Skip to main content

Full text of "Department of State bulletin"

See other formats 


• 


tQ^£5AtM 


Given  By 
U.  S.  SUPT.  OF  DOCUMENTS 


^^mmwmmm'mm 


^Ae/  ^e^a^t7}^en{/  x)^ tnate/ 


•y";.:  "z-'S^WiWi-'j.'' 


::ULTURAL  RELATIONS:  U.S.— U.S.S.R. 
Efforts    to    Establish    Cultural-Scientific 
Exchange  Blocked  by  the  U.S.S.R 403 

PROVISIONAL    RECTIFICATIONS    ALONG 
THE  WESTERN  GERMAN  FRONTIER 
Communique    of    the    Belgium,    France, 
Luxembourg,  Netherlands,  United  King- 
dom, and  the  United  States 427 

THE  NORTH  ATLANTIC  PACT:  A  HISTORIC 
STEP  IN  THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF 
AMERICAN  FOREIGN  RELATIONS  •  By 

Charles  E.  Bohlen 428 

THIRD  SESSION  OF  THE  ILO  PERMA- 
NENT MIGRATION  COMMITTEE  •  Article 

by  Irivin  Tobin 421 


For  complete  contents  see  back  cover 


Vol,  XX,  No.  509 
April  3, 1949 


^.^..^y^.  bulletin 


Vol.  XX,  No.  509   •    Publication  3479 
April  3,  1949 


For  sala  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

U.B.  Oovemment  Printing  Office 

Washington  25,  DC. 

Prick: 

M  Issues,  domestic  $6,  foreign  $7.29 

Single  copy,  16ceDt« 

The  printing   n{  this   publication   lin« 

been   approved    hy    the   Director   of   the 

Bureau  uf  tbc  Diiileet  (February  18,  l*)  19) 

^ote:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Clt»tlon  of  the  Dkpartment 
OF  Statp:  imi.iiiTiN  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BULLETIN, 
a  tceekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publicationa, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  with  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  urork  of  the  De- 
partment  of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includes 
press  releases  on  foreign  policy  issued 
by  the  White  House  and  the  Depart- 
ment, and  statements  and  addresses 
made  by  the  Presidrnt  and  by  the 
Secretary  of  State  and  other  officers 
of  the  Department,  as  trell  as  special 
articles  on  ixirious  phases  of  inter- 
national affairs  and  the  functions  of 
the  Department.  Information  is  in- 
cluded concerning  treaties  and  in- 
ternational agreements  to  which  th« 
United  States  is  or  may  beconte  a 
party  and  treaties  of  general  inter' 
national  interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  at 
xcell  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


Cultural  Relations:  U.S.— U.S.S.R.^ 

Efforts  to  Establish  Cultural-Scientific  Exchange  Blocked  by  the  U.S.S.R, 


PARTI:  INTRODUCTION 

The  United  States  and  the  Problem 
of  Cultural  Exchange 

THE  free  interchange  of  ideas  and  persons  be- 
tween nations  has  always  been  a  cardinal  Amer- 
ican principle.  In  a  real  sense  the  cultural 
structure  of  the  United  States  has  been  derived 
from  an  interplay  of  outside  and  native  influences. 
Without  outside  contacts  the  United  States  could 
not  have  developed  as  it  has,  nor  would  its  further 
development  be  enriched  and  diversified  without  a 
continuation  of  such  contacts. 

The  United  States  is  not  unique  in  its  inherit- 
ance of  cultural  influences  from  other  countries  of 
the  world ;  all  civilized  nations  owe  a  considerable 
debt  to  ideas  and  art  forms  borrowed  from  outside 
their  borders  and  amalgamated  with  their  own 
contributions  to  produce  a  new  and  richer  product. 

Individuals  and  private  groups  in  the  United 
States  have  long  actively  sponsored  cultural- 
exchange  activities.  In  addition,  the  United 
States  Government  recently  adopted  an  official 
program  for  international  information  and  educa- 
tional exchange.  Its  objectives,  as  defined  by  law, 
are  "to  promote  a  better  understanding  of  the 
United  States  in  other  countries,  and  to  increase 
mutual  understanding  between  the  people  of  the 
United  States  and  the  people  of  other  countries."  ^ 

Cultural  Exchange  and  the  U.S.S.R. 

Because  relations  between  the  United  States  and 
the  U.S.S.K.  are  obviously  of  great  importance  to 
both  nations  and  to  the  world  at  large,  special  em- 
phasis has  been  placed  by  Americans  on  cultural 
exchange  with  the  U.S.S.R. 

It  became  apparent  during  World  War  II  that 
an  interchange  of  ideas  and  a  mutual  understand- 
ing between  the  two  peoples  would  constitute  a 
prime  necessity  for  the  building  of  a  healthy  world 
society  after  the  victory  was  won.  The  political, 
economic,  and  cultural  traditions  of  these  two 

April  3,   1949 


peoples  differed  so  vastly  that  only  a  tolerant  ac- 
ceptance of  each  other's  viewpoints  could  prevent 
unfortunate  misunderstandings.  This  problem 
was  recognized  as  particularly  acute  when  it  be- 
came obvious  that  in  the  postwar  era  the  United 
States  and  the  Soviet  Union  would  control  the  pre- 
ponderance of  the  world's  military  and  economic 
power.  Therefore,  as  early  as  the  Moscow  con- 
ference of  October  1943,  the  American  Government 
sought  to  establish  an  information  and  exchange 
program  with  the  Soviet  Union.  The  United 
States  continued  these  efforts  throughout  the  re- 
mainder of  the  war  and  long  after  the  military  vic- 
tory was  gained.  The  postwar  Aiiibassador  to  the 
Soviet  Union,  Gen.  Walter  Bedell  Smith,  succinctly 
stated  the  American  interest  in  cultural  inter- 
change when  he  said,  "the  more  the  people  of  the 
world  know  about  each  other,  the  better  they  under- 
stand each  other,  and  the  less  friction  there  is  likely 
to  be."  ^ 

It  soon  became  obvious,  however,  that  the  Soviet 
Government  did  not  share  the  U.  S.  Government's 
views  on  the  importance  of  creating  genuine  instru- 
ments for  bridging  the  gulf  between  the  two 
peoples.  In  putting  forth  concrete  proposals  for 
cultural  cooperation,  American  officials  consistent- 
ly encountered  obstacles  placed  in  their  path  by  the 
Soviet  authorities.  Whether  U.  S.  efforts  were 
aimed  at  establishing  an  exchange  of  students,  pro- 
fessors, and  artists,  or  books,  research  findings,  and 
films,  the  results  were  the  same.  The  uncoopera- 
tive attitude,  the  lack  of  interest,  the  interminable 
delay  or  absence  of  replies  by  the  Soviet  Govern- 
ment thwarted  American  attempts  at  establishing 


Department  of 


'  Released  to  the  press  Mar.  24,  1949. 
State  publication  3480. 

'  United  States  Information  and  Educational  Exchange 
Act  of  1948,  Public  Law  402  (80th  Cong.,  2d  sess.). 

'  United  States  Information  and  Educational  Exchange 
Act  of  1947 :  Hearings  Before  a  Special  Subcommittee  of 
the  Committee  on  Foreign  Affairs,  House  of  Representa- 
tives, SOth  Congress,  1st  session,  on  H.  R.  3342,  p.  48. 


403 


cultural  relations  between  the  two  wartime  Allies. 
Furthermore,  since  the  middle  of  1947  the  Soviet 
Government  has  embarked  upon  a  campaign  to 
place  every  sort  of  legal  obstacle  (backed  by  the 
threat  of  heavy  punishment)  in  the  way  of  contacts 
between  the  Russian  people  and  foreigners  and  to 
instill  in  the  Russian  people  the  belief  that  cul- 
tural relations  with  Americans  and  other  outsiders 
carry  a  threat  to  the  well-being  of  the  Soviet  state, 

American  Technical  and  Material  Aid  to  the 
Soviet  Union 

Long  before  the  war  the  Soviet  Union  experi- 
enced concretely  and  to  its  benefit  one  of  the  many 
contributions  which  American  culture  could  render 
in  the  international  field — namely,  technical  know- 
how.  Stalin  himself  acknowledged  this  in  1932 
when  he  stated  that  "We  observe  the  United  States 
with  interest,  since  this  country  ranks  high  as  re- 
gards science  and  techniques.  We  should  be  glad 
to  have  American  scientists  and  technicians  as  our 
teachers  and  in  the  technical  field  to  be  their 
pupils."* 

During  the  first  two  Five  Year  Plans  of  the 
Soviet  Union,  American  aid  in  technical  assistance 
and  equipment  was  very  important,  as  the  Soviet 
Government  itself  admitted.  During  a  conversa- 
tion with  Eric  Johnston,  then  president  of  the 
U.  S.  Chamber  of  Commerce,  in  June  1944,  Mar- 
shal Stalin  asserted  that  about  two  thirds  of  all 
the  large  industrial  enterprises  in  the  Soviet  Union 
had  been  built  with  United  States  material  aid  or 
technical  assistance.  Col.  Hugh  Cooper  was  in- 
strumental in  designing  and  constructing  the 
power  project  Dneprostroi,  for  which,  according 
to  the  Soviet  encyclopedia,  the  machinery  was  fur- 
nished by  the  American  concerns,  Newport  News 
Drydock  Company  and  General  Electric.  In  the 
play  Tempo,  which  deals  with  the  efforts  of  the 
Soviet  people  in  building  a  construction  project, 
the  American  engineer,  Mr.  Carter,  a  symbol  of 
efficiency,  was  patterned  after  Colonel  Cooper. 
John  Littlepage  was  a  principal  technical  adviser 
to  the  Soviet  gold-mining  trust.  United  States 
engineers  helped  design  and  erect  the  most  famous 
plants  of  the  Soviet  auto,  truck,  and  tractor  indus- 
try, which  was  modeled  after  the  United  States 
automotive  industry.  Stalin  himself  said  that 
"The  Soviet  Union  is  indebted  to  Mr.  Ford.    He 


'Amtorg,  Review  of  the  Soviet  Union  (no.  2,  Fel)ruary 
1934),  "Soviet  Industry  and  US,"  by  Z.  Suchliov,  p.  45. 
•Eric  .lolinston,  We're  All  In  It,  p.  81. 


helped  build  our  tractor  and  automobile  indus- 
tries." '  The  Ford  Motor  Car  Company,  Hercules 
Motor  Car  Company,  Electric  Autolite  Company, 
and  many  others,  mentioned  in  the  Bohhaya  So- 
vetskaya  Entsiklopediya,  contributed  to  building 
of  the  Soviet  automotive  industry.  The  Soviet 
petroleum  industry  was  patterned  after  the  U.  S. 
industry,  the  Entsiklopediya  stating  that  much  of 
U.  S.  equipment  and  processes  was  used.  Also, 
E konomicheskaya  Zhizn  (June  26,  1930)  credited 
American  techniques  with  increasing  the  efficiency 
of  the  sugar  industry.  Ralph  Budd,  president  of 
Great  Northern  Railway,  was  an  important  ad- 
viser to  the  Soviet  engineers  charged  with  the  re- 
organization of  railroad  transport  during  the  first 
two  Five  Year  Plans. 

Peter  Bogdanov,  head  of  Amtorg,  said  that  in 
1930  there  were  600  to  700  American  engineers  in 
the  Soviet  Union  and  publicly  thanked  the  many 
American  companies  and  individuals  for  their  aid 
to  the  Soviet  Union. 

During  World  War  II  the  American  people 
contributed  to  the  war  effort  of  their  Ally  by  send- 
ing tlie  Soviet  Union  whole  plants,  together  with 
the  newest  machinery,  and  the  necessary  tech- 
nicians to  supervise  the  erection  of  the  plants  and 
the  installation  of  machinery.  Much  of  the  equip- 
ment has  been  invaluable  in  Soviet  reconstruc- 
tion— for  example,  electric-power-generating 
equipment  totaling  some  one  and  a  half  million 
kilowatts  capacity  (total  installed  capacity  in  the 
U.S.S.Ii.  at  the  time  of  the  invasion  was  less  than 
eleven  and  a  half  million  kilowatts)  ;  four  huge 
refineries  using  the  most  advanced  Houdry  avia- 
tion-gasoline process,  which  gives  a  higher-content 
octane  than  the  Soviet  ever  had ;  thousands  of 
macliine  tools,  50  million  dollars'  worth  of  con- 
struction machinery,  1,900  locomotives  (in  1935 
only  1,500  locomotives  were  in  operation  through- 
out the  U.S.S.R.),  427,000  trucks  (approximately 
half  as  many  as  the  U.S.S.R.  produced  in  its  entire 
history  before  the  Nazi  invasion) ;  a  lO-million- 
dollar  tire  plant  bought  from  the  Ford  Company 
by  the  U.  S.  Government  and  given  to  the 
U.S.S.R. — to  mention  but  a  few  of  the  more  nota- 
ble contributions. 

During  the  immediate  postwar  period  the  United 
States  exported  industrial  equipment  to  the 
U.S.S.R.,  and  at  the  same  time  United  States  engi- 
neers engaged  in  aiding  the  Soviet  workers  rebuild 
Dneprostroi,  for  which  a  considerable  part  of  the 


404 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


key  equipment  was  supplied  by  the  General  Elec- 
tric Company. 

The  United  States  supplied  more  commodities 
to  the  U.S.S.R.  during  the  period  1917-1947  than 
did  any  other  country ;  the  total  value  was  roughly 
12  billion  dollars,  of  which  9.5  billion  dollars  was 
lend-lease  material,  much  of  which  has  been  indis- 
pensable in  Soviet  reconstruction  and  for  which 
the  United  States  has  not  been  remunerated  to 
date.  From  1921  to  1947  the  United  States  fur- 
nished the  Soviet  Union  with  3.3  billion  dollars' 
worth  of  essential  machinery  and  2  billion  doUai^s' 
worth  of  metals  (1.3  and  0.9  billion  dollars'  worth 
respectively  under  lend-lease).  (See  Soviet  Sup- 
ply Protocols,  Department  of  State  publication 
2759.) 

The  people  of  the  Soviet  Union  are  aware  of  the 
United  States  aid  to  their  economy,  and  they  ad- 
mire the  technical  efficiency  of  the  American  engi- 
neer and  workman.  They  also  remember  the 
tanks,  trucks,  and  food  which  America  sent  to 
them  during  the  war  against  the  Nazi,  despite  their 
Government's  attempts  to  belittle  the  flow  of 
American  equipment  and  foodstuffs  to  the  U.S.S.R. 
The  Soviet  peoi^le  have  some  notion  about  the 
high  living  standards  of  the  American  people. 
They  realize  that  the  political  system  which  has 
produced  such  achievements  must  possess  consid- 
erable merit.  This  situation  confronts  the  Soviet 
Government  with  a  serious  problem  in  its  attempt 
to  persuade  its  people  that  the  Soviet  system  is 
superior,  that  America  is  decadent  and  its  people 
starving  and  oppressed.  Yet  this  it  must  seek  to 
do,  since  it  is  essential  for  the  Kremlin  to  induce 
its  citizens  to  tolerate  the  obvious  failure  of  the 
Soviet  system  to  provide  for  their  needs  and  to 
accept,  at  least  passively,  the  oppressive  aspects  of 
the  Soviet  state.  It  is  also  necessary  to  keep  gul- 
lible and  misguided  Soviet  sympathizers  beyond 
the  U.S.S.R.'s  borders  ignorant  of  actual  condi- 
tions prevailing  in  the  Soviet  Union. 

The  foregoing  considerations  in  large  part  may 
explain  the  refusal  of  Soviet  authorities  to  permit 
a  genuine  interchange  of  ideas  and  persons  with 
the  United  States.  Information  about  the  pros- 
perity and  freedom  of  the  world  outside  the 
U.S.S.R.  would  leak  in ;  information  about  actual 
conditions  within  the  Soviet  Union  would  leak 
out.  Seepage  in  either  direction  would  weaken 
the  Soviet  Government. 

Soviet  authorities  are  faced  in  this  policy,  how- 
ever, with  a  disturbing  balance  of  alternative  po- 

AprW  3,   J  949 


tential  damages  to  their  regime.  On  the  one  hand, 
free  interchange  of  information  would  weaken 
their  iron  grip  on  the  Soviet  people ;  on  the  other, 
the  exclusion  of  expert  knowledge  from  abroad 
would  in  the  long  run  hold  back  the  development 
of  the  backward  economy  of  the  U.S.S.R.  Per- 
haps this  dilemma  explains  occasional  apparent 
inconsistencies  in  what  has  otherwise  become  an 
iron-clad  Soviet  policy  of  noncooperation  in  cul- 
tural exchange.  Certainly  it  suggests  the  reason 
why  the  small  flow  of  persons  between  the  U.S.S.R. 
and  the  United  States  has  included  preponderately 
technical  and  scientific  personnel  and  why  the  in- 
formation stimulated  by  these  visits  has  gone  in 
one  direction  only — to  the  U.S.S.R. 

PART  II:     CULTURAL  EXCHANGE  OF  PERSONS 

U.  S.  Attempts  To  Establish  a  Basis  for  Cultural 
Interchange  During  the  War 

While  World  War  II  was  still  in  progress,  the 
American  Government  sought  to  establish  the  first 
concrete  acts  of  cultural  cooperation  with  the 
Soviet  Union  which  would  pave  the  way  for  close 
postwar  ties.  Following  the  Moscow  conference 
of  October  1943,  Ambassador  Averell  Harriman 
took  the  initiative  in  a  note  to  Foreign  Minister 
Molotov,  in  which  he  expressed  the  desire  of  the 
United  States  to  institute  a  program  of  cultural 
interchange  in  the  realization  that  "The  relations 
between  our  two  countries  must,  to  be  enduring, 
be  based  on  sympathetic  understanding  of  and 
friendship  between  our  peoples."  Mr.  Harriman 
requested  Soviet  approval  for  American  dis- 
tribution in  the  U.S.S.R.  of  two  bimonthly 
magazines  designed  to  explain  to  the  Russian  pub- 
lic the  nature  of  the  American  war  effort  and 
the  outstanding  features  of  American  life;  he 
submitted  suggestions  for  direct  contact  with 
Soviet  news  editors  for  the  exchange  of  in- 
formation and  the  dissemination  of  American 
news ;  he  proposed  the  publication  of  a  daily  news 
bulletin  for  the  Embassy  and  diplomatic  missions 
which  might  also  be  made  available  to  Tass,  the 
Soviet  news  agency,  for  distribution  as  it  saw  fit ; 
he  advocated  the  continued  distribution  of  Amer- 
ican films  to  the  Soviet  Film  Committee,  the  latter 
to  negotiate  directly  with  producers  in  the  United 
States  if  it  so  wished;  and  finally  he  asked  that 
VOKS  (All-Union  Society  for  Cultural  Relations 
Abroad)  serve  as  a  contact  for  "cultural  purposes." 
Mr.  Molotov  replied  on  December  31,  1943,  in  a 
letter  in  which  he  acknowledged  "the  importance 


of  an  exchange  of  press  information  between  the 
U.S.S.R.  and  the  U.S.A.  for  mutual  understand- 
ing between  the  two  peoples"  and  in  which  he 
stated  that  "With  regard  to  .  .  .  the  exchange  of 
ideas,  materials,  and  assistance  in  the  fields  of 
radio  and  motion  pictures,  the  Embassy  of  the 
United  States  and  its  representatives  can  count 
on  the  assistance  of  the  Press  Section  of  Xarko- 
mindel." 

Unfortunately,  the  implementation  by  Soviet 
authorities  of  Mr.  Molotov's  favorable  reply  never 
reflected  any  enthusiasm  for  the  spirit  of  Mr. 
Harriman's  proposal  nor  any  understanding  of 
the  nature  of  genuine  cultural  interchange.  Dur- 
ing the  succeeding  18  months  of  the  war  period, 
Soviet  cooperation  in  advancing  the  mutual  under- 
standing of  the  two  peoples  through  cultural 
media  was  indeed  much  greater  than  it  was  after 
the  war  ended.  But  even  during  those  relatively 
friendly  months  Soviet  reactions  to  American 
overtures  were  hesitant,  sporadic,  and  usually 
artificial.  Despite  continual  efforts  from  the 
American  side,  Soviet  intransigence  made  it  im- 
possible to  build  a  solid  foundation  of  cultural 
relations  upon  which  to  erect  a  firm  structure  after 
the  war. 

Soviet  Passive  Resistance  to  American  Overtures 

From  the  end  of  the  war  until  mid-1947,  the 
Soviet  authorities  treated  American  overtures  to 
establish  cultural  interchange  with  obvious  cool- 
ness, delaying  aclniowledgement  of  notes,  offering 
various  specious  excuses  for  their  inability  to 
respond  favorable  to  American  proposals,  or  com- 
pletely failing  to  respond. 

In  October  1945,  shortly  after  the  termination 
of  hostilities,  the  U.  S.  Department  of  State 
evinced  its  interest  in  establishing  a  firm  basis  for 
postwar  cultural  relations  with  the  U.S.S.R. 
It  informed  the  Embassy  at  Moscow  that  the  U.  S. 
Government  would  be  interested  in  Imowing  the 
earliest  practical  date  at  which  the  Soviet  Union 
would  consider  sending  the  Red  Army  Chorus  or 
other  similar  groups  to  the  United  States  for  a 
tour,  possibly  in  exchange  for  a  visit  to  the  Soviet 
Union  of  similar  United  States  groups.  It  also 
expressed  the  interest  of  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment in  instituting  an  exchange  of  ballet 
groups,  theater  groups,  and  orchestras  and  of  hold- 
ing reciprocal  exhibits  of  art,  architecture,  and 
handicraft  as  means  of  increasing  the  mutual  \m- 
derstanding  of  the  Soviet  and  American  people. 


Shortly  thereafter,  on  November  13,  1945,  Am- 
bassador Harriman  informed  Deputy  Foreign 
Minister  Vyshinsky  that  the  State  Department 
would  appreciate  a  frank  discussion  of  the  possi- 
bilities of  student  exchange  and  asked  the  Soviet 
Government  whether  it  had  any  objection  in  prin- 
ciple to  starting  such  an  exchange  in  the  1946-47 
academic  year.  A  reply  was  never  received  to  this 
overture. 

In  1946  there  were  a  number  of  offers  on  the  part 
of  various  interested  groups  and  individuals  who 
hoped  to  establish  cultural  interchange  with  the 
Soviet  Union.  The  United  States  Office  of  Educa- 
tion on  behalf  of  an  American  university  sought 
to  obtain  a  Soviet  professor  to  lecture  on  Soviet 
education  for  a  year,  but  VOKS,  through  which 
the  request  was  made,  did  not  respond.  Texas, 
Amherst,  and  Columbia,  among  other  institutions, 
were  interested  in  offering  tuition  scholarships  to 
Soviet  students ;  the  American  Council  of  Learned 
Societies  was  interested  in  sending  ten  or  twelve 
professors  and  research  workers  to  the  U.S.S.R. ; 
the  Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technology  and 
Princeton,  among  others,  expressed  their  desire  to 
exchange  scientific  personnel.  Nothing  mate- 
rialized. 

In  February  1946  the  president  of  Princeton 
University,  through  the  Soviet  Ambassador  in 
"Washington,  extended  invitations  to  the  Univer- 
sity's bicentennial  celebration  to  a  number  of  dis- 
tinguished Soviet  scholars,  including  Peter  L. 
Kapitsa,  L.  D.  Landau,  Sergei  I.  Vavilov,  and 
others.  The  invitations,  extended  on  two  other 
occasions  later  in  the  year,  never  were  acknowl- 
edged. The  Rockefeller  Foundation  also  ex- 
tended invitations  to  Professors  Ivan  Vinogradov 
and  Lev  8.  Pontryagin  without  eliciting  anj'  re- 
sponses. 

An  invitation  tendered  Eugene  Mravinsky,  of 
the  I^ningrad  Philharmonic,  to  be  a  guest  of  the 
Boston  Symphony  in  Boston  on  one  of  several 
dates  kept  open  for  him  in  October,  November,  or 
December  was  unanswered. 

In  May  and  again  in  July  1946,  Sergei  Kousse- 
vitzky  and  the  members  of  the  Boston  Symphony 
offered  to  travel  to  the  Soviet  Union  for  twt)  weeks 
in  September  at  their  own  expense  and  give  a  series 
of  performances,  the  proceeds  to  be  used  for  what- 
ever local  benefits  the  Soviet  Government  might 
select.     This  offer  was  not  acknowledged. 

In  August  1946  the  Soviet  Ministry  of  Health 
failed  to  respond  to  the  proposal  of  Dr.  E.  D. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Young,  representative  of  Russian  War  Relief,  to 
provide  the  Soviet  Government  witli  a  complete 
penicillin  plant  and  to  work  out  a  mutual  exchange 
of  scientists,  particularly  in  the  medical  field. 

Following  her  visit  to  the  Soviet  Union,  at  the 
invitation  of  the  Soviet  Government,  Mrs.  La  Fell 
Dickinson,  president  of  the  General  Federation 
of  Women's  Clubs  in  the  United  States,  offered  a 
scholarship  to  a  Soviet  girl  student,  but  the  Soviet 
Union  failed  to  display  any  interest. 

In  July  1946  Mr.  E.  C.  Ropes  and  Dr.  Lorwin 
of  the  Department  of  Commerce  discussed  with 
the  Soviet  Ministry  of  Higher  Education  pro- 
posals which  Cornell  University  had  submitted  for 
acceptmg  four  Soviet  students  to  engage  in 
graduate  work  and  give  instruction  in  the  Russian 
language.  The  university  did  not  insist  upon  any 
reciprocal  arrangement.  Failing  to  elicit  any  re- 
sponse, Cornell  found  it  necessary  to  abandon  the 
project  in  November.  On  January  29,  1947,  A. 
Samarin,  Deputy  Minister  of  Higher  Education, 
amiounced  that  the  Ministry  regarded  the  pro- 
posal favorably  but  could  not  realize  its  execution 
during  the  current  1946^7  year.  He  did  not  sug- 
gest that  the  invitation  might  be  accepted  for  the 
next  academic  year,  nor  did  Soviet  authorities 
even  refer  to  the  matter  again. 

On  December  16,  1946,  the  Presidium  of  the 
Soviet  Academy  of  Sciences  received  the  biog- 
raphy and  request  of  Professor  Richard  Foster 
Flint  of  Yale  to  engage  in  some  field  work  with 
Soviet  geologists  and  to  confer  with  them  on 
Pleistocene  features  of  the  U.S.S.R.  On  March 
31  of  the  following  year  the  Soviet  Government 
informed  the  American  Embassy  that  since  the 
Academy  of  Sciences  would  not  be  working  in  the 
districts  of  interest  to  Flint  there  was  not  any 
reason  for  his  visit. 

A  Soviet  ballet  company  was  invited  through 
VOKS  to  participate  in  the  International  Dance 
Spring  Festival  which  was  held  in  New  York  City 
in  1947  and  then  to  go  on  tour,  but  nothing  de- 
veloped. Certain  Soviet  institutions  were  ap- 
proved under  the  G.  I.  Bill  of  Rights  in  the  hope 
that  American  veterans  might  study  in  the 
U.S.S.R.  It  was  impossible,  however,  to  make 
arrangements  for  their  admittance. 

There  were  additional  proposals  similar  to  the 
foregoing,  all  of  which  met  with  the  same  lack  of 
favorable  response  from  the  Soviet  Union. 

Through  1946,  despite  the  general  recalcitrance 
of  the  Kremlin  in  effecting  any  cultural  inter- 
Apr;/  3,   7949 


change,  some  persons  did  visit  the  Soviet  Union, 
while  a  few  Soviet  scientists  and  writers  traveled 
in  the  United  States. 

The  Soviet  authorities  cordially  received  play- 
wright Lillian  Hellman ;  John  Strohm,  president 
of  the  Association  of  United  States  Agricultural 
Publications;  Edwin  S.  Smith,  President  of  the 
National  Council  of  American-Soviet  Friendship; 
and  scientists,  including  Professors  Shapley,  of 
Harvard,  Langmuir,  of  General  Electric,  and 
McBain,  of  Stanford,  who  were  invited  to  the 
220th  anniversary  of  the  Russian  Academy  of 
Sciences.  The  scientists  were  invited  to  deliver 
reports  to  the  Academy,  and  all  visitors  were 
granted  extensive  latitude  in  their  sight-seeing. 
However,  this  spasmodic  hospitality,  extended  also 
to  a  few  additional  persons  not  mentioned  above, 
was  not  long  continued.  The  following  year  visas 
were  denied  to  such  distinguished  applicants  as 
Dr.  George  Schadt,  Director  of  the  New  England 
Laboratories,  who  was  interested  in  an  interchange 
of  information  on  clinical  pathology;  Reeves 
Lewenthal,  representative  of  the  Associated 
American  Artists,  who  sought  to  acquire  firsthand 
information  about  Soviet  art;  Dr.  Elliott  P. 
Joslin,  world-famous  Boston  diabetes  specialist; 
and  others. 

During  the  war  period  American  industry  had 
opened  wide  its  portals  to  Soviet  engineers,  tech- 
nicians, and  scholars.  This  continued  in  1946, 
when  leading  industrial  plants  and  radio  corpora- 
tions provided  the  limited  number  of  young 
Soviet  technicians  whom  the  Soviet  Government 
permitted  to  visit  the  United  States  with  tecluiical 
training  in  machine  tooling  and  radio  manufac- 
ture; and  some  15  Russian  students  working  for 
the  Ministry  of  Foreign  Trade  continued  to  ob- 
tain technical  instruction  at  Columbia  University. 

In  1946  a  group  of  Soviet  astronomers,  headed 
by  Professor  A.  A.  Mikhailov,  Chairman  of  the 
Astronomy  Council  of  the  Soviet  Academy  of 
Sciences,  spent  six  months  in  the  United  States, 
where  they  were  familiarized  with  the  latest 
astronomical  instruments  and  research  projects  in 
astronomy. 

For  a  ten  weeks'  period  in  the  early  summer  of 
1946  the  prominent  Soviet  writers,  Ilya  Ehren- 
burg,  Major  General  Galaktionov,  and  Konstantin 
Simonov  toured  the  United  States  as  guests  of  the 
Department  of  State.  During  their  visit  they 
attended  the  convention  of  the  American  Society 
of  Newspaper  Editors,  which  they  were  invited  to 


address.  In  a  farewell  article  Ehrcnburg,  who  has 
frequently  attacked  the  United  States  in  full  ac- 
cordance with  the  approved  Party  line,  acknowl- 
edged the  freedom  of  movement  afforded  him.  He 
wrote:  "When  I  traveled  through  the  United 
States  I  was  accompanied  by  representatives  of  the 
State  Department,  and  I  not  only  do  not  complain 
about  any  restriction  of  freedom,  but  I  am  sin- 
cerely thankful  for  the  attention  shown  to  me."'° 
In  November-December  1946  Dr.  Thomas  Par- 
ran,  Surgeon  General  of  the  U.  S.  Public  Health 
Service,  invited  four  prominent  Soviet  doctors,  in- 
cluding the  eminent  Dr.  Vasili  V.  Parin,  then  Sec- 
retary General  of  the  Soviet  Academy  of  Medical 
Sciences,  to  make  an  extensive  inspection  tour  of 
United  States  hospitals  and  12  main  cancer  re- 
search centers.  All  the  latest  scientific  develop- 
ments were  shown  the  group  during  its  visit.  By 
this  time,  however,  the  Soviet  Government  ap- 
parently began  to  look  with  suspicion  upon  those 
having  contacts  with  the  free  world.  Upon  his 
return  to  Moscow  Dr.  Parin  apparently  vanishodi 
Then,  possibly  as  a  sequel,  the  Soviet  Minister  of 
Health  was  shortly  thereafter  dismissed. 

Hopes  Raised  by  Stalin's  Statements; 
Ambassador  Smith's  Notes 

American  officials  and  representatives  of  Amer- 
ican intellectual  and  artistic  life  still  were  reluc- 
tant to  accept  the  long  record  of  lack  of  coopera- 
tion as  conclusive  evidence  that  the  Soviet  Govern- 
ment refused  to  accept  cultural  exchange  on 
principle.  They  clung  to  the  hope  that  some  rela- 
tively unimportant  and  nonpolitical  factors  might 
underlie  Soviet  intransigence.  Even  those  whose 
study  of  the  basis  of  Soviet  conduct  led  them  to 
consider  remote  the  possibility  of  effective  coopera- 
tion with  the  U.S.S.R.  in  the  cultural  field  reserved 
judgment  and  remained  patient. 

Many  who  had  been  waiting  hopefully  believed 
that  their  patience  was  rewarded  and  that  the 
U.  S.  S.  R.'s  cultural-exchange  policy  was  on  the 
verge  of  becoming  cooperative  when  Stalin  him- 
self expressed  publicly  a  favorable  attitude  in  the 
matter. 

On  December  21, 1940,  during  an  interview  with 
Elliott  Roosevelt  at  the  Kremlin,  Marshal  Stalin 
was  asked :  "Do  j'ou  favor  a  broad  exchange  of  cul- 

•New  York  Tinim,  June  26,  l!)4n. 

'/,ooA-,  Fob.  4.  10-17. 

'New  York  Timen,  May  4,  1947;  Pravda,  May  8,  1047. 

•Bulletin  of  Mar.  2,  1047,  p.  303. 

"  See  pp.  405  and  406. 


tural  and  scientific  information  between  our  two 
nations?  Also  are  you  in  favor  of  the  exchange 
of  students,  artists,  scientists,  and  professors?" 
Marshal  Stalin's  reply  was  an  unequivocal  "Of 
course." '  In  an  interview  with  Harold  Stassen 
on  April  9,  1947,"  Marshal  Stalin  again  expressed 
his  assent  to  the  desirability  of  a  cultural  ex- 
change. According  to  the  Tass  account  of  the 
meeting :  "Stassen  would  like  to  know  whether  J. 
V.  Stalin  hopes  for  a  wider  exchange  of  ideas, 
students,  teachers,  artists  and  tourists  in  the  future 
in  the  event  that  collaboration  [i.  e.  economic  and 
commercial]  is  established  between  the  U.S.S.R. 
and  the  U.  S.  A.  J.  V.  Stalin  replies  that  this  will 
be  inevitable  if  collaboration  is  established.  An 
exchange  of  goods  will  lead  to  an  exchange  of 
people."  Mr.  Stassen  reverted  to  this  question 
later  in  the  interview  in  saying  (Tass  version) : 
"The  press,  trade  and  cultural  exchange  are  the 
spheres  in  which  the  two  systems  must  find  ways 
of  setting  to  right  their  mutual  relations.  J.  V. 
Stalin  says  that  this  is  true." 

The  U.  S.  Government  accepted  Stalin's  reply 
to  Elliott  Roosevelt  at  its  face  value.  Ambassador 
Smith  in  February  wrote  Foreign  Minister 
Molotov  that  the  view  expressed  by  Stalin  is — 
".  .  .  gratifying  to  me  since,  as  you  know,  I  have 
strongly  advocated  such  exchange  to  broaden  the 
base  of  contact  which  is  necessary  in  order  that 
the  people  of  each  of  our  nations  may  understand 
and  appreciate  the  cultural  life  and  objectives  of 
the  other.  ...  I  am  encouraged  by  Generalissimo 
Stalin's  expression  of  views  to  bring  to  your  per- 
sonal attention  a  number  of  proposals  for  ex- 
change of  the  nature  referred  to  above  which 
have  recently  been  made  through  this  Embassy 
by  organizations  and  institutions  in  the  United 
States,  and  which  are  awaiting  Soviet  agreement 
to  be  put  into  effect."' 

Ambassador  Smith  then  enumerated  a  number 
of  offers "  which  had  been  made,  and  asserted 
that  he  was  certain  that  most  of  them  still  were 
open  to  Soviet  acceptance. 

After  a  reasonable  period  of  time  had  elapsed 
without  an}'  response  from  the  Soviet  Foreign 
Ministry,  Ambassador  Smith  in  April  passed  on 
to  Mr.  Vj'shinsky  a  si^ecific  proposal  to  the  effect 
that  the  United  States  would  welcome  visits  to 
the  United  States  of  approximately  50  Soviet 
scholars  in  various  fields  of  science  and  cultural 
studies  "to  confer  with  American  scholars  in  the 


Deparfmenf  of  Sfate   Bulletin 


same  fields  on  matters  of  mutual  professional  in- 
terest," and  that  it  would  welcome  a  similar  invi- 
tation by  the  Soviet  Union  to  American  scholars. 
The  Foreign  Ministry  acknowledged  receipt  of 
the  note  and  advised  the  American  Embassy  that 
the  note  had  been  forwarded  for  consideration  to 
the  appropriate  authorities.  There  the  matter 
ended.  Ambassador  Smith's  letter  to  Mr.  Molotov 
was  never  answered  in  full.  After  a  delay  of 
several  weeks  the  Soviet  Ministry  of  Foreign  Af- 
fairs sent  to  the  American  Embassy  a  few  sporadic 
notes  referring  to  some  but  by  no  means  all  of 
the  proposals  made  in  the  Ambassador's  letter 
and  rejecting  them  for  various  specious  reasons, 
often  transparent,  or  without  explanation. 

Dr.  Simmons  Visits  the  U.S.S.R.;  Turning  Point  in 
Soviet  Attitude  Toward  Cultural  Excliange 

The  American  Council  of  Learned  Societies,  in- 
terested in  establishing  cultural  exchange  with 
the  Soviet  Union  and  deciding  that  perhaps  a 
direct  approach  rather  than  one  through  the  nor- 
mal diplomatic  channels  might  be  more  successful, 
sent  Professor  Ernest  J.  Simmons  of  Columbia 
University  to  Moscow  in  the  summer  of  1947.  He 
carried  specific  proposals  concerning  cultural 
exchange. 

Although  the  specific  proposals  which  Professor 
Simmons  presented  offered  the  U.S.S.R.  greater 
benefits  than  were  asked  in  return,  he  encountered 
an  utter  lack  of  response,  delaying  tactics,  and 
outright  refusals  based  upon  obviously  trivial 
excuses. 

Professor  Simmons  proffered  five  definite  invi- 
tations from  major  universities  for  Soviet  pro- 
fessors of  Russian  literature  and  culture,  Soviet 
economics,  Soviet  jurisprudence,  international  re- 
lations, and  Russian  history  to  deliver  courses, 
four  in  English  and  one  in  Russian.  An  American 
Embassy  aide-memoire  dealing  with  these  invita- 
tions of  Columbia,  Yale,  Chicago,  and  Washington 
Universities  was  acknowledged  but  was  never 
satisfactorily  answered. 

Not  only  was  Professor  Simmons  met  with  offi- 
cial coolness,  and  his  proposals  in  effect  ignored, 
but  soon  after  his  return  to  the  United  States 
Soviet  officialdom  deemed  it  opportune  to  launch 
a  crude  personal  attack  on  him  for  his  Outline  of 
Modern  Russian  Literature.  In  Izvestiya  of  Octo- 
ber 19,  Miss  T.  Motyleva  termed  him  "the  learned 
servant  of  the  'Yellow  Devil'  "  (Gorky's  name  for 
the  "all  powerful"  dollar).    This  personal  attack 

April  3,   1949 


was  undoubtedly  the  answer  to  the  proposal  sub- 
mitted by  Professor  Simmons  on  behalf  of  the 
American  Council  of  Learned  Societies. 

Even  the  cold  reception  encountered  by  Dr.  Sim- 
mons did  not  stem  the  flow  of  proposals  from  pri- 
vate institutions.  A  Soviet  delegation  was  invited 
to  a  convention  of  military  surgeons  held  in  Bos- 
ton, but  the  Ministry  of  Foreign  Affairs  an- 
nounced in  November  1947  that  those  invited  would 
be  "unable  to  attend." 

Invitations  extended  to  either  the  Moscow  or 
Leningrad  Ballet  and  the  Moiseyev  dance  ensemble 
to  participate  in  an  International  Dance  Festival 
in  the  United  States  in  the  spring  of  1948  elicited 
no  response.  As  recently  as  January  1949  Pro- 
fessor Shapley  of  Harvard  submitted  a  request, 
which  as  yet  has  not  borne  any  fruit,  to  the  Soviet 
Ambassador  in  Washington  for  Dr.  Ambarzumian, 
distinguished  Soviet  astrophysicist,  to  present  a 
series  of  lectures  at  Chicago  and  Princeton  Uni- 
versities. He  also  asserted  that  Harvard  would 
welcome  a  visit  by  Dr.  Kukarkin  or  Dr.  Parengago 
of  the  Sternberg  Astronomical  Institute  in  Mos- 
cow, and  that  M.  I.  T.  and  Princeton  would  be 
pleased  to  have  Professors  Alexandrov,  Pontri- 
jagin,  or  others  to  confer  with  American  mathema- 
ticians on  specific  mathematical  problems,  and  that 
various  universities  were  interested  in  having  as 
guest  lecturers  in  mathematics  any  one  of  half  a 
dozen  distinguished  Soviet  mathematicians,  such 
as  Professors  Komogorov,  Vinogradov,  Golfand, 
Markov,  Pontrijagin,  Alexandrov,  Khintchine, 
and  Kurosch.  Several  of  those  invited  had  been 
highly  honored  by  their  fellow  scientists  in  the 
United  States.  In  1948  Professor  Ambarzumian 
was  elected  a  member  of  the  American  Astronom- 
ical Society;  Professors  Vinogradov  and  Gregory 
Shain  were  elected  honorary  fellows  of  the  Amer- 
ican Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  and  Dr.  Alex- 
ander G.  Vologdin  was  awarded  a  medal  and  an 
honorarium  by  the  National  Academy  of  Sciences 
for  individual  achievement  in  paleontology. 

From  the  first  proposals  of  Ambassador  Harri- 
man  in  1943  for  developing  cultural  interchange 
until  Professor  Simmons'  visit,  Soviet  officials  had 
maintained  a  practice  of  either  ignoring  proposals 
or  offering  an  excuse  for  refusing  a  specific  one. 
Not  before  the  middle  of  the  year  1947  were  rea- 
sons officially  proffered  which  would  apply  gener- 
ally to  all  cases.  Then,  during  Professor  Simmons' 
visit,  he  was  told  by  Jacob  Malik,  Deputy  Foreign 
Mmister,  that  since  there  were  hundreds  of  appli- 


cants  for  each  place  in  the  Soviet  higher  schools,  it 
was  extremely  difficult  for  the  Soviet  Union  to 
accept  foreijrn  students.  Similarly  the  demand 
for  teachers  in  the  U.S.S.R.  made  it  very  difl&cult 
to  send  professors  abroad  to  teach  or  lecture  at 
American  universities.  Of  course  this  was  a  spe- 
cious argiunent  even  theoretically,  since  the  United 
States  was  willing  to  accept  as  students  at  Amer- 
ican universities  at  least  as  many  if  not  more  stu- 
dents than  the  number  of  Americans  who  might  be 
involved  in  study  at  Soviet  universities,  and  simi- 
larly would  have  been  willing  to  send  interested 
professors  to  lecture  at  Soviet  higher  institutions. 
In  practice,  the  excuses  appeared  even  more  poorly 
concocted  in  the  light  of  Soviet  policy  of  extensive 
student  exchange  with  satellite  nations. 

On  September  25,  194f),  Izveatiya  announced 
that  "The  Ministry  of  Higher  Education  of  the 
U.S.S.R.  has  made  it  possible  for  students  from 
Slavic  countries  to  study  in  institutions  of  higher 
education  in  Moscow,  Leningrad,  Sverdlovsk  and 
other  cities,  where  they  will  go  through  a  full 
course  of  instruction."  On  October  2-1, 1946,  Mos- 
cow News  stated  that  500  students  from  Slavic 
countries  were  studying  in  the  Soviet  Union,  and 
ai)parently  receiving  extraordinary  treatment, 
since  the  article  related  that  the  Director  of  the 
Sverdlovsk  Industrial  Institute  was  treating  as  his 
own  sons  several  Albanians  studying  there.  In- 
formation coming  from  Seoul.  Korea,  in  December 
1940  related  that  over  300  Koreans  were  studying 
in  the  Soviet  Union.  By  May  1947  there  were 
apparently  700  students  in  the  U.S.S.R.  from  the 
Balkans  alone.''  Facts  were  hardly  consistent 
with  the  Soviet  plea  of  overcrowded  schools  as  an 
excuse  for  rejecting  exchange  of  students  with  the 
United  States. 

Soviet  officials  also  utilized  another  excuse  for 
the  general  refusal  of  all  United  States  proposals 
for  exchange  of  scholars.  Deputy  Foreign  Min- 
ister Malik  in  his  conversation  with  Ambassador 
Smith  and  Professor  Simmons  raised  the  issue  of 
the  U.  S.  Alien  Registration  Act.  He  averred  that 
Soviet  students  and  professors  were  unwilling  to 
visit  the  United  States,  where  they  would  be  com- 
pelled to  register  as  agents  of  a  foreign  power  un- 
der the  provisions  of  that  law.  Ambassador 
Smith  pointed  out  that  he  had  taken  special  pains 
to  remove  this  alleged  barrier  in  connection  with 


"  New  York  Times,  May  7,  1947. 

"  Uchitelskava  Oaeeta  (Teachers  Gazette) ,  Jan.  31, 1948. 


his  previous  invitation  to  50  Soviet  scholars.  At 
that  time  he  had  obtained  a  ruling  by  the  Attorney 
General  to  the  effect  that  students  traveling  to  the 
United  States  to  engage  in  educational  pursuits 
would  not  be  required  to  register  under  the  act  so 
long  as  they  limited  their  activities  to  cultural  ac- 
tivities. While  here  they  could,  if  they  wished, 
engage  in  political  affairs,  but  if  they  chose  to  do 
so,  they  would  then  be  required  to  register.  To 
this  Malik  replied  evasively  that  the  act  still  con- 
stituted a  psychological  hazard  for  prospective 
Soviet  students  and  professors,  though  he  did  not 
explain  how. 

Campaign  Against  Alleged  "Ulterior  Motives" 
Underlying  U.S.  Cultural-Exchange  Policy 

Although  the  iUiti-American  propaganda  cam- 
paign had  been  increasing  in  momentum  during 
1947.  and  although  the  "State  Secrets  Act'"  of  June 
1947,  a  supplementary  decree  of  December  1947, 
and  press  attacks  upon  scientists  maintaining 
Western  contacts  were  indicative  of  a  new  Soviet 
line  towards  the  question  of  cultural  relations  with 
the  United  States,  it  was  not  before  early  1948  that 
the  American  proposals  were  vehemently  attacked 
on  the  ground  that  they  concealed  ulterior  and  evil 
motives.  A  Soviet  Professor  Bernstein  bitterly 
denounced  the  Institute  of  International  Educa- 
tion of  New  York  and  its  director,  Stephen  Dug- 
ganr-  Obviously  with  official  approval,  Bernstein 
described  the  organization  as  a  "monopoly  Ameri- 
can institution  for  international  pedagogic  rela- 
tions, for  training  legal  'pedagogic'  spies  and 
informers,  and  for  establishing  an  'American  col- 
umn' in  every  country." 

This  article  placed  Soviet  actions  of  the  pre- 
vious three  years  in  proper  focus.  It  verified  what 
seasoned  observers  of  Soviet  society  had  known  to 
be  the  underlying  cause  of  Soviet  coolness  to  sug- 
gestions for  cultural  exchanges:  i.  e.  feelings  of 
inferiority,  lack  of  confidence  that  Soviet  ideas 
and  ways  of  life  would  withstand  competition  with 
the  capitalist  world,  and  stemming  from  these, 
suspicions  that  Americans  intended  eventually  to 
undermine  the  Soviet  system,  Professor  Bern- 
stein's views  were  only  a  logical  development  in 
the  increasingly  chauvinistic  and  xenophobic  path 
taken  by  the  Kremlin. 

The  secrecy  act  of  June  1947  had  provided  severe 
penalties  for  Soviet  citizens  divulging  information 
which  is  regarded  in  other  countries  as  perfectly 
normal  data  for  publication  and  free  dissemination 

Department  of  Sfofe   Bulletin 


domestically  and  internationally.  The  decree 
promulgated  in  December  1947  forbade  any  Soviet 
institution  other  than  the  Ministry  of  Foreign  Af- 
fairs and  the  Ministry  of  Foreign  Trade  to  have 
any  relations  with  representatives  of  foreign 
states.  The  perverted  apprehensiveness  regard- 
ing espionage  which  Soviet  propaganda  had  beaten 
into  the  consciousness  of  Soviet  citizens  was  re- 
vealed in  Professor  Bernstein's  charge  of  malicious 
intent  in  the  fact  that  "Students  sent  abroad  by 
the  Institute  of  International  Education  are  ad- 
vised not  to  confine  themselves  to  their  academic 
pursuits,  but  to  study  the  cultural,  political  and 
social  life  of  the  country  to  which  they  are  sent, 
make  friends  with  the  local  students  and  visit  their 
homes,  and  establish  friendly  relations  with  the 
population."  Official  mentalities  so  warped  as  to 
see  evil  in  this  vital  basis  of  mutual  understanding 
could  not  be  expected  to  comprehend  the  American 
approach  to  studying  in  other  countries,  as  defined 
by  Ambassador  Smith : 

"Of  course,  naturally,  all  Soviet  colleges  teach  the 
Soviet  political  ideology  and  political  economy, 
the  doctrines  promulgated  by  Marx,  Engels,  and 
later,  Lenin.  An  American  student  going  there  to 
attend  a  university  would  study  the  same  thing, 
and  I  think  it  well  that  he  should,  because  I  think 
the  people  of  this  country  ought  to  understand  the 
political  ideology  that  motivates  the  one  other 
country  in  the  world  which  corresponds  to  ours  in 
size  and  potential  strength."  " 

Having  disposed  of  one  of  the  lanes  of  what 
should  be  a  two-way  traffic  highway  in  student 
exchange,  Professor  Bernstein  proceeded  to  at- 
tack the  other.  Pointing  out  that  the  Institute 
also  arranges  for  foreign  students  to  study  in  the 
United  States,  he  found  that  "The  selection  of 
scholars  invited  to  America,  like  the  selection  of 
American  professors  sent  abroad,  has  a  specific 
character.  Both,  as  a  rule,  belong  to  the  openly 
reactionary  camp." 

The  patent  foolishness  of  this  charge  was  espe- 
cially laid  open  when  applied  to  Soviet  citizens  to 
whom  invitations  had  been  extended  and  to  those 
who  had  actually  visited  the  United  States.  No 
questions  were  asked  about  their  politics,  and  it 
could  hardly  be  said  that  any  of  them  belonged  to 
the  "openly  reactionary  camp,"  since,  if  they  had, 
they  would  have  been  confined  to  a  Soviet  concen- 
tration camp. 


Individual  Scientists  Want  Cultural  Exchange 

The  Soviet  Union  has  been  eminently  successful 
in  exercising  almost  complete  control  over  the 
actions  and  words  of  its  citizens,  but  it  has  not  been 
able  entirely  to  enslave  their  minds. 

Unfortunately  for  the  Kremlin,  men  of  science 
still  think.  They  realize  that  as  broad  as  possible 
an  interchange  of  ideas  is  necessai-y  for  scientific 
advancement.  They  understand  that  widespread 
exchange  of  information  pertaining  to  projects- 
in-work,  to  preliminary  findings,  to  new  tech- 
niques and  methods  saves  many  long  hours  of 
wasted  and  fruitless  effort  and  is  essential  to  scien- 
tific progress.  Consequently,  scientists  and  men 
of  letters  in  the  Soviet  Union  have  been  exceed- 
ingly desirous  of  the  development  of  cultural  ex- 
change between  the  United  States  and  the  Soviet 
Union,  and  for  a  time  freely  expressed  their  views. 
The  ill-fated  Dr.  Vasili  V.  Parin,  when  he  ad- 
dressed the  American-Soviet  Medical  Society  in 
New  York  in  December  1946,  said :  "It  is  obvious 
that  our  plan  includes  practically  the  same  prob- 
lems as  those  studied  in  the  U.S.A.  It  indicates 
once  more  that  modern  science  is  really  interna- 
tional in  character,  and  proves  once  more  the  need 
for  scientific  interchange."  ^^ 

The  Soviet  representative  on  the  United  Nations 
Atomic  Energy  Commission,  Professor  Simon  P. 
Alexandrov,  recognized  the  desirability  of  reduc- 
ing the  impediments  making  cultural  interchange 
between  his  country  and  the  United  States  dif- 
ficult. He  urged  an  easing  of  visa  restrictions, 
reduced  costs  of  travel  between  the  two  countries, 
and  an  increased  study  of  one  another's  language. 
Alexandrov  strongly  advocated  the  use  of  the 
press,  radio,  and  movies  to  promote  better  under- 
standing, and  the  desirability  of  an  interchange 
of  large  numbers  of  business  and  professional  men, 
engineers  and  students. 

Even  those  journalistic  pillars  of  the  Soviet  way 
of  life,  Messrs.  Ehrenburg,  Galaktionov  and 
Simonov,  wrote  the  Department  of  State  to  thank 
it  for  its  assistance  during  their  visit  to  the  United 
States  and  said:  "We  think  mutual  travels  of 
representatives  of  culture  will  assist  the  coopera- 
tion and  friendship  between  our  countries." 


"  Hearings  on  H.  R.  3342,  as  cited,  p.  52. 
"^^  American  Revieio  of  Soviet  Medicine,  April  1947,  p. 
297. 


April  3,    7949 


However,  such  views  ran  contrary  to  the  views 
of  the  Soviet  leadei-s  wl>o  are  desirous  of  keepin<; 
their  people  uninformed  about  the  progress  tak- 
ing phice  in  the  free  world.  Consequently,  it  was 
deemed  necessary  to  launch  an  all-out  attack  upon 
the  Soviet  people  to  intimidate  them  and  make 
them  afraid  to  engage  in  any  relations  with  the 
West. 

In  June  1947  there  was  the  State  Secrets  Act, 
by  which  almost  any  information  became  suscepti- 
ble to  interpretation  as  a  state  secret,  so  that  a 
Soviet  citizen  would  avoid  any  conversation  that 
he  might  have  with  a  foreigner  for  fear  of  being 
charged  with  violating  the  act. 

On  July  24,  1947,  in  a  broadcast  speech  on  the 
subject  of  "Soviet  Patriotism,"  a  writer,  P. 
Vyshinsky,  stated  that  "every  Soviet  patriot  must 
realize  the  importance  of  keeping  secret  our 
scientific  discoveries  and  inventions."  " 

The  theory  behind  this  statement  is  that  since 
in  the  Soviet  Union  the  state  makes  possible  the 
education  of  the  scientist,  the  engineer,  and  the 
technician,  their  work  becomes  completely  the 
property  of  the  state.  It  then  becomes  a  criminal 
offense,  from  the  view  of  the  Soviet  leaders,  for 
anyone  within  the  Soviet  Union  to  make  available 
any  of  the  products  of  his  research  to  other  coun- 
tries, unless  with  the  permission  of  the  state.  Add 
to  this  the  theme  running  through  Soviet  propa- 
ganda at  home  and  abroad  that  all  the  people  be- 
yond the  Iron  Curtain  are  engaged  in  a  continuous 
espionage  campaign  to  pry  loose  from  the  Soviet 
Union  the  secrets  of  its  "unrivalled  discoveries", 
and  the  reason  is  clear  why  the  Soviet  Govern- 
ment, infallible  as  always,  is  acting  for  the  welfare 
of  its  people  in  its  refusal  to  participate  in  cul- 
tural exchange  with  the  West.  Recently,  to  "but- 
tress" its  ridiculous  contention  that  Westerners 
are  assigned  to  spy  on  it,  the  Soviet  Union  has 
published  the  absurdly  distorted  writings  of  a 
former  administrative  clerk  of  the  American  Em- 
bassy in  Moscow,  in  which  she  asserts  that  every 
American  in  the  Soviet  Union,  herself  excluded, 
is  engaged  in  espionage  activities.  Implicit  is 
the  warning  that  the  Soviet  citizen  should  not  risk 
involvement  by  having  any  contact  with  these 
spies. 


"Also  in  Bolshevik,  No.  18,  1947,  p.  37. 
" Literatumaya  Oazeta    (Literary  Gazette),  Aug.  30, 
1947. 

" Partiinaya  Zhizn   (Party  Life),  No.  14,  1047. 


Cultural  Interchange  Becomes  Disgraceful  and 
Unpatriotic 

Evidently  having  decided  in  mid- 1947  that  they 
would  not  engage  in  any  cultural  exchange  with 
the  United  States,  and  in  consonance  with  the 
implication  of  Vyshinsky *s  speech  on  patriotism, 
Soviet  policy-makers  began  to  attack  those  of  its 
citizens  who  favored  or  engaged  in  cultural  in- 
terchange. For  a  scientist  or  artist  to  maintain 
any  correspondence  with  foi-eign  colleagues  be- 
came in  Soviet  eyes  a  sin  defined  as  "obsequious- 
ness before  bourgeois  cosmopolitanism",  and  took 
on  the  connotation  of  a  treasonable  act.  The  cru- 
sade against  cultural  interchange  became  inextri- 
cably interwoven  with  spy  phobia  on  the  one  hand 
and  blatant  chauvinism  in  scientific  and  cultural 
matters  on  the  other.  As  a  result  of  this  atmos- 
phere, scientists,  well-known  and  obscure  alike, 
were  attacked  in  the  press  for  having  been  so  "un- 
patriotic" as  to  publish  their  works  in  foreign 
periodicals. 

In  September,  1947,  A.  R.  Zhebrak,  the  Soviet 
geneticist,  who  had  been  a  delegate  to  the  United 
Nations  at  San  Francisco  and  who  had  established 
friendships  among  American  scientists,  was  at- 
tacked for  criticizing  the  work  of  a  fellow  scientist, 
Lysenko,  in  an  American  magazine.  This  act  was 
called  inconsonant  "with  an  elementary  under- 
standing of  the  civil  honor  of  a  Soviet  man."" 
Zhebrak  was  promptly  deposed  as  president  of  the 
Academy  of  Sciences  of  the  Byelorussian  S.S.R. 
for  his  crime. 

At  the  same  time,  Dr.  X.  P.  Dubinin,  of  the  In- 
stitute of  Experimental  Biology  of  the  U. S.S.R. 
Academy  of  Sciences,  was  blasted  for  "pandering 
to  the  West"  by  publishing  articles  in  foreign 
periodicals. 

The  effrontry  of  an  obscure  Soviet  professor  in 
publishing  in  a  French  journal  material  pertain- 
ing to  Soviet  research  in  perfume  chemistry  drew 
a  stinging  rebuke  from  a  Communist  Party  maga- 
zine. "Unfortunately,"  wrote  the  author  of  the 
tirade,  "persons  are  still  to  be  found  among  the 
oflicials  of  the  machinery  of  state,  in  particular 
among  the  scientific  workers,  who  indulge  in  ob- 
sequiousness and  fawning  to  bourgeois  culture." 
Why  should  any  loyal  Soviet  citizen  wish  to  pub- 
lish his  ideas  or  views  in  the  capitalist  press,  it  was 
asked,  when  "to  have  an  article  published  in 
Soviet  periodicals  is  not  a  smaller,  but  a  greater 
honor  than  in  the  foreign  periodicals."  ^" 

Department  of  State   Bulletin 


In  February  1948,  Professor  Y.  I.  Frenkel,  a 
highly  esteemed  atomic  physicist,  was  similarly 
called  to  task  for  having  published  some  of  his 
works  abroad,  but  because  of  the  importance  of  his 
work  to  the  Government  he  was  not  denounced. 

Apparently,  despite  the  State  Secrets  Act, 
various  speeches,  and  the  attacks  on  scientists  for 
having  published  works  abroad,  there  were  still 
many  people  who  believed  in  the  desirability  of 
cultural  exchange  .  Therefore,  it  was  necessary  to 
strike  hard  at  such  evil  thoughts  by  damning  those 
holding  them  before  the  entire  people.  This  could 
best  be  accomplished  through  the  medium  of  the 
stage,  and  so  came  into  being  the  "propaganda 
piece".  Court  of  Honor,  a  viciously  anti-American, 
but  hardly  original  play,  which  is  closely  pat- 
terned after  an  earlier  Soviet  play.  Fear,  by  Afino- 
genov.  The  play  primarily  rails  against  the  mis- 
guided villains  in  the  Soviet  Union  who  believe  in 
the  universality  of  science  and  the  interchange  of 
information.  Such  a  view,  it  is  explained,  is  dan- 
gerous to  hold  since  all  American  scientists  are 
either  intelligence  agents  or  the  slaves  of  monopoly 
corporations  anxious  to  obtain  Soviet  scientific 
secrets  which  they  can  use  in  their  preparations  for 
an  aggressive  war.  Thus  does  the  Soviet  Govern- 
ment seek  to  justify  to  its  people  its  refusal  to 
grant  visas  to  such  capable  medical  men  as  Doctor 
Dixon  of  the  Mayo  Clinic  and  Doctors  Hauschka, 
Shimkin,  and  Shear,  who  wished  to  study  cancer 
research  with  the  world-famous  Soviet  Doctors 
Roskin,  Klueva,  and  their  associates. 

The  many  attacks  upon  eminent  men  in  the 
scientific  world,  the  publication  of  the  ex-Amer- 
ican Embassy  clerk's  concoctions  about  American 
espionage,  and  the  scurrilous  attacks  on  American 
scientists  and  international-minded  scientists  in 
the  U.S.S.R.  are  all  obviously  motivated  by  the 
Kremlin's  determination  to  discourage  the  Soviet 
citizen  from  maintaining  any  contacts  with  the 
outside  world,  and  to  justify  the  Kremlin's  rejec- 
tion of  the  multifold  American  attempts  to  effect  a 
genuine  program  of  mutually  beneficial  cultural 
interchange. 

PART  III:  EXCHANGE  OF  PUBLICATIONS 

In  its  efforts  to  facilitate  the  exchange  of  pub- 
lications, the  United  States  has  been  confronted 
with  the  same  Soviet  obstructionist  tactics  which 
it  faced  in  its  attempts  to  obtain  an  exchange  of 
persons  between  the  two  countries.  Generally, 
Soviet  librarians  and  heads  of  cultural  institu- 

Apri7  3,    7949 


tions  have  manifested  a  sincere  interest  in  ex- 
panding the  international  exchange  of  books,  pe- 
riodicals, newspapers,  and  government  documents. 
However,  the  official  Soviet  policy  has  been  de- 
signed to  impede  such  an  exchange. 

The  crux  of  the  problem  has  been  the  difference 
between  the  attitudes  of  the  American  Govern- 
ment and  the  Soviet  Government  on  dissemination 
of  information.  The  former,  believing  in  the  de- 
sirability of  the  widest  possible  international  ex- 
change of  publications  as  a  basis  for  enabling 
people  in  all  fields  to  understand  better  develop- 
ments in  other  countries,  has  made  available  to  all 
interested  governments,  institutions,  and  individ- 
uals all  publications  printed  within  the  United 
States.  Similarly,  libraries,  scholarly  institutions 
and  publishers  in  the  United  States  have  always 
been  very  liberal  in  their  distribution  of  printed 
materials. 

In  the  Soviet  Union,  on  the  other  hand,  an  en- 
tirely different  attitude  exists  toward  the  distribu- 
tion of  publications.  The  Goverimient  is  by  no 
means  inclined  to  make  available  to  foreign  gov- 
ermnents  and  institutions  all  the  printed  mate- 
rials published  in  the  U.S.S.R.  It  is  suspicious 
of  the  interest  of  foreign  countries  in  Soviet  pub- 
lished materials,  and  is  even  unwilling  to  make 
available  important  bibliographies,  to  say  nothing 
of  materials  included  in  such  bibliographies.  At 
the  same  time,  since  the  Soviet  leaders  wish  to 
keep  their  people  ignorant  of  progressive  develop- 
ments in  the  West,  they  are  not  motivated  by  the 
same  enthusiasm  for  an  exchange  of  publications 
as  the  United  States,  which  seeks  to  make  avail- 
able to  its  citizens  all  the  products  of  domestic  and 
foreign  thought. 

It  is  not  to  be  thought,  however,  that  the  Soviet 
Union  is  disinterested  in  the  acquisition  of  Ameri- 
can publications.  On  the  contrary,  it  has  in  the 
United  States  two  agencies  whose  duty  it  is  to 
make  extensive  purchases  of  American  publica- 
tions, which  are  used  by  Soviet  institutions  for 
official  research  on  American  affairs  but  not  made 
accessible  to  the  Soviet  public.  These  organiza- 
tions are  Amtorg  and  the  Four  Continents  Book 
Store  in  New  York  City.  The  latter,  supposedly 
primarily  a  commercial  outlet  for  Soviet  publica- 
tions, actually  devotes  about  80  percent  of  its 
business  to  the  purchase  of  American  publications 
for  export  to  the  U.S.S.R.  Amtorg,  which  also 
spends  large  sums  in  the  purchase  of  American 
publications  for  the  U.S.S.R.,  devotes  considerable 


time  to  compiling  information  obtained  from  in- 
formative American  industrial  publications  and 
investment  manuals,  such  as  those  published  by 
Standard  Statistics  Company,  Poor's,  Moody's 
and  Thompson's.  Whereas  American  scholars 
find  it  almost  impossible  to  obtain  adequate  eco- 
nomic information  about  the  Soviet  Union, 
Amtorg  has  been  free  to  gather  so  much  economic 
information  about  the  United  States  that  it  has 
been  able  to  issue  annual  comprehensive  volumes 
entitled  S]>ravochnik  Amerikanskoi  Tekhniki  i 
Promyshlennosti  (Handbook  of  American  Tech- 
nique and  Industry),  which  contain  extraordi- 
narily detailed  information,  including  photo- 
graphs. Thase  give  information  on  plant  loca- 
tion, performance,  and  types  of  products  of  United 
States  plants.  In  addition  to  its  interest  in  pur- 
chasing certain  United  States  publications,  the 
Soviet  Union  is  also  interested  in  acquiring  some 
printed  material  by  exchange.  The  Government 
has  created  a  system  for  the  ostensible  purpose  of 
facilitating  international  exchange.  Through 
1S)45,  Soviet  exchange  was  handled  primarily 
through  VOKS  and  the  All-Union  Lenin  Library 
in  Moscow,  with  the  Library  of  the  Academy  of 
Sciences  sometimes  acting  independently  and 
sometimes  through  the  All-Union  Lenin  Library. 
Actually,  exchange  of  materials  has  been  increas- 
ingly centralized  in  the  All-Union  Lenin  Library. 
However,  regardless  of  the  organs  handling  ex- 
change, the  attitude  has  continually  been  that  of 
attempting  to  secure  as  much  as  possible  for  the 
Soviet  Union  while  giving  as  little  as  possible  to 
American  libraries.  This  becomes  clear  in  a  re- 
view of  the  course  of  American  efforts  to  improve 
exchange  relationships. 

At  the  close  of  the  recent  war,  American  organi- 
zations, commercial  as  well  as  professional,  liber- 
ally participated  in  campaigns  to  send  gift  books 
to  the  Soviet  Union.  In  1945,  the  members  of  the 
U.  S.  International  Book  Association  contributed 
a  hundred  books,  chiefly  medical,  to  Soviet  librar- 
ies; the  American  Medical  Association  sent  the 
All-Union  Lenin  Library  75  copies  of  an  18-volume 
medical  encyclopedia,  purchased  with  A.M.A. 
funds.  In  April  of  the  following  year,  the  Amer- 
ican Library  Association  sent  as  a  gift  to  the 
U.S.S.R.  300  copies  of  its  bibliography,  Book.^  Pvh- 
lished  in  the  United  ,States  ID.ID-WP,  as  well  as 
over  2,400  different  books  published  during  that 
period  valued  at  over  $13,000.  Other  institutions 
forwarded  similar  gifts  to  fill  out  gaps  in  Soviet 


libraries.  These  gifts  were  in  addition  to  the  large 
quantity  of  books,  periodicals,  newspapers,  and 
government  documents  which  were  sent  to  the 
U.S.S.R.  under  established  exchange  procedures 
by  the  Library  of  Congress,  the  Smithsonian  In- 
stitution, the  U.  S.  Department  of  Agriculture, 
and  many  other  organizations. 

However,  in  contrast  to  the  attitude  of  American 
institutions,  Soviet  publication  institutions  were 
not  at  all  helpful.  Not  only  were  American  librar- 
ies finding  it  diflScult  to  acquire  desired  publica- 
tions through  exchange,  but  conmaercial  dealings 
with  Vsesoyuznoye  Obedineniye  Mezhdunarod- 
naya  Kniga  (All-Union  Combine  for  International 
liooks — the  centralized  book-export  firm  of  the 
U.S.S.R.)  were  found  to  be  extremely  ineffectual 
because  it  often  was  unable  to  meet  requests  for 
material  which  it  claimed  to  have,  and  because  of 
the  frequent  changes  in  methods  which  it  pre- 
.scribed  for  dealing  with  it.  For  instance,  in  No- 
vember 1945  it  advised  one  large  purchaser  of 
Soviet  materials  that  all  requests  should  be  made 
directly  to  it.  On  the  other  hand,  in  its  more 
widely  distributed  advertisements,  potential  pur- 
chasers are  instructed  to  place  their  orders  with 
Mezhdunarodnaya  Kniga "s  ^Vmerican  representa- 
tive, the  Four  Continents  Book  Corporation  in 
New  York  City.  Regardless  of  which  organiza- 
tion handled  purchase  orders,  those  submitting 
tliem  received  but  a  fractional  part  of  the  material 
requested. 

To  remedy  the  unsatisfactory  status  of  affairs  in 
the  purchase  and  exchange  of  publications  with  the 
Soviet  Union,  a  plan  was  worked  out  by  the  De- 
jiartment  of  State,  the  Library  of  Congress,  and 
fourteen  other  libraries  to  expedite  the  acquisition 
of  Soviet  materials,  and  a  special  representative 
was  sent  to  the  Soviet  Union,  as  an  attache  to  the 
United  States  Embassj',  for  the  purpose  of  imple- 
menting the  program.  He  was  instructed  not  only 
to  investigate  ways  of  enlarging  the  flow  of  Soviet 
materials  to  American  libraries,  but  to  be  attentive 
to  Soviet  suggestions  for  improving  the  flow  of 
materials  to  the  U.S.S.R. 

This  representative  of  the  Embassy  quickly  dis- 
covered that  VOKS,  which  had  been  established 
for  the  purpose  of  facilitating  cultural  relations 
between  foreigners  and  Soviet  institutions,  was 
extremely  reluctant  to  arrange  any  contacts  for 
him  with  individual  Soviet  libraries;  all  ex- 
changes were  to  be  effected  through  the  All-Union 
Lenin  Library.    At  the  latter,  the  American  rep- 


Deparlment  of  State  Bulletin 


resentative  learned  the  reason  for  the  inadequate 
and  delayed  flow  of  publications  to  the  United 
States.  First,  the  deposit  of  books  in  the  library 
for  the  purpose  of  exchange  is  a  matter  deter- 
mined by  each  of  the  dozens  of  publishers  in  the 
Soviet  Union,  and  consequently  many  publica- 
tions are  not  available  to  the  library  for  use  in 
exchange.  More  important,  however,  is  the  fact 
that  of  these  books  the  library  receives  only  three 
copies,  with  which  it  is  expected  to  meet  the  ex- 
change requests  of  all  foreign  libraries. 

There  might  have  been  some  excuse  for  such  a 
limited  number  of  copies  to  be  set  aside  during  the 
war  when  there  was  a  considerable  paper  shortage 
in  the  Soviet  Union.  But  after  the  war  it  was 
quite  ridiculous  that  such  an  enormous  country  as 
the  U.S.S.R.,  with  all  its  resources  was  unable  to 
spare  a  lai^ge  enough  number  of  books  to  supply 
the  needs  of  foreign  scholars  interested  in  study- 
ing all  the  work  being  turned  out  by  Soviet  authors 
and  institutions,  and  to  reciprocate  for  the  large 
quantities  of  publications  sent  from  abroad  for 
which  exchange  in  kind  was  expected. 

Another  dead  end  was  encountered  by  American 
attempts  to  obtain  Soviet  bibliographies.  Where- 
as the  Library  of  Congress  made  available  to  the 
U.S.S.R.  bibliographies  containing  the  titles  of  the 
full  output  of  American  publishers,  including 
United  States  Government  publications,  the  All- 
Union  Lenin  Library,  in  answer  to  a  request,  in- 
formed the  American  representative  that  the  1946 
files  of  the  Soviet  National  Bibliography,  Knizh- 
naya  Letopis,  could  not  be  obtained  in  sufficient 
quantity  by  the  Lenin  Library  for  exchange  pur- 
poses. To  date,  United  States  institutions  have 
not  been  able  to  purchase  or  secure  in  exchange  this 
bibliography,  which  is  of  the  greatest  importance 
to  any  American  libraries  interested  in  selecting 
the  best  or  most  appropriate  books  published  in 
the  Soviet  Union. 

When  Professor  Ernest  J.  Simmons  visited  the 
Soviet  Union  in  the  summer  of  1947,  he  experi- 
enced the  lack  of  cooperative  spirit  which  had 
characterized  the  Soviet  side  of  the  publications- 
exchange  program.  He  had  brought  with  him  a 
proposal  by  the  Library  of  Congress  to  establish 
a  combined  American-Soviet  bibliography  of  all 
available  materials  on  pre-Revolution  and  post- 
Revolution  materials  on  United  States-Soviet  re- 
lations. This  suggestion  was  turned  down  on  the 
grounds  that  the  AU-Union  Lenin  Library  was  too 
busy  reorganizing  its  own  files,  bibliographies,  etc. 

April  3,   7949 


Professor  Simmons  also  submitted  a  proposal  for 
an  exchange  of  two  research  library  representa- 
tives between  the  Library  of  Congress  and  the  All- 
Union  Lenin  Library  for  a  period  of  six  months. 
The  answer  was  negative,  and  the  excuse  flimsy. 

In  the  past,  the  Soviet  Government  has  closely 
pursued  a  policy  of  channeling  all  its  own  export 
of  publications  through  two  main  agencies, 
Mezhdunarodnaya  &iiga  for  sales,  and  the  All- 
Union  Lenin  Library  for  exchange,  while  mani- 
festing its  disinclination  to  negotiate  with  any 
central  exchange  agent  of  the  United  States, 
whether  that  be  the  United  States  Embassy  in 
Moscow  or  the  Library  of  Congress.  In  January 
1946  the  Lenin  Library  informed  the  United  States 
Embassy  in  Moscow  that  whereas  during  wartime, 
when  the  mails  were  unreliable,  it  was  desirable 
to  utilize  diplomatic  channels  for  book  exchange, 
it  was  now  preferable  to  revert  to  "normal"  chan- 
nels. It  was  also  asserted  that  the  All-Union 
Library  preferred  to  deal  directly  with  individual 
American  libraries. 

The  net  result  of  conducting  publications  inter- 
change with  the  Soviet  Union  under  "normal" 
conditions  has  been  that  the  many  interested 
American  institutions  which  have  forwarded  ma- 
terials to  the  All-Union  Lenin  Library  for  ex- 
change purposes  have  been  competing  for  the  very 
limited  number  of  desired  publications  which  the 
Lenin  Library  has  available. 

When  exchange  has  taken  place,  it  has  been  made 
less  valuable  to  the  recipient  libraries  in  the 
United  States  by  two  facts.  On  the  one  hand,  the 
necessary  bibliographical  material  of  Soviet  pub- 
lications is  lacking  or  arrives  so  late  that  desired 
books  are  out  of  print;  on  the  other,  when  selec- 
tion is  left  up  to  the  Soviet  Union  the  results  are 
unsatisfactory,  partly  because  of  the  limited  choice 
open  to  the  Soviet  librarians. 

Not  only  has  the  actual  number  of  publications 
sent  to  the  Soviet  Union  by  American  institutions 
always  far  exceeded  the  number  received  in  re- 
turn, but  the  substance  (quite  apart  from  the  stul- 
tification inherent  in  Soviet  works  due  to  the  con- 
fining strictures  of  Marxian  dogma)  of  the  former 
is  vastly  superior.  The  American  contributions 
include  mostly  volumes  containing  considerable 
amounts  of  solid  information.  Most  of  the  Soviet 
publications  consist  of  periodicals,  newspapers, 
brochures,  pamphlets,  posters,  and  theater  pro- 
grams, with  the  latter  two  categories  predominat- 
ing.    Each  of  these  items  is  counted  separately  by 


Soviet  library  officials,  and  the  total  is  cited  as 
the  number  of  publications  sent  on  exchange.  The 
operation  of  Soviet  cooperation  under  "normal"' 
conditions  is  further  illustrated  by  the  refusal  of 
the  Lenin  Library  on  more  than  one  occasion  after 
the  war  to  provide  American  libraries  with  micro- 
films of  essential  out-of-print  materials,  though 
the  requests  included  offers  to  reimburse  the  li- 
brary for  the  costs  involved. 

Lack  of  resources,  due  largely  to  the  war,  and 
the  traditional  inefficiency  of  the  Soviet  bureauc- 
racy might  have  explained  in  part  the  early  post- 
war failure  of  the  Soviet  Union  to  cooperate  in  the 
matter  of  publications  exchange.  American  insti- 
tutions for  a  long  period  gave  Soviet  libraries  and 
other  book  organizations  generous  benefits  of  the 
doubt  on  this  score.  But  as  the  record  became  re- 
plete with  case  after  case  in  which  the  Soviet  un- 
cooperative attitude  could  not  be  explained  in  these 
terms,  it  became  clear  that  the  refusal  to  engage 
in  genuine  book  exchange  was  a  fixed  Soviet  official 
policy.  It  became  evident  that  in  book  exchange, 
as  in  international  politics,  it  is  possible  to  deal 
■with  the  Soviet  Union  only  so  long  as  the  business 
is  conducted  according  to  the  rules  established  by 
the  Soviet  Union,  and  so  long  as  the  major  share 
of  benefits  involved  accrue  to  the  U.S.S.R.  As  in 
international  politics,  too,  the  basis  of  the  rela- 
tionship is  a  deep  undercurrent  of  official  Soviet 
distrust  and  antipathy  toward  the  Western  world. 

PART  iV:  CONCLUSIONS 

Present  conditions  do  not  indicate  that  cultural 
relations  between  the  United  States  and  the 
U.S.S.R.  will  develop  to  the  mutual  benefit  of  the 
peoples  of  both  countries. 

Despite  Pravda's  assertion  of  November  3, 104(), 
that  "There  are  absolutely  no  obstacles,  unless  they 
are  created  by  non-Soviet  parties,  to  the  most  lively 
trade,  scientific,  and  cultural  bonds  between  our 
countries  based  on  a  firm  foundation  of  mutual 
respect  and  equal  rights,"  the  events  of  the  past 
four  years  of  continuous  efforts  upon  the  part  of 
the  American  Government,  American  institutions, 
and  American  individuals  to  establish  cultural  ex- 
change in  the  realm  of  education,  science,  or  publi- 
cations, thoroughly  invalidate  Pravda''s  statement. 

The  United  States  repeated  proposals  for  an  ex- 
change of  persons  has  met  with  scant  success.  A 
handful  of  persons  have  been  granted  visas  by  the 
Soviet  Government,  but  with  few  exceptions  they 


have  been  people  thought  "politically  acceptable" 
by  Soviet  authorities.  On  the  other  hand,  the 
United  States  has  accorded  visas  to  any  outstand- 
ing Soviet  citizen  in  the  field  of  the  arts  and  sci- 
ences, regardless  of  his  political  views.  The 
United  States  has  recently  granted  visas  to  notable 
Communist  propagandists  to  attend  the  Interna- 
tional Cultural  and  Scientific  Conference  for 
World  Peace,  fully  conscious  of  the  party  line  to 
which  such  artists,  writers,  and  scientists  have 
adhered  at  past  gatherings.  However,  to  do  so 
is  in  accordance  with  the  American  view  of  free- 
dom of  intellectual  interchange. 

To  do  so  also  demonstrates  the  vast  difference 
between  the  policies  of  the  two  governments,  for 
the  Soviet  Government  has  never  permitted  within 
its  borders  a  nongovernmental  international  meet- 
ing representing  a  wide  range  of  political  views. 

Despite  the  postwar  efforts  of  the  United  States 
Government  to  widen  the  channels  of  cultural 
interchange,  the  Soviet  Government  persistently 
pursued  an  obdurate  policy.  First  the  resistance 
was  of  a  passive  nature,  delayed  replies,  incom- 
plete replies,  failures  to  reply.  Then  after  the 
summer  of  1947,  rejections  became  more  definite, 
based  upon  positive  although  specious  reasons  such 
as  overcrowded  housing  conditions  and  psycho- 
logical fears  allegedly  incited  by  the  U.  S.  Alien 
Registration  Act.  Finally,  in  1948,  the  Soviet 
Government  took  the  open  position  of  refusal  to 
participate  in  cultural  interchange  with  the 
United  States  because  of  suspicions  that  American 
motives  behind  the  program  were  aimed  at  under- 
mining Soviet  security. 

Concomitant  with  the  increasingly  vehement 
opposition  to  cultural  interchange  has  been  the 
increasing  emphasis  upon  Soviet  priorities  and 
Soviet  superiority  in  the  realm  of  the  arts  and 
sciences.  The  mounting  tight  control  exercised 
over  Soviet  artists  and  scientists,  and  the  increas- 
ing attack  upon  those  who  maintained  contacts 
with  fellow  specialists  in  the  free  world  have  also 
poisoned  the  atmosphere  and  inhibited  Soviet  in- 
tellectuals. 

The  only  conclusion  that  can  be  drawn  from 
Soviet  opposition  to  an  exchange  of  students  and 
professors  and  an  expansion  of  publications  ex- 
change is  that  the  Soviet  Government  fears  a  free 
interchange  of  ideas  because  of  a  realization  that 
thirty  years  of  Communism  have  failed  to  provide 
the  patient  Soviet  people  with  a  living  standard 
anywhere    approximating   that    enjoyed    by    the 


Department  of  %tate  Bulletin 


workers  in  the  United  States ;  because  thirty  years 
of  Communism  have  deprived  the  Soviet  people  of 
freedom  of  thought  and  action,  freedom  which 
once  experienced  through  contact  with  American 
people  or  American  books  will  make  them  ill- 
content  with  their  life  in  the  Soviet  Union. 

Unfortunately,  the  attitude  of  the  Soviet  Gov- 
ernment determines  the  course  of  the  U.S.- 
U.S.S.R.  cultural  interchange;  its  opposition  de- 
prives almost  350  million  people  of  the  multifold 
advantages  to  be  derived  from  a  broader  range 
of  understanding  of  peoples,  their  views,  and  their 
accomplishments. 

President  Truman  related  the  concept  of  cul- 
tural exchange  to  the  vital  issue  of  peace  in  an 
address  on  July  4, 1947,  in  which  he  said : 

"The  third  requisite  of  peace  is  the  free  and  full 
exchange  of  knowledge,  ideas,  and  information 
among  the  peoples  of  the  earth.  .  .  ." 


Research  and  Teaching  Opportunities 
in  United  Kingdom 

[Released  to  tlie  press  March  25] 

Announcement  of  opportunities  for  American 
citizens  to  undertake  advanced  research  or  serve 
as  visiting  professors  in  the  United  Kingdom  was 
made  by  the  Department  of  State  on  March  25. 
The  awards  will  be  made,  under  the  provisions  of 
the  Fulbright  Act,  in  pound  sterling.  Grants  for 
research  and  teaching  under  the  Fulbright  pro- 
gram ordinarily  cover  round-trip  transportation 
for  the  grantee,  a  stipend,  a  living  and  quarters 
allowance,  and  an  allowance  for  the  purchase  of 
necessary  books  and  equipment. 

The  awards  announced  include  visiting  profes- 
sorships at  British  universities  and  university  col- 
leges. Although  well  qualified  applicants  in  other 
fields  will  be  considered  also,  the  following  subjects 
are  among  those  which  have  been  suggested  as 
ajjpropriate  by  the  British  host  institutions: 

Economics,  geography  of  North  America,  Amer- 
ican history,  history  of  the  American  Revolution, 
economic  history,  Russian  history,  philosophy. 

Chemical  engineering,  crystallography,  physics, 
physiology,  social  psychology,  statistical  genetics, 
operative  dental  surgery. 

English  literature,  Elizabethan  literature, 
American  literature,  Biblical  criticism. 

Final  selection  of  professorial  condidates  will  be 
made  by  the  Board  of  Foreign  Scholarships  upon 
the  basis  of  the  personal  qualifications  of  the  indi- 
viduals. Definite  assignment  to  one  of  the  British 
universities  or  university  colleges  will  be  made  at 
the  time  of  selection. 

April  3,   7949 

830397 — 49 3 


Awards  were  also  announced  for  advanced  re- 
search under  the  sponsorship  of  British  institu- 
tions of  higher  learning  in  the  humanities,  the 
social  sciences,  the  natural  and  mathematical 
sciences,  medicine,  and  dentistry.  Library  and 
laboratory  facilities  for  studies  in  many  special- 
ized branches  of  these  fields  will  be  placed  at  the 
disposal  of  the  grantees  by  the  host  universities. 
Although  well  qualified  candidates  in  other  fields 
will  receive  consideration  also,  the  British  institu- 
tions have  indicated  the  existence  of  appropriate 
research  facilities  in  various  specialized  branches 
of  the  following  fields : 

Archeology,  linguistics,  literature.  Oriental 
studies,  theology,  anthropology,  economics,  edu- 
cation, geography,  history,  international  relations, 
law,  philosophy,  political  science,  sociology,  agri- 
culture, biology,  chemistry,  biochemistry,  en- 
gineering, geology,  mathematics,  physics,  psy- 
chology, medicine,  surgery,  psychiatry,  dentistry, 
veterinary  medicine. 

Final  selection  of  candidates  for  advanced  re- 
search grants  will  be  made  by  the  Board  of  Foreign 
Scholarships  upon  the  basis  of  the  personal  quali- 
fications of  the  applicants,  the  merit  of  their  re- 
search projects,  and  the  facilities  available  in  the 
United  Kingdom  for  the  accomplishment  of  their 
projects. 

British  universities  which  have  expressed  a  de- 
sire to  be  sponsors  either  to  American  visiting  pro- 
fessors or  research  scholars  include:  Aberdeen, 
Belfast,  Birmingham,  Bristol,  Cambridge,  Dur- 
ham, Edinburgh,  Glasgow,  Leeds,  Liverpool, 
London,  Manchester,  Nottingham,  Oxford,  Read- 
ing, Sheffield,  St.  Andrews,  Swansea,  Abery- 
stwyth, Bangor,  Cardiff,  Exeter,  Hull,  Leicester, 
Southampton,  Welsh  National  School  of  Medicine. 

Candidates  for  all  grants  will  be  selected  on  the 
basis  of  merit  by  the  Board  of  Foreign  Scholar- 
ships. Veterans  will  be  given  preference  provided 
their  other  qualifications  are  approximately  equal 
to  those  of  other  candidates.  Persons  receiving 
awards  will  normally  be  expected  to  remain  abroad 
for  one  academic  year. 

The  awards  are  offered  under  Public  Law  584 
(79th  Congress),  the  Fulbright  Act,  which 
authorizes  the  Department  of  State  to  use  certain 
foreign  currencies  and  credits  acquired  through 
the  sale  of  surplus  property  abroad  for  programs 
of  educational  exchange  with  other  nations. 

Persons  interested  in  the  opportunities  listed 
above  for  visiting  professors  and  research  scholars 
should  write  to  the  Conference  Board  of  As- 
sociated Research  Councils,  2101  Constitution 
Avenue,  Washington  25,  D.C.,  for  application 
forms  and  additional  information  concerning 
fields  of  teaching  and  research,  sponsoring  in- 
stitutions, and  conditions  of  award. 


The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations 


General  Assembly 

IMarcb  26-April  1) 
Delegation 

Secretary  Acheson  will  join  the  United  States 
Delegation  for  the  opening  session  of  the  United 
Nations  General  Assembly  on  April  5,  it  was  an- 
nounced on  March  28  by  Assistant  Secretary  Rusk. 
The  United  States  Delegation,  with  one  exception, 
will  be  the  same  as  for  the  first  part  of  the  As- 
sembly session,  wliich  met  in  Paris  from  mid- 
September  to  mid-December  of  last  year.'  Erwin 
D.  Canham,  editor  of  the  Christian  Science  Moni- 
tor and  president  of  the  American  Society  of 
Newspaper  Editors,  joins  the  delegation  as  an  al- 
ternate delegate  in  lieu  of  Assistant  Secretary 
Gross,  who  is  now  carrying  the  responsibility  of 
congressional  relations  for  the  Department  of 
State.  Mr.  Canham  will  take  part  in  the  consid- 
eration of  three  draft  conventions  on  freedom  of 
information  which  will  come  before  the  Third 
Committee  of  the  Assembly. 

The  United  States  Delegation  will  be  composed 
of  Ambassador  Warren  R.  Austin,  United  States 
Representative  and  Chief  of  the  United  States 
Mission  to  the  United  Nations,  John  Foster  Dulles, 
Mrs.  Franklin  D.  Roosevelt,  Ambassador  Philip 
C.  Jessup,  and  Benjamin  V.  Cohen.  Alternate 
delegates  are  Assistant  Secretary  Thorp,  Ambas- 
sador Ray  Atherton,  Ambassador  Francis  B. 
Sayre,  Mr.  Canham,  and  Assistant  Secretary  Rusk. 
The  delegation  will  meet  in  Washington  on  Satur- 
day, April  2,  for  preliminary  consultation  with 
the  Secretary  of  otate  and  other  departmental 
officers  before  moving  to  New  York. 

Interim  Committee 

A  long-range  plan  for  the  study  of  methods  of 
pacific  settlement  of  disputes  and  of  promoting 
international  cooperation  in  the  j'jolitical  field  was 
approved  by  the  Interim  Committee  of  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  (familiarly  known  as  the  ''Little 
Assembly")  at  its  meeting  on  March  31. 

The  plan  was  presented  to  the  Interim  Com- 
mittee by  James  N.  Hyde  of  the  United  States, 
who  acted  as  rapporteur  of  Subcommittee  6,  which 
had  been  given  the  responsibility  for  prei:)aring 
implementation  of  Paragraph  2  (c)  of  a  Greneral 
Assembly  resolution  of  December  3,  1948,  request- 
ing systematic  study  of  these  matters. 

As  the  first  step  in  the  series  of  studies  proposed 
to  the  Interim  Committee  over  the  next  several 
years,  the  subcommittee  recommended  that  an 
analysis  be  made  of  the  operation  of  United  Na- 
tions Commissions.  The  Secretariat  will  be  asked 
to  record  and  synthesize  the  experience  of  Com- 
missions appointed  by  the  General  Assembly  and 
the  Security  Council  during  the  past  several  years 
in  eflForts  to  investigate,  conciliate,  and  prevent 
hostilities. 

'  Bi-iiETiN  of  Sept.  12,  1948,  p.  330. 


The  program  of  study  proposed  by  the  sub- 
committee was  given  wholehearted  support  by 
the  United  States.  Charles  P.  Noyes,  sitting  for 
the  fli-st  time  as  Deputy  Representative  for  the 
United  States  on  the  Interim  Committee,  spoke 
of  the  proposed  studies  as  being  "of  inestimable 
value  to  the  United  Nations."  He  pointed  out 
that  they  would  "add  very  greatly  to  the  under- 
standing which  member  nations  and  the  public 
at  large  have  regarding  the  processes  of  peaceful 
settlement  available  under  the  United  Nations 
Charter,  as  well  as  the  other  aspects  of  political 
cooperation." 

The  Interim  Committee,  in  giving  its  unani- 
mous approval  to  the  subcommittee  proposal,  made 
provision  for  the  consultation  of  individual  ex- 
perts and  learned  societies  outside  of  the  United 
Nations. 

At  the  same  meeting,  the  Interim  Committee 
designated  a  subcommittee  to  study  and  formulate 
proposals  regarding  the  present  constitution,  du- 
ration and  terms  of  reference  of  the  Interim  Com- 
mittee. The  subcommittee  was  asked  to  submit  by 
August  15,  1949  concrete  proposals  which  might 
be  put  before  the  General  Assembly  in  September. 

Transport  and  Communications 

The  third  session  of  the  Transport  and  Com- 
munications Commission,  which  began  on  March 
21,  ended  on  March  30  with  the  adoption  of  the 
Commission's  report  to  the  Economic  and  Social 
Council  containing  ten  resolutions.  Among 
those  approved  at  its  final  meetings  was  one  re- 
questing the  Secretary  General  to  ascertain  the 
views  of  governments,  in  order  to  facilitate  Com- 
mission consideration  of  the  problems  of  maritime 
shipping  affecting  Latin  America  at  its  next  ses- 
sion. Another  defined  "inland  transport"  to  in- 
clude rail,  road,  inland  waterways,  and  pipe  lines. 
A  third  resolution  called  the  Economic  and  Social 
Council's  attention  to  the  fact  that  solution  of 
problems  facing  the  Commission  would  be  greatly 
•facilitated  when  the  International  Trade  Organ- 
ization and  Inter-governmental  Maritime  Consul- 
tative Organization  conventions  came  into  force. 
Another  recommended  continued  study  of  the 
problem  of  coordination  of  inland  transport. 

Unesco 

More  than  2,500  delegates  from  this  country 
and  representatives  from  22  other  countries  as- 
sembled in  Cleveland  March  30  for  the  second  na- 
tional  conference  of  the  United  States  National 
Commission  for  tiie  United  Nations  Educational, 
Scientific  and  Cultural  Organization  (Uxesco)  to 
learn  of  Unesco's  accomplishments  to  date  and  of 
its  plans  for  the  future.  The  primary  function 
of  Unesoo  is  the  promotion  of  international  coop- 
eration through  tlie  free  exchange  of  infonnation 
and  ideas  on  education,  art,  and  science. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Fleet  Admiral  Nimitz  Nominated 
as  Kashmir  Plebiscite  Administrator 

Statement  hy  Secretary  Acheson 

[Released  to  the  press  March  23] 

Since  the  beginning  of  the  year,  when  India  and 
Pakistan  put  into  effect  a  cease-fire  in  Kashmir, 
the  two  Governments  have  shown  a  most  coopera- 
tive and  praisewoi'thj'  spirit  in  working  toward 
a  final  settlement  of  the  Kashmir  issue  with  the 
assistance  of  the  United  Nations  Commission  for 
India  and  Pakistan  (Uncip).  The  nomination 
of  Fleet  Admiral  Nimitz  as  Plebiscite  Adminis- 
trator is  further  evidence  of  the  progress  being 
made  toward  a  peaceful  solution  of  this  difficult 
question.  Wliile  the  task  which  Admiral  Nimitz 
will  now  assume  is  one  in  which  he  will  act  as  an 
international  public  servant  of  the  United  Nations 
and  not  as  a  representative  of  this  Government, 
we  feel  honored  that  India  and  Pakistan  have 
agreed  to  repose  their  confidence  in  an  outstanding 
American  whose  immeasurable  contribution  to  the 
successful  conclusion  of  the  recent  war  in  the  Pa- 
cific remains  vividly  in  our  memories. 

We  hope  that  with  these  various  recent  encour- 
aging developments  the  Kashmir  issue  will  be 
brought  to  an  early  and  satisfactory  settlement. 

The  Kashmir  issue  arose  in  the  fall  of  1947 
following  the  partition  of  India  into  the  separate 
dominions  of  India  and  Pakistan.  The  Maharaja 
of  Kashmir,  a  Hindu  who  rules  over  a  predom- 
inantly Moslem  population,  acceded  to  India, 
thereby  causing  fightmg  between  the  Indian  forces 
on  the  one  hand  and  rebel  insurgents  aided  by 
raiding  tribesmen  and  later  augmented  by  Pak- 
istan troops.  This  issue  was  brought  to  the  Se- 
curity Council  on  January  1, 1948,  by  India.  The 
United  Nations  Commission  (Uncip)  composed 
of  representatives  of  Argentina,  Belgium,  Colom- 
bia, Czechoslovakia,  and  United  States  was  estab- 
lished. This  Commission  has  succeeded  in  effect- 
ing as  of  January  1  of  this  year  a  cease-fire,  and 
conversations  are  now  being  held  in  New  Delhi 
between  the  United  Nations  Commission  and  the 
disputants  regarding  the  implementation  of  a 
truce.  Both  India  and  Pakistan  have  agreed  to 
a  plebiscite  in  Kashmir  to  determine  the  will  of 
the  people.  Admiral  Nimitz  as  Plebiscite  Ad- 
ministrator will  take  over  this  difficult  task. 


U.S.  Contribution  for  Relief  of 
Palestine  Refugees 

Statement  hy  the  President 

[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  March  24] 

It  is  with  gratification  that  I  have  today  signed 
Senate  Joint  Resolution  36  authorizing  a  special 
contribution  by  the  United  States  of  $16  million 
for  the  relief  of  Palestine  refugees. 


The  United  Nations  General  Assembly  on  No- 
vember 19,  1948,  urged  all  States  members  of  the 
United  Nations  to  make  voluntary  contributions  as 
soon  as  possible  to  a  relief  fund  totaling  $32  mil- 
lion. The  Secretary  of  State  informs  me  that  thus 
far  fifteen  other  Members  of  the  United  Nations 
have  contributed  and  that  other  Governments  have 
signified  their  intention  to  send  money  or  contri- 
butions in  kind.  Tliere  is  a  pressing  need  for  this 
fund,  for  seven  hundred  thousand  refugees  are 
living  almost  on  starvation  level.  It  is  the  hope 
of  the  United  States  that  very  promptly  the  total 
$32  million  fund  will  be  subscribed  by  the  mem- 
bers of  tlie  United  Nations,  or  other  countries, 
which  have  not  yet  given  to  the  fund. 

I  trust  that  before  this  relief  program  is  ended 
means  will  be  devised  for  the  permanent  solution 
of  the  refugee  problem,  and  that  the  efforts  of 
the  Palestine  Conciliation  Commission  to  estab- 
lish a  lasting  peace  will  bring  hope  of  a  brighter 
future  to  these  destitute  victims  of  the  recent  hos- 
tilities in  the  Holy  Land. 


Current  United  Nations  Documents: 
A  Selected  Bibliography ' 

General  Assembly 

Official  Records  of  the  Second  Session 

First   Committee,    Political   and    Security   Questions 

including  Regulation  of  Armaments.  Summary  Rec- 
ord of  Meetings.  16  September-19  November  1947. 
xsii,  628  pp.     Printed.     $6.50. 

• Fifth    Committee,    Administrative    and    Budgetary 

Questions.  Summary  Record  of  Meetings.  16  Sep- 
tember-18  November  1947.  xxii,  500  pp.  Printed. 
$5.00. 

General  Committee.     Summary  Records  of  Meetings, 

17  September-3  November  1947.  vii,  47  pp.  Printed. 
50(i. 

Joint  Committee  of  the  Second  and  Third  Com- 
mittees. Summary  Record  of  Meetings.  8  October- 
5  November  1947.     xix,  98  pp.     printed.     $1.25. 

Official  Records  of  the  Second  Session.    Plenary  Meetings. 

Volume  I.    80th-109th  Meetings.    16  September-13 

November  1947.    LXXVI,  753  pp.  printed.    $8.00. 

—Volume  II.     110th-12Sth  Meetings.     13  November- 
29  November  1947.    pp.  753-1637.    printed.    $10.00. 

Survey  of  International  Law  in  relation  to  the  work  of 
codification  of  the  International  Law  Commission. 
.  .  .  [A/CN.4/1,  November  5,  1948]  70  pp.  Printed. 
500. 


'  Printed  materials  may  be  secured  in  the  United  States 
from  the  International  Documents  Service,  Columbia  Uni- 
versity Press,  2960  Broadway,  New  York  City.  Other  ma- 
terials (mimeographed,  or  processed  documents)  may  be 
consulted  at  certain  designated  libraries  in  the  United 
States. 


AptW  3,   1949 


INTERNATIONAL  ORGANIZATIONS  AND  CONFERENCES 

Calendar  of  Meetings  ^ 


Adjourned  during  March 

IcAO  (InteriiHlioiial  Civil  Aviation  Organization): 

Council:  Bixlh  Session 

Operations  Division 

Airworlliincs.s  Division 

International  Wheat  Conference 

L'liitod  Nations: 

Ecosoc  (Economic  and  Social  Council): 

Einhth  Session 

Who  (World  Health  Organization): 

E.\ecutive  Board:  Third  Session 

Fao  (Food  and  Agricultural  Organization): 

Near  East  Regional  Meeting  on  Animal  Breeding  Under  Tropical 
and  Subtropical  Conditions. 

International  Bice  Commission:  First  Meeting 

IcEF  (International  Children's  Emergency  Fund): 

Executive  Board 

Ilo  (International  Labor  Organization): 

Industrial   Committee  on   Civil  Engineering  and  Public   Works: 
Second  Session. 

In  Session  as  of  April  1, 1949 

United  Nations: 

Commission  on  Korea 


Commission  on  India  and  Pakistan 

Conciliation  Commission  for  Palestine 

Trusteeship  Council:  Fourth  Session 

Ecosoc  (Economic  and  Social  Council): 

Commission  on  the  Status  of  Women:  Third  Session.  .    .    .    .    . 

Subcommission  on  Economic  Development:  Third  Session  .  . 
Transport  and  Communications  Commission:  Third  Session  ._  . 
Economic    Commission    for    Europe:    Committee   on    Electric 

Power. 
Economic  Commission  for  Asia  and  the  Far  East:    Committee 
of  the  Whole. 
Itu  (International  Telecommunication  Union): 

Provisional  Frequency  Board 

International  Confere'nce  on  High  Frequency  Broadcasting     .    .    . 


Cfm  (Council  of  Foreign  Ministers) :  Deputies  for  Austria 

Itu  (International  Telecommunication  Union) : 

Aeronautical  Radio  Committee 

IcAO    (International    Civil    Aviation   Organization):   African-Indian 

Ocean  Regional  Meeting. 
Fad    (Food   and   Agriculture   Organization):   Indo-Pacific   Fisheries 
Council. 

Rubber  Study  Group:  Sixth  Session 

Ino   (International   Refugee  Organization):   Second   Session   of  the 

General  Council. 
Ilo  (International  Labor  Organization) : 

Committee  on  Application  for  Conventions  and  Recommenda- 
tions. 
Conference  of  European  Experts  on  Training  of  Supervisors  and 
Instructors  within  Industry. 

Scheduled  for  April 

American  Internation.al  Institute  for  the  Protection  of  Childhood: 
Annual  Meeting  of  the  Directing  Council. 

Tin  Study  Group:  Management  Committee 

United  Nations: 

Ecosoc  (Economic  and  Social  Council): 

Economic  Commission  for  Europe:  Committee  on  Industry  and 

Materials. 
Population  Commission:  Fourth  Session       .......... 

Subcommission  on  Employment  and  Economic  Stability:  Third 

Session. 
Statistical  Commission:  Fourth  Session 


Montreal    . 
Montreal    . 
Montreal 
Washington 


Lake  Success . 
Geneva  .  .  . 
Cairo  .  .  .  . 
Bangkok  .  .  . 
Lake  Success . 
Rome  .    .    .    . 


Seoul 


Lake  Success  . 
Jerusalem  .  . 
Lake  Success , 


Beirut.  .  .  . 
Lake  Success . 
Lake  Success  . 
Geneva    .    .    . 


Bangkok 


Geneva   .    . 
Mexico  City 

London    .    . 


Washington 
Londoh   .    . 


Singapore 

London  . 
Geneva  . 


Geneva 
Geneva 


Montevideo 
London  .  . 


Geneva 


Geneva   .    .    . 
Lake  Success . 


Geneva 


1949 


Jan.  18-Mar. 
Feb.  8-Mar. 
Feb.  22-Mar 
Jan.  26-Mar. 

ls 
13 
29 
23 

Feb.  7-Mar. 

18 

Feb.  21-Mar 

.  9 

Mar.  1-12 

Mar.  7-15 

Mar.  9-10 

Mar.  15-26 

1948 

Dec.  12- 

1949 

Jan.  3- 
Jan.  17- 
Jan.  24- 

Mar.  21- 
Mar.  21- 
Mar.  21- 
Mar.  21- 

Mar.  28- 

1948 

Jan.  15- 
Oct.  22- 

1949 

Feb.  9- 

Mar.  15- 
Mar.  22- 

Mar.  24- 

Mar.  28- 
Mar.  29- 

Mar.  23- 

Mar.  so- 

Apr. 1-2 
Apr.  4 

Apr.  4- 

Apr.  11- 
Apr.  11- 


420 


Apr.  25- 
Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Calendar  of  Meetings — Continued 


General  Assembly :  Second  Part  of  Third  Session 

International  Law  Commission 

Permanent  Central  Opium  Board 

Sixteenth  International  Congress  of  Geography 

Gatt  (Genera!  Agreement  on  Tariffs  and  Trade) :  Third  Session  of 

Contracting  Parties. 
Ilo  (International  Labor  Organization) : 

Coal  Mining  Committee:  Third  Session 

Fourth  Regional  Conference  of  American  States  Members  .  .  .  . 
IcAO  (International  Civil  Aviation  Organization) : 

North  Atlantic  Meteorological  Communications  Meeting     .    .    .    . 

European  Frequency  Meeting:  Second  Session 

Special  Meeting  on  Notices  to  Air  Men 

Meeting  on  Joint  Support  for  Ocean  Weather  Ship  Stations  and 
Joint  Support  for  Air  Navigation  Facilities  in  Danish  Territory 
and  in  Creels  Territory. 

XXIV  Italian  Congress  of  Stomatology 

Diplomatic  Conference  for  the  Drawing  Up  of  a  New  Convention 

Intended  to  Protect  War  Victims. 
Fag  (Food  and  Agriculture  Organization) : 

Preparatory  Conference  on  World  Wood  Pulp  Problems 

Conference  on  Rice  Breeding 

Southeast  Asia  Conference  on  Rinderpest  Control  Problems  .  .  . 
International  Cotton  Advisory  Committee:  Eighth  Meeting  .  .  .  . 
First  International  Congress  on  Civil  Engineering 


Lake  Success 

Lake  Success 

Geneva   

Lisbon 

Annecy,  France 

Pittsburgh 

Montevideo 

London    

Paris 

Montreal 

London   

Taormina  and  Catania,  Italy 
Geneva   

Montreal 

Bangkok 

Bangkok     

Brussels 

Mexico  City 


1949 

Apr.  5- 
Apr. 
Apr. 

Apr.  8-15 
Apr.  11- 


Apr.  19- 
Apr.  25- 

Apr.  11- 
Apr.  10- 
Apr.  19- 
Apr.  20- 


Apr.  20-24 
Apr.  21- 


Apr.  25- 

Apr. 

Apr. 

Apr.  2.5-30 

Apr.  30- 


Prepared  in  the  Division  of  International  Conferences,  Department  of  State. 


Third  Session  of  the  ILO  Permanent  Migration  Committee 


BY  IRWIN  M.  TOBIN 


Background 

The  Pei'manent  Migration  Committee  (Pmc) 
of  the  International  Labor  Organization,  which 
held  its  Third  Session  at  Geneva,  January  13-27, 
1949,  was  set  up  by  the  Govei'uing  Body  of  the 
International  Labor  Office  as  a  result  of  a  recom- 
mendation made  by  the  Conference  of  Experts  on 
Migration  for  Settlement,  held  at  the  Office  in  1938. 
Its  terms  of  reference  were  originally  limited  to 
migration  for  settlement,  but  in  1944,  when  it 
became  clear  that  migration  for  employment 
might  also  become  a  problem  of  considerable  im- 
portance after  the  war,  the  terms  of  reference  of 
the  Committee  were  broadened  to  enable  it  to  deal 
with  all  forms  of  migration. 

The  membership  of  the  Committee  consists  of 
representatives  of  the  governments  of  all  states 
members  of  the  International  Labor  Organization 
which  wish  to  participate,  representatives  of  the 
Governing  Body,  and  three  experts  appointed  by 
the  Governing  Body,  together  with  advisory  mem- 
bers representing  the  United  Nations  and  other 
intergovernmental  organizations. 

The  First  Session  of  the  Committee,  which  con- 
vened in  Montreal  in  August  1946,  exchanged 
views  on  postwar  migration  prospects,  discussed 
the  forms  of  international  cooperation  capable  of 
facilitating  an  organized  resumption  of  migration, 
and  also  considered  the  effect  of  racial  discrimina- 
tion upon  migration. 


The  Second  Session,  held  in  Geneva  in  Febru- 
ary-March 1948,  drafted  a  migration  for  employ- 
ment convention  and  related  instruments,  and  thus 
laid  the  basis  for  the  subsequent  inquiries  to  gov- 
ernments by  the  Ilo  and  the  preparation  of 
amended  draft  texts  submitted  to  the  present  meet- 
ing of  the  Committee.  The  Second  Session  also 
considered  the  division  of  responsibilities  between 
the  Ilo  and  other  international  organizations  con- 
cerned with  migration. 

In  order  to  develop  fully  the  background  of  the 
Third  Session  there  must  also  be  taken  into  ac- 
count the  increasingly  active  role  of  the  Ilo  in 
migration  as  it  is  related  to  manpower  and  eco- 
nomic-development programs.  As  a  result  of  this 
growing  interest,  which  was  formalized  at  the 
107th  Session  of  the  Ilo  Governing  Body  in  De- 
cember 1948,  there  were  added  to  the  agenda  of 
the  Third  Session  of  the  Pmc  three  new  items  re- 
lating to  the  migration  aspects  of  the  Ilo  man- 
power program. 

Agenda 

The  agenda  of  the  Third  Session  was  thus  com- 
posed of  two  items  referred  to  the  Committee  by 
the  previous  session  of  the  Permanent  Migration 
Committee,  and  three  further  items  which  were 
later  placed  on  the  agenda  at  the  instance  of  the 


April  3,   J949 


IiiO    Governing    Bod}-.      The    agenda    read    as 
follows : 

1.  Miirration  for  Kinployiiif'nt :  Revision  ct  tli<>  Miprra- 
tlon  for  Eniplo.viiK'iit  ('"nvciiti<in,  l!t39;  tlie  MigTiiticm  for 
EniplD.vinent  Kecoiiiiiu'inlation,  19H9 ;  and  the  SliKnition 
for  Einployraent  (Cooperation  between  States)  Kt-coni- 
niendMtion,  1939. 

2.  Foniiulation  of  Principles  concerning  MiRtation  for 
I.anil  Si'ltlenient,  ini'liulins  Preparation  of  a  Model  Agree- 
nii'iit  on  Mi^'ration  for  Land  Sfttlenicnt. 

3.  Migration  within  the  Manpower  Program  of  the  Ilo. 

4.  Migration  and  Uesettlement  of  "Specialists." 

i).  Metliods  to  P'urther  Exchanges  of  Trainees,  including 
Preparation  of  a  Model  Agreement. 

Participation 

T\venty-fo\ir  governments  were  represented  at 
the  Third  Session  by  fully  accredited  delegations, 
two  additional  governments  having  sent  observers. 
The  Committee  also  included  two  representatives 
each  of  the  three  groups  (government,  employers, 
workers)  which  compose  the  Ilo  Governing  Body. 
Advisory  members  were  also  present  from  the 
United  Nations,  International  Bank  and  Fund, 
Ito  Interim  Commission,  Fad,  Iro,  Who,  and 
ITxEsco.  Observers  representing  the  Economic 
Commission  for  Europe,  the  Oe?:c  ^lanpower 
Committee,  and  the  Labor  Division  of  ECA  at- 
tended some  of  the  sessions;  however,  tlie  repre- 
sentative of  the  International  Committee  for 
European  Migratory  Movements,  who  was  origi- 
nally scheduled  to  attend,  did  not  appear. 

The  number  of  governments  represented  was 
approximately  the  same  as  at  the  1948  session,  thus 
indicating  a  sustained  interest  in  migration  on  the 
part  of  a  substantial  number  of  governments  in 
almost  every  part  of  the  world.  The  wide  rep- 
resentation of  specialized  agencies  indicated  both 
an  alertness  of  interest  and  the  desire  to  coordinate 
as  closely  as  possible  the  activities  of  the  various 
organizations  interested  in  the  migration  field. 
Governing  Body  representation  was  double  that 
of  the  previous  year,  with  the  possible  implication 
that  the  Ilo  felt  that  greater  participation  of  rep- 
resentatives of  employers  and  workers  in  the  de- 
liberations of  a  Committee  basically  governmental 
in  composition  was  desirable,  especially  in  con- 
sidering the  manpower  items. 

Proceedings  and  Recommendations 

Opening  address 

The  opening  plenary  meeting  was  featured  by 
the  address  ot  Jef  Reus,  Assistant  Director  Gen- 
eral of  the  Ilo  and  Secretary  General  of  the 
Session.  Mr.  Rens  outlined  the  background  of  the 
Committee's  agenda  and  stated  tlie  problems  with 
wiiich  it  was  confronted,  in  particular  those  in- 
volved in  tlie  newly  undertaken  manpower  pro- 
gram of  the  lu).  Delegates  showed  special  inter- 
est in  tlie  schedule  of  conferences  contemplated  by 
David  Morse,  the  Director  General,  whicli  was  to 
include  (1)  a  meeting  of  re]iresenta(ives  of  the 
I'nited  Nations  and  s[)('cializ(>d  agencies  to  be  held 
in  Geneva  in  February  104!)  to  study  the  measures 


to  be  taken  to  insure  as  complete  coordination  as 
possible  of  their  manpower  and  migration  activi- 
ties and  (2)  an  international  conference  of  govern- 
ments directly  concerned  with  migration,  the  task 
of  wliicli  would  he  to  negotiate  and  conclude  multi- 
lateral and  bilateral  agreements  for  the  transfer  of 
migrants  from  manpower  surplus  to  manpower 
deficit  countries.  The  Permanent  Migration  Com- 
mittee was  asked  to  indicate  the  conditions  which 
it  considered  must  be  fulfilled  to  assure  that  the 
latter  meeting  could  be  successfully  held,  since  the 
Office  recognized  that  most  careful  preparation  for 
it  would  be  required.  The  Committee  was  also 
asked  to  advise  (he  Governing  Body  concerning  the 
projected  manpower  program  as  a  whole. 

Commenting  upon  the  proposed  migration  con- 
vention, Mr.  Rens,  after  describing  the  earlier  his- 
tory of  the  draft  convention  on  migration  for  em- 
ployment and  related  instruments,  stated  that  the 
texts  prepared  by  the  Office  on  the  basis  of  previ- 
ous discussions  by  the  Committee  and  the  subse- 
quent comments  of  governments  were  designed 
"to  give  the  greatest  possible  protection  to  mi- 
grants, while  at  the  same  time  facilitating  mi- 
gration." 
The  Rights  of  Migrants 

The  main  business  before  the  Session  was  to 
redraft  for  presentation  to  the  forthcoming  con- 
ference of  the  Il(5  the  texts  of  the -convention, 
reconunendation,  and  model  agreement  on  migra- 
tion for  empIo3ment  and  a  separate  proposed  con- 
vention concerning  the  personal  effects  and  tools 
of  migrants  for  employment.  These  instruments, 
in  the  form  in  which  they  came  before  Subcom- 
mittee I,  had  been  drawn  u])  by  the  Office  upon 
the  basis  of  the  proposals  of  the  Second  Session 
of  the  Pmc  and  the  observations  made  by  govern- 
ments on  the  drafts  circulated  to  them.  Ihe  key 
instrument,  the  convention  on  migration  for  em- 
ploj'inent  (referred  to  hereafter  as  the  convention) 
contained  two  principal  parts:  I,  applicable  to 
migration  in  general:  and  II,  applii'ablc  to  mi- 
grants recruited  to  till  particular  jobs.  Taking 
into  account  the  changes  made  in  the  text  by  the 
Tliird  Session,  part  I  of  the  draft  convention  now 
embraces  obligations  by  signatory  states  to  (1) 
provide  accurate  information  concerning  employ- 
ment opportunities  and  regulations  atfecting  mi- 
gration for  emploj'ment;  ('2)  take  measures  to  fa- 
cilitate the  dej)arture,  journe}-,  and  receiation  of 
migi-ants,  with  special  concern  for  their  health  and 
welfare;  and  (3)  assure  to  migrants  treatment 
equal  to  that  of  domestic  labor,  so  far  as  law  or 
government  regulations  a])ply,  in  fields  such  as 
remuneration,  housing,  social  security,  trade  union 
membership  and  collective-bargaining  rights,  and 
access  to  schools.  Part  II,  applicable  to  migrants 
recruited  for  specific  employment,  provides  for 
(1)  regulation  of  procedures  governing  recruit- 
ment, introduction,  and  placement  of  migrants; 
(li)  free  access  to  i)ublic  employment  services:  ('.)) 
written  contracts;  and  (4)  special  types  of  pro- 

Departmenf  of  State  Bulletin 


tective  supervision  for  migrants  under  govern- 
ment-si3onsored  group  migration  schemes. 

The  principal  controversy  which  dominated  the 
deliberations  of  Subcommittee  I  had  been  fore- 
shadowed in  the  statements  made  at  the  opening 
plenary  session.  One  group,  led  by  the  United 
Kingdom,  favored  a  drastic  reorganization  of  the 
texts,  with  a  view  to  limiting  the  convention  on 
migration  for  employment  to  an  agreement  on  the 
basic  rights  of  all  migrants.  It  was  argued  that 
such  a  procedure  would  facilitate  ratification  by 
a  wide  circle  of  governments  of  immigration 
countries,  thus  giving  the  convention  greater 
force  and  influence.  This  point  of  view  was  in 
the  end  rejected  by  the  majority  of  the  Committee 
on  the  ground  that  a  convention  limited  to  such 
general  provisions  would  withhold  from  migrants 
the  protection  they  require  and  thus  fail  to  serve 
the  purposes  of  the  convention  as  originally  con- 
templated. It  was  also  considered  by  many  dele- 
gations that  such  a  drastic  change  in  procedure 
would  require  new  instructions  from  their  Gov- 
ernments, prolong  the  period  required  for  prepa- 
ration of  the  convention,  and  thus  make  it  im- 
possible to  fulfil  the  Committee's  mandate  to 
propose  a  test  for  adoption  by  the  forthcoming 
Ilo  conference.  This  difference  in  over-all  ap- 
proach necessarily  determined  the  spirit  in  which 
many  delegates  discussed  the  convention  draft  as 
it  was  examined  article  by  article.  In  the  end  the 
revised  text  as  reported  out  by  the  subcommittee 
and  approved  by  the  closing  plenary  session  gave 
more  detailed  and  specific  protection  to  migrants 
than  the  text  prepared  by  the  Office. 

The  dilemma  involved  in  redrafting  the  con- 
vention was  stated  succinctly  in  the  final  report 
of  the  Session,  which  drew  attention  to  "the  de- 
tailed and  often  teclmical  character,  and  the  ex- 
tensive implications  of  many  of  the  provisions  of 
the  texts,"  and  remarked  that  at  its  deliberations 
Subcommittee  I  "had  as  its  aim  to  arrive  at  a 
satisfactory  compromise  on  the  various  provisions 
which  would  adequately  protect  the  interests  of 
migrants  but  which  would  not  at  the  same  time 
effect  such  a  radical  departure  from  the  practices 
and  policies  of  Members  as  to  endanger  the  accept- 
ability of  the  instruments  to  a  sufficient  number  of 
Governments.  The  latter  result  would,  of  course, 
be  to  deprive  migrants  of  that  very  protection 
which  it  is  the  aim  of  the  Conventions  and  the 
other  instruments  to  achieve." 

While  the  United  States  Delegation  was  of  the 
opinion  that  some  of  the  proposed  detailed  amend- 
ments were  inappropriate  to  a  convention,  it  took 
the  view — in  accordance  with  its  instructions— 
that  the  draft  convention  was  in  general  satisfac- 
tory to  the  U.S.  Government,  and  that  a  radical 
revision,  such  as  that  proposed  by  the  U.K.  Rep- 
resentatives, would  render  impossible  the  prepa- 
ration by  this  Session  of  the  Pmc  of  a  draft  text 
to  be  placed  before  the  1949  Ilo  conference  for 
adoption.     The    U.S.    Representatives    therefore 

April  3,   1949 


participated  in  the  discussion  of  the  text  princi- 
pally in  order  to  forestall  the  adoption  of  amend- 
ments which  would  run  counter  to  American 
policy  and  practice  with  respect  to  migration. 
On  specific  controversies  as  they  emerged  between 
countries  of  immigration  and  emigration  the 
United  States  Representatives  generally  took  the 
attitude  that  the  countries  particularly  concerned 
with  migration  movements  of  the  kind  covered  by 
the  text  should  play  the  principal  role  in  drafting 
the  appropriate  articles. 
ILO  Manpower  Program 

The  Ilo  manpower  program,  submitted  to  the 
±^Mc  tor  Its  advice,  was  greeted  with  substantial 
but  cautious  approval.  After  a  discussion  of  the 
prospects  of  migration  and  the  practical  difficul- 
ties encountered  by  countries  of  immigration  and 
emigration,  the  Committee  welcomed  the  initiative 
being  taken  by  the  Ilo  in  dealing  with  migration 
questions,  and  m  particular  endorsed  the  proposed 
meeting  of  the  United  Nations  and  specialized 
agencies  to  be  held  in  February  1949,  with  a  view 
to  coordinating  activities  in  this  field.  The  Com- 
mittee also  considered  a  number  of  specific  prob- 
lems which  might  be  dealt  with  by  the  forthcom- 
ing Ilo  Governing  Body  Session,  such  as  the 
absorptive  capacity  of  possible  countries  of  immi- 
gration, the  adaptability  of  migrants  to  their  new 
environments,  and  certain  practical  aspects  of  the 
international  mobility  of  labor.  The  Committee 
noted  with  approval  the  intention  of  the  Office  to 
call  a  conference  of  interested  governments  to 
negotiate  bilateral  and  multilateral  migration 
agreements,  but  emphasized  in  this  connection  the 
need  for  the  most  careful  preparatory  planning 
and  consultation  of  goverimients  before  such  a 
conference  could  be  convened  with  a  reasonable 
prospect  of  achieving  practical  results. 

The  Committee  also  considered  a  proposal  put 
forward  by  Albert  Monk,  workers'  delegate,  that 
the  Permanent  Migration  Committee  should  as- 
sume a  tripartite  character  representative  of 
governments,  employers,  and  workers  according 
to  the  customary  Ilo  pattern.  It  was  generally 
felt  that  such  tripartite  representation  might  be 
accorded  in  the  regional  manpower  committees 
being  established  by  the  Governing  Body,  of  which 
those  for  Europe  and  Asia  have  already  been  set 
up,  while  another  for  Latin  America  is  under  con- 
sideration. It  was  the  sense  of  the  Committee  that 
the  Pmc  should  continue  to  exist  essentially  in  its 
present  form,  open  to  membership  on  a  universal 
basis,  and  serving  as  a  technical  advisory  com- 
mittee on  migration  and  manpower  questions. 
Finally,  the  Committee  took  note  of  a  recommen- 
dation from  Subcommittee  III,  which  resulted 
from  a  U.S.  proposal,  to  the  effect  that  the  Ilo 
should  undertake  to  make  studies  and  provide 
technical  advice  with  a  view  to  assisting  govern- 
ments interested  in  developing  land-settlement 
projects  capable  of  absorbing  surplus  manpower 
available  for  migration. 


Land  Settlement 

Tlie  discussion  of  niignition  for  laiul  settlement, 
in  Subcommittee  III,  was,  in  view  of  limitations 
of  time  and  the  complexity  of  the  subject,  confined 
to  general  principles,  leaving  it  to  the  Office  to 
draft  a  model  agreement  text  for  circulation  to 
governments  and  discussion  by  the  next  session  of 
the  Pmc.  The  Subcommittee  was  also  in  agree- 
ment that,  in  addition  to  considering  the  stand- 
ards which  should  be  applied  in  the  treatment  of 
migrants  for  land  settlement,  the  Ilo  should  take 
practical  steps  within  its  competence  to  facilitate 
migration  for  land  settlement  at  the  request  of  in- 
terested governments.  The  recommendations  of 
the  Subcommittee,  whicli  were  adopted  by  the  full 
Committee  at  the  final  plenary  session,  proposed 
(1)  that  the  Office  submit  to  governments  for  their 
comments  the  texts  of  the  general  principles  for- 
mulated by  the  Committee  and  the  model  agree- 
ment to  be  drafted  by  the  Office ;  (2)  that  the  ques- 
tion of  the  model  agreement  be  taken  up  by  the 
next  session  of  the  Pmc;  and  (3)  that  the  Office, 
with  the  agreement  and  cooperation  of  interested 
governments  and  specialized  agencies,  study  pos- 
sibilities for  land  settlement  and  make  available 
to  governments,  upon  their  request,  the  Ilo's  tech- 
nical facilities  to  assist  them  in  preparing  land- 
settlement  projects. 

Specialists  and  Trainees 

Discussion  by  Subcommittee  II  of  the  migra- 
tion and  resettlement  of  specialists  and  methods  to 
further  the  excliange  of  trainees  resulted  in  rec- 
ommendations, approved  by  the  full  Committee, 
designed  to  give  tlie  Ilo  limited,  but  nevertheless 
practical,  responsibilities  in  both  fields.  With  re- 
gard to  the  migration  of  specialists  and  techni- 
cians, particularly  those  who  are  DP's  under  the 
care  of  the  Iro,  it  was  proposed  that  the  Office  cir- 
cularize information  concerning  the  availability 
of  such  technicians,  request  member  governments 
to  inform  it  of  opportunities  for  their  resettle- 
ment, and  attempt  in  other  ways  to  build  a  bridge 
between  known  surpluses  and  known  demands. 
With  regard  to  the  exchange  of  trainees  it  was 
proposed  that  the  Office  be  requested  to  make  a 
survey  of  regulations  concerning  the  exchange  of 
trainees  and  the  organizations,  private  and  public, 
having  responsibilities  in  this  field.  The  Office 
was  also  requested  to  assist  governments,  upon  re- 
quest, in  facilitating  the  international  movement 
of  trainees.  The  question  was  further  to  be  re- 
ferred to  the  industrial  committees  and  regional 
conferences  of  the  Ilo  and  to  the  next  session  of 
the  Permanent  Migration  Committee. 

Conclusions 

Summary  of  the  Session 

In  certain  respects  the  Third  Session  of  the  Pmo 
marked  a  turning  point  in  the  conception  of  the 
Conmiittee's  task  and  gave  a  pi-actical  impetus  to 
the  new  role  being  played  by  the  Ilo  in  the  field 
of  migration.    There  was  a  marked  bipolarity  in 


the  discussions  of  the  Committee,  which,  on  the  one 
hand,  was  moving  toward  completion  of  work  pre- 
viously initiated  dealing  with  the  protection  of 
migrants  and,  on  the  other  hand,  was  exploring 
available  and  effective  means  to  facilitate  migra- 
tion movements  wherever  such  movements  would 
promote  individual  and  national  welfare.  It  was 
observed  by  many  delegates  that  the  framework 
of  discussion  had  changed  considerably  since  the 
organization  of  the  Pmc  in  1940  in  tlie  light  of 
the  experience  of  migration  acquired  by  various 
governments  during  the  postwar  years  and  the 
new  awai-eness  on  tne  part  of  many  governments 
of  the  relationship  between  migration  and  a  high 
level  of  employment  and  prosperity. 

The  Convention  on  Migration  for  Employment 

The  U.S.  Delegation  believes  that  it  would  be 
in  the  interest  of  the  U.S.  Government  to  ratify 
the  convention  on  migration  for  employment, 
sliould  the  forthcoming  Ilo  conference  adopt  the 
text  recommended  by  the  Third  Session  of  the 
Pmc.  However,  the  Delegation  believes  that  con- 
sideration should  be  given  to  the  possibility  of 
separating  the  present  text  into  two  conventions, 
one  containing  general  provisions  applicable  to 
all  migrants  for  employment,  the  other  laying 
down  detailed  rules  for  the  recruitment,  transfer, 
and  conditions  of  labor  of  group  migrants.  Such 
an  approach  would  insure  the  greatest  possible 
protection  to  all  types  of  migrants,  while  avoiding 
the  danger  that  a  single  detailed  convention  may 
not  meet  with  ratification  on  a  sufficiently  wide 
scale  to  bring  it  into  force.  Such  separation  would 
also  be  better  adapted  to  the  needs  and  practices  of 
the  United  States,  which  must  necessarily  draw 
a  distinction  between  the  position  of  immigrants 
entering  normally  under  our  immigration  laws 
and  those  brought  to  this  country  under  group 
schemes  for  limited  periods  to  engage  in  agricul- 
tural and  other  pursuits  for  which  domestic  labor 
is  unavailable. 

Migration  and  the  ILO  Manpoicer  Program 

Tlie  U.S.  Government  should  welcome  the  in- 
itiative now  being  taken  by  the  Ilo  to  assist  gov- 
ernments which  have  an  interest  in  the  promotion 
of  emigration  and  immigration.  Broadly  speak- 
ing, such  a  program  is  in  line  with  those  objectives 
of  U.S.  foreign  policy  which  are  related  to  the 
maximum  utilization  of  resources,  including  man- 
power, and  the  fullest  realization  of  the  capabili- 
ties of  the  so-called  underdeveloped  areas.  The 
regional  economic  conunissions  of  the  Ecosoc  and 
the  Manpower  Conunittee  of  the  Oeec  are  looking 
to  the  Ilo  for  concrete  assistance  towards  attain- 
ing these  objectives.  The  U.S.  Government 
should,  through  continued  participation  in  Ilo 
conferences  dealing  with  migration  and  man- 
power, contribute  advice  derived  from  its  own 
experience  to  (he  fullest  possible  development  of 
this  Ilo  i)rogram. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


U.S.  Delegations  to  International  Conferences 


ICAO:  African-Indian  Ocean  Regional  Meeting 

Tlie  Department  of  State  announced  on  March 
21  the  United  States  Delegation  to  the  first  In- 
ternational Civil  Aviation  Organization  (Icao) 
regional  air  navigation  meeting  for  the  African- 
Indian  Ocean  region,  which  convened  at  London, 
March  22,  1949.  The  United  States  Delegation  is 
as  follows: 


Clifford  P.  Burton,  Chief  of  Tt>chnical  Mission,  Civil  Aero- 
nautics Administration,  Department  of  Commerce 

Vice  Chairman 

Reuben  H.  CUnkscales,  Technical  Assistant,  International 
Standards  Division,  Civil  Aeronautics  Board 

Alternates 

James  F.  Angier,  Chief,  Foreign  Section,  Civil  Aeronautics 
Administration,  Department  of  Commerce 

Norman  R.  Hagen,  Meteorological  Attache,  American  Em- 
bassy, London 

Victor  J.  Kayne,  Airways  Operations  Specialist  (Icao) 
Civil  Aeronautics  Administration,  Department  of 
Commerce 

Ray  F.  Nicholson,  Representative,  Flight  Operations 
(Icao)  Civil  Aeronautics  Administration,  Depart- 
ment of  Commerce 

George  L.  Rand,  Representative,  International  Telecom- 
munications Standards,  Civil  Aeronautics  Adminis- 
tration, Department  of  Commerce 

Robert  Lawrence  Stark,  Assistant  Branch  Chief,  Inter- 
national Branch,  Aviation  Division,  Bureau  of  En- 
gineering, Federal  Communications  Commission 

Lieut.  Comdr.  Clement  Vaughn,  Jr.,  U.S.N.,  Search  and 
Rescue  Agency,  United  States  Coast  Guard,  Depart- 
ment of  the  Treasury 

Advisers 

Alden  Patterson  Bowser,  Radio  Engineer  in  Charge, 
Terminal  Aids,  Civil  Aeronautics  Administration, 
Department  of  Commerce 

Alick  B.  Currie,  Airways  Operations  Specialist,  Civil 
Aeronautics  Administration,  Department  of  Com- 
merce 

Maj.  Paul  M.  Hulier,  U.S.A.F.,  United  States  Air  Force, 
Germany 

Maj.  Grove  C.  Johnson,  U.S.A.F.,  Icao  Liaison  Section, 
Headquarters  Military  Air  Transport  Service,  Depart- 
ment of  the  Air  Force 

Comdr.  Herman  T.  Krol,  U.S.N.,  Head,  Airspace  Section, 
Civil  Aviation  Branch,  Department  of  the  Navy 

Scott  Magness,  Civil  Aeronautics  Administration  Coordi- 
nator, London 

William  C.  Peck,  Deputy  Chief,  Planning  and  Develop- 
ment Branch,  Engineering  Division,  Directorate  of 
Installations,  Department  of  the  Air  Force 

Ralph  D.  Rhea,  Division  Communications  Superintendent, 
Atlantic  Division,  Pan  American  World  Airways 

Comdr.  William  N.  Stevens,  U.S.N..  Staff  Aerologist  for  the 
Commander-in-chief  of  Naval  Forces,  Eastern  Atlantic 
and  Mediterranean,  Department  of  the  Navy 

Secretary  of  Delegation 

Mason  LaSelle,  Division  of  International  Conferences, 
Department  of  State 


Staff 

Mary  E.  Bean,  Office  of  Chief  of  Technical  Mission,  Civil 
Aeronautics  Administration,  Department  of  Commerce 

Isabell  Erzen,  Division  of  International  Conferences,  De- 
partment of  State 

It  is  expected  that  about  20  governments  will 
attend  this  meeting  for  the  purpose  of  examining 
the  problems  of  air  navigation  and  operations  in 
the  region.  The  delegates  will  prepare  a  plan  of 
aids  to  navigation  and  recommended  practices  in 
the  region,  make  recommendations  to  the  Council 
of  Icao  regarding  facilities,  services,  and  priori- 
ties on  the  international  civil  air  routes,  and  stim- 
ulate the  development  of  aviation  and  safety 
methods  and  measures  in  the  region.  It  is  ex- 
pected that  the  meeting  will  follow  the  usual  pat- 
tern of  regional  meetings  of  the  Icao  and  that  the 
principal  committees  formed  will  inclitde  aero- 
dromes, air  routes,  and  ground  aids,  air-traiBc  con- 
trol, communications,  meteorology,  and  search  and 
rescue.  The  practices  and  procedures  recom- 
mended by  the  meeting  will  be  forwarded  to  the 
Icao  Council  at  Montreal  for  consideration  and 
approval. 

The  African-Indian  Ocean  meeting  will  be  the 
last  in  the  original  series  of  ten  regional  meetings 
scheduled  by  the  Icao  to  survey  aviation  facilities 
throughout  the  world. 

U.S.  Observers  Attend  World  Engineering 
Conference 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  March 
21  that  the  following  United  States  unofficial  ob- 
servers are  attending  the  Second  International 
Technical  Congress  of  the  World  Engineering 
Conference,  which  convened  at  Cairo  on  March 
20,  1949 : 

Charles  R.  Enlow,  Agricultural  Attach^,  American  Em- 
bassy, Ankara 
T.  W.  Mermel,  Engineering  Assistant  to  the  Commissioner 

of  Reclamation,  Department  of  the  Interior 
Edwin  R.  Raymond,  Agricultural  Attach^,  American  Em- 
bassy, Cairo 
Commander  Robert  D.  Thorson,  Assistant  Naval  Attach^, 

American  Embassy,  Cairo 
Col.  Theodore  A.   Weyher,  Assistant    Military    Attach^, 
American  Legation,  Bern 

One  of  the  major  sections  of  the  Congress  will 
be  devoted  to  the  problem  of  water  in  the  Middle 
East.  This  problem  of  the  Middle  Eastern  coun- 
tries is  in  many  respects  similar  to  that  of  our 
AVestern  States,  and  the  Congress  will  provide  an 
opportunity  to  exchange  views  on  the  subject. 
Other  subjects  to  be  discussed  will  be  industrial 
raw  materials  and  their  rational  utilization 
throughout  the  world  and  the  social  aspect  of 
technical  development  and  of  raw  material. 


April  3,   7949 


IRO:  Executive  Committee  and  General  Council 

Tlio  Department  of  State  announced  on  March 
22  tlie  f<tllf)winp  U.  S.  Delepiitions  to  meetings  of 
the  Executive  Committees  and  the  General  Council 
of  the  International  Refugee  Organization  (Iro) 
scheduled  to  meet  at  Geneva,  March  24-28  and 
March  2!)-April  9,  1949,  respectively: 

Fourth   Meeting   of   the   Executire   Committee 

United  States  Representative 

George  L.  Warren,  Adviser  on  Refugees  and  Displaced 
Persons,  Department  of  State 

Adviser 

Alvin  J.  Roseinan,  Cliief,  International  Activities  Branch, 
Bureau  of  the  Budget 

Second  Session  of  the  General  Council 

United  States  Representative 

George  L.  Warren,  Adviser  on  Refugees  and  Displaced 
Persons,  Department  of  State 

Advisers 

Koswell    D.    McClelland,    Economic    Analyst,    American 

Legation.  Bern 
Paul  McCormack,  Chief,  Repatriation  and  Resettlement 

Office,    Operations    Uraneh,    Civil    Affairs    Division, 

European  Command 
Alvin  J.  Roseman,  Chief.  International  Activities  Branch, 

Bureau  of  the  Budget 
Lt.  Col.  R()l)eit  L.  Walton,  Deputy  Chief,  Internal  Affairs 

Branch,  Civil  Affairs  Division,  United  States  Forces, 

Austria 

These  meetings  will  consider  the  Director  Gen- 
eral's report  on  the  activities  of  the  Iro  for  the 
period  July  1-Decemher  31,  1948,  the  financial 
report  for  the  same  period,  the  question  of  i>ay- 
ment  by  the  Iito  for  the  movement  of  Jewish 
refugees  from  Central  Europe  to  Palestine,  the 
Director  General's  statement  on  plans  for  the 
liquidation  of  the  Iro  and  his  recommendations 
with  respect  to  proposals  which  may  be  made  by 
the  Iro  to  the  United  Nations  Economic  and  Social 
Council  concerning  action  which  may  be  taken  by 
the  United  Nations  with  regard  to  problems  of 
refugees  after  tlie  liquidation  of  the  Iro. 

Protection  of  Childhood 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  March 
17  that  Elisabeth  Shirley  Enochs,  Director  of  the 
International  Cooperation  Service,  Children's 
Bureau,  Federal  Security  Agency,  will  attend  the 
annual  meeting  of  the  Directing  Council  of  the 
American  Intei-nsitional  Institute  for  the  Protec- 
tion of  Childliood  as  alternate  technical  delegate 
of  the  United  States.  The  meeting  is  scheduled 
to  be  held  at  Montevideo,  April  1-2.  Katharine 
F.  Lenroot,  Chief  of  the  Children's  Bureau,  who 
is  technical  delegate  of  the  United  States  to  the 
Directing  Council  is  unable  to  attend  the  forth- 
coming meeting.  United  States  participation  in 
the  Institute  was  authorized  by  a  joint  resolution 
of  Congress  in  May  1928. 


ITU:  U.S.  Submits  Proposal  on  Telegraph 
Regulations 

Tlie  United  States  Government  will  send  rep- 
resentatives, to  be  named  at  a  later  date,  to  the 
Administrative  Conference  to  Revise  the  Inter- 
national Telephone  and  Telegraph  Regulations. 
This  meeting,  sponsored  by  the  International  Tele- 
communication Union  (Itu),  is  being  held  under 
the  auspices  of  the  French  Government  and  is 
scheduled  to  convene  at  Paris  on  May  19.  1949. 

Although  for  many  years  a  party  to  international 
communication  conventions,  the  United  States  has 
not  heretofore  become  a  party  to  the  International 
Telegraph  Regulations.  After  consideration  of 
the  views  of  the  telegraph  industry  and  users,  this 
Government  has  concluded  that  it  should  partici- 
pate in  the  Paris  meeting  in  the  interest  of  devel- 
oping regidations  to  which  the  United  States  may 
adhere.  A  letter  has  been  forwarded  to  the  Secre- 
tary General  of  the  International  Telecommunica- 
tion Union,  at  Geneva,  containing  the  text  of  the 
United  States  proposals  for  revising  the  existing 
International  Telegraph  Regulations  (Cairo, 
1938).  These  proposals  will  be  placed  on  the 
agenda  for  consideration  by  the  conference  when 
it  convenes  in  May. 

The  United  States  does  not  expect  to  adhere  to 
the  International  Telephone  Regulations,  but  will 
be  represented  by  observers  on  the  committees  of 
the  conference  relating  to  the  International  Tele- 
phone Regulations. 

The  proposals  of  the  United  States  include  pro- 
visions regarding  the  classifications  of  telegrams 
and  rates.  These  provisions  were  made  public  in 
a  report  of  tlie  Federal  Communications  Commis- 
sion dated  February  23,  1949,  Docket  9094,  and 
propose  that  there  should  be  unification  of  the  rates 
for  ordinary  telegrams  composed  of  plain  lan- 
guage, cipher  language,  code  language,  or  any 
mixture  thereof.  Such  unification  of  rates  would 
take  place  initially  at  75  percent  of  the  prevailing 
rates  for  ordinary  full-rate  messages.  Other  pro- 
posals refer  to  the  revision  of  the  existing  Inter- 
national Telegraph  Regidations  and  are  of  a 
technical  nature  concerning  accounting  and  tariffs, 
and  operations. 

These  proposals  were  formulated  by  the  Federal 
Comnuinications  Commission  and  submitted  to  the 
Department  of  State  for  transmission  to  the  Inter- 
national Telecommunication  Union.  The  Com- 
mission held  public  hearings  and  sponsored  two 
working  groujis,  composed  of  government  experts 
ami  representatives  of  the  telegraiih  industry  and 
users,  lor  liie  purpose  of  drafting  the  proposals. 

This  (iovernment  participated  in  the  Telegraph 
Regulations  Revision  Committee  of  the  Itu,  which 
met  at  Geneva  in  January  of  this  year.  At  this 
meeting  the  United  States  made  known  its  objec- 
tions to  the  existing  telegraph  regidations  and 
indicated  the  form  that  the  new  regulations  should 
take  in  order  to  be  acceptable  to  it. 


Departmenl  of  State  Bulletin 


THE  RECORD  OF  THE  WEEK 


Provisional  Rectifications  Along  the  Western  German  Frontier 

COMMUNEQUE  OF  BELGIUM,  FRANCE,  LUXEMBOURG,  NETHERLANDS, 
UNITED  KINGDOM,  AND  THE  UNITED  STATES' 


It  was  announced  at  the  conclusion  of  the  Lon- 
don talks  on  Germany  on  June  7,  1948,  that  pro- 
posals were  being  submitted  to  the  Governments 
of  the  United  States,  France,  the  United  Kingdom, 
and  the  Benelux  countries  for  bringing  about  pro- 
visionallv  certain  minor  territorial  adjustments  in 
the  western  boundary  of  Germany.^ 

The  six  governments,  taking  into  account  the  un- 
foreseen delays  to  which  the  conclusion  of  a  final 
peace  settlement  with  Germany  has  been  subjected, 
consider  it  necessary  to  proceed  to  a  preliminary 
examination  of  the  problem  of  frontiers  and  to  put 
into  effect  the  minor  adjustments  justified  by  ad- 
ministrative necessities  and  by  conditions  affecting 
communications  along  Germany's  western  frontier. 
The  problem  of  Germany's  frontiers  will  be  re- 
examined and  settled  definitively  in  its  entirety 
at  the  time  of  final  peace  settlement. 

After  detailed  study,  the  six  governments  have 
approved  the  proposals  for  provisional  adjust- 
ments of  the  frontier  which  have  been  submitted 
to  them  by  a  working-party  meeting  in  Paris. 

The  six  governments  have  also  examined  the 
frontiers  of  the  Saar  territory  and  have  agreed 
that,  pending  confirmation  or  modification  by  the 
terms  of  the  final  peace  settlement,  the  present 
frontier  shall  be  maintained  with  the  minor 
modifications. 

The  areas  affected  by  the  adjustments  will  be 
placed  under  the  administration  of  the  countries 
adjacent  to  Germany. 

These  adjustments  may  be  confirmed  or  modified 
by  the  terms  of  the  final  settlement  concerning 
Germany. 

The  London  recommendations  fixed  a  very  re- 
stricted frame  of  reference  for  the  working  party. 
Only  those  proposals  might  be  examined  which 
involved  no  appreciable  loss  to  the  German  econ- 
omy and  which,  being  of  minor  character  only, 
could  be  regarded  as  desirable  to  eliminate  local 
anomalies  and  improve  communications. 


This  limited  frame  of  reference  did  not  permit 
the  working  party  to  take  into  consideration  cer- 
tain major  territorial  claims  of  Germany's  western 
neighbors. 

Within  the  limits  thus  defined,  31  minor  rectifi- 
cations will  be  effected  at  a  date  to  be  announced 
later,  along  the  frontier  between  Germanj%  on  the 
one  hand  and  the  Netherlands,  Belgium,  Luxem- 
bourg, the  Saar,  and  France,  on  the  other. 

These  will  affect  a  total  area  of  approximately 
135  square  kilometers  (approximately  52  square 
miles)  and  a  population  of  some  13,500  persons. 

These  modifications  have  been  defined  in  general 
outline.  Their  exact  limits  will  be  fixed  by  de- 
limitation commissions.  These  commissions  will 
make  their  decision  after  having  heard  if  this  ap- 
pears desirable,  the  local  authorities  and  persons 
in  the  area  capable  of  giving  information  or  ex- 
planations necessary  for  the  accomplishment  of 
the  commissions'  task. 

All  measures  will  be  taken  with  a  view  to  safe- 
guarding the  interests  of  the  inhabitants,  as  re- 
gards both  their  personal  status  and  their  movable 
and  real  property.  No  one  will  be  forced  to  ac- 
cept the  nationality  of  the  country  to  which  the 
area  is  attached.  Persons  not  desiring  to  accept 
this  nationality  will  enjoy  the  protection  accorded 
to  persons  and  property  by  the  laws  of  the  country 
and  no  crimination  will  be  exercised  against  them. 
They  will  have  the  right  to  settle  in  Germany,  in 
which  case  they  will  be  allowed  to  take  with  them 
their  movable  property,  either  retaining  owner- 
ship of  their  real  property  or  selling  it  and  being 
permitted  to  transfer  the  funds  to  Germany  under 
the  special  regulations  which  will  be  prescribed. 
They  will,  on  the  other  hand,  have  the  right  to 
continue  to  reside  in  the  area  concerned,  if  they 
so  desire. 

'  Released  to  the  press  simultaneously  by  all  countries 
on  Mar.  26,  1949. 

'  Bulletin  of  June  20,  1948,  p.  807.  For  communique 
on  the  Ruhr,  see  Bulletin  of  Jan.  9,  1949,  p.  43. 


April  3,   1949 


The  North  Atlantic  Pact:  A  Historic  Step  in  the  Development 
of  American  Foreign  Relations 


BY  CHARLES  E.  BOHLEN  > 
Counselor  of  the  Department  of  State 


The  text  of  the  proposed  North  Atlantic  pact 
has  been  made  public'  The  Secretary  of  State,  in 
a  Nation-wide  broadcast  last  Friday  nif^iit,  has 
explained  to  the  American  people  the  general  pur- 
poses of  the  pact  and  most  of  its  specific  provisions. 

It  will  be  signed  during  the  first  week  of  April 
by  the  Foreign  Ministers  of  the  participating 
countries,  who  will  come  to  Washington  for  that 
purpose.  It  will  then  be  submitted  by  the  Presi- 
dent to  the  Senate  of  the  United  States  for  the  con- 
sent of  that  body  to  its  ratification. 

In  accordance  with  our  Constitutional  processes 
and  operation  of  our  democratic  system,  tlie  execu- 
tive branch  of  the  Government  is  submitting  to  the 
judgment  of  tlie  people  and  their  elected  repre- 
sentatives this  measure  to  enhance  the  preservation 
of  peace  in  the  world  and  the  security  of  the 
United  States. 

This  treaty,  which  has  been  laid  before  you,  was 
not  hastily  improvised.  It  has  not  been  considered 
and  negotiated  in  an  atmosphere  of  alarm  and 
hysteria.  Tliat  has  been  reserved  for  those  who 
do  not  wish  to  see  the  purposes  of  this  pact 
achieved. 

It  has  received  the  most  careful  consideration 
possible  from  the  executive  branch  of  this  Govern- 
ment, which  has  kept  in  close  touch  with  the 
leaders  of  the  United  States  Senate. 

It  is  in  full  conformity  with  the  advice  of  the 
Senate  embodied  in  the  resolution  passed  by  a  vote 
of  64  to  4  on  June  11, 1948.' 

It  has  been  carefully  worked  out  with  the  repre- 
sentatives of  the  nations  forming  part  of  the  North 
Atlantic  connnunitj'  to  which  we  belong  in  order 
to  give  the  clearest  expression  possible  to  their 
joint  aims  and  purposes.  It  has  been  drafted  with 
the  most  scrupulous  regard  for  the  Constitutional 
processes  of  this  and  of  the  other  countries  which 
have  joined  with  us  in  the  association. 

It  is  an  historic  step  in  the  development  of  the 
foreign  relations  of  this  Republic.  But  it  is  not  in 
any  sense  a  sudden  or  sharp  departure  from  the 
policy  which  this  Government  has  pursued  since 
the  end  of  the  war.  On  the  contrary,  it  is  the 
logical  development  of  those  policies  and  also  of 
those  of  the  nations  sharing  our  concept  of  civi- 
lization, who  together  with  us  have  formed,  and 

'  Address  delivered  before  the  Philadelphia  Bulletin 
Forum  on  Mar.  23,  19-19,  and  released  to  the  press  on  the 
same  date. 

'Buu.icTiN  of  Mar.  liO,  1949,  p.  339;  also  printed  as  De- 
partment of  State  publication  34G4. 

'Bulletin  of  July  18,  1948,  p.  79. 

428 


U.S.  Interest  in  Security  of  Areas  Outside 
North  Atlantic  Community 

STATEMENT  OF  SECRETARY  ACHESON 

Duriug  the  drafting  of  the  North  Atlantic  pact, 
we  were  aware  of  the  possibility  that  our  formal 
expression  of  serious  interest  in  the  security  of 
countries  in  the  North  Atlantic  area  might  be  mis- 
interpreted as  implying  a  lessening  of  our  interest 
in  the  security  of  countries  in  other  areas,  particu- 
larly the  Near  and  .Middle  East. 

In  my  radio  discu.ssion  of  the  North  Atlantic 
pact  last  Friday  night,  I  tried  to  make  clear  our 
continuing  interest  in  the  security  of  areas  out- 
side tlie  North  -Atlantic  community,  particularly  in 
Greece,  Turkey,  and  Iran.'  I  will  repeat  the  por- 
tion of  my  speech  bearing  upon  this  subject : 

"In  the  compact  world  of  today,  the  security  of 
the  United  States  cannot  be  defined  in  terms  of 
boundaries  and  frontiers.  A  .serious  threat  to  in- 
ternational peace  and  .security  anywhere  in  the 
world  is  of  direct  concern  to  this  country.  There- 
fore it  is  our  policy  to  help  free  peoples  to  maintain 
their  integrity  and  independence,  not  only  in  West- 
ern Europe  or  the  Americas,  but  wherever  the  aid 
we  are  able  to  provide  can  be  effective.  Our  actions 
in  supporting  the  integrity  and  independence  of 
Greece,  Turkey,  and  Iran  are  expressions  of  that 
determination.  Our  interest  in  the  security  of 
these  countries  has  been  made  clear,  and  we  shall 
continue  to  pursue  that  policy." 

I  think  that  should  speak  for  itself. 

'  BuLLETi.N  of  Mar.  27,  1949,  p.  384. 


still  do,  the  chief  supporters  of  the  United  Na- 
tions. 

Tonight  I  propose  to  deal  primarily  with  those 
questions  or  doubts  which  may  perhaps  arise  in 
the  minds  of  the  people  of  the  United  States  in 
relation  to  this  treaty. 

For  example :  Why  is  such  a  treaty  necessary 
when  the  Charter  of  the  United  Nations  was  con- 
ceived as  a  means  of  assuring  protection  and  se- 
curit V  to  all  the  nations  of  the  world  ? 

I  tliink  the  answer  is  familiar  to  all  of  us  and 
is  to  be  found  in  the  chronicle  of  events  since  the 
end  of  World  War  II.  It  is  to  be  found  in  the 
fate  of  Eastern  Europe,  in  the  record  of  ob.'^truc- 
tion  in  tiie  United  Nations  itself,  and  in  the  fact 
which  cannot  be  ignored — that  formal  peace  has 
not  brought  security  or  banished  fear  from  the 
world. 

The  United  Nations,  whose  Charter  bears  so 
strong  an  imprint  of  American  thought  and  initia- 
tive, was  and  .^till  is  based  on  the  concept  that 
aggression  anywhere  is  a  mutter  of  concern  to 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


all  the  peoples  and  nations  of  the  world.  It  was 
intended  to  provide  a  meclianisni  whereby  this  con- 
cern could  be  translated  into  action  in  order  to 
enfoi-ce  peace  against  any  would-be  aggressor.  It 
was  further  based  upon  the  belief  that  the  prin- 
cipal powers  which  had  borne  the  greatest  respon- 
sibility in  the  last  war  would  act  in  unison  in 
defense  of  the  purposes  and  principles  of  the  Char- 
ter to  which  they  had  solemnly  subscribed.  The 
unity  of  the  great  powers  was  to  be  a  unity  brought 
about  by  an  honest  observation  on  their  part  of 
the  rules  of  international  conduct  set  forth  in  the 
Charter.  It  was  not,  as  some  state,  to  be  a  unity 
achieved  at  the  expense  of  principle  and  through 
a  series  of  deals  in  order  to  preserve  a  solid  front 
of  the  great  powers  against  the  I'est  of  the  world. 

I  think  the  record  shows  that  four  of  the  five 
permanent  members  of  the  Security  Council  who 
were  given  this  special  position  have,  on  the  whole, 
faithfully  and  honestly  been  guided  in  their  for- 
eign relations  by  the  Charter.  The  same  cannot 
be  said  of  the  fifth  member — the  Soviet  Union. 

I  shall  not  recite  the  dreary  record  of  Soviet 
frustration  and  obstruction  in  the  United  Na- 
tions— the  abuse  of  the  veto,  the  defiance  of  resolu- 
tions of  the  General  Assembly. 

I  mention  it  merely  to  show  that  the  fault  lies 
not  in  the  United  Nations  itself,  nor  in  the  mech- 
anism set  up  under  the  Charter,  but  in  the  policies 
and  attitude  which  the  Government  of  one  of  the 
great  powers  has  pursued  in  relation  to  the  or- 
ganization. As  a  result,  the  United  Nations  has 
not  been  permitted  to  establish  throughout  the 
world  the  condition  of  security  for  which  it  was 
designed. 

However,  the  great  objectives  of  the  Charter — 
the  maintenance  of  international  peace  and  secu- 
rity, the  creation  of  conditions  which  will  foster 
and  encourage  the  rule  of  law  rather  than  force 
and  anarchy  in  international  affairs — still  remain 
valid.  They  still  remain  the  aims  of  the  United 
States  and  those  like-minded  countries  which  have 
joined  with  us  in  the  Atlantic  pact. 

The  North  Atlantic  pact  is  no  substitute  in  any 
way  for  the  United  Nations,  but  the  utilization  of 
what  Secretary  Marshall  referred  to  before  the 
General  Assembly  in  1947  as  the  "untapped  re- 
sources" of  the  Charter  for  the  advancement  of 
the  purposes  for  which  the  United  Nations  was 
founded.  The  pact  is  not  only  in  full  conformity 
with  the  great  aims  of  the  Charter  but  it  is,  as  the 
published  text  reveals,  squarely  within  its  pro- 
visions. 

Under  article  51,  the  Charter  expressly  recog- 
nizes the  inherent  right  of  individual  and  collective 
self-defense,  which  is  the  birthright  of  every  free 
and  independent  nation.  It  makes  clear  that  it 
was  not  the  intention  of  the  framers  of  the  Charter 
to  favor  anj'  potential  aggressor  by  denying  to  the 
law-abiding  and  pacific  state  the  exercise  of  the 
elementary  right  of  self-defense. 


The  pact  specifically  recognizes  the  overriding 
responsibility  of  the  Security  Council  for  the 
maintenance  of  international  peace  and  security. 
Article  5  states  that  any  measures  adopted  by  the 
parties  to  the  present  treaty  to  resist  armed  attack 
shall  not  only  be  reported  to  the  Security  Council 
as  the  Charter  provides  but  shall  be  terminated  as 
soon  as  the  Security  Council  has  taken  the  neces- 
sary measures  to  restore  international  peace  and 
security. 

In  certain  quarters  it  has  already  been  asserted 
that  this  treaty  is  provocative  and  aggressive  in 
relation  to  the  Soviet  Union.  This  will  continue  to 
be  asserted  by  certain  Governments,  organizations, 
and  persons  who  do  not  wish  to  see  confidence, 
securit\',  and  recovery  return  to  the  world. 

There  are  a  number  of  answers  to  this  question. 
The  terms  of  the  treaty  themselves  make  very  clear 
the  defensive  nature  of  this  pact.  Article  1  specifi- 
cally binds  the  parties  to  settle  any  international 
dispute  in  which  they  may  be  involved  bj'  pacific 
means  and  furthermore  contains  a  solemn  re- 
affirmation of  their  obligation  under  the  Charter 
to  refrain  from  armed  force  or  threat  of  armed 
force  in  the  conduct  of  their  international  affairs. 
Behind  this  pledge  stand  the  character  and  policies 
of  the  countries  which  are  parties  to  this  treaty. 
The  very  nature  of  their  institutions  makes  a  cal- 
culated plan  of  aggression  a  virtual  impossibility. 
They  are  the  countries  who  have  not  only  demon- 
strated their  will  for  peace,  but  who  have  the  most 
to  lose  and  the  least  to  gain  from  war.  There  is, 
however,  one  very  simple  and,  I  think,  overriding 
answer  to  any  doubts  on  this  subject  which  are 
honestly  held.  The  common  power  of  defense  au- 
thorized by  this  treaty  will  never  be  exercised  un- 
less some  country  resorts  to  armed  attack  against 
one  of  the  parties.  The  obligation  under  article  5, 
which,  under  the  conditions  stated,  might  involve 
the  use  of  armed  force  to  meet  such  an  attack,  will 
not  and  cannot  be  put  into  effect  unless  an  actual 
armed  attack  occurs. 

Any  nation  which  professes  fears  as  to  this  pact 
has  the  power  to  render  its  military  aspects  non- 
operative  by  the  simple  expedient  of  abiding  by  the 
commitment  in  the  Charter — not  to  use  force  in 
its  international  relations.  Should,  however,  any 
nation  be  so  unwise,  and  so  criminal,  as  to  launch 
an  attack  against  any  member  of  this  community, 
then  it  would  know  in  advance  that  it  could  not 
deal  with  its  intended  victim  without  bringing 
against  itself  the  full  weight  of  the  community 
as  a  whole. 

The  Secretary  of  State  has  already  explained, 
and  the  public  debates  and  the  hearings  before  the 
Senate  will  undoubtedly  make  even  clearer,  that 
this  treaty  contains  no  automatic  obligation  for 
this  country  to  go  to  war.  We  assume  the  obliga- 
tion to  exercise  an  honest  judgment  as  to  what, 
in  the  face  of  an  armed  attack  on  one  of  the  mem- 
bers, is  required  to  restore  and  maintain  the  secu- 
rity of  the  North  Atlantic  area. 


April  3,   1949 


In  adding  to  the  security  of  the  Xorth  Atlantic 
area  this  treaty  is  not  only  contributing  to  the 
sense  of  confiaence  of  the  nations  involved  in 
this  treaty,  and  directly  to  that  of  the  United 
States,  it  is  also  contributing  to  the  maintenance 
of  international  peace  and  security  in  the  world, 
for  under  modern  conditions  it  is  difficult  to  imag- 
ine any  war  that  does  not  involve  the  vital  area 
covered  by  the  treaty. 

If  the  would-be  aggressor  knows  in  advance  that 
this  area — without  question  one  of  the  most  vital 
strategic  areas  in  the  world — has  been  rendered 
secure  by  the  voluntary  and  defensive  association 
of  the  nations  joined  by  this  ocean,  it  is  doubtful 
if  it  would  be  tempted  to  take  the  first  step  leading 
to  the  outbreak  of  general  hostilities. 

Another  question  which  inevitably  arises  with 
respect  to  tliis  pact  is  its  connection  with  any 
future  program  of  military  supplies  from  this 
country.  In  other  words:  Is  there  a  price  tag 
attached  to  flie  Atlantic  pact? 

Tlie  answer  to  that  is  "No." 

Under  article  3  of  the  treaty,  we  undertake  with 
the  other  signatories  to  act  togetlier  as  follows : 

In  order  more  effectively  to  achieve  the  objectives  of 
this  Treaty,  the  Parties,  separately  and  jointly,  by  means 
of  continuous  and  effective  self-help  and  mutual  aid,  will 
maintain  and  develop  tlieir  individual  and  collective 
capacity  to  resist  armed  attack. 

Under  this  article,  the  United  States  accepts  an 
obligation  to  use  its  honest  judgment  as  to  the 
wisest  and  most  effective  contribution  it  can  make 
to  further  the  purposes  of  this  treaty. 

The  President  has  already  announced  his  inten- 
tion to  present  to  Congress  a  recommendation  pro- 
viding for  American  assistance  in  the  form  of  arms 
and  equipment  to  other  countries  when,  in  the 
opinion  of  this  Government,  such  assistance  is  in 
our  national  interest. 

A  number  of  considerations  will,  of  course,  enter 
into  the  drawing  up  of  any  such  program,  with 
particular  reference  to  the  effect  upon  our  do- 
mestic economy,  the  state  of  our  own  national  de- 
fense establishment,  and  full  recognition  that  it 
is  the  policy  of  tliis  Government  and  of  the 
countries  associated  with  us  in  this  pact  to  give 
clear  priority  to  economic  recoverj'.  This  means 
that  the  supply  of  any  arms  and  equipment  under 
the  proposed  program  to  foreign  countries  will 
be  done  in  such  a  manner  as  not  to  impair  but 
rather  to  assist  the  major  goal  of  economic  re- 
covery and  reconstruction.  If  Congress  approves 
this  measure  and  appropriates  the  funds  necessary 
for  its  execution,  it  would  clearly  become  one  of 
the  principal  means  by  which  the  United  States 
could  make  its  contribution  to  the  effectiveness  of 
the  pact. 

I  said,  in  the  beginning,  that  this  treaty  repre- 
sents an  historic  step  in  the  development  of  Ameri- 
can foreign  relations.  This  is  true  in  the  sense  that 
for  the  first  time  in  our  historj'  we  are  prepared 
formally  to  enter  into  an  association  for  20  years 


with  countries  outside  this  hemisphere,  under 
wiiich  we  undertake  to  regard  an  attack  on  any  of 
tliose  countries  as  the  equivalent  of  an  attack  on 
the  United  States. 

It  is  a  recognition  of  the  fact  that  in  the  inter- 
dependence of  the  modern  world  there  are  certain 
geogi'aphic  areas  whose  safety  is  directly  and 
vitally  linked  with  the  safety  of  the  United  States. 
It  is  a  recognition,  furthermore,  of  a  community 
of  interest  and  civilization  which,  twice  in  history, 
has  found  its  expression  in  unity  only  after  ag- 
gression occurred,  but  which  now  is  clearly, 
calmly,  and  explicitly  proclaimed  to  the  whole 
world. 

It  should  remove  from  the  mind  of  any  aggres- 
sor the  tempting  prospect  of  being  able  to  deal 
with  its  victims  one  by  one. 

It  permits  the  nations  who  joined  in  this  pact 
to  work  out  an  integrated  and  intelligent  system 
of  defense  for  the  whole  area  so  that  if,  despite 
every  effort,  the  pact  should  fail  of  its  chief  i)ur- 
pose  of  preventing  a  recourse  to  armed  attack,  the 
victims  of  this  attack  will  not,  as  in  the  past,  have 
to  improvise  in  haste  and  in  mortal  jieril  the 
measures  essential  for  their  self-preservation. 

This  pact  effectively  links  the  two  comnumities 
which  stem  from  a  common  civilization  on  both 
sides  of  tlie  Atlantic. 

It  is  limited  in  its  operation  to  an  attack  in 
Europe,  including  the  French  departments  of 
Algiers,  or  North  America  and  the  intervening  air 
and  sea  spaces  between  them.  It  is  so  limited  not 
by  any  intention  to  be  an  exclusive  arrangement, 
but  simply  because,  in  a  formal  association  of  this 
kind  dealing  with  a  specific  area,  there  must  be 
some  relation  between  the  extent  of  the  commit- 
ment and  the  possibility  of  makino;  it  effective. 
But  any  would-be  aggressor  would,  I  think,  be 
making  a  tragic  mistake  if  he  believed  that  non- 
inclusion,  for  geographic  or  other  reasons,  of  other 
nations  in  this  pact  means  that  the  independence 
and  integrity  of  such  nations  are  not  a  matter  of 
deep  concern  to  us. 

Tliis  pact  is  designed  to  contriiiute  to  world 
peace  by  securing  an  area  of  vital  interest  to  the 
t'nited  States  and  to  the  European  nations  which 
form  a  natural  part  of  that  area.  It  does  not 
imply  by  any  means  that  it  is  only  in  this  area  that 
we  have  an  interest  in  preserving  peace. 

Many  of  the  aspects  of  this  treaty  cannot  pos- 
sibly be  covered  in  so  limited  a  time.  It  is  of  ex- 
treme importance  that  the  people  of  the  United 
States  thoroughl}'  understand  the  meaninji  and 
intent  of  this  treaty.  An  undertaking  of  this  na- 
ture cannot  possibly  succeed  unless  its  full  signifi- 
cance is  understood  and  supported  by  the  jieople. 
It  is  not  tlie  type  of  measure  that  can  be  entered 
into  halfheartedly  or  superliciallv  if  it  is  to 
achieve  its  purpose.  AYe  are  confident  that  with 
full  understanding  will  come  full  support  and  that 
the  people  of  this  country  will  thereby  demon- 
strate to  the  world  that  they  have  not  only  learned 
the  lessons  of  history  but  have  learned  them  well. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Voice    of    America    to    Iran    Inaugurated 


On  March  21  the  Voice  of  America  beamed  to 
Iran  the  first  of  a  daily,  30-minute  Persian  broad- 
cast of  information  and  commentary.  It  was  the 
first  Voice  of  America  broadcast  to  the  Near  East 
since  the  war. 

The  voices  of  Mr.  Barkley  and  Mr.  Allen  were 
heard  in  English  and  also  in  Persian  translations. 
Ambassador  Ala  spoke  in  Persian. 

The  remainder  of  the  broadcast  consisted  of 
news,  a  roundup  of  editorial  opinion  from  Ameri- 
can newspapers,  and  a  feature  about  Iranians  in 
the  United  States. 

The  program  will  be  beamed  to  Iran  daily  from 
11 :  30  a.  m.  to  12 :  00  noon  e.  s.  t.  (8  to  8 :  30  p.  m. 
Iranian  time)  and  relayed  by  American  trans- 
mitters at  Munich  and  by  facilities  leased  from 
BBC.  The  new  broadcast  series  will  increase  to 
20  the  number  of  languages  beamed  by  the  Voice 
of  America. 

President  Truman's  Message 

On  behalf  of  the  people  of  the  United  States,  I 
take  great  pleasure  in  extending  cordial  greetings 
and  best  wishes  to  the  people  of  Iran,  on  this, 
the  first  Persian-language  broadcast  of  the  Voice 
of  America. 

It  is  my  sincere  hope  that  this  program  will 
serve  to  strengthen  the  historic  bond  of  friend- 
ship which  already  links  the  Iranian  and  Amer- 
ican peoples.  We  look  forward  to  a  period  of 
continued  good  will  and  of  increased  understand- 
ing between  your  nation  and  mine. 

Such  understanding  will  help  toward  the  cre- 
ation of  tlie  kind  of  world  the  American  people 
and  their  government  most  desire:  a  peaceful 
world,  free  of  the  fears  of  war,  free  of  oppression, 
and  free  of  want:  a  prosperous  world  in  which 
peoples  of  every  creed,  color  and  nationality  can 
live  together  as  good  neighbors  in  friendship  and 
fellowship.  I  am  certain  that  your  people  arid 
ours  stand  earnestly  together  in  this  desire.  May 
the  new  year,  which  you  celebrate  today,  see  great 
achievement  towards  the  goal  of  peace  and  free- 
dom for  all  mankind. 

Vice  President  Barkley^s  Message 

I  take  great  pleasure  in  extending  greetings  to 
the  people  of  Iran. 

Our  admiration  goes  to  the  Iranian  people  for 
their  past  resistance  to  antidemocratic  forces  and 
we  look  forward  to  continued  good  will  between 
your  nation  and  ours — to  a  period  of  increased 
understanding. 

Seldom  if  ever  in  recorded  history  has  there 
been  a  greater  need  for  international  understand- 
ing— for  intelligent  separation  of  truth  from  dis- 


tortion. Much  of  the  friction  which  has  devel- 
oped in  the  wake  of  the  war  could  be  dispelled 
if  the  true  desires  of  the  people  and  their  leaders 
could  be  brought  into  clear  focus. 

Assistant  Secretary  Allen's  Message 

It  was  my  privilege,  while  serving  as  American 
Ambassador  in  Iran,  to  have  frequent  opportunity 
to  speak  directly  with  the  Iranian  people.  I  have 
missed  this  privilege  keenly  since  my  return  to 
the  United  States. 

I  am  therefore  especially  glad  to  be  able  to  speak 
directly  to  you  again,  this  time  over  the  Voice 
of  America. 

The  broadcasting  service  which  we  are  inaugu- 
rating to  Iran  today  is  dedicated  to  bringing  the 
people  of  our  two  countries  closer  together  in 
international  friendship.  Through  these  broad- 
casts we  shall  seek  to  convey  the  good  will  which 
our  people  hold  for  your  country. 

We  shall  attempt,  in  our  Persian  language  trans- 
missions, to  let  the  people  of  Iran  know  more 
about  America  and  the  American  people:  about 
our  genuine  efforts  to  achieve  lasting  world  peace ; 
about  our  hopes  for  a  world  of  greater  prosperity 
in  which  we  can  all  share ;  but  above  all,  our  desire 
that  Iran  shall  always  be  a  strong  and  indepen- 
dent nation. 

It  is  my  sincere  hope  that  these  broadcasts  will 
give  the  Iranian  people  a  fuller  appreciation  of 
America's  deep  interest  in  the  welfare  of  Iran, 
which  I  assure  you,  is  constant. 

It  is  now  my  honor  and  pleasure  to  present  to 
you  the  Ambassador  of  your  own  Government, 
His  Excellency,  Hussein  Ala. 

Ambassador  Aid's  Message 

Mt  dear  fellow  countrymen,  On  the  occasion 
of  the  New  Year,  I  am  delighted  and  proud  to 
convey  to  you  two  congratulations.  Firstly,  on 
account  of  the  Noi'ouz  celebration  and  the  safety 
and  well  being  of  our  beloved  King,  who  by  the 
Grace  of  God,  was  saved  from  the  attempt  made 
on  his  life  by  an  evil  element,  and  was  preserved 
to  continue  to  render  everlasting  public  service  to 
the  country  and  the  people  of  Iran. 

My  other  congratulation  is  for  the  inauguration 
of  the  program  of  the  Voice  of  America  to  Iran; 
one  of  the  services  under  the  charge  of  a  true 
friend  of  Iran,  Mr.  George  Allen. 

As  American  Ambassador  to  Iran,  Mr.  Allen 
manifested  his  friendly  feelings  towards  our 
country,  at  a  very  critical  time,  and  used  all  his 
eifoi'ts  to  strengthen  sincere  relations  between  the 
two  countries. 

Now  in  his  new  post,  animated  by  the  same 
feelings,  he  desires  to  bring  to  the  people  of  Iran 


April  3,   J  949 


news  and  interesting  information  about  the  cus- 
toms and  the  way  of  life  in  America  as  well  as 
world  events. 

I  do  not  believe  that  anyone  can  deny  that  the 
most  effective  means  of  good  understanding  among 
nations  and  the  maintenance  of  world  peace  is  the 
freedom  of  the  press,  exchange  of  views,  and  dis- 
semination of  correct  information.  I  am.  tiiere- 
fore,  certain  that  this  new  step  of  the  American 
Government  in  extending  the  Voice  of  America  to 
the  far-olT  land  of  Iran  will  be  received  by  you 
with  eagerness  and  good  will  and  that  you  will 
draw  due  benefit  from  it. 

On  my  part,  I  will  do  my  best,  with  the  co- 
operation of  my  colleagues,  to  reciprocate  this  pro- 
gram by  informing  the  American  nation  of  the 
events  and  happenings  in  Iran. 

During  my  stay  of  over  three  years  in  Wash- 
ington, I  have  become  convinced  that  this  great 
country  has  no  other  purpose  or  aim  but  the  main- 
tenance of  peace  and  good  will  in  the  world ;  it 
desires  to  cooperate  in  the  progress,  and  social 
and  economic  development  of  other  nations,  so 
that  America  too  might  benefit  from  the  fruits 
of  such  a  desirable  state  of  affairs. 

American  foreign  policy  is  based  on  the  support 
and  strengthening  of  the  United  Nations  and  the 
observance  of  the  Charter.  This  is  the  vei\y  policy 
and  ideal  of  the  Government  and  people  of  Iran. 

Our  country  has  the  distinction  of  being  the 
only  country  in  the  Middle  East  which  during  the 
war  gave  real  and  valuable  assistance  to  the  Allies 
and  made  outstanding  contributions  and  sacrifices 
to  further  the  common  cause  in  the  defeat  of 
aggression  and  oppression.  Having  done  this, 
Iran  later  realized  the  necessity  of  devoting  atten- 
tion to  rehabilitation  in  the  postwar  period.  She 
has  undertaken  an  economic  development  program 
to  raise  the  standard  of  living  and  bring  prosperity 
to  the  people.  Under  His  Majesty's  auspices,  firm 
steps  are  being  taken  to  improve  economic  condi- 
tions and  promote  the  welfare  of  the  people,  more 
especially  in  tlie  fields  of  health,  education,  and 
agriculture.  This  desirable  policy  and  self-help 
will  enable  us  to  obtain  considerable  assistance. 

All  the  Iranians  residing  in  America,  loving 
their  country  as  they  do,  pray  that,  under  tiie  lead- 
ership of  their  benevolent  Shah-in-Shah,  the 
Majlis,  the  Senate,  and  the  Government  may  suc- 
ceed in  bringing  about  basic  reforms  and  pre- 
serving the  rigiits,  independence,  and  territorial 
integrity  of  Iran.  They  earnestly  trust  that  in 
the  coming  year  and  for  many  long  years  to  come, 
Iran  may  enjoy  happiness  and  prosperity. 

May  gladness  come  to  the  land  of  Iran,  our  country, 
May  the  land  and  its  people  ever  enjoj'  prosperity ; 
Should  there  be  no  Iran,  let  me  not  be; 
Let  there  be  no  Iranian  alive  such  condition  to  see.' 


'  Translated  from  the  Shah-Ncmch,  famous  Iranian  epic, 
by  the  Iraniau  Ambassador. 


Reports  of  the  Exertion  of  Soviet 
Pressure  on  Iran 

Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson 

[Released  to  the  press  March  23) 

For  some  time  now,  our  Embassy  at  Tehran  has 
reported  Soviet  pressure  upon  Iran  in  the  form  of 
persistent  press  and  radio  propaganda,  alleging, 
among  other  things,  activities  by  United  States 
advisers  in  Iran  hostile  to  the  Soviet  Union.  That 
pressure  seems  to  have  intensified  in  recent  weeks. 
AVhen  Ambassador  Ala  called  on  me  on  the  four- 
teenth of  this  month,  he  iianded  me  a  copy  of  a 
memorandum  to  the  Soviet  Ambassador  in  Tehran 
in  which  the  Iranian  Government  protested  against 
disturbing  Soviet  press  and  radio  attacks  upon 
Iran.  This  memorandum  was  also  released  to  the 
press  in  the  Iranian  capital.  One  type  of  Soviet 
allegation  mentioned  in  the  Iranian  memorandum 
is  that  "American  advisers  intend  to  transform 
Iran  into  a  military  base  to  be  used  against  the 
Soviet  Union."  Such  charges  are  altogether  false 
and  demonstrably  untrue.  In  this  connection,  I 
might  refer  to  certain  statements  which  I  tried  to 
emphasize  in  my  radio  talk  last  Friday :  "This 
country  is  not  planning  to  make  war  against  any- 
one.    It  is  not  seeking  war.     It  abhors  war." 

I  might  say  in  connection  with  Soviet  allega- 
tions of  hostile  United  States  activity  in  Iran  what 
I  have  already  said  with  regard  to  allegations  that 
aggressive  designs  underlie  our  particijiation  in 
the  Atlantic  pact,  namely,  tliat  this  "can  rest  only 
on  a  malicious  misrepresentation  or  a  fantastic  mis- 
understanding of  tlie  nature  and  aims  of  American 
society." 


Chester  H.  Opal  Transferred  From 
Post  in  Warsaw 

[Released  to  the  press  March  23] 

Assistant  Secretary  George  V.  Allen  announced 
on  March  23  the  transfer  to  another  post  of  Chester 
H.  Opal,  attache  at  the  Embassy  in  Warsaw, 
wliose  recall  was  requested  by  the  Polish  Foreign 
Office  because  tlie  ^VircIc^<H  BitUetin  issued  by  the 
United  States  Information  Service  in  Warsaw  re- 
ferred to  Poland  as  a  "Soviet  satellite."'  Mr.  Allen 
said  that  the  United  States  Government  was  ac- 
ceding to  the  request  of  the  Polish  Government 
that  Mr.  Opal  leave  Poland. 

Mr.  Allen  pointed  out  that  the  article  in  the 
Polish  edition  of  the  Wireless  Bulletin  to  which 
the  Polisli  Government  took  exception  contained, 
among  other  tilings,  an  immoderately  worded  de- 
nunciation of  "point  4"  in  tlie  President's  inau- 
gural achhess  l)y  a  duly  accredited  representative 
of  tlie  Polish  Cioveinnient.  This  kind  of  fair  and 
unprejudiced  reporting  is  not  to  be  found  in  the 
controlled  press  of  Poland. 


Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


Procedure  for  Filing  Claims  for  Looted 
Property  in  Japan 

[Released  to  the  press  March  21] 

On  March  21  the  Department  of  State  called 
attention  to  the  fact  that  April  5,  1949,  is  the 
closing  date,  established  under  the  Far  Eastern 
Commission  policy  for  the  filing  of  claims  with 
the  Supreme  Commander  for  the  Allied  Powers 
for  the  restitution  of  identified  property  looted 
from  areas  occupied  by  the  Japanese.  After  that 
date  tlie  Supreme  Commander  may,  in  his  dis- 
cretion, accept  only  claims  for  property  known 
to  have  been  looted  but  not  yet  identified  as  to 
ownership. 

In  an  earlier  announcement,  persons  whose 
property  was  looted  from  occupied  areas  were 
urged  to  file  claims  for  restitution  since  substan- 
tial quantities  of  looted  property  unidentified  as 
to  ownership  or  origin  which  had  been  recovered 
in  Japan  may  be  liquidated  unless  valid  claims 
are  forthcoming.^ 

It  was  pointed  out  that,  in  general,  claims  for 
restitution  must  be  filed  with  the  Supreme  Com- 
mander througli  the  present  government  of  the 
area  from  which  the  property  was  looted.  The 
Department  of  State  is  prepared  to  accept  such 
claims  on  behalf  of  United  States  nationals  for 
forwarding  to  appropriate  foreign  governments. 
Claims  should  describe  the  jDroperty  as  fully  as 
possible  to  facilitate  its  identification,  should 
state  the  ciicumstances  under  which  it  disap- 
peared, and  should  be  accompanied  by  proof  of 
ownership. 


Work  and  Victory  Demonstration  in  Greece  ^ 

Statement  iy  Secretary  Acheson 

[Released  to  the  press  March  23] 

As  you  may  know,  the  Greek  Government  and 
people  are  this  week  conducting  a  series  of  demon- 
strations for  "work  and  victory"'  to  assert  tlieir 
determination  to  preserve  their  independence  in 
the  face  of  rebellion  from  within,  which  is  largely 
directed  by  antidemocratic  forces  outside  Greece's 
borders. 

The  demonstrations  being  held  throughout 
Greece  today  are  devoted  to  the  theme  of  "inter- 
national solidarity."  I  am  happy  to  reaffirm  the 
solidarity  of  the  Government  and  people  of  the 
United  States  with  the  Government  and  people 
of  Greece  in  their  struggle  to  preserve  Greek  in- 
dependence and  democracy. 

Greece,  which  gave  democracy  to  the  world,  was 
also  the  site  of  one  of  history's  earliest  attempts 
to  give  legal  expression  to  international  solidarity 
on  behalf  of  peace.  This  was  the  Amphictyonic 
League,  founded  by  the  independent  city  states  of 


ancient  Greece  five  hundred  years  before  Christ. 

Today,  Greece  is  again  a  testing  ground  of  a 
new  organization,  the  United  Nations,  established 
to  provide  a  means  for  the  peaceful  settlement  of 
international  disputes.  By  extending  their  sup- 
port to  Greece  at  the  present  time,  the  American 
people  are  endeavoring  not  only  to  act  as  good 
neighbors,  but  also  to  give  practical  effect  to  their 
determination  that  the  principle  of  collective  or- 
ganization for  peace,  to  which  the  Amphictyonic 
League  pointed  the  way,  shall  be  made  to  work. 

The  present  rededication  of  the  Greek  people  to 
"work  and  victory"  is  a  renewed  manifestation  of 
the  valor  of  the  Hellenic  race.  The  final  success 
of  their  efforts  and  of  those  being  made  by  the 
United  States  and  other  members  of  the  United 
Nations  on  their  behalf  will  insure  the  pi'eserva- 
tion  of  that  race.  It  will  also  mark  important 
progress  in  mankind's  long  quest  for  enduring 
peace. 

Statement  hy  the  President 

[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  March  25] 

I  have  been  deeply  impressed  by  the  "work  and 
victory"  manifestations  in  Greece,  demonstrating 
the  united  will  of  the  Greek  people  to  labor  and 
fight  for  the  preservation  of  their  ancient  demo- 
cratic heritage  and  of  their  independence,  so 
jjroudly  proclaimed  128  years  ago  today.  I  have 
also  been  moved  by  the  concurrent  expressions  of 
Greek  ajjpreciation  of  American  aid  and  of  the 
Greek  people's  determination  to  use  the  help  ex- 
tended by  their  American  and  other  friends  to  the 
best  advantage. 

Greek  heroism  displayed  in  the  Greek  War  of 
Independence  and  in  the  First  and  Second  World 
Wars  evoked  the  admiration  and  enlisted  the  sup- 
port of  Americans.  Today,  on  this  anniversary 
of  Greek  independence,  the  reaffirmation  of  Greek 
resistance  to  a  new  alien  threat  is  a  further  shining 
example  of  courage  in  the  face  of  adversity. 

Despite  the  continuing  ravages  of  the  foreign- 
inspired  guerrilla  warfare,  the  Greek  people  re- 
main determined  to  rebuild  their  own  land  in  their 
own  way,  in  freedom  and  in  peace.  This  is  the 
significance  of  the  "work  and  victory"  rally.  The 
spirit  of  the  people  and  the  recent  successes  of  the 
Greek  armed  forces  confirm  my  confidence  that 
the  new  totalitarian  pressure  will  be  contained, 
whatever  difficulties  may  lie  ahead. 

The  American  people  are  proud  of  their  part 
in  helping  to  preserve  Greek  independence  and  the 
structure  of  world  peace  through  the  Greek  aid 
program. 

'  Bulletin  of  Aug.  22,  1948,  p.  245. 

■  Tlie  President  of  tlie  United  States  named  Henry  F. 
Grady,  Ambassador  Extraordinary  and  Plenipotentiary 
of  the  United  States  of  America  to  Greece,  as  his  Personal 
Representative  with  the  rank  of  Special  Ambassador  to  at- 
tend the  celebration. 


Apn7  3,    1949 


Korean  Ambassador  Presents  Credentials 

[Released  to  the  press  March  25] 

The  remarks  of  the  newly  appointed  Amha^mdor 
of  Korea,  Dr.  John  M.  Chang,  upon  the  occa- 
sion of  the  presentation  of  his  letter  of  credence, 
on  March  25  follow  : 

Mr.  President:  It  is  my  proud  and  unique 
privilege  to  deliver  into  Your  Excellency's  hands 
this  letter  of  credence  of  the  Honorable  President 
of  the  Republic  of  Korea,  Dr.  Syngman  Rhee, 
accrediting  me  before  Your  Excellency  as  his  first 
Ambassador  Extraordinary  and  Plenipotentiary 
in  the  United  States  of  America. 

This  historic  ceremony  today  is  evidence  of  the 
earnest  desire  of  the  people  and  the  Government 
of  Korea  to  maintain  and  to  make  even  closer  the 
most  friendly  relations  between  our  two  Govern- 
ments, united  by  strong  bonds  of  sympathy  and 
mutual  interest.'  My  people  have  watched  and 
studied  with  profound  admiration  and  interest  the 
political,  economic  and  cultural  achievements  of 
3'our  great  people. 

I  wish  to  express  to  Your  Excellency  that  my 
Government  and  my  people  are  sincerely  ap- 
preciative of  the  part  played  by  the  United  States 
of  America  within  very  recent  memory  in  helping 
us  in  our  efforts  to  regain  independence  and 
establish  a  constitutional  democracv.  We  re- 
member particularly,  with  profound  gratitude, 
your  very  gi-acious  action  in  according  the  first  de 
jure  recognition  to  the  Republic  of  Korea  on  Jan- 
uary first  of  this  year,  thereby  restoring  the  posi- 
tion of  our  country  to  an  international  standing  as 
a  duly  qualified  member  of  the  community  of  the 
freedom-loving  nations. 

I  am  entrusted,  Mr.  President,  with  the  pleasant 
commission  to  express  to  Your  Excellency  in  the 
name  of  the  President  of  the  Republic  of  Korea 
and  our  Government  the  sincere  wishes,  to  which 
I  have  the  honor  to  join  mine,  for  the  personal 
happiness  of  Your  Excellency,  who  has  won  by 
such  magnificent  statesmanship  the  love  and  ad- 
miration and  respect  of  all  the  nations,  and  the 
prosperity  of  this  gi-eat  country.  I  may  assure 
you  that  my  people  and  my  Government  are  also 
anxious  to  cooperate  with  your  great  people  and 
Government  in  any  effort  that  may  be  inspired  by 
principles  of  justice  and  democracy  directed  to  the 
task  of  establishing  a  permanent  basis  for  a  demo- 
cratic and  peaceful  workL 

I  am  aware  of  the  very  heavy  responsibility  of 
my  mission,  but  with  the  friendship  and  coopera- 
tion which  I  feel  confident  that  I  shall  receive  from 
your  people  and  your  Government,  I  will  do  my 
utmost  to  carry  out  my  Government's  instructions 
with  the  greatest  care  and  devotion  to  deserve  the 
confidence  of  Your  Excellency  and  your  Govern- 
ment. 

In  entering  upon  my  duties,  I  am  fully  confident 


that  the  machinery  of  diplomatic  intercourse  set 
in  motion  today  will  be  productive  of  results  which 
will  not  only  be  conducive  to  our  mutual  benefit 
but  will  prove  to  be  an  appreciable  contribution  to 
the  task  of  building  a  free  and  prosperous  world. 

The  Presidents  reply  to  the  remarks  of  the  newly 
appointed  Ambassador  of  Korea,  Dr.  John  M. 
Chang,  upon  the  occasion  of  the  presentation  of 
his  letter  of  credence  follows: 

Mr.  Ambassador  :  It  is  with  sincere  pleasure  that 
I  accept  from  you,  as  the  first  Ambassador  Ex- 
traordinary and  Plenipotentiary  of  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  Republic  of  Korea  to  the  United 
States,  this  letter  of  credence  from  your  President, 
Dr.  Syngman  Rhee. 

This  occasion,  indeed,  marks  a  significant  and 
happy  day  in  both  Korean  and  American  history. 
It  is  a  great  step  toward  the  fulfilment  of  the  de- 
sires of  both  our  countries  and  of  the  objectives  of 
United  States  foreign  policy  with  respect  to  Korea, 
wherein  your  country  puts  on  the  formal  mantle 
of  freedom  and  independence.  Over  the  past 
years,  our  two  Governments  and  our  peoples  have 
worked  together  to  achieve  these  ends,  which  were 
so  clearly  stated  in  the  Cairo  and  Potsdam  Declara- 
tions, subscribed  to  by  four  of  the  Allied  Nations, 
and  the  principles  of  which  have  since  been  sup- 
ported by  an  overwhelming  majority  of  the  mem- 
l)er  states  of  the  United  Nations. 

May  I  express,  Mr.  Ambassador,  on  behalf  of 
the  people  and  the  Government  of  the  United 
States  the  deep  appreciation  we  feel  for  the  gra- 
cious sentiments  of  President  Rhee  which  you 
have  conveyed  and  for  your  own  kind  thoughts 
on  this  memorable  day.  I  may  tell  you  that  it 
is  the  desire  of  the  people  of  this  country  that  the 
friendly  relations  existing  between  our  two  Gov- 
ernments, which  this  occasion  so  eloquently  rep- 
resents, shall  prosper  and  grow  strong. 

I  welcome  you,  Dr.  Chang,  in  your  position  as 
Ambassador  of  the  Government  of  the  Republic 
of  Korea,  and  extend  to  you  my  congi-atulations, 
sure  in  the  knoweldge  of  your  capabilities  and  ef- 
forts on  the  behalf  of  your  own  country  and  of  the 
freedom-loving  nations  of  the  world. 


Letters  of  Credence 

Honduras 

The  newly  appointed  Ambassador  of  Honduras, 
Sefior  Dr.  Rafael  Heliodoro  Valle,  presented  his 
letters  of  credence  to  the  President  on  IMarch  24, 
1949.  For  texts  of  the  ^Vmbassador's  remarks  and 
the  President's  reply,  see  Department  of  State 
press  release  18S  of  March  24. 

Department  of  State   Bulletin    i 


Proclamation  Supplement  on  Trade  With  Cuba 

The  President  of  the  United  States  issued 
Proclamation  2829,^  supplementing  proclamations 
of  December  16,  1947,  and  January  1,  1948,  and 
carrying  out  general  agreement  on  tariffs  and  trade 
and  exclusive  trade  agreement  with  Cuba.^ 


THE  FOREIGN  SERVICE 

American  Legation  at  Pretoria  Elevated 
to  Embassy 

[Released  to  the  press  March  23] 

The  American  Legation  at  Pretoria,  Union  of 
South  Africa,  will  be  elevated  to  Embassy  status 
on  March  23,  when  Ambassador-designate  North 
Winship  presents  his  credentials  to  the  Governor- 
General  of  the  Union  of  South  Africa  at  Capetown. 
Mr.  Winship  has  been  serving  as  Minister  to  the 
Union  of  South  Africa  since  June  11,  1948, 


THE  DEPARTMENT 
Appointment  of  Officers 

James  S.  Moose,  Jr.  as  Chief  of  the  Division  of  African 
Aff.iirs,  effective  February  9,  1949. 

Donald  L.  Nicholson  as  Chief  of  the  Division  of  Secu- 
rity, effective  August  27,  1948. 


Joint  Brazil-U.S.  Technical  Commission 
Report  Released 

[Released  to  the  press  March  24] 

The  Department  of  State  released  on  March  24 
the  full  text  of  the  Joint  Brazil-United  States 
Technical  Commission  Report.  Release  was  made 
simultaneously  in  Rio  de  Janeiro  and  Washington. 
A  summary  of  this  report  was  released  in  Wash- 
ington on  March  10.^  The  Commission,  which  was 
established  by  authority  of  President  Dutra  and 
President  Truman,  functioned  under  the  joint 
chairmanship  of  Octavio  Gouvea  de  Bulhoes  and 
John  Abbink.  It  completed  its  work  in  Brazil  on 
February  7. 

Copies  of  the  report  of  the  Commission,  includ- 
ing several  special  sub-commission  studies,  are 
expected  to  be  made  available  to  the  public  in  a 
few  weeks  and  will  be  sold  by  the  Superintendent 
of  Documents,  Government  Printing  Office,  Wash- 
ington, D.C.  Agencies  of  the  Government  and 
representatives  of  private  organizations  may  now 
obtain  copies  of  the  report  without  the  special 
studies  from  the  Division  of  Publications  of  the 
Department  of  State  which  has  a  limited  supply. 


PUBLICATIONS 


Department  of  State 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  Oovem- 
ment  Printing  Office.  Washington  25,  D.  C.  Address  re- 
quests direct  to  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  except 
in  the  case  of  free  puhlications,  which  may  he  obtained 
from  the  Department  of  State. 

Naval  Forces  on  the  American  Lakes:  Application  and 
Interpretation  of  the  Rush-Bagot  Agreement.  Treaties 
and  Otlier  International  Acts  Series  1830.  Pub.  3369.  17 
pp.     10<>. 

Understandings  Between  the  United  States  and  Can- 
ada regarding  the  Agreement  of  Apr.  28  and  29,  1817, 
effected  b.v  Exchange  of  Notes— Signed  at  Ottawa 
June  9  and  10,  1930 ;  entered  into  force  June  10,  1939; 
signed  at  Ottawa  Oct.  30  and  Nov.  2,  1940;  entered 
into  force  Nov.  2,  1940;  signed  at  Ottawa  Feb.  26  and 
Mar.  9,  1942;  entered  into  force  Mar.  9,  1942;  signed 
at  Washington  Nov.  18  and  Dec.  6,  1946 ;  entered  into 
force  Dec.  6,  1946. 

Whaling.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series 
1849.     Pub.  3383.     17  pp.     200. 

Convention  Between  the  United  States  and  Other  Gov- 
ernments—Signed at  Washington  under  date  of  Dec. 
2,  1946 ;  entered  into  force  Nov.  10,  1948. 

Initial  Financial  and  Property  Settlement.  Treaties  and 
Other  International  Acts  Series  1851.    Pub.  3395.    25  pp 

m. 

Agreement  and  Supplement  thereto  Between  the 
United  States  and  Korea— Signed  at  Seoul  Sept.  11, 
1948 ;  entered  into  force  Sept.  20,  1948. 

The  United  States  Goal  in  Tomorrow's  World.  General 
Foreign  Policy  Series  6.     Pub.  3450.     6  pp.     50. 

A  discussion  of  American  foreign  policy  by  Ambassa- 
dor Philip  C.  Jessup. 

The  North  Atlantic  Pact.    General  Foreign  Policy  Series 

7.  Pub.  3462.     16  pp.     100. 

The  fact  sheet  on  the  treaty  for  collective  defense  and 
the  preservation  of  peace,  security,  and  freedom  in  the 
North  Atlantic  community. 

North  Atlantic  Treaty:  Proposed  for  Signature  During 
First  Week  in  April  1949.    General  Foreign  Policy  Series 

8.  Pub.  3464.     5  pp.     50. 

Includes  the  preamble  and  14  articles  of  treaty. 


CORRECTION 

"Security  Council  Studies  Berlin  Currency  and 
Trade  Problems,"  in  the  Bulletin  of  March  27, 
1949,  page  377,  second  line:  The  date  should  be 
identified  as  "released  for  publication  on  March  16." 


'  14  Fed.  Reg.  1151. 
'  Bulletin  of  Jan.  4,  1948,  p.  28. 

'For  text  of  the  summary  see  Documents  and  State 
Papers  for  March-April  1949. 


April  3,   1949 


-^'  .•■!"l??;?;-^ 


wyyvC€^nl6^ 


.  OTit-^^^^/fv-W.." 


General  Policy  Page 

Cultural  Relations:  U.S. — U.S.S.R.  Efforts  To 
Establish  Cultural-Scientific  Exchange 
Blocked  by  the  U.S.S.R 403 

U.S.  Contribution  for  Relief  of  Palestine  Ref- 
ugees.    Statement  by  the  President  .    .    .    419 

U.S.  Interest  in  Security  of  Areas  Outside  North 
Atlantic  Community.  Statement  by  Sec- 
retary Acheson 428 

Reports  of  the  E.xerlion  of  Soviet  Pressure  on 

Iran.     Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson  .    432 

Work  and  Victory  Demonstration  in  Greece: 

Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson 433 

Statement  by   the   President 433 

Letters  of  Credence:   Honduras 434 

Korean  Ambassador  Presents  Credentials .    .    .    434 

The  United  Nations  and 

Specialized  Agencies 

The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations  .    .    .    418 
Fleet  Admiral  Nimitz  Nominated  as   Kashmir 
Plebiscite    Administrator.     Statement    by 

Secretary  Acheson 419 

U.N.  Documents:  A  Selected  Bibliography  .    .    419 
Third  Session  of  the  Ilo  Permanent  Migration 

Committee.     By  Irwin  Tobin 421 

U.S.  Delegations  to  International  Conferences: 
\ctfo:  African-Indian  Ocean  Regional  Meet- 
ing      425 

U.S.    Observers    Attend    World    Engineering 

Conference 425 

Iro:     E.xecutive     Committee     and    General 

Council 426 

Protection  of  Childhood 420 

Occupation  Matters 

Provisional  Rectifications  Along  the  Western 
German  Frontier.  Communique  of  Bel- 
gium, France,  Luxembourg,  Netherlands, 
United  Kingdom,  and  the  United  States  .    .    427 


Economic  Affairs  Page 

U.S.  Observers  Attend  World  Engineering  Con- 
ference   425 

Itxj:    U.S.    Submits     Proposal     on     Telegraph 

Regulations 426 

Procedure  for  Filing  Claims  for  Looted  Property 

in  Japan 433 

Treaty  information 

Provisional  Rectifications  Along  the  Western 
German  Frontier.  Communique  of  Bel- 
gium, France,  Luxembourg,  Netherlands, 
United  Kingdom,  and  the  United  States  .    .    427 

The  North  Atlantic  Pact:  A  Historic  Step  in 
the  Development  of  American  Foreign  Re- 
lations.    By  Charles  E.  Bohlen 428 

Proclamation  Supplement  on  Trade  With  Cuba  .    435 

International  Information  and 
Cultural  Affairs 

Cultural  Relations:  U.S.— U.S.S.R.  Efforts 
To  Establish  Cultural-Scientific  Exchange 
Blocked  by  the  U.S.S.R 403 

Research  and  Teaching  Opportunities  in   the 

United  Kingdom 417 

Voice  of  America  to  Iran  Inaugurated  ....    431 

Calendar  of  Meetings 420 

The  Foreign  Service 

Chester  H.  Opal  Transferred  From  Post  in  War- 
saw     432 

American    Legation    at    Pretoria    Elevated    to 

Embassy 435 

The  Department 

Apijoiiiimi'iit  of  Officers 435 

Publications 

Joint  Brazil-U.  S.  Technical  Commission  Report 

Released 435 

Department   of   State 435 


m/?i^iwlo^ 


Irtcin  M.  Tohin,  author  of  the  article  on  the  Third  Session  of 
the  Ii.o  Permanent  Migration  Committee,  is  an  International 
Labor  Economist  in  the  Division  of  International  Labor  and 
Social  Affairs,  Depiirtment  of  State.  Mr.  Tobin  was  Adviser  to 
the  U.S.  Delegate,  and  Secretary  of  the  U.S.  Delegation  to  the 
Third  Session  of  the  Ii.o  Permanent  Migration  Committee. 


^^m^mm^^mmmmmmmm 


fj/ie/  ^e/ict'y^^^teni/  ^ t/iaie/ 


BULGARIA,  HUNGARY,  AND  RUMANIA 
ACCUSED  OF  VIOLATING  FUNDA- 
MENTAL FREEDOMS 450 

NINTH  GENERAL  CONFERENCE  ON 
WEIGHTS  AND  MEASURES   •   Article  by 

Dr.  Edward  (J.  Condon 447 

DEVELOPING  INTERNATIONAL  UNDER- 
STANDING •  An  Article 439 


Vol.  XX,  No.  510 
April  10, 1949 


For  complete  contents  see  back  cover 


^.s,w^./r..  bulletin 


Vol.  XX,  No.  510    •    Pubucation  34S3 
April  10, 1949 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

"  U.S.  Qovemraent  Printing  Oflice 

Washington  26,  D.C. 

Price: 

62  issues,  domestic  $5.00,  foreign  $7.25 

Single  copy,  16  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  (February  18, 
1849). 

Note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  Items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Department 
or  State  Bulletin  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BULLETIN, 
a  tceekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  icith  information  on 
devtlopments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  work  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includes 
press  releases  on  foreign  policy  issued 
by  the  White  House  and  the  Depart- 
ment, and  statements  and  addresses 
made  by  the  President  and  by  the 
Secretary  of  State  and  other  officers 
of  the  Department,  as  well  as  special 
articles  on  various  phases  of  inter- 
national affairs  and  the  functions  of 
the  Department.  Information  is  in- 
cluded concerning  treaties  and  in- 
ternational agreements  to  which  the 
United  States  is  or  may  become  a 
party  and  treaties  of  general  inter- 
national interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
tcell  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


U.  S.  SUPERIHTENOENT  Of  OOCtlEAiilSI 

Developing  International  Understanding 

An  Article 


Few  incidents  demonstrate  more  clearly  the  in- 
tense interest  of  other  peoples  in  things  American 
than  the  reaction  to  the  recent  display  of  an  Amer- 
ican mail-order  company  catalog  in  one  of  the 
United  States  Information  Service  libraries  in 
Eastern  Europe.  Scores  of  people  formed  a  line 
outside  the  building  before  the  library  opened  and 
stood  in  line  for  hours  waiting  their  turn  to  look 
at  the  catalog.  The  librarian  and  her  assistant 
received  innumerable  requests  for  translations  of 
descripitions  of  the  articles  it  offered  for  sale.  So 
many  people  wanted  to  see  the  catalog  that  the 
normal  functioning  of  the  library  was  seriously 
interfered  with,  and  the  catalog  was  withdrawn. 
Not  only  did  visitors  request  that  the  catalog  be 
put  back  on  display  but  they  also  called  at  both 
the  library  and  the  librarian's  home  pleading  for 
an  opportunity  to  look  at  the  catalog  and  for  in- 
formation on  how  they  could  buy  the  articles 
described. 

This  incident  illustrates  the  reception  given  the 
many  and  varied  activities  of  this  Government's 
International  Information  and  Educational  Ex- 
change Program  throughout  the  world.  Through 
libraries,  press  services,  radio  broadcasts,  and  doc- 
umentary motion  pictures  the  program  is  pro- 
viding peoples  of  other  nations  with  a  balanced 
picture  of  American  life  and  thought.  Under  this 
program  students,  teachers,  experts  in  various 
fields,  and  professors  are  helped  to  come  to  this 
country  for  serious  work  in  recognized  fields  of 
scientific  and  cultural  learning.  The  program  also 
seeks  to  facilitate  travel  and  study  abroad  by  com- 
petent Americans  capable  of  contributing  to  the 
knowledge  and  skills  of  other  people  and  of  add- 
ing, on  their  i-eturn,  to  the  store  of  knowledge  in 
their  respective  fields. 

The  Government's  educational-exchange  pro- 
gram originated  in  1939  with  Congressional  au- 
thorization for  scientific  and  cultural  exchanges 
between  the  United  States  and  the  other  American 


republics  and  the  Philippines.  The  Smith-Mundt 
Act  (Public  Law  402)  of  January  1948  for  the 
first  time  provided  legislative  authority  for  the 
conduct  of  a  com^jrehensive  overseas  information 
program  and  at  the  same  time  extended  authority 
for  the  conduct  of  educational-exchange  activities 
to  include  the  Eastern  Hemisphere.  No  new  funds 
were  appropriated,  however,  for  this  latter  activ- 
ity, and  plans  for  the  development  of  government- 
sponsored  educational  exchanges  outside  the  west- 
ern hemisphere,  except  for  such  activities  under 
the  Fulbright  Act  (Public  Law  584),  await  Con- 
gressional appropriation.  The  Fulbright  Act 
authorizes  the  use  of  certain  foreign  currencies 
obtained  from  the  sale  abroad  of  United  States 
surplus  property  for  study  and  teaching  by 
American  scholars  and  professors  wishing  to  pur- 
sue their  work  overseas,  and  for  the  round  trip 
transportation  to  the  United  States  of  foreign 
nationals  for  similar  purposes. 

Equally  valuable  in  the  impact  on  international 
understanding  and  in  contributions  to  teclinical, 
scientific,  and  cultural  knowledge  in  the  United 
States  are  the  exchanges  of  scholars  and  technical 
experts  between  the  United  States  and  other  coun- 
tries facilitated  by  the  Government's  educational- 
exchange  program.  The  sending  of  American 
teachers  and  professional  persons  to  other  coun- 
tries is  complemented  by  the  award  of  grants 
and  fellowships  to  outstanding  experts  from  other 
nations  for  training  or  study  in  the  United  States. 

The  Philippine  Training  Program  exemplifies 
one  type  of  exchange  now  being  carried  on.  Under 
this  program  196  Filipinos  were  brought  to  the 
United  States  in  1948  and  about  170  more  are 
expected  in  1949  for  training  in  government  ad- 
ministration and  other  fields. 

An  example  of  a  mutually  beneficial  exchange 
is  Oscar  Barahona  Streber  of  Costa  Rica,  who 
came  to  the  United  States  in  1945  to  study  our 
civil-service  laws  and  social  legislation.    He  had 


April    10,    J 949 


already  compiled  Costa  Rica's  codigo  del  trahajo 
and  the  ganmtias  sociales  and  was  an  adviser 
on  labor  matters  to  liis  Government.  To  assist  Mr. 
Barahona,  the  Department  of  State  awarded  him 
a  six-month  field  study  j?rant  which  enabled  him 
to  continue  research  in  his  field. 

Partly  as  a  result  of  his  work  in  the  United 
States  he  was  recalled  to  Costa  Rica  to  draw  up 
their  civil-service  law.  As  a  further  result  of  his 
studies,  he  was  later  called  upon  by  the  Govern- 
ment of  Guatemala  to  assist  in  drawing  up  social 
legislation  of  great  importance  to  that  country  and 
in  establishing  the  Instituto  Guatemalteco  de 
Seguridad  Social,  of  which  he  is  President.  In 
June  1948,  the  Guatemalan  Government  presented 
to  Mr.  Barahona  the  "Orden  del  Quetzal"  in  recog- 
nition of  his  services  to  the  country. 

In  writing  of  his  studies  in  the  United  States, 
Mr.  Barahona  makes  the  following  remarks  about 
the  general  value  of  his  stay  in  the  United  States : 

"While  studying  here  I  have  learned  to  speak 
and  write  fairly  the  English  language;  I  have 
been  making  lots  of  friends  and  pei-sonal  acquaint- 
ances, who  enable  me  to  know  exactly  which  are 
your  ways  of  thinking  and  your  social  realities; 
I  am  nowadays  familiar  and  extremely  fond  of 
the  American  way  of  life;  I  have  been  visiting 
museums,  theatres,  galleries,  monuments,  collec- 
tions of  painting  and  numerous  other  places  of 
art ;  and  not  to  make  this  a  very  large  enumeration, 
I  must  tell  you  that  I  have  tried  to  be  as  open- 
minded  as  possible  in  order  to  grasp  all  that  I  can 
of  this  wonderful  environment." 

Dr.  C.  E.  Pomes,  of  Guatemala,  was  awarded  a 
fellowship  in  1944  to  pursue  studies  in  dentistry  at 
the  University  of  Chicago.  Following  his  work 
at  Chicago,  Dr.  Pomes  accepted  a  fellowship  to 
teach  and  undertake  further  studies  at  Northwest- 
ern University  Dental  School.  On  his  return  to 
Guatemala,  Dr.  Pomes  wrote,  "I  wish  to  express  at 
this  time  my  sincerest  gratitude  to  the  Department 
of  State  for  its  valuable  assistance  to  further  my 
knowledge  in  dental  science.  I  bought  a  substan- 
tial amount  of  scientific  material  for  my  school 
and  have  a  number  of  plans  to  further  dental 
education  in  Guatemala. 

Another  type  of  exchange  is  exemplified  by  ac- 
tivities undertaken  several  years  ago  during  an 
outbreak  of  poliomyelitis  in  Ecuador.  The  Gov- 
ernment of  Ecuador  asked  the  United  States  for 
an  orthopedic  surgeon  to  work  with  the  Ecuadoran 
public-health  administration  and  a  technician  to 


organize  hospital  techniques  for  getting  the  af- 
flicted children  back  on  their  feet.  After  the  sur- 
geon had  been  in  Ecuador  for  several  months  and 
her  work  had  been  reported  in  the  newspapers,  she 
was  approached  on  the  street  one  day  by  a  taxi 
driver,  who  took  off  his  sombrero  and  said, 
"Senorita,  I  am  sent  by  my  fellow  taxi  drivers  to 
tell  you  how  grateful  we  are  for  what  you  are  do- 
ing for  the  children  of  Ecuador.  They  asked  me 
to  tell  you  that  if  at  any  time  of  the  day  or  night 
you  need  a  taxi,  they  are  at  your  service.'' 

After  the  surgeon  returned  to  the  United  States, 
the  American  technician  remained  to  help  reor- 
ganize the  National  School  of  Social  Service  in 
Ecuador.  A  member  of  the  faculty  of  the  school 
came  to  Washington  for  training  in  the  Children's 
Bureau.  Last  June  the  school  graduated  its  first 
class  of  17  specialists,  most  of  whom  were  taken 
into  the  Ecuadoran  Government  to  continue  their 
work.  Meanwhile  the  United  States  had  been 
sending  to  Ecuador  translations  in  Spanish  of 
widely-known  authoritative  books  on  children's 
problems. 

Cooperative  agricultural  experiment  stations 
are  maintained  in  a  number  of  Latin  American 
countries.  At  these  stations  American  technical 
experts  work  side  by  side  with  local  technicians  on 
soil,  fertilizer,  crop,  and  pest  problems.  For  ex- 
ample, a  farmer  came  to  the  San  Andres  Valley 
Station  in  El  Salvador  for  advice  on  corn  pro- 
duction. After  a  study  of  his  farm,  specialists 
from  the  station  recommended  the  use  of  sodium 
nitrate  fertilizer.  The  farmer,  after  following 
the  station's  advice,  reported  a  tripled  corn  yield. 

Several  years  ago  production  of  the  cocoa  bean 
in  Ecuador  was  steadily  declining  because  of  a 
disease  which  in  twenty  j'ears  reduced  production 
approximately  75  percent.  Ecuadoran  cocoa 
production,  comparable  in  importance  to  cotton 
growing  in  the  United  States,  affects  employment, 
government  revenue,  and  many  other  economic  and 
social  conditions.  In  addition  to  the  hardship 
caused  Ecuadorans  by  the  decline  of  this  crop, 
American  chocolate  manufacturers  began  to  ex- 
perience increasing  difficulty  in  obtaining  adequate 
supplies  of  Ecuadoran  cocoa  bean.  By  agree- 
ment between  the  United  States  Department  of 
Agriculture  and  the  Ecuadoran  Ministry  of  Ag- 
riculture a  joint  experiment  station  was  set  up. 
The  United  States  supplied  the  technical  experts; 
Ecuador  furnished  the  land,  buildings,  and  local 
staff  required.     Within  two  years  the  experiment 

DepaMmeni  of  State  Bulletin 


station  had  developed  two  specific  insecticides  and 
fungicides  for  treating  the  disease. 

Long-range  research  programs  of  this  kind  have 
been  developed  in  collaboration  with  Brazil,  Cuba, 
Ecuador,  El  Salvador,  Guatemala,  Nicaragua,  and 
Peru.  Each  experiment  station  is  governed  by  a 
supervisory  commission  on  which  both  the  United 
States  and  the  other  country  are  represented. 
Projects  are  under  the  guidance  of  United  States 
technicians,  who  assist  local  technicians  in  acquir- 
ing increased  technical  knowledge.  As  the  local 
technicians  gain  experience,  they  assume  increas- 
ing responsibility  for  the  M'ork  of  the  station. 
Projects  include  soil  technology,  plant  diseases 
and  pests,  farm  building  construction,  drainage 
and  irrigation,  crop  rotation,  and  studies  of  the 
uses  of  fertilizers. 

Work  at  the  agricultural  experiment  stations 
is  based  on  the  fact  that  the  economies  of  the 
other  American  republics  are  primarily  agricul- 
tural and  that  increased  production  of  complemen- 
tary crops  will  raise  living  standards,  add  to  the 
purchasing  power  of  the  countries,  and  aid  in  de- 
veloping more  stable  and  diversified  economies. 
Here  is  the  good-neighbor  policy  at  work. 

In  Sao  F'aulo,  Brazil,  during  1948  over  6,700 
persons  attended  English  classes  of  the  Uniao 
Cultural  Brazil-Estados  Unidos,  using  American 
teaching  materials  supplied  by  this  center.  The 
Uniao  is  one  of  twenty-eight  such  cultural  centers 
in  the  other  American  republics.  Persons  study- 
ing English  at  these  centers  pay  for  their  lessons 
and  the  receipts,  and  other  local  revenue  secured 
by  the  centers  cover  more  than  sixty  percent  of 
the  cost  of  operating  the  centers.  The  United 
States  Government  contributes  the  remainder  of 
the  cost. 

The  cultural  centers  are  independent  organiza- 
tions cooperatively  directel  by  local  boards  com- 
posed of  American  residents  and  nationals  of  the 
countries  in  which  they  are  located. 

President  Truman  in  his  inaugural  address  on 
January  20  pointed  out  that  "our  imponderable 
resources  in  technical  knowledge  are  constantly 
growing  and  are  inexhaustible"  and  that  by  mak- 
ing them  available  to  other  peoples  we  can  lielp 
them  to  realize  their  aspirations  for  a  better  life. 

A  project  in  which  this  type  of  technical  assist- 
ance is  being  made  available  to  the  mutual  benefit 
of  the  United  States  and  the  other  nations  con- 
cerned is  the  preparation  for  the  1950  census  of 
the  jVmericas.     Periodic  censuses  of  population, 

April  10,   1949 


agriculture,  mining,  industry,  business,  housing, 
and  other  subjects  are  essential  to  an  analysis  of 
the  economic  and  social  problems  of  any  country. 
There  are  serious  gaps  in  information  of  this  kind 
concerning  many  of  the  countries  of  the  Western 
Hemisphere. 

Eecognizing  this  lack,  the  Inter-American  Sta- 
tistical Institute  in  1946  appointed  a  committee 
composed  of  one  technician  from  each  country  to 
develop  procedures  and  standards  to  be  used  in 
taking  a  hemisphere  census  in  1950.  The  United 
States  Government  has  been  actively  aiding  in 
preparations  for  the  census  by  giving  technical 
assistance  to  ofiicials  preparing  for  the  census, 
by  assisting  in  integrating  census  work  with  re- 
lated statistical  activities,  and  by  strengthening 
statistical  staffs  and  organizations. 

United  States  assistance  has  included  the  send- 
ing of  consultants  to  the  other  American  repub- 
lics and  training  Latin  American  statisticians  in 
this  country.  Special  statistical  consultant  serv- 
ices have  been  provided  to  Costa  Rica,  Cuba,  Ecua- 
dor, Honduras,  Panama,  Paraguay,  Peru,  and 
Uruguay  in  the  fields  of  foreign  trade,  agricul- 
ture, labor,  prices,  vital  statistics,  and  national 
income. 

Nearly  one  hundred  technicians  have  been 
awarded  training  gi'ants  for  intensive  study  in 
the  United  States  of  census  and  other  statistical 
metliods.  A  number  of  young  economists  and 
statisticians  have  come  to  the  United  States  for 
advanced  study. 

The  attitude  of  local  peoples  to  the  American 
libraries  in  other  countries  is  typified  by  a  recent 
incident  of  the  United  States  Information  Service 
library  in  Shanghai.  A  devoted  reader  of  medical 
books  at  the  library  told  the  desk  attendant  one 
morning  that  he  was  sure  he  had  identified  one  of 
the  library's  books  on  sale  in  a  second-hand  book- 
shop. When  the  library  staff  investigated,  they 
found  that  several  b»ooks  had  been  stolen,  the 
identifying  library  stamps  defaced  or  removed, 
and  the  books  offered  for  sale.  The  interest  of 
local  people  in  the  maintenance  of  American  li- 
braries has  led  to  many  incidents  illustrating  the 
value  which  is  placed  on  the  books  and  facilities 
made  available  by  the  United  States  Information 
Service.  Sixty-six  libraries  containing  a  cross 
section  of  America's  literary,  scholastic,  and  tech- 
nical traditions  are  today  being  maintained  in  44 
countries.  These  libraries,  like  good  libraries  in 
the  United  States,  have  in  addition  to  their  book 


collection,  a  broad  selection  of  United  States  Gov- 
ernment documents,  subscriptions  to  American 
periodicals,  music  scores,  and  commercial  record- 
ings of  American  music.  It  is  hoped  to  expand  the 
number  of  libraries  to  80  and  to  add  around 
50,000  volumes  as  well  as  several  hundred  thou- 
sand technical  documents,  ^Vmerican  magazines. 
and  congressional  and  other  significant  publica- 
tions to  their  collections. 

With  millions  of  people  throughout  the  world 
eager  to  learn  more  about  the  United  States,  its 
people  and  their  way  of  life,  the  Information  and 
Educational  Exchange  Program  is  becoming  an  in- 
creasingly important  factor  in  supplementing  the 
private  media  of  information  and  exchange  in  fur- 
nishing a  true  picture  of  America  and  thus  helping 
to  promote  mutual  understanding  among  peoples 
in  all  parts  of  the  world.  The  American  libraries 
in  foreign  cities  have  become  focal  points  for  con- 
tacts between  nationals  of  the  countries  in  which 
they  are  located  and  the  best  of  American  litera- 
ture, art,  music,  technical,  and  scientific  writings. 
The  role  of  the  government's  information  program 
is  to  make  available  information  about  the  United 
States  where  it  would  be  unprofitable  or  otherwise 
impossible  for  private  American  groups  or  enter- 
prises to  operate. 

In  several  countries  of  Eastern  Europe,  Ameri- 
can books  and  magazines  are  difficult  if  not  im- 
possible to  obtain.  However  access  to  American 
thought  is  maintained  through  these  United  States 
libraries  even  though  citizens  of  these  nations  are 
discouraged  in  many  ways  from  using  this  source 
of  information.  So  eager  are  citizens  of  these 
countries  to  study  American  books,  that  in  spite  of 
persecution,  they  are  resorting  to  a  number  of 
methods  for  obtaining  books.  One  of  these  was 
sending  an  elderly,  illiterate  peasant  woman  to  the 
library  to  borrow  technical  treatises  on  medical 
engineering  and  other  scientific  subjects. 

A  technical  school  in  an  Eastern  Euroj^ean  coun- 
try recently  wrote  to  the  American  library : 

"We  wish  to  express  our  deep  gratitude  for  of- 
fering to  allow  us  to  consult  American  reviews  and 
technical  books  from  the  American  Library.  Al- 
though some  time  has  elapsed  since  the  end  of  the 
war,  it  has  not  been  possible  for  us  to  renew  our 
subscriptions  to  scientific  i-eviews  or  to  procure 
those  American  technical  books  which  are  so  im- 
portant for  us  and  which  we  need  in  our  scientific 

•Department  of  State  publication  3313. 
442 


work.  Tliis  same  situation  also  prevails  in  other 
branches.  The  interruption  of  cultural  contacts 
with  other  countries  will  have  serious  eflfects  on  the 
progress  of  civilization  in  this  country  and  this 
situation  is  becoming  more  serious  with  the  pass- 
ing of  time.  Were  it  not  for  the  American 
Library,  our  isolation  would  have  been  complete. 
The  American  generosity  in  opening  this  Library 
has  greatly  alleviated  one  of  the  most  fatal  conse- 
quencies  of  the  war." 

Refusing  to  pull  down  an  Iron  Curtain  on  this 
side  of  the  Atlantic,  the  United  States  has  adopted 
the  policy  of  stimulating  private  exchange-of- 
persons  programs,  maintaining  at  the  same  time 
its  standards  for  assurance  of  safeguards  against 
subversive  activities.  Government-supported  ex- 
changes, however,  will  not  be  initiated  before  funds 
are  provided  nor  before  the  other  Governments 
evidence  a  desire  to  cooperate  in  the  helpful  and 
friendly  spirit  of  the  Smith-Mundt  Act.  Although 
this  policy  had  been  in  eflFect  for  some  time  on 
informal  case-by-case  basis,  it  was  formally 
adopted  as  a  result  of  recommendations  by  the 
United  States  Advisory  Commission  on  Educa- 
tional Exchange  on  October  19, 1948.^  This  Com- 
mission urged  in  its  report  to  the  Secretary  that 
we  not  close  our  doors  to  all  contacts  with  those 
nations  whose  philosophy  disagrees  with  ours. 
The  report  maintained  that  for  the  United  States 
to  cut  off  contacts  with  totalitarian  nations 
through  fear  of  the  effects  of  such  contacts  on  our 
democratic  institutions  implies  weakness  in  our 
own  institutions. 

The  policies  and  activities  of  the  State  Depart- 
ment's Educational  Exchange  Program  are  an 
arm  of  United  States  foreign  policy — one  of  the 
ways  in  which  the  United  States  is  continually 
seeking  to  achieve  international  peace  and  secu- 
rity, increased  material  well-being  for  its  own  and 
other  peoples,  and  the  extension  and  protection  of 
fundamental  human  rights  and  freedoms. 

Vigorous  efforts  b}-  the  government  to  supple- 
ment private  activities  in  the  field  of  educational 
and  cultural  intercliange  are  helping  to  achieve 
the  objectives  of  United  States  foreign  policj'. 
The  promotion  of  international  understanding 
througli  tlie  exchange  of  persons  and  ideas  is  one 
of  the  strongest  weapons  we  have  in  the  struggle 
to  maintain  democratic  institutions  against  the 
subtle  attempts  by  totalitarian  states  to  under- 
mine human  liberty  and  freedom. 

DeparfmenI  of  State  Bulletin 


Resolutions  and  Decisions  of  Eighth  Session  of  the  ECOSOC 


U.N.  doc.  E/1309 
Dated  Mar.  24,  1949 


The  following  is  a  list  of  resolutions  and  de- 
cisions of  the  Council  at  its  eighth  session.  The 
number  under  which  each  will  appear  in  printed 


form  in  the  five  official  languages  is  given  (VIII 
denotes  the  eighth  session) ,  together  with  the  doc- 
ument symbol  under  which  it  has  been  issued  in 
mimeographed  form  and  the  agenda  item  to  which 
it  relates : 


Agenda  item  no.' 


16 
17 
18 
54 

19 

20 
52 

21 
22 
23 

24 

25 

26 

28 

27 

6 
14 
3 
7 

29 

41 
32 

33 

8 

34 
36 

11 
35 

30 

31 
38 

39 

15 


World  economic  situation 

Economic  development  of  under-developed  countries  .... 

Technical  assistance  for  economic  development 

Creation  of  a  central  publication  for  the  promotion  of  and 

advising  on  development  projects. 
Report  of  the   Food  and  Agriculture   Organization  of  the 

United  Nations  on  progress  in  the  co-ordination  of  studies 

of  suitable  measures  to  bring  about  an  increase  in  food 

production. 

The  problem  of  wasting  food  in  certain  countries 

Availability  of  DDT  insecticides  for  combatting  malaria  in 

agricultural  areas. 

Proceeds  of  sale  of  Unrra  supplies 

Interim  report  of  the  Economic  Commission  for  Europe     .    . 
Interim  report  of  the  Economic  Commission  for  Asia  and 

the  Far  East. 
Interim    report    of   the    Economic    Commission    for    Latin 

America. 
Report  of  the  International  Bank  for  Reconstruction  and 

Development. 

Report  of  the  International  Monetary  Fund 

General    Assembly   resolution    217    (III)    regarding   human 

rights. 
Report  of  the  third  session  of  the  Commission  on  Human 

Rights. 

Trade  union  rights  (freedom  of  association) 

Infringements  of  trade  union  rights 

Survey  of  forced  labour  and  measures  for  its  abolition     .    .    . 
Principle  of  equal  pay  for  equal  work  for  men  and    women 

workers. 
Sub-Commissions  on   Freedom  of  Information  and  of  the 

Press. 

Declaration  of  old  age  rights 

Question  of  procedure  for  the  election  of  members  of  the 

Commission  on  Narcotic  Drugs. 
Annual  report  of  the  Permanent  Central  Opium  Board  .    .    . 
Administrative  arrangements  between  the  Council  and  the 

Permanent  Central  Opium  Board. 
Appointment  of  members  of  the  commission  of  inquiry  into 

the  effects  of  chewing  the  coca  leaf. 
Teaching  of  the  purposes  and  principles,  the  structure  and 

activities  of  the  United  Nations  in  the  schools  of  Member 

States. 

Translation  of  the  classics 

Use  of  the  central  library  at  Geneva  by  the  United  Nations 

and  the  specialized  agencies. 
Reports  of  the  Executive  Board  of  the  International  Chil- 
dren's Emergency  Fund. 

United  Nations  Appeal  for  Children 

Report  of  the  International  Refugee  Organization  on  resettle- 
ment of  non-repatriable  refugees  and  displaced  persons. 
Procedure  to  be  followed  in  connection  with  the  draft   con- 
vention on  declaration  of  death  of  missing  persons. 
Implementation  of  recommendations  on  economic  and  social 

matters. 


E/1195 
E/1215 
E/1216 
E/1263 

E/1258 


E/1259 
E/1262 

E/1156 
E/1274 
E/1275 

E/1276 

E/1260 

E/1261 
E/1162 

E/1163/Rev.  1 

E/1300 
E/1236 
E/1237 
E/1177 

E/1193 

E/1219 
E/1205 

E/1203 
E/1202 

E/1204 

E/1155/Rev.  1 


E/1250 
E/1157 


E/1306 


E/1305 
E/1251 


E/1220 
E/1307 


April   JO,    1949 


RcsolutloD  no. 

Agenda  Item  no.' 

Title 

Document 

211  (VIII)      .    .    . 

42 

Relations  with  and  co-ordination  of  specialized  agencies  .    . 

E/1178 

212  (VIII)      .    .    . 

Suppl.  item  3  .    . 

Convention  on  privileges  and  imnniiiiiies  of  the  specialized 
agencies:  Annex  relating  to  the  International  Refugee  Or- 
ganization. 

E/I253 

213  (VIII)     .    .    . 

53 

Application  of  Ceylon  for  raembership  in  the  United  Nations 
Educational,  Scientific  and  Cultural  Organization. 

E/1153 

214  (VIII)      .    .    . 

9 

47 

Reports  of  the  Council  Nao  Committee 

E/1179 

215  (VIII)     .    .    . 

Distribution  of  membership  in  subsidiary  organs  of  the  Eco- 

E/1152 

nomic  and  Social  Council. 

216  (VIII)      .    .    . 

55 

Report  of  the  Joint  Committee  of  the  Economic  and  Social 
Council  and  the  Trusteeship  Council  on  arrangements  for 

E/1154 

co-operation  in  matters  of  common  concern. 

217  (VIII)      .    .    . 

43 

Revision  of  the  rules  of  procedure  of  the  Council 

E/1304 

218  (VIII)      .    .    . 

49 

44 

Agenda  Committee 

E/1289 
E/1299 

219  (VIII)      .    .    . 

Revision  of  the  rules  of  procedure  of  the  functional  commis- 

220  (VIII)      .    .    . 

13 

Draft  rules  for  the  calling  of  international  conferences     .    .    . 

E/1221 

DECISIONS 

(a) 

1 

58 

Election  of  officers  of  the  Council 

See  E/SR.226 
See  E/SR.282 

(b) 

Election  of  members  of  the  Agenda  Committee 

(c) 

57 

Confirmation  of  members  of  functional  commissions    .... 

See    E/1235,    E/- 
1235/Add  1,  E/- 
1235/ Add  l/Corr 

1,  E/1235/ Add. 

2,  E/1235 /Add. 
3,E/SR.272and 

(d) 

45  (i) 

Interim  Committee  on  Programme  of  Meetings 

See  E/SR.231 

(e) 

45  (ii) 

Date  of  the  second  session  of  the  Sub-Commission  on  the 
Prevention  of  Discrimination  and  the  Protection  of  Minor- 
ities. 

Deferment  of  agenda  items 

See  E/SR.232 

(f) 

(') 

See   E/SR.227, 
272,  and  282 

(g) 

50 

Discharge  of  agenda  item 

See  E/SR.282 

'  See  documents  E/1090  and  E/1090/Corr.  1. 
»  Items  deferred:  4,  5,  10,  12,  37,  40,  46. 


Current  United  Nations  Documents:  A  Selected  Bibliography^ 


27   pp. 


Security  Council 

Official  Records  of  the  Second  Year 

No   69,   174th   meeting:   4   August   1947. 

printed.     25^. 

Supplement  No.  13. 

Supplement  No.  14. 

Supplement  No.  15. 

Supplement  No.  16. 

Supplement  No.  17. 

Supplement  No.  10. 

Official  Records  of  the  Third  Year 

360th  Meeting:  28  September  1948,  No.  112. 

Printed.     30^. 

Supplement  for  September  1948.    10  pp.    Printed.    100 

361st    Meeting:    4   October    1948.     No.   113.     30   pp. 

Printed.     30^. 


s 

pp. 

printed. 

10*. 

3 

pp. 

printed. 

10*. 

4 

pp. 

printed. 

10*. 

2 

pp. 

printed. 

10*. 

3 

pp. 

printed. 

10*. 

9 

pp. 

printed. 

10*. 

30  pp. 


'Printed  materials  may  be  secured  in  the  United  States 
from  the  Inteinatlonal  Documents  Service,  Columbia 
University  Press,  2960  Broadway,  New  York  27,  N.  Y. 
Other  materials  (mimeographed  or  processed  documents) 
may  be  consulted  at  certain  designated  libraries  in  the 
United  States. 


-362nd  Meeting :  5  October  1,  1948.     No.  114.     23  pp, 

Printed.     25*. 
-363r(l  and  364th  Meetings :  6  October  1948.    No.  115, 

46  pp.     Printed.     50(!i. 
-365th   Meeting;  14  October  1948.     No.   116.     38  pp. 

Printed.     40*. 
-366th   Meeting:  15  October  1948.     No.  117.     17  pp. 

Printed.     20^. 
-367th  and  36Sth  Meetings:  19  October  1948.    No.  118. 

67  pp.     Printed.     700. 
-369th.   370th   and   371st   Meetings:  22  October  1948. 

No.  119.     IS  pp.     Printed.     20*. 
-372nd   .Meeting:  25  October  1948.     No.   120.     14  pp, 

Printed.     15*. 
-373rd  Meeting:  26  October  1948.     No.   121.     27  pp. 

Printed.     .30*. 
-374th   Meeting:  28  October  1948.     No.   122.     40  pp. 

Printed.     40*. 
-375th   Meeting:  29  October  1948.     No.   123.     25  pp. 

Printed.     25*. 
-Supplement  for  October  1948.    72  pp.     Printed.    70f!. 
-376th  and  377th  Meetings:  4  November  1948;  378th 

Meeting:  9  November  1948;  379th  Meeting:  10  No- 
vember 1948.     No.  124.     64  pp.     Printed,     mi. 
— No.  130.     3S,'')th  and  386th  meetings:  17  December 

1948     37  pp.     printed.     35*. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations 


Italian  Colonies 

John  Foster  Dulles,  U.S.  Representative,  initi- 
ated the  debate  in  Committee  I  (Political  and  Se- 
curity), consisting  of  58  members,  on  the  disposal 
of  Italy's  prewar  colonies  in  Africa.  His  specific 
suggestions  were  that  eastern  Eritrea  be  ceded  to 
Ethiopia;  that  Italy  be  invited  to  administer 
Italian  Somaliland  under  a  trusteeship;  and 
that  Cyrenaica,  which  is  in  eastern  Libya,  be 
placed  under  British  administration,  regardless  of 
whether  the  General  Assembly  decided  to  deal 
with  Libya  as  a  whole  or  in  part.  Mr.  Dulles  said 
that  Libya  should  be  placed  under  the  U.  N. 
trusteeship  system  with  primary  emphasis  on 
achieving  early  independence.  He  also  urged 
finding  a  separate  solution  for  western  Eritrea, 
which  is  more  closely  allied  to  the  peoples  to  its 
west. 

Mr.  Dulles  gave  two  principles  as  a  basis  for  his 
suggestions :  first,  that  the  interests  of  the  inliabi- 
tants  are  paramount,  and  second,  that  regard 
should  be  had  for  international  peace  and  security. 

Prior  to  the  U.S.  statement,  Ethiopia  renewed 
her  bid  to  receive  two  of  the  colonies,  Eritrea  and 
Italian  Somaliland.  Italy  has  expressed  the  view 
that  she  should  be  granted  administration  over  all 
three. 

Approval  of  a  United  States  motion  per- 
mitted Italian  participation  in  the  Committee's 
discussion. 

Human  Rights  in  Bulgaria  and  Hungary 

After  a  lengthy  debate,  the  General  Committee 
of  the  General  Assembly  voted  on  April  7,  11  to  2, 
(U.S.S.R.  and  Poland),  to  include  in  the  General 
Assembly  agenda  a  combination  of  the  Bolivian- 
proposed  item  on  the  Mindszenty  case  and  the  Aus- 
tralian proposal  on  the  observance  of  fundamental 
freedoms  and  human  rights  in  Bulgaria  and 
Hungary.  The  United  States  had  proposed  com- 
bining these  two  items,  and  as  amended  by  Aus- 
tralia, the  item  reads :  "Having  regard  to  the  pro- 
visions of  the  Charter  and  of  the  peace  treaties, 
the  question  of  the  observance  in  Bulgaria  and 
Hungary  of  human  rights  and  fundamental  free- 
doms, including  questions  of  religious  and  civil 
liberties,  with  special  reference  to  recent  trials  of 
church  leaders." 

Palestine 

A  general  armistice  agreement  between  Israel 
and  Hashemite  Jordan  Kingdom  [Transjordan] 
was  signed  in  Rhodes  April  3  by  their  delegations 
after  33  days  of  negotiations.  Thus  all  of  Israel's 
immediate  neighbors  except  Syria  have  signed 

April   TO,    1949 


armistice  documents  as  a  major  step  toward  a 
permanent  peace  settlement  in  Palestine. 

Discussions  of  the  Palestine  Conciliation  Com- 
mission with  representatives  of  six  Arab  states 
in  Beirut  on  implementation  of  the  General  As- 
sembly resolution  on  repatriation  of  refugees 
came  to  a  close  on  April  5.  Five  of  the  Arab 
states,  Egyi^t,  Lebanon,  Saudi  Arabia,  Syria,  and 
Ti'ansjordan,  approved  the  Commission's  sugges- 
tion to  continue  the  exchange  of  views  on  a  broader 
basis  with  all  governments  concerned  in  the  near 
future  at  some  neutral  place.  The  representative 
of  Iraq  declared  that  in  the  view  of  his  Govern- 
ment, there  would  be  no  useful  purpose  in  con- 
tinuing the  exchange  of  views  before  the  refugee 
problem  is  solved. 

Commission  on  Status  of  Women 

More  than  a  score  of  proposals,  aimed  at  help- 
ing women  everywhere  to  lead  a  fuller  and  happier 
life  on  the  basis  of  equality  with  men,  were  made 
at  the  third  session  of  the  Commission  on  the 
Status  of  Women  which  is  now  drawing  to  a  close. 

The  proposed  measures  include  steps  to  secure 
voting  and  other  political  rights  for  women  the 
world  over,  to  remove  outdated,  conflicting  na- 
tionality laws  which  often  deprive  married  or 
divorced  women  of  their  nationality  and  even 
confound  the  citizenship  status  of  their  children, 
to  improve  educational  and  professional  facilities 
for  women  in  metropolitan  as  well  as  in  depend- 
ent areas,  and  to  give  increasing  recognition  to 
the  principle  that  women  doing  the  same  work 
as  men  should  be  paid  equal  wages. 

In  the  field  of  equal  pay  for  equal  work,  the 
resolution  decided  to  enlist  the  aid  of  the  Ilo 
in  drawing  up  a  plan  to  secure  international  aboli- 
tion of  restrictions  on  the  pay  of  women  workers 
and  to  grant  women  the  equal  technical  training 
and  access  to  jobs.  After  studying  numerous  re- 
ports showing  gross  discrimination  in  the  field 
of  education  in  many  comitries,  the  Commission 
decided  to  request  the  Secretary-General  to  organ- 
ize  a   world-wide   study,   in   collaboration   with 

UNESCO. 

Indonesia 

Secretary  Acheson  in  his  talk  with  the  Nether- 
lands' Foreign  Minister,  Dirk  U.  Stikker,  reiter- 
ated the  hope  that  the  instructions  sent  from  the 
Security  Council  to  the  Commission  for  Indonesia 
on  March  23  be  put  into  effect  at  the  earliest  possi- 
ble date. 

This  March  23  resolution  called  on  the  Cormnis- 
sion  for  Indonesia,  of  which  the  United  States  is 


a  member,  to  assist  the  Dutch  and  Republican 
authorities  to  reach  agreement  on  three  points: 
(1)  restoration  of  tlie  republican  government  in 
its  capital,  now  occupied  by  the  Dutch;  (2)  dis- 
continuance of  Dutch  military  action  and  of  re- 
publican guerrilla  operations;  and  (3)  the  time 
and  conditions  for  holding  a  subsequent  confer- 
ence at  The  Hague  to  negotiate  a  final  settlement 
of  the  over-all  Indonesian  dispute. 

Mr.  Stikker,  who  was  in  Washington  to  partici- 
pate in  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  signing,  after 
making  cleiir  that  the  suggestions  of  the  Security 
Council  have  been  accepted  by  the  Netherlands 
Government,  expressed  similar  desires  and  out- 
lined to  the  Secretary  the  paths  along  which  he 
believed  progress  could  be  achieved  most  effec- 
tively. 

Australia  and  India  have  asked  for  discussion 
of  the  Indonesian  situation  by  the  General  As- 
ssembly  at  this  session.  Though  the  Assembly  can- 
not make  any  recommendations  while  the  item 
is  on  the  Security  Council  agenda,  it  can  discuss 
the  question. 

Promotion  of  International  Cooperation  in 
Political  Field 

The  Ad  Hoc  Political  Committee  of  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  approved  on  April  7  a  recommenda- 
tion of  the  Interim  Committee  dealing  with  IT. S.- 
Chinese proposal  for  creation  of  a  panel  of  ex- 
perts to  serve  on  commissions  of  inquiry  and  con- 
ciliation. There  was  strong  Soviet  opposition  and 
the  six  nations  forming  the  Slav  bloc  voted  against 
the  proposal.  Tliis  recommendation,  together 
with  three  others  which  have  already  been  dealt 
with  by  the  Ad  Hoc  Political  Committee  and  now 
await  action  liy  the  General  xVssembly,  represents 
specific  proposals  submitted  by  the  Interim  Com- 
mittee in  its  report  to  the  General  Assembly. 

U.N.  Special  Committee  on  the  Balkans 

The  U.N.  Special  Committee  on  the  Balkans, 
on  which  tlie  United  States  is  represented,  has 
ordered  its  northern  Greek  border  observation 
teams  to  report  whether  aid  from  Albania,  Bul- 
garia, and  Yugoslavia  to  the  Greek  guerrillas  has 
increased  within  recent  months.  The  Greek  Gov- 
ernment has  pre.sented  new  complaints  to  the  Sec- 
retarj'-General  as  evidence  of  increasing  aid  to 
guerrillas,  one  of  which  alleges  that  late  last  month 
a  guerrilla  brigade  of  some  800  men  entered  Al- 
bania, obtained  fresh  supplies,  and  then  slipped 
back  across  the  border  into  Greece. 


International  Refugee  Organization 

'I'iie  Iro's  General  Council  of  10  members  is  de- 
bating in  Geneva  whether  to  approve  an  extension 
of  one  year  of  the  Iro,  which  expires  Jidy  1,  1950. 
Although  each  of  the  Council's  members  has  ex- 
pressed his  government's  views,  no  final  vote  has 
tjeen  taken.  According  to  Director  General  Wil- 
liam Hallam  Tuck,  "It  has  been  my  impression 
that  there  has  been  in  a  broad  sense  a  general 
recognition — often  a  reluctant  recognition — of  the 
fact  that  some  functions  of  Iro  must  continue  be- 
yond the  original  target  date  for  termination." 
Mr.  Tuck  favors  a  j'ear's  extension  for  resettlement 
work,  but  suggested  that  the  care  and  maintenance 
of  refugees  in  camps  cease  in  June  1950. 

World  Medical  Council  Planned 

A  conference  composed  of  representatives  from 
more  than  oO  nongovernmental  health  agencies  be- 
gan April  1  at  Brussels  to  consider  creation  of  a 
permanent  council  to  coordinate  congresses  of 
medical  science  on  a  world-wide  basis.  This  con- 
ference is  being  held  under  the  sponsorship  of 
l^NKsco  and  the  World  Health  Organization.  The 
jjermanent  council  would  strive  to  unify  the  work 
of  medical  congi-esses  and  other  agencies,  inter- 
nationally, in  order  to  avoid  duplication  of  studies 
and  gathering.  World  scientific  gi'oups  would 
have  a  central  bureau  of  information.  In  addi- 
tion, the  permanent  council  is  expected  to  give 
financial  assistance  to  scientific  works  of  con- 
gresses and  to  organize  courses  in  connection  with 
such  gatherings  for  the  benefit  of  i)hysicians. 

Conservation  and  Utilization  of  Resources 

Secretary  C)f  the  Interior  Krug  has  announced 
the  names  of  119  outstanding  United  States  scien- 
tists and  experts  who  will  present  treatises  at  the 
U.N.  Scientific  Conference  on  the  Conservation 
and  Utilization  of  Resources  convening  August  17 
at  Lake  Success.  This  world  meeting  to  pool  the 
most  advanced  scientific  knowledge  oi  resources  of 
all  nations  was  proposed  by  President  Truman  in 
September  1946.  The  conference  will  have  no 
policy-making  responsibilities,  since  the  experts 
will  represent  the  sciences  rather  than  govern- 
ments. During  the  three-week  conference,  experts 
will  exchange  ideas  and  experiences  on  the  tech- 
niques of  resources  conservation  and  use.  costs  and 
l)enefits,  and  tested  waj's  of  setting  projects  into 
operation. 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


INTERNATIONAL  ORGANIZATIONS  AND  CONFERENCES 


Ninth  General  Conference  on  Weights  and  Measures 


BY  DR.  EDWARD  U.  CONDON 
Director,  National  Bureau  of  Standards 


The  Ninth  General  Conference  on  Weights  and 
Measures,  hekl  at  Paris  and  Sevres  October  12-21, 
1948,  marked  the  revival  of  an  international  or- 
ganization which  was  established  by  treaty  in  1875 
and  which  has  held  regular  meetings  since  1889 
with  the  exception  of  interruptions  due  to  the  two 
World  Wars.  The  Eighth  General  Conference 
was  held  in  1933.  The  Ninth  General  Conference 
was  originally  scheduled  for  October  1939  but  was 
postponed  because  of  the  outbreak  of  war  in  Sep- 
tember of  that  year.  The  Conference,  therefore, 
had  to  consider  developments  which  had  taken 
place  over  a  period  of  15  years. 

Thirty-three  countries  now  belong  to  the  inter- 
national organization.  Twenty-eight  of  these 
named  fifty-five  delegates  to  the  Ninth  General 
Conference.  The  United  States  delegates  were  Dr. 
Edward  U.  Condon,  Director  of  the  National  Bu- 
reau of  Standards,  and  Dr.  E.  C.  Crittenden, 
Associate  Director. 

The  International  Bureau  of  Weights  and  Meas- 
ures, located  at  Sevres,  serves  both  as  a  laboratory 
and  as  a  secretariat  for  the  General  Conference  and 
for  the  permanent  International  Committee  on 
Weights  and  Measures.  The  Bureau  was  able  to 
continue  its  work  throughout  the  war  period,  al- 
though working  under  difficult  conditions.  The 
buildings  of  the  Bureau  suffered  some  damage 
from  aerial  bombardment,  but  the  "prototype" 
international  standards  of  length  and  mass,  the 
International  Meter  and  the  International  Kilo- 
gram, were  not  damaged  since  they  were  stored  in 
well-protected,  subterranean  chambers. 

Among  the  functions  of  the  International  Bu- 
reau is  the  periodic  comparison  of  national  stand- 
ards with  the  international  prototypes  stored  at 
Sevres.  At  the  Ninth  General  Conference  the 
Bureau  reported  measurements  on  a  few  national 
meters  and  on  a  considerable  number  of  national 
kilograms.  With  the  exception  of  two  kilograms 
which  were  known  to  have  been  used  a  great  deal, 
no  one  of  the  national  standards  supplied  for  com- 
parison showed  changes  from  its  original  value 
greater  than  the  possible  errors  of  measurement. 
For  example,  among  the  standards  compared  was 
the  kilogram  No.  20,  which  constitutes  the  basic 
standard  of  mass,  or  "weight,"  of  the  United 
States.  This  kilogram  was  compared  with  the  in- 
ternational standards  in  1937.    The  measurements 

April   10,    1949 


obtained  in  1948  differed  from  those  found  in  1937 
by  only  two  parts  in  a  thousand  million. 

In  spite  of  the  excellent  performance  of  the 
platinum-iridium  meter  bars  during  the  60  years 
since  they  were  distributed,  the  search  for  a  less 
arbitrary  standard  of  length  has  gone  on.  In 
particular  it  is  expected  that  eventually  the  wave 
length  of  some  spectral  line  might  be  used  as  such 
a  standard.  Reports  made  to  the  Conference  in- 
dicated very  definite  progress  in  this  direction. 
The  production  of  several  materials  consisting  of 
a  single  isotope  of  an  element  rather  than  a  mixture 
of  several  isotopes  has  made  it  possible  to  obtain 
lines  of  simple  structure  giving  sharp  patterns  in 
the  optical  instruments  by  which  measurements 
are  made.  One  of  the  most  promising  of  these  is 
the  green  line  of  mercury-198,  an  isotope  produced 
by  transmutation  of  gold  under  neutron  bombard- 
ment. While  not  sj^ecifically  mentioning  mer- 
cury-198, the  Conference  formally  recognized  the 
fact  that  spectral  lines  of  this  type  combine  in  the 
highest  degree  the  qualities  required  to  constitute 
satisfactory  standards  of  length.  It  requested  the 
national  laboratories  and  the  International  Bureau 
to  continue  the  study  of  such  lines  with  the  expec- 
tation of  establishing  eventually  a  new  definition 
of  the  meter  based  upon  the  wave  length  of  a 
particular  line  emitted  under  specified  conditions. 

In  the  field  of  electrical  measurements  the  con- 
summation of  the  plan  approved  by  the  Eighth 
Conference,  in  1933,  to  redefine  the  units  so  as  to 
make  them  concordant  with  the  basic  mechanical 
units  of  length,  mass,  and  time  was  reported  to 
the  Conference,  The  revised  values  of  electrical 
units  were  in  fact  introduced  into  use  as  of  Janu- 
ary 1,  1948,  in  accordance  with  action  taken  by 
the  Intei-national  Committee  on  Weights  and 
Measures.^  At  the  same  time  a  new  system  of 
photometric  units  was  introduced  replacing  the 
two  diverse  systems  which  had  been  in  use  previ- 
ously. The  Ninth  General  Conference  confirmed 
both  of  these  actions. 

The  most  important  new  teclmical  development 
dealt  with  by  the  Conference  was  the  adoption  of 
a  revised  text  describing  the  International  Tem- 
perature Scale.  This  scale,  extending  from  — 190° 
C.  to  temperatures  in  the  neighborhood  of  4000°  C, 

'Announced  in  National  Bureau  of  Standards  Circular 
No.  C459. 


has  been  in  use  since  1027.  The  changes  made 
are  largely  in  details  of  procedure  for  making 
measurements  in  various  parts  of  this  range.  The 
lower  limit  to  which  the  scale  is  to  apply  is  raised 
to  the  boiling  point  of  oxygen,  —182.970°  C. ;  the 
upper  range  is  changed  somewhat  and  made  to 
extend  to  extremely  high  temperatures  by  adopt- 
ing improved  constants  and  a  better  expression  for 
the  lelation  between  temperature  and  the  energj' 
radiated  (Planck's  Law  instead  of  Wien's,  and 
1.438  cm-degrees  for  the  second  constant  of  radia- 
tion, instead  of  1.432).  Numerical  values  for 
temperatures  in  the  neighborhood  of  1000°  C.  are 
raised  a  few  tenths  of  a  degree  because  the  melting 
point  of  silver  is  taken  as  960.8°  instead  of  960.5°. 
A  translation  of  the  complete  revised  text  is  being 
published  in  the  March  1949  issue  of  the  Journal 
of  Research  of  the  National  Bureau  of  Standards. 

Incidentally,  as  a  result  of  discussion  of  the  two 
terms  "centigrade"  and  "centesimal,"  which  liave 
been  applied  to  the  temperature  scale  used  in 
metric  countries  and  in  scientific  work  elsewhere, 
the  Conference  recommended  the  adoption  of  the 
name  "celsius"  in  preference  to  either  of  the  two 
other  terms. 

The  International  Temperature  Scale  is  a  prac- 
tical realization  of  the  theoretical  thermodynamic 
scale,  which  has  commonly  been  defined  by  refer- 
ence to  two  fixed  points — the  freezing  point  and 
the  boiling  point  of  water.  Following  a  proposal 
of  the  International  Union  of  Physics,  the  Confer- 
ence recognized  the  possibility  of  defining  an  abso- 
lute thermodynamic  scale  of  temperature  by  fixing 
a  single  fundamental  point,  for  which  the  triple 
point  of  water  would  now  be  taken.  However,  to 
make  a  scale  so  defined  agree  with  the  Kelvin  scale 
now  in  use  it  would  be  necessary  to  determine 
precisely  the  numerical  value  for  that  fixed  point, 
and  on  this  numerical  value  the  Conference  could 
not  agree,  opinion  being  divided  between  273.16° 
and  273.17°  C. 

Another  point  on  which  there  was  much  discus- 
sion was  definition  of  units  of  heat.  The  joule 
was  unanimously  recommended  as  a  preferred 
unit,  but  some  workers  prefer  to  continue  the  use 
of  a  calorie,  and  it  has  not  been  possible  to  reach 
agreement  on  the  definition  of  any  single  unit 
bearing  this  name.  The  Conference,  therefore, 
recommended  that  the  workers  using  the  calorie 
should  furnish  all  the  information  necessary  to 
convert  their  results  into  joules. 


From  various  sources  the  Conference  received 
recommendations  for  the  establishment  of  a  gen- 
eral international  system  of  practical  units. 
(These  recommendations  of  course  referred  to 
metric  units,  since  the  international  organization 
does  not  attempt  to  deal  with  the  Anglo-Saxon 
system  of  units.)  The  French  national  office  of 
weights  and  measures  presented  detailed  proposals 
regarding  such  a  general  system.  The  Conference 
instructed  the  International  Committee  on 
Weights  and  Mea.sures  to  undertake  a  survey  of 
opinions  in  scientific,  technical,  and  pedagogical 
circles  of  all  countries  in  the  hope  of  establishing 
a  single  system  of  units.  Inquiries  to  this  end  will 
be  transmitted  through  official  governmental 
agencies. 

Various  other  technical  questions  were  con- 
sidered by  the  Conference.  One  of  these  which 
may  be  of  general  interest  was  the  naming  of  large 
numbers.  In  many  countries  names  ending  in 
illion  are  applied  to  digits  in  groups  of  six  where- 
as in  other  countries,  including  the  United  States, 
such  names  are  applied  to  groups  of  three  digits. 
For  example,  in  the  United  States  a  thou.sand  mil- 
lion is  called  a  billion  and  a  thousand  billion  a 
trillion,  but  in  Great  Britain  a  "billion"  is  a  million 
million,  and  a  "trillion"  is  a  million  "billion."  In 
tlie  hope  of  reconciling  this  difference  the  Confer- 
ence adopted  a  recommendation  favoring  the  use 
of  six-digit  groups;  but,  since  the  United  States 
delegates  could  not  agree  to  such  a  recommenda- 
tion, the  resolution  as  adopted  proposed  the  use 
of  that  particular  system  in  European  countries. 

In  addition  to  the  technical  problems  mentioned, 
the  Conference  had  also  to  deal  with  various  ad- 
ministrative matters  affecting  the  International 
Bureau.  For  example,  a  new  scale  of  contribu- 
tions to  be  paid  by  member  countries  was  estab- 
lished, and  it  was  agreed  that  the  basic  contribu- 
tion to  the  International  Bureau  should  be  raised 
from  150.000  gold  francs  ($49,005)  to  175,000  gold 
francs  ($57,172.50)  as  soon  as  the  major  countries 
which  are  not  now  able  to  pay  their  dues  (Japan 
and  Germany)  resume  payments  .  The  amount  of 
the  contribution  paid  by  each  member  country 
depends  upon  its  population.  The  United  States, 
one  of  the  largest  countries,  pays  15  percent  of  the 
total.  Event\ially,  therefore,  when  the  new  scale 
comes  into  effect,  the  regular  annual  dues  of  the 
United  States  will  become  26,250  gold  francs 
($8,575.88)  instead  of  22,500  gold  francs  ($7,- 
350.75). 


Deparlment  of  %»aie  Bulletin 


Significance  of  New  International  Wheat  Agreement  to  U.S.  Wheat  Farmers 


STATEMENT  BY  CHARLES  F.  BRANNAN 
Secretary  of  Agriculture 


[Released  to  the  press  by  the 
Department  of  Agriculture  March  23] 

The  United  States  and  other  nations  have  just 
concluded  an  international  wheat  agreement 
which,  if  put  into  effect,  will  be  of  great  benefit 
to  the  farmers  of  this  country. 

It  has  not  been  done  without  difficulty.  This 
agreement  has  been  concluded  only  through  a 
great  demonstration  of  international  cooperation. 

You  know  how  much  the  world  wheat  situa- 
tion has  changed  within  the  jjast  year.  The  se- 
vere shortage  that  prevailed  a  year  ago  has  been 
modified.  The  price  has  dropped  sharply.  These 
changes  weakened  our  hands  and  sti'engthened 
those  of  the  importers.  In  spite  of  that  change 
the  ceiling  price  in  this  agreement  is  only  20  cents 
a  bushel  lower  than  the  agi'eement  drawn  last 
year,  while  the  floor  price  for  the  next  four  years 
is  10  cents  higher  than  was  provided  by  the  1948 
agi-eement.  If  a  world  wheat  surplus  develops, 
that  increase  in  the  floor  will  be  extremely  bene- 
ficial to  U.S.  farmers. 

There  are  three  basic  reasons  why  I  feel  that 
this  agi-eement  is  of  great  benefit  to  our  farmers. 

In  the  fii-st  place,  it  will  stabilize  our  foreign 
market  for  wheat.  Under  this  agreement  we  will 
have  a  guaranteed  market  for  167.5  million  busliels 
of  wheat  each  year.^  In  addition,  we  are  obliged 
to  supply  large  quantities  of  wheat  to  occupied 
areas  in  Germany  and  Japan.  Together,  those 
two  obligations  will  amount,  at  the  present  time, 
to  well  over  300  million  bushels  a  year.  That 
is  about  as  much  wheat  as  we  feel  we  could  guaran- 
tee to  deliver  annually  over  a  four-year  period. 
We  expect  some  years  to  have  more  wheat  for 
export  than  that.  But  considering  the  possibility 
of  unfavorable  weather,  we  would  not  want  to 
guarantee  delivery  of  much  more. 

Between  the  Wars  our  wheat  exports  dwindled 
to  next  to  nothing  while  wheat  stocks  in  this  coun- 
try rose  higher  and  higher  and  prices  fell  lower 
and  lower.  Our  normal  customers  were  raising 
more  and  more  wheat  themselves  even  though  it 
was  extremely  uneconomical  to  do  so.  That  was 
the  outcome  of  a  chain  of  events  which  I  don't 


have  to  recount  here.  But  our  farmers  don't  want 
to  go  through  that  again.  They  are  able  to  raise 
wheat  efficiently  for  export,  and  they  want  to 
retain  a  reasonable  foreign  market.  Because  of 
the  acute  dollar  shortage  throughout  much  of  the 
world,  some  of  those  same  tendencies  toward  un- 
econmic  self-sufficiency  are  again  manifesting 
themselves.  By  assuring  those  countries  a  stable 
supply  we  believe  that  this  agreement  will  help 
stem  that  tide  and  protect  our  foreign  wheat 
market. 

Second,  this  agreement  will  complement  our 
domestic  wheat  program.  As  you  know,  in  our 
domestic  agi-icultural  program  we  are  attempting 
to  assure  an  abundance  of  food  and  fiber  to  our 
consumers,  at  the  same  time  making  sure  that  our 
farmers  are  not  penalized  for  producing  abun- 
dantly. This  is  the  aim  of  our  price-supi^ort  pro- 
gram. Yet  with  a  commodity  which  we  export  in 
large  quantities,  such  as  wheat,  it  will  be  difficult 
to  support  the  price  at  home  should  world  prices 
fall  to  very  low  levels.  This  agreement  puts  a 
floor  under  the  foreign  price  for  much  of  our  ex- 
port wheat.  To  the  extent  that  the  government 
finds  it  necessary  to  support  the  domestic  price  of 
wheat,  this  agreement  will  considerably  reduce 
the  cost  of  that  operation. 

My  third  and  last  point  is  that  this  agreement, 
if  put  into  operation,  will  set  a  pattern  of  inter- 
national cooperation  in  solving  agricultural 
problems  which  can  be  carried  over  to  other  com- 
modities. We  have  proved  to  ourselves  and  to  the 
wox'ld  that  a  large  body  of  nations  can  agree  on 
solutions  to  complex  agricultural  problems.  This 
is  a  ijostwar  "first"  in  its  field.  We  have,  in  the 
case  of  this  commodity  at  least,  shown  that  inter- 
national cooperation  can  be  substituted  for  eco- 
nomic warfare. 


'  Later,  on  March  23,  the  Brazilian  Government  re- 
quested an  increase  in  its  import  quota,  which  in  turn 
will  cause  a  slight  increase  in  the  aforesaid  published 
quota  for  the  United  States  export  market  above  the 
167.5  million  busliels  given. 


April   10,    J  949 


THE  RECORD  OF  THE  WEEK 


Bulgaria,  Hungary,  and  Rumania  Accused  of  Violating  Human  Rights 
and  Fundamental  Freedoms 


[Released  to  the  press  April  21 

The  United  States  representatives  in  Bulgaria, 
Hungary,  and  Kuniania  delivered  the  notes  given 
below  to  the  respective  Ministries  of  Foreign  Af- 
fairs of  those  countries  on  Saturday,  April  2.  In 
these  notes  the  United  States  Government  charges 
the  Bulgarian,  Hungarian,  and  Rumanian  (io\ern- 
ments  with  having  repeatedly  violated  their  obli- 
gations nnder  the  respective  peace  treaty  articles 
requiring  them  to  secure  to  all  persons  under  their 
jurisdiction  the  enjoyment  of  human  rights  and 
of  the  fundamental  freedoms.^ 

At  tlie  reiiuest  of  the  Canadian  Government, 
whicli  does  not  maintain  direct  diplomatic  rela- 
tions with  those  governments,  the  United  States 
representatives  simultaneously  gave  formal  notifi- 
cation to  the  Hungarian  and  Rumanian  (lovern- 
ments  that  the  Canadian  Government  associates 
itself  with  the  contents  of  the  respective  United 
States  notes.  The  United  States  representative 
in  Bulgaria,  at  the  time  of  presenting  the  United 
States  note,  stated  that,  while  Canada  is  not  a 
signatory  of  the  peace  treaty  with  Bulgaria  and 
accordingly  is  not  in  a  position  to  make  represen- 
tations on  the  basis  of  the  peace  treaty,  the  views  of 
the  Canadian  Government  in  this  matter  are 
identical  with  those  expressed  in  the  United 
States  note. 

U.S.  NOTE  TO  BULGARIAN  GOVERNMENT 

March  29.  19J,9 
The  Legation  of  the  United  States  of  America 
presents  its  compliments  to  the  Ministry  of  For- 
eign Alfairs  of  Bul<;aria  and,  acting  under  the  in- 
structions of  the  Uiiited  States  Government,  has 
the  honor  to  refer  to  Article  2  of  the  Treaty  of 
Peace  with  Bulgaria,  and  to  the  Bulgarian  Gov- 
ernment's record  with  respect  to  fulfillment  of  its 
obligations  under  that  Article  to  protect  luunan 
rights  and  the  fundamental  freedoms. 

Article  2  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  reads  as  follows : 

Bulgaria  shall  take  all  measures  necessary  to  secure 
to  all  persons  under  Bulgarian  jurisfiiction,  without  dis- 
tinction as  to  race,  .sex,  language  or  religion,  tlio  enjo.vment 
of  human  rights  ami  of  the  fundanient.'il  frt'i'ilmiis,  includ- 
ing freedom  of  osprcssion,  of  press  and  i>uliliraticin,  of  re- 
ligious worship,  of  political  opinion  and  of  public  meeting. 

Since  the  entry  into  force  on  September  15, 
1047  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  with  Bulgaria,  the 
United  States  Government,  as  a  signatory  of  that 
instrument,  has  observed  closely  clevelopments  in 
Bulgaria  with  a  view  to  ascertaining  whether  the 

'  See  also  Buu.etin  of  Mar.  27,  1949,  p.  391. 
450 


Bulgarian  Government  has  been  fulfilling  its  obli- 
gations under  the  Treaty.  The  United  States 
Government  attaches  particular  importance  to 
the  obligations,  set  forth  in  the  aforementioned 
Article,  which  require  the  Bulgarian  Government 
to  secure  to  all  persons  under  Bulgarian  jurisdic- 
tion the  enjoyment  of  human  rights  and  of  the 
fundamental  freedoms.  On  the  basis  of  its  ob- 
servations during  this  period,  the  United  States 
Government  concludes  that  the  Bulgarian  Gov- 
ernment, although  it  has  had  ample  opportunity 
to  carry  out  its  commitments  in  good  faith,  has 
deliberately  and  systematically  denied  to  the  Bul- 
garian people,  by  means  of  privative  measures 
and  oppressive  acts,  the  exercise  of  the  very  rights 
and  freedoms  which  it  has  pledged  to  secure  to 
them  under  Article  2  of  the  Treaty.  The  disre- 
gard shown  by  the  Bulgarian  Government  for 
the  rights  and  liberties  of  persons  under  its  juris- 
diction, as  illustrated  below,  has  indeed  become 
so  notorious  as  to  evoke  the  condemnation  of  free 
peoples  everywhere. 

Through  the  exercise  of  police  power  the  Bul- 
garian Government  has  deprived  large  numbers 
of  its  citizens  of  their  basic  human  rights,  assured 
to  them  under  the  Treaty  of  Peace.  These  depri- 
vations have  been  manifested  by  arbitrary  ar- 
rests, systematic  perversion  of  the  judicial  proc- 
ess, and  the  prolonged  detention  in  prisons  and 
camps,  without  public  trial,  of  persons  whose 
views  are  opposed  to  those  of  the  regime. 

Similarly,  the  Bulgarian  Government  has  de- 
nied to  persons  living  under  its  jurisdiction,  as 
individuals  and  as  organized  groups  including 
democratic  political  parties,  the  fundamental  free- 
doms of  political  opinion  and  of  public  meeting. 
It  has  dissolved  the  National  Agrarian  Union,  the 
Bulgarian  Socialist  Party  and  other  groups,  and 
has  imprisoned  many  of  their  leaders.  With  the 
Treaty  of  I'eace  barely  in  eifect  and  in  the  face 
of  world  opinion,  the  Bulgarian  Government  or- 
dered the  execution  of  Ni1<ola  Petkov.  National 
Agrarian  Union  leader,  who  dared  to  express 
democratic  political  opinions  which  did  not  cor- 
respoiui  to  those  of  the  Bulgarian  Government. 
I*roceediiigs  were  instituted  against  those  deputies 
who  did  not  agree  with  its  policies,  with  the  re- 
sult that  no  vestige  of  parliamentary  opposition 
now  remains,  an  illustration  of  the  effective  denial 
of  freedom  of  political  opinion  in  Bulgaria. 

By  restrictions  on  the  press  and  on  other  publi- 
cations, the  Bulgarian  Government  has  denied  to 
persons  under  its  jurisdiction  the  freedom  of  ex- 

Department  of  State   Bulletin 


pression  guaranteed  to  them  under  the  Treaty 
of  Peace.  By  laws,  administrative  acts,  and  the 
use  of  force  and  intimidation  on  the  part  of  its 
officials,  the  Bulgarian  Government  has  made  it 
impossible  for  individual  citizens  openly  to  ex- 
press views  not  in  conformity  to  those  officially 
prescribed.  Freedom  of  the  press  does  not  exist  in 
Bulgaria. 

By  legislation,  by  the  acts  of  its  officials,  and  by 
"trials"  of  religious  leaders,  the  Bulgarian  Govern- 
ment has  acted  in  contravention  of  the  express 
provision  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  in  respect  of  free- 
dom of  worship.  Recent  measures  directed 
against  the  Protestant  denominations  in  Bulgaria, 
for  example,  are  clearly  incompatible  with  the 
Bulgarian  Government's  obligation  to  secure  free- 
dom of  religious  worship  to  all  persons  under  its 
jurisdiction. 

Tlie  Bulgarian  Government  bears  full  responsi- 
bility not  only  for  acts  committed  since  the  effec- 
tive date  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  which  are  in 
contravention  of  Article  2,  but  also  for  its  failure 
to  redress  the  consequences  of  acts  committed  prior 
to  that  date  which  have  continued  to  prejudice 
the  enjoyment  of  human  rights  and  of  the  funda- 
mental freedoms.  The  United  States  Government, 
mindful  of  its  responsibilities  under  the  Treaty 
of  Peace,  has  drawn  attention  on  appropriate  oc- 
casions to  the  flagrant  conduct  of  the  Bulgarian 
authorities  in  this  regard.  The  Bulgarian  Gov- 
ernment, however,  has  failed  to  modify  its  conduct 
in  conformity  with  the  stipulations  of  the  Treaty. 

In  the  circumstances,  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment, as  a  signatory  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace,  finds 
that  the  Bulgarian  Govermnent  has  repeatedly 
violated  the  provisions  of  Article  2  of  that  Treaty. 
In  as  much  as  the  obligation  of  the  Government  of 
Bulgaria  to  secure  to  all  persons  under  Bulgarian 
jurisdiction  the  enjoyment  of  hinnan  rights  and 
fundamental  freedoms  is  expressly  stipulated  in 
the  Treaty,  no  specious  argument  that  the  matters 
raised  in  the  present  note  are  purely  of  a  domestic 
character  can  be  accepted.  The  United  States 
Government,  accordingly,  calls  upon  the  Bulgar- 
ian Government  to  adopt  prompt  remedial  meas- 
ures in  respect  of  the  violations  referred  to  above 
and  requests  the  Bulgarian  Government  to  specify 
the  steps  which  it  is  prepared  to  take  in  imple- 
menting fully  the  terms  of  Article  2  of  the  Treaty 
of  Peace. 

U.S.  NOTE  TO  HUNGARIAN   GOVERNMENT 

March  29^  19J,9 
The  Legation  of  the  United  States  of  America 
presents  its  compliments  to  the  Ministry  of  For- 
eign Affairs  of  Hungary  and,  acting  under  the 
instructions  of  the  United  States  Government,  has 
the  honor  to  refer  to  Article  2  of  the  Treaty  of 
Peace  with  Hungary,  and  to  the  Hungarian  Gov- 
ernment's record  with  respect  to  fulfillment  of  its 
obligations  under  that  Article  to  protect  human 
rights  and  the  fundamental  freedoms. 

Apr/7   JO,   J 949 


Article  2  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  reads  as  follows : 

1.  Hungary  shall  take  all  measures  necessary  to  secure 
to  all  persons  under  Hungarian  jurisdiction,  without  dis- 
tinction as  to  race,  sex,  language  or  religion,  the  enjoyment 
of  human  rights  and  of  the  fundamental  freedoms,  in- 
cluding freedom  of  expression,  of  press  and  publication, 
of  religious  worship,  of  political  opinion  and  of  public 
meeting. 

2.  Hungary  further  undertakes  that  the  laws  in  force 
in  Hungary  shall  not,  either  in  their  content  or  in  their 
application,  discriminate  or  entail  any  discrimination  be- 
tween persons  of  Hungarian  nationality  on  the  ground 
of  their  race,  sex,  language  or  religion,  whether  in  ref- 
erence to  their  persons,  property,  business,  professional 
or  financial  interests,  status,  political  or  civil  rights  or 
any  other  matter. 

Since  the  entry  into  force  on  September  15, 
1947  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  with  Hungary,  the 
United  States  Government,  as  a  signatory  of  that 
instrument,  has  observed  closely  developments  in 
Hungary  with  a  view  to  ascertaining  whether  the 
Hungarian  Government  has  been  fulfilling  its  ob- 
ligations under  the  Treaty.  The  United  States 
Government  attaches  particular  importance  to  the 
obligations,  set  forth  in  the  aforementioned 
Article,  which  require  the  Hungarian  Government 
to  secure  to  all  persons  under  Hungarian  juris- 
diction the  enjoyment  of  human  rights  and  of 
the  fundamental  freedoms.  On  the  basis  of  its 
observations  during  this  period,  the  United  States 
Government  concludes  that  the  Hungarian  Gov- 
ernment, although  it  has  had  ample  opportunity  to 
carry  out  its  commitments  in  good  faith,  has  de- 
liberately and  systematically  denied  to  the  Hun- 
garian people,  by  means  of  privative  measures 
and  oppressive  acts,  the  exercise  of  the  very  rights 
and  freedoms  which  it  has  pledged  to  secure  to 
them  under  Article  2  of  the  Treaty.  The  dis- 
regard shown  by  the  Hungarian  Government  for 
the  rights  and  liberties  of  persons  under  its  juris- 
diction, as  illustrated  below,  has  indeed  become 
so  notorious  as  to  evoke  the  condemnation  of  free 
peoples  everywhere. 

The  abridgment  of  rights  and  freedoms  begun 
by  the  Hungarian  Government  in  the  armistice 
period  has  continued  without  abatement  since  the 
entry  into  force  of  tlie  Treaty  of  Peace.  Through 
arbitrary  exercise  of  police  power  and  perversion 
of  judicial  process,  tlie  Hungarian  Government 
and  its  agencies  have  violated  the  rights  of  citizens 
as  free  men  to  life  and  liberty.  Denial  of  free- 
dom of  political  opinion  is  complete  in  Hungary. 
Democratic  political  parties  which  held  substan- 
tial mandates  from  people  have  been  through  the 
Government's  initiative  successively  purged,  si- 
lenced in  Parliament,  fragmentized  and  dissolved. 
To  enforce  rigid  political  conformity  the  Hun- 
garian Government  and  the  Communist  Party 
which  controls  it  have  established  a  vast  and  insid- 
ious network  of  police  and  other  agents  who  ob- 
serve, report  on,  and  seek  to  control  the  private 
opinions,  associations,  and  activities  of  its  citizens. 

The  Hungarian  Govermnent,  despite  the  pro- 
visions of  the  Treaty  of  Peace,  has  circumscribed 


freedom  of  expression.  Freedom  of  press  and 
publication  does  not  exist.  Basic  decrees  pertain- 
ing to  the  pre.ss  are  restrictive  in  character  and  are 
so  interpreted  in  practice.  No  substantive  criti- 
cism of  the  Government  of  the  Communist  Party 
is  permitted.  Government  control  of  printing  es- 
tablishments and  of  the  distribution  of  newsprint 
has  been  exercised  to  deny  freedom  of  expression 
to  individuals  or  groups  whose  political  opinions 
are  at  variance  with  those  of  the  Government. 
In  the  field  of  reporting,  absence  of  formal  cen- 
sorship has  not  obscured  the  record  of  the  Hun- 
farian  Government  in  excluding  or  expelling 
oreign  correspondents  who  have  written  des- 
patches critical  of  the  regime  or  in  intimidating 
local  correspondents  into  writing  only  what  is  ac- 
ceptable or  favorable  to  the  regfme. 

Freedom  of  public  meeting  on  political  matters 
has  been  re^jularly  denied  to  all  except  Communist 
groups  and  their  collaboratoi-s.  In  the  case  of 
religious  meetings,  on  various  occasions  attendance 
at  such  gatherings  has  been  obstructed  and  the 
principals  subjected  to  harassment.  The  Hun- 
garian Government,  moreover,  has  pursued  policies 
detrimental  to  freedom  of  religious  worship.  It 
has  sought  by  coercive  measures  to  undermine  the 
influence  of  the  churches  and  of  religious  leaders 
and  to  restrict  their  legitimate  functions.  By 
arbitrary  and  unjustified  proceedings  against  re- 
ligious leaders  on  fabricated  grounds,  as  in  the 
cases  of  Cardinal  Mindszenty  and  Lutheran 
Bishop  Ordass,  the  Hungarian  dovernment  has  at- 
tempted to  force  the  submission  of  independent 
church  leaders  and  to  bring  about  their  replace- 
ment witli  collaborators  subservient  to  the  Com- 
munist Party  and  its  program.  Such  measures 
constitute  violations  of  the  freedom  of  religious 
worship  guaranteed  by  the  Treaty  of  Peace. 

The  Hungarian  Government  bears  full  respon- 
sibility not  only  for  acts  committed  since  the  effec- 
tive date  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  which  are  in  con- 
travention of  Article  2,  but  also  for  its  failure  to 
redress  the  consequences  of  acts  committed  prior 
to  that  date  which  have  continued  to  prejudice  the 
enjoyment  of  human  rights  and  of  the  fundamen- 
tal freedoms.  The  United  States  Government, 
mindful  of  its  responsibilities  under  the  Treaty  of 
Peace,  had  drawn  attention  on  appropriate  occa- 
sions to  the  flagrant  conduct  of  the  Hungarian 
authorities  in  this  regard.  The  Hungarian  Gov- 
ernment, however,  has  failed  to  modifv  its  conduct 
in  conformity  with  the  stipulations  of  the  Treaty. 

In  the  circumstances,  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment, as  a  signatory  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace, 
finds  that  the  Hungarian  Government  has  re- 
peatedly violated  the  provisions  of  Article  2  of 
that  Treaty.  In  as  much  as  the  obligation  of  the 
Government  of  Hungary  to  secure  to  all  persons 
under  Hungarian  jurisdiction,  the  enjoyment  of 
human  rights  and  the  fundamental  freedoms  is 
expressly  stipulated  in  the  Treaty,  no  specious 
argument  that  the  matters  raised  in  the  present 
Note  are  purely  of  a  domestic  character  can  be  ac- 


cepted. The  United  States  Government,  accord- 
ingly, calls  upon  the  Hungarian  Government  to 
adopt  prompt  remedial  measures  in  respect  of  the 
violations  referred  to  above  and  requests  the  Hun- 
garian Government  to  specify  the  steps  which  it 
IS  prepared  to  take  in  implementing  full}'  the 
terms  of  Article  2  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace. 

U.S.  NOTE  TO  RUMANIAN  GOVERNMENT 

March  29,  IBlfi. 

The  Legation  of  the  United  States  of  America 
presents  its  compliments  to  the  Ministry  of 
Foreign  Affairs  of  Rumania  and,  acting  under  the 
instructions  of  the  United  States  Government,  has 
the  honor  to  refer  to  Article  3  of  the  Treaty  of 
Peace  with  Rumania,  and  to  the  Rumanian  Gov- 
ernment's record  with  respect  to  fulfillment  of  its 
obligations  under  that  Article  to  protect  human 
rights  and  the  fundamental  freedoms. 

Article  3  of  Treaty  of  Peace  reads  as  follows : 

1.  Rouijiania  shall  take  all  measures  necessary  to  se- 
cure to  all  iXTsoiis  under  Roumanian  jurisdiction,  with- 
out distinction  as  to  race,  sex,  language  or  religion,  the 
enjoyment  of  human  rights  and  of  the  fundamental  free- 
doms, including  freedom  of  expression,  of  press  and  pub- 
lication, of  religious  worship,  of  political  opinion  and  of 
pultlic  meeting. 

2.  Itouniania  further  undertakes  that  the  laws  in  force 
in  Roumania  shall  not,  either  in  their  content  or  in  their 
application,  discriminate  or  entail  any  discrimination 
between  persons  of  Roumanian  nationality  on  tlie  ground 
of  their  race,  sex,  language  or  religion,  whether  in  ref- 
erence to  their  persons,  property,  business,  profession  or 
financial  interests,  status,  political  or  civil  rights  or  any 
otlier  matter. 

Since  the  entry  into  force  on  September  15, 
1947  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  with  Rumania,  the 
United  States  Government,  as  a  signatory  of  that 
instrument,  has  observed  closely  developments  in 
Rumania  with  a  view  to  ascertaining  whether  the 
RuiiKinian  Government  has  been  fulfilling  its  obli- 
gations under  the  Treaty.  The  United  States 
Government  attaches  particular  importance  to  the 
obligations,  set  forth  in  the  aforementioned 
Article,  which  require  the  Rumanian  Government 
to  secure  to  all  persons  under  Rumanian  juris- 
diction the  enjoj'inent  of  human  rights  and  of  the 
fundamental  freedoms.  On  the  basis  of  its  ob- 
servations during  this  period,  the  United  States 
Government  concludes  that  the  Rumanian  Gov- 
ernment, although  it  has  had  ample  opportunity 
to  carry  out  its  commitments  in  good  faith,  has 
deliberately  and  systematically  denied  to  the  Ru- 
manian jieople,  by  means  of  privative  measures 
and  oppressive  acts,  the  exercise  of  the  very  rights 
and  freedoms  which  it  has  pledged  to  secure  to 
them  under  Article  3  of  the  Treaty.  The  disre- 
gard shown  by  the  Rumanian  Government  for 
the  rights  and  liberties  of  persons  under  its  juris- 
diction, as  illustrated  below,  has  indeed  become 
so  notorious  as  to  evoke  the  condemnation  of  free 
peoples  everywhere. 

During  the  Armistice  period  the  Rumanian 
Government  took  or  countenanced  actions  which 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


progi-essively  deprived  persons  under  its  jurisdic- 
tion of  their  essential  rights  and  freedoms.  The 
Kumanian  Government  accelerated  these  depriva- 
tions after  it  had  signed  the  Treaty  of  Peace  on 
February  10,  1947,  and  in  June  and  August  1947, 
the  United  States  Government  warned  the  Ku- 
manian Government  concerning  such  actions  as 
being  prejudicial  to  the  fulfillment  of  provisions 
of  the  Treaty.  The  Rumanian  Government,  how- 
ever, took  no  corrective  measures.  This  process 
was  not  only  not  revei-sed  but  continued  without 
abatement  after  the  Treaty  came  into  force. 

In  violation  of  freedom  of  political  opinion, 
assured  by  the  Treaty  of  Peace,  the  Kumanian 
Government  and  the  minority  Communist  Party 
which  controls  it  disrupted,  silenced  and  outlawed 
democratic  political  parties  and  deprived  demo- 
cratic leaders  of  their  liberty.  To  this  end,  the 
Rumanian  Government  employed  methods  of  in- 
timidation and  perversions  of  the  judicial  process. 
The  inequities  of  these  actions,  as  exemplified  by 
the  "trial"  and  condemnation  to  life  imprison- 
ment of  luliu  Maniu,  President  of  the  National 
Peasant  Party,  and  other  leaders  were  recited  by 
the  United  States  Government  in  the  Legation's 
note  No.  61  of  Februaiy  2,  1948.  Moreover,  large 
numbers  of  Rumanian  citizens  have  been  seized 
and  held  for  long  periods  without  public  trial. 

By  laws,  decrees  and  administrative  measures 
as  well  as  by  extra-legal  acts  of  organizations 
affiliated  with  the  Government  and  the  Com- 
munist Party,  the  Rumanian  Government  has 
stifled  all  expression  of  political  opinion  at  vari- 
ance with  its  own.  Freedom  of  press  and  publi- 
cation, guaranteed  by  the  Treaty  of  Peace,  does 
not  exist  in  Rumania.  No  substantive  criticism 
of  the  Government  is  permitted.  The  Rumanian 
Goveriunent  has  taken  control  of  printing  estab- 
lishments and  has  suppressed  all  publications 
which  are  not  responsive  to  its  direction  or  which 
do  not  serve  the  purposes  of  the  Communist  Party. 

Despite  the  express  provision  of  the  Treaty  of 
Peace,  only  Communist  and  Communist-approved 
organizations  are  able  in  practice  to  hold  public 
meetings.  In  view  of  the  threat  of  forcible  inter- 
vention and  reprisals  by  the  Government  or  by  the 
Communist  Party,  other  groups  have  not  at- 
tempted to  hold  such  meetings. 

The  Rumanian  Government  has  likewise 
abridged  freedom  of  religious  worship,  guaran- 
teed under  Article  3  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace,  by 
legislation  and  by  other  measures  which  effectively 
deny  such  freedom.  It  has  assumed  extensive  con- 
trol over  the  practice  of  religion,  including  the 
application  of  political  tests,  which  is  incom- 
patible with  freedom  of  worship.  These  powers 
have  been  used  in  at  least  one  instance  to  destroy 
by  Governnaent  decree  a  major  religious  body  and 
to  transfer  its  property  to  the  state. 

The  Rumanian  Government  bears  full  respon- 
sibility not  only  for  acts  committed  since  tlae 

April  10,  1949 


effective  date  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  which  are 
in  contravention  of  Article  3,  but  also  for  its  fail- 
ure to  redress  the  consequences  of  acts  committed 
prior  to  that  date  which  have  continued  to  preju- 
dice the  enjoyment  of  human  rights  and  of  the 
fundamental  freedoms.  The  United  States  Gov- 
ernment, mindful  of  its  responsibilities  under  the 
Treaty  of  Peace,  has  drawn  attention  on  appro- 
priate occasions  to  the  flagrant  conduct  of  the 
Rumanian  authorities  in  this  regard.  The  Ru- 
manian Government,  however,  has  failed  to  modify 
its  conduct  in  conformity  with  the  stipulations  of 
tne  Treaty. 

In  the  circumstances,  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment, as  a  signatory  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace,  finds 
that  the  Riunanian  Government  has  repeatedly 
violated  the  provisions  of  Article  3  of  that  Treaty. 
In  as  much  as  the  obligation  of  the  Government  of 
Rumania  to  secure  to  all  persons  under  Rumanian 
jurisdiction  the  enjoyment  of  human  rights  and 
the  fundamental  freedoms  is  expressly  stipulated 
in  the  Treaty,  no  specious  argument  that  the 
matters  raised  in  the  present  note  are  purely  of  a 
domestic  character  can  be  accepted.  The  United 
States  Government,  accordingly,  calls  upon  the 
Rumanian  Government  to  adopt  prompt  remedial 
measures  in  respect  of  the  violations  referred  to 
above  and  requests  the  Rumanian  Goveriunent  to 
specify  the  steps  which  it  is  prepared  to  take  in 
implementing  fully  the  terms  of  Article  3  of  the 
Treaty  of  Peace. 


THE  CONGRESS 

U.S.  Extends  Invitation  for  195610lymplc 
Games ' 

Whereas  the  United  States  Olympic  Association 
will  invite  the  International  Olympic  Commit- 
tee to  hold  the  Olympic  Games  in  the  United 
States  at  Detroit,  Michigan,  in  1956:  Now, 
therefore,  be  it 

Resolved  hy  the  Senate  and  House  of  Repre- 
sentatives of  the  United  States  of  America  in  Con- 
gress as'sembled,  That  the  Government  of  the 
United  States  joins  in  the  invitation  of  the  United 
States  Olympic  Association  to  the  International 
Olympic  Committee  to  hold  the  1956  Olympic 
Games  in  the  United  States  at  Detroit,  Michigan ; 
and  expresses  the  hospitable  hope  that  the  United 
States  may  be  selected  as  the  site  for  this  great 
enterprise  in  international  good  will. 

Sec.    2.    The  Secretary  of  State  is  directed  to 
transmit  a  copy  of  this  joint  resolution  to  the 
International  Olympic  Committee, 
Approved  March  23,  1949. 

'  Public  Law  22,  81st  Cong.,  1st  sess. 


National  Conference  of  Christians  and  Jews  Protest  Denial  of 
Religious  Freedom  in  Hungary  and  Bulgaria 


[Released  to  the  press  March  ;!1] 

Text  of  Petition 

March  28, 1949 

Sir  :  It  has  become  tragically  clear  to  the  world 
that  calculated  assaults  on  and  suppression  of  free- 
dom of  religion  are  now  practiced  in  various  na- 
tions as  matters  of  national  policy.  These  actions 
imdermine  tlie  cornerstone  of  world  peace  which 
55  nations  laid  in  San  Francisco. 

There  the  peoples  of  those  nations  proclaimed 
"faith  in  fundamental  human  rights,  in  the  dignity 
and  worth  of  the  human  person,  the  equal  rights  of 
men  and  women''  and  undertook  to  "achieve  inter- 
national cooperation  ...  in  promoting  and  en- 
couraging respect  for  human  rights  and  funda- 
mental freedoms  for  all  without  distinction  as  to 
race,  sex,  language  or  religion'*. 

Lest  these  solemn  covenants  with  the  peoples 
of  the  world  become  empty  phi-ases.  tlio  n'ligious 
rights  thus  guaranteed  must,  in  deeds  as  well  as  in 
words,  be  protected.  Such  safeguards  the  United 
Nations  was  constituted  to  provide. 

In  furtherance  of  the  Charter's  provisions,  the 
General  Assembly  of  the  United  Nations,  in  De- 
cember, 1948,  by  Vote  of  48  nations,  none  dissent- 
ing, proclaimed  a  Universal  Declaration  of  Hu- 
man Rights  which  provides  that  "everyone  has 
the  right  to  freedom  of  thought,  conscience  and 
religion'",  and  the  right  "in  public  or  private  to 
manifest  his  religion  or  beliefs  in  teaching,  prac- 
tices, worship  and  observance";  that  "everyone  is 
entitled  in  full  equality  to  a  fair  and  public  hear- 
ing by  an  independent  and  impartial  tribunal  in 
tiie  determination  of  .  .  .  any  criminal  charge 
against  him". 

These  fundamental  rights,  we  submit,  have  been 
violated  in  recent  prosecutions  of  religious  leaders 
in  Hungary  and  Bulgaria.  An  issue  of  para- 
mount importance  tliercfore  confronts  the  United 
Nations,  which  both  its  General  Assembly  and  its 
Economic  and  Social  Council  have  power  to 
examine. 

The  Charter  not  only  authorizes  but  directs  the 
General  Assembly  (Chap.  IV,  Art.  13)  to  "initiate 
studies  and  make  recommendations  for  the  pur- 


pose of  .  .  .  assisting  in  the  realization  of  human 
rights  and  fundamental  freedoms  for  all".  Like 
powers  are  granted  to  the  Economic  and  Social 
Council  (Chap.  X,  Art.  C2).  The  Member  States 
of  the  United  Nations  (Chap.  IX,  Art.  55  and  56) 
"pledge  themselves"  to  promote  "universal  respect 
for.  and  observance  of.  liuman  rights  and  funda- 
mental freedoms  for  all."  Chapter  I,  Article  2, 
Section  6  of  the  Charter  also  enacts  that  the  United 
Nations  "shall  ensure  that  states  which  are  not 
members  of  the  United  Nations  act  in  accordance 
with  these  principles  so  far  as  may  be  necessary 
for  the  manitenance  of  international  peace  and 
security". 

Pursuant  to  these  and  other  mandates  of  the 
Charter,  treaties  were  made  on  Februarj-  10, 1947, 
bv  twelve  of  the  victorious  Allies  including  the 
U.S.S.R.,  Great  Britain,  U.  S.  A.,  China  and 
France,  with  the  vanquished  governments  of  Bul- 
garia. Hungary  and  Roumania.  These  treaties 
declare  that  in  their  respective  territorial  jurisdic- 
tion each  of  these  states  "shall  take  all  measures  to 
secure  to  all  persons  .  .  .  without  distinction  as 
to  race,  sex,  language  or  religion  the  enjoyment  of 
human  rights  and  of  the  fundamental  freedoms 
including  freedom  of  expression,  of  press  and  pub- 
lication, of  religious  worship,  of  political  opinion 
and  of  public  meeting".  These  treaties  declare 
that  the  parties  thereto  shall  appoint  a  commis- 
sion to  consider  disputes  arising  from  their 
violation. 

Pursuant  to  those  treaties,  to  the  United  Na- 
tions Chaiter  and  the  Universal  Declaration  of 
Human  Rights  ample  jurisdiction  exists  for  in- 
quiry into  the  grave  violations  of  religious  rights 
whicli  have  lately  occurred.  The  authority  to 
conduct  such  inquiries  carries  with  it  a  commen- 
surate duty. 

"Wlierefore,  we  urge  that  our  Government  raise 
these  issues,  either  in  the  United  Nations,  or  by 
sucli  other  means  as  may  be  inost  appropriate,  to 
the  end  that  recent  imprisonments,  trials  and  con- 
victions of  religious  leaders  by  the  Governments  of 
Bulgaria  and  Hungary  shall  be  made  the  subject  of 
jjrompt.  impartial,  public  examination. 

Very  respectfully, 
National  Conference  of  Christians  and  Jews. 


Deparfmenf  of  Sfofe  Bullelin 


[Here  follow  the  signatures  of  the  members  of  the  Human 
Rights  Committee,  the  National  Co-Chairman,  the 
President,  and  other  participants  of  the  Conference] 

Reply  of  Secretary  Acheson  to  the  President  and 
Chairman  of  the  Human  Rights  Commiittee 

Sirs  :  The  Department  of  State  welcomes  your 
petition  of  Marcli  29  protesting  against  tlie  denial 
of  religious  freedom  in  Hungary  and  Bulgaria. 

We  Americans  know  the  importance  of  freedom 
of  religion.  Our  country  was  settled  very  largely 
by  individuals  who  fled  intolerance  to  find  free- 
dom to  worship  their  God  according  to  the  dictates 
of  their  conscience.  In  the  United  States  they 
established  a  haven  of  individual  freedoms  which 
we,  their  inheritors,  enjoy  in  full  measure  today. 

With  other  nations  which  share  our  belief  in 
individual  liberty,  we  are  now  seeking  to  promote 
fundamental  human  rights  through  the  United 
Nations  and  other  means.  What  appears  to  be  a 
brutal  threat  to  freedom  of  thought,  conscience 
and  religion  has  been  developed  by  the  authori- 
tarian regimes  which  control  Eastern  European 
peoples.  A  Godless  Inquisition  has  apparently 
been  set  in  operation  to  abolish,  through  thought 
police,  the  right  of  the  individual  to  follow  any 
kind  of  religious  belief. 

The  United  States  will  join  with  like-minded 
nations  in  focusing  world  attention  on  this 
tyranny  through  appropriate  means. 

To  the  best  of  our  national  ability,  your  petition 
will  be  answered. 

Very  truly  yours. 

Dean  G.  Acheson 
Secretary  of  State 


ECA]  Anniversary 

Voice  of  America  Broadcast 

[Released  to  the  press  April  1] 

The  Voice  of  America  will  commemorate  the 
first  anniversary  of  the  Economic  Cooperation  Ad- 
ministration with  a  series  of  special  broadcasts  to 
the  world  this  week  end. 

George  V.  Allen,  Assistant  Secretary  of  State 
for  public  affairs,  said  the  special  broadcasts  are 
designed  to  give  overseas  listeners  a  clear  and 
accurate  picture  of  the  true  aims  of  the  European 
Recovery  Programs  and  the  accomplishments  that 
have  been  made  under  it. 

The  commemoration  will  be  climaxed  with  a 
Voice  of  America  broadcast  on  Sunday  of  a  30- 
minute  documentary  entitled  "The  Marshall 
Plan."  Paul  Hoffman,  Eca  Administrator; 
Christian  Christiansen,  editor  of  Verdensgang,  of 
Oslo;  A.  P.  Wadsworth,  editor  of  the  Manchester 
Guardian,  and  Raymond  Aron,  editor  of  Figaro, 
of  Paris,  will  participate  in  the  program. 

Another  special  broadcast  Sunday  will  be  a 
radio  forum,  "One  Year  of  Eca."  during  which 
Anne  O'Hare  McCormick  of  the  New  York  Times 

April   10,   1949 


and  Quincy  Howe  of  the  Columbia  Broadcasting 
System  will  be  interviewed. 

During  the  week  leading  up  to  the  Eca  anni- 
versary, the  Voice  of  America  has  broadcast  state- 
ments by  a  number  of  officials  and  private  citizens 
of  nations  cooperating  in  the  recovery  program. 

Participants  include :  Erik  Brof oss,  Norwegian 
Minister  of  Commerce;  J.  O.  Krag,  Danish  Minis- 
ter of  Commerce;  Sean  McBride,  Irish  Minister 
of  External  Affairs;  Maurice  Petsche,  French 
Minister  of  Finance;  Moens  de  Fernig,  Belgian 
Minister  of  Foreign  Trade;  Stephan  Stephano- 
poulos,  Greek  Minister  of  Coordination;  P. 
Makris,  Secretary  General  of  the  Greek  Federa- 
tion of  Labor;  Dr.  Peter  Krauland,  Austrian 
Minister  for  Economic  Planning ;  Tage  Erlander, 
Swedish  Prime  Minister;  Sir  Stafford  Cripps, 
British  Chancellor  of  the  Exchequer ;  and  Robert 
Marjolin  of  France,  Secretary  of  the  Organiza- 
tion of  European  Economic  Cooperation. 

Eca  ofiicials  who  made  special  talks  for  over- 
seas broadcast  included  T.  K.  Finletter,  Chief  of 
the  Eca  Mission  to  the  United  Kingdom;  J.  D. 
Zellerbach,  Chief  of  the  Eca  Mission  to  Italy ;  W. 
Averell  Harriman,  Eca  Ambassador;  John  Nu- 
veen,  Jr.,  Chief  of  the  Eca  Mission  to  Greece ;  and 
David  K.  E.  Bruce,  Chief  of  the  Eca  Mission  to 
France.  Other  anniversary  statements  include 
those  by  AVilliam  Green,  President  of  the  Ameri- 
can Federation  of  Labor,  and  Vera  Micheles  Dean 
of  the  Foreign  Policy  Association. 

Additional  statements  are  being  recorded  in  the 
United  States  and  abroad  for  use  in  connection 
with  the  Eca  anniversary  broadcasts. 

■Message  to  the  President  From  Prime  Minister  Attlee 

[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  April  2] 

A  year  has  now  gone  by  since  you  signed  the 
Foreign  Assistance  Act  of  1948  and  gave  us  hope 
and  help  when  most  we  needed  it.  In  the  short 
space  of  these  twelve  months,  nineteen  free  na- 
tions and  territories,  joining  together  in  the  organ- 
ization for  Euroi^ean  Economic  Co-operation, 
have  embarked  on  a  co-operative  effort  which  is 
without  precedent  in  times  of  peace.  As  a  result, 
during  the  last  year  the  whole  economic  scene  in 
Western  Europe  has  been  transformed  to  a  degree 
which  must  astonish  all  of  us  when  we  recall  the 
uncertainties  and  perils  of  the  immediately  pre- 
ceding years. 

That  this  progress  towards  full  recovery  has 
been  and  continues  to  be  accomplished,  is  due  to 
the  generosity  and  far-sightedness  of  the  people 
and  Government  of  the  United  States.  Without 
their  help  the  achievements  of  the  past  year  would 
not  have  been  possible  nor  would  Europe  now 
have  the  confidence  to  go  forward  to  grapple  the 
great  tasks  which  yet  remain  to  be  fulfilled.  On 
this  happy  anniversary,  so  pregnant  for  the  peace 
of  civilization,  we  send  to  you  and  to  the  American 
peoi^le  our  heartfelt  thanks. 


Selecting  Our  Future  Citizens 


BY  HERVE  J.  L'HEUREUXi 
Chief,  Visa  Division 


Thore  are  two  basic  theories  or  fundamental  sys- 
tems for  the  control  of  immigration  into  any  coun- 
try. One  is  that  no  alien  shall  be  permitted  to 
enter  the  national  territory  of  a  country  unless 
there  is  some  specific  provision  of  the  law  of  the 
country  concerned  which  authorizes  the  admission 
of  the  individual  alien  or  the  particular  class  of 
aliens  to  which  he  belongs.  In  other  words,  under 
this  theory  the  national  law  of  the  particular  coun- 
try bars  ail  aliens  from  admission  into  the  national 
territory  except  in  such  cases  or  classes  of  cases 
as  the  law  may  specifically  provide  for  the  ad- 
mission of  aliens. 

The  other  basic  concept  of  iramigi-ation  control 
is  predicated  upon  the  theory  that  all  aliens  may 
have  the  privilege  of  entering  the  national  terri- 
tory of  a  country,  so  far  as  the  fundamental  law 
of  the  country  is  concerned,  unless  there  is  some 
particular  provision  in  the  national  law  which 
specifically  provides  for  the  exclusion  of  an  alien 
in  an  individual  case,  according  to  the  excluded 
class  of  aliens  to  which  he  belongs.  This  is  the 
fundamental  concept  of  immigration  control 
which  is  followed  by  the  United  States,  although 
most  countries  of  the  world  follow  the  first  basic 
principle  I  have  mentioned. 

You  can  appreciate  the  reason  why  our  immigra- 
tion laws  are  based  upon  the  second  theoretical 
concept.  It  is  simply  a  matter  of  our  historical 
development  as  a  nation  of  immigrant  people.  In 
the  early  days  of  our  history  we  welcomed  and 
encouraged  all  immigrants  who  wanted  to  come 
here.  We  needed  manpower  to  develop  the  vast 
wilderness  which  has  become  what  we  know  today 
as  the  United  States  of  America.  AVe  were  looking 
for  men  and  women  who  wanted  to  start  a  new 
life  in  this  new  world  of  rugged  individualism  and 
collective  opportunity — men  and  women  who  loved 
human  freedom  and  who  cherished  political  and 
religious  liberty.  We  wanted  immigrants  who 
would  leave  their  old-world  problems  and  contro- 
versies behind  them  and  come  here  to  establish 
upon  the  continent  of  North  America  a  new  nation 
of  people  from  many  lands — a  new  nation  based 
upon  new  political  and  economic  concepts  of  na- 
tional life.     That  we  have  succeeded  so  well  is  in 

'  Adflre.ss  delivered  at  the  Annual  Conference  of  National 
Council  of  Naturalization  and  Citizenship,  New  York  Cit.v, 
on  Mar.  25,  1949,  and  released  to  the  press  on  the  same 
date. 


itself  a  tribute  to  the  sturdy  character  of  our  early 
immigrants. 

We  want  to  keep  the  doors  open  for  worthy  im- 
migrants and  yet  preserve  our  heritage.  We  do 
not  wish  to  see  our  favorable  position  in  the  world 
frittered  away  by  a  lackadaisical  immigration 
policy  which  would  permit  a  vast  influx  of  people 
from  other  countries  of  the  world  who  would 
create  insurmountable  problems  for  those  who  are 
already  here. 

This  is  a  time  of  great  and  far-reaching  achieve- 
ment in  the  fields  of  science  and  invention.  In 
these  modern  days  of  global-freinjht  aircraft,  ra- 
dio, radar,  television,  and  other  electronic  as  well 
as  mass-production  developments,  not  to  mention 
atomic  energj'.  we  are  living  in  a  much  smaller 
world.  It  is  also  a  more  highly  developed  civili- 
zation from  many  points  of  view.  There  is,  there- 
fore, sound  basis  for  a  new  concept  of  immigration 
control.  We  need  to  have  a  more  selective  immi- 
gration policy  in  the  interests  of  our  own  people, 
and  yet  we  would  not  close  the  door  to  immigrants 
who,  for  their  own  benefit  alone,  may  desire  to 
come  to  this  country. 

In  a  more  technical  sense,  it  has  been  our  prac- 
tice in  past  years  to  follow  the  "first-come-first- 
served'"  rule  in  granting  the  privilege  of  immigra- 
tion into  the  United  States.  This  was  necessary 
because  of  the  fact  that  we  have  imposed  numerical 
as  well  as  qualitative  restrictions  upon  the  entry 
of  immigrants  into  this  country.  In  other  words, 
when  you  have  more  applicants  for  permission  to 
enter  than  there  are  seats  in  the  hall,  it  is  custom- 
ary for  people  to  line  up  at  the  entrance.  Those 
first  in  line  may  be  admitted,  but  the  hall  may  be 
filled  before  the  last  person  in  line  is  reached. 

In  enacting  our  quota  immigration  laws.  Con- 
gress has  provided  that  we  may  take  certain  immi- 
grants out  of  line  and  move  them  ahead  of  others. 
This  we  call  granting  a  preference.  But  Congress 
has  stipulated  precisely  in  the  law  the  classes 
which  may  be  granted  such  a  preference  over 
others,  whom  we  call  nonpreference  immigrants. 
We  are  therefore  precluded  from  taking  other  per- 
sons out  of  their  normal  order  and.  in  effect,  gi'ant- 
ing  to  them  an  unathorized  preference,  or  a 
l^reference  not  provided  by  law. 

The  only  occupational  preference  authorized  by 
law  is  for  aliens  having  skill  in  agriculture  above 
that  of  an  ordinary  farm  laborer,  but  the  law  pro- 
vides that  this  shall  not  apply  to  applicants  who 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


are  chargeable  to  quotas  of  less  than  300  annually, 
and  it  is,  of  course,  in  the  quotas  smaller  than  300 
annually  that  preference  may  mean  the  difference 
between  coming  to  the  United  States  or  not  being 
able  to  come  at  all,  because  of  the  heavy  demand 
for  visas  on  the  part  of  aliens  who  are  the  close 
relatives  of  citizens  or  residents  and  who  are  en- 
titled to  preference  as  such  in  accordance  with 
the  law. 

Our  experience  of  a  quarter  of  a  century  in 
the  work  of  controlling  immigi-ation  into  the 
United  States,  primarily  at  the  foreign  source, 
through  the  visa  or  double-check  system  shows  that 
there  is  sound  basis  for  an  amendment  of  the  law 
which  will  enable  us  to  penetrate  further  into  the 
field  of  selective  immigration.  We  have  been 
obliged  to  tell  American  industrial,  commercial, 
and  scientific  institutions  and  firms  that  they  may 
not  bring  to  the  United  States  as  immigrants  out 
of  the  regular  turn  on  a  quota  waiting  list,  a  highly 
skilled  and  greatly  needed  technician  or  scientist. 
In  some  such  cases  it  may  be  many  years  before 
the  aliens  they  may  desire  to  bring  to  this  country 
can  be  reached  on  the  waiting  list. 

This  situation,  in  my  opinion,  is  one  that  would 
justify  early  remedial  legislation,  not  for  the  pur- 
pose of  assisting  for  his  own  sake  an  immigrant 
who  wants  to  come  here  as  soon  as  possible  but  for 
the  purpose  of  enabling  the  important  American 
interests  involved  to  fill  an  urgent  need,  which  in 
turn  will  provide  for  greater  activity  and  expan- 
sion of  our  business  and  industry  and  provide  more 
and  greater  employment  for  our  citizens  and  resi- 
dents. In  other  words,  a  sovereign  nation  should 
have  the  power  to  select  and  bring  immigrants 
into  its  territory  whenever  it  is  in  the  national  in- 
terest to  do  so,  instead  of  filling  up  the  quotas  year 
in  and  year  out  with  immigrants  who,  for  their 
own  sakes,  desire  to  enter,  regardless  of  whether 
they  may  be  able  to  make  any  appreciable  contri- 
bution to  the  national  welfare. 


Nonimmigrant  Passport  Visa  Fee  Arrangement 
With  France 

[Released  to  the  press  March  30] 

Effective  April  1,  1949,  American  citizens  in 
possession  of  valid  American  passports  may  enter 
Metropolitan  France  and  the  following  French 
territories  without  French  visas  for  a  temporary 
period  of  stay  provided  they  comply  with  other 
laws  and  regulations  of  Metropolitan  France  and 
of  such  territories  concerning  the  entry,  residence, 
and  employment  or  occupation  of  foreigners  or 
travelers:  Metropolitan  France,  Andorra,  Al- 
geria, Morocco,  Guadeloupe,  Martinique,  Guiana, 
Reunion,  Tunisia. 

Statutory  and  other  restrictions  preclude  the 
United  Sates  from  granting  identical  concessions, 
but  French  nationals  resident  in  Metropolitan 

April   10,   1949 


France  and  the  above-mentioned  territories  who 
are  in  possession  of  valid  French  passports  and 
who  are  eligible  to  receive  visas  with  which  to 
apply  for  admission  into  the  United  Sates  as  bona 
fide  nonimmigrants  will  be  granted,  effective  April 
1,  1949,  gratis  passport  visas,  and  in  cases  of 

?ualified  temporary  visitors,  visas  may  be  valid 
or  24  months  provided  the  passports  of  the  bearers 
remain  valid  for  that  period  of  time.  All  other 
nonimmigrant  passport  visas  granted  French  na- 
tionals resident  in  Metropolitan  France  and  in  the 
above-mentioned  territories  will  have  a  maximum 
period  of  validity  of  12  months  provided  the  pass- 
ports of  the  bearers  remain  valid  for  that  period 
of  time. 

French  citizens  resident  outside  Metropolitan 
France  and  the  above-mentioned  French  terri- 
tories and  who  are  eligible  to  receive  American 
visas,  may  be  gi-anted  nonimmigrant  passport 
visas  valid  for  a  maximum  period  of  12  months  at 
prescribed  visa  fees. 

American  citizens  entering  French  territories 
other  than  those  above-mentioned  are  subject  to 
French  visa  requirements  and  visa  fees. 

This  arrangement  will  be  put  into  effect  outside 
Metropolitan  France.  United  Kingdom,  Belgium, 
and  Switzerland  for  French  citizens  residing  in  the 
specified  territories  but  temporarily  absent  there- 
from and  who  are  proceeding  to  the  United  States 
as  nonimmigrants,  as  soon  as  American  diplomatic 
and  consular  officers  are  notified. 


Atlantic  Pact  Countries  Take  Note  of  Soviet 
Views  of  tiie  Treaty 

Statement  hy  the  Foreign  Ministers 

[Released  to  the  press  April  2] 

Tlie  Foreign  Ministers  of  the  countries  assem- 
bled here  in  Washington  for  the  signing  of  the 
North  Atlantic  pact  have  taken  note  of  the  views  of 
the  Soviet  Government  made  public  by  that  Gov- 
ernment on  March  31,  1949. 

The  Foreign  Ministers  note  that  the  views  ex- 
pressed by  the  Soviet  Government  on  March  31 
are  identical  in  their  misinterpretation  of  the 
nature  and  intent  of  this  association  with  those 
published  by  the  Soviet  Foreign  Office  in  January, 
before  the  text  of  the  pact  was  even  in  existence. 
It  would  thus  appear  that  the  views  of  the  Soviet 
Government  on  this  subject  do  not  arise  from  an 
examination  of  the  character  and  text  of  the  North 
Atlantic  pact  but  from  other  considerations. 

The  text  of  the  treaty  itself  is  the  best  answer 
to  such  misrepresentations  and  allegations.  The 
text  makes  clear  the  completely  defensive  nature 
of  this  pact,  its  conformity  with  both  the  spirit  and 
letter  of  the  Charter  of  the  United  Nations,  and 
also  the  fact  that  the  pact  is  not  directed  against 
any  nation  or  groUp  of  nations  but  only  against 
armed  aggression. 


Voice  of  America  Broadcasts  Atlantic  Pact 
Ceremonies 

The  largest  concentration  of  short-wave  radio 
facilities  ever  assembled  for  a  single  program  will 
be  used  to  broadcast  to  the  world  the  address  of 
President  Truman,  the  12  Foreign  Ministers,  and 
the  other  ceremonies  of  the  signing  of  the  North 
Atlantic  security  pact  in  Washington  on  Monday 
(April  4  at  2 :  45  to  5  :  00  p.  m.,  e.  s.  t.) 

The  Voice  of  America,  originating  the  broad- 
casts in  the  Departmental  Auditorium,  where  the 
signing  takes  place,  will  be  joined  by  the  British 
Broadcasting  Corjjoration.  the  Canadian  Broad- 
casting Company  and  the  U.S.  Armed  Forces  Net- 
work, to  bring  the  signing  ceremonies  to  a  world- 
wide audience  and  in  the  major  languages  of  the 
world — 43  in  all. 

People  of  the  Eastern  European  countries,  in- 
cluding Soviet  Russia,  will  be  able  to  listen  to  the 
ceremony  either  in  English  as  it  actually  takes 
place,  or  to  listen  to  the  detailed  description  of  the 
event  and  the  summary  translations  of  the  speeches 
in  their  own  languages. 

This  double  coverage  to  Iron  Curtain  areas,  in 
which  government  censorship  might  otherwise 
keep  accurate  news  of  the  event  from  the  people, 
will  be  provided  through  additional  relays  put  into 
service  for  this  purpose,  and  the  regular  language 
programs  beamed  to  Russia  and  her  satellites  by 
both  the  Voice  of  America  and  the  BBC.  These 
facilities  will  include  the  four  powerful  transmit- 
ters of  the  American  relay  liase  in  Munich  in  addi- 
tion to  the  BBC  relays  for  Eastern  Europe. 

The  Voice  and  BBC  will  have  a  team  of  com- 
mentators near  the  signing  table  to  give  the  con- 
tinuing description  of  the  event.  All  of  the  com- 
mentary originating  during  the  ceremony  will  be 
in  Engli.sh,  with  the  translations  being  made  by 
the  language  experts  in  the  Xew  York  studios  of 
the  Voice.  Immediately  after  the  signing,  a  VOA 
French  commentator  will  give  a  complete  resume 
of  the  event  at  the  AVashington  studios  of  the  Voice 
for  direct  broadcast  to  Europe. 

The  Voice  of  America  broadcast  will  begin  at 
2 :  45  p.  m.,  Monday  with  a  background  commen- 
tary on  the  pact.  At  3 :  00  p.  m.,  the  British 
Broadcasting  Corporation,  the  Canadian  Broad- 
casting Comi)any,  and  the  U.S.  Armed  Forces  Net- 
work will  join  the  network  just  before  the 
speeches  by  the  Foreign  Ministers  begin  on  the 
stage. 

The  entire  ceremony  consisting  of  speeches  by 
Secretary  Acheson  and  the  Foreign  Ministers,  the 
address  by  President  Truman,  and  the  signing 
ceremonies  will  go  over  the  air  simultaneously  to 
Europe,  North  Africa,  the  Middle  East,  and  Latin 
America. 


After  the  ceremonies  are  over,  the  Voice  of 
America  will  rebroadcast  a  half-hour  summarized 
version  to  Latin  America  and  to  the  Far  East. 

During  the  24  hours  following  the  ceremonies, 
sunmiaries  of  the  event  will  be  broadcast  on  all 
regular  Voice  of  America  programs. 

In  addition  to  the  broadcasting  of  the  ceremony, 
the  texts  of  all  speeches  and  news  stories  of  the 
event  will  be  sent  to  U..S.  Embassies  and  Legations 
abroad  and  made  available  to  the  press  in  foreign 
countries.  Photographic  exhibits  of  the  signing 
will  also  be  sent  out. 


Foreign  Ministers  Approve  Atlantic  Treaty 

CommMnique 

[Released  to  the  press  AprU  2] 

Tlie  Foreign  Ministers  of  Belgium.  Canada, 
Denmark,  France,  Iceland,  Italy,  Luxembourg, 
the  Netherlands,  Norway,  Portugal,  and  the 
United  Kingdom  and  the  Secretary  of  State  of  the 
United  States  met  on  April  2  and  formally  ap- 
proved the  text  of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty,  to 
be  signed  on  April  4. 

Preliminary  consideration  was  given  to  the 
nature  of  the  council  to  be  established  under  article 
9  of  the  treaty.  It  was  agreed  that  the  council 
should  be  composed  of  Foreign  Ministers  or  other 
representatives  of  governments.  It  was  agreed 
that  tlie  council  should  meet  immediately  after  the 
treaty  goes  into  effect  for  the  purpose  of  establish- 
ing the  defense  committee. 


Mutual  Problems  Discussed  With  Netherlands 

Joint    Statement    hi/    Secretary    Acheson    and 
Foreign  Minister  Stikker  of  the  Netherlands 

[Released  to  the  press  March  31] 

Mr.  Stikker,  in  his  talk  with  tlie  Secretary  of 
State,  went  over  several  matters  of  interest  to  the 
Netherlands  Government  in  connection  with  the 
Atlantic  pact  and  Western  European  questions. 
He  also  discussed  fully  and  frankly  the  Indonesian 
situation.  In  this  connection,  the  Secretary  in- 
dicated to  him  the  strong  hope  of  the  United  States 
Government  that  the  instructions  sent  from  the 
Security  Council  to  the  Commission  for  Indonesia 
on  March  23  might  be  put  into  effect  at  the  earliest 
possible  date.  The  Secretary  expressed  full  con- 
fidence that  both  parties  would  enter  into  pre- 
liminary negotiations  called  for  by  the  Security 
Council  action  promptly  and  in  good  faith. 

Mr.  Stikker.  after  making  clear  tliat  the  sugges- 
tions of  the  Security  Council  had  been  accepted  by 
the  Netherlands  Government,  expressed  similar 
desires  and  outlined  to  the  Secretary  the  paths 
along  which  he  believed  progress  could  be  achieved 
most  effectively  aiul  expeditiously. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


U.S.  and  U.K.  Discuss  Germany  and  Greece 

Joint    Statement    hy    Secretary    Acheson    and 
Foreign  Secretary  Bevin 

[Released  to  the  press  March  31] 

The  Secretary  of  State  reviewed  with  Mr.  Bevin 
a  number  of  European  questions  of  common  con- 
cern. In  particular,  they  gave  general  considera- 
tion to  the  problems  of  Western  Germany  and  ex- 
changed views  on  the  situation  in  Greece.  The 
Secretary  of  State  and  Mr.  Bevin  met  in  order  to 
have  a  general  exchange  of  views  on  these  sub- 
jects, and  no  decisions  were  taken  at  the  meeting. 

Definition  of  Term  "German  Etiinic  Origin" 

[Released  to  the  press  March  30] 

The  Department  of  State  has  formulated  the 
following  definition  of  the  term  "German  ethnic 
origin"  for  the  guidance  of  American  consular  of- 
ficers in  Germany  and  Austria  in  implementation 
of  section  12  of  the  Displaced  Persons  Act  of 
1948: 

In  order  to  qualify  for  an  immigration  visa  under  tlie 
"German  ethnic  origin"  iportions  of  tlie  German  and  Aus- 
trian quotas  ttie  burden  of  proof  shall  be  upon  each  ap- 
plicant to  establish  that  he  is  not  subject  to  exclusion 
from  the  United  States  under  any  provision  of  the  im- 
migration laws  and  to  establish  the  following  qualifica- 
tions as  a  person  of  "German  ethnic  origin"  as  intended  by 
Congress  in  enacting  the  provisions  of  section  12  of  the 
Displaced  Persons  Act  of  June  25,  1948: 

1.  That  be  was  born  in  Poland,  Czechoslovakia,  Hun- 
gary, Rumania,  or  Yugoslavia.  The  statute  specifically 
requires  this  as  an  element  of  classification. 

2.  That  he  resided  in  any  part  of  Germany  or  Austria 
on  June  25,  1948,  when  the  Displaced  Persons  Act  became 
effective.     This  is  also  a  specific  statutory  requirement. 

3.  That  he  does  not  come  under  the  jurisdiction  of  the 
International  Refugee  Organization.  The  statute  classi- 
fies as  displaced  persons  certain  aliens  who  are  under  the 
jurisdiction  of  the  International  Refugee  Organization, 
and  provides  a  special  procedure  for  dealing  with  them 
as  "eligible  displaced  persons". 

4.  (a)  That  he  is  a  German  expellee,  or  the  accom- 
panying wife  or  minor  child  of  a  German  expellee,  pur- 
suant to  the  Potsdam  Agreement  of  August  1,  1945,  from 
Poland,  Czechoslovakia,  or  Hungary,  or  (b)  that  he  is  a 
a  refugee,  or  the  accompanying  wife  or  minor  child  of  a 
refugee  from  Poland,  Czechoslovakia,  Hungary,  Rumania, 
or  Yugoslavia. 

5.  That  he  is  characteristically  Germanic,  a  status  which 
is  to  be  determined  upon  the  basis  of  the  following  com- 
bination of  factors,  the  presence  or  absence  of  any  par- 
ticular one  of  which  will  not,  in  itself,  be  considered  as 
conclusive,  but  any  combination  of  which  may  be  con- 
sidered as  providing  satisfactory  evidence  of  German 
ethnic  origin: 

(a)  Antecedents  emigrated  from  Germany. 

(b)  Use  of  any  of  the  German  dialects  as  the  common 
language  of  the  home  or  for  social  communications. 

(c)  Resided  in  the  country  of  birth  in  an  area  popu- 
lated predominantly  by  persons  of  Germanic  origin  or 
stock  who  have  retained  German  social  characteristics 
and  group  homogeneity  as  distinguished  from  the  sur- 
rounding population. 

(d)  Evidences  common  attributes  or  social  characteris- 
tics of  the  Germanic  group  in  which  he  resided  in  the 
country  of  his  birth,  such  as  educational  institutions  at- 
tended, church  afliliation,  social  and  jwlitical  associations 

April  JO,   1949 


and  affiliations,  name,  business  or  commercial  practices 
and  associations,  and  secondary  languages  or  dialects. 

6.  Any  person  who  fails  to  qualify  under  1  or  2  is 
statutorily  ineligible  to  receive  an  immigration  visa  under 
the  "German  ethnic  origin"  clause  in  section  12  of  the 
Displaced  Persons  Act,  but  such  person  may  apply  in  the 
usual  manner  for  an  appropriate  immigration  visa  under 
the  quota  of  the  country  of  his  birth,  at  such  time  as 
his  turn  is  reached  on  the  waiting  list,  and  his  priority 
on  such  waiting  list  shall  be  determined  as  of  the  date 
of  his  registration  for  an  immigration  visa  under  the 
"German  ethnic  origin"  program. 

7.  In  the  case  of  any  applicant  who  qualifies  under  1 
and  2,  but  who  fails  to  qualify  under  3,  4,  or  5,  action 
should  be  suspended  and  a  full  report  should  be  sub- 
mitted to  the  Department  for  an  advisory  opinion  con- 
cerning the  alien's  proper  classification. 

Persons  in  Germany  and  Austria  who  were  bom 
in  one  of  the  five  countries  mentioned  in  the  above 
definition  may  submit  to  the  American  consular 
office  at  which  they  are  registered  appropriate  evi- 
dence to  establish  that  they  are  classifiable  as 
persons  of  German  ethnic  origin.  Such  evidence 
should  not  be  sent  to  the  Department  of  State. 

American  Soldiers  Convicted  in  Czeclioslovakia 
on  Cliarges  of  Espionage 

Statement  hy  Secretary  Acheson 

[Released  to  the  press  March  30] 

The  United  States  Government  views  with 
grave  concern  the  conviction  on  March  26  of  two 
American  soldiers,  George  R.  Jones  and  Clarence 
R.  Hill,  to  ten  to  twelve  years  at  hard  labor,  re- 
spectively, on  charges  of  espionage  after  deten- 
tion since  December  10,  1948,  without  access  to 
our  Embassy  and  without  due  regard  for  the 
normal  rights  and  safeguards  to  which  an  ac- 
cused should  be  entitled  insofar  as  this  Govern- 
ment is  aware.  The  conviction  was  suddenly 
announced  on  March  29  without  prior  notification 
to  our  Embassy  in  Praha  that  the  men  had  been 
brought  to  trial.  Earlier  background  informa- 
tion on  this  case  was  made  available  to  the  press 
in  the  Department's  announcement  of  February 
18,  1949,  and  in  subsequent  reports  from  our  Em- 
bassy in  Pralia.^ 

This  Government  fully  supports  the  action  of 
the  United  States  Ambassador  in  Praha  in  pro- 
testing the  procedure  of  the  Czechoslovak  au- 
thorities in  this  matter.  The  Czechoslovak  Min- 
istry of  Foreign  Affairs  has  stated  that  a  note 
is  being  addressed  to  the  Embassy  on  this  sub- 
ject, and  has  further  promised  that  arrangements 
would  be  made  next  week  for  our  Embassy  to 
interview  them. 

Before  determining  what  further  measures 
may  be  taken  in  this  matter  on  behalf  of  the 
American  citizens  involved,  the  Department  of 
State  will  await  the  Czechoslovak  official  com- 
munication in  this  matter  and  the  results  of  the 
interviews  with  the  prisoners  by  our  representa- 
tives in  Praha. 


'  BtrrxETiN  of  Feb.  27,  1949,  p.  266. 


Influence  of  Inter-American  Relations  on  U.S.  Foreign  Policy 


BY  PAUL  C.  DANIELS' 
Director  for  American  Republic  Affairs 


You  are  all  familiar  with  the  history  of  re- 
lations between  the  United  States  and  its  good 
neighboi-s  in  the  other  American  republics.  These 
relations  are  of  long  standing.  There  have  been 
ups  and  downs,  to  be  sure,  but  the  outstanding 
feature  through  many  decades  has  been  the  de- 
termination of  the  American  nations  to  get  along 
together  for  the  benefit  of  all. 

At  the  root  of  this  liistoric  cooperation  is  the 
factor  of  geography,  which  binds  us  together. 
Deeper  still  is  the  strong  psychological  factor  of 
love  of  liberty  and  freedom  and  the  aspirations  of 
democracy  which  we  share.  Nearly  all  the  Ameri- 
can republics,  like  our  own  country,  obtained  their 
freedom  by  fighting  for  it.  They  have  carefully 
guarded  their  hard-won  independence  ever  since. 

The  ability  of  the  American  republics  to  get 
along  together  has  never  stood  out  in  sharper 
relief  than  it  does  today.  Not  only  does  it  stand 
out  by  contrast  with  conflicts  elsewhere,  but  it 
serves  as  a  powerful  beacon  to  guide  the  rest  of  the 
world.  I  look  upon  the  evolution  of  Pan-Ameri- 
canism as  the  source  and  the  proving  ground  of 
some  of  the  major  programs  of  the  United  States 
foreign  policy  of  today.  A  brief  look  into  the 
background  and  some  of  the  latest  developments 
in  the  political,  technical,  and  economic  phases  of 
our  cooperation  with  tlie  other  American  nations 
will  illustrate  this  point. 

Ever  since  the  days  of  President  Monroe,  the 
American  Eepublics.  This,  in  turn,  became  the 
cooperation  among  themselves  for  the  protection 
of  their  individual  and  collective  freedom.  This 
need,  of  course,  has  its  basis  in  the  community  of 
interests  of  the  Americas. 

This  community  of  interests,  through  the  years, 
became  more  widely  recognized.  It  found  its  first 
expression  in  organized  form  in  1890  with  es- 
tablishment of  the  Commercial  Bureau  of  the 
American  Republics.  This,  in  turn,  became  the 
Pan  American  Union  in  1910.  There  followed  a 
step-by-step  development,  entirely  healthy  and 
logical  in  cliaractor,  that  led  to  the  creation  of  the 
Organization  of  American  States  at  the  Bogota 
conference  of  1948.  The  Pan  American  Union, 
today,  is  the  permanent  general  secretariat  of  that 
organization. 

AVliile    political   and    economic   considerations 

'  An  address  delivered  at  the  University  of  Wisconsin,  at 
Madison,  on  Mar.  30,  1949,  and  released  to  the  press  on  the 
same  date. 


were  in  the  process  of  development,  there  was  a 
similar  evolution  of  the  concept  of  mutual  aid  for 
security.  Beginning  with  the  principle  of  con- 
sultation in  the  event  of  a  threat  to  peace,  this 
mutual  concern  developed  into  the  doctrine  of  "all 
for  one  and  one  for  all."  At  Habana  in  1940,  the 
year  before  Pearl  Harbor,  the  concept  that  an 
attack  on  an  American  state  by  a  non-American 
state  would  be  considered  as  an  attack  on  all  be- 
came generally  accepted.  This  was  reaffiniied  in 
1945,  in  the  Act  of  Chapultepec.  This  act  pro- 
vided that  in  the  event  of  an  attack,  there  would 
be  general  consultation  to  decide  on  counter 
measures,  including  the  use  of  armed  force. 

Thus,  there  emerged  an  entirely  new  principle 
in  international  cooperation.  The  thought,  to  be 
sure,  was  not  of  itself  a  new  one,  but  in  its  applica- 
tion to  international  treaties  and  commitments,  it 
was  a  fundamental  innovation.  Today,  as  we 
know,  it  is  having  a  tremendous  influence  in  woi-ld 
afl'airs. 

These  and  other  important  concepts  found  their 
practical  application  in  the  treaty  of  Rio  de 
Janeiro,  signed  in  1947.  The  treaty  embodies  the 
principle  of  "all  for  one  and  one  for  all"  should 
an  attack  occur  within  the  geographic  limits  en- 
compassing the  Western  Hemisphere.  It  goes 
still  further  than  that.  It  extends  the  obligation 
of  tlie  adherents  to  consult  for  collective  action 
when  an  attack  anywhere  in  the  world  threatens 
the  security  of  America.  This  is  a  realistic  recog- 
nition that  Western-Hemisphere  security  is  in- 
separably bound  up  with  the  security  of  the  rest 
of  the  world. 

It  is  an  interesting  fact  that  although  the  Mexico 
City  conference  preceded  the  San  Francisco  con- 
ference on  the  United  Nations,  the  Act  of  Chapul- 
tepec provided  that  any  treaty  which  mi^ht  grow 
out  of  it  should  be  consistent  with  the  U.N.  Char- 
ter. This  reflects  the  basic  faith  of  the  Americas 
in  the  concej^t  that  the  United  Nations  is  the  para- 
mount authority  for  the  preservation  of  world 
peace.  It  is  not  without  significance  that  all  of 
the  American  republics  are  members  in  good 
standing  of  the  United  Nations. 

Tiien,  wlien  the  U.N.  Charter  was  being  evolved, 
in  San  Francisco,  the  United  States  together  with 
the  other  American  republics  introduced  the  prin- 
ciple of  regional  security  arrangements.  Sub- 
sequent developments  have  confirmed  the  wisdom 
of  this  proposal.  The  American  republics  had 
behind  them  the  experience  of  nearly  GO  years  of 

Department  of  Slate  Bulletin 


collective  action  for  their  mutual  welfare.  They 
had  demonstrated  the  complete  feasibility  of  sucFi 
action.  By  their  foresight  at  San  Francisco,  they 
placed  the  benefit  of  this  successful  experience  at 
the  disposal  of  the  world.  It  is  this  experience 
which  has  guided  us  in  our  policy  of  strengthening 
freedom-loving  nations  against  aggression,  in 
order  that  they  may  attain  economic  security. 

The  North  Atlantic  pact  is  the  latest  applica- 
tion of  our  policy  of  helping  democratic  nations 
protect  themselves  against  aggression.  You  have 
had  occasion  to  familiarize  yourselves  with  its  pro- 
visions since  it  was  published  a  few  days  ago. 
The  basic  structure  of  the  North  Atlantic  pact, 
you  will  note,  is  very  similar  to  that  of  the  Rio 
treaty.  The  pact,  like  the  Rio  treaty,  contains 
provisions  for  consultation  for  collective  action  as 
well  as  for  unified  common  defense,  should  an 
armed  attack  be  made  on  any  one  or  more  of  the 
contracting  parties.  Both  are  regional  arrange- 
ments, with  both  pursuing  the  same  goal  in  their 
respective  areas. 

Only  recently  we  saw  the  effectiveness  of  the 
Rio  de  Janeiro  treaty  positively  demonstrated. 
Since  I  have  first-hand  knowledge  of  the  circum- 
stances, I  would  like  to  review  them  in  some  detail. 

Eight  days  after  the  treaty  became  effective,  the 
Council  of  the  Organization  of  American  States, 
the  permanent  executive  agency  of  the  Organiza- 
tion, received  from  Costa  Rica  a  request  that  the 
treaty  be  invoked  against  Nicaragua.  It  is  a  strik- 
ing coincidence  that  Costa  Rica  should  be  the  first 
to  call  the  treaty  into  operation,  since  it  was  Costa 
Rica's  ratification,  deposited  on  the  third  of  last 
December,  that  made  the  treaty  a  binding  instru- 
ment. 

Costa  Rica  charged  that  it  had  been  invaded  by 
forces  organized  within  Nicaragua  and  contended 
that  this  constituted  a  threat  to  the  peace  within 
the  meaning  of  article  6  of  the  Rio  treaty. 

The  next  day,  Sunday,  the  12th  of  December, 
the  Council  met  but  found  it  had  insufficient  in- 
formation on  which  to  invoke  the  pact  and  thereby 
to  establish  far-reacliing  precedents.  Under  the 
able  chairmanship  of  Ambassador  Corominas  of 
Argentina,  the  Council  requested  by  telegram 
more  information  from  the  governments  con- 
cerned and  from  other  American  governments  as 
well.  On  December  14, 48  hours  later,  it  met  again 
and  on  the  basis  of  the  information  that  had  been 
supplied,  the  treaty  was  invoked  and  the  Council 
set  itself  up  as  the  provisional  organ  of  consulta- 
tion, pending  the  convocation  of  a  meeting  of 
Foreign  Ministers. 

A  five-member  commission  was  named  on  De- 
cember 15  and  left  the  following  day  by  special 
airplane  for  San  Jose  and  Managua  to  investigate 
on  the  spot.  Appointed  to  this  group  were  the 
Ambassadors  of  Mexico,  Brazil,  and  Colombia, 
and  myself  as  representative  of  the  United  States. 
The  commission  was  able  to  carry  out  its  instruc- 
tions in  an  atmosphere  of  willing  cooperation  of 

April   10,   1949 


the  two  nations  involved  in  the  dispute.  The  job 
was  done  expeditiously  and  the  commission  re- 
turned to  Washington  on  December  23  to  report 
its  findings. 

On  the  24th,  the  Council  met  again  and  after 
hearing  the  Commission's  report  agreed  on  a  reso- 
lution which  called  on  both  parties  to  cease  all 
hostile  acts  and  urged  them  to  come  to  an  ami- 
cable agreement.  This  was  accomplished  without 
the  Council  having  to  call  a  meeting  of  Foreign 
Ministers  for  consultation  on  further  action.  Ne- 
gotiations went  on  between  the  two  countries, 
while  at  the  same  time  compliance  with  the  resolu- 
tion was  observed  by  a  military  commission  ap- 
pointed by  the  Council.  On  the  21st  of  February, 
a  little  more  than  a  month  ago,  Nicaragua  and 
Costa  Rica  signed  a  friendship  pact  which  not 
only  ended  the  entire  incident  peacefully,  but  also 
constitutes  an  added  guarantee  of  tranquility  for 
years  to  come. 

I  have  given  you  this  quick  review  of  these  de- 
velopments in  order  to  impress  upon  you  the  speed 
with  which  this  Rio  treaty  mechanism  woi-ked. 
The  Rio  treaty  merits  special  mention  because 
it  proves  that  a  group  of  representatives  of  many 
countries,  animated  by  good  will,  is  able  to  move 
with  speed  and  decisiveness.  On  the  other  hand, 
thoroughness  and  justice  were  not  sacrificed  for 
the  sake  of  speed.  The  Council  took  great  care 
to  obtain  reliable  information  which  made  it  pos- 
sible to  take  intelligent,  well-founded  decisions. 
Solid  precedents  were  set  on  which  to  base  future 
procedure  and  decisions. 

Other  tried  and  proved  features  of  United 
States  relations  with  Latin  America  are  being 
elaborated  and  extended  in  our  current  mterna- 
tional  programs.  You  will  recall  that  President 
Truman  at  liis  inauguration  called  for  a  "bold  new 
program  for  making  the  benefits  of  our  scientific 
advances  and  industrial  progress  available  for 
the  improvement  and  growth  of  underdeveloped 
areas."  This  program  is,  indeed,  both  new  and 
bold,  if  only  by  virtue  of  the  vast  scope  it  em- 
braces. In  its  principal  elements,  however,  its 
prototype  may  be  found  in  the  technical  and  scien- 
tific programs  of  cooperation,  which  we  have  been 
conducting  with  Latin  America  for  many  years. 

The  experience  we  have  gained  in  the  last  10 
years  of  coordinated  effort  in  this  field  will  prove 
to  be  of  untold  value  in  the  formulation  and  execu- 
tion of  the  new  "Point-4"  program.  Indeed,  in 
its  early  phases,  this  program  will  consist  largely 
of  a  continuation  and  extension  of  our  work  in 
this  field  with  the  other  American  republics.  As 
it  takes  shape,  it  will  undoubtedly  rely  heavily 
on  the  wealth  of  experience  and  know-how  that 
we  already  possess. 

Let  me  review,  for  a  moment,  some  of  the  basic 
considerations  that  have  been  guiding  our  tech- 
nical cooperation  efforts.  First  of  all,  we  enter 
into  projects  only  at  the  request  of  the  individual 
governments  and  when  we  are  convinced  that  a 
project  is  desirable  for  its  effects  on  national  and 


international  welfare.  There  must  also  be  i-eal 
evidence  that  the  other  government  is  eager  to 
pursue  the  project  to  a  successful  finish.  Our 
cooperation  is  intended  to  help  the  other  countries 
to  help  themselves.  Their  self-help  is  expressed 
in  difterent  ways:  by  dollar  reimbursements  or 
advance  of  funds  for  services  rendered;  bj-  pro- 
viding land,  buildings,  and  other  facilities  and 
equipment  within  the  foreign  country;  by  making 
available  the  best  qualified  nationals  of  the  re- 
cipient country  or  other  countries  to  work  with 
American  technicians;  by  providing  maintenance 
personnel ;  and,  in  other  constructive  ways. 

The  important  thing  that  has  stood  out  in  some 
of  these  ventures  is  that  as  the  progi-ams  became 
larger  and  more  effective,  a  correspondingly  larger 
percentage  of  the  total  costs  was  borne  by  the  other 
governments  and  less  and  less  by  the  United  States. 
At  the  outset  most  of  the  programs  of  the  In- 
stitute of  Intpr-American  Affairs  were  almost 
wholly  financed  by  the  United  States.  Today,  the 
United  States  contributions  to  those  same  pro- 
grams are  down  to  below  10  percent  in  one  in- 
stance and  in  every  case  below  50  percent.  Tlie 
cooperative  approach  to  these  projects  has  al- 
ready served  as  a  pattern  for  comparable  activities 
in  other  parts  of  the  world  and  undoubtedly  will 
provide  valuable  experience  in  further  develop- 
ment of  the  President's  program. 

Anotlier  characteristic  of  our  technical  and 
scientific  programs  is  that  they  are  flexible.  Not 
only  do  they  vary  in  form  and  method  from 
country  to  country,  but  they  are  actually  spon- 
sored and  carried  out  by  many  different  agencies. 

In  addition  to  the  Institute  of  Inter-American 
Affairs,  the  United  States  Government  cooper- 
ates with  other  governments  through  the  Inter- 
departmental Committee  on  Scientific  and  Cul- 
tural Cooperation.  This  committee  coordinates 
the  technical  operations  abroad  of  some  '25  bu- 
reaus with  10  Federal  departments.  The  Govern- 
ment also  participates  in  constructive  cooperative 
programs  througli  such  inter- American  agencies 
as  the  Pan  American  Sanitary  Bureau.  Other 
operations  have  long  been  conducted  by  private 
nonprofit  organizations  such  as  the  Rockefeller 
Institute,  the  Institute  of  International  Educa- 
tion, to  name  but  two. 

A  considerable  amount  of  technical  assistance, 
on  the  other  hand,  is  directly  related  to  and  de- 
pendent upon  private  business  enterprises.  Priv- 
ate investments  through  contracts  with  foreign 
governments  or  with  private  foreign  firms  are 
frequently  accompanied  by  American  technology. 
American  business  firms  not  only  furnish  detailed 
technical  information  with  the  capital  goods  tliey 
send  abroad,  but  they  fn'(|U('ntly  send  along  tech- 
nicians to  supervise  installations  and  operations 
and,  at  the  same  time,  to  train  local  national  per- 
sonnel.. In  addition  manj'  firms  bring  personnel 
to  this  country  for  intensive  training  in  their 
plants  and  hiboratoi'ies.  There  are,  also,  many 
private  engineering  considtant  linns  engaged  in 


making  available  to  the  Latin  Americans  our  tech- 
nical know-how  and  services. 

This  sort  of  private  enterprise  is  welcomed 
wholeheartedly  by  the  Department  of  State.  The 
Department  attempts  to  encourage  private  agen- 
cies to  the  greatest  extent  possible,  to  supplement 
the  limited  government-sponsored  programs.  It 
recognizes  the  importance  of  the  role  of  private 
activities  in  contributing  to  our  common  objectives 
of  economic  and  social  advancement.  In  attempt- 
ing to  avoid  past  errors,  which  came  to  be  known 
as  "dollar  diplomacy,"  we  expect  that  American 
citizens  and  enterprises  will  interfere  in  no  way 
with  the  political  affairs  of  the  country  in  which 
they  are  engaged. 

The  specific  projects,  both  official  and  private, 
now  being  carried  on  in  Latin  America,  are  far 
too  numerous  to  enumerate  here.  Sufiice  it  to  say 
they  have  dealt  with  public  health,  education,  in- 
dustry, agriculture,  aviation,  geologic  investiga- 
tions, and  many  other  subjects. 

Economic  cooperation  with  Latin  America  has 
long  since  gone  beyond  the  basic  and  essential 
considerations  of  trade  for  private  gain.  It  has 
taken  the  shape  of  sincere  attempts  to  develop  and 
bolster  the  economies  of  the  respective  countries 
for  the  betterment  of  all  concerned.  This  is  a 
lofty  goal;  it  is  difficult  to  realize.  Nevertheless 
it  is  constantly  before  us.  It  is  a  basic  objective 
sought  in  the  technical  and  scientific  cooperation 
programs  I  have  mentioned.  We  also  seek  that 
goal  through  other  means. 

I  will  not  attempt  a  discussion  of  all  the  various 
factors  and  conditions  which  enter  into  the  eco- 
nomic relationship  of  the  Americas.  Wliat  we  are 
seeking  is  a  healthy  economy,  based  on  the  fullest 
possible  development,  increased  trade,  and  a 
liiglier  standard  of  living  for  all  the  people,  with 
its  obvious  influence  on  political  stability. 

At  Rio,  when  the  politico-military  cooperative 
agreement  was  reached,  it  was  proposed  that 
similar  cooperation  be  sought  in  the  economic 
field.  This  would  be  a  continuation  of  other  long 
standing  cooperative  efforts  and  would  put  them 
on  a  well-defined  and  firmer  basis.  The  Inter- 
American  Economic  and  Social  Council  prepared 
a  basic  draft  to  be  considered  at  the  Bogota  con- 
ference. The  basic  draft  was  formalized  at  Bo- 
gota as  an  agreement  among  the  states  "to  cooper- 
ate individually  and  collectively  and  with  other 
nations  to  carry  out  the  principles  of  facilitating 
access,  on  equal  terms,  to  the  trade,  ]irodiicts,  and 
means  of  j^roduction,  including  scientific  and  tech- 
nical advances,  that  are  needed  for  their  industrial 
and  general  economic  development." 

Tiie  economic  agreement  of  Bogota  is  important 
because  it  sets  forth  a  detailed  set  of  principles  for 
economic  cooperation  and  development.  We  have 
not  yet  been  able  to  see  it  through  to  ratification 
because  of  numerous  reservations  that  were  made 
at  Bogota.  However,  we  are  now  exerting  every 
effort  to  reduce  these  reservations,  in  order  to 

Department  of  State   Bvlletin 


make  the  document  comprehensible  when  it  is 
presented  for  ratification.  To  this  end  the  United 
States  took  the  initiative  in  having  it  referred  to 
the  Inter- American  Economic  and  Social  Council, 
which  is  now  attempting  to  eliminate  duplications 
and  consolidate  the  others  into  a  draft  protocol 
form.  According  to  present  plans,  it  will  be  re- 
studied  at  the  economic  conference  which  is  sched- 
uled to  be  held  in  Buenos  Aires  the  latter  part  of 
this  year. 

Meanwhile,  various  economic  programs  of  the 
United  States  are  contributing  to  the  alleviation 
of  the  economic  difficulties  of  Latin  America. 
These  are  fully  in  keeping  with  our  history  of 
cooperation,  as  well  as  with  the  objectives  of  the 
Bogota  agreement. 

Moreover,  the  great  economic  momentum  which 
has  gathered  in  this  country  under  our  system  of 
individual  enterprise  could  easily  expand  into 
Latin  America  to  an  extent  never  before  visualized. 
There  is  an  abundance  of  business  and  private 
capital  which  could  be  poured  into  the  countries 
to  the  south  of  us.  The  economic  and  social  bet- 
terment in  those  countries  that  would  derive  from 
this  capital  is  almost  boundless.  The  obstacles 
that  stand  in  the  way  of  this  development  are  not 
insurmountable.  Guaranties  against  expropria- 
tion and  other  hazards  would  open  the  way  to 
thousands  of  prospective  investors  bringing  in  a 
short  time  results  that  it  will  otherwise  require  a 
great  span  of  years  to  accomplish. 

It  is  unfortunate  that  the  conditions  in  Europe 
that  followed  in  the  wake  of  the  last  war  were  so 
severe  that  we  have  had  to  concentrate  our  efforts 
upon  them.  The  war,  as  you  know,  left  the  econ- 
omy of  Europe  in  virtual  chaos.  It  was  obvious 
that  no  recovery  would  be  possible  without  outside 
assistance  and  we  were  the  only  nation  in  a  posi- 
tion to  help  the  European  countries  get  back  on 
their  feet. 

It  has  been  our  confident  hope  and  belief  that 
the  urgent  assistance  we  are  now  providing  under 
the  European  Recovery  Program  will  have  a  bene- 
ficial effect  on  Latin  America.  This  effect  will  be 
felt  in  the  availability  in  Europe  of  materials  and 
capital  goods  that  are  needed  for  the  further  devel- 
opment of  the  other  American  republics.  At  the 
same  time,  it  will  serve  to  restore  to  their  former 
extent  and  even  to  widen  traditional  European 
markets  for  Latin  American  exports. 

This  is  not  to  say  that  these  benefits  are  the 
solution  to  the  economic  problems  of  Latin  Amer- 
ica. Far  from  it.  We,  in  this  country,  are  acutely 
aware  of  the  existence  of  those  problems.  How- 
ever, it  is  apparent  that  while  there  is  no  limit  to 
the  political  cooperation  we  can  give  to  Latin 
America  at  the  present  time,  and  while  we  have 


an  abundance  of  technical  and  scientific  skill  to 
export,  we  cannot  stretch  the  burden  on  our  tax- 
payers or  the  limited  resources  of  the  United  States 
Treasury  to  fill  all  of  the  world's  needs  at  once. 
We  must  be  guided,  primarily,  by  considerations 
of  security  and  our  own  available  resoui'ces. 

From  the  security  aspect  alone,  the  logic  of  the 
great  effort  we  are  placing  on  the  recovery  of  the 
European  democracies  is  readily  apparent.  Secu- 
rity and  a  sound  economy  go  hand  in  hand. 

Naturally,  European  recovery  will  have  effects 
that  go  well  beyond  the  limited  spheres  of  Europe, 
or  of  the  United  States.  The  American  com- 
munity of  interests  will  be  served  at  the  same  time, 
since,  in  the  Western  Hemisphere,  the  security  of 
one  country  is  the  security  of  all,  and  Western 
Hemisphere  security  is  dependent  upon  world 
security. 

We  hope  to  be  able  to  increase  the  degree  of  co- 
operation between  ourselves  and  our  immediate 
neighboi-s.  We  will  continue  to  respect  the  soyei*- 
eignty  and  juridical  equality  of  all  the  American 
nations.  We  will  continue  to  abide  by  the  soleimi 
inter-American  commitments  of  nonintervention 
in  the  internal  and  external  affairs  of  those  coun- 
tries. We  will  continue  to  give  tangible  evidence 
of  our  good  neighborliness  and  of  our  faith  in  the 
Americas.  Our  history,  our  traditions,  and  our 
international  goals  stand  as  guarantees  to  that 
effect.  These  same  objectives  represent,  I  am 
confident,  the  deep  conviction  of  every  individual 
American  citizen. 

U.S.-Mexican  International  Convention  for 
Tuna  investigation  Sent  to  the  Senate 

To  the  Senate  of  the  United  States: 

With  a  view  to  receiving  the  advice  and  con- 
sent of  the  Senate  to  ratification,  I  transmit  here- 
with a  convention  between  the  United  States  of 
America  and  Mexico  for  the  establisliment  of  an 
International  Commission  for  the  Scientific  In- 
vestigation of  Tuna,  signed  at  Mexico  City  Jan- 
uary 25,  1949. 

I  transmit  also,  for  the  information  of  the  Sen- 
ate, the  report  which  the  Secretary  of  State  has 
addressed  to  me  in  regard  to  this  convention.^ 

The  purpose  of  this  convention  has  my  com- 
plete and  wholehearted  approval  and  I  recom- 
mend the  convention  to  the  favorable  considera- 
tion of  the  Senate. 

Harry  S.  Truman 
The  White  House, 

March  23,  19J,9. 

^  Documents  not  here  printed. 


AprW   10,   1949 


Report  to  the  Congress  by  Advisory  Commission  on  Information 


[Released  to  tbe  press  March  30] 

Congress  was  advised  by  the  United  State,s  Ad- 
visory Commission  on  Information  on  March  30 
that  the  glowing  importance  of  our  international 
information  program  as  a  tool  of  America's  for- 
eign policy  requires  an  immediate  and  broad  ex- 
pansion of  the  world-wide  information  program, 
including  activities  of  the  Voice  of  America,  now 
being  conducted  by  the  State  Department. 

The  Commission,  created  by  Congress  last  year 
under  Public  Law  402,  is  made  up  of : 

Mark  Ethrldge,  publisher,  Louisville  Courier-Journal, 
Chairman 

Erwin  D.  Canham,  editor,  Christian  Science  Monitor, 
Acting  Chairman 

Philip  D.  Reed,  chairman,  the  General  Electric  Company 

Mark  A.  May,  director  of  the  Institute  of  Human  Rela- 
tions. Yale  University 

Justin  Miller,  president  of  the  National  Association  of 
Broadcasters 

Mr.  Canham  is  acting  as  cliairman  of  the  Com- 
mission in  the  absence  of  Mr.  Ethridge,  who  is 
serving  on  the  United  Nations  Conciliation  Com- 
mission for  Palestine. 

While  the  present  information  program  was 
found  by  the  Commission  to  be  effective  "as  far  as 
it  goes,'*  its  operations  now  were  described  as  in- 
adequate to  meet  the  pressing  needs  of  our  inter- 
national responsibilities.  The  report  held  that 
the  budgetary  recommendations  sent  to  Congress 
by  the  Department  of  State  for  the  program  in 
1950  provide  a  "bare  minimum"  for  continuing  the 
beginning  that  has  been  made.^ 

Wliile  it  is  important  to  spend  well  rather  than 
merely  to  spend  a  lot,"  the  Commission's  report 
said,  "the  vital  need  for  broadening  this  program 
as  speedily  and  effectively  as  possible  calls  for  a 
much  larger  expenditure." 

"Indeed,"  the  Commission  said,  "a  realistic  ap- 
proach requires  that  we  provide  a  budget  better 
balanced  between  the  three-pronged  program  of 
military,  economic,  and  information  policy.  A 
budget  which  contemplates  $1.''),000.000,000  for 
military,  $5,000,000,000  for  economic,  and  only 
$36,000,000  for  information  and  educational 
services,  does  not  provide  an  effective  tool  for 
cleaning  out  the  Augean  stables  of  international 
confusion  and  misunderstanding." 

"It  is  in  the  information  field",  the  Commission 
said,  "that  we  meet  the  rival  forces  head  on.  The 
Soviet  Union,  for  example,  places  by  all  odds  its 
heaviest  reliance  on  'propaganda',  spending  enor- 
mous sums  and  using  its  best  and  most  imaginative 
brains.  Other  governments  are  acutely  conscious 
of  the  importance  of  information  programs  and 
are  spending  more  in  proportion  to  their  capacities 


"The  report  will  be  printed  as  Department  of  State 
publication  3485. 


than  is  the  United  States  in  telling  its  story 
abroad." 

The  Commission's  recommendations  were  based 
not  only  upon  its  study  of  the  program  here,  but 
also  upon  a  survey  in  the  field  made  by  Mr.  May 
on  behalf  of  the  Commission  which  took  him  into 
ten  European  countries  early  this  year. 

Based  on  Mr.  May's  report  and  on  extensive 
additional  information  from  the  field,  the  Com- 
mission reported  that  behind  the  Iron  Curtain,  the 
Voice  of  America  is  getting  through  not  only  to  the 
people  who  have  access  to  radio  sets  but  also  to 
many  more  by  word  of  mouth. 

"The  Voice  is  heard,  and  it  is  effective,"  the  re- 
port said.  "It  is  effective  partly  because  it  tells 
the  people  the  truth  about  what  is  going  on  in  the 
world  outside  and  in  their  own  countries;  partly 
because  it  counteracts  Russian  propaganda; 
mainly  and  fundamentally  because  it  brings  hope 
and  encouragement." 

The  Commission  estimated  that  the  Voice  has 
an  audience  of  a  million  people  in  Poland;  that  it 
may  be  reaching  more  than  a  tenth  of  the  people 
in  Czechoslovakia ;  that  it  is  by  far  our  most  impor- 
tant medium  in  bringing  the  message  of  America 
to  the  peoples  of  Bulgaria,  Hungary,  and  Ru- 
mania, and  that  it  is  reaching  "millions  of  Rus- 
sians today." 

In  the  free  countries  of  Europe,  the  information 
program  is  steadily  gaining  in  effectiveness  among 
leadership  groups,  but  information  about  the 
United  States  is  not  yet  effectively  reaching 
farmers,  industrial  workers,  owners  of  small 
businesses,  etc. 

The  Commission  particularly  ui'ged  that  im- 
mediate steps  be  taken  to  improve  the  channels  of 
information  about  America  to  the  peoples  of 
Middle  East  and  South  Asian  countries. 

This  problem  is  greatly  complicated  by  the  high 
rate  of  illiteracy  among  the  peoples  of  some  of 
these  countries,  and  the  vigor  with  which  the 
Soviet  propaganda  machine  is  trying  to  win  them 
over  to  Communism. 

To  illustrate  the  enormity  of  the  problem,  the 
Commission  pointed  out  that  for  almost  two  years, 
one  information  officer  in  Calcutta  has  been  trying 
to  present  American  news  to  60  local  newspapers 
and  maintain  a  United  State  Information  Service 
operation  in  a  region  of  S3  million  people. 

The  program  was  described  as  playing  an  im- 
portant role  in  implementing  U.S.  foreign  policy 
in  the  Far  East,  with  printed  materials  and  posters 
pla3'ing  the  most  important  role,  motion  pictures 
next,  and  libraries,  film  strips,  and  radio  broad- 
casting adding  their  parts  to  the  total  program. 

Calling  attention  to  the  permanent  im])ortance 
of  Latin  America  as  co-members  of  the  Western 
Hemisphere  area,  the  Commission  said  that  the 
United  States  Information  Service  in  that  field 
must  be  a  well-rounded  and  constant  effort. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


"The  urgent  and  critical  problem  in  Latin 
America,"  the  report  said,  "is  to  counteract  the  po- 
tent attraction  which  Communism  has  for  the 
underprivileged,  particularly  the  semiliterate  la- 
bor groups — the  petroleum  workers  of  Venezuela, 
the  industrial  workers  and  miners  of  Chile,  and 
the  laborers,  both  industrial  and  agricultural,  of 
Mexico.  Leaders  who  are  backed  by  local  Party 
organizations  and  the  whole  Soviet  propaganda 
machine  untiringly  urge  Communist  doctrine  upon 
these  masses  and,  as  is  well  known,  the  present 
Communist  'line'  in  Latin  America  is  to  turn  their 
every  natural  aspiration,  their  every  legitimate 
grudge,  against  the  United  States  as  the  op- 
pressor of  their  class  and  their  nation. 

"The  maximum  efficiency  of  the  USIS  opera- 
tion in  Latin  America,  within  its  present  author- 
ized level,  cannot  do  more  than  scratch  the  surface 
in  bringing  about  an  understanding  of  the  United 
States  and  its  policies  to  the  150,000,000  people  of 
the  twenty  Latin  Republics." 

The  Commission  placed  emphasis  upon  the  im- 
portance of  the  part  which  private  agencies, 
groups,  and  individuals  can  play  in  disseminat- 
ing information  about  the  United  States  abroad 
and  noted  that  dollar  limitations  abroad  prevent 
the  dissemination  of  adequate  amounts  of  Ameri- 
can reading  matter  despite  the  great  demand  for  it. 

"In  this  connection,"  the  report  said,  "the  Com- 
mission is  puzzled  by  the  fact  that  the  Congress 
saw  fit  to  make  available  to  the  Economic  Coopera- 
tion Administration  ten  million  dollars  (almost 
equal  to  one  third  of  the  total  appropriation  for 
the  purposes  of  Public  Law  402)  to  stimulate  the 
dissemination  of  private  media  (through  currency- 
exchange  aid)  in  the  countries  receiving  assistance 
under  the  European  Recovery  Act. 

"It  is  suggested  that  the  dissemination  of  Amer- 
ican private  media  abroad  is  primarily  and  essen- 
tially an  informational  activity  of  the  kind 
contemplated  by  Public  Law  402.  It  is  further 
suggested  that  responsibility  and  funds  for  this 
activity  should  be  placed  with  the  Department  of 
State  which  is  responsible  for  the  administration 
of  Public  Law  402,  and  that  the  activity  should 
not  be  limited  to  countries  receiving  aid  under 
the  European  Recovery  Act." 

The  Commission  found,  on  the  basis  of  Mr. 
May's  report,  that  the  Voice  of  America's  opera- 
tions should  be  improved  by  increasing  the  physi- 
cal facilities  to  increase  the  strength  of  its  signal ; 
by  increasing  the  number  of  broadcasts  and  by 
improving  the  attractiveness  of  the  programs. 
It  recommended  expansion  of  mobile  unit  facili- 
ties to  take  motion  pictures,  exhibits,  and  other 
visual  materials  to  the  less  literate  populations  of 
foreign  countries  and  to  those  who  have  no  access 
to  radio. 

The  program  to  Russia,  with  respect  both  to 
the  Voice  of  America  programs  and  the  distribu- 
tion of  the  magazine  Amerika,  the  Commission  re- 

April  10,  7949 


Eorted,  is  achieving  an  invaluable  result  in  that 
oth  the  broadcasts  and  the  magazine  are  di- 
minishing the  effectiveness  of  Soviet  internal 
propaganda. 

"Without  these  media,"  the  report  said,  "our 
battle  would  not  be  a  contest,  even  a  losing  one. 
We  would  lose  out  entirely  and  only  too  quickly." 
The  Commission  presented  the  following  con- 
clusions in  its  report : 

(1)  Events  in  the  past  year  have  made  a  Unit«d 
States  Government  information  program  more 
important  than  ever.  The  Commission  feels  that 
every  opportunity  for  expansion  should  be  em- 
braced immediately. 

(2)  To  make  the  program  effective  at  home,  the 
most  important  step  is  to  close  the  gap  in  policy 
between  other  parts  of  the  Department  and  the 
information  area. 

(3)  The  budgetary  recommendations  which 
have  been  sent  to  the  Congress  for  this  program 
for  1950  are  a  bare  minimum  for  continuing  the 
beginning  which  has  been  made. 

(4)  To  improve  the  effectiveness  of  information 
by  radio  we  should  increase  its  physical  facilities 
in  order  to  strengthen  its  signal  and  provide  more 
medium-wave  relay  bases ;  increase  the  number  of 
broadcasts;  improve  the  attractiveness  of  Ameri- 
can progi-ams;  and  increase  the  number  of  radio 
officers  in  countries  that  have  large  national  net- 
works. Wherever  possible  we  should  endeavor  to 
buy  time  on  local  radio  stations. 

(5)  Visual  materials  (motion  pictures,  displays, 
and  exhibits)  should  be  carried  to  the  small  towns, 
villages,  and  rural  areas,  and  this  can  be  done  most 
effectively  and  efficiently  with  mobile  units. 

(6)  There  is  a  great  need  for  more  motion  pic- 
tures of  a  documentary  and  informational  charac- 
ter, and  the  procurement  of  language  adaptation 
of  films  should  be  rapidly  and  substantially  in- 
creased. 

(7)  Funds  for  travel  and  entertainment  are 
very  limited,  and  an  increase  in  these  funds  may 
very  well  be  one  of  the  best  investments  that  could 
be  made.  It  is  impossible  to  do  a  good  informa- 
tion job  without  doing  at  the  same  time  a  good 
public-relations  job, 

(8)  In  a  few  key  cities  of  the  world  we  do  not 
have  a  wireless  monitoring  service.  Such  a  serv- 
ice should  be  established  for  reception  of  the  Wire- 
less Bulletin,  and  it  is  vitally  important  that  the 
Bulletin  be  translated  into  the  languages  of  the 
various  coimtries. 

(9)  There  is  a  great  need  for  additional  re- 
gional offices  and  branch  libraries  to  be  established 
outside  the  capital  cities. 

(10)  The  dissemination  of  American  private 
media  abroad  is  primarily  and  essentially  an  in- 
formational activity  and  the  responsibility  and 
f imds  for  this  activity  should  be  placed  with  the 
Department  of  State,  and  the  activities  should  not 
be  limited  to  the  countries  receiving  aid  under 
the  European  Recovery  Act. 


Air  Transport  Agreement  With  Finland 

The  De]>artinuut  (jf  Statu  aniiouiiced  on  March 
29  the  signature  in  Helsinki  of  an  air-transport 
agreement  on  March  29, 1949,  between  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  United  States  and  the  Government 
of  Finhmd.'  The  agi-eement  was  signed  on  behalf 
of  the  Government  of  the  United  States  by  the 
United  States  Minister,  Avra  M.  Warren,  and  on 
behalf  of  the  Government  of  Finland  by  the  Act- 
ing Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs,  Uuno  Takki. 

This  agreement  incorporates  the  Bermuda  prin- 
ciples and  conforms  to  the  general  pattern  of  air- 
transport agreements  which  the  United  States  has 
entei'ed  into  with  many  other  countries.  By  the 
terms  of  the  annex  to  the  agreement,  an  air  car- 
rier, or  air  carriers,  of  the  United  States  are 
granted  the  right  to  operate  a  service  from  the 
United  States  over  a  North  Atlantic  route  to  Hel- 
sinki and  an  air  carrier,  or  air  carriers,  of  Finland 
are  extended  the  right  to  operate  a  service  from 
Finland  over  a  North  Atlantic  route  to  New  York. 
It  is  the  thirty-seventh  bilateral  air-transport 
agreement  entered  into  by  the  Government  of  the 
United  States. 


Air  Transport  Agreement  With  Panama 

Tlie  Department  of  State  announced  that  an  air- 
transport agreement  with  the  Republic  of  Panama 
was  signed  in  Panama  City  on  March  31.  This  is 
the  thirty-eighth  such  agreement  concluded  by  the 
United  States.^ 

This  agreement  is  of  the  so-called  "Bermuda" 
type,  upon  which  the  great  majority  of  the  bi- 
lateral air-transport  agreements  of  the  United 
States  are  based.  This  agreement  grants  traffic 
rights  to  United  States  air  lines  at  Panama  City 
and  David  and  traffic  rights  to  Panamanian  air 
lines  at  a  point  or  points  in  the  United  States  to  be 
agreed  upon  when  Panama  is  ready  to  operate  a 
service  to  the  United  States. 

Concurrent  with  the  signing  of  the  aviation 
agreement,  two  ancillary  exchanges  of  notes  were 
executed  between  the  American  Ambassador  and 
the  Panamanian  Foreign  Minister,  under  which 
the  United  States  agreed  to  furnish  certain  com- 
munications cable  for  the  operation  of  additional 
communication  facilities  at  Tocumen  National 
Airport  and  a  technical  aviation  mission,  if  so 
requested  by  the  Republic  of  Panama. 

The  Panamanian  Foreign  Minister  signed  this 
agreement  subject  to  the  concurrence  of  and  rati- 
fication by  the  Panama  Assembly. 


'For  text  of  tho  fii-'roement,  see  Dopartment  of  State 
pre.is  release  lOfi  of  Mni-.  2!),  liMft. 

'  For  text  of  the  agreement,  see  Department  of  State 
press  release  208  of  Mar.  31,  1049. 

466 


Discussions  With  Mexico  on  Developing 
Oil  Industry 

[Eeleaued  to  the  press  March  31] 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  March 
31  that  Senator  Antonio  J.  Bermudez,  Director 
General  of  Petroleos  Mexicanos,  the  petroleum 
entity  of  the  Mexican  Government,  has  been  in 
Washington  for  the  past  several  days  and  that  he 
has  discussed  with  officers  of  the  Department  and 
other  agencies  of  the  Government  the  plan  of 
Petroleos  Mexicanos  for  the  development  of  the 
oil  industry  of  Mexico.  Among  matters  dis- 
cussed were  the  terms  of  the  contract  recently  con- 
cluded by  Petroleos  Mexicanos  witli  a  group  of 
private  United  States  oil  companies,  the  need  of 
Petroleos  Mexicanos  for  material  and  technical 
assistance,  and  the  details  of  the  project  pertain- 
ing to  dollar  requirements. 

The  Department  and  officers  of  other  interested 
agencies  of  the  Government  are  studying  the 
project  presented  by  Senator  Bermudez  from  the 
points  of  view  of  the  development  of  additional 
petroleum  resources  in  the  North  American  conti- 
nent, the  foreign  exchange  position,  the  general 
economic  development  of  Mexico,  and  the  tradi- 
tional view  of  this  Government  as  to  the  role  of 
private  capital  in  economic  development  both  at 
home  and  abroad.  The  general  plan  for  the  de- 
velopment of  the  Mexican  petroleum  industry  in- 
cludes the  construction  of  a  pipe  line  across  the 
Isthmus  of  Tehuantepec,  a  plant  for  the  produc- 
tion of  lubricating  oils,  the  construction  of  new  re- 
fineries, the  modernization  of  refineries  now  in  op- 
eration,  and  the  construction  of  additional  trans- 
portation facilities  in  northeast  Mexico  in  order 
that  reserves  of  industrial  gas  may  be  utilized  as 
fuel  for  industrial  developments  in  Monterrey, 
Torreon,  and  other  cities  in  the  area.  The  appro- 
priate United  States  authorities  are  studying  this 
proposal  in  the  expectation  of  further  conversa- 
tions with  Senator  Bermudez. 


THE  DEPARTMENT 

Lloyd  V.  Berkner  Appointed  To  Direct 
Military  Assistance  Program 

Statement  hy  Secretary  Acheson 

[Released  to  the  press  March  30] 

I  have  today  appointed  Lloyd  V.  Berkner  to  be 
a  Special  Assistant  to  the  Secretary  to  direct  the 
work  concerned  with  the  military  assistance  pro- 
gi'am.  This  function  has  previously  been  per- 
formed by  Assistant  Secretary  Gross,  and  Mr. 
Borkner's  appointment  is  designed  to  free  Mr. 
Gross  of  this  responsibility  in  order  that  he  may 
devote  his  entire  time  to  the  most  important  func- 
tion of  congressional  relations. 

As  to  the  general  information,  the  Department 
of  State  in  consultation  witli  representatives  of  the 

Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


Ncational  Military  Establishment  and  the  Eca  is 
still  considering  draft  legislation  on  the  military 
assistance  program.  The  legislation  has  not  yet 
been  submitted  to  the  Bureau  of  the  Budget,  and 
there  has  been  no  final  decision  as  to  when  the  draft 
legislation  will  be  submitted  to  the  Congress.  We 
hope  to  have  the  draft  legislation  available  for 
study  by  the  time  the  Senate  is  considering  the 
Atlantic  pact. 

The  draft  legislation  will  probably  contain  a 
specific  authorization  for  an  over-all  amount 
needed  for  a  program  one  year  in  duration.  It 
seems  likely  that  authority  will  be  sought  for  a 
program  extending;  over  a  longer  period  of  time, 
but  the  authorization  of  funds  would  be  for  only 
one  year. 

The  legislation  as  it  is  now  contemplated  would 
not  name  countries  specifically  eligible  for  mili- 
tary assistance.  In  a  program  of  this  type,  it 
is  essential  that  the  President  have  considerable 
discretion  in  its  administration. 

Although  it  is  not  contemplated  at  this  time  that 
the  draft  legislation  will  indicate  the  countries 
specifically  eligible,  no  final  decision  has  been 
reached  as  to  whether  the  authorization  will  be 
sought  on  an  area  or  a  global  basis. 

THE  FOREIGN  SERVICE 
Resignations 

The  President  accepted  the  resignations  of  Josiah  Mar- 
vel, Jr.  and  Walter  Bedell  Smith  as  American  Ambassa- 
dors to  Denmark  and  to  the  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist 
Republics,  respectively.  For  the  texts  of  Mr.  Truman's 
letters  accepting  their  resignations,  see  White  House 
press  releases  of  March  24  and  March  25,  1949. 

PUBLICATIONS 
Department  of  State 

For  sale  hy  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  Qovern- 
ment  Printing  Office,  Washington  25,  D.  C.  Address  re- 
quests direct  to  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  except 
in  the  case  of  free  publications,  which  may  be  obtained 
from  the  Department  of  State. 

The  Kansas  Story  on  UNESCO.  International  Organiza- 
tion and  Conference  Series  IV,  United  Nations  Educa- 
tional, Scientific  and  Cultural  Organization  7.  Pub.  3378. 
41  pp.     200. 

How  a  state  council  was  organized  and  is  contributing 
to  international  understanding  and  peace. 


Universal  Postal  Union.  Treaties  and  Other  International 
Series  1850.     Pub.  3384.     283  pp.     500. 

Convention,  Final  Protocol,  Regulations,  Air-Mail 
Provisions,  and  Final  Protocol  to  Air-Mall  Provisions 
Between  the  United  States  and  Other  Governments 
Revising  the  Universal  Postal  Convention  of  May  23, 
1939 — Signed  at  Paris  July  5,  1947 ;  entered  into  force 
July  1,  1948. 

Joint   Commission   on   Rural   Reconstruction   in   China. 

Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  1848.  Pub. 
3389.     19  pp.     10<J. 

Agreement  Between  the  United  States  and  China — 
Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Nanking  Aug. 
3,  and  5,  1948 ;  entered  into  force  Aug.  5,  1948. 

Education:  Cooperative  Program  in  Paraguay.  Treaties 
and  Other  International  Acts  Series  1856.  Pub.  3399. 
4  pp.     5^. 

Agreement  Between  the  United  States  and  Paraguay 
Extending  Agreement  of  Mar.  8,  1948,  Between  Para- 
guay and  the  Institute  of  Inter-American  Affairs — 
Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Asuncion 
June  30,  1948;  entered  into  force  Aug.  2,  1948. 

The  Far  Eastern  Commission.  Second  Report  by  the 
Secretary  General,  July  10,  1947-Dec.  23,  1948.  Far  East- 
ern Series  29.     Pub.  3420.     65  pp.     200. 

National  Commission  News,  March  1949.  Pub.  3449.  10 
pp.     100  a  copy ;  $1  a  year  domestic,  $1.25  a  year  foreign. 

The  monthly  publication  of  the  United  States  National 
Commission  for  Unesco. 


Diplomatic  List,  March  1949.    Pub.  3451.     196  pp. 

copy  ;  $3.25  a  year  domestic,  $4.50  a  year  foreign. 


30^  a 


Monthly  list  of  foreign  diplomatic  representatives  in 
Washington,  with  their  addresses. 


Caribbean  Commission  Releases  Report 
of  West  Indian  Conference 

The  Caribbean  Commission  Central  Secretariat 
released  in  March  a  three-part  report  of  the  Third 
Session  of  the  West  Indian  Conference.  It  in- 
cludes a  summary  of  the  Secretary  General's  re- 
port to  the  Conference,  the  report  of  the  Con- 
ference, and  a  report  of  action  taken  by  the 
Commission  on  the  recommendations  of  the  Con- 
ference. 

Copies  of  this  publication  (99  pp.)  may  be  pur- 
chased from  the  International  Documents  Service, 
Columbia  University  Press,  2960  Broadway,  New 
York  27,  New  York.     Price  not  listed. 


April   10,    1949 


^orvCeo^t^ 


International  Information  and 

Cultural  Affairs  Pago 

Developing  International  Understanding.   An 

Article 439 

ECA  Anniversary: 

Voice  of  America  Broadcast 455 

Message  to  the  President  from   Prime 
Minister  Attlee 455 

Voice   of  America  Broadcasts  Atlantic  Pact 

Ceremonies 458 

Report  to  the  Congress  by  Advisory  Com- 
mission on  Information 464 

General  Policy 

Bulgaria,  Hungary,  and  Rumania  Accused  of 
Violating    Human    Rights    and    Funda- 
mental Freedoms: 
U.S.  Note  to  Bulgarian  Government .    .    .        450 
U.S.  Note  to  Hungarian  Government    .    .        451 
U.S.  Note  to  Rumanian  Government     .    .        452 

National  Conference  of  Christians  and  Jews 
Protest  Denial  of  Religious  Freedom  in 
Hungary  and  Bulgaria: 

Text  of  Petition 454 

Reply  of  Secretary  Acheson 455 

Selecting  Our  Future  Citizens.     By  Herve  J. 

L'Heureux 456 

Nonimmigrant  Passport  Visa  Fee  Arrange- 
ment With  France 457 

Mutual  Problems  Discussed  With  Nether- 
lands         458 

U.S.  and  U.K.  Discuss  Germany  and  Greece. 
Joint  Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson 
and  Foreign  Secretary  Bevin 459 

Definition  of  Term  "German  Ethnic  Origin"  .        459 

American  Soldiers  Convicted  in  Czecho- 
slovakia on  Charges  of  Espionage.  State- 
ment by  Secretary  Acheson 459 

Influence    of    Inter-American    Relations    on 

U.S.  Foreign  Policy.     By  Paul  C.Daniels.        460 

Treaty  Information 

Significance  of  New  International  Wheat 
Agreement  to  U.S.  Wheat  Farmers. 
Statement  by  Charles  F.  Brannan    .      .        449 


Treaty  Information — Continued  Page 

Bulgaria,  Hungary,  and  Rumania  Accused  of 
Violating    Human    Rights   and    Funda- 
mental Freedoms: 
U.S.  Note  to  Bulgarian  Government  .    .    .        450 
U.S.  Note  to  Hungarian  Government     .    .        451 
U.S.  Note  to  Rumanian  Government     .    .        452 

Atlantic  Pact  Countries  Take  Note  of  Soviet 
Views  of  the  Treaty.  Statement  by  the 
Foreign  Ministers 457 

Foreign   Ministers  Approve  Atlantic  Treaty. 

Communique 458 

U.S. -Mexican    International    Convention  for 

Tuna  Investigation  Sent  to  the  Senate  .        463 

Air  Transport  Agreement  With  Finland     .    .        466 

Air  Transport  Agreement  With  Panama    .    .        466 

The  United  Nations  and 
Specialized  Agencies 

Resolutions  and  Decisions  of  Eighth  Session 

of  Ecosoc 443 

U.N.  Documents:  A  Selected  Bibliography  .        444 
The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations  .    .        445 

Economic  Affairs 

Ninth   General   Conference  on   Weights  and 

Measures.     By  Dr.  Edward  U.  Condon  .        447 

Discussions  With  Mexico  on  Developing  Oil 

Industry 466 

The  Department 

Lloyd  V.  Berkner  Appointed  To  Direct  Mili- 
tary Assistance  Program.  Statement  by 
Secretary  Acheson 466 

The  Foreign  Service 

Resignations  of  Ambassadors  Josiah  Marvel, 

Jr.,  and  Walter  Bedell  Smith 467 

The  Congress 

U.S.    Extends   Invitation   for   1956   Olympic 

Games 453 

Publications 

Department  of  State 467 

Caritibean    Commission   Releases   Report   of 

West  Indian  Conference 467 


^ne/  ^€^v(i^tme/n(/  aw  tftcUe/ 


SIGNING  CEREMONY  OF  THE  NORTH 
ATLANTIC  TREATY 

Statements  by  the  Foreign  Ministers 
and  President  Truman 471 

REQUEST  FOR  MILITARY  ASSISTANCE 
FROM  ATLANTIC  PACT  COUNTRIES: 

Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson  .    .    .     493 
Exchange  of  Communications 494 

U.S.,  U.K.,  AND  FRANCE  REACH  AGREE- 
MENT ON  ALL  QUESTIONS  RELATING 
TO  GERMANY 

Communique 499 

Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson  .    .    .  499 

Message  to  the  Military  Governors  .    .  500 

Text  of  Occupation  Statute 500 


For  complete  contents  see  back  cover 


Vol.  XX,  No.  511 
April  17,  1949 


Supt-  0.  Oocurncn*': 


<J/t€  ^eficvrdme^t  ^£ c/ta^ 


bulletin 

Vol.  XX,  No.  511    •    Publication  3490 
April  17,  1949 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

U.S.  OoTemmcnt  Printing  OCBce 

Wnshington  26,  D.C. 

Price: 

62  Issues,  domestic  $5,  toreien  $7.25 

Single  copy,  15  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  (February  18,1949). 

Note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Department 
or  State  Bitlletin  as  the  source  will  be 
spprecisted. 


The  Department  of  State  BVLLETIN, 
a  weekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  with  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  work  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BVLLETIN  includes 
press  releases  on  foreign  policy  issued 
by  the  White  House  and  the  Depart- 
ment, and  statements  and  addresses 
made  by  the  President  and  by  the 
Secretary  of  State  and  other  officers 
of  the  Department,  as  tcell  as  special 
articles  on  various  phases  of  inter- 
national affairs  and  tlie  functions  of 
the  Department.  Information  is  in- 
cluded concerning  treaties  and  in- 
ternational agreements  to  which  the 
United  States  is  or  may  become  a 
party  and  treaties  of  general  inter- 
national interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
well  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


Signing  Ceremony  of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty,  Departmental  Auditorium, 
Washington,  April  4, 1949  > 


REMARKS  BY  DEAN  ACHESON 
Secretary  of  State  of  the  United  States 


On  behalf  of  the  Government  and  the  people 
of  the  United  States,  I  warmly  welcome  to  our 
country  and  our  capital  the  Foreign  Ministers 
who  have  assembled  here  to  sign  the  North  At- 
lantic Treaty.-  We  are  honored  by  their  presence, 
both  as  individuals  who  have  done  much  for  peace 
and  as  representatives  of  nations  and  peoples  who 
have  conti'ibuted  notably  to  the  welfare  and 
progress  of  mankind. 

We  are  met  together  to  consummate  a  solenrn 
act.  Those  who  participated  in  the  drafting  of 
this  treaty  must  leave  to  others  judgment  of  the 
significance  and  value  of  this  act.  They  cannot 
appraise  the  achievement  but  they  can  and  should 
declare  the  purposes  of  their  minds  and  hearts. 

It  was,  I  think,  their  purpose — like  the  pur- 
pose of  those  who  chart  the  stars — not  to  create 
what  they  record,  but  to  set  down  realities  for 
the  guidance  of  men,  whether  well  or  ill-disposed. 
For  those  who  seek  peace  it  is  a  guide  to  refuge 
and  strength,  a  very  present  help  in  trouble.  For 
those  who  set  their  feet  upon  the  path  of  aggres- 
sion, it  is  a  warning  that  if  it  must  needs  be  that 
offenses  come,  then  woe  unto  them  by  whom  the 
offense  cometh. 

For  the  reality  which  is  set  down  here  is  not 
created  here.  The  reality  is  the  unity  of  belief, 
of  spirit,  of  interest  of  the  community  of  nations 
represented  here.  It  is  the  product  of  many  cen- 
turies of  common  thought  and  of  the  blood  of 
many  simple  and  brave  men  and  women. 

The  reality  lies  not  in  the  common  pursuit  of 
a  material  goal  or  of  a  power  to  dominate  others. 
It  lies  in  the  aiSrmation  of  moral  and  spiritual 
values  which  govern  the  kind  of  life  they  pro- 
pose to  lead  and  which  they  propose  to  defend,  by 
all  possible  means,  should  that  necessity  be  thrust 
upon  them.  Even  this  purpose  is  a  fact  which 
has  been  demonstrated  twice  in  this  present  cen- 
tury. 


PROGRAM 

2 :  30  p.  m.     Music  by  United  States  Marine  Band 

2:45  p.  m.  Arrival  of  the  Foreign  Ministers  (West 
Entrance) 

3 :  00  p.  m.     Entrance  of  the  Foreign  Ministers 

3 :  05  p.  m.  Welcome  and  remarks  by  the  Secretary 
of  State  of  the  United  States 

3 :  10  p.  m.  Introduction  of  the  Foreign  Ministers 
by  the  Secretary  of  State  of  the 
United  States 

Remarks  of  the  Foreign  Ministers  on  the  occasion 
of  the  signing  of  the  treaty.  (Each  Foreign 
Minister  is  expected  to  speak  for  five  minutes 
in  the  language  of  his  choice.  Those  speeches 
not  made  in  English  will  be  translated  immedi- 
ately following  the  speaker.) 

Entrance  of  the  President  of  the  United  States 

Remarks  of  the  President 

Formal  signing  of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty 

Closing  remarks  of  the  Secretary  of  State 

Adjournment 


It  is  well  that  these  truths  be  kirown.  The  pur- 
pose of  this  treaty  is  to  publish  them  and  give 
them  form. 

From  this  act,  taken  here  today,  will  flow  in- 
creasing good  for  all  peoples.  From  this  joining 
of  many  wills  in  one  purpose  will  come  new  in- 
spiration for  the  future.  New  strength  and  cour- 
age will  accrue  not  only  to  the  peoples  of  the  At- 
lantic community  but  to  all  peoples  of  the  world 
conrmunity  who  seek  for  themselves,  and  for 
others  equally,  freedom  and  peace. 


■  Released  to  the  press  Apr.  4,  1949 ;  President  Truman's 
remarks  were  released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House 
on  the  same  date. 

'Bulletin  of  Mar.  20,  1949,  p.  339;  also  printed  as 
Department  of  State  Publication  3464. 


April    17,    1949 


471 


REMARKS  BY  PAUL-HENRI  SPAAK 
Prime  Minister  and  Ministerlof  Foreign  Affairs  of  Belgium 


In  signing  tlie  North  Atlantic  pact,  we  are  going 
to  participate  in  the  most  important  political 
event  that  has  occurred  since  the  creation  of  the 
United  Nations. 

The  great  defensive  alliance  about  to  be  created 
is  an  essential  milestone  on  the  road  leading  to  the 
consolidation  of  peace. 

The  peoples  of  the  world  have  therefore  the 
right  to  rejoice  over  it. 

The  North  Atlantic  pact  conforms  with  the 
letter  and  the  spirit  of  the  San  Francisco  Charter 
since,  inspired  solely  by  a  sense  of  defense,  it  is, 
through  the  magnitude  of  the  forces  which  it 
brings  together,  of  a  nature  to  discourage  any 
future  aggressor  and  since  it  gives  to  article  51, 
which  proclaims  the  right  to  legitimate  individual 
and  collective  defense,  a  practical  and  effective 
form  without  which  it  would  be  but  a  mockery. 

The  new  pact  is  purely  defensive;  it  is  directed 
against  no  one;  it  threatens  no  one;  it  should 
therefore  disturb  no  one;  save,  of  course,  any 
person  or  persons  who  might  foster  the  criminal 
idea  of  having  recourse  to  war.  To  be  convinced 
of  this,  one  has  only  to  read  it;  but,  one  must  do 
so  without  a  preconceived  idea. 

The  peoples  here  represented  detest  war,  and 
their  Governments  share  their  sentiments. 

War  is  a  hateful  and  absurd  thing.  It  settles 
nothing,  and  its  consequences  constitute  almost 
as  heavy  a  burden  for  the  conquerors  as  for  the 
conquered.  Democracies  are  essentially  pacific. 
Wliere  peoples  have  something  to  say,  where 
thought  is  not  in  chains  and  opposition  muzzled, 
the  idea  that  an  aggressive  policy  could  be  pur- 
sued is  inconceivable.  If  the  whole  world  ac- 
cepted and  practiced  the  democratic  principles 
which  are  ours,  there  would  be  no  more  war.  But 
until  that  is  the  case,  we  have  the  right  and  the 
duty  to  be  prudent  and  prepared. 

Twice  within  less  than  25  years  the  democra- 
cies of  Western  Europe,  the  United  States  of 
America,  and  Canada  have  faced  terrible  dangers. 
Twice  the  civilization  that  they  represent,  their 
way  of  life  and  of  thought  have  been  jeopardized. 


Twice  it  has  required  military  miracles  to  save 
them.  Twice  an  overblind  trust  has  all  but  ruined 
them.  It  would  be  unpardonable  to  ignore  the 
repeated  lessons  of  history. 

Those  who  today  are  angered  or  saddened  be- 
cause the  principles  of  universal  collective  security 
contemplated  in  the  United  Nations  Charter  are 
to  be  supplemented  by  a  system  more  restricted, 
but  having  the  same  goal  and  observing  the  same 
principles,  will  find  some  subjects  for  reflection  in 
the  signing  of  the  pact.  They  will  regret,  per- 
haps, having  seen  the  rostrum  of  the  United  Na- 
tions transformed  into  an  instrument  of  propa- 
ganda in  which  vehemence  and  insult  have  fre- 
quently replaced  the  essential  desire  for  coopera- 
tion; perhaps  also  they  will  regret  that  the  abuse 
of  the  veto  and  refusal  to  collaborate  have  so  often 
rendered  ineffective  the  decisions  of  the  Security 
Council  or  the  recommendations  of  the  Assembly. 
The  United  Nations  remain  our  great  hope. 
We  continue  to  desire  and  to  believe  that  one  day 
all  nations  may  find  their  security  in  this  world 
organization  and  that  all  Governments,  having  at 
last  recognized  the  precedence  of  international 
law  over  their  own  will,  may  make  of  the  United 
Nations  the  mighty  instrument  that  we  have  al- 
ways wished  for. 

But  until  that  day,  no  one  can  contest  our  right 
to  gather  together  and  organize  in  one  corner  of 
the  world  all  the  forces  of  those  who,  having  fi- 
nally and  wholly  renounced  all  idea  of  aggressive 
warfare,  do  not  wish  to  find  themselves  one  day 
without  defense  before  an  attack  upon  them. 

The  North  Atlantic  pact  is  an  act  of  faith  in  the 
destiny  of  Western  civilization.  Based  on  the 
exercise  of  civil  and  political  liberties,  on  respect 
for  the  human  person,  it  cannot  perish. 

The  North  Atlantic  pact  places  in  the  service  of 
this  civilization  and  of  peace  the  most  powerful 
means  of  defense  that  has  ever  been  created.  That 
is  why,  in  the  name  of  an  overwhelming  majority 
of  the  Belgian  people,  I  shall  sign  it  in  a  few  mo- 
ments with  confidence  and  pride. 


Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


REMARKS  BY  L.  B.  PEARSON 
Secretary  of  State  for  External  Affairs  of  Canada 


Last  week  the  Parliament  of  Canada,  with  only 
two  dissenting  voices,  endorsed  the  treaty  which 
we  sign  here  today.  This  virtual  unanimity  re- 
flected the  views  of  the  Canadian  people  who  feel 
deeply  and  instinctively  that  this  treaty  is  not 
a  pact  for  war,  but  a  pledge  for  peace  and  progress. 

The  North  Atlantic  Treaty  was  born  out  of  fear 
and  frustration;  fear  of  the  aggi'essive  and  sub- 
versive policies  of  Communism  and  the  effect  of 
those  policies  on  our  own  peace  and  security  and 
well-being ;  frustration  over  the  obstinate  obstruc- 
tion by  Communist  states  of  our  efforts  to  make 
the  United  Nations  function  effectively  as  a  uni- 
versal security  system.  This  treaty,  though  born 
of  fear  and  frustration,  must,  however,  lead  to 
positive  social,  economic,  and  political  achieve- 
ments if  it  is  to  live;  achievements  which  will 
extend  beyond  the  time  of  emergency  which  gave 
it  birth  or  the  geographical  area  which  it  now 
includes. 

This  treaty  does  not  of  itself  ensure  peace.  It 
does,  however,  give  us  the  promise  of  far  gi-eater 
security  and  stability  than  we  possess  today.  By 
our  combined  efforts,  we  must  convert  this  promise 
into  performance  or  the  treaty  will  remain  no 
more  than  yet  another  expression  of  high  but  un- 
attained  ideals.  That  will  not  happen  to  our 
North  Atlantic  pact  if  each  of  us  accepts  the  chal- 
lenge it  proclaims;  if  each  of  us,  with  trust  in 
the  good  will  and  peaceful  policies  of  the  others, 
will  strive  to  make  it  something  more  than  words. 
We  know  that  we  can  do  this.  If  it  were  not  so, 
we  would  not  today  be  giving  this  pledge  to  stand 
together  in  danger  and  to  work  together  in  peace. 

We,  in  this  North  Atlantic  community,  the 
structure  of  which  we  now  consolidate,  must  jeal- 
ously guard  the  defensive  and  progressive  nature 
of  our  league.  There  can  be  no  place  in  this  gi-oup 
for  power  politics  or  imperialist  ambitions  on  the 
part  of  any  of  its  members.     This  is  more  than 


a  treaty  for  defence.  We  must,  of  course,  defend 
ourselves,  and  that  is  the  first  purpose  of  our 
pact;  but,  in  doing  so,  we  must  never  forget  that 
we  are  now  organizing  force  for  peace,  so  that 
peace  can  one  day  be  preserved  without  force. 

We  are  a  North  Atlantic  community  of  twelve 
nations,  and  three  hundred  and  fifty  million  peo- 
ple. We  are  strong  in  our  lands  and  resources,  in 
our  industry  and  manpower.  We  are  strong  above 
all  in  our  common  tradition  of  liberty,  in  our 
common  belief  in  the  dignity  of  the  individual,  in 
our  common  heritage  of  social  and  political 
thought,  and  in  our  resolve  to  defend  our  freedoms 
together.  Security  and  progress,  however,  like 
peace  and  war,  are  indivisible.  So  there  must  be 
nothing  narrow  or  exclusive  about  our  league,  no 
slackening  of  our  interest  in  the  welfare  and  se- 
curity of  all  friendly  people. 

The  North  Atlantic  community  is  part  of  the 
world  community  and  as  we  grow  stronger  to  pre- 
serve the  peace,  all  free  men  grow  stronger  with 
us.  The  world  today  is  too  small,  too  interde- 
pendent, for  even  regional  isolation. 

This  treaty  is  a  forward  move  in  man's  progi-ess 
from  the  wasteland  of  his  postwar  world,  to  better, 
safer  ground.  But  as  we  reach  the  distant  paS' 
tures,  we  see  greener  ones  far  on.  As  we  reach  the 
summit  of  this  lofty  peak,  higher  ones  loom  up 
beyond.  We  are  forever  climbing  the  ever- 
mounting  slope  and  must  not  rest  until  we  reach 
the  last  objective  of  a  sane  and  moral  world. 

Our  treaty  is  no  mere  Maginot  Line  against  an- 
nihilation, no  mere  fox  hole  from  fear,  but  the 
point  from  which  we  start  for  yet  one  more  attack 
on  all  those  evil  forces  that  would  block  our  way 
to  justice  and  to  peace. 

In  that  spirit,  and  with  great  pride,  I  sign  this 
treaty  as  the  delegate  and  the  servant  of  my 
country. 


April    17,    1949 


REMARKS  BY  GUSTAV  RASMUSSEN 
Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs  of  Denmark 


Wlien  today,  on  behalf  of  Denniiuk,  I  .sign  the 
North  Atlantic  Treaty,  I  do  so  because  it  is  an 
instrument  of  peace,  and  because  it  has  no  otlier 
purpose  than  defense  in  case  an  armed  attack 
should  occur  against  any  one  of  the  sigiuitory 
powers. 

Under  article  1  of  the  treaty,  the  parties  under- 
take to  settle  any  international  dispute  by  peace- 
ful means.  As  has  been  recently  said  by  a  high 
American  official,  behind  this  pledge  stand  the 
character  and  policies  of  the  countries  which  are 
parties  to  the  treaty.  The  very  nature  of  their 
institutions  makes  a  calculated  plan  of  aggression 
a  virtual  impossibility. 

The  North  Atlantic  Treaty  contains  a  solemn 
reaffirmation  of  the  pledges  given  by  those  coun- 
tries under  the  United  Nations  Cliarter.    The 


treaty  is  therefore  designed  to  strengthen  the  sys- 
tem of  the  United  Nations.  It  constitutes  a  cor- 
nerstone in  the  fundamental  structure  of  general 
security. 

Twice  in  this  century,  the  United  States  of 
America  has  gone  to  war  in  order  to  come  to  the 
aid  of  the  democratic  nations  of  Europe  in  their 
fight  against  aggression. 

By  this  treaty  the  United  States  has  in  advance 
expressed  her  readiness  also  in  the  future  to  stand 
by  democratic  and  peace-loving  peoples,  and  has 
thereby  contributed  in  a  magnanimous  way  to  the 
maintenance  of  peace. 

This  goal,  the  preservation  of  peace,  is  also  Den- 
mark's, in  deep  accord  with  the  ardent  desire  and 
old  tradition  of  the  Danish  nation. 


REMARKS  BY  ROBERT  SCHUMAN 
Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs  of  the  Frencli  Republic 


The  history  of  contemporary  France  is  a  succes- 
sion of  aggressions  she  endured  and  of  attempts 
she  has  made  to  avoid  them. 

Three  times  in  seventy  years  .she  has  been  in- 
vaded. The  first  time,  she  was  the  sole  victim  of 
the  aggressor.  From  1914  to  1918  half  of  our  con- 
tinent was  submerged  under  the  wave  of  aggres- 
sion. And  the  last  war  overflowed  Europe,  the 
invasion  became  transcontinental,  not  only  because 
of  alliances,  but  also  because  of  the  immensity  of 
the  means  of  action.  Invasion  crosses  neutral 
frontiers;  neither  distance  nor  natural  obstacles 
can  stop  it  any  longer. 

In  the  past,  the  peoples  menaced  by  it  too  often 
allowed  themselves  to  be  surprised  by  it.  The 
teaching  of  experience  has  led  them  to  draw  to- 
gether. They  have  placed  their  confidence  in  in- 
ternational organization  for  peace  and  security. 
France  has  constantly  supported  these  efforts  and 
nurtured  this  great  hope.  She  remains  fei'vently 
attached  to  it  because  she  is  convinced  that  in  the 
end  humanity  will  submit  to  the  exigencies  of 
solidarity. 

But  she  is  obliged  also  to  recognize  that  collec- 
tive organizations,  as  they  function  today,  have 


not  yet  acquired  the  necessary  efficacy.  The  Cliar- 
ter envisages  the  possibility  of  regional  pacts.  It 
authorizes  its  members  to  organize  individually 
or  collectively  for  self-defense  in  conformity  with 
the  principles  of  the  Charter. 

France  ardently  desires  that  the  United  Nations 
may  become  one  day  strong  enough  to  assure  by 
itself  peace  and  security  in  the  world,  thus  render- 
ing any  individual  initiative  unnecessary. 

But,  meanwhile,  the  Governments  which  bear 
the  fearsome  responsibility  of  guarding  the  inde- 
pendence of  their  countries  have  no  right  to  put 
their  trust  in  partial  guarantees.  It  would  be 
criminal  for  them  to  neglect  a  single  opportunity, 
or  a  possible  aid,  for  the  preservation  of  peace. 

The  exclusive  concern  of  France  is  to  make  im- 
possible any  invasion  of  her  own  territory  or  of 
the  territory  of  peace-loving  nations.  Our  aim 
cannot  be  restricted  to  the  winning  of  a  war  which 
might  be  forced  upon  us,  a  war  which,  even  if  we 
win  it,  would  leave  Europe  ravaged  and  depopu- 
lated. We  want  to  avoid  such  a  war  by  becoming, 
together,  strong  enough,  together  to  safeguard 
peace. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Wlio,  in  justice,  could  reproach  us  for  such  an 
attempt  ?  Wliat  sincere  friend  could  take  offense 
at  it?  In  the  past,  France  has  been  sufficiently 
respectful  of  her  obligations  and  true  to  her 
friendships,  sufficiently  alerted  also  by  dreadful 
experience,  to  be  beyond  all  suspicion. 

There  is  no  contradiction  between  two  treaties 
when  both  have  as  their  object  to  guarantee  the 
security  of  the  same  country  but  are  concluded 
with  different  guarantors.  The  multiplicity  of 
possible  risks  necessitates  a  multiplicity  of  pre- 
cautions. This  answer  we  gave  to  Germany  when, 
in  1935,  she  took  objection  to  the  Franco-Russian 
treaty,  incompatible,  according  to  her,  with  the 
Locarno  pact.  Today,  we  give  it  to  the  U.S.S.R. 
with  whom  we  remain  bound  by  a  defense  pact 
against  a  possible  German  menace  and  by  the  obli- 
gation we  accepted  never  to  associate  ourselves 
with  any  threat  directed  against  her.  We  shall 
scrupulously  honor  this  obligation.  When  we  ex- 
pand the  network  of  our  friendships,  old  and  new, 
do  we  in  fact  repudiate  a  friendship  which  does 
not  satisfy  all  our  need  for  security?     Is  it  a 


threat  to  anyone  when  we  take  our  insurance 
against  all  risks,  when  we  organize  a  system  of 
common  defense  against  any  attack,  whatever  its 
nature  ? 

We  are  uniting,  with  the  intention  of  providing 
a  common  and  reciprocal  protection.  We  want 
to  discourage  in  advance  any  aggression,  by  mak- 
ing it  more  and  more  dangerous  for  the  aggres- 
sor. Only  a  potential  aggressor  could  legitimately 
consider  it  aimed  at  him.  Our  conscience  is  clear. 
In  signing  this  pact,  France  solemnly  proclaims 
her  absolute  determination  to  maintain  peace.  It 
is  not  for  herself  iilone  that  France  wants  peace, 
for  she  knows  that  peace  has  become  the  indivisible 
property  of  all,  and  that,  by  allowing  it  to  be 
compromised  by  one  of  us,  we  would  all  lose  it 
together. 

Nations  are  more  and  more  convinced  that  their 
fates  are  closely  bound  together,  that  their  salva- 
tion and  their  welfare  can  no  longer  be  based 
upon  an  egotistical  and  aggi'essive  nationalism 
but  must  rest  upon  the  progressive  application 
of  human  solidarity. 


REMARKS  BY  BJARNI  BENEDIKTSSON 
Minister  of  Foreign  AKairs  of  Iceland 


The  nations  who  are  now  forming  this  new 
brotherhood  are  unlike  each  other  in  many  re- 
spects: Some  of  them  are  the  greatest  and  most 
powerful  in  the  world — others  are  small  and  weak. 

None  is  smaller  or  weaker  than  my  one — the  Ice- 
landic nation.  My  people  are  unarmed  and  have 
been  unarmed  since  the  days  of  our  Viking  fore- 
fathers. We  neither  have  nor  can  have  an  army. 
My  country  has  never  waged  war  on  any  country 
and  as  an  unarmed  comitry  we  neither  can  nor  will 
declare  war  against  any  nation  as  we  stated  when 
entering  the  United  Nations.  In  truth  we  are 
quite  unable  to  defend  ourselves  from  any  foreign 
armed  attack. 

There  was,  therefore,  hesitation  in  our  minds  as 
to  whether  there  was  a  place  for  us  as  participants 
in  this  defensive  pact.  But  our  country  is  under 
certain  circumstances  of  vital  importance  for  the 
safety  of  the  North  Atlantic  area.  In  the  last  war 
Great  Britain  took  over  the  defense  of  Iceland, 
and  later  we  concluded  an  agreement  with  the 
United  States  Government  for  military  protection 
of  Iceland  during  the  war.     Our  participation  in 


this  pact  shows  that  for  our  own  sake,  as  well  as 
for  the  sake  of  others,  we  want  similar  arrange- 
ments in  case  of  a  new  war,  which  we  all  indeed 
hope  and  pray  never  will  occur. 

But  it  is  not  only  this  realistic  reason  which  has 
decided  our  attitude.  We  also  want  to  make  it 
crystal  clear  that  we  belong,  and  want  to  belong, 
to  this  free  commvuiity  of  free  nations  which  now 
is  being  formally  founded. 

It  is  a  fact,  as  I  said  before,  that  we  are  unlike 
each  other  in  many  respects  but  there  are  many 
things  which  bind  us  solidly  together. 

We  all  face  the  same  danger.  In  this  world 
of  ours,  where  distances  have  vanished,  peace  in- 
deed is  indivisible.  The  same  disruptive  elements 
are  everywhere  at  this  sinister  work.  Everywhere 
they  are  accusing  us,  who  are  workmg  for  peace, 
of  being  warmongers. 

Wlien  we  were  discussing  this  pact  in  the  Par- 
liament of  Iceland,  those  elements  tried  with  force 
to  hinder  that  venerable  institution  in  its  work. 
Such  violence  has  never  before  been  tried  against 
the  thousand  years  old  Parliament  of  Iceland. 


April   17,    1949 


The  misguided  crowd  which  tried  this  pretended 
they  were  shouting  for  peace.  This  contradictory 
behaviour  of  throwing  stones  with  your  hands 
while  you  are  clamouring  for  peace  with  your  lips 
is  not  in  accordance  with  Icelandic  tradition,  nor 
is  it  in  conformity  with  Western  culture.  We  all 
know  where  those  habits  originate,  and  this  men- 
tality certainly  is  the  greatest  menace  to  the  world 
today. 

But  it  is  not  only  this  threat  to  world  peace  and 
human  well-being  which  unites  us.    Neither  is  it 


only  the  fact  that  we  all  live  in  the  same  part  of 
the  world.  There  are  stronger  bonds  which  bind 
us  together. 

We  all  belong  to  the  same  culture.  We  would 
all  prefer  to  lose  our  lives  rather  than  lose  our 
freedom,  either  as  individuals  or  nations.  We 
all  believe  in  friendly  cooperation  among  nations. 
We  all  want  peace  for  all  the  world  and  well-being 
for  mankind. 

Therefore,  we  gather  here  today  hopefully  to 
sign  this  solemn  treaty. 


REMARKS  BY  CARLO  SFORZA 
Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs  of  Italy 


The  Italian  nation,  after  two  world  wars,  in  the 
space  of  one  generation,  looks  with  confidence  and 
hope  to  this  treaty;  it  sees  in  it  a  decisive  step 
towards  the  advent  of  peace  in  a  free  and  united 
world. 

This  pact  is  a  complex  and  articulate  instru- 
ment in  which  the  will  prevails  to  discourage, 
through  our  unity,  any  aggi'essive  move,  prepos- 
terous and  unlikely  as  this  may  appear.  To  the 
very  few  who  in  good  faith  still  hesitate,  be  it 
enough  to  remind  that,  had  this  treaty  existed  in 
1914  and  in  1939,  there  wouldn't  have  been  the 
battles  which  spread  ruins  from  Italy  to  England, 
from  France  to  Russia. 

Indeed,  it  is  not  without  significance  that  the 
European  peoples  should  have  apprehended  with 
joy  that  this  treaty  would  be  signed  on  the  free 
American  soil.  It  helps  everybody  realize  that 
oceans  are  on  the  way  of  becoming  small  lakes  and 
that  even  the  most  different  historical  formations 
represent  no  more  than  a  variety  of  folklore  in 
front  of  the  necessity  of  uniting  all  of  us,  in  order 
to  save  our  most  cherished  common  patrimony: 
peace  and  democracy. 


Signing  a  pact,  however,  is  not  enough.  Life 
shall  have  to  circulate  through  it,  as  a  result  of  a 
constant  free  collaboration  in  the  service  of  peace 
between  all  its  members,  present  and  future. 

It  is  not  without  a  reference  to  the  spirit  of  this 
pact,  that  two  of  its  signatories,  the  French  and 
the  Italian,  signed  a  week  ago  in  Paris  a  treaty  of 
economic  cooperation  between  our  two  peoples. 
Not  only  would  we  fail  the  spirit  of  the  pact,  we 
would  also  belittle  its  force  if  we  considered  it 
only  as  a  protective  umbrella.  We  must  pray  to 
God  that  this  pact  will  prove  to  be  like  the  English 
Magna  Charta:  on  one  side  intangible,  on  the 
other  side  a  continuous  creation. 

The  North  Atlantic  pact  will  constitute  one 
among  the  noblest  and  most  generous  events  in 
human  history  if  all  its  members  will  show- 
within  and  outside  the  pact— that  the  melancholy 
history  of  Europe  has  taught  them  this  supreme 
lesson :  that  no  nation  in  the  world  can  feel  secure 
in  its  prosperity  and  peace  if  all  its  neighbors  are 
not  as  safely  marching  towards  the  same  goals  of 
prosperity  and  security. 


REMARKS  BY  JOSEPH  BECH 

Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs  of  Luxembourg 


Grouped  around  tlie  most  powerful  democracy 
in  the  world,  the  states  signatory  to  the  Atlantic 
pact  constitute  at  once  the  most  formidable  and 
the  most  sincerely  peaceful  coalition  of  material 
and  moral  forces  that  has  ever  been  set  up  by  na- 


tions to  insure  their  security  and  to  spare  the 
world  the  horrors  of  war. 

In  the  absence  of  any  coercive  force  belonging 
to  the  United  Nations,  the  treaty  of  assistance  and 
mutual  aid  among  the  twelve  Western  countries 


476 


Departmenf  of  Slate  Bulletin 


constitutes  the  most  effective  guarantee  possible 
for  tliem,  a  guarantee  that  is  essential  in  a  world 
where  distrust  prevails,  a  world  divided  by  politi- 
cal and  ideological  conceptions  that  are  radically 
opposed,  with  all  the  risks  and  dangers  that  this 
state  of  things  and  of  mind  involves. 

The  nations  of  the  West  never  wanted  this  divi- 
sion. It  is  not  their  concern  that  other  nations 
have  a  regime  different  from  theirs,  and  they  ask 
only  normal  relations  with  the  East.  If,  a  year 
ago,  five  of  them  placed  themselves  on  the  defen- 
sive in  concluding  the  Brussels  pact,  and  if,  today, 
the  United  States  and  Canada  are  in  their  turn 
joining  the  ten  European  countries  to  organize 
collective  defense  and  the  maintenance  of  peace, 
security,  and  liberty  in  the  North  Atlantic  com- 
munity, it  is  because  their  unceasing  efforts  to 
find  common  solutions  with  the  countries  of  the 
East  in  important  matters  have  encountered  con- 
stant intransigence  and  because,  in  a  word,  the 
policy  of  conciliation  followed  by  the  Western 
countries  has  found  no  echo  in  the  East. 

These  causes  which  have  given  birth  to  our 
pact  determine  and  limit  its  purpose  and  scope. 

The  North  Atlantic  pact  is  the  logical  supple- 
ment to  the  Brussels  pact. 

Like  the  latter,  its  purpose  is  both  to  prevent 
war  from  breaking  out,  by  establishing  a  balance 
between  the  forces  confronting  each  other  and 
to  win  any  war  of  aggression  that  may  be  directed 
against  one  or  all  of  the  signatory  states. 

The  defensive  alliance  that  we  are  concluding 
today  cannot  of  course  establish  true  peace,  which 


is  more  than  the  absence  of  war,  but,  like  other 
similar  alliances  in  the  past,  it  may  give  the  world 
a  salutary  period  of  lasting  truce.  I  am  sure  that 
that  is  the  fervent  desire  of  the  signatories  to  this 
pact,  all  of  whom  believe  that  peaceful  coexistence 
of  the  two  regimes  is  possible  and  all  of  whom 
wish  it. 

With  the  aid  given  to  Europe  by  the  Marshall 
Plan,  the  Atlantic  pact  opens  a  new  era  of  the 
closest  solidarity  between  the  democratic  countries 
of  Europe  and  the  new  world. 

Nothing  proves  better  this  ineluctable  solidarity 
of  the  destinies  of  our  countries  than  the  fact  that 
the  United  States,  breaking  with  a  tradition  two 
centuries  old,  is  concluding  a  military  alliance  in 
peacetime.  That  is  an  event  of  extraordinary 
historical  significance  for  the  United  States  and 
of  the  utmost  importance  for  Europe. 

The  peoples  of  Europe  note  with  profound 
gratitude  what  the  presence  at  their  sides  of  this 
mighty  and  generous  country  signifies. 

They  approve  and  acclaim  the  pact,  and  accept 
the  real  risks  and  the  heavy  obligations  that  it 
imposes  upon  them.  They  accept  it  with  active 
faith  in  the  necessity  for  and  the  efficacy  of  the 
union  that  has  been  achieved. 

It  is  in  this  same  spirit  that,  with  the  prior 
assent  of  nine-tenths  of  the  members  of  the  Luxem- 
bourg Parliament,  I  set  the  signature  of  my  small 
country  beside  those  of  so  many  friendly  nations 
at  the  bottom  of  this  instrument  of  peace,  the 
Atlantic  pact. 


REMARKS  BY  DIRK  U.  STIKKER 
Minister  for  Foreign  Affairs  of  the  Netlieriands 


The  treaty  we  are  about  to  sign  marks  the  end 
of  an  illusion :  the  hope  that  the  United  Nations 
would,  by  itself,  ensure  international  peace. 

Regretfully,  we  were  driven  to  the  conclusion 
that  the  Charter,  though  essential,  is  not  enough, 
in  the  world  as  it  is,  to  protect  those  vital  principles 
for  which  we  of  the  Western  world  who  have 
gathered  here,  stand. 

Tlierefore,  we  felt  it  our  duty  to  make  this 
treaty.  So  far  from  merely  marking  the  end  of 
an  illusion,  it  most  especially  marks  the  birth  of  a 
new  hope  of  enduring  peace. 

Its  opponents  are  clamoring  that  this  treaty  aims 


at  war.  That  is  a  lie.  Its  aim  is  peace — peace, 
not  after  a  new  war,  but  peace  now,  and  from 
now  on. 

We  who  are  vitally  interested  in  the  security 
of  the  North  Atlantic  area,  henceforth  stand  united 
in  our  resolve  to  repel  aggression,  just  as  we  stand 
united  in  our  resolve  not  to  attack  others. 

Such,  then,  is  the  treaty's  unshakable  moral 
basis.  We  shall  sign  with  a  clear  conscience  in  the 
face  of  God. 

Various  aspects  of  the  new  treaty  are  being  ex- 
plained by  my  fellow  speakers.  Let  me  add  and 
stress  this : 


April    17,    7949 


Together  we  are  determined  in  our  mutual  in- 
terest to  gird  the  North  Atlantic  with  a  chain  of 
strength.  That  chain  is,  necessarily,  as  strong  as 
its  weakest  link.  Let  us  then  strive  together,  on 
a  basis  of  equal  treatment  for  all,  to  uphold  the 
strength  of  the  strongest  links,  and  to  increase  that 
of  the  weakest,  for  weak  links  are  a  common  peril. 
This  is  a  dictate  of  plain  common  sense. 

Here,  as  in  so  many  other  fields  of  international 
cooperation  and  integration,  the  Netherlands  will 
not  be  found  wanting.  As  we  have  participated 
in  making  and  implementing  the  Brussels  pact, 
and  Benelux,  and  Okkc.  and  a  Western  Euro- 
pean Federation  (to  name  only  these),  so  shall  we 
participate  in  making  the  treaty  now  before  us  a 
living  and  inspiring  reality.  We  know  that  you 
all  in  turn  will  not  fail  us. 

We  rejoice  at  the  thought  that  at  last  the  truth 
prevails  that  the  North  Atlantic  is  a  highway  that 


unites,  not  a  barrier  that  divides.  We  rejoice  at 
the  thought  that  North  Americans  and  Western 
Europeans  have  found  each  other  in  a  common 
edifice  dedicated  to  peace.  Freedom  from  fear  is 
being  brought  nearer  to  all  of  us  today. 

Let  me  close  with  a  word  of  Netherlands  grati- 
tude to  all  those  who  have  labored  towards  bring- 
ing us  here  together.  In  saj'ing  this,  I  am  think- 
ing not  only  of  the  negotiators,  who  I  thank  most 
warmly,  but  also,  and  no  less  of  those  enlightened 
men  who  built  that  massive  pedestal  of  popular 
support  on  which  this  treat}'  now  securely  stands : 
members  of  Congress,  parliamentarians,  moulders 
and  interpreters  of  public  opinion  in  all  our 
countries. 

And  so,  with  a  humble  prayer  for  God's  merciful 
blessing,  I  declare  the  Netherlands  Government's 
readiness  to  sign  this  treaty  for  peace. 


REMARKS  BY  HALVARD  LANGE 
Minister  for  Foreign  Affairs  of  Norway 


As  I  am  about  to  sign,  on  behalf  of  the  Nor- 
wegian Government,  the  North  Atlantic  pact,  I 
sti'ongly  feel  that  it  is  a  logical  sequence  to  a  line 
which  we  have  followed  since  the  liberation  of  oru" 
country  in  May,  1945.  The  five  long  years  of  Nazi 
occupation  had  given  our  people  a  new  and  deeper 
conception  of  freedom,  law,  and  democracy. 

And  so  we  were  determined  that  never  again 
must  Norway  risk  the  loss  of  her  freedom  and  all 
that  goes  with  it. 

With  great  faith  and  hope  the  Norwegian  Gov- 
ernment had  taken  an  active  part  in  the  United 
Nations  Conference  in  San  Francisco.  When 
after  many  divergencies  the  nations  represented 
there  reached  agreement  and  the  Charter  was 
solemnly  signed,  we  sincerely  believed  that  a  foun- 
dation had  been  laid  upon  which  we — allies  and 
friends  of  the  great  war — could  build  together  a 
future  of  peace  and  freedom. 

We  believe  today  as  firmly  as  ever  in  the  right- 
ness  of  the  words  and  spirit  of  that  great  Charter 
and  in  the  fundamental  soundness  and  necessity 
of  the  universal  idea  of  the  United  Nations. 

We  cannot  close  our  eyes,  however,  to  the  fact, 
that — for  reasons  which  we  all  know — the  United 
Nations  cannot  today  give  us  or  any  other  nation 


the  security  to  which  we  had  confidently  looked 
forward. 

Under  these  circumstances  my  country  tem- 
porarily had  to  look  for  a  greater  measure  of 
security,  beyond  that  provided  by  membership  in 
the  United  Nations. 

Our  first  thought,  naturally,  was  to  turn  to 
our  neighboi-s  and  friends  in  the  north  of  Europe 
to  see  what  the  three  of  us  together  could  do.  As 
we  Norwegians  saw  it,  the  best  solution  would  be 
a  Scandinavian  regional  pact  under  the  Charter 
of  the  United  Nations,  in  some  way  affiliated  with 
the  great  Western  democracies,  to  which  we  are 
so  closely  related  economically,  culturally,  and 
ideologically. 

As  we  could  not  fully  agree,  however,  on  the 
basis  for  such  a  Scandinavian  defense  union  and 
on  the  necessity  of  establishing  solidarity  with  a 
broader  and  stronger  regional  defense  grouping, 
the  logical  .solution  for  Norway  was  to  join  the 
North  Atlantic  pact.  We  have  a  longer  coast 
line  on  the  North  Atlantic  than  any  other  country. 
Our  experience  through  the  centuries  has  been 
that  the  ocean  did  not  separate.  On  the  contrary, 
for  us  it  has  been  the  highway  of  coniniercial  and 
cultural  intercourse. 


Department  of  Stale   Bulletin 


Before  doing  so,  we  asked  ourselves  some  search- 
ing questions : 

Can  the  proposed  pact  offer  the  protection  we 
need  if  the  worst  shoukl  happen  ?  Will  our  obli- 
gations under  the  pact  be  within  our  means,  with- 
out jeopardizing  our  economic  reconstruction 
program  ? 

We  further  asked:  Is  the  pact  in  full  accord- 
ance with  the  Charter  of  the  United  Nations? 

And,  last  but  not  least,  is  the  proposed  pact 
of  a  clearly  defensive  nature?  Will  it  promote 
our  foremost  aim:  Peace  with  freedom? 

Studying  the  text  of  the  pact,  we  found  satis- 
factory answers  to  all  these  questions. 

We  felt  convinced  that  the  prospective  signers 
of  the  pact  considered  the  preservation  of  peace 
and  freedom  their  foremost  aim.  They  would 
regard  any  idea  of  aggression  contrary  to  their 
most  basic  instincts  and  fundamental  policies. 

Our  pact  is  a  pact  of  peace.  It  is  directed 
against  no  nation.  It  is  directed  solely  against 
aggression  itself. 


The  moment  the  United  Nations  through  the 
common  efforts  of  all  its  member  nations  is  ca- 
pable of  functioning  in  accordance  with  the  inten- 
tion of  its  founders  and  with  the  letter  and  spirit 
of  the  Charter,  at  that  moment  the  need  for  such 
regional  arrangements  will  become  much  less  ur- 
gent, and  will  ultimately  be  eliminated  altogether. 

The  overwhelming  majority  of  the  Norwegian 
people  deeply  believes  that  the  signing  of  the  At- 
lantic pact  is  an  event  which  may  decisively  in- 
fluence the  course  of  history  and  hasten  the  day 
when  all  nations  can  work  together  for  peace  and 
freedom. 

On  this  solemn  occasion  I  wish  to  take  the 
opportunity  to  express  our  deep-felt  appreciation 
of  the  tremendous  contribution  of  the  United 
States  of  America  during  and  after  the  war. 
The  scope  and  vision  of  the  undertakings  which 
the  United  States  have  originated  for  the  recon- 
struction and  stabilization  of  a  war-torn  world, 
have  seldom  been  equalled  in  human  history. 


REMARKS  BY  JOSE  CAEIRO  DA  MATTA 
Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs  of  Portugal 


The  Government  of  Portugal,  which  I  have  the 
honor  to  represent  here  on  this  occasion,  received 
with  pleasure  the  invitation  extended  by  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States  in  its  name  and  in 
the  name  of  Belgium,  Canada,  France,  Luxem- 
bourg, the  Netherlands,  Norway,  and  the  United 
Kingdom,  to  take  part  in  the  North  Atlantic  pact. 

The  time  has  now  come  where  we  see  the  con- 
cept of  this  pact  become  a  reality;  and,  before 
our  signatures  are  affixed  to  it,  allow  me  to  say  a 
few  words  in  the  name  of  Portugal. 

To  President  Truman,  who,  with  his  strong 
personality,  so  well  symbolizes  in  this  hour  the 
clear  political  vision  and  the  decisive  entry  of  the 
United  States  into  this  undertaking,  go  the  cordial 
greetings  of  the  Government  and  people  of 
Portugal. 

My  country,  in  accepting  the  invitation  ex- 
tended to  her  to  take  her  place  among  the  original 
participating  nations  in  the  Atlantic  pact,  was 
not — I  can  affirm — concerned  exclusively  with  con- 
siderations of  her  own  security :  she  did  so  much 
more  because  of  her  recognition  of  the  need  of  giv- 
ing her  cooperation  to  this  gi-eat  effort.    More  than 


ever  it  is  necessary  to  defend  the  principles  and 
the  positions  which  those  peoples  that  are  the 
depository  of  the  ideals  of  Western  civilization 
occupy  in  the  world.  It  can  be  said  that  there  is 
now  being  repeated  around  the  shores  of  the  At- 
lantic— and  on  a  much  vaster  scale — the  picture 
which  the  ancient  peoples  knew  at  the  time  when 
the  finest  conquests  of  the  human  mind  and  the 
highest  exponents  of  civilization  were  centered  in 
the  small  but  fertile  area  of  the  classical  world. 

Portugal  is  an  Atlantic  country  whose  activities 
throughout  the  long  centuries  of  history  took  place 
to  a  great  extent  on  the  broad  sea  which  forms 
her  boundary.  To  those  countries  to  which  we 
are  bound  by  the  seaways  of  the  Atlantic,  we  are 
brought  near  by  friendly  relations.  The  memory 
of  our  first  contacts  with  some  of  them  are  lost  in 
the  night  of  time.  With  one  of  them  we  can  point 
to  centuries  of  the  closest  collaboration. 

Europe,  which  has  such  a  great  moral  heritage  to 
defend,  Europe,  reduced  in  political  values,  strug- 
gling against  the  greatest  and  most  dangerous 
mental  epidemic  of  all  times,  which  threatens  to 
destroy  the  flower  of  our  culture,  Europe  is  anx- 


April   17,    J  949 


iously  seeking  a  formula  for  peace.  Her  moral 
forces  are  now  exerted  in  the  will  to  correct  her 
ills.  And  the  evidence  of  what  might  be  a  dis- 
quieting shadow  on  her  horizon  finds  her  facing 
with  courage  and  decision  the  reality  of  her  pres- 
ent position,  appreciative  and  gi-ateful  for  the 
moral  and  material  solidarity  nobly  offered  to  her 
from  this  side  of  the  Atlantic. 

Portugal  wishes  to  assert  that  she  sees  in  the 
North  Atlantic  pact,  not  only  an  instrument  of 
defense  and  international  cooperation,  but  also,  for 


the  reasons  and  for  the  aims  which  govern  it, 
a  precious  instrument  for  peace.  And  she  con- 
siders herself  fortunate  to  be  able  to  find  that, 
once  again,  none  of  the  instruments  on  which  her 
foreign  relations  are  based  is  in  conflict  with  its 
letter  or  its  spirit. 

May  the  thought  which  has  made  of  these  na- 
tions living  examples  of  true  social  progi-ess,  in 
work,  in  freedom,  and  in  peace,  keep  intact  the 
ties  which  are  being  formed  today  and  ensure  that 
this  pact  may  bear  the  fruit  which  we  expect  of  it. 


REMARKS  BY  ERNEST  BEVIN 
Secretary  of  State  for  Foreign  Affairs  of  the  United  Kingdom 


Sir,  In  appending  my  signature  to  this  pact 
today,  I  am  doing  so  on  behalf  of  a  free  parlia- 
mentary nation,  and  I  am  satisfied  that  the  step 
■we  are  taking  has  the  almost  unanimous  approval 
of  the  British  people. 

Like  other  signatories,  my  country  has  had 
forced  upon  it  the  great  task  of  fighting  two  world 
wars  against  aggression  within  a  period  of  a 
quarter  of  a  century. 

The  cost  in  human  life  and  treasure  was  appall- 
ing. Succeeding  generations  in  the  period  fol- 
lowing each  struggle  over  a  wide  area  of  the  world 
■were  thrown  into  a  state  of  uncertainty  and  har- 
assed by  wars  of  nerves  and  civil  wars. 

The  common  people  (who  only  want  to  live  in 
peace)  have  been  unable  to  follow  their  peaceful 
pursuits  or  to  sleep  safely  in  their  beds. 

They  have  seen  their  constitutions  crushed — 
constitutions  in  which  they  thought  they  had  made 
their  liberty  secure. 

We  have  witnessed  a  period  in  which,  while  the 
countries  represented  here  liave  been  striving  to 
rehabilitate  the  ■world  and  to  restore  it  to  prosper- 
ity and  sanity,  they  have  been  constantly  frus- 
trated in  their  efforts. 

We  have  all  tried  with  a  genuine  desire  and  firm 
purpose  to  build  an  effective  United  Nations. 

We  have  endeavored  to  make  its  machinery 
work  and  to  create  such  confidence  in  this  great 
■world  organisation  as  will  enable  it  to  establish 
security  for  all  the  peoples  of  the  world. 

But  so  far  our  hopes  have  not  been  fully  realised. 

What  course  then  was  open  to  us? 

We  had  to  get  together  and  build  with  such  ma- 
terial as  was  available  to  us,  and  this  material 


was  happily  at  hand  in  (his  great  Atlantic  com- 
munity, with  a  common  outlook  and  desire  for 
peace. 

Countries  whose  representatives  are  signing  this 
great  pact  today  are  composed  of  peace-loving  peo- 
ples with  spiritual  affinities,  but  ■who  also  have 
great  pride  in  their  skill  and  their  production  and 
in  their  achievements  in  mastering  the  forces  of 
nature  and  harnessing  the  great  resources  of  the 
world  for  the  benefit  of  mankind. 

Our  peoples  do  not  glorify  war,  but  they  will 
not  shrink  from  it  if  aggression  is  threatened. 

This  pact  is  a  concrete  proof  of  the  determina- 
tion of  a  group  of  like-minded  nations  never  to 
fight  one  another. 

These  nations  are,  in  addition,  linked  with  many 
other  peoples,  who  equally  will  never  indulge  in 
aggression. 

All  these  peoples  are  united  in  a  common  line 
of  thought  and  desire. 

Today  is  not  only  the  day  of  the  signature  of 
this  pact,  it  is  also  a  day  of  solemn  thought — and, 
may  I  say,  of  consecration  for  peace  and  resistance 
to  aggression. 

Speaking  for  the  British  people,  I  can  assure 
you  that  they  have  agreed  to  make  their  contri- 
bution to  the  pool  for  peace. 

Although  this  pact  is  called  the  Atlantic  pact  and 
is  defined  as  covering  the  Atlantic  area,  I  must 
repeat  what  I  stated  recently  in  the  British  House 
of  Commons,  that  it  does  not  minimise  either  our 
interest  in  or  determination  to  support  others  not 
included  in  this  pact,  with  whom  we  have  had 
long  years  of  friendship  and  alliances. 


Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


We  are  in  the  process  of  enthroning  and  making 
paramount  the  use  of  reason  as  against  force. 

The  day  may  come  when  all  the  world  will 
accept  that  view. 

Today  will  bring  a  great  feeling  of  relief  to 
millions  of  people. 

At  last  democracy  is  no  longer  a  series  of  iso- 
lated units. 

It  has  become  a  cohesive  organism,  determined 
to  fulfil  its  great  purpose. 

But  it  is  not  the  final  end. 


We  shall  pursue  with  every  endeavour  the  build- 
ing up  of  a  truly  universal  United  Nations,  to 
which  this  group  of  countries  will  be  no  mean 
contributor. 

In  the  solemnity  of  this  moment,  I  put  my  sig- 
nature to  this  pact  in  the  name  of  a  people  who 
join  with  other  signatories  for  the  preservation  of 
the  great  freedoms,  and  in  giving  an  assurance  to 
mankind  of  our  determination  to  assist  all  the 
peoples  of  the  world  to  live  in  understanding  and 
good-neighborliness. 


ADDRESS  OF  THE  PRESIDENT  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES 


On  this  historic  occasion,  I  am  hajjpy  to  welcome 
the  Foreign  Ministers  of  the  countries  which, 
together  with  the  United  States,  form  the  North 
Atlantic  community  of  nations. 

The  purpose  of  this  meeting  is  to  take  the  first 
step  toward  putting  into  effect  an  international 
agreement  to  safegiiard  the  peace  and  prosperity 
of  this  community  of  nations. 

It  is  altogether  appropriate  that  nations  so 
deeply  conscious  of  their  common  interests  should 
join  in  expressing  their  determination  to  preserve 
their  present  peacefid  situation  and  to  pi'otect  it 
in  the  future. 

What  we  are  about  to  do  here  is  a  neighborly  act* 
We  are  like  a  group  of  householders,  living  in  the 
same  locality,  who  decide  to  express  their  com- 
munity of  interests  by  entering  into  a  formal  as- 
sociation for  their  mutual  self-protection. 

This  treaty  is  a  simple  document.  The  nations 
which  sign  it  agree  to  abide  by  the  peaceful  prin- 
ciples of  the  United  Nations,  to  maintain  friendly 
relations  and  economic  cooperation  with  one 
another,  to  consult  together  whenever  the  terri- 
tory or  independence  of  any  one  of  them  is 
thi-eatened,  and  to  come  to  the  aid  of  any  one  of 
them  which  may  be  attacked. 

It  is  a  simple  document,  but  if  it  had  existed  in 
1914  and  in  1939,  supported  bj'  the  nations  which 
are  represented  here  today,  I  believe  it  would  have 
prevented  the  acts  of  aggression  which  led  to  two 
World  Wars. 

The  nations  represented  here  have  fnown  the 
tragedy  of  those  two  wars.  As  a  result,  many  of 
us  took  part  in  the  founding  of  the  United  Nations. 
Each  member  of  the  United  Nations  is  under  a 
solemn  obligation  to  maintain  international  peace 


and  security.  Each  is  bound  to  settle  international 
disputes  by  peaceful  means,  to  refrain  from  the 
threat  or  use  of  force  against  the  territory  or  in- 
dei^endence  of  any  country,  and  to  support  the 
United  Nations  in  any  action  it  takes  to  preserve 
the  peace. 

That  solemn  pledge — that  abiding  obligation — 
we  reaffirm  here  today. 

We  rededicate  ourselves  to  that  obligation,  and 
propose  this  North  Atlantic  Treaty  as  one  of  the 
means  to  carry  it  out. 

Through  this  treaty  we  undertake  to  conduct 
our  international  affairs  in  accordance  with  the 
provisions  of  the  United  Nations  Charter.  We 
undertake  to  exercise  our  right  of  collective  or  in- 
dividual self-defense  against  armed  attack,  in  ac- 
cordance with  article  51  of  the  Charter,  and  sub- 
ject to  such  measures  as  the  Security  Council  may 
take  to  maintain  and  restore  international  peace 
and  security. 

Within  the  United  Nations,  this  country  and 
other  countries  have  hoped  to  establish  an  inter- 
national force  for  the  use  of  the  United  Nations 
in  preserving  peace  throughout  the  world.  Our 
efforts  to  establish  this  force,  however,  have  been 
blocked  by  one  of  the  major  powers. 

This  lack  of  unanimous  agreement  in  the  Se- 
curity Council  does  not  mean  that  we  must  aban- 
don our  attempts  to  make  peace  secure. 

Even  without  that  agreement,  which  we  still 
hope  for,  we  shall  do  as  much  as  we  can.  And 
every  bit  that  we  do  will  add  to  the  strength  of 
the  fabric  of  peace  throughout  the  world. 

In  this  treaty,  we  seek  to  establish  freedom  from 
aggression  and  from  the  use  of  force  in  the  North 
Atlantic   community.     This   is   the   area    which 


April   17,    1949 


has  been  at  the  heart  of  the  last  two  world  con- 
flicts. To  protect  this  area  against  war  will  be  a 
long  step  toward  permanent  peace  in  the  whole 
world. 

There  are  those  who  claim  that  this  treaty  is  an 
aggressive  act  on  the  part  of  the  nations  which 
ring  the  North  Atlantic. 

This  is  absolutely  untrue. 

The  pact  will  be  a  positive,  not  a  negative,  in- 
fluence for  peace,  and  its  influence  will  be  felt 
not  only  in  the  area  it  specifically  covers  but 
throughout  the  world.  Its  conclusion  does  not 
mean  a  narrowing  of  the  interests  of  its  members. 
Under  my  authority  and  instructions,  the  Secre- 
tary of  State  has  recently  made  it  abundantly 
clear  that  the  adherence  of  the  United  States  to 
this  pact  does  not  signify  a  lessening  of  American 
concern  for  the  security  and  welfare  of  other  areas, 
such  as  the  Near  East.  The  step  we  are  taking 
today  should  serve  to  reassure  peace-loving  peoples 
everywhere  and  pave  the  way  for  the  world-wide 
stability  and  peaceful  development  which  we  all 
seek. 

Twice  in  recent  years,  nations  have  felt  the  sick- 
ening blow  of  unprovoked  aggression.  Our 
peoples,  to  whom  our  Governments  are  responsible, 
demand  that  these  things  shall  not  happen  again. 

We  are  determined  that  they  shall  not  happen 
again. 

In  taking  steps  to  prevent  aggression  against 
our  own  peoples,  we  have  no  purpose  of  aggres- 
sion against  others.  To  suggest  the  contrary  is 
to  slander  our  institutions  and  defame  our  ideals 
and  our  aspirations. 

The  nations  represented  here  are  bound  together 
by  ties  of  long  standing.  We  are  joined  by  a 
common  heritage  of  democracy,  individual  liberty, 
and  the  rule  of  law.  These  are  the  ties  of  a  peace- 
ful way  of  life.  In  this  pact  we  merely  give  them 
formal  recognition. 

With  our  common  traditions  we  face  common 
problems.  We  are,  to  a  large  degree,  industrial 
nations,  and  we  face  the  problem  of  mastering 
the  forces  of  modern  technology  in  tlio  pulilic 
interest. 

To  meet  this  problem  successfully,  we  must  have 
a  world  in  which  we  can  exchange  the  products 
of  our  labor  not  only  among  ourselves,  but  with 
other  nations.  We  have  come  together  in  a  great 
cooperative  economic  effort  to  estal)lish  this  kind 
of  world. 


We  are  determined  to  work  together  to  provide 
better  lives  for  our  people  without  sacrificing  our 
common  ideals  of  justice  and  human  worth. 

But  we  cannot  succeed  if  our  people  are  haunted 
by  the  constant  fear  of  aggression,  and  burdened 
by  the  cost  of  preparing  their  nations  individu- 
ally against  attack. 

In  this  pact,  we  hope  to  create  a  shield  against 
aggi-ession  and  the  fear  of  aggression — a  bulwark 
which  will  permit  us  to  get  on  with  the  real  busi- 
ness of  government  and  society,  the  business  of 
achieving  a  fuller  and  happier  life  for  our  citizens. 

We  shall,  no  doubt,  go  about  tliis  business  in 
different  ways.  There  are  different  kinds  of  gov- 
ernmental and  economic  systems,  just  as  there  are 
different  languages  and  different  cultures.  But 
these  differences  present  no  real  obstacle  to  the 
voluntary  association  of  free  nations  devoted  to 
the  common  cause  of  peace. 

We  believe  that  it  is  possible  for  nations  to 
achieve  unity  on  the  gi'eat  principles  of  human 
fi-eedom  and  justice,  and  at  the  same  time  to  jDer- 
niit,  in  other  respects,  the  greatest  diversity  of 
which  the  human  mind  is  capable. 

Our  faith  in  this  kind  of  unity  is  borne  out 
by  our  experience  here  in  the  United  States  in 
creating  one  nation  out  of  the  variety  of  our  con- 
tinental resources  and  the  peoples  of  many  lands. 

This  method  of  organizing  diverse  peoples  and 
cultures  is  in  direct  contrast  to  the  method  of  the 
police  state,  which  attempts  to  achieve  unity  by 
imposing  the  same  beliefs  and  the  same  rule  of 
force  on  everyone. 

We  believe  that  our  methotl  of  achieving  inter- 
national unity  through  the  voluntary  association 
of  different  countries  dedicated  to  a  common  cause 
is  an  effective  step  toward  bringing  order  to  our 
troubled  world. 

For  us,  w^ar  is  not  inevitable.  We  do  not  believe 
that  there  are  blind  tides  of  history  which  sweep 
men  one  way  or  the  other.  In  our  own  time 
we  have  seen  brave  men  overcome  obstacles  that 
seemed  insurmountable  and  forces  that  seemed 
overwhelming.  ]\Ien  with  courage  and  vision  can 
still  determine  their  own  destiny.  They  can 
choose  slavery  or  freedom — war  or  peace. 

I  have  no  doubt  which  they  will  choose.  The 
treaty  we  are  signing  here  today  is  evidence  of 
the  path  they  will  follow. 

If  there  is  anything  certain  today,  if  there  is 
anything  inevitable  in  the  future,  it  is  the  will 
of  the  people  of  the  world  for  freedom  and  jieace. 


482 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


UNITED  NATIONS  AND  SPECIALIZED  AGENCIES 


Reconvening  of  the  Third  Session  of  the  General  Assembly 


Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson 

[Released  to  the  press  by  the  U.S.  Mission 
to  the  United  Nations  April  5] 

On  the  occasion  of  the  reconvening  of  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly,  I  should  like  to  express  what  I  be- 
lieve is  the  conviction  of  the  Ameiican  people  that 
the  United  Nations  is  our  best  hope  of  building  a 
peaceful  world  community. 

It  embodies  the  hopes  and  aspirations  to  which 
we  dedicated  ourselves  in  the  War.  We  are  de- 
termined that  these  purposes  shall  not  be  lost, 
however  great  are  the  difficulties  to  be  surmounted. 
In  order  to  help  create  those  conditions  of  stability 
and  security  which  are  essential  to  the  full  effec- 
tiveness of  the  United  Nations,  this  country  has 
cooperated  with  other  peace-loving  nations  in  ef- 
forts to  achieve  world  economic  recovery  and  as- 
surances against  aggression.  We  look  upon  these 
as  necessary  foundations  for  the  kind  of  construc- 
tive and  peaceful  cooperation  among  nations 
which  the  founders  at  San  Francisco  visualized 
as  the  real  work  of  the  United  Nations. 

Agenda 

A/808 

Dated  Dec.  15,  1948 

I.  Committee  Reports  Awaiting  Action  by  the 
General  Assembly  in  Plenary  Meeting. 

1.  The  problem  of  voting  in  the  Security  Coun- 

cil: 

(a)  Report  of  the  ad  hoc  Political  Committee 
(A/792) ; 

(6)  Draft  resolution  proposed  by  the  Union 
of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics  (A/793). 

2.  Study  of  methods  for  the  promotion  of  inter- 

national co-operation  in  the  political  field: 
report  of  the  ad  hoc  Political  Committee. 

3.  Report  of  the  Economic  and  Social  Council 

(Chapter  III)  :  report  of  the  Third  Com- 
mittee (A/783). 

4.  Violation  by  the  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist 

Republics  of  fiuidamental  human  rights, 
traditional  diplomatic  practices  and  other 
I^rinciples  of  the  Charter:  report  of  the 
Sixth  Committee  (A/787). 

5.  Reports  of  the  Advisory  Committee  on  Ad- 

ministi'ative  and  Budgetary  Questions :  I'e- 
port  of  the  Fifth  Committee  (A/802). 

II.  Items  Awaiting  Action  by  the  Committees. 

A.  First  Committee 

1.  Treatment  of  Indians  in  the  Union  of  South 
Africa :  item  proposed  by  India. 


2.  Question  of  Franco  Spain:  implementation 

of  the  resolutions  and  recommendations  of 
the  General  Assembly  of  12  December  1946 
and  of  17  November  1947:  item  proposed 
by  Poland. 

3.  Question  of  the  disposal  of  the  former  Italian 

colonies:  item  proposed  by  the  United 
States  of  America,  France,  the  United 
Kingdom  and  the  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist 
Republics. 

B.  Ad  hoc  Political  Committee 

1.  Study  of  methods  for  the  promotion  of  inter- 

national co-operation:  report  of  the  In- 
terim Committee  of  the  General  Assembly. 

2.  United  Nations  Guard :  item  proposed  by  the 

Secretary-General. 

3.  Report  of  the  Security  Council. 

C.  Third  Committee 

1.  Report  of  the  Economic  and  Social  Council 

(Chapter  III). 

2.  Refugees  and  displaced  persons: 

(a)  Pi'oblem  of  refugees  and  displaced  per- 
sons :  item  proposed  by  Poland. 

(b)  Repatriation,  resettlement  and  immigra- 
tion of  refugees  and  displaced  persons:  report 
of  the  Economic  and  Social  Council. 

3.  Freedom  of  information :  report  of  the  Eco- 

nomic and  Social  Council. 

4.  Discriminations  practised  by  certain  States 

against  immigrating  labour,  and  in  par- 
ticular against  labour  recruited  from  the 
rans  of  refugees:  item  proposed  by 
Poland. 

5.  Creation  of  a  sub-commission  of  the  Social 

Commission  of  the  Economic  and  Social 
Council  on  the  study  of  the  Social  problems 
of  the  aboriginal  populations  of  the  Amer- 
ican continent:  item  proposed  by  Bolivia. 


A/BUR/AGENDA/57 
April  1,  1949 

1.  Organization  of  the  third  regular  session 
(Part  II)  :  memorandum  by  the  Secretary-Gen- 
eral (A/BUR/115). 

2.  Allocation  of  agenda  items  among  Commit- 
tees (A/808)  : 

(a)  Creation  of  an  ad  hoc  committee  to  consider 
methods  and  procedures  which  woidd  enable  the 
General  Assembly  to  discharge  its  functions  more 
effectively  and  expeditiously:  item  proposed  by 


Apn\    17,    7949 


Denmark,  Norway  and  Sweden  (A/743,  A/825) ; 

(b)  Proposal  for  the  adoption  of  Russian  as  one 
of  the  working  languages  of  the  General  Assem- 
bly :  item  proposed  bv  the  Union  of  Soviet  Social- 
ist Republics  (A/BUR/112)  ; 

(c)  Proposal  for  the  adoption  of  Chinese  as  one 
of  the  working  languages  of  the  General  As- 
sembly: item  proposed  by  China  (A/BI'R/113). 

3.  Consideration  of  requests  for  the  inclusion  of 
additional  items  in  the  agenda  of  the  third  regular 
session : 

(a)  Study  of  the  legal  proceedings  against 
Cardinal  Mindszenty  of  Hungary  in  relation  to 
Article  1,  paragraph  3,  and  Article  55,  paragraph 
c,  of  the  Charter:  item  proposed  by  Bolivia 
(A/820)  ; 

(b)  Observance  of  fundamental  freedoms  and 
human  rights  in  Bulgaria  and  Hungary,  includ- 
ing the  question  of  religious  and  civil  liberty  in 


special  relation  to  recent  trials  of  church  leaders: 
item  proposed  by  Australia  (A/821)  ; 
(c)  Question  of  Indonesia 

(i)  Item  proposed  by  India  (A/826) 

(ii)  Item  proposed  by  Australia  (A/827). 

4.  Application  of  Israel  for  admission  to  mem- 
bership in  the  United  Nations:  letter,  dated  7 
March  1949,  from  the  President  of  the  Security 
Council  to  the  President  of  the  General  Assembly 
(A/818). 

5.  Application  of  Ceylon  for  admission  to  mem- 
bership in  the  United  Nations:  letter,  dated  17 
March  1949.  from  the  President  of  the  Security 
Council  to  the  President  of  the  General  Assembly 
(A/823). 

6.  Appointments  to  fill  vacancies  in  the  member- 
ship of  subsidiary  bodies  of  the  General  Assembly, 
Committee  on  Contributions :  note  bv  the  Secre- 
tary-General (A/BUR/114). 


U.S.  Views  on  Former  Italian  Colonies 


STATEMENT  BY  JOHN  FOSTER  DULLES' 
U.S.  Representative  to  the  General  Assembly 


In  this  matter  of  the  former  Italian  colonies,  the 
General  Assembly  exercises  an  authority  which  is 
unique  in  the  history  of  the  United  Nations.  Nor- 
mally the  Assembly  can  only  make  recommenda- 
tions, which  are  without  binding  effect  upon  the 
member  states.  In  this  case,  however,  the  four 
states  which  under  the  Italian  peace  treaty  were 
charged  with  the  responsibility  of  disposing  of  the 
colonies  have  agreed  in  advance  to  be  bound  by 
this  Assembly's  recommendations.  Therefore,  the 
Assembly  in  the  present  instance  is  acting  in  effect 
as  the  supreme  legislative  authority. 

The  responsibility  which  the  Assembly  thus  as- 
sumes is  a  heavy  one.  The  problem  does  not  lend 
itself  to  easy  solution.  Indeed,  if  there  had  been 
an  easy  solution,  the  problem  would  not  now  be 
here.  The  Council  of  Foreign  Ministers  has 
struggled  vainly  with  the  matter  ever  since  its 
first  meeting  in  September  1945.  Not  only  did 
its  three  yeai-s  of  effort  fail  to  produce  a  solution, 
but  in  the  course  of  the  effort  all  the  Governments 
concerned  have  shifted  their  positions,  thus  also 
demonstrating  the  close  balance  of  many  conflict- 
ing factors. 

It  is,  as  I  say,  because  the  problem  has  proved 
baffling,  that  it  has  at  last  come  to  us  here,  and 

'  Mafle  in  Committee  I  (Political  and  Security)  of  the 
General  A.^sonihly  at  Lake  Success,  N.Y.,  on  Apr.  6,  1949, 
and  released  to  the  press  by  the  U.S.  Deiegatiou  to  the 
General  Assembly  on  the  same  date. 


what  we  do  with  it  will  not  merely  affect  the  des- 
tinies of  some  3  million  people,  it  will  also  affect 
the  future  of  the  United  Nations  itself.  Here  we 
are,  a  body  not  hampered  by  the  veto,  with  final 
authority  with  respect  to  a  vexing  problem  which 
has  defied  solution  by  what  is  commonly  referred 
to  as  "))ower  politics."'  If  this  Assembly  proceeds 
comjietently  to  find  a  just  and  practical  solution, 
that  will  add  greatly  to  the  prestige  of  the  United 
Nations.  If,  on  the  other  hand,  the  Assembly 
proves  itself  impotent,  then  the  result  will  be  that 
international  problems  will  more  and  more  be  dealt 
with  on  the  basis  of  applicable  national  power, 
rather  than  on  the  basis  of  high  principles  inter- 
nationally applied. 

The  provisions  of  the  Italian  peace  treaty  repre- 
sented an  act  of  faith  in  the  Assembly  of  the 
United  Nations.  It  devolves  upon  us  to  justify 
that  faith. 

We  are  dealing  here  with  non-self-governing 
territories,  and  we  shall,  I  assume,  want  to  apply 
the  principles  of  the  Charter,  which  are  found 
notalily  in  chapter  XI.  Two  basic  principles  are 
there  laid  down.  First,  the  interests  of  the  in- 
habitants are  paramount.  Second,  regard  should 
be  had  for  international  peace  and  security.  On 
behalf  of  the  United  States,  I  shall  indicate  briefly 
and  in  a  preliminary  way  the  conclusions  which 
seem  to  us  to  be  suggested  by  the  application  of 
these  two  principles  to  the  three  colonial  areas  in 
question;  namely,  Libya,  Eritrea,  and  Italian  So- 


484 


Department  of  Slate  Bulletin 


maliland.  In  this  connection,  we  have  relied 
largely  upon  the  report  of  the  Commission  of 
Investigation,  which  in  1947  the  Four  Powers  sent 
to  ascertain  the  wishes  of  the  inhabitants  and  to 
gather  other  pertinent  information. 

Let  us  turn  first  to  Libya.  The  inhabitants 
seem  well  advanced  toward  self-government  and 
independence,  and  we  believe  any  Assembly  de- 
cision should  put  the  primary  emphasis  on  achiev- 
ing early  independence. 

Also,  the  relevancy  of  this  area  to  international 
peace  and  security  cannot  be  ignored.  Names 
such  as  Tobruk  and  Bengasi  have  not  been  for- 
gotten, and  Egj'ptian  and  other  Arab  states  are 
entitled  to  a  solution  that  does  not  again  place 
them  in  jeopardy.  The  future  of  Libya,  indeed, 
intimately  affects  the  whole  strategic  position  in 
the  Mediterranean  and  the  Near  East. 

It  seems,  therefore,  that  both  the  welfare  of  the 
inhabitants  and  international  peace  and  security 
require  that  Libya  should  be  placed  under  the 
trusteeship  system  and  the  administration  en- 
trusted to  the  care  of  a  state  or  states  which  have 
demonstrated  the  capacity  and  the  will  to  develop 
independence,  in  accordance  with  article  76  of  the 
Charter,  and  also  to  assure  that  the  trust  territory 
shall  play  its  part  in  the  maintenance  of  inter- 
national peace  and  security,  in  accordance  with 
article  84  of  the  Charter. 

In  tliis  connection  we  believe  that  the  Assembly 
will  wish  to  consider  carefully  the  view  of  the 
Government  of  the  United  Kingdom  and  of  the 
other  members  of  the  British  Commonwealth. 
Libya  was  liberated  as  the  result  of  a  great  Allied 
offensive  in  which  British  Commonwealth  troops 
bore  the  brunt  of  the  fighting.  Also,  the  United 
Kingdom  Government  is,  under  the  peace  treaty, 
actually  administering  all  of  Libj'a  except  Fezzan, 
and  such  administration,  which  has  now  lasted  for 
upwards  of  five  years,  has  given  intimate  knowl- 
edge from  which  this  Assembly  can,  no  doubt, 
profit.  Furthermore,  the  United  Kingdom  has 
given  ample  evidence,  not  merely  by  word  but  by 
deed,  that  it  genuinely  believes  in  the  principle 
of  developing  non-self-governing  areas  so  as  to 
make  them  independent.  For  this  reason,  we 
consider  that  regardless  of  whether  the  General 
Assembly  decides  to  deal  with  Libya  as  a  whole 
or  in  part,  the  United  Kingdom  should  be  invited 
to  undertake  the  administration  of  Cyrenaica. 

If  we  turn  to  Eritrea,  we  find  people  who  are 
neither  homogeneous  nor  ready  for  self-govern- 
ment. However,  in  the  case  of  much  of  Eritrea, 
there  is  close  affinity  with  the  neighboring  people 
of  Ethiopia.  Also,  in  the  case  of  this  part  of 
Eritrea,  there  has  been  a  demonstrated  relation- 
ship to  international  peace  and  securitj'.  We  feel 
that  it  is  important  that  the  disposition  of  the 
territory  be  such  as  to  insure  that  it  cannot  again 
be  used  by  any  nation  as  a  base  of  operations 
against  Ethiopia.     Furthermore,  it  seems  reason- 

April  17,   1949 

832197 — 49 3 


able  that  Ethiopia  should  have  adequate  access 
to  the  sea. 

These  considerations  combine  to  suggest  that 
the  eastern  portion  of  Eritrea,  including  the  port 
of  Massawa  and  the  city  of  Asmara,  might  be  in- 
corporated into  Ethiopia,  subject  to  appropriate 
protection  of  Italian  and  other  minorities. 

In  the  case  of  the  western  province  of  Eritrea, 
the  affinity  of  the  people  is  closer  with  the  peoples 
to  the  west  of  them,  and  it  would  seem  that  a  sep- 
arate solution  should  be  found  for  the  future  of 
the  inhabitants  of  the  western  province. 

In  the  case  of  Italian  Somaliland,  it  is  apparent 
that  the  inhabitants  are  not,  and  in  any  predict- 
able period  will  not  be,  ready  for  self-government 
or  independence.  For  a  long  time  to  come,  out- 
side assistance  and  guidance  will  be  required  in 
order  to  develop  the  meager  resources  and  to  bring 
about  a  development  of  the  sparse  population  so 
that  they  can  stand  by  themselves.  The  area  is 
without  major  strategic  importance  from  the 
standpoint  of  international  peace  and  security. 

In  view  of  the  revival  of  democratic  government 
and  institutions  in  Italy  since  the  overthrow  of 
Fascism  and  the  demonstrated  willingness  and 
ability  of  the  present  government  of  Italy  to 
assume  the  obligations  of  a  peace-loving  state  in 
accordance  with  the  Charter,  we  feel  that  Italy 
should  be  invited  to  undertake  the  responsibility 
of  administering  Italian  Somaliland  under  the 
United  Nations  trusteeship  system. 

In  all  of  these  matters  we  believe  that  the  ar- 
rangements should  be  such  as  to  afford  the  Italian 
people  an  opportunity  to  participate  in  the  de- 
velopment of  their  former  colonies  so  far  as  is 
consistent  with  the  reasonable  wishes  of  the  people 
and  the  maintenance  of  harmonious  order.  The 
Italian  nation  has  a  surplus  population  of  people 
who  have  demonstrated,  in  many  parts  of  the 
world,  their  great  capacity  to  develop  waste  places 
into  productivity.  "We  believe  that  the  material 
welfare  of  the  Italian  people  and  the  inhabitants 
of  Africa  can  be  advanced  by  cooperation  under 
sound  administi'ation.  We  hope  that  this  As- 
sembly will  approach  the  matter  in  that  spirit. 
Let  us  not  allow  wi-ongs  of  the  past,  however 
grievous,  and  emotions  of  the  past,  however  justi- 
fiable, to  dominate  our  debates  and  to  prescribe 
permanent  barriers  to  the  fruitful  intercourse  of 
peoples  who  can  help  each  other  and  who,  in  the 
words  of  our  Charter  should  practice  tolerance  and 
live  together  in  peace  with  one  another  as  good 
neighbors. 

I  offer  the  foregoing  as  an  indication  of  the  far- 
reaching  imijortance  of  the  problem  with  which 
we  deal,  and  of  the  manj'  factors  which  must  be 
taken  into  account  if  we  are  to  reach  a  just  and 
equitable  solution.  We  look  forward  to  hearing 
the  expression  of  views  of  other  delegates.  My 
Government  has  every  confidence  in  the  inherent 
wisdom  of  this  body  and  in  its  ability  to  cope  with 
this  problem  in  a  manner  commensurate  with  the 
important  issues  involved. 


The  Atlantic  Community  and  the  United  Nations 

BY  AMBASSADOR  PHILIP  C.  JESSUPi 


There  is  nothing  novel  in  the  subject  which  has 
been  given  to  me  to  talk  about  tliis  evening.  As  a 
matter  of  fact,  it  would  be  difficult  to  find  any 
novel  point  in  connection  with  the  North  Atlantic 
pact.^  One  of  the  gratifj-ing  aspects  of  the  devel- 
opment of  the  plans  for  this  pact  is  the  fact  that 
it  was  made  puolic  even  before  it  was  signed  and 
that  there  is  therefore  this  present  period  before 
its  ratification  during  which  people  can  comment 
on  it.  They  have  commented  freely  on  almost 
every  aspect  of  it.  I  have  tried  to  study  as  many 
of  these  comments  as  possible.  Some  of  tliem 
have  been  made  in  the  press,  in  news  stories,  and 
in  editorials  or  columns,  some  in  radio  comments, 
some  in  the  views  or  organizations,  and  some  in 
correspondence  and  conversation  with  individuals. 

I  have  collected  from  all  tliese  sources  the  prin- 
cipal and  most  frequently  recurring  arguments 
and  doubts  which  have  been  expressed  concerning 
the  ])act  in  so  far  as  concerns  its  bearing  on  the 
United  Nations.  I  am  not  now  dealing  with  other 
aspects  of  the  pact.  I  have  tried  to  analyze  the 
points,  and  I  shall  try  to  deal  with  them  tonight. 

Before  looking  at  these  various  views  in  detail, 
I  should  like  to  suggest  that  some  of  them  reflect 
positions  which  were  taken  when  the  idea  of  the 
conclusion  of  such  a  treaty  was  known  but  liefore 
its  text  was  made  public  or  even  agreed  upon. 
The  expression  of  many  of  these  points  of  view 
during  the  period  of  negotiation  was  extremely 
helpful.  It  influenced  the  drafting  of  the  text.  I 
shall  not  try  to  be  specific  and  name  names  or 
refer  to  particular  points,  but  I  have  no  doubt  that 
there  are  many  organizations  and  individuals  who 
have  taken  satisfaction  in  seeing  reflected  in  the 
pact  ideas  which  they  had  discussed  during  the 
negotiating  stage. 

The  relation  of  the  conclusion  of  the  pact  to  the 
United  Nations  can  be  examined  from  several 
points  of  view.  First,  there  is  the  text  of  the 
treaty  itself,  which  can  be  analyzed  in  the  light  of 
the  United  Nations  Charter;  second,  there  are  the 
authoritative  declarations  of  the  President  and  of 
the  Secretary  of  State  concerning  our  policy  and 
our  intentions;  third,  there  is  an  area  which  is 
necessarily  more  speculative — it  involves  an  analy- 
sis and  appreciation  of  the  world  situation  and  of 

'  An  address  delivered  before  the  Academy  of  Political 
Science  in  New  York,  N.Y.,  on  Apr.  7,  10-19,  and  released 
to  the  press  on  the  same  date. 

'  For  text  of  the  treaty,  see  Bm.r.ETiN  of  aiar.  20,  1949, 
p.  339 ;  also  printed  as  Department  of  State  publication 
3464. 

486 


the  operations  of  the  United  Nations  and  of  the 
way  in  which  the  North  Atlantic  pact  will  be 
utilized.  Speculation,  at  least  in  public,  is  not 
generally  considered  to  be  good  diplomatic  prac- 
tice, but  I  shall  venture  a  short  distance  into  that 
field. 

One  can  deal  briefly  with  the  analysis  of  the 
text  of  the  treaty,  since  the  essential  points  have 
already  been  made  abundantly  clear  in  various 
official  statements. 

In  the  first  place,  the  preamble  begins  with  a  re- 
affirmation of  faith  in  the  purposes  and  principles 
of  the  Charter  of  the  United  Nations. 

In  the  second  place,  article  1  is  a  restatement  of 
the  specific  principles  stated  in  paragraphs  3  and 
■I  of  article  2  of  the  Charter.  Using  the  language 
of  the  Charter,  the  parties  agree  to  settle  their  in- 
ternational disputes  by  peaceful  means.  This 
statement  is  not  confined  to  disputes  among  the 
parties  to  the  treaty;  it  includes  disputes  between 
parties  to  the  ti'eaty  and  states  wliich  are  not 
parties.  Even  more  important,  this  article  1  uses 
tlie  language  of  paragraph  4  of  article  2  to  pledge 
the  parties  again  to  "refrain  in  their  interna- 
tional relations  from  the  threat  or  use  of  force  . .  . 
in  any  .  .  .  manner  inconsistent  with  the  Purposes 
of  tlie  United  Nations."  Nothing  could  be  more 
explicit  in  declaring  the  defensive  and  nonhostile 
purposes  of  this  treat}-. 

In  the  third  place,  article  5,  which  might  be  de- 
scribed as  tlie  operative  article,  calling  for  joint 
action  in  self-defense  in  case  of  an  armed  attack, 
expressly  cites  and  is  based  upon  article  51  of  the 
Charter.  It  includes  that  provision  in  51  which 
requires  states  acting  in  self-defense  to  report 
immediately  any  measures  which  they  may  be 
forced  to  take  to  the  Security  Council.  It  states 
also  the  obligation  under  this  same  article  to  ter- 
minate any  such  measures  when  the  Security  Coun- 
cil has  acted. 

In  the  fourth  place,  article  7  reaffirms  the  prin- 
ciple contained  in  article  10:3  of  the  Charter.  That 
article  of  the  Cliarter  says  that  if  there  is  a  conflict 
between  the  obligations  of  members  under  the 
Charter  and  their  obligations  under  any  other  in- 
ternational agreement,  the  Charter  obligations 
shall  prevail.  This  is  what  article  7  provides. 
Tliis  provision  is  reinforced  by  article  8,  wherein 
the  parties  declare  that  none  of  their  existing  in- 
ternational engagements — which  include  their  en- 
gagements under  the  Charter — is  in  conflict  with 
the  provision  of  this  treaty. 

Department  of  Slate   Bulletin 


In  the  fifth  place,  article  12  of  the  pact,  which 
provides  for  possible  review  of  tlie  treaty  after 
ten  years,  specifically  says  that  any  such  review 
shall  take  into  account  "the  development  of  uni- 
versal as  well  as  regional  arrangements  under  the 
Charter  of  the  United  Nations  for  the  maintenance 
of  international  peace  and  security."  This  is  a 
recognition  of  the  desire  of  the  parties  to  look 
forward  to  tlie  day  when  a  universal  security  sys- 
tem as  originally  envisaged  in  the  Cliarter  will 
materialize  and  provide  the  sense  of  security  which 
is  essential  to  the  maintenance  of  international 
peace. 

So  far  as  official  statements  are  concerned,  there 
has  been  not  one  iota  of  quibbling  or  evasion.  Let 
me  remind  you  that  in  his  inaugural  address,  on 
January  20,  the  President  announced  the  plans 
for  concluding  this  North  Atlantic  Treaty.  He 
therefore  had  it  in  the  forefront  of  his  mind  when 
he  stated  the  first  point  of  his  four-point  program, 
in  which  tlie  objectives  of  the  United  States  for 
tlie  promotion  of  peace  and  freedom  wei'e  outlined. 
Tliat  first  point  was : 

"We  will  continue  to  give  unfaltering  support 
to  the  United  Nations  and  related  agencies,  and 
we  will  continue  to  search  for  ways  to  strengthen 
tlieir  authority  and  increase  their  effectiveness." 

When  the  North  Atlantic  pact  was  signed  in 
Washington  on  April  4,  the  President  reiterated 
this  policy.     He  said : 

The  nations  represented  here  have  known  the  tragedy 
of  those  two  wars.  As  a  result,  many  of  us  took  part  in 
the  founding  of  the  United  Nations.  Each  member  of 
the  United  Nations  is  under  a  solemn  obligation  to  main- 
tain international  peace  and  security.  Each  is  bound 
to  settle  international  disputes  by  peaceful  means,  to 
refrain  from  the  threat  or  use  of  force  against  the 
territory  or  independence  of  any  country,  and  to  support 
the  United  Nations  in  any  action  it  takes  to  preserve  the 
peace. 

That  solemn  pledge — that  abiding  obligation — we  re- 
affirm here  today. 

We  rededicate  ourselves  to  that  obligation,  and  pro- 
pose this  North  Atlantic  Treaty  as  one  of  the  means 
to  carry  it  out. 

Through  this  treaty  we  undertake  to  conduct  our  in- 
ternational affairs  in  accordance  with  the  provisions  of 
the  United  Nations  Charter.  We  undertake  to  exercise 
our  right  of  collective  or  individual  self-defense  against 
armed  attack,  in  accordance  with  article  .51  of  the  Charter, 
and  subject  to  such  measures  as  the  Security  Council 
may  take  to  maintain  and  restore  international  peace 
and  security. 

I  think  it  would  overweight  the  record  to  cite 
to  you  every  other  authoritative  official  pronounce- 
ment on  this  subject.  I  confine  myself  tlierefore 
to  reminding  you  wliat  the  Secretary  of  State  said 
on  March  IS  over  the  radio,  when  the  text  of  the 
pact  had  just  been  released : 

The  Atlantic  pact  is  a  collective  self-defense  arrange- 
ment among  the  countries  of  the  North  Atlantic  area.  It 
is  aimed  at  coordinating  the  exercise  of  the  right  of 
self-defense  specifically  recognized  in  article  51  of  the 
United  Nations  Charter.  It  is  designed  to  fit  precisely 
into  the  framework  of  the  United  Nations  and  to  assure 
practical  measures  for  maintaining  peace  and  security 
in  liarmony  with  the  Charter. 

April   17,   J  949 


It  is  the  firm  Intention  of  the  parties  to  carry  out  the 
pact  in  accordance  with  the  provisions  of  the  United 
Nations  Charter  and  in  a  manner  which  will  advance 
its  purposes  and  principles. 

Now  some  say  that  while  this  record  proves  that 
the  President  and  the  Secretary  of  State  intend 
to  strengthen  rather  than  weaken  the  United  Na- 
tions by  the  conclusion  of  the  North  Atlantic  pact, 
it  does  not  prove  that  the  pact  will  actually  have 
that  effect.  That  is  a  natural  and  proper  com- 
ment. That  is,  fortunately,  part  of  our  demo- 
cratic process  of  popular  discussion  of  great  pub- 
lic issues.  I  think  we  should  therefore  analyze 
the  probable  results  of  the  pact  in  the  light  of  its 
possible  influence  upon  the  United  Nations.  We 
should  do  this,  as  I  have  said,  even  though  it 
leads  us  into  the  field  of  speculation. 

The  question  whether  the  pact  will  weaken  the 
United  Nations  cannot  be  separated  from  the 
question  whether  the  pact  contributes  to  the  main- 
tenance of  peace.  Let  us  plumb  this  problem  by 
asking  the  question  :  "Would  any  state  not  a  party 
to  the  pact  be  justified  in  feeling  that  the  conclu- 
sion of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  constitutes  a 
threat  to  its  peace  and  security?"  I  believe  it 
would  not.  It  is  clear  from  the  text  of  articles  4, 
5,  and  6  of  the  treaty  that  its  provisions  are  not 
to  be  brought  into  play  unless  there  is  a  threat 
to  the  territorial  integrity  or  political  independ- 
ence or  security  of  one  of  the  parties  or  unless 
there  is  an  armed  attack  in  the  areas  defined  by 
article  6.  In  other  words,  the  treaty  does  not  come 
into  play  unless  there  is  a  violation  of  article  2, 
paragraph  4  of  the  Charter.  These  points  em- 
phasize the  fact  which  the  Secretary  of  State  has 
made  abundantly  clear ;  namely,  that  the  Atlantic 
pact  is  defensive  and  not  offensive. 

Now  article  51  of  the  Charter  justifies  action  in 
self-defense  only  in  the  case  of  an  armed  attack. 
The  whole  theory  of  that  article  is  that  force  can- 
not be  used  as  an  instrument  of  national  policy  on 
the  individual  determination  by  a  single  state 
that  its  interests  would  be  advanced  by  the  use 
of  force. 

There  is  nothing  in  the  pact  to  call  for  or  justify 
the  use  of  force  against  any  other  state  which 
loyally  complies  with  the  Charter  of  the  United 
Nations.  It  has  been  made  abundantly  clear  that 
the  treaty  has  not  been  concluded  for  the  purpose 
of  justifying  or  provoking  war  but  rather  for  the 
purpose  of  making  war  much  less  likely.  No  gov- 
ernment of  a  state  not  a  party  to  the  treaty  can 
say  that  this  treaty  is  directed  against  it  unless 
that  government  is  prepared  to  put  on  the  cap 
which  marks  it  as  having  aggressive  intentions 
against  one  or  more  parties  to  the  treaty. 

For  the  very  reason  that  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty  is  subject  to  and  in  accordance  with  the 
Charter  of  the  United  Nations,  it  cannot  constitute 
a  threat  to  any  other  state  wliose  policies  and 
actions  are  also  in  conformity  with  and  subject  to 
that  same  Charter. 


It  would  be  less  than  frank,  however,  to  avoid 
stating  the  fact  that  the  conclusion  of  this  treaty 
has  resulted  from  the  fears  which  the  policy  of 
the  Soviet  Union  has  created.  This  situation  was 
made  crystal  clear  by  Mr.  Spaak,  the  Belgian 
Prime  Minister,  at  the  Paris  session  of  the  General 
Assembly.  He  was  replying  to  Mr.  Vyshinsky, 
the  chief  Soviet  spokesman,  who  had  made  it 
perfectly  plain  that  his  co\intry  was  not  going 
to  cooperate  in  solving  any  of  the  agenda  problems 
before  the  Assembly.    Mr,  Spaak  said : 

I  must  answer  you.  I  think  I  am  the  one  to  do  It, 
because  no  one  could  consider  that  Belgium  is  trying  to 
be  provocative  asainst  the  Soviet  Union.  We  are  afraid 
because  by  your  conduct  you  have  rendered  this  organiza- 
tion ineffective.  We  are  afraid  because  the  probL^ras 
before  this  Assembly  have  remained  unsolved;  because 
even  when  a  solution  is  proposed  by  a  majority  of  the 
United  Nations  you  have  refused  to  adhere  to  this  solu- 
tion. We  are  afraid  because  we  have  placed  all  our 
hopes  and  confidence  in  the  defensive  organization  of  the 
United  Nations;  and  through  the  policy  you  have  pur- 
sued, you  are  forbidding  us  to  seek  our  security  and  our 
salvation  within  the  framework  of  this  organization,  but 
making  us  seek  it  within  the  framework  of  a  regional 
arrangement.  We  are  afraid  of  you  because,  in  every 
country  represented  here,  you  are  maintaining  a  fifth 
column,  beside  which  the  Hitlerite  fifth  column  is  nothing 
but  a  boy  scout  organization,  if  I  might  say  so.  There 
is  not  a  single  spot  in  the  world,  whether  in  Asia,  whether 
in  Europe,  or  whether  in  Africa,  where  a  government 
represented  here  fails  to  find  difficulties  and  these  diffi- 
culties are  being  still  further  aggravated  by  you  .  .  . 

Since  iMr.  Spaak  made  this  lucid  statement,  the 
recent  series  of  declarations  by  Communist  lead- 
ers in  a  number  of  countries  to  the  effect  that  their 
first  loyalty  was  to  the  Soviet  Union  and  not  the 
countries  of  their  ostensible  allegiance  has  done 
nothing  to  allay  these  fears.  "While  that  sense  of 
insecurity  pervades  the  world,  the  United  Nations 
cannot  flourish  and  develop  as  it  should.  Here 
we  go  round  the  circle,  because  the  United  Nations 
itself  cannot  remove  the  sense  of  insecurity  until 
it  has  reached  a  full  stage  of  development  based 
primarily  on  the  cooperation  of  all  the  permanent 
members  of  the  Security  Council. 

At  this  present  juncture  of  world  affairs,  there 
are  two  principal  ways  in  which  the  sense  of  in- 
security can  be  removed,  given  the  nature  of  those 
fears  aiid  the  source  from  which  they  spring.  One 
way,  and  the  way  most  to  be  desired,  is  a  change 
in  the  policy  of  the  Soviet  Government. 

I  shall  comment  on  only  one  of  the  changes  in 
the  policy  of  the  Soviet  (Jovernment  which  would 
contribute  to  a  world-wide  sense  of  security.  I 
refer  to  the  question  which  Mr.  Spaak  mentioned, 
tlie  question  of  cooperation  in  the  United  Na- 
tions to  strengtiien  the  United  Nations.  It  some- 
times seems  to  be  assumed  that  it  is  the  Soviet 
Union  which  is  cooperating  with  the  United  Na- 
tions and  that  it  is  the  United  States,  which,  in 
entering  into  this  North  Atlantic  Treaty,  is  re- 
fusing to  cooperate.  As  a  great  Governor  of  this 
State  used  to  say,  "Let's  look  at  the  record". 

There  are  thirteen  specialized  agencies  of  the 
United  Nations.    The  Soviet  Union  belongs  to 


only  two  of  them.  Recently  it  gave  notice  of 
withdrawal  from  the  World  Health  Organization. 
The  United  States  belongs  to  all  thirteen  special- 
ized agencies. 

The  General  Assembly  established  in  1947  an 
Interim  Committee,  frequently  called  the  '"Little 
Assembly."  It  was  alleged  that  this  body  was 
designed  to  bypass  the  Security  Council.  Its  rec- 
ord reveals  no  such  desire  or  intent.  The  Interim 
Committee  is  engaged  in  studying  the  improve- 
ment of  methods  for  the  pacific  settlement  of 
international  disputes.  Should  not  all  members 
of  the  United  Nations  contribute  to  that  task? 
The  Interim  Committee  studied  the  problem  of 
voting  in  tlie  Security  Council  tlie  use  of  the  veto. 
There  may  well  be  differences  of  opinion  concern- 
ing the  desirability  of  limiting  the  use  of  the  veto 
in  particular  cases.  Surely  the  way,  the  United 
Nations  way,  to  reconcile  differences  of  opinion 
so  far  as  possible,  is  through  discussion  in  the 
organ  of  the  United  Nations,  which  has  the  matter 
under  consideration.  The  Soviet  Union  has  never 
taken  its  seat  in  the  Interim  Committee,  but  it  can 
do  so  whenever  it  is  willing  to  cooperate  in  this 
part  of  the  joint  endeavor  for  peace.  The  United 
States  has  actively  cooperated  in  all  phases  of  the 
work  of  this  Committee. 

The  Interim  Committee  also  has  the  function  of 
guiding  certain  United  Nations  commissions  when 
the  General  Assembly  is  not  in  session,  specifically 
the  Korean  and  Balkan  commissions.  The  Soviet 
Union  has  not  cooperated  in  the  work  of  those 
commissions.     Tlie  United  States  has  cooperated. 

These  are  specific  points.  More  could  be  listed. 
More  could  be  said  about  the  many  other  Soviet 
attitudes  and  positions  which,  as  Mr.  Spaak  said, 
have  brought  about  the  conviction  that  the  Union 
of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics  is  not  cooperating 
with  and  through  the  United  Nations  to  make  the 
peace  secure.  None  but  the  Soviet  Government 
can  alter  the  existing  impression.  The  Soviet 
Government  can  begin  tomorrow  to  build  up  con- 
fidence where  it  has  already  built  up  fear.  I 
do  not  deny  that  it  will  need  to  overcome  great 
skepticism,  but  no  one  has  closed,  or  is  attempting 
to  close,  the  door  on  an  honest  attempt. 

It  is  impossible  to  overlook  the  fundamental 
cleavage  in  the  basic  theory  of  the  Soviet  Union 
on  the  one  hand  and  of  the  United  States  on  the 
other.  The  Soviet  Union  officially  stands  on  the 
proposition  that  war  is  inevitable. 

The  Soviet  Union  is  officially  committed  to  a 
philosophy  of  conflict,  which  is  alien  to  our  think- 
ing and  to  our  ideals.  Premier  Stalin  likes  to 
quote  the  following  passage  from  Lenin : 

We  live  .  .  .  not  only  in  a  state  but  In  a  system 
of  states,  and  the  existence  of  the  Soviet  Republic  side  by 
side  with  the  imperialist  states  for  a  long  time  is  un- 
thinkable. In  the  end  either  one  or  the  other  will 
conquer.  And  until  that  end  comes,  a  series  of  the  most 
terrible  collisions  between  the  Soviet  Republic  and  the 
bourgeois  states  is  inevitable. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


We  also  believe  that  we  live  in  a  system  of  states, 
but  from  this  premise  is  drawn  the  opposite  con- 
clusion. Our  conclusion  is  that  it  is  unthinkable 
that  the  members  of  that  system  of  states  should 
not  be  able  to  find  ways  to  live  in  peace  with  each 
other. 

As  the  President  said  in  his  speech  at  the  signing 
of  the  North  Atlantic  pact  on  April  4  : 

For  us,  war  is  not  inevitable.  We  do  not  believe  that 
there  are  blind  tides  of  history  which  sweep  men  one  way 
or  the  other.  In  our  own  time  we  have  seen  brave  men 
overcome  obstacles  that  seemed  insurmountable  and  forces 
that  seemed  overwhelming.  Men  with  courage  and  vision 
can  still  determine  their  own  destiny.  They  can  choose 
slavery  or  freedom — war  or  peace. 

I  have  no  doubt  which  they  will  choose.  The  Treaty 
we  are  signing  here  today  is  evidence  of  the  path  they  will 
follow. 

We  believe  in  the  capacity  of  the  human  mind 
and  spirit  to  bridge  the  deepest  chasms,  to  over- 
come the  most  formidable  obstacles.  The  conflict 
in  the  world  today  is  the  conflict  between  the 
Marxist  dogma  that  we  must  have  war  and  our 
Westei-n  faith  that  we  can  have  peace.  Tlaat  faith 
is  an  abiding  faith,  and  it  will  triumph. 

Obviously,  if  the  Soviet  Union  considers  that 
war  is  inevitable,  it  prepares  for  war.  So  long  as 
it  is  preparing  for  war  other  states  must  take  de- 
fensive precautions.  Since,  however,  we  in  the 
United  States  start  from  the  proposition  that  war 
is  not  inevitable,  we  do  not  proceed  on  the  theory 
that  a  preventive  war  must  be  initiated. 

Since  the  world  has  not  yet  received  convincing 
evidence  of  a  change  in  Soviet  policy,  the  way  in 
which  the  United  States  can  help  to  eliminate  or 
to  lessen  the  sense  of  insecurity  is  by  a  firm  and 
honest  declaration  of  purpose,  which  the  North 
Atlantic  Treaty  provides.  I  would  remind  you 
of  the  passage  in  the  President's  inaugural  address 
in  which  he  said : 

The  primary  purpose  of  these  agreements  is  to  provide 
unmistakable  proof  of  the  joint  determination  of  the  free 
countries  to  resist  armed  attack  from  any  quarter.  Each 
country  participating  in  these  arrangements  must  con- 
tribute all  it  can  to  the  common  defense. 

If  we  can  make  it  sufficiently  clear,  in  advance,  that 
any  armed  attack  affecting  our  national  security  would 
be  met  with  overwhelming  force,  the  armed  attack  might 
never  occur. 

One  also  sees  arguments  against  the  North 
Atlantic  pact  which  seem  to  reflect  the  fear  that 
the  conclusion  of  this  treaty  is  a  definitive  and  final 
espousal  of  the  theory  that  the  hope  for  a  universal 
peace  and  security  system  which  inspired  the 
drafting  of  the  Charter  in  1945  is  dead.  This 
is  not  the  case.  The  necessities  of  the  present 
require  the  conclusion  of  this  treaty,  but  it  is  by 
no  means  an  abandonment  of  the  aspiration  for  a 
universal  system.  This  point  was  made  clear  by 
Assistant  Secretary  Rusk  in  a  radio  broadcast 
on  March  20,  when  he  said  that  we  do  not  regard 
the  North  Atlantic  pact  "as  a  fully  satisfactory 
or  permanent  solution."  He  went  on  to  say  "We 
have  rejected  national  or  regional  isolationism." 

April    17,    7949 


He  pointed  to  the  fact,  and  it  is  a  fact,  that  the 
best  assurance  we  have  on  this  point  is  to  be  found 
"in  the  intentions  of  the  American  people.  They 
want  a  world-wide  security  system,  and  they  won't 
be  content  with  a  regional  system."  The  Govern- 
ment of  the  United  States  has  not  ceased,  and  will 
not  cease,  to  direct  its  policy  toward  the  develop- 
ment of  a  universal  system  for  international  peace 
and  security.  We  have  not  created  the  tensions 
which  make  this  defense  pact  necessary  at  this 
time.  We  devoutly  hope  that  it  will  never  be 
necessary  to  invoke  the  provisions  of  this  pact. 
But  we  would  not  be  discharging  our  responsi- 
bilities to  the  United  Nations  and  to  the  peoples 
of  the  world  if  at  this  juncture  we  did  not  make 
this  clear  declaration  concerning  the  steps  we  are 
prepared  to  take  in  conformity  with  the  Charter, 
should  the  need  arise. 

Now  it  is  also  argued  that  article  9  of  the  North 
Atlantic  treaty  contains  a  threat  to  the  Security 
Council.  Article  9  provides  for  the  establishment 
of  a  council  composed  of  representatives  of  all 
of  the  parties.  People  ask  whether  we  intend 
to  divert  into  this  council  the  consideration  of 
international  problems  which  ought  to  be  dealt 
with  in  the  Security  Council  of  the  United  Nations. 

We  have  no  such  intention.  This  council,  es- 
tablished under  article  9,  is  "to  consider  matters 
concerning  the  implementation  of  this  Treaty." 
If  it  had  been  in  existence  during  the  past  years, 
it  would  not  have  been  used  to  settle  the  Palestine 
case,  or  the  Indonesian  case,  or  the  Kashmir  case. 
Since  the  Soviet  blockade  of  Berlin  was  a  threat 
to  the  peace  and  affected  the  area  covered  by  the 
treaty,  the  coiuicil  to  be  set  up  under  article  9 
might  have  given  preliminary  consideration  to 
that  question  from  the  point  of  view  of  the  po- 
tential threat  involved.  Such  consultations  would 
not  have  affected  the  jurisdiction  or  the  use  of  the 
Security  Council.  The  Security  Council  remains 
the  body  to  which  we  and  all  the  other  members 
of  the  United  Nations  have  entrusted  "primary  re- 
sponsibility for  the  maintenance  of  international 
peace  and  security  .  .  ."  That  is  what  is  stated 
in  article  24  of  the  Charter  and  article  7  of  the 
North  Atlantic  pact  says  specifically  that  this 
treaty  does  not  affect  that  responsibility. 

If  the  Soviet  Union  will  join  in  making  the 
Security  Council  an  effective  instrument  for  the 
discharge  of  its  responsibilities,  the  Security 
Council  and  the  United  Nations  itself  will  grow  in 
stature  and  in  influence.  Meanwhile,  its  growth 
can  be  stimulated  by  the  existence  of  such  agree- 
ments as  this  peace  pact  for  the  North  Atlantic 
community. 

It  is  worth  noting  that  the  criticisms  of  the 
North  Atlantic  pact  as  a  rival  to  the  United  Na- 
tions were  not  addressed  to  the  Rio  pact  of  1948. 
The  Rio  pact  had  a  very  similar  basis  in  terms  of 
a  regional  arrangement  relying  heavily  on  article 
51  of  the  Charter.  Perhaps  when  the  Rio  pact 
was  concluded  those  interested  in  the  United  Na- 
tions remembered  particularly  that  the  conclusion 


of  some  sucli  regional  arrangement  for  the  Amer- 
icas was  planned  at  the  Ciuipultepec  conference 
of  1945,  just  hefore  the  United  Nations  meeting  in 
San  P'rancisco.  The  probability  of  its  conclusion 
was  very  much  in  the  minds  of  those  who  framed 
the  Charter.  The  Rio  pact  therefore  seemed  to 
many  a  reasonable  development  in  no  way  in  cim- 
flict  witli  the  Charter.  I  suppose  the  reason  why 
many  people  have  not  taken  the  same  attitude  in 
regard  to  the  Atlantic  pact  is  that  they  are  in- 
fluenced more  by  the  political  than  by  basic  legal 
argimients.  They  might  well  agree  that  techni- 
cally the  Atlantic  pact  has  a  sound  legal  founda- 
tion but  they  are  worried  that,  because  of  the  vital 
political  relationship  of  the  North  Atlantic  states 
to  tlie  Soviet  Union,  this  new  pact  may  have  seri- 
ous world-wide  political  repercussions  which  did 
not  result  from  the  Rio  pact.  Perhaps  if  the 
North  Atlantic  Treaty  had  been  preceded  by  some 
other  regional  defense  arrangements,  it  would 
have  been  less  subject  to  this  criticism.  PerliajJS 
the  very  importance  of  this  agreement  among  this 
particular  group  of  states  is  what  causes  concern. 
It  would  be  a  mistake  to  underestimate  the  im- 
portance of  the  Rio  treaty,  just  as  it  would  be  a 
mistake  to  minimize  the  importance  of  the  North 
Atlantic  pact.  But  it  would  also  be  a  mistake  to 
assume  that  this  treaty  dealing  with  the  North 
Atlantic  area  endangers  the  United  Nations  any 
more  than  the  Rio  treaty  endangered  the  organi- 
zation. 

The  extremists  among  world-government  advo- 
cates run  greater  risks  of  endangering  the  future 
of  the  United  Nations.  In  their  position  is  found 
the  antithesis  to  the  approach  marked  by  the  At- 
lantic pact.  Those  responsible  for  the  pact  take 
the  first  practical  step  for  consolidating  peace  in 
a  crucial  area.  By  the  conclusion  of  tlie  treaty, 
they  enhance  a  solidarity  hitherto  embryonic.  In 
.so  doing  they  avowedly  and  in  fact  support  the 
United  Nations.  World-government  extremists, 
unhappy  over  the  defects  of  the  United  Nations, 
would  scrap  the  progress  which  it  marks  and 
begin  anew.  They  wish  to  buy  a  prefabricated 
home  made  all  in  one  piece.  They  do  not  wish 
to  bother  with  foundations  or  practical  little  de- 
tails like  septic  tanks  and  plumbing  and  water 
supply.  Happily  these  persons  are  not  represent- 
ative of  all  world-government  advocates.  Many 
of  them  advocate  building  on  the  existing  founda- 
tions, that  is  on  the  United  Nations.  Many  of 
them  arc  willing  to  take  their  coats  off  and  to  work 
on  jnitting  a  roof — or  at  least  a  tarpaulin — over 
our  heads.  Wliile  doing  so,  they  look  forward  to 
the  day  when  the  palace  of  all  our  dreams  will 
shelter  us. 

Such  an  attitude  is  a  worthy  reflection  of  our 
early  pioneering  spirit.  This  country  was  settled 
by  men  and  women  who  had  their  dreams  of  tlie 
future  but  did  not  let  those  dreams  interfere  with 
clearing  the  forest,  planting  the  corn,  and  main- 
taining their  necessary  defenses. 


We  may  l>e  at  the  crossroads  of  a  process  by 
which  through  such  arrangements  as  these,  tied 
securely  into  the  Cliarter,  a  decisive  and  unag- 
gressive preponderance  of  power  in  the  hands  of 
states  supporting  the  I'nited  Nations  can  be  es- 
tablished. It  must  be  our  hope  that  the  circle  of 
states  supporting  the  United  Nations  will  stead- 
ily broaden  until  it  becomes  universal. 


Resolution  on  Trade  Union  Rights: 
Freedom  of  Association 

I'.N.  doc.  E/1300 
Adopted  Mar.  17,  1949 

The  Economic  and  Social  Council 

Takes  xotk  of  General  Assembly  resolution  128 
(II)  concerning  trade  union  rights  (freedom  of 
a.ssociation)  and  international  machinery  for  their 
safeguarding; 

Ri:cALi,s  its  resolutions  52  (IV)  and  84  (V) ;  and 

Having  EXAsrixEo  the  note  from  the  Interna- 
tional Labour  Organisation  recording  the  deci- 
sions concerning  freedom  of  association  taken  by 
the  International  Labour  Conference  at  its  thirty- 
first  session  (document  E/'8G3)  ; 

OnsEn\'ES  the  action  taken  and  proposed  by  the 
International  Labour  Organisation  within  its 
recognized  competence,  in  particular  the  adoption, 
liy  tiie  International  Labour  Conference,  of  the 
Freedom  of  Association  and  the  Protection  of  the 
Ri"ht  to  Organize  Convention,  1948; 

FuKTiiER  NOTES  the  resolution  of  the  Interna- 
tional Labour  Conference  concerning  international 
machinery  for  safeguarding  freedom  of  associa- 
tion; 

/n.'ifnirfs  the  Secretary -General  to  enter  into 
consultation  with  Director-General  of  the  Ilo  for 
exploration  of  the  question  of  enforcement  of  trade 
union  rights  (freedom  of  association)  as  provided 
in  resolution  84  (V)  of  the  Council  and  to  study 
jointly  the  control  of  the  practical  application  of 
trade  union  rights  and  freedom  of  association  as 
provided  for  in  resolution  128  (II)  of  the  General 
Assembly ; 

licque.sts  the  Secretary-General  to  report  to  the 
Council  on  the  results  of  his  consultations,  with  a 
view  to  enabling  the  Council  to  give  the  matter 
further  consideration,  including  consideration  of 
the  (luestion  of  further  co-operation  with  the  Gov- 
erning Body  of  the  Ilo;  and 

Transmits  the  decisions  concerning  freedom  of 
association  taken  by  the  International  Labour  Con- 
ference at  its  thirty-first  session  to  the  Commission 
on  Human  Rights  in  order  that  it  may  consider 
the  contents  of  the  Freedom  of  Association  and  the 
I*rotection  of  the  Riglit  to  Organize  Convention. 
1948,  and  the  resolution  concerning  international 
machinery  for  safeguarding  freedom  of  associa- 
tion, when  drawing  up  for  submission  to  the 
Council  its  (inal  proposed  text  of  the  International 
Covenant  on  Ilunum  Rights  and  draft  articles  of 
implementation. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations 


International  Court  of  Justice 

The  International  Court  of  Justice  has  just 
handed  down  its  decision  that  Governments  may 
be  sued  for  injuries  caused  to  the  United  Nations 
or  its  agents  in  the  execution  of  U.N.  business. 

The  question  of  reparations  for  injuries  sus- 
tained in  U.N.  service  was  submitted  to  the  Court 
in  a  General  Assembly  resolution  prompted  by 
the  death  of  Count  Bernadotte  in  Palestine  and 
of  eleven  other  persons  on  U.N.  assignments.  The 
Court's  judgment  was  that  the  United  Nations 
exercises  and  enjoys  functions  and  rights  ex- 
plained on  the  basis  of  its  possession  of  a  large 
measure  of  international  personality  and  capacity 
to  operate  upon  an  international  plane.  The 
Court  unanimously  decided  that,  with  this  in- 
terpretation of  the  United  Nations  as  having  an 
international  personality,  it  is  entitled  to  main- 
tain its  rights  by  bringing  international  claims. 

The  United  States  was  among  those  countries 
submitting  written  observations. 

U.N.  Assistant  Secretai-y-General  Ivan  Kerno 
and  A.  H.  Feller,  Director' of  the  U.N.  Legal  De- 
partment, termed  the  Court's  decision  an  "historic 
landmark"  that  strengthens  the  legal  status  of  the 
United  Nations  under  international  law. 

Corfu  Channel  Case 

The  International  Court  of  Justice  has  ruled  by 
a  vote  of  11  to  5  that  Albania  is  responsible  under 
international  law  for  the  damage  and  loss  of  life 
which  resulted  when  two  British  destroyers  struck 
mines  in  the  Albanian  territorial  water's  of  the 
Corfu  Channel  in  October  1946.  The  Court  will 
decide  later  on  the  amount  for  damages  to  be  paid 
by  Albania. 

The  issues  in  this  long-debated  case  were  con- 
sidered by  a  committee  of  the  Security  Council, 
but  were  never  resolved.  The  disputing  nations 
then  agreed  last  year  to  abide  by  whatever  deci- 
sion the  Court  would  give,  though  Albania  is  not 
a  member  of  the  United  Nations.  The  Court  con- 
cluded that  the  mines  could  not  have  been  laid 
without  the  knowledge  of  Albania  and  that  it  was 
her  duty  to  warn  ships  of  the  danger  in  passing 
through  the  channel.  The  Court  also  ruled  thati 
Britain  did  not  violate  the  sovereignty  of  Albania 
"by  reason  of  the  acts  of  the  British  Navy  in  Al- 
bania waters"  in  this  case,  but  that  such  sovereignty 
was  violated  the  next  month  when  Britain  sent 
minesweepers  into  the  channel.  The  tribunal 
stated,  however,  that  the  declaration  of  the  Court 
concerning  this  gives  appropriate  satisfaction  for 
that  offense. 


U.N.  Guard 

The  Ad  Hoc  Political  Committee  of  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  adopted  a  Philippine  resolution  on 
April  11  to  refer  the  Secretary-General's  proposal 
for  the  establishment  of  an  initial  U.N.  guard  force 
to  a  special  committee  for  study. 

This  proposal  recommends  a  force  of  800  men  to 
protect  U.N.  missions  in  scattered  parts  of  the 
world.  In  introducing  the  proposal  on  behalf  of 
the  Secretary-General,  Mr.  Feller  of  the  U.N. 
Legal  Department  said  that  these  men  would  be 
members  of  the  Secretariat  and  recruited  on  an 
international  basis,  in  accordance  with  articles 
100  and  101  of  the  Charter.  They  would  not  be  a 
military  force  and  their  arms  would  be  limited  to 
personal  emergency  defense  weapons.  In  every 
case  the  functions  would  be  exercised  in  accord- 
ance with  the  Charter. 

The  Soviet  Delegate  Malik  expressed  strong 
opposition,  terming  the  proposal  a  "contribution 
to  practical  implementation  of  the  expansionist 
policy  of  some  powers"  aimed  at  "using  the  U.N. 
for  their  own  selfish  purposes."  Benjamin  Cohen, 
U.S.  Delegate,  in  supporting  the  Philij^pine  reso- 
lution emphasized  that  the  special  committee 
should  be  free  to  consider  the  problem  of  creation 
of  a  U.N.  guard  in  all  its  aspects.  He  rejected 
Soviet  allegations  of  ulterior  motives  on  the  part 
of  countries  favoring  the  Secretary-General's 
plan. 

The  report  of  the  special  committee  on  the  U.N. 
guard  force  will  be  considered  at  the  fourth  regu- 
lar session  of  the  General  Assembly. 

Voting  in  the  Security  Council 

The  General  Assembly  in  ])lenary  session  on 
April  li  adopted  a  resolution  which  provides  for  a 
policy  of  gradual  liberalization  of  the  voting  pro- 
cedures of  the  Security  Council.  Forty-six  coun- 
tries supported  the  resolution,  the  six  countries 
of  the  Slav  bloc  opposed  it,  and  two  countries 
abstained. 

The  proposal  drawn  up  last  year  by  the  Ad  Hoc 
Political  Committee  of  the  General  Assembly 
where  it  was  sponsored  by  four  permanent  mem- 
bers of  the  Security  Council — China,  the  United 
Kingdom,  the  United  States,  and  France.  It  was 
based  largely  on  a  study  of  the  question  by  the  In- 
terim Committee.  The  resolution  recommends 
restriction  of  the  use  of  the  veto  on  34  types  of  deci- 
sions which  are  considei-ed  procedural.  It  also 
recommends  that  the  major  powers  agi-ee  volun- 
tarily among  themselves  to  restrict  the  veto  on 
certain  substantive  matters,  particularly  those  in- 
volving the  admission  of  new  members  and  the 
pacific  settlement  of  disputes. 


April    17,    1949 


Warren  R.  Austin  strongly  recommended  adop- 
tion of  the  resolution,  stating  that  if  the  members 
of  the  United  Nations  would  cooperate  in  carry- 
ing out  the  recommendations,  he  believed  there 
would  be  substantial  improvement  in  the  effective- 
ness of  the  Security  Council's  operations. 

Korea 

A  Chinese  resolution  to  admit  the  Republic  of 
Korea  to  the  United  Nations  was  defeated  by  the 
U.S.S.R.  in  the  Security  Council  on  April  8  when 
it  cast  its  30th  veto.  The  Republic  of  Korea  rep- 
resents the  8th  country  barred  from  the  T'nited 
Nations  by  Soviet  vetos.  During  the  debate  the 
Soviet  and  Ukrainian  delegates  renewed  their 
previous  charges  that  the  Republic  is  a  "puppet" 
regime. 

Ambassador  Austin  led  the  support  for  Korea's 
application,  pointing  out  that  Soviet  claims  and 
charges  had  Ix'en  overwhelmingly  rejected  by  the 
General  Assembly  last  December  in  Paris.  At 
that  time,  the  Assembly  recognized  the  govern- 
ment of  tlie  Republic  as  the  only  lawful  govern- 
ment in  Korea. 

Israeli  Membership 

The  application  of  Israel  for  membership  in  the 
United  Nations  was  admitted  to  the  General  As- 
sembly agenda  on  April  13  and  referred  to  the 
Political  Committees.  The  United  States  favored 
immediate  action  by  the  Assembly  as  recom- 
mended by  the  14-member  Steering  Committee, 
but  31  countries  voted  in  favor  of  a  Pakistani 
amendment  which  will  delay  final  action  until  the 
matter  is  reviewed  in  committee. 

Freedom  of  Information 

A  12-membcr  Subcommission  of  Fi'eedom  of 
Information  and  of  the  Press  has  been  appointed 
by  the  Commission  on  Human  Rights  from  27 
nominees  at  a  special  meeting  on  April  11.  The 
Economic  and  Social  Council  voted  in  March  to 
continue  through  1952  this  Subcommission  of  the 
Human  Rights  Commission  which  was  set  up  to 
study,  report,  and  make  recommendations  on 
means  of  promoting  freedom  of  information  and 
the  reduction  or  elimination  of  barriere  to  free 
flow  of  information  between  countries  with  par- 
ticular reference  to  news. 

MeanVvhile,  discussion  is  continuing  in  the  So- 
cial, Humanitarian  and  Cultural  Committe*  of 
the  General  Assembly  on  three  draft  conventions 
concerning  freedom  of  information  relating  to 
(1)  the  gathering  and  international  transmission 
of  news,  (2)  the  institution  of  an  international 
right  of  correction,  and  (3)  freedom  of  informa- 
tion. The  conventions  are  being  considered  ar- 
ticle by  article  and  tluis  far  members  have  agi-eed 
on  the  first  two  articles  of  the  convention  on  gath- 
ering and  international  transmission  of  news.  In- 
cluded in  the  first  article  is  an  agreed  definition  of 
"information  agency,"  "correspondent"  and 
"news   material."     The   second   article   provides 


that  "in  order  to  facilitate  the  freest  possible 
movement  of  correspondents  in  the  performance 
of  their  functions"  the  contracting  states  shall  ex- 
pedite travel  of  correspondents  within  their  terri- 
tories and  shall  not  impose  restrictions  which 
discriminate  against  such  correspondents. 

A  Polish  amenilment  was  rejected  which  would 
have  added  to  the  definition  of  "news  material"  a 
phrase  designed  to  restrict  news  that  might  pro- 
voke threats  to  the  peace.  U.  S.  Delegate  Erwin 
D.  Canham  told  the  committee  that  the  Polish 
amendment  would  give  governments  a  chance  to 
impose  news  censorship  and  set  in  motion  a  new 
jjower  "on  the  evil  path  of  misunderstanding"  be- 
tween nations  and  peoples. 

International  Law  Commission 

Tlie  newly  elected  lo-member  International 
Law  Commission  began  its  first  session  at  Lake 
Success  on  April  11  and  elected  Judge  Manley  O. 
Hudson  of  the  United  States  as  Chairman.  The 
members  of  this  Commission  were  elected  by  the 
General  Assembly  in  Paris,  the  Statute  of  the  ILC 
having  been  approved  by  the  Assembly  in  1947. 

The  Commission  agreed  without  objection  to 
begin  discussion  of  the  first  agenda  item,  jjlanning 
for  the  codification  of  international  law,  with  the 
understanding  that  this  would  include  genei-al 
discussion  of  the  Commission's  terms  and  plan  of 
work.  Other  items  on  the  agenda  concern  the 
rights  and  duties  of  states,  the  desirability  and 
feasibility  of  creating  an  international  judicial  or- 
gan for  the  punishment  of  genocide,  ways  and 
means  for  making  the  evidence  of  customary  in- 
ternational law  more  readily  available,  and  co- 
operation with  other  bodies  of  the  United  Nations 
and  other  national  and  international  organiza- 
tions. 

Indonesia 

Discussions  began  April  14  in  Batavia  between 
representatives  of  the  Netherlands  and  of  the  In- 
donesian Republic  imder  the  auspices  of  the  U.N. 
(Commission  for  Indonesia.  These  talks  were  pro- 
])osed  by  the  Commission  as  a  step  in  compliance 
with  the  Security  Council  communication  of 
March  23  calling  for  such  discussions.  Republican 
agreement  to  participate  was  conditioned  on  the 
understanding  that  the  initial  discussions  concern 
the  restoration  of  the  Republican  Government  at 
Jogjakarta,  as  called  for  earlier  by  the  Security 
Council. 

U.S.  representative  Merle  Cochran,  has  the 
rotating  chairmanship  this  week.  Dr.  J.  H.  Van 
Royen  heads  the  Netherlands  delegation  and  Dr. 
Mdhainnu'd  Roeni.  the  Republican. 

World  Health  Organization 

Honduras  became  the  61st  member  of  the  World 
Healtli  Organization  by  depositing  the  instrument 
of  ratification  with  the  United  Nations  at  Lake 
Success.  Honduras  is  the  13th  of  the  American 
republics  belonging  to  the  Who. 

Depatfment  of  State   Bulletin 


THE  RECORD  OF  THE  WEEK 


Request  for  Military  Assistance  From  Atlantic  Pact  Countries  ^ 


Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson 

The  Department  of  State  on  April  8  released 
copies  of  communications  exchanged  with  the 
Brussels  treaty  powers  and  with  Norway,  Den- 
mark, and  Italy  concerning  the  provision  by  the 
United  States  of  military  assistance  to  those 
countries.  Before  I  deal  specifically  with  these 
requests,  I  should  like  to  review  briefly  some  of 
the  considerations  which  have  led  the  executive 
branch  of  the  Government  to  decide  that  the  pro- 
vision of  arms  and  equipment  to  free  and  friendly 
nations  is  in  the  highest  interests  of  the  American 
people. 

It  is  now  clear  that  in  the  world  of  today  we  can 
no  longer  rely  on  our  geographic  position  to  pre- 
serve our  security  and  peace.  Our  security  and 
peace  necessarily  rest  in  the  combined  security  and 
peace  of  the  democratic  world.  Thus,  the  single 
purpose  of  our  foreign  policy  has  been  to  make  a 
free  world  possible  and  more  secure.  The  foreign 
policy  which  this  Government  has  actively  pursued 
since  the  termination  of  World  War  II  has  had 
as  its  fundamental  objective  the  improvement  of 
the  security  of  the  American  people,  by  assisting 
in  bringing  about  conditions  which  will  make  for 
peace.  Our  policy  has  been  directed  towards 
preserving  free  institutions  and  nations,  to  enable 
them  to  pursue,  through  their  own  efforts,  the 
democratic  way  of  life,  from  which  we  have  bene- 
fited so  much.  To  this  end  we  embarked  upon  the 
European  Recovery  Program,  which  is  by  all  odds 
the  most  important  and  hopeful  application  of 
the  foreign  policy  I  have  described :  the  policy  of 
preserving  and  strengthening  the  environment  of 
freedom. 

To  the  same  end  of  preserving  peace  we  have, 
in  conjunction  with  certain  Western  European 
countries  and  Canada,  signed  the  Atlantic  pact. 
It  is  clear,  however,  that  the  restoration  of  politi- 
cal and  economic  health  in  Western  Europe,  so 
essential  to  our  peace  and  security,  requires  on  the 
part  of  the  peoples  of  that  area  a  confidence  in  the 
future,  a  sense  of  personal  security,  and  a  reason- 
able assurance  of  peace.  If  they  do  not  have  that 
confidence,  their  progress  towards  recovery  and 
the  establishment  of  self-supporting  sound  econ- 
omies for  strengthening  democratic  institutions 
will  be  handicapped. 

It  is  against  this  background  that  we  have  for 
several  montlis  been  developing  a  progi-am  of 
foreign  military  assistance.  That  program  is  be- 
ing planned  on  the  basis  of  information  as  to  the 

April   17,    1949 


urgent  military  needs  of  certain  of  the  Western 
European  nations  which  we  received  from  them 
informally  some  time  ago.  Substantially  review 
of  this  information  has  already  been  undertaken 
by  us.  The  formal  requests  do  not,  therefore, 
create  a  new  need  for  military  assistance ;  rather, 
they  serve  to  confirm  a  situation  of  which  we 
have  been  aware  and  to  establish  the  principles 
upon  which  the  use  of  our  assistance  can  be  based. 
The  requests  for  military  assistance  nov7  for- 
malized by  this  exchange  of  notes  are  predicated 
upon  an  urgent  need  for  improvement  in  the  de- 
fensive capabilities  of  the  countries  requiring  such 
assistance,  thereby  discouraging  aggression 
against  them.  The  military  assistance  program, 
like  the  Atlantic  pact,  is  part  of  a  policy  which 
is  entirely  defensive  in  its  scope.  It  could  not 
be  otherwise.  Aggression  is  contrary  to  the  basic 
traditions,  instincts,  and  fundamental  policies  of 
the  nations  involved.  There  can  be  no  doubt  that 
the  Atlantic  pact  countries  have  much  to  lose  and 
nothing  to  gain  fi-om  war.  By  the  very  fact  of 
our  democratic  systems  of  govermnent,  we  can 
never  conspire  to  undertake  aggressive  action. 
The  public  discussions  in  this  country  and  abroad 
which  will  take  place  concerning  the  North  At- 
lantic pact  and  the  proposed  military  assistance 
program  are  clear  guarantees  that  we  are  not  pre- 
paring for  an  aggressive  war. 

The  requests  come  from  certain  of  the  nations 
who  have  this  week  joined  with  us  in  signing  the 
North  Atlantic  pact.  It  is  important  to  note, 
however,  that  the  requests  are  not  a  produrt  of 
the  pact — an  instrument  which  is  not  yet  m  effect. 
Thus,  even  without  the  existence  of  the  North  At- 
lantic pact,  the  need  for  assistance  and  the  recom- 
mended response  of  this  Government  would  be 
the  same  I  need  only  refer  to  the  address  to 
Congi-ess  on  March  17,  1948,  by  the  President  of 
the  United  States,  when  he  stated  in  referring  to 
the  conclusion  of  the  Brussels  treaty :  "I  am  sure 
that  the  determination  of  the  free  countries  of 
Europe  to  protect  themselves  will  be  matched  by 
an  equal  determination  on  our  part  to  help  them 
to  do  so."  In  his  inaugural  address  this  year  the 
President  stated  as  a  part  of  his  program  that 
".  .  .  we  will  provide  military  advice  and  equip- 
ment to  free  nations  which  will  cooperate  with 
us  in  the  maintenance  of  peace  and  security." 

These  requests  and  our  replies  therefore  in  no 
sense  represent  a  price  tag  to  be  placed  upon  the 

"  Released  to  the  press  Apr.  8, 1949. 


pact.  At  the  .same  time,  by  stressing  the  willing- 
ness of  each  requesting  nation  to  do  what  it  can 
to  help  itself  and  each  other  in  the  common  cau.se, 
they  are  consistent  with  the  spirit  of  the  pact. 
Our  decision  to  provide  assistance  will  represent 
a  careful,  honest  judgment  of  an  effective  means 
by  which  we  can  contribute  to  the  collective  de- 
fense of  the  North  Atlantic  area.  This  progi'am 
will  thus  become  a  powerful  factor  in  assuring 
success  for  the  aims  of  the  pact.  As  the  countries 
of  Western  Europe  develop  their  strength  to  resist 
aggression,  they  will  become  better  able  to  con- 
tribute not  only  to  the  peace  and  security  of  the 
Xorth  Atlantic  area,  but  to  the  peace  and  security 
of  the  world. 

Let  us  now  review  briefly  the  terms  of  the  re- 
quests. They  all  emphasize  certain  basic  prin- 
ciples of  vital  importance  in  assuring  the  United 
States  that  our  assistance  will  yield  maximum 
benefits  to  us  as  well  as  to  the  recipients.  They 
all  recognize  that  economic  recovery  must  be  given 
first  priority ;  they  all  recognize  in  clear  terms  that 
each  country  must  imdertake  to  do  what  it  can 
to  help  itself  and  help  the  other  parties  of  the  pact ; 
they  all  recognize  the  importance  of  building  up 
at  this  time  a  modest  progi-am  of  arms  product  ion, 
over  and  above  what  had  been  contemplated  in 
their  budgets  for  this  year,  so  undertaken  as  not 
to  impede  the  progress  of  the  Economic  Recovery 
Progr-am. 

Of  particular  significance  is  the  fact  that  these 
principles  have  been  put  into  actual  woi'king  opera- 
tion by  the  five  Western  Union  countries.  Their 
coordinated  request  is  the  result  of  careful  ex- 
amination, as  a  group,  of  what,  as  a  group,  they 
can  do  for  themselves.  Their  coordinated  answer 
augurs  well  for  the  future  successful  establishment 
of  a  cooperative  common  defense  program  for  the 
Xorth  Atlantic  area. 

While  the  assistance  to  the  North  Atlantic  pact 
countries  will  constitute  the  larger  part  of  our  as- 
sistance program,  the  proposed  program  does  call 
for  some  assistance  to  other  areas.  This  will  in- 
clude assistance  to  areas  to  which  we  have  already 
undertaken  commitments,  such  as  our  military  as- 
sistance program  to  Greece  and  Turkey. 

I  cannot  at  this  time  give  a  figure,  a  range  of 
figures,  or  an  informed  guess,  of  what  the  cost  of 
the  program  will  be  for  either  the  North  Atlantic 
pact  countries  or  for  other  areas.  That  matter  is 
now  being  consideied  jointly  with  the  Bureau  of 
the  Budget  and  will  be  submitted  to  the  President. 
When  the  President  has  made  his  review  I  will 
then  be  in  a  position  to  make  the  figure  known  to 
the  Congress  and  the  people  of  the  United  States. 


'  Pre.sontcd  to  the  Dep.irtment  of  State  by  the  Liixeni- 
bouFK  Minister,  Hu?ues  Le  Gallais.  as  ropresontative  of 
his  Foreipn  Mini.ster,  Joseph  I'ccli.  Cliaiiiiian  of  llic  Con- 
sultative ComniittPe  of  the  Brussels  Treaty  Powers.  The 
ComniittPe  consists  of  the  five  Forcifin  Ministers. 


Exchange  of  Communications  Between  the  Brussels 
Treaty  Powers  and  the  United  States 

Rtqutit  from  Brusaela  Treaty  Powers  to  the 
United  States  Government  for  Military  Assist- 
ance ' 

April  5,  19 1(9 

1.  Since  the  signature  of  the  Brussels  Treaty 
the  five  Governments  [United  Kingdom,  France, 
Belgium,  the  Netherlands,  Luxembourg]  have  had 
under  consideration  a  common  defence  pro- 
gi-amme.  Convinced  of  the  necessity  for  such  a 
programme,  they  believe  that  its  formulation  and 
application  must  be  based  on  entire  solidarity  be- 
tween them.  They  have  reached  the  conclusion 
that  if  this  defence  programme  is  to  be  effective 
the  material  assistance  of  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment is  essential.  The  principles  on  which  the 
programme  should  be  based  are  set  out  in  the  fol- 
lowing paragraphs. 

2.  The  main  principles  would  be  self-help,  mu- 
tual aid,  and  common  action  in  defence  against  an 
armed  attack.  The  immediate  objective  is  the 
achievement  of  arrangements  for  collective  self- 
defence  between  the  Brussels  Treaty  Powers 
within  the  terms  of  the  Charter  of  the  United 
Nations.  The  programme  would  be  considered 
as  a  further  step  in  the  development  of  Western 
European  security  in  the  spirit  of  the  statement 
made  by  President  Truman  to  Congress  on  March 
17.  11)48,  the  day  of  the  signature  of  the  Brussels 
Treat}'.  It  would  be  in  accordance  with  the  gen- 
eral objective  of  Article  Z  of  the  North  Atlantic 
Pact,  and  would  result  in  each  Party,  consistent 
with  its  situation  and  resources,  contributing  in 
the  most  effective  form  such  mutual  aid  as  could 
reasonably  be  expected  of  it.  It  would  also  be  in 
accordance  with  the  principles  expressed  in  the 
Resolution  of  the  Senate  of  the  United  States  of 
June  11,1948. 

3.  The  military  strength  of  the  participating 
Powers  should  be  developed  without  endangering 
economic  recovery  and  the  attainment  of  economic 
viability,  which  should  accordingly  have  priority. 

4.  In  apjilying  these  general  principles  of  a 
common  defence  programme  the  signatories  of  the 
Brussels  Treaty  attach  importance  to  the  follow- 
ing points: 

A.  The  armed  forces  of  the  European  partici- 
pating countries  should  be  developed  on  a  co- 
ordinated basis  in  order  that  in  the  event  of  aggres- 
sion they  can  operate  in  accordance  with  a  common 
strategic  plan. 

B.  The)'  should  be  integrated  so  as  to  give 
the  maximum  efficiency  with  the  minimum  neces- 
sary expenditure  of  manpower,  money,  and 
materials. 

C.  Increased  military  effort,  including  in- 
creased arms  production,  should  be  consistent  with 
economic  objectives  and  the  maintenance  of 
economic   viability.      Additional    local    currency 


494 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


costs  should  be  met  from  non-inflationary  sources. 
D.  Arrangements  concerning  the  transfer  of 
military  equipment  and  supplies  for  such  produc- 
tion among  the  European  participating  countries 
should  permit  transfer,  in  so  far  as  possible,  with- 
out regard  to  foreign  exchange  problems  and  with- 
out clisrupting  the  intra-European  payment 
scheme. 

5.  In  order  to  carry  out  a  common  defence  pro- 
gramme on  the  basis  of  the  above  principles,  there 
IS  urgent  need  for  United  States  material  and 
financial  assistance.  The  Signatories  of  the  Brus- 
sels Treaty  will  therefore  be  glad  to  learn  whether 
the  United  States  Government  is  prepared  to  pro- 
vide this  assistance  to  them. 

6.  In  the  event  of  a  favourable  reply  in  relation 
to  tlie  above  request,  a  detailed  statement  of  the 
specific  needs  of  the  signatories  of  the  Brussels 
Treaty  for  the  year  1949/1950  will  be  transmitted 
to  the  United  States  Government  at  the  earliest 
possible  date. 


Reply  of  the  United  States  Government  to  the 
'•"Request  from  the  Brussels  Treaty  Poioers  to 
the  United  States  Government  for  Military 
Assistance^''  dated  April  5, 19^9  ^ 

April  6, 1949 

1.  The  Government  of  the  United  States  refers 
to  the  memorandum  dated  April  5,  1919  from  the 
Brussels  Treaty  Powers,  which  inquires  whether 
the  United  States  will  provide  military  assistance 
in  the  form  of  military  equipment  and  financial 
aid  to  tlie  Brussels  Treaty  Powers  and  which  sets 
forth  the  principles  on  which  such  request  is  made. 

2.  The  Executive  Brancli  of  the  United  States 
Government  is  prepared  to  recommend  to  the 
United  States  Congress  that  the  United  States 
provide  military  assistance  to  countries  signatory 
to  the  Brussels  Treaty,  in  order  to  assist  them  to 
meet  the  materiel  requirements  of  their  defense 
program.  Such  assistance  would  be  extended  in 
recognition  of  the  principle  of  self-help  and  mutual 
aid  contained  in  the  Atlantic  Pact,  under  which 
Pact  members  will  extend  to  each  other  such  re- 
ciprocal assistance  as  each  country  can  reasonably 
be  expected  to  contribute,  consistent  with  its  geo- 
graphic location  and  resources,  and  in  the  form  in 
which  each  can  most  effectively  furnish  such  as- 
sistance. 

3.  It  will  be  requested  of  the  Congress  that  such 
assistance  be  in  the  form  of  military  equipment 
from  the  United  States  required  by  their  common 
defense  program  and  the  provision  of  some  finan- 
cial assistance  for  increased  military  efforts  on 
their  part  required  by  such  defense  program.  It 
will  be  understood  that  the  allocation  of  this  ma- 
teriel and  financial  assistance  will  be  effected  by 
common  agreement  between  the  Brussels  Treaty 
Powers  and  the  United  States. 

4.  The  United  States  Government  will  accord- 


ingly appreciate  receiving  as  soon  as  possible  the 
detailed  statement  of  the  specific  needs  of  the 
signatories  of  the  Brussels  Treaty  for  the  year 
1949-50  as  proposed  in  paragraph  (6)  of  the  re- 
quest from  the  Brussels  Treaty  Powers. 

Exchange  of  Communications  Between  the 
Governments  of  Denmark  and  the  U.  S. 

April  7, 19Jfi 

On  March  14th.  1949,  the  Danish  Foreign  Minis- 
ter submitted  to  the  Department  of  State  lists  of 
the  items  of  military  equipment  which  in  the 
opinion  of  the  Danish  Government  is  urgently 
needed  at  the  present  time  to  strengthen  its  ability 
to  defend  the  country  against  aggression. 

In  requesting  military  assistance  from  the 
United  States,  the  Danish  Government  realizes 
that  such  aid  by  the  United  States  would  be  ex- 
tended in  recognition  of  the  principle  of  self-help 
and  mutual  aid  contained  in  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty,  signed  in  Washington  on  April  4th,  1949, 
under  which  Treaty  members  will  extend  to  each 
other  such  reciprocal  assistance  as  each  can  reason- 
ably be  expected  to  contribute,  consistent  with  its 
geogi'aphic  location  and  resources,  and  in  the  form 
in  which  each  can  most  effectively  render  such 
assistance.  On  its  side,  the  Danish  Government 
is  ready  to  provide  to  members  of  the  North  Atlan- 
tic Treaty,  in  recognition  of  the  principle  of  self- 
help  and  mutual  aid  contained  in  the  Treaty,  such 
reciprocal  assistance  as  Denmark  can  reasonably 
be  expected  to  contribute,  consistent  with  its  geo- 
graphic location  and  resources  and  in  the  form  in 
which  it  can  most  effectively  render  such  assistance. 

Denmark  is  willing  to  increase  its  military  effort 
including  production  insofar  as  this  is  possible 
without  endangering  its  economic  recoverj'  and 
stability  which  shoidd  have  priority.  It  will,  how- 
ever, need  assistance  from  the  United  States  to 
help  it  meet  the  dollar  costs  involved  in  increased 
production. 

The  Danish  Government  hopes  that  the  United 
States  Government  will  be  prepared  to  extend 
military  aid  to  Denmark  in  accordance  with  the 
above  principles  and  would  greatly  appreciate  to 
learn  the  views  of  the  United  States  Government 
with  regard  to  the  scope  and  character  of  the  con- 
templated assistance. 


Ajml  7,  1949 

Keference  is  made  to  the  Memorandum  of  the 
Danish  Embassy  of  Api'il  7,  1949,  requesting  the 
views  of  the  United  States  Government  with  re- 
spect to  the  provision, of  militai'y  assistance  to  the 
Danish  Government. 

The  Executive  Branch  of  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment is  prepared  to  recommend  to  the  United 

■  Presented  to  the  Luxembourg  Minister,  Hugues  Le 
Gallais,  on  behalf  of  tlie  United  States  Government. 


April    17,    7949 


States  Conp^ress  that  the  United  States  provide 
military  assistance  to  the  Government  of  Dennuirk 
in  order  to  assist  it  to  meet  the  materiel  require- 
ments of  its  defense  program.  It  will  be  requested 
of  the  Congress  that  such  assistance  be  in  the  form 
of  military  equipment  from  the  United  States 
required  by  Denmark's  defense  program  and  the 
provision  of  some  financial  assistance  for  increased 
military  production  on  Denmark's  part  required 
by  its  defense  program.  Such  assistance  would 
be  extended  in  recognition  of  the  principle  of 
self-help  and  mutual  aid  contained  in  the  Atlantic 
Pact. 

It  is  understood  that  the  information  previously 
made  available  to  the  United  States  Government 
by  the  Government  of  Denmark  concerning  its  re- 
quirements for  military  assistance  remains  un- 
changed. 

Exchange  of  Notes  Between  the  Governments 
of  Italy  and  the  U.  S. 

April  6,  194.9 

The  Italian  Ambassador  presents  his  compli- 
ments to  the  Honorable  tlie  Secretary  of  State  and 
has  the  honor  to  refer  to  the  steps  previously  taken 
by  the  Italian  Government  which  emphasized  to 
the  United  States  Government  the  urgent  need 
of  some  items  of  military  equipment  for  the 
strengthening  of  the  Italian  Armed  Forces.  With 
reference  thereto,  the  Italian  Ambassador  has  the 
honor  to  stress  that,  following  the  signature  by 
Italy  of  the  Atlantic  Pact,  and  in  view  of  the 
obligations  ensuing  from  the  participation  of  Italy 
in  such  treaty,  the  need  for  military  assistance 
continues  to  be  very  urgent  at  the  present  time  if 
the  Italian  military  establishment  is  to  be  put  in 
a  position  to  resist  effectively  aggi-ession. 

Upon  entering  into  the  North  Atlantic  Pact, 
the  Italian  Goverimient  is  aware  that,  in  order 
fully  to  achieve  the  objectives  of  this  treaty,  Italy 
must  separately  and  jointly  with  the  other  partici- 
pants maintain  and  develop  its  individual  and  col- 
lective capacity  to  resist  armed  attack  by  means 
of  continuous  and  effective  self-help  and  mutual 
aid. 

Wliile  the  Italian  Ambassador  reiterates  the 
need  for  military  assistance  from  the  United 
States,  he  wishes  to  emphasize  that  the  Italian 
Government  realizes  that  any  aid  coming  from 
the  Government  of  the  United  States  would  be 
extended  in  recognition  of  the  principle  set  up 
above,  under  which  prospective  Pact  members  will 
extend  to  each  other  such  reciprocal  assistance  as 
each  country  can  be  expected  to  contribute,  con- 
sistent with  its  geogi'aphic  location  and  resources, 
and  in  the  form  in  which  each  country  can  most 
effectively  furnish  such  assistance.  In  relation 
thereto  the  Italian  Ambassador  wishes  also  to 
stress,  under  instructions  from  his  Government, 


that  in  turn  Italy  is  ready  to  provide  to  members 
of  the  Atlantic  Pact  such  reciprocal  assistance  as 
it  can  reasonably  be  expected  to  contribute,  con- 
sistent with  its  geographic  location  and  resources 
and  in  the  form  in  which  it  can  most  effectively 
furnish  such  assistance. 

Tlie  Italian  Ambassador  has  also  been  instructed 
to  point  out  that  the  Italian  Government  realizes 
that,  since  Italy  is  engaged  in  the  effort  of  achiev- 
ing economic  i-ccovery  through  the  assistance  gen- 
erously granted  by  the  American  Government  in 
the  framework  of  the  European  Recovery  Pro- 
gram, it  would  be  harmful  to  increase  military 
production  to  such  an  extent  as  to  endanger  the 
successful  pursuance  of  economic  recovery. 

An  increase  in  militarj'  production  in  Italy, 
wliich  would  derive  from  tlie  program  of  self- 
help  and  mutual  aid,  and  which  Italy  might  plan 
for  the  furtherance  of  the  aims  of  the  North  At- 
lantic Pact,  must  therefore  be  contained  within 
such  limits  as  to  allow  the  successful  prosecution 
of  the  progi'am  of  economic  recovery  and  the 
maintenance  of  economic  viability.  Tlie  Italian 
Government  realizes  in  fact  that  economic  recovery 
contributes  strongly  to  the  re-creation  of  confidence 
and  hope  in  Europe  and  that  a  program  of  military 
aid  must  be  pursued  in  such  a  manner  as  to  facili- 
tate the  achievement  of  the  goals  of  the  European 
Recovery  Program  adding  another  stone  to  the 
structure  of  European  recovery.  Therefore, 
while  Italy  will  devote  its  energies  to  increasing 
its  ability  to  I'esist  armed  attack  and  thus  contrib- 
ute to  European  stability,  the  Italian  Government 
will  see  that  these  programs  will  not  affect  the 
result  of  the  European  Recovery  Program  in  Italy. 
In  this  respect  the  Italian  Ambassador  wishes 
also  to  stress  that,  in  view  of  its  shortage  of  dol- 
lars, the  Italian  Government,  in  planning  said  in- 
crease of  military  production  in  Italy,  will  need 
some  assistance  from  the  United  States  in  order 
to  help  meet  the  dollar  costs  which  will  be  involved 
in  this  new  production.  While  the  Italian  Gov- 
ernment will  deeply  appreciate  any  aid  of  this 
kind  that  the  United  States  Government  will  ex- 
tend, it  will  see  to  it  that  the  cost  of  the  new  mili- 
tary production  in  local  currency  be  met  from 
non-inflationary  sources. 

The  Italian  Ambassador  expresses  the  hope 
that  the  United  States,  in  view  of  the  principles 
set  up  in  the  North  Atlantic  Pact,  will  be  pre- 
pared to  extend  military  aid  in  such  a  manner  as 
to  facilitate  the  participation  of  Italy  in  such 
a  program. 

The  Italian  Ambassador  will  greatly  appreciate 
receiving  at  the  earliest  convenience  any  informa- 
tion that  the  United  States  will  kindly  give  on  its 
views  as  to  the  assistance  that  it  is  prepared  to 
extend,  and  has  the  honor  to  thank  for  the  Hon- 
orable Secretary  of  State's  interest  in  the  matter. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


April  7,  1949 
The  Secretary  of  State  presents  his  compliments 
to  His  Excellency  the  Ambassador  of  Italy  and  has 
the  honor  to  refer  to  his  note  requesting  this  Gov- 
ernment's views  concerning  the  provision  of  mili- 
tary assistance  to  the  Government  of  Italy. 

The  Executive  Branch  of  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment is  prepared  to  recommend  to  the  United 
States  Congress  that  the  United  States  provide  mil- 
itary assistance  to  the  Government  of  Italy  in  order 
to  assist  it  to  meet  the  material  requirements  of  its 
defense  program.  It  will  be  requested  of  the  Con- 
gress that  such  assistance  be  in  the  form  of  mili- 
tary equipment  from  the  United  States  required 
by  Italy's  defense  program  and  the  provision  of 
some  financial  assistance  for  increased  military 
production  on  Italy's  part  required  by  its  defense 
program.  Such  assistance  would  be  extended  in 
recognition  of  the  principle  of  self-help  and  mu- 
tual aid  contained  in  the  Atlantic  Pact. 

In  connection  with  its  recommendations  to  the 
Congress,  the  United  States  Government  will  avail 
itself  of  the  information  concerning  items  of_mil- 
itary  equipment  urgently  needed  for  the  strength- 
ening of  the  Italian  armed  forces  which  were  ear- 
lier emphasized  by  the  Italian  Government,  and 
is  ready  to  continue  its  consultation  with  the  Ital- 
ian Government  in  order  to  examine  any  relevant 
information  in  further  detail. 

Exchange  of  Communications  Between  the 
Governments  of  Norway  and  the  U.  S. 

Ap-ril  7,  1949 
After  the  liberation  in  May,  1945,  the  Norwegian 
people  actively  concentrated  its  efforts  upon  the 
reconstruction  of  the  country,  and  has  taken  upon 
itself  substantial  burdens  and  sacrifices  to  secure 
its  future. 

The  bitter  experiences  suffered  by  the  people 
during  the  war,  its  urge  to  defend  free  democracy 
and  its  appreciation  of  the  exposed  geographical 
position  of  the  country,  have  convinced  the  over- 
whelming majority  of  the  people  of  the  necessity 
to  allocate  an  important  share  of  the  country's 
limited  resources  to  the  rehabilitation  of  Norwe- 
gian defense.  During  the  three  years  from  1946- 
1949  Norway's  Storting  appropriated  a  total  of 
1.100  million  kroner  for  military  purposes. 

The  large  investments  in  the  economy  of  the 
country  necessary  to  achieve  a  balanced  foreign 
exchange  position,  and  the  large  investments  in 
defense  establisliments  inevitably  caused  a  strain 
on  the  economic  resources  of  the  country,  as  well  as 
on  its  finances.  Norwegian  economists  unani- 
mously agi-ee  that  additional  allocations  for  mili- 
tary purposes  would  with  all  probability  impede 
economic  recovery  and  endanger  economic  stabil- 
ity, which  the  country  has  hitherto  been  able  to 
maintain. 


The  Norwegian  Government  has  arrived  at  the 
conclusion  that  it  will  not  be  possible  to  finance 
the  establishment  of  an  adequate  defense  by  draw- 
ing solely  upon  domestic  resources.  The  Norwe- 
gian Government  has  therefore  submitted  to  the 
Government  of  the  United  States  a  list  of  require- 
ments for  the  Norwegian  defense  necessary  for  the 
implementation  of  plans  for  the  period  up  to  July 
1,  1950.  It  is  also  endeavoring  to  determine  how 
Norwegian  military  production  may  be  increased 
if  financial  assistance  should  be  provided. 

The  Norwegian  request  has  been  made  in  recog- 
nition of  the  principle  of  self-help  and  mutual  aid 
contained  in  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  in  accord- 
ance with  which  the  members  will  undertake  to  ex- 
tend such  reciprocal  assistance  as  each  country  can 
reasonably  be  expected  to  contribute  consistent 
with  its  resources  and  geographical  location,  with 
due  regard  to  the  requirements  of  economic  recov- 
ery, and  in  the  form  in  which  it  can  most  effec- 
tively furnish  it. 

The  Norwegian  Government  recognizes  its  obli- 
gations in  accordance  with  this  principle,  while 
noting  that  the  principle  of  self-help  and  mutual 
aid  is  not  inconsistent  with  the  foreign  policy  pur- 
sued by  the  Norwegian  Government. 

Wliile  referring  to  what  has  been  outlined  above 
concerning  defense  steps  being  undertaken  and 
recognizing  that  Norway  must  be  prepared,  in  own 
and  mutual  interest,  to  increase  her  military 
capacity  and  production,  the  Norwegian  Govern- 
ment assumes  that  first  priority  should  be  given 
to  economic  recovery  and  the  maintenance  of 
economic  stability. 

The  Norwegian  Govermnent  hopes  that  the 
United  States  will  be  prepared  to  extend  to  Nor- 
way military  aid  in  accordance  with  the  above 
principles.  The  views  of  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment as  to  the  assistance  it  is  prepared  to  ex- 
tend, will  be  welcomed. 


April  7,  1949 
Reference  is  made  to  the  Aide-Memoire  of  the 
Norwegian  Embassy,  dated  April  7,  1949  asking 
the  views  of  the  United  States  Government  with 
respect  to  the  provision  of  military  assistance. 

The  Executive  Branch  of  the  United  States 
Government  is  prepared  to  recommend  to  the 
United  States  Congress  that  the  United  States 
provide  military  assistance  to  the  Government  of 
Norway  in  order  to  assist  it  to  meet  the  materiel 
requirements  of  its  defense  program.  It  will  be 
requested  of  the  Congress  that  such  assistance  be 
in  the  form  of  military  equipment  from  the  United 
States  required  by  Norway's  defense  program  and 
the  provision  of  some  financial  assistance  for  in- 
creased military  production  on  Norway's  part 
which  may  be  required  by  its  defense  program. 
Such  assistance  would  be  extended  in  recognition 
of  the  principle  of  self-help  and  mutual  aid  con- 
tained in  the  Atlantic  Pact. 


April   17,    1949 


It  is  understood  that  the  information  previously 
made  available  to  the  United  States  Government 
by  the  Government  of  Norway  concerning  its  re- 
quirements for  military  assistance  remains 
unchaiiiied. 


Rules  for  Emergency  Aid  Grants  to 
Chinese  Students 

[Released  to  the  press  April  7] 

Rules  under  which  emergency  aid  will  be  ren- 
dered to  certain  Chinese  students  in  the  United 
States  from  the  $500,000  fund  recently  made  avail- 
able for  this  purpose  by  tlie  State  Department  in 
cooperation  with  EGA,  were  announced  on  April 
2  by  the  Department  of  State. 

Grants  will  be  made  to  Chinese  students  in  ur- 
gent need  wIk)  are  seniors  or  graduate  students  in 
accredited  U.S.  colleges  or  universities  and  who 
are  specializing  in  certain  technical  and  scientific 
fields. 

These  grants,  the  Department  announced,  will 
cover  tuition,  maintenance,  and  certain  other  ex- 
penses. Amounts  of  the  grants  will  be  limited  to 
the  sum  necessary  to  enable  the  recipient  (a)  to 
achieve  an  immediate  and  approved  educational 
objective,  (b)  to  return  to  China  and  make  his 
knowledge  and  skill  available  in  his  own  country'. 

The  basic  principles  and  objectives  of  this  emer- 
gency program  were  reviewed  and  approved  by  the 
United  States  Advisory  Commission  on  Educa- 
tional Exchange,  a  statutory  Commission  estab- 
lislied  for  the  purpose  of  formulating  and  recom- 
mending educational  exchange  programs  and 
policies  to  the  Secretary  of  State. 

Qualifications 

1.  The  student  must  be  a  citizen  of  the  Republic 
of  China. 

2.  The  student  must  have  been  engaged  in  a 
course  of  study  as  of  the  fall  semester  1948. 

3.  (a)  He  must  be  engaged  in  certain  technical 
fields  of  study. 

(b)  He  cannot  be  enrolled  in  such  schools  as 
fine  arts;  such  courses  as  history,  American  law 
or  literature,  and  similar  courses. 

4.  He  must  be  enrolled  in  an  accredited  univer- 
sity or  college. 

5.  He  must  be  in  need  of  financial  assistance. 

6.  He  must  sign  a  pledge  to  return  to  China, 
where  he  can  apply  his  skills  when  his  education  is 
finished. 

Procedures 

1.  Tlie  President  of  each  Universitj-  where  eli- 
gible Cliinese  students  are  enrolled  will  appoint  an 
official  representative. 

2.  The  Department  of  State  will  send  this  of- 
ficial the  application  blanks,  and  letter  of  refer- 
ence forms. 


3.  The  student  fills  in  the  form  and  hands  it  to 
the  University  official,  who  certifies  to  its  accuracy, 
and  returns  it  to  the  Department  of  State. 

4.  The  letters  of  reference  will  be  sent  by  the 
authors  directly  to  the  Department  of  State.  The 
references  cannot  be  students,  and  must  be  ap- 
proved by  the  University  representative. 

5.  The  Department  determines  the  amount  and 
conditions  of  the  award  and  notifies  the  student 
and  the  University  official. 

Re>^ponsihiUty  of  the  University 

1.  To  appoint  an  official  representative  who 
will : 

(a)  Issue  application  forms. 

(b)  Advise  the  student. 

(c)  Approve  references. 

(d)  Certify  to  accuracy  of  the  application. 
{e)   Receive  notification  of  award. 

(/)  Notify  the  Department  immediately  when 
tlie  student  severs  his  relationship  with  the 
University. 

(17)  Notify  the  Department  when  the  student 
is  doing  imsatisfactorj-  work. 

(A.)  Give  a  general  report  on  all  award  students 
at  the  end  of  quarters  and  semesters,  and 
at  the  end  of  the  academic  year. 

I-ntragovernmental  Working  Committee 

This  Committee  will  consist  of  three  persons,  a 
representative  of  the  Department  of  State,  of  the 
United  States  Office  of  Education,  and  of  ECA, 
with  the  Chairman  from  the  Department  of  State. 
This  will  be  a  focal  point  where  ECA  can  estab- 
lish criteria  consonant  with  its  legislative  author- 
ity, and  the  United  States  Office  of  Education  will 
make  available  its  specialized  knowledge  and  re- 
sources in  education.  This  Committee  will  meet 
at  regular  intervals  and  will  advise  concerning 
policy. 

The  Advisoty  Committee  on  Emergency  Aid  to 
Chinese  Students 

This  Committee  will  consist  of  representatives 
from  interested  private  organizations,  and  two  or 
three  cul  hoc  members  from  private  life  who  will 
.serve  at  the  pleasure  of  the  appointing  officer. 
This  Committee  will  be  appointed  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  State,  and  will  meet  within  30  days  of  the 
formal  inauguration  of  the  program  to  review, 
comment,  and  advise.  Subsequent  meetings  will 
be  called  at  the  pleasure  of  the  appointing  officer. 

Application 

1.  Students  who  are  in  college  must  apply 
through  the  University  official. 

2.  College  and  University  officials  and  others 
interested  may  direct  correspondence  to:  Division 
of  Exchange  of  Persons,  Department  of  State, 
Washington  25,  D.C. 


Department   of  Stale   Bulletin 


U.S.,  U.K.,  and  France  Reach  Agreement  on  All  Questions 
Relating  to  Germany  ^ 


COMMUNIQUE 


The  Foreign  Ministers  of  the  United  States, 
United  Kingdom,  and  France  have  discussed  in 
Washington  the  whole  range  of  issues  now  pend- 
ing in  connection  with  Germany  and  have  arrived 
at  complete  agreement. 

The  text  of  an  occupation  statute  in  a  new  and 
simpler  form  has  been  approved  and  is  being  trans- 
mitted to  the  German  Parliamentary  Council  at 
Bonn.  Agreement  was  reached  on  the  basic  prin- 
ciples to  govern  the  exercise  of  Allied  powers  and 
responsibilities  and  also  the  tripartite  Allied  con- 
trol machinery.  The  Foreign  Ministers  confirmed 
and  approved  agreements  on  the  subject  of  plant 
dismantling,  prohibited  and  restricted  industries, 
and  the  establishment  of  an  International  Ruhr 
Authority,  all  of  which  were  recently  negotiated 
in  London. 

The  occupation  statute  will  define  the  powers 
to  be  retained  by  the  occupation  authorities  upon 
the  establishment  of  the  German  Federal  Republic 
and  set  forth  basic  procedures  for  the  operation  of 
Allied  supervision.  Subject  only  to  the  limitations 
of  the  statute,  the  German  Federal  State  and  the 
participating  Laender  will  have  full  legislative, 
executive,  and  judicial  powers,  in  accordance  with 
the  basic  law  and  with  their  respective  constitu- 
tions. The  statute  aims  to  permit  the  German 
people  to  exercise  democratic  self-government. 
Provision  is  made  for  a  review  of  the  terms  of  the 
statute  after  a  year  in  force. 

With  the  establishment  of  the  German  Federal 
Republic,  there  will  be  a  marked  change  in  the 
oi'ganization  to  carry  out  occupation  responsi- 
bilities. Military  Government  as  such  will  be  ter- 
minated, and  the  functions  of  the  Allied  author- 
ities will  become  mainly  supervisory.  Each  of  the 
Allied  establishments  in  Germany  will  come  under 
the  direction  of  a  High  Commissioner,  aside  from 
the  occupation  forces  which  will  remain  headed 
by  military  commanders.  The  three  High  Com- 
missioners together  will  constitute  an  Allied  High 
Commission,  which  will  be  the  supreme  Allied 
agency  of  control.  In  order  to  permit  the  German 
Federal  Republic  to  exercise  increased  respon- 
sibility for  domestic  affairs  and  to  reduce  the 
burden  of  occupation  costs,  staff  personnel  shall 
be  kept  to  a  minimum. 

The  German  Government  authorities  will  be  at 
liberty  to  take  administrative  and  legislative  ac- 
tion, and  such  action  will  have  validity  if  not  dis- 


approved by  Allied  authorities.  There  will  be 
certain  limited  fields  in  which  the  Allies  will  re- 
serve the  right  to  take  direct  action  themselves  or 
to  direct  German  authorities  to  take  action.  How- 
ever, these  fields  will  be  limited,  and  aside  from 
security  matters,  the  exercise  of  direct  powers  by 
the  Allies  is  regarded  in  many  instances  as  self- 
liquidating  in  nature. 

It  was  agreed  that  a  major  objective  of  the  three 
Allied  Governments  was  to  encourage  and  facili- 
tate the  closest  integration,  on  a  mutually  benefi- 
cial basis,  of  the  German  people  under  a  demo- 
cratic federal  state  within  the  framework  of  a 
European  association.  In  this  connection  it  is 
understood  that  the  German  Federal  Republic 
will  negotiate  a  separate  bilateral  ECA  agreement 
with  the  United  States  and  should  participate  as 
a  full  member  in  the  Organization  for  European 
Economic  Cooperation,  thus  becoming  a  respon- 
sible partner  in  the  European  Recovery  Program. 

STATEMENT  BY  SECRETARY  ACHESON 

As  the  communique  indicates,  the  three  West- 
ern Governments  reached  complete  agreement  on 
all  the  questions  relating  to  Germany  which  have 
been  under  negotiation  between  them  in  both 
London  and  Berlin  during  the  past  few  months. 
On  plant  dismantling  and  on  prohibited  and  re- 
stricted industries,  Ambassador  Douglas  suc- 
ceeded in  obtaining  agreement  in  London  a  few 
days  before  the  talks  in  Washington  began.  These 
were  extremely  difiicult  and  complicated  matters, 
and  the  understanding  reached  in  London  con- 
tributed greatly  to  the  success  of  the  discussions 
held  here. 

The  three  Ministers  confirmed  and  approved 
the  agreements  on  plant  dismantling  and  pro- 
hibited and  restricted  industries.  With  respect  to 
dismantling,  publication  will  be  withheld  pending 
notification  to  the  Inter-Allied  Reparations 
Agency  at  Brussels,  which  will  be  made  in  a  few 
days.  "We  are  awaiting  confirmation  of  a  defini- 
tive text  by  the  Military  Governors  in  Germany 
before  publishing  the  results  of  the  agreement 
on  prohibited  and  restricted  industries. 

The  Ministers  also  gave  formal  approval  to 
the  statute  published  in  London  at  the  end  of 
December  last  year  for  the  setting  up  of  an  Inter- 

'  Released  to  the  press  Apr.  8,  1949. 


April   17,    7949 


national  Authority  for  the  Ruhr.  Steps  will  be 
taken  immediately  for  the  organization  of  this 
Authority. 

You  will  recall  that  intergovernmental  discus- 
sions were  started  in  London  in  January  on  the 
occupation  statute  for  Western  (iermany  and  on 
the  principles  which  would  govern  an  agreement 
on  trizonal  fusion.  While  considerable  progress 
was  made  in  London  on  both  these  subjects,  no 
agreement  had  been  reached  prior  to  the  arrival 
here  of  the  French  and  British  Foreign  Minis- 
ters. In  our  AVashington  discussions,  we  were 
able  to  clear  up  all  outstanding  points  and  suc- 
ceeded in  drafting  a  much  simpler  occupation 
statute,  which  will  be  shortly  transmitted  to  the 
Parliamentary  Council  at  Bonn  for  the  latters 
information  in  the  formulation  of  the  basic  law. 
We  also  agreed  on  basic  provisions  for  tlie  estab- 
lishment of  an  Allied  High  Commission  and  on 
the  basic  principles  which  will  be  embodied  in 
trizonal  fusion.  A  more  detailed  and  technical 
trizonal  fusion  agreement  will  have  to  be  con- 
cluded, as  was  done  in  the  case  of  the  bizonal 
fusion  agreement  with  the  British.  The  settle- 
ment of  the  princii)al  points  now  clears  the  way 
for  the  drafting  of  tliis  formal  agreement.  Com- 
plete trizonal  fusion  will  follow^  with  the  estab- 
lishment of  the  German  Federal  Government. 

MESSAGE  TO  THE  MILITARY  GOVERNORS 

The  Foreign  Ministers  of  the  United  States, 
United  Kingdom,  and  France  take  the  occasion 
of  their  meeting  in  Washington  for  the  discussion 
of  German  matters  to  extend  jointly  their  sincere 
appreciation  to  their  Military  Governors  for  the 
outstanding  manner  in  which  they  have  per- 
formed their  missions  in  the  last  trying  yeai-s. 

The  Ministers,  speaking  in  behalf  of  their  Gov- 
ernments, desire  to  express  their  admiration  of 
the  able  and  devoted  manner  in  which  the  three 
Commanders-in-Chief  have  accomplished  the  im- 
mense task  that  has  confronted  them  in  Germany. 
The  Commanders-in-Chief  have  assumed  for  their 
Governments  the  burden  of  bringing  together  the 
remnants  of  a  Germany  which  war  and  chaos  had 
reduced  to  a  cauldron  of  misery  and  where  all 
organized  government  had  been  destroyed.  In 
these  four  j^ears  the  task  of  reconstruction  and 
pacification  has  proceeded  without  a  single  inci- 
dent of  serious  import.  This  is  an  unparallelcil 
accomplishment. 

The  firm  foundation  laid  by  the  Military  Gov- 
ernors has  made  possible  the  agreement  reached 
in  Washington  by  tlie  Foreign  IMinisters  on  mat- 
ters connected  with  Germany.  They  are  confi- 
dent that  the  pioneer  work  of  these  soldier-states- 
men will  now  lead  on  to  the  evolution  of  a  demo- 
cratic and  peaceful  Germany. 


TEXT  OF  OCCUPATION  STATUTE 

In  tlie  exorcise  of  the  supreuu'  autliority  which 
is  retained  by  the  Govei-iiments  of  France,  the 
United  States  and  the  United  Kingdom. 

AVe.  Geneijal  Pierre  Koenig,  Military  Governor 
and  Commander-in-Chief  of  the  French  Zone  of 
Germany, 

General  Lucius  D.  Clay,  Military  Governor 
and  Commander-in-Chief  of  the  United  States 
Zone  of  Germany,  and 

General  Sir  Brian  Hubert  Robertson,  Mil- 
itary Governor  and  Conimander-in-Chief  of  the 
British  Zone  of  Germany, 

Do    HERI.BT    JOINTLY    PROCXu\IM    THE    FOLLOWING 

ocx"UP.\TioN  statute: 

1.  During  the  period  in  which  it  is  necessary 
tliat  the  occupation  continue,  the  Governments  of 
France,  the  United  States  and  the  United  King- 
dom desire  and  intend  that  the  German  people 
shall  enjoy  self-govermnent  to  the  maximum  pos- 
sible degree  consistent  with  such  occupation.  The 
Federal  State  and  the  participating  Laender  shall 
have,  subject  only  to  the  limitations  in  this  Instru- 
ment, full  legislative,  executive  and  judicial  pow- 
ers in  accordance  with  the  Basic  Law  and  with 
their  respective  constitutions. 

2.  In  order  to  ensure  the  accomplishment  of  the 
basic  purposes  of  the  occupation,  powers  in  the 
following  fields  are  specifically  reserved,  includ- 
ing the  right  to  request  and  verify  information  and 
statistics  needed  by  the  occupation  authorities: 

(a)  disarmament  and  demilitarization,  includ- 
ing related  fields  of  scientific  research,  prohibitions 
and  restrictions  on  industry  and  civil  aviation; 

(6)  controls  in  regard  to  the  Ruhr,  restitution, 
reparations,  decartelization,  deconcentration,  non- 
discriminaticm  in  trade  mattei-s,  foreign  interests 
in  Germany  and  claims  against  Germany; 

(c)  foreign  affairs,  including  international 
agreements  made  by  or  on  behalf  of  Germany; 

(d)  displaced  pereons  and  the  admission  of 
refugees ; 

(e)  protection,  prestige,  and  security  of  Allied 
forces,  dependents,  employees,  and  representatives, 
their  inimuiiities  and  satisfaction  of  occupation 
costs  and  their  other  requirements; 

(/)  respect  for  the  Basic  Law  and  the  Land 
constitutions; 

(fj)  control  over  foreign  trade  and  exchange; 

(/()  control  over  internal  action,  only  to  the 
niiniinum  extent  necessary  to  ensure  use  of  funds, 
food  and  oilier  supplies  in  such  manner  as  to  re- 
duce to  a  minimum  the  need  for  external  assistance 
to  Germany; 

(/)  control  of  the  care  and  treatment  in  Ger- 
man prisons  of  persons  charged  before  or  sen- 
tenced by  the  courts  or  tribunals  of  the  occupying 
powers  or  occupation  authorities;  over  the  carrj'- 
ing  out  of  sentences  imposed  on  them;  and  over 
questions  of  amnesty,  pardon  or  release  in  relation 
to  them. 

Department  of  State   Bulletin 


3.  It  is  the  hope  and  expectation  of  the  Gov- 
ernments of  France,  the  United  States  and  the 
United  Kingdom  that  the  occupation  authorities 
will  not  have  occasion  to  take  action  in  fields  other 
than  those  specifically  reserved  above.  Tlie  oc- 
cupation authorities,  however,  reserve  the  right, 
acting  under  instructions  of  their  Governments, 
to  resume,  in  whole  or  in  part,  the  exercise  of  full 
authority  if  they  consider  that  to  do  so  is  essen- 
tial to  security  or  to  preserve  democratic  govern- 
ment in  Germany  or  in  pursuance  of  the  inter- 
national obligations  of  their  governments.  Before 
so  doing,  they  will  formally  advise  the  appropri- 
ate German  authorities  of  their  decision  and  of 
the  reasons  therefor. 

4.  The  German  Federal  Government  and  the 
governments  of  the  Laender  shall  have  the  power, 
after  due  notification  to  the  occupation  authorities, 
to  legislate  and  act  in  the  fields  reserved  to  these 
authorities,  except  as  the  occupation  authorities 
otherwise  specifically  direct,  or  as  such  legislation 
or  action  would  be  inconsistent  with  decisions  or 
actions  taken  by  the  occupation  authorities 
themselves. 

5.  Any  amendment  of  the  Basic  Law  will  re- 
quire the  express  approval  of  the  occupation  au- 
thorities before  becoming  effective.  Land  consti- 
tutions, amendments  thereof,  all  other  legislation, 
and  any  agreements  made  between  the  Federal 
State  and  foreign  governments,  will  become  ef- 
fective twenty-one  days  after  official  receipt  by 
the  occupation  authorities  unless  previously  dis- 
approved by  them,  provisionally  or  finally.  The 
occupation  authorities  will  not  disapprove  legis- 
lation unless  in  their  opinion  it  is  inconsistent 
with  the  Basic  Law,  a  Land  Constitution,  legis- 
lation or  other  directives  of  the  occupation  author- 
ities tliemselves  or  the  provisions  of  this  Instru- 
ment, or  unless  it  constitutes  a  grave  threat  to  the 
basic  purposes  of  the  occupation. 

6.  Subject  only  to  the  requirements  of  their  se- 
curity, the  occupation  authorities  guarantee  that 
all  agencies  of  the  occupation  will  respect  the  civil 
rights  of  every  person  to  be  protected  against 
arbitrary  arrest,  search  or  seizure;  to  be  repre- 
sented by  counsel;  to  be  admitted  to  bail  as  cir- 
cumstances warrant;  to  communicate  with  rela- 
tives; and  to  have  a  fair  and  prompt  trial. 

7.  Legislation  of  the  occupation  authorities 
enacted  before  the  effective  date  of  the  Basic  Law 
shall  remain  in  force  until  repealed  or  amended 
by  the  occupation  authorities  in  accordance  with 
the  following  provisions: 

(a)  legislation  inconsistent  with  the  foregoing 
will  be  repealed  or  amended  to  make  it  consistent 
herewith ; 

(6)  legislation  based  upon  the  reserved  powers, 
referred  to  in  paragraph  2  above,  will  be  codified ; 

(c)  legislation  not  referred  to  in  (a)  and  (b) 
will  be  repealed  by  the  occupation  authorities  on 
request  fi-om  appropriate  German  authorities. 


8.  Any  action  shall  be  deemed  to  be  the  act  of 
the  occupation  authorities  under  the  powers  herein 
reserved,  and  effective  as  such  under  this  Instru- 
ment, when  taken  or  evidenced  in  any  manner 
provided  by  any  agreement  between  them.  The 
occupation  authorities  may  in  their  discretion  ef- 
fectuate their  decisions  either  directly  or  through 
instructions  to  the  appi'opriate  German  author- 
ities. 

9.  After  12  months  and  in  any  event  within  18 
months  of  the  effective  date  of  this  Instrument 
the  occupying  powers  will  undertake  a  review  of 
its  provisions  in  the  light  of  experience  with  its 
operation  and  with  a  view  to  extending  the  juris- 
diction of  the  German  authorities  in  the  legisla- 
tive, executive  and  judicial  fields. 


Absentee-Owned  Properties  in  U.S.  Zone 
in  Germany  To  Be  Returned 

[Keleased  to  the  press  by  OMGUS  in  Berlin  March  26] 

Certain  properties  having  an  individual  value  of 
DM  10,000  or  less,  located  in  the  U.S.  area  of  con- 
trol of  Germany  which  are  presently  under  prop- 
erty control  custody  of  Military  Government  and 
belong  to  absentee  owners  will  be  released  after 
May  15, 1949,  to  the  former  custodians,  who  man- 
aged the  property  at  the  time  it  was  taken  into 
custody  by  Military  Government,  providing  such 
custodians  are  able  to  give  evidence  that  they 
presently  retain  the  confidence  of  the  alien  owners. 
Property  Division  of  OMGUS  announced  on 
March  26.  The  properties  affected  are  further 
limited  to  those  which  were  taken  into  control  by 
Military  Government  solely  by  reason  of  absentee 
ownership. 

Nearly  8,000  pieces  of  property  with  a  total 
value  approximating  RM  70,000,000  are  involved. 
The  absentee  owners  will  be  notified  of  the  action 
to  be  taken  relative  to  their  property.  If  the 
property  owner  chooses,  he  may  nominate  his  own 
agent  to  accept  release  of  the  property  before  May 
15,  1949.  In  the  event,  however,  that  the  owner 
does  not  take  this  opportunity  to  name  his  own 
agent.  Military  Government  will  thereafter  release 
the  property  to  the  former  custodian,  providing 
certain  conditions  are  met,  and  that  he  produces 
evidence  to  show  that  he  is  still  acceptable  to  the 
owner. 

Each  agent  or  close  relative  of  an  absentee 
owner,  in  order  to  reassume  responsibility  for  such 
properties  he  formerly  administered  in  the  U.S. 
area  of  control,  will  be  required  to  sign  a  certificate 
acknowledging  receipt  of  the  property  and  agree- 
ing to  notify  his  principal  that  the  property  will 
nevertheless  remain  subject  to  the  provisions  of 
Military  Government  Law  No.  52,  as  well  as  all 
other  applicable  laws,  ordinances,  directives, 
orders,  or  regulations  of  Military  Government. 
The  properties  will  thus  remain  subject  to  the 


April   17,   1949 


Military  Govornment  policy  concerning  morato- 
rium oil  foreign  investments;  and  unless  the  owner 
or  his  agent  is  granted  a  special  license,  he  may 
not  make  other  than  ordinaiy  business  expendi- 
tures in  connection  with  the  released  property. 

The  Property  Division  of  OMGUS  announced 
that  this  step  is  being  taken  in  pursuance  of  the 
policy  of  Military  Government  to  release  as 
quickly  as  possible"  the  properties  of  all  absentee 
owners,  and  to  withdraw  from  the  field  of  prop- 
erty control.  It  is  anticipated  that  this  step  will 
result  in  the  release  of  approximately  80  percent 
of  the  number  of  all  absentee-ownecl  properties 
still  under  Military  Government  property  control 
custody  in  the  U.S.  area  of  control,  altliough  the 
value  of  tliesc  ])r()i)erties  constitutes  only  10  per- 
cent of  the  value  of  controlled  absentee-owned 
properties. 

U.S.  Official  Interviews  American  Soldiers 
Held  Prisoners  in  Czechoslovakia 

[Released  to  the  press  April  fi] 

Capt.  Donald  G.  McNamara,  assistant  military 
attache,  and  Consul  Carroll  C.  Parry,  accom- 
panied by  two  representatives  of  the  Czechoslovak 
Government  yesterday  afternoon  visited  the  two 
soldiers,  George  R.  Jones  and  Clarence  R.  Hill, 
at  Bory  prison  near  Pilsen.  The  two  men  were 
interviewed  separately  in  the  presence  of  the  fore- 
going persons  as  well  as  the  prison  warden  and  an 
interpreter. 

The  men  admit  having  voluntarily  entered 
Czechoslovakia  about  midnight  on  December  8, 
1948,  in  uniform  and  about  .5  :  00  a.  m.  the  follow- 
ing day  were  arrested  while  asleep  in  a  switch 
hotise  on  the  railway  near  tlie  border.  They  weri' 
confined  at  several  places  and  were  tried  by  a  court 
in  Praha  which  sentenced  them  to  twelve  (Hill) 
and  ten  years  (Jones).  The  men  appeared  to  be 
in  good  health.  They  are  now  confined  at  Bory 
prison  near  Pilsen.  In  the  light  of  the  interview, 
the  Embassy  is  asking  the  Foreign  Office  for  fur- 
ther information. 


Time  Extended  for  Patent  Applications  in 
Japan 

[Released  to  the  press  March  20] 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  March 
29  the  issuance  by  the  United  States  Government 
of  an  interim  directive  to  the  Supreme  Com- 
mander for  the  Allied  Powers  regarding  the  ex- 
tension of  time  for  exorcising  the  right  of  priority 
for  patent  applications  in  Jajian.  The  Depart- 
ment pointed  out  that  this  interim  directive  is 
complementary  to  a  recent  policy  decision  of  the 
Far  Eastern  Commission  regarding  patents,  util- 


ity models,  and  designs  in  Japan.  Because  the 
Commission  did  not  take  action  on  the  urgent  mat- 
ter of  extension  of  priority  rights,  this  Govern- 
ment has  acted  in  accordance  with  the  authority 
granted  it  in  paragraph  III,  3  of  the  terms  of 
reference  of  the  Far  Eastern  Commission  which 
provides : 

The  Uiiiteil  States  Goveninieiit  may  issue  Interim  di- 
rectives to  the  Supreme  Commander  pending  action  by 
the  Commission  whenever  urgent  matters  arise  not  covered 
by  policies  already  formulated  by  the  Ct)mmission:  pro- 
vided that  any  directives  dealing  with  fundamental 
changes  in  the  Japanese  constitutional  structure  or  In 
the  regime  of  control,  or  dealing  with  a  change  in  the 
.Japanese  Government  as  a  whole  will  be  issued  only  fol- 
lowing consultation  and  following  the  attainment  of  agree- 
ment in  the  Far  Eastern  Commission. 

The  Department  explained  that  the  urgency  for 
a  policy  on  priority  for  patent  applications  in 
Japan  is  accentuated  by  the  long  period  which  has 
elapsed  since  it  was  last  possible  for  nationals  of 
countries  at  war  with  .Japan  to  file  i)atent  applica- 
tions in  .Japan.  Under  normal  circumstances,  per- 
sons wjio  had  filed  in  any  country  a  first  applica- 
tion for  a  patent  and  wished  to  have  comparable 
protection  in  Japan  would  have  filed  an  applica- 
tion there  within  a  year  in  order  to  take  advantage 
of  the  priority  right  derived  from  the  previous 
first  filing.  Bv  extending  the  priority  period,  the 
interim  directive  affords  protection  to  persons  who 
have  not  been  able  to  exercise  their  priority  rights 
in  Japan  because  of  the  war.  The  interim  direc- 
tive also  provides  that  third  parties  who  have, 
before  the  filing  of  the  application  in  Japan,  hona 
fide  manufactured,  used,  sold,  or  leased  the  sub- 
ject matter  of  any  Japanese  patent  obtained  with 
such  priorities  shall  be  given  the  usual  protection 
from  liability  for  infringement. 

The  text  of  the  interim  directive,  which  has 
been  issued  to  the  Supreme  Commander  for  the 
Allied  Powers  and  will  be  filed  with  the  Far 
Eastern  Commission,  is  as  follows: 

Nationals  of  countries  at  war  with  Japan  who  had  duly 
filed  in  any  country  the  first  application  for  a  patent  not 
earlier  than  twelve  months  before  the  effective  date  of 
loss  of  right  to  file  patent  applications  in  Japan  should  be 
entitled,  within  twelve  months  after  the  date,  as  deter- 
mined by  the  Supreme  Commander,  on  which  such  Govern- 
ments and  nations  are  again  p<^rmitted  to  apply  for  patents 
directly  to  the  Japanese  Patent  Office  and  to  obtain  legal 
services  necessary  for  this  purpose,  to  apply  for  corre- 
spondini;  rights  in  Japan  with  a  right  of  priority  based 
upon  the  previous  first  filing  of  the  application.  Third 
parties  who  have  hona  fide  manufactured,  used,  sold  or 
leased  the  subject  matter  of  any  Japanese  patent  obtained 
with  this  priority  should  not  be  liable  fur  infringement  on 
a<'ciiunt  of  sucli  use  Init  should  be  enabled  to  continue  such 
use  after  the  filing  of  the  application  only  under  the  terms 
of  ,'1  nonexclusive  license  which  the  patent  owner  should 
lie  rcMpiired  to  grant  on  terms  providing  for  reasonable 
royalties  ;is  fixed  liy  an  agency  to  be  authorized  to  malce 
such  determinations.  Payment  of  such  royalties  should 
he  subject  to  applicable  financial  regulations  in  effect  in 
Japan  at  the  time  they  are  paid. 


Department  ot  State  Bulletin 


Termination  of  Foreign  Liquidation 
Commission 

[Released  to  the  press  March  24] 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  March 
24  that  the  Office  of  the  Foreign  Liquidation  Com- 
missioner (FLC)  has  notified  its  remaining  over- 
seas offices  of  closing  dates  and  that  the  liquidation 
of  the  entire  organization  will  be  effected  by  June 
30,  1949. 

The  agency  has  already  disposed  of  approxi- 
mately $10,300,000,000  (at  procurement  cost)  of 
war  surplus  located  in  foreign  areas.  Approxi- 
mately $2,000,000,000,  or  about  20  percent  of  pro- 
curement cost,  was  realized  for  the  United  States 
from  these  sales.  A  large  percentage  of  the  sur- 
plus consisted  of  used  items  or  material  which 
would  require  conversion  from  military  to  civilian 
use.  Much  of  the  surplus  was  located  in  out-of- 
the-way  places  far  from  a  favorable  market.  The 
surplus  consisted  of  about  4,000,000  types  of  items 
of  almost  eveiy  conceivable  type  of  material  rang- 
ing from  mules  to  entire  naval  yards. 

The  FLC  still  has  on  hand  approximately  $13,- 
000,000  (at  procurement  cost)  of  noncombat  war 
surplus  consisting  chiefly  of  returned  lend-lease 
equipment,  wrecked  vessels,  and  related  maritime 
items  located  at  various  Pacific  islands. 

Field  offices  of  the  FLC  were  notified  of  their 
termination  dates  as  follows :  Central  Field  Com- 
missioner for  Europe,  at  Paris,  May  15, 1949 ;  Cen- 
tral Field  Commissioner  for  Pacific  Islands,  Asia, 
and  Australia,  located  at  Manila,  May  15;  field 
representative  for  Australia  and  Southern  Pacific, 
at  Sydney,  March  31;  Field  Commissioner  for 
Marianas,  Marshall-Gilbert  ai-ea,  at  Guam,  May 
15;  and  special  representative  for  Latin  America 
and  the  Antilles,  at  Balboa,  March  31. 

Already  closed  are  FLC  field  offices  at  New 
Delhi,  for  India  and  Pakistan;  Cairo,  for  the 
Middle  East;  London,  for  the  British  Isles;  Rome, 
for  southern  Europe  and  North  Africa;  Eio  de 
Janeiro,  for  South  America ;  Shanghai,  for  China; 
and  Canada  and  the  North  Atlantic  field  offices 
located  in  the  Washington,  D.  C,  Central  Office. 

With  the  liquidation  of  the  FLC  on  June  30, 
its  residual  functions  not  absorbed  by  the  Depart- 
ment's permanent   establishment  will  be  trans- 


ferred to  other  Government  agencies.  The  actual 
disposal  of  any  remaining  overseas  surplus  will 
be  handled  by  the  owning  agencies,  principally 
the  Departments  of  the  Army  Air  Force,  and 
Navy,  under  an  amendment  to  FLC  regulation  8, 
which  governs  the  foreign  disposal  operations 
under  the  Surplus  Propei'ty  Act  of  1944. 

The  predecessor  of  the  Office  of  the  Foreign 
Liquidation  Commissioner  was  the  Office  of  the 
Army-Navy  Liquidation  Commissioner,  which 
began  its  existence  in  February  1945,  under  the 
control  of  the  Surplus  Property  Board,  which  had 
been  established  by  the  Surplus  Property  Act. 
The  functions  and  staff  of  this  organization  were 
transferred,  effective  October  20, 1945,  to  the  juris- 
diction of  the  Department  of  State  by  executive 
order,  and  the  agency  was  renamed  the  Office  of 
the  Foreign  Liquidation  Commissioner. 

Maj.  Gen.  Clyde  L.  Hyssong  is  the  present 
Foreign  Liquidation  Commissioner.  He  succeeded 
Fred  W.  Ramsey. 

Aid  to  Ciiinese  Students  in  the  U.S. 

[Released  to  the  press  jointly  with  ECA  March  30] 

An  agreement  has  been  reached  between  the 
Department  of  State  and  the  Economic  Coopera- 
tion Administration  whereby  $500,000  is  being 
turned  over  to  the  Department  by  ECA  for  tem- 
porary aid  to  Chinese  students  in  the  United 
States  in  certain  scientific  and  technical  fields. 
Details  concerning  the  administration  of  the  fund 
are  being  worked  out  between  ECA  and  the  De- 
partment and  will  be  announced  in  the  near 
future.  In  the  meantime,  no  one  is  presently  au- 
thorized to  receive  applications  for  assistance 
under  tliis  program,  which  is  undertaken  follow- 
ing a  request  by  the  Government  of  China  to 
ECA. 

This  is  an  emergency  program  designed  to  en- 
able qualified  Chinese  students  to  achieve  immedi- 
ate professional  objectives  in  certain  scientific  and 
technical  fields  and  to  enable  them  to  return  to 
China  as  soon  as  possible  to  make  use  of  the 
knowledge  and  skill  acquired  in  the  United  States. 
Funds  for  this  program  will  be  made  available 
from  the  appropriation  for  assistance  to  China 
under  the  China  Aid  Act  of  1948. 


April   17,    1949 


^€yrUen/6/ 


Treaty  Information 

Signing    Ceremony    of    the    North    Atlantic 

Treaty:  Page 

Program 471 

Remarks  by  Dean  Acheson 471 

Remarks  by  Paul-Henri  Spaak 472 

Remarks  by  L.  B.  Pearson 473 

Remarks  by  Gustav  Rasmussen 474 

Remarks  by  Robert  Schuman 474 

Remarks  by  Bjarni  Benediktsson    ....        475 

Remarks  by  Carlo  Sforza 476 

Remarks  by  Joseph  Bech 476 

Remarks  by  Dirk  U.  Stikker 477 

Remarks  by  Halvard  Lange 478 

Remarks  by  Jos6  Caeiro  Da  Malta    .    .    .        479 

Remarks  by  Ernest  Bevin 480 

Address   of   the    President   of   the   United 

States 481 

The    Atlantic    Community   and    the    United 
Nations.      By     Ambassador     Philip    C. 

Jessup 486 

Request  for  Military  Assistance  From  Atlan- 
tic Pact  Countries: 
Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson     ....        493 
E.xchange  of  Communications  Between  the 
Brussels  Treaty  Powers  and  the  United 

States 494 

Exchange  of  Communications  Between  the 

Governments  of  Denmark  and  the  U.S. .        495 
Exchange  of  Notes  Between  the  Govern- 
ments of  Italy  and  the  U.S 496 

Exchange  of  Communications  Between  the 

Governments  of  Norway  and  the  U.S.  .        497 

The    United    Nations    and    Specialized 
Agencies 

Reconvening    of    the    Third    Session    of    the 
General  As.sembly: 
Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson     ....        483 
Agenda 483 


Tlie    United    Nations     and     Specialized 

Agencies — Continued 

U.S.    Views    on    Former    Italian    Colonies. 

Statement  by  John  Foster  Dulles   .    .    . 
The    Atlantic    Community   and    the    United 

Nations.     Statement     by     Ambassador 

Philip  C.  Jessup 

Resolution  on  Trade  Union  Rights.    Freedom 

of  Association 

The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations  .    . 


484 


490 
491 


Occupation  Matters 

U.S.,  U.K.,  and  France  Reach  Agreement  on 
All  Questions  Relating  to  Germany: 

Communique 499 

Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson     ....        499 
Message  to  the  Military  Governors    .    .    .        500 

Text  of  Occupation  Statute 500 

Absentee-Owned  Properties  in  U.S.  Zone  in 

Germany  To  Be  Returned 501 

Time   Extended  for  Patent   Applications   in 

Jajian 502 

International  Information  and  Cultural 
Affairs 

Rules  for  Emergency  Aid  Grants  to  Chinese 

Students 498 

.4id  to  Chinese  Students  in  the  U.S 503 

The  Department 

Termination  of  Foreign  Liquidation  Commis- 
sion           503 


General  Policy 

U.S.   Official   Interviews  American   Soldiers 
Held  Prisoners  in  Czechoslovakia    .    .    . 


502 


"    •"   '  ■'■'■■.■■','>.   '•-  ■     ;'■'     ,"","''■  "'  '4'"','. ', '"m-,,;    ^  ■'■'  '■'.  ^  '  .   ','."''»'J*W   '''V'  ■' •     ■'  -i      r        ■     ' 


K!W^i:'^5---:.3'. 


e^v^e^  zl!eh€(/)f^t^e^  /O^ t/i€(^ 


.^.^^'Mmy:^ 


U.S.,  U.K.,  AND  FRANCE  REACH  AGREE- 
MENT ON  GERMAN  REPARATION 
PROGRAM 524 

REPORT  OF  THE  SECRETARY  OF  STATE 
TO  THE  PRESIDENT  ON  NORTH 
ATLANTIC  TREATY 532 

THE  INTERNATIONAL  WHEAT  AGREE- 
MENT OF  1949  •  An  Article  by  Edward  G. 
Cale 507 


For  complete  contents  see  back  cover 


Vol.  XX,  No.  512 
April  24,  1949 


I^M^^y^^^lftV* 


MAY  3  0  1949 


x/Ae  zlJe^ut/yl^eTit  /)£  !jia,le    V^  LI  JL  1  Cy  L  J.  1  X 


Vol.  XX,  No.  512    •    I'lblication  3493 
April  24,  1949 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

U.  S.  Government  Printing  Office 

Washington  25,  D.  C. 

P  RICE: 

62  issues,  domestic  $5,  (orcipn  $7.25 

Single  copy,  15  cents 

The  printing  ot  this  publication  has 

been    apiroved  by  the  Director  of  tbe 

Bureau  ot  the  Budget  (February  18, 1941I- 

Note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Dep.vktmf.nt 
o?  State  Bullet;n  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


Ths  Department  of  State  BULLETIN, 
a  tceekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  oj  Publicationt, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  thm 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  trith  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  trork  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includeM 
press  releases  on  foreign  policy  issued 
by  the  While  House  and  the  Depart- 
ment, and  statements  and  addresses 
made  by  the  President  and  by  the 
Secretary  of  State  and  other  officers 
of  the  Department,  as  tcell  as  special 
articles  on  various  phases  of  inter- 
ruitional  affairs  and  the  functions  of 
the  Department.  Information  is  in- 
cluded concerning  treaties  and  in- 
ternational agreements  to  ichich  the 
United  States  is  or  may  become  a 
party  and  treaties  of  general  inter- 
national interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  a* 
tcell  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


The  International  Wheat  Agreement  of  1949 


By  EDWARD  G.  CALE 
Associate  Chief,  International  Resources  Division 


For  the  second  year  in  succession  the  negotia- 
tions pliase  of  formulating  an  international  wheat 
agreement  has  been  successfully  concluded.  The 
general  structure  of  the  agi-eement  and  its  essential 
features  are  the  same  as  those  of  the  agreement 
which  was  negotiated  at  the  special  session  of  the 
International  Wheat  Council  held  in  Washington 
from  January  28  until  March  6,  1948,  but  never 
2)laced  in  effect.'  The  new  agreement,  like  the 
1948  agreement,  is  a  multilateral  contract  under 
which  member  exporting  countries  agree  to  supply 
specified  quantities  of  wheat  to  member  importing 
countries,  if  called  upon  to  do  so,  at  the  maximum 
prices  provided  for  in  the  agi-eement.  Member 
impoitmg  countries  agree,  conversely,  to  purchase 
specified  quantities  of  wheat  from  member  export- 
ing countries,  if  called  upon  to  do  so,  at  the  mini- 
mum prices  provided  for  in  the  agreement.  As 
will  be  indicated,  however,  many  of  the  terms  of 
the  1949  agreement  are  different  from  those  of  the 
1948  agreement. 

The  1948  wheat  agreement  provided  for  the  con- 
vening, in  Washington  in  July  1948,  by  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States  of  America,  of  the 
first  meeting  of  the  Wheat  Council  established 
under  that  agreement.  It  also  provided  that  at 
the  opening  of  the  first  session  of  the  Wheat  Coun- 
cil any  government  which  had  signed  and  ratified 
the  agreement  might  effect  its  withdrawal  there- 
from bj'  notification  to  the  Government  of  the 
United  States  if,  in  the  opinion  of  any  such  gov- 
ernment, the  guaranteed  purchases  or  guaranteed 
sales  of  the  countries  whose  governments  had  rati- 
fied the  agreement  were  insufficient  to  insure  its 
successful  operation.  Wlien  a  large  number  of  the 
countries  which  had  signed  the  1948  agreement, 
including  the  United  States,  announced  that  their 
governments  had  not  approved  the  agreement  in 
time  to  put  it  into  effect  on  August  1,  1948,  as  ex- 
pected. Great  Britain,  Australia,  and  several  other 
countries  which  had  ratified  it  withdrew,  and  the 
representatives  of  Canada  and  the  other  countries 
remaining  in  the  agreement  adopted  a  resolution 
recommending  to  their  governments  that  the 
agreement  be  considered  inoperative  as  among 
themselves. 

The  representatives  of  the  countries  which  had 
signed  the  agreement  then  adopted  a  resolution  ap- 
pointing a  Preparatory  Committee  to  keep  under 

April  24,   7949 


review  the  prospects  of  concluding  a  new  agree- 
ment and  invited  the  United  States  Government 
to  arrange  to  convene  a  meeting  of  the  Committee 
if  at  any  time,  after  consultation  with  the  Com- 
mittee's chairman,  this  meeting  should  appear  to 
be  desirable.  The  resolution  further  provided 
that  should  the  Prepai'atory  Committee  recom- 
mend that  an  international  conference  be  held  to 
negotiate  a  new  international  wheat  agreement, 
the  United  States  Government  should  be  invited 
to  convene  such  a  conference. 

An  informal  meeting  of  the  Preparatory  Com- 
mittee was  convened  at  the  request  of  the  United 
States  during  the  Fao  Conference  held  in  Wash- 
ington in  the  latter  half  of  November.  At  this 
meeting  the  Committee  was  informed  of  the  i^ro- 
posal  by  the  United  States  Govez-nment  to  convene 
an  International  Wlieat  Conference  on  or  about 
January  25,  1949,  and  later  on  December  3,  1948, 
the  Committee  approved  the  convening  of  the  Con- 
ference. Invitations  to  the  Conference  were  ini- 
tially sent  to  all  governments  that  were  members 
either  of  the  Fao  of  the  United  Nations  or  of  the 
United  Nations  itself.  The  Government  of  Israel 
later  expressed  a  desire  to  be  represented  and  was 
invited  to  send  an  observer.  Toward  the  end  of 
the  Conference  the  status  of  the  representative  of 
Israel  was  changed  from  that  of  observer  to  that 
of  a  plenipotentiary  delegate  by  action  of  the  Con- 
ference. 

In  all,  56  countries  were  represented  at  the  Con- 
ference, 48  by  delegates  and  8  by  observers.  In 
addition,  observers  of  six  international  organiza- 
tions attended.  The  countries  represented  by  del- 
egates were:  Argentina,  Austi'alia,  Austria,  Bel- 
gium, Bolivia,  Brazil,  Canada,  Ceylon,  Chile, 
China,  Colombia,  Costa  Rica,  Cuba,  Denmark, 
Dominican  Eepublic  Ecuador,  Egj'pt,  El  Salvador, 
France,  Greece,  Guatemala,  India,  Iran,  Ireland, 
Israel,  Italy,  Lebanon,  Liberia,  Mexico,  the 
Netherlands,  New  Zealand,  Nicaragua,  Norway, 
Panama,  Paraguay,  Peru,  Philippines,  Poland, 
Portugal,  Saudi  Arabia,  Sweden,  Switzerland, 
Union  of  South  Africa,  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist 
Republics,  United  Kingdom,  United  States,  Uru- 
guaj',   and    Yugoslavia.     The  countries   sending 

^Documents  and  State  Papers,  May  194S,  p.  102.  The 
1949  agreement  will  be  printed  in  Documents  and  State 
Papers  for  May  1949. 


observers  were:  Afghanistan,  Czeclioslovakia, 
Ethiopia,  Finland,  Pakistan,  Syria,  Turkey,  and 
Venezuela. 

The  international  organizations  represented  at 
the  Conference  by  observers  were :  The  Food  and 
Agriculture  Organization,  the  International 
Bank,  the  International  Monetary  Fund,  the 
United  Nations,  the  Interim  Coordinating  Com- 
mittee for  International  Commodity  Arrange- 
ments, and  the  Interim  Commission  of  the  Inter- 
national Trade  Organization. 

A  large  part  of  the  work  of  the  Conference  was 
done  in  meetings  of  the  full  Conference  sitting  as 
a  committee  of  the  whole.  Smaller  committees 
and  working  parties  were  established,  however, 
with  specific  assignments,  which  often  involved 
problems  requiring  more  detailed  consideration 
than  could  advantageously  be  given  in  meetings 
of  the  full  Conference. 

Although  the  Steering  Committee  was  in  a  posi- 
tion to  consider  all  problems  of  major  importance 
to  the  Conference,  most  of  its  attention  was  de- 
voted to  actions  relating  to  the  duration  of  the 
agreement  and  to  the  maximum  and  minimvmi 
prices  that  it  should  contain. 

The  principal  tasks  of  the  Price  Equivalents 
Committee  were  related  to  the  development  of 
formulae  for  determining  in  the  currencies  of  the 
exporting  countries  that  were  expected  to  be  in  the 
agreement  the  maximum  and  minimum  prices  for 
various  types  of  wheat  in  relation  to  the  grade  of 
Canadian  wheat  (No.  1  Manitoba  Northern)  which 
was  taken  as  a  basic  grade  for  purposes  of  the 
agreement.  Since  France  and  Uruguay  had  indi- 
cated that  they  intended  to  participate  in  the 
agreement  as  exporters  and  since  these  countries 
had  not  been  exporters  under  the  agi'eement  signed 
in  1948,  one  of  the  principal  matters  considered  by 
the  Committee  was  the  price  equivalents  for  these 
countries. 

The  Working  Party  on  Quantities  was  given 
the  task  of  equating  the  total  quantity  of  wheat 
which  exporting  countries  wished  to  sell  under  the 
agreement  with  the  total  quantity  of  wheat  which 
importing  countries  wished  to  purchase  and  of 
working  out  the  relative  shares  of  each  country 
in  the  total  quantity  of  its  group. 

The  Working  Party  on  Flour  directed  its  atten- 
tion to  a  number  of  problems  relating  to  the  p\ir- 
chase  and  sale  of  wheat  flour,  rather  than  wheat 
grain,  as  a  part  of  the  guaranteed  quantities  under 
the  agreement. 

The  Working  Party  on  articles  III  and  XVII 
dealt  with  questions  regarding  the  recording  of 
transactions  under  the  wheat  agreement  by  the 
Wlieat  Council.  The  numbers  of  the  articles  re- 
ferred to  were  those  of  the  1!)4S  draft,  the  1048 
agreement  having  been  adopted  by  the  Conference 
as  its  annotated  agenda.  The  article  in  the  new 
agreement  dealing  with  the  recording  of  transac- 
tions against  guaranteed  quantities  is  article  IV, 
rather  than  article  III  or  XVII. 


Tlie  Working  Party  on  Voting  Provisions 
studied  all  sections  of  the  agreement  where  the 
question  of  voting  would  arise  and  made  recom- 
mendations as  to  the  size  of  the  vote  that  should 
be  required  in  each  case. 

'J'he  first  meeting  of  the  Conference  was  held  on 
January  '20  and  the  last  meeting  on  March  23. 
During  this  period  the  Conference  was  in  con- 
tinuous session.  All  meetings  except  tlie  first,  on 
January  26,  and  the  last,  on  March  23,  were  in 
executive  session.  Arrangements  were  made,  how- 
ever, for  certain  of  the  principal  officers  of  the 
Conference  to  meet  with  the  press  from  time  to 
time  and  to  issue  releases  regarding  developments 
at  the  Conference  so  that  the  public  might  be  kept 
advised  of  the  progress  of  the  negotiations.  At  the 
final  session,  on  March  23,  which  was  open  to  the 
public,  copies  of  the  agreement  and  a  release  de- 
scribing its  principal  features  were  distributed  to 
the  press. 

Tlie  agreement  consists  of  a  preamble  and  23 
articles.  The  preamble,  which  is  somewhat  shorter 
than  that  of  the  1948  agreement,  indicates  the  pur- 
pose of  the  agreement — the  intention  "to  over- 
come the  serious  hardship  caused  to  producers  and 
consumers  by  burdensome  surpluses  and  critical 
shortages  of  wheat." 

Tlie  new  agreement,  as  compared  with  the  1948 
agreement,  is  believed  to  embody  a  number  of 
improvements  in  terminology.  The  agreement  has 
also,  in  the  interest  of  a  more  logical  arrangement 
and  sequence,  been  subdivided  into  five  parts  and 
the  articles  grouped  under  them  in  a  somewhat 
different  order  from  that  observed  in  the  1948 
agreement. 

Part  1  (General)  includes  two  articles,  article  I, 
in  which  the  objectives  of  the  agi'eement  are  stated, 
as  they  were  in  the  1948  agreement,  as  being  "to 
assure  supplies  of  wheat  to  importing  countries 
and  markets  for  Avheat  to  exporting  countries  at 
equitable  and  stable  prices,"  and  article  II,  giving 
definitions  of  numerous  terms  used  in  the 
agreement. 

Part  2  (Rights  and  Obligations)  consists  of 
articles  III  through  VIII.  This  is  the  principal 
substantive  part  of  the  agi'eement.  Annexes  to 
article  III  show  the  quantities  of  wheat  which  the 
exporting  countries  are  committed  to  sell  at  the 
maximum  prices  and  those  which  the  importing 
countries  are  committed  to  buy  at  the  minimum 
prices.  Article  IV,  as  mentioned,  deals  with  the 
recording  of  transactions  against  the  guaranteed 
quantities.  Article  V  relates  to  the  enforcement 
of  the  rights  of  exporting  countries  and  importing 
countries  under  the  agreement.  Article  Vl  con- 
tains the  price  provisions  of  the  agreement. 
Article  VII  contains  a  general  undertaking  of 
both  exporting  and  importing  countries  regard- 
ing the  maintenance  of  stocks.  Article  VIII  pro- 
vides that  the  exporting  and  importing  countries 
shall  report  to  the  Council,  within  the  time  pre- 
scribed by  it,  such  information  as  the  Council  may 

Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


request  in  connection  with  the  administration  of 
the  agi-eement. 

Part  3  (Adjustment  of  Guaranteed  Quantities) 
is  made  up  of  four  articles.  Article  IX  indicates 
the  way  in  which  the  total  export  quantities  and 
the  total  import  quantities  will  be  brought  into 
equilibrium  in  the  event  that  some  countries  fail 
to  participate  in  the  agreement  or  withdraw  there- 
from. Article  X  deals  with  adjustments  in  the 
guaranteed  quantities  which  may  be  made  neces- 
sary by  a  short  crop  in  an  exporting  country  or 
by  monetary  difficulties  in  an  importing  country. 
Article  XI  provides  a  method  whereby  an  in- 
crease might  be  made  simidtaneously  in  the  guar- 
anteed quantities  of  the  exporting  countries  and 
the  importing  countries.  Article  XII  provides 
a  procedure  whereby  the  guaranteed  quantities 
of  the  importing  countries  might  be  reduced  in 
order  to  provide  wheat  for  the  relief  of  a  critical 
need  that  has  arisen  in  another  importing  country 
which  is  a  signatory  to  the  agreement. 

Part  4  (Administration)  contains  seven  articles. 
Article  XIII  establishes  an  International  Wheat 
Council  to  administer  the  agreement,  provides  for 
its  constitution,  its  power  and  functions,  for  vot- 
ing in  the  Council,  and  for  other  related  matters. 
Article  XIV  provides  for  an  Executive  Committee 
which  is  to  be  responsible  to  and  work  under  the 
general  direction  of  the  Council.  Article  XV 
provides  for  the  establishment  of  an  Advisory 
Committee  on  Price  Equivalents,  article  XVI  for 
the  Secretariat  of  the  Council,  article  XVII  for  the 
payment  of  annual  contributions  by  the  exporting 
and  importing  countries  to  meet  the  expenses  in- 
cident to  the  administiation  of  the  agreement,  and 
article  XVIII  deals  with  cooperation  between  the 
Wlieat  Council  and  other  intergovernmental  or- 
ganizations. Article  XIX  relates  to  the  handling 
of  disputes  and  complaints. 

Part  5  (Final  Provisions)  contains  four  arti- 
cles. Article  XX  deals  with  the  signature,  ac- 
ceptance, and  entry  into  force  of  the  agreement. 
Article  XXI  provides  for  accession  to  the  agree- 
ment by  countries  other  than  those  which  are  its 
initial  signatories.  Article  XXII  relates  to  such 
matters  as  duration,  amendment,  withdrawal 
from,  and  termination  of  the  agreement.  Article 
XXIII  deals  with  the  application  of  the  agree- 
ment in  respect  of  the  overseas  territories  of  the 
countries  signing  the  agreement. 

Aside  from  the  altered  arrangement  of  articles 
and  the  changes  that  have  been  made  in  drafting, 
there  are  a  number  of  important  differences  be- 
tween the  terms  of  the  present  agreement  and  the 
terms  of  the  1948  draft.  The  principal  changes 
relate  to  duration,  maximum  and  minimum  prices, 
and  to  the  quantity  of  wheat  covered  by  the  agree- 
ment. These  differences  are  summarized  in  the 
following  tabulations. 

It  will  be  observed  that  the  minimum  prices 
Ijrovided  in  the  new  agreement  are  10  cents  per 

April  24,   J  949 


Duration  of  agreement 
and  quantity  covered 

1949 

1948 

Duration  (years) 

Quantity  (bushels)    .... 

4 
456,  283,  389 

499, 

5 
997,  000 

Price  and 

agreement 

1948- 
49 

1949- 
50 

1950- 

51 

1951- 
52 

1952- 
53 

Maximum: 
1949  .... 

$1.  80 
2.00 

1.  .50 

$1.  80 
2.00 

1.40 
1.  30 

$1.80 
2.00 

1.30 

$1.80 

1948  .... 
Minimum: 

1949  .... 

$2.  00 

2.00 
1.20 

1948  .... 

1.  50 

1. 

40 

1.  20 

1.  10 

annum  higher  than  those  provided  in  the  1948 
agreement.  As  will  also  be  observed,  the  maxi- 
mum price  is  20  cents  per  bushel  lower  than  under 
the  1948  agreement.  The  guaranteed  export  quan- 
tity in  the  1949  agreement  is  not  only  less  than 
that  under  the  1948  agreement  but  also  has  to  be 
shared  by  five  exporters  instead  of  three,  since 
France,  which  had  a  guaranteed  import  quantity 
of  almost  36  million  bushels  under  the  1948  agree- 
ment, has  a  guaranteed  export  quantity  under  the 
1949  agreement  of  slightly  more  than  3.3  million 
bushels,  and  since  Uruguay,  which  would  have 
been  neither  an  exporter  nor  an  importer  under 
the  1948  agreement,  has  a  guaranteed  export  quan- 
tity of  slightly  more  than  1.8  million  bushels. 

The  export  quantities  of  the  other  exporting 
countries  have  been  reduced  from  230  million 
bushels  in  the  1948  agreement  to  a  little  over  203 
million  bushels  in  the  1949  agreement  in  the  case  of 
Canada,  from  185  million  bushels  to  a  little  over 
168  million  bushels  in  the  case  of  the  United 
States,  and  from  85  million  bushels  to  80  million 
bushels  in  the  case  of  Australia. 

There  are  other  changes  in  the  new  agreement 
that  are  worthy  of  note.  Greater  attention  is 
given  to  outlining  the  general  philosophy  of  the 
agreement  (article  III)  than  was  the  case  in  the 

1948  agreement.  This  does  not  involve  a  change 
in  concept  so  much  as  it  does  a  change  in  presen- 
tation. For  example,  exporting  and  importing 
countries  under  either  the  1948  agreement  or  the 

1949  agreement  would  have  been  free  to  fulfil  their 
guaranteed  quantities  through  private  trade  chan- 
nels or  otherwise,  but  this  was  implied  in  the  1948 
agreement  whereas  it  is  specifically  stated  in  the 
1949  agreement  (paragraph  8  of  article  III). 

The  1949  agreement  also  provides  in  greater 
detail  than  did  the  1948  agreement  for  the  record- 
ing of  transactions  against  guaranteed  quantities. 
This  matter  is  dealt  with  in  article  IV  of  the  new 
agreement,  in  which  certain  principles  are  laid 
down  for  the  Council  to  follow  in  prescribing  rules 
of  procedure  for  the  recording  of  transactions. 


Tlie  1949  agreement  also  gives  more  attention  to 
the  way  in  wliicli  wlieat  Hour  may  be  bouglit  or 
sold  as  part  of  tlie  guaranteed  quantities  under  the 
agreement  and  of  the  criteria  which  the  Council 
shall  follow  in  settling  disagreements  which  may 
arise  between  cxportincr  and  importing  countries 
over  this  mutter  (paragraphs  1  (c),  1  (e),  2  (c), 
and  2  (c)  of  article  V).  Wheat  Hour  can  be  substi- 
tuted for  wheat  grain  in  fulfilment  of  obligations 
under  the^  agreement  if  agreed  to  by  buyer  and 
seller.  Where  countries  cannot  agree  as  to  the 
relative  amounts  of  wheat  grain  and  wheat  flour 
which  tliey  should  buy  or  sell,  the  matter  is  to  be 
settled  by  tlie  Couiicii.  In  settlmg  such  matters, 
the  Council  will  be  expected  to  consider  any 
circumstances  which  the  interested  countries  wish 
to  submit  for  consideration,  such  as  industrial  pro- 
gi-ams  of  any  country  that  might  have  a  bearing 
on  the  problem  as  well  as  the  normal  traditional 
volume  and  ratio  of  imports  of  wheat  Hour  and 
wheat  gi'ain  imported  by  the  importing  country 
concerned. 

The  1949  agreement  also  gives  the  Council  more 
latitude  in  placing  the  agreement  into  operation 
than  did  the  194S  agi-eement.  The  agi-eement  will 
enter  into  force  in  respect  of  parts  1,  3,  4,  and  5  on 
July  1,  1949,  provided  the  governments  of  import- 
ing countries  responsible  for  not  less  tlian  70  per- 
cent of  the  guaranteed  purchases  and  the  govern- 
ments of  the  exporting  countries  responsible  for 
not  less  than  80  percent  of  the  guaranteed  sales 
have  accepted  the  agreement  by  that  date,  and  the 
Council  may  fix  a  date  as  late  as  September  1.  1949, 
on  which  part  2  (Rights  and  Obligations)  shall 
enter  into  force  between  those  governments  wjiich 
have  accepted  it  (paragraph  3  of  article  XX). 
The  Council  is  therefore  given  a  period  of  as  nuich 
as  two  months  (July  1  to  September  1)  to  attempt 
to  readjust  the  totals  of  the  export  and  import 
quantities  if  difliculties  should  arise  because  of 
failure  of  some  of  the  governments  to  sign  or 
ratify  the  agreement.  Under  the  1948  agreement 
a  country  which  felt  that  an  insufficient  number  of 
countries  had  signed  and  ratified  it  to  insure  its 
successful  operation  was  permitted  to  withdraw, 
but  it  had  to  exercise  this  right  at  the  beginning  of 
the  first  session  of  the  Council  in  July.  Tlie  new 
agreement  permits  wtihdrawal  up  to  September  1. 
1949,  under  such  conditions  (paragraph  fi  of 
article  XXII).  thereby  permitting  the  Council 
and  the  various  countries  concerned  additional 
time  in  which  to  attempt  to  make  the  adjustments 
that  may  be  necessary  to  make  the  agreement  an 
effective  operating  instrument  if  certain  of  the 
countries  do  not  become  participants. 

Two  other  changes  of  minor  impoj-tance  are  the 
facts  that  the  United  States  Government  is  to  be 
the  depository  of  amendments  which  may  be  made 
to  the  agreement  as  well  as  of  the  original  agree- 
ment itself,  whereas  under  the  1948  agreement  the 
Wheat  Council  would  have  served  as  the  deposi- 
tory of  amendments,  and  that  the  article  on  terri- 
toi-ial  application  in  the  1949  agreement  is  drafted 


in  such  a  way  as  to  obviate  the  necessity  of  par- 
ticipating countries  listing  their  territories  in  re- 
spect of  which  the  agreement  is  to  apply,  as  was 
done  in  the  1948  agreement. 

There  have  been  deletions  from  as  well  as  ad- 
ditions to  the  new  agi-eement.  For  example, 
there  is  no  counterpart  in  the  1949  agi-eement  to 
article  VII  of  the  1948  agreement,  which  pro- 
vided that  the  Council  might  use  its  good  offices 
in  assisting  an  exporting  or  an  importing  country 
to  make  additional  sales  or  purchases.  There  is 
also  no  counterpart  to  article  VIII  of  the  1948 
agreement  relating  to  sales  for  nutritional  pro- 
grams. The  first  of  these  was  deleted  because  of 
the  belief  that  such  an  article  would  be  of  little 
importance  in  view  of  improvements  in  the  supply 
position.  As  to  the  second,  since  the  agreement 
applies  only  to  the  quantities  covered  by  its  terms, 
it  appeared  unnecessary  to  give  the  Council  any 
responsibility  in  respect  of  sales  made  outside  its 
terms. 

TJiere  were  36  signatories  of  the  1948  agree- 
ment. 3  exporting  countries  and  33  importing 
countries.  Of  these,  two  of  the  three  exporting 
countries — Canada  and  the  United  States — and 
13  of  the  33  importing  countries — China.  Colom- 
bia. Denmark,  Egypt,  Greece.  India.  Ireland. 
Lebanon.  Liberia,  tiie  Netherlands.  Peru,  Portu- 
gal, and  the  United  Kingdom — signed  the  agree- 
ment at  the  final  session  of  the  Wlieat  Council  in 
which  it  was  negotiated.  The  countries  which 
signed  at  that  time  accounted  for  more  than  80 
percent  of  the  wheat  covered  on  the  export  side 
and  more  than  fiO  percent  on  the  import  side. 

Forty-two  governments  have  indicated  their 
intention  of  signing  the  1949  agreement,  five  as 
exjjorting  countries  and  thirty-seven  as  importing 
countries.  As  indicated  earlier,  the  five  export- 
ing countries  are  Australia.  Canada.  France,  the 
Ignited  States,  and  Uruguay.  Three  countries 
which  signed  the  1948  agreement  as  importers 
have  shown  no  intention  of  participating  in  the 
1949  agreement.  These  countries  are  Afghan- 
istan, Czechoslovakia,  and  Poland.  Eight  coun- 
tries which  did  not  sign  the  1948  agreement  have 
indicated  an  intention  of  signing  the  1949  agree- 
ment as  importers.  These  are  Bolivia,  Ceylon,  El 
Salvador,  Israel,  Nicaragua,  Panama,  Paraguay, 
and  Saudi  Arabia. 

The  governments  signing  the  agreement  at  the 
close  of  the  Conference  this  year  represented  a 
higher  proportion  on  both  theexport  and  import 
sides  than  was  the  case  last  year.  Representatives 
of  all  the  exporting  countries  and  representatives 
of  2.5  of  the  37  importing  countries  which  have 
indicated  an  Intention  of  participating  in  this 
year's  agreement  signed  it  on  March  23  at  the  close 
of  the  Conference.  The  countries  which  signed  at 
that  time  rejiresented  100  jjerccnt  of  the  export 
quantities  covered  by  tlie  agreement  and  87  percent 
of  the  import  quantities  covered. 

Both  Argentina  and  the  U.S.S.R.  indicated  dur- 
ing the  Conference  that  they  would  not  i)articipate 

Department  of  State   Bulletin 


in  the  agreement.  Neither  was  a  signatory  of  last 
year's  agreement.  Argentina  was  represented  in 
the  negotiations  botli  last  year  and  this.  Its  re- 
fusal to  participate  in  either  agi-eement  was  ap- 
parently the  result  of  its  dissatisfaction  with  the 
maximum  price  provisions.  The  U.S.S.R.,  which 
had  not  been  represented  in  any  of  the  postwar 
wheat  negotiations,  took  an  active  part  in  the  ne- 
gotiations this  year.  Its  failure  to  become  a  signa- 
tory of  the  agreement  appears  to  have  been  largely, 
if  not  altogether,  attributable  to  a  disagreement 
as  to  the  guaranteed  export  quantity  which  the 
U.S.S.R.  should  have  relative  to  the  guaranteed 
export  quantities  of  the  other  exporting  countries. 

The  following  were  the  principal  factors  re- 
sponsible for  the  attitude  of  the  other  exporting 
countries  concerning  the  appropriate  size  of  the 
guaranteed  expoi-t  quantity  of  the  U.S.S.R. :  the 
share  of  the  U.S.S.R.  in  world  wheat  trade  since 
the  time  of  the  First  World  War,  the  quantity  of 
wheat  which  the  importing  countries  that  had  indi- 
cated an  intention  of  participating  in  the  agree- 
ment appeared  to  have  included  because  of  the 
anticipated  participation  of  the  U.S.S.R.,  and  the 
current  level  of  wheat  exports  from  the  U.S.S.R. 
in  relation  to  exports  from  the  other  principal 
wheat  exporting  coimtries. 

Prior  to  the  First  World  War  Russia  was  one 
of  the  world's  major  exporters  of  wheat,  its  ex- 
ports in  the  period  1909-13,  having  averaged  al- 
most 165  million  bushels  per  year.  Since  that 
time,  however,  U.S.S.R.  participation  in  the 
world  wheat  trade  has  been  on  a  greatly  reduced 
basis.  Its  annual  exports  averaged  approxi- 
mately 9  million  bushels  for  the  j^eriod  1920-29, 
approximately  34  million  bushels  for  the  period 
1930-39,  and,  as  was  to  have  been  expected  in  view 
of  the  Second  World  War,  its  exports  have  been 
much  lower  during  the  1940's  than  during  the 
1930's.  Its  exports  to  all  countries  are  believed,  at 
present,  to  be  at  the  rate  of  40  to  45  million  bushels 
a  year.  From  15  to  20  million  bushels  of  these 
exports  are  believed  to  be  going  to  countries  such 
as  Czechoslovakia  and  Finland,  which  had  indi- 
cated no  intention  of  participating  in  the  agree- 
ment. Accordingly,  exports  from  the  U.S.S.R. 
to  the  countries  that  were  expected  to  participate 
in  the  agreement  are  running  at  an  annual  rate 
of  from  20  to  30  million  bushels.  Furthermore, 
an  analj'sis  of  the  quantities  of  wheat  which  the 
importing  countries  had  shown  an  intention  to 
purchase  under  the  agreement  from  all  the  ex- 
porting countries,  including  the  U.S.S.R.,  indi- 
cated that  not  more  than  40  million  bushels  was 
attributable  to  the  anticipated  participation  of  the 
U.S.S.R.  Under  tliese  circumstances,  the  other 
exporting  countries  felt  that  a  guaranteed  ex- 
port quantity  in  excess  of  40  million  bushels  would 
mean  giving  up  to  the  U.S.S.R.  markets  which 
such  countries  had  been  accustomed  to  supply  and 
which  they  could  expect  to  supply  under  the  agree- 
ment. Because  of  their  desire  to  have  the 
U.S.S.R.  participate  in  the  agreement,  however, 

April  24,    7949 


the  other  exporting  countries  stated  that  they 
would  be  prepared  to  agree  to  a  guaranteed  ex- 
port quantity  of  50  million  bushels  for  the 
U.S.S.R.  The  U.S.S.R.  Delegation  at  first  pressed 
for  a  guaranteed  export  quantity  equivalent  to  20 
percent  of  the  total  quantity  of  wheat  covered  by 
the  agreement.  The  delegation  finally  indicated 
that  the  U.S.S.R.  was  prepared  to  accept  a  quan- 
tity of  75  million  bushels  but  refused  to  accept  a 
smaller  quantity,  altliougli  it  was  pointed  out  by 
representatives  of  some  of  the  importing  coun- 
tries that  a  figure  this  large  would  involve  a 
change  of  sources  of  supply  for  some  of  the  im- 
porting countries  that  might  well  cause  them  se- 
rious difficulties.  Representatives  of  the  export- 
ing countries  as  well  as  of  the  importing  coun- 
tries expressed  regret  that  the  U.S.S.R.  considered 
itself  to  be  unable  to  participate  in  the  agreement 
on  terms  which  would  have  been  acceptable  to  the 
other  signatories. 

The  Conference,  ju.st  as  was  the  case  last  year, 
realized  that  it  would  be  necessary,  prior  to  July 
1,  to  make  administrative  and  other  arrangements 
for  the  operation  of  the  agreement.  It  therefore 
established  a  Preparatory  Committee  for  this  pur- 
pose consisting  of  the  following  countries :  Austra- 
lia, Benelux,  Brazil,  Canada,  Egypt,  France,  India, 
Italy,  the  United  Kingdom,  and  the  United  States. 

As  indicated  earlier,  the  governments  have  until 
July  1,  1949,  to  approve  the  agreement.  If  the 
agreement  is  to  become  effective,  approval  by  July 
1,  1949,  by  governments  responsible  for  at  least 
80  percent  of  the  exports  under  the  agreement  and 
at  least  70  percent  of  the  imports  will  be  required. 
This  means  that  the  agreement  cannot  go  into 
operation  unless  approved  by  Canada,  the  United 
Kingdom,  and  the  United  States,  since  the  guar- 
anteed quantity  of  each  of  these  countries  is  in 
excess  of  one  third  of  the  total  guaranteed  exports 
or  imports,  as  the  case  may  be.  On  the  export 
side,  tlie  failure  of  France  or  Uruguay  to  approve 
the  agreement  need  not  seriously  prejudice  the 
chances  of  placing  the  agreement  in  effective  oper- 
ation, but  the  failure  of  Australia  to  approve 
would  confront  the  Council  with  very  serious 
problems  at  its  July  meeting.  Furthermore,  if 
only  a  sufficient  number  of  importing  countries 
approve  the  agreement  to  make  up  the  70  percent 
which  is  needed  to  place  parts  of  the  agreement 
other  than  those  relating  to  rights  and  obligations 
into  effect  on  July  1,  the  Council,  at  its  July  meet- 
ing, would  also  be  faced  with  serious  problems  of 
adjusting  the  guaranteed  quantities  of  the  export- 
ing countries  to  this  total. 

On  the  basis  of  last  year's  experience,  the  period 
April  15  to  July  1  would  appear  to  be  no  more 
than  adequate  for  obtaining  approval  by  govern- 
ments resiionsible  for  the  required  percentages  of 
the  guaranteed  export  and  import  quantities.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  fact  that  the  agreement,  in  its 
essential  features,  is  similar  to  the  1948  agi-eement, 
which  has  been  previously  considered  by  govern- 
ments, should  be  helpful. 


THE  UNITED  NATIONS  AND  SPECIALIZED  AGENCIES 


The  Problem  of  Voting  in  the  Security  Council 

By  AMBASSADOR  WARREN  R.  AUSTIN  > 


The  General  Assembly  has  before  it  at  this  time 
a  resolution  relating  to  the  voting  procedures  of 
the  Security  Council  approved  by  the  Ad  Hoc  Po- 
litical Committee  on  December  lU,  ll)4s,  in  Paris.- 

The  exercise  of  the  veto  power  on  a  number  of 
occasions  has  seriously  undermined  the  confidence 
of  member  states  in  the  ability  of  the  Security 
Council  to  maintain  international  peace  and  secur- 
ity. The  chronic  disagreement  and  deadlock  in 
the  United  Nations  is  a  matter  of  deepest  concern 
to  all  tiiose  who  wish  to  see  this  organization  func- 
tion as  it  was  intended — as  an  effective  instrument 
to  safeguard  our  common  interests  in  peace  and 
security.  The  use  of  the  veto  and  tlie  threat  of  its 
use  are  symptoms  of  the  prevailing  disagreement. 

All  members  of  the  United  Nations  liave  as- 
sumed definite  obligations  in  the  Charter.  These 
obligations  constitute  the  law  of  the  Charter  bind- 
ing upon  all  nations,  large  and  small.  The  per- 
manent members  of  the  Security  Council  cannot, 
through  their  special  voting  position,  evade  or  nul- 
lify these  obligations.  They  cannot  use  their 
privileged  vote  granted  by  the  Charter,  to  defeat 
the  Charter.  Under  article  2,  for  example,  all 
members  are  bound  to  refrain  from  the  threat  or 
use  of  force  against  the  territorial  integrity  or 
political  inde])endence  of  any  state,  or  in  any 
other  manner  inconsistent  with  the  purposes  of 
the  United  Nations.  If  a  permanent  member  at- 
tempts to  destroy  through  force,  the  political  inde- 
pendence of  his  neighbor  contrarv  to  this  obliga- 
tion, the  responsibility  for  the  violation  cannot  be 
avoided  or  obscured  through  the  casting  of  a  nega- 
tive vote  wlien  the  victim  takes  the  aggression  be- 
fore the  Council.  The  permanent  member, 
through  tlie  exercise  of  the  veto,  cannot  deprive 
members  of  the  right  to  defend  themselves,  nor 
take  away  the  legal  right  or  moral  duty  of  other 
members  to  come  to  the  aid  of  the  victim  in  de- 
fense of  the  Charter. 

The  i)ractice  of  the  veto  is  the  very  reverse  of  the 
unanimity  principle  in  the  Security  Council.  In- 
stead of  leading  to  agreement,  it  aggravates  differ- 
ences. It  provokes  ill  will  and  undermines 
friendly  relations  among  states  upon  which  tlie 
peace  of  the  world  depends.  We  must  reject  the 
idea  that  if  unanimity  fails  the  will  of  one,  however 

'Address  made  before  the  General  Assembly  in  New 
York,  N.  Y.,  on  Apr.  i:5,  ll)4!t,  and  rolcased  to  the  press  by 
the  U.S.  Mission  to  tlie  United  Xiiiioiis  on  the  same  date. 

'  Bulletin  of  Jan.  23,  liMit,  p.  'M. 


arbitrary,  prevails  over  the  will  of  many,  however 
reasonable.  The  unanimity  principle  cannot 
^york  where  agreement  is  offered  only  on  condi- 
tion that  the  will  of  the. most  intrans'igent  mem- 
ber must  prevail. 

To  insist  on  the  exercise  of  the  veto  regardless  of 
its  effects  on  the  organized  international  commu- 
nity and  to  reject  any  efforts  to  regulate  its  appli- 
cation under  the  Charter,  in  the  light  of  experi- 
ence, is  to  stand  in  the  way  of  effective  progress 
b}'  the  United  Nations. 

Looking  now  to  the  immediate  problem  of  im- 
proving the  functioning  of  the  Security  Council, 
we  have  before  us  a  resolution  which  was  jointly 
.sponsored  in  the  Ad  Hoc  Political  Committee  by 
four  of  the  permanent  members  of  the  Security 
Council— all  except  the  Soviet  Union.  Tlie  reso- 
lution incorporates  the  substance  of  the  recom- 
mendations of  the  Interim  Committee  of  tlie  Gen- 
eral Assembly.  You  will  recall  that  the  second 
session  of  the  General  Assembly  in  1947  requested 
the  Interim  Committee  to  make  a  careful  study  of 
tliis  problem  of  voting  procedures  and  to  report 
with  its  conclusions.  Two  sessions  of  the  General 
Assembly  hacl  considered  and  debated  this  prob- 
lem. A  majority  of  the  member  nations  had 
reached  the  conclusion  that  the  effectiveness  of  the 
Security  Council  to  fulfil  its  proper  function  in 
the  United  Nations  was  being  jeopardized  by  the 
abuse  of  the  veto  power  by  one  of  the  permanent 
members  of  the  Security  Council.  There  was, 
however,  little  agreement  on  what  measures  could 
appropriately  be  taken  to  improve  the  situation. 
Under  tlie  circumstances  it  was  considered  desira- 
ble that  the  entire  matter  be  thoroughly  studied 
in  a  nonpolitical  atmosphere  with  a  viewto  bring- 
ing about  a  better  understanding  on  the  part  of 
all  concerned  as  to  the  political  and  technical 
problems  involved.  It  was  hoped  that  such  a 
study  would  throw  more  light  on  the  problem  with 
less  generation  of  heat  than  would  be  iiossible 
in  the  General  Assembly  itself.  It  would  also 
bring  to  liglit  much  more  clearly  the  exact  areas 
of  agreement  and  disagreement  among  the  various 
member  niitions. 

The  results  of  the  study  are  now  before  us. 
Even  a  superficial  perusal  of  the  resolution  of  the 
Ad  Hoc  Committee  must  di.sclose  that  it  is  not 
designed  to  alter  fundamentally  the  unanimity 
jM-inciple  as  it  i.s  embodied  in  the  Charter.  A  very 
great  majoi-ity  of  the  members  of  the  United  Na- 
tions have  expressed  the  view  either  explicitly  or 

Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


implicitly  that  the  unanimity  principle  is  and 
should  remain  a  fundamental  principle  of  the 
Charter.  A  majority  of  the  members  of  the 
United  Nations  are  opposed  to  any  eilort  being 
made  at  this  time  to  amend  the  Charter. 

On  the  other  hand,  there  is  a  large  majority  of 
the  members  of  the  United  Nations  who  are  mak- 
ing an  anxious  effort  to  design  ways  and  means 
of  giving  life  to  the  unanimity  principle  and  mak- 
ing it  work  so  that  the  Security  Council  can  carry 
out  its  function  effectively.  The  working  of  this 
principle  requires  an  effort  on  the  part  of  all  mem- 
bers of  the  United  Nations  and  particularly  the 
permanent  members  of  the  Security  Council  to 
reconcile  their  divergent  views  on  the  basis  of 
tolerance  and  mutual  understanding. 

The  resolution  before  us  sets  us  on  the  path 
toward  this  objective.  It  represents  a  policy  of 
gradual  liberalization  of  the  voting  procedures 
of  the  Security  Council  through  processes  of  in- 
terpretation and  application  of  the  principles  of 
the  Charter  and  through  agreement  of  the  mem- 
bers of  the  Security  Council.  We  rely  on  proc- 
esses of  discussion,  definition,  regulation,  and 
practice  to  move  us  forward  toward  our  objective 
and  not  upon  revolutionary  change.  We  recom- 
mend restraint  and  self -discipline  to  member  na- 
tions in  accordance  with  the  letter  and  spirit  of 
the  Charter  as  an  appropriate  means  of  giving  life 
to  the  unanimity  principle  and  keeping  it  within 
proper  bounds. 

In  our  view  the  proposals  now  before  us  are  most 
moderate.  They  are  designed  to  be  within  the 
limits  of  what  is  practicable  under  prevailing 
world  conditions.  We  firmly  believe  that  if  the 
members  of  the  United  Nations  would  cooperate 
in  carrying  out  the  program  presented  in  these 
proposals  we  would  quickly  see  substantial 
improvement  in  the  effectiveness  of  the  Security 
Council's  operations.  You  will  recall  that  efforts 
by  the  Assembly  along  similar  lines  in  1946  have 
resulted  in  a  substantial  improvement.  I  refer  to 
the  suggestions  made  by  several  members  of  the 
Assembly  during  the  debates  that  abstention  of  a 
permanent  member  of  the  Security  Comicil  should 
not  be  considered  a  veto.  That  practice  was  adop- 
ted by  common  consent  in  the  Security  Council 
and  has  now  become  a  well-accepted  Security 
Council  procedure.  I  believe  all  of  you  will  agree 
that  the  adoption  of  this  practice  has  substan- 
tially added  to  the  effectiveness  of  the  Security 
Council.  A  number  of  important  decisions  of  the 
Council  during  the  past  two  years  has  been  ap- 
proved with  one  or  more  of  the  permanent  mem- 
bers abstaining.  At  least  one  Security  Council 
decision  under  chapter  VII  and  one  decision  rec- 
ommending a  state  for  membership  has  been 
approved  with  a  permanent  member  abstaining. 
Let  us  now  look  at  this  resolution  in  more  detail. 
The  work  of  the  Interim  Committee  ^  on  which  the 
resolution  is  based  revealed  the  great  potentiali- 


ties which  can  be  progressively  realized  under  the 
present  Charter  if  there  can  be  general  agreement 
upon  a  moderate  course.  By  adoption  of  this  reso- 
lution, the  Assembly  would  make  an  important 
decision  to  the  effect  that  34  specified  and  de- 
scribed decisions  of  the  Security  Council  are  pro- 
cedural. This  effect  would  principally  arise  out 
of  the  first  paragraph— "Recommends  to  the  mem- 
bers of  the  Security  Council  that,  without  preju- 
dice to  other  decisions  which  the  Security  Council 
may  deem  procedural,  the  decisions  set  forth  in  the 
attached  Annex  be  deemed  procedural  and  that 
the  members  of  the  Security  Council  conduct  their 
business  accordingly :" 

The  principal  criteria  for  placing  these  34  items 
in  the  category  of  decisions  deemed  procedural 
were — 

(a)  Decisions  under  procedure  provisions  of  the 
Charter ; 

( b )  Decisions  relating  to  the  internal  procedure 
of  the  United  Nations ; 

(c)  Decisions  relating  to  internal  functioning 
of  the  Security  Council ; 

(d)  Decisions  analogous  to  the  foregoing; 

(e)  Decisions  which  implement  procedural 
decisons. 

In  short,  the  Interim  Committee,  after  a  thorough 
study,  concluded  that  these  decisions  are  proce- 
dural in  the  light  of  the  express  language  of  the 
Charter,  and  of  sound  Charter  interpretation. 

This  first  paragraph  is  concerned  with  the  rever- 
sal of  a  tendency  toward  an  unwarranted  exten- 
sion of  the  veto  to  areas  where  its  application  was 
never  contemplated  by  the  Charter.  Its  purpose 
is,  also,  to  eliminate  undisciplined  use  of  the  veto 
contrary  to  the  assumptions  and  understanding 
under  which  the  privileged  vote  was  accorded  to 
the  permanent  members.  This  first  paragraph  is 
simply  an  interpretation  of  the  Charter  according 
to  its  letter  and  spirit.  It  amounts  to  saying  to  the 
Security  Council :  "The  proper  interpretation  of 
the  Charter  forbids  stultification  of  the  Security 
Council  in  the  cases  described."  In  a  w^ord,  the 
effect  of  this  paragraph  of  the  resolution  is  to  keep 
certain  enumerated  types  of  decision  in  the  cate- 
gory of  procedural.  Its  main  objective,  of  course, 
fs  to  give  life  to  the  purposes  and  principles  of  the 
United  Nations  in  accordance  with  which  the  Secu- 
rity Council  must  act  in  the  discharge  of  its  duties. 

This  resolution,  especially  paragraph  1,  would 
be  affected  by  the  structural  relationship  between 
the  General  Assembly  and  the  Security  Council. 
Article  24  provides : 

In  order  to  ensure  prompt  and  efEective  action  by  the 
United  Nations,  its  Members  confer  on  the  Security  Coun- 
cil primary  responsibility  for  the  maintenance  of  interna- 
tional peace  and  security,  and  agree  that  in  carrying  out 
its  duties  under  this  responsibility  the  Security  Council 
acts  on  their  behalf. 

=  Documents  and  State  Papers,  August  1948,  p.  340. 


April  24,   1949 


Tliis  preneral  giiint  of  functions  and  powers,  far 
beyond  the  specific  frrants  found  in  chapters  VI, 
VII,  VIII,  and  XII,  is  definitely  characterized  by 
tlie  very  next  paragraph  of  the  Charter: 

In  lUschnrfring  tlifse  duties  the  Security  Council  shall 
net  in  nrconliiiice  with  the  Purp<jses  and  Principles  of  the 
I'nitiHl  Nations.  .  .  . 

This  is  mandatory.  Conversely,  article  25  pro- 
vides : 

The  Members  of  the  United  Nations  agree  to  accept  and 
carrj'  out  the  decisions  of  the  Security  Council  in  accord- 
ance with  the  present  Charter. 

In  the  light  of  the  relationship  between  the 
Security  Council  and  the  General  Assembly,  by 
which  all  members  are  represented,  a  recommenda- 
tion of  this  nature  coming  from  the  General  As- 
sembly will  no  doubt  receive  particular  attention 
from  the  members  sitting  on  the  Security  Council. 

This  first  paragraph  does  not  al)ridge  tlie  luia- 
nimity  rule  of  voting.  On  the  contrary,  it  gives  it 
life — vitality.  As  I  have  said,  it  would  make  the 
Sectirity  Council  efficient  with  respect  to  matters 
in  which  it  is  sometimes  now  stultified.  It  is  pro- 
posed at  this  time  because  the  three  years  of  prac- 
tice in  the  Security  Council  has  developed  an 
unforeseen  and  willful  use  of  the  veto  based  on 
minority  interpretation,  contrary  to  majority 
decision. 

Now  I  shall  advance  to  paragraph  2  of  the 
resolution.  It  contains  a  recommendation  to  the 
permanent  members  of  the  Security  Council  that 
they  .seek  agreement  among  themselves  upon  what 
possible  decisions  of  the  Security  Council  they 
might  forbear  to  exercise  tlieir  veto  when  seven 
affirmative  votes  are  cast  in  the  Council  in  supjiort 
of  such  decisions.  In  seeking  agi-eement,  the  per- 
manent members  are  to  give  favorable  consider- 
ation to  the  list  of  decisions  compiled  by  tlie 
Interim  Committee.  The  theory  upon  which  the 
Interim  Committee  prepared  this  list  was  that  if 
the  permanent  members  could  agree  to  refiaiii 
from  using  their  veto  with  reference  to  such  deci- 
sions, the  Security  Council  would  be  able  to  per- 
form its  responsibilities  more  promptly  and  ef- 
fectively. The  types  of  decision  dealt  "with  here 
thus  differ  from  tho.se  contained  in  the  first  recom- 
mendation because  some  of  them  are  unquestion- 
ably of  substance  while  as  to  others  there  may 
be  differing  views  upon  whether  they  are  substan- 
tive or  procedural.  Indeed,  the  Interim  Com- 
mittee has  indicated  clearly  that  the  insertion  of 
decisions  in  this  list  was  not  governed  by  the 
criterion  of  their  procedural  or  nonprocedural 
character.  Tlie  most  important  decisions  con- 
tained in  this  list  are  not  procedural,  such  as,  for 
example,  the  decision  on  the  admission  of  a  new 
member  and  certain  pacific  settlement  nuitters 
under  chapter  VI  of  the  Charter.  In  this  con- 
nection, I  would  recall  that  the  United  States  is  on 
record  as  favoring  a  libei-alization  of  the  voting 
procedure  of  the  Security  Council  through  elimina- 


tion by  whatever  means  that  may  be  appropriate 
of  the  unanimit}'  requirement  with  respect  to  ap- 
plications for  membership  and  to  matters  arising 
under  chapter  VI  of  the  Charter. 

Neither  the  first  nor  the  second  recommenda- 
tion in  the  resolution  before  us  violates  the  spirit 
of  the  statement  of  the  four  sponsoring  powere 
at  San  Francisco.  During  the  debate  there  upon 
the  voting  formula,  a  questionnaire  was  addressed 
to  tlie  sponsoring  powers  by  the  smaller  powers. 
The  sponsoring  powers  theieupon  undertook  to 
make  a  joint  interpretation  of  the  voting  formula, 
insofar  as  such  an  interpretation  of  a  basic  con- 
stitutional provision  could  appropriately  be  made 
in  advance  of  its  adoption,  and  in  the  absence  of 
any  practical  experience  as  to  the  operation  of  the 
Organization  or  of  the  Security  Council.  This 
statement  is  not  a  treaty,  nor  was  it  intended  to 
be  any  part  of  the  treaty  which  is  the  Charter. 
By  its  own  words  it  is  characterized  as  a  "state- 
ment of  their  general  attitude  toward  the  whole 
question  of  unanimity  of  permanent  members  in 
the  decisions  of  the  Security  Council."  It  was 
connected  with  the  act  of  agreement  upon  the 
Charter  and  is  therefore  entitled  to  great  weight 
in  that  connection.  It  is  nevertheless  inferior  to 
the  Charter  and  must  be  subservient  to  its  prin- 
ciples and  purposes.  Certainly  its  natural  mean- 
ing should  not  be  extended  by  willful  obstruction. 

The  four-power  statement  contained  an  expres- 
sion of  hope  that  there  would  not  arise  matters  of 
great  importance  upon  which  a  decision  M-ould 
have  to  be  made  as  to  whether  a  procedural  vote 
would  apply.  Experience  since  San  Francisco 
has  shown  that  this  optimistic  expectation  has  not 
been  realized,  and  the  first  recommendation  is 
based  on  a  recognition  of  this  fact.  This  recom- 
mendation should  be  of  assistance  to  the  Security 
Council  in  determining  whether  or  not  a  questioii 
is  procedural.  The  four-power  statement  made  it 
clear  that  the  enumeration  of  procedural  questions 
which  it  contained  was  not  exclusive.  Further- 
more, it  in  no  way  foreclosed  advance  agreement 
as  to  what  questions  should  be  considered  pro- 
cedural. It  did  not  say  that  a  question  should  be 
considered  nonj)rocedural  simply  because  one  of 
the  permanent  members  so  regards  it.  The  four- 
power  statement  cannot  enjoy  a  position  of 
supremacy  over  the  Charter. 

The  four-power  statement  contained  another 
explicit  assumption,  which  has  proved  contrary 
to  fact :  that  the  permanent  members  would  not 
use  their  privileged  vote  "willfully  to  obstruct 
the  operation  of  the  Council."  The  powers  par- 
ticipating in  the  statement  thus  recognized  that 
self-restraint  upon  the  part  of  the  permanent 
members  was  necessaiy  and  to  be  expected  if  the 
Security  Council  was  to  function  as  intended.  If 
this  be  true  it  would  seem  quite  proper  for  the  As- 
sembly in  light  of  experience  to  recommend  to  the 
permanent  members  that  if  they  are  unable,  after 
genuine  effort,  to  achieve  unanimity  among  them- 

Deparfment  of  Sfafe  Bullefin 


selves  on  certain  decisions  not  immediately  con- 
cerning their  vital  interests  they  should  agi"ee 
among  themselves  not  to  exercise  the  veto  in  those 
decisions.  Such  agreement  among  the  permanent 
members  is  the  objective  of  the  second  recommen- 
dation. 

For  the  reasons  I  have  stated,  the  four-power 
statement  in  the  view  of  my  Government  consti- 
tutes no  barrier  to  such  agreement.  The  parties  to 
that  statement  are  free  to  explore,  as  this  resolu- 
tion attempts  to  do,  how  better  voting  procedures 
can  be  put  into  operation. 

The  third  recommendation  of  the  draft  resolu- 
tion suggests  to  the  permanent  members  a  "code  of 
conduct"  which  they  should  observe  in  connection 
with  their  privileged  vote.  They  are  to  consult  to- 
gether wherever  feasible  and  to  exercise  their  veto 
only  when  they  consider  a  question  of  vital  im- 
portance, taking  into  account  the  interests  of  the 
United  Nations  as  a  whole,  and  to  state  upon  what 
ground  they  consider  this  condition  to  be  present. 


All  permanent  members  are  on  record  as  favor- 
ing consultations.  We  believe  that  these  consul- 
tations should  take  place  whenever  there  is  a  pos- 
sibility of  obtaining  constructive  results.  These 
consultations  should  take  place  not  only  with  ref- 
erence to  specific  matters  before  the  Council; 
above  all,  the  method  of  consultation  should  be 
applied  as  one  of  the  means  of  implementing  the 
recommendations  contained  in  the  di-aft  resolu- 
tion. 

This  resolution  was  sponsored  by  four  perma- 
nent members  and  aroused  the  support  of  an  im- 
pressive number  of  member  states.  The  vote  in 
the  Ad  Hoc  Committee  of  the  General  Assembly 
was  j'eas  33,  nays  6,  abstentions  4. 

It  ought  to  gain  strength  in  the  vote  of  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly.  Its  purpose  and  natural  tendency 
is  to  make  the  United  Nations  more  effective  in 
its  vital  functions. 


U.S.  Participation  in  Continued  U.N.  Appeal  for  Children 

LETTER  FROM  SECRETARY  ACHESON  TO  SECRETARY-GENERAL  LIE' 


April  4,  mo 
ExcELLEXCY :  I  havc  the  honor  to  acknowledge 
the  receipt  of  your  note  dated  February  28,  1949 
in  which  you  indicate  a  desire  to  be  advised  of  the 
intention  of  the  United  States  Government  with 
regard  to  General  Assembly  Resolution  No.  215  III 
in  which  it  was  decided  to  continue  the  United 
Nations  Appeal  for  Children.  You  also  request 
information  as  to  whether  the  United  Nations  In- 
ternational Children's  Emergency  Fund  should 
maintain  contact  with  the  Campaign  organization 
which  functioned  in  the  United  States  in  1948  or 
whether  other  channels  of  communication  are  to 
be  followed. 

The  United  States  Government  and  the  Ameri- 
can people  have  a  deep  concern  for  the  plight  of 
needy  children  of  the  world.  They  have  shown 
this  concern  from  the  outbreak  of  World  War  II 
and  continuously  in  the  years  since,  through  the 
provision  of  funds  by  the  Congress  and  through 
voluntary  private  contributions.  The  United 
States  Government  has  appropriated  $75,000,000 
to  be  made  available  to  the  United  Nations  Inter- 
national Children's  Emergency  Fund  under  a 
matching  formula  of  T2%  from  the  United  States 
Government  and  28%  from  other  governments. 
In  addition  it  has  provided  funds  for  a  free  school 
lunch  program  for  children  in  Germany  and  has 
made  a  number  of  other  appropriations  for  for- 
eign relief,  a  large  part  of  which  has  been  of  bene- 
fit to  children. 

April  24,   1949 


In  addition  to  Government  appropriations,  ex- 
tensive contributions  have  been  made  by  the  Amer- 
ican people  thi'ough  voluntary  relief  agencies 
largely  for  the  welfare  of  children.  These  gifts 
are"^  estimated  to  approximate  $1,000,000,000  in 
value  since  1939  and  in  the  current  year  will 
amount  to  over  $150,000,000. 

In  the  light  of  the  interest  in  the  Fund  already 
demonstrated  by  the  United  States  and  in  view  of 
the  continuing  needs  of  the  children  of  the  world 
plans  are  being  developed  for  informing  the  Amer- 
ican people  of  these  needs  and  of  the  work  of  the 
Fund  and  for  giving  them  full  opportunity  to  con- 
tribute to  it.     These  plans  are  as  follows : 

1.  Responsibility  for  informing  and  enlisting 
the  interest  of  the  public  in  the  work  of  the  Fund 
will  be  vested  in  the  United  States  Committee  for 
the  United  Nations  International  Children's 
Emergency  Fund  under  the  Chairmanship  of  Mrs. 
Oswald  Lord.  The  Committee  will  also  maintain 
liaison  with  American  voluntary  agencies  to  assist 
in  coordinating  their  child  welfare  programs  in 
countries  where  the  Fund  operates,  with  progi-ams 
of  the  Fund.  The  activities  of  this  Committee 
will  be  carried  on  under  policies  developed  with 


'  Reply  to  query  from  the  United  Nations  Secretary 
General,  Trygve  Lie,  about  the  intention  of  the  United 
States  with  regard  to  General  Assembly  resolution  in 
which  it  was  decided  to  continue  the  United  Nations  Ap- 
peal for  Children.  Released  to  the  press  by  the  U.S. 
Mission  to  the  United  Nations  Apr.  4,   1949. 

SIS 


the  advice  of  the  Department  of  State  and  the 
United  States  Representative  on  the  Executive 
Board  of  the  Fund. 

2.  The  United  vStates  Committee  will  direct  its 
activities  especially  toward 

(a)  keeping  the  American  people  informed 
through  such  media  as  the  press,  radio,  magazines 
and  public  addresses,  of  the  needs  of  children  and 
of  the  operations  of  the  Fund, 

(b)  encouraging  and  coordinating  efforts  by 
groups  and  organizations  which  may  undertake 
to  make  or  obtain  contributions  for  the  work  of 
the  Fund,  and 

(c)  acting  as  the  agency  in  the  United  States 
through  which  contributions  from  voluntary 
sources  will  be  channeled  to  the  Fund. 

8.  In  order  to  carry  out  its  functions  the  United 
States  Committee  will  form  an  advisory  gi-oup 
which  will  include  representatives  of  business, 
labor,  farm,  professional,  religious,  patriotic  and 
men's  and  women's  clubs  and  associations.  It  will 
also  employ  a  small  salaried  staff. 

Official  relationship  between  the  Fund  and  this 
Government  sliould  continue  to  be  carried  on 
through  normal  governmental  channels.  How- 
ever, it  would  greatly  facilitate  the  work  of  the 
United  States  Committee  if  advice  and  informa- 
tional material  could  be  provided  by  the  Fund  to 
the  Committee  and  it  is  hoped  that  the  Fund  will 
maintain  close  informal  relationships  with  the 
Committee  for  this  purpose. 

Accept  [etc.] 

Dean  Acheson 

Secretary  of  State  of  the  United  States  of  America 


Resolution  Extending  Through  1949 
the  U.N.  Appeal  for  Children 

tJ.N.  res.  215,  III 
Adopted  Dec.  8,  1948 

The  General  Assembly, 

NoTiNc  the  widespread  response  to  the  United 
Nations  Appeal  for  Children,  the  large  number 
of  countries  which  have  co-operated  in  the  conduct 
of  national  campaigns,  and  the  co-operation  and 
support  for  the  Appeal  provided  by  non-govern- 
mental organizations, 

Recognizing  that  the  aftermath  of  devastation 
and  dislocation  resulting  from  Mar  has  revealed 
specific  needs  of  children  in  many  countries  and 
that  a  moral  responsibility  falls  on  the  peoples  of 
all  countries  to  act  for  the  greater  well-being  of 
children  throughout  the  world. 

Noting,  with  approval,  the  provisions  of  resolu- 
tion 162  (VII)  ado])ted  by  the  Economic  and 
Social  Council  on  12  August  1948, 

1.  Contiimes  the  United  Nations  Appeal  for 
Children  as  a  world-wide  appeal  for  voluntary 
non-governmental  contributions  to  be  used  for  the 


benefit  of  children,  adolescents,  and  expectant  and 
nursing  mothers  without  discrimination  on  ac- 
count of  race,  religion,  nationality,  or  political 
belief; 

2.  Invites  the  co-operation  of  peoples  of  all 
countries  to  assist  and  support  national  activities 
in  favour  of  the  Appeal; 

3.  Decides  that  the  proceeds  of  the  collections 
in  each  country  shall  be  for  the  benefit  of  the 
United  Nations  International  Children's  Emer- 
gency Fund,  and  that  the  name  United  Nations 
Appeal  for  Children  shall  be  used  only  in  national 
campaigns  which  are  conducted  for  this  purpose, 
subject  to  the  provisions  of  resolution  92  (I)  of 
the  General  Assembly  governing  the  use  of  the 
United  Nations  name  and  abbreviations  of  that 
name: 

4.  Requests  the  United  Nations  International 
Children's  Emergency  Fund,  as  the  United  Na- 
tions agency  eiitru.sted  with  special  responsibility 
for  meeting  emergency  needs  of  children  in  many 
parts  of  the  world : 

(a)  To  assist  in  the  conduct  of  national  cam- 
paigns for  the  benefit  of  the  International  Chil- 
dren's Emergency  Fund,  with  a  view  to  providing 
international  co-ordination  of  voluntary  govern- 
mental and  non-governmental  appeals  for  the 
benefit  of  children ; 

(h)  To  report  concerning  the  appeals  to  the 
ninth  session  of  the  Economic  and  Social  Council 
and  to  the  fourth  regular  scs,<ion  of  the  General 
Assembly. 


Opinions  of  International  Court  of  Justice 
Announced 

Statement  hy  Secretary  Acheson 

[Released  to  the  press  April  13] 

Two  opinions  which  have  just  been  announced 
by  the  International  Court  of  Justice  call  atten- 
tion again  to  the  effective  functioning  of  the  ju- 
dicial process  in  the  United  Nations. 

On  Saturday,  April  9,  the  International  Court 
handed  down  its  first  judgment  in  a  contentious 
case  between  two  states.  The  United  Kingdom 
had  sued  Albania  for  damages  resulting  from  the 
mining  of  two  British  destroyers  in  the  Corfu 
Channel  on  October  22,  194G.  AVhile  the  opinion 
has  not  yet  been  received  and  read  in  the  Depart- 
ment of  State,  the  Court  apparently  held  Albania 
responsible  under  international  law  for  the  dam- 
age caused.  Eleven  of  the  sixteen  sitting  judges 
concurred  in  the  decision.  The  Court  ditl  not  as- 
sess damages,  but  decided  to  hold  further  hearings 
if  the  two  parties  accept  its  competence  to  assess 
the  amount.  It  held  also  that  British  vessels  on 
one  occasion  had  violated  Albanian  sovereignty 
but  that  the  declaration  to  this  effect  by  the  Court 
constituted  adequate  satisfaction  to  Albania. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Yesterday  tlie  International  Court  handed 
down  its  second  advisory  opinion.  The  opinion 
was  rendered  at  the  request  of  the  General  Assem- 
bly on  the  question  whether  the  United  Nations 
could  sue  governments  for  injury  caused  to  the 
organization  or  any  of  its  agents  in  the  discharge 
of  United  Nations  functions.  The  Court  held 
unanimously  that  the  United  Nations  could  claim 
compensation  from  any  government,  whether  it  is 
a  member  of  the  United  Nations  or  not,  for  any 
damage  incurred  by  the  organization  when  the 
government  is  legally  responsible  for  injury  to  an 
agent  of  the  United  Nations. 
Palestine  Relief  Contribution 

[Keleased  to  the  press  by  the  U.S.  Mission  to  the 
U.N.  April  11 

On  April  11,  Ambassador  Warren  E.  Austin 
presented  Secretary-General  Trygve  Lie  with  a 
check  for  8  million  dollars  as  the  first  pay- 
ment of  the  United  States  for  the  relief  of  Pales- 
tine refugees.  A  contribution  of  16  million  dol- 
lars was  authorized  by  the  Congress  on  March  16, 
after  President  Truman  had  recommended  that 
the  United  States  contribute  50  percent  of  the 
amount  requested  in  the  U.N.  resolution  for  Pal- 
estine refugee  relief.^  t^  i   • 

This  resolution,  sponsored  by  Belgium,  the 
Netherlands,  the  United  Kingdom,  and  the  United 
States,  and  passed  unanimously  by  the  General 
Assembly  on  November  19,  1948,  requests  the  Sec- 
retary-General to  appoint  a  Director  of  United 
Nations  Relief  for  Palestine  Refugees,  and  urges 
the  member  states  to  make  voluntary  contribu- 
tions in  kind  or  in  funds  to  raise  32  million  dollars 
for  the  program. 

Statement  hy  Ambassador  Warren  R.  Austin 

The  conscience  of  the  world  has  been  aroused  by 
the  desperate  plight  of  the  Palestine  refugees,  now 
scattered  and  homeless  in  the  Middle  East.  The 
General  Assembly,  last  November,  considered  this 
problem  so  urgent  that  all  considerations  of  inter- 
national politics  were  dropped  from  the  debate 
and  a  resolution  to  request  the  member  nations  to 
contribute  to  the  aid  of  this  mass  of  unfortimate 
people  was  passed  unanimously. 

The  Unite.d  States  and  the  other  countries  who 
have  contributed  to  this  fund  act  out  of  humani- 
tarian concern  for  the  suffering  of  almost  a  mil- 
lion sorely  tried  human  beings.  But  they  also  act 
in  enlightened  self-interest. 

I  think  that  we  are  all  learning  that  the  plight 
of  suffering  people  anywhere  is  a  matter  of  con- 
cern to  all  of  us.  We  now  know  that  the  peace 
of  the  whole  world  is  threatened  by  unrest  and 
instability  in  any  part  of  the  world.  And  unrest 
and  political  instability  thrive  in  a  land  where  so 
many  are  without  the  barest  necessities  of  life, 
even  without  hope,  unless  we  give  it  to  them. 

AptW  24,   1949 


The  Assembly  resolution  states  clearly  the  gen- 
eral belief  that  alleviation  of  conditions  of  starva- 
tion and  distress  among  the  Palestine  refugees  is 
one  of  the  minimum  conditions  for  the  success  of 
the  efforts  of  the  United  Nations  to  bring  peace 
to  that  land. 

Therefore  it  is  particularly  gratifying,  at  this 
time  when  the  prospect  of  a  Palestine  settlement  is 
Isrighter  than  it  has  been  in  many  months,  to  add 
this  sum  to  the  gifts  of  other  peoples  for  the  relief 
of  the  Palestine  refugees. 

Current  United  Nations  Documents: 
A  Selected  Bibliography  ^ 

Security  Council 

Official  Records,  Third  Year 

390th.  Meeting:  15  November  1948.     No.  125.    29 

pp.     printed.     30^;. 

381st   Meeting:  16  November   1948.    No.   126.     56 

pp.     printed.     60^. 

3S2nd  Meeting:  25  November  1948.     No.  127.     29 

pp.     printed.     30(i. 

3S3rd    Meeting:  2    December   1948.     No.    128.    25 

pp.     printed.     30^. 
1949.     S/1234.     4  pp.     mimeo. 
Interim  Report  of  the  United  Nations  Commission  for 
India  and  Paliistan.     S/1100.     22  November  1948.     77 
pp.  and  28  annexes,     mimeo. 
Report    of    the    Administration    of    tlie    British/United 
States  Zone  of  the  Free  Territory  of  Trieste.    1  July 
to  30  September  1948.    S/1174,  January  5,  1948.    ii,  37 
pp.  mimeo. 
Letter  Dated  10  January  1949  from  the  Chairman  and 
Rapporteur  of  the  United  Nations  Commission  for 
India  and  Palsiston  Addressed  to  the  President  of  the 
Security   Council  Transmitting  the   Second   Interim 
Report  of  the  Commission.     S/1196,  January  10, 1949. 
35  pp.     mimeo. 
Letter,  Dated  30  November  1948,  from  the  Acting  Mediator 
to  the  Secretary-General  Transmitting  a  Report  Con- 
cerning  the   Deaths   of   United    Nations   Observers. 
S/1099,  2  December  1948.    10  pp.    mimeo. 

General  Assembly 

Official  Records  of  the  Third  Session 

. Second   Part  of  the  Report  of  the  United  Nations 

Temporary  Commission  on  Korea.  Volume  II — An- 
nexes I-VII.  Supplement  No.  9  (A/575/Add.4).  38 
pp.     Printed.    40«f. 

First  Part    of    the    Report    of    the  United  Nations 

Temporary  Commission  on  Korea.  Volume  Ill- 
Annexes  IX-XII.  Supplement  No.  9  (A/575/Add.2). 
304  pp.     Printed.     $3.00. 

Progress  Report  of  the  United  Nations  Mediator  on 

Palestine.  Supplement  No.  11  (A/648).  57  pp. 
Printed.     70^. 

Supplementary  Report  of  the  United  Nations  Special 

Committee  on  the  Balkans,  Covering  the  period  from 
17  June  to  10  September  1948.  Supplement  No.  8A 
(A/644),     iv,  17  pp.     Printed.    25^. 


'  BOTJ^TiN  of  Feb.  20, 1949,  p.  235. 

'  Printed  materials  may  be  secured  in  the  United  States 
from  the  International  Documents  Service,  Columbia 
University  Press,  29G0  Broadway,  New  York  27,  New 
York.  Other  materials  (mimeographed  or  processed  docu- 
ments) may  be  consulted  at  certain  designated  libraries 
in  the  United  States. 

517 


The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations 


[April  11,-22] 

Human  Rights  in  Bulgaria  and  Hungary 

The  Ad  Hoc  Political  Coniiuittee  of  the  General 
Assembly  on  X\^v\\  1!)  bepaii  consideration  of  the 
question  of  observance  in  Bulgaria  and  Hungary 
of  human  riji:hts  and  fundamental  freedoms,  in- 
cluding; relifjious  and  civil  liberties,  with  special 
reference  to  recent  trials  of  church  leaders.  Be- 
fore beginning  general  debate,  the  Committee 
agreed  to  invite  rei)resentatives  of  Bulgaria  and 
Hungary  to  participate  in  tiie  debate,  but  witliout 
vote.  Three  principal  draft  resolutions  on  sug- 
ge.sted  procedures  for  dealing  with  this  question 
were  submitted. 

A  Cuban  draft  proposed  the  establishment  of  a 
special  15-member  fact  finding  committee  to  eluci- 
date the  acts  alleged  to  have  been  committed  in 
Bulgaria  and  Hungary  against  human  rights  and 
fundamental  freedoms. 

,  A  second  draft  resolution,  submitted  by  Bolivia, 
proposed  that  the  General  Assembly  express  its 
"deep  concern,"  support  the  steps  taken  by  the 
states  signatories  to  the  peace  treaties  regarding 
the  accusations,  and  retain  the  matter  on  the  agenda 
for  the  fourth  session  of  the  Assembly. 

A  third  draft  resolution,  submitted  by  Australia, 
proposes  the  establishment  of  a  smaller  committee 
of  inquiry  to  investigate  tlie  matter. 

The  U.S.  Delegate  Benjamin  V.  Cohen  on  April 
19  stated  that  the  issues  involved  in  this  case  weie 
of  "intense  interest"  to  the  entire  international 
community.  There  was  no  intention  on  the  part  of 
the  United  States,  he  added,  to  interfere  in  the  na- 
tional affairs  of  Bulgaria  or  Hungary  or  to  favor 
any  i)articular  political  groups ;  however,  altlioiigli 
these  states  under  the  peace  treaties  had  under- 
taken to  safegiuird  the  civil  and  religious  liberties 
of  their  people,  they  had  violated  human  rights  in 
a  "deliberate,  systematic  and  continuous"  manner. 

The  Soviet  Deleofate  Malik  presented  on  AT)ri] 
21  a  70-minute  defense  of  human  rights  in  Hun- 
gary and  Bulgaria  and  asserted  tlie  trial  of  the 
churchmen  there  was  in  accordance  with  that  j^art 
of  the  two  peace  treaties  calling  for  disbanding  of 
all  "fascist"  organizations.  Mr.  Cohen  repudiated 
as  "baseless  and  absurd"  charges  that  the  United 
States  had  conspired  with  the  accused  clerg}-men. 
and  remarked  that  those  mIio  i)rofess  to  want  a 
friendly  and  peaceful  world  should  act  in  this 
spirit. 

Freedom  of  Information 

Continuing  on  ait  icle-by-article  consideration  of 
the  draft  convention  on  the  gathering  and  inter- 


national transniission  of  news,  the  General  As- 
sembly Social,  Humanitarian  and  Cultural  Com- 
mittee reached  agreement  on  six  additional 
articles.  The  Committee  also  voted  to  merge  with 
the  newsgathering  convention  the  second  draft 
convention  providing  for  the  establishment  of  an 
internati(mal  right  of  official  correction  to  provide 
])rotection  against  false  or  distorted  reporting 
likely  to  injure  friendly  relations  between  nations. 
A  Norwegian  projjosal  for  referring  disputes  over 
the  "right  of  correction"  provisions  to  the  Interna- 
tional Court  of  Justice  for  arbitration  was  also 
adopted. 

Full  access  to  news,  within  the  national  security 
limits,  would  be  provided  to  all  foreign  cor- 
respondents in  states  acceding  to  this  convention, 
according  to  the  approved  article  3. 

Article  4  provides  that  governments  should  not 
censor  peacetime  news  dispatches  going  abroad  un- 
less they  I'elate  directly  to  national  defense.  The 
United  States  Delegate  Erwin  Canham  said  that 
the  United  States  would  have  preferred  no  pro- 
visions at  all  validating  i)eacetinie  censorship  since 
this  Government  opposes  peactime  censorship  in 
any  form.  If  the  definition  included  in  article  -4 
were  not  included  in  the  draft  convention,  how- 
ever, Mr.  Canham  said  that  other  articles  might  be 
inter])reted  as  allowing  even  broader  censor.ship. 
The  Committee  rejected  an  amendment  proposed 
by  Poland  that  would  permit  censorship  "within 
tlie  limits  laid  down  by  the  laws  and  regulations 
providing  for  national  security." 

Article  h  provides  that  a  correspondent  lawfully 
admitted  by  a  contracting  state  cannot  be  expelled 
on  account  of  any  lawful  exercise  of  his  rights  as 
a  correspondent. 

Article  (>  gives  to  such  correspondents  or  infor- 
mation agencies  equal  access  to  all  transmission 
facilities  used  generally  and  publicly  for  news 
disjiatches,  and  at  the  general  rates. 

The  seventii  article  would  give  equal  rights  and 
o])portunity  for  dispatches  of  correspondents  and 
information  agencies  outside  a  particular  contract- 
ing state  to  be  transmitted  into  that  state.  A 
limiting  Polish  proj^osal  was  rejected. 

Debate  m\  the  final  article  was  delayed  until  the 
delegates  could  hear  from  tlieir  countries  concern- 
ing the  U.  S.  proposal  submitted  by  Mrs.  Roosevelt 
that,  in  view  of  the  apparent  conflict  between  ]u-o- 
visions  of  this  ai-ticle  and  the  sweeping  restrictions 
on  telecommunication  contained  in  the  Interna- 
tional Telecommunication  Union  convention,  sig- 
natories of  the  present  convention  waive  their 
rights  of  restriction  under  the  Itu  convention. 


Depatimen^  of  Sfafe   Bulletin 


International  Law  Commission 

The  Ilc  in  a  topic-by-topic  discussion  of  the  U. 
N.  Secretariat's  survey  of  international  law  in  re- 
lation to  codification  tentatively  approved  14 
topics  as  suitable  for  codification.  The  first  three 
were  selected  as  "priority"  items.  The  selected 
topics  included  law  of  treaties,  diplomatic  inter- 
course and  immunities,  consular  intercourse  and 
immunities,  law  of  state  responsibility,  law  of 
arbitral  procedure,  the  regime  of  territoi'ial 
waters,  the  law  of  nationality,  the  treatment  of 
aliens,  right  of  asylum,  recognition  of  states,  suc- 
cession of  states  and  governments,  jurisdiction 
over  foreign  states,  jurisdiction  with  regard  to 
crimes  committed  outside  national  territory,  and 
the  regime  of  the  high  seas.  The  Chairman,  Man- 
ley  O.  Hudson,  of  the  U.  S.,  in  suggesting  two  of 
the  three  topics  given  priority,  said  that  in  view  of 
past  faihu-es,  the  Commission  should  choose  sub- 
jects on  which  it  has  a  good  chance  to  arrive  at  a 
result. 

Among  the  rejected  topics  was  the  proposal  to 
include  the  law  of  war,  which  was  opposed  vigor- 
ously by  most  of  the  members.  In  the  discussion 
Mr.  Hudson  drew  attention  to  the  opinion  as 
stated  in  the  Secretariat  report  that  the  codifica- 
tion plan  should  not  include  the  laws  of  war  since 
the  United  Nations  Charter  excluded  the  concept 
of  its  legality. 

Italian  Colonies 

The  General  Assembly  58-nation  Political  & 
Security  Committee  continued  general  discussion 
on  disposal  of  Italy's  former  African  colonies  in 
seven  lengthy  meetings  during  the  week  without 
reaching  agreement.  The  debate  to  date  has  de- 
veloped, in  general  terms,  resulting  in  four  princi- 
pal types  of  proposals,  with  variations  Avithin  the 
categories.  The  Soviet  bloc  reconnnended  a 
United  Nations  trusteeship.  India  and  Pakistan 
have  supported  this  position  with  certain  modifi- 
cations. Italian  Foreign  Minister  Sforza  has 
made  a  bid  for  Italian  trusteeship.  A  large  num- 
ber of  South  American  states  and  some  Western 
European  states  share  this  view.  The  Arabs  have 
placed  emphasis  on  independence  for  a  unified 
Libya.  The  United  States  suggestions  supported 
by  the  United  Kingdom  were  that  Eastern  Eritrea 
be  ceded  to  Ethiopia,  that  Italy  administer  Italian 
Somaliland  under  a  United  Nations  trusteeship, 
and  that  Cyrenaica  in  Eastern  Libya  be  placed 
under  British  administration  regardless  of  the  de- 
cision of  whether  to  deal  with  Libya  as  a  whole  or 
in  part,  and  that  Libya  should  be  placed  under 
a  United  Nations  trusteeship  with  ])rimary  em- 
phasis on  achieving  eaidy  independence. 


On  April  20,  the  Australian  Delegate  suggested 
the  establishment  of  a  special  commission  with 
powers  to  visit  the  former  colonies,  and  if  neces- 
sary to  investigate,  analyze,  and  collate  data  and 
report  recommendations  foi'  settlement  of  the 
question  to  the  September  session. 

General  Assembly  Procedure 

The  Ad  Hoc  Political  Committee  of  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  approved  April  18  a  Scandinavian 
proposal  to  establish  a  15-member  committee  to 
consider  methods  and  procedures  for  expediting 
General  Assembly  functioning.  By  this  proposal 
the  special  committee,  of  which  the  United  States 
would  be  one  of  the  members,  would  report  to  the 
Secretary  General  by  August  15  and,  if  possible, 
to  the  present  session  of  the  General  Assembly. 
The  Soviet  bloc  abstained  in  the  voting. 

Commission  for  India  and  Pakistan 

The  UN  Commission  for  India  and  Pakistan  on 
April  15  presented  both  dominions  with  proposals 
for  a  truce  agreement  in  the  state  of  Jammu  and 
Kashmir,  pending  a  plebiscite  to  determine 
whether  the  state  goes  to  India  or  Pakistan.  The 
Commission  said  that  the  proposals  represent  an 
adjustment  of  viewpoints  within  the  framework 
of  commitments  already  entered  into. 

IRO 

The  Iro  has  announced  plans  for  opening  youth 
centers  for  teen-aged  displaced  persons  in  Austria, 
Italy,  and  the  U.S.  zone  of  Germany.  The  experi- 
mental center,  which  opened  in  August  in  the 
British  zone,  where  about  60  adolescents  of  both 
sexes  assembled  in  a  community,  was  so  successful 
that  similar  centers  were  planned.  The  stay  of 
the  young  people  in  the  center  is  expected  to  be 
short,  but  the  aim  is  to  give  them  in  addition  to  a 
general  knowledge  of  secondary  education  and 
language  training  a  basis  for  good  phy.sical  and 
moral  health  and  for  vocational  guidance. 

International  Trade  Organization 

More  than  500  delegates  and  assistants  have 
assembled  in  Annecy,  France,  for  the  largest  trade 
meeting  ever  convened  to  discuss  tariff  barriers 
and  other  problems  of  international  trade.  These 
representatives  from  34  countries  have  assembled 
under  the  auspices  of  the  23  countries  comprising 
the  original  contracting  parties  to  the  General 
Agreement  on  Tariffs  and  Trade,  which  resulted 
from  tariff  negotiations  held  at  Geneva  in  1947. 
It  is  expected  that  three  months  of  continuous 
sessions  will  be  necessary  to  complete  the  negotia- 
tions. The  United  States  is  one  of  the  original 
contracting  parties. 


AprW  24,    1949 


INTERNATIONAL  ORGANIZATIONS  AND  CONFERENCES 


Opening  of  Tariff  Negotiations  at  Annecy,  France 


Message  From  Secretary  Acheson  ' 

I  wish  to  take  this  opportunity  to  extend  my 
greetings  to  you  who  have  gathered  in  Annecy  to 
participate  in  tiie  tliird  session  of  tlie  contracting 
parties  to  the  General  Agreement  on  Tariffs  and 
Trade  and  the  ensuing  tariff  negotiations. 

The  United  States  Government  believes  that 
effective  international  cooperation  in  economic 
matters  is  essential  to  the  success  of  any  program 
for  assuring  a  lasting  peace  and  that  it  can  and 
should  take  a  variety  of  forms.  Moreover,  effec- 
tive international  economic  achievement  requires 
the  active  participation  of  many  countries  on  a 
cooperative  democratic  basis. 

We  in  the  United  States  firmly  support  and  par- 
ticipate in  the  economic  activities  of  the  United 
Nations  and  its  specialized  agencies.  We  are  also 
giving  special  help  to  the  countries  which  have 
chosen  to  participate  in  the  European  Recovery 
Program.  In  his  inaugural  address,  President 
Truman  recently  stated  that  the  United  States 
stands  ready  to  join  with  other  countries  to  pro- 
mote economic  development  by  facilitating  the  ex- 
change of  technological  information  and  stimulat- 
ing tlie  flow  of  capital.  In  his  Economic  Report 
to  the  Congi-ess  in  January  the  President  pointed 
out  that  the  Havana  Charter  for  an  International 
Trade  Organization  lays  the  foundation  for  a  re- 
turn to  reasonable  freedom  of  world  trade.  He 
is  expected  to  send  the  charter  shortly  to  the  Con- 
gress for  approval. 

On  a  par  with  these  cooperative  endeavors  and 
of  longer  standing  is  the  program  to  reduce  trade 
barriers  and  eliminate  discriminatory  trade  prac- 
tices through  trade-agreement  negotiations.  This 
program  is  of  great  value  in  its  own  right  and  is 
essential  to  the  permanent  .success  of  other  pro- 
grams of  economic  cooperation.  The  conclusion 
of  the  General  Agreement  on  Tariffs  and  Trade 
between  23  countries  at  Geneva  in  1947  laid  a  firm 
foundation  for  the  sound  expansion  of  trade.  The 
adherence  of  11  additional  countries  to  the  General 
Agreement  will  mark  another  important  milestone 
in  our  progress  toward  world  recovery.  I  send 
you  my  sincere  best  wishes  for  a  full  measure  of 
success  in  your  important  deliberations. 

U.  S.  Delegation 

The  Department  of  State  on  April  5  announced 
that  the  President  has  approved  the  composition 
of  the  United  States  Delegation  to  the  third  ses- 
520 


sion  of  the  contracting  parties  to  the  General 
Agreement  on  Tariffs  and  Trade  and  the  tariff 
negotiations  with  11  countries  desiring  to  accede 
to  the  General  Agreement,  which  convened  at 
Annecy,  France,  on  April  8  and  April  11,  1949, 
respectively. 

The  chairman  of  the  delegation  was  Wood- 
bury Willoughby,  Chief.  Division  of  Commercial 
Policy,  Department  of  State,  and  the  Vice  Chair- 
man was  John  W.  Evans,  Director  of  the  Com- 
modities Division  of  the  Office  of  International 
Trade.  Department  of  Commerce.  The  remain- 
ing delegates  were  the  other  members  of  the 
interdepartmental  Trade  Agreements  Committee, 
of  wliich  Mr.  Willougliby  is  chairman. 

The  meeting  of  the  contracting  parties  consid- 
ered various  technical  matters  affecting  the  pres- 
ent operation  of  the  General  Agreement  on  Tariffs 
and  Trade,  concluded  at  Geneva  in  1947,  and  fu- 
ture procedures  with  regard  to  it. 

The  tariff  negotiations  between  the  23  contract- 
ing parties  to  the  General  Agreement  and  the  11 
countries  which  desire  to  accede  to  it  extended 
the  area  and  volume  of  world  trade  covered  by  tliis 
unprecedented  agreement  for  the  reduction  of  ex- 
cessive trade  barriers. 

The  countries  which  negotiated  for  the  pur- 
pose of  acceding  to  the  General  Agreement  on 
Tariffs  and  Trade  are  Denmark,  Finland,  Swe- 
den. Italy,  Greece,  Liberia,  Haiti,  Dominican  Re- 
public, Nicaragua,  Colombia,  and  Uruguay.  Peru 
and  El  Salvador,  which  originally  planned  to  join 
in  the  negotiations,  have  indicatecl  that  they  are 
not  able  to  begin  negotiations  at  this  time. 

In  preparation  for  the  negotiations  the  United 
States  has  followed  the  customary  trade-agree- 
ments procedures.  Notice  of  intention  to  nego- 
tiate and  lists  of  products  on  which  possible  United 
States  tariff  concessions  may  be  considered  were 
published  on  November  5  and  December  17,  1948, 
and  public  hearings  were  held  by  the  Committee 
for  Reciprocity  Information  on  December  7-14, 
1948,  and  on  January  25-27,  1949. 

A  list  of  the  members  of  the  United  States  Del- 
egation follows : 

Chairmfin 

Woodbur.y  Willougliby,  Chief,  Division  of  Commercial 
Policy,  Department  of  State,  and  Cliairman,  Interde- 
partmental Trade  Agreements  Committee 

'Rend  at  the  ses.sion  by  Woodbury  Willoughby,  Chair- 
man of  the  U.S.  Delegation  on  Apr.  11,  1949,  and" released 
to  the  press  on  the  same  date. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Vice  Chairman 

John  W.  Evans,  Director,  Commodities  Division,  OfiBce  of 
luteruational  Trade,  Department  of  Commerce 

Delegates 

Philip  Arnow,  Economist,  Department  of  Labor 

Prentice  N.  Dean,  Division  of  International  Programs, 
National  Military  Establishment 

Iver  Olsen,  Assistant  Chief,  Commercial  Policy  and  United 
Nations  Division,  Department  of  the  Treasury 

Robert  B.  Schwenger,  Chief,  Regional  Investigations 
Branch,  Office  of  I-'oreign  Agricultural  Relations,  De- 
partment of  Agriculture 

Advisers 

Walter  Hollis,  Assistant  to  the  Legal  Adviser,  Department 
of  State 

Vernon  L.  Phelps,  Adviser  on  European  Commercial  Af- 
fairs, Division  of  Commercial  Policy,  Department  of 
State 

George  Bronz,  Special  Assistant  to  the  General  Counsel, 
Depai'tment  of  the  Treasury 

William  R.  Johnson,  Deputy  Commissioner  of  Customs, 
Bureau  of  Customs,  Department  of  the  Treasury 

Carl  E.  Christopherson,  Foreign  Service  Officer,  Office  of 
International  Trade,  Department  of  Commerce 

H.  P.  MacGowan,  Adviser  on  Trade  Agreements  Policy, 
Office  of  International  Trade,  Department  of  Com- 
merce 

Floyd  E.  Davis,  Acting  Head,  Livestock  and  Wool  Division, 
Office  of  Foreign  Agricultural  Relations,  Department 
of  Agriculture 

Lionel  C.  Holm,  Executive  Assistant  to  the  Administrator, 
Production  and  Marketing  Administration,  Depart- 
ment of  Agriculture 

F.  A.  Motz,  Attach^,  American  Embassy,  Paris 

George  B.  Rogers,  Agricultural  Economic  Statistician, 
Bureau  of  Agricultural  Economics,  Department  of  Ag- 
riculture 

Tariff  Negotiating  Teams 

Denmark-Finland 

Prentice  N.  Dean,  Head,  Division  of  International  Pro- 
grams, National  Military  Establishment 

Julean  Arnold,  Jr.,  Country  Specialist,  Division  of  Com- 
mercial Policy,  Department  of  State 

H.  P.  MacGowan,  Adviser  on  Trade  Agreements  Policy, 
Office  of  International  Trade,  Department  of  Com- 
merce 

SVPEDEN 

Avery  F.  Peterson,  Head,  Counselor,  American  Embassy, 
Stockholm 

H.  Arnold  Quirin,  Country  Specialist,  Division  of  Com- 
mercial Policy,  Department  of  State 

Grant  Olson,  Analyst,  Scandinavian  Section,  Office  of  In- 
ternational Trade,  Department  of  Commerce 

Italy 

Homer  S.  Fox,  Head,  Counselor,  American  Embassy, 
Ottawa 

John  M.  Kennedy,  Country  Specialist,  Division  of  Com- 
mercial Policy,  Department  of  State 

Carl  E.  Christopherson,  Foreign  Service  Officer,  Office  of 
International  Trade,  Department  of  Commerce 

Howard  F.  Shepston,  Analyst,  Italian  Section,  Office  of 
International  Trade,  Department  of  Commerce 

Greece  and  Liberia 

Horace  H.  Smith  Head,  First  Secretary,  American  Em- 
bassy, Athens 

C.  Thayer  White,  Country  Specialist,  Division  of  Com- 
mercial Policy,  Department  of  State 

Samuel  Goldberg,  Acting  Chief,  Near  East-Africa  Section, 
Office  of  International  Trade,  Department  of  Com- 
merce 

Dominican  Republic-Haiti 

Daniel  M.  Braddock,  Head,  First  Secretary,  American 
Embassy,  Madrid 

Amelia  Hood,  Country  Specialist,  Division  of  Commer- 
cial Policy,  Department  of  State 

April  24,   7949 

833209—49 3 


Albert  J.  Powers,  Chief,  Caribbean  Section,  Office  of  In- 
ternational Trade,  Department  of  Commerce 

Colombia,  Uruguay,  and  Nicaragua 

Howard  H.  Tewksbury,  Head,  Chief,  Division  of  River 
Plate  Affairs,  Department  of  State 

Elizabeth  McGrory,  Country  Specialist,  Division  of  Com- 
mercial Policy,  Department  of  State 

William  F.  Gray,  Country  Specialist,  Division  of  Com- 
mercial Policy,  Department  of  State 

Anthony  J.  Poirier,  Tariff  and  Trade  Agreements  Spe- 
cialist, Office  of  International  Trade,  Department  of 
Commerce 

Frederick  R.  Mangold,  Foreign  Service  Staff,  Office  of 
International  Trade,  Department  of  Commerce 

Consultants 

Ben    Dorfman,   Chief   Economist,    United    States   Tariff 

Commission 
G.    Patrick    Henry,    Economist,    United     States    Tariff 

Commission 
Willard  W.  Kane,  Commodity  Specialist,  United  States 

Tariff  Commission 
Hyman    Leikind,    Commodity    Specialist,   United   States 

Tariff  Commission 
Allyn    C.    Loosley,    Principal    Economist,    United    States 

Tariff  Commission 
David  Lynch,  Principal  Economist,  United  States  Tariff 

Commission 

Commodity  Specialists 

Thomas  C.  Mason,  Commodity  Analyst,  Forest  Products 

Branch,  Office  of  International  Trade,  Department  of 

Commerce 
William  H.  Myer,  Assistant  Chief,  Machinery  and  Motive 

Products  Branch,  Office  of  International  Trade,  De- 
partment of  Commerce 
J.  Joseph  W.  Palmer,  Chief,  Iron  and  Steel  Section,  Office 

of  International  Trade,  Department  of  Commerce 
Nathan   B.    Salant,   Chief,   Economic   Programs   Section, 

Textile  and  Leather  Branch,  Office  of  International 

Ti-ade,  Department  of  Commerce 
George  A.  Sallee,  Chief,  Dairy,  Poultry  and  Fish  Products 

Section,   Office  of   International   Trade,  Department 

of  Commerce 
Secretariat:  Sijerial  Assistant  to  the  Chairman 
Arthur  C.  Nagle,  Foreign  Affairs  Specialist,  Division  of 

International  Conferences,  Department  of  State 

Techiiical 

Technical  Secretary 

James  H.  Lewis,  Acting  Assistant  Chief,  Division  of  Com- 
mercial Policy,  Department  of  State 
Trade  Agreements  Committee  Staff 

Robert  W.  Shaw,  Foreign  Affairs  Analyst,  Committee  Sec- 
retariat Brancli,  Department  of  State 

George  C.  Spiegel,  Country  Specialist,  Division  of  Com- 
mercial Policy,  Department  of  State 

M.  Marguerite  Dotye,  International  Trade  Economist,  De- 
partment of  Commerce 

M.  Margaret  McCoy,  Divisional  Assistant,  Division  of 
Commercial  Policy,  Department  of  State 


Rubber  Study  Group:  Sixth  Meeting  Ends 

Tlie  Department  of  State  received  word  on 
April  5  that  the  Sixth  Meeting  of  the  Rubber 
Study  Group,  held  in  London  under  the  chairman- 
ship of  Sir  Gerard  Clauson,  K.C.M.G.,  O.B.E., 
Assistant  Under  Secretary  of  State,  Colonial  Of- 
fice, ended  on  April  1,  1949.  The  Vice  Chairmen 
were  A.  Pirelli,  of  the  Italian  Delegation,  and 
W.  A.  David,  of  the  Liberian  Delegation. 


The  meeting  was  attended  by  delegations  from 
Australia,  Belgium,  the  British  Colonies,  Burma, 
Canada,  Ceylon,  Czechoslovakia,  I)eiimark, 
France,  Hungary,  Italy,  Liberia,  the  Netherlands 
and  Indonesia,  the  United  Kingdom,  and  the 
United  States  and  by  observers  from  the  United 
Nations  Interim  Co-ordinating  Committee  for  In- 
ternational Commodity  Arrangements  and  from 
the  International  Rubber  Development  Com- 
mittee. A  representative  of  Siam  was  also  pres- 
ent. Donald  D.  Kennedy,  Chief,  International 
Resources  Division,  Department  of  State,  was 
chairman  of  the  United  States  Delegation. 

The  principal  objects  of  the  meeting  were: 

1.  To  examine  the  statistical  position  regarding 
the  production  and  consumption  of  rubber 
throughout  the  world. 

2.  To  review  the  world  rubber  situation  in  the 
liglit  of  tlie  changes  in  that  position  since  the  fifth 
Studv  Group  Meeting  held  in  Washington  in 
April,  1948. 

3.  To  consider  measures  designed  to  expand 
world  consumption  of  rubber. 

The  group  examined  the  statistical  position  and 
made  estimates  for  natural  rubber  production  and 
consumption  of  natural  and  synthetic  rubber  dur- 
ing 1949.  It  was  estimated  tliat  the  world  pro- 
duction of  natural  rubber  would  be  in  the  neigli- 
borhood  of  l,r)7r),000  long  tons  and  consumption 
of  natural  and  syntlietic  rubber  miglit  be  in  the 
neighborhood  of  1,450,000  and  450,000  long  tons, 
respectively. 

These  figures  make  no  allowance  for  govern- 
mental stockpiling.  Tables  1  and  2  give  the  esti- 
mates made  by  the  group. 

Much  of  the  time  of  the  meeting  was  devoted 
to  national  statements  by  the  delegations  present, 
and  full  opportunity  was  given  to  the  delegations 
to  question  one  another.  Among  the  subjects  to 
which  attention  was  drawn  were  the  present  eco- 
nomic position  of  the  producers  of  natural  rubber 
and  social  conditions  in  their  countries,  recent  ad- 
vances in  the  synthetic  rubber  industry,  the  grad- 
ing and  packing  of  natural  rubber,  and  the  costs 
and  prices  of  both  types  of  rubber. 

The  group  continued  its  policy  of  examining  all 
possible  means  for  encouraging  the  expansion  of 
the  world  consumption  of  rubber.  The  group 
recognized  that  a  great  deal  of  valuable  develop- 
ment work  on  existing  rubber  products  was  being 
done  throughout  the  world,  and  considered  that 
the  most  immediate  large-scale  increase  in  the  con- 
sumption of  rubber  would  be  achieved  by  an  in- 
tensification of  this  work,  particularly  in  certain 
fields. 

The  group  emphasized  the  great  importance 
which  it  attached  to  the  speedy  application  of  the 
results  of  research  into  new  uses  of  rubber.  In 
this  connection,  the  group  paid  a  tribute  to  the 
work  of  the  International  Rubber  Development 


Committee  and  invited  the  Committee  to  continue 
to  send  observers  to  its  meetings. 

The  group  were  informed  of  the  intention  of  the 
French  producers  to  grade  and  market  their  rub- 
ber on  its  intrinsic  properties  (to  be  known  as 
specification  rubber)  as  well  as  on  external  appear- 
ance. 

The  Rubber  Study  Group  will  hold  its  next 
meeting  some  time  during  the  second  quarter  of 
1950,  the  precise  date  and  the  place  to  be  decided 
by  the  management  committee. 

Tahle  1. — Estimated  natural  rubber  production,  19^9 

Territory :                 i,ooo  i,ooo 

long  tona  long  tons 

Malaya 700  British  Borneo    .        G2 

Indonesia    ....      500  Biiima 12 

Ceylon 90  Liberia 27 

Indochina    ....        45  Other  countries  .      139 


Total 


.  1,575 


Table  2. — Estimated  natural  and  synthetic  rubber  consump- 
tion, 1949 


U.S. A 

U.K 

France  .... 
Netherlands  . 
Belgium  .  .  . 
Czechoslovakia 

Italy 

Denmark.  .  . 
Hungary  .  .  . 
.\ustralia  .  .  . 
Canada.  .  .  . 
Other  countries 

Total    . 


Natural      Synthetic 


1,000  IrtT.Q 
tous 

600 

18.3 

97 

10 

15 

30 

33 

5 

3 

30 

40 

404 


1,450 


1,000  long 

tons 

410 

2 

8 


tow 

1,010 

185 

105 

10 

15 

30 

36 

5 

3 

30 

60 

411 


1,900 


'  Excluding  Russian-produced  synthetic  rubber. 
'  A  small  amount  is  expected  to  be  used. 

U.  S.  Delegation  to  Conference  for  Drawing  Up 
Convention  for  Protection  of  War  Victims 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  April 
11  that  the  President  has  approved  the  desig- 
nation of  Leiand  Harrison,  former  American 
Minister  to  Switzerland  and  Raymund  T.  Tin- 
gling, Assistant  Legal  Adviser,  Department  of 
State,  as  Chairman  and  Vice  Chairman,  respec- 
tively, of  the  United  States  Delegation  to  the 
Diplomatic  Conference  for  the  Drawing  Up  of  a 
New  Convention  Intended  to  Protect  War  Vic- 
tims. The  conference  is  scheduled  to  convene  at 
Geneva  on  April  21,  1949.  Other  members  of  the 
United  States  Delegation  are  as  follows : 

Albert   E.   Clnttenburg,   Jr.,   First   Secretary,   American 

Embassy,  Lisbon 
Brig.   Gen.   Joseph   V.  Dillon,   Provost  Marshal  General, 

Department  of  the  Air  Forces 


Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


Robert  W.  Glnnane,  Special  Assistant  to  the  Attorney 
General,  Department  of  Justice  _ 

Commander  Charles  Hunsicker,  Jr.,  Head,  International 
Law  Branch,  Office  of  the  Judge  Advocate  General, 
Department  of  the  Navy 

William  H.  McCahon,  Special  Assistant  to  the  Chief, 
Division  of  Protective  Services,  Department  of 
State  ,.      1,  ,    „ 

Maj.  Gen.  Edwin  P.  Parker,  Jr.,  Provost  Marshal  Gen- 
eral, Department  of  the  Army 

Harold  W.  Starr,  Associate  Counselor,  American  National 
Red  Cross 

The  Conference  will  consider  the  revision  of 
the  two  Geneva  conventions  of  1929  relative  to  the 
treatment  of  the  sicli  and  wounded  and  prisoners 
of  war,  and  the  revision  of  The  Hague  convention 
of  1907  concerning  naval  warfare,  which  is  com- 
monly referred  to  as  the  hospital  ships  convention. 
Also  to  be  discussed  will  be  the  establishment  of 
a  new  convention  on  the  treatment  of  civilians 
in  wartime. 

It  is  expected  that  the  forthcoming  Conference 
will  be  divided  into  two  parts.  The  first  four  or 
five  weeks  will  be  devoted  to  a  detailed  review 
and  final  drafting  of  the  proposed  revisions  of  the 
conventions.  After  a  short  adjournment  the  sec- 
ond part  of  the  Conference  will  be  held  for  the 
formal  signing  of  the  new  conventions. 

This  Government  participated  in  preliminary- 
informal  discussions  on  this  subject  at  a  meeting 
of  government  experts  convened  at  Geneva  under 
the  auspices  of  the  International  Committee  of 
the  Ked  Cross  in  April  1947.  At  that  meeting, 
14  countries  were  represented,  and  considerable 
progress  was  made  in  the  formulation  of  revised 
and  new  draft  conventions.  These  discussions 
were  continued  on  a  somewhat  broader  scale  at  the 
Seventeenth  International  Red  Cross  Conference 
held  at  Stockholm  in  August  1948,  in  which  49 
governments  and  51  national  Red  Cross  societies 
participated. 

American  Educator  To  Visit  Latin  American 
Law  Schools 

Philip  W.  Thayer,  Dean  of  the  School  of  Ad- 
vanced International  Studies,  Washington,  D.  C, 
has  been  awarded  a  grant-in-aid  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  State  for  a  visit  of  approximately  five 
weeks  beginning  March  31  to  six  of  the  other 
American  republics  to  confer  with  university  offi- 
cials and  others  on  problems  of  mutual  interest 
in  the  field  of  legal  education.  This  trip  is  in 
continuation  of  a  project  initiated  last  year  when 
Mr.  Thayer  made  a  similar  visit  to  the  Univer- 
sity of  Habana.  His  present  trip  will  include 
visits  to  the  principal  cities  of  Uruguay,  Argen- 
tina, Chile,  Peru,  Ecuador,  and  Colombia,  where 
he  will  confer  with  deans  and  faculty  members 
of  law  schools  and  with  other  leaders  in  the  field 
of  law,  concerning  arrangements  for  a  subsequent 
interchange  of  ideas  on  a  continuing  basis. 

April  24,   7949 


World  Trade  Week,  1949 

A    PROCLAMATION' 

Whereas  international  trade  provides  the  me- 
dium by  which  the  nations  of  the  world  exchange 
the  products  of  their  resources  and  skills ;  and 

Whereas  the  expansion  of  import  and  export 
trade  improves  standards  of  living,  encourages 
full  employment  of  labor  and  productive  facili- 
ties, and  speeds  the  development  of  human  and 
natural  resources  throughout  the  world,  thus  lay- 
ing the  foundation  for  lasting  world  prosperity 
and  peace;  and 

Whereas  the  United  States  advocates  the  re- 
moval of  unnecessary  restrictions  and  discrimina- 
tions in  international  trade  and  accordingly  has 
initiated  a  reciprocal-trade-agreements  program 
and  has  taken  steps  in  concert  with  other  nations 
toward  the  establishment  of  an  International 
Trade  Organization : 

Now,  therefore,  I,  Harry  S.  Truman,  Presi- 
dent of  the  United  States  of  America,  do  hereby 
proclaim  the  week  commencing  May  22,  1949,  as 
World  Trade  Week;  and  I  urge  the  appropriate 
officials  of  the  several  States,  Territories,  and  pos- 
sessions of  the  United  States,  as  well  as  the  munici- 
palities and  other  political  subdivisions  of  the 
country,  to  cooperate  in  the  observance  of  that 
week.  .   . 

I  also  invite  business,  educational,  and  civic 
groups,  and  the  people  of  the  United  States  gen- 
erally, to  observe  World  Trade  Week  with  cere- 
monies, exhibits,  and  other  appropriate  activi- 
ties. 

In  witness  whereof,  I  have  hereunto  set  my 
hand  and  caused  the  Seal  of  the  United  States 
of  America  to  be  affixed. 

Done  at  the  City  of  Washington  this  5th  day  of 

April  in  the  year  of  our  Lord  nineteen  hundred 

and  forty-nine,  and  of  the  Independence 

[seal]     of  the  United  States  of  America  the  one 

hundred  and  seventy-third. 


By  the  President: 

Dean  Aciieson, 
Secretary  of  State. 

THE  FOREIGN  SERVICE 
Confirmation 

On  April  6,  1049,  the  Senate  confirmed  the  nomination  of 
John  J.  Muccio  to  be  American  Ambassador  Extraordinary 
and  Plenipotentiary  to  the  RepubUc  of  Korea. 


'  Proc.  2834,  14  Fed.  Reg.  1663. 


523 


THE  RECORD  OF  THE  WEEK 


U.S.,  U.K.,  and  France  Reach  Agreement  on  German  Reparation  Program 


[Released  to  the  press  April  13] 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  April 
13  that  agreement  had  been  reached  by  the  Gov- 
ernments of  the  United  States,  United  Kingdom, 
and  France,  as  the  powers  responsible  for  occupa- 
tion of  the  Western  zones  of  Germany,  for  the  re- 
vision of  the  lists  of  capital  equipment  to  be 
removed  from  Western  Germany  as  reparation. 
This  revision  was  made  in  order  to  bring  the 
reparation  dismantling  program  into  harmony 
■with  the  European  Kecovery  Program.  Under  it 
those  plants  which,  if  retained  in  Germany,  can 
contribute  most  effectively  to  the  coordinated  eco- 
nomic revival  of  the  countries  participating  in  the 
European  Recovery  Program  will  be  removed  from 
the  reparation  dismantling  H.st. 

In  accordance  with  the  agreement  reached  by 
the  three  governments,  certain  equipment  from  15!) 
plants  previously  scheduled  for  removal  as  repara- 
tion will  be  retained  in  Germany.  The  amount 
of  equipment  which  had  previously  been  scheduled 
for  removal  from  these  plants  varies  from  a  single 
piece  of  equipment  in  a  plant  to  the  entire  equip- 
ment of  an  operating  factory.  The  removal  of 
equipment  not  yet  completely  dismantled  and  re- 
moved will  be  completed  as  quickly  as  possible. 

This  agreement,  which  constitutes  a  final  de- 
cision with  regard  to  the  removal  of  those  plants 
originally  selected  in  AVestern  Germany,  should 
enable  both  the  Allied  recipients  of  reparation  and 
responsible  authorities  in  Western  Germany  to 
plan  promptly  for  the  effective  use  of  the  equip- 
ment to  be  removed  and  that  to  be  retained. 

A  revised  list  of  plants  subject  to  reparation  has 
been  communicated  to  the  Inter-Allied  Repara- 
tion Agency  at  Brussels  by  the  three  governments. 

The  equipment  which  will  be  retained  in  Ger- 
many is  located  in  32  plants  in  the  steel  industry, 
88  metal  working  plants,  32  chemical  plants,  and  7 
plants  in  the  nonferrous  metal  industries. 

Only  5  of  the  32  affected  plants  in  the  steel  in- 
dustry produce  crude  steel.  The  retention  of 
equipment  in  this  industry  will  result  in  a  nomi- 
nal increase  in  the  crude  steel-making  capacity  of 
Western  Germany  of  165,000  tons  per  year  beyond 
the  present  theoretical  capacity  of  approximately 
13,300,000  tons  per  year.  The  limitation  on  crude 
steel  production  in  the  three  Western  zones  of 
Germany  of  11,100,000  tons  per  year  (being  a  total 
of  10,700,000  tons  per  year  in  the  Bizone  and 
400,000  tons  in  the  French  zone)  has  not  been 
changed.  The  difference  between  the  actual  pro- 
duction of  steel  under  the  limitation,  and  the 


theoretical  capacity  of  about  13,500,000  tons  per 
year  to  be  left  in  W  estern  Germany  is  required  for 
greater  flexibility  and  economy  of  operation  under 
conditions  of  changing  demand  for  finished  steel 
products. 

These  same  reasons  underlie  the  decision  to 
retain  the  equipment  in  the  steel-finishing  plants 
which  constitute  the  remainder  of  the  32  affected 
plants  or  part  plants  in  the  steel  industry.  The 
steel-finishing  capacity  in  these  plants  which  per- 
mits the  fabrication  of  plates,  sheets,  and  tuoes, 
in  addition  to  that  previously  permitted,  is  con- 
sidered necessary  if  Germany  is  to  use  her  crude 
steel-making  capacity  most  effectively  and  make 
as  great  a  contribution  to  European  recover}'  as 
possible  within  the  established  limitation  on  pro- 
duction. 

The  revision  of  the  list  of  plants  was  made  at 
the  suggestion  of  the  U.S.  Government.  In  pro- 
posing such  a  revision,  the  United  States  believed 
it  appropriate  that  account  be  taken  in  the  repara- 
tion program  of  the  European  Recovery  Program 
and  the  participation  of  Western  Germany  in  that 
program.  The  reparation  program  was  designed 
to  bring  about  the  removal  of  capital  equipment 
to  Allied  countries,  where  it  could  be  usefully  em- 
ployed, when  this  equipment  is  in  excess  of  Ger- 
man peaceful  needs.  The  U.S.  Government  felt 
that,  in  view  of  the  possibilit}'  which  the  Euro- 
pean Recover}'  Program  offered  for  meeting  the 
new  investment  requirements  of  the  Allied  coun- 
tries to  an  increased  extent  from  new  capital 
equipment,  and  of  the  possibility  of  more  effec- 
tive use  of  German  resources  in  the  interest  of 
the  common  good  of  the  countries  participating 
in  the  European  Recovery  Program,  a  reexami- 
nation of  the  reparation  program  would  be  ap- 
propriate. ERP  also  offered  new  possibilities  of 
achieving  one  of  the  aims  of  the  reparation  pro- 
gram, namely  the  rehabilitation  of  the  economies 
of  the  European  countries  which  had  been  dis- 
located during  the  war. 

A  preliminary  examination  of  the  list  of  plants 
scheduled  for  removal  led  the  U.S.  Government 
to  select  381  for  further  study.  This  study  was 
made  by  the  Humphrey  Committee  (Industrial 
Advisory  Committee),  appointed  by  Paul  Hoff- 
man, Economic  Cooperation  Administrator.  Mr. 
Hoffman  had  been  charged  by  the  Congress  with 
making  .such  a  study  in  section  115  (f)  of  the  Eco- 
nomic Cooperation  Act,  reading  as  follows: 

Thp  .Vdministrator  will  request  the  Secretary  of  State 
to  obtain  agreement  of  those  countries  concernpfl  that  such 
capital  equipment  as  is  scheduled  for  removal  from  the 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


three  western  zones  of  Germany  be  retained  in  Germany  if 
such  retention  will  most  effectively  serve  the  purposes  of 
the  European  recovery  program. 

This  Committee  was  headed  by  George  M.  Hum- 
phrey, President  of  M.  A.  Haiina  Company,  and 
included  Frederick  V.  Geier,  President  of  Cin- 
cinnati Milling  Machine  Company;  John  L.  Mc- 
Caffrey, President  of  International  Harvester 
Company;  Gwilym  A.  Price,  President  of  West- 
inghouse  Electric  &  Manufacturing  Company; 
and  Charles  E.  Wilson,  President  of  General 
Motors  Corporation. 

The  Committee  in  turn  engaged  the  services  of 
four  leading  engineering  firms  to  make  a  factual 
review  of  the  chemical,  laonferrous  metal,  and  me- 
chanical engineering  plants.  They  also  obtained 
the  assistance  of  George  Wolf,  president  of  the 
United  States  Steel  Export  Corporation,  and  a 
group  of  his  associates,  to  review  the  steel  indus- 
try of  A^'^estern  Germany  and  to  investigate  the 
particular  plants  scheduled  for  reparation. 

After  a  careful  examination  of  the  plants  and 
consultation  with  British  and  French  experts, 
the  Committee  submitted  a  report  to  the  ECA  Ad- 
ministrator on  January  12,  1949,  recommending 
the  retention  in  Germany  of  certain  equipment  in 
167  plants  of  the  381  which  it  has  been  requested 
to  examine.  The  report  of  the  Committee  was  ap- 
proved by  the  Administrator  who  requested  the 
Secretary  of  State  to  seek  the  agreement  of  the 
British  and  French  Governments,  as  powers  in 
occupation  in  Western  Germany,  to  the  retention 
of  these  plants  in  Germanj^  The  Humphrey 
Committee  report  is  being  made  public  on  April 
13  by  ECA. 

Discussion  among  the  governments  resulted  in 
agreement  to  remove  from  Germany  the  equip- 
ment in  eight  plants  and  part  of  a  ninth  which 
the  Humphrey  Committee  had  recommended  be 
retained  in  Germany. 

In  addition  to  certain  equipment  in  the  159 
plants  to  be  retained  under  the  present  agreement, 
the  French  Government,  before  the  Humphrey 
Committee  recommendations  had  been  formu- 
lated, decided  to  retain  in  the  French  zone  equip- 
ment in  40  other  plants  or  parts  of  plants  which 
had  been  included  in  the  list  of  381  examined  by 
the  Humphrey  Committee. 

The  report  of  the  Committee  was  discussed  by 
the  three  Governments  in  conjunction  with  a  re- 
port from  the  Military  Governors  of  the  Western 
zones  of  Germany  on  a  revised  list  of  prohibitions 
and  restrictions  which  should  be  applied  to  Ger- 
man industry  on  security  grounds.  As  a  result 
of  tliese  discussions,  coordinated  agreements  were 
reached  by  the  three  Governments  on  these  sub- 


jects. The  revised  list  of  prohibited  and  re- 
stricted industries,  which  has  been  furnished  to  the 
three  military  governments  for  implementation, 
will  be  made  public  shortly. 

The  Humphrey  Committee  recommended  that 
the  following  plants  be  included  among  those  re- 
tained in  Germany.  However,  in  the  course  of 
discussions  among  the  Governments  of  France, 
the  United  Kingdom,  and  United  States,  it  was 
agreed  that  these  plants  should  be  removed  from 
Germany.     The  list  follows: 

Bochumer  Verein  GusstaUfabrik,  Bochum; 
Deutsche  Edelstahlwerke  (Tiegelstahl),  Bochum; 
Klockner  Werke  A.G.,  Dusseldorf;  August 
Thyssen  Hiitte,  A.  G.  ^Tiederrheinische,  Duisburg ; 
Hoesch  A.  G.,  Hohenlimburg;  I.  G.  Farben,  buna 
plant,  Ludwigshafen;  I.  G.  Farben,  synthetic  am- 
monia plant,  Oppau;  and  I.  G.  Farben,  chlorine 
and  caustic-soda  plant,  Ludwigshafen.  The 
final  decision  on  the  August  Thyssen  Hiitte  plant 
at  Hamborn  was  to  retain  only  the  ore  sintering 
and  power  generation  equipment. 


Organization  of  Ruhr  Autiiority 

Statement  hy  Secretary  Acheson 

[Released  to  the  press  April  13] 

The  organization  of  the  International  Author- 
ity for  the  Ruhr  will  commence  as  soon  as  the 
agreement  of  December  28,  reached  in  London 
and  recently  approved  by  the  three  Foreign  Min- 
isters at  their  meeting  here  in  Washington,  has 
been  formally  signed  in  London.^ 

Once  the  agreement  has  been  signed,  an  organi- 
zation meeting  will  be  summoned  by  the  United 
Kingdom.  This  meeting  will  probably  take 
place  in  London.  At  this  meeting  the  organiza- 
tion of  the  Ruhr  Authority  will  be  worked  out  in 
detail.  It  is  agreed  that  the  Ruhr  Authority  will 
not  begin  exercising  its  functions  until  just  before 
the  German  Federal  Republic  has  been  established. 
It  was  also  difficult  to  do  so  until  the  Occupation 
Statute  and  the  German  Constitution  had  made 
further  progress.  There  is  therefore  ample  time 
for  the  organization  of  the  Ruhr  Authority  to  be 
perfected. 

The  United  States  member  on  the  Council  of 
the  International  Authority  for  the  Ruhr  has  not 
yet  been  selected. 


^  For  related  materials  see  Bulletin  of  June  20,  1948, 
p.  807  ;  Jan.  9, 1949,  p.  43 ;  Apr.  3, 1949,  p.  427 ;  and  Apr.  17, 
1949,  p.  499. 


April  24,   1949 


Occupation  Statute  as  a  Practicable  Basis  of  Cooperation 
With  Future  German  Government 


STATEMENT  BY  SECRETARY  ACHESON 


[Released  to  the  press  April  13] 

Our  information  indicates  that  the  preliminary 
German  reaction  to  the  Occupation  Statute  lias 
not  been  unfav()ral)le.  "We  expect  tliat  there  will 
be  increased  understanding  as  the  German  politi- 
cal leaders  and  public  have  a  chance  to  examine 
the  background  against  which  the  Washington 
agreements  were  made  and  the  purpose  thev  are 
meant  to  serve. 

The  Occupation  Statute  sets  forth  the  maxi- 
mum powers  which  the  Allied  authorities  mean 
to  reserve.*  The  key  issue  for  the  future  will  be 
the  manner  and  extent  to  which  the  Allied  au- 
thorities will  exercise  their  powers.  In  this  con- 
nection, I  .should  like  to  point  out  that  the  three 
Governments  had  in  mind  establishing  a  practi- 
cable basis  of  cooperation  with  the  future  Federal 
German  Government  and  declai-ed  it  to  be  a 
major  objective  to  facilitate  the  closest  integra- 
tion of  the  German  people  under  their  own  gov- 
ernment within  the  framework  of  European  as- 
sociation. 

I  have  noted  the  fears  expressed  that  the  occu- 
pying countries  would  use  their  powers  to  sup- 
jjress    future    German    industrial     competition. 


This  is  a  baseless  assumption,  since  it  has  always 
been  our  aim  to  make  Germany  self-sufficient  to 
the  greatest  possible  degree  in  order  to  reduce  the 
need  for  outside  assistance. 

The  retention  of  control  over  research  is  a 
justifiable  adjunct  of  continued  German  dcmili- 
laiization,  and  this  is  the  context  in  which  the 
pertinent  ])rovision  of  the  Occupation  Statute 
was  framed. 

As  regards  control  over  foreign  trade,  this  is  a 
protection  of  direct  benefit  to  the  German  admin- 
istration itself,  since  we  must  assure  ourselves 
that  the  funds  we  are  supplying  are  properly 
used  and  are  not  squandered.  In  the  meantime 
we  will,  of  course,  permit  and  encourage  the  Ger- 
mans to  develop  their  own  foreign  trade  resources 
so  that  they  themselves  may  contribute  as  far  as 
possible  to  their  own  support  and  to  the  produc- 
tion of  goods  for  the  benefit  of  Europe  as  a  whole. 

With  resjject  to  the  Basic  Law,  certain  features 
of  which  are  still  under  discussion,  our  interest  is 
that  a  solution  will  be  found  preserving  the  fed- 
eral character  of  tlie  government  which  the  Ger- 
mans have  been  authorized  to  set  up,  and  we  hope 
that  earlj-  agreement  can  be  reached  on  this  issue. 


U.S.,  U.K.,  and  France  Announce  Agreement  on  Limitations 
on  Certain  Industries  in  Germany 


[Released  to  the  press  jointly  with 
the  Department  of  the  Army  April  13] 

The  Departments  of  State  and  Army  made 
public  the  text  of  an  agreement  which  was  an- 
nounced on  A])ril  13  by  the  Military  Governors  of 
the  United  vStates,  the  United  Kingdom,  and 
France,  in  (Jermany,  regarding  limitations  to  be 
placed  upon  certain  industries  in  (lermany  in  the 
interest  of  security.  The  agreement  embodies 
recommendations  recently  formulated  by  repre- 
sentatives of  the  three  Governments  in  London  and 


'For  text  of  statute  see  Bulleti.n  of  Apr.  17,  li)49,  p. 


500. 
526 


approved  by  the  three  Foreign  Ministers  on  April 
8.  19-tO,  in  Washington,  as  part  of  the  general 
agreement  which  they  reached  regarding  Ger- 
many, in  order  to  permit  the  establishment  of  a 
Cierman  Federal  (lovernment  which  could  form 
a  i)art  of  the  European  community. 

The  question  of  prohibited  and  restricted  in- 
dustries was  considered  by  the  three  Governments 
in  conjunction  with  the  review  of  the  reparation 
ilismantling  program  to  bring  that  program  into 
harmony  with  the  European  Recovery  Program. 
In  consequence,  coordinated  agreements  were 
reached  by  the  three  Governments  on  both  subjects. 

Department   of  State   Bulletin 


A  separate  announcement  was  made  with  regard 
to  reparations.^ 

Pursuant  to  instructions  received  from  their 
respective  governments  to  conchide  the  agreement 
hereinafter  set  forth,  concerning  proliibited  and 
limited  industries  in  tlie  United  States,  United 
Kingdom  and  Frencli  Occupied  Areas  of  Germany 
(hereinafter  referred  to  for  the  purposes  of  tliis 
Agreement  as  German}'),  the  United  States, 
United  Kingdom  and  French  Military  Governors 
and  Commanders-in-Chief  hereby  promulgate  the 
following  agreement,  effective  forthwith: 

Article  I 

The  prohibitions  laid  down  in  this  Agreement 
shall  remain  in  force  until  the  peace  settlement. 

The  limitations  laid  down  in  this  Agreement 
shall  remain  in  force  until  1st  January,  1953,  or 
until  the  peace  settlement,  whichever  is  the  earlier, 
and  thereafter  as  may  be  agreed. 

Should  no  peace  settlement  have  been  concluded 
by  30th  June,  1952,  the  Military  Governors  shall 
forthwith  review  these  limitations  in  the  light  of 
the  conditions  then  prevailing,  taking  into  account 
the  requirements  of  security  of  the  Allied  Powers, 
the  state  and  effectiveness  of  the  arrangements 
made  to  preserve  security,  and  the  requirements  of 
European  Recovery.  Should  the  Militarj'  Gov- 
ernors be  unable  within  90  days  from  30th  June, 
1952,  to  reach  agreement  on  the  limitations  which 
in  the  absence  of  an  earlier  peace  settlement  shall 
be  continued  after  1st  January,  1953,  the  matter 
shall  be  considered  forthwith  by  the  three 
Governments. 

Article  II 

Action  within  the  discretion  of  the  Military 
Governors  under  the  terms  of  the  Agi-eement 
shall  be  taken  by  unanimous  decision. 

Article  III 

The  production  or  manufacture  of  the  follow- 
ing substances  and  war  materials  shall  be  pro- 
hibited, and  all  plants  and  equipment  for  tlieir 
production  or  manufacture  not  already  removed 
or  destroyed  shall,  as  soon  as  possible,  be  re- 
moved from  Germany  or  destroyed. 

(a)  The  items  listed  in  Schedule  A  to  Control 
Council  Law  No.  -±3  (at  Annex  A) 

(6)  Primary  Magnesium 

(r)   Beryllium 

Article  IV 

The  production,  import,  export,  transijort, 
storage,  use  and  i^ossession  of  radioactive  mate- 
rials will  be  the  subject  of  legislation  by  the  Mili- 
tary Governors. 

Article  V 

1.  The  production  of  synthetic  rubber  and  bu- 
tadiene shall  be  prohibited. 

April  24,   1949 


2.  In  order  to  give  effect  to  the  foregoing  pro- 
hibitions, facilities  for  copolymerization,  facili- 
ties for  research  and  testing  of  synthetic  rubber, 
and  facilities  for  the  production  of  butadiene  at  the 
Huls,  Ludwigshafen  and  Leverkusen  plants  shall 
be  removed  or  destroyed. 

Article  VI 

1.  The  production  of  petrol,  oil  and  lubricants 
directly  or  indirectly  from  coal  or  brown  coal 
by  the  Bergius  hydrogenation  process,  the 
Fischer-Tropsch  synthesis,  or  analogous  proces- 
ses, shall  be  prohibited  except,  temporarily,  to 
the  extent  inseparable  from  the  production  of 
hydrocarbon  waxes  for  the  manufacture  of  syn- 
thetic fatty  acids  for  the  production  of  washing 
materials. 

2.  The  synthesis  of  hydrocarbon  waxes  by  the 
Fischer-Tropsch  process  shall  be  permitted  only 
so  long  as  the  supply  of  fats  and  oils  available  in 
Germany  is  inadequate  for  the  manufacture  of 
sufficient  washing  materials  without  the  use  of 
syntlietic  fatty  acids,  and  in  any  event  not  beyond 
31st  December,  1949. 

3.  The  Fischer-Tropsch  plants  not  now  engaged 
in  the  synthesis  of  hydrocarbon  waxes  shall,  as 
soon  as  possible,  be  removed  from  Germany  or 
destroyed.  The  two  Fischer-Tropsch  plants  en- 
gaged in  the  synthesis  of  hydrocarbon  waxes  shall, 
as  soon  as  possible  after  production  ceases,  be  re- 
moved from  Germany  or  destroyed. 

4.  All  Bergius  plants  except  the  Wesseling 
plant  shall,  as  soon  as  possible,  be  removed  from 
Germany  or  destroyed.  The  whole  Wesseling 
plant  shall  be  retained,  and  may  be  used  for  tlie 
refining  of  natural  petroleum,  for  the  hydrogen- 
ation of  heavy  residues  from  such  refining  and 
for  the  synthesis  of  ammonia  and  methanol. 

Article  VII 

The  manufacture  of  electronic  valves  shall 
be  limited  to  a  list  to  be  drawn  up  by  experts  and 
published  by  the  Military  Governors  of  permitted 
types  that  shall  not  exceed  either  10  watts  dissi- 
pation or  250  megacycles  frequency,  subject  to  the 
authority  of  the  Military  Governors,  acting  upon 
the  advice  of  the  Military  Security  Board,  to  per- 
mit by  licence  the  manufacture  of  types  exceeding 
10  watts  dissipation  (but  not  exceeding  250  mega- 
cycles frequency)  in  case  of  necessity. 

Article  VIII 

1.  The  capacity  of  the  following  industries 
shall  be  limited  as  stated  below : 

(«)  Steel,  to  that  remaining  after  the  removal 
of  reparations ; 

(b)  Electric  arc  and  high  frequency  furnace 
steel  furnace  capacity,  to  that  remaining  after  the 
removal  of  reparations; 

'  See  ante  V.  524. 


(c)  Primary  Aluminium,  to  that  sufficient  to 
produce  85,000  tons  of  primary  aluminium  a  year; 

(d)  Shipbuilding,  to  that  remaining!:  after  the 
removal  as  reparations  of  the  followintf  yards  in 
addition  to  those  four  that  have  already  been 
made  available  for  reparations: 

CIXD    1200  Gerniania    Werft.    Kiel 

CIND    1235  Deutsche    Werke,    Kiel 

CIND    1287  Deutsche    "Werft    Reiherstieg. 
Hamburg ; 

(e)  Ball  and  Roller  Bearings,  to  that  remain- 
ing after  the  removal  as  reparations  of  plant  and 
equipment  calculated  to  leave  in  Germany  capac- 
ity sufficient  to  produce  33  million  units  a  year  on 
a  one-shift  basis,  or  pi'esent  capacity,  whichever 
is  the  less; 

(/)  Synthetic  Aminoina,  to  that  remaining 
after  the  removal  of  reparations ; 

{g)  Chlorine,  to  that  remaining  after  the  re- 
moval of  reparations ; 

(A.)  Styrene,  to  20,000  tons  annual  working 
capacity. 

2.  In  order  that  the  total  authorised  capacity 
of  the  industries  limited  in  paragraph  1  above 
shall  not  be  exceeded,  no  enterprise  shall  be  per- 
mitted, (except  under  licence  from  the  Military 
Governors,  acting  upon  the  advice  of  the  Military 
Security  Board)  to  increase  the  productive  capac- 
ity of  any  of  its  plant  or  equipment  that  is  en- 
gaged or  partly  engaged  in  any  of  the  industries 
list  in  this  article,  whether  it  is  proposed  to  effect 
the  increase  by  the  extension  of  existing  facilities, 
the  construction  of  new  facilities,  or  the  addition 
of  new  equipment.  The  construction  of  new  plant 
and  equipment,  and  the  replacement  or  reconstruc- 
tion of  that  removed  or  destroj'ed  shall  likewise 
be  prohibited  except  under  licence  from  tlie  ilili- 
tary  Governors,  acting  upon  the  advice  of  the 
Military  Security  Board.  The  Militarj*  Security 
Board  will  ensure  that  obsolete  or  wornout  plant 
or  equipment  the  replacement  of  which  by  new 
has  been  licensed  is  removed  from  Germany  or 
destroyed. 

Article  IX 

1.  The  production  of  steel  shall  be  limited  to 
11.1  million  ingot  tons  a  year. 

2.  The  production  of  primary  aluminium  shall 
be  limited  to  85.000  tons  of  primary  aluminium 
a  year.  Xo  specific  limitation  shall  be  placed  on 
imports  of  bauxite  and  alumina ;  they  shall,  how- 
ever, be  controlled  to  prevent  stock-piling  in  ex- 
cess of  a  number  of  months'  supply,  to  be  deter- 
mined by  the  Military  Governors. 

3.  The  production  of  st3'rene  shall  be  limited 
to  20,000  tons  a  year. 

Article  X 

1.  The  manufacture  of  the  following  shall  be 
prohibited : 


(a)  Machine  tools  or  other  manufacturing 
equipment  specifically  designed  for  the  produc- 
tion of  weapons,  ammunition  or  other  implements 
of  war. 

(b)  Attachments,  devices,  tools  or  other  ob- 
jects having  no  normal,  peacetime  use  and  spe- 
cifically designed  to  convert  or  adapt  machine 
tools  or  other  manufacturing  equipment  to  the 
production  of  weapons,  ammunition  or  other  im- 
plements of  war. 

2.  The  manufacture  of  the  types  of  machine 
tools  listed  at  Annex  B  shall  be  prohibited  except 
under  licence  from  the  Military  Governors,  act- 
ing upon  the  advice  of  the  Military  Security 
Board,  which  licence  will  normally  be  granted  un- 
less the  Military  Governoi-s  have  reason  to  think 
that  the  tools  are  not  intended  for  peaceful  pro- 
duction. 

Article  XI 

1.  The  construction  of  ships  whose  size  or 
speed  does  not  exceed  the  limits  contained  in  the 
following  table  shall  be  permitted  in  Germany, 
I)rovided  that  no  ocean-going  ships  shall  be  con- 
structed until  a  German  coastal  fleet  adequate  for 
the  requirements  for  European  and  German  re- 
covery lias  been  reconstituted.  (It  has  been  esti- 
mated that  Germanv  will  require  for  this  purpose 
517.000  G.  R.  T.,  including  360,000  G.  R.  T.  of  dry 
cargo  ships.) 

Dry  cargo  ships         12  knots  7,200  G.  R.  T. 
Tankers  12  knots  7,200  G.  R.  T. 

Small  craft  12  knots     650  G.  R.  T. 

(including  fishing  vessels  and  ships  other 

than  cargo-carrying  craft) 
Coastal  vessels  12  knots  2,700  G.  R.  T. 

2.  Notwithstanding  the  above  provisions,  Ger- 
manj'  shall  be  permitted  during  the  period  of  this 
Agreement  to  acquire  abroad  up  to  100.000  G.R.T. 
of  tankers  of  not  more  than  1-4  knots  speed  and 
10,700  G.R.T.,  being  not  less  than  16,000  dwt; 
and  up  to  300,000  G.R.T.  of  dry  cargo  ships  of  not 
more  than  12  knots  speed  and  7,200  G.R.T. 

3.  In  order  to  provide  guidance  for  the  Military 
Governors,  a  committee  of  experts  is  to  be  consti- 
tuted by  the  Governments  of  the  United  States, 
the  United  Kingdom  and  France  with  instructions 
to  prepare,  within  three  months,  a  report  outlin- 
ing the  types  of  ships,  excluding  ships  primarily 
for  passengers,  which  may  be  required  by  Ger- 
many, although  they  exceed  in  one  respect  or 
another  the  limits  in  paragraph  1  above.  The 
committee  shall  also  determine  those  features  of 
design,  construction,  propulsion  machinery,  etc., 
which  would  facilitate  use  for  or  conversion  for 
war  purposes  or  Mhich  do  not  conform  to  normal 
merchant  marine  practice  and  should  therefore  be 
prohibited.  The  recommendations  of  the  commit- 
tee shall  be  transmitted  to  the  Military  Governors 
for  action  in  accordance  with  the  procedure  out- 
lined in  the  following  paragraph. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


4.  The  Military  Governors,  acting  upon  the  ad- 
vice of  the  Military  Security  Board,  may  permit 
by  licence  the  construction  or  acquisition  of  ships 
exceeding  in  some  respects  the  limitations  on  speed 
and  tonnage  shown  in  paragraph  1  above,  in  order 
to  provide  for  ships  having  special  purposes  or 
functions.  The  Military  Governors  shall  take 
into  account  the  requirements  of  security  and  the 
necessity  that  ships  shall  be  capable  of  operating 
economically  in  the  trades  or  routes  for  which  they 
are  intended. 

5.  Notwithstanding  anything  contained  herein 
to  the  contrary,  the  Military  Governors,  acting 
upon  the  advice  of  the  Military  Security  Board, 
may  authorise  under  licence  the  construction  of 
vessels  having  a  greater  speed  than  12  knots  that 
are  shown  to  be  essential  for  such  purposes  as  the 
prevention  of  smuggling  and  illegal  fishing,  fron- 
tier control,  fii-e  fighting,  or  for  the  use  of  pilots  or 
the  civil  police. 

6.  The  Military  Governors  shall  promulgate  the 
legislation  necessary  to  give  effect  to  the  foregoing 
provisions ;  and  upon  the  coming  into  effect  of  such 
legislation  the  operation  of  the  relevant  provisions 
of  Control  Council  Directives  Nos.  33,  37,  44  and 
45  shall  be  suspended.  Until  the  promulgation  of 
such  legislation,  the  building  of  any  ships  other 
than  those  permitted  under  the  relevant  provi- 
sions of  Control  Council  Directives  Nos.  33,  37,  44 
and  45  shall  remain  prohibited. 

Article  XII 

Nothing  in  this  Agreement  shall  be  interpreted 
as  impairing  or  reducing  the  powers  with  which 
the  Military  Security  Board  is  vested. 


ANNEX  A 
Schedule  A  to  Control  Council  Law  No.  43 

Grmip  I 

(a)  All  weapons  including  atomic  means  of 
warfare  or  apparatus  of  all  calibres  and  natures 
cajDable  of  projecting  lethal  or  destructive  pro- 
jectiles, liquids,  gases  or  toxic  substances,  their 
carriages  and  mountings. 

(b)  All  projectiles  for  the  above  and  their 
means  of  jDrojection  or  projjulsion.  Examples  of 
means  of  propulsion  are  cartridges,  charges,  etc. 

(c)  All  military  means  of  destruction  such  as 
grenades,  bombs,  torpedoes,  mines,  depth  mines, 
depth  and  demolition  charges  and  self-propellecl 
charges. 

(d)  All  military  cutting  or  piercing  weapons 
(in  French:  white  arms),  (in  Russian:  cold 
arms),  such  as  bayonets,  swords,  daggers  and 
lances. 

Group  II 

(a)  All  vehicles  specially  equipped  or  designed 
for  military  purposes  such  as  tanks,  armoured 

April  24,   1949 


cars,  tank-carrying  trailers,  armoured  railway 
rolling  stock,  etc. 

(b)  Armour  of  all  types  for  military  purposes. 

(e)  Harness  specially  designed  for  military 
purposes. 

Group  III 

(a)  (i)  Range-finding  apparatus  of  all  kinds 
for  militarj'  pui'poses; 

(ii)  Aiming,  guiding,  and  computing  devices 
for  fire  control ; 

(iii)  Locating  devices  of  all  kinds  (particu- 
larly all  devices  for  radio  direction  finding  and  all 
devices  for  radio  detection) ; 

(iv)  Instruments  for  assisting  observations 
of  fire  or  for  the  remote  control  of  all  moving 
objects. 

(b)  All  signalling  and  inter-communication 
equipment  and  installations  specially  designed  for 
war  purposes ;  all  apparatus  for  radio  interference. 

(c)  Searchlights  with  mirror  diameter  of  more 
than  45  cms. 

(d)  Optical  instruments  of  all  kinds  specially 
designed  or  intended  for  war  purposes. 

(e)  Survey  and  cartographic  equipment  and  in- 
struments of  all  kinds  specially  designed  for  war 
purposes.  Military  maps  and  equipment  for  using 
them. 

(/)  Military  engineering  tools,  machinery  and 
equipment  such  as  special  bridging  materials. 

(g)  Personal  military  equipment  and  uniforms, 
and  military  insignia  and  decorations. 

(h)  Cryptographic  machines  and  devices  used 
for  cipher  purposes. 

(/)  All  camouflage  and  dazzle  devices. 

Any  of  the  materials  listed  in  Group  III,  ex- 
cept for  electronic  devices  such  as  radar,  radio- 
goniometric  and  similar  equipment,  that  have  a 
normal  peacetime  use  and  are  not  specially  de- 
signed for  military  use,  are  excluded  from  the  pro- 
visions of  paragraph  1,  Article  I  of  the  Law. 

Group  IV 

(a)  Warships  of  all  classes.  All  ships  and 
floating  equipment  specially  designed  for  servic- 
ing wai'ships.  All  ships  with  characteristics  ex- 
ceeding those  required  for  normal  peacetime  uses ; 
or  designed  or  constructed  for  conversion  into 
warships  or  for  military  use. 

(b)  Special  machinery,  equipment  and  instal- 
lations which  in  time  of  peace  are  normally  used 
solely  in  warships. 

(c)  Submersible  craft  of  all  kinds;  submersible 
devices  of  all  kinds,  designed  for  military  pur- 
poses. Special  equipment  pertaining  to  these 
craft  and  devices. 

{d)  All  military  and  landing  devices. 
(e)   Material,  equipment  and  installations  for 
the  military  defense  of  coasts,  harbours  etc. 

Group  V 

(a)  Aircraft  of  all  types,  heavier  or  lighter 
than  air;  with  or  without  means  of  propulsion, 


iiu'ludinf^  kites,  captive  balloons,  gliders  and 
model  aircraft,  and  all  auxiliary  equipment,  in- 
cluding aircraft  engines  and  component  parts, 
accessories,  and  spare  parts  specifically  designed 
for  aircraft  use. 

(h)  Ground  equipment  for  servicing,  testing 
or  aiding  the  operation  of  aircraft,  such  as  cata- 
pults, winclies  and  beacons;  material  for  the 
rapid  prenaration  of  airfields  such  as  landing 
mats;  special  equipment  used  in  conjunction 
with  air  photography:  excluding  however, 
from  the  provisions  of  paragraph  1,  Article 
I  of  this  Law  any  such  (■(iui]mii'iit  and  ma- 
terials for  landing  fields  and  air  beacons  that 
have  a  normal  peacetime  use  and  are  not  spe- 
cifically designed  for  military  use  as  listed  in 
Schedule  B. 

Groifp  VI 

All  drawings,  specifications,  designs,  models 
and  reproductions  directly  relating  to  the  de- 
velopment, manufacture,  testing,  or  inspection 
of  the  war  materials,  or  to  ex])eriments  or  re- 
search in  connection  with  war  material. 

Group  VII 

Machinery  and  other  manufacturing  ecjuipment 
and  tooling  used  for  the  development,  manufac- 
ture, testing  or  inspection  of  the  war  material  de- 
fined in  tliis  Schedule,  and  not  capable  of  conver- 
sion to  peacetime  production. 

Group  VIII 

(a)  The  following  War  Chemicals: 

High  explosives  with  the  exception  of  those 
listecl  in  Schedule  B.  Group  Vllla.^ 

(Note:  By  "high  explosives"  is  meant  organic 
explosives  used  as  fillings  for  shells,  bombs,  etc.) 

Double-base  propellants  (i.  e.  Nitrocellulose 
propellants  containing  nitroglycerine,  diethj'l- 
eneglycol  dinitrate  or  analogous  substance). 

Single-base  propellants  for  any  weapons  except 
sporting  weapons. 

Nitroguanidine. 

Poison  war  gases  (including  liquids  and  solids 
customarily  included  in  this  term)  with  the  ex- 
ception of  those  listed  in  Group  Vlllb'  of  Schedule 
B. 

Rocket  fuels : 

Hydrogen  peroxide  of  above  37%  concentration. 
Hydrazine  hj'drate 
Methyl  nitrate. 

Highly  toxic  products  from  bacteriological  or 
plant  sources  (with  the  exception  of  those  bac- 
teriological and  plant  products  which  are  used  for 
therapeutic  purposes) . 

{h)  All  special  means  for  individual  and  col- 
lective defense  used  in  peace  exclusively  by  the 
armed  forces,  such  as  protective  masks  against 

'  This  reference  Is  to  Schechilp  R  nf  Allied  Control 
Council  Law  No.  43  signed  Dec.  20.  1!I4(!.  in  Berlin. 


toxic  or  lethal  devices  used  for  war,  detection  ap- 
paratus etc. 

Group  IX 

All  apparatus,  devices,  and  material  specially 
designed  ff)r  training  and  instructing  pereonnel 
in  the  use.  handling,  manufacture  or  maintenance 
of  war  material. 


Types  of  machine  toots  the  manufacture  of  which 
shall  be  prohibited  except  under  licence  from  the 
Military  Security  Board 

1.  Spiral  b(  ccl  gear  cutters. 

•2.  Brocwhhig  mackineH  of  the  following  kinds: 

(a)   Continuous  surface  type. 

{h)  Reciprocating  type  (bar  type  cutter)  with 
cutter  diameter  or  equivalent  cross  section  exceed- 
ing 2  inches  (iA  mm),  or  working  stroke  exceed- 
ing >5  feet  (1524:  mm)  or  pull  capacity  exceeding 
;35,()00  lbs  ( 15,876  kgs) . 

3.  General  purpose  lathes  of  the  following 
kinds : 

{a)  Lathes  of  work  diameter  capacity  (swing 
over  carriage)  exceeding  56  inches  ( 1,422  mm). 

(&)  Lathes  of  work  diameter  capacity  (swing 
over  carriage)  of  from  36  inches  (914  mm)  to  56 
inches  and  with  distance  between  centres  (length 
of  work  piece)  exceeding  14  feet  (4,267  mm). 

(c)  Lathes  of  work  (lianieter  capacity  (swing 
over  carriage)  of  from  18  inches  (457  mm)  to  36 
inches  (914  mm)  and  with  distance  between  cen- 
tres exceeding  18  feet  (5,486  mm). 

4.  Vertical  turret  lathes  (turret  type  head,  not 
rotating  table)  of  work  diameter  capacity  exceed- 
ing 39  inches  (991  mm). 

5.  Chucking  and  facing  lathes  of  work  diameter 
capacity  exceeding  96  inches  (2,438  mm)  or  with 
travel  of  carriage  exceeding  7  feet  (2,134  mm). 

6.  Car  and  locomotive  wheel  lathes  (machines 
designed  specifically  for  this  work)  of  work  diam- 
eter capacity  exceeding  96  inches  (2,438  mm). 

7.  Turret  lathes  of  chuck  capacity  exceeding  24 
inches  (610  mm)  or  of  bar  capacity  exceeding  3 
inches  (76  mm). 

8.  MiUin-g  machines  of  general  purpose  and 
univei-.sal  types,  horizontal  and  vertical,  any  of 
whose  specifications  exceed  the  following  limits : 

(a)  Maximum  overall  weight :  4  tons. 
(h)   Following  rectangular  table  dimensions: 
(i)   Maximum  length:  48  inches  ( 1,219  mm), 
(ii)   Maxinunn  width  :    14  inches  (356  mm). 
(c)   Following  round  table  dimensions: 

(i)   Maximum    table    diameter:     24    inches 
(610  mm). 

(ii)   Maximum  work  diameter  capacity:    32 
inches  (813  mm). 

9.  Planer  milling  machines  of  distance  between 
housings  exceeding  4  feet  ( 1,219  mm)  or  of  length 
of  platen  exceeding  12  feet  (3,658  mm)  or  of 
number  of  heads  exceeding  3. 

10.  Grinding  7nachines  of  the  following  kinds: 

Depar/menf  of  Sfofe   Bulletin 


(a)  Cylindrical  general  purpose  machines ^of 
work  diameter  capacity  exceeding  30  inches  (762 
mm)  or  of  distance  between  centres  exceeding  9 
feet  (2,743  mm),  but  not  including  machines  spe- 
cifically designed  for  and  limited  to  finishing  roll- 
ing mill,  calencler,  printing  and  other  similar  ma- 
chine parts. 

(b)  Surface  rectangular  table  machnies  of 
platen  width  exceeding  24  inches  (610  mm)  or  of 
platen  length  exceeding  72  inches  (1,829  mm). 

(c)  Surface  round  table  machines  of  table 
diameter  exceeding  36  inches  (914  mm). 

11.  Gear  producing  machines  of  all  types  whose 
work  diameter  capacity  exceeds  60  inches  (1,524 
mm). 


12.  Forging  hammers  of  all  types  of  falling 
weight  exceeding  31/2  tons  (3.5.56  metric  tons). 

13.  Forging  machiTies  of  bar  stock  diameter  or 
equivalent  cross  section  exceeding  3^2  inches  (89 
mm). 

14.  Mechanical  presses  of  an  effective  operating 
pressure  exceeding  1,000  tons  (1,016  metric  tons). 

15.  Hydraulic  presses  of  an  effective  operating 
pi-essure  exceeding  1,000  tons  (1,016  metric  tons). 

16.  Precision  jig  boring  machines  of  a  lateral 
displacement  of  cutter  with  reference  to  work  (or 
displacement  of  work  with  reference  to  cutter) 
exceeding  24  inches  (610  mm) . 


PLANT  DISMANTLING  AND  PROHIBITED  AND  RESTRICTED  INDUSTRIES  IN  GERMANY 
A  Chronology  of  Public  Statements  and  Agreements 


1.  August  1,  1945.  Potsdam  Protocol  (Berlin  agree- 
ment) siLcned. 

Among  the  agreements  In  the  Protocol  were  a  ban  on 
German  production  of  military  materials ;  a  restriction  of 
production  of  certain  types  of  materials  of  high  importance 
to  a  war  effort  but  also  important  to  a  peacetime  economy ; 
and  arrangements  for  the  removal  from  Germany  of  equip- 
ment surplus  to  the  requirements  of  the  peacetime  economy 
In  certain  industries. 

Reference:    Department   of   State   press    release   238   of 
March  24,  1947,  for  full  text. 

2.  December  12,  1945.  The  Department  of  State  issued 
its  interpretation  of  the  Potsdam  Protocol  as  it  related  to 
reparation  and  the  peacetime  German  economy. 

In  part  this  interpretation  was :  "The  present  determi- 
nation, however,  is  not  designed  to  impose  permanent  lim- 
itations on  the  Germany  economy.  The  volume  of  per- 
mitted industrial  production  of  a  peacetime  character  will 
be  subject  to  constant  review  after  February  2,  1946 ;  and 
final  Allied  decisions  regarding  restrictions  to  be  main- 
tained on  German  industrial  capacity  and  production  will 
not  be  made  until  the  framing  of  the  peace  settlement 
with  Germany." 
Reference :  Department  of  State  publication  2630,  United 

States    Economic    Policy    Toward    Germany, 

Appendix  g. 

3.  March  28, 1946.  The  "Plan  of  the  Allied  Control  Coun- 
cil for  lieparatious  and  the  Level  of  the  Postwar  German 
Economy"  made  public  by  the  Military  Governors  of  the 
Four  Occupying  Powers. 

This  plan  contained  a  list  of  prohibited  and  restricted 
industries  and  laid  the  basis  for  removal  of  plants  for 
reparation  in  furtherance  of  the  Potsdam  Protocol. 
Reference :  Department  of  State  publication  2630,  United 

States    Economic    Policy    Toward    Oermany, 

Appendix  k. 

4.  December  20,  1946.  The  Allied  Control  Council 
reached  agreement  on  and  signed  Law  No.  43,  in  Berlin. 

Schedule  A  of  Law  43  spelled  out  the  types  of  war 
materials  whose  production  was  wholly  prohibited.  The 
Schedule  A  list  has  not  been  changed,  and  there  is  three- 
power  agreement  that  it  should  continue  in  effect. 

5.  August  29,  1947.  The  "Revised  Plan  for  Level  of  In- 
dustry in  the  U.S./U.K.  Zones  of  Germany"  was  made 
public. 

After  a  year-and-a-half  of  experience  it  was  found  that 
the  requirements  of  the  German  peacetime  economy  had 
been  underestimated.  When  four-zone  unity  could  not 
be  achieved  the  Jlilitary  Governors  of  the  Bizonal  area 
undertook  a  revision  of  the  level-of-industry  plan.     This 

April  24,   J  949 


increased  the  industrial  capacity  to  be  retained  in  certain 

German  industries.     A  review  of  the  prohibited  industries 

and  of  the  restrictions  on  certain  types  of  production  was 

deferred. 

Reference :  Bulletin  of  Sept.  7,  1947,  p.  468. 

6.  June  2,  1948.  Representatives  of  France,  the  United 
Kingdom,  and  the  United  States  signed  a  report  in  Lon- 
don containing  their  recommendations  on  certain  German 
problems. 

Among  these  recommendations  was  one  for  establish- 
ment of  a  Military  Security  Board  that  would  enforce 
German  disarmament  and  demilitarization,  with  appro- 
priate controls  over  the  prohibited  and  restricted 
industries. 
Reference :  Bulletin  of  June  20,  1948,  pp.  807-10. 

7.  April  3,  1948.  Economic  Cooperation  Act  of  1948, 
signed  by  the  President. 

Section  115  (f )  of  this  act  specified : 

"The  Administrator  (of  the  ECA)  will  request  the  Sec- 
retary of  State  to  obtain  the  agreement  of  those  countries 
concerned  that  such  capital  equipment  as  it  scheduled  for 
removal  as  reparations  from  the  three  western  zones  of 
Germany  be  retained  in  Germany  if  such  retention  will 
most  effectively  serve  the  purpose  of  the  European  re- 
covery program."  ,,  4.  -.an 
Reference :  Public  Law  472— 80th  Congress ;  chapter  169— 
2d  Session. 

8  August  1948.  The  Industrial  Advisory  Committee  of 
the  ECA,  under  the  chairmanship  of  George  M.  Humphrey, 
assembled  a  group  of  engineers  to  examine  the  plants 
that  had  been  placed  on  removal  lists  in  the  Western 
zones. 

The  engineers  began  their  work  abroad  on  October  13 
and  ended  it  on  December  16,  1948.  The  report  of  the  In- 
dustrial Advisory  Committee,  containing  recommenda- 
tions on  the  plants  to  be  retained  in  Germany,  is  dated 
January  12,  1949.  On  January  25  the  U.S.  Secretary  of 
State  asked  the  British  and  French  Governments  to  ac- 
cept the  ECA  recommendations. 

9  September  1948.  The  Military  Governors  of  the  three 
VVestern  zones  began  a  review  of  the  prohibited  and 
restricted  industries. 

10  January  17,  1949.  Formation  of  the  Military  Secu- 
rity Board  for  the  Western  zones  of  Germany  was  an- 
nounced. „   ^„>„        inr 
Reference :  Bulletin  of  February  6,  1949,  p.  195. 

11  March  1949.  A  Franco-U.K.-U.S.  conference  at  the 
o-ovcrnmental  level  began  in  London  to  review  the  recom- 
mendations of  the  Military  Governors  on  the  revision  of 
the  prohibited  and  restricted  industries  and  also  to  con- 
sider the  recommendations  of  the  Industrial  Advisory 
Committee  of  the  ECA. 

531 


Report  of  the  Secretary  of  State  to  the  President  on  North  Atlantic  Treaty 


[Released  to  the  press  April  12) 

April  7, 194s 

The  PREsroENT:  I  have  the  honor  to  transmit 
to  you  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty,  signed  at  Wash- 
ington on  April  4,  1949,  with  the  recommendation 
that  it  be  submitted  to  the  Senate  for  its  advice 
and  consent  to  ratification. 

In  accepting  the  obligations  of  the  United  Na- 
tions Charter  in  1945,  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment committed  itself  for  the  first  time  to  full 
participation  in  collective  action  to  maintain  in- 
ternational peace  and  security.  The  foreign  pol- 
icy of  the  United  States  is  based  squarely  upon  the 
United  Nations  as  the  primary  instrumentality 
of  international  peace  and  progi-ess.  This  Gov- 
ernment is  determined  to  make  the  United  Nations 
ever  more  effective  in  order  ultimately  to  assure 
universal  peace. 

Altlioiigli  this  Government's  full  participation 
in  world  cooperation  dates  only  from  1945,  this 
Government  liad,  for  more  than  a  century  and  a 
quarter,  contributed  to  the  peace  of  the  Americas 
by  making  clear  its  determination  to  resist  tiny  at- 
tack upon  our  neighboring  Republics  to  the  South. 
The  same  determination  and  the  obligations  nec- 
essary to  give  it  effect  througli  the  collective  action 
of  all  the  American  Republics  was  incorporated 
in  the  Treaty  of  Rio  de  Janeiro  in  1947.  This 
Treaty,  like  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty,  is  a  de- 
fense arrangement  under  the  Charter  of  the  United 
Nations.  The  essence  of  that  Treaty  is  recogni- 
tion of  the  fact  that  an  armed  attack  on  any  of 
the  American  States  is  in  effect  an  attack  upon 
them  all. 

The  North  Atlantic  Treaty  is  patterned  on  the 
Treaty  of  Rio  de  Janeiro.  Its  essence  is  recogni- 
tion of  the  fact  tliat  an  armed  attack  on  any  of 
tlie  North  Atlantic  nations  is  in  effect  an  attack 
upon  them  all.  An  attack  upon  any  of  them  would 
not  be  designed  merely  to  gain  territory  or  na- 
tionalistic ends.  It  would  be  directed  squarely 
against  our  common  democratic  way  of  life. 

The  essential  purpose  of  the  Treaty  is  to  fortify 
and  preserve  this  common  way  of  life.  It  is  de- 
signed to  contribute  to  the  maintenance  of  peace 
by  making  clear  in  advance  the  determination  of 
the  Parties  resolutely  and  collectively  to  resist 
armed  attack  on  any  of  them.  It  is  further  de- 
signed to  contribute  to  the  stability  and  well-being 
of  the  member  nations  by  removing  tlie  haunting 
sense  of  insecurity  and  enabling  them  to  plan  and 
work  with  confidence  in  the  future.  Finally,  it  is 
designed  to  provide  the  basis  for  effective  collec- 
tive action  to  restore  and  maintain  the  security  of 
the  North  Atlantic  area  if  an  armed  attack  should 
occur. 


This  Treaty  and  the  Rio  Treaty,  committing  the 
United  States  as  they  do  to  exert  its  great  influence 
for  peace,  are,  in  my  opinion,  second  only  in  im- 
I)ortance  to  our  membership  in  the  United  Nations. 
For  tliis  reason  every  effort  has  been  made  to  de- 
velop it  on  a  wholly  non-partisan  basis  and  in 
cooperation  between  the  Executive  and  Legisla- 
tive branches. 

In  December  1947  you  ratified  the  Treaty  of 
Rio  de  Janeiro  on  the  advice  and  consent  of  the 
Senate  given  with  only  one  dissenting  vote. 

On  March  17,  1948.  the  Governments  of  Bel- 
gium, France.  Luxembourg,  the  Netherlands,  and 
the  United  Kingdom  signed  the  Brussels  Treaty, 
which  was  modelled  to  a  consideral)le  extent  on 
the  Rio  Treaty  and  which  established  another  col- 
lective defense  arrangement  within  the  frame- 
work of  the  Charter.  That  arrangement  was  es- 
tablished with  the  encouragement  of  this  Govern- 
ment as  a  .step  toward  the  closer  integration  of 
the  free  nations  of  Europe  and  as  evidence  of  the 
determination  of  the  five  parties  resolutely  to  de- 
fend themselves  and  each  other  against  aggression. 
In  establishing  it,  they  repeatedly  advised  us  that, 
despite  their  determination  to  do  their  utmost  in 
self-defense,  their  collective  strength  might  be  in- 
adequate to  preserve  peace  or  insure  their  national 
survival  unless  the  great  power  and  influence  of 
the  United  States  and  other  free  nations  were  also 
brought  into  association  with  them. 

On  the  day  the  Brussels  Treaty  was  signed,  you 
addressed  the  Congress  in  joint  session  and  praised 
the  conclusion  of  that  Treaty  as  a  notable  step  to- 
ward peace.  You  expressed  confidence  that  the 
American  people  would  extend  the  free  countries 
the  support  which  the  situation  might  require  and 
that  their  determination  to  defend  themselves 
would  be  matched  by  an  equal  determination  on 
our  part  to  help  them  to  do  so. 

Shortly  thereafter,  my  predecessor,  General 
Marshall,  and  Mr.  Robert  Lovett  undertook  a  se- 
ries of  consultations  with  the  leaders  and  members 
of  the  Senate  Foreign  Relations  Committee  on  the 
problems  facing  the  free  world  and  how  they 
might  best  be  met  by  bringing  American  influence 
to  bear  in  the  cause  of  peace,  in  association  with 
other  free  nations,  and  within  the  framework  of 
the  United  Nations  Qiarter. 

On  May  19,  1948,  the  Foreign  Relations  Com- 
mittee imanimously  reported  Senate  Resolution 
No.  239.     That  Resolution  declared : 

Whereas  peace  with  justice  and  the  defense  of  human 
rights  and  fundamental  freedoms  require  international 
cooi)eration    through   more   effective   use   of   the   United 

Nations : 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Therefore  be  it 

Resolved,  That  the  Senate  reaffirm  the  policy  of  the 
United  States  to  achieve  international  peace  and  secu- 
rity through  the  United  Nations  so  tliat  armed  force  shall 
not  be  used  except  in  the  conuiion  interest,  and  that  the 
President  be  advised  of  the  sense  of  the  Senate  that  this 
Government,  by  constitutional  process,  should  particu- 
larly pursue  the  following  objectives  within  the  United 
Nations  Charter :  .  .  . 

(2)  Progressive  development  of  regional  and  other 
collective  arrangements  for  individual  and  collective  self- 
defense  in  accordance  with  the  purposes,  principles,  and 
provisions  of  the  Charter. 

(3)  Association  of  the  United  States,  by  constitutional 
process,  with  such  regional  and  other  collective  arrange- 
ments as  are  liased  on  continuous  and  effective  self-help 
and  mutual  aid,  and  as  affect  its  national  security. 

(4)  Contributing  to  the  maintenance  of  peace  by 
making  clear  its  determination  to  exercise  the  right  of 
individual  or  collective  self-defen.se  under  Article  51 
should  any  armed  attacli  occur  affecting  its  national 
security. 

On  June  11, 1948,  the  Senate  adopted  that  Eeso- 
lution  by  a  non-partisan  vote  of  64  to  4.  The 
Preamble  of  H.  K..  6802  which  was  unanimously 
reported  by  the  Foreign  Affairs  Committee  of  the 
House  of  Representatives  on  June  9  but  not  voted 
upon  prior  to  adjournment,  contained  language 
identical  in  substance  with  that  quoted  above. 

In  July,  on  the  basis  of  these  expressions  of 
the  wishes  of  the  Legislative  branch,  you  author- 
ized Mr.  Lovett  to  begin  exploratory  conversa- 
tions with  the  Ambassadors  of  Canada  and  of  the 
Parties  to  the  Brussels  Treaty.  These  conversa- 
tions resulted  in  September  in  agreement  by  the 
representatives  participating  in  them  that  an 
arrangement,  established  by  Treaty,  for  the  col- 
lective defense  of  the  North  Atlantic  area  was 
desirable  and  necessary.  Agreement  was  also 
reached  on  the  general  nature  of  the  Treaty. 
Following  approval  by  the  governments  concerned 
of  the  recommendations  of  their  representatives, 
negotiation  of  the  Treaty  was  begun  in  December 
and  finished  on  March  15,  1949. 

Throughout  these  conversations  and  negotia- 
tions Mr.  Lovett  and  I  have  constantly  made  clear 
that,  so  far  as  the  United  States  was  concerned, 
the  Treaty  nuist  conform  to  the  expression  of  guid- 
ance contained  in  the  Senate  Resolution.  I  am 
glad  to  say  that  the  principles  stated  in  the  Resolu- 
tion received  the  wholehearted  concurrence  of  the 
other  participating  governments.  From  time  to 
time  during  the  negotiations  first  Mr.  Lovett  and, 
since  January  20,  I  have  consulted  fully  with  the 
Chairman  and  ranking  minority  member  of  the 
Foreign  Relations  Committee.  During  the  later 
stages  of  the  negotiations  I  met  twice  with  the 
Foreign  Relations  Committee  as  a  whole.  The 
Treaty  in  its  final  form  reflects  a  number  of  con- 
structive suggestions  made  by  members  of  the 
Committee. 

Early  in  March  the  Norwegian  Government  de- 
cided to  join  in  negotiating  the  Treaty  and  since 
March  4  the  Norwegian  Ambassador  has  partici- 
pated fully  in  the  discussions. 

April  24,   7949 


It  is  clear  that  a  collective  defense  arrangement 
of  this  nature,  in  order  to  be  fully  effective,  should 
be  participated  in  by  as  many  countries  as  are  in 
a  position  to  further  the  democratic  principles 
upon  which  the  Treaty  is  based  and  to  contribute 
to  the  security  of  the  North  Atlantic  area  and  as 
are  prepared  to  undertake  the  necessary  responsi- 
bilities. Accordingly,  invitations  to  become  orig- 
inal signatories  of  the  Treaty  were  issued  on  be- 
half of  the  eight  participating  governments  on 
March  17  to  the  Governments  of  Denmark,  Ice- 
land, Italy,  and  Portugal.  It  is  a  source  of  grati- 
fication that  those  governments  decided  to  partici- 
pate in  this  collective  enterprise. 

Treaties  are  ordinarily  negotiated  in  strict  con- 
fidence and  their  contents  made  public  only  after 
signature.  In  this  case,  while  it  was  necessary  to 
conduct  the  negotiations  in  confidence  until  gen- 
eral agreement  had  been  reached,  the  negotiating 
governments  decided  to  make  the  text  public  as 
soon  as  it  had  been  tentatively  agreed  upon.  This 
was  done  in  order  to  give  public  opinion  in  each  of 
the  participating  countries  and  in  all  other  coun- 
tries the  maximum  opportunity  to  study  and  dis- 
cuss its  terms.  I  am  exceedingly  gratified  by  the 
popular  reaction  to  the  Treaty  in  the  United  States 
and  abroad. 

The  text  of  the  Treaty  is,  I  think,  self-explana- 
tory. In  drafting  a  document  of  such  importance 
to  millions  of  individuals  every  effort  has  been 
made  to  make  it  as  clear,  concise,  and  simple  as 
possible. 

The  Preamble  expresses  the  spirit  and  purposes 
of  the  Treaty.  In  it  the  Parties  reaffirm  their 
faith  in  the  purposes  and  principles  of  the  United 
Nations  Charter  and  their  desire  to  live  in  peace 
with  all  peoples  and  all  governments.  They  ex- 
press their  determination  to  safeguard  the  free- 
dom and  the  common  heritage  and  civilization  of 
their  peoples  founded  on  the  principles  of  democ- 
racy, individual  liberty  and  the  rule  of  law.  They 
express  their  desire  to  promote  stability  and  well- 
being  in  the  North  Atlantic  area  and  their  resolu- 
tion to  unite  their  efforts  for  collective  defense  and 
for  the  preservation  of  peace  and  security. 

Article  1  reflects  "their  desire  to  live  in  peace 
with  all  peoples  and  all  governments"  by  explicitly 
reaffirming  the  obligations,  expressed  in  Article  2 
of  the  Charter  and  reflected  throughout  the  Char- 
ter, to  settle  any  international  disputes  in  which 
they  may  be  involved,  with  any  nation,  by  peaceful 
means  in  such  a  manner  that  international  peace 
and  security,  and  justice,  are  not  endangered  and 
to  refrain  in  their  international  relations  from  the 
threat  or  use  of  force  in  any  manner  inconsistent 
with  the  purposes  of  the  United  Nations.  It  is 
clear  that  any  allegations  that  the  Treaty  conceals 
aggressive  intentions  are  deliberate  perversions  of 
fact. 

Article  2  reflects  the  conviction  of  the  Parties 
that  true  peace  is  more  than  the  mere  absence  of 


war.  In  this  Article  the  Parties  indicate  their 
desire  to  strenptlien  the  moral  and  material  factors 
upon  wliicli  true  peace  depends.  They  will  do  so 
by  stieiip(heniii>r  their  own  free  institutions,  by 
hrinfrinp:  about  a  better  understanding  of  the  prin- 
ciples upon  which  those  institutions  are  founded, 
and  by  promoting  conditions  of  stability  and  well- 
being.  They  will  also  seek  to  eliminate  conflict  in 
their  international  economic  policies  and  will  en- 
courage economic  collaboration  between  any  or  all 
of  them. 

Article  3  carried  into  the  Treaty  the  concept  con- 
tained in  the  Senate  Kesolution  that  such  collective 
arrangements  should  be  based  on  continuous  and 
effective  self-help  and  mutual  aid.  This  means 
that  no  Party  can  rely  on  others  for  its  defense 
unless  it  does  its  utmost  to  defend  itself  and  con- 
tribute toward  the  defense  of  the  othei-s.  The  Ar- 
ticle does  not  itself  obligate  any  Party  to  make  any 
specific  contribution  to  the  defense  capacity  of  any 
other  Party,  at  any  jiaiticular  time  or  over  any 
given  period  of  time.  It  does  contain  the  general 
obligations  of  determined  self-defense  and  assist- 
ance in  strengtliening  the  defense  capacity  of  the 
group  as  a  whole.  Tlie  concept  of  "mutual  aid"' 
is  that  each  Party  shall  contribute  such  mutual 
aid  as  it  reasonably  can,  consistent  with  its  geo- 
gra]ihic  location  and  resources  and  with  due  re- 
gard to  the  requirements  of  basic  economic  health, 
in  the  form  in  which  it  can  most  effectively  fur- 
nish it,  whether  in  the  form  of  facilities,  man- 
power, productive  capacity,  military  equipment, 
or  other  forms. 

Article  4  provides  for  consultation  at  the  request 
of  any  Pai'ty  whenever  in  its  opinion  the  teri-i- 
torial  integrity,  political  independence  or  security 
of  any  of  the  Parties  is  threatened.  Any  situation 
or  event  anywhere  could  be  cause  for  consultation 
if  it  were  deemed  to  threaten  the  integrity,  inde- 
pendence or  security  of  any  Party,  but  it  is  not 
anticipated  that  consultation  would  be  lightly 
sought  or  that  it  would  be  productive  if  it  were. 
The  Article  contains  no  obligation  beyond  consul- 
tation. Any  action  taken  as  a  result  of  consul- 
tation would  be  determined  by  each  Party  in  the 
light  of  the  seriousness  of  the  situation  and  of  its 
obligations  under  the  United  Nations  Charter  and 
in  the  spirit  of  the  Treaty. 

There  is  no  intention  that  such  consultation 
should  in  any  way  duplicate  the  functions  of  tlie 
United  Nations  Security  Council  or  the  General 
Assembly.  In  particular,  there  is  no  intention  of 
undertaking  any  enforcement  action  within  the 
meaning  of  Article  i\'^  of  tlie  Charter  unless  the 
Security  Council  should  specifically  call  upon  the 
Parties  to  take  it. 

Article  5  is  based  squarely  on  the  "inherent 
right",  specifically  recognized  in  Article  51  of  the 
Charter,  of  "individual  or  collective  self-defense 
if  an  armed  attack  occurs  against  a  member  of 
the  United  Nations".  That  right  does  not  derive 
from  Article  51  of  the  Charter:  it  is  inherent,  and 


recognized  as  such  and  preserved  by  that  Article. 
The  Article  is  also  based  upon  the  fact  that  in 
the  world  of  today  the  security  of  the  Parties  to 
this  Treaty  is  so  interdependent  that  an  armed  at- 
tack on  an)'  one  of  them  would  be  in  effect  an  at- 
tack on  all. 

This  Article  provides  that,  if  such  an  armed 
attack  occurs,  each  Party  will  take  such  action  as 
it  deems  necessary,  including  the  use  of  armed 
foice.  to  restore  and  maintain  the  security  of  the 
North  Atlantic  area. 

The  basic  purpose  of  the  Treaty  is  to  contribute 
to  the  maintenance  of  peace,  as  recommended  in 
the  Senate  Resolution,  by  making  clear  the  deter- 
mination of  the  Parties  to  exercise  the  right  of  self- 
defense  should  an  armed  attack  occur  against  any 
of  them.  As  you  stated  in  your  inaugural  address, 
if  it  can  be  made  sufficiently  clear  that  such  an 
attack  would  be  met  with  overwhelming  force, 
the  attack  may  never  occur. 

This  Treaty  is  designed  to  prevent  such  an 
attack  occurring  by  making  clear  the  determina- 
tion of  the  signatory  nations  to  take  the  neces- 
sary- action  should  it  occur.  Far  more  important 
than  language  in  a  treaty  is  the  determination  of 
the  peoples  bound  b\'  it.  It  is  my  hope  and  belief 
that  the  American  people  and  the  peoples  of  the 
other  signatory  nations  will  by  their  national  con- 
duct make  this  unmistakably  clear. 

The  obligation  upon  each  Party  is  to  use  its 
honest  judgment  as  to  the  action  it  deems  neces- 
sary to  restore  and  maintain  the  security  of  the 
North  Atlantic  area  and  accordingly  to  take  such 
action  as  it  deems  necessary.  Such  action  might  or 
might  not  include  the  use  of  armed  force  depend- 
ing upon  the  circumstances  and  gravity  of  the  at- 
tack. If  an  attack  were  of  a  minor  nature  meas- 
ures short  of  force  would  certainly  be  utilized 
first  and  might  suffice.  Only  in  the  clear  case  of 
a  major  armed  attack  would  the  use  of  force  be 
necessary.  Each  Party  retains  for  itself  the 
right  of  determination  as  to  whether  an  armed 
attack  has  in  fact  occurred  and  what  action  it 
deems  necessary  to  take.  If  the  situation  were 
not  clear  there  would  presumably  be  consultation 
prior  to  action.  If  the  facts  were  clear,  action 
would  not  necessarily  depend  on  consultation  and 
it  is  hoped  that  the  action  would  be  as  swift  and 
decisive  as  the  gravity  of  the  situation  was  deemed 
to  require. 

This  does  not  mean  that  the  United  States  would 
automatically  be  at  war  if  we  or  one  of  the  other 
Parties  to  the  Treaty  were  attacked.  Under  our 
Constitution,  the  Congress  alone  has  the  power 
to  declare  war.  The  United  States  would  be  obli- 
gated by  the  Treaty  to  take  promptly  the  action 
which  it  deemed  necessary  to  restore  and  main- 
tain the  security  of  the  North  Atlantic  area.  That 
decision  as  to  what  action  was  necessary  would 
naturally  be  taken  in  accordance  with  our  con- 
stitutional processes. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Article  51  of  the  Charter  recognizes  the  inherent 
right  of  self-defense  until  the  Security  Council 
has  taken  the  measures  necessary  to  maintain  inter- 
national peace  and  security.  Article  5  of  the 
Treaty  jDrovides  that  any  armed  attack  upon  a 
Party  and  all  measures  taken  as  a  result  thereof 
shall  immediately  be  reported  to  the  Security 
Council  and  that  such  measures  shall  be  termi- 
nated when  the  Security  Council  has  taken  the 
necessary  action. 

Article  6  specifies  certain  areas  within  which  an 
armed  attack  would  give  rise  to  the  obligations  of 
Article  5.  The  area  covered  by  the  Treaty  is  the 
general  Xorth  Atlantic  area  and  is  deliberately 
not  defined  by  lines  on  a  map.  The  purpose  of  the 
Treaty  is  to  j^revent  an  armed  attack  by  making 
clear  that  such  an  attack  within  that  general  area 
would  meet  the  collective  resistance  of  all  the  Par- 
ties. It  would  not  be  in  keeping  with  the  spirit 
of  the  Treaty  to  provide  that  an  attack  such  as 
the  sinking  of  a  vessel  at  one  point  at  sea  would 
give  rise  to  the  obligations  of  Article  5,  while  a 
similar  attack  a  few  miles  away  would  not.  Fur- 
thermore, it  is  not  contemplated  that  minor  inci- 
dents would  bring  the  provisions  of  Article  5  into 
effect. 

Article  7  makes  clear  that  the  obligations  of  the 
Parties  under  the  Treaty  are  subordinated  to  their 
obligations  under  the  Charter.  Their  obligations 
under  the  Charter  are  in  no  way  affected  by  the 
Treaty  and  the  provisions  of  the  Charter  are  para- 
mount wherever  applicable.  In  this  Article  the 
Parties  also  explicitly  recognize  the  primary  re- 
sponsibility of  the  Security  Council  for  the  main- 
tenance of  international  peace  and  security. 

In  Article  8  each  Party  declares  that  none  of  its 
existing  international  engagements  with  any  state 
is  in  conflict  with  the  provisions  of  the  Treaty  and 
undertakes  not  to  enter  into  any  international  en- 
gagement in  conflict  with  it. 

By  Article  9  the  Treaty  becomes  not  merely  a 
static  document  but  the  basis  for  a  continuing  col- 
lective arrangement  as  envisaged  in  the  Senate 
Resolution.  That  Article  establishes  a  Council, 
on  which  each  Party  is  to  be  represented,  to  facili- 
tate implementation  of  the  Treaty.  The  Council 
is  to  be  so  organized  as  to  be  able  to  meet  promptly 
at  any  time  and  shall  set  up  such  subsidiary  bodies 
as  may  be  necessary,  in  particular  a  defense  com- 
mittee to  recommend  measures  for  the  implementa- 
tion of  Articles  3  and  5.  The  Council  will  have  no 
powers  other  than  to  consider  matters  within  the 
purview  of  the  Treaty  and  to  assist  the  Parties  in 
reaching  agi'eement  upon  them.  Consequently,  no 
voting  procedure  is  needed  or  provided.  Each 
government  remains  the  judge  of  what  actions  it 
should  take  in  fulfillment  of  the  obligations  of  the 
Treaty. 

Article  10  recognizes  that  not  all  states  in  the 
North  Atlantic  area  in  a  position  to  further  the 
principles  of  the  Treaty  or  to  contribute  to  the 
security  of  the  area  may  wish  to  become  parties  at 


this  time.  The  Article  accoi-dingly  provides  that 
the  Parties  may,  by  unanimous  agreement,  invite 
any  other  European  state  in  a  position  to  further 
the  principles  of  the  Treaty  and  to  contribute  to 
the  security  of  the  North  Atlantic  area  to  become 
a  party  at  a  later  date. 

Since  Canada  and  the  United  States  are  orig- 
inal signatories  and  the  other  American  Republics 
are  actual  or  potential  parties  to  the  Rio  Treaty, 
no  accessions  by  other  American  states  are  con- 
templated. 

Since  the  accession  of  additional  parties  might 
alter  the  responsibilities  of  the  original  signa- 
tories, unanimous  agreement  is  required  to  invite 
other  states  to  join. 

Article  11  provides  that  the  Treaty  shall  be  rati- 
fied and  its  provisions  carried  out  by  the  Parties 
in  accordance  with  their  respective  constitutional 
processes.  The  Senate  Resolution  spoke  of  asso- 
ciation of  the  United  States  "by  constitutional 
process"  with  such  arrangement  as  that  established 
by  the  present  Treaty,  and  it  is  naturally  under- 
stood, as  this  Article  provides,  that  both  ratifica- 
tion of  the  Treaty  and  the  carrying  out  of  all  its 
provisions  must  be  in  accordance  with  the  consti- 
tutional processes  of  the  signatory  nations. 

At  the  request  of  the  other  signatory  govern- 
ments, the  United  States  Government  has  agreed 
to  act  as  the  depositary  of  the  Treaty. 

It  was  considered  advisable  that  the  Treaty  en- 
ter into  effect  only  when  it  had  been  ratified  by 
each  of  the  se\'en  governments  which  originally 
participated  in  the  negotiations,  and  a  provision 
to  this  effect  is  contained  in  this  Article. 

Article  12  provides  for  the  review  of  the  Treaty 
at  the  request  of  any  Party  after  the  Treaty  has 
been  in  force  for  10  years,  or  at  any  time  there- 
after. This  provision  corresponds  to  the  similar 
provision  of  Article  109  in  the  United  Nations 
Charter  providing  for  a  review  of  the  Charter 
after  10  years.  Article  12  provides  that  the  review 
of  the  Treaty  shall  take  into  account  the  factore 
that  affect  peace  and  security  in  the  North  At- 
lantic area,  including  the  development  of  univer- 
sal as  well  as  regional  arrangements  under  the 
Charter  for  the  maintenance  of  international 
peace  and  security. 

Article  13  provides  that  any  Party  may  cease 
to  be  a  Party,  after  the  Treaty  has  been  in  force 
for  20  years,  upon  the  expiration  of  one  year's 
notice  of  denunciation. 

The  common  heritage  of  the  signatory  nations 
dates  deep  in  history  and  the  bonds  between  them 
are  fundamental.  It  is  hoped  that  their  coopera- 
tion will  be  permanent  and  progressively  closer. 
The  Treaty  must  have  a  relatively  long  duration 
if  it  is  to  provide  the  necessary  assurance  of  long- 
terra  security  and  stability.  On  the  other  hand, 
the  impossibility  of  foretelling  what  the  interna- 
tional situation  will  be  in  the  distant  future  makes 
rigidity  for  too  long  a  term  undesirable.  It  is 
believed  that  indefinite  duration,  with  the  possibil- 


April  24,   1949 


ity  that  any  Party  may  withdraw  from  the  Treaty 
after  20  years  and  that  the  Treaty  as  a  whole  might 
be  reviewed  at  any  time  after  it  has  been  in  effect 
for  ten  years,  provides  the  best  solution. 

Article  14  is  a  formal  article  concerninfif  the 
equal  authenticity  of  the  English  and  French  texts 
and  the  disposition  of  tiie  original  Treaty  and 
certified  copies  thereof. 

I  believe  that  this  Treaty  will  prove  to  be  an 
important  milestone  in  realization  of  the  desire 
of  the  American  people  to  use  their  great  influence 
for  peace.  It  makes  clear,  in  my  opinion,  their 
determination  to  do  so.  The  Treaty  has  been 
formulated  in  accordance  with  the  guidance  given 
by  the  Senate  in  Resolution  239.  In  the  Senate 
debate  on  tliat  Kesolution  it  was  made  clear  that 
the  Senate,  in  advising  you  [larticularly  to  pursue 
certain  objectives,  in  no  way  yielded  its  freedom 
of  action  to  scrutinize  and  to  give  or  withhold  its 
consent  to  ratification  of  such  treaty  as  might  be 
negotiated.  I  know  that  the  Senate  will  conscien- 
tiously exercise  that  pierogative  and  I  trust  that 
the  Treaty  will  meet  with  its  approval. 
Kespectfully  submitted, 

Dean  Achesox 

Encloscbe  :   North  Atl.intic  Treaty. 
[BULLETIN  of  Mar.  20,  1949,  p.  .3:i9] 


Head  of  American  Relief  for  Czechoslovakia 
Arrested  in  Praha 

[Released  to  the  press  April  13] 

Vlasta  Adele  Vraz,  head  of  the  Praha  office  of 
American  Relief  for  Czechoslovakia,  was  arrested 
April  9  about  1  p.  m.,  and  is  now  thought  to  be  in 
Panrac  Prison,  Praha. 

American  Relief  for  Czechoslovakia,  sponsored 
by  the  Advisory  Committee  on  Voluntary  Foreign 
Aid,  is  the  organization  which  sends  gifts  of  food 
and  clothing  to  the  children  of  Czechoslovakia 
from  Czechs  and  Czech-Americans  in  the  United 
States.  The  head  office  of  the  organization  is  at 
9  East  10th  Street,  New  York  City,  in  charge  of 
Dr.  Kenneth  D.  Miller.  The  activities  of  the 
Praha  office  were  to  have  been  discontinued  in 
June  of  this  year. 

Miss  Vraz  was  born  in  Chicago.  Her  current 
address  is  2101  South  Elmwood  Street,  Berwyn, 
Illinois.  She  is  unmarried,  tlie  daughter  of  the 
late  well-known  explorer-historian,  Enrique  Vraz, 
and  first  came  to  Praha  as  a  representative  of  the 
American  Red  Cross  in  October  1945. 

An  American  Embassy  representative  was  per- 
mitted to  visit  Miss  Vraz  on  April  12  in  the  pres- 

'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  10,  1949,  p.  4,'55. 


ence  of  a  Foreign  Office  representative  and  two 
police  officials.  She  appeared  to  be  well  and  said 
she  had  been  well  treated  to  date  and  was  being 
held  for  investigation  in  connection  with  alleged 
activities  of  a  political  nature. 

On  December  7,  1946,  Miss  Vraz  was  awarded 
the  Czechoslovak  "Order  of  the  White  Lion"  for 
services  to  the  State  of  Czechoslovakia.  The  laU- 
■sfr-pmser  issued  to  her  bv  the  Czechoslovak  Con- 
sulate General  in  New  Vork  on  September  21, 
1945,  includes  a  statement  that  she  was  coming  to 
Czechoslovakia  at  the  invitation  of  the  Czechoslo- 
vak Government.  She  received  a  certificate  dated 
October  22,  1945,  from  the  late  Foreign  Minister, 
Jan  Masaryk,  confirming  the  aforementioned  invi- 
tation and  bespeaking  tiie  good  oHices  of  all  Czech- 
oslovak officials,  civilian  and  military,  on  her  be- 
half. In  January  of  this  year  she  received  a  letter 
from  the  Czechoslovak  authorities  thanking  her 
for  her  care  and  the  devotion  with  which  she  had 
conducted  relief  activities  in  Czechoslovakia  for 
the  past  three  years  and  for  her  understanding  of 
the  needs  of  the  Czechoslovak  children. 


The  President's  Reply  to  Prime  Minister  Attlee 
on  First  Anniversary  of  ECA 

[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  April  7] 

The  President  has  sent  the  following  message  to 
Clement  Attlee,  Prime  Minuter  of  Great  Brit- 
ain, in  reply  to  the  message  from  Mr.  Attlee  ^  on 
the  occasion  of  the  first  anniversary  of  the  sign- 
ing of  the  Foreign  Assistance  Act  of  1948: 

I  am  confident  that  I  speak  not  only  for  myself 
but  for  the  people  of  the  United  States  in  express- 
ing appreciation  for  your  message  on  this  first 
anniversary  of  the  signing  of  the  Foreign  Assist- 
ance Act  of  1948. 

The  record  of  the  countries  participating  in  the 
European  Recovery  Program  during  the  jiast  j'ear 
is  one  of  great  accomplishment  in  industry,  in  ag- 
riculture, in  trade.  It  is  a  record  of  tireless  hard 
work.  It  is  also,  I  believe,  a  record  of  achieve- 
ment through  cooperation.  The  Organization  for 
European  Economic  Cooperation  so  recently  es- 
tablished by  the  countries  working  together  to- 
ward full  recovei-y  has  demonstrated  to  us  all  the 
meaning  of  true  international  action. 

"We  in  the  United  States  are  proud  that  we  have 
had  a  ]iart  in  tliis  great  mutual  effort.  We  are 
confident  that  the  progress  toward  true  recovery 
which  has  been  so  mai'ked  during  this  first  year 
will  continue  and  that  the  high  goals  which  have 
been  set  will  be  fully  realized. 


Department  of  Stale  Bvlletin 


Joint  U.S.-Canada  Industrial  IVSobilization  Committee  Established 

EXCHANGE  OF  NOTES  BETWEEN  THE  TWO  GOVERNMENTS 


[Released  to  the  press  April  12] 

A  Joint  United  States— Canada  Industrial  Mo- 
bilization Committee  was  established  on  April  12 
by  an  exchange  of  notes  between  the  two  Govern- 
ments, in  Ottawa,  following  a  series  of  discussions 
that  began  last  June.  This  Joint  Committee  will 
consist  of  the  following : 
For  the  United  States 

Dr.   John   R.   Steelman,  Acting  Chairman,   National   Se- 
curity Resources  Board 
Donald  F.  Carpenter,  Chairman,  Munitions  Board 

For  Canada 

Harry    J.    Carmichael,    Chairman,    Industrial    Defence 
Board  „         ^        t     « 

S.  D.  Pierce,  Associate  Deputy  Minister,  Department  ol 
Trade  and  Commerce 

The  agreement  recognizes  the  mutual  interests 
and  complementary  characteristics  of  the  resources 
of  the  two  countries.  It  will  be  the  function  of  the 
new  Committee  to  exchange  information  and  co- 
ordinate the  views  of  the  two  Governments  m 
connection  with  planning  for  industrial  mobiliza- 
tion in  the  event  of  an  emergency.  The  new  Com- 
mittee is  further  charged  with  cooperation  with 
the  existing  U.S.-Canadian  Permanent  Joint 
Board  on  Defense,  established  in  1940  by  the  late 
President  Roosevelt  and  Mackenzie  King,  then 
Prime  Minister  of  Canada. 

A  meeting  of  the  Joint  U.S.-Canada  Industrial 
Mobilization  Committee  is  contemplated  in  the 
near  future. 

The  text  of  the  notes  follows : 

Ottawa,  April  12, 1949 

No.  93 

Excellency  :  I  have  the  honor  to  inform  Your 
Excellency  that  the  common  interests  of  Canada 
and  the  United  States  in  Defence,  their  proximity 
and  the  complementary  characteristics  of  their  re- 
sources clearly  indicate  the  advantages  of  coordi- 
nating their  plans  for  industrial  mobilization,  in 
order  that  the  most  effective  use  may  be  made  of 
the  productive  facilities  of  the  two  countries. 

The  functions  of  the  Department  of  Trade  and 
Commerce  and  the  Industrial  Defence  Board  in 
Canada  and  those  of  the  National  Security  Ee- 
sources  Board  and  the  Munitions  Board  in  the 
United  States  suggest  that,  for  the  present,  it 
would  be  appropriate  to  use  these  Agencies  to  as- 
sist the  two  Governments  in  coordinating  their 
Industrial  Mobilization  Plans. 

Therefore,  my  Government  wishes  to  propose 
that  the  two  Governments  agree : 

(a)  That  a  Joint  Industrial  Mobilization  Com- 
April  24,  1949 


mittee  be  now  constituted  consisting,  on  the  United 
States  side,  of  the  Chairman  of  the  National  Se- 
curity Resources  Board  and  the  Chairman  of  the 
Munitions  Board  and,  on  the  Canadian  side,  of  the 
Chairman  of  the  Industrial  Defence  Board  and  a 
Senior  Official  of  the  Department  of  Trade  and 
Commerce ; 

(b)   That  the  Joint  Committee: 

(i)  Exchange  information  with  a  view  to  the 
coordination  of  the  plans  of  the  United  States 
and  Canada  for  Industrial  Mobilization ; 

(ii)  Consider  what  recommendations  in  the 
field  of  Industrial  Mobilization  planning,  in  areas 
of  common  concern,  should  be  made  to  each  Gov- 
ernment ; 

(iii)  Be  empowered  to  organize  Joint  Sub- 
Committees  from  time  to  time  to  facilitate  the  dis- 
charge of  its  functions ; 

(iv)  Be  responsible  for  cooperation  with  the 
Permanent  Joint  Board  on  Defence  on  matters  of 
Industrial  Mobilization. 

If  your  Government  is  agreeable  to  the  above 
Proposals,  it  is  understood  that  this  Note,  together 
with  your  Note  in  reply  agreeing  thereto,  shall 
constitute  an  agreement  between  our  two  Govern- 
ments which  shall  enter  in  force  on  the  date  of 
your  reply  and  shall  remain  in  force  indefinitely 
subject  to  termination  by  either  Government  at 
any  time  on  giving  six  months'  notice. 

Please  accept  [etc.] 

Laukence  A.  Steinhardt 
Ottawa,  April  12,  194d 

No.   113 

Excellency  :  I  have  the  honor  to  acknowledge 
the  receipt  of  Your  Excellency's  note  No.  93  of 
April  12,  1949  in  which  you  informed  me  that  the 
Government  of  the  United  States  of  America 
wishes  to  propose  that  our  two  Governments  agree : 

[Here  follow  paragraphs  (a)  and  (b)  as  printed 
above.] 

I  have  the  honor  to  inform  Your  Excellency 
that  the  Government  of  Canada  concurs  in  the 
foregoing  proposals  and  agrees  that  Your  Excel- 
lency's note  and  this  reply  shall  constitute  an 
agreement  between  our  two  Governments  which 
shall  enter  into  force  on  this  day  and  shall  remain 
in  force  indefinitely,  subject  to  termination  by 
either  Government  at  any  time  on  giving  six 
months'  notice. 

Accept  [etc.] 

Lester  B.  Pearson 


Resumption  of  Diplomatic  Relations 
With  Paraguay 

[Released  to  the  press  April  13] 

On  April  13  Fletcher  Warren,  United  States 
Ambassador  at  Asuncion  delivered  a  note  to  the 
Para-riiayan  Foreijrn  Minister  in  reply  to  a  note 
of  March  2,  1J)4!),'  from  the  Minister  in  which  he 
announced  that  Dr.  P'clipe  Molas  Lopez  had  as- 
sumed tile  Presidency  of  Parap;uay  on  February 
27,  1049.  This  action  by  the  United  States  Am- 
bassador constituted  the  resumption  of  normal 
diplomatic  relations  between  the  Paraguayan  and 
United  States  Governments,  interrupted  on  Jan- 
uary 30,  1!)40,  with  the  resi<rnation  of  President 
J.  Xatalicio  Gonzalez  of  Paraguay. 

The  Paraguayan  note  of  March  2,  1949,  stated 
that  the  Government  was  in  control  of  the  entire 
country,  furnishing  security  and  guarantees  to  its 
people;  that  it  proposes  to  achieve  institutional 
normalization  by  means  of  free  elections;  and  that 
it  will  continue  to  respect  Paraguay's  interna- 
tional commitments. 

The  United  States  Ambassador's  note  in  reply 
expressed  confidence  that  the  friendship  wliich 
has  always  characterized  relations  between  the 
two  countries  will  continue  unimpaired. 


Israeli  Ambassador  Presents  Credentials 

[Released  to  the  press  April  H] 

The  remarks  of  the  newly  appointed  Ambassa- 
dor of  Israel,  Eliahu  Elath,  upon  the  occasion  of 
the  presentation  of  his  letters  of  credence,  on 
April  11  follow: 

Mr.  President  :  The  President  of  Israel  has  in- 
structed me,  in  presenting  to  you  the  Letters  of 
Credence  accrediting  me  as  Ambassador  Extraor- 
dinary and  Plenipotentiary  of  Israel  to  the  LTnited 
States  of  America,  to  convey  to  you  his  warm 
greetings  and  to  express  his  sincere  hope  for  the 
continued  well-being  and  prosperity  of  the  United 
States  and  its  President. 

The  President  and  people  of  Israel  are  deeply 
grateful  for  tlie  great  contribution  made  by  the 
Government  of  the  United  States  and  its  people 
to  the  establishment  of  the  State  of  Israel. 

The  nolile  tradition,  instituted  by  President 
Woodrow  Wilson  and  continued  by' all  his  suc- 
cessors, of  expressing  sympatliy  with  the  aims  of 
Zionism  has  earned  for  the  people  of  the  United 
States  and  its  Government  the  undying  gratitude 
and  admiration  of  Israel  and  the  Jewish  people. 

The  synijjathy  and  concern  shown  by  you,  Mr. 
President,  for  the  Jewish  displaced  persons  of 

'  Not  printed. 


Europe,  the  constructive  suggestions  that  you  have 
made  for  their  resettlement,  your  support  of  the 
establishment  of  the  State  of  Israel,  and  your 
prompt  recognition  following  the  proclamation 
of  Israel's  independence  on  May  14, 1948,  will  for- 
ever be  recorded  in  the  hearts" of  our  people  and 
preserved  in  the  annals  of  our  history. 

As  a  peace-loving  nation,  Israel' will  seek  to 
maintain  and,  by  her  actions,  to  express  her  own 
moral  heritage,  and  to  make  yet  another  contribu- 
tion to  civilization.  It  is  her  fervent  hope  that 
she  will  be  allowed  to  do  so,  so  that  her  progress 
may  contribute  to  the  development  of  the  Mfddle 
East  and  be  of  benefit  to  the  entire  world. 

I  deeply  appreciate  the  honor  of  being  the  first 
representative  of  my  country  in  the  T'nited  States. 
It  will  be  my  constant  endeavor  to  advance  and 
strengthen  the  ties  of  friendship  and  cooperation 
existing  between  Israel  and  this  great  democracy. 
I  trust  that  in  the  discharge  of  this  important 
task,  Mr.  President,  I  shall  receive  your  under- 
standing and  help,  as  well  as  th'at  of  your 
Government. 

The  Presidents  reply  to  Mr.  Elath  folloivs : 

Mr.  Ambassador  :  It  is  a  g^'eat  pleasure  for  me  to 
receive  from  the  President  of  Israel  the  Letters 
accrediting  you  as  the  first  Ambassador  Extraor- 
dinary and  Plenipotentiary  of  Israel  to  the 
United  States  of  America. 

It  is  a  matter  of  particular  satisfaction  to  me  to 
witness  this  important  further  step  in  the  strength- 
ening and  consolidation  of  relations  between'^our 
two  countries,  relations  which  have  reflected  the 
sincere  interest  of  the  Government  and  people  of 
the  United  States  in  the  deep-rooted  aspirations  of 
your  people  to  found  an  independent  nation.  I 
am  gratified  to  receive  Your  Excellency's  kind  re- 
marks concerning  the  contribution  of' the  Amer- 
ican (iovemment  and  people  to  the  establishment 
of  the  State  of  Israel. 

I  am  firmly  convinced  of  the  necessity  for  the 
speedy  establishment  of  a  true  and  equitable  peace 
between  Israel  and  its  neighbors  and  for  the  reso- 
lution of  all  problems  outstanding  between  them, 
in  afcoidance  with  the  solemn  recommendations' 
of  the  United  Nations  with  respect  to  Palestine. 
The  Government  of  the  United  States  is  deeply 
desirous  of  assisting  by  all  appropriate  means  in 
the  tulnllment  of  these  objectives. 

I  wish  to  express  to  Your  Excellency  my  per- 
sonal pleasure  that  as  Ambassador  of  "Israel  you 
will  continue  to  represent  your  Government  in 
Washington.  I  appreciate  the  wishes  which  you 
have  expressed  for  the  coiitimieil  prosperity"  of 
the  United  States  and  for  my  personal  well-being, 
and  I  should  be  grateful  if'you  would  convey  to 
your  distinguished  President  the  best  wishes  of  the 
(Jovernment  and  people  of  the  United  States  for 
the  jieace  and  prosperity  of  Israel,  and  for  his  per- 
sonal happiness  and  welfare. 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


THE  CONGRESS 

Report  on  Progress  of  the  Econonjic  Cooperation  Ad- 
ministration. Report  of  the  Joint  Committee  on  Foreign 
Economic  Cooperation  created  pursuant  to  section  124 
of  Public  Law  472,  Eightieth  Congress.  S.  Rept.  13,  81st 
Cong.,  1st  sess.     ix,  152  p. 

Jose  Babace.  Report  (To  accompany  S.  26).  S.  Rept. 
8,  Slst  Cong.,  1st  sess.    2  pp. 

Certain  Basque  Aliens.  Report  (To  accompany  S.  27). 
S.  Rept.  9,  Slst  Cong.,  1st  sess.    4  pp. 

Authorizing  Payment  of  Claims  Based  on  Loss  of  or 
Damage  to  Property  Deposited  by  Alien  Enemies.  S.  Rept. 
10,  Slst  Cong,,  1st  sess.    2  pp. 

Amending  Section  3  of  the  Act  Entitled  "An  Act  to  Re- 
vise the  Alaska  Game  Law,"  Approved  July  1,  1943,  as 
Amended  (57  Stat.  301).  H.  Rept.  170,  Slst  Cong.,  1st 
sess.,  to  accompany  H.R.  220.     3  pp. 

Authorizing  Payment  of  Claims  Based  on  Loss  of  or 
Damage  to  Property  Deposited  by  Alien  Enemies.  H. 
Rept.  172,  Slst  Cong.,  1st  sess.,  to  accompany  S.  29.     3  pp. 

Certain  Basque  Aliens.  H.  Rept.  193,  Slst  Cong.,  1st 
sess.,  to  accompany  S.  27.     3  pp. 

Authorizing  Vessels  of  Canadian  Registry  to  Transport 
Iron  Ore  Between  United  States  Ports  on  the  Great  Lakes 
During  the  Period  From  March  15  to  December  15,  1949, 
Inclusive.  H.  Rept.  209,  Slst  Cong.,  1st  sess.,  to  accom- 
pany H.J.  Res.  143.     4  pp. 

The  United  States  Constitution.  Text,  Index,  Chronol- 
ogy and  Leading  Quotations.  S.  Doc.  210,  SOth  Cong., 
2d  sess.     42  pp. 

Estimate  of  Appropriations— Several  Executive  Depart- 
ments and  Independent  Offices.  Communication  from  the 
President  of  the  United  States  transmitting  estimate  of 
appropriations  for  the  several  executive  departments  and 
independent  offices  to  pay  claims  for  damages,  audited 
claims,  and  judgments  rendered  against  the  United  States, 
as  provided  by  various  laws,  in  the  amount  of  $22,638,- 
857.65,  together  with  an  indefinite  amount  as  may  be 
necessary  to  pay  interest  and  costs.  S.  Doc.  15,  Slst 
Cong.,  1st  sess.     333  pp. 

Proposed  Provision  Pertaining  to  an  Existing  Appro- 
priation— United  States  Maritime  Commission.  Com- 
munication from  the  President  of  the  United  States 
transmitting  proposed  provision  pertaining  to  an  existing 
appropriation  of  the  United  States  Maritime  Commission, 
fiscal  vear  1949.     S.  Doc.  19,  Slst  Cong.,  1st  sess.     2  pp. 


PUBLICATIONS 


Department  of  State 

For  sale  hij  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  O-overn- 
ment  Printing  Office,  Washington  25,  D.  C.  Address  re- 
quests direct  to  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  except 
in  the  case  of  free  pxiMications,  which  may  he  obtained 
from  the  Department  of  State. 

General  Agreement  on  Tariffs  and  Trade,  Geneva,  October 
30,  1947.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series 
1700.  Pub.  3188.  2044  pp.  In  two  volumes,  with  the 
documents  arranged  in  the  order  of  the  original  compila- 
tion deposited  with  the  United  Nations.  Vol.  I,  $3;  Vol. 
II,  $1.50. 

Volume  I  contains  the  Final  Act  ( in  both  English  and 
French),  the  English  authentic  texts,  and  the  revised 
translations  by  the  Department  of  State  of  the  parts 
of  this  agreement  in  which  only  the  French  texts  are 
authentic. 

Volume  II  contains  the  French  authentic  texts  and 
the  Protocol  of  Provisional  Application  (in  both  Eng- 
lish and  French). 


Education:  Cooperative  Program  in  Paraguay.    Treaties 
and  Other  International  Acts  Series  1S15.    Pub.  3333.    20 

pp.     10<i'. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Paraguay — 
Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Asuncion 
Dec.  11,  1947  and  Mar.  3,  1948;  entered  into  force 
Mar.  3,  1948.  And  Agreement  between  Paraguay  and 
the  Institute  of  Inter-American  Affairs — Signed  at 
Asunci6n  Mar.  S,  1948 ;  approved  by  exchange  of  notes 
signed  at  Asunci6n  Mar.  10  and  12,  1948;  entered 
into  force  Mar.  12, 1948. 

International  Refugee  Organization.  Treaties  and  Other 
International  Acts  Series  1846.     Pub.  3362.     119  pp.     30^. 

Constitution  adopted  by  the  United  States  and  Other 
Governments — Opened  for  signature  at  New  York 
Dec.  15,  1946;  instrument  of  acceptance  deposited  by 
the  United  States,  July  3,  1947;  entered  into  force 
Aug.  20,  1948. 

Air  Service:  Facilities  in  French  Territory.  Treaties  and 
Other  International  Acts  Series  1852.     Pub.  3390.     S  pp. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  France — 
Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Paris  June 
18,  1946 ;  entered  into  force  June  IS,  1946. 

Patents:  Certain  Rights  of  Priority  in  Filing  Applications. 

Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  1861.  Pub. 
3405.    4  pp.     54. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  the  Repub- 
lic of  the  Philippines — Effected  by  exchange  of  notes 
dated  at  Wa.shington  Feb.  12,  Aug.  4  and  23,  1948; 
entered  into  force  Aug.  23, 1948. 

Trade:  Application  of  Most-Favored-Nation  Treatment 
to  Areas  Under  Occupation  or  Control.  Treaties  and 
Other  International  Acts  Series  1834.     Pub.  3406.     7  pp. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Turkey — 
Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Ankara  July 
4,  1948 ;  entered  into  force  July  13,  1918. 

Haitian  Finances:  Waiver  of  Certain  Claims.  Treaties 
and  Other  International  Acts  Series  1862.  Pub.  3407. 
2  pp.     5^. 

Understanding  between  the  United  States  and  Haiti — 
Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Port-au-Prince 
Oct.  1,  1947 ;  entered  into  force  Oct.  1,  1947. 

American  Commission  for  Cultural  Exchange  With  Italy. 

Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  1864.  Pub. 
3409.     9  pp.     54. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Italy — 
Signed  at  Rome  Dec.  18,  1948 ;  entered  into  force  Dec. 
18, 1948. 

Claims:  Hannevig  against  the  United  States;  Jones 
against  Norway.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts 
Series  1865.     Pub.  3410.     S  pp.     54. 

Convention  between  the  United  States  and  Norway — 
Signed  at  Washington  Mar.  28,  1940;  entered  into 
force  Nov.  9,  1948. 

The  United  Nations  and  the  North  Atlantic  Pact.  In- 
ternational Organization  and  Conference  Series  III,  30. 
Pub.  3463.     4  pp.     54. 

Partial  text  of  an  address  by  Ambassador  Philip 
C.  Jessup. 


April  24,   1949 


^{yyvCe/nl^/ 


Treaty  Information  Page 

The  International  Wheat  Agreement  of  1949. 

By  Edward  G.  Cale 507 

Opening  of  Tariff   Negotiations  at   Annecy, 
France: 
Message  From  Secretary  Acheson    ....        520 
U.S.  Delegation 520 

U.S.,  U.K.,  and  France  Announce  Agree- 
ment on  Limitations  on  Certain  Indus- 
tries in  Germany: 

Text  of  Agreement 527 

Plant  Dismantling  and  Prohibited  and  Re- 
stricted Industries  in  Germany    ....        531 

Report  of  the  Secretary  of  State  to  the  Presi- 
dent on  North  Atlantic  Treaty 532 

The    President's    Reply    to    Prime    Minister 

Attlee  on  First  Anniversary  of  EGA.    .    .        536 

Joint  U.S. -Canada  Industrial  Mobilization 
Committee  Established.  Exchange  of 
Notes  Between  the  Two  Governments.    .        537 

The  United  Nations  and  Specialized 
Agencies 

The  Problem  of  Voting  in  the  Security  Coun- 
cil.    By  Ambassador  Warren  R.  Austin  .        512 

U.S.  Participation  in  Continued  U.N.  Ap- 
peal for  Children.  Letter  From  Secretary 
Acheson  to  Secretary-General  Lie     ...        515 

Opinions  of  International  Court  of  Justice 
Announced.  Statement  by  Secretary 
Acheson 516 

Resolution  Extending  Through  1949  the  U.N. 

Appeal  for  Children 516 

Palestine  Relief  Contribution.     Statement  by 

Ambassador  Warren  R.  Austin    ....        517 

U.N.  Documents:  A  Selected  Bibliography.    .        517 

The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations     .    .        518 


Occupation  Matters  page 

U.."^.,  I'.K.,  and  France  Reach  Agreement  on 

German  Reparation  Program 524 

Organization  of  Ruhr  .\uthority.     Statement 

by  Secretary  .\cheson 525 

Occupation  Statute  as  a  Practicable  Basis  of 
Cooperation  With  Future  German  Gov- 
ernment. Statement  by  Secretary  Ache- 
son         526 

U.S.,  U.K.,  and  France  Announce  Agreement 
on  Limitations  on  Certain  Industries  in 
Germany: 

Text  of  agreement 527 

Plant    Dismantling    and     Prohibited    and 

Restricted  Industries  in  Germany  .    .    .        531 

General  Policy 

U.S.  Delegation  to  Conference  for  Drawing 
Up  Convention  for  Protection  of  W^ar 
Victims 522 

Head  of  American  Relief  for  Czechoslovakia 

Arrested  in  Praha 536 

Resumption  of   Diplomatic  Relations   With 

Paraguay 538 

Israeli  Ambassador  Presents  Credentials.    .    .        538 

Economic  Affairs 

Rubber  Study  CJroup:  Sixth  Meeting  Ends  .        521 

W' orld  Trade  Week,  1949.     A  Proclamation  .        523 

The  Foreign  Service 

Confirmation 523 

International  Information  and  Cultural 

Affairs 

American  Educator  To  Visit  Latin  American 

Law  Schools 523 

The  Congress 539 

Publications 

Department  of  State 539 


^/oe/  ^e^a^tme/ni/  m  tnat0 


U.S.  ANSWERS  SOVIET  CHARGES  AGAINST 
NORTH  ATLANTIC  TREATY  •  Statement 

by  Ambassador  Warren  R.  Austin 552 

SUPPRESSION   OF   HUMAN   RIGHTS    IN 

BULGARIA    AND    HUNGARY  •   Statement 

by  Benjamin   V.  Cohen 556 

THE  FREE  UNIVERSITY  OF  BERLIN  •  An 

Article 548 

THE  RETURNED  MASTERPIECES  OF  THE 
BERLIN  MUSEUMS  •  Note  by  Ardelia  R. 
Hall 543 


For  complete  contents  see  back  cover 


Vol.  XX,  No,  513 
May  1, 1949 


^.^^y*.  bulletin 


Vol.  XX,  No.  513    •    Pubucation  3499 
May  1,  1949 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

'  U.S.  Government  Printing  Office 

Washington  25,  D.C. 

Prjce: 

62  Issues,  domestic  SS.OO,  foreign  $7.25 

Single  copy,  15  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  bas 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  (February  18, 
1949). 

Note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  Items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Dkpahtment 
or  State  Bulletin  as  the  source  will.be 
appreciated.  ^— .^— 


The  Department  of  State  BVLLETIJS, 
a  iceekty  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Divixion  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  with  information  on 
devilopments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  work  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BVLLETliS  includes 
press  releases  on  foreign  policy  issued 
by  the  White  House  and  the  Depart- 
ment, and  statements  and  addresses 
made  by  the  President  and  by  the 
Secretary  of  State  and  other  officers 
of  the  Department,  as  tcell  as  special 
articles  on  various  phases  of  inter- 
national affairs  and  the  functions  of 
the  Department.  Information  is  in- 
cluded concerning  treaties  and  in- 
ternational agreements  to  which  the 
United  States  is  or  may  become  a 
party  and  treaties  of  general  inter- 
national interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  aa 
well  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


The  Returned  Masterpieces  of  the  Berlin  Museums 

INTRODUCTORY  NOTE  BY  ARDELIA  R.  HALL 
Arts  and  Monuments  Officer,  Department  of  State 


The  first  two  shipments  of  masterpieces  from 
the  collections  of  the  Kaiser  Friedrich  Museum 
and  the  Nationalgalerie  of  Berlin,  returned  to  Ger- 
many following  a  period  of  safekeeping  in  the 
United  States,  have  been  exhibited  throughout  the 
past  winter  at  the  Central  Collecting  Point  in 
Wiesbaden,  Germany.  The  final  shipment  of 
paintings,  returned  on  April  23,  1949,  will  com- 
plete the  collection  of  returned  masterpieces  in  this 
exhibition. 

While  the  paintings  were  in  the  United  States, 
the  entire  collection  was  displayed  at  the  National 
Gallery  of  Art  in  Washington,  D.C.,  to  approxi- 
mately one  million  people.  A  selection  of  the 
paintings  was  exhibited  in  a  nation-wide  tour  of 
13  cities  to  an  additional  1,439,599.  From  this 
tour,  a  total  of  $305,964  was  received  in  admission 
fees.  This  fund  for  the  relief  of  German  children 
in  the  American  zone  is  being  administered,  on  be- 
half of  Gen.  Lucius  D.  Clay,  by  the  Council  of  Ee- 
lief  Agencies  licensed  for  operation  in  Germany. 

The  paintings  have  been  retm-ned  to  the  Ameri- 
can zone  by  the  Department  of  the  Army  in  accord- 
ance with  the  original  plan  announced  from  the 
White  House  that  they  would  be  restored  to  Ger- 
many as  soon  as  favorable  conditions  for  their 
proper  care  were  assured.  At  the  opening  of  the 
first  showing  in  Germany  at  the  Munich  Central 
Collecting  Point,  General  Clay  said,  "I  am  proud 
to  be  able  to  keep  my  pledge  that  they  would  be 
returned  safely  to  the  German  people.  I  hope 
that  our  mutual  appreciation  of  these  works  of  art 
will  help  toward  mutual  understanding  between 
our  nations." 

The  leading  American  officials  in  Hesse  have 
also  welcomed  the  German  public  in  a  foreword 
and  an  introduction  to  the  catalogue  of  the  re- 
turned masterpieces  at  the  Central  Collecting 
Point  in  Wiesbaden.  Their  comments  here  re- 
printed reveal  something  of  the  scope  of  the 

May  I,  7949 


museum  activities  of  American  Military  Govern- 
ment. These  brief  words  are  also  an  expression 
of  the  high  ideals  which  have  motivated  the  work 
of  the  American  Monuments,  Fine  Arts,  and 
Arcliives  Section  and  are  a  token  of  the  service 
which  the  American  Fine  Arts  officers  have  gen- 
erously contributed  to  the  cultural  life  of 
Germany. 

The  exhibition  was  the  culmination  of  an  im- 
portant phase  of  these  activities  in  connection 
with  the  reassembling  and  reopening  of  German 
national  collections,  which  has  been  little  publi- 
cized in  the  United  States.  Since  1946,  a  series 
of  special  exhibitions  at  the  Wiesbaden  Central 
Collecting  Point  have  been  presented  to  the  Ger- 
man public  under  the  joint  auspices  of  the  Mon- 
uments, Fine  Arts,  and  Archives  Sections  of 
Greater  Hesse,  the  Minister  of  Culture  and  Edu- 
cation of  Hesse,  and  of  the  Stadtkreis,  Wiesbaden. 

The  Wiesbaden  Collecting  Point  is  the  great 
center  where  German  public  collections  have  been 
assembled  from  the  depositories  throughout  the 
American  zone.  Established  by  the  Monmnents, 
Fine  Arts,  and  Archives  officers  in  July  1945,  it 
is  housed  in  one  of  the  finest  museums  of  Ger- 
many, the  New  Landesmuseum.  The  modern 
building  was  completed  and  formally  opened  in 
1920.  Fortunately  this  museum  had  suffered 
little  serious  damage  during  the  war.  The  glass 
of  the  windows  and  skylights  had  been  shattered 
and  the  roof  damaged.  However,  Capt.  Walter 
I.  Farmer,  the  first  director  of  the  newly  estab- 
lished collecting  point,  was  able  to  carry  out  the 
needed  reconditioning  of  the  building.  Seventy- 
five  galleries  were  made  available  through  his  ef- 
forts for  the  exhibition  and  safe  storage  of  the 
great  public  collections  of  the  German  State. 
Until  recently  there  were  4,450  paintings  and  197,- 
200  objects  of  art,  not  including  the  collections 
of  the  Wiesbaden  Landes  Museum,  in  the  custody 


of  the  American  Military  Government  at  this  col- 
lecting point. 

The  Oflice  of  Military  Government  for  Germany 
(U.S.)  has  exerted  every  effort  to  protect  and 
safeguard  these  German  collections.  Whenever 
possible,  personnel  of  the  German  museums  have 
assisted  in  inventorying,  cataloging,  storing,  and 
reporting  on  the  collections  which  had  formerly 
been  in  their  charge.  Urgent  repairs  to  works  of 
art  have  been  made.  The  collections  have  been 
returned,  as  rapidly  as  possible,  to  the  German  in- 
stitutions which  owned  them  and  to  the  city  where 
they  belong.  The  Department  of  the  Army  and 
the  American  Military  Government  have  scrupu- 
lously and  conscientiously  discharged  the  obliga- 
tions of  tliis  Government  under  international  law 
to  respect  cultural  property.  Once  again,  the 
United  States  has  demonstrated  its  practical  con- 
cern for  the  protection  of  these  symbols  of 
civilization. 

The  final  chapter  of  the  long  hegira  of  the  "re- 
turned masterpieces"  will  not  be  written  before 
they  are  restored  once  more  to  their  rightful  own- 
ers, the  people  of  Berlin.  The  first  of  the  Berlin 
museums  was  opened  in  1830.  Today,  the  modern 
buildings  of  the  Staatliche  Museum  and  the  Kaiser 
Friedrich  Museum  stand  roofless  and  unrepaired, 
Keconstruction  may  properly  have  to  wait  upon 
more  urgent  emergency  housing  and  building. 
Although  it  may  be  some  time  before  these  home- 
less collections  can  be  returned,  it  may  confidently 
be  expected  that  the  integrity  and  unity  of  the 
great  Berlin  collections  will  always  be  recognized. 

From  the  great  artistic  wealth  assembled  at  the 
Central  Collecting  Point,  the  notable  series  of  nine 
exhibitions  has  been  arranged  by  the  distin- 
guished Fine  Arts  officers  at  Wiesbaden  and  in 
Greater  Hesse,  including  Captain  Farmer,  Capt. 
Patrick  Joseph  Kelleher,  Capt.  Edith  Standen 
(WAC),  Capt.  Everett  P.  Lesley,  Jr.,  Frank 
Bilodeau,  and  Dr.  Theodore  Allen  Heinrich. 

For  the  past  two  years,  the  Landes  Museum 
has  been  under  the  administration  of  Dr.  Hein- 
rich, of  Berkeley,  California,  a  graduate  of  Cam- 
bridge University,  Land  Chief  for  Hesse  and 
Director  of  the  Wiesbaden  Collecting  Point.  The 
highest  tribute  should  be  paid  to  his  endeavors. 
He  has  been  responsible  for  the  success  of  the  re- 
cent exhibitions.  He  has  discussed  their  great 
cultural  value  in  his  introduction  to  the  catalogue. 


They  have  won  the  warm  and  appreciative  re- 
sponse of  the  German  people  and  of  the  Allied  per- 
sonnel. The  attendance  has  been  drawn  from  all 
zones.  The  schools  and  universities  have  enthusi- 
astically participated  in  these  educational  oppor- 
tunities so  long  denied  them.  Furthermore,  an 
important  revenue  has  been  received  from  admis- 
sion fees  and  the  sale  of  catalogues.  The  first  ex- 
hibit was  officially  opened  by  Col.  James  R.  New- 
man, Director  of  the  Office  of  Military  Govern- 
ment for  Hesse,  who  also  welcomed  the  German 
public  to  the  latest  exhibit  of  the  "returned  mas- 
terpieces." 

The  first  exhibition,  German-owned  Old  Mas- 
ters, was  shown  for  10  weeks,  from  February  10 
to  April  23,  1946,  with  an  attendance  of  63,196 
and  receipts  of  77,051  reichsmarks.  The  exhibit 
was  chosen  from  the  German  national  treasures 
remaining  at  Wiesbaden,  following  the  shipment 
of  the  202  masterpieces  to  Washington.  It  in- 
cluded among  other  paintings,  2  by  Fra  Angelico, 
4  by  Botticelli,  4  by  Raphael,  6  by  Van  Dyck,  and 
18  by  Rembrandt,  as  well  as  the  world-renowned 
head  of  Nefretiti,  erroneously  reported  at  one 
time  to  have  been  lost.  At  that  exhibition  the 
German  public  received  for  the  first  time  the  as- 
surance that  while  many  of  their  historic  build- 
ings had  been  destroyed,  their  art  treasures  had 
survived  the  war. 

The  second  exhibition,  Masterworks  of  North- 
ern Painting  before  1600,  was  exhibited  for  13 
weeks,  from  May  12  to  August  11,  1946,  with  an 
attendance  of  23,116  and  receipts  of  20,928  reichs- 
marks; the  third.  Old  Master  Drawings  of  the 
15th  to  the  18th  centuries,  for  13  weeks,  from 
September  1  to  December  3,  1946,  with  an  attend- 
ance of  13,591  and  receipts  of  19,513  reichsmarks; 
the  fourth,  Christmas  Pictures  of  the  Nativity 
Scenes,  for  8  weeks,  from  December  15,  1946,  to 
February  15,  1947,  with  an  attendance  of  13,394 
and  an  income  of  17,439  reichsmarks;  the  fifth. 
Nineteenth  Century  German  Painting,  for  17 
weeks  from  March  30  to  July  27,  1947,  with  an 
attendance  of  35,380  and  income  of  72,807  reichs- 
marks; the  sixth.  Eighteenth  Century  Art,  for  11 
weeks,  from  September  28  to  December  14,  1947, 
with  an  attendance  of  15,840;  the  seventh,  the 
Haubrick  Collection  of  Paintings  and  Drawings 
by  German  artists,  for  8  weeks,  from  January  31 
to  March  30,  1948,  with  an  attendance  of  9.259, 

Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


receipts  of  21,210  reichsmarks;  the  eighth,  the 
Kembrandt  Exhibition,  on  display  during  the  sum- 
mer of  1948,  drew  an  attendance  of  as  many  as 
2,000  a  day;  and  the  ninth  exhibition,  Keturned 


Masterworks  of  the  Berlin  Collections,  arranged 
for  the  winter  of  1948^9,  is  still  on  view.  The 
foreword  and  introduction  to  the  illustrated  cat- 
alogue of  this  exhibition  follows. 


A  FOREWORD  BY  JAMES  R.  NEWMAN 
Director,  Office  of  Military  Government  for  Hesse 


It  is  a  very  special  pleasure  for  me  to  introduce 
the  ninth  exhibition  at  the  Wiesbaden  Central  Col- 
lecting Point  with  these  words  of  welcome,  because 
it  establishes  a  notable  landmark  in  the  relation 
between  the  German  people  and  the  American 
Military  Government  and  is  the  symbol  of  a  unique 
responsibility  entrusted  to  the  people  of  Hesse. 

The  famous  masterpieces  on  these  walls,  historic 
and  proud  possessions  of  the  Kaiser  Friedrich 
Museum  and  Nationalgalerie  of  Berlin,  have  now 
returned  to  Germany  from  the  United  States, 
where  they  were  sent  in  1945  for  safekeeping  be- 
cause it  was  then  believed  in  Washington  that  no 
adequate  facilities  for  their  proper  care  survived 
in  Germany. 

I  remember  very  well  the  distress  experienced 
at  that  time  by  our  Monuments,  Fine  Arts  and 
Archives  officers,  who  feared  that  this  gesture  of 
generous  concern  for  the  safety  of  these  paintings 
might  be  misinterpreted.  To  allay  any  fears  felt 
by  you  and  to  answer  uninformed  criticism,  the 
President  of  the  United  States  issued  a  public 
statement  concerning  the  transfer  and  gave  his 
personal  pledge  that  the  paintings  would  be  re- 
turned to  Germany  as  soon  as  conditions  should 
warrant.^ 

The  civilized  nations  of  the  world  agreed  over 
forty  years  ago  at  The  Hague  that  the  custom  of 
regarding  works  of  art  as  booty  of  war  a  barbar- 
ous usage  which  should  by  solemn  covenant  be 
abandoned  as  a  step  toward  the  abolition  of  war 
itself.  Although  this  agreement  has  since  been 
violated  and  our  MFA  &  A  officers  have  had  to 
devote  much  time  and  effort  to  recovering  and 
restoring  to  their  rightful  owners  cultural  objects 
looted  by  the  Nazi  government,  we  still  believe  in 
its  fundamental  justice  and  have  devoted  great 
thought  and  effort  to  preserving  the  cultural  heri- 
tage of  the  German  people  until  they  were  in 
position  to  reassume  its  charge. 


That  time  has  now  come.  During  the  past  year 
and  a  half  the  properties  of  the  museums  in  west- 
ern Germany  have  been  returned  to  the  custody  of 
the  owning  institutions,  but  we  were  still  caring  in 
our  Collecting  Points  at  Wiesbaden,  Offenbach 
and  Munich  for  great  quantities  of  cultural  objects 
belonging  to  the  German  people  but  normally 
housed  in  Berlin.  For  practical  purposes  these 
must  at  present  be  considered  as  homeless.  In 
July  and  August  of  this  year  we  have  transferred 
responsibility  for  the  safekeeping  of  these  na- 
tional treasures  to  the  Ministers-President  of 
Hesse  and  Bavaria.  They  are  to  act  as  custodians 
of  this  property  in  the  name  of  the  German  people 
until  the  future  German  government  is  in  position 
to  decide  on  their  ultimate  disposition. 

Now  the  first  half  of  the  202  paintings  sent  to 
Washington  in  1945  for  safekeeping  have  been  re- 
turned to  Wiesbaden  in  accordance  with  our  Presi- 
dent's pledge,  to  be  added  to  the  many  thousands 
of  other  works  of  art  already  placed  in  your  cus- 
tody. Meanwhile  these  great  works  of  art  have 
been  seen  and  enjoyed  by  over  one  and  a  half  mil- 
lion American  people.  The  other  half  of  the  202 
paintings,  sturdier  than  these,  are  making  a  longer 
tour  in  America  and  will  return  to  Wiesbaden  next 
spring.  The  proceeds  of  that  exhibition  tour  are 
being  used  to  buy  food,  medical  supplies  and  cloth- 
ing for  needy  German  children. 

It  is  our  earnest  hope  that  our  act  of  faith  in 
honoring  our  convenantal  obligations  to  your 
works  of  art  will  not  only  have  increased  our  im- 
derstanding  and  respect  for  each  other,  but  that  it 
will  serve  to  establish  as  an  active  principle  in  the 
future  conduct  of  international  affairs  the  ideal  so 
hopefully  and  unequivocally  expressed  in  The 
Hague  Convention. 


'  BtTLLETiN  Of  Sept.  30, 1945,  p.  499. 


May   1,   1949 


AN  INTRODUCTION  BY  THEODORE  ALLEN  HEINRICH 

Director,  Wiesbaden,  Central  Collecting  Point,  and 
Chief,  MFA  &  A  Section,  OMGH 


The  present  exhibition,  unlike  all  but  the  first 
of  the  eight  previous  Wiesbaden  shows,  has  only 
the  obvious  link  of  quality  between  the  paintings 
to  explain  why  these  particular  masterpieces  have 
been  hung  together  in  the  galleries  at  the  present 
moment.  The  first,  opened  on  10  February  1946, 
was  arranged  at  a  time  when  most  of  the  German 
museums  still  lay  in  comatose  inactivity  as  shat- 
tered ruins  or  grievously  damaged,  their  contents 
scattered  to  obscure  hiding  places  from  the  im- 
partial fury  of  bombs,  tlieir  survival  or  loss  as 
sacrifice  to  the  insatiable  appetite  of  war  known 
only  to  a  few  museum  directors  and  to  the  Allied 
officers  of  the  Monuments,  Fine  Arts  and  Archives 
service.  It  was  offered  as  visible  token  and  joyful 
proof  of  the  safety  of  certain  of  the  most  precious 
and  widely  beloved  treasures  of  Germany's 
national  patrimony,  nearly  all  deriving  from  the 
collections  of  the  Berlin  museums  and  brought  to 
Wiesbaden  for  safekeeping  from  a  salt  mine  near 
Kassel  to  which  they  had  been  evacuated  by  Ger- 
man museum  authorities  after  many  adventures 
during  the  latter  part  of  the  war. 

During  the  past  two  years,  as  the  museums  of 
western  Germany  slowly  succeeded  in  carrying  out 
at  least  sufficient  repairs  to  provide  adequate  stor- 
age conditions  for  their  own  property,  it  has  been 
possible  to  return  to  their  own  homes  an  extremely 
large  number  of  paintings,  sculptures,  drawings 
and  other  cultural  materials  which  had  found 
refuge  in  the  Wiesbaden  Central  Collecting  Point. 
During  the  life  of  the  Collecting  Point  it  has  also 
been  possible,  in  connection  with  its  primary  func- 
tion, to  recover,  identify,  and  restitute  to  their 
countries  of  origin  very  considerable  quantities 
of  cultural  objects  removed  from  those  countries 
during  the  German  occupation,  items  ranging  from 
single  paintings  to  the  national  stamp  collection  of 
Poland.  This  work  is  nearing  completion,  but 
we  are  now  engaged  in  trying  to  perform  a  similar 
service  for  the  shockingly  large  number  of  works 
of  art  expropriated  from  their  German  Jewish 
owners  by  the  Nazis  and  which  had  found  their 
nameless  way  into  our  custody. 

Of  bona  fide  German  public  property  gathered 
for  safekeeping  in  Wiesbaden,  the  progress  of  re- 


building of  western  German  museums  has  made 
it  possible  to  reduce  our  holdings  by  returns  to 
the  owning  institutions  to  the  point  that  our  one 
remaining  custodial  responsibility  of  real  conse- 
quence in  this  category  was  for  that  deriving  from 
the  Berlin  museums.  It  seemed  to  us  that  this  re- 
sponsibility might  well  be  transferred  to  the 
German  people  and  so  during  the  latter  part  of 
this  summer  the  Minister-President  of  Hesse 
agreed  to  act  in  the  name  of  the  German  people  as 
bailee  for  these  properties  until  such  time  as  the 
future  German  government  can  undertake  to  make 
the  proper  disposition  of  them. 

Meanwhile,  we  felt  under  some  obligation  to 
make  available  in  the  form  of  changing  exhibi- 
tions the  more  important  objects  from  the  immense 
collections  sheltered  here.  We  felt  that  the  re- 
sponse to  the  first  exhibition  corroborated  our  as- 
sessment of  the  need  to  be  able  to  see  these  things 
freely  again  and  encouraged  us  to  devote  many 
hours  of  our  private  time  to  planning  and  ar- 
ranging the  integrated  series  of  shows  which  fol- 
lowed and  which  have  been  carried  out  with  the 
active  support  of  the  Hessian  Kultusministerium. 
Using  always  as  basis  the  extraordinarily  rich  col- 
lections of  the  Berlin  museums  but  with  the  fur- 
ther enrichments  made  possible  by  the  extremely 
generous  cooperation  of  other  museums  and  pri- 
vate collectors,  we  have  been  able  to  explore  various 
aspects  of  the  principal  developments  and  prob- 
lems of  European  art,  to  study  its  interrelations 
and  divergencies,  to  admire  its  strength  and  pon- 
der its  weakness,  to  enjoy  and  appreciate  the  in- 
dividual works  which  are  the  quintessential  ex- 
pression of  the  highest  moments  and  achievements 
of  western  civilization,  our  common  heritage. 
Many,  especially  those  who  are  now  students,  have 
come  to  know  these  things  at  first  hand  for  the 
first  time,  and  it  has  been  our  sufficient  reward 
to  lielp  make  this  possible. 

Through  these  exhibitions  we  have  had  an  in- 
tense look  at  the  painting  of  the  lands  north  of  the 
Alps  before  1600.  We  have  traced  the  iconog- 
raphy of  the  story  of  the  Nativity  through  all 
the  schools  of  European  art.  We  examined,  as 
few  people  have  ever  had  the  opportunity  to  do 


Department  of  Slate  Bulletin 


in  public  galleries,  the  development  of  drawing 
from  the  middle  ages  to  the  French  Kevolution, 
an  exliibition  of  perhaps  unparalleled  splendor  in 
an  absorbing  field  in  which  to  know  the  hands 
of  the  greatest  masters  in  their  most  intimate  ex- 
pression. We  took  a  good  look  at  the  best  of  19th 
century  German  painting  and  drawing  and  asked 
some  searching  questions  concerning  their  relative 
importance  and  meaning.  We  reexamined  the 
sumptuous  paintings,  tapestries  and  drawings  of 
the  18th  century,  where  we  found  that  not  all  was 
frivolity  and  that  the  voice  of  that  too  lightly 
dismissed  era  has  still  something  of  value  to  say 
in  our  own  troubled  times.  We  contrived  to  ap- 
proach with  fresh  understanding  some  of  the  more 
or  less  contemporary  paintings  which  the  Nazis 
had  ignorantly  labelled  "degenerate"  but  which 
much  of  the  non-German  world  has  long  accepted 
as  the  valid  expression  of  our  age.  And  finally  we 
have  had  an  extraordinary  opportunity  to  study 
the  work  and  mind  of  one  of  the  greatest  of  all 
Europeans,  Rembrandt. 

At  each  new  exhibition,  however,  some  favorite 
work  was  missing  and  we  have  often  been  asked 
why,  for  exam^jle,  Eembrandt's  "Man  with  the 
Golden  Helmet,"  or  van  Eyck's  "Man  with  a 
Pink"  or  Holbein's  "George  Gisze"  was  not  in- 
cluded. They  were  not  included  because  when 
these  great  treasures  were  discovered  by  Ameri- 
can troops  deep  in  their  salt  mine  refuge  and 
were  brought  up  to  the  light  of  day,  some  of 
them  actually  on  7  May  1945,  prophetically  on 
the  day  of  armistice  like  the  spirit  of  civilization 
resurrected  from  entombment,  our  governmentj 
felt  grave  concern  for  their  future  welfare.  It 
was  known  in  America  that  German  museums 
were  in  ruins  and  disturbing  rumors  reached 
Washington  that  even  the  Wiesbaden  Collecting 
Point,  to  which  the  paintings  had  been  trans- 
ferred, did  not  offer  ideal  storage  conditions  for 
these  often  fragile  embodiments  of  what  we  hold 
most  precious  in  our  mutual  cultural  history.  For 
this  reason  the  hospitality  of  our  most  modern 
and  technically  perfect  museum  building,  the  Na- 
tional Gallery  of  Art,  was  offered  to  provide  the 


best  possible  conditions  of  safety  for  a  portion 
of  these  irreplaceable  treasures,  and  202  paintings 
of  the  Berlin  museum  collections  crossed  the 
Atlantic. 

As  Dr.  Newman  has  pointed  out,  in  order  to 
avoid  any  misunderstanding  of  the  motives  for 
tliis  transfer  the  President  of  the  United  States 
personally  announced  that  the  move  was  made  in 
order  to  guarantee  the  greatest  possible  security 
for  these  immensely  valuable  works  of  art  until 
such  time  as  the  German  people  might  be  able 
to  make  proper  provisions  for  them.  In  the  mean- 
time a  vast  number  of  Americans,  most  of  whom 
would  perhaps  never  have  the  opportunity  to  view 
them  in  Germany,  have  had  the  privilege  and 
joy  of  seeing  these  masterworks  and  have  gladly 
contributed  their  admission  fees  for  the  welfare 
of  your  children. 

Now  slightly  over  half  of  these  great  paintings 
have  returned  to  Wiesbaden  and  this  exhibition 
is  presented  as  proof  of  our  pledge  to  return  them. 
The  other  97,  less  fragile  than  these,  are  making 
a  wider  tour  in  America  to  make  it  possible  for 
several  hundred  thousand  more  people  in  the 
Middle  and  Far  West  of  the  United  States  to 
have  their  chance  to  enrich  their  understanding 
of  Europe  through  the  privilege  of  seeing  at  least 
this  part  of  the  celebrated  Berlin  collections. 
They  will  return  to  Wiesbaden  in  the  late  spring 
to  join  the  paintings  here  exhibited. 

However  long  it  may  take  to  eliminate  all  the 
barbarities  of  war,  and  war  itself,  we  would  like 
to  think  that  on  this  point  at  least  we  may  have 
helped  to  establish  the  inviolability  of  works  of 
art  as  pawns  in  the  differences  which  have  beset 
us.  Art  is  a  common  language,  a  bridge  we  may 
freely  cross  and  recross  in  our  effort  to  find  mu- 
tual respect  and  understanding.  Therefore, 
while  quality  may  be  the  only  obvious  link  between 
these  paintings,  their  true  and  deepest  importance 
to  us  now  lies  in  the  reason  for  their  being  here 
together  in  Wiesbaden,  as  the  hopeful  symbol  of 
a  pledge  made  good,  of  a  new  and  better  era  in 
human  relations. 


May   1,   1949 


Free  University  of  Berlin^ 


BY  HOWARD  W.  JOHNSTON 
Chief,  Higher  Education,  Education  and  Cultural  Relations  Branch,  OMG  Berlin  Sector 


The  Free  University  of  Berlin  (Freie  Univer- 
sitaet  Berlin)  stands  today  as  a  symbol  in  the 
struggle  for  academic  freedom  and  human  dignity. 
As  its  2,200  students  walk  through  the  streets  of 
Dahlem  in  the  U.S.  Sector  of  Berlin  to  their 
classes,  it  would  seem  difficult  to  realize  that  eight 
months  ago  the  Free  University  was  no  more  than 
a  hope  in  the  minds  of  some  forward-looking 
Berliners. 

The  Free  University  has  come  to  be  known  as  a 
fighting  university,  for  its  professor's  and  students 
are  aware,  from  personal  experience,  of  the  dan- 
gers of  totalitarianism.  However,  it  is  primarily 
a  growing  educational  institution,  utilizing  what 
would  have  been  half-idle  buildings,  students  and 
professors.  It  conserves  the  traditional  values  of 
European  universities  and  at  the  same  time  serves 
as  an  instrument  for  realizing  university  reforms. 

The  story  of  the  development  of  the  Free  Uni- 
versity cannot  be  separated  from  the  story  of 
Soviet  efforts  to  rebuild  the  old  University  of  Ber- 
lin into  a  communist  school.  Berlin  University 
on  Unter  den  Linden — prior  to  1933  one  of  the 
world's  greatest  universities — had  a  very  special 
meaning  for  hundreds  of  Americans  who  studied 
in  its  famous  halls. 

From  the  time  of  its  founding  in  1809  under  the 
leadership  of  Wilhelm  von  Humboldt  it  had  a  de- 
cided influence  on  Germany  and  the  world. 
Hegel,  Mommsen,  Hartmann  and  Meinecke  were 
among  its  renowned  teachers.  In  size  it  was  im- 
pressive with  11,000  students  and  120  scientific 
institutes. 

In  1933,  its  friends  were  grieved  to  see  the  Nazi 
hand  fall  on  this  center  of  academic  freedom. 
With  the  coming  of  peace  in  1945  these  friends 
hoped  that  once  again  a  great  university  could  be 
rebuilt  on  Nazi  ruins. 

Berlin  fell  to  Soviet  forces  in  April  1945.  Dur- 
ing the  three  succeeding  months  before  the  French, 


'Reprinted  from  Information  Bulletin  of  U.S.  Military 
Government  In  Germany,  Mar.  8,  1949. 


British  and  American  occupation  forces  entered 
the  city,  Berlin  institutions,  including  Berlin  Uni- 
versity, were  being  organized  according  to  eastern 
ideas.  The  education  officers  of  the  three  western 
sector  occupation  authorities  were,  therefore,  im- 
mediately confronted  with  a  Soviet  proposal  to 
reopen  Berlin  University  under  the  direct  control 
of  an  occupation  power.  The  Soviet  area  of  re- 
sponsibility in  Berlin  included  Stadt  Mitte  (Mid- 
dle borough)  with  its  Unter  den  Linden  university 
buildings. 

The  American  educational  representative  made 
a  counterproposal  in  the  Allied  Kommandatura  of 
Berlin  to  the  effect  that  the  university  be  placed 
under  the  Berlin  city  government  where  it  had  al- 
ways been  so  that  each  occupation  power  would 
have  equal  responsibility  for  the  university's  de- 
veloj^ment.  The  Soviet  representative  argued 
that  the  univei'sity  had  served  a  wider  area  than 
tlie  city  of  Berlin  and  therefore  should  not  be  con- 
trolled merely  by  the  city  government,  and  that 
Berlin  University  had  been  a  hotbed  of  Nazism 
and  could  not  be  entrusted  to  a  German  governing 
unit.  The  French  and  British  backed  the  Ameri- 
can proposal  for  quadripartite  control. 

Because  the  Soviets  vetoed  the  measure,  the  mat- 
ter went  to  the  deputy  commandants  and  then  to 
the  commandants  without  agreement.  Finally,  in 
October  1945  the  problem  reached  the  Allied  Con- 
trol Authority,  the  highest  Military  Government 
level  in  Germany,  where  the  Russians  used  the 
same  arguments  and  again  vetoed  the  attempt  of 
the  throe  western  powers  to  place  Berlin  Univer- 
sity under  quadripartite  control. 

Russian-controlled  newspapers  announced  that 
Berlin  University  would  open  in  November  1945 
under  Russian  control.  The  opening  date  was 
postponed  twice  but  finally  in  January  1946  the 
university  resumed  classes. 

Meanwhile,  a  gi'oup  of  professors  under  the 
leadership  of  Prof.  Eduard  Spranger  appealed  to 
the  British  and  the  U.S.  Military  Governments  to 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


open  a  university  in  one  of  the  west  sectors. 
Neither  Military  Government  could  at  that  time 
comply,  however,  because  to  have  helped  the  pro- 
fessors would  have  constituted  a  serious  unilateral 
action  which  might  have  disrupted  Allied  relations 
at  a  time  when  the  West  was  bending  every  effort 
to  make  fourpower  relations  work. 

As  1946  drew  to  a  close  it  was  apparent  that  the 
Soviet  authorities  were  fitting  the  university  into 
a  definite  plan.  Extra  food  and  coal  were  allot- 
ted to  professors  and  special  favors  granted  to 
students.  The  sons  and  daughters  of  workers 
were  favored  over  those  of  professional  men  and 
"capitalists".  A  strongly  communist  preparatory 
school  was  established  to  provide  the  university 
with  party-liners.  A  separate  teachers  faculty 
was  formed  and  this  was  being  filled  with  com- 
munist instructors.  Communist  professors  were 
brought  in  to  fill  key  positions  on  the  legal,  eco- 
nomics and  philosophical  faculties.  By  making 
some  of  these  courses  compulsory,  by  requiring 
special  examinations  and  by  making  sure  that 
ample  brochures  for  instruction  were  printed,  the 
new  school  soon  felt  the  pressure  of  the  Com- 
munist Party  line. 

In  spite  of  this,  the  majority  of  students  tried 
to  go  quietly  ahead  with  their  studies  as  if  nothing 
was  happening.  However  when  six  student  op- 
position leaders  were  kidnaped  in  the  spring  of 
1947  student  opposition  became  more  vocal. 

A  student  paper  printed  by  opposition  students 
came  to  life.  This  monthly  magazine,  Collo- 
quium, presented  many  thoughtful  articles  on  the 
meaning  of  academic  freedom  and  on  the  problems 
of  university  reconstruction.  As  the  party  line 
drew  sharper  and  opposition  became  more  articu- 
late. Colloquium  become  more  and  more  the 
spokesman  of  student  opposition  throughout  the 
Soviet  Zone.  In  April  1948  three  of  the  editors  of 
Colloquium  were  expelled  as  students  from  Berlin 
University  because  of  articles  they  had  written. 
Their  articles  constituted  a  sharp  attack  on  Soviet 
occupation  methods  of  dealing  with  East  Zone 
universities. 

The  question  raised  by  the  sudden  expulsion 
was  not  so  much  whether  the  articles  deserved  dis- 
ciplinary action  but  whether  or  not  the  students 
should  have  been  dismissed  by  the  occupation 
power  without  reference  to  the  regularly  consti- 
tuted system  for  student  discipline.  Two  large 
student  demonstrations  against  the  Soviet  action 

May  I,  7949 


helped  to  focus  public  attention  on  conditions  at 
Berlin  University. 

On  May  10  the  city  assembly,  meeting  in  the 
Soviet  Sector,  voted  83-17  to  try  again  to  place 
the  school  on  Unter  den  Linden  under  the 
Magistrat  and,  should  this  fail,  to  establish  a  Free 
University  in  the  western  sectors  of  Berlin.  The 
Russian  SED  party  and  Soviet  authorities  were 
violently  opposed  to  the  proposal,  and  of  course, 
refused  to  share  control  of  their  school  which  then 
enrolled  6,000  students. 

Berliners  who  wished  to  make  a  firm  stand  for 
academic  freedom  were  therefore  faced  with  the 
problem  of  developing  a  new  university.  Several 
suitable  buildings  were  available  in  the  American 
Sector,  and  teaching  equipment  and  books  were 
known  to  exist  in  scattered  places  throughout  the 
western  sectors.  Moreover,  scores  of  professors 
and  thousands  of  students  already  lived  in  the 
American  Sector.  However,  the  Germans  were 
promised  nothing,  therefore,  except  temporary  as- 
sistance and  whatever  help  might  be  possible 
through  regular  MG  channels. 

Several  committees  had  suddenly  mushroomed, 
each  conmaittee  wishing  to  do  something  about 
the  new  university.  A  meeting  of  all  interested 
persons  was  held  June  19  and  a  German  prepara- 
tory committee  of  12  was  formed.  Prof.  Ernst 
Eeuter,  later  elected  mayor  of  Berlin,  became 
chairman  of  the  committee  which  evolved  a  work- 
able plan.  Dozens  of  buildings  had  to  be  in- 
spected, prospective  professors  had  to  be  inter- 
viewed and  numerous  problems  had  to  be  studied 
with  great  care. 

On  July  23  the  committee  issued  a  proclamation 
stating  the  meaning  of  Berlin's  struggle  for  aca- 
demic freedom  and  asking  the  world  to  assist  in 
establishing  a  free  university.  On  July  24  a 
newly  organized  Secretariat  moved  into  an  empty 
building  in  Dahlem.  Dozens  of  willing  students 
hustled  in  and  out  and  within  a  few  hours  chairs 
and  tables  began  to  appear.  That  same  day  two 
telephones  were  installed.  A  tremendous  cooper- 
ative effort  was  begun. 

Problems  facing  the  secretariat  were  compli- 
cated by  the  Soviet  blockade  and  by  currency  re- 
form. Securing  equipment  from  the  West,  which 
had  looked  easy  in  June,  appeared  insurmountable 
after  currency  reform.  Even  the  problem  of  con- 
tacting professors  in  the  West  proved  difficult 
because  the  airlines  over  the  Soviet  blockade  had 
to  be  reserved  for  food,  coal  and  economic  neces- 


sities.  Money  was  scarce  and  as  students  brought 
in  books  and  furniture  it  was  still  not  clear  how 
much  money  would  be  available.  Dr.  von  Berg- 
mann  and  his  student  assistants  in  the  secretariat 
volunteered  their  time. 

It  was  not  until  August  that  the  preparatory 
committee  learned  that  2,000,000  Deutsche  marks 
($600,000),  from  a  fund  which  had  accrued  from 
the  sale  of  U.S.-issued  (jerman  publications,  would 
be  available.  Two  million  Deutsche  marks  was  a 
lot  of  money,  but  only  a  small  sum  for  starting  a 
university.  Development  of  a  natural  science 
faculty  with  its  expensive  laboratories  had  to  be 
postponed,  and  effort  had  to  be  exerted  to  make 
each  mark  go  as  far  as  possible. 

By  September  students  were  busy  furnishing 
the  building  across  the  street  from  the  secretar- 
iat's office  and  repairing  a  wing  of  a  large  museum 
three  blocks  away. 

Special  committees  carefully  drafted  proposed 
statutes  for  the  university.  On  Nov.  10  the  stat- 
utes giving  the  new  university  a  legal  basis  were 
approved  by  the  city  government,  which  was  no 
longer  subject  to  Soviet  vetoes. 

During  October  and  November,  more  than  5.000 
prospective  students  procured  application  blanks 
at  the  Secretariat.  Because  the  standards  were 
high  and  because  the  new  university  was  in  no 
position  to  offer  every  field  of  study,  only  3,500 
applications  were  returned.  The  faculty  commit- 
tee who  interviewed  and  screened  these  3,500  stu- 
dents found  great  difficulty  in  selecting  only  2,200 
because  the  caliber  of  the  applicants  was  excellent. 
Selection  was  based  chiefly  on  the  student's  aca- 
demic record  and  on  his  promise  of  success. 

According  to  a  definite  system,  extra  points 
were  given  for  resistance  to  Nazism.  As  a  result, 
less  than  eight  percent  of  the  Free  University  stu- 
dents were  officers  in  the  army  or  held  offices 
in  Hitler  organizations.  This  percentage  is  per- 
haps the  lowest  for  any  university  in  Germany. 
Twenty  percent  of  the  students  are  the  sons  and 
daughters  of  laborers,  as  compared  with  three  per- 
cent for  German  universities  before  the  war. 
Twenty-five  percent  are  young  women,  a  figure 
which  is  high  for  any  German  university,  particu- 
larly in  view  of  the  fact  that  almost  no  women 
attended  German  universities  prior  to  World 
War  I. 

At  present  there  is  a  waiting  list  of  more  than 
6,000  prospective  students.    Of  those  men  and 


women  now  studying  at  the  university,  30  percent 
are  from  the  Soviet  Zone,  20  percent  transferred 
from  the  Berlin  University  and  five  percent  from 
the  west  zones.  From  outside  Germany  are  30 
students  of  17  different  countries. 

During  November,  classes  were  organized  under 
three  faculties:  philosophy,  law-economics  and 
medicine.  By  December,  the  organizational  work 
was  well  in  hand  and  students  were  thronging  the 
university  halls.  A  formal  opening  was  planned 
for  Dec.  4. 

This  ceremony,  held  at  Titania  Palast,  a  large 
theater  in  the  American  Sector,  was  a  memorable 
occasion.  Professor  Renter  described  the  work 
of  the  preparatory  committee  to  2,000  students, 
parents,  leading  German  civic  leaders  and  Allied 
representatives  present.  Prof.  Friedrich  Mein- 
ecke,  who  had  been  elected  rector,  was  ill ;  never- 
theless he  spoke  through  a  recording.  Prof.  Ed- 
win Redslob,  pro-rector,  gave  the  main  address. 

Col.  Frank  L.  Howley,  commandant  of  the  U.S. 
Sector  of  Berlin,  who  had  given  the  imiversity 
strong  backing  from  the  start,  urged  the  Germans 
to  follow  the  example  of  Diogenes,  who  was  desti- 
tute materially  but  who  asked  Alexander  the 
Great  merely  to  step  aside  and  let  the  sun  shine 
through  when  Alexander  came  to  him  with  offers 
of  aid. 

Mrs.  Louise  Schroeder,  then  acting  ma3'or,  spoke 
in  behalf  of  the  Berlin  population.  Thornton 
Wilder,  famous  playwright,  brought  greetings 
from  American  universities.  Representatives 
brought  messages  from  the  students  and  profes- 
sors of  the  universities  of  western  Germany. 

Behind  the  professors,  civic  leaders  and  stu- 
dents who  sat  on  the  stage — it  was  new  to  have 
students  share  such  honors — a  huge  university  seal 
had  been  erected — Freie  Universitaet  Berlin,  Veri- 
tas, Justitia,  Libertas  (truth,  justice,  liberty). 

After  the  flourishes  of  opening,  the  steady  tasks 
of  teaching  and  building  have  gone  on.  One  hun- 
dred and  thirty-four  professors  and  assistants 
have  already  been  selected  for  the  three  faculties 
and  more  are  added  each  week  as  top-ranking  pro- 
fessors seek  refuge  from  eastern  universities.  On 
the  philosophical  faculty  are  teachers  of  philoso- 
phy, history,  languages,  art,  psychology,  litera- 
ture (including  English  and  American),  jour- 
nalism, dramatics,  archaeology  and  musicology. 
The  law-economics  faculty  has  teachers  in  many 
aspects  of  these  fields  as  well  as  in  political  science. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


The  medical  faculty  so  far  offers  work  in  the  clin- 
ical semesters  of  both  medicine  and  dentistry  and 
is  in  the  process  of  developing  pre-clinical  courses. 

Gaps  and  weaknesses  as  still  exist  in  the  Free 
University's  offerings  can  be  remedied  in  part  by 
exchange  relations  with  Berlin's  specialized  col- 
leges— the  Technical  University  (Technische  Uni- 
versitaet)  and  the  Academy  of  Political  Science 
(Hochschule  fuer  Politik)  in  the  British  Sector 
and  the  Evangelical  Seminary  (Kirchliche  Hoch- 
schule) and  Teachers  College  (Paedagogische 
Hochschule)  in  the  American  Sector. 

Fifteen  buildings  are  used  by  the  university. 
Some  of  the  hospitals  used  by  the  medical  faculty 
are  located  in  the  British  and  French  Sectors. 
The  university  is  centered,  however,  around  the 
buildings  in  Dahlem  which  offers  an  excellent  site 
for  study  and  for  campus  activities. 

Approximately  400,000  books  are  available  to 
the  university.  This  aid  includes  the  nearby 
OMGUS  Reference  Library  with  more  than  110,- 
000  volumes,  a  sociological  library  of  5,000  and  an 
international  law  library  of  40,000  books. 

The  Free  University  is  governed  by  a  board  of 
12  members — Berlin's  mayor,  the  city  finance  min- 
ister, the  city  education  minister  and  three  others 
from  the  City  Assembly,  the  rector,  a  representa- 


tive of  the  professors  and  another  of  the  students. 
The  three  remaining  places  are  filled  by  outstand- 
ing laymen — this  year  a  judge,  a  labor  leader  and 
a  Nobel  Prize-winning  chemist.  For  internal 
affairs  there  is  a  senate  on  which  two  students  sit 
for  all  matters  except  those  pertaining  to  pro- 
fessors. 

One  student  said  that  it  is  wonderful  to  be  able 
to  discuss  problems  freely  without  the  feeling  that 
the  student  sitting  nearby  is  a  spy.  The  emphasis 
at  the  Free  University  is  definitely  on  studies,  but 
there  is  also  a  sense  of  community  responsibility 
that  has  been  lacking  in  German  universities. 

The  Free  University  faces  a  serious  problem  of 
financial  support;  DM  1,800,000  ($540,000)  will 
be  needed  before  the  end  of  the  summer.  The 
City  Government  stands  ready  to  help,  but  is  itself 
faced  with  the  financial  difficulties  of  the  block- 
aded city. 

The  Free  University  is  providing  a  democratic 
experience  for  the  hundreds  of  Germans  taking 
part  in  its  development  and  is  fulfilling  the  moral 
obligation  of  the  community  to  talented  young 
people  whose  education  was  interrupted  by  the 
war.  The  Free  University  is  an  example  of  coop- 
erative democratic  activity. 


Views  of  U.S.,  U.K.,  and  France  on  German[^Basic  Law 
Transmitted  to  Military  Governors 


[Released  to  the  press  April  22] 

On  April  8  the  Foreign  Secretaries  of  the 
United  States,  the  United  Kingdom,  and  France 
transmitted  their  views  on  the  German  Basic  Law 
to  the  United  States,  British,  and  French  Military 
Governors  for  the  latter's  guidance.  It  was  left 
to  the  Military  Governors  to  determine  the  time 
they  considered  it  appropriate  to  communicate 
these  views  to  the  Parliamentary  Council  at  Bonn. 
The  Foreign  Secretaries'  views,  cited  below,  were 
transmitted  to  the  Parliamentary  Council  at  Bonn 
on  the  afternoon  of  April  22. 

(a)  The  Foreign  Ministers  are  not  able  to  agree  at  this 
time  that  Berlin  should  be  included  as  a  Land  in  the 
initial  organization  of  the  German  Federal  Republic. 

(6)  In  the  tinancial  field  any  provisions  put  forward 
by  the  Parliamentary  Council  in  the  direction  of  securing 
financial  independence  and  adequate  strength  for  both 
the  Laender  and  Federal  Governments  in  operating  in 
their  respective  fields  will  receive  sympathetic  considera- 
tion. 

May  1,  1949 


(c)  On  the  question  of  Article  36  (Article  95  (c) )  they 
will  also  give  sympathetic  consideration  to  any  formula 
which 

(i)  eliminates  from  the  federal  powers  those  matters 
definitely  excluded  by  the  London  agreement. 

(ii)  assures  to  the  Laender  sufiicient  powers  to  en- 
able them  to  be  independent  and  vigorous  governmental 
bodies. 

(iii)  assures  to  the  Federal  Government  suflBcient 
powers  in  the  important  fields  of  government  to  enable 
them  to  deal  effectively  with  those  fields  in  which  the 
interests  of  more  than  one  Land  are  substantially  and 
necessarily  involved. 

(d)  Finally,  the  Foreign  Ministers  request  that  the 
Military  Governors  indicate  to  the  Parliamentary  Coun- 
cil, at  an  appropriate  time,  that  they  are  ready  to  con- 
template a  suggestion  for  a  right  of  the  Federal  State  to 
supplement,  from  its  own  revenues,  appropriations  made 
by  the  Laender  from  revenues  from  their  own  taxes 
levied  and  collected  by  them,  by  grants  for  education, 
health  and  welfare  purjwses,  subject  in  each  case  to 
specific  approval  of  the  Bundesrat. 

551 


THE  UNITED  NATIONS  AND  SPECIALIZED  AGENCIES 
U.S.  Answers  Soviet  Charges  Against  North  Atlantic  Treaty 

STATEMENT  BY  AMBASSADOR  WARREN  R.  AUSTIN > 


The  members  of  the  General  Assembly  have 
heard  charges  by  the  delegation  of  the  U.S.S.R. 
that  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  is  a  step  toward 
undermining  the  United  Nations  and  that  the 
parties  to  the  treaty,  particularly  the  United 
States,  have  engineered  the  treaty  for  imperialistic 
purposes  and  with  aggressive  designs.^  There  is 
and  can  be  no  rational  basis  for  such  assertions. 
Yet  it  comes  as  no  surprise  to  my  delegation  that 
such  charges  are  made.  Almost  every  construc- 
tive step  that  the  United  States  has  taken  of  late 
to  assist  free  nations  to  restore  their  economies, 
regain  political  stability,  or  preserve  their  inde- 
pendence when  that  is  threatened,  is  slandered  and 
distorted  by  a  certain  kind  of  propaganda.  Such 
propaganda  usually  attacks,  with  now  familiar 
phrases,  any  particular  international  program 
with  which  the  United  States  is  associated  as  some 
wicked  monstrosity  laden  with  dangers  to  peace. 
It  demands  that  the  sole  test  of  the  peaceful  in- 
tentions of  governments  and  peoples  be  that  of 
unqualified,  unquestioning  agreement  with  the 
views  of  the  Soviet  Union.  It  thus  seeks  the 
adoption  by  international  bodies  of  the  approach 
and  system  of  definitions  employed  internally  by 
the  political  authorities  in  the  Soviet  system. 

Such  propaganda  itself  is  dangerous.  It  at- 
tempts on  the  one  hand  to  confuse  the  minds  and 
conscience  of  people  in  free  societies  in  the  face 
of  present-day  realities.  On  the  other  hand,  it 
plants  distrust  and  hostility  toward  the  outside 
world  in  the  minds  of  those  whose  information 
comes  to  them  filtered  through  a  tightly  controlled 
censorship.  The  result  is  far  from  beneficial  to 
the  cause  of  peace. 

The  text  of  the  treaty  was  published  over  three 
■weeks  ago,  and  its  substance  is  now  being  dis- 
cussed by  the  free  peoples  of  the  world  and  is  soon 
to  be  discussed  by  the  parliamentary  bodies  of  the 
several  countries  which  have  signed  the  treaty. 

The  treaty  represents  a  voluntary  association  of 
freedom  and  peace-loving  countries  to  assure 
peace  and  security  in  the  North  Atlantic  area,  and 
so  to  contribute  to  the  foundations  of  peace  in  the 
world  generally.  There  is  one  thing  and  one 
thing  only   which   the  treaty   is   against — it   is 

'Made  before  the  plenary  session  of  the  Genernl  As- 
sembly in  New  York,  N.Y.  on  Apr.  14,  1949,  and  released 
to  the  press  by  the  U.S.  Mission  to  the  United  Nations  on 
the  same  date. 

'  For  text  of  treaty,  see  Btjlletin  of  Mar.  20,  1949,  p. 
339 ;  also  printed  as  Department  of  State  publication  3464. 

552 


against  aggression  or  the  threat  of  aggression, 
however  these  may  manifest  themselves.  But  its 
positive  emphasis  is  on  peace  and  on  the  means 
of  best  assuring  peace.  It  is  not  an  aggressive 
instrument  and  cannot  be  used  as  such  because  it 
is  rooted  in  the  purposes  and  principles  of  the 
United  Nations  Charter.  Its  framers  have  kept 
actively  in  mind,  throughout  the  negotiating  pe- 
riod, the  great  measure  of  strength  and  support 
which  this  defense  arrangement  should  bring  to 
the  United  Nations,  the  paramount  international 
organization  for  the  maintenance  of  peace  and  se- 
curity. The  treaty  fits  squarely  within  the  frame- 
work of  the  Charter  and  is  designed  to  coordinate 
the  exercise  of  the  ri^ht  of  self-defense  specifically 
recognized  in  article  51  of  the  Charter.  The 
United  States  has,  as  is  well  known,  already  en- 
tered into  a  similar  collective  defense  arrangment 
with  the  other  American  republics  as  part  of  the 
reorganization  of  the  Inter-American  system  to 
bring  it  within  the  framework  of  the  United 
Nations  Charter. 

The  treaty  has  come  into  existence  because  there 
is  a  real  need  for  it  in  the  world  today.  It  is  a 
formal  acknowledgement  of  the  repeatedly  dem- 
onstrated fact  that  the  nations  on  both  sides  of  the 
North  Atlantic  have  a  natural  community  of  in- 
terest and  of  democratic  ideals.  The  European 
part  of  this  community  is  now  engaged  in  a  great 
cooperative  effort  to  attain  economic  recovery  and 
the  blessings  of  political  and  social  stability  wliich 
depend  so  much  on  economic  well-being.  In  that 
effort  the  United  States  is  assisting  on  a  very  large 
scale  because  it  knows  that  a  sound  and  healthy 
Europe  is  a  great  force  for  peace,  a  vital  element  in 
a  strong  United  Nations,  and  a  friendly  partner 
with  the  United  States  in  its  efforts  for  increased 
security  for  all.  But  Western  European  recovery 
is  being  retarded  b}'  a  sense  of  insecurity  and  fear 
stemming  from  the  increased  pressures  and  threats 
which  have  their  origin  in  the  plans  or  fancies  of 
international  Communism.  Already  certain  coun- 
tries have  found  themselves  unable  to  resist  such 
pressures  and  have  become  submerged.  It  is  vital 
to  peace  that  this  process  should  not  be  continued. 
The  nations  of  the  North  Atlantic  area  have 
learned  the  lesson  that  they  must  stand  together 
and  make  it  plain  in  advance  that  they  will  do  so, 
since  the  preservation  of  the  freedom  and  inde- 
pendence of  any  one  of  them  is  incontestably  a  mat- 
ter of  vital  concern  to  all.  The  treaty  is  intended 
to  remove  the  feeling  of  insecurity  which  hinders 

Department  of  Slate  Bulletin 


economic  recovery  in  Europe  and  to  reestablish  a 
needed  equilibrium  under  which  East  and  West  can 
cooperate  in  the  United  Nations  and  outside  it,  in 
mutual  respect  and  forbearance.  The  American 
people  and  their  Government  consider  these  aims 
to  be  wholly  consistent  with  our  commitments  to 
render  steadfast  support  to  the  United  Nations. 
They  also  consider  them  to  be  in  the  interest  of 
the  security  of  the  United  States. 

So  far  as  the  United  States  is  concerned,  the  de- 
velopment of  the  treaty  stems  directly  from  the 
will  of  the  people,  as  stated  through  their  repre- 
sentatives in  Congress.  On  June  11,  1948,  the 
Senate  of  the  United  States,  by  overwhelming  vote, 
resolved  that  the  United  States  pursue  three  prin- 
cipal objectives  within  the  United  Nations :  ^ 

1.  Progressive  development  of  regional  and 
other  collective  arrangements  for  individual  and 
collective  self-defense ; 

2.  association  of  the  United  States  with  such 
arrangements  based  on  self-help  and  mutual  aid ; 
and 

3.  promoting  peace  by  our  determination  to  ex- 
ercise the  right  of  individual  and  collective  self- 
defense  in  the  event  of  armed  attack. 

The  President  of  the  United  States  in  his  inau- 
gural address  declared  that  the  unfaltering  sup- 
port of  the  United  Nations  is  one  of  the  cardinal 
points  of  his  four-point  program.* 

It  is  our  belief  that  the  treaty  fully  expresses  the 
common  determination  of  its  participants  to  sup- 
port the  Charter,  to  prevent  aggression,  and  to  pre- 
serve the  peace.  In  concluding  this  defense  ar- 
rangement, the  parties  are  not  absolved  from  one 
iota  of  their  responsibilities  or  obligations  under 
the  United  Nations  Charter. 

That  fact  alone  should  remove  the  fears  which 
Mr.  Gromyko  has  expressed  here.  His  fears  should 
be  allayed  further  by  a  dispassionate  reading  of 
the  treaty  itself.  The  charges  made  here  by  him 
are  the  same  as  those  made  by  his  government  be- 
fore a  text  of  this  treaty  was  even  in  existence. 
The  prejudgment  is  not  justified  by  the  treaty 
itself. 

Article  1  of  the  treaty  affirms  as  obligation  to 
which  those  parties  already  members  of  the  United 
Nations   are  already   committed;   namely, 

...  to  settle  any  international  disputes  in  which  they 
may  be  involved  by  peaceful  means  in  such  a  manner  that 
international  peace  and  security,  and  justice,  are  not  en- 
dangered, and  to  refrain  in  their  international  relations 
from  the  threat  or  use  of  force  in  any  manner  inconsistent 
with  the  purposes  of  the  United  Nations. 

Article  7  is  equally  categorical  on  the  inviolabil- 
ity of  "rights  and  obligations  under  the  Charter  of 
the  Parties  which  are  members  of  the  United  Na- 
tions." 
May  1,  1949 


The  paramount  authority  of  the  Security  Coun- 
cil of  the  United  Nations  in  enforcement  action  is 
clearly  recognized.  At  the  same  time,  the  treaty 
is  based  on  the  inherent  right,  recognized  in  article 
51  of  the  Charter,  of  collective  self-defense  against 
armed  attack  pending  the  time  when  the  Security 
Council  has  taken  the  measures  necessary  to  main- 
tain international  peace  and  security.  Measures 
to  be  taken  in  the  exercise  of  this  right  must  be 
reported  immediately  to  the  Security  Council  and 
cannot  in  any  way  affect  the  authority  and  respon- 
sibility of  that  organ  for  the  maintenance  of 
peace. 

In  articles  2  and  3  the  parties  pledge  themselves 
to  preserve  and  strengthen  their  free  institutions; 
to  promote  better  understanding  of  the  principles 
on  which  free  institutions  are  founded ;  to  promote 
conditions  of  stability  and  well-being ;  and  to  de- 
velop economic  cooperation  among  themselves 
They  also  agree  to  a  program  of  self-help  and  mu- 
tual aid  in  order  to  carry  out  the  objectives  of  the 
treaty. 

Article  4  provides  for  joint  consultation  when- 
ever, in  the  opinion  of  any  participant,  "the  terri- 
torial integrity,  political  independence  or  security 
of  any  of  the  Parties  is  threatened." 

Article  5  establishes  the  principle  that  an  armed 
attack  against  one  or  more  of  the  parties  in  Eu- 
rope or  North  America  will  be  considered  as  an 
attack  against  all.  This  would  bring  into  play 
measures  of  collective  self-defense  under  article  51 
of  the  Charter,  each  party  to  take  such  action  as  it 
deems  necessary,  including  the  use  of  armed  force, 
in  any  given  instance.  Any  such  measures  would 
be  immediately  reported  to  the  Security  Council 
and  must  be  terminated  when  the  Security  Coun- 
cil has  taken  the  measures  necessary  to  restore  and 
maintain  international  peace  and  security. 

It  should  be  remembered  that  the  principal  ob- 
jective underlying  article  51  was  to  express  the 
right  of  states  individually  or  collectively  to  take 
measures  to  meet  an  armed  attack  until  the  Secu- 
rity Council  has  taken  the  measures  necessary  to 
maintain  international  peace  and  security. 

The  prominent  characteristic  of  article  51  is  the 
expression  in  it  of  a  cause  for  action  which  is  recog- 
nized the  world  over,  and  which  commanded  agree- 
ment at  San  Francisco,  namely:  "The  inherent 
right  of  individual  or  collective  self-defense." 
Great  progress  had  already  been  made  immediately 
before  the  meeting  in  San  Francisco  in  implemen- 
tation of  that  inherent  right.  The  states  of  the 
Western  Hemisphere  had,  by  treaties,  developed 
a  system  of  their  own  in  the  hemisphere  for  the 
operation  of  measures  of  self-defense.  The 
Chapultepec  conference  had  finished  its  work  only 
two  months  before  the  meeting  at  San  Francisco. 


'  Bulletin  of  July  18,  1948,  p.  79. 
'  Bulletin  of  Jan.  30,  1949,  p.  123. 


There  it  had  crystallized  the  basic  principles  of 
this  system  of  hemispheric  self-defense  in  the  Act 
of  Chapultei)ec.  At  San  Francisco,  therefore, 
where  the  adoption  of  this  act  by  the  American 
rcpuljjics  was  brought  to  the  attention  of  the  nego- 
tiators of  the  Charter  of  the  United  Nations,  the 
question  arose  how  the  legitimate  operation  of 
such  a  regional  system  was  to  be  fitted  into  a  gen- 
eral global  system. 

At  the  same  time,  the  American  states  supported 
the  primacy  of  the  universal  system  which  the 
Charter  sought  to  establish.  The  interest  of  the 
United  Nations,  then  being  formed,  to  avoid  an 
isolationism  of  a  regional  nature  which  might  con- 
Hict  with  the  principles  and  purposes  of  this  great 
voluntary  association,  were  taken  care  of  through 
other  provisions  than  those  of  article  51.  How- 
ever, this  was  done  without  impairing,  in  the  least 
degree,  the  right  of  regional  associations  to  act  in 
self-defense  by  tlie  categorical  language  of  article 
51.  This  language  is — "Nothing  in  the  present 
Charter  shall  impair  the  inherent  right  of  indi- 
vidual or  collective  self-defense  if  an  armed  attack 
occurs  against  a  Member  of  the  United  Nations, 
until  the  Security  (council  has  taken  the  measures 
necessary  to  maintain  international  peace  and 
security. .  . ."  This  comprehends  anything  in  the 
Charter  that  might  stand  in  the  way  of  this  special 
right  of  self-defense.  Articles  52  and  53  deal  with 
enforcement  action  and  not  action  for  self-defense. 
The  former  requires  authorization  from  the 
Security  Council;  the  latter  does  not. 

Therefore,  this  is  not  a  new  issue.  Mr.  Gromyko 
presents  an  old  issue  that  was  settled  by  the  con- 
summation of  the  Charter  of  the  United  Nations 
with  article  51  in  it. 

Additional  articles  define  the  area  directly 
covered  by  the  defense  provisions  of  the  treaty, 
provide  for  effective  bodies  to  coordinate  imple- 
mentation, establish  norms  for  the  adherence  of 
other  states,  and  provide  for  the  ratification  and 
duration  of  the  treaty.  The  treaty  may,  if  any  of 
the  parties  so  request,  be  reviewed  after  ten  years 
in  the  light  of  the  factors  then  affecting  peace  and 
security  in  the  North  Atlantic  area  and  of  the 
further  development  of  United  Nations  agencies 
and  programs. 

As  the  depository,  the  Government  of  the  United 
States  expects  to  register  the  treaty  with  the 
United  Nations,  in  accordance  with  article  102  of 
the  Charter,  when  ratifications  necessary  to  bring 
the  treaty  into  force  have  been  obtained. 

I  have  outlined  the  contents  of  the  treaty  in 
order  to  make  plain  the  entire  consistency  of  the 
treaty  with  the  United  Nations  Charter  on  everj- 
point.    It  should  not  be  thought  that  because  the 


"  Bulletin  of  Apr.  .3,  1049,  p.  403 ;  also  printed  as  De- 
partment of  State  publication  3480. 

°  For  text  see  Bulletin  of  May  9,  1948,  p.  600. 


treaty  applies  to  the  North  Atlantic  area  its  ad- 
herents are,  or,  could  be,  indifferent  to  the  welfare 
or  independence  of  free  countries  in  other  areas. 
The  United  States  has  repeatedly  made  plain  in 
thougiit  and  deed  its  interest  in  the  maintenance  of 
the  integrity  and  independence  of  such  countries 
as  Gi-eece,  Turkey,  and  Iran.  Other  parties  to  the 
North  Atlantic  Treaty  have  also  indicated  in  vari- 
ous ways  their  similar  interest  and  concern.  To 
the  extent  that  this  new  treaty  can  strengthen  the 
security  of  the  North  Atlantic  area,  we  are  con-  ■ 
viiiced  that  it  can  also  contribute  to  a  greater  w 
measure  of  security  in  other  areas  as  well.  The  ■ 
United  States  is  also  determined  to  continue  to 
work  through  the  United  Nations  by  all  available 
and — appropriate  means  to  achieve  the  same  basic 
objective. 

Mr.  Gromyko  has  complained  that  the  Soviet 
Union  is  being  isolated  from  the  peace-loving  na- 
tions of  the  world.  If  this  is  so,  it  is  pertinent  to 
ask  who  is  responsible  for  that  isolation. 

Take,  for  example,  economic  relations. 

The  Soviet  Union  in  July  1947  was  invited  to 
participate  in  the  program  to  rebuild  Europe's 
shattered  economy  and  to  give  a  better  standard 
of  living  to  Europe's  millions.  But  the  Soviet 
Government  refused  to  take  part  in  this  joint 
effort.  Indeed,  Andrei  Zdhanov  told  the  initial 
Cominform  conference  that  the  Soviet  Union  "will 
make  every  effort  in  order  that  this  plan  [the  Mar- 
shall Plan]  be  doomed  to  failure." 

Take,  for  example,  cultural  relations. 

The  United  States  believes  that  the  cause  of 
peace  can  be  served  by  creating  better  under- 
standing among  peoples.  Toward  this  end  the 
United  States  has  sought  repeatedly  but  unsuc- 
cessfully to  establish  with  the  U.S.S.R.  the  ex- 
change of  students,  professors,  artists,  books,  and 
the  products  of  scientific  investigation.  But  it  is 
an  unfortunate  fact  that  since  the  middle  of  1947, 
the  Soviet  Government  has  embai'ked  upon  a  cam- 
paign to  place  everj^  type  of  obstacle,  supported  by 
the  threat  of  heavy  punishment,  in  the  way  of 
contacts  between  the  Russian  people  and  the 
people  of  the  non-Soviet  world.^ 

Instead  of  seeking  to  lead  the  Russian  people 
into  closer  and  friendlier  relationship  with  the 
l)eoplcs  (if  other  countries,  the  Soviet  Government 
has  deliberately  sought  to  block  any  free  inter- 
change of  ideas,  and  indeed  through  its  controlled 
press,  has  systematically  and  deliberately  sought 
to  poison  the  minds  of  the  Russian  people  against 
examining  the  ideas  of  other  countries. 

Take,  for  example,  political  relations. 

Mr.  Gromyko  complains  that  the  Soviet  Union 
was  excluded  from  the  Brussels  pact  °  and  from 
the  North  Atlantic  Treaty.  But  how  did  the 
Soviet  Government  respond  to  earlier  efforts  for 
closer  political  relationship?  Secretary  of  State 
Byrnes  in  1946  offered  to  the  Soviet  Union   a 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


mutual  guarantee  pact  against  any  future  German 
or  Japanese  aggression  to  remain  in  force  for  25 
or  even  40  years.  But  instead  of  accepting,  the 
Soviet  Government  rejected  that  offer. 

We  have  heard  the  Western  Union  characterized 
as  another  means  of  isoLating  the  Soviet  Union. 
I  ask  you  to  recall  what  event  preceded  the  forma- 
tion of  the  Western  Union  ?  Was  it  not  the  Com- 
munist seizure  of  Czechoslovakia?  Coming  as  it 
did  upon  the  heels  of  a  series  of  acts  of  territorial 
aggrandizement,  did  not  the  capture  of  this  state 
by  the  instruments  of  international  Communism 
give  the  nations  of  Western  Europe  good  reason  to 
fear  for  their  safety,  and  to  join  together  in 
measures  for  their  own  defense?  The  Brussels 
treaty  and  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  are  continu- 
ations of  the  efforts  of  peace-loving  nations  to  find 
ways  of  assuring  themselves  that  aggressive  totali- 
tarianism will  be  deterred  from  further  adven- 
tures, and  to  give  expression  to  the  ideals  of  liberty 
and  democracy  which  Communist  ideology  is  at- 
tempting to  destroy  in  Europe. 

It  should  be  abundantly  clear  to  all  that  these 
efforts  have  been  directed  against  potential  ag- 
gressors and  no  one  else.  What  is  the  significance 
of  the  constant  reiteration  by  the  Soviet  Union  of 
the  statement  that  the  treaty  is  directed  against 
it  ?  Is  it  possible  that  this  could  be  the  expressions 
of  a  guilty  conscience? 

Take,  still  another  example:  the  activities  of 
the  United  Nations.  The  Soviet  Union  has  been 
invited  repeatedly  to  join  the  various  specialized 
agencies  of  the  world  to  participate  in  joint  efforts 
to  build  a  better  world.  But  the  Soviet  Govern- 
ment preferred  to  isolate  itself  from  most  of  these 
organizations.  Now  that  it  is  withdrawing  from 
the  World  Health  Organization,  the  Soviet  Union 
belongs  to  only  2  of  the  13  specialized  agencies. 
Just  as  this  isolation  of  the  Soviet  Union  is  of  its 
own  making,  so  is  it  true  that  it  can  be  ended 
whenever  the  Soviet  Union  decides  to  join  whole- 
heartedly the  peaceful  family  of  nations. 

The  lack  of  certainty  that  the  Security  Council 
will  be  able  to  function  with  full  effectiveness, 
which  has  been  high  lighted  by  the  abuse  of  the 
privilege  of  the  veto,  is  one  of  the  reasons  which 
have  made  it  necessary  for  members  to  find  other 
means  within  the  framework  of  the  Charter  to 
insure  their  own  security  and  safeguai'd  the  pur- 
poses and  principles  of  the  Charter.  The  North 
Atlantic  Treaty,  which  was  signed  in  Washing- 
ton on  April  4  of  this  year,  is  designed  to  serve 
as  one  of  such  means.  This  treaty  gives  concrete 
expression  within  the  North  Atlantic  area  to  an 
obligation  which  is  implicit  in  the  Charter.     The 

'  Btilletin  of  Mar.  27, 1949,  p.  38. 


North  Atlantic  Treaty  is  designed  to  support  the 
purposes  and  principles  of  the  United  Nations  and 
to  strengthen  the  organization. 

May  I  revert  for  a  moment  to  the  item  of  the 
agenda  which  is  now  before  us.  The  injection  by 
the  Soviet  Union  of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty 
into  this  discussion  gives  a  strong  reason  in  addi- 
tion to  those  which  I  gave  yesterday  for  the 
adoption  of  the  pending  four-power  resolution 
aimed  at  cooperation  in  efforts  at  security  and 
peace. 

These,  then,  are  our  intentions  and  purposes  in 
joining  with  11  other  governments  in  the  con- 
clusion of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty.  We  believe 
that  it  will  strengthen  the  United  Nations  and  help 
to  create  conditions  under  which  that  organization 
cair  better  and  more  surely  discharge  its  great  re- 
sponsibilities. In  conclusion,  I  should  like  to  cite 
a  passage  from  Secretary  Acheson's  recent  radio 
address  to  the  American  people  on  the  meaning  of 
the  Atlantic  pact.'  Secretary  Acheson  stated 
what  every  true  Amei'ican  will  echo  fervently  and 
with  conviction: 

".  .  .  This  country  is  not  planning  war 
against  anyone.  It  js  not  seeking  war.  It  abhors 
war.  It  does  not  hold  war  to  be  inevitable.  Its 
policies  are  devised  with  the  specific  aim  of  bridg- 
ing by  peaceful  means  the  tremendous  differences 
which  beset  international  society  at  the  present 
time." 

The  members  of  this  Assembly  can  be  sure  that 
these  sentiments  are  based  on  the  deepest  convic- 
tions of  the  American  people,  and  that  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  United  States  will  continue  its  policy 
of  firm  support  to  the  United  Nations  and  defense 
of  the  cause  of  peace. 

Let  US  increase  the  power  of  the  United  Nations 
by  giving  the  pending  resolution  decisive  success. 


Documents  and  State  Papers 
January  1949  contains: 

The  Problem  of  Greece  in  the  Third  Session  of  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly 

Activities  of  the  Far  Eastern  Commission:  Second  Report 
by  the  Secretary-General 

Calendar  of  International  Meetings  with  Annotations 

February  1949  contains: 

The  Trusteeship  Council:  Third  Session 

The  German  Press  in  the  U.S.-Occupied  Area  1945-48 

Three  Years  of  Reparations 

Private  Commercial  Entrants  to  Japan 

Calendar  of  International  Meetings  with  Annotations 

Copies  of  the  publication  are  for  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of 
Documents,  Government  Printing  OtTice,  Washington  25,  D.  C,  at 
300  a  copy;  subscription  price  for  12  issues  is  $3.00  a  year. 


May  7,  1949 


Suppression  of  Human  Rights  in  Bulgaria  and  Hungary 


STATEMENT  BY  BENJAMIN  V.  COHEN  > 
U.S.  Delegate  to  the  General  Assembly 


The  questions  here  raised  concerning  civil  and 
religious  liberties  in  two  former  enemy-controlled 
countries  deserve  our  most  serious  consideration. 

In  January  1942  in  the  first  formal  declaration 
of  the  United  Nations,  the  nations  engaged  in  the 
struggle  with  the  forces  of  tyranny  expressed  their 
common  intention  to  fight  on  to  victory  in  defense 
of  liberty,  independence,  religious  freedom,  and 
human  rights  for  all  peoples. 

In  February  1945  at  Yalta,  the  three  war  lead- 
ers of  the  United  Nations — Stalin,  Churchill,  and 
Roosevelt — gave  a  solemn  pledge  on  behalf  of  their 
respective  countries  to  the  peoples  of  Europe  then 
on  the  threshold  of  liberation  that  freedom  should 
be  restored,  not  to  their  former  rulers  and  not  to  a 
new  set  of  rulers,  but  to  those  peoples  themselves. 
To  them  we  promised  the  right  to  create,  through 
free  elections,  democratic  institutions  of  their  own 
choice.  And  under  the  peace  treaties  signed  at 
Paris  in  February  1947,  the  states  formerly  allied 
with  Germany  undertook  as  an  international  ob- 
ligation to  protect  and  safeguard  the  fundamental 
freedoms  and  human  rights  of  their  peoples. 

Under  the  Charter  of  the  United  Nations  all 
the  members  of  the  United  Nations  also  solemnly 
committed  themselves  to  take  joint  and  separate 
action  in  cooperation  with  the  organization  to 
promote  universal  respect  for,  and  observance  of, 
human  rights  and  fundamental  freedoms  for  all 
without  distinction  as  to  race,  sex,  language,  or 
religion.  In  Paris  last  autumn,  without  a  dissent- 
ing vote,  the  General  Assembly  adopted  a  Declara- 
tion of  Human  Rights  and  called  upon  all  peoples 
and  organs  of  society,  by  teaching  and  education 
and  by  progressive  measures,  to  promote  respect 
for  these  rights  and  to  secure  their  effective 
recognition  and  observance.^ 

Under  articles  55  and  56  the  field  of  human 
rights  is  brought  plainly  and  expressly  within  the 
scope  of  the  Charter,  and  the  Assembly's  authority 
in  this  field  may  be  exercised  under  articles  10  and 
14.  Article  2  (7)  of  the  Charter  regarding  non- 
intervention in  matters  of  domestic  jurisdiction 
was  not  intended  to  preclude,  in  appropriate  cases, 

'  Made  in  the  Ad  Hoc  Political  Committee  on  Apr.  18, 
1940,  and  released  to  the  pres.s  by  the  U.S.  Mission  to  the 
United  Nations  on  the  same  date. 

'  For  text  of  the  Universal  Declaration  of  Human  Rights, 
see  Bulletin  of  Dec.  19,  194S,  p.  752. 

"TIAS  1650  and  1651  (Department  of  State  publica- 
tions 2973  and  2974). 

556 


discussion  in  the  Assembly  concerning  the  promo- 
tion of  human  rights  and  fundamental  f  reeaoms  to 
which,  individually  and  collectively,  the  members 
of  the  United  Nations  have  committed  themselves 
in  the  Charter.  Nor  is  the  Assembly  barred  under 
appropriate  circumstances  from  expressing  an 
opinion  or  making  a  recommendation  when  there 
is  a  persistent  and  willful  disregard  for  human 
rights  in  any  particular  country.  Moreover,  in 
determining  the  applicability  of  article  2,  para- 
graph 7,  we  must  not  lose  sight  of  the  important 
fact  that  in  the  case  before  us,  Bulgaria  and  Hun- 
gary have  assumed  in  the  treaties  of  peace  ^  spe- 
cial obligations  under  international  law  to  secure 
human  rights  and  fundamental  freedoms  to  all 
persons  under  their  jurisdiction. 

Generally  speaking,  however,  no  organ  of  the 
United  Nations  can  compel  corrective  action  in 
this  field  in  the  absence  of  a  breach  of  or  a  threat 
to  international  peace  or  of  a  treaty  providing  for 
such  action. 

A  serious  responsibility  rests  upon  the  members 
of  the  Assembly  to  refrain  from  making  recom- 
mendations which  may  not  only  be  ignored  but 
may,  in  fact,  in  certain  situations  create  greater  in- 
transigence on  the  part  of  those  criticized  and  ag- 
gravate the  position  of  those  most  deserving  of 
our  sympathy  and  assistance.  The  task  of  the 
Assembly  is  to  promote  respect  for  and  the  observ- 
ance of  human  rights  and  fundamental  freedoms 
and  not  to  make  recommendations  which,  in  fact, 
defeat  the  practical  realization  of  its  objectives. 
Moreover,  the  General  Assembly  obviously  cannot 
itself  act  as  a  court  to  review  all  the  individual 
cases  in  which  it  may  be  alleged  that  human  rights 
and  freedoms  have  been  infringed.  But  an  ap- 
preciation of  the  practical  difficulties  in  promoting 
respect  for  and  observance  of  human  rights  should 
not  and  cannot  be  exploited  as  an  easy  excuse  for 
not  trying  to  do  anything  in  any  situation. 

It  will  require  a  great  deal  of  time  and  concerted 
effort  to  establish  adequate  minimum  .standards  of 
respect  for  human  rights  and  freedoms  every- 
where in  tlie  world  as  envisaged  in  tlie  Charter. 
The  General  Assembly  rightly  took  as  its  first  step 
the  working  out  of  a  general  Declaration  of  Hu- 
man Rights  so  that  we  may  have  some  standards 
with  which  to  start.  In  all  our  countries,  includ- 
ing my  own,  much  remains  to  be  done,  and  none  of 
us  can  afford  to  assume  a  self-righteous  attitude. 

Department  of  Stale  Bullelin 


But  if  we  are  serious  in  our  quest  for  peace,  we 
cannot  fail  to  do  our  part  and  make  every  effort  to- 
wards promoting  minimum  standards  of  human 
riglits.  For  as  Secretary  of  State  Marshall  said 
at  the  opening  of  this  Third  Session  of  the  Assem- 
bly/ "Governments  which  systematically  disre- 
gard the  rights  of  their  own  people  are  not  likely  to 
respect  the  rights  of  other  nations  and  other 
peoples     .     .     ." 

There  are  in  this  changing  and  diversified  world 
varying  concepts  of  the  functions  of  the  state  and 
the  status  of  the  individual.  We  generally  agree 
that  within  the  widest  limits  the  rights  of  the  indi- 
vidual in  relation  to  the  state  should  be  determined 
by  the  respective  states.     But  there  are  limits. 

I  think  that  we  are  all  in  agreement  that,  in  the 
liglit  of  our  pledges  in  the  Charter,  the  functions 
of  the  state  should  be  of  a  character  to  promote  and 
not  to  destroy  human  rights  and  fundamental  free- 
doms. Let  us  grant  that  in  the  absence  of  a  treaty 
we  must  accept  the  judgment  of  the  respective 
states  as  to  what  functions  of  the  state  promote 
the  rights  and  freedoms  of  its  citizens  and  what  is 
the  exact  substantive  content  of  these  rights  and 
freedoms ;  there  is  nevertheless  an  obligation  on  the 
part  of  every  civilized  state  to  exercise  its  judg- 
ment in  honesty  and  good  faith.  No  state  has  the 
sovereign  right  claimed  by  Hitler's  Third  Reich 
to  declare  war  on  freedom  and  religion.  State 
sovereignty  does  not  mean  state  tyranny.  In 
fields  of  thought  and  religion  where  men  cannot 
agree,  freedom  is  the  only  alternative  to  tyranny. 

Unless  a  state  allows  freedom  for  the  peaceful 
expression  of  ideas,  the  road  toward  peaceful 
change  and  progress  is  blocked.  Unrestrained 
political  power,  no  less  than  unrestrained  economic 
power,  has  a  corroding  effect  upon  those  who  ex- 
ercise it.  This  is  particularly  true  when  the  wield- 
ers  of  power  deny  themselves  the  benefit  of  any 
views  not  meekly  submissive  and  subservient  to 
their  will  and  caprice.  Power  which  is  unwilling 
to  combat  error  with  reason  is  not  likely  itself  to 
be  guided  by  reason.  No  state  need  fear  the  errors 
of  dissenting  opinion  and  nonconforming  thought 
where  reason  is  free  to  combat  them.  It  is  uneasy 
privilege,  not  confident  progress,  which  prefers  the 
arbitrament  of  force  to  the  test  of  reason.  Sup- 
pression of  nonconforming  opinion  has  alwaj^s 
characterized  the  police  state  which  fears  the  free- 
dom of  its  own  citizens.  Tolerance  of  dissent  is 
the  most  certain  sign  of  a  free  state  which  cher- 
ishes and  does  not  fear  the  freedoms  of  its  citizens 
and  uses  force  only  to  protect  and  not  to  suppress 
that  freedom. 

As  I  have  already  indicated,  the  governments  of 
the  ex-enemy  states  undertook  a  solemn  interna- 
tional obligation  to  safeguard  the  civil  and  re- 
ligious rights  of  their  people.  These  governments 
have  formally  recognized  that  the  observance  of 
the  human  rights  set  forth  in  the  peace  treaties  is 
not  merely  a  matter  of  their  own  domestic  concern. 
Three  Allied  Powers  signatories  to  the  treaties 

May  J,   1949 


were  given  specific  functions  with  respect  to  the 
execution  of  these  treaties.  Moreover  the  peace 
treaties  provide  definite  procedures  for  the  settle- 
ment of  differences  concerning  their  interpreta- 
tion and  execution.  Having  in  mind  these  pro- 
cedures, on  April  2  my  government  took  initial 
action  in  this  regard  in  notes  addressed  to  the  Gov- 
ernments of  Bulgaria,  Hungary,  and  Rumania, 
formally  charging  them  with  violations  of  the 
human  rights  clauses  of  the  respective  treaties." 
Other  signatory  states  have  taken  similar  steps. 
The  receipt  of  replies  from  Hungary  rejecting  the 
charges  has  confirmed  the  existence  of  disputes  for 
which  the  appropriate  settlement  procedures  are 
laid  down  in  the  peace  treaties.  Many  delegates 
here,  including  those  who  argued  that  the  General 
Assembly  had  no  authority  to  discuss  the  question 
before  us,  have  referred  to  these  procedures.  I 
hope  that  this  is  an  augury  that  all  the  states  con- 
cerned will  cooperate  in  carrying  out  these  pro- 
visions of  the  peace  treaties. 

The  issues  involved  in  these  charges  have  come 
recently  into  the  focus  of  world  opinion  as  a  result 
of  the  prosecutions  of  church  leaders  in  Hungary 
and  Bulgaria.  They  are  of  intense  concern  to  the 
entire  international  community  organized  in  the 
United  Nations  and  not  only  to  the  states  parties 
to  the  treaties  of  peace.  It  seems  to  us  only  fitting 
and  proper  that  the  members  of  the  General  As- 
sembly who  are  deeply  concerned  and  anxious 
about  the  charges  of  suppression  of  civil  and  re- 
ligious liberties  in  these  countries  should  express 
that  concern  and  anxiety.  That  should  help  the 
governments  of  these  countries  to  understand  that 
the  resort  to  the  treaty  procedures  and  to  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  is  supported  not,  as  it  has  been 
charged,  by  a  few  powers  for  undisclosed  imperial- 
istic reasons  but  by  the  world  community  of  na- 
tions because  of  principles  which  are  deeply  and 
universally  cherished. 

There  is  no  intention  whatever,  on  the  part  of 
the  United  States  Government,  to  interfere  in  the 
internal  affairs  of  these  states  or  to  favor  this  or 
that  political  group.  Concern  over  violations  of 
human  rights  cannot  properly  be  pictured  as  a 
policy  of  intervention,  of  encouragement  to  reac- 
tion, or  of  opposition  to  social  reform.  On  the 
contrary,  it  is  our  belief  that  sincere  observance  of 
the  human  rights  and  political  liberties  of  indi- 
vidual citizens  makes  possible  more  genuine  social 
reforms  which  emanate  from  the  people  themselves 
and  may  be  enjoyed  by  them  in  an  atmosphere  free 
from  fear. 

It  is  not  our  purpose  here  to  develop  and  examine 
juridically  the  individual  acts  of  the  ex-enemy  gov- 
ernments which  have  given  rise  to  the  charges 
against  them.  The  United  States  is  prepared  to 
submit  specific  and  detailed  observations  on  such 
acts,  with  supporting  dociunentation,  in  connection 

*  Bulletin  of  Oct.  3,  1948,  p.  432. 

•  Bulletin  of  Apr.  10,  1949,  p.  450. 


with  the  proceedings  under  the  treaties  of  peace. 
Here,  however,  it  is  our  intention  to  outline  only 
the  broad  pattern  of  developments  in  these  coun- 
tries. In  each  country  it  is  a  pattern  of  a  minority 
group  seizing  the  instrumentalities  of  government 
through  force  and  intimidation  and  maintaining 
itself  in  power  through  suppression  of  every  one 
of  the  liuman  rights  and  fundamental  freedoms 
which  these  states  have  solemnly  undertaken  to 
observe.  It  is  a  pattern  disclosing  a  clear  design 
to  suppress  first  the  leaders  of  political  groups  and 
parties  and  then  the  leaders  of  religious  groups 
and  organizations,  because  these  leaders  had  re- 
fused to  subordinate  themselves,  or  to  use  their 
influence  to  subordinate  their  followers,  to  the 
dictates  of  the  Cominform. 

In  nearly  all  countries  there  are  different  con- 
cepts as  to  the  exact  and  appropriate  scope  of  civil 
and  religious  freedom.  But  making  all  due  al- 
lowances for  legitimate  differences  of  opinion,  we 
cannot  see  that  any  substantive  civil  or  religious 
freedom  can  survive  in  these  ex-enemy  countries  if 
the  shabbiest  sort  of  excuse  suffices  to  liquidate 
political  and  religious  leaders  who  refuse  to  accept 
and  support  the  prevailing  totalitarianism. 
These  leaders  have  been  driven  from  office  or 
brought  to  trial  on  the  pretext  that  they  have 
violated  national  laws.  Actually  there  is  reason 
to  believe  that  they  are  being  persecuted  and  tried 
not  for  the  offenses  with  which  they  have  been 
charged,  but  because  the  governments  had  de- 
cided to  liquidate  them  as  sources  of  independent 
opinion.  We  cannot  accept  the  proposition  that 
under  the  guise  of  dissolving  Fascist  or  subversive 
organizations  a  state  may  suppress  the  expression 
of  views  that  are  odious  or  even  hostile  to  it.  We 
do  not  question  the  right  of  the  state  to  protect 
itself  from  those  who  endeavor  to  overthrow  the 
state  by  force  and  violence,  but  that  right  does  not 
justify  the  suppression  of  efforts  to  seek  changes 
by  peaceful  means  even  though  those  efforts  are 
displeasing  to  the  ruling  groups.  Has  there  ever 
been  a  tyranny,  however,  ruthless,  which  did  not 
regard  its  own  authority  as  beneficently  exercised 
in  the  interest  of  the  people  and  its  own  objectives 
as  a  facile  excuse  for  the  suppression  of  freedom  ? 

Let  us  now  consider,  more  specifically,  the  situa- 
tion obtaining  in  Hungary.  The  second  article 
of  the  treaty  of  peace  with  Hungary  reads  as 
follows : 

1.  Hungary  shall  t.ike  all  measures  necessary  to  .secure 
to  all  persons  under  Hungarian  jurisdiction,  without  dis- 
tinction as  to  race,  sex,  language  or  religion,  the  enjoyment 
of  human  rights  and  of  the  fundamental  freedoms,  in- 
cluding freedom  of  expression,  of  press  and  publication, 
of  religious  worship,  of  political  opinion  and  of  public 
meeting. 

2.  Hungary  further  undertakes  that  the  laws  in  force 
In  Hungary  "shall  not,  either  in  their  content  or  In  their 
application,  discriminate  or  entail  any  discrimination  be- 
tween persons  of  Hungarian  nationality  on  the  ground  of 
their  race,  sex,  language  or  religion,  whether  in  reference 


'  Bulletin  of  Aug.  24,  1947,  p.  392. 


to  their  persons,  property,  business,  professional  or  finan- 
cial Interests,  status,  political  or  civil  rights  or  any  other 
matter. 

It  is  the  view  of  my  government  that  freedom 
of  political  opinion,  one  of  the  fundamental  free- 
doms guaranteed  under  this  provision,  has  vir- 
tually ceased  to  exist  in  Hungary.  In  the  na- 
tional elections  of  1945  the  Communist  Party  ob- 
tained only  17  percent  of  the  vote.  But  thi3 
minority  party,  having  arrogated  to  itself  key 
positions  in  the  government,  embarked  upon  a 
campaign  of  force  and  intimidation  on  a  nation- 
wide scale  in  order  to  eliminate  all  actual  and  po- 
tential opposition  and  to  nullify  the  popular 
mandate. 

The  majority  Small  Holders  Party,  which  had 
polled  57  percent  of  the  national  vote  in  19-15,  had 
its  parliamentary  majority  greatly  reduced 
through  purges  and  arrests  of  its  leaders;  Com- 
munist-inspired action  against  its  accepted  leaders 
drove  them  from  positions  in  the  government  and 
in  the  party,  to  be  replaced  by  politicians  subservi- 
ent to  Communist  dictates. 

In  new  elections  held  in  August  1947,  the  in- 
ability of  non-Communist  parties  to  campaign 
freely  because  of  Communist  interference  and 
governmental  restrictions,  the  arbitrary  disfran- 
chisement of  many  voters,  and  practices  such  as 
multi{)le  voting,  made  impossible  a  fair  expres- 
sion of  the  popular  will,  as  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment had  occasion  to  inform  the  Hungarian 
Government  at  the  time."  But  not  satisfied  even 
with  the  results  of  these  elections,  the  Communist- 
dominated  Hungarian  Government  proceeded  to 
silence  and  to  destroy  the  non-Communist  parties. 
By  the  forced  dissolution  of  the  Independence 
Party  and  the  Democratic  People's  Party,  whose 
leaders  had  to  flee  the  country,  over  one  and  one- 
half  million  voters  were  deprived  of  their  rep- 
resentation in  Parliament.  The  historic  Social 
Democratic  Party  was  forced  into  a  merger  with 
the  Communists  following  the  arrest  and  im- 
prisonment of  those  leaders  who  opposed  the 
merger  and  a  purge  of  party  members  who  voiced 
their  opinions  against  it.  The  forced  extinction, 
earlier  this  year,  of  the  Christian  Women's  Camp, 
whose  leader  had  the  temerity  to  introduce  into 
Parliament  a  motion  requesting  the  United  Na- 
tions to  undertake  an  investigation  of  the  state  of 
religious  freedom  in  Hungary,  marked  the  dis- 
appearance of  all  organized  opposition  from  the 
Hungarian  legislature. 

Safeguards  for  an  independent  judiciary  have 
been  criticallv  impaired.  Under  the  provisions  of 
Act  XXIII  of  March  19,  1948,  the  Minister  of 
Justice  in  the  Hungarian  Government  was  given 
authoritv  to  transfer  or  retire  any  judge.  The 
exercise  "of  this  authority  and  the  establishment  of 
a  system  of  the  politically  controlled  People's 
Courts,  have  together  reduced  the  judiciary  to 
political  subservience  to  the  regime. 

As  for  freedom  of  expression,  another  right 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


which  Hungary  had  undertaken  to  respect,  the 
plain  fact  is  that  people  are  afraid  to  express  them- 
selves and  a  significant  silence  obtains  throughout 
the  land  except  for  those  vocal  few  who  speak 
for  the  regime. 

Under  the  present  Hungarian  law  the  utterance 
of  an  untrue  or  even  true  statement  which  is  con- 
sidered by  the  authorities  to  be  detrimental  to  the 
Republic  or  disturbing  to  the  existing  order  is  an 
offense  punishable  by  law. 

Freedom  of  press  and  publication  has  ceased  to 
exist  in  Hungary.  Governmental  authority  is 
used  to  prevent  the  publication  of  any  views  dis- 
tasteful to  the  ruling  group,  and  journalists  have 
been  subjected  to  arrest  and  imprisonment  for 
independent  reporting. 

Freedom  of  public  meeting  has  been  denied  reg- 
ularly since  the  middle  of  1947  to  all  except  the 
controlling  minority  group  and  its  collaborators. 
Prior  to  that  time  meetings  of  democratic,  non- 
Communist  parties  were  broken  up  by  organized 
mobs  with  the  acquiescence  of  the  police. 

Another  fi'eedom  of  fundamental  importance 
guaranteed  in  the  peace  treaty  is  the  freedom  of 
religious  worship.  Religious  worship,  of  course, 
means  more  than  mere  formal  participation  in 
religious  ritual.  Religious  freedom  is  not  assured 
merely  by  a  constitutional  provision  to  that  eflfect, 
or  by  the  fact  that  churches  remain  open.  Re- 
ligion as  a  creative  force  in  a  free  society  requires 
freedom  to  teach  and  voice  views  based  on  re- 
ligious tenets,  freedom  to  associate  with  those  of 
like  belief. 

The  Hungarian  Government,  however,  in  pur- 
suing its  objective  of  bringing  all  aspects  of  Hun- 
garian life  under  a  uniform  totalitarian  system, 
has  sought  by  coercive  measures  to  restrict  the 
legitimate  functions  of  the  churches.  A  system- 
atic campaign  has  been  conducted  to  dissolve 
church  organizations  or  transform  them  into  new 
organizations  under  "acceptable"  leadership.  In 
carrying  out  this  program  the  Government  has 
resorted  to  numerous  repressive  measures,  arbi- 
trary arrests,  trials  of  priests  and  nuns,  inter- 
ference with  religious  processions,  and  restrictions 
on  the  opening  of  religious  chapels. 

By  threats  and  arbitrary  proceedings  against 
church  leaders  and  by  perversion  of  the  judicial 
process,  the  Government  has  attempted  to  force 
the  retirement  or  submission  of  independent 
church  leaders  and  to  bring  about  their  replace- 
ment by  those  willing  to  adopt  a  subservient  atti- 
tude. Those  who  refused,  like  Lutheran  Bishop 
Ordass  and  Cardinal  Mindszenty,  were  arrested 
and  imprisoned. 

Bishop  Ordass  was  informed  by  Government 
representatives  that  he  would  be  in  danger  unless 
he  resigned.  He  replied  that  he  would  not  desert 
his  flock.  Thereupon  he  was  taken  into  custody 
by  the  political  police,  held  for  several  days,  then 
freed.  Wlien  he  still  would  not  resign  he  was  re- 
arrested on  charges  of  embezzlement  and  black- 
May   I,  1949 


marketeering,  and  sentenced  to  a  prison  term  by 
a  "People's  Court." 

Because  of  his  high  ecclesiastical  office  and  his 
criticism  of  the  policies  of  the  Government,  Cardi- 
nal Mindszenty  became  the  focal  point  of  the  at- 
tack upon  the  Catholic  Church.  Religious  meet- 
ings at  which  he  was  present  were  disrupted  or 
interfered  with ;  his  associates  and  followers  were 
subjected  to  threats  and  sometimes  to  physical 
violence  on  the  part  of  the  police.  Finally,  the 
decision  was  taken  to  silence  the  Cardinal,  whose 
prestige  among  the  people  and  whose  open  disap- 
proval of  the  repressive  methods  of  the  regime 
marked  him  for  elimination.  After  the  Govern- 
ment had  been  unable  to  induce  or  frighten  him 
into  submission,  he  was  arrested  and  tried  on 
charges  that  were  mere  pretexts  for  the  Govern- 
ment's principal  objectives  of  discrediting  him 
and  of  destroying  his  influence.  This,  in  our 
view,  is  the  true  significance  of  the  action  against 
Cardinal  Mindszenty. 

I  now  turn  to  Bulgaria,  article  2  of  the  treaty  of 
peace  with  Bulgaria  provides : 

Bulgaria  .shall  take  all  measures  necessary  to  secure  to 
all  persons  under  Bulgarian  jurisrtiction,  without  distinc- 
tion as  to  race,  sex,  language  or  religion,  the  enjoyment  of 
human  rights  and  of  the  fundamental  freedoms,  including 
freedom  of  expression,  of  press  and  putilication,  of  religious 
worship,  of  political  opinion  and  of  public  meetings. 

The  record  of  the  Bulgarian  Government  also 
reveals  a  complete  unwillingness  to  recognize  the 
human  rights  and  freedoms  of  those  whose  think- 
ing does  not  conform  with  the  thinking  of  the  self- 
constituted  ruling  group.  The  violations  of  hu- 
man rights  by  the  Bulgarian  Government  has  been 
deliberate,  systematic,  and  continuous.  Copious 
evidence  of  these  violations  appears  in  the  official 
laws  and  regulations  of  that  Government  and  in  the 
record  of  repressive  measures  in  every  field  of  pub- 
lic activity  designed  to  coerce  the  population  into 
undissenting  obedience. 

There  is  no  freetlom  for  peaceful  political  dis- 
sent in  Bulgaria,  and  the  last  vestiges  of  independ- 
ent political  opinion  have  been  suppressed.  Even 
under  the  circumstances  of  intimidation  and  fraud 
which  marked  the  last  national  elections,  in  Oc- 
tober 1946,  the  opposition  received  over  one  fourth 
of  the  total  number  of  votes.  However,  since  these 
elections  the  opposition  deputies  have  been  ex- 
pelled and  their  parties  dissolved. 

The  enforced  liquidation  of  the  National  Agrar- 
ian Union,  whose  leader,  Nikola  Petkov,  was  exe- 
cuted, and  of  the  Socialist  Party  whose  leader  was 
sentenced  to  imprisonment,  deprived  a  major  por- 
tion of  the  Bulgarian  electorate  of  all  participa- 
tion in  public  affairs.  Petkov  had  an  admirable 
record  of  resistance  to  Fascism  and  Nazi  tyranny. 
In  postwar  Bulgaria,  as  a  legally  elected  member  of 
Parliament,  he  spoke  out  in  defense  of  political  and 
civil  liberties.  As  a  consequence  he  was  deprived 
of  his  immunity,  imprisoned,  and  executed  by  the 
Bulgarian  Government  after  a  trial  to  which  the 


United  States  Government  felt  compelled  to  refer 
publicly  as  a  travesty  of  justice.  The  real  aim  of 
these  political  trials  was  to  liquidate  all  opposition 
to  the  Communist-dominated  government  and  to 
make  impossible  any  change  by  peaceful,  demo- 
cratic means. 

Arbitrary  arrests  and  imprisonment,  deportation 
from  one  part  of  the  country  to  another,  and  forced 
labor  are  now  common  practices  in  Bulgaria.  The 
chief  instrumentality  for  carrying  out  these  depri- 
vations of  human  rights  is  the  "people's  militia," 
which  is  empowered  oy  law  to  detain  and  send  to 
so-called  "labor-educational  communities"  or  new 
places  of  residence  persons  alleged  to  be  of  Fascist 
or  antinational  inclinations,  dangerous  to  public 
order  and  state  security,  or  who  disseminate  harm- 
ful or  false  rumors.  Under  this  law,  local  militia 
chiefs  exercise  vaguely  defined  and  extensive  au- 
thority over  individual  citizens,  many  of  whom  are 
held  under  inhuman  conditions  in  camps  or  in  en- 
forced banishment  in  designated  localities. 

Moreover,  it  is  not  merely  that  the  individual 
may  be  deprived  of  his  fundamental  rights  through 
a  nonjudicial  procedure  lacking  the  basic  safe- 
guards against  arbitrary  action,  for  even  if  so- 
called  judicial  processes  were  employed,  it  has  be- 
come evident  that  the  judiciary  has  been  purged 
so  as  to  make  it  an  instrument  of  the  regime. 

There  is  no  freedom  of  expression,  press,  and 
publication  in  the  Bulgarian  police  state.  Persons 
are  subjected  to  fines  and  imprisonment  for  speak- 
ing, writing,  or  printing  what  the  Government 
chooses  to  regard  as  insulting  or  as  "prone  to  cre- 
ate views  dangerous  to  public  order,"  to  quote  the 
press  law.  The  State  Secrets  Law  and  regula- 
tions enacted  thereunder  define  state  secrets  in  a 
way  which  permits  the  application  of  this  concept 
to  any  subject.  The  citizen  therefore  never  knows 
when  his  mentioning  any  subject  can,  if  the  au- 
thorities choose,  be  employed  as  a  club  against  him. 
The  principal  newspapers  of  the  Agrarian  and 
Socialist  Parties  were  suppressed  in  1947.  No 
newspapers  not  conforming  to  the  government 
"line"  can  be  published. 

In  the  matter  of  freedom  of  religion,  a  clear 
attempt  to  intimidate  religious  bodies  recently  oc- 
curred in  connection  with  the  trial  of  a  group  of 
ministers  of  several  Protestant  sects.  After  being 
arrested  and  kept  in  custody  for  many  months, 
these  men  were  brought  into  court  and  tried  on 
fantastic  charges  of  using  their  churches  as  espio- 
nage adjuncts  of  the  United  States  and  of  the 
United  Kingdom.  The  charges  of  "espionage, 
treason  and  currency  operations"  involving  United 
States  ollicials  were,  as  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment pointed  out  in  a  note  to  the  Bulgarian  Gov- 
ernment, unfounded  and  ludicrous.  As  this  note 
indicated,  the  accusation  and  trials  were  an  obvioiis 
manifestation  of  an  effort  to  intimidate  the  small, 
respected  Protestant  denominations  in  Bulgaria 
and  discredit  their  leaders.  It  happened  that 
these  Protestant  Churches  had  normal  ties  with  re- 
ligious bodies  of  the  same  denomination  outside  of 


Bulgaria.  Behind  the  persecutions  of  their 
pastors  lies  the  unwillingness  of  the  totalitarian 
regime  to  allow  even  such  ties  to  be  maintained. 

A  similar  state  of  affairs  with  respect  to  sup- 
pression of  human  rights  prevails  in  Rumania.  I 
wish  to  make  it  quite  clear  that  the  omission  of 
developments  in  Rumania  from  my  discussion  re- 
sults only  from  the  fact  that  our  agenda  item  is 
confined  to  Hungary  and  Bulgaria,  not  from  any 
desire  to  draw  a  distinction  between  their  record 
and  that  of  Rumania.  As  I  indicated  earlier,  my 
government  has  taken  steps  to  establish  these 
charges  in  all  tliree  countries  and  to  obtain 
remedies  in  accordance  with  the  peace  treaties. 

The  question  before  us  is — what  would  be  the 
proper  and  practicable  course  of  action  for  the 
Assembly  under  the  circumstances?  We  believe 
that  the  General  Assembly  should  give  its  encour- 
agement and  support  to  action  under  the  treaty 
procedures  for  inquiry  and  determination.  It 
seems  to  us  that  such  a  course  is  preferable  to  any 
other  that  is  available  to  the  Assembly.  It  is  the 
course  that  best  accords  with  the  spirit  of  article  33 
of  the  Charter  which  counsels  the  parties  to  a  dis- 
pute to  resort  to  means  of  their  own  choice  prior  to 
a  recourse  to  the  United  Nations.  "We  hope  there- 
fore that  the  General  Assembly  will  take  official 
note  of  the  charges  made  and  of  the  steps  taken 
under  the  treaty  of  peace  to  insure  that  human 
rights  and  fundamental  freedoms  are  safeguarded 
in  accordance  with  the  treaty  provisions.  The  dis- 
cussion in  the  Assembly  should  impress  the  Gov- 
ernments of  Bulgaria,  Hungary,  and  Rumania 
with  the  importance  of  their  compliance  in  good 
faitli  witli  their  obligations  to  cooperate  in  the 
settlement  of  these  issues. 

AVhatever  action  might  be  taken,  we  should  not 
lose  sight  of  our  real  purpose  in  the  field  of  human 
rights  and  freedoms.  It  is  not  to  set  neighbor 
against  neighbor  or  nation  against  nation  but  to 
unite  the  world  on  the  bases  of  principles  which 
recognize  the  freedom  and  dignity  of  all  men  and 
all  nations. 

We  are  all  of  a  common  humanity.  We  have 
all,  under  the  (^barter,  expressed  our  determina- 
tion to  respect  the  dignity  and  worth  of  the  human 
person,  to  practice  tolerance  and  to  live  together 
in  peace  with  one  another  as  good  neighbors. 
Despite  the  various  ways  of  life  we  may  pursue 
and  despite  the  different  ideas  we  may  cherish,  let 
us  learn  to  tolerate  ways  of  life  we  cannot  ourselves 
practice  and  ideas  we  cannot  ourselves  share.  Let 
us  strive  then  to  find  the  strains  of  common 
humanity  which  can  bind  us  together.  Let  us 
then,  as  members  of  a  common  humanity,  agi-ee  to 
reject  all  forms  of  tyranny  over  the  mind  and  sotil 
of  man.  I^et  ns  approach  these  problems  of  human 
rights  with  the  firm  determination  to  find  com- 
mon standards  upon  which  we  can  build  a  world 
comnumity  of  free  nations  and  of  free  men.  En- 
during peace  nuist  rest  upon  the  acceptance  of 
common  standards  of  human  rights  that  can  com- 
mand the  willing  allegiance  of  all  humanity. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


The  United  States  in  tlie  United  Nations 

[April  23-29] 

Soviet  Wives 

The  General  Assembly  in  plenary  session  on 
April  25  approved  a  resolution  condemning  "meas- 
ures which  prevent  or  coerce  the  wives  of  citizens 
of  other  nationalities  from  leaving  their  country 
of  origin  with  their  husbands  or  in  order  to  join 
them  abroad"  and  calling  on  the  U.  S.  S.  R.  to 
withdraw  "the  measures  of  such  a  nature  which 
have  been  adopted."  The  vote  was  39  to  6,  with 
11  abstentions. 

The  Chilean  representative  introduced  the  com- 
plaint at  the  Paris  session  of  the  General  Assembly 
last  fall  after  the  refusal  of  the  Soviet  Union  to 
permit  the  Russian  wife  of  the  son  of  the  former 
Chilean  Ambassador  to  the  U.  S.  S.  R.  to  leave  with 
her  husband.  Other  similar  cases  were  brought 
up,  and  the  resolution  was  adopted  by  the  Legal 
Committee. 

Mrs.  Roosevelt,  participating  in  the  three-hour 
debate,  expressed  regret  that  there  had  been  no 
change  in  the  situation  subsequent  to  the  adop- 
tion of  the  resolution  in  Paris  and  added  that  tliis 
meant  "unhappy  young  people"  were  forced  to 
remain  against  their  will  in  the  U.  S.  S.  R.  "and 
under  circumstances,  we  are  informed,  which  have 
given  them  reason  to  fear  for  their  personal 
security." 
Human  Rights  in  Bulgaria  and  Hungary 

A  Bolivian  resolution  which  recommends  re- 
course to  peace-treaty  arbitration  procedures  in 
connection  with  charges  against  Bulgaria  and 
Hungary  was  approved  by  the  Ad  Hog  Political 
Committee  of  the  General  Assembly  on  April  22 
by  a  vote  33  to  6,  with  11  abstentions.  The  resolu- 
tion retains  the  question  on  the  agenda  for  the 
fourth  session  of  the  General  Assembly.  After 
four  days  of  debate,  the  Committee  thus  disposed 
of  the  agenda  item  concerning  the  observance  in 
Bulgaria  and  Hungary  of  human  rights  and  fun- 
damental freedoms,  with  special  reference  to 
recent  trials  of  church  leaders. 

A  Cuban-Australian  arnendment  which  would 
establish  a  committee  of  inquiry  to  investigate  the 
charges  was  defeated.  Two  other  amendments 
were  withdrawn  following  an  appeal  by  the  U.  S. 
Delegate,  Benjamin  Cohen,  one  providing  for  re- 
consideration of  General  Assembly  recommenda- 
tions on  membership  of  Hungary  and  Bulgaria  in 
the  United  Nations  and  another  "condemning" 
charter  infringements.  Mr.  Cohen  said  that 
though  he  shared  the  sentiment  prompting  the 
several  amendments,  he  could  not  support  any  of 
them.  He  felt  that  the  Bolivian  resolution  best 
expressed  the  collective  General  Assembly  opin- 
ion, but  he  thought  the  Committee  should  try  to 
find  a  solution  acceptable  not  only  to  those  who 
were  "convinced"  but  also  to  the  minority. 

Both  Bulgaria  and  Hungary  declined  the  invi- 
tation to  participate  in  the  debate,  again  declar- 

May  I,  7949 


ing  that  the  clerical  trials  were  an  internal  mat- 
ter and  not  within  the  competence  of  the  United 
Nations. 

Pacific  Settlement 

Four  specific  proposals  resulting  from  a  study 
made  by  the  Interim  Committee  of  methods  for 
the  promotion  of  international  cooperation  in  the 
political  field  were  approved  by  the  General  As- 
sembly by  an  overwhelming  majority  on  April  28. 
The  United  States  Delegate,  "Warren  R.  Austin, 
supported  all  of  these  recommendations. 

One  of  the  jji-oposals  is  for  the  establishment  of 
a  panel  for  inquiry  or  conciliation.  Members  of 
a  commission  of  inquiry  or  conciliation  could  be 
drawn  from  this  panel  by  the  Security  Council, 
the  General  Assembly,  the  Interim  Committee  or 
by  any  states  taking  steps  for  the  settlement  of 
their  disputes  outside  United  Nations  organs. 
Ambassador  Austin  described  the  proposed  panel 
as  a  flexible  device  which  created  no  organ  or 
procedure  to  complicate  the  present  United  Na- 
tions structure. 

Another  recommendation  relates  to  the  appoint- 
ment of  a  rapporteur  or  conciliator  at  an  early 
stage  in  the  consideration  of  disputes  brought  to 
the  attention  of  the  Security  Council. 

A  third  proposal  is  to  restore  the  General  Act 
of  1928  to  full  effect.  Though  the  United  States 
is  not  a  party  to  this  act,  it  supported  this 
proposal. 

The  final  recommendation  was  to  recommit  to 
the   Interim   Committee  for   further   study   the 
amendments  to  the  General  Assembly's  rules  pro- 
posed by  that  Committee. 
International  Law  Commission 

The  International  Law  Commission  has  de- 
cided on  the  substance  of  several  articles  to  be  in- 
cluded in  the  Draft  Declaration  on  the  Rights  and 
Duties  of  States  and  agreed  that  this,  like  the, 
human-rights  declaration,  would  take  the  form  of 
a  declaration  to  be  adopted  by  the  General  As- 
sembly as  a  "common  standard  of  conduct"  to  be 
applicable  to  all  states,  and  not  just  United  Nations 
members.  Further  agreement  was  reached  that 
the  text  would  not  include  all  possible  Charter  pro- 
visions, but  would  be  restricted  to  those  rights  and 
duties  which  were  general  to  international  law 
and  that  the  declaration  should  conform  as  strictly 
as  possible  to  the  language  of  the  Charter. 

Thus  far  the  Commission  has  agreed  to  include 
articles  declaring  that  every  state  has  the  right 
(1)  to  exist  and  to  preserve  its  existence  (2)  to 
have  its  existence  recognized  by  other  states  (3)  to 
independence  and  (4)  to  legal  equality.  Another 
article  will  pertain  to  the  duty  of  nonintervention 
of  every  state. 

Chairman  Manley  O.  Hudson  (U.S.)  pomted 
out  that  the  Commission  is  not  at  this  stage  at- 
tempting to  arrive  at  the  final  wording  but  is  try- 
ing to  determine  what  to  include  in  the  declaration. 

561 


INTERNATIONAL  ORGANIZATIONS  AND  MEETINGS 

Calendar  of  Meetings ' 


Adjourned  during  April 

Itu  (InternaUorial  Telecommunication  Union): 

International  Conference  on  High  Frequency  Broadcasting  . 
United  Nations: 

Trusteeship  Council:  Fourth  Session 

Ecosoc  (Kconomic  and  Social  Council): 

Commission  on  the  Status  of  Women:  Third  Session  .  .  . 
Commission  on  Economic  Development :  Third  Session  .  . 
Transport    and     Communications     Commission:    Third 

Session. 
Economic  Commission  for  Europe: 

Committee  on  Electric  Power 

Committee  on  Industry  and  Materials 

Economic  Commission  for  Asia  and  the  Far  East: 

Committee  of  the  Whole 

Population  f'dniniission:  Fourth  Session 

Himian  Rights  ("oinniission:  Special  Session 

IcAO  (International  Civil  Aviation  Organization): 

African-Indian  Ocean  Air  Navigation  Meeting 

North  Atlantic  Meteorological  Communications  Meeting 

Special  Meeting  on  Notices  to  Airmen 

Fag  (Food  and  Agriculture  Organization) : 

Indo-Pacific  Fisheries  Council 

Rubber  Study  Group 

Iro  (International  Refugee  Organization) : 

General  Council:  Second  Session 

Ilo  (International  Labor  Organization): 

Conference  of  European  Experts  on  Training  of  Supervisors 
within  Industry. 

Coal  Mines  Committee:  Third  Session 

American  Institute  for  the  Protection  of  Childhood: 

Annual  Meeting  of  the  Directing  Council 

Tin  Study  Group:  Management  Committee 

Geography,  Sixteenth  International  Congress  of 

Stomatology,  XXIV  Italian  Congress  of 

International  Cotton  Advisory  Committee:  Eighth  Meeting  . 

In  Session  as  of  May  1,  1949 

United  Nations: 

Commission  on  Korea 


Commission  on  India  and  Pakistan 

Conciliation  Commission  for  Palestine 

General  Assembly:  Second  Part  of  Tliird  Session 

International  Law  Commission 

Ecosoc  (Economic  and  Social  Council): 

Subcommission  on  Employment  and  Economic  Stability: 
Third  Session. 

Statistical  Commission:  Fourth  Session 


Itu  (International  Telecommunication  Union): 
Provisional  Frequency  Board 


Region  II — Fourth  Inter-American  Radio  Conference  .    .    . 

Council  of  Foreign  Ministers:   Deputies  for  Austria 

Gatt  (General  A.ssembly  on  Tariffs  and  Trade) : 

Third  Session  of  Contracting  Parties 

ICAO  (International  Civil  Aviation  Organization): 

Meeting  on  .Joint  Support  for  Ocean  Weather  Ship  Stations 
and  Joint  Support  for  Air  Navigation  Facilities  in  Dan- 
ish Territory  and  in  Greek  Territory. 

European  Frequency  Meeting:  Second  Session 

War  Victims,  Diplomatic  Conference  for  the  Drawing  Up  of 

a  New  Convention  Intended  to  Protect. 
Fao  (Food  and  Agriculture  Organization): 

Preparatory  Conference  on  World  Wood  Pulp  Problems  . 
Ilo  (International  Labor  Organization): 

Fourth  Regional  Conference  of  American  States  Members  . 
First  International  Congress  on  Civil  Engineering 


Mexico  City  . 

Lake  Success . 

Beirut .... 
I,ake  Success . 
Lake  Success . 


Geneva  .  .  . 
Geneva   .    .    . 

Bangkok  .  . 
Geneva  .  .  . 
Lake  Success . 


London  . 
London  . 
Montreal 

Singapore 
London    . 


Geneva 
Geneva 


Pittsburgh  , 


Montevideo 

London   

Lisbon 

Taormina  and  Catania,  Italy . 
Brussels 


Seoul 


Lake  Success 

Haifa,  Jerusalem,  and  Rhodes 

Lake  Success 

Lake  Success 


Lake  Success  . 
Geneva    .    .    . 


Geneva 


Washington 
London   .    . 


Annecy,  France 
London    .    .    .    . 


Paris    . 
Geneva 


Montreal 


Montevideo 
Mexico  City 


'  Prepared  in  the  division  of  International  Conferences,  Department  of  State. 
•  In  recess  from  Apr.  6-29,  1949. 


1948 

Oct.  22-Apr.  10 

1949 
Jan.  24-Mar.  25 

Mar.  21-.\pr.  4 
Mar.  21-Apr.  11 
Mar.  21-30 


Mar.  21-23 
Apr.  4-8 

Mar.  28- Apr.  5 
Apr.  11-22 
Apr.  11 

Mar.  22-Apr.  12 
Apr.  11- 
Apr.  19- 


Mar.  24-31 
Mar.  28- Apr.  1 

Mar.  29-Apr.  9 

Mar.  30-Apr.  2 


Apr.  19-30 

Apr.  1-2 
Apr.  4 
Apr.  8-15 
Apr.  20-24 
Apr.  25-30 


Dec 

Jan. 
Jan. 
Apr. 
Apr. 


Apr. 
Apr. 


1948 

12- 
1949 

3- 

28- 
5- 
12- 

11- 


2.5- 
1948 


Jan. 


Apr. 
Feb. 


Apr. 
Apr. 


15- 
1949 

25- 
9-» 

11- 

20- 


Apr.  26- 
Apr.  21- 


Apr.  25- 

Apr.  25- 
Apr.  30- 


Departmenf  of  State  Bulletin 


Calendar  of  Meetings — Continued 


Scheduled  for  May 

United  Nations: 

Ecosoc  (Economic  and  Social  Council): 

Social  Commission :  Fourth  Session 

Economic  and  Employment  Commission:  Fourth  Session  . 

Commission  on  Human  Rights:  Fourth  Session 

Economic  Commission  for  Europe:  Fourth  Session    .    .    . 
Commission  on  Narcotic  Drugs:  Fourth  Session    .    .    .    . 

Economic  Commission  for  Latin  America 

Subcommission  on  Freedom  of  Information  and  the  Press: 
Third  Session. 
Ilo   (International  Labor  Organization): 

Advisory  Committee  Meeting  of  Experts  on  Cooperation     . 

Inland  Transport  Committee:  Third  Session 

Correspondence  Committee  on  Social  Insurance 

Governing  Body:  109th  Session 

ICAO  (International  Civil  Aviation  Organization): 

Council:  Seventh  Session 

Itu  (International  Telecommunication  Union) : 

Administrative    Conference    to    Revise    the    International 
Telegraph  and  Telephone  Regulations. 

Region  I  and  Region  III  Frequency  Conferences 

Inter-American  Bar  Association,  Sixth  Meeting  of  the  .    .    .    . 

Health  Congress  of  the  Royal  Sanitary  Institute 

Pan  American  Sanitary  Organization: 

Executive  Committee:  Seventh  Session 

International  Whaling  Commission,  First  Meeting  of  the     .    . 
IcEF  (International  Children's  Emergency  Fund):  Executive 
Board. 

South  Pacific  Commission:  Third  Meeting 

International  Railway  Congress 


Lake  Success  .  .  . 
Lake  Success .  .  . 
Lake  Success .    .    . 

Geneva 

Lake  Success  .    .    . 

Habana  

Lake  Success  .    .    . 

Geneva    

Brussels 

Montreal  .  .  .  . 
Geneva    

Montreal     .    .    .    . 

Paris 

Geneva 

Detroit 

Brighton,  England 

Washington    .    .    . 

London    

Lake  Success     .    . 

Noumea 

Lisbon 


1949 

May  2- 
Mav  9- 
May  »- 
May  9- 
May  9- 
May  29- 
May  31- 


May  5 
May  18- 
May  24- 
May  27- 

May  10 

May  18 

May  18 
May  22 
May  23 

May  23 
May  30- 
May 

May  10 
May 


U.S.  Delegation  to  Cotton  Advisory  Meeting 


The  Department  of  State  announced  on  April 
19  the  United  States  Delegation  to  the  eighth 
meeting  of  the  International  Cotton  Advisory 
Committee  scheduled  to  convene  at  Brussels  on 
April  25,  1949.  The  United  States  Delegation  is 
as  follows : 

Chairman 

Edwin  D.  White,  Assistant  to  the  Secretary  of  Agriculture, 
Department  of  Agriculture 

Advisers 

Read  Dunn,  Director  of  Foreign  Trade,  National  Cotton 
Council  of  America 

Jerome  T.  Gaspard,  First  Secretary  and  Consul,  American 
Embas.sy,  Brussels 

Charles  J.  Little,  Commercial  Attach^,  American  Embassy, 
Brussels 

Rene  Lutz,  Office  of  International  Trade,  Department  of 
Commerce 

Arthur  W.  Palmer,  Head,  Division  of  Cotton  and  Other 
Vegetable  Fibers,  OfBce  of  Foreign  Agricultural  Re- 
lations, Department  of  Agriculture 

Horace  G.  Porter,  Office  of  the  Special  Representative, 
Economic  Cooperation  Administration,  Paris 

Robert  B.  Schwenger,  Chief,  Regional  Investigations 
Branch,  Office  of  Foreign  Agriculture  Relations,  De- 
partment of  Agriculture 


Clovis  D.  Walker,  Director,  Cotton  Branch,  Production 
and  Marketing  Administration,  Department  of 
Agriculture 

Adviser  and  Secretary 

James  G.  Evans,  Chief,  Fibers  Section,  Division  of  Inter- 
national Resources,  Department  of  State 

At  the  forthcoming  meeting  the  Committee  will 
review  the  world  cotton  situation  and  exchange  in- 
formation concerning  the  cotton  policies  of  the 
member  governments.  The  problem  of  increas- 
ing the  usefulness  of  the  secretariat  of  the  Commit- 
tee in  compiling  statistical  and  other  data  on  cot- 
ton throughout  the  world  and  the  problem  of  in- 
creasing the  effectiveness  of  the  Committee  wiU 
also  be  discussed  at  Brussels. 

The  Committee  was  established  in  accordance 
with  the  recommendations  of  the  International 
Cotton  Conference,  held  at  Washington  in  Septem- 
ber 1939,  for  the  purpose  of  keeping  the  interested 
countries  abreast  of  the  developments  in  the  world 
cotton  situation  and  of  suggesting  practicable 
measures  from  time  to  time  for  international 
collaboration  in  the  solution  of  world  cotton 
problems. 


May   1,   7949 


THE  RECORD  OF  THE  WEEK 


Pan  American  Day:  A  Symbol  of  Mutual  Trust  and  Cooperation 
Among  the  Americas 

ADDRESS  BY  SECRETARY  ACHESON  > 


I  appreciate  the  invitation  of  the  Council  to  join 
with  you  in  observing  Pan  American  Day.  iVl- 
though  this  occasion  is  the  first  opportunity  I 
have  had  since  my  return  to  the  Department  of 
State  to  meet  with  the  representatives  of  the 
American  republics  in  the  Pan  American  Union, 
I  feel  at  home  here,  in  the  same  way  that  all  of 
us  feel  at  home  together  in  the  inter-American 
community  of  good  neighbors. 

Wholehearted  support  of  the  inter-American 
system  has  been  a  foundation  stone  of  the  foreign 
relations  of  my  country  for  many  years.  None  of 
the  momentous  international  developments  that 
have  taken  place  during  these  years  has  lessened 
the  importance  of  this  policy  for  my  country — 
sonie  have  increased  it.  This  policy  is  not  the 
policy  of  any  one  man  or  any  one  political  party, 
nor  is  it  the  policy  of  any  oiie  moment.  It  is  an 
established  national  policy,  strongly  and  actively 
supported  by  the  will  of  the  people  of  my  country. 

The  Pan  American  Union,  with  its  important 
place  in  the  inter-American  system,  symbolizes  a 
spirit,  increasingly  important  to  international 
affairs — a  disposition  on  the  part  of  governments 
to  sit  down  together  and  work  out  their  common 
problems  in  an  atmosphere  of  concord  and  mutiial 
trust.  This  habit  of  cooperation  is  firmly  estab- 
lished and  deeply  rooted  in  the  Western  Hemi- 
sphere. Perhaps  to  some  extent  we  take  it  for 
granted  and  forget  that  many  other  nations  have 
not  accepted  this  principle  so  thoroughly  or  prac- 
ticed it  so  long  as  we  have.  But  many  states  have 
now  come  to  realize  the  great  value  of  the  example 
and  pattern  of  friendship  and  cooperation  set  by 
the  American  republics  in  this  hemisphere. 

It  is  apparent  that  two  opposing  forces  are  at 
work  in  the  world  of  today.  One  is  disruptive. 
It  divides  nations  and  peoples.  It  turns  indi- 
viduals against  each  other  even  in  the  same  coun- 
try and  the  same  community.  The  other  force 
draws  peoples  and  nations  together  in  common 
endeavor.  It  harmonizes  the  interests  of  indi- 
viduals. 

Observation  of  the  operation  of  these  contrasting 
influences  reveals  a  paradox.  Free  people  are 
willing  to  share  their  privileges  and  prerogatives 
with  others— to  entrust  their  vital  interests  to  the 
decision  of  the  community  of  which  they  are  a 

'  Made  at  the  Special  Session  of  the  Connpil  of  Organi- 
zation of  American  States  in  Washington,  D.C.,  on  Apr.  14, 
1949,  and  released  to  the  press  on  the  same  date. 


part.  Repressed  people  hold  aloof,  suspect  the 
motives  of  those  who  offer  friendship  and  aid, 
and  shrink  from  or  oppose  cooperative  action. 

We  can  see  clearly  which  of  these  attitudes  is 
normal  and  healthy  and  which  is  abnormal  and 
morbid.  It  is  my  conviction  that  the  cohesive 
forces  at  work  for  unity  and  cooperation  will  pre- 
vail in  time  over  the  divisive  forces  working  for 
disruption  and  disaster.  I  believe  this  because  the 
desire  for  cohesion  and  cooperation  is  rooted  in 
man's  long  search  for  security,  peace,  and  spiritual 
advancement  in  a  social  order  devised  to  further 
the  realization  of  those  aims. 

It  is  understandable  that  leadership  for  the  at- 
tainment of  those  ends  through  cooperative  action 
comes  largely  from  the  Western  world,  which  be- 
lieves so  firmly  that  the  objective  of  individual 
liberty  and  well-being  can  best  be  realized  through 
the  exercise  of  tolerance  and  restraint  by  individ- 
uals toward  the  other  members  of  the  community. 
Fortunately,  these  principles  are  steadily  gaining 
welcome  support  as  the  basis  of  the  peaceful  and 
orderly  world  community  now  being  built  by  col- 
lective endeavor  devoted  to  the  common  purpose  of 
a  better  life  for  all  peoples. 

Cooperation  among  nations  on  a  world-wide 
scale  is  a  comparatively  recent  development.  A 
start  was  made  scarcely  three  decades  ago  with  the 
League  of  Nations.  In  the  vision  of  Woodrow 
Wilson,  the  people  of  the  world  caught  a  glimpse 
of  the  family  of  nations  moving  forward  in  unison. 
But  my  country  faltered  and  held  back.  It  had 
not  fully  learned  that  its  security  was  bound  up  in 
the  security  of  a  free  world.  Hindered  by  other 
adverse  factors,  the  League  proved  unable  to  check 
the  resurgent  militarism  that  forced  the  world,  in- 
cluding my  own  country,  again  into  war. 

But  war  only  confirmed  that  the  compulsion  to- 
ward international  cooperation  is  too  great  to  be 
ignored  or  defeated.  Even  while  World  War  II 
was  being  fought,  the  Allied  powers  began  organ- 
izing the  United  Nations.  These  efforts  achieved 
success  at  San  Francisco,  where  the  American  re- 
publics exerted  a  strong  and  constructive  influ- 
ence in  the  drafting  of  the  Charter. 

Once  more  men  possessed  an  instrument  for  con- 
sultation and  collective  action.  And  once  more 
they  learned  that  form  and  organization  are  not 
enough,  that  the  spirit  which  animates  the  mem- 
bers is  all  important.     The  attitude  of  one  mem- 

Deparfment  of  Slate  Bulletin 


ber  can  keep  the  United  Nations — or  any  interna- 
tional organization — from  working  as  it  is  in- 
tended to  work  and  can  seriously  hamper  the  sin- 
cere efforts  of  the  majority  to  achieve  security  and 
progress  through  collective  action. 

But  the  will  to  attain  the  objectives  of  the  United 
Nations  through  joint  action  in  keeping  with  the 
spirit  and  principles  of  the  Charter  is  as  strong 
as  ever.  The  nations  and  peoples  dedicated  to 
peace  and  security  through  international  cooper- 
ation have  refused  to  be  defeated  or  dismayed  by 
obstruction  and  threats.  They  have  souglat  and 
found  ways  to  carry  forward  their  purpose  and,  at 
the  same  time,  to  strengthen  the  United  Nations  as 
their  primary  choice  of  the  means  of  collective 
action. 

Some  of  the  means  that  have  been  developed 
within  the  spirit  of  the  Charter  are  aid  to  free 
countries  whose  integrity  and  independence  are 
tlireatened:  the  European  Eecovei-y  Program; 
the  Treaty  of  Rio  de  Janeiro;  the  Brussels  Pact; 
and  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty.  All  of  these 
measures  are  of  major  importance  to  the  American 
republics.  Some  originated  in  the  community  of 
American  nations  and  directly  concern  the  secu- 
rity of  this  hemisphere  and  relationships  within 
the  inter-American  system.  Others  have  been 
strongly  influenced  by  principles  evolved  and  in- 
stitutions developed  by  the  American  republics. 

The  nations  represented  here  today  actively 
supported  the  inclusion  in  the  United  Nations 
Charter  of  the  concept  of  regional  arrangements — 
a  need  foreseen  by  the  conference  of  American 
states  held  in  Mexico  City  prior  to  the  San  Fran- 
cisco conference  on  organization  of  the  United 
Nations. 

The  mutual  defense  treaty  for  the  Western 
Hemisphere  concluded  at  Eio  de  Janeiro  in  1947 
was  based  on  the  principle,  recognized  by  article 
51  of  the  Charter,  that  an  attack  on  one  of  the 
American  nations  would  be  considered  an  attack 
on  all,  and  would  be  dealt  with  accordingly,  by 
joint  action.  An  immediate  result  of  the  conclu- 
sion of  this  treaty  was  the  widespread  recognition 
of  the  fact  that  the  purposes  of  the  Charter  were 
strengthened  and  fuithered  by  ancillary  arrange- 
ments in  accordance  with  the  principles  of  the 
Charter. 

The  principle  of  the  inherent  right  of  individual 
and  collective  self-defense,  embodied  in  article  51 
of  the  United  Nations  Charter,  became  the  heart 
of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty,  which  is  designed 
to  assure  the  maintenance  of  international  peace 
and  security  for  the  North  Atlantic  community, 
just  as  the  Treaty  of  Eio  de  Janeiro  is  designed 
to  provide  the  same  assurance  for  the  American 
community.  The  American  family  of  nations  can 
justifiably  take  pride  in  the  way  their  pioneering 
for  peace  has  borne  fruit  for  others  who  earnestly 
desire  to  achieve  the  same  purpose.  The  prin- 
ciples of  consultation  on  matters  of  mutual  concern 
and  of  close  cooperation  in  the  economic  as  well  as 
the  security  field  likewise  are  incorporated  in  the 

May  I,  1949 


North  Atlantic  Treaty,  as  they  are  in  the  formal 
agreements  of  the  American  republics. 

Another  important  element  common  to  both 
treaties  is  that  they  are  explicitly  designed  to  fit 
into  the  universal  system  of  the  United  Nations. 
Both  are  reinforcements  and  developments  of  the 
United  Nations  concept,  not  alternatives  to  it. 

The  Organization  of  American  States  is  an  ele- 
ment of  strength  for  the  United  Nations,  and  con- 
versely, the  United  Nations  is  an  element  of 
strength  for  the  Organization  of  American  States. 
All  of  us  belong  to  and  are  active  in  both.  There 
are  no  divided  loyalties  here.  We  can  honestly 
and  sincerely  serve  the  same  cause  in  both  the 
regional  and  the  universal  system. 

In  dealing  with  the  instrumentalities  and 
mechanisms  for  international  cooperation,  may  I 
mention  an  additional  development  upon  which 
intensive  work  is  now  proceeding.  This  is  Presi- 
dent Truman's  plan  of  technical  cooperation 
among  the  peoples  of  the  earth  in  improving  their 
living  conditions  and  strengthening  their  national 
economies.  This  effort  also  will  be  a  practical 
demonstration  in  international  cooperation,  with 
many  nations  participating. 

The  great  hopes  for  this  program  are  shared,  I 
believe,  by  the  people  of  the  Western  Hemisphere 
as  well  as  the  peoples  of  other  areas.  The  pro- 
gram will  be  unique  in  many  respects.  It  will  re- 
quire full  and  continuing  cooperation  not  only 
among  governments,  but  also  among  the  people 
who  carry  on  the  great  work  of  producing  for  the 
needs  of  the  world.  Eeal  understanding  can  de- 
velop out  of  the  mingling,  on  a  practical  worka- 
day basis,  of  the  technicians  of  many  countries 
with  the  peoples  of  other  lands.  They  cannot  deal 
with  each  other  at  arms  length,  but  must  work 
shoulcler  to  shoulder,  demonstrating  and  learning 
new  ways  of  sowing  and  harvesting  crops,  con- 
trolling and  eliminating  disease,  producing  more 
goods  with  less  effort  and  at  less  cost.  Wlien 
international  cooperation  takes  place  on  a  wide 
enough  scale  on  the  farms  and  in  the  factories  of 
the  world,  the  tasks  of  statesmen  will  be  easier. 

One  reason  I  have  such  great  hopes  for  this  pro- 
gi-am  is  that  already,  in  the  republics  of  the  West- 
ern Hemispliere,  there  is  proof  of  how  much  can 
be  accomplished  by  this  method.  The  pioneering 
done  by  the  members  of  the  inter-American  sys- 
tem will  prove  invaluable  in  the  wider  application 
of  the  processes  arrived  at  by  trial  and  error. 
The  prototype  of  almost  every  kind  of  project 
contemplated  in  the  world-wide  program  envi- 
sioned by  President  Truman  has  been  developed 
and  tested  in  cooperative  programs  carried  on  in 
recent  years  between  the  United  States  and  its 
sister  American  countries.  Present  plans  include 
a  substantial  expansion  of  these  joint  activities 
in  this  hemisphere  even  as  they  are  extended  to  new 
areas. 

The  experience  of  our  countries  in  technical  co- 
operation will  also  serve  as  a  caution  to  other 
peoples  that,  promising  as  this  technique  is,  too 


much  cannot  be  expected  too  soon.  Raising  the 
living  standards  of  large  groups  of  people,  over 
large  areas,  is  a  complex  problem  involving  many 
diverse  factors.  It  cannot  he  accomplished  with- 
out intensive,  continuous  effort. 

Modern  technology  can  make  the  earning  of 
one's  daily  bread  less  exhausting.  It  can  relieve 
man  of  much  backbreaking  drudgery  and  release 
his  creative  powers  for  things  of  the  spirit.  It  is 
in  this  sense  that  President  Trun>iin's  "Point  4" 


opens  up  almost  limitless  vistas  in  the  long  future. 
The  effective  inter-American  system  which  ex- 
ists today  is  the  work  of  many  men.  As  repre- 
sentatives of  the  American  republics,  we  can  be 
justly  proud  of  those  who  contributed  to  this  suc- 
cess. We  can  best  pay  tribute  to  them  by  main- 
taining and  perfecting  the  system  they  initiated 
in  the  full  knowledge  that  the  welfare  of  the  West- 
ern Hemisphere  retjuires  mutual  trust  and  cooper- 
ation. 


Present  Day  International  Economic  Picture 


REMARKS  BY  WILLARD  L.  THORPi 
Assistant  Secretary  for  Economic  Affairs 


At  the  end  of  the  war,  the  economic  problems 
faced  by  the  various  countries  of  the  world  were 
tremenclous.  However,  the  immediate  require- 
ments were  obvious  and  the  ininiediate  objectives 
wei-e  clear.  The  economies  of  the  war-devastated 
countries  were  shattered,  and  reconstruction,  reor- 
ganization, and  a  revival  of  production  were  the 
obvious  requirements.  The  economies  in  the  other 
countries  of  the  world  had  been  diverted  and 
distorted  to  wartime  production,  and  the  problem 
for  them  was  one  of  transformation  to  a  peacetime 
basis.  Most  government  budgets  were  necessarily 
far  from  balanced,  and  trade  among  countries  was 
exceedingly  limited.  The  basic  over-all  world 
problem  was  one  of  shortages,  with  starvation  the 
greatest  threat  of  all.  These  shortages  were  by 
no  means  evenly  distributed  among  countries. 

It  is  dangerous  to  generalize  when  conditions 
vary  so  throughout  the  world,  but  certain  underly- 
ing trends  are  generally  evident.  Althougli  tre- 
mendous strides  have  been  taken  since  V-J  Day, 
no  one  can  claim  that  world  economic  health  has 
been  achieved.  However,  the  most  promising  re- 
sults have  been  in  the  very  field  of  production 
where  results  were  most  needed.  The  processes  of 
conversion  in  countries  like  the  United  States  have 
taken  place  with  the  maintenance  of  production 
levels  close  to  those  achieved  under  war  pressures. 
The  war-devastated  areas  are  in  the  process  of  a 
dynamic  upward  surge  from  their  postwar  lows 
with  production  tending  to  reach  and  even  exceed 
prewar  levels  for  many  commodities.  The  short- 
age period  is  not  yet  over,  but  the  softening  of 
prices  is  one  indication  of  reduced  pressure  of  de- 
mand upon  supply. 

In  terms  of  the  external  relations  of  countries, 
if  one  uses  the  balance  of  payments  as  a  test,  we 

'Made  at  the  Mississippi  Valley  World  Trade  Confer- 
ence In  New  Orleans,  Apr.  22,  1949,  and  released  to  the 
press  on  the  same  date. 

566 


are  still  far  from  economic  health.  The  excess  of 
American  exports  over  imports  reached  its  maxi- 
mum in  the  second  quarter  of  1047,  and  is  sub- 
stantially less  today.  The  ga])  however  is  still  in 
the  neighborhood  of  five  or  six  billion  dollars  per 
annum.  On  the  other  hand,  most  foreign  coun- 
tries found  themselves  operating  on  a  deficit  basis 
and  have  had  to  bring  their  situation  into  balance 
either  through  loans  or  grants  from  the  United 
States  and  other  countries  or  through  extensive 
controls  over  trade,  or  both.  It  is  worthy  of  note 
that  there  is  much  more  similarity  today,  at  least 
superficially,  among  most  of  these  deficit  countries 
than  was  true  immediately  at  the  end  of  the  war. 
Whereas  the  countries  with  extreme  postwar  defi- 
cits, such  as  the  United  Kingdom,  Italy,  and 
France,  have  succeeded  in  reducing  their  gaps, 
other  countries  which  seemed  to  be  in  good  condi- 
tion at  the  end  of  the  war  have  more  recently  found 
themselves  with  threatened  imbalances  in  trade. 
Countries  such  as  Sweden,  Canada,  and  Mexico  al- 
lowed trade  to  continue  with  minimum  restrictions 
to  a  point  where  the  purchases  of  American  goods 
outstripped  the  foreign  exchange  which  they  were 
earning  and,  after  a  substantial  depletion  of  their 
reserves,  were  forced  to  take  steps  to  protect  their 
financial  situation. 

The  net  lesult  has  been  a  great  emphasis  on  the 
balancing  of  trade,  the  development  of  more  and 
more  agreements  either  on  a  barter  or  quasi-barter 
basis,  and  the  widespread  application  of  quotas 
and  exchange  controls  as  a  method  of  conserving 
financial  resources.  Within  this  total  picture,  it 
is  natural  that  the  emphasis  in  most  foreign  coun- 
tries should  have  been  to  develo]:)  sources  of  supply 
outside  the  United  States  as  much  as  possible. 

It  may  be  worth  while  to  review  briefly  the 
character  of  our  own  record  during  the  postwar 
period.  So  far  as  trade  in  goods  and  services  has 
been  concerned,  our  impoitshave  been  rising  stead- 
ily since  early  in  194(),  while  our  exports  reached 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


their  peak  early  in  1947.  This  high  level  in  1947 
was  made  possible  because  foreign  countries 
financed  about  4.5  billion  dollars  of  their  pur- 
chases in  the  United  States  in  that  year  from  their 
reserves  of  gold  and  dollar  assets.  In  1948,  this 
source  had  largely  run  out  so  that  purchases 
financed  from  these  sources  shrank  to  about  860 
million  dollars,  all  of  which  were  concentrated  in 
the  first  half  of  the  year.  Government  aid,  both 
grants  and  loans,  was  about  one  billion  dollars 
less  in  1948  than  in  1947.  To  meet  this  decline  of 
the  dollar  supply  abroad  of  about  5  billion  dol- 
lars, when  all  sources  are  considered,  foreign 
countries  increased  their  exports  to  the  United 
States  by  2  billion  dollars  and  reduced  their  pur- 
chases here  by  3  billion  dollars.  It  is  worthy  of 
note  that  while  foreign  countries  were  increasing 
their  sales  to  the  United  States  and  reducing 
their  purchases  here,  they  were  increasing  their 
total  imports  from  all  sources.  The  reestablish- 
ment  of  foreign  sources  of  supply,  particularly  of 
foodstuffs,  fuels,  and  manufactured  products, 
lessened  the  war-created  need  to  rely  upon  the 
United  States  to  an  unusual  degree  for  such 
products,  although  the  United  States  still  con- 
tinues to  be  a  much  greater  source  of  goods  moving 
in  world  trade  than  was  the  case  before  the  war. 

Obviously,  the  comparison  of  1948  and  1947  in- 
dicates a  marked  advance  towards  economic 
health,  but  it  is  also  true  that  adjustments  of  this 
kind  become  increasingly  difficult  to  make.  Im- 
ports into  the  United  States  will  not  continue  to 
increase  at  this  rate  year  after  year,  and  a  further 
substantial  cut  in  our  exports  might  have  im- 
portant domestic  repercussions  in  particular  in- 
dustries. Furthermore,  it  is  important  to  realize 
that  the  European  countries  do  face  a  problem  of 
dimensions  greater  than  merely  returning  to  their 
prewar  trading  position,  inasmuch  as  certain  of 
their  prewar  sources  of  foreign  exchange,  notably 
earnings  on  foreign  investments,  cannot  be  easily 
recovered.  One  added  factor  is  that  there  have 
been  substantial  population  increases  since  the 
prewar  period  so  that  identical  total  quantities 
mean  lower  per  capita  consumption. 

The  problem  of  the  adjustment  of  the  trade 
balance,  which  I  have  cited,  is  not  entirely  a  new 
problem.  The  fact  is  that  the  United  States  has 
balanced  its  trade  ever  since  the  First  World  War 
by  various  transactions  outside  the  commodity 
field.  During  the  20's,  the  floating  of  foreign 
securities  in  the  United  States  went  on  at  a  very 
rapid  pace.  During  the  30's,  the  balance  was 
achieved  largely  through  the  flow  of  gold  and  other 
assets  to  the  United  States.  During  the  40's,  the 
deficit  has  been  met  largely  by  government  grants 
and  loans. 

It  may  well  be  that  in  time,  this  basic  problem 
will  take  care  of  itself  through  a  greater  rise  of 
imports  into  the  United  States  than  of  our  exports 
abroad.  This  has  been  the  usual  experience  of 
countries  once  they  have  reached  a  creditor  posi- 

Mo/  I,  1949 


tion.  It  is  probably  true  that  our  dependence  on 
foreign  sources  of  raw  materials  is  increasing,  al- 
though this  must  be  offset  in  part  by  the  develop- 
ment of  synthetic  products  such  as  synthetic  rub- 
ber. However,  the  shift  in  the  situation  relative 
to  copper,  lead,  and  zinc  and  the  requirements  for 
many  less  well-known  metals  would  seem  to  indi- 
cate that  outside  sources  will  be  increasingly  used. 
Even  iron  ore  promises  to  be  imported  into  the 
United  States  in  substantial  quantities  during  the 
next  decade. 

It  is  to  be  hoped,  too,  that  the  imbalance  of  ex- 
change can  be  cut  down  to  some  extent  by  increased 
American  tourist  expenditures  abroad. 

There  are  other  important  elements  in  the  pic- 
ture. The  gap  may  be  filled  in  part  by  the  efforts 
to  contribute  to  the  process  of  economic  develop- 
ment in  underdeveloped  areas.  Wlien  President 
Truman  placed  assistance  to  underdeveloped  areas 
as  "Point  4"  in  his  inaugural  address  last  January,^ 
it  created  great  interest,  not  only  in  the  United 
States  but  in  other  countries.  He  put  it  quite 
simply  in  the  framework  of  the  need  of  these  coun- 
tries and  of  the  political  instabilities  which  are 
related  to  low  standards  of  living.  However,  it  is 
inevitable  that  any  substantial  progress  in  the 
process  of  economic  development  will  require  the 
flow  of  capital  goods  from  the  industrialized  coun- 
tries to  the  backward  areas.  This  may,  of  course, 
be  accomplished  as  the  result  of  an  International 
Bank  loan,  some  government  programs  or  loan,  or 
of  the  flow  of  private  capital.  In  any  event,  the 
immediate  effect  would  be  to  increase  the  capital 
flow  item  on  the  balance-of-payments  account. 

If  one  looks  further  into  the  future,  progress 
towards  economic  development  has  certain  other 
imijlications.  It  is  clear  that  trade  is  closely  re- 
lated to  standards  of  living.  If  the  native  popula- 
tion in  an  area  must  dedicate  nearly  its  entire  ef- 
forts to  producing  food,  clothing,  and  shelter  for 
its  own  use  alone,  it  cannot  participate  in  any 
larger  market  either  as  a  supplier  or  as  a  purchaser. 
American  goods  have  always  moved  in  greatest 
quantity  to  the  more  developed  countries  such  as 
Canada  and  the  United  Kingdom.  The  process  of 
economic  development  therefore  can  lead  toward 
a  real  expansion  in  world  trade.  If  there  is  such 
expansion  there  is  then  greater  room  for  adjust- 
ments as  between  countries,  providing  an  oppor- 
tunity to  achieve  both  internal  and  external 
balance. 

It  is  ea.sy  to  talk  about  economic  developments, 
but  there  is  a  far  distance  between  the  general  no- 
tion and  the  specific  accomplishment.  Economic 
development  is  a  kind  of  growth  or  change  which 
involves  much  more  than  the  building  of  factories 
or  the  digging  of  mines.  The  requirements  vary, 
of  course,  from  country  to  country.  In  one  area 
the  immediate  limitation  may  be  a  problem  in  the 
field  of  health,  in  another  it  may  be  basic  education 
and  vocational  training,  and  in  another  transpor- 

»  Bulletin  of  Jan.  30, 1949,  p.  123. 


tation  facilities.  In  many  large  areas  the  most 
important  pressing  proLk-m  is  that  of  making 
more  food  available,  and  this  can  be  done  both  Vjy 
improved  techniques  and  by  large-scale  projects, 
such  as  irrigation  and  reclamation. 

In  many  ways  the  effort  to  facilitate  economic 
development  is  much  more  difficult  than  the  effort 
to  assist  in  European  recovery.  However,  they 
both  have  one  thing  clearly  in  common;  namely, 
that  their  success  depends  in  large  part  on  domes- 
tic action.  The  European  Recovery  Program  was 
one  in  which  the  United  States  was  able  to  pro- 
vide the  last  5  percent  which  was  necessary  to  make 
the  European  95  percent  come  alive,  but  the  princi- 
pal drive  and  dynamics  had  to  come  from  the  Eu- 
ropean countries  themselves.  Economic  develop- 
ment depends  primarily  upon  the  attitude  and  de- 
termination of  the  country  involved. 

There  are  many  ways  in  which  the  process  of 
economic  development  can  be  facilitated.  The 
history  of  the  United  States  is  clearly  a  case  where 
outside  assistance  played  an  important  pail.  Our 
early  settlers  brought  with  them  the  skills  and  the 
implements  which  had  been  developed  over  the 
centuries  in  Europe,  so  they  started  with  a  culture 
and  a  productivity  far  advanced  over  that  of  the 
native  Indian  inhabitants.  Our  railroads  were 
built  with  European  capital  and  largely  with  im- 
migrant labor.  Our  scientific  knowledge  has 
cumulated  with  major  contributions  acquired  from 
scientists  and  laboratories  all  over  the  world.  The 
flow  has  been  both  in  and  out.  As  the  United 
States  forged  ahead  in  its  own  development,  there 
was  an  increasing  flow  of  knowledge  and  capital 
from  its  shores  to  other  countries. 

It  will  always  be  true  that  much  of  the  exchange 
among  countries  will  be  on  a  personal  basis.  One 
of  the  greatest  forms  of  transfer  has  been  and  still 
is  through  migration  and  settlement.  This  is  par- 
ticularly true  of  the  basic  skills  and  habits  of  work. 
At  the  higher  technical  level,  the  rate  of  transfer 
depends  in  large  part  upon  the  degree  of  inter- 
change of  information  and  the  extent  to  which 
scholars  and  research  workers  in  various  parts 
of  the  world  are  in  touch  with  each  other  through 
direct  contact,  publications,  organizations  and  so 
forth.  Restrictions  in  the  flow  of  information  and 
knowledge  are  obviously  restrictions  on  progress. 

The  process  of  economic  development  can  be  fa- 
cilitated by  many  different  types  of  activity,  rang- 
ing from  the  encouragement  of  migration  to  the 
lowering  of  tariffs  and  elimination  of  quotas  in  in- 
ternational trade  in  books  and  periodicals.  How- 
ever, interest  in  the  United  States  at  the  present 
time  is  centering  on  two  particular  elements — tech- 
nical cooperation  and  the  supply  of  capital. 
These  were  emphasized  by  President  Truman  in 
his  inaugural  address. 

Technical  cooperation  is  used  in  a  rather  broad 
sense  to  range  all  the  way  from  basic  education 
and  public  health  assistance  to  the  study  of  the 
productivity    of    a    particular    industry.     Con- 


siderable progress  can  be  made  in  many  areas  by 
these  means  alone,  without  requiring  much  capital, 
particularly  in  fields  such  as  education,  public 
health,  and  increased  food  production.  However, 
there  can  be  no  gainsaying  the  fact  that  the  pro- 
vision of  basic  public  services,  such  as  roads,  har- 
bors, dams  for  power  and  irrigation  projects,  and 
the  like,  require  large  quantities  of  capital.  In 
the  industrialization  of  a  country,  when  it  moves 
on  from  the  small-scale  household  handicraft 
methods  of  production  to  the  use  of  power  machin- 
ery, capital  again  becomes  a  major  requirement. 

The  channels  through  which  international  as- 
sistance has  flowed,  other  than  those  on  the  strictly 
personal  level,  have  been  private  institutions,  both 
philanthropic  and  profit-making,  bilateral  gov- 
ernmental arrangements,  and  more  recently  the 
United  Nations.  To  increase  the  speed  of  eco- 
nomic development,  the  effectiveness  and  scale  of 
utilization  of  each  of  these  channels  must  be  in- 
creased. 

There  are  various  ways  in  which  the  United 
States  Government  can  be  of  assistance,  but  here 
again  the  amount  which  it  can  do  by  itself  is  ex- 
ceedingly limited.  It  was  for  this  reason  that 
President  Truman  in  his  inaugural  address  em- 
phasized the  fact  that  all  elements  in  the  country 
must  work  together  in  the  search  for  means  to 
assist  the  underdeveloped  areas.  Again  I  want  to 
stress  that  those  of  us  who  are  fortunate  enough  to 
be  living  in  the  United  States  should  remember 
that  our  own  achievement  has  not  been  entirely 
through  our  own  resources.  No  modern  country 
can  take  full  credit  for  its  own  development. 
Human  knowledge  is  cumulative  and  traces  its 
origins  to  all  parts  of  the  globe.  Even  modern 
scientific  and  technical  knowledge  is  the  product 
of  laboratories  in  many  countries.  Capital  has 
always  flowed  in  substantial  quantities  across 
national  boundaries.  But  this  modern  technical 
knowledge  and  the  productive  contribution  of 
capital  have  been  utilized  most  unevenly 
throughout  the  world,  with  the  result  that  stand- 
ards of  living  and  productivity  are  likewise  un- 
equal. It  is  still  true  that  thousands  of  people 
starve  to  death  each  year,  and  half  the  plows  in 
use  today  in  the  world  are  made  of  wood.  Some- 
thing like  80  percent  of  the  world's  automobiles 
are  in  the  United  States.  Only  a  small  fraction  of 
the  world's  population  has  ever  heard  a  radio, 
and  an  infinitesimal  fraction  has  ever  seen  a  tele- 
vision set.  The  need  for  improved  living  stand- 
ards is  obvious,  but  this  is  a  long,  slow  process, 
requiring  domestic  effort  and  international  co- 
operation of  a  high  order. 

I  have  talked  about  the  international  economic 
problem  of  balancing  trade  among  countries,  the 
progress  which  has  been  made  through  the  Eco- 
nomic Recovery  Program,  and  the  potentialities 
in  the  process  of  economic  development.  These 
are  dynamic  factors  aimed  at  improving  the  basic 
situation,  but  their  effectiveness  is  closely  related 

Department  of  Stafe  Bulletin 


to  the  principles  which  are  generally  accepted  as 
underlying  international  economic  relations. 
Here  there  are  at  least  three  basic  elements  in  the 
American  concept  of  a  healthy  world  economy. 
The  first  two  relates  to  the  nature  and  extent  of 
obstacles  which  individual  governments  may  place 
in  the  way  of  the  flow  of  goods.  At  the  moment, 
the  immediate  circumstances  have  forced  all  kinds 
of  arbitrary  restrictions.  As  conditions  improve, 
it  should  be  possible  to  thaw  out  these  situations 
and  permit  trade  to  flow  more  freely. 

These  obstacles  take  the  form  of  trade  barriers 
and  of  exchange  controls.  In  both  these  fields, 
the  United  States  has  taken  a  leading  part  in  the 
effort  to  establish  an  agreed  set  of  principles  and 
international  machinery  for  considering  the  ex- 
ceptions and  adaptations  which  individual  coun- 
tries may  find  necessary  from  time  to  time.  Neither 
the  International  Trade  Organization  nor  the  In- 
ternational Monetary  Fund  was  designed  to  deal 
with  the  immediate,  critical  postwar  problems  of 
imbalance  and  shortage.  Rather,  both  represent 
devices  for  reducing  obstacles  to  trade  and  main- 
taining financial  stability  by  means  of  interna- 
tional cooperative  action  (after  the  immediate 
problems  are  solved). 

The  third  basic  requirement  is  to  establish  a 
system  of  order  relative  to  the  many  international 
economic  matters  which  involve  private  citizens. 
Obviously,  economic  activity  within  any  country 
is  closely  related  to  the  existence  of  a  system  of  law 
which  establishes  and  defines  the  rights,  privileges, 
and  obligations  of  the  individual.  A  similar  basis 
of  understanding  is  important  when  one  passes 
across  national  boundaries.  In  February  1948,  a 
treaty  of  friendship,  commerce,  and  navigation  was 
signed  between  the  United  States  and  Italy,  which 
is  perhaps  the  most  modern  document  of  this  type 
in  existence.^  It  defines  on  a  reciprocal  basis,  the 
treatment  which  each  will  give  to  the  citizens  of 
the  other.  Treaties  of  this  kind,  which  give  assur- 
ances to  foreigners  as  to  their  treatment  within  a 
country,  are  most  important  in  providing  not  only 
a  basis  for  travel  and  trade,  but  in  defining  more 
exactly  the  prospective  treatment  of  foreign  in- 
vestment. Economic  progress  is  aided  by  reducing 
the  number  of  uncertainties  in  the  world,  and  we 


feel  that  such  treaties  provide  important,  fixed 
jjoints  for  economic  navigation. 

The  European  Recovery  Program  and  the  "Point 
4"  program  are  dynamic  elements  in  our  policy. 
The  reduction  of  barriers  and  creation  of  rights 
and  obligations  establish  the  underlying  basis  for 
continuing  expansion.  The  elements  add  up  to  a 
coherent  whole. 

Our  economic  foreign  policy  is  a  living  policy. 
It  grows  and  develops  and  adapts  itself  to  the  ne- 
cessities of  the  moment.  In  such  a  brief  survey 
as  I  have  given,  much  has  been  omitted  and  no  ele- 
ment has  been  developed  in  adequate  detail.  But 
it  is  important  to  have  a  sense  of  the  over- all  pat- 
tern— to  see  the  broad  framework  into  which  the 
various  parts  must  fit — to  see  where  we  came  from, 
where  we  are,  and  where  we  hope  to  go.  Nor  can 
economic  foreign  policy  be  separated  from  over-all 
foreign  policy  as  arbitrarily  as  I  have  done.  In  a 
world  where  some  countries  are  more  friendly  than 
others,  all  elements  in  foreign  policy  must  take  that 
unhappy  fact  into  account.  Similarly,  our  strong 
support  of  the  United  Nations  affects  many  other 
phases  of  foreign  policy. 

The  international  economic  scene  of  the  mo- 
ment is  full  of  currents  and  cross-currents.  The 
area  of  economic  policy  choice,  which  was  exceed- 
ingly limited  for  most  countries  in  the  immediate 
postwar  period,  when  basic  requirements  were  ab- 
solute necessities,  is  now  broadening  and  choices 
can  be  made  over  a  wider  and  wider  area.  In  a 
very  real  sense,  many  countries  are  becoming  more 
and  more  economically  independent.  This  is  one 
of  the  clearly  recognized  objectives  of  the  Euro- 
pean Recovery  Plan,  and  we  should  be  happy  to 
see  the  accomplishment.  However,  it  makes  it 
increasingly  necessary  for  us  to  be  so  right  in  our 
policy  that  we  can  be  strong  on  the  basis  of  moral 
strength.  The  basis  of  our  economic  foreign 
policy  must  not  lie  solely  in  the  interests  of  the 
United  States,  but  in  a  sincere  effort  to  develop 
and  carry  out  policies  and  programs  whose  goal 
is  the  mutual  benefit  of  the  peoples  of  all  the 
countries  involved,  including  our  own.  The  eco- 
nomic policies,  which  I  have  so  briefly  outlined, 
derive  their  fundamental  justification  and  support 
from  this  basis  of  mutual  benefit. 


Trial  of  Japanese  War  Criminals 


The  Far  Eastern  Commission  makes  the  follow- 
ing recommendations  ^  to  member  governments  of 
the  Commission: 

If  possible,  investigations  in  connection  with  of- 
fenses falling  under  paragraph  1  h  and  1  c  of  the 
policy  decision  of  the  Far  Eastern  Commission  en- 
titled "Apprehension,  Trial  and  Punishment  of 
War  Criminals  in  the  Far  East"  (FEC-007/3), 

May  7,   7949 


passed  by  the  Commission  on  April  3, 1946,  includ- 
ing such  offenses  alleged  to  have  been  committed 
by  persons  suspected  of  offenses  falling  under 
paragraph  1  a  of  the  said  policy  decision,  should 

'  For  test  see  Department  of  State  press  release  77  of 
Feb.  2,  1948. 

'  Recommenciations  to  member  governments  of  the  Far 
Eastern  Commission  approved  by  the  Commission  on  Mar. 
31,  1949,  and  released  to  the  press  on  Apr.  1,  1949. 

569 


be  completed  before  June  30,  1949,  and  all  trials 
thereof  should  be  concluded,  if  possible,  before 
September  30,  1949. 

[Released  to  tbe  press  by  FEC  April  11 

The  Far  Eastern  Commission  at  its  147th  meet- 
ing on  March  31,  1949,  recommended  to  its  11 
member  governments  that,  if  possible,  investiga- 
tions of  suspected  Japanese  war  criminals,  accused 
either  of  violations  of  the  laws  or  customs  of  war, 
or  of  murder,  extermination,  enslavement,  depor- 
tation, or  other  inhumane  acts  committed  against 
any  civilian  population  or  prosecutions  on  politi- 
cal, racial,  or  religious  grounds,  should  be  com- 
pleted by  June  ;>0,  and  trials  of  such  persons 
completed  by  September  30,  1949. 

It  will  be  remembered  that  according  to  a  pre- 
viously announced  policy  decision  of  the  Far 
Eastern  Commission  adopted  on  February  24, 
1949,  it  was  agreed  that  no  further  trials  should 
be  initiated  of  suspected  criminals  whose  offenses 
fell  within  category  of  so-called  "a"  crimes, 
"Planning,  preparation,  initiation  or  waging  of  a 
•war  of  aggression  or  a  war  in  violation  of  inter- 
national treaties,  agreements  and  assurances,  or 
participation  in  a  common  plan  or  conspiracy  for 
the  accomplishment  of  any  of  the  foregoing." 

Investigations  and  trials  of  Japanese  for  war 
crimes  had  been  called  for  by  the  Far  Eastern 
Commission  policy  decision  of  April  3,  1946,  "Ap- 
prehension, Trial  and  Punishment  of  War  Crimi- 
nals in  the  Far  East." '  This  policy  had  set  up 
three  categories  of  war  crimes,  commonly  known 
as  categories  a,  b,  and  c.  It  is  the  second  and 
third  categories  which  are  referred  to  in  the 
present  recommendation  of  the  Far  Eastern  Com- 
mission. The  paragraphs  in  the  original  FEC 
policy  decision  on  war  criminals  referred  to  in  the 
present  decision  are  as  follows : 

1.  The  term  "war  crimes"  as  used  herein,  includes : 

a.  Planning;,  i>reparation,  initiation  or  waging  of  a 
war  of  aggression  or  a  war  in  violation  of  international 
treaties,  agrcenients  and  assurances,  or  participation  in 
a  common  plan  or  conspiracy  for  the  accomplishment  of 
any  of  the  foregoing. 

6.  Violations  of  the  laws  or  customs  of  war.  Such 
violations  shall  include  but  not  be  limited  to  murder,  ill 
treatment  or  deportation  to  slave  labor  or  for  any  other 
purpose  of  civilian  population  of,  or  in,  occupied  territory, 
murder  or  ill  treatment  of  prisoners  of  war  or  persons  on 
the  seas  or  elsewhere,  improper  treatment  of  hostages, 
plunder  of  public  or  private  property,  wanton  destruction 
of  cities,  towns  or  villages  or  devastation  not  justified  by 
military  necessity. 

c.  Murder,  extermination,  enslavement,  deportation  and 
other  inhumane  acts  committed  against  any  civilian 
population,  before  or  during  the  war  or  prosecutions  on 
political,  racial  or  religious  grounds  in  execution  of  or  in 


'  See  Activitir.'f  of  Ihr  Far  Eastern  Commission  Report 
by  the  Secretary  Ocniral,  Appendix  39,  p.  97,  Department 
of  State  publication  L'SS.S. 

'  Policy  decision  approved  by  the  Far  Eastern  Commis- 
sion Feb.  24,  1!)4!»;  a  directive  based  up(m  this  decision 
was  forwarded  by  the  U.S.  Government  to  the  Supreme 
Commander  for  the  Allied  Powers  for  implementation. 

570 


connection  with  any  crime  defined  herein,  whether  or  not 
In  violation  of  the  domestic  law  of  the  country  where 
peri)et  rated. 

The  Far  Eastern  Commission  decides  as  a 
matter  of  policy  that:^ 

No  further  trials  of  Japanese  war  criminals 
should  be  initiated  in  respect  of  offenses  classified 
under  paragraph  1  a  of  the  policy  decision  of  the 
Far  Eastern  Commission  entitled  "Apprehension, 
Trial  and  Punishment  of  War  Criminals  in  the 
Far  East"  passed  by  the  Commission  on  April 
3,  1946. 

[Released  to  the  press  by  FEC  March  16] 

The  Far  Eastern  Commission  at  its  142d  meet- 
ing on  February  24  adopted  a  policy  deci- 
sion stating  that  no  further  trials  should  be 
initiated  with  respect  to  Japanese  suspected  of 
having  planned,  prepared,  or  conspired  to  wage  a 
war  of  aggression — commonly  referred  to  as  "class 
a"  crimes. 

This  decision — the  55th  policy  approved  by  the 
Far  Eastern  Commission  since  its  first  meeting  on 
February  26,  1946 — has  been  communicated 
to  the  Supreme  Commander  for  the  Allied 
Powers,  General  MacArthur,  in  a  directive  issued 
in  the  usual  manner  through  the  Joint  Chiefs  of 
Staff.  The  policy  states  that  "no  further  trials 
of  Japaitese  war  criminals  should  be  initiated  in 
respect  of  offenses  classified  under  paragraph  1  a 
of  the  policy  decision  of  the  Far  Eastern  Com- 
mission entitled  'Apprehension,  Trial  and  Punish- 
ment of  AVar  Criminals  in  the  Far  East'  passed 
by  the  Commission  on  April  3, 1946." 

The  present  action  of  the  Commission  has  no 
bearing  on  so-called  "&"  and  "c"  offenses :  violation 
of  the  laws  and  customs  of  war  and  crimes  against 
humanity,  such  as  murder,  extermination,  enslave- 
ment, etc. 

It  will  be  recalled  that  the  Potsdam  Declara- 
tion of  July  26,  1945,  announced  that  "stern 
justice  shall  be  meted  out  to  all  war  crimi- 
nals, including  those  who  have  visited  cruelties 
upon  our  prisoners."  Pursuant  to  this  agreement 
the  United  States  Government  in  October  1945, 
prior  to  the  establishment  of  the  Far  Eastern 
Connnission,  forwarded  a  directive  to  the  Su- 
preme Commander  with  instructions  regarding  the 
prosecution  of  suspected  Japanese  war  criminals 
and  the  establishment  of  an  International  Mili- 
tary Tribunal  for  the  Far  East.  Subsequently, 
at  the  Moscow  Conference  of  December  1945,  the 
Far  Eastern  Commission  was  established.  Five 
weeks  after  its  initial  meeting  in  Washington,  the 
Commission  approved  the  policy  decision  already 
mentioned  above  ("Apprehension,  Trial  and  Pun- 
ishment of  War  Criminals  in  the  Far  East,"  April 
3,  1946).  This  decision  was  transmitted  to 
the  Supreme  Commander  through  the  Joint  Chiefs 
of  Staff,  in  accordance  with  the  established  proce- 
dure, and  superseded  the  earlier  United  States 
directive. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


On  April  26,  1946,  an  indictment  was 
lodged  with  the  International  Military  Tribunal 
for  the  Far  East  charging  28  Japanese  with  hav- 
ing committed  crimes  falling  into  all  three  cate- 
gories referred  to  above,  namely,  classes  "a",  "J", 
and  "c".  The  indictment  charged  offenses  cov- 
ering a  period  of  17  years  and  committed  through- 
out the  greater  part  of  Eastern  Asia.  Trial  was 
formally  begun  on  June  4,  1946.  Evidence 
submitted  was  collected  not  only  from  sources  in 
the  Far  East  but  also  from  sources  in  Europe  and 
the  United  States. 

The  trial  lasted  for  nearly  two  and  a  half  years. 
Of  the  twenty-eight  men  originally  indicted,  two 
died  in  the  course  of  the  trial  and  a  third  was 
adjudged  mentally  incompetent  for  trial.  The 
remaining  twenty-five  were  all  convicted  in  a 
lengthy  judgment  read  to  the  tribunal  between 
November  4  and  November  12,  1948.  All 
but  one  were  found  guilty  of  the  crime  of 
waging  or  conspiring  to  wage  aggressive  war 
("class  a"  crimes).  Eleven  were  also  found 
guilty  of  "J"  and  "c"  crimes. 

Sentences  were  passed  on  the  25  convicted  war 
criminals  on  November  12, 1948.  Seven  were  sen- 
tenced to  death  by  hanging;  sixteen  received  sen- 
tences of  life  imprisonment;  and  two  were  sen- 
tenced to  20  years  and  7  years  i-espectively. 

Between  midnight  and  12 :  33  a.  m.  on  December 
24,  1948,  following  unsuccessful  appeals  to  the 
United  States  Supreme  Court  to  review  their  sen- 
tences, the  seven  men  sentenced  to  death  by  the 
International  Military  Tribunal  for  the  Far  East, 
including  former  Premier  Hideki  Tojo,  were 
hanged  in  Sugamo  Prison  in  Tokyo. 


Procedure  for  Claiming  Land  in  Japan 

[Released  to  the  press  April  18] 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  April 
18  that  it  has  received  a  communication  from 
the  Supreme  Commander,  Allied  Headquarters, 
Japan,  to  the  effect  that  the  Japanese  Government 
is  seeking  certain  information  from  former  Jap- 
anese nationals  who  own  lands  in  Japan  and  who 
do  not  wish  these  lands  to  be  sold  in  connection 
with  the  Japanese  land  reforms. 

The  Japanese  land-reform  law  provides  that 
lands  owned  by  Japanese  nationals  abroad  will 
be  purchased  by  the  Government  for  resale  to  the 
farmers  actually  engaged  in  their  cultivation  but 
stipulates  that  any  owner  who  relinquished  his 
Japanese  nationality  prior  to  October  21,  1946, 
will  be  exempt  from  this  provision. 

Persons  whose  lands  are  exempt,  therefore,  are 
requested  to  file  applications  immediately,  to- 
gether with  proof  of  their  new  nationality. 
Lands  in  this  category  inadvertently  purchased 
by  the  Government  will  be  returned  to  their  for- 

May   1,   1949 


eign  owners  upon  submission  of  satisfactory  evi- 
dence within  12  months  of  the  purchase.  Writs 
of  purchase  of  the  lands  will  be  sent  directly  to 
the  former  owners  by  the  Government.  Appli- 
cations to  forestall  purchase  or  secure  a  cancella- 
tion of  purchase  must  be  addressed  to  the  Jap- 
anese Minister  of  Agriculture  and  Forestry, 
Tokyo. 


Notice  to  Americans  in  Naniting 

[Released  to  the  press  April  22] 

The  American  Embassy  in  Nanking  on  April  21, 
1949,  made  the  following  announcement  to  all 
American  nationals  residing  in  Nanking : 

"Until  recently  an  American  naval  vessel  has 
been  stationed  at  Nanking.  It  is  now  stationed 
in  Shanghai.  Owing  to  a  blockage  of  the  Yangtze 
Eiver,  interfering  with  the  movement  of  all  vessels, 
the  presence  of  any  United  States  naval  vessel  at 
Nanking  at  a  given  time  cannot,  in  the  future,  be 
expected. 

"The  Marine  Guard  at  the  Embassy,  having 
been  based  upon  ships  stationed  at  Nanking,  has 
accordingly  been  reduced  to  a  guard  sufficient  only 
for  the  Chancery's  internal  security.  It  will  not 
be  available  for  any  protective  duties  either  gen- 
erally or  in  connection  with  evacuation. 

"American  nationals,  who  may  have  regarded 
the  presence  of  United  States  naval  vessels  and  of 
the  Marine  Guard  as  implying  that  the  United 
States  will  furnish  either  emergency  protection  or 
emergency  evacuation,  should  therefore  reconsider 
their  position  at  Nanking.  There  is  no  assurance 
that  Nanking  will  be  spared  either  civil  disturb- 
ance or  military  assault.  The  Embassy  is  com- 
pelled to  warn  everyone  that  those  remaining  must 
be  prepared  to  stay  through  any  emergencj'. 

"Therefore,  those  who  do  not  so  intend  should 
leave  Nanking  now,  while  normal  commercial 
means  of  travel  still  exist." 

As  of  April  4,  1949,  official  pei'sonnel  in  the 
American  Embassy  in  Nanking,  including  wives 
and  children,  was  172.  Other  Americans  residing 
in  the  Nanking  area  total  87. 


President's  Message  on  Republic 
of  Ireland  Act 

[Released  to  the  press  April  18] 

President  Truman  sent  the  following  message 
to  President  O'Kelley,  Dublin,  on  April  18 : 

On  the  occasion  of  the  entering  into  force  of  the 
Republic  of  Ireland  Act,  I  send  to  you  and  to  the 
Irish  people,  on  behalf  of  the  people  of  the  United 
States  of  America,  sincere  good  wishes  for  the 
continued  welfare  and  prosperity  of  your  country. 


'wnte^rU^' 


Occupation  Matters  Fase 

The   Returned    Masterpieces   of  the   Berlin 
Museums: 
Introductory  Note  by  Ardelia  R.  Hall   .    .        543 
A  Foreword  by  James  R.  Newman     .    .    .        545 
An  Introduction  by  Theodore  Allen  Hein- 

rich 546 

Free  University  of  Berlin.     By  Howard  W. 

Johnston 548 

Views  of  U.S.,  U.K.,  and  France  on  German 
Basic    Law    Transmitted    to    Military 

Governors 551 

Trial  of  Japanese  War  Criminals 569 

Procedure  for  Claiming  Land  in  Japan  ...        571 

The  United  Nations  and 
Specialized  Agencies 

U.S.  Answers  Soviet  Charges  Against  North 
Atlantic  Treaty.  Statement  by  Ambas- 
sador Warren  R.  Austin 552 

Suppression  of  Human  Rights  in  Bulgaria 
and  Hungary.  Statement  by  Benjamin 
V.  Cohen 556 

The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations  .    .        561 


General  Policy 

Pan  American  Day:  A  Symbol  of  Mutual 
Trust  and  Cooperation  Among  the 
Americas.  Address  by  Secretary  Ache- 
son    

Notice  to  Americans  in  Nanking 

President's  Message  on  Repubhc  of  Ireland  . 


Calendar  of  Meetings 


International  Information  and 
Cultural  Affairs 

The    Returned    Masterpieces   of   the   BerUn 

Museums: 

Introductory  Note  by  Ardelia  R.  Hall  .    . 

A  Foreword  by  James  R.  Newman     .    .    . 

An  Introduction  by  Theodore  Allen  Hein- 

rich 


564 
571 
571 


Economic  Affairs 

U.S.  Delegation  to  Cotton  Advisory  Meeting  .        563 
Present    Day    International    Economic    Pic- 
ture.    By  Willard  L.  Thorp 566 


562 


543 

545 


546 


//v€/  zlJeha^meni/  /C^ Cftate^ 


g 

1 

THE  NORTH  ATLANTIC  TREATY  AND  THE 
ROLE    OF    THE    MILITARY    ASS 
iivrF  ppoCTf  AJ\T 

THE  CURRENT  SIT(  Allo\   Tn   GKi   ' 


'  ':■■'»  V:A    s'lJO^  ,>  .]-^  t,        ■     INTERNA- 
Ml»NVL     IRADL    ORGANIZAT" 
TRVXSMITTED  TO  THE  SENATE 


NbLLAK    bLKVlCl 
NATIONALS  •  Anid. 


o^e  z/^efho/rtm^e^  ^^ C/Ccite    VJ  Li  i  1  w  L 1  i  X 


Vol.  XX,  No.  514    •    Publication  3501 
Max  8,  1949 


For  sale  hy  the  Superintendent  ot  Documents 

U.S.  Government  Printing  Office 

Washington  2fi,  D.O. 

Peick: 

62  Issues,  domestic  $5,  foreign  $7.26 

Single  copy.  15  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  ot  the  Budget  (February  18,1949). 

Note:  Contents  of  this  publloatlon  are  not 
copyrighted  and  Items  contiilncd  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Department 
OF  State  Bulletin  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BULLETIN, 
a  weekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  with  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  icork  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includea 
press  releases  on  foreign  policy  issued 
by  the  White  House  and  the  Depart- 
ment, and  statements  and  addresset 
made  by  the  President  and  by  the 
Secretary  of  State  and  other  officers 
of  the  Department,  as  trell  as  special 
articles  on  various  phases  of  inter- 
national affairs  and  the  functions  of 
the  Department.  Information  is  in- 
cluded concerning  treaties  and  in- 
ternational agreements  to  trhich  the 
United  States  is  or  may  become  a 
party  and  treaties  of  general  inter- 
national interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
well  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


Consular  Services  for  German  Nationals 

by  Walter  J.  Marx 


The  Interim  Office  for  German  Affairs  is  a 
unique  experiment  for  which  there  appears  to  be 
no  precedent  in  the  history  of  the  United  States. 
During  World  War  II  the  interests  of  the  German 
Government  in  the  United  States  were  protected 
by  the  Swiss  Legation  at  Washington.  Upon  the 
defeat  of  Germany  in  May  1945,  the  Swiss  Govern- 
ment turned  over  to  the  United  States  the  German 
Embassy  and  other  German  diplomatic  property. 
Since  the  Gennan  Government  no  longer  existed, 
the  300  thousand  German  nationals  in  the  United 
States,  and  for  that  matter,  those  elsewhere  in 
the  world  outside  of  Germany,  found  themselves 
without  protection.  There  were  no  longer  any 
consular  officers  who  might  issue  travel  docmnents 
to  Germans  or  take  measures  to  protect  their  prop- 
erty interests,  to  certify  legal  documents  for  use  in 
Germany  and  to  give  other  such  services.  Until 
they  relinquished  the  protection  of  German  inter- 
ests, the  Swiss  had  even  continued  the  payment  of 
German  pensions  in  this  country.  Many  aged 
German  people  after  May  1945,  unable  to  obtain 
their  pensions  any  longer,  lost  their  only  means 
of  livelihood. 

The  lack  of  valid  travel  documents  proved  to  be 
increasingly  embarrassing  to  German  nationals. 
Immediately  after  the  German  collapse  most  Ger- 
mans outside  of  Germany  remained  very  quiet  and 
made  little  attempt  to  travel.  But  as  time  passed, 
and  the  Allied  Powers  began  the  economic  rehabil- 
itation of  the  Western  zones  of  Germany,  German 
business  men  in  the  United  States  attempted  to  re- 
establish ties  with  German  business  firms  and 
found  it  necessary  to  send  their  agents  to  Germany 
and  to  other  countries.  Germans  in  the  United 
States  and  citizens  of  German  heritage  began  to 
hear  from  their  relatives  in  Germany  from  whom 
they  had  been  cut  off  for  five  or  more  years.  Aged 
mothers  were  dying,  family  affairs  were  badly 
snarled,  estates  had  been  inherited,  relatives  had 
become  lost  during  the  tremendous  uprooting  of 
populations  started  by  Hitler  and  intensified  by 
the  Poles  and  the  Soviets. 


Since  there  was  no  immediate  prospect  of  sign- 
ing a  definitive  German  peace  treaty  and  of  estab- 
lishing a  new  German  government  with  full  sov- 
ereign powers,  the  Department  of  State  attempted 
to  find  some  temporary  solution  to  the  problem 
caused  by  the  collapse  of  consular  protection  for 
German  nationals  abroad.  There  was  also  some 
uneasiness  in  the  Department  at  the  thought  of 
300  thousand  Germans  carrying  on  their  af- 
fairs and  possibly  traveling  abroad  on  makeshift 
travel  documents.  Travel-control  aspects  of  the 
problem  and  the  possibility  of  establishing  interim 
offices  to  perform  consular  functions  for  German 
nationals  in  each  country  having  a  large  German 
population  were  studied. 

The  matter  was  presented  to  the  Allied  Control 
Council  in  Berlin,  and  after  much  discussion  all 
Four  Powers  agreed  in  December  1946,  that  the  In- 
terim Offices  for  German  Affairs  should  be  estab- 
lished. In  order  to  implement  the  Allied  decision. 
Congress  authorized  a  bill  for  the  Department  of 
State  to  perform  certain  consular  services  for  Ger- 
man nationals  residing  in  the  United  States.  The 
Soviet  authorities,  however,  later  changed  their 
minds  in  regard  to  the  establishment  of  interim 
offices,  thus  forcing  a  temporary  abandonment  of 
the  world-wide  plan. 

The  Division  of  Protective  Services  took  little 
further  action  in  regard  to  the  bill,  and  as  the  80th 
Congress  drew  to  a  close  it  seemed  apparent  that 
the  bill  would  be  lost  in  the  final  rush  of  legislation. 
However,  in  the  closing  hours  of  the  session.  Public 
Law  798  was  passed  authorizing  the  Department  to 
perform  certain  consular  services  for  German  na- 
tionals in  the  United  States,  "its  Territories  and 
possessions."  Since  a  bill  for  funds  had  not  been 
submitted  to  the  Congi'ess,  no  money  was  available 
to  the  DeiJartment  to  carry  out  the  purpose  of  the 
law.  It  was  anticipated  that  the  functions  would 
pay  for  themselves  out  of  the  fees  obtained  from 
persons  requesting  consular  services,  but  the  law 
would  not  permit  the  Department  of  State  to  use 
this  income  directly  for  carrying  out  the  consular 


May  8,   1949 


functions.  The  money  would  have  to  go  to  the 
U.S.  Treasury.  A  siiecific  appropriation  from 
Congress  would  then  be  required  to  carry  on  the 
work. 

The  original  intention  had  been  to  use  emergency 
funds  temporarily  to  .set  up  an  Interim  Office  for 
German  AflFairs,  but  after  the  passage  of  Public 
Law  798  it  was  determined  that  these  funds  were 
not  available.  Nevertheless,  the  matter  was  press- 
ing because  upon  the  publication  of  the  bill  inquir- 
ies began  to  pour  into  the  Department  regarding 
the  new  functions.  An  office  would  have  had  to  be 
set  up  if  only  to  reply  to  such  inquiries. 

There  was  also  the  problem  of  coordination  with 
the  military  authorities  in  Germany  since  the  origi- 
nal plan  had  called  for  the  establishment  of  a  con- 
sular backstop  in  Germany,  similar  to  the  consular 
section  of  the  former  German  Foreign  Office.  But 
at  that  time  to  hope  to  obtain  Allied  agreement  for 
the  reestablishment  of  even  a  shadow  of  the  old 
German  Foreign  Office  seemed  futile.  At  best, 
many  months  of  effort  would  be  required.  Since 
Congress  had  authorized  the  functions  of  the  Office, 
it  was  decided  to  go  ahead  and  begin  the  perform- 
ance of  the  functions.  The  military  authorities 
were  requested  to  make  the  necessary  arrangements 
in  the  three  Western  zones  of  Germany  for  accept- 
ance of  documents  issued  by  the  new  office  in 
Washington. 

The  original  plan  for  the  Office  had  called  for 
an  initial  registration  of  all  German  nationals  in 
the  United  States  and  a  questionnaire  was  devised 
in  German  and  English  designed  to  catch  any  po- 
tential troublemakers  or  former  Nazis.  To  process 
this  registration  it  was  estimated  that  over  a  hun- 
dred employees  would  be  necessary.  Since  refunds 
were  available  and  because  the  security  aspect  of 
the  Office  gradually  faded  into  the  backgi-ound, 
particularly  because  the  Department  of  Justice 
presumably  already  had  on  file  complete  records, 
it  was  decided  to  drop  the  registration  idea. 

In  the  summer  of  1948  the  most  pressing  problem 
for  Germans  in  this  country  was  the  pi-ocurcment 
of  travel  documents.  So  the  Division  of  Protective 
Services,  which  would  be  directly  responsible  for 
the  functioning  of  the  new  Office,  with  a  skeleton 
staff  began  two  essential  functions:  travel  docu- 
mentation and  the  authentication  of  legal  docu- 
ments for  use  in  Germany. 

With  this  small  staff,  the  Interim  Office  opened 
operations  early  in  August  1948,  by  attempting  to 
answer  the  large  volume  of  mail  that  had  been 


accumulating — a  thousand  pieces  of  mail  a  month 
were  pouring  in. 

The  key  items  required  for  beginning  the  per- 
formance of  consular  functions  were  travel  docu- 
ments, a  great  seal  of  office,  wafers,  and  authenti- 
cation forms.  An  original  travel  document, 
written  in  English,  French,  and  German,  based 
roughly  upon  a  similar  document  issued  by  the 
Military  Government  in  Germany,  was  designed 
and  was  printed.  A  seal  of  office  was  also  de- 
signed and  then  maimfactui-ed  by  the  Bureau  of 
Engraving  and  Printing.  Inquiries  in  an  ever 
increasing  volume  continued  to  pour  into  the  De- 
partment. Early  in  August  the  Departmental 
regulation  formally  establishing  the  Interim  Office 
was  published  in  the  Federal  Register,  and  travel 
agents  and  lawyers  began  to  call  upon  the  Interim 
Office  in  person  for  more  detailed  information 
about  its  functions. 

It  was  not  before  September  13,  1948,  that  the 
travel  documents  were  readj'  for  issuance  and 
the  seal  of  office  delivered  from  the  Bureau  of 
Engi-aving  and  Printing.  By  the  close  of  the 
month  some  $2,000  in  fees  had  already  been  col- 
lected. During  the  first  quarter  of  1949  over 
$10,000  was  received,  and  during  the  spring-travel 
rush,  income  is  running  about  $4,000  each  month. 
Consequently,  the  Interim  Office  is  more  than  pay- 
ing its  own  way. 

It  is  surprising  to  note  that  about  70  percent  of 
the  travel-document  business  of  the  Office  is  con- 
cerned with  the  return  to  Germany  of  Germans 
who  came  recently  to  this  country,  mainly  aged 
l)eople  who  came  on  immigi-ation  visas  to  join  sons 
and  daughters.  They  become  homesick,  and  many 
wish  to  return  to  Germany  within  a  month  after 
their  arrival  in  America.  Many  husbands  have 
even  written  frantic  letters  to  the  Interim  Office 
stating  that  their  mothers  are  breaking  up  their 
homes,  and  some  American  daughters-in-law  re- 
sent an  elderly  German  woman's  taking  possession 
of  the  kitchen,  reorganizing  the  household  along 
efficient  German  lines,  and  replacing  American 
witli  German  cooking. 

The  Interim  Office  is  also  patronized  steadily  by 
homesick  or  unhappy  war  brides,  particularly  by 
tliose  who  at  one  time  had  had  a  rather  pleasant 
and  easy  life  in  Germany.  Apparently,  many  an 
American  soldier  exaggerated  his  economic  cir- 
cumstances at  home.  In  a  few  cases,  no  matter 
how  desperate  the  situation  may  be  in  Germany  to 
which  they  are  returning,  German  war  brides  in- 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


I 


sist  upon  returning,  having  given  up  all  hope  of 
making  a  success  of  their  American  mari-iage  or 
of  life  in  America.  A  surprising  number  of  at- 
tractive and  intelligent  girls,  after  divorcing  their 
American  husbands,  state  they  wish  to  return  to 
Germany  because  of  loneliness,  even  in  our  cities 
with  large  German  populations.  In  keeping  with 
German  consular  regulations  the  Interim  Office 
has  tried  to  be  particularly  helpful  in  aiding  these 
war  brides  without,  of  course,  overstepping  the 
Departmental  regulations  which  restrict  sharply 
the  amount  of  protection  that  the  Interim  Office 
may  give  German  nationals. 

Most  of  the  other  clients  of  the  Office  are  Ger- 
mans going  home  to  visit  aged  relatives,  to  take 
care  of  inheritances,  to  look  after  their  property, 
or  for  other  business  matters.  Occasionally  Ger- 
mans are  going  to  India,  South  Africa,  South 
America,  and  elsewhere  on  Interim  Office  docu- 
ments. Some  German  seamen  find  an  Interim 
Office  travel  document  indispensable  in  obtaining 
a  job  on  American  vessels  and  in  obtaining  the 
necessary  Coast  Guard  clearance.  Until  the  estab- 
lishment of  the  Interim  Office,  German  seamen  re- 
siding in  the  United  States  found  themselves  in 
a  most  difficult  position,  being  unable  to  work 
without  some  soi't  of  documentation.  Occasion- 
ally, the  Visa  Division  of  the  Department  of  State 
granted  a  waiver  of  passport  requirements  to  such 
men  but  these  waivers  had  to  be  renewed  at  rather 
brief  intervals  and  did  not  take  the  place  of  a  valid 
travel  document. 

It  should  be  made  clear  that  in  authorizing  the 
Department  of  State  to  perform  consular  services 
for  Gennan  nationals  in  this  country.  Congress  did 
not  authorize  taking  over  the  protection  of  these 
nationals  in  the  fashion,  for  example,  that  the 
Swiss  protected  them  during  the  war.  Neither 
can  Germans  bearing  Interim  Office  travel  docu- 
ments appeal  to  American  consuls  abroad  for  pro- 
tection. The  wording  in  three  languages  on  the 
cover  of  the  document  makes  this  point  clear.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  travel  document,  in  a  passport- 
type  booklet,  is  being  generally  accepted  by  all 
foreign  consulates  in  the  United  States,  and  for- 
eign visas  are  being  gi-anted  to  the  holders 
enabling  them  to  travel  to  other  parts  of  the  world. 
Certain  nations  refuse  to  accept  improvised  travel 
documents,  such  as  affidavits  of  identity.  One 
client  of  the  Interim  Office  traveled  all  over  Latin 
America  on  a  United  States  reentry  permit  forti- 
fied with  20  pages  of  visas  on  blank  sheets  of  paper. 


A  security  check  is  made  in  every  case  to  make 
certain  that  the  Department  is  not  facilitating  the 
travel  of  a  German  whose  travel  may  be  opposed 
to  the  interests  of  the  United  States.  However, 
since  the  great  majority  of  Germans  in  this  coun- 
try entered  on  visas  issued  by  American  consular 
officers  after  thorough  investigation,  the  Interim 
Office  practically  never  finds  information  against 
an  applicant  that  would  preclude  the  issuance  of  a 
travel  document.  The  Interim  Office  must,  how- 
ever, be  on  the  alert  for  some  German  who  may  be 
in  this  country  illegally  or  might  be  wanted  by  the 
authorities. 

One  of  the  curious  requests  that  come  to  the  In- 
terim Office  came  from  a  young  German  of  mili- 
tary age  who  had  no  immediate  travel  plans  but 
who  feared  that  war  was  imminent  and  wanted  a 
travel  document  so  that  he  could  escape  the  draft 
by  departing  hurriedly  from  the  country  in  the 
event  of  war. 

One  of  the  early  problems  consisted  of  keeping 
abreast  of  the  current  military  regulations  govena- 
ing  travel  to  the  zones  of  occupation  in  Germany. 
The  rules  changed  from  time  to  time,  varied  in 
each  zone,  and  the  interpretation  of  the  rules  by 
Allied  military  officials  changed  sometimes  from 
day  to  day.  With  the  adoption  of  uniform  travel 
regulations  to  all  three  Western  zones  and  the  es- 
tablishment in  Washington  of  a  branch  of  the  Ber- 
lin Combined  Travel  Board,  the  situation  has  im- 
proved. Liaison  between  the  Military  Permit  Of- 
fice and  the  Interim  Office  is  necessarily  close. 
Both  Offices  realize  the  anomaly  of  having  one  of- 
fice issue  travel  documents  to  Gennan  nationals 
with  a  separate  office  issuing  what  amounts  to  Ger- 
man visas  on  the  same  documents  and  on  the  pass- 
ports of  other  countries. 

The  work  of  the  Interim  Office  is  facilitated  by 
its  having  been  authorized  to  function  outside  of 
the  normal  Departmental  channels.  Routine  mail 
is  signed  in  the  Office  and  is  sent  out  directly.  By 
using  form  letters  it  has  been  possible  to  answer 
all  mail  in  a  single  day  after  its  arrival. 

Although  original  plans  called  for  a  legal  sec- 
tion, there  is  at  present  no  such  section.  The 
Interim  Office  makes  no  attempt  to  adjudicate 
questions  of  German  citizenship.  Its  travel  docu- 
ment states  that  the  issuance  of  the  document  prej- 
udices in  no  way  the  bearer's  nationality.  Docu- 
ments are  issued  upon  reasonable  evidence  of  Ger- 
man nationality  in  the  form  of  documents  such  as 
expired  German  passports.  Military  Government 


May  8,  7949 


travel  documents,  etc.,  and  upon  the  oath  of  the 
applicant  that  lie  or  she  is  a  German  national. 

Unfortunately,  Public  Law  798  does  not  permit 
the  Interim  Oflice  to  document  the  worst  victims  of 
Hitler,  persons  who  were  deprived  of  their  German 
citizenship  by  Nazi  laws  and  who  today  under- 
standably are  unwilling  to  take  an  oath  that  they 
are  still  German  citizens.  But  the  Interim  Oflice 
can  document  the  German  who  loyally  registered 
at  a  German  Consulate  before  the  war  for  German 
military  service  under  Hitler  since  his  registration 
is  excellent  evidence  of  his  claim  to  German  na- 
tionality. 

When  the  Swiss  relinquished  the  protection  of 
German  interests  upon  the  collapse  of  Germany, 
the  central  German  Interests  Section  continued  to 
function  at  Bern  but  it  is  concerned  more  with  wel- 
fare and  relief  in  regard  to  the  German  popula- 
tion in  Switzerland.  Tlie  Interim  Office  has  taken 
on  no  relief  functions.  Although  the  protection 
function  of  the  Office  is  strictly  limited,  the  Interim 
Office  does  provide  a  travel  document  which  is  gen- 
erally recognized  by  other  powers,  and  Germans 
in  the  United  States  have  a  governmental  office  to 
•which  they  can  turn  for  advice  and  information 
and  from  which  they  can  expect  to  get  an  answer  by 
return  mail.  For  persons  almost  defeated  by  gov- 
ernmental red  tape  and  bureaucratic  procrastina- 
tion these  things  mean  a  gi'eat  deal.  Particularly 
interesting  is  the  fact  that  numerous  Congressmen 
are  actively  interested  in  the  work  of  the  Office  and 
call  upon  its  facilities  almost  daily  on  behalf  of  the 
relatives  of  their  constituents. 


Because  of  the  lack  of  personnel  the  work  of 
the  Interim  Office  has  been  restricted  to  the  is- 
suance of  travel  documents  and  the  authentication 
of  legal  documents  for  use  in  Germanj'.  A  few 
"Lebensbescheinigungen"  have  also  been  issued, 
and  these  pieces  of  paper  apparently  have  enabled 
certain  Germans  to  obtain  pension  payments  once 
more.  An  expansion  of  activities  to  include  other 
consular  functions  depends  not  only  on  personnel 
but  also  upon  the  future  of  Germany,  the  forma- 
tion of  the  proposed  government  of  the  Western 
zones  and  any  consequent  resumption  by  Germany 
of  representation  abroad. 

The  broad  title  of  the  Office  causes  some  confu- 
sion for  American  citizens  as  well  as  for  German 
nationals.  Often  people  telephone  or  write  to  the 
Office  regarding  any  matter  that  pertains  to 
German  affairs,  protest  the  devaluation  of  their 
German  bank  accounts,  request  aid  for  relatives  in 
Germany,  or  ask  for  help  in  solving  complicated 
personal  problems.  With  the  recent  establish- 
ment in  the  Department  of  the  Office  for  German 
and  Austrian  Affairs,  the  title  of  the  Interim 
Office  was  changed  to  the  Interim  Office  for  Ger- 
man Consular  Affairs. 

The  Interim  Office  will  pass  out  of  existence  at 
such  time  as  its  functions  are  no  longer  required, 
presumably  after  Germany  has  representatives  of 
her  own  in  the  United  States.  This  Government 
in  the  meantime  will  carry  out  its  obligations  as 
custodian  of  a  conquered  people  and  will  attempt 
to  satisfy  the  personal  needs  of  deserving  German 
nationals  for  consular  functions. 


Current  United  Nations  Documents:  A  Selected  Bibliography' 


Economic  and  Social  Council 

Draft  Convention  for  the  Suppression  of  the  Traffic  in 
Persons  and  of  the  Exploitation  of  the  Prostitution 
of  Others.  E/1072,  December  23,  1948.  28  pp. 
mimeo.  [Also,  Annex  I,  49  pp.  miiueo,  and  Annex 
2,  51  pp.     mimeo.] 

Tax  Treatment  of  Foreign  Nationals,  Re.sources  and 
Transactions.  E/CN.8/4.5,  December  20, 1948.  93  pp. 
mimeo. 

Economic  Commission  for  Asia  and  the  Far  East.  Report 
of  the  Fao/Ecafe  Joint  Worlting  Party  on  Agricul- 
tural Requisites.  E/CN.ll/135/Add.l,  November  13, 
1948.     125  pp.     mimeo. 

United  Nations  Conference  on  Freedom  of  Information. 
Held  at  Geneva,  Switzerland,  from  23  March  to  21 
April,  1948.  E/Conf.  0/79,  April  22,  1948.  Final  Act. 
iii,  41  pp.     Printed.     40^. 

'  Printed  materials  may  be  secured  in  the  United  States 
from  the  International  Documents  Service,  Columbia 
University  Press,  2!)()0  Broadway,  New  York,  27,  N.  Y. 
Other  materials  (mimeographed  or  processed  documents) 
may  be  consulted  at  certain  designated  libraries  in  the 
United  States. 


National  and  International  Action  to  Achieve  or  Main- 
tain Full  Employment  and  Economic  Stability.  Re- 
plies from  Specialized  Agencies.  E/1111/Add.l.  Feb. 
16,  1949.     30  pp.  mimeo. 

Study  on  the  Position  of  Stateless  Persons.  E/lllZ 
Feb.  1,   1949.     158  pp.  mimeo. 

Technical  Assistsince  for  Economic  Development.  E/1174. 
Feb.  19.  1949.     10  pp.  mimeo. 

Trusteeship  Council 

Official  Records,  Third  Session.  From  the  First  Meeting 
(10  June  1948)  to  the  Forty-third  Meeting  (5  August 
1948).     XV,  509  pp.     Printed.     $5.50. 

Comments  and  Suggestions  made  at  the  Third  Session 
of  the  General  Assembly.  Fourth  session.  T/230. 
Jan.  12,  1949.     5  pp.  mimeo. 

Administrative  Union :  Comments  and  suggestions  of  the 
General  Assembly.  Fourth  session.  T/231.  Jan.  24, 
1949.     7  pp.  mimeo. 

Administrative  Unions  Affecting  Trust  Territories.  In- 
terim Report  of  the  Committee  on  Administrative 
Unions.     T/203.     JIar.  1,  1949.     26  pp.  mimeo. 


578 


Departmenf  of  State   Bulletin 


THE  UNITED  NATIONS  AND  SPECIALIZED  AGENCIES 


Promotion  of  International  Political  Cooperation 

BY  AMBASSADOR  WARREN  R.  AUSTIN' 


The  General  Assembly  has  before  it  three  speci- 
fic recommendations  of  the  Interim  Committee  and 
the  recommendation  of  the  Ad  Hoc  Political  Com- 
mittee that  a  fourth  recommendation  be  returned 
to  the  Interim  Committee  for  further  study. 
These  recommendations  all  relate  in  a  very  lim- 
ited way  to  that  fundamental  subject  the  promo- 
tion of  international  cooperation  in  the  political 
field  and.  more  particularly,  to  that  area  of  the 
subject  dealing  with  pacific  settlement. 

The  proposed  panel  for  inquiry  or  conciliation  - 
involves  the  establishment  of  a  panel  from  which 
members  of  a  commission  of  inquiry  or  concilia- 
tion could  be  drawn  by  the  Security  Council,  the 
General  Assembly,  or  the  Interim  Committee,  or 
by  any  states  taking  steps  for  the  settlement  of 
their  disputes  outside  of  United  Nations  organs. 
Its  simple  purpose  is  to  provide  assistance  to 
United  Nations  organs  or  to  such  states  in  select- 
ing members  of  commissions.  There  is  no  obliga- 
tion on  the  part  of  any  state  or  any  organ  to  use 
it.  It  is  put  forward  simply  as  a  quick  method 
devised  for  the  fast  moving  world  of  today.  As 
such,  we  hope  it  may  assist  in  the  more  fi-equent 
use  of  inquiry  and  conciliation.  We  feel  that  this 
device  might  also  help  the  parties  to  settle  a  dis- 
pute pursuant  to  their  obligation  under  article  33 
of  the  Charter  before  going  to  United  Nations  or- 
gans. If  there  exists  a  method  for  picking  a  com- 
mission before  any  particular  dispute  between  the 
parties  has  built  up  tension  between  them,  that 
makes  it  easier  for  those  parties  to  agree  upon  the 
creation  of  a  commission.  The  panel  would  be 
a  means  of  having  readily  available  a  list  of  in- 
dividuals of  known  competence  who  would  be 
available  on  short  notice,  and  it  provides  that  per- 
sons designated  would  be  disposed  in  principle  to 
serve.  The  individuals,  members  of  such  a  panel, 
would  in  principle  be  sympathetic  and  receptive  to 
a  call  to  serve  on  a  commission,  but,  of  course,  they 
would  be  under  no  legal  obligation  to  do  so.  The 
plan  is  a  flexible  device  because  it  creates  no  organ 
or  procedure  to  complicate  the  structure  of  the 
United  Nations.  It  would  simply  be  a  registry  of 
available  persons  for  use  by  the  Security  Council, 
the  Assembly,  or  other  United  Nations  organs  and 
would  be  available  at  all  times  to  states  desiring 
to  use  it.  The  experience  of  United  Nations  bodies, 
even  in  the  brief  period  since  the  adoption  of  the 
Charter,  has  shown  the  almost  constant  need  for 
competent  persons  to  serve. 

Another  recommendation  relates  to  the  appoint- 

lAav  8,  7949 


ment  of  a  rapporteur  or  conciliator  at  an  early 
stage  in  the  consideration  of  disputes  brought  to 
the  attention  of  the  Security  Council.  It  recom- 
mends that  the  Council  examine  the  utility  and 
desirability  of  such  a  practice.  It  was  successfully 
used  in  the  Council  of  the  League  of  Nations,  and 
the  Security  Council  has  already  found  it  useful 
in  some  cases.  Here  again,  the  recommendation  is 
flexible  and  involves  no  new  machinery.  My  dele- 
gation thinks  this  is  a  constructive  suggestion, 
worthy  of  the  attention  of  the  Security  Council. 

Finally,  there  is  the  recommendation  to  restore 
full  effect  to  the  General  Act  of  Geneva  of  1928. 
It  was  originally  introduced  in  the  Interim  Com- 
mittee by  Belgium,  which  is  a  party  to  that  treaty, 
and  the  resolution  provides  a  convenient  means  by 
which  those  states  who  have  adhered  to  the  treaty, 
or  may  wish  to  adhere  to  it,  can  accept  a  revised 
act  replacing  League  of  Nations  references  with 
references  to  United  Nations  organs.  The  Gen- 
eral Act  provides  appropriate  means  for  the  par- 
ties to  it  to  fulfil  their  obligation  under  article  33 
of  the  Charter  to  attempt  settlement  of  disputes 
before  bringing  them  to  the  United  Nations.  The 
United  States  is  not  a  party  to  the  General  Act 
but  supports  this  proposal  because  it  will  aid  other 
states  who  are  members  in  rendering  effective 
between  themselves  a  multilateral  pacific  settle- 
ment treaty. 

The  first  purpose  of  the  United  Nations,  as  we 
find  it  stated  in  article  1  of  the  Charter,  is  the 
maintenance  of  international  peace  and  security. 
Certain  methods  are  indicated  for  the  carrying 
out  of  this  purpose  and  included  among  them  are 
international  political  coopei-ation,  including  spe- 
cifically the  peaceful  settlement  of  disputes. 
Throughout  the  Charter  the  roles  of  United  Na- 
tions organs  and  of  the  United  Nations  members 
themselves  are  defined  with  this  first  principle 
uppermost.  With  a  view  to  preserving  peace,  the 
members  and  organs  of  the  United  Nations  have 
their  various  responsibilities  and  duties.  If  force 
is  to  be  eliminated  in  international  relations,  the 
Charter  recognizes  that  we  must  (1)  eliminate  the 
causes  of  war  and  (2)  substitute  other  means  than 
force  for  dealing  with  these  causes.  The  General 
Assembly,  the  Security  Council,  and  the  members 

'  Statement  made  before  the  General  Assembly  in 
New  York  on  Apr.  25,  1949,  and  released  to  the  press 
by  the  U.S.  Mission  to  the  United  Nations  on  the  same 
date. 

'  U.N.  doc.  A/833,  Apr.  12,  1949. 

579 


themselves  all  have  interlocking  responsibilities 
as  part  of  this  single  plan. 

The  role  of  the  General  Assembly  in  its  relation 
to  international  political  cooperation  is  described 
in  articles  10,  11  (1),  13  (la),  14,  and  35  of  the 
Charter.  We  see  from  such  provisions  as  articles 
10  and  14  that  the  General  Assembly  has  even 
greater  flexibility  and  scope  directed  at  removing 
the  causes  of  war  than  has  the  Security  Council. 

There  are  two  principal  ways  in  which  the  As- 
sembly is  concenu'd  with  international  political 
cooperation.  There  is  the  handling  of  actual  dis- 
putes and  related  political  problems  under  article 
14.  The  Assembly  can  discuss  and  subject  to 
article  12  may  lecommend  measures  for  the  peace- 
ful adjustment  of  any  situation,  regardless  of  its 
origin,  which  it  considers  likely  to  impair  the 
general  welfare  of  friendly  relations  among  na- 
tions, including  situations  resulting  from  a  viola- 
tion of  the  provisions  of  the  Charter.  Article  14 
is  broad  in  scope  and  in  the  extent  of  authority  it 
entrusts  to  the  Assembly.  It  is  reasonable  and 
proper  that  tlie  (leneral  Assembly  should  use  these 
powers.  In  situations  where  action  by  the  Security 
Council  is  impossible  by  reason  of  the  veto,  it  is 
all  the  more  natural  to  expect  that  article  14  would 
be  relied  upon. 

Another  area  in  which  the  Assembly  has  re- 
sponsibilities is  in  the  broad  study  and  formulation 
of  recommendations  in  the  field  of  international 
political  coopei'ation.  I  understand  that  the  In- 
terim Committee  is  planning,  when  this  session  ad- 
journs, to  examine  in  some  detail  the  role  of  the 
Assembly  in  pacific  settlement,  and  I  would  expect 
that  in  this  connection  it  would  consider  the.se 
principles  which  I  have  mentioned.  Parentheti- 
cally, one  of  the  specific  recommendations  before 
us  is  that  two  proposed  amendments  to  the  Rules 
of  Procedure  of  the  General  Assembly  be  recom- 
mitted to  the  Interim  Committee  for  further  con- 
sideration in  connection  with  this  study.  My  gov- 
ernment made  this  reconunendation,  feeling  that 
it  would  be  useful  not  to  suggest  one  or  two  amend- 
ments to  the  Rules  of  Procedure  at  this  time  but 
to  await  the  wider  consideration  of  the  Interim 
Committee. 

But  these  articles  of  the  Charter  describing  the 
role  of  the  General  Assembly  are  not  drafted  in 
such  a  way  that  the  responsibilities  of  the  As- 
sembly are  defined  and  set  out  in  complete  detail. 
That  IS  not  the  way  in  which  constitutional  docu- 
ments are  drafted.  There  is  a  place  for  constru- 
ing our  Charter  to  give  it  vitality  and  effectiveness 
in  carrying  out  the  purjjose  for  which  the  entire 
organization  was  created — and  that  is  peace. 
There  is  only  one  answer  to  the  claim  that  the 
General  Assembly  is  violating  either  the  letter  or 
the  spirit  of  the  Ciiarter  by  acting  in  the  pacific 
settlement  of  disputes  or  by  studying,  recommend- 
ing, and  synthesizing  the  experience  of  the  United 
Nations.  These  activities  lay  foundations  for 
peace. 


We  all  recognize  that  the  Security  Council  has 
the  primary  duty  of  maintaining  international 
jjeace  and  security,  but  it  would  be  misreading  the 
Charter  to  conclude  that  it  has  the  only  such  re- 
sponsibility. Article  35  indicates  that  this  is  not 
the  fact.  The  Assembly  has  recently  had  occa- 
sion to  consider  the  effectiveness  of  the  Security 
Council  to  fulfil  its  proper  function  in  the  light  of 
the  study  of  the  veto  by  the  Interim  Committee. 
It  is  certainly  not  the  plan  of  the  Charter  that 
every  dispute  between  members  of  the  United  Na- 
tions shall  at  the  earliest  possible  moment  find  its 
wav  before  the  Security  Council. 

All  members  of  the  United  Nations  are  obli- 
gated under  article  2  to  settle  their  international 
disputes  by  peaceful  means  and  to  refrain  in  their 
international  relations  from  the  threat  or  use  of 
force.  They  are  also  under  a  duty  under  the 
language  of  article  33  when  parties  to  any  dispute 
the  continuance  of  which  is  likely  to  endanger  the 
maintenance  of  international  peace  and  security, 
first  of  all,  to  seek  a  solution  by  one  of  the  well 
understood  methods  of  pacific  settlement,  such  as 
negotiation,  inquiry,  conciliation,  and  the  rest. 
There  is,  therefore,  an  obligation  on  the  part  of 
members  not  to  take  to  the  Security  Council  a  dis- 
pute of  this  character  unless  and  until  they  have 
made  a  previous  effort  to  settle  it.  This  is  one  of 
the  great  general  principles  of  international  co- 
operation, that  all  international  disputes  should 
j)r()inptly  be  settled  by  the  parties  by  peaceful 
means  in  conformity  with  the  principles  of  justice 
and  international  law. 

This  is  entirely  consistent  with  the  responsi- 
bility of  the  Security  Council  and  of  the  General 
Assembly.  It  recognizes  that  many  disputes  may 
lend  tliemselves  to  settlement  in  their  early  stages 
by  methods  agreed  upon  by  the  parties,  often  of 
an  informal  nature.  Two  of  the  three  recommen- 
dations now  before  us  relate  to  this  obligation  of 
members  under  article  33. 

The  principle  of  article  33  that  the  parties  shall 
fii-st  of  all  try  to  help  themselves  simply  under- 
lines tlic  importance  and  seriousness  of  recourse  to 
tlie  Security  Council  or  the  General  Assembly. 
Tiiis  is  an  application  of  the  principle  of  substi- 
tuting pacific  settlement  for  force  in  the  organiza- 
tion of  tlie  peace.  No  member  of  the  Security 
Council,  and  certainly  no  permanent  member,  un- 
der the  provisions  of  the  Charter,  should  be  heard 
to  claim  a  voice  in  the  settlement  of  a  dispute 
which  the  parties  can  work  out  themselves  before 
it  may  develop  in  seriousness  so  as  to  be  a  threat 
to  tlie  international  community.  A  student  of  the 
Ciiarter  would  seek  in  vain  for  any  such  power  in 
the  Security  Council.  The  demand  of  a  member 
of  the  Security  Council  to  have  such  a  voice,  and 
particularly  a  deciding  voice,  by  virtue  of  the 
veto,  as  to  the  settlement  of  all  disputes  could 
only  confirm  the  suspicion  that  a  motive  is  present 
other  than  the  seeking  of  a  soimd  organization  of 
peace. 

Department  of  State   Bulletin 


A  true  picture  of  how  the  United  Nations 
operates  in  the  pacific  settlement  of  disputes  can 
only  be  seen  by  looking  at  those  interrelated  func- 
tions of  the  General  Assembly  with  its  broad  re- 
sponsibilities, the  Security  Council  with  its  wide 
powers,  and  all  the  members  of  the  United  Nations 
with  their  duties  assumed  upon  ratifying  the 
Charter. 

Let  us  now  consider  the  task  which  was  en- 
trusted to  the  Interim  Committee  as  a  subsidiary 
organ  of  the  General  Assembly  to  undertake  its 
duties  under  articles  11  (1)  and  13  (la)  of  the 
Charter.  An  important  function  of  the  General 
Assembly  which  was  so  delegated  is  to  initiate 
studies  and  to  make  recommendations  to  promote 
international  cooperation  in  the  political  field. 
The  Security  Council  and  the  Assembly  are  politi- 
cal organs  and  instruments  of  action.  But  there 
is  the  duty  of  the  Assembly  under  article  13  (la) 
to  reflect  on  this  action,  m  the  form  of  its  ex- 
perience, and  perhaps  to  synthesize  it.  An  Ameri- 
can philosopher  has  observed  that  man's  thoughts 
spring  from  his  actions  rather  than  his  actions 
from  his  thoughts.  A  corollary  of  that  might  be 
that  those  of  us  who  are  immersed  in  action  can 
guide  it  by  taking  thought.  The  function  of  the 
General  Assembly  to  analyze  the  actions  of  United 
Nations  organs  is  both  proper  and  necessary.  It 
is  carrying  out  the  role  of  the  General  Assembly. 
AVithin  tlie  last  few  daj'S  we  have  seen  the  In- 
ternational Law  Commission  undertake  its  cor- 
responding duties  under  anotlier  clause  of  this 
same  article  of  the  Charter.  Where,  I  would  ask, 
can  any  member  of  the  United  Nations  find  in 
this  work  a  studied  attempt  to  bypass  the  Security 
Council?  "\^^lere  can  it  find  any  more  than  a 
beginning,  at  a  rather  late  date  and  on  a  very 
limited  scale,  of  the  duty  of  the  General  Assembly 
to  initiate  tliese  studies  and  make  recommenda- 
tions ? 

The  work  which  the  Interim  Committee  has 
thus  far  been  able  to  accomplish  has  been  of  two 
kinds.  In  the  first  place  it  has  planned  a  long- 
range  study  of  this  field,  which  will  probably  be 
before  the  General  Assembly  at  its  fourth  session 


but  which  is  not  before  us  today.  It  has  also  pre- 
sented to  the  Assembly  the  four  specific  proposals, 
three  of  which  are  before  us,  with  the  recommen- 
dation that  the  fourth  be  returned  for  further  con- 
sideration. One  of  them  is  a  suggestion  to  the 
Security  Council.  Another  suggests  simply  a 
means  for  picking  members  of  commissions  which 
the  Security  Council,  the  General  Assembly,  or 
any  states  outside  of  United  Nations  organs  might 
in  their  discretion  employ.  The  third  would  re- 
place references  to  League  of  Nations  organs  in 
the  General  Act  of  Geneva  of  1928  with  references 
to  United  Nations  organs.  They  are  three  pro- 
cedural suggestions  involving  no  substantive  obli- 
gation upon  members  of  the  United  Nations,  and 
all  intended  simply  as  technical  aids  for  pacific 
settlement  procedures. 

I  wish  that  the  representative  of  the  Soviet 
Union  might  have  occupied  his  chair  in  the  In- 
terim Committee  so  that  he  could  sense  the  spirit 
in  which  proposals  are  made  and  debated  with  the 
intention  of  trying  to  improve  United  Nations  pro- 
cedures by  practical  and  objective  study  of  their 
operation.  He  would  have  observed  how  in  the 
Interim  Committee  the  judgment  of  all  the  mem- 
bers who  have  seen  fit  to  take  their  seats  has  been 
brought  to  bear  on  these  questions,  not  with  a  view 
to  bypassing  the  Security  Council  but  with  the  idea 
of  looking  beyond  the  immediate  dispute  to  ways 
and  means  of  developing  Charter  potentialities 
and  handling  international  political  problems  in 
all  organs.  In  other  words,  he  would  have  seen 
that  vast  resource  of  spiritual  and  intellectual 
power  that  exists  in  cooperation  in  a  voluntary 
association  by  this  great  number  of  nations  repre- 
senting the  interests,  the  ideals  and  the  aspirations 
of  the  world. 

The  United  States  will  vote  in  favor  of  the 
four  specific  recommendations  of  the  Ad  Hoc 
Political  Committee.  The  Interim  Committee,  in 
undertaking  the  work  of  studying  and  making 
recommendations  in  the  field  of  international 
political  cooperation,  is  exercising  a  duty  of  the 
General  Assembly  to  seek  constantly  for  the  real- 
ization of  the  Charter  as  an  instrument  for  peace 
and  justice. 


Reply  to  the  U.S.S.R.  Regarding  the  Italian  Colonies 


STATEMENT  BY  JOHN  FOSTER  DULLES' 
U.S.  Delegate  to  the  General  Assembly 


We  are  all  here  to  try  to  find  a  constructive  so- 
lution to  a  very  difficult  problem.  Wlrether  or 
not  the  prolongation  of  the  general  debate  by  the 
honorable  delegate  of  the  Soviet  Union  promotes 
that  result  may  pei-haps  be  questionable,  but  I 
do  feel  that  I  should  make  some  comment  upon 
some  of  his  remarks. 

In  the  first  place,  I  would  like  to  say  that  in  my 

May  8,   7949 


opinion  the  fact  that  this  problem  is  here  before 
the  United  Nations  Assembly  in  itself  attests  to  a 
desire  on  the  part  of,  particularly,  the  United 
Kingdom  and  of  the  United  States  and  of  the 


'Made  in  Committee  I  (Political  and  Security)  of  the 
General  Assembly  on  Apr.  23,  1949,  and  released  to  the 
press  by  the  U.S.  Mission  to  the  United  Nations  on  the 
same  date. 

581 


members  of  the  British  Commonwealth  to  seek  an 
international  solution,  and  it  evidences  that  to  a 
far  greater  dejn'ee  than  has  been  evidenced  by  any 
other  of  the  victors  in  the  World  War.  It  was 
the  forces  of  the  United  Kingdom  and  the  Com- 
monwealth, and.  latterly,  United  States  forces  in 
North  Africa,  which  cleared  the  enemy  from  these 
areas  in  North  Africa.  If  we  had  followed  the  ex- 
ample which  was  set  by  other  of  the  victors,  we 
would  have  settled  this  matter  ourselves.  There 
is  no  area  tliat  the  Soviet  Union  conquered  in  the 
world  which  lias  l)een  brouglit  in  any  aspect  what- 
ever before  the  United  Nations  for  decision.  In 
ever}'  such  area  the  Soviet  Union  has  taken  the 
position  that  because  it  conquered  the  area,  it,  and 
it  alone,  is  entitled  to  make  the  solution.  And 
there  is  a  certain  contrast,  Mr.  Chairman,  I  be- 
lieve, between  the  conduct  of  those  nations  who 
conquered  these  areas  and  freed  them  from  the 
enemy  and  liberated  them  and  the  conduct  of  cer- 
tain others  who  are  now  here  criticizing  us  because 
this  problem  is  here  for  an  international  solution, 
which  under  comparable  situations  they  bitterly 
and  utterly  reject  for  themselves. 

When  the  Soviet  Union  comes  here  to  get  inter- 
national judgment  upon  the  areas  which  it  took 
over,  say,  in  the  Far  East,  the  Kuriles  Islands, 
Port  Arthur,  Dairen,  etc.,  then  we  can  hear  it,  with 

food  grace  perhaps,  criticize  those  who  have 
rought  this  problem,  the  fruit  of  their  victory,  to 
the  United  Nations  for  international  solution. 
Until  then,  I  would  think  it  was  better  grace  on 
their  part  to  keep  more  silent. 

Now,  Mr.  Chairman,  the  honorable  delegate 
of  the  Soviet  Union  made  reference  to  two  state- 
ments which  I  made  in  my  opening  presentation. 
One  of  them  was  that  I  recalled  the  fact  that  under 
the  Charter  of  the  United  Nations  it  is  provided 
that  under  the  trusteeship  system  one  of  the  ob- 
jectives and  purposes  to  be  served  is  tlaat  the  area 
should  play  its  part  in  the  maintenance  of  inter- 
national peace  and  security.  I  said  in  my  speech, 
and  I  quote,  "the  relevancy  of  this  area  to  inter- 
national peace  and  security  cannot  be  ignored." 
The  honorable  delegate  of  the  Soviet  Union  seems 
to  resent  that  in  regard  to  tliis  area  which  we  now 
have  brought  here  to  this  United  Nations  for  in- 
ternational solution  we  should  even  mention  the 
fact  that  it  historically  has  involved  international 
peace  and  socui-ity,  and  those  involve  considera- 
tion which  both  under  the  Charter  and  historically 
are  properly  before  us.  It  is  quite  true  that  the 
Soviet  troops  did  not  fight  in  this  area.  If  they 
had — if  they  had  undergone  what  some  of  their 
allies  had  to  undergo  in  this  area — I  am  quite  con- 
fident that  they  would  not  have  resented  a  refer- 
ence to  international  peace  and  security  as  being 
a  factor  which  in  this  case  properly  is  taken  into 
account. 

It  was  also  said,  Mr.  Chairman,  that  I  had  been 
eulogistic  in  my  praise  of  the  United  Kingdom.  I 
said  this  about  the  United  Kingdom :  "The  United 
Kingdom  has  given  ample  evidence  not  merely 


by  word  but  by  deed  that  it  genuinelv  believes  in 
the  principle  of  developing  non-self-governing 
areas  so  as  to  make  them  independent."  It  was 
tliat — and  that  alone — which  I  said  in  eulogy  of 
the  United  Kingdom,  although  I  think  I  might 
have  said  much  more. 

"Wliat  is  the  fact,  Mr.  Chairman?  Tlie  fact  is 
that  around  this  table  today  there  sit  ten  member 
nations  who  can  by  their  presence  here  attest  to 
the  reality  of  that  fact.  There  would  be  two  more, 
Eire  and  Ceylon,  if  it  were  not  for  the  veto  which 
was  exercised  against  them  by  the  Soviet  Union. 
And  there  would  be  ten  more,  also  membei-s,  sit- 
ting around  this  table  if  they  had  not  been  swal- 
lowed up  in  the  maw  of  the  "Soviet  Union.  If  in 
considering  these  areas  the  record  of  one  country 
or  another  in  actually  bringing  independence  to 
(lejiendent  peoples  is  to  be  taken  into  account,  then 
again  I  say  the  record  is  such  that  I  would  have 
thought  it  was  wiser  for  the  honorable  delegate  of 
the  Soviet  Union  to  have  kept  silent.  I  said 
nothing,  Mr.  Chairman,  about  the  actual  condi- 
tions at  present  in  these  territories  under  military 
administration,  and  I  am  quite  prepared  to  admit 
that  a  military  administration  which  has  no  defi- 
nite term  of  existence,  which  does  not  permit  a 
civil  administration  or  long-term  planning,  is  not 
a  situation  which  is  in  the  best  interest  of  the 
populations  concerned  and  ought  to  be  ended  be- 
ciuise  only  with  the  possibility  of  long-range  plan- 
ning is  it  possible  to  improve  the  conditions  of 
these  people.  To  judge  the  possibilities  of  a  long- 
range  civil  administration  in  terms  of  a  military 
administration  which  is  subject  to  being  terminated 
at  any  time  is,  I  submit,  Mr.  Chairman,  to  make 
a  very  unfair  comparison.  We  are  eager,  and  I 
am  quite  confident  that  the  United  Kingdom, 
which  is  in  actual  administration,  is  eager  to  bring 
about  as  quickly  as  possible  conditions  which  wiU 
permit  of  long-range  civilian  planning  for  the 
benefit  of  the  inhabitants  of  these  areas. 

Now,  the  honorable  delegate  of  the  Soviet  Union 
comes  back  to  his  suggestion  for  administration 
of  this  area  by  the  Trusteeship  Council  and  he 
says  that  there  are  not  really  any  practical  diffi- 
culties there  involved  and  that  he  does  not  think 
that  it  will  cost  anything  to  operate  these  terri- 
tories. Well,  again  I  can  understand  how  he 
comes  to  that  conclusion  because  I  am  quite  sure 
that  in  the  areas  which  are  occupied  by  the  Soviet 
Union  it  does  not  cost  them  anything. '  Tliat,  how- 
ever, is  not  the  way  in  which  some  countries  op- 
erate and  when  they  are  in  such  ai-eas  it  is  not  their 
practice  to  try  and  squeeze  out  of  these  areas  the 
last  drop  that  is  possible.  It  is  our  effort  to  try 
to  build  up  these  areas,  and  that  is  a  costly  opera- 
tion— although  again  I  can  understand  that  the 
honorable  delegate  of  the  Soviet  Union  does  not 
have  the  experience  to  appreciate  it.  The  United 
States  has  put  some  6  billion  dollars  a  year  into 
the  European  Recovery  Program.  We  had  hoped 
that  it  would  be  possible  under  such  administration 
as  this  organization  decides  upon  to  do  something 

Deparlmenf  of  State  Bulletin 


to  build  up  the  areas  here  in  question.  Even  aside 
from  tliat  the  cost  of  administration  is  bound  to 
be  very  considerable.  I  do  not  have  available 
the  precise  estimates  which  we  have,  but  roughly 
speaking  I  can  say  that  we  figure  that,  even  apart 
from  what  you  might  call  constructive  expendi- 
tures, just  in  terms  of  the  administration  of  the 
government,  that  for  the  United  Nations  to  take 
this  on  would  involve  at  once  a  probable  doubling 
of  the  present  budget  of  the  United  Nations,  a 
cost  of  somewhere  around  40  million  dollars. 

The  United  Nations,  as  I  think  we  all  appreciate 
or  should  appreciate,  is  not  in  a  position  to  con- 
duct an  economical  administration.  At  the  pres- 
ent time,  we  have  no  civil  service  in  being.  We  are 
not  in  a  position,  as  governinents  are,  to  instruct 
their  civil  servants  to  take  a  tour  of  duty  in  these 
areas  where  conditions  are  not  at  the  present  time, 
I  am  prepared  to  admit,  very  attractive  from  the 
standpoint  of  climate  and  living  conditions.  For 
the  United  Nations  to  go  out  and  bid  for  persons 
to  take  those  jobs  on,  would  be  an  extremely  ex- 
pensive operation,  and  it  would  be  foolish  on  our 
part  to  ignore  that  fact.  In  these  matters,  how- 
ever, I  hesitate  to  put  the  primary  emphasis  on 
what  it  would  cost.  If  it  is  the  right  thing  to  do, 
and  if  it  would  probably  work,  we  should  be  will- 
ing to  try  it  even  if  it  does  involve  doubling  or 
tripling  the  budget  and  the  contributions  of  the 
members  of  the  United  Nations. 

We  ourselves  at  the  beginning,  Mr.  Chairman, 
had  suggested  a  far  greater  international  solution 
than  we  are  now  suggesting.  The  reason  why  we 
have  felt  compelled  to  drop  our  sights  in  that  re- 
spect is  not  wholly  or  even  primarily  a  matter  of 
the  cost.  Since  our  original  proposals  were  made 
in  London  in  1945,  unfortunately  the  fact  is  that 
the  different  organs  of  the  United  Nations  have 
become  a  battle  ground  between  two  different 
points  of  view.  It  has  been  demonstrated  that 
at  least  one  of  the  points  of  view  is  that  of  at- 
tempting to  demonstrate  that  nothing  constructive 
can  be  done  under  any  form  of  society  other  than 
that  of  Communism,  and  the  purpose,  therefore, 
must  be  to  cause  a  failure  of  efforts  which  are 
made  other  than  under  the  auspices  of  a  Com- 
munist government.  And  we  have  seen  in  many 
different  areas  of  the  world  the  effort  to  demon- 
strate that  a  non-Communist  society  is  bound  to 
fail,  by  disrupting  it,  by  strikes,  sabotage,  threats 
of  civil  war  or  actual  civil  war ;  and,  on  the  other 
hand,  in  the  effort  which  the  United  States  initi- 
ated and  which  it  has  been  carrying  on  now  in 
conjunction  with  the  participating  European 
countries  under  the  Marshall  Plan.  One  of  the 
great  problems  we  have  to  face  is  the  fact  that  it 
becomes  a  very  costly  operation  because  some  na- 
tions are  unwilling  to  participate  in  it — not  only 
are  unwilling  to  participate  in  it,  but  are  posi- 
tively exerting  themselves,  at  great  expense  and 
effort,  to  prevent  that  effort  at  European  recovery. 
Is  it  right  and  is  it  proper,  I  wonder,  Mr.  Chair- 
man, to  entrust  these  colonial  peoples  to  an  or- 

May  8,   7949 


ganization  which  is  divided  and  in  which  there  are 
powerful  elements  which  want  to  see  the  failure 
of  efforts  such  as  are  being  made  now  in  Western 
Europe  and  such  as  we  hope  can  also  be  made  in 
North  Africa?  If  we  want  a  constructive  effort 
in  North  Africa,  shouldn't  it  be  entrusted  to  those 
who  believe  it  can  succeed  ?  Or  should  we  bring 
into  partnership  in  that  effort  those  who  are  com- 
mitted to  cause  a  failure  of  that  particvilar  kind 
of  effort,  as  they  have  demonstrated  in  almost 
every  quarter  of  the  woi-ld  ? 

And  that,  Mr.  Chairman,  is,  above  all,  the  reason 
why  the  United  States  now  believes  that  it  is  im- 
practical to  entrust  the  colonies  to  an  international 
organization  which  would  contain  within  it  ele- 
ments wlrich  are  dedicated  to  proving  that  only 
a  Communist  form  of  society  can  succeed  in  the 
world. 

Now  as  to  the  responsibility  for  the  delay  in 
this  matter.  I  was  in  London  when  this  matter 
first  came  up  in  September  1945,  with  Secretary 
Byrnes,  and  at  that  meeting  of  the  Foreign  Minis- 
ters, Mr.  Molotov  represented  the  Soviet  Union. 
The  matter  could  have  been  settled  at  that  time. 
Mr.  Chairman,  nearly  four  years  ago,  if  it  had 
not  been  for  the  attitude  then  taken  by  the  honor- 
able Minister  for  Foreign  Affairs  of  the  Soviet 
Union.  The  United  States  made  a  proposal  which 
was  accepted  definitively  by  three  of  the  five  mem- 
bers of  the  Council,  accepted  in  principle  by  a 
fourth,  and  rejected  outright  only  by  the  fifth 
member,  the  Soviet  Union,  which  then  insisted 
that  it  must  have  Tripolitania  for  itself.  And  it 
was  that  action  by  the  Soviet  Union  at  the  first 
meeting  of  the  Council  of  Foreign  Ministers  that 
made  it  impossible  at  that  tune  to  get  this  matter 
settled. 

I  reject,  Mr.  Chairman,  the  suggestion  that  it 
has  been  the  United  States  and  the  United  King- 
dom which  have  constantly  tried  to  prevent  a 
solution  of  this  problem.  On  the  contrary,  we  have 
sought  it,  and  sought  it  earnestly,  and,  as  I  say,  as 
a  result  of  our  efforts  it  would  have  been  settled 
nearly  four  years  ago  if  it  had  not  been  for  the 
ambition  of  the  Soviet  Union  to  have  a  base  in 
the  Mediterranean.  I  recall  that  the  Soviet  Union, 
in  anticipation  of  the  elections  in  Italy  last  year, 
took  a  position  in  favor  of  Italy  which,  it  it  were 
maintained  today,  might  be  a  constructive  contri- 
bution toward  a  solution.  But  after  that  position 
had  served  the  purposes  of  the  election  and  the 
election  had  been  lost,  then  a  different  position  was 
taken  which  now  makes  it  even  more  difficult  to 
arrive  at  a  solution. 

I  am  confident  that  the  members  of  this  Commit- 
tee, before  deliberations  are  over,  will  realize  that 
the  United  States  Delegation  at  least — and  I  am 
sure  others — are  trying  constructively,  with  an 
open  mind  toward  the  views  of  everybody  aroimd 
this  table,  to  arrive  at  a  positive  solution.  I  am 
confident  of  the  verdict  of  this  Committee  as  to 
who  is  trying  to  promote  and  who  is  trying  to 
obstruct  a  solution  to  this  question. 


The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations 


[April  30-May  G] 

Spanish  Question 

Dubate  upL'iied  May  5  in  the  Political  Commit- 
tee of  the  General  Assembly  on  the  question  of 
Franco  Spain,  with  Poland  denouncing  the  United 
States  and  Brazil  submitting  a  proposal  to  leave 
members  full  freedom  of  action  in  their  diplo- 
matic relations  with  Spain.  The  following  day 
Poland  introduced  a  lengthy  resolution  recalling 
earlier  condemnations  of  tlie  Franco  Government 
and  recommending  that  all  U.N.  members  "cease 
to  export  to  Spain"  arms,  ammunition,  and  all 
warlike  and  strategic  material,  as  well  as  to  re- 
frain from  entering  into  any  agreements  either 
formally  or  (fe  facto  with  Spain.  Polish  Repre- 
sentative Kat/.-Suchy  described  Franco's  exist- 
ence as  a  threat  to  the  peace. 

The  United  States  has  not  participated  in  the 
general  debate  to  date,  but  discussion  on  the  ques- 
tion is  continuing. 

Israeli  Application  for  Membership 

The  Ad  Hoc  Political  Committee  of  the  General 
Assembly  opened  discussion  Maj'  3  on  Israel's 
application  for  membership  in  the  United  Nations, 
the  item  having  been  transferred  to  it  from  the 
crowded  agenda  of  the  regular  Political  Com- 
mittee. 

A  Lebanese  proposal  would  postpone  admission 
of  Israel  until  the  latter  had  accepted  in  principle 
the  internationalization  of  Jerusalem  and  the  res- 
toration of  Arab  refugees  to  their  homes.  Argen- 
tina proposed  that  the  Vatican  be  invited  to  pre- 
sent a  report  on  what  it  considered  necessary 
guarantees  for  preservation  of  the  holy  places  in 
.Jerusalem.  An  Iraqi  resolution  which  questioned 
the  legality  of  tlie  Security  Council  vote  recom- 
mending the  admission  of  Israel,  since  the  United 
Kingdom  abstained,  was  later  withdrawn. 

Following  an  invitation  extended  by  the  Com- 
mittee, Israeli  Representative  Eban  in  a  2-hour 
statement  on  May  5  described  Israel's  position  on 
the  internationalization  of  Jerusalem,  resettlement 
of  Arab  refugees,  and  the  Bernadotte  assassina- 
tion. Israel  would  support  "establishment  by  the 
United  Nations  of  an  international  regime  for 
Jerusalem  concerned  exclusively  with  control  and 
protection  of  holy  places,"  he  emphasized.  He 
stated  that  no  solution  to  the  problem  of  Arab 
refugees  was  possible  before  a  "final  and  effective 
peace  settlement"  resulted  from  the  Lausanne 
meetings  now  taking  place  between  the  Palestine 
Conciliation  Commission  and  Arab  and  Israeli 
representatives.     Mr.    Eban,    though    admitting 


failure  of  the  Israeli  Government  to  find  the 
mediator's  assassins,  felt  the  failure  should  be  con- 
sidered against  the  background  of  a  country  forced 
to  protect  itself  against  aggression  from  without 
and  an  "intractable  dissident  military  organiza- 
tion'' from  within. 


Italian  Colonies 

Witli  general  debate  on  the  disposition  of  the 
former  Italian  colonies  completed,  four  specific 
resolutions  were  submitted  to  the  Political  Com- 
mittee during  the  week. 

U.S.  Delegate,  John  Foster  Dulles,  supported  a 
resolution  introduced  by  U.K.  Delegate,  Hector 
McNeil,  calling  for  possible  independence  of  Libya 
in  10  years  and  U.K.  administration  of  an  interim 
trusteeship  over  Cyrenaica.  It  also  recommended 
tliat  Egj'pt,  France.  Italy,  United  Kingdom,  and 
United  States  submit  proposals  to  the  fourth  ses- 
sion of  the  Assembly  on  interim  trusteeships  over 
the  rest  of  Libj'a,  incorporation  of  Eritrea  into 
Ethiopia  and  the  Sudan,  and  Italian  trusteeship 
over  Somaliland.  Mr.  Dulles  stated  that  such  a 
decision  would  not  be  perfect  but  would  be  the  best 
solution  of  a  colonial  problem  the  world  has  yet 
seen.  This  U.K.  formula  met  with  considerable 
opposition. 

Eighteen  Latin  American  states  are  supporting 
a  resolution  introduced  by  Mexico  which  would 
request  Egypt,  France,  Italy,  the  United  King- 
dom, and  the  United  States  "to  consider  the  terms 
and  conditions  under  which  Libya  might  be  placed 
under  the  international  trusteeship  system. 
Ethiopia.  France,  Italy,  United  Kingdom,  and 
United  States  would  be  commissioned  to  perform 
the  same  task  with  respect  to  Somaliland,  while 
the.se  same  countries  would  be  asked  to  make 
studies  and  recommendations  concerning  the  fu- 
ture of  Eritrea." 

The  Australian  proposal  called  for  the  estab- 
lishment of  a  7-member  special  committee  to  ex- 
amine unresolved  aspects  of  the  Italian  colonies 
question  and  report  to  the  Secretary-General  not 
later  than  September  1,  1949. 

An  Iranian  resolution  recommended  placing 
Libya  and  Somaliland  under  the  trusteeship  sys- 
tem and  provided  for  the  appointment  of  a  special 
commission  to  ascertain  the  wishes  of  the  Eritrean 
people. 

At  the  request  of  U.S.S.R.  Delegate,  Andrei 
Gromyko,  vote  on  the  four  I'esolutions  was  de- 
ferred until  May  9. 

Department  of  Slate  Bulletin 


The  Current  Situation  In  Germany 


THE  RECORD  OF  THE  WEEK 


ADDRESS  BY  SECRETARY  ACHESON > 

In  considering  a  suitable  subject  for  this  occa- 
sion, I  naturally  supposed  that  the  newspaper 
publishers  of  the  nation  would  expect  me  to  choose 
a  topic  having  some  news  value.  I,  therefore, 
decided  that  it  might  be  timely  for  me  to  speak 
on  United  States  policy  with  respect  to  Germany. 
But  I  must  confess  that  I  did  not  then  foresee  just 
how  prominently  Germany  would  figure  in  the 
news  at  this  precise  time. 

The  conversations  between  Ambassador  Jessup 
and  Mr.  Malik,  which  were  reported  in  the  state- 
ment issued  a  few  days  ago,  constitute  the  latest 
development  in  a  long  and  involved  series  of  devel- 
opments affecting  Germany  since  the  beginning  of 
the  occupation.  I  think  you  may  be  interested 
in  the  relation  of  these  developments  to  the  broad 
aspects  of  the  German  problem  and  the  efforts 
of  the  United  States  Government  to  deal  with  it. 

Early  this  month  I  met  with  the  Foreign 
Ministers  of  France  and  the  United  Kingdom  for 
talks  on  Germany,  the  outcome  of  which  we  all 
regarded  as  momentous.  It  was  not  by  mere 
coincidence  that  these  agreements  were  initialed 
during  the  week  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  was 
signed.  That  historic  instrument  marks  a  deci- 
sive step  toward  the  creation  of  a  community  of 
democratic  nations  dedicated  to  the  attainment 
of  peace  and  determined  to  insure  its  preserva- 
tion by  all  the  material  and  moral  means  at  their 
disposal. 

The  German  problem  cannot  be  disassociated 
from  the  general  problem  of  assuring  security  for 
the  free  nations.  No  approach  to  German  prob- 
lems can  be  adequate  which  deals  only  with  Ger- 
many itself  and  ignores  the  question  of  its  relation- 
ship to  the  other  nations  of  Europe.  The 
objectives  of  United  States  policy  toward  the 
German  people  are  interwoven  with  our  interest 
in,  and  our  policies  toward,  the  other  peoples  of 
Europe.  Here  the  basic  considerations  are  the 
same  whether  they  can  extend  to  all  of  Germany 
or  must  be  limited  to  Western  Germany. 

We  have  made  clear  our  desire  to  aid  the  free 
peoples  of  Europe  in  their  efforts  toward  re- 
covery and  reconstruction.  We  have  made  clear 
our  policy  to  aid  them  in  their  efforts  to  establish 
a  common  structure  of  new  economic  and  political 
relationships.  To  these  ends,  we  are  providing 
temporary  economic  assistance  through  the  Euro- 
pean Kecovery  Program  and  are  proposing  to  par- 
ticipate with  them  in  our  common  defense  through 
the  North  Atlantic  pact. 

May  8,    J 949 


In  this  setting,  it  is  the  ultimate  objective  of 
the  United  States  that  the  German  people,  or  as 
large  a  part  of  them  as  possible,  be  integrated  into 
a  new  common  structure  of  the  free  peoples  of 
Europe.  We  hope  that  the  Germans  will  share 
in  due  time  as  equals  in  the  obligations,  the  eco- 
nomic benefits,  and  the  security  of  the  structure 
which  has  been  begun  by  the  free  peoples  of 
Europe. 

We  recognize  that  the  form  and  pace  of  this  de- 
velopment are  predominantly  matters  for  deter- 
mination by  the  Europeans  themselves.  We  also 
recognize  that  effective  integration  of  the  German 
people  will  depend  upon  reciprocal  willingness 
and  upon  their  belief  in  the  long-range  economic 
benefits  and  the  greater  security  for  all  which  will 
accrue  from  a  joint  effort. 

The  maintenance  of  restrictions  and  controls 
over  the  Germany  economy  and  a  German  state, 
even  for  a  protracted  period,  cannot  alone  guar- 
antee the  West  against  the  possible  revival  of  a 
German  threat  to  the  peace.  In  the  long  run,  se- 
curity can  be  insured  only  if  there  are  set  in  motion 
in  Germany  those  forces  which  will  create  a  gov- 
ernmental system  dedicated  to  upholding  the  basic 
human  freedoms  through  democratic  procedures. 
These  constructive  forces  can  derive  their 
strength  only  from  the  renewed  vitality  of  the 
finer  elements  of  the  German  cultural  tradition. 
They  can  flourish  only  if  the  German  economy  can 
provide  sustenance  and  hope  for  the  German 
people.  They  can  attain  their  greatest  effective- 
ness only  through  a  radically  new  reciprocal  ap- 
proach by  the  German  people  and  the  other 
peoples  of  Europe.  This  approach  must  be  based 
on  common  understanding  of  the  mutual  benefits 
to  be  derived  from  the  voluntaiy  cooperative  ef- 
fort of  the  European  community  as  a  whole. 

Through  all  of  this  effort,  our  basic  aim  with 
respect  to  the  Germans  themselves  has  been  to 
help  them  make  the  indispensable  adjustments  to 
which  I  have  just  referred.  We  have  tried  to  help 
them  to  find  the  way  toward  a  reorganization  of 
their  national  life  which  would  permit  them  to 
make  the  great  contribution  to  world  progress 
which  they  are  unquestionably  capable  of  making. 
But  it  is  important  for  us  all  to  remember  that  no 
one  but  the  Germans  themselves  can  make  this  ad- 


'  Made  before  the  American  Society  of  Newspaper 
Publishers  in  New  Yorii  on  Apr.  28,  1949,  and  released 
to  the  press  on  the  same  date.  The  address  was  broadcast 
over  the  major  national  networks. 

585 


justment.  Even  the  wisest  occupation  policy 
could  not  make  it  for  them.  It  must  stem  from 
them.  It  must  be  a  product  of  their  own  will 
and  their  own  s])irit.  All  that  others  can  do  is  to 
help  to  provide  the  framework  in  which  it  may  be 
made. 

These  are  the  conditions  we  consider  essential 
for  the  long-term  solution  of  the  German  problem. 
The  purpose  of  the  Washington  agreements,  and 
of  the  other  decisions  taken  by  the  Western 
Powers,  is  to  bring  about  these  required  conditions 
at  the  earliest  practicable  time.  This  has  been 
the  consistent  purpose  of  the  United  States 
Government. 

This  Government  made  earnest  efforts  for  two 
and  a  half  years  after  the  war  to  resolve  the  major 
issues  arising  from  the  defeat  of  German}'  and 
to  achieve  a  general  settlement.  During  that 
period  we  participated  in  the  four-power  ma- 
chinery for  control  of  Germany  established  by 
international  agreement  in  1945. 

By  the  end  of  1947  it  appeared  that  the  Soviet 
Union  was  seeking  to  thwart  any  settlement 
which  did  not  concede  virtual  Soviet  control  over 
German  economic  and  political  life.  This  was 
confirmed  in  two  futile  meetings  of  the  Council  of 
Foreign  Ministers  in  Moscow  and  London.  It 
was  emphasized  in  the  Allied  Control  Authority 
in  Berlin,  where  the  Soviet  veto  power  was  exer- 
cised three  times  as  often  as  by  the  three  Western 
Powers  combined. 

The  resultant  paralysis  of  interallied  policy  and 
control  created  an  intolerable  situation.  Germany 
became  divided  into  disconnected  administrative 
areas  and  was  rapidly  being  reduced  to  a  state 
of  economic  chaos,  disti-ess,  and  despair.  Disaster 
was  averted  prinuirily  by  American  economic  aid. 

The  German  stalemate  heightened  the  general 
European  crisis.  The  European  Recovery  Pro- 
gram could  not  succeed  without  the  raw  materials 
and  finished  products  which  only  a  revived  Ger- 
man economy  could  contribute. 

By  1948  it  became  clear  that  the  Western  Pow- 
ers could  no  longer  tolerate  an  impasse  which 
made  it  impossible  for  them  to  discharge  their 
responsibilities  for  the  organization  of  German 
administration  and  for  the  degree  of  German  eco- 
nomic recovery  tliat  was  essential  for  the  welfare 
of  Europe  as  a  whole.  These  powers  determined 
to  concert  their  policies  for  the  area  of  Germanj' 
under  their  control,  which  embraced  about  two 
thirds  of  the  territory  and  three  fourths  of  the 
population  of  occupied  Germany. 

These  common  policies  were  embodied  in  the 
London  agreements,  announced  on  June  1,  1948. 
This  joint  program,  I  wish  to  emphasize,  is  in  no 
sense  a  repudiation  of  our  international  commit- 
ments on  Germany,  embodied  in  the  Potsdam 
protocol  and  other  agreements.  It  represents  a 
sincere  effort  to  deal  with  existing  realities  in  the 
spirit  of  the  original  Allied  covenants  peitaining 
to  Germany. 


The  London  agreements  constitute  a  set  of  ar- 
rangements for  the  coordinated  administration 
of  Germany  pending  a  definitive  peace  settlement. 
Tlie  execution  of  this  program,  now  in  progress, 
should  restore  stability  and  confidence  in  Western 
Germany  while  protecting  the  vital  interests  of 
Germany's  neighbors.  It  seeks  to  insure  coopera- 
tion among  the  Western  nations  in  the  evolution 
of  a  policy  which  can  and  should  lead  to  a  peace- 
ful and  fruitful  association  of  Germany  with 
Western  Europe.  It  is  a  provisional  settlement 
which  in  no  way  excludes  the  eventual  achieve- 
ment of  arrangements  applicable  to  all  of 
Germany. 

The  London  agreements  established  a  basic  pat- 
tern for  future  action  in  the  West.  The  bizonal 
area,  formed  by  economic  merger  of  the  American 
and  British  zones  in  1947,  and  the  French  zone 
were  to  be  coordinated  and  eventually  merged. 
The  Western  zones  wei'e  to  participate  fully  in 
the  European  Recovery  Program.  An  Interna- 
tional Authority  for  the  Ruhr  was  to  be  created 
to  regulate  the  allocation  of  coal,  coke,  and  steel 
between  home  and  foreign  consumption,  to  insure 
equitable  international  access  to  Ruhr  resources, 
and  safeguard  against  remilitarization  of  Ruhr 
industry. 

The  Germans  were  authorized  to  establish  a 
provisional  government,  democratic  and  federal  in 
character,  based  upon  a  constitution  of  German 
inception.  It  would  be  subject,  in  accordance 
with  an  occupation  statute,  to  minimum  super- 
vision by  the  occupation  authorities  in  the  interest 
of  the  general  security  and  of  broad  Allied  pur- 
poses for  Germany.  Coordinated  three-power 
control  was  to  be  established,  with  the  virtual 
abolition  of  the  zonal  boundaries. 

Of  exceptional  importance  were  the  guarantees 
of  security  against  a  German  military  revival,  a 
point  sometimes  overlooked  in  present-day  talk 
about  the  hazards  inherent  in  rebuilding  German 
economic  and  political  life.  The  London  agree- 
ments provide  that  there  is  to  be  consultation 
among  the  three  occupying  powei"s  in  the  event  of 
any  threat  of  German  military  resurgence;  that 
their  armed  forces  are  to  remain  in  Germany  until 
the  peace  of  Europe  is  secure :  that  a  joint  Military 
Security  Board  should  be  created  with  powers  of 
inspection  to  insure  against  both  military  and  in- 
dustrial rearrangement;  that  all  agreed  disarma- 
ment and  demilitarization  measures  should  be 
maintained  in  force;  and  that  long-term  demili- 
tarization measures  should  be  agreed  upon  prior 
to  the  end  of  the  occupation.  It  should  be  ob- 
served that  these  far  reaching  safeguards  are  to 
accompany  the  more  constructive  aspects  of  the 
program  and  assure  that  the  new  powers  and  re-  . 
sponsibilities  assumed  by  the  Germans  may  not  ■ 
be  abused.  " 

During  the  last  10  months  notable  progress  has 
been  made  in  Western  Germany,  which  is  ap- 
parent to  all  the  world.     An  entirely  new  atmos- 

Department  of  Sfate  Bulletin 


phere  of  hope  and  creative  activity  has  replaced 
the  lethargy  and  despair  of  a  year  ago.  Much  of 
the  London  program  is  well  on  the  way  to  real- 
ization. An  agreement  establishing  the  Interna- 
tional Authority  for  the  Ruhr  has  been  drafted 
and  approved.  The  Military  Security  Board  has 
been  established.  The  bizone  and  French  zone 
are  participating  fully  in  the  European  Recovery 
Program.  Agreements  have  been  reached  with 
respect  to  such  difficult  and  controverted  issues  as 
the  protection  of  foreign  property  rights  in  Ger- 
many, the  revision  of  lists  of  plants  scheduled  for 
dismantling  on  reparations  account,  and  determi- 
nation of  restricted  and  prohibited  industries. 

A  short  time  ago  we  all  felt  that  we  should  have 
a  fresh  look  at  the  German  problem.  This  was 
done  in  Washington  while  Mr.  Bevin  and  Mr. 
Schuman  were  there  earlier  this  month.  The 
genuine  readiness  of  the  participating  govern- 
ments to  sacrifice  special  points  of  view  to  the  com- 
mon good  has  made  it  possible  to  reach  a  degree  of 
accord  far  exceeding  what  could  have  been  hoped 
for  only  a  month  or  two  ago. 

There  were  three  particularly  important  fea- 
tures about  the  agreements  on  German  policy 
which  resulted  from  these  conversations.  The 
first,  was  the  striking  harmony  in  essential  out- 
look. The  second,  was  the  removal  of  the  obstacles 
to  the  fulfillment  of  the  constructive  London  pro- 
gram which  had  developed  through  diverse  Allied 
disagreements.  Thirdly,  the  three  Governments 
acknowledged  the  need  for  the  termination  of 
Military  Government  and  its  replacement  by  a 
civilian  Allied  Commission  at  the  time  of  the  estab- 
lishment of  the  German  Federal  Republic.  This 
last  is  a  great  step  forward  toward  peace,  in  my 
opinion. 

With  respect  to  my  first  point,  the  harmony  of 
view  reached  by  the  three  Governments  on  a  com- 
mon policy  for  Germany,  you  all  know  that 
matters  of  German  policy  have  been,  in  the  past, 
issues  of  great  controversy.  I  suppose  that  it  is 
a  result  of  the  depth  of  the  historical  backgi'ound, 
the  emotions  and  passions  that  have  been  aroused 
as  a  result  of  Germany's  aggressive  wars,  and  the 
inevitable  importance  attached  to  the  course  of 
German  developments.  It  is  therefore  not  strange 
that  there  should  be  distinct  American,  British, 
and  French  views  on  Germany. 

But  I  see  in  the  successful  outcome  of  our  recent 
Washington  talks  the  prospect  that  France,  Great 
Britain,  and  the  United  States  are  developing  a 
common  policy  toward  Germany  based  on  mutual 
understanding  and  reasonableness.  The  continua- 
tion of  this  development  of  a  common  policy,  which 
I  am  convinced  will  occur,  and  toward  which  I 
shall  lend  every  effort,  is  an  essential  element  in  an 
enduring  peace  in  Central  Europe. 

The  agreement  in  Washington  on  the  text  of  an 
occupation  statute  has  removed  one  of  the  major 
obstacles  to  the  establishment  of  the  German 
Federal  Republic.  The  Parliamentary  Coimcil  met 

May  8,   7949 


at  Bonn  on  September  1,  and  has  been  working 
diligently  to  draft  a  basic  law  or  provisional  con- 
stitution for  a  Federal  German  Government. 
Since  last  December  its  leaders  have  requested  the 
text  of  the  occupation  statute  which  had  been 
promised  to  the  Parliamentary  Council  before 
completion  of  its  work. 

The  three  occupying  powers  have  been  discuss- 
ing the  occupation  statute  since  last  August.  In 
the  course  of  these  many  months  the  draft  occupa- 
tion statute  had  become  a  very  heavy,  complicated, 
and  legalistic  document.  The  three  Foreign 
Ministers  approved  the  text  of  an  occupation 
statute  in  a  new  and  simpler  form,  which  was  then 
transmitted  to  the  German  Parliamentary  Council 
at  Bonn.  According  to  latest  reports,  all  the  con- 
troversial issues  with  respect  to  the  basic  law  have 
been  settled,  all  differences  between  the  occupying 
powers  and  the  Germans  and  among  the  Germans 
themselves  have  been  resolved,  and  a  constitution 
is  expected  to  be  approved  by  the  Parliamentary 
Council  by  May  15. 

The  establishment  of  a  German  Government 
does  not,  and  cannot  at  this  time,  mean  the  end 
of  the  occupation  of  Germany.  If  democratic 
self-goveriunent  is  to  be  introduced  in  Germany  it 
must  be  given  a  chance  to  live.  It  cannot  thrive  if 
its  powers  are  in  question,  or  if  it  is  subject  to 
arbitrary  intervention.  The  occupation  statute 
defines  the  powers  to  be  retained  by  the  occupying 
authorities  upon  the  establishment  of  the  German 
Federal  Republic  and  sets  forth  the  basic  pro- 
cedures for  the  operation  of  Allied  supervision. 

The  reserved  powers  have  been  retained  in  such 
fields  as  disarmament  and  demilitarization;  con- 
trols in  regard  to  the  Ruhr,  reparations,  and  de- 
cartelization ;  foreign  affairs;  displaced  persons; 
security  of  Allied  forces  and  representatives ;  con- 
trol over  foreign  trade. 

The  key  issue  for  the  future  will  be  the  manner 
and  extent  to  which  the  Allied  authorities  exer- 
cise their  powers.  A  practicable  basis  for  coopera- 
tion between  the  Western  Allies  and  the  future 
federrJ  Western  government  will  have  to  be 
sought,  through  which  the  German  people  may 
exercise  democratic  self-government  under  the 
statute. 

Provision  is  made  in  the  occupation  statute  for 
a  review  of  its  terms  after  a  year  in  force. 

In  accordance  with  the  statute,  the  action  of  the 
German  Government  authorities  generally  does 
not  require  affirmative  Allied  approval.  This 
means  that  the  day-to-day  operations  of  the 
German  Government  cannot  be  thwarted  by  the 
veto  of  one  occupying  power  or  by  Allied  disagree- 
ment. German  Government  authorities  will  be  at 
liberty  to  take  administrative  and  legislative 
action,  and  such  action  will  be  valid  if  not  dis- 
approved by  Allied  authorities. 

There  is  one  important  element  in  the  Washing- 
ton agreements  on  the  economic  side  that  I  want 
to  stress  because  it  is  a  good  indication  of  our 


intent.  As  you  know,  this  Government  has  ex- 
pended in  Germany  since  the  cessation  of  hos- 
tilities hir<;e  sun*  of  appropriated  funds  in  order 
to  feed  the  (iennan  i)eople  and  support  the  (ier- 
man  economy.  These  sums  were  carried  in  the 
Army  budfret.  Since  the  commencement  of  eco- 
nomic cooperation  aid,  the  bizonal  area  and  the 
French  zone  have  been  receiving  EGA  funds  and 
tlie  Military  Governors  of  the  bizonal  and  the 
French  zone  concluded  bilateral  ECA  agreements 
with  t!ie  United  States  Government. 

It  has  now  been  agreed  that  with  the  establish- 
ment of  the  German  Federal  Republic,  funds  pro- 
vided by  the  United  States  Government  to  the 
German  economy  will  be  made  available  through 
the  Economic  Cooperation  Administration.  The 
German  Federal  Republic  would  itself  execute  a 
bilateral  ECA  agreement  with  the  United  States 
Government,  and  would  likewise  become  a  party 
to  the  convention  for  European  Economic  Co- 
operation and  participate  as  a  full  member  in  the 
Organization  for  European  Economic  Coopera- 
tion. 

Tlie  German  economy  has  responded  energeti- 
cally to  the  currency  reform  of  last  June  and  to 
the  recovery  assistance  already  received.  The 
Gei-man  workshop  is  beginning  again  to  produce, 
for  itself,  for  its  Western  European  neighbors, 
and  for  other  cooperating  countries.  The  Ger- 
mans now,  under  the  foreseen  arrangements,  will 
have  an  opportunity  through  their  own  govern- 
ment to  become  a  responsible  partner  in  the 
European  Recovery  Program. 

The  Washington  agreements  envisage  at  the 
time  of  the  establishment  of  the  German  Federal 
Republic  the  termination  of  Military  Government 
and  its  replacement  by  an  Allied  High  Commis- 
sion of  civilian  character.  Military  functions  will 
continue  to  be  e.xercised  by  military  commanders, 
but  each  of  the  Allied  establishments  in  Germany, 
aside  from  occupation  forces,  will  come  under 
the  direction  of  a  High  Conunissioner.  The  func- 
tions of  the  Allied  authorities  are  to  become 
mainly  supervisory. 

The  three  Foreign  Ministers  on  April  8  sent  a 
joint  message  of  appreciation  to  their  Military 
Governors  for  the  pioneer  work  they  had  done  in 
Germany.  This  action  was  based  upon  moving 
tributes  paid  during  our  discussions  to  the  devoted 
efforts  of  the  Military  Governors.  We  Americans 
take  just  and  special  pride  in  our  own  Military 
Governor,  General  Clay.  I  believe  firmly  that  his- 
tory will  record  that  the  United  States  has  been 
well  served  by  him.  It  is  in  accordance  with  his 
views  and  the  views  of  the  National  Military  Es- 
tablishment that  we  are  looking  forward  to  the 
transfer  of  the  control  agencies  in  Germany  to 
civilian  hands.  This  change  is  an  interim  meas- 
ure, to  be  sure,  but  in  the  right  direction,  the  di- 
rection of  ])eace. 

I  know  that  this  thought  nnist  be  arising  in  your 


minds,  at  this  stage.  How  long  must  we  be  satis- 
fied with  interim  measures  when  the  people  of  all 
countries  desperately  desire  a  genuine  and  lasting 
peace  ?  Will  the  moves  we  are  making  in  Western 
Germany  contribute  to  a  permanent  settlement  of 
tiie  German  problem?  Wliat  are  the  possibilities 
of  renewed  four-power  talks  on  Germany?  Has 
the  possibility  of  such  talks  or  the  success  of  their 
outcome  been  prejudiced? 

In  the  communique  announcing  the  London 
agreements,  released  June  6,  1948,  it  was  empha- 
sized that  the  agreed  recommendations  in  no  way 
precluded,  and  on  the  contraiy  would  facilitate, 
eventual  four-power  agreement  on  the  German 
problem.  They  were  designed,  it  was  stated,  to 
solve  the  urgent  political  and  economic  problems 
arising  out  of  the  present  situation  in  Germany. 

When  this  Government  embarked,  together  with 
its  AVestern  Allies,  on  the  discussion  of  new  ar- 
rangements for  Western  Germany,  it  did  not  mean 
that  we  had  abandoned  hope  of  a  solution  which 
would  be  applicable  to  Germany  as  a  whole  or 
that  we  were  barring  a  resumption  of  discussions 
looking  toward  such  a  solution  whenever  it  might 
appear  that  there  was  any  chance  of  success.  It 
did  mean  that  this  Government  was  not  prepared 
to  wait  indefinitely  for  four-power  agreement  be- 
fore endeavoring  to  restore  healthy  and  hopeful 
conditions  in  those  areas  of  Germany  in  which  its 
influence  could  be  exerted. 

Should  it  prove  possible  to  arrange  for  renewed 
four-power  discussions,  this  Govermnent  will  do 
its  utmost,  as  it  has  in  the  past,  to  arrive  at  a  settle- 
ment of  what  is  plainly  one  of  the  most  crucial 
jiroblenis  in  world  affairs. 

There  are  certain  principles,  however,  the  ob- 
servance of  which  is  essential,  in  our  view,  to  any 
sastisfactory  solution  of  the  German  problem  and 
which  we  shall  have  to  keep  firmly  in  mind  in 
whatever  the  future  may  bring. 

The  people  of  Western  Germany  may  rest  as- 
sui-ed  that  this  Government  will  agree  to  no  gen- 
eral solution  for  German^'  into  which  the  basic 
safeguards  and  benefits  of  the  existing  Western 
German  arrangements  would  not  be  absorbed. 
They  may  rest  assured  that  until  such  a  solution 
can  be  achieved,  this  Govermnent  will  continue 
to  lend  vigorous  support  to  the  development  of 
the  Western  (Jerman  program. 

The  people  of  Europe  may  rest  assured  that 
this  Government  will  agree  to  no  arrangements 
concerning  Germany  which  do  not  protect  the 
security  interests  of  the  European  conununity. 

The  people  of  the  United  States  may  rest  as- 
sured that  in  any  discussions  relating  to  the  future 
of  Germany,  this  Government  will  have  foremost 
in  mind  their  deep  desire  for  a  peaceful  and  or- 
derly solution  of  these  weighty  problems  which 
have  been  the  heart  of  so  many  of  our  difficulties 
in  the  postwar  period. 

Deparfmenf  of  Siafe   Bulletin 


AGREEMENT  ON  TRIPARTITE  CONTROLS 
FOR  WESTERN  GERMANY 

[Released  to  the  press  April  26] 

The  Department  of  State  on  April  26  made  pub- 
lic the  text  of  the  agreement  reached  in  Washing- 
ton on  April  8,  1949,  between  the  Governments  of 
France,  the  United  Kingdom,  and  the  United 
States  on  the  basic  principles  for  the  merger  of 
the  three  Western  German  zones  of  occupation. 
The  purpose  of  this  agreement  is  to  define  the  or- 
ganization and  procedures  through  which  the 
powers  of  the  occupying  governments  will  be 
exercised  after  the  establishment  of  a  provisional 
German  Government.  The  agreement  provides 
for  a  High  Commission,  to  be  composed  of  a  High 
Commissioner  for  each  of  the  occupying  govern- 
ments, and  it  outlines  the  manner  in  which  the 
Commissioners  will  vote  and  reach  their  decisions. 
The  nature  and  extent  of  the  powers  to  be  exer- 
cised by  the  occupying  governments  have  been 
fully  set  out  in  the  occupation  statute.^  The  text 
of  the  agreement  follows : 

The  Governments  of  the  United  Kingdom, 
France  and  the  United  States  agree  to  enter  into 
a  trizonal  fusion  agreement  prior  to  the  entry  into 
effect  of  the  Occupation  Statute.  The  representa- 
tives of  the  three  occupying  powers  will  make  the 
necessary  arrangements  to  establish  tripartite  con- 
trol machinery  for  the  western  zones  of  Germany, 
which  will  become  effective  at  the  time  of  the 
establishment  of  a  provisional  German  govern- 
ment. The  following  provisions  agreed  by  the 
Governments  of  the  United  Kingdom,  France  and 
the  United  States  shall  form  the  basis  of  those 
arrangements : 

1.  An  Allied  High  Commission  composed  of  one 
High  Commissioner  of  each  occupying  power  or 
his  representative  shall  be  the  supreme  Allied 
agency  of  control. 

2.  The  nature  and  extent  of  controls  exercised 
by  the  Allied  High  Commission  shall  be  in  har- 
mony with  the  Occupation  Statute  and  interna- 
tional agreements. 

3.  In  order  to  permit  the  German  Federal  Re- 
public to  exercise  increased  responsibilities  over 
domestic  affairs  and  to  reduce  the  burden  of  occu- 
pation costs,  staff  personnel  shall  be  kept  to  a 
minimum. 

4.  In  the  exercise  of  the  powers  reserved  to  the 
Occupation  Authorities  to  approve  amendments  to 
the  Federal  Constitution,  the  decisions  of  the 
Allied  High  Commission  shall  require  unanimous 
agreement. 

5.  In  cases  in  which  the  exercise  of,  or  failure 
to  exercise,  the  powers  reserved  under  paragraph 
2  (g)  of  the  Occupation  Statute  would  increase 
the  need  for  assistance  from  United  States  Gov- 
ernment appropriated  funds,  there  shall  be  a  sys- 
tem of  weighted  voting.  Under  such  system  the 
representatives  of  the  Occupation  Authorities  will 

May  8,  1949 

835031 — 49 -3 


have  a  voting  strength  proportionate  to  the  funds 
made  available  to  Germany  by  their  respective 
governments.  This  provision  shall  not,  however, 
reduce  the  present  United  States  predominant 
voice  in  JEIA  and  JFEA  while  these  organiza- 
tions, or  any  successor  organization  to  them,  con- 
tinue in  existence  and  are  charged  with  the 
performance  of  any  of  their  present  functions. 
No  action  taken  hereunder  shall  be  contrary  to 
any  inter-governmental  agreement  among  the  sig- 
natories or  to  the  principles  of  non-discrimination. 

6.  On  all  other  matters  action  shall  be  by  ma- 
jority vote. 

7.  (a)  If  a  majority  decision  alters  or  modifies 
any  inter-governmental  agreement  which  relates 
to  any  of  the  subjects  listed  in  paragraph  2  (a) 
and  2  ( & )  of  the  Occupation  Statute,  any  dissent- 
ing High  Commissioner  may  appeal  to  his  Gov- 
ernment. This  appeal  shall  serve  to  suspend  the 
decision  pending  agreement  between  the  three 
governments. 

(i)  If  a  High  Commissioner  considers  that  a 
majority  decision  conflicts  with  any  inter-govern- 
mental agreement  which  relates  to  any  of  the  sub- 
jects in  paragraph  2  (cr)  and  2  (h)  of  the  Occupa- 
tion Statute  or  with  the  fundamental  principles 
for  the  conduct  of  Germany's  external  relations 
or  with  matters  essential  to  the  security,  prestige, 
and  requirements  of  the  occupying  forces,  he  may 
appeal  to  his  Government.  Such  an  appeal  shall 
serve  to  suspend  action  for  30  days,  and  thereafter 
unless  two  of  the  Governments  indicate  that  the 
grounds  do  not  justify  further  suspension. 

(c)  If  such  appeal  is  from  an  action  of  the  Al- 
lied High  Commission  either  declining  to  disap- 
prove or  deciding  to  disapprove  German  legisla- 
tion, such  legislation  shall  be  provisionally 
disapproved  for  the  duration  of  the  appeal  period. 

8.  A  High  Commissioner  who  considers  that  a 
decision  made  by  less  than  unanimous  vote  involv- 
ing any  other  matter  reserved  by  the  Occupation 
Statute  is  not  in  conformity  with  basic  tripartite 
policies  regarding  Germany  or  that  a  Land  con- 
stitution, or  an  amendment  thereto,  violates  the 
Basic  Law,  may  appeal  to  his  government.  An 
appeal  in  this  case  shall  serve  to  suspend  action  for 
a  period  not  to  exceed  twenty-one  days  from  the 
date  of  the  decision  unless  all  three  governments 
agree  otherwise.  If  such  appeal  is  from  an  action 
of  the  Allied  High  Commission  either  declining 
to  disapprove  or  deciding  to  disapprove  German 
legislation,  such  legislation  shall  be  provisionally 
disapproved  for  the  duration  of  the  appeal  period. 

9.  All  powers  of  the  Allied  High  Commission 
shall  be  uniformly  exercised  in  accordance  with 
tripartite  policies  and  directives.    To  this  end  in 


'  Recent  agreements  on  Germany  include  the  Occupation 
Statute,  Bdixeten  of  Apr.  17,  1949,  p.  .500 ;  International 
Authority  for  the  Ruhr,  Bulletin  of  .Tan.  9,  1949,  p.  43; 
Agreement  on  German  Reparation  Program,  Bulletin  of 
Apr.  24,  1949,  p.  524 :  and  Prohibited  and  Limited  Indus- 
tries in  Germany,  Bulletin  of  Apr.  24,  1949,  p.  526. 

589 


each  Land  the  Allied  Higli  Commission  sliall  be 
represented  by  a  single  Land  Conmiissioner  who 
shall  be  solely  responsible  to  it  for  all  tripartite 
affairs.  In  each  Land  the  Land  Commissioner 
shall  be  a  national  of  the  Allied  Power  in  whose 
zone  the  Land  is  situated.  Outside  his  own  zone 
each  High  Commissioner  will  delegate  an  observer 
to  each  of  the  Land  Commissioners  for  purposes 
of  consultation  and  information.  Nothing  in  this 
paragraph  shall  be  construed  to  limit  the  functions 
of  bodies  established  pursuant  to  inter-govern- 
niental  agreement. 

10.  To  the  greatest  extent  possible,  all  directives 
and  other  instruments  of  control  shall  be  addressed 
to  the  federal  and/or  Land  authorities. 

IL  The  Trizonal  Fusion  Agreement  will  con- 
tinue in  force  until  altered  by  agreement  among 
the  governments. 

UNDERSTANDING  ON  WURTTEMBERG-BADEN 
PLEBISCITE 

[Released  to  tbe  press  April  20) 

It  was  agreed  that  the  status  quo  in  Wiirttem- 
borg  and  Baden  would  be  maintained  for  the  time 
being  and  that  the  plebiscite  I'ecommended  by  the 
German  Minister  Presidents  would  be  postponed 
in  tlie  interest  of  avoiding  any  possible  delay  in 
the  establisliment  of  the  German  Federal  Govern- 
ment. 

It  was  further  agreed  that  the  question  of  the 
Wiirttemberg-Baden  land  boundaries  would  be 
reexamined  after  the  establishment  of  the  German 
Federal  Government. 

AGREEMENT  REGARDING  PORT  OF  KEHL 

[Released  to  the  press  April  26] 

The  French  control  authorities  with  the  assis- 
tance of  the  Strasbourg  French  authorities  will 
maintain  under  existing  conditions  jurisdiction 
over  the  Kehl  port  zone  until  establishment  of  the 
German  Federal  Government  and  conclusion  of 
negotiations  between  the  French  and  German 
Authorities  with  respect  to  a  joint  port  adminis- 
trat  ion  for  Kehl. 

It  was  agreed,  on  a  proposal  of  the  French  Gov- 
ernment, that  the  city  of  Kehl  would  gradually  be 
returned  to  German  administration.  It  was  fore- 
seen that  the  French  temporarily  domiciled  in 
Kehl  might  remain  during  a  four-year  period  re- 
quired for  the  preparation  of  additional  housing 
in  Strasbourg.  Around  one  third  of  the  French 
inhabitants  will  be  able  to  leave  Kehl  within 
several  months,  and  the  remainder  j)rogressively 
thereafter  as  housing  becomes  available. 

The  final  decision  with  respect  to  the  Kehl  port 
zone  will  be  made  in  the  peace  settlement.  It  the 
port  authority  develops  harmoniously,  the  United 
States  and  the  United  Kingdom  will  be  willing 
at  tlie  time  of  the  peace  settlement  to  bring  an 
attitude  of  good  will  toward  the  establishment  of 
a  permanent  joint  authorit}'. 


THREE  POWER  RESPONSIBILITIES  ON 

ESTABLISHMENT  OF  GERMAN  FEDERAL 

REPUBLIC 

(Released  to  the  press  April  26] 

The  three  Governments  also  agreed  on  and  re- 
corded in  their  minutes  the  principles  according 
to  which  their  powers  and  responsibilities  will  be 
exercised  after  the  establishment  of  a  German 
Federal  Republic.  "Wliile  the  occupying  govern- 
ments will  retain  supreme  authority,  it  is  intended 
that  military  government  will  be  terminated  and 
that  the  function  of  the  occupation  officials  will 
be  mainly  supervisory.  The  German  authorities 
will  be  free  to  take  administrative  or  legislative 
action,  and  this  action  will  be  valid  unless  it  is 
vetoed  by  Allied  authority.  The  fields  in  which 
the  occupation  authorities  reserve  the  right  to  take 
direct  action  themselves  including  the  issuance  of 
orders  to  German  federal  and  local  officials,  will 
be  restricted  to  a  minimum,  and  it  is  expected 
that,  with  the  exception  of  security  questions,  the 
exercise  of  direct  powers  will  be  of  a  temporary 
and  self-liquidating  nature.  After  the  German 
Federal  Republic  has  been  established,  the  Eco- 
nomic Cooperation  Administration  will  assume 
the  responsibility  for  supervising  the  use  of  funds 
made  available  by  the  United  States  Government 
to  the  German  economy  for  purposes  of  relief 
and  recovery.  It  is  envisaged  that  the  German 
Federal  Republic  will  become  a  party  to  the  con- 
vention for  European  economic  cooperation  and 
will  also  conclude  a  bilateral  agreement  with  the 
Government  of  the  United  States,  ■\\nien  the 
German  Republic  has  been  established  and  military 
government  has  been  brought  to  an  end.  the 
strictly  military  functions  of  the  occupation  au- 
thorities will  be  exercised  by  a  Commander-in- 
Chief  and  all  other  functions  by  a  High  Commis- 
sioner, who  will  direct  each  of  the  Allied 
establishments  in  Germany  other  than  the  occu- 
pation forces.  It  is  intended  that  the  size  of 
the  staffs  to  be  maintained  in  Germany  will  be 
kept  to  a  minimum.  A  major  objective  of  the 
tliree  Allied  Governments  is  to  bring  about  the 
closest  integration,  on  a  mutually  beneficial  basis, 
of  the  (jerman  people  under  a  democratic  federal 
state  within  the  framework  of  a  European 
association. 

INFORMAL  CONVERSATIONS  ON  BERLIN 
BLOCKADE 

[Released  to  the  press  April  26 J 

Since  the  imposition  by  the  Soviet  Government 
of  the  blockade  of  the  city  of  Berlin  the  three 
Western  Governments  have  consistently  sought  to 
bring  about  the  lifting  of  that  blockade  on  terms 
consistent  with  their  rights,  duties,  and  obligations 
as  occupying  powers  in  Germany.  It  was  in  con- 
formity with  this  policy  that  the  Western  Govern- 
ments initiated  conversations  in  Moscow  last  sum- 
mer.   Following  their  breakdown,  the  matter  was 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


referred  in  September  1948  to  the  Security  Coun- 
cil of  the  United  Nations. 

All  these  efforts  ended  in  failure,  and  the  three 
Western  Governments  made  it  plain  that  they 
were  not  prepared  to  continue  discussions  in  the 
light  of  the  Soviet  attitude. 

Since  that  time  the  Western  Governments  have 
looked  consistently  for  any  indication  of  a  change 
in  the  position  of  the  Soviet  Goverinnent  and  have 
been  anxious  to  explore  any  reasonable  possibility 
in  that  direction  through  contacts  with  Soviet 
oiEcials. 

In  tills  connection  the  Department  of  State 
noted  with  jjarticular  interest  that  on  January 
30,  1949,  Premier  Stalin  made  no  mention  of  the 
currency  question  in  Berlin  in  his  reply  to  ques- 
tions asked  him  by  an  American  journalist.  Since 
the  currency  question  had  hitherto  been  the  an- 
nounced i-eason  for  the  blockade,  the  omission  of 
any  reference  to  it  by  Premier  Stalin  seemed  to 
the  Department  to  indicate  a  development  which 
should  be  explored. 

With  these  considerations  in  mind,  Mr.  Jessup, 
then  the  U.S.  Deputy  Representative  on  the  Secu- 
rity Council,  took  occasion,  in  a  conversation  on 
February  15  with  Mr.  Malik,  the  Soviet  Eepre- 
sentative  on  the  Security  Council,  to  comment  on 
the  omission  by  Premier  Stalin  of  any  reference 
to  the  currency  question.  Since  this  question  had 
been  the  subject  of  much  discussion  in  the  Security 
Council  and  in  the  Experts  Committee  appointed 
under  the  ausjiices  of  the  Council,  Mr.  Jessup  in- 
quired whether  the  omission  had  any  particular 
significance. 

One  month  later,  on  March  15,  Mr.  Malik  in- 
formed Mr.  Jessup  that  Premier  Stalin's  omission 
of  any  reference  to  the  currency  problem  in  regard 
to  Berlin  was  "not  accidental,"  that  the  Soviet 
Government  regarded  the  currency  question  as 
important  but  felt  that  it  could  be  discussed  at 
a  meeting  of  the  Council  of  Foreign  Ministers  if 
a  meeting  of  that  body  could  be  arranged  to  review 
the  whole  German  problem.  Mr.  Jessup  inquired 
whether  tliis  meant  that  the  Soviet  Government 
had  in  mind  a  Foreign  Ministers'  meeting  while 
the  blockade  of  Berlin  was  in  progress  or  whether 
it  indicated  that  the  blockade  would  be  lifted  in 
order  to  permit  the  meeting  to  take  place. 

The  information  as  to  the  Soviet  Government's 
attitude  revealed  in  these  informal  contacts  was 
immediately  conveyed  to  the  British  and  French 
Governments. 

On  March  21  Mr.  Malik  again  asked  Mr.  Jessup 
to  visit  him  to  inform  him  that  if  a  definite  datJe 
could  be  set  for  the  meeting  of  the  Council  of 
Foreign  Ministers,  the  restrictions  on  trade  and 
transportation  in  Berlin  could  be  lifted  recipro- 
cally and  that  the  lifting  of  the  blockade  could 
take  place  in  advance  of  the  meeting. 

Taking  advantage  of  the  presence  of  the  For- 
eign ]\Iinisters  of  Great  Britain  and  France  in 


Washington,  the  recent  developments  in  regard 
to  the  Soviet  attitude  were  discussed  with  them. 
An  agreed  position  was  reached  among  the 
three  Western  Powers.  In  order  that  tliere  should 
be  no  misunderstanding  in  the  mind  of  the  Soviet 
Government  in  regard  to  this  position,  a  state- 
ment was  read  to  Mr.  Malik  by  Mr.  Jessup  on 
April  5.  The  purpose  of  this  statement,  which 
represented  the  agreed  position  of  the  three  West- 
ern Powers,  was  to  make  clear  that  the  points 
under  discussion  wei'e  the  following: 

1.  Reciprocal  and  simultaneous  lifting  of  the 
rastrictions  imposed  by  the  Soviet  Union  since 
March  1,  1948,  on  communications,  transporta- 
tion, and  trade  between  Berlin  and  the  Western 
zones  of  Germany  and  the  restrictions  imposed  by 
the  Three  Poweis  on  communications,  transporta- 
tion, and  trade  to  and  from  the  Eastern  zone  of 
Germany. 

2.  The  fixing  of  a  date  to  be  determined  for  a 
meeting  of  the  Council  of  Foreigii  Ministers. 

The  Western  Powers  wished  to  be  sure  that  these 
two  points  were  not  conditioned  in  the  understand- 
ing of  the  Soviet  Government  on  any  of  the  other 
points  which  in  the  past  had  prevented  agreement 
upon  the  lifting  of  tne  blockade. 

The  statement  summarized  the  understanding 
of  the  three  Governments  of  the  position  which 
the  Soviet  Government  took  concerning  the  pro- 
posal of  lifting  the  blockade  and  the  meeting  of 
the  Council  of  Foreign  Ministers.  Its  purpose 
was  to  make  unmistakably  clear  that  the  position 
of  the  Soviet  Government  was  as  now  stated  in 
the  release  of  the  Tass  Agency. 

On  April  10  Mr.  Malik  again  asked  Mr.  Jessup 
to  call  upon  him  at  that  time  and  again  stated  the 
position  of  the  Soviet  Government.  From  this 
statement  it  appeared  that  there  were  still  certain 
points  requiring  clarification. 

As  a  result  of  this  meeting,  further  discussions 
took  place  between  the  three  Governments,  which 
have  resulted  in  a  more  detailed  formulation  of 
their  position,  which  will  be  conveyed  by  Mr. 
Jessup  to  Mr.  Malik. 

If  the  present  position  of  the  Soviet  Government 
is  as  stated  in  the  Tass  Agency  release  as  pub- 
lished in  the  American  press,  the  way  appears 
clear  for  a  lifting  of  the  blockade  and  a  meeting 
of  the  Council  of  Foreign  Ministers.  No  final  con- 
clusion upon  this  can  be  reached  until  further  ex- 
changes of  view  with  Mr.  Malik. 


[Released  to  the  press  April  27] 

In  a  statement  to  the  press  April  26,  the  De- 
partment of  State  noted  that  Mr.  Jessup  would 
have  a  further  talk  with  Mr.  Malik  in  continua- 
tion of  the  informal  conversations  which  had  taken 
place  regarding  the  lifting  of  the  Berlin  blockade 
and  a  possible  meeting  of  the  Council  of  Foreign 
Ministers. 


May  8,   1949 


Mr.  Jessup  saw  Mr.  Malik  on  April  27  as 
planned  and  communicated  to  iiim  informally  the 
position  of  the  three  Governments.  The  Govern- 
ments of  France  and  of  the  United  Kingdom  will, 
of  course,  be  informed  concerninj^  this  conver- 
sation. 

INTERNATIONAL  AUTHORITY  FOR  THE 
RUHR  ESTABLISHED 

[Reloased  to  the  press  .\prll  28] 

In  accordance  with  the  decision  reached  by 
Foreign  Ministers  at  their  recent  meeting  in  AVash- 
ington,  the  agreement  for  establishment  of  an 
International  Authority  for  the  Ruhr  was  signed 


on  April  28  at  the  Foreign  Office  in  London. 

Foreign  Secretary  Bevin  signed  for  the  United 
Kingdom,  M.  Massigli.  French  Ambassador  on 
bclialf  of  France,  and  Julius  Holmes,  American 
Minister  Plenipotentiary  in  London,  on  behalf  of 
the  United  States.  The  Belgian  Ambassador,  the 
Netherlands  Ambassador,  and  the  Luxembourg 
Minister  signed  on  behalf  of  their  respective 
governments. 

In  accordance  with  the  terms  of  the  agreement, 
which  was  published  on  December  29  last  year, 
meetings  of  appropriate  representatives  will  be 
held  in  near  future  to  undertake  work  of  organiz- 
ing and  setting  up  authority  itself. 


Jurisdiction  of  U.S.  Courts  Re  Suits  for  Identifiable  Property  Involved 
in  Nazi  Forced  Transfers 


[Released  to  the  press  April  27] 

As  a  matter  of  general  interest,  the  Department 
of  State  publishes  herewith  a  copy  of  a  letter  of 
April  13,  1949,  from  Jack  B.  Tate,  Acting  Legal 
Adviser,  Department  of  State,  to  the  attorneys  tor 
the  plaintiff  in  Civil  Action  No.  31-555  in  the 
United  States  District  Court  for  the  Southern  Dis- 
trict of  New  York. 

The  letter  repeats  this  Government's  opposition 
to  forcible  acts  of  dispossession  of  a  discriminatory 
and  confiscatory  nature  practiced  by  the  Germans 
on  the  countries  or  peoples  subject  to  their  con- 
trols; states  that  it  is  this  Government's  policy  to 
undo  the  forced  transfers  and  restitute  identifiable 
property  to  the  victims  of  Nazi  persecution  wrong- 
fully deprived  of  such  property ;  and  sets  forth 
that  the  policy  of  the  Executive,  with  respect  to 
claims  asserted  in  the  United  States  for  restitution 
of  such  property,  is  to  relieve  American  courts 
from  any  restraint  upon  the  exercise  of  their  juris- 
diction to  pass  upon  the  validity  of  the  acts  of 
Nazi  officials. 

Copies  of  the  letter  were  also  sent  to  the  court 
and  to  the  attorneys  for  the  other  parties  to  the 
litigation.    The  letter  is  as  follows : 

April  13, 19Jfi 
Bennett,  House.  &  Cotrrs, 
Counselors  at  Law, 
U  'Wall  Street, 
New  York  6,  New  York. 
Sirs  :  You  have  brought  to  the  attention  of  the 
Department  Civil  Action  No.  31-555  now  pending 
in  the  United  States  District  Court  for  the  South- 
ern District  of  New  York  between  Arnold  Bern- 
stein, plaintiff,  and  N.  V.  Nederlandsche-Ameri- 
kaanschc  Stoomvaart-Maatschappij,  also  known 
as  Holland-America  Line,  defendant,  and  Chemi- 
cal    Bank     and     Trust     Company,     third-party 


defendant,  which  involves  certain  matters  treated 
in  the  case  of  Bernstein  v.  Van  Heyghen  Freres 
Societe  Anonyme,  1G3  F.  2d  246  (C.  C.  A.  2d 
1947),  cert.  den.  332  U.S.  772  (1947). 

You  have  pointed  out  that  the  Circuit  Court  of 
Appeals  in  the  Van  Heyghen  case  stated : 

"...  a  court  of  the  forum  will  not  undertake 
to  pass  upon  the  validity  under  the  municipal  law 
of  another  state  of  the  acts  of  officials  of  that 
state,  purporting  to  act  as  such."    (page  250) 

".  .  .  no  court  will  exercise  its  jurisdiction  to 
adjudicate  the  validity  of  the  official  acts  of  an- 
other state."     (pages  249-250) 

The  court  held  that  the  Executive  had  not  "acted 
to  relieve  its  courts  of  restraint  upon  the  exercise 
of  their  jurisdiction"  (page  250)  or  had  not  "indi- 
cated any  positive  intent  to  relax  the  doctrine  that 
our  courts  shall  not  entertain  actions  of  the  kind  at 
bar",  (page  251)  It  was  therefore  concluded 
that  in  the  circumstances  the  court  was  without 
power  to  inquire  into  the  acts  of  spoliation  alleged 
to  have  been  perpetrated  on  Bernstein  in  Germany 
in  1937-1938  in  which  Nazi  officials  of  Germany 
were  claimed  to  have  been  participants. 

You  have  inquired  whether  the  Department 
might  care  to  express  its  view  concerning  the  Ex- 
ecutive policy  of  this  Government  with  respect 
to  the  exercise  by  courts  of  this  country  of  juris- 
diction in  sucli  cases.  The  Department  considers 
the  matter  an  important  one  and  is  pleased  to 
express  its  views  as  follows : 

1.  This  Government  has  consistently  opposed 
the  forcible  acts  of  dispossession  of  a  discrimina- 
tory and  confiscatory  nature  practiced  by  the 
Germans  on  the  countries  or  peoples  subject  to 
their  controls.  In  this  connection  reference  is 
made  to  the  following : 

Departmont  of  State  Bulletin 


a.  Inter- Allied  Declaration  against  Acts  of  Dis- 
possession of  January  5,  1943,  United  States 
Economic  Policy  toward  Germany  (Dep't  State 
Pub.  2630)  52; 

b.  Gold  Declaration  of  February  22,  1944,  9 
Fed.  Reg.  2096  (1944); 

c.  The  Potsdam  Agreement  of  August  2,  1945, 
13  Dep't  State  Bull.  153  (1945) ; 

d.  Directive  to  the  Commander-in-Chief  of  the 
United  States  Forces  of  Occupation  Regarding 
the  Military  Government  of  Germany,  April  1945, 
JCS  1067,  paragraphs  4  (d),  48  (e)  (2),  13  Dep't 
State  Bull.  596  (1945); 

e.  Directive  to  Commander-in-Chief  of  United 
States  Forces  of  Occupation  Regarding  the  Mili- 
tary Government  of  Germany,  July  11, 1947,  para- 
graph I7d,  17  Dep't  State  Bull.  186  (1947) ; 

f.  Law  No.  1  of  the  Allied  Control  Council  (Off. 
Gaz.  of  the  Control  Council  for  Germ.  No.  1,  Oct. 
29,  1945)  ; 

g.  Military  Government  Law  No.  1  (Mil.  Gov. 
Gaz.-U.S.  Zone  June  1,  1946)  ; 

h.  Military  Government  Law  No.  52,  sees.  1(f), 
2  (Mil.  Gov."  Gaz.-U.S.  Zone  June  1,  1946) ; 

i.  Military  Government  Law  No.  59  on  Restitu- 
tion of  Identifiable  Property  (Mil.  Gov.  Gaz.- 
U.S.  Zone  Nov.  10,  1947) . 

2.  Of  special  importance  is  Military  Govern- 
ment Law  No.  59  which  shows  this  Government's 
policy  of  undoing  forced  transfers  and  restituting 
identifiable  property  to  persons  wrongfully  de- 
prived of  such  property  within  the  period  from 
January  30,  1933  to  May  8,  1945  for  reasons  of 
race,  I'eligion,  nationality,  ideology  or  political 
opposition  to  National  Socialism.  Article  1  (1). 
It  should  be  noted  that  this  policy  applies 
generally  despite  the  existence  of  purchasers  in 
good  faith.    Article  1  (2). 

3.  The  policy  of  the  Executive,  with  respect  to 
claims  asserted  in  the  United  States  for  the  resti- 
tution of  identifiable  property  (or  compensation  in 
lieu  thereof)  lost  through  force,  coercion,  or 
duress  as  a  result  of  Nazi  persecution  in  Germany, 
is  to  relieve  American  courts  from  any  restraint 
upon  the  exercise  of  their  jurisdiction  to  pass  upon 
the  validity  of  the  acts  of  Nazi  officials. 

Copies  of  this  letter  are  being  transmitted  to 
Judge  Sylvester  J.  Ryan  and  to  the  attorneys  for 
the  other  parties  to  the  litigation. 
Very  truly  yours, 

Jack  B.  Tate 
Acting  Legal  Adviser 


Research  and  Teaching  Opportunities 
in  Italy 

[Released  to  the  press  April  30] 

More  than  175  opportunities  for  Americans  to 
undertake  graduate  study  or  advanced  research, 

May  8,   1949 


or  to  serve  as  visiting  professors  in  Italy  under 
the  Fulbright  Act  were  announced  on  April  30  by 
the  Department  of  State.  The  awards,  which  are 
the  first  offered  for  Italy  under  the  provisions  of 
the  Fulbright  program,  are  payable  in  Italian 
lire.  Graduate  scholarships  under  this  program 
ordinarily  cover  the  round-trip  travel,  mainte- 
nance, tuition,  and  necessary  books  and  equipment 
of  the  grantee.  Grants  to  visiting  professors  and 
research  scholars  ordinarily  include  round-trip 
transportations,  a  stipend,  a  living  and  quarters 
allowance,  and  an  allowance  for  purchases  of 
necessary  books  and  equipment. 

One  hundred  and  forty  of  these  awards  are  of- 
fered to  American  students  for  graduate  study  in 
Italy. 

Eighteen  grants  are  announced  for  Americans 
to  serve  as  visiting  professors  in  Italian  universi- 
ties, and  twenty  awards  for  American  research 
specialists  to  woi'k  under  the  sponsorship  of  Ital- 
ian institutions. 

In  addition,  grants  for  round-trip  travel  are 
announced  for  more  than  100  Italian  citizens  for 
study,  teaching,  or  research  in  the  United  States. 
These  awards  do  not  cover  expenses  in  the  United 
States,  which  must  be  met  from  other  sources. 

Candidates  for  all  grants  will  be  selected  upon 
the  basis  of  merit  by  the  United  States  Board  of 
Foreign  Scholarships.  Veterans  will  be  given 
preference  provided  their  other  qualifications  are 
approximately  equal  to  those  of  other  candidates. 
Final  selection  of  visiting  professors  and  research 
scholars  and  their  assignment  to  Italian  universi- 
ties and  institutions  will  be  made  also  upon  the 
basis  of  the  appropriateness  of  their  fields  of 
teaching  or  study  to  Italian  needs  and  the  facili- 
ties available  in  Italy  for  their  research. 

The  awards  are  offered  under  Public  Law  584 
(79th  Congi-ess),  the  Fulbright  Act,  which  au- 
thorizes the  Department  of  State  to  use  foreign 
currencies  and  credits  acquired  through  the  sale 
of  surplus  property  abroad  for  programs  of  edu- 
cational exchanges  with  other  nations.  Agree- 
ments have  been  signed  with  the  following 
countries  which  are  now  participating  in  the  pro- 
gram :  China,  Burma,  Greece,  the  Republic  of  the 
Philippines,  New  Zealand,  Belgium  and  Luxem- 
bourg, United  Kingdom,  France,  and  Italy. 

Graduate  students  interested  in  the  possibilities 
for  study  in  Italy  should  make  application  to  the 
Institute  of  International  Education,  2  West 
Forty-fifth  Street,  New  York  19,  New  York,  before 
June  15. 

Persons  interested  in  the  opportunities  listed 
above  for  visiting  professors  and  research  scholars 
should  write  to  the  Conference  Board  of  Asso- 
ciated Research  Councils,  2101  Constitution  Ave- 
nue, Washington  25,  D.C.,  for  application  forms 
and  additional  information  concerning  fields  of 
teaching  and  research,  sponsoring  institutions,  and 
conditions  of  award. 


The  North  Atlantic  Treaty  and  the  Role  of  the  Military  Assistance  Program 

STATEMENT  BY  SECRETARY  ACHESON' 


I  welcome  this  opportunity  to  discuss  with  you 
the  Xorth  Atlantic  Treaty  signed  on  April  4. 
That  treaty  is  no  new  document  to  you.  It  has 
been  developed,  to  an  extent  without  parallel  in 
my  knowledge,  as  a  cooperative  enterprise  between 
the  executive  and  legislative  branches  of  the  Gov- 
ernment and  particularly  between  the  Department 
of  State  and  this  Conmiittee.  Without  the  vision 
and  assistance  of  your  chairman,  of  your  former 
chairman,  and  the  members  of  this  Committee,  this 
treaty  could  never  have  been  concluded.  The  text 
embodies  many  constructive  suggestions  from 
members  of  the  Committee. 

The  President  has  spoken  on  the  treaty  in  re- 
cent weeks,  and  the  Department  of  State  has  made 
available  a  considerable  amount  of  source  material 
regarding  it.  Since  you  already  have  in  your  pos- 
session some  of  what  t  shall  say  today,  I  shall  make 
my  statement  as  short  as  possible  and  will  then 
be  at  your  disposal  for  questions. 

I  should  like  briefly  to  review  with  you  the  rea- 
son for  this  treaty,  and  its  purposes. 

It  has  been  well  said  that  "Everyone  wants 
peace,  but  not  everyone  is  prepared  to  work  for  it." 
No  people  in  this  world  want  peace  more  than  the 
American  people.  They  have  always  wanted  it, 
they  have  sought  it  in  various  ways,  but  they  have 
not  always  been  ready  to  work  for  it.  If  we  wish 
peace  we  must  be  prepared  to  wage  peace,  with  all 
our  thought,  energy,  and  courage.  That  is  the 
purpose  of  this  treaty. 

When  the  United  States  was  a  small  and  weak 
country,  isolated  by  many  weeks  from  other  con- 
tinents, our  forefathers  wisely  based  our  foreign 
policy  upon  the  realities  of  those  times,  and  we 
managed  to  stay  ajiart,  to  a  large  extent,  from 
developments  in  other  lands. 

However,  our  responsibility  for  assisting  in  the 
maintenance  of  peace  beyond  our  borders  has  been 
long  recognized  and  assumed.  For  more  than  a 
century  and  a  quarter  this  Government  has  con- 
tributed to  the  peace  of  the  Americas  by  making 
clear  that  it  would  regard  an  attack  on  any  Amer- 
ican state  as  an  attack  on  itself.  We  gave  our 
unilateral  declaration  to  this  elfect.  As  the  years 
passed  and  our  neighbors  to  the  south  grew  in 
stature,  they  accepted  a  similar  responsibility. 

But  beyond  this  responsibility,  we  did  not  see 
clearly  the  impact  of  an  unstable  world  on  our 


'  Made  at  the  hearings  before  the  Senate  Committee  on 
Foreign  Relations  on  Apr.  27,  1949,  and  released  to  the 
press  on  the  same  date. 


securit}'.  In  1920  many  nations  of  the  world 
joined  in  an  attempt  to  maintain  international 
peace  and  security  through  the  League  of  Na- 
tions. Although  the  President  of  the  United 
States  had  played  a  leading  part  in  drafting  the 
League  Covenant,  the  United  States  was  not  pre- 
pared to  enter  the  League,  and  we  withdrew  from 
the  participation  with  other  nations  in  their  first 
effort  to  wage  peace  on  a  world-wide  basis.  ^Vs  a 
consequence,  we  had  no  eflfective  means  to  prevent 
the  Second  World  War. 

But  by  1945  after  the  tragedy  of  involvement 
in  a  second  world  war,  we  realized  fully  that 
times  had  changed,  drastically  and  irrevocably. 
It  is  the  responsibility  of  this  generation  to  base 
the  conduct  of  foreign  affairs  upon  the  realities  of 
today.  Today  no  place  on  earth  is  more  than  a 
few  hours  distant  from  any  other  place.  Today 
neither  distance  nor  ocean  nor  air  affords  security. 
Security  today  and  henceforward  can  only  be  as- 
sured, in  the  President's  words,  by  stopping  war 
before  it  can  start. 

In  1945  a  new  and  greater  effort  for  the  mainte- 
nance of  international  peace  and  security  was  un- 
dertaken in  the  establishment  of  the  United  Na- 
tions. In  the  preamble  of  the  Charter  the  peoples 
of  the  United  Nations  expressed  their  determina- 
tion— 

to  save  succeeding  generations  from  the  scourge  of  war, 
which  twice  in  our  lifetime  has  brought  untold  sorrow  to 
mankind  .  .  . 

And  for  these  ends 

to  practice  tolerance  and  live  together  in  peace  with 
one  another  as  good  neighbors,  and 

to  unite  our  strength  to  maintain  international  peace 
and  security,  and 

to  ensure,  b.v  the  acceptance  of  principles  and  the  institu- 
tion of  methods,  that  armed  force  shall  not  he  used, 
save  in  the  common  interest .  .  . 

The  first  purpose  of  the  United  Nations,  as  stated 
in  article  1  of  the  Charter  is — 

to  maintain  international  peace  and  security,  and  to  that 
end :  to  take  effective  collective  measures  for  the  pre- 
vention and  removal  of  threats  to  the  peace,  and  for  the 
suppression  of  acts  of  aggression  or  other  breaches  of  the 
peace,  and  to  bring  about  by  peaceful  means,  and  in  con- 
formity with  the  principles  of  justice  and  international 
law,  adjustment  or  settlement  of  international  disputes 
or  situations  which  might  lead  to  a  breach  of  the  peace; 

The  American  people  overwhelmingly  accepted 
this  commitment  and  the  other  commitments  laid 
down  in  the  Charter.  They  showed  not  merely 
their  desire  for  peace,  but  their  determination  to 

Department  of  Slate  Bulletin 


work  for  peace  through  full  participation  in 
"effective  collective  measures  for  the  prevention 
and  removal  of  threats  to  the  peace  and  for  the 
suppression  of  acts  of  aggression."  The  hopes  of 
the  American  people  for  peace  with  freedom  and 
justice  are  based  on  the  United  Nations. 

The  Charter  not  only  spells  out,  as  did  the  Kel- 
log  Pact,  the  essential  principle  of  settling  dis- 
putes by  peaceful  means  instead  of  by  war,  it  goes 
much  further.  The  Charter  commits  all  members 
of  the  United  Nations  to  certain  principles  in  the 
conduct  of  their  foreign  affairs  which  would,  if 
carried  out,  do  a  number  of  things.  First,  they 
would  secure  peace  and  do  away  with  the  use  of 
force  as  an  instrument  of  national  policy.  Sec- 
ond, they  would  establish  the  right  of  nations  to 
indepenclence  and  self-determination.  Third,  they 
would  establish  that  economic,  social,  and  other 
problems  can  and  should  be  worked  out  by  inter- 
national agreement  and  for  the  benefit  of  the 
peoples  of  all  countries.  Fourth,  they  would 
recognize  and  further  hiunan  rights  and  funda- 
mental freedoms.  Here  is  more  than  a  vague  ex- 
pression. These  are  the  foundations  of  a  world 
system,  based  on  law,  which  would  do  far  more 
than  merely  prevent  war. 

Still,  the  Charter  goes  further.  It  establishes 
machinery  and  procedures  for  furthering  these 
purposes.  The  fundamental  fact  of  the  Charter 
is  that  these  mechanisms  and  procedures  are  the 
institutions  and  procedures  of  free  peoples,  based 
on  solving  difficulties  and  making  progress  through 
investigation  of  facts,  free  discussion,  and  deci- 
sions by  adjustment  among  representatives  of  the 
member  nations,  all  of  whom  accept  and  are  at- 
tempting to  achieve  the  purposes  of  the  world  or- 
ganization. 

Now,  any  organization  of  free  individuals  or 
free  peoples  whether  it  is  a  private  one,  or  a  na- 
tional one,  or  an  international  one,  must  proceed 
upon  the  basis  that  the  vast  bulk  of  those  within  it 
are  firmly  attached  to  the  basic  principles  of  the 
organization  and  are  trying  to  carry  them  out. 
If  this  is  so,  adjustments  are  made  within  the  area 
of  common  purposes;  and,  no  matter  how  sharp 
disagreements  may  be,  there  are  common  princi- 
ples to  which  appeal  may  be  made  and  which  basi- 
cally govern  the  conscience  and  behavior  of  the 
members.  Whenever  a  powerful  minority  repu- 
diates the  basic  principles  and  uses  the  proceduz'es 
to  accomplish  directly  contrary  purposes  or  to 
frustrate  the  organization,  then  it  obviously  will 
not  work  as  intended. 

Here  lies  the  basic  difficulty  which  the  United 
Nations  has  faced — a  difficulty  which  would  pro- 
duce serious  problems  in  any  international  organ- 
ization, however  perfectly  devised.  This  diffi- 
culty is  that  a  powerful  group,  even  though  a 
minority,  has  not  genuinely  accepted  the  purposes 
and  principles  of  the  organization  and  has  used  its 
institutions   and   procedures  to   frustrate  them. 

May  8,   1949 


This  is  not  a  defect  of  machinery.  It  is  a  defect 
in  the  basic  attitude  of  some  of  the  members  which 
no  change  of  machinery  or  procedure  can  cure. 

One  of  the  principal  problems  which  has  grown 
out  of  this  situation  which  I  have  described  is  that 
a  sense  of  insecurity  and  a  fear  of  aggression  have 
grown  up  in  an  important  section  of  the  world 
which  is  struggling  to  recover  economically,  poli- 
tically, and  socially  from  the  drains  of  the  last 
war.  The  recovery  of  this  area  is  of  vital  con- 
cern to  the  whole  world. 

To  attain  a  sense  of  security  and  to  be  free  from 
the  constant  fear  of  armed  attack  is  certainly  one 
of  the  prime  objectives  of  the  United  Nations. 
How,  then,  is  this  objective  to  be  obtained  when  a 
few  of  the  members  of  the  United  Nations  frus- 
trate the  attempt  to  attain  it  through  the  machin- 
ery provided  in  the  Charter?  It  is  certainly  not 
to  be  obtained  by  doing  nothing  about  it.  It  is 
certainly  not  hostile  to  the  United  Nations  or  con- 
trary to  the  Charter  to  attempt  to  attain  this  ob- 
jective by  methods  wholly  consistent  with  the 
Charter. 

The  United  Nations  is  not  a  thing  in  itself.  It 
is  not  an  end  in  itself.  It  is  a  means  to  an  end. 
The  end  is  pi-ogressive  development  of  a  peace- 
ful and  stable  world  order  where  law  rather  than 
force  and  anarchy  will  govern  the  conduct  of  na- 
tions in  their  foreign  relations.  It  was  never  in 
the  minds  of  the  f  ramers  of  the  Charter  that  the 
organization  set  up  under  it  should  be  so  distorted 
as  to  become  an  international  instrument  wliich 
paralyzed  the  pacific  nations  of  the  world,  the  pos- 
sible victims  of  aggression,  while  leaving  a 
would-be  aggressor  with  completely  free  hands 
to  deal  with  them  one  by  one.  In  order  that  there 
should  be  no  misunderstanding  on  this  point, 
article  51  was  inserted  in  the  Charter. 

If  I  may  use  an  understatement,  the  sense  of 
insecurity  prevalent  in  Western  Europe  is  not  a 
figment  of  the  imagination.  It  has  come  about 
through  the  conduct  of  the  Soviet  Union.  West- 
ern European  countries  have  seen  the  basic  pur- 
poses and  principles  of  the  Charter  cynically  vio- 
lated by  the  conduct  of  the  Soviet  Union  with  the 
countries  of  Eastern  Europe.  Their  right  to  self- 
determination  has  been  extinguished  by  force  or 
threats  of  force.  The  human  freedoms  as  the  rest 
of  the  world  understands  them  have  been  ex- 
tinguished throughout  that  whole  area.  Economic 
problems  have  not  been  solved  by  international 
cooperation  but  dealt  with  by  dictation.  These 
same  methods  have  been  attempted  in  other  areas — 
penetration  by  propaganda  and  the  Communist 
Party,  attempts  to  block  cooperative  international 
efforts  in  the  economic  field,  wars  of  nerves,  and 
in  some  cases  thinly  veiled  use  of  force  itself. 

By  the  end  of  1947  it  had  become  abundantly 
clear  that  this  Soviet  pressure  and  penetration 
was  being  exerted  progressively  further  to  the 
west.    In  January  1948,  the  British  Foreign  Sec- 


retary,  Ernest  Bevin,  said  that  if  any  one  power 
attempted  to  dominate  Europe  by  wliatever  means, 
direct  or  indirect,  it  would  inevitably  lead  to 
another  world  war  unless  this  policy  could  be 
checked  by  peaceful  means.  He  declared  that  if 
peace  and  security  were  to  be  preserved  it  could 
be  done  only  "by  mobilization  of  such  a  moral  and 
material  foi'ce  as  will  create  confidence  and  energy 
in  the  West  and  inspire  respect  elsewhere." 

With  encouraf^ement  from  the  United  States 
the  Lirussels  treaty  was  signed  on  March  17,  1948.= 
The  Brussels  treaty  system  took  the  form,  not  of 
a  network  of  bilateral  alliances,  as  had  originally 
been  considered,  but  of  a  collective  defense  ar- 
rangement within  the  framework  of  the  United 
Nations  Charter  similar  in  many  respects  to  the 
Rio  treaty.  On  the  day  the  Brussels  treaty  was 
signed,  the  President,  in  addressing  both  Houses 
of  Congress,  called  the  treaty  a  notable  step  toward 
peace  and  expressed  confidence  that  the  determina- 
tion of  the  free  peoples  of  Europe  to  protect  them- 
selves would  be  matched  by  equal  determination 
on  our  part  to  help  them  do  so  and  that  the  United 
States  would  extend  to  the  free  countries  the  sup- 
port which  the  situation  might  require.^ 

At  that  time  the  Congress  had  before  it  a  num- 
ber of  proposals  for  strengthening  the  United 
Nations  and  making  it  a  more  effective  instrument 
for  the  maintenance  of  international  peace  and 
security.  My  predecessor.  General  Marshall,  and 
former  Under  Secretary  of  State  Robert  Lovett 
entered  into  consultation  with  the  Committee  on 
how  the  great  influence  of  the  United  States  might 
best  be  brought  to  bear  in  association  with  other 
free  nations  in  strengthening  the  United  Nations 
and  furthering  the  cause  of  world  peace. 

On  May  1'.),  1948,  this  Committee  unanimously 
reported  Senate  Resolution  No.  239.*  That  reso- 
lution declared : 

Whereas  peace  with  justice  and  the  defense  of  human 
rights  and  fundamental  freedoms  require  international 
cooperation  through  more  effective  u.se  of  the  United  Na- 
tions: Tlierefore  be  it 

Resolved,  That  the  Senate  reaffirm  the  policy  of  the 
United  States  to  acliieve  international  peace  and  security 
through  tlie  United  Nations  so  that  armed  force  shall  not 
be  used  except  in  the  common  interest,  and  that  the  Pres- 
ident be  advised  of  the  sense  of  tlie  Senate  that  this  Gov- 
ernment, by  constitutional  process,  should  particularly  pur- 
sue the  following  objectives  within  the  United  Nations 
Charter : 

(1)  Voluntary  agreement  to  remove  the  veto  from 
all  questions  involving  pacific  settlements  of  international 
disputes  and  situations,  and  from  the  admission  of  new 
members. 

(2)  Progressive  development  of  regional  and  other  col- 
lective arrangements  for  individual  and  collective  self- 
defense  in  accordance  with  the  purixjses,  principles,  and 
provisions  of  the  Charter. 


'  Bulletin  of  May  9,  1948,  p.  000. 
'BtJi.T.F.TiN  of  Mur.  2.S,  194S,  p.  418. 
*  PiTLLETiN  (if  .July  18,  1948,  p.  79. 


(3)  Association  of  the  United  States,  by  constitutional 
process,  with  such  regional  and  other  collective  arrange- 
ments as  are  based  on  continuous  and  effective,  self-help 
and  mutual  aid.  and  as  affect  its  national  security. 

(4)  Contributing  to  the  maintenance  of  peace  by  mak- 
ing clear  its  determination  to  exercise  the  right  of  indi- 
vidual or  collective  self-defense  under  article  51  should 
any  armed  attack  occur  affecting  its  national  security. 

(7,)  .Maximum  efforts  to  obtain  agreements  to  provide 
the  United  Nations  with  armed  forces  as  provided  by  the 
Charter,  and  to  obtain  agreement  among  member  nations 
ui>on  universal  regulation  and  reduction  of  armaments 
under  adequate  and  dependable  guaranty  against  violation. 

(0)  If  necessary,  after  adequate  effort  toward  strength- 
ening the  United  Nations,  review  of  the  Charter  at  an 
appropriate  time  by  a  General  Conference  called  under  ar- 
ticle 109  or  by  the  General  Assembly. 

It  will  be  noted  that  of  the  six  objectives  recom- 
mended, numbers  1,  5,  and  6  were  designed  to 
strengthen  the  United  Nations  on  a  universal  basis. 
This  requires  the  agreement  of  all  the  major  pow- 
ers. Our  efforts  to  achieve  these  objectives  are  be- 
ing steadily  pursued  but  it  has  not  yet  been  pos- 
sible, and  I  am  not  able  to  say  when  it  may  be  pos- 
sible, to  achieve  them. 

The  second,  third,  and  fourth  objectives  are  de- 
signed to  promote  peace  and  stability  by  ancillary 
methods  witliin  the  principles  of  the  Charter.  In 
its  report  on  that  resolution,  the  Committee  de- 
clared that  these  relatively  unexplored  resources 
of  the  Charter  should  be  further  explored  and  de- 
veloped as  rapidly  as  possible. 

For  more  than  a  year  the  members  of  the  Com- 
mittee and  ofiicers  of  the  Department  of  State 
have  been  in  consultation  as  to  the  nature  of  the 
problems  involved,  how  they  might  best  be  met, 
and  how  the  influence  of  the  United  States  might 
best  be  brought  to  bear  in  the  cause  of  peace. 
Throughout  the  negotiation  of  this  treaty  the 
United  States  negotiators  have  been  guided  by  the 
wishes  of  the  Senate  as  expressed  in  resolution  239. 
It  is  highly  gratifying  that  the  views  of  the  Senate, 
as  expressed  in  the  unanimous  report  of  this  Com- 
mittee on  the  resolution  and  the  passage  by  the 
Senate  of  that  resolution  by  a  vote  of  64  to  4,  and 
in  subsequent  consultation  on  the  text  of  the  treaty, 
have  been  absolutely  free  of  partisan  spirit  and 
have  been  moved  solely  by  the  interests  of  the 
United  States,  of  the  United  Nations,  and  of  world 
peace. 

Following  the  resolution  of  the  Senate,  Mr. 
Lovett  undertook  to  explore  the  matter  with  the 
Ambassadors  of  Canada,  the  United  Kingdom, 
France,  Bclgimn,  the  Netherlands,  and  Luxem- 
bourg. The  objective  of  this  Government  and  of 
the  other  Governments  participating  in  these  dis- 
cussions was  to  establish  an  arrangement  which 
would : 

1.  Increase  the  determination  of  the  parties 
to  resist  aggression  and  their  confidence  that  they 
could  successfully  do  so; 

2.  promote  full  economic  recovery  through  re- 
moving the  drag  of  a  sense  of  insecurity ; 

3.  stimulate  the  efforts  of  the  parties  to  help 

Deparfment  of  Stafe  Bulletin 


themselves  and  each  other  and,  through  coordi- 
nation, to  achieve  maximum  effectiveness  for  de- 
fense; and 

4.  contribute  to  the  maintenance  of  peace  and 
reduce  the  possibility  of  war  by  making  clear  the 
determination  of  the  parties  jointly  to  resist  armed 
attack  from  any  quarter. 

I  have  explained  the  text  of  the  treaty,  article  by 
article,  in  my  report  to  the  President,  vrhich  is  be- 
fore you,  and  I  will  not  repeat  that  explanation  at 
this  point.  I  wish  merely  to  stress  certain  essen- 
tial points  of  the  treaty. 

The  treaty  is  carefully  and  conscientiously  de- 
signed to  conform  in  every  particular  with  the 
Charter  of  the  United  Nations  and  to  contribute  to 
the  accomplishments  of  its  purposes.  This  is 
made  clear  in  article  I,  which  reiterates  and  re- 
affirms the  basic  principle  of  the  Charter,  namely, 
that  the  participating  countries  will  settle  all  their 
international  disputes,  not  only  among  themselves 
but  with  any  nation,  by  peaceful  means  in  accord- 
ance with  the  provisions  of  the  Charter.  This 
declaration  sets  the  whole  tone  and  spirit  of  the 
treaty  and  provides  unmistakable  proof  that  any 
allegations  that  the  treaty  conceals  aggressive  in- 
tentions are  obvious  perversions  of  the  truth. 
Democracies,  by  their  very  nature,  must  conduct 
their  atfairs  openly.  They  could  not,  even  if  they 
wished,  conspire  against  anyone,  individually  or 
collectively.  Such  allegations  are  belied  both  by 
the  terms  of  the  treaty  and  by  the  very  nature  of 
the  free  institutions  upon  which  the  signatory 
governments  are  founded. 

Article  II  demonstrates  the  conviction  of  the 
parties  that  real  peace  is  a  positive  and  dynamic 
thing,  that  it  is  much  more  than  the  mere  absence 
of  war.  In  this  article  the  signatory  governments 
assert  that  they  will  strengthen  their  free  institu- 
tions and  see  to  it  that  the  fundamental  purposes 
upon  which  these  institutions  are  founded  are  bet- 
ter understood  everywhere.  They  also  agree  to 
seek  to  eliminate  conflicts  in  their  economic  life 
and  to  promote  economic  cooperation  among  them- 
selves. Here  is  the  ethical  essence  of  the  treaty — 
the  common  resolve  to  preserve,  strengthen,  and 
make  better  understood  the  very  basis  of  tolerance, 
restraint,  freedom,  and  well-being,  the  really  vital 
things  with  which  we  are  concerned. 

Article  III,  of  which  I  will  speak  further  later 
this  morning,  embodies  in  the  treaty  the  concept 
contained  in  the  Senate  resolution  of  "continuous 
and  elfective  self-help  and  mutual  aid."  This 
means  that  no  party  can  rely  on  others  for  its  de- 
fense unless  it  does  its  utmost  to  defend  itself  and 
contribute  toward  the  defense  of  the  others. 

Tlie  basic  purpose  of  the  treaty  is,  as  recom- 
mended in  the  Senate  resolution,  to  contribute  to 
the  maintenance  of  peace  by  making  clear  the 
determination  of  the  parties  to  exercise  the  right 
of  self-defense  under  article  51,  should  armed  at- 
tack upon  any  party  occur.     This  provision  is 

May  a,   1949 


contained  in  article  V.  If  the  treaty  accomplishes 
its  purpose,  such  an  armed  attack  will  not  occur. 
In  order  to  accomplish  that  purpose,  however,  the 
parties  must  state  clearly  what  they  would  be  pre- 
pared to  do  if  an  armed  attack  should  occur. 

Article  V  recognizes  the  basic  fact  that  an  armed 
attack  upon  any  party  would  so  threaten  the  na- 
tional security  of  the  other  parties  as  to  be  in  effect 
an  armed  attack  upon  all.  It  further  provides 
that  in  the  event  of  such  an  attack  each  of  them 
will  take,  individually  and  in  concert  with  the 
other  parties,  whatever  action  it  deems  necessary 
to  restore  and  maintain  the  security  of  the  North 
Atlantic  area,  including  the  use  of  armed  force. 

This  naturally  does  not  mean  that  the  United 
States  would  automatically  be  at  war  if  one  of 
the  other  signatory  nations  were  the  victim  of  an 
armed  attack.  Under  our  Constitution,  the  Con- 
gress alone  has  the  power  to  declare  war.  The 
obligation  of  this  Government  under  article  V 
would  be  to  take  promptly  the  action  it  deemed 
necessary  to  restore  and  maintain  the  security  of 
the  North  Atlantic  area.  That  decision  would, 
of  course,  be  taken  in  accordance  with  our  Con- 
stitutional procedures.  The  factors  which  would 
have  to  be  considered  would  be  the  gravity  of  the 
attack  and  the  nature  of  the  action  which  this 
Government  considered  necessary  to  restore  and 
maintain  the  security  of  the  North  Atlantic  area. 
That  would  be  the  end  to  be  achieved.  Under  the 
treaty  we  would  be  bound  to  make  an  honest  judg- 
ment as  to  what  action  was  necessary  to  attain 
that  end  and  consequently  to  take  such  action. 
That  action  might  or  might  not  include  the  use 
of  armed  force.  If  we  should  be  confronted  again 
with  an  all  out  armed  attack  such  as  has  twice 
occurred  in  this  century  and  caused  world  wars, 
I  do  not  believe  that  any  action  other  than  the  use 
of  armed  force  could  be  effective.  The  decision, 
however,  would  naturally  rest  where  the  Constitu- 
tion has  placed  it. 

I  believe  it  appropriate  to  outline  briefly  the 
role  of  the  proposed  military  assistance  program 
in  our  over-all  foreign  policy  and  its  relationship 
to  the  Atlantic  pact.  As  you  know,  the  President 
will  shortly  recommend  to  the  Congress  the  en- 
actment of  legislation  authorizing  the  transfer 
of  military  equipment  and  assistance  to  other  na- 
tions. As  you  also  know,  the  proposed  program 
will  request  authorization  and  appropriation  of 
$1,130,000,000  for  Atlantic  pact  countries  and  ap- 
proximately $320,000,000  for  other  countries,  in- 
cluding Greece  and  Turkey,  making  a  total  of 
$1,450,000,000  for  the  fiscal  year  1950. 

The  furnishing  of  military  assistance  to  the 
Atlantic  pact  countries  is  designed  to  assist  us 
in  attaining  the  fundamental  goal  of  our  foreign 
policy :  the  preservation  of  international  peace  and 
the  preservation  of  the  security  of  the  United 
States.  Our  aid  to  Greece  and  Turkey,  the  Euro- 
pean Recovery  Program — the  greatest  of  all 
measures  to  date  in  our  foreign  policy — Senate 


Resolution  239,  the  Atlantic  pact,  which  we  are 
now  considerinf;:,  and  the  proposed  military  as- 
sistance program,  are  all  designed  to  this  end. 

You  may  ask  why  it  is  not  enough  to  have  the 
Atlantic  pact  alone  since  it  accepts  the  principle 
that  an  attack  on  one  is  an  attack  on  all.  Wliy 
does  the  Executive  believe  that  it  will  be  neces- 
sary to  have  a  militar}'  assistance  program  in  ad- 
dition to  the  commitments  contained  in  the  pact? 

The  answer  is  found  in  tlie  insecurity  and  the 
fears  of  Western  Europe  and  of  many  of  tlie  other 
freedom-loving  nations  of  the  world.  Basic  to 
the  purposes  of  the  military  assistance  program  is 
the  necessity  of  promoting  economic  recovery  and 
political  stability  by  providing  a  basis  for  confi- 
dence, a  sense  of  security,  and  a  reasonable  assur- 
ance of  peace  among  European  peoples.  The 
military  assistance  program  will  improve  the  de- 
fenses and  military  capabilities  of  these  nations, 
and  thus  increase  their  will  to  resist  aggression 
and  tlieir  ability  to  maintain  internal  security. 

It  is  undei-standable  that  the  free  nations  of 
Western  Europe  cannot  look  forward  with  equa- 
nimity to  invasion  and  occupation  in  the  event 
of  war,  even  if  we  guarantee  subsequently  to  lib- 
erate them.  Nor  is  it  in  our  own  interest  to  per- 
mit them  to  be  occupied  with  the  consequent 
necessity  of  the  costly  liberation  of  these  areas. 
Our  active  foreign  policy  has  given  rise  in  Europe 
to  a  great  momentum  of  recovery  and  a  great  in- 
crease in  the  will  to  resist.  The  hope  for  peace 
lies  in  maintaining  this  momentum.  The  free 
countries  of  Western  Europe  must  be  encouraged 
to  continue  their  efforts  towards  recoverj'.  Their 
will  to  resist  and  their  ability  mutually  "to  defend 
themselves  must  be  strengthened.  They  must  be 
encouraged  and  assisted  to  build  up  their  defense 
forces,  through  self-help  and  mutual  aid,  to  a 
point  where  aggression  cannot  take  place  through 
internal  disorders  growing  from  the  seeds  sown 
by  a  potential  aggressor,  or  under  the  guise  of 
border  incidents.  In  short,  they  must  regain, 
individually  and  collectively,  their  ability  to 
maintain  their  independence  and  national  security. 
This  in  itself  is  an  additional  deterrent  to  any 
would-be  aggressor.  Thus,  even  without  the  ex- 
istence of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty,  the  need  for 
assistance  for  defense  of  these  countries  would  be 
the  same.  With  the  pact,  the  assistance,  once 
given,  will  be  infinitely  more  effective. 

It  is  important,  however,  to  view  the  objectives 
of  the  proposed  military  assistance  progi-am  in 
light  of  the  objectives  of  article  3,  the  self-help 
and  mutual  aid  article,  of  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty,  for  the  objectives  of  each  are  comple- 
mentary. The  objectives  of  both  are  to  maintain 
and  develop  individual  and  collective  capacity  to 
resist  by  self-help  and  mutual  aid.  That  is  what 
article  3  is  going  to  do;  that  is  what  the  proposed 
military  assistance  program  is  going  to  do.  Arti- 
cle 3  does  not  bind  the  United  States  to  the  pro- 
posed military  assistance  program,  nor  indeed  to 


any  program.  It  does  bind  the  United  States 
to  the  principle  of  self-help  and  mutual  aid. 
Within  this  principle  each  party  to  the  pact  must 
exercise  its  own  honest  judgment  as  to  what  it 
can  and  should  do,  to  develop  and  maintain  its 
own  capacity  to  resist  and  to  help  others.  The 
judgment  of  the  executive  branch  of  this  Govern- 
ment is  that  the  United  States  can  and  should  pro- 
vide military  assistance  to  assist  the  other  coun- 
tries in  tlie  pact  to  maintain  their  collective  secu- 
rity. The  pact  does  not  bind  the  Congress  to 
reach  that  same  conclusion,  for  it  does  not  dictate 
the  conclusion  of  honest  judgment.  It  does 
preclude  repudiation  of  the  principle  or  of  the 
obligation  of  making  that  honest  judgment.  Thus, 
if  you  ratify  the  pact,  it  cannot  be  said  that  there 
is  no  obligation  to  help.  There  is  an  obligation  to 
help,  but  the  extent,  the  manner,  and  the  timing  is 
up  to  the  honest  judgment  of  the  parties. 

I  therefore  earnestly  trust  that  the  Congress  will 
see  fit  to  enable  this  (government  to  carry  out  that 
aspect  of  its  foreign  policy  represented  by  the 
proposed  military  assistance  program.  At  the 
same  time,  I  urge  that  both  the  treaty  and  the 
proposed  military  assistance  program  should  be 
considered  separately  and  on  their  own  merits. 

For  my  own  part  I  believe  that  both  the  North 
Atlantic  Treaty  and  the  military  assistance  pro- 
gram will  contribute  to  world-wide  security. 

The  treaty  is  wholly  consistent  with  the  Charter 
and  designed  to  strengthen  the  system  of  inter- 
national law  of  which  the  Charter  is  the  basis.  It 
will  give  security  and  confidence  to  the  signatory 
nations,  whose  common  institutions  and  moral  and 
ethical  beliefs  draw  them  naturally  together  and 
whose  well-being  is  vital  to  world  recovery. 

The  added  security  of  these  nations  does  not 
threaten  or  weaken  any  other  nation  or  portion  of 
the  world.  Tlie  principles  which  draw  these  na- 
tions into  natural  affinity  and  which  they  seek 
to  defend — freedom  of  the  individual,  tolerance 
and  restraint,  and  the  rule  of  law,  are  the  prin- 
ciples which  unite  free  peoples  throughout  the 
world. 

The  determination  to  provide  defense  for  these 
principles  by  the  12  nations  joining  in  this  treaty — 
added  to  the  other  steps  taken  bj-  these  and  other 
nations  to  wage  peace — must  be  an  encouragement 
to  all  peojjles  who  wish  peace  based  on  these 
principles. 

The  treaty  is  the  practical  expression  of  the  de- 
termination that  an  aggressor  cannot  divide  these 
nations  and  pick  them  off  one  by  one.  History  has 
taught  us  that  the  absence  of  such  determination 
and  of  its  clear  statement  in  advance  is  gravely 
dangerous.  The  knowledge  that  armed  attack 
will  be  mot  by  collective  defense,  prompt  and  ef- 
fective, will  surely  have  a  steadying  effect  on  any- 
one from  whom  that  transgression  might  come. 

The  political  and  moral  strength  which  this 
treaty  adds  to  the  accumulating  economic  strength 
of  a  vital  portion  of  the  world  will  strengthen 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


our  ability  to  build  a  world  in  which  freedom  is 
maintained  and  expanded  and  in  which  the  prob- 
lems remaining  and  growing  out  of  the  war  can 
be  solved  in  an  atmosphere  free  of  the  fear  of 
aggression. 

In  conclusion  I  should  like  to  repeat  to  you 
words  which  the  President  used  at  the  signing  of 
the  treaty : 

It  is  a  simple  document,  but  if  it  had  existed  in 
1914  and  in  1939,  supported  by  the  nations  which 
are  represented  here  today,  I  believe  it  would  have 
prevented  the  acts  of  aggression  which  led  to  two 
World  Wars.  .  .  . 


For  us,  war  is  not  inevitable.  We  do  not  be- 
lieve that  there  are  blind  tides  of  history  which 
sweep  men  one  way  or  the  other.  In  our  own 
times  we  have  seen  brave  men  overcome  obstacles 
that  seemed  insurmountable  and  forces  that 
seemed  overwhelming.  Men  with  courage  and 
vision  can  still  determine  their  own  destiny.  They 
can  choose  slavery  or  freedom — war  or  peace. 

I  have  no  doubt  which  they  will  choose.  The 
treaty  we  are  signing  here  today  is  evidence  of 
the  path  they  will  follow. 

If  there  is  anything  certain  today,  if  there  is 
anything  inevitable  in  the  future,  it  is  the  will  of 
the  people  of  the  world  for  freedom  and  peace. 


President  Truman  Transmits  tiie  Nortii  Atlantic  Treaty  to  the  Senate 


The  Whi,te  House,  April  12, 19Jf9. 
To  the  Senate  of  the  United  States: 

I  transmit  herewith  for  the  consideration  of  the 
Senate  a  copy  of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty, 
signed  at  Washington  on  April  4,  1949,  together 
with  a  report  of  the  Secretary  of  State.^ 

This  treaty  is  an  expression  of  the  desire  of  the 
people  of  the  United  States  for  peace  and  security, 
for  the  continuing  opportunity  to  live  and  work 
in  freedom. 

Events  of  this  century  have  taught  us  that  we 
cannot  achieve  peace  independently.  The  world 
ha.s  grown  too  small.  The  oceans  to  our  east  and 
west  no  longer  protect  us  from  the  reach  of  bru- 
tality and  aggression. 

We  have  also  learned — learned  in  blood  and  con- 
flict— that  if  we  are  to  achieve  peace  we  must  work 
for  peace. 

This  knowledge  has  made  us  determined  to  do 
everything  we  can  to  insure  that  peace  is  main- 
tained. We  have  not  arrived  at  this  decision 
lightly,  or  without  recognition  of  the  effort  it  en- 
tails. But  we  cannot  escape  the  great  responsi- 
bility that  goes  with  our  great  stature  in  the  world. 
Every  action  of  this  Nation  in  recent  years  has 
demonstrated  the  overwhelming  will  of  our  people 
that  the  strength  and  influence  of  the  United 
States  shall  be  used  in  the  cause  of  peace,  justice, 
and  freedom. 

In  this  determination,  our  people  wholeheart- 
edly accepted  the  Charter  of  the  United  Nations 
in  1945.  Since  then,  we  have  worked  unceasingly 
to  reach  international  agreement  through  the 
United  Nations  and  to  make  the  United  Nations 
a  more  effective  instrument  for  its  mighty  task. 

In  the  last  year  we  have  embarked  on  a  great 
cooperative  enterprise  with  the  free  nations  of 
Europe  to  restore  the  vitality  of  the  European 
economy — ^so  important  to  the  prosperity  and 
peace  of  our  country  and  the  world. 

May  8,    J 949 


The  North  Atlantic  Treaty  is  further  evidence 
of  our  determination  to  work  for  a  peaceful  world. 
It  is  in  accord  with  the  action  of  the  Senate  last 
June  when  it  signified  its  approval  of  our  country's 
associating  itself  in  peacetime  with  countries  out- 
side the  Western  Hemisphere  in  collective  arrange- 
ments, within  the  framework  of  the  United 
Nations  Charter,  designed  to  safeguard  peace  and 
security. 

The  12  nations  which  have  signed  this  treaty 
undertake  to  exercise  their  right  of  collective  or 
individual  self-defense  against  armed  attack,  in 
accordance  with  article  51  of  the  United  Nations 
Charter,  and  subject  to  such  measures  as  the  Se- 
curity Council  may  take  to  maintain  and  restore 
international  peace  and  security.  The  treaty 
makes  clear  the  determination  of  the  people  of 
the  United  States  and  of  our  neighbors  in  the 
North  Atlantic  community  to  do  their  utmost  to 
maintain  peace  with  justice  and  to  take  such  action 
as  they  may  deem  necessary  if  the  peace  is  broken. 

The  people  of  the  North  Atlantic  community 
have  seen  solemn  agreements,  designed  to  assure 
peace  and  the  rights  of  small  nations,  broken  one 
by  one  and  the  people  of  those  nations  deprived  of 
freedom  by  terror  and  oppression.  They  are  re- 
solved that  their  nations  shall  not,  one  by  one, 
suffer  the  same  fate. 

The  nations  signing  this  treaty  share  a  common 
heritage  of  democracy,  individual  liberty,  and  the 
rule  of  law.  The  American  members  of  the  North 
Atlantic  community  stem  directly  from  the  Euro- 
pean members  in  tradition  and  in  love  of  freedom. 
We  have  joined  together  in  the  progressive  de- 
velopment of  free  institutions,  and  we  have  shared 
our  moral  and  material  strength  in  the  present 
task  of  rebuilding  from  the  devastation  of  war. 

The  security  and  welfare  of  each  member  of  this 
community  depend  upon  the  security  and  welfare 
of  all.     None  of  us  alone  can  achieve  economic 


'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  24, 1949,  p.  532. 


prosperity  or  military  security.     None  of  us  alone 
can  assure  the  continuance  of  freedom. 

Together,  our  joint  strength  is  of  tremendous 
significance  to  the  future  of  freemen  in  ever\' 
part  of  the  world.  For  this  treaty  is  clear  evidence 
that  differences  in  language  and  in  economic  and 
political  systems  are  no  real  bar  to  the  effective 
association  of  nations  devoted  to  the  great  prin- 
ciples of  human  freedom  and  justice. 

This  treaty  is  only  one  step — although  a  long 
one — on  the  road  to  peace.  Xo  single  action,  no 
matter  how  significant,  will  achieve  peace.  We 
must  continue  to  work  patiently  and  carefully,  ad- 
vancing with  practical,  realistic  steps  in  the  liglit 
of  circumstances  and  events  as  they  occur,  build- 
ing the  structure  of  peace  soundly  and  .solidly. 

I  believe  that  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  is  such 
a  step,  based  on  the  realities  of  the  situation  we 
face  today  and  framed  within  the  terms  of  the 
United  Nations  Charter  and  the  Constitution  of 
the  United  States. 

In  the  conviction  that  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty 
is  a  great  advance  toward  fulfillment  of  the  un- 
conquerable will  of  the  people  of  the  United 
States  to  achieve  a  just  and  enduring  peace,  I 
request  the  advice  and  consent  of  the  Senate  to  its 
ratification. 

Harry  S.  Trum.vn. 


are  printed  the  Dunkirk  treaty  between  Great 
Britain  and  France,  and  the  Brussels  treaty  with 
pertinent  documents.  Foreign  assistance  and  mil- 
itary aid  furnished  by  the  Lnited  States  is  traced 
through  excerpts  from  the  President's  message  to 
Congress  on  Greek-Turkish  aid,  the  act  providing 
that  a.ssistance,  parts  of  the  President's  Message  to 
Congress  in  March  1948,  the  Foreign  Assistance 
Act  of  1948,  and  the  convention  for  European  eco- 
nomic recovery  with  related  documents.  Steps 
leading  to  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  are  outlined, 
beginning  with  the  Vandenberg  resolution,  quota- 
tions from  President  Truman's  inaugural  address, 
and  concluding  with  the  white  paper  on  the  pact 
issued  by  the  Department  of  State. 

Part  3  reviews  the  Soviet  System  of  treaties  and 
the  Soviet  official  position  on  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty.  The  Soviet  mutual  assistance  treaties 
with  illustrative  texts  are  printed  and  also  the 
communique  on  the  establishment  of  the  Comin- 
form,  a  Tass  statement  on  the  Soviet  Council  for 
■Economic  Mutual  Assistance,  a  statement  of  the 
Soviet  Ministry  of  Foreign  AflFairs  on  the  North 
Atlantic  Treaty,  Soviet  protest  on  the  treaty,  and 
the  statement  of  the  foreign  ministere  in  reply  to 
the  protest. 

Part  4  is  a  chronology  of  major  developments 
relating  to  the  treaty. 


THE  CONGRESS 

Senate  Document  on  North  Atlantic 
Treaty  Issued 

Senate  Document  No.  48,  81st  Congi-ess,  entitled 
the  A' orth  Atlantic  Treaty,  which  was  prepared  by 
the  staff  of  the  Senate  Foreign  Relations  Commit- 
tee, contains  documents  relating  to  the  North 
Atlantic  Treaty. 

In  the  document  are  maps  showing  areas  de- 
fined by  tlie  North  Atlantic  Treaty  as  well  as  by 
the  Kio  treaty.  Part  1  contains  the  text  of  the 
North  Atlantic  Treaty,  the  President's  message 
transmitting  it  to  the  Senate,  and  the  Secretary's 
report. 

Part  2  relates  to  the  development  of  the  treaty, 
in  which  excerpts  from  the  United  States  Consti- 
tution are  quoted.  Tlie  Inter-American  defense 
and  United  Nations  security  documents  such  as  the 
Monroe  Doctrine,  the  Act  of  Chapulte]iec.  the  Rio 
treaty  of  reciprocal  assistance,  the  Fulbright  and 
Connally  resolutions,  and  excerpts  from  the  U.N. 
Charter  are  i)rinted.  Agreements  toward  the  set- 
tlement of  World  War  II  have  been  included — the 
Yalta  agreement,  the  Potsdam  agreement,  and  the 
draft  treaty  on  the  disarmament  and  demilitariza- 
tion of  Germany  offei-ed  by  the  United  States  at 
Paris.    Under  defense  treaties  of  Western  Europe 


Legislation 

Suspension  of  Import  Taxes  on  Copper.  Hearings 
before  the  Coniuiittee  on  Finance,  United  States  Senate, 
81st  Cong.,  1st  sess.  on  H.  R.  2313,  an  act  to  suspend 
certain  import  taxes  on  copper.  Feb.  17  and  24,  1949. 
iii.  24  pp. 

Extension  of  European  Recovery  Program.  Hearings 
before  the  Committee  on  Foreign  Affairs,  House  of  Repre- 
sentatives, 81st  Cong.,  1st  .sess.,  on  H.  R.  23(!2,  a  bill  to 
amend  tlie  Economic  Cooperation  Act  of  IJMS.  Part  1. 
Feb.  8,  9,  10,  11,  15,  16,  17,  and  18,  1049.     ii,  489  pp. 

Revised  Supplemental  Estimate — Payment  of  Claims 
for  Damages,  Audited  Claims,  and  Judgments.  Communi- 
cation from  the  President  of  the  United  States  trans- 
mitting revised  su|)plemental  estimate  of  appropriation 
involving  an  increase  of  .$61,713.42  for  payment  of  claims 
for  damages,  audited  claims,  and  judgments.  S.  Doc.  24, 
81st  Cong.,  1st  sess.     8  pp. 

Extending  the  .Vuthority  for  the  Investigation  of  the 
Immigration  System,  and  Increasing  the  Limit  of  Ex- 
penditudes  Therefor.  S.  Kept.  65,  81st  Cong.,  1st  sess.,  to 
accompany  S.  Ues.  40.     3  pp. 

Relating  to  the  Immigration  Status  of  the  Lawful  Wives 
and  Children  of  Chinese  Treaty  Merchants.  S.  Rept.  67, 
81st  Cong.,  1st  sess.,  to  accompany  S.  206.     2  pp. 

Providing  for  the  Payment  of  Certain  Swiss  Claims. 
S.  Rept.  77,  81st  Cong.,  1st  sess.,  to  accompany  S.  612. 
5  pp. 

Relating  to  an  Investigation  of  the  Immigration  Laws 
and  the  Administration  Thereof.  S.  Rept.  86,  81st  Cong., 
1st  sess.,  to  accompany  S.  Res.  40.     1  p. 

Promoting  the  Progress  of  Science.  S.  Rept.  90,  81st 
Cong..  1st  sess..  to  accompany  S.  247.     7  pp. 

Copper  Import-Tax  Suspension.  S.  Rept.  91,  81st  Cong., 
1st  sess.,  to  accompany  H.R.  2313.     3  pp. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Charter  Proposing  an  International  Trade  Organization 
Transmitted  to  the  Senate 


PRESIDENT  TRUMAN'S  MESSAGE  TO  THE  CONGRESS 


To  the  Congress  of  the  United  States : 

I  submit  herewith,  for  the  consideration  of  the 
Congress,  the  Charter  for  an  International  Trade 
Organization,  prepared  by  a  conference  of  the 
United  Nations  which  met  in  Havana  in  1948, 
together  with  a  memorandum  from  the  Secretary 
of  State. 

Tlie  Charter  is  designed  to  do  two  things:  to 
establish  a  code  of  international  conduct  to  guide 
nations  in  dealing  with  the  fundamental  problems 
of  world  trade,  and  to  create  an  agency,  within 
the  framework  of  the  United  Nations,  to  help  im- 
plement this  code. 

We  have  learned  through  bitter  experience  how 
necessary  it  is  for  nations  to  approach  jointly  the 
task  of  improving  the  conditions  of  world  trade. 

During  the  1930's  many  nations  acted  indepen- 
dently, each  attempting  to  gain  advantage  at  the 
expense  of  others.  The  result  was  a  vicious 
circle — with  restrictions  by  one  nation  provoking 
more  serious  restrictions  by  other  nations  in  re- 
taliation. The  end  result  was  a  tremendous  drop 
in  the  volume  of  international  trade  which  made 
the  general  depression  worse  and  injured  all 
countries. 

Since  the  recent  war,  though  some  nations  have 
again  acted  unilaterally,  there  has  been  a  general 
resolve  to  prevent  the  vicious  circle  of  restrictions 
and  to  acliieve  progressively  freer  trade.  To  gain 
this  objective,  action  by  many  nations  is  necessary. 
No  one  nation  alone,  and  no  small  group  of  nations, 
can  have  enough  impact  on  the  network  of  ob- 
structions that  has  been  built  up. 

The  United  States  program  of  reciprocal  trade 
agreements  has  been  a  shining  beacon  of  coopera- 
tive action  to  reduce  tariff  barriers,  and  it  is  vitally 
necessary  that  the  Reciprocal  Trade  Agreements 
Act  be  extended  in  full  force. 

But  it  is  clear  that  trade  agreements  alone  are 
not  enough..  These  agreements  do  not  touch  cer- 
tain important  obstacles  to  the  expansion  of  world 
trade.  Subsidies,  cartels,  and  many  other  devices 
have  important  effects  in  limiting  trade  or  creating 
disadvantages  for  one  country  as  compared  with 
another.  What  is  needed  is  cooperative  action  to 
attack  the  whole  range  of  obstacles  that  stand  in 
the  way  of  broadening  international  trade. 

The  Havana  Charter  is  a  major  step  toward 
achieving  tliat  objective.  It  was  agreed  upon  by 
the  representatives  of  fifty-four  nations  after  more 
than  two  years  of  preparatory  study  and  negotia- 
tion. 


The  Charter  establishes  an  international  or- 
ganization, which  is  essential  to  continuous  and 
effective  international  cooperation  in  the  field  of 
trade.  The  nations  accepting  membership  in  the 
International  Trade  Organization  commit  them- 
selves to  abide  by  fair  and  liberal  principles  of 
trade.  They  agree  to  take  no  action  which  may 
injure  another  nation  without  first  making  a 
genuine  effort  to  reach  a  constructive  solution 
through  consultation  either  directly  between  them- 
selves or  through  the  Organization.  They  agree 
to  work  together  continuously  to  achieve  progi'es- 
sively  greater  trade  and  to  settle  differences  with 
respect  to  national  policies  that  affect  the  flow  of 
international  commerce. 

The  Charter  is  the  most  comprehensive  interna- 
tional economic  agreement  in  history.  It  goes 
beyond  vague  generalities  and  deals  with  the  real 
nature  of  the  problems  confronting  us  in  the  pres- 
ent world  situation.  Wliile  it  does  not  include 
every  detail  desired  by  this  Nation's  representa- 
tives, it  does  provide  a  practical,  realistic  method 
for  progressive  action  toward  the  goal  of  expand- 
ing world  trade. 

The  United  States  can  be  proud  of  its  leadership 
in  this  constructive  action  to  help  the  nations  of 
the  world  work  their  way  out  of  the  morass  of 
restriction  and  discrimination  that  has  gripped 
international  trade  ever  since  the  fii-st  world  war. 
The  alternative  to  the  Charter  is  economic  conflict 
and  shrinking  international  trade. 

This  Charter  is  an  integi-al  part  of  the  larger 
program  of  international  economic  reconstruction 
and  development.  The  great  objectives  of  the 
European  recovei-y  program  will  be  only  partially 
realized  unless  we  achieve  a  vigorous  world  trad- 
ing system.  The  economic  advancement  of  under- 
developed areas  likewise  depends  very  largely  upon 
increasing  the  international  exchange  of  goods 
and  services.  Thus  the  Charter  is  an  effective 
step  toward  improved  standards  of  living  through- 
out the  world,  toward  the  growth  of  production, 
and  toward  the  maintenance  of  employment  and 
economic  stability.  It  is  fundamental  to  the 
progressive,  expanding  world  economy  so  vital  to 
the  increasing  welfare  and  prosperity  of  the  peo- 
ple of  the  United  States. 

The  great  structure  of  international  cooperation 
that  is  being  erected  through  the  United  Nations 
must  rest  upon  a  solid  foundation  of  continuous 
cooperation  in  economic  affairs.  The  Charter  for 
an  International  Trade  Organization  is  a  neces- 


Moy  8,   1949 


sary  part  of  that  foundation,  along  with  the  spe- 
cial arrangements  that  have  been  made  in  the 
fields  of  money  and  credit,  transportation  and 
communications,  food  and  agriculture,  labor  and 
health. 
As  an  essential  forward  step  in  our  foreign  pol- 


icy, I  recommend  that  the  Congress  authorize  the 
United  States  to  accept  membership  in  the  Inter- 
national Trade  Organization. 

Harrt  S.  Trumax 
Th£  White  House, 
ApHl  £8, 194s. 


MEMORANDUM  FOR  THE  PRESIDENT  FROM  THE  SECRETARY  OF  STATE 


[Released  tu  tLe  press  Aiiril  LIS) 

On  March  24,  1948,  after  more  than  two  years 
of  public  discussion  and  international  negotiation, 
the  representatives  of  54  nations,  assembled  at 
Habana,  completed  a  charter  for  an  International 
Trade  Organization  for  submission  to  their  re- 
spective governments.  This  charter  establishes  a 
code  of  principles  to  be  accepted  in  the  conduct  of 
international  trade  and  an  organization  to  help 
make  them  work.  The  organization  would  take 
its  place  with  the  International  Bank,  the  Inter- 
national Monetary  Fund,  and  the  Food  and  Agri- 
cultural Organization  as  a  specialized  agency  of 
the  United  Nations. 

The  Economic  World  Today 

Tlic  world  economy  is  still  seriously  out  of  joint. 
Tlie  aftermath  of  six  years  of  struggle,  with  its 
depletion  of  financial  and  material  resources  and 
its  distortion  of  the  apparatus  for  the  production 
and  distribution  of  goods,  is  still  with  us.  There 
are  pronounced  imbalances  of  trade  not  only  be- 
tween the  United  States  and  most  of  the  rest  of 
tlie  world  but  between  other  countries. 

Despite  constructive  efforts  to  cope  with  these 
problems,  there  is  still  a  widespread  feeling  in  the 
world  of  economic  and  political  insecurity.  Na- 
tions face  the  problems  of  increasing  production 
and  distribution  of  goods,  of  finding  ways  and 
means  to  bring  the  industrialized  nations  of  the 
world  back  into  full  productivity  and  stability, 
and  of  developing  and  bringing  into  the  area  of 
productive  trade  the  underdeveloped  nations  of 
the  world. 

In  such  a  situation  there  is  a  clear  need  for  a 
body  in  which  policies  in  the  field  of  trade  can  be 
continually  discussed,  questioned,  explained,  ad- 
justed, and  harmonious  agreement  reached.  The 
Ito  charter  provides  such  a  body. 

Origins  of  the  Charter 

Even  while  liostilities  were  still  going  on,  many 
persons  in  tlie  United  States  began  to  think  of 
how  we  could  reach  international  agreement  after 
the  war  which  would  avoid  the  mistakes  and  eco- 
nomic conflict  of  the  inter-war  period  and  set  the 
course  of  international  trade  along  expanding  and 
liberal  lines.  The  Atlantic  Charter  enunciated 
the  principle  of  equal  access  for  all  to  the  markets 
and  the  raw  materials  of  the  world.  Article  VII 
of  the  mutual  aid  agreements  laid  down  the  prin- 


ciple of  negotiation  for  the  reduction  of  tariffs, 
for  the  elimination  of  preferences,  and  for  the 
removal  of  discriminatory  practices  in  interna- 
tional trade.  As  early  as  1943,  consultation  began 
with  representatives  of  the  British  and  Canadian 
Governments  to  develop  agreement  on  principles 
which  ultimately  emerged  refined  and  sharpened 
in  the  Ito  charter. 

When  the  Bretton  Woods  conference  completed 
its  labors  in  establishing  the  charters  of  the  Inter- 
national Bank  and  the  International  Monetary 
Fund,  the  delegates  recognized  that  their  work 
was  not  complete.  They  realized  that  action  by 
nations  in  the  field  of  the  international  exchanges 
and  in  the  field  of  international  investment  re- 
quired complementary  action  in  the  field  of  trade. 
In  the  final  act  of  that  conference,  therefore,  they 
called  upon  the  member  nations  to  continue  to 
work  to — 

(1)  reduce  obstacles  to  international  trade  and  in  other 
ways  promote  mutually  advantageous  international  com- 
mercial relations; 

(2)  bring  about  the  orderly  marketing  of  stable  com- 
modities at  prices  fair  to  the  producer  and  consumer 
alike : 

(.3)  deal  with  thp  special  problems  of  international  con- 
cern wliich  will  arise  from  the  cessation  of  production 
for  war  purposes ;  and 

(4)  facilitate  by  cooperative  efifort  the  harmonization 
of  national  policies  of  Member  States  designed  to  pro- 
mote and  maintain  high  levels  of  employment  and  pro- 
gressively rising  standards  of  living. 

Wlien  the  Congress  accepted  membership  for 
the  United  States  in  the  Bretton  Woods  organiza- 
tions, it  said — 

"In  the  realization  that  additional  measures  of 
international  economic  cooperation  are  necessary 
to  facilitate  the  expansion  and  balanced  growth  of 
international  trade  and  render  most  effective  the 
operations  of  the  Fund  and  the  Bank,  it  is  hereby 
declared  to  be  the  policy  of  the  United  States  to 
seek  to  bring  about  further  agreement  and  coop- 
eration among  nations  and  international  bodies, 
as  soon  as  possible,  on  ways  and  means  which 
will  best  reduce  obstacles  to  and  restrictions  upon 
international  trade,  eliminate  unfair  trade  prac- 
tices, promote  mutually  advantageous  commercial 
i-elations,  and  otherwise  facilitate  the  expansion 
and  balanced  growth  of  international  trade  and 
promote  the  stability  of  international  economic 
relations." 

Further  agreement  has  now  been  reached  in  the 
Ito  charter. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


The  basic  ideas  of  the  charter  were  set  forth  in 
the  United  States  "Proposals  for  the  Expansion 
of  World  Trade  and  Employment,"  placed  before 
the  peoples  of  the  world  for  their  consideration 
in  December  1945.  It  was  at  the  suggestion  of  the 
United  States  that  the  Economic  and  Social  Coun- 
cil of  the  United  Nations,  at  its  first  meeting  in 
February  1946,  appointed  a  committee  to  prepare 
the  agenda  for  an  international  conference  on 
trade  and  employment,  the  conference  which  took 
place  at  Habana  in  1948  and  produced  the  Ito 
charter.  When  that  preparatory  committee  met 
for  the  first  time  in  London  in  October  1946,  it 
had  before  it  and  adopted  as  its  basic  working 
document  a  "Suggested  Charter  for  an  Interna- 
tional Trade  Organization"  proposed  and  pre- 
pared by  the  United  States.  A  second  meeting  of 
the  Committee  was  held  in  Geneva  in  1947. 
■  After  the  London  meeting,  the  resulting  draft 
charter  was  published.  Public  hearings  were  held 
upon  it  in  seven  cities  in  the  United  States.  Ex- 
tensive hearings  were  also  conducted  by  the 
Finance  Committee  of  the  United  States  Senate. 
Most  of  the  suggestions  which  were  developed  at 
those  hearings  ultimately  found  their  way  into 
the  charter. 

Scope  of  the  Charter 

The  charter  is  comprehensive  and  detailed..  It 
is  a  code  of  principles  designed  to  guide  action.  It 
contains  commitments  covering  a  wide  range  of 
trade  relations.  It  stands  in  contrast  to  the  reso- 
lutions and  recommendations  of  international 
economic  conferences  between  the  two  World 
Wars,  which  were  uniformly  in  such  general  terms 
and  so  lacking  in  substantive  content  as  to  have 
little  or  no  practical  effect  upon  the  activities  of 
nations.  The  charter  leaves  the  world  of  pious 
generalities  and  addresses  itself  to  the  more  thorny 
task  of  providing  a  guide  for  action  in  dealing 
with  specific  problems  in  international  trade. 

Equally  important,  the  charter  provides  a 
mechanism  for  continuous  consultation  between 
nations  on  policies  affecting  world  trade.  It  es- 
tablishes the  obligation  and  the  mechanism  of 
consultation  and  adjustment  before  action,  rather 
than  retaliation  after  it. 

We  are  pledged  to  unfaltering  support  of  the 
United  Nations  in  the  conviction  that  interna- 
tional differences  of  opinion  can  best  be  composed 
around  the  conference  table.  The  International 
Trade  Organization  will  provide  the  conference 
room  for  discussion  of  problems  of  international 
trade.  Its  rules  for  action,  its  means  for  consulta- 
tion will  together  provide  a  method  of  meeting 
world  trade  problems  as  they  arise  and  of  helping 
to  maintain  economic  peace. 

Objective  of  the  Charter 

The  objective  of  the  charter  can  be  simply  stated. 
It  is  to  contribute  to  higher  standards  of  living, 
to  greater  production  and  wider  distribution  and 

May  8,  1949 


consumption  of  goods  and  services,  and  thus  to 
economic  and  political  stability  throughout  the 
world.  It  seeks  to  do  this,  first,  by  reducing  public 
and  private  barriers  which  restrict  and  divert 
trade;  second,  by  establishing  the  objective  of 
multilateralism  and  nondiscrimination  in  inter- 
national trade  and  by  providing  means  and  foster- 
ing conditions  under  which  this  objective  can  be 
achieved  as  rapidly  as  possible ;  third,  by  provid- 
ing a  means  for  dealing  with  problems  arising 
out  of  surpluses  of  primary  commodities ;  fourth, 
by  promoting  the  economic  stability  and  the 
maintenance  of  employment  so  essential  to  liberal- 
ization of  trade  policy;  and,  fifth,  by  advancing 
the  economic  development  of  underdeveloped 
areas,  which  have  so  great  a  contribution  to  make 
to  their  own  welfare  and  that  of  the  world. 

The  Substantive  Commitments  of  the  Charter 

Many  of  the  substantive  commitments  of  the 
charter  are  based  on  familiar  principles  of  United 
States  policy.  Others  are  of  a  pioneering  char- 
acter.    In  the  first  group  are : 

(a)  The  commitment  that  member  nations  will 
stand  ready  to  negotiate  for  the  reduction  of 
tariffs  and  the  elimination  of  tariff  preferences. 
This  is  simply  international  acceptance  of  a  policy 
long  followed  by  the  United  States  under  the  Hull 
reciprocal-trade-agreements  program.  So  far  as 
the  United  States  is  concerned,  this  commitment 
will  be  carried  out  under  the  authority  and  pro- 
cedures of  the  Reciprocal  Trade  Agreements  Act. 

(b)  Commitments  desigiied  to  limit  the  use  of 
indirect  forms  of  protectionism,  such  as  discrimi- 
natory internal  taxes,  mixing  regulations,  and 
arbitrary  and  concealed  barriers  in  the  guise  of 
customs  regulations.  The  principal  effect  of  these 
commitments  will  be  to  concentrate  charges  upon 
imports  at  the  customs  frontier,  to  make  it  widely 
and  definitely  known  exactly  what  these  charges 
are,  to  simplify  as  much  as  possible  the  binding 
red  tape  of  customs  administration,  and  to  secure  a 
wider  degree  of  uniformity  in  such  administration. 
The  provisions  of  the  charter  dealing  with  this 
subject  represent  the  widest  area  of  detailed  agi'ee- 
ment  yet  reached  internationally  in  this  compli- 
cated and  highly  important  field. 

(c)  A  condemnation  in  principle  of  the  use  of 
quantitative  restrictions,  a  limitation  of  their  use 
in  practice  to  specified  situations  in  which  all  na- 
tions are  agreed  that  their  use  is  permissible,  and 
a  commitment  to  keep  their  use  subject  to  inter- 
national scrutiny  and  control. 

(d)  Acceptance  of  the  basic  principle  of  non- 
discrimination and  equal  opportunity  in  inter- 
national trade;  the  principle  of  unconditional 
most-favored-nation  treatment. 

These  principles  are  familiar  in  the  United 
States.  They  have  long  been  incorporated  in  our 
trade  agreements  and  commercial  treaties.  In  the 
charter  they  are  reaffirmed  as  objectives  in  all 


cases  and  as  rules  of  immediate  and  present  be- 
havior in  cases  wliere  that  is  now  possible.  Wliere 
deviation  is  required  by  the  exif^encies  of  particu- 
lar situations,  the  deo^ree  of  deviation  from  the 
principle,  and  the  conditions  under  which  such 
deviation  will  be  recognized  as  legitimate,  are 
specifically  laid  down. 

Some  changes  in  present  United  States  law  will 
be  necessary  for  full  compliance  with  the  charter. 
These  changes,  however,  are  relatively  few  in 
number  and  scope.  They  will  be  pointed  out  in 
detail  to  the  Congress  during  the  presentation  of 
the  charter,  and  necessary  legislation  will  be  pre- 
sented later. 

The  charter,  however,  recognizes  that  govern- 
mental trade  barriers  and  discriminations  repre- 
sent only  part  of  the  obstacles  to  increased  trade 
in  today's  economic  world.  It  therefore  goes  on 
to  attack  problems  not  hitherto  dealt  with  in 
broad-scale  international  agreement. 

The  charter  contains  the  first  set  of  interna- 
tioni',1  commitments  with  respect  to  the  restrictive 
pnulices  of  private  and  public  international  car- 
tels. In  many  cases  such  practices  can  be  as 
effective  and  as  harmful  to  the  development  of  in- 
ternational trade  as  the  more  familiar  restrictions 
imposed  by  governments.  The  charter  defines 
these  harmful  practices,  and  contains  commit- 
ments by  the  member  nations  to  take  necessary 
action  according  to  their  own  constitutional  and 
legal  systems  to  secure  the  abandonment  of  prac- 
tices found  to  be  injurious. 

The  charter  contains  the  first  set  of  commit- 
ments by  governments  to  guide  the  operation  of 
their  state-trading  enterprises.  The  development 
of  state  trading  has  been  a  phenomenon  of  increas- 
ing inii)ortance  in  the  field  of  international  trade. 
The  purpose  of  the  charter  commitments  is  to  sub- 
ject the  conduct  of  such  enterprises,  as  much  as 
possible,  to  the  same  criteria  as  those  which  nor- 
mally govern  the  operation  of  private  enterprises. 

The  charter  contains  the  first  set  of  interna- 
tional rules  with  respect  to  the  formulation  and 
opei-ation  of  intergovernmental  commodity  agree- 
ments. Many  special  problems  arise  in  the  field 
of  primary  commodities.  These  are  often  pro- 
duced by  large  numbers  of  small  ])ioducers  and 
surpluses  cause  widespread  hardship.  Price  fluc- 
tuations can  be  and  often  are  violent. 

Intergovernmental  action  is  frequently  required 
to  assist  in  dealing  with  such  problems.  In  the 
past  such  action  has  normally  been  by  agreement 
only  of  the  producing  countries.  The  charter, 
among  other  things,  M-ould  require  that  in  any 
such  agreement  consuming  countries  will  have  an 
equal  voice  with  producing  countries,  a  new  re- 
quirement for  commodity  agreements. 

The  charter  contains  provisions  for  consultation 
between  members  with  respect  to  their  use  of  sub- 
sidies, with  a  view  to  limitation  of  such  u.se  when 
it  proves  to  be  harmful  to  otiier  nations*  interests. 


The  charter  recognizes  the  importance  to  inter- 
national trade  of  a  high  and  stable  level  of  de- 
mand in  the  member  countries.  The  reduction  of 
barriers  to  international  trade  will  be  of  little 
avail  if  there  is  no  demand  for  the  products  of 
international  trade.  The  full  realization  of  de- 
mand for  the  products  of  international  trade  can- 
not be  achieved  if  there  are  unnecessary  barriers  to 
the  exchange  of  such  products.  These  are  two 
sides  of  the  same  coin.  In  the  charter,  member 
countries  would  commit  themselves  to  use  their 
best  efforts  according  to  their  own  constitutional 
procedures,  such  as  our  Employment  Act  of  1946, 
to  achieve  and  maintain  within  their  borders  full 
and  productive  employment. 

Finally,  the  charter  recognizes  the  fundamental 
importance  of  the  economic  development  of  under- 
developed countries.  Vast  areas  of  the  world  are 
in  very  early  stages  of  economic  and  industrial  de- 
velopment, resources  are  not  fully  utilized,  poverty 
is  widespread,  starvation  and  disease  are  ever 
present.  Such  conditions  provide  no  basis  for 
economic  progi-ess  or  political  stability.  They  are 
fertile  breeding  grounds  for  discontent  and  un- 
rest. 

It  is  to  the  common  interest  of  all  nations  to  see 
such  areas  brought  to  a  higher  stage  of  economic 
development.  This  can  be  done  by  the  efforts  of 
the  people  and  governments  of  the  areas  them- 
selves, by  the  efforts  of  private  industry,  agi'icul- 
ture,  and  labor  in  other  countries,  by  the  help  of 
other  governments,  and  by  the  help  of  interna- 
tional agencies.  Therefore,  the  charter  contains 
provisions  designed  to  facilitate  the  flow  of  tech- 
nological information  and  private  capital  into 
areas  which  need  and  can  use  them  and.  at  the 
same  time,  to  safeguard  those  areas  against  abuses 
of  foreign  investment  which  have  unhappily  taken 
place  in  the  past. 

These  provisions  of  the  charter  were  of  deep 
and  primary  concern  to  a  large  number  of  the 
countries  represented  at  Habana.  They  are  of 
concern  to  the  United  States  also.  For  it  is  in  this 
area  that  the  United  States  and  other  highly  in- 
dustrialized and  developed  countries  can  make  a 
great  contribution  to  the  sound  development  of 
other  nations  and,  at  the  same  time,  to  our  own 
prosperity. 

The  Exceptions  in  the  Charter 

Tiie  cliarter  is  designed  as  a  set  of  princii)les  to 
be  observed  in  action.  It  is  not  just  a  set  of  tempo- 
rary rules  to  meet  the  present  abnormal  and  emer- 
gency economic  situation.  It  is  designed  also  for 
the  longer  term.  It  will  represent  agreement  as  to 
future  objectives  as  well  as  to  the  rules  for  today's 
action. 

Many  of  the  commitments,  such  as  those  dealing 
with  negotiations  for  the  reduction  of  tariffs  and 
elimination  of  preferences,  the  abolition  of  dis- 
criminatory  internal   taxes   and   regulations,  the 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


simplification  and  publication  of  customs  regula- 
tions, the  negotiation  and  operation  of  commodity 
agreements,  the  limitation  of  the  restrictive  prac- 
tices of  cartels,  and  others,  can  be,  and  must  be, 
immediately  and  fully  lived  up  to. 

Other  commitments  cannot,  in  the  postwar  eco- 
nomic world,  be  fully  lived  up  to  by  all  countries 
immediately. 

For  example,  the  members  of  the  Ito  will  com- 
mit themselves  to  abandon  the  use  of  quantitative 
restrictions.  But  during  the  postwar  transition 
period,  it  is  inescapably  necessary  for  many,  if 
not  most,  countries  to  budget  their  foreign  pur- 
chases. Therefore,  the  charter  provides  that  when 
countries  are  in  real  balance-oi-payments  difficul- 
ties thej'  may  use  quantitative  restrictions  to  limit 
their  expenditures  of  foreign  exchange.  When  the 
circumstances  which  the  charter  recognizes  as 
justifying  the  use  of  such  restrictions  have  been 
corrected,  members  are  committed  to  abandon 
them. 

Under  certain  circumstances,  countries  in  the 
process  of  economic  development  may  have  legiti- 
mate need  to  use  restrictive  measures,  which  would 
otherwise  be  prevented  by  the  charter,  for  the  de- 
velopment of  new  industry.  Hence,  the  charter 
provides  certain  cases  in  which  this  may  be  done, 
provided  the  organization  is  satisfied  that  care- 
fully specified  conditions,  agreed  to  by  all  the 
members,  have  been  met. 

Under  certain  circumstances,  a  tariif  rate  ne- 
gotiated under  the  commitment  of  members  to  ne- 
gotiate for  the  reduction  of  their  tariffs  may  cause 
or  threaten  unexpected  injury  to  a  domestic 
industry.  The  charter  provides  that  under  such 
circumstances  the  country  granting  that  conces- 
sion may  withdraw  or  modify  it  to  the  extent 
necessary  to  prevent  such  injury.  This  provision 
is  patterned  on  the  escape  clause  which  the  United 
States  includes  in  trade  agreements  negotiated 
under  the  Reciprocal  Trade  Agreements  Act. 

Under  certain  circumstances,  it  has  been  neces- 
sary for  governments  to  intervene  to  prevent  the 
disastrous  effects  of  surpluses  of  agricultural 
products  by  programs  restricting  domestic  pro- 
duction or  marketing.  In  such  cases  it  would  be 
unfair  for  imports  to  be  exempt  from  control,  and 
they  could  be  limited. 

Considerations  of  national  security  at  times  re- 
quire measures  which  would  not  conform  to  the 
general  principles  which  would  normally  be  ap- 
plied under  the  charter.  An  exception  is,  there- 
fore, provided  to  permit  action  to  be  taken  by 
member  countries  necessary  for  their  national 
security. 

Without  exceptions  of  this  kind,  members  of 
the  organization,  ourselves  included,  could  not  ac- 
cept the  commitments  of  the  charter.  The  excep- 
tions are  carefully  defined  and  are  agreed  to  by  all. 
Their  use  is  subject  to  scrutiny  by  the  organiza- 
tion. Their  abuse  is  subject  to  complaint  by  the 
members. 

May  8,   7949 


Structure  and  Functions  of  the  Organization 

The  International  Trade  Organization  would 
be  a  specialized  agency  of  the  United  Nations. 
As  such,  it  would  enter  into  relationship  with  the 
Economic  and  Social  Council  of  the  United  Na- 
tions and  with  the  other  specialized  agencies  in 
order  to  insure  coordinated  action  and  to  avoid 
duplication  of  activities  and  functions. 

The  structure  of  the  organization  itself  is  simple. 
It  will  have  a  Conference  composed  of  all  the  mem- 
ber nations  which  will  be  its  fundamental  govern- 
ing body.  The  Conference  will  meet  periodically, 
but  at  least  once  a  year. 

The  executive  functions  of  the  organization  will 
be  vested  in  an  Executive  Board  of  eighteen 
countries,  of  which  eight  must  be  nations  of  chief 
economic  importance  as  determined  by  the  Con- 
ference. This  {provision  insures  a  permanent  seat 
for  the  United  States  on  the  Executive  Board. 
Other  nations  likely  to  have  permanent  seats  under 
this  test  will  be  the  United  Kingdom,  France, 
the  Benelux  Customs  Union,  and  Canada. 

Each  member  country  will  have  one  vote  in  the 
Conference  and  on  the  Executive  Board.  De- 
cisions of  the  Conference  and  of  the  Executive 
Board  will  be  by  majority  vote,  except  in  certain 
cases  where  a  two-thirds  vote  is  required. 

The  organization  will  have  a  Director  General, 
to  be  appointed  by  the  Conference  on  recommen- 
dation of  the  Executive  Board,  who  will  be  re- 
sponsible for  its  day-to-day  activities  under  the 
direction  and  supervision  of  the  Executive  Board. 

With  one  exception  relating  to  the  discrimina- 
tory application  of  i-estrictions  for  balance-of- 
payments  reasons  the  organization  will  have  no 
power  to  require  any  member  to  take  any  specific 
action.  It  will  have  the  power  to  decide  whether 
a  member  has  lived  up  to  its  commitments  under 
the  charter.  If  it  finds  that  the  member  has  not 
lived  up  to  a  given  commitment,  it  Jiiay  release 
other  members  from  certain  of  their  charter  obli- 
gations to  that  member,  which,  if  not  satisfied 
with  this  decision,  maj'  in  most  cases  withdraw 
from  the  organization  on  sixty  days'  notice. 

Decisions  of  the  conference  of  the  organization 
may  be  referred  to  the  International  Court  of 
Justice  for  legal  opinion. 

The  organization  will  provide  a  forum  where 
problems  may  be  discussed  and  conflicting  in- 
terests reconciled.  It  provides  a  means  of  bring- 
ing to  bear  upon  a  given  problem  the  force  of 
international  public  opinion.  It  provides  a  means 
of  developing,  on  a  case-by-case  basis,  interna- 
tional precedents  in  the  field  of  economic  and 
commei'cial  relations. 

The  organization  will  provide  a  means  for  the 
accumulation  and  dissemination  of  trade  statistics 
and  information  about  trade  practices  of  govern- 
ment, e.  g.,  customs  regulations,  etc.,  which  can 
be  of  great  service  to  businessmen. 

The  organization  will  be  empowered  to  make 
studies  in  various  fields,  for  example,  standardiza- 


tion,  uniformity,  and  simplification  of  customs 
regulations.  It  can  be  a  means  for  the  collection 
and  dissemination  of  technological  information. 
The  expenditures  of  the  organization  are  to  be 
met  by  contributions  from  the  members.  These 
contributions  are  to  be  apportioned  among  the 
members  in  accordance  with  a  scale  fixed  by  the 
Conference  following  such  principles  as  may  be 
applied  by  the  United  Nations.  Should  the  United 
Nations  place  a  maximum  limit  on  the  propor- 
tionate contribution  to  its  budget  by  any  one 
member,  the  same  limit  is  to  be  applied  to  con- 
tributions to  the  organization. 

Place  of  the  ITO  in  the  Structure  of  International 
Cooperation 

It  is  ujipiirent  that  the  economic  problems  fac- 
ing us  today  cannot  be  solved  by  any  one  nation, 
or  any  few  "nations,  but  must  be  tackled  by  many 
nations  working  together. 

We  arc  committed  to  unfaltering  support  of  the 
United  Nations.  We  have  participated  in  the 
building  and  ostablishmcnt  of  the  International 
Monetary  Fund  to  deal  with  the  problems  of  inter- 
national exchange.  The  purpose  of  the  Fund  is 
to  promote  by  international  action  reasonable 
stability  and  convertibility  of  currencies.  Clearly, 
trade  must  be  brought  into  balance  if  currencies 
are  ever  to  be  and  remain  stable.  Kegulation  of 
exchange  controls  is  futile  if  nations  are  free  to 
use  quantitative  restrictions  instead.  To  solve  the 
problems  of  international  trade,  international 
cooperation  with  respect  to  exchange  controls  and 
currency  valuation  must  go  hand  in  hand  with 
international  cooperation  with  respect  to  other 
forms  of  trade  barriei-s  and  the  expansion  of 
demand  in  international  trade. 

We  have  participated  in  the  building  and  opera- 
tion of  the  International  Bank  for  Reconstruction 
and  Development.  AVe  are  interested  in  foreign 
private  investment.  Clearly,  loans  cannot  be  re- 
paid or  earnings  on  investments  received  if  inter- 
national trade  is  not  fostered  and  freed. 
International  cooperation  in  provision  of  capital 
must  go  hand  in  hand  with  international  coopera- 
tion in  the  development  of  the  kind  of  conditions 
in  which  capital  can  exercise  its  catalytic  and 
constructive  influence. 

We  are  playing  a  tremendous  part  in  the  great 
work  of  European  recovery.  In  the  development 
of  the  European  Recovery  Program  there  has  been 
consistent  recognition  of  the  vital  importance  of 
increased  trade.  The  participating  countries  have 
pledged  themselves  to  cooperate  to  reduce  trade 
barriers  and  expand  trade  in  accord  with  the 


principles  of  the  draft  charter  for  an  International 
Trade  Organization.  Similar  pledges  are  re- 
peated in  the  Convention  for  European  Economic 
Cooperation. 

Section  115  (b)  (3)  of  the  Economic  Coopera- 
tion Act  requires  the  inclusion  in  the  bilateral  aid 
agreements  between  each  of  the  participating 
countries  and  the  United  States  a  general  under- 
taking to  cooperate  in  facilitating  and  stimulating 
an  increasing  interchange  of  goods  and  services 
and  in  reducing  barriers  to  trade.  In  accord  with 
this  Congressional  mandate  a  provision  to  this 
effect  was  included  in  the  bilateral  aid  agreements 
witli  the  participating  countries. 

The  European  Recovery  Program  is  designed  to 
help  put  the  European  countries  on  their  feet. 
The  Ito  charter  provides  principles  and  rules  of 
trade  which  if  followed  over  the  long  term  will 
give  them  the  best  chance  of  staying  on  their  feet, 
riie  problem  is  one  of  markets  as  much  at  it  is 
one  of  production.  Our  investment  in  the  Euro- 
pean Recovery  Program  can  be  fully  realized  only 
if  the  participating  countries  are  able  and  willing 
to  adopt  trade  policies  which  will  foster  multi- 
lateral, nondiscriminatorj-,  and  expanding  inter- 
national trade,  rather  than  policies  of  bilateralism, 
discrimination,  limitation,  and  control.  Wide  ac- 
ceptance of  the  charter  throughout  the  world 
would  mean  that  many  other  nations  besides  those 
in  Western  Europe  would  be  marching  in  the  same 
direction  and  with  the  same  purpose. 

AVe  are  deeply  interested  in  assisting  in  the  de- 
velopment of  underdeveloped  areas  of  the  world. 
We  hope  to  see  these  areas  develop  under  political 
and  economic  institutions  in  which  human  dignity 
and  freedom  can  be  preserved.  In  particular,  we 
hope  to  increase  the  international  flow  of  technical 
knowledge.  This  is  not  something  which  we  can, 
or  would  wish,  to  do  alone.  Other  nations  have 
great  reservoirs  of  knowledge  and  experience 
which  they  too  can,  and  will  be  glad  to,  share. 
The  International  Trade  Organization  will  be  one 
means  whereby  resources  of  knowledge  may  be 
pooled  and  directed  to  the  areas  and  projects 
where  they  can  be  most  constructive. 

Conclusion 

Thus,  the  International  Trade  Organization, 
like  the  other  specialized  agencies  of  the  United 
Nations,  is  part  of  a  pattern — the  pattern  of  the 
groat  majority  of  a  community  of  nations  co- 
ojierating  together  in  various  fields  of  the  com- 
munity's life  to  provide  the  services  which  the 
community  needs. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Steps  Taken  for  Safety  of  Americans  in  Lower  Yangtze  Valley 


NOTICE  BY  U.S.  CONSULATE  GENERAL 

[Released  to  the  press  April  26] 

The  following  announcement  to  American  citi- 
zens was  issued  by  the  U.S.  Consulate  General  in 
Shanghai  on  April  25,  pursuant  to  the  Department 
of  State  authorization  and  consultation  with 
Achiiiral  Badger: 

As  pointed  out  in  the  statement  issued  by  the 
Consultate  General  on  April  23,  the  recent  inci- 
dents on  the  Yangtze  require  a  reappraisal  of  the 
plans  which  have  been  made  for  the  evacuation  of 
Americans  to  points  of  safety  in  the  event  that 
conditions  in  Slianghai  should  become  so  hazard- 
ous as  to  make  this  appear  to  be  desirable.  The 
commanding  officer  of  the  American  naval  forces 
stationed  at  Shanghai,  pursuant  to  this  reappraisal 
and  to  his  instructions  not  to  become  involved  in 
China's  fratricidal  civil  war,  is  shortly  moving 
his  heavy  units  from  close  anchorages  in  the 
Wliangpoo  to  the  lower  Yangtze. 

Contact  will  be  maintained  by  small  craft 
between  Shanghai  and  the  naval  units  in  the  lower 
Yangtze  as  long  as  this  proves  feasible. 

American  citizens  desiring  safe  haven  aboard 
American  naval  units  will  be  processed  at  the 
American  Consulate  General  starting  immediately 
and  will  then  be  received  at  the  U.S.  Naval  Annex, 
627  Yangtzepoo  Road.  The  evacuation  unit  of 
the  American  Consulate  General  is  being  re- 
activated today.  Citizens  taking  advantage  of 
this  facility  will  appreciate  that  no  guarantee  can 
be  given  that  they  will  be  permitted  to  land  again 


by  the  local  authorities.  The  Consulate  General 
will  of  course  continue  to  function. 

Citizens  taking  advantage  of  these  facilities  will 
realize  that  accommodations  although  adequate 
may  not  be  comfortable.  Those  not  desiring  or 
not  able  to  return  to  Shanghai  will  be  routed  on- 
ward by  commercial  shipping  or  to  Hong  Kong 
or  Japan  for  further  routing.  Amei-ican  citizens 
will  appreciate  that  when  these  facilities  are  no 
longer  available  no  further  facilities  of  any  kind 
can  be  provided  by  the  American  authorities  for 
the  protection  of  American  citizens  in  Shanghai 
and  they  must  be  prepared  to  remain  here. 

Citizens  may  wish  to  check  whether  commercial 
facilities  are  available  either  on  ships  or  planes. 
The  Consulate  General  will  have  the  latest  in- 
formation available  regarding  such  facilities. 
Attention  is  invited  to  the  fact  that  additional 
space  has  been  made  available  in  the  President 
Wilson  due  to  depart  April  27. 

AMBASSADOR  STUART  INSTRUCTED  TO  RE- 
PORT TO  WASHINGTON 

[Released  to  the  press  April  25] 

Ambassador  J.  Leighton  Stuart  has  remained 
in  Nanking  during  the  take-over  of  the  city  by 
Chinese  Communists,  as  have  the  chiefs  of  most 
other  diplomatic  missions.  Before  the  Chinese 
Communist  army  occupied  the  city.  Ambassador 
Stuart  received  instructions  that  when  he  con- 
siders it  advisable,  after  assuring  himself  regard- 
ing the  safety  and  welfare  of  the  American  com- 
munity in  the  lower  Yangtze  Valley  area,  he  is 
to  come  to  Washington  for  consultations. 


PUBLICATIONS 


Department  of  State 

For  sale  hy  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  Oovemment 
Printing  Office,  Washington  25,  D.  C.  Address  requests 
direct  to  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  except  in  the 
case  of  free  publications,  which  may  he  obtained  from  the 
Department  of  State. 

European  Unity.  European  and  Britisli  Commonwealtli 
Series  4.     Pub.  3364.     14  pp.     Free. 

Address  by  John  Foster  Dulles,  U.S.  Delegate  to  the 
Third  Session  of  the  General  Assembly,  Paris,  Nov 
18,  1948. 

Inter-American  Treaty  of  Reciprocal  Assistance.  Trea- 
ties and  Other  International  Acts  Series  1838.  Pub.  3380. 
40  pp.     15^. 

Between  the  United  States  and  Other  American  Re- 
publics—Opened for  signature  at  Rio  de  Janeiro  Sept. 
2,  1947 ;  entered  into  force  Dec.  3,  1948. 

May  8,    1949 


Foreign  Service  List,  January  1,  1949.  Pub.  3388.  151 
pp.  400  a  copy.  Subscription  price  $1.50  a  year;  $2.00 
foreign. 

The  January  issues  of  the  List  will  include  the  sec- 
tions showing  the  posts  of  assignment,  retirements 
in  the  Foreign  Service,  the  consular  districts,  the 
tariff  of  Foreign  Service  fees,  the  index  of  persons, 
and  the  geographic  index.  The  April,  July,  and 
October  issues  will  include  only  the  posts  of  assign- 
ment and  the  two  indexes. 

Air  Service:  Facilities  in  French  Territory.  Treaties 
and  Other  International  Acts  Series  1853.  Pub.  3391 
2  pp.     5^. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  France 
Amending  Agreement  of  June  18,  1946 — Effected  by 
exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Paris  May  8  and  17,  1947 ; 
entered  into  force  May  17,  1947. 

Double  Taxation:  Taxes  on  Income.    Treaties  and  Other 
International  Acts  Series  1854.     Pub.  3396.    30  pp.     100. 
Convention    between    the    United    States    and    Den- 
mark—Signed at  Washington  May  6, 1948 ;  proclaimed 
by  the  President  of  the  United  States  Dec.  8,  1948. 

607 


Occupation  Matters  Paee 

Consular    Services    for    German    Nationals. 

By  Walter  J.  Marx 575 

The  Current  Situtation  in  Germany: 

•    Address  by  Secretary  Acheson 585 

Agreement    on    Tripartite    Controls    for 

Western  Germany 689 

Understanding     on     Wilrttemberg-Baden 

Plebiscite 590 

Agreement  Regarding  Port  of  Kehl    .    .    .        590 
Three    Power    Responsibilities    on    Estab- 
lishment of  Gorman  Federal  Republic  .        590 
Informal   Conversations  on*  Berlin   Block- 
ade            590 

International     Authority     for     the     Ruhr 

Established .    .    .    ■        592 

Jurisdiction  of  U.S.  Courts  re  Suits  for 
Identifiable  Property  Involved  in  Nazi 
Forced  Transfers 592 

The  United  Nations  and 
Specialized  Agencies 

U.N.  Documents:  A  Selected  Bibliography  .        578 

Promotion  of  International  Political  Co- 
operation. By  Ambassador  Warren  R. 
Austin       579 

Reply  to  the  U.S.S.R.  Regarding  the  Italian 
Colonies.  Statement  by  John  Foster 
Dulles 581 

The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations  .    .        684 


Treaty  Information  Paee 

The  North  Atlantic  Treaty  and  the  Role  of 
the  Military  Assistance  Program.  State- 
ment by  Secretary  Acheson 594 

President  Truman  Transmits  North  Atlantic 

Treaty  to  the  Senate 599 

Charter    Proposing   an    International    Trade 
Organization  Transmitted  to  the  Senate: 
President  Truman's  Mes.sage  to  the  Con- 
gress              601 

Memorandum  for  the  President  From  the 

Secretary  of  State      602 

General  Policy 

Steps    Taken    for    Safety    of    Americans    in 

Lower  Yangtze  Valley: 
Notice  by  U.S.  Consulate  General  ....        607 
Ambassador  Stuart  Instructed  To  Report 

to  Washington 603 

international  information  and 
Cultural  Affairs 

Research     and     Teaching     Opportunities    in 

Italy 593 

Tlie  Congress 

Senate  Document  on  North  Atlantic  Treaty 

Issued 600 

I^egislation 600 

Publications 

Department  of  State 607 


%mit)itmdo7^ 


Walter  J.  Marx,  nnthor  of  the  article  on  Consular  Services 
for  German  Nationals,  is  Officer  in  Charge  of  the  Interim  Office 
for  German  Consular  Affairs,  Division  of  Protective  Services, 
Office  of  Controls  in  the  Department  of  State. 


^^m^s^mm^m^m^ 


^ne/  zl)eAa>^^i^nie/rit  /w  tfv^ 


rOLATION  OF  HUMAN  RIGHTS  IN  BUL- 
GARIA, HUNGARY,  AND  RUIVIANIA: 

Statements  by  Secretary  Acheson  and 

Benjamin  V.  Cohen 611 

ECONOMIC     POLICY     AND     THE     ITO 

CHARTER     •     Address  by  Secretary  Acheson   .      623 

INTERNATIONAL  RECLAMATIONS  AND 
THE  PEACE   SETTLEMENTS    •   By  Jack 

Tate 627 

RESTRICTIONS  BETWEEN  ZONES  OF 
OCCUPATION  IN  GERMANY  AND 
BERLIN  LIFTED 631 


Vol.  XX,  No.  515 
May  15,  1949 


For  complete  contents  see  back  cover 


11.  S.  SUPERII.TtNDENr  bf  t/wtuMtCli 

JUN    9    1949 


*.a/^^y^.  bulletin 


Vou  XX,  No.  515    •    Publication  3503 
May  15,  1949 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

U.S.  Oovernraent  Printing  Office 

Washington  25,  D.C. 

Price: 

62  Issues,  domestic  $.">,  foreign  $7.25 
Single  copy,  16  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 
been  approved  by  the  Dircclor  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  (February  18, 
1U49). 

iVotc:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  Items  contained  heroin  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Department 
OF  Statk  Bulletin  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BULLETIN, 
a  treekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Divisiott  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interestcil  Ufiencies  of 
the  Government  tiith  information  on 
devilopments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  u'ork  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includes 
press  releases  on  foreign  policy  issued 
by  the  White  House  and  the  Depart- 
ment, and  statements  and  addresses 
made  by  the  President  and  by  the 
Secretary  of  State  and  other  officers 
of  the  Department,  as  icell  as  special 
articles  on  various  phases  of  inter- 
national affairs  and  the  functions  of 
the  Department.  Information  is  in- 
cluded concerning  treaties  and  in- 
ternational agreements  to  uhich  tlie 
United  States  is  or  may  become  a 
party  and  treaties  of  general  inter- 
ruitional  interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
uell  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
curren  I  ly. 


Violation  of  Human  Riglits  in  Bulgaria,  Hungary,  and  Rumania 


STATEMENT  BY  SECRETARY  ACHESON 

[Released  to  the  press  May  4] 

This  Government  has  now  received  replies  from 
Bulgarici,  Hungary,  and  Rumania  rejecting  the 
charges,  made  in  our  notes  of  April  2,  that  these 
three  Governments  were  violating  the  articles  of 
the  respective  peace  treaties  concerning  human 
rights  and  fundamental  freedoms.  In  their  re- 
plies, they  accuse  the  United  States,  in  making 
these  charges,  of  attempting  to  interfere  in  their 
affairs.  This  argument  is  clearly  not  valid,  since 
the  protection  of  human  rights  is  an  international 
obligation  assumed  by  these  Governments  when 
they  signed  the  peace  treaties  and  not  a  matter 
of  purely  domestic  jurisdiction.  The  Bulgarian, 
Hungarian,  and  Rumanian  notes  make  other  ac- 
cusations against  the  United  States  which  are  both 
false  and  not  germane  to  the  issue  of  violation  of 
human  rights ;  for  example,  all  three  Governments 
accuse  the  United  States  of  supporting  Fascist 
elements  in  those  countries. 

Receipt  of  these  three  notes  confirms  the  exist- 
ence of  "disputes"  concerning  the  execution  and 
interpretation  of  the  treaties.  The  treaties  them- 
selves (article  36  of  the  Bulgarian  treaty,  40  of 
the  Hungarian  treaty,  and  38  of  the  Rumanian 
treaty)  provide  specific  procedures  for  the  settle- 
ment of  disputes.  The  Department  is  consulting 
with  interested  signatory  governments  with  a  view 
to  proceeding  under  the  provisions  of  these  arti- 
cles (United  Kingdom,  Canada,  Australia,  and 
New  Zealand  with  respect  to  Hungary  and  Ru- 
mania; United  Kingdom,  Australia,  and  New 
Zealand  with  respect  to  Hungary,  Rumania,  and 
Bulgaria ;  Canada  was  not  a  signatory  of  the  Bul- 
garian treaty).  The  procedure  calls  for,  first,  re- 
sort to  the  three  heads  of  mission  (American, 
British,  and  Soviet)  in  each  capital.  If  they  do 
not  reach  agreement  within  two  months,  each  dis- 
pute shall  be  referred  to  a  commission  composed 
of  one  representative  of  each  party  and  a  third 
member  selected  by  mutual  agreement  of  the  two 
parties ;  should  they  fail  to  agree  within  a  period 
of  one  month  on  the  appointment  of  a  third  mem- 
ber, the  Secretary-General  of  the  United  Nations 
may  be  requested  by  either  party  to  make  the  ap- 
pointment. These  commissions,  according  to  the 
treaty,  can  take  binding  decisions  by  majority 
vote. 

The  United  Nations  General  Assembly  ap- 
proved last  Saturday,  by  a  vote  of  34  to  6,  a  reso- 

May    15,    1949 


lution  expressing  serious  concern  over  the  charges 
made  against  Hungary  and  Bulgaria  and  express- 
ing the  hope  that  measures  taken  under  the  peace 
treaties  would  be  diligently  applied  in  order  to 
insure  respect  for  human  rights  and  fimdamental 
freedoms.  This  resolution  is  an  indication  of  gen- 
eral support  througliout  the  world  for  the  action 
we  have  initiated  under  the  peace  treaties.  The 
six  votes  cast  against  the  resolution  were  those  of 
the  Soviet  bloc. 

Benjamin  V.  Cohen's  speech  made  at  Lake  Suc- 
cess during  the  Assembly  discussion  on  this  sub- 
ject on  April  18  clearly  sets  forth  our  views  on  the 
possibilities  and  benefits  of  international  action 
in  this  field  and  of  the  American  concept  of  a  free 
society  tolerant  of  dissent  in  contrast  to  the  police 
state  which  suppresses  all  independent  opinion.^ 

STATEMENT  BY  BENJAMIN  V.  COHEN' 

The  resolution  now  before  the  Assembly  deals 
with  the  important  question  of  human  rights  and 
fundamental  freedoms  in  Bulgaria  and  in 
Hungary.  Before  putting  this  question  on  the 
agenda,  the  Assembly  debated  and  decided  its 
own  competence  to  discuss  it.  The  Ad  Hoc 
Political  Committee,  to  which  the  Assembly  re- 
ferred the  item,  also  gave  the  issue  of  competence 
full  attention.  There  is,  therefore,  no  need  to 
reargue  this  issue  now. 

In  the  Ad  Hoc  Political  Committee,  the  dele- 
gates expressed  the  views  and  sentiments  of  their 
respective  governments  and  peoples  in  regard  to 
this  question  of  human  rights  in  Bulgaria  and 
Hungary,  with  special  reference  to  the  recent 
trials  of  the  church  leaders  in  these  countries. 
The  views  and  sentiments  expressed  reveal  tha 
widespread  anxiety,  profound  concern,  and  in- 
tense feeling  that  the  recent  trials  have  aroused 
throughout  the  world. 

A  number  of  delegations,  including  my  own, 
made  serious  charges  of  systematic  suppression  of 
civil  rights  in  Bulgaria  and  Hungary.  In  the 
treaties  of  peace,  the  Governments  of  these  two 
former  enemy  states  undertook  a  solemn  interna- 
tional obligation  to  safeguard  the  human  rights 
and  fundamental  freedoms  of  all  persons  within 
their  jurisdiction.     In  the  view  of  the  Government 

•  Bulletin  of  Apr.  10,  1949,  p.  450,  and  May  1,  1949, 
p.  556. 

'  Made  before  the  General  Assembly  on  Apr.  28,  1949, 
and  released  to  the  press  by  the  U.S.  Mission  to  the  United 
Nations  on  the  same  date. 


611 


of  the  United  States,  as  our  delegation  pointed  out 
in  the  Committee,  in  eacli  of  these  countries  a 
similar  pattern  of  action  lias  been  followed.  A 
minority  group  has  seized  the  instrumentalities  of 
government  through  force  and  intimidation  and 
maintained  itself  in  power  througli  suppression  of 
every  one  of  the  human  rights  and  fundamental 
freedoms  which  these  states  have  solemnly  under- 
taken to  observe  in  the  treaties  of  peace.  There 
is  evidence  of  a  clear  design  on  the  part  of  these 
governments  to  eliminate  the  leaders  of  political 
parties  and  the  leaders  of  religious  groups  who 
have  refused  to  subordinate  themselves  and  to  use 
their  influence  to  subordinate  their  followers  to 
the  dictates  of  the  Communist  Party.  Making 
all  due  allowances  for  legitimate  differences  of 
ojiinion  as  to  the  appropriate  scope  of  civil  and 
religious  fi'eedoms,  wo  cannot  see  that  any  sub- 
stantive civil  or  religious  freedom  can  survive  in 
these  countries,  if  the  shabbiest  sort  of  excuse  suf- 
fices to  liquidate  political  and  religious  leaders 
who  refuse  to  accept  and  support  the  prevailing 
totalitarianism.  These  leaders  have  been  driven 
from  office  and  brought  to  trial  on  the  pretext  that 
they  have  violated  national  laws.  Actually  there 
is  good  reason  to  believe  that  they  are  being  perse- 
cuted and  imprisoned  not  for  the  offenses  with 
which  they  have  been  charged,  but  because  their 
governments  have  decided  to  liquidate  them  as 
sources  of  independent  opinion. 

We  cannot  accept  the  proposition  that  under  the 
guise  of  dissolving  Fascist  or  subversive  organiza- 
tions the  Governments  of  Bulgaria  and  Huncary 
are  entitled  to  suppress  the  expression  of  views 
that  are  displeasing  to  the  ruling  groups.  While 
we  do  not  question  the  right  of  a  state  to  protect 
itself  from  those  who  endeavor  to  overthrow  the 
state  by  force  and  violence,  this  right  does  not 
justify  the  suppression  of  all  efforts  to  seek  changes 
by  peaceful  means.  It  is  not  enough  for  a  state 
to  keep  the  outward  forms  of  religious  worship 
intact  while  absorbing  the  churches  into  the  state 
and  using  them  for  its  own  political  purposes. 

The  United  States  Delegation  reiterates  its 
denial  of  the  charges  made  that  the  United  States 
in  some  way  conspired  with  the  persons  accused  in 
Bulgaria  and  Hungary.  We  repudiate  these 
charges  as  baseless  and  absurd.  The  United 
States  has  endeavored  to  maintain  friendly  rela- 
tions with  these  countries  and  their  people  but 
has  not  attempted  to  interfere  in  their  internal 
affairs  or  to  disturb  friendly  relations  between 
these  countries  and  other  powers.  Moreover,  as 
a  signatory  to  the  treaties  of  peace,  the  United 
States  has  assumed  definite  responsibilities  in  rela- 
tion to  Bulgaria  and  Hungary. 

The  United  States  believes  in  an  open  world 
and  repudiates  the  idea  that  any  country  or  people 
who  are  friendly  to  us  must  be  hostile  to  any  other 
country.  It  is  strange  that  those  who  profess  to 
bo  opposed  to  the  division  of  the  world  into  hostile 
blocs  insist  upon  regarding  any  interest  on  our 


part,  however  legitimate,  towards  countries 
friendly  to  them  as  hostile  and  conspiratorial. 
Those  who  profess  to  want  a  friendly,  peaceful 
world  should  act  in  a  peaceful,  friendly  spirit. 
They  should  not  seek  refuge  in  an  artificial  and 
self-imposed  isolation  which  makes  them  see  a 
plot  in  every  effort  to  maintain  friendly  inter- 
coui-se  with  them. 

In  preparing  a  I'esolution  for  the  consideration 
by  the  Assembly,  the  Ad  Hoc  Political  Committee 
made  a  special  and,  I  think,  a  commendable  effort 
to  obtain  an  agi'eement  on  the  collective  expres- 
sion of  concern  regarding  the  events  in  Bulgaria 
and  Hungary  in  such  a  way  as  to  avoid  aggravat- 
ing differences  and  making  more  difficult  construc- 
tive, remedial  action.  The  Committee  has  en- 
deavored to  facilitate  and  encourage  clarification 
of  the  issues  and  the  safeguarding  of  human  rights 
and  fundamental  freedoms  under  the  available 
treaty  procedures.  In  its  proposed  resolution, 
the  Committee  has  not  only  shown  great  self-re- 
straint but  has  acted  in  conformity  with  the 
Charter  concept  of  the  United  Nations  as  a  center 
for  harmonizing  the  actions  of  nations  in  the  at- 
tainment of  common  ends. 

The  proposed  resolution  takes  into  account  that 
on  entering  into  the  highly  important  but  delicate 
field  of  human  rights  and  fundamental  freedoms, 
even  when  the  question,  as  the  one  before  us,  in- 
volves clear  international  obligations  under  a 
treaty,  the  task  of  the  Assembly  is  not  only  to  make 
recommendations  correct  in  principle,  but  to  make 
recommendations  that  will,  in  fact,  further  and 
not  retard  the  i)ractical  realization  of  its  objective. 

Let  us  therefore  consider  just  what  the  pending 
resolution  proposes.  First,  it  declares  that  one  ot 
the  purposes  of  the  Charter  is  to  achieve  inter- 
national cooperation  in  promoting  and  encourag- 
ing respect  for  human  rights  and  fundamental 
freedoms  for  all,  without  distinction  as  to  race, 
sex,  language,  or  religion.  Surely  there  can  or 
should  be  no  difference  among  us  as  to  this  objec- 
tive, which  is  clearly  and  expressly  stated  in  the 
Charter. 

Second,  the  pending  resolution  takes  note  of  the 
serious  charges  that  have  been  made  regarding  the 
violation  of  human  rights  and  fundamental  free- 
doms in  Bulgaria  and  Hungary  and  expresses  the 
deep  concern  of  the  Assembly  therein.  Certainly 
it  cannot  be  denied  that  some  countries,  including 
my  own,  have  made  serious  charges  in  respect  to 
the  violation  of  the  human  rights  clauses  of  the 
peace  treaties,  or  that  there  is  deep  and  profound 
concern  throughout  the  world  in  these  charges 
that  civil  liberties  and  fundamental  freedoms  have 
been  suppressed  in  Central  and  Eastern  Europe. 
There  are  a  few  states  which  have  denied  that  there 
is  sound  reason  for  this  concern,  but  they  have 
scarcely  tried  to  deny  that  this  concern  does  exist. 

Third,  the  resolution  takes  note  of  the  steps  ■ 
taken  to  invoke  the  treaty  procedures  and  ex-  ■ 
presses  the  hope  that  measures  will  be  taken  under      ■ 

Deparfment  of  State  Bulletin 


the  treaty  to  insure  respect  for  human  rights  and 
fundamental  freedoms.  Here  again  it  is  not  sub- 
ject to  dispute  that  steps  have  been  taken  to  in- 
voke the  treaty  procedures.  And  even  the  states 
which  have  most  strongly  opposed  any  action  by 
the  Assembly  in  this  matter  have  themselves 
pointed  to  the  treaty  procedures  as  providing  the 
proper  and  appropriate  measures  for  determining 
the  facts  and  securing  compliance  with  the 
human  rights  provisions  under  the  peace  treaties. 

Fourth,  the  resolution  draws  the  attention  of 
the  Governments  of  Bulgaria  and  Hungary  to 
their  obligations  under  the  treaties,  including  the 
obligation  to  cooperate  in  the  settlement  of  these 
questions.  Certainly  there  should  be  no  objection 
to  the  Assembly  urging  a  settlement  of  issues  of 
world-wide  concern  through  means  already  as- 
sented to  by  these  countries. 

Fifth,  and  finally,  the  resolution  reserves  the 
right  of  the  Assembly  to  consider  this  subject 
further  at  its  next  session,  a  right  which  the  As- 
sembly clearly  has  in  any  event  and  a  right  for  the 
exercise  of  which  there  should  be  no  occasion  if 
all  parties  concerned  cooperate  in  carrying  out 
the  procedures  in  the  treaties  as  they  have  obli- 
gated themselves  to  do. 

The  resolution  before  us  proposed  by  Bolivia, 
and  supported  by  a  large  majority  of  the  Ad  Hoc 
Political  Committee  in  the  hope  of  encouraging 
an  honest  effort  on  the  part  of  all  concerned  to 
secure  respect  for  human  rights  and  fundamental 
freedoms  in  these  countries,  deserves  wholehearted 
acceptance  by  the  Assembly.  The  United  States 
Delegation  believes  and  hopes  that  the  serious  and 
painstaking  efforts  of  the  Committee  to  avoid  any 
prejudgment  on  the  outcome  of  the  procedures  to 
be  followed  under  the  peace  treaties  should  not 
only  facilitate  the  can-ying  out  of  the  treaty  pro- 
cedures but  should  go  far  to  secure  the  greatest 
possible  support  for  the  resolution  in  the  Assembly. 

So  far  as  the  United  States  Government  is  con- 
cerned, we  shall  regard  it  as  a  duty  to  carry 
through  the  procedures  set  forth  in  the  peace 
treaties.  AVe  are  prepared  to  do  everything  within 
our  power  to  establish  the  facts  and  responsibili- 
ties, to  secure  a  full  and  fair  hearing  of  the  charges 
which  have  been  made,  and  to  achieve  some  real 
guarantee  of  respect  for  human  rights  and  funda- 
mental freedoms  in  these  former  enemy  countries. 

To  these  and  other  European  nations,  four  years 
ago,  the  three  war  leaders  of  the  United  Nations — 
Stalin,  Churchill,  and  Roosevelt,  solemnly  pledged 
that  freedom  would  be  restored;  not  to  their 
former  rulers  and  not  to  a  new  set  of  rulers  but 
to  these  peoples  themselves.  The  human  rights 
clauses  were  inserted  in  the  peace  treaties  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  recommendation  previously 
made  by  the  Economic  and  Social  Council  of  the 
United  Nations.  Under  the  Charter  we  have  all 
committed  ourselves  to  promote  respect  for  and 
observance  of  human  rights  and  fundamental 
freedoms. 

May  IS,  J949 


In  carrying  out  these  pledges,  we  can  do  much 
to  regain  in  peace  the  unity  that  bound  us  together 
in  war.  We  united  in  war  to  preserve  freedom 
from  tyranny.  Unity  in  peace  can  be  maintained 
only  on  the  basis  of  freedom.  In  this  diversified 
woi'ld,  where  men  and  nations  cherish  difl'erent 
ideas  and  different  ways  of  life,  men  and  nations 
can  find  unity  and  peace  only  in  learning  tolerance 
for  ideas  and  ways  of  life  which  they  cannot  and 
will  not  share.  Men  may  be  imprisoned  and  put 
to  death,  but  force  and  suppression  cannot  crush 
men's  faiths  and  ideas.  Deviation  and  error  need 
not  be  feared  where  faith  and  reason  are  free  to 
combat  them. 

We  cannot  build  a  friendly,  peaceful  world 
simply  by  calling  those  with  whom  we  differ  war- 
mongers, imperialists,  traitors,  spies,  or  Fascists. 
Name  calling  and  abuse  are  not  effective  instru- 
ments of  wise  statesmanship. 

If  we  wish  a  friendly,  peaceful  world,  we  must 
establish  conditions  which  make  for  a  friendly, 
peaceful  world.  There  cannot  be  a  friendly,  peace- 
ful world  when  individuals  are  not  free  peacefully 
to  communicate  their  own  thoughts  and  freely  to 
practice  their  own  religion  under  the  guidance  of 
their  chosen  spiritual  leaders.  If  we  wish  to  pre- 
serve the  common  interest  of  all  people  in  peace, 
we  must  safeguard  the  human  rights  and  funda- 
mental freedoms  which  are  cherished  by  all  men 
in  all  nations.  Let  us  find  peace,  unity,  and  free- 
dom for  all  in  our  common  humanity,  in  the  uni- 
versal brotherhood  of  man. 

TEXTS  OF  RESOLUTIONS  ADOPTED  BY  THE 
GENERAL  ASSEMBLY 

U.N.  doc.  A/851 
Adopted  Apr.  30,  1949 

The  General  Assembly, 

Considering  that  one  of  the  purposes  of  the 
United  Nations  is  to  achieve  international  co-oper- 
ation in  promoting  and  encouraging  respect  for 
human  rights  and  fundamental  freedoms  for  all, 
without  distinction  as  to  race,  sex,  language  or 
religion. 

Considering  that  the  Governments  of  Bulgaria 
and  Hungary  have  been  accused,  before  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly,  of  acts  contrary  to  the  purposes  of 
the  United  Nations  and  to  their  obligations  under 
the  Peace  Treaties  to  ensure  to  all  persons  within 
their  respective  jurisdictions  the  enjoyment  of 
human  rights  and  fundamental  freedoms, 

1.  Expresses  its  deep  concern  at  the  gi'ave  accusa- 
tions made  against  the  Governments  of  Bulgaria 
and  Hungary  regarding  the  suppression  of  human 
rights  and  fundamental  freedoms  in  those 
countries ; 

2.  Notes  with  satisfaction  that  steps  have  been 
taken  by  several  States  signatories  to  the  Peace 
Treaties  with  Bulgaria  and  Hungary  regarding 
these  accusations,  and  expresses  the  hope  that 
measures  will  be  diligently  applied,  in  accordance 
with  the  Treaties,  in  order  to  ensure  respect  for 


human  rights  and  fundamental  freedoms; 

3.  Most  ukokntly  draws  tlie  attention  of  the  Gov- 
ernments of  Bulgaria  and  Hungary  to  their  obli- 
gations under  the  Peace  Treaties,  including  the 
obligation  to  co-operate  in  the  settlement  of  all 
these  questions; 

4.  DecklPH  to  retain  the  question  on  the  agenda  of 
the  fourth  regular  session  of  the  General  Assembly 
of  the  United  Nations. 

U.N.  doc.  A/842 
Adopted  Apr.  25,  1949 

The  General  Assembly, 

CoNSiDEHiNT.  the  item  pro])osed  by  Chile  on 
"violation  by  the  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Re- 
publics of  fundamental  human  rights,  traditional 
diplomatic  practices  and  other  principles  of  the 
Charter",  which  violation  has  consisted  in  prevent- 
ing the  Soviet  wives  of  citizens  of  other  nationali- 
ties from  leaving  tlieir  country  with  their  hus- 
bands or  in  order  to  join  them  abroad,  even  when 
they  are  married  to  persons  belonging  to  foreign 
diplomatic  missions,  or  to  members  of  their  fami- 
lies or  retinue, 

Ct>NsiDERiNG  that  in  the  iiieamble  to  the  Charter 
of  the  United  Nations  all  the  signatory  countries 
resolved  "to  re-affirm  faith  in  fundamental  human 
rights,  in  the  dignity  and  worth  of  tlie  human  per- 
son, in  the  equal  rights  of  men  and  women  .  .  .", 

Considering  that  Article  1,  paragraph  3,  of  the 
Charter  binds  all  Memlters  to  encourage  "respect 
for  human  rights  and  for  fundamental  freedoms 
for  all  without  distinction  as  to  race,  sex,  language 
or  religion",  and  that  in  Article  55   (c)   of  the 


Charter  the  Members  undertook  to  promote  "uni- 
versal respect  for,  and  observance  of,  human  rights 
and  fundamental  freedoms  for  all  without  dis- 
tinction as  to  race,  sex,  language,  or  religion", 

Considering,  lastly,  that  the  Economic  and  So- 
cial Council,  in  pursuance  of  the  powers  conferred 
upon  it  by  Article  62,  paragraph  2,  of  the  Charter, 
in  its  resolution  154  (VII),  D,  dated  23  August 
1948,  deplored  the  "legislative  or  administrative 
provisions  which  deny  to  a  woman  the  right  to 
leave  her  country  of  origin  and  reside  with  her 
husband  in  any  other"  and  that  the  Universal 
Declaration  of  Human  Rights  formulated  by  the 
United  Nations  General  Assembly,  in  its  Articles 
13  and  16,  provides  that  everyone  has  the  right  to 
leave  any  country  including  his  own  and  that  men 
and  women  of  full  age  have  the  right  to  marry 
without  any  limitation  due  to  race,  nationality  or 
religion. 

Declares  that  the  measures  which  prevent  or 
coerce  the  wives  of  citizens  of  other  nationalities 
from  leaving  their  country  of  origin  with  their 
husbands  or  in  order  to  join  them  abroad,  are  not 
in  conformity  with  the  Charter;  and  that  when 
tliose  measures  refer  to  the  wives  of  persons  be- 
longing to  foreign  diplomatic  missions,  or  of 
members  of  their  families  or  retinue,  they  are  con- 
trary to  courtesy,  to  diplomatic  practices  and  to 
the  principle  of  reciprocity,  and  are  likely  to  im- 
pair friendly  relations  among  nations; 

Recommends  the  Government  of  the  Union  of 
Soviet  Socialist  Republics  to  withdraw  the  meas- 
ures of  such  a  nature  which  have  been  adopted. 


Resolutions  Adopted  by  the  Trusteeship  Council, 
Fourth  Session,  24  January  to  25  March  1949 


U.N.  doc.  TINF/O 
Dated  April  12  1949. 


45  (IV). 

46  (IV) . 

47  (IV). 

48  (IV) . 

49  (IV). 

50  (IV). 

51  (IV). 

614 


Comments  and  suggestions  arising 
out  of  the  di.sciussion  in  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  on  the  Report  of 
the  Trusteeship  Council  cover- 
ing its  second  and  third  sessions 
(5th  meetinK,  28  January  1949). 

Relations  with  the  Security  Coun- 
cil (46th  mooting,  24"  March 
1919). 

Collaboration  with  the  specialized 
agencies  (29th  meeting,  1  March 
1949). 

Requests  for  additional  informa- 
tion (48th  meeting,  25  March 
1949). 

Question  of  racial  discrimination 
in  Ruanda-Urundi  (38th  meet- 
ing, 14  March  1949). 

Question  of  racial  discrimination 
in  Tanganyika  (44th  meeting, 
23  March  1949). 

Petition  from  Shariff  Gulam  Ali 
Shah  concerning  Ruanda-Urundi 
(48th  meeting,  25  March  1949). 


T/296 


T/268 


T/297 


T/237         52  (IV). 
53  (IV) . 


54  (IV). 


55  (IV) . 


T/327 

T/280         ^"^(I^')- 

T/295 


57  (m. 


Petition  from  Mr.  R.  Van  Saceg- 
hem  concerning  Ruanda-Urundi 
(48th  meeting,  25  March  1949). 

Petition  from  Mr.  Holmboe  con- 
cerning Tanganyika  (48th  meet- 
ing, 25  March  1949). 

Petition  from  Mr.  A.  J.  Siggins 
concerning  Tanganyika  (48th 
meeting,  25  March  1949). 

Petition  from  Mrs.  Halina  Garas 
concerning  Tanganyika  (48th 
meeting,  25  March  1949). 

Petition  from  the  Natural  Rulers 
of  Southern  Section  of  Togoland 
concerning  Togoland  under 
British  administration  (48th 
meeting,  25  March  1949). 

Petition  from  Mr.  Nanji  Jamal 
Kalla  concerning  Ruanda- 
I'rundi  (48th  meeting,  25  March 
1949). 


T/298 
T/299 
T/300 
T/301 
T/302- 

T/303 


Department  of  State   Bulletin 


Petition  from  Mr.  Mulla  Atta 
Muhammad  concerning  Ruanda- 
Urundi  (48th  meeting,  25  March 
1949). 

Petition  from  Mr.  Ahmen  Ishak 
concerning  Ruanda-Urundi  (48th 
meeting,  25  March  1949). 

Petition  from  Mr.  Moladad  Pirand- 
ita  concerning  Ruanda-Unmdi 
(4Sth  meeting,  25  March  1949). 

Petition  from  Mwambutsa,  the 
Mwami  of  Urundi.  concerning 
Ruanda-Urundi  and  Tanganyilva 
(48th  meeting,  25  March  1949). 

Petition  from  I\Ir.  Gassamunyiga 
Matthieu  concerning  Ruanda- 
Urundi  (48th  meeting,  25  March 
1949). 

Petition  from  Mr.  Francis  Rukeba 
concerning  Ruanda-Urundi  (48th 
meeting,  25  March  1949). 

Petition  from  Mr.  Mu.ssa  Kackesset 
bin  Kalimba  concerning  Ruanda- 
Urundi  (4Sth  meeting,  25  March 
1949). 

Petition  from  Mr.  G.  Clement 
Ntilempaqa  concerning  Ruanda- 
Urundi  (48th  meeting,  25  March 
1949). 

Petition  from  twenty-two  Shin- 
yanga  Township  Africans  con- 
cerning Tanganyika  (48th  meet- 
ing, 25  ISIarch  1949). 

Petition  from  Mr.  A.  Vadasz  con- 
cerning Tanganyika  (48th  meet- 
ing, 25  March  1949) . 

Petition  from  the  Tanganyika 
Bahaya  Union  concerning 
Ruanda-Urundi  and  Tanganyika 
(4Sth  meeting.  25  March  1949). 

Petition  from  Mr.  D.  M.  Anjaria 
concerning  .Tanganyika  (48th 
meeting,  25  March  1949). 

Petition  from  Mr.  D.  M.  Anjaria 
concerning  Tanganyika  (48th 
meeting,  25  March  1949). 

Petition  from  the  Shariff  Is-Hak 
Community  concerning  Tangan- 
yika (48th  meeting,  25  March 
1949). 

Petition  from  the  Chagga  Council 
concerning  Tanganyika  (48th 
meeting,  25  March  1949). 

Petition  from  Mr.  B.  O'Donovan 
concerning  Tanganyika  (48th 
meeting,  25  March  1949). 

Petition  from  the  Tanganyika 
African  Association  concerning 
Tanganyika  (48th  meeting,  25 
March  1949). 

Petition  from  the  Nauran  Council 
of  Chiefs  concerning  Nauru 
(48th  meeting,  25  March  1949). 

Petition  from  the  St.  Joan's  Inter- 
national Social  and  Political  Al- 
liance concerning  all  Trust  Ter- 
ritories (48th  meeting,  25  March 
1949). 

Petition  from  Mr.  Ernst  C.  F. 
Kohne  concerning  the  Cam- 
eroons  under  French  adminis- 
tration (48th  meeting,  25  March 
1949). 


T/304 

T/305 
T/306 
T/307 

T/308 

T/309 
T/310 

T/311 

T/312 

T/313 

T/314 

T/315 
T/316 
T/317 

T/318 
T/319 
T/320 

T/321 
T/322 

T/323 


Official 

Title 

Document ' 

78  (IV) 

79  (IV) ... . 

80  (IV) .... 

81  (IV).... 

82  (IV) 

83  (IV) .... 

84  (IV) ... . 

Petition  from  Mr.  Paul  Wamba 
Kudililwa  concerning  Tangan- 
yika (48th  meeting,  25  March 
1949). 

Petition  from  Mr.  Emil  Ruppel 
concerning  Tanganyika  (48th 
meeting,  25  March  1949). 

Petition  from  the  Bakweri  Land 
Committee  concerning  the  Cam- 
eroons  under  British  administra- 
tion (44th  meeting,  23  March 
1949). 

Committee  on  Administratiye 
Unions  (4th  meeting,  27  Jan- 
uary 1949). 

Question  of  the  Trust  Territories 
within  the  French  Union  (36th 
meeting,  10  March  1949). 

Educational  Adyancement  in 
Trust  Territories  (13th  meeting, 
9  February  1949). 

Committee  on  Higher  Education 
in  Trust  Territories  (29th  meet- 
ing, 1  March  1949). 

T/324 

T/325 
T/326 

T/236 
T/279 
T/253 
T/267 

1  The  resolutions  adopted  by  the  Trusteeship  Council 
during  its  fourth  session  -nill  be  republished  in  a  docu- 
ment bearing  the  symbol  number  T/328. 


THE  CONGRESS 

Extension  of  the  European  Recovery  Program.  Report 
of  the  Committee  on  Foreign  Relations  on  S.  1209,  a 
biU  to  amend  the  Economic  Cooperation  Act  of  1948.  S. 
Rept.  100,  81st  Cong.,  1st  sess.    iii,  21  pp. 

Trade  Agreements  Extension  Act  of  1949.  S.  Rept.  107, 
81st  Cong.,  1st  sess.    2  pp. 

Transporting  Iron  Ore  on  the  Great  Lakes.  S.  Rept. 
110,  81st  Cong.,  1st  sess.    2  pp. 

Enhancing  Further  the  Security  of  the  United  States 
by  Preventing  Disclosures  of  Information  Concerning  the 
Cryptographic  Systems  and  the  Communication  Intelli- 
gence Activities  of  the  United  States.  S.  Rept.  HI,  81st 
Cong.,  1st  sess.     5  pp. 

Amending  Title  17  of  the  United  States  Code  Entitled 
"Copyrights,"  With  Respect  to  Relaxation  of  Provisions 
Governing  Copyright  of  Foreign  Works.  H.  Rept.  238, 
Slst  Cong.,  1st  sess.     10  pp. 

Extending  an  Invitation  To  Hold  the  1956  Olympic 
Games  at  Detroit,  Mich.  H.  Rept.  240,  81st  Cong.,  1st 
sess.     1  p. 

Authorizing  a  Reprint  of  Supplement  III  (Country 
Studies  A,  B,  and  C)  of  the  Report  of  the  Subcommittee 
on  National  and  International  Movements  of  the  Com- 
mittee on  Foreign  Affairs,  Entitled,  "The  Strategy  and 
Tactics  of  World  Communism"  for  the  Use  of  the  Com- 
mittee on  Foreign  Affairs.  H.  Rept.  252,  Slst  Cong.,  1st 
sess.     1  p. 

Authorizing  the  Printing  of  Additional  Copies  of  House 
Document  401,  Eightieth  Congress,  Entitled  "Fascism  in 
Action."     H.  Rept.  253,  81st  Cong.,  1st  sess.     1  p. 

Enabling  the  People  of  Hawaii  to  Form  a  Constitution 
and  State  Government  and  to  be  Admitted  into  the  Union 
on  an  Equal  Footing  with  the  Original  States.  H.  Rept. 
254,  Slst  Cong.,  1st  sess.     27  pp. 


May   15,    1949 


The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations 


[May  7-13] 

The  Spanish  Question 

The  General  Assembly  will  take  up  soon  a  reso- 
lution approved  by  its  I'olitical  Committee  leav- 
ing members  full  freedom  of  action  regai-ding  their 
diplomatic  relations  with  Spain.  The  resolution 
states  tliat  it  docs  not  prejudice  the  1946  Assembly 
resolution  admonishing  the  Franco  regime,  but 
does  allow  each  nieinber  to  decide  for  itself  con- 
cerning its  (lii)lomatic  relations  with  Spain.  The 
1946  measure  called  for  the  withdrawal  from  Spain 
of  heads  of  diplomatic  missions. 

The  vote  on  the  resolution,  submitted  by  Bolivia, 
Brazil.  Colombia,  and  Peru,  was  25  to  16,  with  16 
abstentions,  the  United  States  being  one  of  the 
countries  to  abstain.  A  Polish  resolution  calling 
for  compliance  with  previous  United  Nations 
declarations  and  resolutions  on  Spain,  recommend- 
ing against  arms  export  and  treaties,  reaffirming 
that  a  "democratic"  Spain  would  be  welcomed  into 
the  United  Nations  and  specialized  agencies,  and 
expressing  confidence  the  Security  Council  would 
fulfill  its  Charter  responsibilities,  was  rejected. 

United  States  Delegate  Ray  Atherton  in  the  de- 
bate stated  that  the  United  States  position  on 
Spain  remains  unchanged  and  the  United  States 
continues  to  hope  for  the  progressive  development 
of  free  and  democratic  institutions  in  Spain. 
Stating  he  would  not  take  time  for  detailed  refu- 
tation of  the  various  distortions  and  inaccuracies 
about  the  United  States  expressed  by  Poland  and 
associated  nations,  Mr.  Atherton  did  say  that  the 
United  States  has  no  military  alliance  with  Spain 
and  has  given  no  military  assistance  to  Spain,  and 
that  no  military  or  naval  missions  are  maintained 
in  Spain.  He  added  that  the  United  States  has 
made  no  overtures  toward  bringing  Spain  into  the 
United  Nations,  ERP,  or  the  Atlantic  pact  since 
participation  in  such  cooperative  projects  is  a 
matter  for  determination  by  all  participants  and 
not  by  the  United  States  alone. 

Israeli  Membership 

By  a  vote  of  37  to  12,  with  9  abstentions,  the 
General  Assembly  approved  on  May  11,  the  ad- 
mission of  Israel  as  the  fifty-ninth  member  of  the 
Ignited  Nations.  Several  days  earlier,  the  Ad  Hoc 
Political  Committee  had  approved  the  7-power 
resolution  reconmiending  admission,  of  which  the 
United  States  was  one  of  the  cosponsors. 

United  States  Delegate  Warren  K.  Austin  told 
the  Assembly  that  he  believed  Israel  would  be  a 
valuable  member.     He  said  that  the  exhaustive 


discussion  in  the  Committee  was  evidence  of  the 
deep-rooted  desire  of  the  members  of  the  United 
Nations  for  a  just  and  equitable  solution  of  the 
Palestine  problem,  especially  the  questions  of 
Jerusalem  and  the  future  of  the  Arab  refugees. 
He  considered  that  the  responsibility  for  a  peace- 
ful settlement  of  the  Palestine  question  now  rests 
with  the  parties  and  the  Palestine  Conciliation 
Commission.  He  affirmed  that  the  United  States, 
as  a  member  of  the  Commission,  would  continue 
to  work  for  settlement  of  all  outstanding  issues  on 
tlie  basis  of  the  principles  laid  down  by  the 
Assembly. 

Delegates  from  the  six  Arab  states,  who  had 
contended  throughout  the  lengthy  debate  that 
Israel  did  not  meet  Charter  requirements  for  mem- 
bership, walked  out  of  the  Assembly  at  the  con- 
clusion of  the  vote,  but  subsequently  resumed  their 
seats. 

President's  Report  on  the  United  Nations  for  1948 

President  Truman  reaffirmed  United  States  sup- 
port for  the  United  Nations  and  expressed  pride 
in  the  ways  in  which  that  support  was  expressed 
during  1948  in  his  annual  report  to  Congress, 
transmitted  May  12,  on  United  States  participation 
in  the  United  Nations  during  1948.  In  a  letter 
accompanying  his  report,  the  President  said,  '"We 
Inive  taken  the  leadership  in  many  fields  of  inter- 
national relations.  We  can  be  proud  of  what  we 
have  done." 

The  report  included  a  letter  from  Secretary 
Acheson  in  which  he  stated  that  both  '"hope  and 
di.sappointment"  marked  United  States  participa- 
tion in  the  United  Nations.  "The  hope,"'  he  said, 
"grew  out  of  the  continuing  feeling  that  the  prin- 
ciples and  purposes  of  the  United  Nations  Charter 
offer  the  best  basis  of  a  peaceful  world  with  inter- 
national justice  and  respect  for  individual  human 
riglifs  and  (hat  most  members  of  the  organization 
are  working  loyally  in  that  direction.  At  the  same 
time  there  was  disappointment  because  of  the 
failure  of  certain  states  to  observe  tlieir  obliga- 
tions luuler  the  Charter  on  matters  which  seriously 
affect  tlie  maintenance  of  peace."' 

The  first  .section  of  the  report  discusses  the  de- 
vclojiment  of  the  organization  and  work  of  the 
major  United  Nations  organs.  A  second  part  con- 
siders the  major  problems  whicli  the  organization 
has  faced  in  each  of  its  fields  of  activity.  Other 
sections  deal  with  the  field  of  human  rights,  the 
problems  of  dependent  territories,  and  with  admin- 
istrative and  budgetary  questions. 

Deparfmenf  oi  Stafe  Bulletin 


Italian  Colonies 

Tlie  Political  and  Security  Committee  on  May  6 
approved  a  plan  for  disposal  of  Italy's  prewar 
African  colonies,  except  for  western  Eritrea,  by  a 
vote  of  34  to  16,  with  7  abstentions.  The  plan 
adopted  was  proposed  by  a  16-nation  subcommittee 
and  based  on  the  Bevin-Sforza  formula  worked 
out  in  London  last  week  and  proposed  to  the  sub- 
committee by  the  United  Kingdom  representative. 

The  plan  contains  the  following  provisions:  (1) 
Italian  trusteeship  over  Somaliland;  (2)  incor- 
poration of  all  Eritrea  except  the  western  province 
into  Ethiopia;  (3)  separate  trusteeships  for  the 
three  parts  of  Lybia,  with  Britain  to  administer 
Cyrenaica,  France  to  administer  the  Fezzan,  and 
Italy  to  administer  Tripolitania  by  1951,  and 
Britain  to  continue  its  present  administration  until 
then.  Lybia  will  become  independent  in  10  years 
unless  the  Assembly  by  a  two-thirds  vote  decides 
otherwise.  The  provision  that  western  Eritrea 
should  be  incorporated  into  the  Sudan  was  deleted. 
Most  of  the  provisions  of  alternative  draft  resolu- 
tions were  defeated  overwhelmingly  before  the 
Committee  turned  to  the  subcommittee  resolution. 
The  United  States  voted  for  this  plan. 

Indians  in  South  Africa 

At  its  next  plenary  sessions,  the  General  As- 
sembly will  consider  two  resolutions  from  the 
Political  Committee  on  the  question  of  alleged 
discrimination  against  Indians  in  South  Africa. 
A  French-Mexican  proposal  would  invite  India, 
Pakistan,  and  the  Union  of  South  Africa  to  enter 
into  round-table  discussions  on  the  question,  taking 
into  consideration  the  terms  of  the  United  Nations 
Charter  and  Human  Rights  Declaration.  India's 
proposal  would  have_the  Assembly  declare  South 
Africa  guilty  of  violating  the  Charter  and  inter- 
national obligations  in  connection  with  the  alleged 
discrimination  and  would  have  a  three-member 
commission  study  the  situation  and  recommend  a 
solution.  The  South  African  proposal  determin- 
ing that  the  question  is  a  domestic  one  and  not 
within  the  competence  of  the  Assembly  was 
rejected. 

Trieste 

The  U.S.S.R.'s  February  17  resolution  provid- 
ing for  the  appointment  of  Col.  Hermann  Fleuck- 
iger  of  Switzerland  as  governor  of  the  Free  Terri- 
tory of  Trieste  was  rejected  by  the  Security  Council 
on  May  10.  Only  the  U.S.S.R.  and  the  Ukraine 
supported  the  proposal,  and  the  other  nine  mem- 
bers abstained.     The  Soviet  Delegate  Jakob  Malik 


charged  that  the  United  Kingdom,  the  United 
States,  and  France  were  delaying  the  implementa- 
tion of  treaty  clauses  on  Trieste  while  the  Soviet 
Union  sought  to  have  them  implemented.  Though 
only  the  delegates  of  the  Ukraine  and  the  U.S.S.R. 
spoke.  May  10,  the  United  States,  France,  and  the 
United  Kingdom  had  told  the  Council  in  earlier 
debate  on  February  17  that  there  was  no  use  con- 
sidering any  candidate  for  governor  of  Trieste 
because  only  the  return  of  Trieste  to  Italy  will  re- 
store stability  in  that  area. 

Indonesia 

Taking  into  consideration  the  preliminary 
agreement  between  the  Netherlands  and  the  Re- 
public of  Indonesia  which  was  reached  in  Batavia 
on  May  7,  the  Ad  Hoc  Political  Committee  voted 
to  defer  Assembly  consideration  of  the  Indonesian 
question  to  the  fourth  regular  session.  The  terms 
of  the  preliminary  agreement  should  in  the  near 
future  result  in  the  restoration  of  the  republican 
government  to  its  capital  at  Jogjakarta,  the  issu- 
ance of  an  effective  cease-fire,  and  the  holding  of 
a  conference  at  The  Hague  leading  to  a  definitive 
political  settlement. 

Agreement  was  reached  through  talks  which 
have  been  taking  place  in  Batavia  under  the  aus- 
pices of  the  Commission  for  Indonesia.  Discus- 
sions will  continue  until  complete  accord  is 
achieved,  and  for  this  purpose,  two  subcommittees 
established  by  the  agreement  are  now  functioning. 

Commission  on  Human  Rights 

The  Commission  on  Human  Rights,  opening  its 
fifth  session  May  9,  unanimously  reelected  Mrs. 
Roosevelt  as  chairman.  The  Commission  has  a  17- 
item  agenda,  one  of  the  most  important  subjects 
being  examination  of  a  draft  international  coven- 
ant on  human  rights  and  measures  for  its  imple- 
mentation. Mrs.  Roosevelt's  suggestion  that  the 
final  draft  of  this  covenant  should  be  submitted  to 
the  fifth  session  of  the  General  Assembly  rather 
than  next  fall,  met  with  considerable  support.  A 
subcommittee  was  established  to  facilitate  work 
on  items  relating  to  prevention  of  discrimination 
and  protection  of  minorities. 

Also  on  the  agenda  is  examination  of  a  memo- 
randum on  a  survey  of  forced  labor  in  the  Soviet 
Union  and  Communist-dominated  countries  of 
Eastern  .  Europe.  The  memorandum  was  pre- 
sented to  the  Economic  and  Social  Council  last 
February  by  the  American  Federation  of  Labor. 

Due  to  the  concurrent  session  of  the  General 
Assembly,  the  Human  Rights  Commission  had 
only  two  meetings  during  the  week. 


May  15,  7949 


INTERNATIONAL  ORGANIZATIONS  AND  CONFERENCES 


Report  on  Second  Session  of  General  Council,  IRO 

BY  GEORGE  L.  WARREN 


The  General  Council  of  the  International 
Refii<;ee  Organization  (Iro)  held  its  second  ses- 
sion in  Geneva  from  Marcli  29  to  April  8,  1949. 
The  Executive  Committee  held  its  fourth  session 
concurrently  in  Geneva  from  March  24  to  April 
7,  1949. 

Durinfi  the  course  of  the  session  it  was  an- 
nounced that  the  Governments  of  Italy  and  Swit- 
zerland liad  adhei-ed  to  the  constitution  of  Iro, 
and  conKe(iuently  their  representatives  sat  at  the 
table  for  the  first  time.  The  Iro  now  has  18  mem- 
bers: Australia,  Belgium.  Canada,  China,  Den- 
mark, Dominican  Republic.  France,  Guatemala, 
Iceland,  Italy,  Luxembourg.  Netherlands.  New 
Zealand.  Norway,  Switzerland,  United  Kingdom, 
United  States,  and  Venezuela.  The  Governments 
of  the  Dominican  Republic  and  Iceland  were  not 
represented  at  this  meeting. 

The  representative  of  Canada,  J.  Desy,  was 
elected  chairman  of  the  second  session;  the  repre- 
sentative of  Belgium,  J.  Schneider,  first  vice-chair- 
man ;  the  representative  of  Venezuela.  Dr.  V. 
Montoya,  second  vice-chairman;  and  the  repre- 
sentative of  Italy,  Prince  del  Drago,  was  elected 
rapporteur. 

The  Execut  ive  Committee  reported  on  all  actions 
taken  since  the  first  session  of  the  General  Council 
in  September  1948,  particularly  with  respect  to 
immigration  into  countries  of  the  Middle  East, 
evacuation  from  China  of  European  refugees, 
eligibility  of  Albanian  refugees  in  Greece  and  of 
refugees  from  Venezia  Giulia  and  Istria,  of 
Italian  racial  origin,  in  the  Free  Territory  of 
Trieste  and  Italy  who  had  not  opted  for  Italian 
citizenship..  The  Connnittee  also  examined  the 
plan  of  expenditure  for  the  third  financial  year 
1949-50  and  the  Director  General's  report  on  the 
activities  of  the  organization  since  July  1,  11)48, 
and  presented  its  conunents  on  these  documents 
to  the  Council.  The  Committee's  report  was 
apjiroved  by  the  Council. 

With  respect  to  innnigration  into  the  countries 
of  the  Middle  East,  the  Director  General  reported 
that  as  a  result  of  his  consultation  with  the 
Palestine  Conciliation  Commission,  he  would  re- 
sume payment  for  both  the  past  and  future  move- 
ment of  eligible  Jewish  refugees  from  Central 
Europe  to  Palestine.  This  administrative  de- 
cision was  accepted  by  all  the  membei-s  of  the 
Council  with  the  exception  of  the  United  Kingdom 
representative,  who  expressed  the  dissent  of  his 


Government  but  did  not  press  the  matter  further. 
To  provide  funds  for  the  payment  of  this  move- 
ment, a  total  of  9  million  dollars  was  provided  in 
the  plan  of  expenditure  adopted  for  the  fiscal  year 
1948-49  and  G50  thousand  dollars  in  the  plan  of 
expenditure  adopted  for  the  fiscal  year  1949-50. 
Negotiations  between  Iru  and  the  voluntary 
agencies  engaged  in  the  movement  were  initiated 
during  the  course  of  the  meeting  immediately 
after  these  decisions  had  been  taken  by  the  Council. 

The  eligibilit}'  for  Iro  assistance  of  Albanian 
refugees  of  Greek  racial  origin  in  Greece  and  of 
refugees  in  the  Free  Territory  of  Trieste  and  Italy, 
from  Venezia  Giulia  and  Istria.  of  Italian  racial 
origin,  who  had  not  opted  for  Italian  citizenship 
was  finally  determined  by  acceptance  by  the  Coun- 
cil of  certain  amendments  presented  by  the  Di- 
rector General  to  earlier  directives  issued  on  this 
subject. 

Alex  E.  Squadrilli,  Coordinator  for  Europe  of 
the  United  States  Displaced  Persons  Commission, 
addressed  the  Council  briefly  on  the  Commission's 
program  for  the  movement  of  the  remainder  of 
the  205  thousand  displaced  persons  eligible  for  ad- 
mission to  the  United  States  under  the  Displaced 
Persons  Act  of  1948.  He  proposed  to  achieve  a 
rate  of  IG  thousand  to  be  moved  monthly  by  July 
1949  and  gave  assurances  that  this  number  would 
be  processed  by  the  Commission  and  prepared  to 
move,  ])rovide(l  Iro  made  adequate  shipping  avail- 
able. The  Director  General  of  Iro  indicated  that 
this  would  be  possible. 

The  movement  of  Iro  refugees  from  China  was 
discussed  by  the  Council  in  the  review  of  the  Di- 
rector General's  report  on  activities  since  July  1, 
1948.     The    United    States    representative    com-      I 
mended  the  organization  for  its  action  to  date  in     '^ 
removing  approximately  4  thousand  refugees  in 
repatriation  to  Europe  or  in  resettlement  to  Israel, 
and  5  thousand  White  Russian  refugees  to  tempo- 
rary asylum  on  the  island  of  Samar  in  the  Philip- 
pines.   The  Chinese  representative  expressed  the 
judgment  of  his  government  that  the  movement 
had  not  been  justified  by  any  danger  or  threat  of       ( 
danger  facing  the  refugees,  but  at  the  same  time      I 
expressed  the  hope  of  his  government  that  Iro      ^ 
would  persist  in  the  efforts  to  remove  all  eligible 
refugees  from  China. 

The  most  important  question  considered  by  the 
General  Council  had  to  do  with  the  tentative  pro- 
posals of  the  Director  General  of  plans  to  termi- 

Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


nate  Iro  services  and  to  provide  thereafter  for  the 
protection  of  the  civil  status  of  eligible  refugees 
in  their  countries  of  residence,  either  by  a  sub- 
stantially reduced  Iko  organization  or  other  ap- 
propriate international  body.  Briefly  the  Direc- 
tor General  proposed  to  discontinue  accepting 
applications  for  services  other  than  legal  protec- 
tion after  December  31,  1949,  to  require  all  per- 
sons accepted  for  service  to  register  before  April 
1,  1950,  a  definite  choice  regarding  the  form  of 
their  reestablishment,  namely  repatriation,  re- 
settlement, or  assimilation  into  the  local  economy, 
and  to  discontinue  care  and  maintenance  in  the 
camps  after  June  30, 1950.  The  Director  General 
also  assumed  that  the  program  of  resettlement 
would  need  to  be  continued  during  the  fiscal  year 
1950-51,  and  that  an  estimated  50  million  dollars 
in  income  Mould  be  required  for  this  purpose  dur- 
ing the  fourth  year  of  operation.  The  Director 
General  indicated  that  new  applications  for  serv- 
ices resulting  from  unemployment  among  refugees 
caused  by  the  revaluation  of  German  currency  and 
the  arrival  in  Central  Europe  of  new  refugees 
from  the  Iron  Curtain  countries  had  proved 
greater  than  anticipated,  and  that  a  total  of  275 
thousand  accretions  to  those  already  the  concern 
of  the  organization  might  be  expected  between 
January  1. 1949,  and  June  30, 1950. 

The  I'esponse  of  the  government  representatives 
to  these  proposals  was,  first,  one  of  surprise  and, 
second,  skepticism  as  to  the  anticipated  number 
of  accretions.  All  the  representatives  present 
stated  that  because  the  proposals  of  the  Director 
General  had  been  received  just  prior  to  the  con- 
vening of  the  meeting  there  had  been  no  oppor- 
tunity for  the  governments  to  give  them  adequate 
consideration  and  that  consequently  no  positive 
positions  with  respect  to  the  proposals  could  be 
taken  at  this  session.  The  government  represent- 
atives also  expressed  disappointment  that  the  pro- 
posals did  not  contain  specific  plans  for  the 
treatment  of  the  anticipated  residual  refugees  who 
will  not  for  physical  and  other  reasons  qualify  for 
resettlement  in  any  country. 

The  United  States  representative  urged  that  in 
view  of  the  uncertainty  of  income  for  the  organi- 
zation during  a  fourth  year  of  operation  every 
effort  be  made  to  speed  up  the  processing  of 
refugees  and  to  achieve  the  maximum  of  resettle- 
ment possible  from  the  financial  resources  avail- 
able to  the  organization  before  June  30, 1950.  He 
expressed  the  belief  that  this  could  be  accom- 
plished by  better  coordination  of  the  activities  of 
procurement  of  supplies,  care  and  maintenance, 
and  resettlement.  He  urged  that  each  area  in 
which  the  Iro  was  rendering  assistance  to  refugees 
should  be  studied  separately  as  each  area  presents 
a  different  problem  to  the  administration  in  con- 
sidering plans  to  terminate  the  services  of  the 
organization.  He  joined  the  other  representatives 
in  the  plea  that  much  more  intensive  study  be 
given  innuediately  in  each  area  to  the  problem  of 

May    15,    1949 


the  anticipated  residual  group  of  refugees  who  it 
is  expected  will  not  qualify  for  resettlement  in  anj 
country.  He  recommended  also  that  the  antici- 
pated costs  of  the  shipping  i:)rogram  be  constantly 
kept  under  review  in  the  hope  that  more  ships 
could  be  secured  for  the  resettlement  of  refugees 
out  of  the  funds  made  available  for  transportation. 
The  Iro  now  has  a  fleet  of  29  ships  in  operation 
and  anticipates  that  this  number  will  be  increased 
to  35  by  July  1,  1949.  The  United  States  repre- 
sentative also  pointed  out  the  necessity  to  control 
rigidly  the  procurement  of  supplies  in  order  that 
excess  purchases  based  on  overestimates  of  the 
numbers  of  i"ef  ugees  remaining  in  the  camps  would 
be  avoided  and  that  every  advantage  be  taken  of 
the  falling  market  in  food  prices.  At  his  sug- 
gestion the  Council  decided  to  request  the  Director 
General  to  revise  the  tentative  plans  for  the  termi- 
nation of  Iro  services  in  the  light  of  the  comments 
made  by  the  government  representatives. 

The  Council  expressed  the  hope  that  the  Direc- 
tor General  would  be  able  to  distribute  the  revision 
of  plans  to  the  governments  well  in  advance  of  the 
special  session  of  the  Council  to  be  convened  on 
June  22,  1949.  In  this  event  the  government  rep- 
resentatives would  be  enabled  to  present  their 
positive  views  with  respect  to  the  termination  of 
Iro  services  at  the  meeting  of  the  Council  in  June. 


International  Wheat  Agreement 
Sent  to  Senate' 

Message  of  the  President 

To  the  Senate  of  the  United  States: 

With  a  view  to  receiving  the  advice  and  consent 
of  the  Senate  to  ratification,  I  transmit  herewith  a 
certified  copy  of  the  international  wheat  agree- 
ment, in  the  English  and  French  languages,  which 
was  open  for  signature  in  Washington  from  March 
23,  1949  to  April  15,  1949,  and  was  signed,  during 
that  period,  on  behalf  of  the  Government  of  the 
United  States  of  America  and  the  governments  of 
40  other  countries. 

Because  of  the  necessity,  under  the  terms  of  the 
agreement,  that  instruments  of  acceptance  thereof 
be  deposited  by  July  1,  1949,  in  order  to  bring  the 
agreement  into  force  with  a  view  to  its  operation 
during  the  next  crop-year,  it  is  my  hope  that  the 
Senate  will  find  it  possible  to  give  early  considera- 
tion to  the  agreement. 

The  purposes  and  provisions  of  the  agreement 
are  set  forth  in  greater  detail  in  the  enclosed  re- 
port of  the  Secretary  of  State  and  its  enclosures. 
Harry  S.  Truman 

The  White  House, 
Ap7il  19, 1.949. 

'  The  text  of  the  agreement  will  be  printed  in  Documents 
and  State  Papers  for  May  1949. 


U.S.  Delegations  to  International  Conferences 


ILO:  Third  Session  of  Coal  Mines  Committee 

It  was  announced  on  April  22  tliat  the  follow- 
ing delegates  have  been  appointed  to  represent  the 
United  States  at  the  third  session  of  the  Coal 
Mines  Committee  of  the  International  Labor 
Organization  (Ilo),  scheduled  to  be  held  at 
Pittsburgh,  April  19-30,  1949 : 

GOVEENMENT  REPBESENTATIVEa 

Delegates 

Harry  Weiss,  Director,  Wage  Determination  and  Exemp- 
tions Branch,  Wage  and  Hour  and  Public  Contracts 
Division,  Department  of  Labor 

George  W.  Grove,  Supervising  Engineer,  Bureau  of  Mines, 
United  States  Department  of  the  Interior,  Pittsburgh 

Advisers 

Witt  P.owden,  Labor  Economist,  Bureau  of  Labor  Sta- 
tistics. r)epartnient  of  Jjulmr 

Daniel  (ioott.  liivision  of  International  Labor  and  Social 
AITairs,  Department  of  State 

Louis  Lister,  Chief,  Coal  Branch,  Industry  Division, 
Economic  Cooperation  Administration 

Worker  Representatives 
Delegates 

John  T.  Jones,   Director,  Labor's   Non  Partisan   League, 

United  Mine  Workers  of  America 
Thomas  Kennedy,  International   Vice  President,  United 

Mine  Workers  of  America 

Employer  Representatives 
Delegates 

H.  J.  Connolly,  President,  Pennsylvania  Coal  Company, 
Scranton 

Robert  P.  Koenig,  President,  Ayrshire  Collieries  Corpora- 
tion, Indianapolis 

Alternate  Delegate  and  Adviser 

A.  S.  Wilson,  Vice  President,  P.oone  County  Coal  Corpora- 
tion, Sharpies,  West  Virginia 

Advisers 

Michael    D.    David,    Labor   Relations   Counsel,   Ayrshire 

Collieries  Corporation,  Indianapolis 
James    W.    Haley,    Secretary-General    Counsel,    National 

Coal  Association,  Washington,  D.C. 

The  agenda  of  the  meeting  includes  a  general 
report  dealing  particularly  with  the  action  taken 
by  the  various  countries  to  implement  conclusions 
of  the  second  session  of  this  Committee,  the  efforts 
of  the  IiiO  to  follow  up  the  studies  and  inquiries 
proposed  by  the  Committee  and  to  survey  the 
recent  events  and  developments  in  the  coal  indus- 
try. Among  the  other  items  on  the  agenda  are : 
(1)  a  report  on  the  protection  of  young  workers 
emplo3-ed  underground  in  coal  mines;  ('2)  a  re- 
port on  the  retraining  of  physically  incapacitated 
miners;  and  (3)  a  report  on  workhours  in  coal 
mines. 


ILO:  Fourth  Regional  American  Meeting 

Tlie  Department  of  State  announced  on  April 
2G  that  upon  the  recommendation  of  the  Secretary 
of  Labor,  tlie  following  persons  have  been  named 
to  represent  the  United  States  at  the  Fourth  Re- 
gional Conference  of  American  States  Members 
of  the  International  Labor  Organization  (Ilo), 
which  opened  on  April  25  at  Montevideo : 

Government  Represe.n-tati\t.8 
Delegates 

Ellis  O.  Briggs,  United  States  Ambassador  to  Uruguay, 
.Montevideo 

Ralpli  Wriglit,  Assistant  Secretary  of  Labor,  U.S.  Depart- 
ment of  Labor 

Advisers 

James  D.  Bell,  Second  Secretary  and  Consul,  American 
Embassy,  Santiago 

Fernando  Sierra  Berdecia,  Commissioner  of  Labor,  San 
Juan,  Puerto  Rico 

Beatrice  McConnell,  Chief,  Division  of  Legislative  Stand- 
ards and  State  Services,  Bureau  of  Labor  Standards, 
U.S.  Department  of  Labor 

Edwin  E.  Vallon,  Attach^,  American  Embassy,  Buenos 
.\ires 

Aryuess  Joy  Wickens,  .\ssistant  Comini.«sioner  for  Pro- 
gram Operations,  Bureau  of  Labor  Statistics,  U.S. 
Department  of  Labor 

Employer  Representatives 

Delegate 

James  Tanham,  Vice  President,  The  Texas  Company, 
New  York 

Advisers 

Milton  M.  Olander.  Director  of  Industrial  Relations, 
Owens-Illinois  Glass  Company,  Toledo 

Charles  E.  Shaw,  Manager,  Employer  Relations  Overseas, 
Standard  Oil  Company  of  New  Jersey,  New  York 

Worker  Rfn>RESENTATivEs 

Delegate 

Philip  P.  Hannah,  Secretary-Treasurer,  Ohio  State  Fed- 
eration of  Labor,  Columbus 


Serafino  Romualdi.  Latin  American  Representative,  Ameri- 
can Federation  of  Labor,  Washington,  D.C. 

Secretary  of  Delegation 

Maurice  J.   Broderick,   Second   Secretary   and   .\ssistant 
Public  iVffairs  OflBcer,  American  Embassy,  Montevideo 

The  agenda  for  this  meeting  consists  of  the 
Director-General's  report,  whic^i  will  cover  the 
question  of  industrialization,  with  special  ref- 
erence to  relationsliips  of  training  and  health  con- 
ditions to  the  efficiency  of  tlie  labor  force  in  the 
Latin-American  countries,  as  well  as  the  examina- 

Department  of  State  Bullefin 


tion  of  conditions  of  life  and  work  of  the  in- 
digenous populations  of  American  countries,  of 
employment  of  agricultural  workers,  and  of  ad- 
justment of  labor  disputes. 

The  Conference  of  American  States  Members 
is  one  of  a  series  of  regional  meetings  initiated  by 
the  Governing  Body  of  the  Ilo  in  I'J'iQ.  Previous 
meetings  of  tlie  American  states  were  held  at  San- 
tiago in  January  1936,  at  Habana,  November-De- 
cember 1939,  and  at  Mexico  City  in  April  1946. 
Delegations  composed  of  government,  worker,  and 
employer  rej^resentatives  from  the  18  Ilo  member 
states  in  the  Western  Hemisphere  are  participat- 
ing in  the  meeting  at  Montevideo. 

World  Wood  Pulp  Problems 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  April 
26  the  delegation  of  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment at  the  Preparatory  Conference  on  World 
Wood  Pulp  Problems,  which  opened  on  April  25 
at  Montreal : 


Edward  G.  Cale,  Associate  Chief,  International  Resources 
Division,  Department  of  State 

Deleffates 

Horace  Richard  Josephson,  Assistant  Chief,  Division  of 

Foreign   Economics,  Forest   Service,  Department  of 

Agriculture 
Josepli  L.  Muller,  Chief,  Forest  Products  Branch,  Office 

of  International  Trade,  Department  of  Commerce 
W.  LeRoy  Neubrech,  Chief,  Pulp  and  Paper  Section,  Office 

of  Domestic  Commerce,  Department  of  Commerce 

Advisers 

Alexander  McCook  Craighead,  Consultant,  Economic  Co- 
operation Administration 

William  L.  Kilcoln,  First  Secretary  and  Consul,  American 
Embassy,  Ottawa 

Oliver  M.  Porter,  Executive  Secretary,  United  States  Pulp 
Producers  Association,  New  York 

The  Preparatory  Conference,  organized  jointly 
by  the  Food  and  Agriculture  Organization 
(Fao)  and  the  Canadian  Government,  has  been 
called  in  accordance  with  the  terms  of  reference 
laid  down  at  the  first  Fao  annual  conference  at 
Quebec.  Furthermore  the  fourth  session  of  the 
Fao  annual  conference  held  November  1948  de- 
clared that :  In  view  of  the  uncertain  outlook  with 
regard  to  the  productive  capacity  and  demand  for 
wood  pulp,  (a)  more  attention  should  be  given  to 
this  important  commodity;  (b)  a  Preparatory 
Conference  on  World  Wood  Pulp  Problems  should 
be  organized  in  the  very  near  future  for  the  pur- 
pose of  attempting  a  broad  survey  of  the  world 
situation  and  outlook  and  of  formulating  a  pro- 
gram of  regular  international  statistics. 

Since  the  Preparatory  Conference  is  of  an  ex- 
ploratory nature,  invitations  to  send  official  dele- 
gations were  addressed  only  to  those  countries 
that  play  a  significant  part  in  the  production, 
trade,  or  consumption  of  wood  pulp.  All  mem- 
ber governments  of  Fao  were  informed  of  the 
meeting,  however,  so  that  they  might,  if  they  de- 
sired, designate  representatives  to  attend. 

May    15,    1949 


U.  S.  Commissioners  on  Caribbean 
Commission  Meet 

The  Department  of  State  has  announced  that 
the  four  United  States  Commissioners  on  the 
Caribbean  Commission  held  a  three-day  period  of 
consultation  on  May  4  with  officers  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  State  and  other  Departments  of  the  Gov- 
ernment concerned  with  Caribbean  matters. 

The  Commissioners  attending  were : 

Ward  M.  Canaday,  Chairman  of  the  United  States  Sec- 
tion ;  Chairman  of  the  Finance  Committee  of  the 
Willys-Overland  Corporation,  Toledo 

Dr.  Rafael  Pico,  Chairman  of  the  Planning,  Urbanizing 
and  Zoning  Board,  Santurce,  Puerto  Rico 

William  H.  Hastie,  Governor  of  the  Virgin  Islands  of  the 
United  States 

Jesiis  T.  Pinero,  former  Governor  of  Puerto  Rico 

The  system  of  bringing  the  Commissioners  to 
Washington  regularly  for  consultation  was  in- 
itiated by  the  late  Charles  W.  Taussig,  and  this  is 
the  first  such  meeting  since  Mr.  Canaday  was  ap- 
pointed chairman  of  the  United  States  section  by 
the  President  in  November  1948. 

The  Caribbean  Commission  is  an  outgrowth  of 
the  former  Anglo-American  Caribbean  Commis- 
sion, and  is  composed  of  the  (Jovernments  of 
France,  the  Netherlands,  the  United  Kingdom,  and 
the  United  States.  It  is  an  advisory  body  to  the 
member  and  territorial  governments  in  the 
economic  and  social  fields  and  concerns  itself 
especially  with  matters  of  agriculture,  communi- 
cations, education,  fisheries,  health,  housing,  in- 
dustry, labor,  social  welfare,  and  trade.  It  is 
designed  to  encourage  and  strengthen  regional 
cooperation  and  to  improve  the  economic  and  social 
well-being  of  the  peoples  of  the  territories  of  the 
Caribbean.  The  Commission  is  assisted  by  a 
Caribbean  Research  Council  and  periodic  West 
Indian  Conferences.. 

The  Commissioners  had  meetings  with  the 
Secretary  of  State,  Assistant  Secretary  Rusk, 
Assistant  Secretary  Thorp,  and  with  Directors  of 
the  Offices  of  European  Affairs,  American  Re- 
public Affairs,  and  United  Nations  Affairs.  They 
will  call  on  the  heads  of  offices  of  other  Government 
departments. 

Among  the  more  important  matters  which  the 
United  States  Commissioners  discussed  during 
this  three-day  conference  were  the  following: 

1.  Implementation  of  the  President s  Program, 
for  Technical  Assistance.  In  several  of  the  con- 
versations, the  United  States  Commissioners 
2)ointed  out  that  the  President's  program  of  tech- 
nical assistance  to  underdeveloped  areas,  as  out; 
lined  in  the  fourth  point  of  his  inaugural  address, 
could  be  of  immeasurable  benefit  to  the  territories 
of  the  Caribbean.  They  urged  that  every  con- 
sideration be  given  to  the  provision  of  technical 
assistance  in  the  economic  development  of  the 
island  territories.  They  pointed  out  that  the 
Caribbean  Commission,  because  of  the  many  re- 


search  studies  which  it  has  already  undertaken, 
would  be  a  most  efficient  orjranizatiou  for  iniple- 
nientinji;  the  technical  assistance  program. 

'2.  Provinion  of  Small  ShivH  for  Interisland 
Trade.  The  United  States  Commissioners  pro- 
posed that  a  number  of  small  ships  now  lyin<r  idle 
in  American  ports  be  transferred  to  the  (jovern- 
ment  of  Puerto  Kico  for  use  in  interisland  trade 
in  the  Caribbean.  They  expressed  the  view  that 
nothing  could  do  more  to  promote  the  economic 
and  social  life  of  the  peoples  of  the  Caribbean  ter- 
ritoriei5  than  the  imjjrovement  of  shipping  facili- 
ties in  tliat  area.  The  various  departments  con- 
sulted, expressed  great  interest  in  the  plan  and 
indicated  they  would  immediately  take  steps  to 
implement  this  plan. 

3.  Revioval  of  the  15  percent  Excise  Tax  on 
Transportation.  The  United  States  Commis- 
sioners pointed  out  that  tourist  trade  to  the  Carib- 
bean is  seriously  hampered  by  the  discriminatory 
15  percent  Federal  excise  tax  imposed  on  air  and 
sea  transportation  in  the  area.  They  strongly 
urged  that  this  excise  tax  be  eliminated  as  it  has 
been  in  the  case  of  other  areas  outside  the  United 
States. 

The  United  States  Commissioners,  during  their 
conference,  al-so  considered  a  number  of  other 
matters  of  interest  to  the  United  States  section 
of  the  Commission  as  well  as  the  more  important 
items  which  will  be  on  the  agenda  at  the  eighth 
meeting  of  the  Commission  to  be  held  in  Trinidad 
on  June  13,  1949. 

U.S.  Ratifies  World  Meteorological  Convention 

[Released  to  the  press  May  5) 

The  President  on  May  4,  1949,  ratified  the  con- 
vention of  the  World  Meteorological  Organization 
opened  for  signature  at  Washington  on  October 
11,  1947,  and  a  related  protocol  concerning  Spain 
opened  for  signature  at  the  .same  time.  Advice 
and  consent  to  ratification  of  the  convention  and 
related  protocol  was  given  by  the  Senate  on  April 
20,  1949.  The  United  States  instrument  of  ratifi- 
cation was  deposited  on  May  4, 1949,  in  the  archives 
of  this  Government,  which  is  designated  by  the 
convention  as  the  depository  government. 

The  United  States  is  the  seventeenth  govern- 
ment to  deposit  its  instrument  of  ratification  or 
accession  with  respect  to  the  convention.  The 
other  governments  which  have  deposited  instru- 
ments of  ratification  or  accession  are:  Australia, 
Byelorussian  Soviet  Socialist  Kepublic,  Finland, 
Iceland,  India,  Lebanon,  New  2k^alaiul,  Norway, 
Philippines,  Kumania,  Sweden,  Switzerland. 
Ukrainian  Soviet  Socialist  Republic,  Union  of 
Soviet  Socialist  Republics,  United  Kingdom,  and 
Yugoslavia.  The  convention  will  enter  into  force 
thirty  days  after  the  date  of  the  deposit  of  the 
thirtieth  instrument  of  ratification  or  accession. 

Upon  its  entry  into  force  the  convention  will 
establish  the  World  Meteorological  Organization, 
the  basic  objective  of  which  is  to  coordinate,  stand- 


ardize, and  improve  world  meteorological  activi- 
ties, and  to  encourage  an  eflicient  exchange  of 
meteorological  information  between  countries  in 
the  aid  of  human  activities.  The  purposes  of  the 
organization  are: 

1.  To  facilitate  world-wide  cooperation  in  the 
establishment  of  networks  of  stations  for  the  mak- 
ing of  meteorological  ob.servations  or  otlier  geo- 
physical observations  related  to  meteorology  and 
to  promote  the  establishment  and  maintenance  of 
meteorological  centers  charged  with  the  provision 
of  meteorological  services; 

2.  to  promote  the  establishment  and  mainte- 
nance of  systems  for  the  rapid  exchange  of 
weather  information ; 

3.  to  promote  standardization  of  meteorological 
observations  and  to  insure  the  uniform  publication 
of  observations  and  statistias; 

4.  to  further  the  application  of  meteorology  to 
aviation,  shipping,  agriculture,  and  other  activi- 
ties; and 

5.  to  encourage  research  and  training  in  mete- 
orology and  to  assist  in  coordinating  the  inter- 
national aspects  of  such  research  and  training. 

As  soon  as  the  World  Meteorological  Organi- 
zation comes  into  being,  it  will  take  its  place  as 
one  of  the  specialized  agencies  of  the  United  Na- 
tions along  with  the  aviation,  telecommunication, 
and  postal  organizations  dealing  with  problems  of 
transport  and  communications. 


U.S.  Sends  Observer  to  Phyto-Sanitary 
Conference 

[Released  to  the  press  April  22] 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  April 
22  that  the  United  States  Government  will  send 
Dr.  Robert  D.  Rands,  Head  of  the  Division  of 
Rubber  Plant  Investigations,  Department  of 
Agriculture,  as  an  observer  to  the  Far  Eastern 
Phyto-Sanitary  Conference  to  be  held  at  Singa- 
pore April  26-28,  1949. 

This  Conference,  called  by  the  British  Commis- 
sioner General  for  Southeast  Asia,  is  for  the  pur- 
pose of  discussing  urgent  problems  in  the  field  of 
))lant-([uarantine  regulations  and  of  recommend- 
ing cooperative  action  in  the  common  interest 
against  the  introduction  of  dangerous  pests  or 
diseases  into  Southeast  Asia.  The  i)articipating 
countries  will  discuss  draft  regulations  for  the 
control  of  tlio  tratlic  in  living  plants,  looking  to- 
ward the  unification  of  existing  statutes. 

The  United  States  as  a  principal  consumer  of 
Far  Ii^iisteiii  rubber  is  vitally  concerned  over  the 
circctiveiu'ss  of  an  international  agreement  for  ex- 
cluding ilangerous  pests  or  diseases  from  that 
producing  area. 

It  is  exjiected  that  while  there  Dr.  Rands  will 
inspect  rubber  experiment  stations  located  in 
Malaya,  Sumatra,  and  Java. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


TFSE  RECORD  OF  THE  WEEK 


Economic  Policy  and  the  ITO  Charter 

ADDRESS  BY  SECRETARY  ACHESON> 


There  is  a  cliai-acter  in  one  of  Moliere's  plays 
who  wondered  what  prose  was  and  then  was  sur- 
prised and  delighted  to  learn  that  he  had  been 
speaking  it  all  his  life. 

The  process  of  change  in  human  relations  is 
much  like  the  speaking  of  j^rose.  All  of  us  are 
principals  in  the  process  of  social  change,  but  we 
seldom  see  ourselves  in  tliis  flattering  light. 
Lacking  the  detached  persiJective  of  the  historian 
and  preoccupied  as  we  are  with  the  affairs  of  each 
day,  we  are  often  quite  unaware  of  how  different 
is  the  way  we  think,  act,  and  react  today  from 
the  way  we  did  a  few  years  ago. 

All  of  us  in  this  country  are  aware,  I  think,  that 
the  conceptions  and  convictions  that  underlie  our 
foreign  policies  have  undergone  a  momentous 
transformation  in  the  last  decade.  Certainly  we 
have  had  to  cast  our  economic  thinking  in  a  new 
perspective  and  to  see  the  economic,  political,  and 
social  factors  in  relation  to  the  whole  pattern  of 
international  life. 

We  have  come  to  realize  more  clearly  than  ever 
before  that  foreign  economic  policy  is  not  made 
in  a  political  vacuum.  It  is  hardly  possible  any 
longer  to  draw  a  sharp  dividing  line  between 
economic  affairs  and  political  affairs.  They  are 
related  and  interacting.  Each  complements  and 
supplements  the  other.  They  must  be  combined 
in  a  single  unified  and  rounded  policy  designed 
to  serve  and  advance  the  national  interest. 

As  businessmen,  you  are  naturally  most  in- 
terested in  those  aspects  of  foreign  policy  that 
affect  business  conditions.  Therefore  I  shall  speak 
chiefly  of  some  of  the  major  elements  of  our 
foreign  economic  policy.  I  also  shall  necessarily 
refer,  rather  briefly,  to  some  of  our  essential 
political  objectives.  They  have  a  definite  and 
obvious  connection  with  the  European  Recovery 
Program,  for  example.  All  are  closely  related 
to  the  other  elements  of  our  foreign  policy.  All 
are  parts  of  an  integrated  whole.    Each  is  vital. 

Our  course  of  action  in  the  last  decade  has  been 
based  on  two  perceptions  growing  out  of  the  tragic 


events  which  have  shaken  and  bled  the  world  in 
our  generation.  We  saw,  first,  that  freedom  and 
aggression  do  not  mix ;  that  where  a  ruler  would 
enslave  his  neighbors,  he  must  first  enslave  his 
own  people;  and,  accordingly,  that  the  cause  of 
peace  is  served  by  the  defense  of  popular  govern- 
ments and  the  institutions  of  freedom.  Secondly, 
we  learned  the  bitter  lesson  that  freedom  does  not 
thrive  and  may  even  wither  and  die  under  the 
stress  of  economic  privation  and  crisis,  especially 
where  its  roots  are  shallow. 

We  sought  an  answer  to  both  those  problems  in 
the  United  Nations.  The  charter  pledges  the 
member  nations  to  strive  to  secure  their  people 
against  both  the  scourge  of  war  and  the  curse  of 
material  want.  The  Security  Council  has  the 
primary  responsibility  for  maintaining  the  peace. 
The  improvement  of  the  living  conditions  of  the 
world's  peoples  is  the  task  of  the  Economic  and 
Social  Council  and  the  specialized  agencies. 

The  obstruction  of  the  Soviet  Union,  the  ag- 
gressive conspiracy  of  the  Communists  of  all  coun- 
tries, and  the  unexpectedly  serious  difficulties  of 
reconstruction  prompted  the  United  States  to  take 
additional  measures.  We  went  directly  to  the 
aid  of  Greece  and  Turkey.  We  undertook  the 
European  Recovery  Program. 

Developments  in  Europe  since  the  end  of  hos- 
tilities provide  a  classic  example  of  the  interre- 
lation of  economics  and  politics.  The  free  nations 
of  Europe  had  to  regain  their  economic  health 
in  order  to  resist  the  encroachments  of  Commu- 
nism. Yet  the  gathering  momentum  of  recovery, 
given  impetus  by  American  aid,  was  endangered 
by  the  mounting  sense  of  insecurity  against  armed 
attack.  The  North  Atlantic  Treaty  would  allay 
that  fear  and  free  the  people  of  Western  Europe 
to  devote  their  full  thought  and  energy  to  the 
valiant  effort  to  achieve  recovery.     The  security 

'  Made  before  the  National  Convention  of  the  TJ.  S. 
Chamber  of  Commerce  in  Washington,  D.C.  on  May  3, 
1949,  and  released  to  the  press  on  the  same  date.  Also 
printed  as  Department  of  State  publication  3511. 


May    15,    1949 


value  of  the  treaty  would  be  measurablj-  increased 
by  the  provision  of  American  military  assistance 
to  build  up  the  security  forces  of  Western  Europe. 
Yet  this  military  assistance  must  be  provided  in 
such  a  way  that  it  will  not  detract  from  the  prog- 
I'ess  of  economic  recovery. 

I  think  the  forces  of  freedom  and  democracy  are 
entitled  to  draw  encouragement  from  the  recent 
trend  of  events  in  Western  Europe.  Since  the  be- 
ginning of  the  European  Recovery  Program, 
totalitarianism  in  Western  Europe  has  made  no 
advance.  In  every  important  election  in  this  area, 
the  people  have  clearly  manifested  their  support 
of  constitutional  government.  Communist  efforts 
to  impede  recovery  have  been  defeated  by  vigorous 
governmental  action,  notably  in  France  and  Italy. 
Labor  has  become  increasingly  aware  of  the 
dangers  of  Communist  agitation.  Increased  pro- 
duction and  financial  stability  have  been  stimu- 
lated by  renewed  hope  and  confidence  in  the 
future.  Hope  and  confidence  in  turn  have  been 
augmented  by  economic  recovery.  The  effects  of 
this  marked  improvement,  both  in  morale  and  in 
actual  living  conditions,  are  being  felt  throughout 
Western  Europe,  and  beyond. 

Yet  it  would  not  be  prudent  to  content  our- 
selves merely  with  the  success  achieved  thus  far. 
We  must  press  forward  vigorously  to  the  realiza- 
tion of  our  immediate  objectives.  We  must  go 
further  and  devise  means  for  consolidating  the 
gains  now  being  made  and  for  extending  them  into 
the  future. 

It  is  not  enough  merely  to  perpetuate  the  free 
institutions  of  the  western  world.  They  must 
be  increasingly  developed  and  made  to  yield 
greater  benefits  for  all  the  members  of  the  human 
society  they  are  designed  to  serve.  It  is  not 
enough  to  increase  the  productivity  of  the  individ- 
ual economic  systems  of  the  countries  that  make 
up  the  western  community  of  nations.  Means 
must  be  found  to  assure  the  adequate  and  equitable 
distribution  of  the  material  things  that  make  for 
a  better  life,  so  that  the  peoples  of  this  commmiity 
and  the  world  can  share  in  the  benefits  that  accrue 
from  the  common  effort. 

Tlie  fabric  of  the  world  economy,  of  industry, 
finance,  and  conniiorce  must  be  restored.  But 
even  that  is  not  enough.  We  know  that  at  its  pre- 
war best,  world  production  and  world  trade  were 
not  adequate  to  meet  the  basic  needs  of  human 
society.  We  can  be  sure  that  the  masses  of  people 
will  no  longer  be  satisfied  with  half  a  loaf. 


An  affirmative  approach  to  the  solution  of  world 
economic  problems  is  an  imperative  need  of  our 
times.  The  United  States  Government  has  taken 
the  lead  in  developing  such  an  approach. 

'\\niile  providing  the  necessary  emergency  aid, 
we  have  persistently  pui^sued  a  long-range  inter- 
national economic  program.  We  look  forward  to 
the  day  when  the  differences  between  doing  busi- 
ness abroad  and  doing  business  at  home  will  be 
much  less  than  at  present — when  currencies  will 
be  generally  stable  and  convertible,  trade  and 
travel  subject  to  only  moderate  restraints,  and 
investment  subject  to  fewer  risks.  To  these  ends 
we  have  been  promoting  currency  stabilization :  we 
have  been  negotiating  trade-barrier  reductions; 
we  have  been  negotiating  simplification  of  travel 
arrangements;  we  have  been  negotiating  treaties 
and  agreements  covering  investments,  commerce, 
transport,  and  communications;  we  have  been 
working  on  a  plan  to  increase  the  flow  of  tech- 
nology, and  we  have  been  working  in  the  United 
Nations  and  its  specialized  agencies  in  a  wide 
variety  of  fields.  Most  particularly,  we  have  been 
working  in  that  oldest  and  most  important  field 
of  economic  relations  among  nations — trade. 

We  have  continued  our  established  and  effective 
policy  embodied  in  the  Reciprocal  Trade  Agree- 
ments Act.  The  usefulness  of  this  principle  was 
gi'eatlj'  extended  by  means  of  the  General  Agree- 
ment on  Tariffs  and  Trade  concluded  by  23  of 
the  world's  leading  trading  nations,  in  1947.  A 
further  extension  is  expected  to  result  from  the 
negotiations  now  in  progress  at  Annecy,  France, 
between  these  countries  and  11  others. 

The  capstone  of  the  economic  structure  we  are 
seeking  to  erect  is  the  charter  of  the  International 
Trade  Organization,  which  President  Truman  sub- 
mitted to  the  Congress  last  week  for  ratification. 
I  should  like  to  talk  with  you  about  the  purposes 
and  principles  of  the  charter. 

The  Ito  charter  was  drawn  up  by  more  than  50 
nations  which  were  represented  at  the  United  Na- 
tions Conference  on  Trade  and  Emploj^ment  at 
Hnbana,  in  the  winter  of  1947-48.  The  Habana 
conference  was  the  culmination  of  at  least  five 
years  of  active  planning  and  preparation  by  our 
government  and  the  governments  of  many  other 
countries.  When  the  Conference  adjourned,  it 
had  produced  the  most  comprehensive  interna- 
tional economic  agreement  ever  negotiated. 

The  goal  of  the  Ito  charter  is  the  realization  of 
higher  levels  of  material  well-being  through  the 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


expansion  of  international  trade.  For  most 
countries  in  the  modern  world,  the  existence  of  an 
efficient  trade  mechanism  is  virtually  an  indis- 
pensable condition  to  economic  advancement  and 
the  achievement  of  tolerable  standards  of  living. 
It  is  only  through"  such  a  mechanism  that  each 
country  is  able  to  specialize  in  the  production  of 
the  goods  which  it  can  make  most  effectively  and 
to  exchange  its  output  for  the  goods  which  other 
countries  are  better  equipped  to  make.  Where  no 
such  mechanism  exists,  or  where  it  functions  er- 
ratically and  unevenly,  the  inevitable  result  is 
the  partial  breakdown  of  specialization,  the  re- 
duction of  the  world's  output,  and  the  growth  of 
economic  discontent.  An  efficient  world  trading 
system  is  thus  a  powerful  device  for  helping 
others,  and  ourselves  as  well,  to  acquire  the  ma- 
terial means  to  a  better  life. 

The  Ito  charter  seeks  in  two  waj's  to  create  an 
efficient  and  expanding  world  trading  system. 
First,  it  lays  down  a  detailed  code  of  rules  of  fair 
practice  to  govern  the  foi'eign  trade  policies  of 
member  nations.  The  main  objectives  of  these 
rules  are  the  elimination  or  reduction  of  a  wide 
variety  of  trade  barriers,  imposed  mainly  by  gov- 
ernments, and  the  taking  of  positive  action  to  deal 
with  difficult  problems.  Second,  it  provides  for 
the  establishment  of  an  International  Trade  Or- 
ganization within  the  United  Nations  family,  to 
administer  the  detailed  rules  of  the  charter  and 
to  serve  as  a  forum  for  the  international  considera- 
tion and  solution  of  trade  policy  problems. 

Not  only  is  the  Ito  charter  the  most  compre- 
hensive international  economic  agreement  ever 
reached;  in  quite  another  sense,  it  reflects  a  re- 
markable achievement  in  fruitful  international  co- 
operation. The  delegates  of  56  nations  went  to 
Habana  with  so  great  a  diversity  of  interest  and 
outlook  that  Cassandras  all  over  the  world  had 
buried  the  Conference  before  it  was  born.  Some 
countries  were  committed  to  the  principle  of 
private  enterprise,  others  to  varying  degrees  of 
socialism  or  state  control ;  some  were  economically 
backward,  and  others  advanced ;  some  were  credi- 
tors, and  others  were  debtors ;  some  were  producers 
of  primary  products,  others  were  producers  of 
manufactured  goods;  some  had  deficits  in  their 
balance  of  payments,  others  had  surpluses. 

The  Conference  succeeded,  however,  because  the 
delegates  recognized  that  their  common  interest 
in  the  expansion  of  world  trade  eclipsed  their 
numerous  differences  in  matters  of  detail.    By  a 


slow  process  of  negotiation,  accommodation,  and 
mutual  give  and  take,  the  Conference  finally 
reached  common  ground  on  every  major  issue 
before  it. 

At  the  Habana  conference  the  delegates  showed 
great  wisdom  when  they  pursued  the  cooperative 
effort  beyond  the  platitudinous  stage.  They  re- 
jected the  easy  temptation  to  conceal  their  dis- 
agreements by  writing  only  a  brief  statement  of 
general  principles  and  objectives.  Such  a  state- 
ment would  have  accomplished  little  or  nothing 
of  value,  for  each  country  would  have  been  free 
to  interpret  such  a  loose  agreement  to  sanction 
whatever  it  wanted  to  do.  Instead,  the  Conference 
persevered  in  the  harder  but  more  fruitful  course. 
The  Ito  charter,  because  it  is  detailed,  is  also  more 
precise  and  more  readily  enforceable  than  it  other- 
wise would  have  been. 

The  Ito  charter  could  never  have  been  success- 
fully negotiated  if  the  delegates  at  Habana  had 
not  had  the  good  judgment  to  ignore  the  dis- 
ruptive counsels  of  extremists.  Some  persons 
wanted  a  trade  organization  endowed  with  the 
power  to  veto  domestic  economic  jDolicies  of  its 
members.  The  United  States  could  obviously  not 
have  joined  an  organization  which  asserted  the 
right  to  veto  our  domestic  agricultural  aid  pro- 
gram, nor  would  other  countries  allow  an  inter- 
national body  to  exercise  the  right  of  veto  over 
their  domestic  capital  development  programs. 
The  charter,  as  it  stands  today,  does  not  authorize 
the  trade  organization  to  intervene  in  the  domestic 
economic  policies  of  its  members. 

Other  persons  wanted  the  chailer  to  prohibit 
direct  governmental  participation  in  international 
trade  through  state  trading  agencies.  Happily, 
this  disruptive  advice  was  ignored.  The  United 
States  and  other  nations  which  maintain  state 
trading  agencies  to  handle  certain  types  of  com- 
merce could  obviously  not  have  accepted  such  a 
prohibition.  Instead  the  framers  of  the  charter 
took  the  wise  course  of  laying  down  rules  to  gov- 
ern the  conduct  of  state  trading  and  to  prevent 
the  abuse  of  this  instrument. 

Then  there  were  the  global  planners  who  wanted 
the  trade  organization  empowered  to  plan  and 
direct  international  trade.  But  this  proposal  was 
wholly  inconsistent  with  the  main  objective  of 
the  charter,  which  was  to  reduce  and  restrict  gov- 
ernmental controls  over  trade,  not  to  broaden  and 
extend  them.  The  Habana  conference,  of  course, 
rejected  the  planning  proposal.    The  charter  does 


May    15,    1949 


not  empower  the  trade  organization  to  tell  any 
country  where,  what,  or  when  it  shall  buy  and 
sell,  or  how  much  it  shall  pay  or  charpe. 

Neither  does  the  trade  organization  have  the 
power  to  impose  any  specific  form  of  economic 
system  on  any  country.  We  in  the  United  States, 
of  course,  are  wholeheartedly  devoted  to  free  enter- 
prise and  hope  that  other  nations  will  realize  the 
advantages  of  that  system  over  all  others.  The 
best  way  to  accomplish  that  objective  is  to  demon- 
strate the  merits  of  free  enterprise  in  the  open 
competition  of  world  trade.  The  best  way  to  win 
converts  for  our  system  is  to  prove  in  practice  that 
it  is  capable  of  outperforming  its  competitors,  year 
in  and  year  out.  The  Habana  conference  wisely 
took  the  position  that  a  country's  form  of  economic 
organization  is  its  own  affair  and  that  countries 
with  different  economic  systems  can  cooperate  to 
their  mutual  advantage  in  the  field  of  interna- 
tional trade. 

Finally,  there  were  the  "all-or-none-ers,"  per- 
haps better  described  as  the  "abolitionists."  The 
abolitionists  felt  that  there  was  only  one  proper 
way  to  deal  with  a  trade  barrier,  and  that  was  to 
abolish  it  forthwith.  Each  type  of  trade  barrier 
had  its  own  abolitionist  following.  There  was  the 
tariff  group,  the  preferences  group,  the  import- 
quota  group,  the  export-subsidy  group,  and  others. 

Although  the  abolitionists  sometimes  differed 
among  themselves  as  to  which  type  of  trade  barrier 
was  most  obnoxious,  they  all  agreed  that  to  reduce 
a  trade  barrier  rather  than  to  abolish  it  was  to 
compromise  with  iniquity  and  to  sanction  mal- 
practice. Better  no  charter,  they  felt,  than  a 
charter  which  merely  reduces  trade  barriers. 

Now  this  position  has  a  certain  air  of 
righteousness  about  it,  which,  for  a  period, 
seemed  attractive  to  some  of  the  Habana  dele- 
gates. Fortunately,  they  rejected  the  doctrine. 
They  recognized  what  is  perfectly  obvious  to 
most  of  us — that  a  world  economy  enmeshed  for 
20  years  in  a  myriad  of  barriers  and  restrictions 
cannot  be  transformed  into  its  opposite  by  the 
edict  of  a  single  international  conference.  They 
recognized  also  that  there  is  no  kind  of  trade 
barrier  of  which  it  cannot  be  said  that  its  use  in 
particular  circumstances,  for  particular  purposes, 
or  for  a  limited  period,  may  be  justifiable.  What 
they  sought  to  do — and  they  succeeded  admir- 
ably— was  to  achieve  the  maxinmm  curtailment  of 
trade  restraints,  which  was  possible  in  the  circum- 
stances, and  to  limit  and  circumscribe  carefully  the 


future  use  of  trade  barriers  by  members  of  the  or- 
ganization. 

To  these  ends,  the  charter  has  a  number  of 
specific  objectives.  It  seeks  to  establish  the  prin- 
ciple of  nondiscrimination,  with  the  minimum 
number  of  exceptions  necessary  to  deal  with  cur- 
rent economic  difficulties.  It  aims  at  the  simpli- 
fication of  customs  regulations  and  formalities. 
It  seeks  to  achieve  agreement  among  the  members 
to  work  for  the  reduction  of  tariffs  and  the 
elimination  of  tariff  preferences.  The  charter 
sets  up  principles  designed  to  subject  state  trading 
enterprises  as  nearly  as  possible  to  the  same  stand- 
ards as  those  governing  private  enterprise.  It  pro- 
vides means  for  limiting  and  eliminating  the 
harmful  effects  of  private  international  cartels. 
It  specifies  the  conditions  for  making  interna- 
tional commodity  agreements. 

The  charter  provides  for  the  establislunent  of 
conditions  for  foreign  investment  which  will  be 
fair  both  to  the  investor  and  to  the  country  where 
the  investment  is  made.  It  promotes  the  condi- 
tions most  favorable  for  the  economic  upbuilding 
of  underdeveloped  areas.  It  encourages  a  high 
level  of  productive  employment. 

The  dramatic  achievement  of  Habana  was  the 
formulation  of  the  first  comprehensive  code  of  in- 
ternational law  to  govern  trade  policies.  Just  as 
the  Congress  of  the  United  States  has  never  passed 
a  universally  popular  law,  so  there  is  no  important 
rule  in  the  charter  which  fully  satisfies  every 
country  which  was  represented  at  Habana.  But 
just  as  every  State  in  our  union  recognizes  that 
the  immeasurable  advantages  of  membership  in 
our  Federal  system  far  outweigh  the  occasional 
defeats  which  it  suffers  in  the  Congress,  so  nearly 
every  delegation  at  Habana  saw  that  the  loss  in- 
volved in  the  concessions  it  had  to  make  was 
eclipsed  by  the  great  gains  of  the  charter  as  a 
whole.  The  charter  embodies  the  victory  of  the 
spirit  of  international  cooperation  over  the 
dangerous  and  divisive  attitude  that  no  country 
should  compromise  its  position  on  any  issue  in 
the  interest  of  broad  international  agreement. 

No  code  of  laws  is  worth  very  much  without  an 
authoritative  body  to  interpret  and  administer  it. 
This  responsibility  will  be  borne  by  the  Interna- 
tional Trade  Organization,  which,  I  expect,  will 
become  one  of  the  most  active  and  important  of 
the  specialized  agencies  within  the  family  of  the 
United  Nations.     The  organization  will  not  only 

Departmenf  of  State   Bulletin 


I 


refine  and  clarify  the  detailed  rules  of  the  charter 
as  it  acts  on  the  cases  which  are  brought  before 
it,  but  it  will  serve  as  well  as  a  forum  for  the  con- 
sideration of  new  trade  policy  problems  as  they 
emerge. 

It  is  interesting,  and  I  think  instructive,  to 
speculate  on  what  the  course  of  trade-policy  de- 
velopment would  have  been  in  the  1930's  if  an 
International  Trade  Organization  had  existed  in 
that  period.  In  that  unhappy  era,  as  you  will 
remember,  each  country  raised  new  and  more 
onerous  trade  restrictions  with  hardly  a  thought  of 
the  consequences  of  its  policies  on  other  nations. 
But  with  every  country  seeking  to  export  its 
troubles,  none  succeeded.  All  that  was  accom- 
plished was  the  slow  strangulation  of  world  trade. 
The  history  of  that  period  would  have  been  dif- 
ferent, I  think,  if  each  country  had  been  required 
to  state  its  intentions  and  answer  criticisms  before 
an  international  body. 

A  few  j'ears  hence,  the  world  will  be  faced  with 
trade  policy  problems  which  cannot  even  be  fore- 


seen, let  alone  dealt  with,  today.  But  the  exist- 
ence of  a  permanent  international  forUm  and  a 
body  of  tested  rules  will  assure  that  nations  will 
act  with  full  knowledge  of  the  views  and  probable 
reactions  of  their  neighbors.  In  these  circum- 
stances, it  seems  to  me  much  more  than  a  wistful 
hope  that  conciliation  and  compromise  will  sup- 
plant the  economic  artillery  duels  which  char- 
acterized trade  relations  in  the  19.30's. 

The  charter  of  the  International  Trade  Organi- 
zation is  thus  the  beginning  of  law  in  the  realm  of 
world  commerce  and  the  vehicle  for  the  growth  of 
a  spirit  of  mutuality  and  interdependence  in  trade 
relations.  I  know  of  no  other  road  to  the  develop- 
ment of  the  kind  of  world  trading  system  in  which 
the  world's  productive  energies  can  be  transformed 
into  the  highest  levels  of  material  well-being. 

The  charter  of  the  International  Trade  Organi- 
zation is  worthy  of  the  support  of  all  those  who 
believe  that  peace  and  progress  may  be  pursued 
by  enabling  the  people  of  the  world  to  secure  the 
means  to  a  better  life. 


International  Reclamations  and  the  Peace  Settlements 

BY  JACK  TATE' 
Acting  Legal  Adviser 


In  discussing  claims  under  the  peace  treaty  with 
Italy,  Hungary,  Rumania,  and  Bulgaria  it  is  essen- 
tial that  there  be  a  consideration  of  the  framework 
of  facts  and  policy  within  which  the  provisions 
were  written.  Not  only  does  this  f  i-amework  place 
the  provisions  in  proper  perspective,  but  it  goes  a 
long  way  toward  explaining  the  ends  which  these 
provisions  were  designed  to  achieve  and  the  extent 
to  which  they  satisfy  the  claims  which  gave  rise 
to  the  provisions. 

In  September  1943,  actual  hostilities  between 
the  United  States,  the  principal  Allied  and  Asso- 
ciated Powers,  and  Italy  came  to  a  close  with  the 
signing  of  an  armistice.  From  that  time  until  the 
surrender  of  Germany  in  May  1945,  Italy  was  of 
assistance  to  the  Allies  in  the  prosecution  of  the 
war  with  Germany.  Continually  during  that 
period,  and  beyond  it  to  the  present,  the  United 
States  supplied  hundreds  of  millions  of  dollars' 
worth  of  supplies  to  the  Italian  people. 

At  the  time  of  the  drafting  of  the  peace  treaty 
with  Italy,  it  was  clear  that  the  rebuilding  of  the 
Italian  economy,  including  the  restoration  of  war- 
damaged  facilities  would  not  be  undertaken  suc- 
cessfully within  the  foreseeable  future  by   the 

Aloy   15,   1949 


Italians  without  outside  assistance.  It  was  like- 
wise clear  not  only  that  the  United  States  was  the 
only  source  of  substantial  assistance,  but  that  from 
both  the  political  and  economic  standpoint,  it  was 
in  the  national  interest  of  the  United  States  to  ren- 
der substantial  assistance  in  the  rebuilding  of  a 
democratic  independent  Italy. 

For  these  reasons  the  representatives  of  the 
United  States  sought  to  keep  to  a  minimum  the 
reparation  obligations  placed  upon  Italy.  For 
its  part,  the  United  States  announced  that  it  would 
seek  no  reparation  2>ayment  from  Italy.  It  like- 
wise announced  that  it  did  not  anticipate  that  it 
would  utilize  all  Italian  assets  available  under 
article  79  in  the  United  States  in  satisfaction  of 
claims  not  fully  satisfied  under  the  terms  of  the 
treaty.  It  used  its  influence  to  reduce  the  amount 
of  dollar  obligations  which  would  be  imposed  upon 
Italy,  as  against  the  persistent  efforts  of  the 
U.S.S.R.  and  Yugoslavia,  for  example,  to  increase 
those  amounts.    In  the  existing  state  of  the  Italian 


'  Address  made  before  the  Anjerican  Society  of  Inter- 
national Law  on  Apr.  29,  1949,  and  released  to  the  press 
on  the  same  date. 


economj',  substantial  reparations  from  Italy  to 
otlier  countries  would  have  to  be  paid  for  largely 
by  the  United  States. 

It  was  within  this  framework  that  tlie  United 
States  supported  the  principle  of  lira  compensa- 
tion for  war  damage  to  the  property  in  Italy  of 
United  Nations  nationals,  and  it  was  in  the  in- 
terest of  rebuilding  a  sound  Italian  economy,  not 
plagued  by  inflationary  pressures,  that  the  United 
States  supported  less  than  100  percent  lira  com- 
pensation with  respect  to  certain  classes  of  such 
war  damage. 

The  treaties  with  Hungary,  Rumania,  and 
Bulgaria  were  negotiated  during  the  same  period 
as  the  treaty  with  Italy.  Political  factors  with 
which  we  are  all  familiar  required  the  economic 
and  financial  provisions  of  those  treaties  to  be 
substantially  identical  with  the  Italian  treaty,  so 
that,  in  considering  tlie  i)rovisions  of  the  treaties 
relating  to  claims  we  shall  advert  to  the  pertinent 
provisions  of  the  treaty  with  Italy. 

The  fii-st  reference  in  the  treaty  to  the  matter  of 
reclamations  or  claims  is  contained  in  part  VI, 
entitled  "Claims  Arising  out  of  the  War."  The 
first  section  of  article  74  deals  with  the  matter  of 
reparations  payable  to  the  Soviet  Union,  Albania, 
Ethiopia,  Greece,  and  Yugoslavia  in  the  total  value 
of  oGO  million  dollars.  That  article  also  specifies 
the  sources  from  which  reparations  shall  be  paid, 
which  in  the  case  of  the  Soviet  Union  (in  the  sum 
of  100  million  dollai-s)  includes  inter  alia  Italian 
assets  in  Rumania,  Bulgaria,  and  Hungary.  The 
article  also  provides  that  the  claims  of  the  other 
states  mentioned  (Albania,  Ethiopia,  Greece,  and 
Hungtiry)  in  excess  of  the  amount  of  reparations 
payable  to  them,  shall  be  settled  out  of  the  Italian 
assets  subject  to  their  respective  jurisdictions. 
Under  the  provisions  of  the  article,  Italy  is  obli- 
gated to  compensate  natural  and  juridical  pereons 
whose  property  is  taken  for  reparation  purposes. 

The  next  reference  in  the  treaty  to  claims  is 
found  in  section  III  of  part  VI  entitled,  '"Renunci- 
ation of  Claims  by  Italy."  Paragraph  1  of  article 
76  provides  that  Italy — 

waives  all  clniins  of  any  description  against  the  Allied 
and  Associated  Powers  on  behalf  of  the  Italian  Govern- 
ment, or  Italian  nationals  arising  directly  out  of  the  war 
or  out  of  actions  taken  because  of  the  existence  of  a  state 
of  war  in  Europe  after  September  1,  1939  .  .  . 

Paragraph  2  provides  that  the  provisions  of  the 
article  "shall  bar,  completely  and  finally,"  the 
claims  waived  "which  will  be  henceforward  ex- 
tinguished, whoever  may  be  the  jiarties  in  inter- 
est." Among  the  types  of  claims  which  are 
specifically  mentioned  in  paragraph  1  as  being 
•waived,  barred,  and  extinguished  are  the 
following : 

(o)  Claims  for  losses  or  damages  sustained  as  a  con- 
sequence of  acts  of  forces  or  authorities  of  Allied  or 
Associated  Powers ; 

(6)  Claims  arising  from  the  presence,  operations,  or 
actions  of  forces  or  authorities  of  Allied  or  Associated 
Powers  in  Italian  territory; 

628 


(c)  Claims  with  respect  to  the  decrees  or  orders  of 
Prize  Courts  of  Allied  or  Associated  Powers  .  .  . ; 

(d)  Claims  arising  out  of  the  exercise  or  purported 
exercise  of  belligerent  rights. 

In  paragraph  5  it  is  provided  that  the  waiver 
includes  claims  arising  out  of  actions  taken  with 
respect  to  ships,  and  also  "claims  and  debts  arising 
out  of  the  Conventions  on  prisoners  of  war." 

In  connection  with  these  broad  provisions  for 
waiver  of  Italian  claims,  it  will  be  noted  that  this 
article  also  imposes  upon  Italy  certain  obligations 
to  pay  compensation  on  account  of  certain  types 
of  claims  with  respect  to  which  the  Allied  "and 
Associated  Powers  concerned  would  ordinarily  be 
required  to  make  satisfaction.  Paragraph  2  pro- 
vides in  part  as  follows : 

.  .  .  The  Italian  Government  agrees  to  make  equitable 
compensation  in  lire  to  persons  who  furnished  supplies  or 
sen'ices  on  requisition  to  the  forces  of  Allied  or  Asso- 
ciated Powers  in  Italian  territory  and  in  satisfaction  of 
non-combat  damage  claims  against  the  forces  of  Allied  or 
Associated  Powers  arising  in   Italian   territory. 

It  will  be  observed  that  compensation  shall  be  paid 
to  "persons,"  apparently  irrespective  of  their 
nationality  status. 

The  principal  provisions  of  the  treaty  in  relation 
to  claims  of  nationals  of  the  United  States  are 
contained  in  section  I  of  part  VII  entitled  "United 
Nations  Property  in  Italy."  Article  78  imposes 
certain  duties  upon  Italy  with  respect  to  property 
of  United  Nations  nationals  in  Italy,  including 
the  return,  free  of  specified  encumbrances,  of  all 
such  propert}'  "as  it  now  exists."  Paragraph  4 
{a)  of  the  article  provides  that  the  Italian  Gov- 
ernment "shall  be  responsible  for  the  restoration 
to  complete  good  order"  of  the  property  returned. 
The  same  paragraph  also  requires  the  payment  of 
compensation  with  resi^cct  to  United  Nations 
property  in  Italy.    It  provides: 

In  cases  where  property  cannot  be  returned  or  where, 
as  a  result  of  the  war,  a  fiiited  Nations  national  has 
suffered  a  loss  by  reason  of  injury  or  damage  to  property 
in  Italy,  he  shall  receive  from  the  Italian  Government 
compensation  in  lire  to  the  extent  of  two-thirds  of  the 
sum  necessary,  at  the  date  of  ptiyment,  to  purchase 
similar  property  or  to  make  good  the  loss  suffered. 

In  otlier  words,  if  sequestered  property  cannot 
be  returned  because,  for  example,  it  does  not  exist 
or  cannot  be  found,  the  owner  is  entitled  to  re- 
cover two  thirds  of  the  sum  necessary  "to  purchase 
similar  property."  On  the  other  hand,  if  tlie  owner 
of  any  property  in  Itah',  sequestered  or  other- 
wise, "suffered  a  loss  by  reason  of  injury  or 
damage"  thereto  "as  a  result  of  the  war,"  he  is  en- 
titled to  two  thirds  of  the  sum  necessary  "to  make 
good  the  loss  suffered."  It  will  be  noted  that  the 
Italian  Government  is  obligated  to  pay  compensa- 
tion irrespective  of  any  question  as  to  the  au- 
thorities or  forces  inflicting  the  loss  or  damage. 
The  provision  requiring  that  compensation  in  lire 
sliall  be  in  such  amount  as  may  be  necessary  "at  the 
date  of  payment"  to  purchase  similar  property  or 
make  good  the  loss,  was  ai^parently  designed  to 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


protect  the  owner  from  loss  on  account  of  de- 
preciation in  the  purchasing  power  of  Italian  cur- 
rency, between  the  date  of  loss,  or  the  date  of  an 
award,  and  the  date  wlien  compensation  is  actually 
paid.  While  the  treaty  provides  that  lire  currency 
received  as  compensation  shall  be  "freely  usable" 
in  Italy,  it  also  provides  that  it  shall  be  subject  to 
foreign-exchange  control  regulations  as  may  be  in 
force  in  Italy  from  time  to  time. 

Paragraph  4  {d)  of  article  78  also  requires  the 
Italian  Government  to  grant  to  United  Nations 
nationals  an  indemnity  at  the  same  rate  as  stipu- 
lated in  paragraph  4  (a)  to  compensate  them  for 
"the  loss  or  damage  due  to  special  measures 
applied  to  their  property  during  the  war,  and 
which  wei-e  not  applicable  to  Italian  property." 
It  is  expressly  provided  that  this  provision  does 
not  apply  to  loss  of  profits.  Paragraph  5  imposes 
additional  financial  obligations  on  Italy.  It 
provides : 

5.  All  reasonable  expenses  incnrred  in  Italy  in  establish- 
ing claims,  including  the  assessment  of  loss  or  damage, 
shall  be  borne  by  the  Italian  Government. 

The  term  "United  Nations  nationals"  as  used  in 
article  78  is  defined  in  paragraph  9  as  including 
"individuals  who  are  nationals  of  any  of  the 
United  Nations,  or  corporations  or  associations 
organized  under  the  laws  of  any  of  the  United 
Nations"  if  they  possessed  that  status 

(a)  On  September  3,  1943,  the  date  of  the 
Armistice  with  Italy ;  and  also 

{I)  On  September  15,  1947,  the  effective  date 
of  the  peace  treaty  with  Italy. 

The  term  is  also  defined  to  include  "all  individuals, 
corporations  or  associations  which,  under  the  laws 
in  force  in  Italy  during  the  war,  have  been  treated 
as  enemy."  Such  laws  would  presumably  include 
those  corresponding  to  legislation  which  was  in 
force  in  the  United  States  during  the  war  such  as 
the  Trading  with  the  Enemy  Act,  and  section  21  of 
Title  50  of  the  United  States  Code  relating  to  the 
internment  and  removal  of  "alien  enemies"  found 
in  the  United  States  in  time  of  war. 

In  connection  with  the  above-mentioned  pro- 
vision under  which  the  benefits  of  the  article  are 
accorded  corporations  or  associations  organized 
under  the  laws  of  any  of  the  United  Nations,  it 
may  also  be  noted  that  paragraph  4  (&)  provides, 
■with  respect  to  corporations  or  associations  or- 
ganized under  the  laws  of  a  state  which  is  not  one 
of  the  United  Nations,  for  a  so-called  "piercing  of 
the  corporate  veil"  and  recognition  of  the  "bene- 
ficial interest"  principle.     It  reads : 

4.  (6)  United  Nations  nationals  who  hold,  directly  or 
indirectly,  ownership  interests  in  corporations  or  asso- 
ciations which  are  not  United  Nations  nationals  witliin 
the  meaning  of  paragraph  9  (o)  of  this  Article,  but  which 
have  suffered  a  loss  by  reason  of  injury  or  damage  to  prop- 
erty in  Italy,  shall  receive  compensation  in  accordance 
with  sub-paragraph  (a)  above.  This  comjiensation  shall 
be  calculated  on  the  basis  of  the  total  loss  or  damage 

May  75,   1949 


suffered  by  the  corporation  or  association  and  shall  bear 
the  same  proportion  to  such  loss  or  damage  as  the  bene- 
ficial interests  of  such  nationals  in  the  corporation  or 
association  bear  to  the  total  capital  thereof. 

The  relationship  between  Italy  and  the  United 
States  concerning  the  subject  of  claims  would  be 
incomplete  if  we  stopped  with  the  treaty.  Fol- 
lo\ving  the  signature  of  the  treaty,  but  before  it 
entered  into  force  on  September  15,  1947,  the 
United  States  and  Italy  entered  into  several  mem- 
oranda of  understanding,  and  an  exchange  of 
notes,  on  August  14,  1947.  These  documents, 
known  as  the  Lombardo  agreement,  after  the  chief 
of  the  Italian  delegation,  constitute  an  executive 
agreement.  It  had  become  clear  during  the  period 
after  the  claims  provisions  of  the  treaty  with  Italy 
had  been  di-afted  that  the  Italian  financial  posi- 
tion had  deteriorated  and  that  Italy  was  laboring 
under  a  heavy  balance-of-payments  deficit.  The 
United  States  was  formulating  the  interim  aid 
program,  which  immediately  preceded  the  Euro- 
pean Recovery  Program,  under  which  substantial 
dollar  grants  for  the  purchase  of  essential  im- 
ports were  provided  for  Italy.  Under  these  cir- 
cumstances the  United  States  as  a  matter  of  policy 
decided  that  it  was  in  its  national  interest  not  to 
take  advantage  of  certain  of  its  treaty  rights  in  the 
matter  of  claims,  in  order  to  ease  the  financial 
burden  of  Italy,  and  avoid  being  placed  in  the 
anomalous  position  of  taking  money  out  of  one 
pocket  and  putting  it  into  another.  It  was  also 
considered  that  by  waiving  substantial  treaty 
claims  the  United  States  would  by  example  indi- 
cate to  other  countries  interested  in  an  independ- 
ent and  sound  Italy,  that  such  a  course  was  de- 
sirable for  them  as  well.  It  can  be  said,  I  believe, 
in  retrospect,  that  our  expectations  in  this  regard 
were  not  ill-founded. 

In  the  Lombardo  agreement  the  United  States 
waived  financial  claims  of  the  Government  of  the 
United  States  totaling  approximately  one  billion 
dollars.  This  amount  included  the  value  of  all 
civilian  supplies  furnished  under  the  military  re- 
lief program  prior  to  the  agreement,  of  all  supplies 
procured  with  funds  appropriated  for  the  pur- 
poses of  the  Lend-Lease  Act  and  transferred  to 
Italy  through  the  agency  of  the  War  Department, 
of  all  claims  of  the  United  States  or  any  of  its 
agencies  with  respect  to  advances  made  toward  the 
financing  of  Italian  partisans,  of  all  claims  with 
i-espect  to  payments  of  salary  to  Italian  officer 
prisoners  of  war,  and  several  other  classes  of 
claims. 

The  Government  of  Italy  made  several  com- 
mitments in  the  Lombardo  agreement  respecting 
property  of  nationals  of  the  United  States.  In 
article  3  of  the  memorandum  of  understanding 
between  the  two  governments  regarding  settle- 
ment of  certain  wartime  claims  and  related  mat- 
ters, the  Italian  Government  agreed  that  with 
respect  to  paragraph  4  (a)  and  {d)  of  article  78 
of  the  treaty  of  peace,  the  requirement  "for  the 


restoration  to  complete  flood  order"  would  be  fol- 
lowed in  ill!  ciiscs  where  there  had  been  (1)  de- 
terioration of  the  physical  property  while  under 
Italian  control,  and  (2)  where  the  physical  prop- 
erty had  suffered  nonsubstantial  damage  as  a  re- 
sult of  acts  of  war;  in  all  other  cases  the  require- 
ment to  compensate  in  lire  to  the  extent  of  "two- 
thirds  of  the  sum  necessary''  would  apply,  except 
that  the  Government  of  Italy  mipht  with  respect 
to  any  case,  apply  tiie  requirement  "for  the  restoia- 
tion  to  complete  good  order."  With  respect  to 
the  property  of  United  States  nationals  which 
were  not  covered  by  these  provisions,  the  Italian 
Government  stated  tliat  it  would  provide  identical 
treatment  as  described  above.  The  (jovernmcnt 
of  Italy  in  article  IV  of  tlie  same  memorandum  of 
understanding  recognized  the  existence  of  legiti- 
mate claims  of  the  United  States  Government  and 
of  United  States  nationals  against  the  Italian 
Govermnent  or  Italian  nationals  arising  out  of 
contracts  or  other  obligations  incurred  prior  to 
December  S,  11)41,  and  agreed  that  it  would  make 
every  effort  to  settle  such  obligations  and  to  facili- 
tate to  the  extent  possible  the  payment  of  such 
debts  or  other  claims.  There  are  several  other  pro- 
visions of  the  Lombardo  agreement  of  direct  bene- 
fit to  United  States  nationals  who  held  dollar 
bonds  issued  or  guaranteed  by  the  Italian  Govern- 
ment, and  a  plan  for  the  settlement  of  a  number  of 
these  obligations  was  advanced  by  the  Italian 
Government  at  the  time  the  agreement  was  entered 
into,  and  has  since  been  accepted  by  a  substantial 
number  of  American  bondlioldcrs. 

It  should  be  mentioned  in  this  connection  that 
the  Italian  Government,  pursuant  to  article  II 
of  the  memorandum  of  understanding  regarding 
Italian  assets  in  the  United  States  and  certain 
claims  of  United  States  nationals,  agreed  to  pay 
and  deposit  with  the  United  States  Government 
5  million  dollars  in  United  States  currency,  to 
be  utilized  in  such  manner  as  the  United  States 
Government  deemed  appropriate,  in  application  to 
the  claims  of  United  States  nationals  arising  out 
of  the  war  with  Italy  and  not  otherwise  provided 
for.  This  sum  has  been  paid,  and  it  is  now  being 
held  awaiting  distribution  to  such  persons  in  such 
manner  as  the  Congress  may  provide.  Approxi- 
mately GO  million  dollars  of  Italian  property  in 
the  United  States,  the  majority  of  it  blocked  prop- 
erty and  (lie  remainder  vested  by  the  Alien  Prop- 
erty Custodian  was  and  is  being  returned  to  Italy 
and  Italian  nationals. 

While  provisions  substantially  similar  to  those 
in  the  peace  treaty  with  Italy,  which  have  been 
thus  far  discus.sed  with  respect  to  United  Nations 
property  in  Italy,  are  also  contained  in  the  peace 
treaties  with  Finland,  Bulgaria,  Rumania,  and 
Hungarj',  the  last  two  treaties  contain  additional 
provisions  concerning  the  property  in  those  coun- 
tries of  persons  who  were  subjected  to  pei'secution 
after  September  1, 1939.     For  example,  paragraph 


1  of  article  25  of  the  treaty  with  Rumania  provides 
as  follows: 

1.  Houmnnia  iindeitakes  that  in  all  cases  where  the 
IiriipcTty,  legal  ritrhts  or  interests  in  Roumania  «f  persons 
under  Roumanian  jurisdiction  have,  since  Sei)teniber  1, 
l!i.30,  been  the  subject  of  measures  of  si'questration,  con- 
tiscation  or  control  on  account  of  the  racial  origin  or 
religion  of  such  persons,  the  said  propert.v,  legal  rights 
and  interests  shall  be  restored  together  with  their  acces- 
sories or,  if  restoration  is  impossible,  that  fair  compen- 
sation shall  be  made  therefor. 

Paragraph  2  of  the  same  article,  dealing  with  so- 
called  "heirless  or  unclaimed"  property  of  perse- 
cutees,  provides  in  part  as  follows : 

2.  All  propert.v,  rights  and  interests  in  Roumania  of 
pprsDiis,  organisations  or  communities  which.  iiKlividually 
or  MS  iiicinbcrs  of  groups,  were  the  object  of  racial,  reli- 
;;ious  or  otlicr  Fascist  measures  of  persecution,  and  re- 
maininf:  heirless  or  unclaimed  for  six  months  after  the 
coniiiiK  into  force  of  the  present  Treaty,  shall  be  trans- 
ferred liy  the  Roumanian  Government  to  organisations  in 
Roumania  representative  of  such  persons,  orf,'anisatioiis 
or  communities.  The  property  transferred  shall  be  used 
|py  such  organisations  for  purposes  of  relief  and  rehabilita- 
tion of  surviving  members  of  such  groups,  organisations 
and  communities  in  Roumania.  .  .  . 

All  the  peace  treaties  contain  provisions  similar 
to  article  83  of  the  treaty  with  Italy  concerning  the 
settlement  of  disputes  arising  under  article  78 
relating  to  Unitecl  Nations  property.  Article  83 
provides  that  such  disputes  shall  be  referred  to  a 
so-called  Conciliation  Commission  composed  of  a 
representative  of  the  government  of  tlie  United 
Nation  concerned  and  a  representative  of  the  Gov- 
ermnent of  Italy.  It  also  provides  that  if  the  two 
representatives  are  unable  to  agree  with  respect  to 
a  dispute  eitlicr  government  may  request  the  addi- 
tion of  a  third  member  selected  by  mutual  agree- 
ment of  the  two  governments  from  nationals  of  a 
third  country.  If  the  two  governments  are  unable 
to  agree  upon  a  selection,  the  article  ])rovides  for 
other  methods  for  his  designation,  including  the 
possibilit}'  of  his  appointment  by  the  Secretary- 
Genei'al  of  the  United  Nations.  The  article  also 
provides  for  decisions  by  majority  vote  and  that 
the  decisions  shall  be  accepted  by  the  parties  as 
definitive  and  binding. 

Special  reference  may  be  made  to  provisions  of 
the  peace  treaty  with  Finland,  to  which  the  United 
States  is  not  a  party  since  it  was  not  at  war  with 
that  country.  Article  29  contains  provisions  in 
relation  to  the  waiver  of  claims  of  the  Finnish 
Government  and  Finnish  nationals  similar  to 
those  contained  in  the  treaty  with  Italy  which 
have  been  discussed.  By  paragraph  3  of  the  article 
tlie  benelits  of  the  waiver  are  extended  to  United 
Nations  which  severed  diplomatic  relations  with 
Finlaiul  during  the  war,  which  the  United  States 
had  done  on  June  30,  19-14.  In  paragraph  4 
specific  reference  is  made  to  the  waiver  of  claims 
arising  out  of  actions  taken  din-ing  the  war  with 
respect  to  Finnish  ships.  It  is  interesting  to  ob- 
serve in  that  respect  that  certain  Finnish  ships 
were  taken  by  the  United  States  during  the  war 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


pursuant  to  a  statute  which  requires  that  the 
owners  of  requisitioned  ships  be  paid  just  compen- 
sation, and  funds  have  been  appropriated  for  that 
purpose.  The  interesting  question  arises  as  to 
whether  the  claims  of  the  Finnish  owners  for  com- 
pensation under  United  States  law  have  been 
legally  "extinguished"  by  a  treaty  to  which  the 
United  States  is  not  a  party.  If  so,  the  apparent 
result  is  that  foreim  relations  between  the  United 
States  and  Finland,  insofar  as  such  claims  are  in- 
volved, is  determined  not  by  the  Government  of 
the  United  States  but  by  governments  of  other 
countries  parties  to  the  peace  treaty,  including, 
inter  alia,  those  of  the  United  Kingdom,  the  Soviet 
Union,  Byelorussia,  the  Ukraine,  and  Czechoslo- 
vakia. 

It  is  perhaps  foolhardy  for  a  lawyer  to  philoso- 
phize. Speculation  upon  means  and  ends  of  claims 
settlements  of  peace  treaties  is  perhaps  particu- 
larly unprofitable.  I  take  it,  however,  that  I  may 
be  excused  for  saying  tliat  there  seems  to  be  an 


air  of  unreality  surrounding  traditional  financial 
settlements  between  victorious  and  defeated  na- 
tions after  wars.  The  victorious  nation  in  the 
modern  world,  entangled  with  the  rest  of  the  world 
in  its  economy  and  in  other  ways,  finds  that  it  is 
often  in  the  position  of  being  unwilling  and  in- 
deed unable  to  realize  the  "fruits"  of  its  victory. 
In  terms  of  its  own  national  interest  such  a  nation 
finds  it  advantageous  to  forego  what  would  appear 
to  be  "advantages"  to  a  private  person  in  a  less 
complex  setting.  Speaking  broadly,  it  is  my  im- 
pi'ession  that  in  a  world  such  as  ours  the  idea  of 
reparations  makes  less  and  less  economic  sense. 
Our  Government  is  apparently  of  the  same 
opinion,  as  is  evident  from  the  enormous  amount 
of  claims  which  were  our  right  to  insist  upon 
under  the  treaties,  but  which  we  waived.  From 
all  this,  one  may  draw  the  conclusion  that  a  nation 
does  not  "win"  a  war.  However,  it  would  be  rash 
to  assume  that  the  corollary — that  a  nation  does 
not  lose  a  war — is  likewise  true. 


Restrictions  Between  Zones  of  Occupation  in  Germany  and  Berlin  Lifted 


Letter  From  French,  U.K.,  and  U.S.  Representa- 
tives to  U.N.  Secretary-General 

D.N.  doc.  S/1316 
Dated  May  5,  1949 

May  i,  1949 
Excellency  : 

We,  the  Representatives  of  France,  the  United 
Kingdom  and  the  United  States  on  the  Security 
Council,  have  the  honor  to  request  that  you  bring 
to  the  attention  of  the  Members  of  the  Security 
Council  the  fact  that  our  Governments  have  con- 
cluded an  agreement  with  the  Government  of  the 
Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics  providing  for 
the  lifting  of  the  restrictions  which  have  been  im- 
posed on  communications,  transportation  and 
trade  witli  Berlin.  A  copy  of  the  communique 
indicating  the  agreement  reached  between  us  is 
enclosed. 

Accept,  Excellency,  the  renewed  assurances  of 
our  highest  consideration. 

Jean  Chauvel 
Representative  of  France 
Alexander  Cadogan 
Representative  of  the  United  Kingdom 
Warren  R.  Austin 
Representative  of  the  United  States 


Communique 

[Released  to  the  press  May  51 

The  Governments  of  France,  the  Union  of  So- 
viet Socialist  Republics,  the  United  Kingdom,  and 
the  United  States  have  reached  the  following 
agreement : 

1.  All  the  restrictions  imposed  since  March  1, 
1948,  by  the  Government  of  the  Union  of  Soviet 
Socialist  Republics  on  communications,  transpor- 
tation, and  trade  between  Berlin  and  the  Western 
zones  of  Germany  and  between  the  Eastern  zone 
and  the  Western  zones  will  be  removed  on  May  12, 
1949. 

2.  All  the  restrictions  imposed  since  March  1, 
1948,  by  the  Governments  of  France,  the  United 
Kingdom,  and  the  United  States,  or  any  one  of 
them,  on  communications,  transportation,  and 
trade  between  Berlin  and  the  Eastern  zone  and 
between  the  Western  and  Eastern  zones  of  Ger- 
many will  also  be  removed  on  May  12, 1949. 

3.  Eleven  days  subsequent  to  the  removal  of  the 
restrictions  referred  to  in  paragraphs  one  and 
two,  namely,  on  May  23,  1949,  a  meeting  of  the 
Council  of  Foreign  Ministers  will  be  convened  in 
Paris  to  consider  questions  relating  to  Germany 
and  problems  arising  out  of  the  situation  in  Ber- 
lin, including  also  the  question  of  currency  in 
Berlin. 


May    ?5,   7949 


General  Clay  Resigns  as  Military  Governor 
in  Germany 

Statement  hy  President  Truman 

[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  Douse  May  3] 

Four  years  ago  on  March  29,  1945,  President 
Roosevelt  announced  the  selection  of  Gen.  Lucius 
D.  Clay  for  service  in  the  Military  Government  in 
Germany.  Historically  the  Army  has  had  a  great 
tradition  of  constructive  achievement  in  the  gov- 
erinncnt  of  occupied  areas,  such  as  Cuba,  Puerto 
Rico,  and  the  Philippines.  But  nothing  that 
Americans  had  hitherto  been  called  on  to  deal  with 
approached  the  grim  prospect  presented  by  the 
moral  and  physical  collapse  of  Germany  and  the 
resulting  uiu'xaiiij)le  chaos. 

General  Clay  was  selected  for  this  task  on  his 
record  of  tireless  effort,  his  firmness  and  his  fair- 
ness, his  quality  as  a  soldier,  and  finally  his  under- 
standing of  and  devotion  to  the  American  spirit 
of  freedom. 

On  May  1.5,  1949,  I  am  acceding  to  his  repeated 
request  to  be  released  from  his  task.  Several  times 
before  it  had  been  thought  that  his  request  could 
be  granted,  but  in  recurring  emergencies  I  felt 
that  his  character  and  abilities  were  essential  to  the 
task  in  Germany  to  which  we  were  committed.  He 
could  not  be  spared. 

The  work  of  moral  and  economic  reconstruction 
among  the  Germans  in  the  western  zone  has  pro- 
ceeded to  a  point  where  they  are  about  to  obtain 
a  greatly  enlarged  measure  of  political  and  eco- 
nomic responsibility.  General  Clay  has  now 
completed  a  prodigious  task  of  administration. 

As  a  soldier  he  has  raised  the  morale  and  effi- 
ciency of  our  troops  in  Germany  to  levels  in  which 
he  and  the  country  can  take  justifiable  pride. 

His  name  will  always  be  associated  with  one  of 
the  toughest  tasks  and  accomplishments  of  Ameri- 
can history.  He  deserves  and  will  receive  the 
thanks  of  the  American  people. 

General  Huebner  and  General  Hays,  General 
Clay's  military  and  military  government  deputies, 
will  carry  on  his  work  pending  the  appointment  of 
a  civilian  high  coniniissioner. 

Achievements  Toward  Economic  Recovery 
in  Trieste 

Statement  hy  Secretary  Acheson 

[Released  to  the  press  May  4] 

I  have  welcomed  the  opportunity  to  discuss  with 
Major  General  Airey  '  the  situation  in  that  zone  of 
the  Free  Territory  of  Trieste  which  is  being  ad- 
ministered by  representatives  of  the  United  King- 
dom and  United  States  under  his  conmiand,  in 
accordance  with  the  provisions  of  the  treaty  of 
peace  with  Italy  and  with  due  regard  for  the  re- 

'  Maj.  Gon.  Torence  Airey  of  the  British  Army  Is  Com- 
mander of  tlie  Anglo-American  zone. 


sponsibilities  assumed  by  the  Security  Council  of 
tne  United  Nations  in  this  respect.  I  am  gratified 
to  learn  of  the  stability  which  has  been  achieved  as 
a  result  of  this  administration,  which  I  feel  is  a 
splendid  example  of  Anglo-American  cooperation. 
I  am  especially  pleased  to  learn  of  the  strenuous 
efforts  which  are  being  made,  within  the  European 
Recovery  Progi-am,  to  bring  about  moi'e  normal 
economic  conditions  in  the  Anglo-American  zone 
and  to  overcome  the  economic  difficulties  caused  by 
the  separation  of  the  Free  Territory  from  Italy. 

The  United  States,  together  with  the  Govern- 
ments of  France  and  the  United  Kingdom,  pro- 
posed on  March  20, 1948,  the  revision  of  the  treaty 
of  peace  with  Italy  so  as  to  return  to  Italy  the 
Free  Territory  of  Trieste.  I  hope  that  the  im- 
plementation of  this  proposal,  which  I  am  con- 
vinced will  contribute  to  international  stability 
and  to  the  well-being  and  security  of  the  inhabit- 
ants of  the  Free  Territorj-  of  Trieste,  will  not  be 
long  delayed. 

Deadline  for  Filing  Property-Restitution 
Applications  in  Czechoslovakia 

[Released  to  the  press  May  5) 

The  Department  of  State  has  been  informed  by 
the  American  Embassy  at  Praha  that  the  deadline 
for  filing  property-restitution  applications  under 
tlie  Czechoslovak  Law  of  May  IG,  1946,  is  June  17, 
1949. 

The  law  declared  as  null  and  void  any  property 
transfers  and  any  legal  transactions  involving 
jiioperty  insofar  as  they  were  undertaken  after 
September  29,  1939,  under  duress  caused  by  enemy 
occupation  or  by  national,  social,  or  political  per- 
secution. Such  property,  as  a  rule,  was  seques- 
tered by  the  German  authorities  and  transferred 
into  ownership  of  the  German  Reich  or  German 
nationals,  and  after  Czechoslovakia's  liberation  it 
was  placed  by  the  Czechoslovak  authorities  under 
national  administration  or  confiscated  as  enemy 
property. 

According  to  the  provisions  of  the  law  of  May 
16, 1946,  claims  for  restitution  of,  or  compensation 
for,  such  property  may  be  made  by  those  who  lost 
the  proiwrty  or  suffered  damages  due  to  invalid 
legal  transactions,  or  by  their  heirs.  If,  however, 
the  claimant  is  a  "nationally  unreliable  person," 
the  property  belongs  to  the  Czechoslovak  state  as 
confiscated  enemy  property.  Such  claims  are  to 
be  snlmiitted  by  the  claimant  to  the  appropriate 
district  in  Czechoslovakia  which  decides  in  the 
matter  after  hearing  the  interested  parties  and 
examining  the  proofs  submitted  by  them. 

The  attention  of  American  claimants  is  directed 
to  the  possibility  that  they  may  be  deprived,  by 
default,  of  their  right  to  claim  property  seques- 
tered during  Czechoslovakia's  occujiation,  if  tlieir 
authorized  legal  representatives  in  Czechoslovakia 
do  not  file  their  claims  within  the  specified  time 
limit. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


U.S.  Foreign  Policy  and  the  North  Atlantic  Pact 

BY  ASSISTANT  SECRETARY  PEURIFOY' 


The  constant  aim  of  the  United  States  foreign 
policy  is  to  secure  political  and  economic  condi- 
tions throughout  the  world  in  such  a  manner 
that  our  kind  of  life  can  best  thrive,  and  American 
interests  can  best  be  served.  In  making  foreign 
policj',  there  is  no  other  factor  which  comes  near 
this  objective  in  importance.  To  accomplish  this, 
we  must  have  a  real  peace  which  doesn't  threaten 
to  blow  up  in  our  faces  at  least  once  in  every  gen- 
eration. We  are  taking  evei^y  practical  and  con- 
structive step  that  will  make  it  possible  for  Ameri- 
cans— and  freedom-loving  peoples  everywhere — 
to  build  a  real  peace. 

We  don't  have  to  look  very  far  in  the  world 
today  to  find  trouble.  If  anybody  still  believes  in 
polls,  a  recent  survey  shows  that  most  of  us  are 
''headline  readers".  Actually,  that  is  all  we  have 
to  be  to  realize  that  there  is  plenty  of  trouble  all 
around  us — China,  the  Balkans,  the  Middle  East, 
and  even  danger  inside  our  own  borders. 

But  what  is  often  not  apparent  is  the  progress 
being  made.  It  is  slow  progress,  but  it  exists 
nevertheless.  Through  great  efforts,  for  example, 
hostilities  between  Israel  and  neighboring  Arab 
states  have  been  bi'ought  to  a  close. 

I  think  it  is  time  we  asked  that  often  used 
American  question :  "So  what?"  I  like  that  ques- 
tion because  there  aren't  any  other  two  words 
in  the  English  language  that  put  a  person  more  on 
the  spot.  He  either  has  to  give  a  good  answer  or 
keep  quiet.  With  my  eyes  open,  I  am  putting 
myself  on  the  spot  before  you  today  and  will  at- 
tempt a  good  answer. 

Here  in  the  United  States  we  have  more  of 
value  to  protect  than  any  other  country  anywhere 
else  in  the  world.  For  more  than  250  years,  we 
have  been  building  something  without  equal  or 
precedent.  It  has  not  been  an  easy  task.  It  has 
been  done  at  the  cost  of  many  lives  and  endless 
toil,  but  I  don't  think  any  of  us  would  say  it  hasn't 
been  worth  while..  This  democracy — ^American 
style — is  something  we  want  to  keep  building  on. 
It  is  the  job  of  the  Department  of  State  to  do 
everything  in  its  power  to  make  world-wide  con- 
ditions such  that  we  can  continue  to  build  in 
America. 

As  you  may  know,  I  have  been  spending  much 
of  my  time  recently  in  the  business  of  reorganizing 
the  Department  of  State.  When  the  job  is  finished, 
we  expect  to  have  an  even  more  effective  organiza- 
tion than  the  American  people  have  had  in  the 
past  to  conduct  our  business  with  other  nations 
and  peoples. 

tAay   IS,    1949 


This  task  of  carrying  out  our  aims  abroad  has 
been  made  immeasurably  harder  by  the  policy  of 
the  Soviet  Union.  In  the  Soviet  Union  and  its 
satellites,  you  and  I  as  individuals  would  be  worth 
little  beyond  what  we  could  produce  for  those 
states.  We  would  have  no  freedom  and  no  dignity 
as  human  beings.  Even  as  musicians,  artists,  or 
writers  we  would  be  able  to  use  our  talents  only 
as  the  Politburo  saw  fit.  We  would  be  cogs  in  a 
machine  which  to  date  has  produced  misery  for 
those  who  work  in  it. 

The  Soviet  Union  would  like  to  see  its  system 
spread  throughout  the  world.  Communists  are 
working  m  every  country  of  the  world  today.  The 
question  is  whether  we  should  bother  about  what 
is  happening  abroad  and  concentrate  on  the  prob- 
lem in  our  own  nation  or  whether  we  should  also 
take  an  active  interest  in  the  course  of  freedom 
beyond  our  shores.  Events  of  the  past  few  years 
give  us  the  answer  which  is  the  reason  your  Gov- 
ernment has  chosen  the  latter  road.  Develop- 
ments during  the  last  two  years,  in  my  opinion, 
have  fully  justified  that  policy. 

The  President  pointed  this  out  in  his  inaugural 
address  when  he  said : 

".  .  .  The  first  half  of  this  century  has  been  marked  by 
unprecedented  and  brutal  attacks  on  the  rights  of  man, 
and  by  the  two  most  frightful  wars  in  history.  The 
supreme  need  of  our  time  is  for  men  to  learn  to  live 
together  in  peace  and  harmony. 

The  peoples  of  the  earth  face  the  future  with  grave 
uncertainty,  composed  almost  equally  of  great  hoiws 
and  great  fears.  In  this  time  of  doubt,  they  look  to  the 
United  States  as  never  before  for  good  will,  strength,  and 
wise  leadership. 

The  preservation  of  freedom  overseas  is  as  im- 
portant to  the  United  States  as  its  preservation 
here  at  home.  Our  programs,  such  as  the  Mar- 
shall Plan,  are  going  a  long  way  toward  this  end. 
Hungry  people,  without  the  hope  or  the  means 
to  build,  are  ripe  for  Communist  propaganda. 
Through  the  European  Recovery  Program,  we 
have  brought  to  16  countries  of  Western  Europe 
both  hope  and  the  material  things  they  need  to 
build  for  the  future.  In  providing  this  aid,  we 
have  erected  for  ourselves  the  strongest  possible 
bulwark  against  totalitarianism — the  belief  in 
themselves  and  in  the  future  that  only  a  free 
people  can  have. 

United  States  assistance  has  materially  con- 

'  Address  made  at  the  DAR  Chapter  House  in  Parmville, 
N.  C.  on  Apr.  29,  1W9,  and  released  to  the  press  on  the 
same  date.  John  E.  Peurifoy  is  Assistant  Secretai-y  for 
Administration. 

633 


tributed  to  the  maintenance  of  a  free  Greece.  It 
has  f^reatly  aided  Turkey  in  resisting  cxtoriial 
pressure.  Tlie  French  and  Italian  elections  of  1948 
proved  the  interest  of  the  peoples  of  those  countries 
in  staying  within  the  non-Communist  world. 
Conununist  victories  would  have  doomed  any  hope 
of  economic  recovery  for  the  rest  of  Western 
Europe. 

Our  stake  in  keeping  the  peoples  of  these  nations 
free  is  a  great  one.  If  they  are  lost  to  the  other 
side,  we  may  lose  any  chance  of  economic  coopera- 
tion with  them.  Our  foreign  markets  in  those 
countries  might  dry  up.  We  might  not  be  able 
to  get  from  them  tne  things  we  need  to  keep  up 
our  standard  of  living  except  on  an  indefinite  and 
uncertain  basis.  Politically,  we  would  lose  valu- 
able allies,  people  who  stand  with  us  in  the  inter- 
national arena  against  Communism. 

In  facing  this  problem,  we  have  looked  at  it 
from  the  positive  rather  than  the  negative  side. 
In  other  words,  our  policy  has  not  been  one  de- 
signed to  merely  hold  the  line  against  this  totali- 
tai'ian  force.  It  has  rather  been  one  of  creating 
an  atmosphere  in  the  world  in  which  democracy 
can  thrive. 

Our  chief  weapon  in  this  struggle  has  been  the 
creation  of  confidence  in  other  nations.  A  free 
people  must  be  a  confident  people,  people  who  are 
not  afraid  to  look  at  the  future.  We  have  done 
this  through  our  aid  progi-ams,  including  the 
Marsliall  Plan;  througli  adhering  strictly  in  the 
United  Nations  to  the  things  for  which  we  stand; 
through  the  example  of  democracy  at  work  at 
home. 

The  gains  to  date  have  been  impressive.  In 
many  parts  of  the  world  the  tide  has  been  slowly 
turning  toward  a  favorable  recognition  of  our  way 
of  life.  However,  there  is  not  yet  definite  proof 
that  the  Communists  are  giving  up.  At  this.time 
encouraging  developments  are  taking  place,  espe- 
cially in  Germany.  The  Berlin  blockade  may  be 
lifted,  but  I  think  most  people  in  the  world  are 
going  to  approach  lliis  latest  effort  with  caution 
and  will  not  be  deceived  if  this  effort  is  not  a  real 
interest  in  furthering  world  jjeace. 

The  point  I  wish  to  make  is  that  we  must  now  do 
all  we  can  to  protect  the  gains  already  made.  We 
can  do  this  and  at  the  same  time  insure  further 
progress  through  the  North  Atlantic  pact  and  the 
projjosed  military  assistance  program. 

We  are  an  integral  part  of  the  North  Atlantic 
conmiunity.  It  is  important  to  our  economy  and 
imiK)rtant  to  our  national  securitj'.  We  s^iould 
not  disassociate  oui'selves  from  it.  It  is  entirely 
to  our  benefit  to  make  this  community  a  strong  one, 
economicall}',  i)olitically,  and  from  the  point  of 
view  of  military  strength.  We  want  this  com- 
munity to  be  sti-ong  enough  to  be  able  to  resist 
any  aggression  from  the  outside  and  even  to  dis- 
coui'age  any  thought  of  aggression.  If  we  can 
do  this  through  the  pact  and  arms  assistance  we 
will  have  succeeded  in  moving  a  long  step  forward 
toward  world  peace. 


The  12  democratic  nations  signing  the  pact  have 
one  objective:  to  gain  the  security  needed  to 
strengthen  themselves,  politically  and  economi- 
cally. The  pact  is  purely  defensive.  It  is  not,  as 
the  Communists  charge,  a  weapon  of  aggression. 
For  the  United  States,  there  is  nothing  in  it  that 
runs  contrary  to  our  established  laws.  The  Con- 
gress has,  and  will  continue  to  have,  the  sole 
power  to  declare  war  for  the  United  States.  Any 
decision  made  under  the  pact  would  be  made  in 
strict  accordance  with  our  Constitution. 

Further,  the  pact  does  not  contravene  any  part 
of  the  Charter  of  the  United  Nations.  Actually, 
it  is  designed  to  coordinate  the  right  of  self- 
defense  specifically  recognized  in  article  fil  of  the 
Charter.  Article  .51  states  that  the  member  gov- 
ernments of  the  United  Nations  have  "the  inherent 
right  of  individual  or  collective  self-defense  if 
an  armed  attack  occurs  against"  one  of  them. 

Exactly  what  commitments  do  the  United 
States  and  the  other  11  countries  make  under  the 
pact?  First,  they  agree  to  settle  their  disputes 
by  peaceful  means  and  to  refrain  from  the  threat 
or  use  of  force  in  their  international  relations  in 
any  manner  not  consistent  with  the  purposes  of 
the  United  Nations.  Second,  they  will  strengthen 
their  free  institutions,  promote  conditions  of 
stability  and  well-being,  and  encourage  economic 
collaboration.  They  next  agree  to  maintain  and 
develop  their  individual  and  collective  capacity  to 
resist  armed  attack.  Fourth,  they  will  consult 
with  each  other  if  the  territorial  integrity,  politi- 
cal independence,  or  security  of  any  one  of  the 
parties  is  threatened.  Last,  they  will  consider  an 
armed  attack  on  any  one  of  the  parties  as  an  at- 
tack against  all  and,  consequently,  take  such  in- 
dividual and  collective  action,  including  the  use 
of  armed  force,  as  each  member  of  the  pact  con- 
siders necessary  to  restore  and  maintain  the 
security  of  the  North  American  area. 

Tlie  pact  has  many  positive  values.  Wliat  the 
free  peoples  of  the  world  are  fighting  more  than 
anything  else  is  fear — fear  that  results  from  the 
kind  of  economic  and  political  instability  en- 
couraged and  fostered  by  the  Communists  and 
from  totalitarian  threats  of  aggressicm.  There 
can  be  no  real  European  economic  recovery  unless 
the  )ieople  of  Western  Europe  have  assurance  that 
the  l)0tter  life  they  arc  working  toward  will  not 
be  suddenly  snatched  from  them.  The  pact  will 
provide  a  large  part  of  the  psychological  lift  they 
need  to  guarantee  the  success  of  their  recovery 
efforts. 

A  further  measure  under  consideration  is  the 
provision  of  military  advice  and  equipment  to  the 
free  nations  of  the  world  willing  to  cooperate  with 
us  in  the  maintenance  of  peace  and  security. 

The  same  urgent  reasons  apply  to  military  as- 
sistance as  apply  to  the  pact.  The  supplying  of 
American  arms  and  advice  will  go  far  in  prevent- 
ing fear  and  uncertainty  in  which  so  many  pi^ople 
have  been  and  are  living.  The  Congress  will  be 
asked  to  consider  this  program  later  this  spring. 

Department  of  State   Butletin 


I  would  like  to  emphasize  one  more  thing.  The 
United  States  cannot  be  strong  politically,  eco- 
nomically, or  militarily  unless  the  free  peoples 
of  the  world  have  the  will  and  opportunity  to 
retain  their  freedom.  No  aid  that  we  give  under 
the  European  Recovery  Program,  the  military  as- 
sistance pi'ogram  or  any  other  program  can  have 
any  chance  of  achieving  its  aims  unless  the  peoples 
of  the  receiving  nations  are  determined  to  secure 
for  themselves  the  kind  of  world  they  want  to 
live  in.  We  know  now  that  these  people  whom  we 
are  helping  are  willing  to  work  and  are  working. 
The  nations  of  Western  Europe  have  proud  heri- 
tages, such  as  we  have  a  proud  heritage.  The 
despair  which  followed  the  end  of  the  war  is  gone, 
and  thev  are  piling  up  a  record  of  real  achieve- 
ment. I'here  should  be  no  cause  for  concern  on 
how  well  they  are  using  what  we  have  already 
given  or  on  how  well  they  will  use  what  we  may 
give  in  the  future. 

We  should  be  thankful  for  the  progress  made. 
For  we  can  no  longer  consider  ourselves  as  living 
on  an  island  safe  and  secure  in  the  middle  of 
troubled  seas.  The  First  and  Second  World  Wars 
demonstrated  for  all  time  that  the  security  of 
the  United  States  cannot  be  separated  from  the 
securit.v  of  Western  Europe.  The  common  inter- 
ests of  both  are  too  great  to  be  artificially  parted. 
We  know  also  that  a  strong  America  by  itself 
offers  no  guarantee  of  peace  and  security  abroad. 
But  a  strong  America  working  with  other  strong 
democratic  nations  oifers  a  real  contribution  and 
assurance  to  world  peace  and  security. 

That  is  what  we  would  gain  through  the  North 
Atlantic  pact  and  the  military  assistance  program. 

It  becomes  the  duty  of  every  citizen,  you,  the 
families  you  represent,  I,  and  other  government 
officials,  to  pull  together  and  support  our  Presi- 
dent, and  certainly  the  objectives  as  stated  in  his 
inaugural  address  when  he  said : 

Events  have  brought  our  American  democracy  to  new 
Influence  and  new  responsibilities.  They  will  test  our 
courage,  our  devotion  to  duty,  and  our  concept  of  liberty. 

But  I  say  to  all  men,  what  we  have  achieved  in  liberty, 
we  will  surpass  in  gi-eater  liberty. 

Steadfast  in  our  faith  in  the  Almighty,  we  will  ad- 
vance toward  a  world  where  man's  freedom  is  secure. 

To  that  end  we  will  devote  our  strength,  our  resources, 
and  our  firmness  of  resolve.  With  God's  help,  the  future 
of  mankind  will  be  assured  in  a  world  of  justice,  har- 
mony, and  peace. 

U.  S.  Views  on  Japan's  Resumption  of 
International  Responsibilities 

[Released  to  the  press  May  6] 

Because  of  remarks  appearing  in  the  press  ^ 
claiming  that  the  United  States  has  called  upon 
the  other  Far  Eastern  Commission  countries  to 
relax  control  of  Japan's  foreign  and  trade  policies, 
the  United  States  Government  feels  obliged  to 
make  the  following  clarifying  statement : 

The  Department  of  State  has  recommended  to 
May   15,   J949 


the  Far  Eastern  Commission  countries  that,  under 
SCAP's  supervision,  Japan  be  permitted  to  attend 
international  meetings  and  conventions  and  to  ad- 
here to  and  participate  in  such  international  ar- 
rangements and  agreements  as  other  countries  may 
be  willing  to  conckide  with  Japan. 

It  is  now  over  three  and  a  half  years  since  Japan 
surrendered  and  the  Allied  Powers  began  the  proc- 
ess of  establishing  conditions  in  Japan  which 
would  lead  finally  to  the  restoration  of  that 
country  to  a  normal  status  in  the  family  of 
nations.  This  is  the  pattern  envisaged  in  the  Pots- 
dam Declaration  and  the  basic  post-surrender 
policy  for  Japan,  which  was  approved  by  the  Far 
Eastern  Commission  on  June  19, 1947.  The  latter 
document  states  in  part  that  one  of  the  objectives 
to  which  policies  for  the  post-surrender  period 
for  Japan  should  conform  is  "to  bring  about  the 
earliest  possible  establishment  of  a  democratic  and 
peaceful  government  which  will  carry  out  its  in- 
ternational responsibilities,  respect  the  rights  of 
other  states,  and  supjiort  the  objectives  of  the 
United  Nations."  ^ 

It  is  important  from  the  point  of  view  of  de- 
veloping I'esponsible  government  in  Japan  that  it 
should  be  given  increasing  direction  of  its  own 
affairs  in  the  international  field  as  well  as  in  the 
domestic  field,  as  at  present.  That  this  process 
should  develop  under  the  guiding  hand  of  the  oc- 
cupation has  obvious  advantages  in  developing  a 
healthy  international  outlook  among  the  Japanese 
and  in  averting  the  confusion  that  might  well 
arise  from  any  abrapt  removal  of  current  re- 
strictions after  a  peace  treaty.  The  immediate 
resumption  by  Japan  of  some  international  re- 
sponsibilities in  such  fields  as  trade  promotion, 
citizenship  and  property  problems,  cultural  rela- 
tions, technical  and  scientific  arrangements  and 
exchanges  would  jjrovide  a  substantial  contribu- 
tion to  the  economic  recovery  of  Japan. 

Request  to  U.S.S.R.  for  Information  on 
Japanese  Prisoners  of  War 

[Released  to  the  press  April  25] 

W.  J.  Sebald,  Chief  of  the  Diplomatic  Section 
of  SCAP,  Tokyo,  on  April  25  addressed  the  fol- 
lowing letter  to  Lt.  Gen.  K.  N.  Derevyanko,  Soviet 
member  of  the  Allied  Council  for  Japan. 

Dear  General  Derevyanko  : 

Reference  is  made  to  the  discussion  on  the  prob- 
lem of  repatriation  at  the  forty-fourth  meeting  of 
the  Allied  Council  for  Japan  on  October  29,  1947. 
Specifically,  your  attention  is  invited  to  those  re- 

' Editor's  Note:  May  5  AP  ticker  report  datelined 
London  states  that,  according  to  American  diplomats, 
United  States  has  called  upon  the  10  other  nations  of  the 
Far  Eastern  Commission  to  relax  control  of  Japan's 
foreign  and  trade  policies.  The  report  then  goes  on  to 
give  inaccurate  account  of  U.S.  proposal  and  of  opposition 
of  British  Commonwealth  countries. 

'  Bulletin  of  Aug.  3,  1947,  p.  '216. 


marks  pertaining  to  appropriate  information  con- 
cerning records  of  death,  disappearance,  or  serious 
illness  of  Japanese  prisoners  of  war. 

It  is  a  matter  of  grave  concern  to  the  Supreme 
Commander  in  his  implementation  of  the  terms 
of  sui-rendcr  and,  by  reference,  of  the  Potsdam 
declaration,  that  the' Japanese  people  be  kept  in- 
formed concerning  a  matter  of  vital  importance  to 
them,  such  as  the  pertinent  data  mentioned  above. 
As  you  are  no  doubt  aware,  there  has  at  no  time 
been  any  report  whatsoever  from  the  Soviet  au- 
thorities concerning  Japanese  prisoners  of  war  held 
in  the  Soviet  Union  or  in  territories  under  the 
control  of  the  Soviet  Union,  nor  is  it  apparent 
from  information  available  to  the  Supreme  Com- 
mander that  any  effort  is  being  made  by  the  Soviet 
authorities  so  to  apprise  the  Supreme  Commander 
as  the  sole  executive  authority  for  the  Allied 
Powers  in  Japan.  Such  information  would  be  of 
interest  not  only  to  the  Japanese  people  and  par- 
ticularly to  the  families  of  the  individuals  con- 
cerned, but,  it  is  believed,  aLso  the  member  nations 
of  the  Far  Eastern  Conmiission  charged  with  the 
f  ornuilation  of  policy  pertaining  to  the  occupation 
of  Japan. 

It  is  therefore  requested,  in  conformity  with  the 
normal  dictates  of  international  law,  that  you  ap- 
proach your  Government  with  a  view  to  obtaining 
all  available  information  concerning  vital  statistics 
of  Japanese  prisoners  of  war,  with  especial  refer- 
ence to  names,  units  and/or  last  recorded  places  of 
domicile  or  residence,  nearest  relatives,  date  and 
place  of  decease  or  serious  illness,  and  such  other 
information  and  data  as  might  be  of  interest  to  the 
families  of  the  individuals  concerned. 
Sincerely  yours, 

W.  J.  Sebai-d 

Soviet  Representations  Concerning  Arrest 
of  Valentin  A.  Gubichev  Rejected 

[Released  to  the  press  May  G] 

The  Department  of  State,  after  consultation 
with  the  Department  of  Justice,  has  rejected  the 
representations  made  by  the  Government  of  the 
Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics  concerning 
the  arrest  of  Valentin  A.  Gubichev.  The  Soviet 
Government  had  claimed  that  Mr.  Gubichev  is 
a  diplomat  of  the  Soviet  Government  and  that 
therefore  his  arrest  was  unlawful  and  in  violation 
of  his  status  and  immunities. 

The  Department  of  State  has  informed  the 
Soviet  Embassy  that  Mr.  Gubichev's  status  in  the 
United  States  was  that  of  a  member  of  the  United 
Nations  Secretariat,  and  as  such  he  had  no  im- 
munity to  arrest  and  prosecution  for  the  acts 
charged.  It  was  pointed  out  that  the  Secretaiy- 
General  of  the  United  Nations  had  not  claimed 
any  immunity  for  Mr.  Gubichev  and,  in  fact,  has 
suspended  him  pending  the  disposition  of  his  case. 

The  Department  of  State  has  rejected  the  claim 
that  Mr.  Gubichev  is  in  this  country  as  a  Soviet 


diplomat  and  entitled  to  diplomatic  immunities. 
Under  international  law  and  the  laws  of  the  United 
States,  except  for  individuals  covered  by  section 
15  of  the  headquarters  agreement  between  the 
United  States  and  the  United  Nations,  an  in- 
dividual is  not  entitled  to  claim  diplomatic  status 
and  immunities  unless  he  is  a  foreign  official  ac- 
credited to  the  Government  of  the  United  States, 
notified  to  the  Department  of  State,  and  accepted 
by  the  Department  for  this  purpose,  or  is  a  member 
of  the  family,  staff,  or  retinue  of  such  official.  The 
United  States  also,  in  appropriate  circumstances, 
extends  diplomatic  privileges  to  foreign  officials 
who  are  accredited  as  diplomatic  officers  to  other 
governments,  to  international  conferences,  or  who 
are  on  other  diplomatic  missions.  Mr.  Gubichev 
has  never  been  accredited  to  the  United  States 
Government  or  accepted  by  it.  and  there  has  been 
no  claim  that  Mr.  Gubichev  is  entitled  to  diplo- 
matic immunities  by  virtue  of  section  15  of  the 
headquarters  agreement  between  the  United  States 
and  the  United  Nations.  Nor  is  he  in  the  United 
States  in  the  capacity  of  an  accredited  diplomatic 
officer  on  any  diplomatic  mission  for  which  it 
would  be  appropriate  to  extend  diplomatic  privi- 
leges to  Mr.  Gubichev  as  a  matter  of  courtesy- 

The  Department  of  State  has  further  informed 
the  Soviet  Government  that  in  view  of  Mr.  Gubi- 
chev's status  as  an  official  of  the  United  Nations, 
the  United  States  Government  cannot  recognize 
that  he  has  continued  to  serve  at  the  .same  time 
in  the  capacity  of  a  Soviet  diplomatic  officer. 
Such  a  dual  status  would  be  a  violation  of  the 
Charter  of  the  United  Nations,  and  the  United 
States  Government  cannot,  consistent  with  its  ob- 
ligations under  the  Charter,  give  effect  to  such 
a  dual  status.  Article  100  of  the  Charter,  and 
the  oath  taken  by  Mr.  Gubichev  pursuant  to  it, 
forbids  members  of  the  Secretariat  to  receive  in- 
structions from  any  government  or  any  authority 
external  to  the  United  Nations,  and  requires  them 
to  refrain  from  any  action  which  might  reflect  on 
their  position  as  international  officials  responsible 
only  to  the  organization.  Members  of  the  United 
Nations  undertake  to  respect  the  exclusively  inter- 
national character  of  the  Secretariat  and  not  to 
seek  to  influence  the  Secretary-General  and  his 
staff  in  the  discharge  of  their  responsibilities.  Mr. 
Gubichev  camiot,  therefore,  at  the  same  time  that 
he  is  an  official  of  the  United  Nations  Secretariat 
enjoy  diplomatic  status  and  immunity  deriving 
from  official  connection  with  the  Soviet  Govern- 
ment. 

The  Department  has  assured  the  Soviet  Gov- 
ernment that  Mr.  Gubichev  will  be  brought  to  trial 
without  undue  delay,  will  be  accorded  a  fair  and 
honest  trial,  and  will  have  the  benefit  of  all  the 
safeguards  which  the  Constitution  and  the  laws  of 
the  United  States  guarantee  to  persons  charged 
with  crime  in  the  courts  of  the  United  States. 

The  acts  charged  to  Mr.  Gubichev  would  con- 
stitute not  only  a  serious  abuse  of  his  privileges  of 

Departmenf  of  State   Bulletin 


residence  in  the  United  States  as  an  international 
official  but  also  a  flagrant  violation  of  his  oath  and 
duties  to  the  United  Nations.  The  United  Nations 
suspended  Mr.  Gubichev  immediately  after  learn- 
ing of  the  charges  against  him  and  has  been  giving 
the  United  States  Government  the  fullest  coopei-a- 
tion  in  the  case.  The  United  States  Government  is 
confident  that  the  member  governments  of  the 
United  Nations  as  well  as  the  Seci'etary-General 
are  concerned  to  assure  that  any  such  activities  by 
an  isolated  individual  are  prevented  or  terminated 
and  that  they  do  not  reflect  on  the  United  Nations 
itself  and  on  the  more  than  3,000  loyal  employees 
of  the  organization. 


British  Commission  Study  of  American 
Antitrust  Laws 

[Released  to  the  press  April  18] 

The  Department  of  State  on  April  18  announced 
the  arrival  of  Sir  Archibald  Carter,  K.C.B., 
K.C.I. E.,  Chaii-man  of  the  British  Commission  for 
the  investigation  of  monopolies  and  restrictive 
business  practices.  Sir  Archibald  is  being  accom- 
panied by  Josiah  Wedgwood  and  E.  C.  Yeabsley, 
C.B.E.,  Commission  members,  and  M.  S.  Morris, 
■who  is  on  the  staff  of  the  Commission.  They  plan 
to  spend  about  a  week  in  the  United  States. 

The  visit  stems  from  the  passage  last  summer 
by  the  British  Parliament  of  the  Monopoly  (In- 
quiry and  Control)  Act.  Apart  from  regulation 
of  public  utilities,  this  is  the  first  British  law  re- 
lating to  control  over  monopolies  since  the  Statute 
of  Monopolies,  passed  in  1624.  Under  the  new 
law  the  Commission  is  empowered  to  make  investi- 
gations into  cases  referred  to  it  by  the  Board  of 
Trade.  The  Commission  may  in  certain  instances 
recommend  remedial  measures  which,  if  approved 
by  the  Board  of  Trade,  may  be  proposed  to  Parlia- 
ment. 

The  Commission  has  only  recently  been  set  up. 
Sir  Archibald  Carter  and  his  colleagues  have  come 
to  this  country  at  the  outset  of  their  work  prin- 
cipally to  learn  at  first  hand  from  United  States 
Government  authorities  methods  and  procedures 
followed  in  inquiries  and  investigations  carried 
on  under  American  antitrust  laws. 


U.S.  Recognition  of  the  New  Syrian 
Government 

[Released  to  the  press  April  27] 

The  American  Legation  in  Damascus  on  April 
27  sent  a  note  to  the  Syrian  Ministry  for  Foreign 
Affairs  signifying  recognition  of  the  United  States 
of  the  new  Syrian  Government  established  on 
March  30, 1949,  under  the  leadership  of  Col.  Husni 
Zaim,  Chief  of  Staff  of  the  Syrian  Army.  The 
text  of  the  Legation's  note  follows : 

The  American  Legation  presents  its  compli- 
ments to  the  Syrian  Ministry  for  Foreign  Affairs 

May  15,  7949 


and,  pursuant  to  instructions  from  the  United 
States  Government,  has  the  honor  to  acknowledge 
the  receipt  of  the  Ministry's  note  no.  S— 1  dated 
April  7, 1949,  transmitting  a  copy  of  the  commmii- 
que  issued  by  the  General  Command  of  the  Army 
and  Armed  Forces  in  regard  to  the  factors  that  led 
to  the  recent  coup  d'etat  in  Syria,  as  well  as  of  the 
Ministry's  note  no.  M-6  dated  April  18,  1949,  in- 
forming the  Legation  that  a  new  Cabinet  had  been 
formed  and  giving  the  names  of  the  members  of 
the  Cabinet. 

The  Legation  has  been  instructed  to  inform  the 
Ministry  that  the  United  States  Government  has 
noted  with  satisfaction  the  public  assurances  which 
His  Excellency  the  Prime  Minister,  Colonel  Husni 
Zaim,  has  made  affirming  the  intention  of  the  new 
Syrian  Government  to  discharge  Syria's  obliga- 
tions arising  out  of  all  treaties  and  international 
Agreements  entered  into  by  previous  Syrian  Gov- 
ernments, as  well  as  its  attachment  to  democratic 
principles  and  its  intention  to  hold  new  elections 
at  an  early  date. 

The  Legation  avails  itself  of  this  opportunity  to 
renew  to  the  Ministry  the  assurances  of  its  highest 
consideration. 


Naval  Mission  Agreement  With  Haiti 

[Released  to  the  press  April  14] 

There  was  signed  on  April  14,  1949,  by 
Secretary  Acheson  and  Joseph  D.  Charles,  Am- 
bassador of  Haiti  to  the  United  States,  an  agree- 
ment providing  for  the  detail  of  officers  and 
enlisted  men  of  the  United  States  Navy  as  an  advis- 
ory mission  to  serve  in  Haiti.  The  agreement  is 
to  continue  in  force  for  four  years  from  the  date 
of  signature,  and  may  be  extended  beyond  that 
period  at  the  request  of  the  Government  of  Haiti. 

The  agreement  is  similar  to  numerous  other 
agreements  in  force  between  the  United  States  and 
certain  other  American  republics  providing  for 
the  detail  of  officers  and  enlisted  men  of  the 
United  States  Army,  Navy,  Air  Force,  or  Marine 
Corps  to  advise  the  armed  forces  of  those  coun- 
tries. The  provisions  of  the  agreement  pertain 
to  the  duties,  rank,  and  precedence  of  the  person- 
nel of  the  mission,  the  travel  accommodations  to 
be  provided  for  the  members  of  the  mission  and 
their  families,  and  other  related  matters. 


Letters  of  Credence 

Cuba 

The  newly  appointed  Ambassador  of  Cuba, 
Seiior  Dr.  Oscar  Cans,  presented  his  credentials 
to  the  President  on  April  20.  For  texts  of  the 
Ambassador's  remarks  and  the  President's  reply, 
see  Department  of  State  press  release  269  of  April 
20, 1949. 


U.S.  Protests  Soviet  Jamming  of  Voice  of  America 


International  Telecommunication  Union  Notified 

[Keleawd  to  the  pri-Ms  Mny  2) 

Rupsiun  jsinimiiiir  "f  the  Voice  of  America  has 
been  protested  by  tlie  Depaitineiit  of  State  to  the 
International  Telcconnnunication  Union,  of  which 
the  U.S.8.R.  is  a  member,  as  a  complete  violation 
of  the  Madrid  and  Atlantic  City  telecommunica- 
tion conventions  and  the  Cairo  and  Atlantic  City 
Radio  Regulations,  it  was  announced  on  May  2  by 
George  V.  Allen,  Assistant  Secretary  for  I'ublic 
Affairs. 

In  announcing  the  protest,  which  was  sent  on 
April  .30  to  the  Union's  headquarters  in  Geneva, 
Mr.  Allen  said  the  Department  has  asked  the 
Union  to  request  the  Soviet  Union  to  immediately 
take  necessary  steps  to  put  an  end  to  the  jamming 
operations. 

The  telegram  of  protest  addressed  to  the  Inter- 
national Telcconnnunication  Union  follows: 

For  more  than  a  year,  radio  jammers  which  have  been 
located  in  the  Soviet  XJnion  by  II.S'.  radio  direction  finders 
have  been  interfering  with  transmissions  of  Voice  of 
America.  Protests  by  the  U.S.  Government  to  the  Soviet 
Government  proved  of  no  avail. 

On  .\pril  25,  104&,  a  new  wlioli-sule  and  particularly 
intensive  jamming  campaign  w;is  iiiidcrt^iken  again  from 
the  Soviet  Union  which  interferes  not  only  with  U.S.  relay 
transmitters  in  Europe,  but  also  with  originating  trans- 
mitters operating  within  the  United  States. 

In  view  of  the  action  taken  by  the  Soviet  Government, 
the  United  States  Government  is  being  forced  to  take 
wliatever  steps  are  necessary  to  protect  its  broadcasting 
transmissions.  In  taking  such  steps  the  United  States 
Government  will  make  every  effort  to  avoid  inconvenience 
to  otlier  members  of  the  Union  which  adhere  to  their 
international  conniiitments  in  the  field  of  international 
broadcasting. 

Keqnest  that  the  foregoing  immediately  be  brought  to 
the  attention  of  the  Soviet  authorities  with  request  that 
tliey  immediately  take  necessary  steps  to  put  an  end  to 
the  jamming  (ii)crntioiis  which  constitute  complete  viola- 
tion of  the  Madrid  and  Atlantic  City  telecommunication 
conventions  and  the  Cairo  and  Atlantic  City  radio 
regulations. 

It  is  also  requested  that  a  copy  of  this  message  be 
circulated  to  all  the  other  members  of  the  Union  for  their 
information. 

Action  Taken  by  Voice  of  America  and  BBC 

[lU'Ieasi'd  to  tlic  iiross  Mny  Gl 

The  Voice  of  America  and  the  British  Broad- 
casting Corporation  began  on  May  7  a  joint  and 
concerted  effort  to  break  through  the  Soviet 
jamming  blockade  which  has  seriously  interfered 
with  the  Russian  language  broadcasts  of  both  the 
Voice  and  BBC  since  April  24. 

George  V.  Allen,  Assistant  Secretary  for  Public 
Affairs,  announced  that  the  Voice  and  BBC  will 
each  broadcast  two  new  Russian-language  pro- 


grams daily  starting  at  10 :  15  a.  m.,  e.d.t.,  on  May 
7.  The  additional  programs  will  be  beamed  to  the 
Soviet  Union  simultaneously  by  the  Voice  and 
BBC.  The  Voice  will  use  35  short-wave  and  1 
medium-wave  transmitters  for  one  of  the  new 
broadcasts  and  23  short-wave  transmitters  for  the 
other.  The  BBC  will  transmit  its  progi'ams  on 
25  transmitters. 

The  Russian  language  services  of  the  two  coun- 
tries will  thus  be  made  available  to  Russian  listen- 
ers on  a  total  of  61  and  48  frequencies,  respectively. 
The  joint  plan  was  decided  upon  after  an  esti- 
mated GO  jannning  transmitters,  located  in  the 
Soviet  Union,  were  concentrated  in  an  intensive 
effort  to  blank  out  American  and  British  programs 
beamed  to  the  U.S.S.R. 

The  jamming  succeeded  in  obliterating  the 
broadcasts  for  the  first  week  after  April  24,  but  for 
the  last  several  days  Voice  of  America  engineers 
have  succeeded  partially  in  breaking  through  the 
jamming  curtain. 

The  Voice  will  continue  until  further  notice  its 
24-hour,  around-the-clock,  broadcasts  in  Russian. 
The  two  new  programs,  starting  at  10:  15  a.  ni. 
and  11: 15  p.  m.,  e.d.t.,  will  be  repeated  by  tran- 
scription until  the  regularly  scheduled  programs 
starting  at  2 :  00  p.  ni.  and  ."> :  00  p.  m.,  e.d.t.  The 
regular  programs  will  then  be  repeated  by  tran- 
scription until  the  special  broadcasts  begin. 

All  of  the  Voice  programs  will  carry  the  follow- 
ing announcement : 

Voice  of  America  transmissions  in  the  Russian  language 
have  been   interfered  with  wilfully  since  early   1048  by 
jammers  located  within  the  Soviet  Union.     In  more  re-  I 
cent  months,  there  has  been  an  increase  in  this  deliberate  | 
interference. 

Since  April  24  systematic,  severe,  and  wholesale  inter- 
ference has  been  imposed  by  additional  Soviet  jammers — 
not  only  on  Voice  of  America  Kussian-language  transmis- 
sions, but  on  BBC  Russian-language  transmissions  in- 
tended for  the  Soviet  Union,  as  well. 

The  nature  of  this  deliberate  interference  follows  a 
pattern  similar  to  the  systematic  jamming  of  short-wave 
iiriiadcasts  conducted  by  the  Nazis  during  the  war. 
Obviciusly  somebody  considers  it  dangerous  to  permit 
the  Soviet  people  to  listen  to  truthful  information  from 
a  free  radio.  The  BBC  and  the  Voice  of  America  have  no 
intention  of  stopping  their  broadcasts  in  the  Russian 
language,  the  aim  of  which  is  to  provide  the  Soviet  people 
witli  truthful  information. 

t'lmscqiiently,  the  BBC  and  the  Voice  of  America  are 
acting  jointly  to  reach  their  Russian-language  listeners 
within  the  Soviet  Union,  and  will  present  two  separate 
special  programs  daily,  in  addition  to  their  regularly 
sclieihiled  Russian-language  programs.  Therefore  there 
will  be  two  new  special  programs  daily,  direct  from  New 
York,  over  facilities  of  the  Voice  of  America  ;  and  two 
new  special  programs  from  London  over  the  BBC.  These 
programs  will  be  repeated  every  hour,  without  inter- 
ruption,  around   the  clock,   and  will   be  presented   com- 

Deparfment  of  Stafe  Bulletin 


mencing  May  7,  Saturday,  at  1415  G.  m.  t.  (1715  Moscow 
time)  on  many  short-wave  frequencies. 

Listen  for  tliese  programs,  and  look  for  the  frequency 
which  serves  you  best. 

These  new  special  programs  will  be  part  of  the  Russian- 
language  programs  on  the  air  continuously,  24  liours  a  day, 
and  will  continue  to  be  broadcast  until  further  notice,  or 
until  the  wilful  interference  of  the  regular  transmissions 
is  stopped. 

The  BB'C  Russian-language  broadcasts  will 
carry  a  similar  announcement.    It  will  say  in  part : 

A  great  number  of  powerful  jammers  have  been  ob- 
served, employing  the  technique  developed  by  the  Nazis  for 
using  Morse  indicators  to  control  the  operation.  The 
effect  has  been  to  obliterate  the  scheduled  programs  in 
Russian  from  London  and  New  York.  It  has  been  noticed, 
at  the  same  time,  a  number  of  short-wave  transmitters 
in  the  Soviet  domestic  service  have  not  recently  been  in 
operation. 

In  order  to  maintain  the  principle  of  freedom  of  in- 
formation, the  BBC  and  the  Voice  of  America  are  jointly 
considering  what  can  be  done  to  circumvent  this  inten- 
tional interference.  As  a  start,  additional  transmissions 
of  30-minute  duration  will  be  introduced  and  will  con- 
tinue until  further  notice.  .  .  . 

It  is  hoped  that  the  effect  of  this  joint  effort  will  be 
to  make  both  the  BBC  and  the  Voice  of  America  Russian 
services  available  to  listeners  on,  at  all  events,  some  of 
the  large  number  of  wave  lengtlis  which  will  be  in  use. 


THE  FOREIGN  SERVICE 
Confirmations 

On  April  20,  1949,  the  Senate  confirmed  the  nomination 
of  Louis  G.  Dreyfus,  Jr.,  to  be  American  Ambassador 
Extraordinary  and  Plenipotentiary  to  Afghanistan. 

On  March  17,  1949,  the  Senate  confirmed  the  nomination 
of  Edward  R.  Dudley  to  be  American  Ambassador  to 
Liberia. 

U.S.  and  Ethiopia  To  Raise  Legations 
to  Embassies 

[Released  to  the  press  April  28] 

The  Governments  of  the  United  States  and 
Ethiopia  have  agreed  to  raise  their  Legations  in 
Addis  Ababa  and  Washington  to  the  status  of 
Embassies.  This  change  in  the  status  of  the  two 
missions  will  become  effective  at  the  time  the  Am- 
bassadors-designate of  the  two  countries  present 
their  credentials. 


PUBLICATIONS 

Revisions  and  Additions  in  Treaty 
information  Service 

[Released  to  the  press  April  19] 

In  releasing  on  April  19  the  second  group  of 
sheets  in  its  loose-leaf  service  entitled  United 
States  Treaty  Developments,  the  Department  of 
State  is  making  available  up-to-date  information 
on  approximately  150  international  agreements 
not  previously  included  in  the  service,  revisions 
and  additions  on  over  150  to  400  agreements  cov- 

May    15,    1949 


ered  in  the  first  release  of  July  1948,'  and  a  new 
appendix  containing  treaty  surveys  on  various 
subjects. 

With  respect  to  the  150  agreements  not  pre- 
viously included,  such  data  as  the  following  are 
given :  date  and  place  of  signature,  effective  date, 
duration,  ratifications,  adherences,  reservations, 
amendments,  extensions,  authorizing  and  imple- 
menting legislation,  executive  action,  administra- 
tive and  diplomatic  interpretations,  and  court  de- 
cisions. The  subject  matter  of  each  agreement  is 
indicated,  with  citations  to  the  text.  This  group 
of  agreements  includes,  in  addition  to  many  re- 
cently concluded  (for  example,  the  General  Agree- 
ment on  Tariffs  and  Trade  signed  at  Geneva,  Oc- 
tober 30, 1947),  a  number  of  important  older  trea- 
ties concerning  which  there  have  been  current  de- 
velopments, such  as  the  Jay  Treaty  of  1794  with 
Great  Britain,  the  narcotic  drugs  conventions  of 
1912  and  1931,  the  telecommunications  convention 
and  radio  regulations  of  1932  and  1938,  and  the 
constitution  of  the  International  Labor  Organiza- 
tion. 

The  second  gi'oup  of  sheets  in  the  current  re- 
lease contains  revised  pages  to  be  substituted  for 
pages  released  in  July  1948  in  order  to  bring  them 
up-to-date.  The  revisions  affect  over  150  agree- 
ments already  treated  in  the  loose-leaf  service. 

The  third  group.  Appendix  III,  contains  lists 
of  prewar  agreements  with  Bulgaria,  Hungary, 
Italy,  and  Rumania  kept  in  force  or  revived  under 
the  respective  treaties  of  peace  following  World 
War  II ;  a  list  of  agi'eements  in  force  between  the 
United  States  and  other  American  republics ;  and 
a  survey  of  treaty  provisions  relating  to  the  rights 
of  inheritance,  acquisition,  and  ownership  of 
property.  Other  surveys  will  be  added  in  sub- 
sequent releases.  Previous  appendices  contain 
information  regarding  treaties  submitted  to  the 
Senate  of  the  United  States  and  not  yet  in  force 
(Appendix  I)  and  a  numerical  list  of  the  Treaty 
Series,  Executive  Agreement  Series,  and  Treaties 
and  Other  International  Acts  Series  (Appendix 
II).  These  lists  are  brought  up-to-date  in  the 
current  release. 

A  cumulative  161-page  index  by  countries  and 
subjects  replaces  the  previous  index. 

The  demand  for  United  States  Treaty  Develop- 
ments, compiled  by  TA  in  the  Office  of  the  Legal 
Adviser,  has  been  so  great  that  consideration  is 
being  given  to  reprinting.  The  second  release  may 
be  purchased  for  $3.25  from  the  Superintendent  of 
Documents,  Government  Printing  Office,  Wash- 
ington 25,  D.C. 

A  third  release  of  loose-leaf  sheets,  containing 
data  on  over  150  further  agreements  and  revisions 
on  over  125  agreements  previously  included  in  the 
service,  is  being  printed  and  will  be  released  in 
the  near  future.  A  fourth  set  of  loose-leaf  sheets 
is  in  preparation. 


'  BuiXETiN  of  Aug.  1,  1948,  p.  155. 


^(yyvCen/i^ 


General  Policy  Page 

Violation  of  Human  Rights  in  Bulgaria,  Hun- 
gary, and  Rumania: 

Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson 611 

Statement  by  Benjamin  V.  Cohen  .    ...        Gil 
Texts  of  Resolutions  Adopted  by  the  Gen- 
eral .\ssembly 613 

U.S.  Foreign  Policy  and  the  North  Atlantic 

Pact.    By  Assistant  Secretary  Peurifoy  .        633 
Soviet  Repiesentations  Concerning  Arrest  of 

Valentin  A.  Gubichev  Rejected  ....        636 
U.S.  Recognition  of  the  New  Syrian  Govern- 
ment             637 

Letters  of  Credence:  Cuba 637 

U.S.  Protests  Soviet  Jamming  of  Voice  of 

*■  America 638 

U.S.   and   Ethiopia  To  Raise   Legations  to 

Embassies 639 

Occupation  Matters 

Restrictions  Between  Zones  of  Occupation  in 

Germany  and  Berlin  Lifted 631 

General  Clay  Resigns  as  Military  Governor 
in  Germany.  Statement  by  President 
Truman 632 

Achievements  Toward  Economic  Recovery 
in  Trieste.  Statement  by  Secretary 
Acheson 632 

Request  to  U.S.S.R.  for  Information  on  Jap- 
anese Prisoners  of  War 635 

U.S.  Views  on  Japan's  Resumption  of  Inter- 
national Responsibilities 635 

The  United  Nations  and 
Specialized  Agencies 

Violation  of  Human  Rights  in  Bulgaria, 
Hungary,  and  Rumania: 

Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson 611 

Statement  by  Benjamin  V.  Cohen  ....        611 
Te.xt  of  Resolutions  Adopted  by  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly 613 

Resolutions  Adopted  by  the  Trusteeship 
Council,  Fourth  Session,  24  January  to 

25  March  1949 614 

The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations  .    .        616 
Report  on  Second  Session  of  General  Council, 

Ibo.     Article  by  George  L.  Warren  .    .        618 


The  United  Nations  and  P<>e« 

Specialized  Agencies — Continued 

U.S.    Delegations    to    International    Confer- 
ences: 
Ilo:  Third   Session  of  Coal   Mines  Com- 
mittee          620 

Ilo:  Fourth  Regional  American  Meeting  .        620 
World  Wood  Pulp  Problems 621 

Economic  Affairs 

U.S.  Commissioners  on  Caribbean  Commis- 
sion .Meet 621 

U.S.     Sends     Observer     to     Phyto-Sanitary 

Conference 622 

Economic    Policy    and    the    Ito     Charter. 

Address  by  Secretary  Acheson 623 

Deadline  for  Filing  Property-Restitution  .\p- 

plications  in  Czechoslovakia 632 

British  Commission  Study  of  .American  .\nti- 

trust  Laws 637 

Treaty  information 

International     Wheat    Agreement    Sent    to 

Senate.     Message  of  the  President  .    .    .        619 

U.S.  Ratifies  World  Meteorological  Conven- 
tion          622 

ICconomic     Policy     and     the     Ito     Charter. 

,\d(lress  by  iSecretary  Acheson 623 

International    Reclamations   and   the    Peace 

Settlements.     By  Jack  Tate 627 

Naval  Mission  .\greement  With  Haiti    .    .    .        637 

Revisions  and  Additions  in  Treaty  Informa- 
tion Service 639 

International  information  and 
Cultural  Affairs 

U.S.    Protests   Soviet  Jamming  of   Voice  of 

.\morica 638 

The  Foreign  Service 

Confinnations 639 

U.S.   and    Ethiopia   To    Raise   Legations   to 

Embassies 639 

The  Congress 615 

Publications 

Revisions  and  Additions  in  Treaty  Informa- 
tion Service 639 


%(ynt7mttt(y)^ 


George  L.  Warren,  author  of  the  Report  on  Second  Session  of 
General  Council,  IRQ,  is  Adviser  on  Refugees  and  Displaced 
Persons,  Department  of  State.  Mr.  Warren  is  United  States 
Representative  to  the  Executive  Committee. 


tJne/  ^eha/^f7nen(?  /C^ Cfuiief 


THE  U.  S.  MILITARY  

ASSISTANCE  PROGRAM    .  . 643 

U.S.    SPANISH  POLICY  •   Remarks  hy  Secretary 

Acheson 660 

ANNIVERSARY    OF     LIBERATION     OF 
CZECHOSLOVAKIA 
1945  Correspondence  Between  SHAEF  and 
Soviet  High  Command 665 

JAPANESE  REPARATIONS  AND  LEVEL  OF 

INDUSTRY     •      Statement  by  Major   General 
Frank  R.  McCoy 667 


For  complete  contents  see  back  cover 


Vol.  XX,  No.  516 
May  22,  1949 


U.  S.  SUPOJINTENOtNT  OF  DCK-UMtHIi 

JUN    7    1949 


^e  Qlefia/y^ene  ^/ y^le    L)  111161111 


Vol.  XX,  No.  510    •    Publicatio.n  3510 
May  22,  1949 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

U.S.  Government  Printing  Office 

Washington  25,  D.C. 

Price: 

52  issues,  domestic  $5,  foreign  $7.25 

Single  copy,  16  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 

been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 

Bureau  of  the  Budget  {February  18, 1949). 

Note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Department 
OF  State  Bulletin  as  the  source  will  bo 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BULLETIN', 
a  weekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Covernment  with  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  work  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BVLLETII\  includes 
press  releases  on  foreign  policy  issued 
by  the  White  House  and  the  Depart- 
ment, and  statements  and  addresses 
made  by  the  President  and  by  the 
Secretary  of  State  and  other  officers 
of  the  Department,  as  well  as  si>ecial 
articles  on  various  pluises  of  inter- 
national affairs  and  the  functions  of 
the  Department.  Information  is  in- 
cluded concerning  treaties  and  in- 
ternational agreements  to  which  the 
United  Slates  is  or  may  become  a 
parly  and  treaties  of  general  inter- 
national interest. 

Publications  of  the  Dcftartment,  as 
well  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


The  U.S.  Military  Assistance  Program 


In  the  compact  world  of  today,  the  security  of  the 
United  States  cannot  be  defined  in  terms  of  boundaries  and 
frontiers.  A  serious  threat  to  international  peace  and 
security  anywhere  in  the  world  is  of  direct  concern  to  this 
country.  Therefore  it  is  our  policy  to  help  free  peoples 
to  maintain  their  integrity  and  independence,  not  only  in 
Western  Europe  or  in  the  Americas,  but  wherever  the  aid 
we  are  able  to  provide  can  be  effective. 

Secretary  of  State  Acheson,  March  18,  1949 

The  military  assistance  program  to  be  presented 
to  Congress  by  President  Truman  outlines  one  of 
the  most  effective  steps  the  United  States  can  take 
at  this  time  to  preserve  international  peace  and 
maintain  its  own  security.  It  is  a  step  in  keeping 
with  the  sharpest  lesson  of  the  twentieth  century — 
that  the  American  people  and  other  democratic 
peoples  must  now  find  their  security  in  the  broader 
security  of  a  free  and  stable  world.  To  keep  our 
freedoms  we  must  share  the  responsibility  of  pro- 
tecting them.  Security  today  means  stopping  war 
before  it  can  start.  It  means  halting  the  piecemeal 
aggressions  which  lead  to  war  by  making  crystal 
clear  to  any  would-be  aggressor  the  price  that  must 
be  paid  for  his  attack. 

Military  assistance  to  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty 
countries  and  to  other  free  nations  will  further 
the  basic  aims  of  general  security  in  a  manner 
which  the  executive  branch  of  the  Government  be- 
lieves will  prove  to  be  timely,  effective,  and,  in 
the  long  run,  economical.  Coupled  with  our  mem- 
bership in  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty,  it  will  give 
direct  assurance  that  the  United  States  intends  to 
continue  the  leadership  which  has  brought  confi- 
dence and  new  hope  to  democratic  nations. 

In  brief,  these  things  will  be  recommended  in 
the  military  assistance  program : 

that  all  projects  of  United  States  military  aid  be 
brought  together  in  one  program ; 

that  a  single  appropriation  be  made  to  cover  the 
costs  of  the  entire  military  aid  program  (for  the 
fiscal  year  1950,  these  amounts  would  be  about 
$1,130,000,000  for  the  North  Atlantic  Pact  coun- 
tries and  about  $320,000,000  for  Greece  and  Tur- 
key and  certain  other  nations  whose  security  is 

May  22,   1949 


important  to  the  United  States,  making  a  total 
of  about  $1,450,000,000) ; 

that  the  Chief  Executive  be  given  the  authority  to 
make  flexible  use  of  these  funds  and  to  meet 
emergencies  as  they  arise ; 

that  most  of  our  aid  at  this  time  go  to  Western 
Europe,  an  area  whose  importance  to  our  secur- 
ity has  been  demonstrated  in  two  world  wars ; 

that  the  military  aid  program  be  separate  and  dis- 
tinct from  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty,  but  that 
it  complement  that  Treaty  through  carrying  out 
the  principles  of  self-help  and  mutual  aid ;  and 

that  our  military  aid  to  the  free  nations  of  Western 
Europe  in  1950  take  three  forms:  a  relatively 
small  but  very  important  amount  of  dollar  aid 
to  increase  military  production  programs  of  the 
Western  European  nations  and  thus  speed  termi- 
nation of  their  present  heavy  dependence  on  the 
United  States,  a  direct  supply  of  arras  and 
equipment  to  help  accelerate  the  strengthening 
of  the  defensive  capabilities  of  their  military 
forces,  and  the  provision  of  U.  S.  technical  and 
training  assistance. 

These  proposals  add  up  to  immediate  support 
of  the  nations  of  Western  Europe  who  have  re- 
quested our  military  aid.  The  program  propos- 
ing that  action  is  an  adjustment  to  the  realities  of 
our  day  and  will  serve  to  bulwark  the  major  course 
the  United  States  has  undertaken  to  preserve 
peace  and  maintain  its  own  security. 

THE  BACKGROUND  OF  UNITED  STATES  POLICY 
The  Need  for  the  Program 

The  proposal  that  we  furnish  military  aid  now 
to  the  nations  of  Western  Europe  derives  from  the 
United  States  policy  of  responsible  leadership 
among  free  nations.  It  has  given  rise  in  the  past 
to  our  aid  to  Greece  and  Turkey,  our  share  in  the 
great  European  recovery  effort,  our  support  of 
regional  and  collective  self-defense  agreements  in 
Senate  Kesolution  239,  and  the  North  Atlantic 

'  Also  printed  as  Department  of  State  publication  3507. 


Pact.  As  early  as  March  17, 1948,  President  Tru- 
man said  in  a  message  to  Congress:  "I  am  confi- 
dent that  the  United  States  will,  by  appropriate 
means,  extend  to  the  free  nations  the  support 
•which  the  situation  requires.  I  am  sure  that  the 
determination  of  the  free  countries  of  Europe  to 
protect  themselves  will  be  matched  by  an  equal 
determination  on  our  part  to  help  them  to  do  so." 
The  need  to  act  now  arises  out  of  the  insecurity 
and  fears  of  Western  Europe  and  of  other 
freedom-loving  nations  of  the  world. 

Free  Europeans  believe  there  is  serious  danger 
that  the  progress  they  have  made  toward  recovery 
may  be  wiped  out;  under  these  circumstances  they 
find  it  difficult  to  exercise  to  the  full  the  drive 
and  imagination  that  can  take  them  to  higher 
levels  of  recovery. 

The  reality  of  the  fears  in  Europe  and  their 
causes  were  summarized  for  the  Senate  Foreign 
Relations  Committee  by  Secretary  of  State  Ache- 
son  in  these  words : 

"If  I  may  use  an  understatement,  the  sense  of 
insecurity  prevalent  in  Western  Europe  is  not  a 
figment  of  the  imagination.  It  has  come  about 
through  the  conduct  of  the  Soviet  Union.  Western 
European  countries  have  seen  the  basic  purposes 
and  principles  of  the  [United  Nations]  Chai'ter 
cynically  violated  by  the  conduct  of  the  Soviet 
Union  with  the  countries  of  Eastern  Europe. 
Their  right  to  self-determination  has  been  extin- 
guished by  force  or  threats  of  force.  The  human 
freedoms  as  the  rest  of  the  world  understands  them 
have  been  extinguished  throughout  that  whole 
area.  Economic  problems  have  not  been  solved  by 
international  cooperation  but  dealt  with  by  dicta- 
tion. These  same  methods  have  been  attempted 
in  other  areas — penetration  by  propaganda  and 
the  Communist  Party,  attempts  to  block  coopera- 
tive international  efforts  in  the  economic  field,  wars 
of  nerves,  and  in  some  cases  thinly  veiled  use  of 
force  itself. 

"By  the  end  of  1947  it  had  become  abundantly 
clear  that  this  Soviet  pressure  and  penetration  was 
being  exerted  progressively  further  to  the  West." 

The  joint  effort  in  the  European  Recovery  Pro- 
gram has  reached  the  stage  where  self-confidence 
is  vitally  important  in  bringing  out  new  invest- 
ments and  new  industries.  There  is  a  close  rela- 
tionship between  progress  toward  recovery  and 
progress  toward  an  effective  defense.  Not  only  is 
recovery  the  foundation  on  which  the  security  of 


a  free  and  healthy  people  depends,  but  economic 
recovery,  as  it  is  realized,  makes  available  more 
and  more  of  the  means  whereby  a  defensive 
strength  can  be  established  and  maintained 
through  a  nation's  own  efforts.  Confidence  that 
the  United  States  is  definitely,  clearly  interested 
in  the  peace  and  security  of  Europe  and  confidence 
among  free  Europeans  that  they  themselves  can 
contribute  to  Europe's  peace  and  security  are  both 
needed  for  full  recovery  and  eventual  indejjend- 
ence  from  United  States  aid. 

The  military  aid  proposed  for  Western  Europe 
starts  with  the  size  and  composition  of  the  military 
forces  planned  for  in  the  1950  budgets  of  these 
countries.  Its  purpose  is  to  help  modernize  and 
balance  the  equipment  of  these  small  forces.  Ex- 
perience has  shown  that  small  military  establish- 
ments, well  equipped  and  backed  by  a  determined 
people,  can  be  effective  in  maintaining  peace. 
Their  presence  in  areas  of  insecurity  would  dis- 
abuse any  would-be  aggressor  of  his  visions  of  easy 
conquest.  The  establishment  of  such  forces  can- 
not be  considered  an  act  of  aggression.  Defensive 
strength  in  the  hands  of  nations  of  peaceful  intent 
does  not  lead  to  war.  The  danger  of  war  arises 
from  the  huge  military  establishments  which  dic- 
tators maintain  and  are  constantly  tempted  to  use. 

The  free  countries  of  Western  Europe  must  be 
encouraged  by  our  actions  to  continue  their  efforts 
toward  recovery.  They  do  not  have  the  resources 
to  develop  adequate  defense  forces  by  their  own 
efforts  within  a  reasonable  time.  Their  will  to 
resist  and  their  ability  mutually  to  defend  them- 
selves must  be  strengthened.  They  must  be  en- 
couraged and  assisted  to  build  up  their  defense 
forces,  through  self-help  and  mutual  aid,  to  a 
point  where  aggression  cannot  take  place,  either 
through  internal  disorders  inspired  from  outside 
sources  or  under  the  guise  of  border  incidents.  In 
short,  we  must  assist  the  free  nations  of  Western 
Europe  to  achieve  the  ability  to  maintain  their  in- 
dependence and  national  security. 

Recovery  and  confidence  are  closely  linked. 
Our  active  foreign  policy  has  given  rise  in  Europe 
to  a  great  momentum  of  recovery  and  a  great  in- 
crease in  the  will  to  resist  aggression.  The  hope 
for  peace  with  freedom  lies  in  maintaining  this 
momentum.  The  continuing  confidence  among 
free  peoples  that  the  United  States  is  a  full  partner 
in  the  effort  to  preserve  peace  is  the  key  factor  in 
meeting  the  economic  and  political  problems  of 
our  over-all  foreign  relations. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


President  Truman's  Third  Point 

In  his  inaugural  address  President  Truman  out- 
lined four  courses  of  interrelated  action  through 
which  the  United  States  is  now  helping  to  create 
the  world  conditions  under  which  all  nations  and 
all  peoples  will  be  free  to  govern  themselves  and 
to  achieve  a  decent  and  satisfying  life.  They  are, 
first,  to  support  and  strengthen  the  United  Na- 
tions ;  second,  to  continue  our  programs  for  world 
economic  recovery ;  third,  to  strengthen  free  na- 
tions against  the  dangers  of  aggression;  and 
fourth,  to  undertake  a  program  to  improve  the 
living  conditions  of  the  peoples  of  underdeveloped 
areas  through  the  use  of  modern  technology. 

The  provision  of  military  aid  to  other  nations 
comes  under  the  third  of  the  President's  policy 
points.  The  United  States,  he  declared  in  his 
address,  will  act  to  strengthen  freedom-loving  na- 
tions against  the  dangers  of  aggression  and  in 
addition  "will  provide  military  advise  and  equip- 
ment to  free  nations  which  will  cooperate  with 
us  in  the  maintenance  of  peace  and  security." 
This  policy  is  not  new.  President  Truman  ex- 
pressed it  in  his  speech  of  March  12,  1947,  when 
he  requested  Congress  for  the  authority  to  aid 
Greece  and  Turkey.  He  declared  at  that  time 
that  "it  must  be  the  policy  of  the  United  States  to 
support  free  peoples  who  are  resisting  attempted 
subjugation  by  armed  minorities  or  by  outside 
pressures." 

In  the  two-year  interval  between  these  state- 
ments, positive  steps  were  taken  to  carry  out  this 
policy  of  military  aid.  The  United  States  has 
provided  military  assistance  to  a  number  of 
nations,  including  Greece  and  Turkey,  which  were 
in  immediate  and  critical  danger  of  aggression. 
Since  the  reiteration  of  the  policy  of  support  given 
in  the  President's  inaugural  address,  we  have  asso- 
ciated ourselves  with  Canada  and  10  other  nations 
in  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty,  signed  on  April  4, 
1949.  Our  partnership  with  the  nations  of  West- 
ern Europe  in  this  collective  security  arrangement 
goes  far  to  give  them  the  confidence  they  need, 
since  the  Treaty  states  clearly  that  an  attack  on 
one  member  is  an  attack  on  all  members.  At  the 
present  time,  however,  the  preponderant  military 
power  which  could  be  brought  to  bear  upon  an 
aggressor  is  centered  in  the  United  States,  3.000 
miles  from  Western  Europe.  It  must  be  perfectly 
clear  to  the  people  of  the  United  States  that  we 
cannot  count  on  our  friends  in  Western  Europe 
to  resist  if  our  strategy  in  the  event  of  war  is  to 

May  22,   J  949 


abandon  these  friends  to  the  enemy  with  a  promise 
of  later  liberation.  That  strategy  would  be  costly, 
since  it  could  produce  nothing  better  than  impo- 
tent and  disillusioned  allies  in  the  event  of  war. 
Plans  for  the  common  defense  of  the  free  world 
must  provide  for  the  security  of  Western  Europe, 
or  the  New  World  may  one  day  stand  alone,  an 
island  of  embattled  freedom  in  a  hostile  world. 
Western  Europe  must  count  on  us  if  it  is  to  sur- 
vive, and  we,  in  turn,  must  count  on  Western 
Europe  if  we  are  to  endure.  As  of  now,  the  inade- 
quate defenses  of  Western  Europe  invite  military 
aggression,  and  increasing  prosperity  makes  it  a 
prize  all  the  more  tempting.  Not  until  we  share 
our  strength  on  a  common  defensive  front  can  we 
hope  to  replace  this  temptation  with  a  real  deter- 
rent to  war.  The  North  Atlantic  Pact  is  an  agree- 
ment on  the  policy  of  a  common  defense;  its  very 
vital  corollary  is  a  program  of  military  aid. 

Coordinating  Military  Aid 

We  are  already  aiding  Greece  and  Turkey.  We 
now  find  it  necessary  to  aid  Western  Europe  and 
certain  other  free  nations.  Manifestly,  in  the  in- 
terests of  economy  and  to  achieve  coherent  action, 
the  military  aid  programs  must  be  considered  to- 
gether and  at  one  time.  Accordingly,  the  execu- 
tive branch  has  been  developing  a  program  some- 
what after  the  manner  of  the  Marshall  Plan  for 
economic  aid.  For  the  past  several  months  the 
Department  of  State,  at  the  direction  of  the  Presi- 
dent, has  been  coordinating  the  efforts  of  all  the 
Government  agencies  concerned  with  foreign  as- 
sistance in  shaping  a  unified,  cohesive  military  aid 
program.  The  proposed  program  provides  for 
centralized  administration  of  military  aid  and 
asks  that  broad  authority  be  granted  to  the  Presi- 
dent so  that  he  may  make  aid  available  in  critical 
situations.  An  essential  part  of  the  planning  at 
this  stage  is  that  the  Congress  should  authorize  a 
single  appropriation  to  finance  all  activities  under 
the  program  during  the  fiscal  year  ending  June 
30, 1950. 

The  advantages  of  this  procedure  are  evident. 
It  will  permit  the  most  economical  allocation  of 
our  limited  military  resources  and  assure  that  they 
will  be  made  available  where  they  are  most  needed 
and  where  they  can  be  used  most  effectively.  The 
broad  administrative  authority  and  a  single  ap- 
propriation would  pi-ovide  the  flexibility  necessary 
to  deal  quickly  with  changing  situations.  The  cen- 
tralized program  also  would  make  possible  a  sys- 


tern  of  priorities  in  wliich  requests  for  iiid  could 
be  measured  against  logical  criteria  and  would  in- 
sure the  most  efficient  use  of  our  assistance  in  com- 
bination with  the  resources  of  the  recipient  coun- 
tries. 


they  are  not  signatories  of  the  Brussels  Treat}-, 
their  requests  emphasize  the  need  for  the  develop- 
ment of  self-help  and  mutual  aid  as  the  basic  prin- 
ciples of  building  up  the  defensive  capacity  of  the 
entire  North  Atlantic  area. 


Requests  for  Assistance 

Tlie  provision  of  military  assistance  for  the 
fiscal  year  1950  is  based  on  requests  from  certain 
free  nations  for  such  assistance.  Of  particular  im- 
portance are  the  requests  received  from  eight  At- 
lantic Pact  countries  early  in  April  of  this  year. 
The  requests  of  five  of  these  countries — the  United 
Kingdom,  France,  Belgium,  the  Netherlands,  and 
Luxembourg — were  submitted  as  a  single  coordi- 
nated request  through  the  mechanism  established 
under  the  Brussels  Treaty  on  March  17,  1948. 
The  remaining  three  requests  from  the  Atlantic 
Pact  countries  are  from  Denmark,  Norway,  and 
Italy. 

These  requests  have  in  common  certain  basic 
principles  which  are  important  in  that  they  pro- 
vide assurance  to  us  that  our  assistance  will  be  so 
used  as  to  furnish  the  maximum  benefit.  Stated 
simply,  the  requests  assure  that  (1)  the  requesting 
countries  will  cooperate  effectively  with  the  United 
States  in  maintaining  international  peace  and 
security ;  (2)  the  military  programs  of  the  request- 
ing countries  will  not  be  permitted  to  endanger 
economic  recovery;  (3)  the  requesting  countries 
will  do  all  they  can  to  help  themselves  and  like- 
minded  nations  in  their  area. 

All  of  the  Atlantic  Pact  countries  requesting 
assistance  recognize  the  importance  of  increasing 
at  this  time  their  existing  programs  of  military 
production  above  the  amount  already  provided  for 
in  their  budgets  for  the  coming  year.  At  the  same 
time,  they  recognize  that  such  an  increase  in  their 
military  production  program  must  not  be  allowed 
to  interfere  with  the  Recovery  Program. 

Of  particular  importance  is  the  fact  that  the 
requests  from  the  Brussels  Treaty  powers  were 
formulated  as  a  coordinated  single  request.  That 
coordinated  single  request  took  into  account  what 
eacli  of  the  five  countries  can  do  for  itself  and  for 
the  others.  It  is  evidence  of  the  ability  of  the 
European  countries  to  work  together  in  establish- 
ing coordinated  planning  and  is  a  result  of  a  care- 
ful examination,  as  a  group,  of  what,  as  a  group, 
they  can  do  for  themselves. 

While  Norway,  Denmark,  and  Italy  were  not 
in  a  position  to  furnish  coordinated  requests  since 


Relationship  to  tlie  Atlantic  Pact 

Tlie  requests  of  the  eight  North  Atlantic  Pact 
countries  are  not  a  product  of  the  Atlantic  Pact. 
The  military  assistance  program  was  conceived 
and  developed  separately  and  somewhat  in  ad- 
vance of  the  formulation  of  the  Pact.  The  mili- 
tary assistance  program  would  be  necessary  even 
without  an  Atlantic  Pact.  It  is  clear,  however, 
that  the  military  assistance  program  will  be  more 
effective  with  the  Atlantic  Pact  than  without  it, 
for  the  Atlantic  Pact  provides  the  defensive  poten- 
tial of  all  the  members  taken  together  as  con- 
trasted with  the  smaller  potential  of  the  individual 
member  nations.  It  further  provides  the  proce- 
dures for  attaining  coordinated  military  defense 
plans  and  the  mechanisms  for  developing  the  self- 
help  and  mutual  aid  principles. 

Although  the  military  assistance  progi'am  and 
the  Pact  were  conceived  of  and  developed  sep- 
arately, they  are  based  upon  the  same  principles 
and  they  are  complementary.  Article  3  of  the 
Pact  provides  that  by  self-help  and  mutual  aid 
the  members  will  develop  their  capacity  to  resist 
aggression.  The  military  assistance  program  is 
based  on  the  same  principle  of  self-help  and 
mutual  aid.  Article  3  does  not  obligate  the 
United  States  to  provide  any  definite  amount  of 
military  assistance  or  to  make  any  specific  contri- 
bution. It  does,  however,  obligate  the  United 
States,  as  it  obligates  every  other  member  of  the 
North  Atlantic  Pact,  to  adhere  to  the  principle  of 
mutual  aid  and  to  exercise  its  own  honest  judg- 
ment in  contributing  what  it  most  eflFectively  can 
to  implement  the  mutual-aid  principle.  It  is  the 
opinion  of  the  executive  branch  of  this  Govern- 
ment that  the  United  States  can  best  contribute  to 
the  collective  capacity  for  defense  of  the  North 
Atlantic  area  by  providing  military  assistance, 
and  it  is  the  recommendation  of  the  executive 
branch  that  it  should  do  so.  It  is  also  the  opinion 
of  the  executive  branch  that  the  provision  of  as- 
sistance will  become  a  powerful  factor  for  assuring 
success  on  the  aims  of  the  Pact,  for.  as  the  coun- 
tries of  the  Western  Union  develop  their  power  to 
resist  aggression,  they  will  become  better  able  to 
contribute  not  only  to  the  peace  and  security  of  the 


DeparfmenI  of  Stafe   Bulletin 


North  Atlantic  area  but  to  the  peace  and  security 
of  the  world. 

Relation  to  the  European  Recovery  Program 

In  the  past  year  the  free  nations  which  are  bound 
together  in  the  European  Recovery  Program  have 
taken  long  strides  toward  being  able,  in  the  words 
of  President  Truman,  to  "contribute  once  more  to 
the  security  and  welfare  of  the  world."  There  has 
been  a  marked  rise  of  confidence  among  them. 
Hope,  and  the  will  to  resist  tyranny,  were  ebbing 
in  1947.  They  are  flowing  again  today.  The  new 
factor  of  confidence  is  a  contagious  and  creative 
human  emotion  essential  to  the  final  success  of  the 
Recovery  Program.  Its  recent  growth  in  Western 
Europe  is  based  on  the  belief  that  through  the 
North  Atlantic  Pact  security  from  external  ag- 
gression can  be  attained. 

In  the  European  mind  two  concepts  contained  in 
the  Atlantic  Pact  are  inseparable.  The  first  is 
that  unity  of  purpose  among  the  free  nations 
would  be  a  powerful  deterrent  to  any  aggressor, 
and  the  second  that,  through  self-help  and  mu- 
tual aid,  effective  military  establishments  can  be 
developed  as  an  assurance  of  defense.  To  combat 
fear,  which  is  also  contagious  and  as  destructive 
as  confidence  is  creative,  the  free  peoples  of  Europe 
need  the  concrete  evidence  of  action  taken  for  mu- 
tual defense.  They  need  to  have  in  their  own 
hands  the  equipment  and  materials  which  will 
represent  a  clear  start  toward  individual  and  col- 
lective military  strength,  adequate  to  control  in- 
ternal disorders  and  to  convince  an  aggressor  that 
he  would  pay  dearly  for  any  attempt  to  cross  their 
borders. 

The  nations  of  Western  Europe  are  taking  their 
obligations  of  self-help  and  mutual  aid  under  the 
North  Atlantic  Pact  very  seriously  and  are  under- 
taking to  do  all  they  can  for  themselves  and  for 
each  other.  They  are,  however,  already  making 
heavy  expenditures  in  relation  to  their  resources 
for  military  purposes,  and  the  additional  effort 
that  they  can  make  at  this  time  is  limited.  These 
nations  could  not  under  existing  circumstances 
produce  sufficient  arms  and  equipment  for  them- 
selves for  adequate  defense  within  a  reasonable 
time. 

They  are  engaged  in  an  all-out  effort  to  achieve 
economic  recovery,  and  they  are  hard  pressed  to 
realize  sufficient  revenues  to  maintain  financial 
stability  and  to  insure  that  an  adequate  flow  of 
funds  into  reconstruction  and  investment  is  main- 
May  22,   J 949 


tained.  These  efforts  must  have  a  clear  priority. 
Sound  and  stable  economies  are,  in  themselves,  the 
strongest  bulwark  against  Communism  and,  in 
addition,  are  essential  to  enable  these  countries  to 
build  up  and  maintain  adequate  defense  forces. 
Additional  military  production  to  be  undertaken 
by  them  must  accordingly  be  limited  to  an  amount 
which  will  not  jeopardize  economic  recovery  and 
maintenance  of  financial  stability  or  require  any 
modification  of  the  original  concept  of  the  eco- 
nomic recovery  program — that  the  recipient  na- 
tions are  to  achieve  sufficient  economic  strength 
by  1952  to  be  able  to  maintain  their  populations 
on  an  adequate  basis  without  extraordinary  out- 
side assistance.  The  margin  above  the  require- 
ments for  economic  recovery  and  financial  stability 
for  increasing  military  production  is  relatively 
small.  A  significant  beginning,  however,  can  be 
made.  On  the  basis  of  estimates  by  these  countries 
and  the  Economic  Cooperation  Administration,  it 
is  believed  that  with  our  assistance  the  rate  of  mili- 
tary production  can  be  increased  by  the  equivalent 
of  several  hundred  million  dollars  without  endan- 
gering economic  recovery  or  financial  stability. 
The  existence  of  this  small  margin  for  additional 
production  does  not  mean  that  full-fledged  effort 
toward  economic  recovery  is  not  being  made.  In 
certain  cases  there  are  specialized  facilities,  such 
as  arsenals  and  aircraft  production  lines,  already 
in  existence  which  are  not  being  used  to  capacity, 
and  there  exist  imbalances  in  other  production 
facilities  which  make  it  impossible  to  utilize  these 
facilities  fully  in  the  recovery  effort.  In  certain 
countries  there  is  a  degree  of  unemployment  or 
pools  of  labor  which  are  relatively  immobile  be- 
cause of  the  housing  shortage.  So  long  as  in- 
creased military  production  is  not  expanded  be- 
yond reasonable  limits  it  would  represent  a  mar- 
ginal production  which  can  be  fitted  safely  into 
the  gradually  recovei-ing  economic  situation  in 
Europe.  The  people  of  these  countries,  with  the 
impetus  of  the  North  Atlantic  Pact  and  the  mili- 
tary assistance  program,  will  also  unquestionably 
accept  the  further  sacrifices  required  to  permit 
sufficient  funds  to  be  realized  from  noninflationary 
sources  to  finance  the  internal  costs  of  this  in- 
creased military  i^roduction  program. 

Provision  must  be  made,  however,  in  the  mili- 
tary assistance  program  to  cover  dollar  costs  in- 
volved in  or  incident  to  this  production,  because 
these  countries  do  not  have  other  means  to  meet 
these  costs.     The  provision  of  these  funds  will  be 


an  economic  expenditure.  When  this  financial  as- 
sistance is  added  to  the  labor,  facilities,  materials, 
and  funds  to  be  supplied  by  the  recipient  nations, 
it  will  result  in  the  production  of  far  more  equip- 
ment than  could  bo  produced  by  the  United  States 
with  the  same  expenditure  and  will  enable  these 
countries  to  initiate  a  gradually  expanding  pro- 
duction program  which  will  eventually  terminate 
the  present  heavy  dependence  on  the  United  States. 

DETAILS  OF  THE  MILITARY  AID  PROGRAM 

A  Single  Plan 

The  proposed  program  combines  all  of  the 
foreign  military  assistance  programs  envisaged 
for  the  fiscal  year  1950.  The  requirements  of  the 
requesting  countries  have  been  carefully  studied 
to  assure  the  most  effective  total  allocation  of 
United  States  assistance. 

The  needs  of  the  five  Brussels  Treaty  nations 
were  examined  through  informal  conversations 
and  in  studies  carried  out  among  their  military 
representatives  and  tliose  of  the  United  States  and 
Canada.  Both  in  tliese  conversations  and  in  the 
studies  made  by  the  permanent  Military  Commit- 
tee, established  under  the  Brussels  Treaty  in  April 
1948,  the  requirements  for  defense  have  been  de- 
termined. 

Bequests  from  Norway,  Denmark,  and  Italy,  also 
members  of  tlie  North  Atlantic  Pact,  and  requests 
from  Greece  and  Turkey  have  also  been  carefully 
screened  by  our  Government.  These  reports  were 
examined  in  the  light  of  the  purpose  of  the  co- 
ordinated program,  our  own  security  interests  in 
the  specified  area,  and  the  requesting  country's 
military  production,  its  ability  to  use  aid  effi- 
ciently, its  defense  jjosition  and  defense  planning, 
and  its  relationship  to  over-all  security  coordina- 
tion. Aid  in  appreciably  smaller  volume  is  also 
needed  in  additional  countries  which  have  asked, 
or  received,  our  assistance  in  the  past. 

The  program  now  before  the  Congress  comprises 
a  planned  and  coordinated  response  to  all  these 
demands  upon  United  States  resources.  It  is 
limited  to  the  bare  essentials  of  aid  necessary,  dur- 
ing the  time  period  proposed,  to  meet  our  world 
rpquirements. 

The  Cost  of  Military  Assistance 

The  legislation  proposed  by  the  President  would 
authorize  him  to  spend  $1,450,000,000  in  the  fiscal 
j'ear  1950  for  the  purposes  of  the  program.  Of 
this  amount,  $1,130,000,000  would  be  provided  to 


the  other  signatories  of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty 
in  the  form  of  equipment  shipped  from  the  United 
States  and  of  funds  for  financing  materials  for 
increased  military  production  in  Europe. 

Duration  of  the  Program 

Military  assistance  programs  of  the  United 
States  have  been  directed  toward  establishing  in 
areas  of  the  free  world  threatened  by  aggression 
the  confidence  and  physical  security  which  will 
make  attempted  intimidation  pointless  and  un- 
jirofitable.  In  facing  the  predatory,  world-wide 
attacks  on  democratic  freedoms,  there  is  the  con- 
tinuing need  to  associate  ourselves  with  vigorous, 
like-minded  peoples  who  have  a  similar  tradition 
of  liberty  and  freedom. 

The  program  now  before  the  Congress  is  an 
interim  program  covering  the  most  urgently 
needed  military  aid  requirements  of  the  fiscal  year 
1950.  It  is  a  program  which  will  go  into  effect, 
if  approved  by  Congress,  prior  to  the  working  out 
of  a  common  strategic  concept  through  the 
machinery  of  the  North  Atlantic  Pact.  The 
programs  for  subsequent  years,  and  the  appropria- 
tions that  will  be  requested  for  them,  will  be 
dependent  upon  many  intangibles.  There  are 
certain  limiting  factors,  however,  which  may  be 
kept  in  mind. 

The  first  of  these  factors  is  that  each  year's 
program  will  add  a  permanent  increment  in  defen- 
sive strength.  With  the  exception  of  the  aid  to 
Greece,  tlie  aid  proposed  under  the  present  interim 
program  is,  for  the  most  part,  capital  equipment, 
equipment  which  lasts  in  peacetime  for  many 
years. 

A  second  factor  is  that  the  aid  projected  for 
Western  Europe  is  being  furnished  to  military 
forces  which  are  of  definite  size  and  composition. 
Any  increase  in  those  forces  will  be  limited  by 
the  agi-eed  priority  of  economic  recovery  in 
Europe. 

A  third  limiting  factor  will  be  the  increasing 
ability  of  the  nations  of  Western  Europe  to  pro- 
vide for  themselves.  As  recovery  in  Europe  pro- 
gresses, industrial  production  in  Europe  will 
increase  and  so  will  the  amount  of  production  that 
will  be  available  for  military  purposes. 

Tlie  fourth  and  greatest  factor  is  the  degree  to 
which  we  and  the  nations  associated  with  us  can 
remove  the  threat  of  war.  The  degree  to  which 
we  can  further  that  basic  aim  of  our  foreign  policy 
will  be  the  most  precise  measure  of  the  limitations 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


which  can   be   placed   safely   on  United   States 
military  assistance. 

Impact  on  the  U.  S.  Economy 

Tlie  National  Security  Resources  Board,  in  con- 
sultation with  other  interested  departments  and 
agencies,  has  analyzed  the  probable  effect  of  the 
proposed  program  upon  our  own  economic  and 
financial  strength.  The  demands  of  the  program 
for  scarce  materials  such  as  steel,  copper,  and  alu- 
minum will  be  small  and  easily  manageable. 
Since  the  expenditures  in  any  one  quarter  of  the 
fiscal  year  will  be  less  than  one  half  of  one  percent 
of  our  gross  national  production,  the  effects  on  the 
over-all  economy  will  be  slight. 

Effect  on  U.  S.  Military  Strength 

The  military  assistance  program  will  not  weaken 
our  presently  authorized  armed  forces.  The  slight 
and  temporary  impact  of  the  program  on  our  own 
materiel  requirements  would  be  more  than  com- 
pensated by  the  improvement,  in  the  long  run,  of 
the  over-all  capability  of  the  United  States  and 
its  partners  to  deter  or  to  meet  aggression. 

Administering  the  Program 

The  executive-branch  proposal  envisions  that 
the  President  will  delegate  to  the  Secretary  of 
State  by  Executive  order  the  broad  responsibility 
and  authority  to  administer  the  military  aid  pro- 
gram. Thus  military  aid  may  be  best  integi-ated 
into  the  over-all  foreign  policy  of  the  United 
States  and  made  consistent  with  our  goal  of  world 
peace. 

Within  the  Department  of  State  an  adminis- 
trator for  foreign  military  assistance  would  be 
appointed  to  administer  the  program  and  super- 
vise the  allocation  of  funds  for  the  Secretary.  The 
National  Military  Establishment  would  be  dele- 
gated a  large  share  of  the  responsibility  for  the 
actual  operation  of  the  program.  Both  the  Na- 
tional Military  Establishment  and  the  Economic 
Cooperation  Administration  would  act  in  an  ad- 
visory capacity  to  the  Department  of  State. 

WAGING  THE  PEACE 

A  Defense  Program 

A  considered  and  limited  program  of  military 
aid  undertaken  by  the  United  States  now  will  ad- 
vance world  peace  and  security  by  deterring  ag- 
gression and  by  helping  to  create  the  climate  of 


hope  and  confidence  essential  for  cooperative  ac- 
tion toward  a  peaceful  and  prosperous  world. 

This  program  is  designed  to  improve  the  defen- 
sive strength  of  the  cooperating  nations  and  thus 
to  increase  their  will  to  resist  aggression  and  their 
ability  to  maintain  internal  security.  The  pro- 
found desire  of  the  peoples  of  Western  Europe 
and  North  America  for  a  chance  to  live  in  peace 
should  allay  any  fear  that  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty,  or  the  limited  assistance  proposed  for  its 
members,  would  provide  a  basis  for  aggressive 
action  against  any  nation. 

The  military  assistance  program  proposed  by 
the  United  States,  like  our  membership  in  the 
North  Atlantic  Treaty,  is  part  of  a  policy  which 
is  entirely  defensive  in  its  scope.  It  could  not  be 
otherwise.  Aggression  is  contrary  to  our  basic 
traditions,  instincts,  and  fundamental  policies. 
The  very  nature  of  our  democratic  system  of  gov- 
ernment gives  assurance  that  we  could  not  conspire 
to  undertake  an  act  of  aggression. 

Military  Aid  and  the  United  Nations 

By  helping  to  restore  a  sense  of  security  to  the 
free  nations  of  the  world  through  increasing  their 
ability  to  resist  aggression,  the  military  aid  pro- 
gram should  help  bring  about  world  conditions 
which  will  permit  the  United  Nations  to  function 
more  effectively.  Supporting  as  it  does  the  peace- 
ful objectives  of  the  United  Nations  and  the  in- 
herent right  of  individual  and  collective  self- 
defense,  specifically  recognized  by  article  51  of  the 
Charter,  the  program  is  wholly  consistent  with  the 
intent  of  the  Charter. 

Action  taken  under  the  program  must  conform 
to  United  Nations  principles  and  purposes  and  to 
our  present  and  future  obligations  under  the 
Charter.  The  proposed  legislation  restates  the 
Government's  obligation  as  a  Member  of  the 
United  Nations  to  refrain  from  giving  assistance 
to  any  nation  against  which  that  organization  is 
taking  preventive  or  enforcement  action.  It  re- 
quires the  President  to  abstain  from  giving  any 
aid  under  the  program  which  he  may  find  incon- 
sistent with  that  obligation. 

The  Price  of  Peace 

The  people  of  America  appreciate  that  world 
peace  cannot  be  achieved  without  effort,  real  sacri- 
fice, and  constant  vigilance.  To  this  end  they  have 
willingly  and  generously  supported  programs  de- 
signed to  secure  lasting  peace  and  security. 

Secretary  Acheson  said  in  his  radio  broadcast 


May  22,   1949 


on  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty :  "The  United  States 
is  waging  peace  by  throwing  its  full  strength  and 
energy  into  the  struggle,  and  we  shall  continue  to 
do  so.  .  .  .  To  have  genuine  peace  we  must  con- 
stantly work  for  it.  But  we  must  do  even  more. 
We  must  make  it  clear  that  armed  attack  will  be 
met  by  collective  defense,  prompt  and  effective.'' 
The  military  assistance  program  now  proposed 
is  part  of  the  price  we  must  pay  for  peace  and 


security  in  present  world  conditions.  It  is  one  of 
the  preventive  actions  we  can  take  now  to  avoid 
the  terrible  expenditures  of  war.  Today  the  free 
nations  hold  the  initiative  in  the  Western  World. 
They  are  confident  that  they  can  and  will  stand 
together  in  defense  of  their  freedom.  If  we  turn 
aside  at  this  moment  from  aiding  the  common  de- 
fense, we  may  not  again  have  such  an  opportunity. 


Probable  Impact  of  Military  Assistance  Program  on  Steel,  Copper,  and  Aluminum 


(Released  to  the  press  May  9] 

At  the  request  of  the  Secretary  of  State,  the 
staff  of  the  National  Security  Resources  Board,  in 
cooperation  with  other  interested  agencies,  has 
studied  the  impact  of  a  hypothetic  military-assist- 
ance program  somewhat  larger  than  the  program 
which  has  been  proposed  by  the  President.  The 
acting  chairman  of  the  National  Security  Re- 
sources Board  has  transmitted  a  report  which  in- 
cludes the  following  paragraphs: 

Military-aid  requirements  are  small  in  relation 
to  total  availabilities.  They  are  also  of  minor  sig- 
nificance in  relation  to  the  requirements  of  all 
proposed  security  programs.  Requirements  lor 
all  security  programs  for  steel  and  aluminum  will 
amount  in  each  case  to  a  little  over  6  percent  of  the 
estimated  United  States  supply.  For  copper, 
such  requirements  amount  to  considerably  over  15 
percent.  All  foreign-aid  requirements,  including 
military  aid,  amount  to  less  than  2  percent  for 
steel,  less  than  one-quarter  of  1  percent  for  alu- 
minum, and  somewhat  over  4  percent  for  copper 
for  which  EGA  program  requirements  are  siz- 
able.    The  military-aid  requirements  amount  to 


less  than  one-half  of  1  percent  of  the  total  supply 
of  each  of  the  three  metals. 

The  problem  of  the  impact  of  the  military-aid 
and  other  security-program  requirements  was  dis- 
cussed at  a  meeting  of  representatives  from  inter- 
ested Federal  agencies.  It  was  the  general  judg- 
ment of  the  group  that  the  increased  burden 
caused  by  the  military-aid  program  would  be 
manageable  and  well  within  necessary  adjust- 
ments in  operating  schedules  for  the  affected  in- 
dustries. The  burdens  on  the  three  basic  metals 
created  by  the  requirements  for  all  the  projected 
security  programs,  while  much  larger,  could  be 
met  within  the  limits  of  the  supplies  estimated  to 
be  available  to  the  United  States  without  any  real 
hardship  on  the  domestic  economy.  Supplies  left 
to  domestic  users  would  be  roughly  at  the  level  of 
consumption  in  1948,  with  a  possibility  that  indus- 
trial demands  might  be  less.  Thus,  in  our  judg- 
ment, the  security  requirements  for  the  three  basic 
materials  could  be  met  even  with  some  large  addi- 
tion governmental  programs.  If  such  programs 
develop,  the  whole  situation  would  require,  of 
course,  further  examination. 


Deparfment  of  State  Bulletin 


THE  UNITED  NATIONS  AND  SPECIALIZED  AGENCIES 


Progress  in  the  Economic  Commission  for  Europe 


STATEMENT  BY  W.  AVERELL  HARRIMAN' 
U.S.  Representative  to  ECE 


In  considering  the  reports  which  have  been  sub- 
mitted to  this  session  by  the  committees  of  Ece,  I 
believe  that  some  general  remarks  are  desirable  be- 
fore we  proceed  to  deal  with  each  report  separately. 
We  are  fortunate  in  being  able  to  examine  these 
reports  against  a  heartening  background.  During 
the  last  year  we  have  seen,  and  can  draw  confidence 
from,  remarkable  improvements  in  large  parts  of 
the  European  economy.  The  impressive  gains  in 
production  in  1946  had  been  checked  in  1947.  Bi- 
lateral trade  arrangements  had  shown  themselves 
unequal  to  the  needs  of  trade  within  Europe  and 
lack  of  foreign  exchange  threatened  to  halt  essen- 
tial imports  from  overseas  of  food,  materials  for 
production,  and  machinery  for  reconstruction. 
These  difficulties  were  intensified  by  adverse 
weather  conditions  throughout  most  of  Europe. 

In  1948,  however,  most  of  us  here  have  seen  this 
trend  toward  disaster  stopped  and  then  decisively 
reversed.  In  1948  there  were  notable  gains  in  the 
output  of  coal,  steel,  electrical  power,  machinery, 
and  consiuner  goods.  It  became  possible  to  end 
rationing  of  many  goods.  Inflation  has  been 
checked  and  is  no  longer  the  threat  that  it  was 
a  year  ago.  The  cooperative  efforts  of  a  number 
of  European  countries,  joined  in  by  my  govei-n- 
ment,  made  possible  once  again  an  assured  flow  of 
needed  food  and  materials.  Increased  production 
resulted,  and  this  in  turn  reinforced  the  oppor- 
tunities for  work.  The  threat  of  widespread  un- 
employment was  averted.  Nature,  with  good 
harvests,  assisted  the  cooperative  endeavors 
of  men. 

Much,  of  course,  remains  to  be  done  before  the 
European  economy  has  been  strengthened  and  uni- 
fied to  the  point  where  external  aid  will  no  longer 
be  needed.  But  the  achievements  of  1948 — we 
may  well  call  it  the  year  of  restored  confidence — 
give  assurance  that  this  goal  will  be  reached.  Re- 
covery is  no  longer  in  doubt.  The  nations  which 
have  voluntarily  joined  together  in  a  cooperative 
recovery  program  will  regain  their  economic 
health,  and  in  doing  so  will  preserve  their  own  in- 
dependence and  confirm  faith  in  liberty  and  demo- 
cratic government  wherever  the  truth  can  be 
known.  The  Economic  Commission  for  Europe 
has  played  a  useful  role  in  those  recovery  gains. 
Much  solid,  down-to-earth  work  has  been  done  by 
the  Ece  committees  on  coal,  steel,  transport,  timber, 

May  22,  1949 


electric  power,  and  industry  and  materials.  More 
can  be  done. 

I  wish  to  comment  briefly  on  a  few  aspects  of 
this  work.  Tlie  Inland  Transport  Committee  has 
strengthened  ties  between  European  countries  in 
reestablishing  an  orderly  system  for  the  return  of 
freight  cars  to  originating  lines,  in  promoting 
standardization  of  freight  cars,  in  plaiining  the 
development  of  a  network  of  modern  international 
highwaj-s,  and  in  removing  many  artificial  bar- 
riers to  road  transport.  The  reciprocal  arrange- 
ments for  free  movement  of  buses  and  trucks  from 
one  country  to  another,  which  the  committee  hope- 
fully describes  as  "freedom  of  the  road,"  are  nota- 
ble steps  forward.  I  hope  that  more  countries 
will  join  in  these  arrangements  and  that  the  tem- 
porary and  limited  agreement  which  has  served 
for  the  past  year  will  soon  be  converted  into  a 
permanent  and  broader  freedom-of-the-road  con- 
vention, which  I  understand  is  now  being  given 
consideration.  Without  assurance  of  free  move- 
ment in  the  future,  the  road-transport  industry 
would  be  reluctant  to  invest  in  expanded  facilities. 

I  note  also  with  particular  interest  the  study  the 
Committee  has  made  with  the  aim  of  expanding 
the  refrigerated  transport  and  marketing  of  fresh 
fruits,  vegetables,  fish,  and  other  perishable  food- 
stuffs. I  hope  that  the  study  will  be  followed  with 
vigorous  action,  so  that  a  fuller  use  may  be  made 
of  European  food  resources  and  European  con- 
sumers may  enjoy  a  better  diet  at  low  prices. 

The  coal  committee  and  the  steel  committee  to- 
gether intensified  their  efforts  to  increase  the  out- 
put of  metallurgical  coke  and  to  conserve  its  use  for 
the  steel  industry.  Their  joint  work  has  helped 
greatly  in  increasing  steel  production  during  the 
past  year.  This,  in  turn,  has  benefited  almost  all 
branches  of  EurojDean  industry.  In  this  connec- 
tion, I  think  it  would  be  aj^propriate  for  the 
Commission  to  note  the  coopei'ative  action  of  the 
member  countries.  Sweden  and  Denmark,  in  par- 
ticular, generously  relinquished,  at  great  inconven- 
ience to  themselves,  supplies  of  coke  customarily 
used  for  household  heating,  so  that  this  coke  might 
be  used  to  increase  the  production  of  steel.  The 
coal  committee  has  continued  its  important  work 

'  Made  to  the  fourth  session  of  the  Commission  in  Geneva 
on  May  9,  1949,  and  released  to  the  press  by  the  U.S. 
Mission  to  the  United  Nations  on  May  10, 1949. 


of  allocating  coal.  As  the  problem  of  allocation 
became  less  pressing,  the  committee  began  to  give 
attention  to  questions  of  a  more  long-term  charac- 
ter, in  particular  the  promotion  of  improved  utili- 
zation of  available  European  resources  of  solid 
fuels.  This  work  should  be  continued.  I  have 
followed  with  interest  the  arrangement  being  fos- 
tered by  the  timber  committee  to  secure  financial 
assistance  to  timber-exporting  countries  in  order 
to  increase  Eurojie's  supply  of  timber  for  housing 
and  industrial  purposes.  My  government  sup- 
ports this  undertaking. 

I  wish  to  say  a  few  words  about  trade.  At  an- 
other time  in  this  session  we  will  have  before  us 
the  matter  of  approving  the  terms  of  reference  rec- 
ommended for  the  Committee  on  the  Development 
of  Trade.  But  it  is  also  desirable  to  comment 
briefly,  during  this  general  review  of  Ece  work, 
on  the  question  of  intra-European  trade  and  on 
what  the  new  committee  on  trade  may  be  able  to 
contribute  to  its  expansion.  A  larger  volume  of 
trade  between  eastern  Europe  and  western  Europe 
can  raise  standards  of  living  in  all  Europe  and 
will  reduce  Europe's  need  for  external  aid.  These 
are  objectives  which  the  record  shows  the  United 
States  to  favor.  A  significant  measure  to  expand 
intra-European  trade  would  be  an  increase  in  the 
availability  for  export  from  eastern  Europe  of 
commodities  desired  by  western  Europe.  A  prin- 
cipal reason  why  east-west  trade  has  not  grown 
more  rapidly  since  the  end  of  the  war  has  been 
the  failure  of  the  eastern  countries,  for  a  variety 
of  causes,  to  export  more  of  the  commodities, 
which  they  have  traditionally  supplied  to  western 
Europe. 

Before  the  war,  eastern  exports  to  the  west  con- 
sisted mainly  of  primary  products.  There  is  still 
a  wide  demand  for  these  products  by  western 
countries.  Western  exports  to  the  east  had  tradi- 
tionally consisted  of  manufactured  goods.  Since 
the  war,  however,  the  demands  of  eastern  coun- 
tries for  goods  from  the  west  have  increasingly 
concentrated  on  heavy  manufactured  goods  which 
have  been  in  scarcest  world  supply.  The  western 
countries,  though  wishing  to  resume  traditional 
patterns  of  trade,  have  been  obliged  to  seek  other 
sources  for  the  primary  products  formerly  avail- 
able in  Europe.  Had  supplies  been  available  in 
greater  volume  from  eastern  Europe,  the  western 
European  nations  could  have  obtained  them  from 
these  traditional  sources  rather  than  from  the 
Western  Hemisphere,  and  thus  return  to  a  more 
normal  level  when  eastern  Europe  resumes  large 
export  to  the  west  of  the  food,  timber,  coal,  and 
nonferrous  metals  which  western  Europe  desires. 
By  contributing  to  the  revival  of  production  and 
export  those  countries  which  have  joined  with  us 
in  the  European  Recovery  Program,  the  United 
States  is  giving  practical  assistance  to  expand- 
ing intra-European  trade  and  intends  to  continue 
to  do  so. 


The  industrial  recovery  in  the  west,  which  we 
have  aided,  has  brought  with  it  effective  markets 
for  the  products  of  eastern  Europe.  Increased 
production  has  meant  that  more  and  more  goods 
which  are  desired  in  exchange  are  becoming  avail- 
able. It  is  encouraging  to  note  from  the  economic 
survey  which  the  secretariat  has  placed  before  us 
that  despite  the  difficulties  we  have  encountered 
and  despite  the  shifts  from  prewar  trading  sys- 
tems, both  total  intra-European  trade  and  trade 
between  eastern  and  western  Europe  have  in- 
creased by  approximatel}'  2;j  percent  during  the 
past  year.  It  is  my  hope  that  the  new  trade  com- 
mittee will  contribute  to  a  sound  pattern  of  ex- 
panded production  and  trade.  Its  success  will 
depend  in  large  measure  on  the  willingness  of  coun- 
tries to  make  available  the  necessary  statistical  in- 
formation. Without  the  basic  facts  of  production 
and  trade  from  all  countries  of  Europe,  the  com- 
mittee will  lack  the  essential  tools  for  its  work. 
If  intra-European  trade  is  to  reach  the  level  re- 
quired for  genuine  recovery,  there  must  be  an  ad- 
vance from  the  now  prevalent  system  of  bilateral 
trade  to  a  freer  multilateral  system.  Trading  on 
a  multilateral  basis,  and  free  trading  over  increas- 
ingly greater  areas,  is  an  objective  to  which  my 
government  subscribes  most  earnestly. 

Americans  understand  through  first-hand  and 
intimate  experience  the  part  that  our  own  great 
free-trading  area  has  played  in  achieving  a  level 
of  productivity  heretofore  unapproached.  The 
economic  survey  which  we  have  at  hand  has  re- 
marked on  that  productivity  in  the  United  States 
and  has  drawn  attention  to  the  fundamental  prob- 
lem of  attaining  higher  industrial  and  agricultural 
productivity  in  Europe.  It  notes  that  the  pro- 
ductivity of  labor  in  industry  in  the  United  States 
was  in  prewar  days  three  times  that  of  labor  in 
Europe  taken  as  a  whole,  and  relatively  even 
greater  in  agriculture.  The  survey  further  points 
out  that  in  the  last  decade  productivity  in  Ameri- 
can industry  has  increased  27  percent  and  in  agri- 
culture 54  percent.  It  ascribes  this  astounding 
rise  mainly  to  higher  standards  of  capital  equip- 
ment and  the  use  of  more  efficient  production 
techniques.  That  is,  of  course,  true.  But  it  must 
be  remembered  that  a  basic  condition  which 
brought  about  that  higher  use  of  equipment  and 
those  more  efficient  techniques  was  the  existence 
of  a  vast  trading  area  uninhibited  by  artificial  bar- 
riers and  serving  as  an  invitation  to  the  free  and 
economic  flow  of  goods,  capital,  and  people.  It 
provided  a  market  of  enormous  size  for  the  most 
efficiently  produced  goods,  wherever  produced.  It 
encouraged  investment  wlierever  it  could  be  most 
wisely  and  economically  made.  It  permitted 
workers  to  move  where  the  job  opportunit  ics  called 
and  where  they  were  most  rewarding.  The  more 
the  nations  of  Europe  can  move  together  toward 
the  establishment  of  these  basic  conditions  the 
more  effectively  can  their  human  and  material  re- 

Deparfmenf  of  State   Bulletin 


sources  develop  ever  rising  standards  of  living  for 
their  people. 

I  have  one  observation,  specifically,  on  the  work 
of  the  EcE  committees.  The  reports  before  us 
show  that  many,  if  not  most,  of  the  bottleneck 
problems  with  which  the  committees  have  been 
concerned  have  been  solved  or  are  nearing  solu- 
tion. Many  of  the  functions  of  these  committees, 
therefore,  need  to  be  reexamined,  and  some  of  the 
work  brought  to  a  conclusion.     The  committees 


themselves  are  probably  best  fitted  to  make  this 
reexamination  of  their  work,  at  least  initially.  I 
suggest  that  the  committees  be  asked  to  do  so  dur- 
ing the  coming  year  and  to  submit  a  report  to  the 
next  regular  session  of  the  Ece  concerning  those 
problems  which  they  believe  will  require  their  at- 
tention beyond  the  year  1950.  If  this  suggestion 
meets  with  favor  among  other  delegations,  I 
should  be  glad  to  see  a  resolution  in  this  sense  put 
forward  for  consideration  by  the  Commission. 


The  Spanish  Question 


RESOLUTION  ADOPTED  BY  COMMITTEE 


U.N.  doc.  A/C.  1/454 
Adopted  May  7,  1949 

The  General  Assembly, 

Considering  that,  during  its  second  session  in 
1947,  a  proposal  intended  to  confirm  the  resolu- 
tion of  12  December  1946  on  the  political  regime 
in  power  in  Spain  failed  to  obtain  the  approval  of 
two-thirds  of  the  votes  cast ; 

Considering  that  certain  governments  have  in- 
terpreted the  negative  vote  of  1947  as  virtually  re- 
voking the  clause  in  the  previous  resolution  wliich 
recommended  the  withdrawal  of  heads  of  mission 
with  the  rank  of  ambassador  or  minister  plenipo- 
tentiary accredited  to  the  Spanish  Government ; 

Considering  that,  in  view  of  the  doubt  regard- 
ing the  validity  of  this  interpretation,  other  gov- 
ernments have  continued  to  refrain  from  accredit- 
ing heads  of  mission  to  Madrid,  therebj'  creating 
inequality  to  their  disadvantage  | 

CfoNSiDERiNG  that  such  confusion  may  diminish 


the  prestige  of  the  United  Nations  which  all  Mem- 
bers of  the  Organization  have  a  particular  interest 
in  preserving; 

Considering  that  in  any  event  the  1946  resolu- 
tion did  not  prescribe  the  breaking  of  political  and 
commercial  relations  with  the  Spanish  Govern- 
ment which  have  been  the  subject  of  bilateral 
agreements  between  the  governments  of  several 
Member  States  and  the  Madrid  Government ; 

Considering  that  in  the  negotiation  of  such 
agreements,  governments  which  have  complied 
with  the  recommendation  of  12  December  1946  are 
placed  in  a  position  of  inequality  which  works  to 
the  disadvantage  of  economically  weaker  govern- 
ments ; 

Decides  without  prejudice  to  the  declarations 
contained  in  the  resolution  of  12  December  1946, 
to  leave  Member  States  full  freedom  of  action  as 
regards  their  diplomatic  relations  with  Spain. 


The  Netherlands  and  Republic  of  Indonesia  Reach  Agreement 


Letter  From  Netherlands  Representative 
to  President  of  Security  Council 

U.N.  doc.  S/1319 
Dated  May  7,  1949 

May  7,  7545 

Sir,  I  have  the  honour  to  inform  you  that  today, 
7  May,  the  Delegations  of  the  Netherlands  and  of 
the  Republic  of  Indonesia  met  in  Batavia,  under 
the  auspices  and  in  the  presence  of  the  United 
Nations  Commission  for  Indonesia,  and  made  the 
following  formal  statements,  endorsed  by  their 
respective  governments. 

The  statement  of  the   Chairman   of  the  Re- 

hAa^  22,   1949 


publican  Delegation,  Dr.  Mohammed  Rum,  reads 
as  follows: 

"As  Chairman  of  the  Republican  Delegation  I 
am  authorized  by  President  Sukarno  and  Vice 
President  Mohammed  Hatta  to  give  their  personal 
assurances  that  they  favour,  in  conformity  with 
the  Security  Council's  Resolution  of  January  28th, 
1949  and  its  directive  of  March  23rd : 

1-  The  issuance  of  an  order  to  the  Republican 
armed  adherents  to  cease  guerrilla  warfare, 

2.  Co-operation  in  restoration  of  peace  and  the 
maintenance  of  law  and  order,  and 


3.  Participation  in  a  round  table  conference  at 
The  Hague  with  a  view  to  accelerate  the  uncon- 
ditional transfer  of  real  and  complete  sovereignty 
to  the  United  States  of  Indonesia. 

President  Sukarno  and  Vice  President  Hatta 
undertake  that  they  will  urge  the  adoption  of  such 
a  policy  by  the  Government  of  the  Republic  of 
Indonesia  as  soon  as  possible  after  its  restoration 
at  Djokjakarta." 

The  statement  of  the  Chairman  of  the  Nether- 
lands Delegation,  Dr.  J.  H.  van  Roijen,  reads  as 
follows : 

"1.  The  Netherlands  Delegation  is  authorized 
to  state  that,  in  view  of  the  undertaking  just  an- 
nounced by  Dr.  Mohammed  Rum,  it  agrees  to  the 
return  of  the  Republican  Government  to  Djokja- 
karta. The  Netlierlands  Delegations  agi-ees 
further  to  the  setting  up  of  one  or  more  joint 
committees  under  the  auspices  of  the  United 
Nations  Commission  for  Indonesia,  for  such 
purposes  as: 

A.  to  make  the  necessary  investigations  and 
preparations  preliminary  to  the  return  of  the 
Republican  Government  to  Djokjakarta; 

B.  to  study  and  advise  on  the  measures  to  be 
taken  in  order  to  effectuate  the  cessation  of 
guerrilla  warfare  and  the  co-operation  in  the 
restoration  and  maintenance  of  law  and  order. 

2.  The  Netherlands  Government  agrees  that  the 
Republican  Government  shall  be  free  and  facili- 
tated to  exercise  its  appropriate  functions  in  an 
area  of  the  residency  of  Djokjakarta  and  that  this 
is  a  step  taken  in  the  light  of  the  Security  Coun- 
cil's directive  of  March  23rd,  1949. 

3.  The  Netherlands  Government  re-affirms  its 
willingness  to  insure  the  immediate  discontinu- 
ance of  all  military  operations  and  to  release 
immediately  and  unconditionally  all  political 
prisoners  arrested  by  them  since  December  17th, 
1948  in  the  Republic  of  Indonesia. 

4.  Without  prejudice  to  the  right  of  self-deter- 
mination of  the  Indonesian  people  as  recognized 
by  Linggadjati  and  the  Renville  principles,  the 
Netherlands  Government  will  refrain  from  the 
establishment  or  recognition  of  Negaras  or 
Diierahs  on  territory  under  Republican  control 
prior  to  December  IQth,  1948,  and  from  the  ex- 
pansion of  Negaras  and  Daerahs  affecting  said 
territory. 

5.  The  Netherlands  Government  favours  the  ex- 
istence of  the  Republic  as  a  state  to  take  its  place 
in  the  United  States  of  Indonesia.  When  a  pro- 
visional representative  body  for  the  whole  of  In- 
donesia is  to  be  established  and  it  consequently 
becomes  necessary  to  determine  the  number  of  rep- 
resentatives from  the  Republic  to  said  body,  this 
number  will  be  one  half  of  the  total  membership 
exclusive  of  the  Republican's  membership. 

6.  Consonant  with  the  intent  of  the  Security 
Council's  ruling  of  March  23rd,  1949,  on  the  sub- 


ject of  the  proposed  round  table  conference  at  The 
Hague  to  the  end  that  the  negotiations  contem- 
plated by  the  resolution  of  January  28th,  1949, 
may  be  held  as  soon  as  possible,  the  Netherlands 
Government  is  fully  prepared  to  do  its  utmost 
tliat  this  conference  take  place  immediately  after 
the  return  of  the  Repuolican  Government  to 
Diokjakarta.  At  this  conference  discussions  will 
take  place  as  to  the  way  in  which  to  accelerate  the 
unconditional  transfer  of  real  and  complete  sov- 
ereignty to  the  United  States  of  Indonesia  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  Renville  principles. 

7.  In  the  light  of  the  necessary  co-operation  in 
the  restoration  of  peace  and  the  maintenance  of 
law  and  order,  the  Netherlands  Government  agrees 
that  in  all  those  areas  outside  the  residency  of 
Djokjakarta  where  civil,  police  and  other  officials 
of  tlie  Government  of  Indonesia  are  not  operating 
at  present,  the  Republican  civil,  police  and  other 
officials,  where  still  operating,  will  remain  in 
function. 

It  is  understood  that  the  Netherlands  authori- 
ties shall  afford  to  the  Republican  Government 
such  facilities  as  may  reasonably  be  required  by 
that  Government  for  communication  and  consul- 
tation with  all  persons  in  Indonesia,  including 
those  serving  in  civil  and  military  services  of  the 
Republic,  and  that  the  technical  details  will  have 
to  be  worked  out  by  the  parties  under  the  auspices 
of  the  United  Nations  Commission  for  Indonesia." 

I  would  highly  appreciate  it  if  you  would  have 
the  contents  of  this  letter  circulated  to  the  Mem- 
bers of  the  Security  Council. 

I  have  [etc.] 

J.  W.  M.  Snouck  Huegronje. 

Approval  of  U.S.  Government 

[Released  to  the  press  Maj-  9] 

The  United  States  Government  expresses  its 
wholehearted  approval  of  the  preliminary  agi-ee- 
ment  between  the  Netherlands  and  the  Republic  of 
Indonesia  which  was  reached  in  Batavia  on  IMay 
7,  1949,  the  terms  of  which  should  result  in  the 
near  future  in  the  restoration  of  the  Republican 
Government  to  the  residency  of  Jogjakarta,  the 
issuance  of  an  effective  cease  fire,  and  the  holding 
of  a  conference  at  The  Hague  leading  to  a  defini- 
tive political  settlement.  The  statesmanship  dis- 
played by  both  parties  in  reaching  this  prelimi- 
nary accord  augurs  well  for  the  success  of  the 
Hague  conference. 

The  United  States  Government,  through  its 
representative  on  the  United  Nations  Commission 
for  Indonesia  under  the  auspices  of  which  the 
preliminary  agreement  was  consummated,  will 
continue  to  give  its  full  support  to  the  achieve- 
ment of  a  political  settlement  of  mutual  benefit  to 
the  Indonesians  and  the  Dutch,  in  accordance  with 
agreed  principles.  Meanwhile,  this  Government 
is  happy  to  extend  congratulations  to  both  parties 
on  the  results  thus  far  achieved. 

Department  of  Slate  Bulletin 


U.S.  Supports  Israeli's  Application  for  Membership  in  U.N. 

STATEMENT  BY  AMBASSADOR  WARREN  R.  AUSTIN' 


The  Ad  Hoc  Political  Committee  has  considered 
carefully  and  thoroughly  the  Security  Council's 
recommendation  that  Israel  be  admitted  to  mem- 
bership in  the  United  Nations.  It  has  approved 
that  recommendation  by  a  large  majority.  The 
United  States  as  a  cosponsor  of  the  draft  resolu- 
tion now  before  us  which  would  have  the  effect  of 
admitting  Israel  to  the  United  Nations,  confidently 
expects  that  the  State  of  Israel  will  be  welcomed 
into  full  membership  in  the  United  Nations  by 
this  Assembly. 

The  long  and  exhaustive  discussion  of  Israel's 
application  for  membership  in  the  Ad  Hoc  Politi- 
cal Committee  is  evidence  of  the  deep-rooted  de- 
sire of  the  members  for  a  just  and  equitable  solu- 
tion of  questions  relating  to  Palestine,  especially 
the  questions  of  Jerusalem  and  of  the  future  of 
the  Arab  refugees.  Committee  discussion  clarified 
the  views  of  the  Government  of  Israel  with  regard 
to  these  problems  and,  perhaps  even  more  impor- 
tant, clarified  the  views  of  the  member  govern- 
ments. I  am  confident  that  the  Government  of 
Israel  is  fully  cognizant  of  the  concern  of  the 
world  for  an  early  and  just  settlement  of  these 
problems.  I  am  confident  that  Israel  will  take 
into  consideration  the  serious  and  thoughtful  views 
on  those  questions  which  have  been  expressed  by 
a  number  of  members,  including  many  who  voted 
in  the  Committee  for  the  admission  of  Israel. 

We  are  not  here  directly  concerned  with  defini- 
tive settlement  of  the  questions  of  Jerusalem  or  the 
Arab  refugees,  deeply  as  we  are  interested  in  those 
questions.  The  broader  problems  of  Palestine 
were  exhaustively  debated  at  the  first  part  of  this 
session  in  Paris,  resulting  in  the  resolution  of  De- 
cember 11, 1948.  The  United  States  actively  sup- 
ported and  voted  for  that  resolution.  The  United 
States  is  intensely  interested  in  the  practical  im- 
plementation of  that  resolution,  and  is  a  member 
of  the  Palestine  Conciliation  Commission  estab- 
lished by  that  resolution.  The  United  States  con- 
tinues to  support  that  resolution  and,  as  a  member 
of  the  Commission,  will  continue  to  work  for  peace- 
ful settlement  of  all  outstanding  Palestine  issues 
on  the  basis  of  the  principles  laid  down  in  that 
resolution. 

However,  we  are  at  this  time  concerned  solely 
with  the  qualifications  of  the  State  of  Israel  for 
membership  in  the  United  Nations.  Article  4  of 
the  Charter  declares  that  membership  in  the 
United  Nations  is  open  to  peace-loving  states  which 
accept  the  obligations  contained  in  the  present 
Charter  and,  in  the  judgment  of  the  organization, 

May  22,   1949 


are  able  and  willing  to  carry  out  these  obligations. 
The  United  States  delegation,  together  with  a  large 
majority  of  the  Security  Council  and  a  very  large 
majority  of  the  Ad  Hoc  Committee,  considers  that 
the  State  of  Israel  qualified  under  Charter 
requirements. 

A  solid  basis  for  peace  and  stability  in  Palestine 
has  been  laid  by  the  armistice  agreements  con- 
cluded by  Israel  and  most  of  the  Arab  states  under 
the  guidance  of  the  acting  mediator,  Dr.  Ealph 
Bunche,  in  pursuance  of  the  Security  Council  res- 
olutions of  November  16  and  December  29,  1948. 
These  agreements  have  created  a  propitious  at- 
mosphere for  carrying  to  a  successful  conclusion 
the  tasks  of  the  Palestine  Conciliation  Commis- 
sion. There  is  still  under  negotiation  an  armis- 
tice agreement  between  Syria  and  Israel.  We 
hope  that  this  agreement  will  be  concluded  in 
the  near  future,  thereby  bringing  to  a  close  the 
truce  period  in  Palestine  and  inaugurating  an  era 
of  peace  and  stability. 

The  Palestine  Conciliation  Commission  and  the 
interested  parties  are  now  gathered  at  Lausanne  to 
settle  their  remaining  differences  and  to  bring  last- 
ing peace  to  Palestine.  I  am  sure  that  the  parties 
and  the  Conciliation  Commission  will  profit  by  the 
recent  discussions  in  the  Ad  Hoc  Political  Com- 
mittee. However,  the  responsibility  for  bringing 
about  the  peaceful  settlement  of  the  Palestine  ques- 
tion rests  upon  the  parties  and  the  Conciliation 
Commission  and  not,  at  this  time,  uj^on  the  General 
Assembly.  The  Assembly  will  have  a  full  oppor- 
tunity to  discuss  the  substantive  aspects  of  the  Pal- 
estine settlement,  including  the  question  of 
Jerusalem  and  the  Arab  refugees,  when  it  con- 
siders the  report  of  the  Palestine  Conciliation 
Commission  at  the  fourth  regular  session  of  the 
General  Assembly. 

So  far  as  the  question  of  Jerusalem  is  concerned, 
which  is  a  matter  of  very  great  consequence  to  this 
Assembly  and  to  great  world  religions,  that  part 
of  the  pi'eamble  which  recalls  the  General  Assem- 
bly resolutions  of  November  29, 1947,  and  Decem- 
ber 11,  1948,  gives  important  significance  to  the 
operative  clauses  of  the  resolution. 

The  report  of  the  Ad  Hoc  Political  Committee 
by  its  distinguished  rapporteur,  Mr.  Vitori-La- 
fronte  of  Ecuador,  records  the  Committee's  con- 


'  Made  in  connection  with  the  Ad  Hoc  Political  Com- 
mittee's report  on  the  application  of  Israel  for  admission 
to  the  United  Nations  on  May  11,  184!),  and  released  to 
the  press  by  the  U.S.  Mission  to  the  United  Nations  on 
the  same  date. 


655 


cern  regarding  the  status  of  Jerusalem  and,  in  par- 
ticular, the  protection  of  the  Holy  Places  as 
follows : 

"The  representative  of  Argentina  requested, 
however,  that  the  report  of  the  ad  hoc  Political 
Committee  to  the  General  Assembly  express  the 
desire  of  the  Committee  that  the  United  Nations 
Conciliation  Commission  should,  when  studying 
the  question  of  the  internationalization  of  Jeru- 
salem and  the  problem  of  the  protection  of  the 
Holy  Places  and  free  access  thereto,  along  the  lines 
of  the  resolutions  of  the  General  Assenibly  of  29 
November  1947  and  11  December  1948,  take  into 
account  the  views  of  the  Holy  See  and  those  other 
religious  authorities  who  desired  to  present  their 
position  with  regard  to  this  matter  to  the  Concilia- 
tion Commission  within  a  reasonable  time  limit, 
in  written  or  verbal  form.  He  suggested  that  the 
report  should  also  include  reference  to  the  fact 
that  the  ad  hoc  Political  Committee  had  taken  note 
of  the  assurances  given  by  the  representative  of  the 
State  of  Israel  witli  regard  to  the  internationaliza- 
tion of  Jerusalem,  incFuding  the  question  of  guar- 
antees for  the  protection  of  the  Holy  Places  and 
free  access  thereto. 

"The  Committee  endorsed  by  38  votes  to  6,  with 
11  abstentions,  the  proposal  of  the  representative 
of  Argentina,  that  those  remarks  be  included  in 
the  report. 


"The  representative  of  Norway,  supported  by 
the  representatives  of  Denmark  and  Sweden,  re- 
quested that  the  report  should  include  a  reference 
to  the  Commission  of  Churches  on  International 
Affairs,  an  organization  created  by  the  World 
Council  of  Churches  and  the  International  Mis- 
sionary Council,  in  case  other  religious  authorities 
were  mentioned." 

From  the  foregoing  action  and  the  debate  in  the 
Ad,  Hoc  Political  Committee  followed  by  the  em- 
pliatic  majority  vote  for  the  resolution,  I  am  per- 
suaded that  the  Palestine  Conciliation  Commis- 
sion and  the  i:)arties  to  the  Lausanne  conference 
will  implement  those  resolutions  faithfully  ac- 
cording to  the  present  conditions  and  circum- 
stances and  in  the  light  of  all  developments. 
There  can  be  no  doubt  whatever  that  the  General 
Assembly,  to  which  the  Palestine  Conciliation 
Commission  makes  its  report,  will  realistically 
apply  those  resolutions. 

Israel  has  solemnly  pledged  its  word  to  carry 
out  the  obligations  of  tlie  Charter  and  that  pledge 
has  been  reiterated  by  the  representative  of  Israel 
appearing  before  the  Ad  Hoc  Political  Commit- 
tee. My  government  believes  that  Israel  would  be 
a  valuable  member  of  the  United  Nations  and 
should  be  admitted  to  the  organization.  Tlie 
United  States  delegation  will  vote  in  favor  of  the 
resolution  now  before  the  Assemblv. 


Current  United  Nations  Documents:  A  Selected  Bibliography^ 


General  Assembly 

Official  Records  of  the  Third  Session,  Part  I. 

Plenary  Meetings  of  the  General  Assembly :  Sum- 
mary Records  of  Meetings  21  September-12  Decem- 
ber, 1948,  LXXII,  1055  pp.  printed.     $10.00. 

Art    Hoc   Political    Committee:    Summary   Records 

of  Meetings  IG  November-9  December,  1948.  xiv,  328 
pp.  printed.    $3.50. 

Political  and  Security  Questions  Including  Regula- 
tion of  Armaments.  First  Committee.  Summary 
Records  of  Meetings  21  September-8  December,  1948. 
XXIII,  1027  pp.  printed.    $10.00. 

Administrative   and    Budgetary    Questions.      Fifth 

Committee.  Summary  Records  of  Meetings  21  Sep- 
tember-10  December,  1948.  XXVII,  907  pp.  printed. 
$9.00. 

Report  of  the  Special  Committee  on   Information 

Transmitted  Tinder  Article  73e  of  the  Chapter.  (2-29 
September  1948)  Supplement  No.  12  (A/593)  21  pp. 
printed.     20^. 


'  Printed  materials  may  be  secured  in  the  United  States 
from  the  International  Documents  Service,  Columbia  Uni- 
versity Press,  2!)(')0  Broadway,  New  York  27,  N.  Y.  Other 
materials  (mimeographed  or  processed  documents)  may 
be  consulted  at  certain  designated  libraries  in  the  United 
States. 


Survey  of  International  Law  in  Relation  to  the  Work  of 
Codification  of  the  International  Law  Commission. 
Preparatory  work  within  the  purview  of  article  18, 
paragraph  1,  of  the  Statute  of  the  International  Law 
Commission.  (Memorandum  submitted  by  the  Secre- 
tary-General) A/CN.  4/1/Rev.  1.  iv,  70  pp.  printed. 
50<(. 

Major  Economic  Changes  in  1948.    vi,  74  pp.  printed.    $1.00. 

Transport  and  Conmiunications  Review.  Vol.  II,  No.  1 
January-.March  1949.     78  pp.  printed.     50^. 

The  Charter  and  Judgment  of  the  Nilrnberg  Tribunal. 
History  and  Analysis.  (Memorandum  submitted  by 
the  Secretary-General)    iv,  99  pp.  printed.     75^ 

Preparatory  Study  Concerning  a  Draft  Declaration  on  the 
Rights  and  Duties  of  Stales.  (Memorandum  sub- 
mitted by  the  Secretary -General)  vl,  228  pp.  printed. 
$1..50. 

Disposition  of  Agenda  Items  of  the  Third  Regular  Ses- 
sion, Part  1,  21  September-12  December  1948. 
A/INF/2S.     28  March    1940.     183   pp.    mimeo. 

United  Nations  Commission  on  Korea.  First  Information 
Report.  (Period  1-19  February  1949)  A/822.  22 
March  1949.     16  pp.  mimeo. 

United  Nations  Commission  on  Korea.  Second  Informa- 
tion Report.  (Period  20  February-12  March  1949) 
A/S30.     11  April  1949.     22  pp.  mimeo. 

Repatriation  of  Greek  Children.  Note  by  the  Secretary- 
General.     A/836.     14  April  1949.     10  pp.  mimeo. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


THE  UNITED  STATES  IN  THE  UNITED  NATIONS 


[May  14-20] 

General  Assembly 

The  second  part  of  the  third  session  of  the 
General  Assembly  ended  on  May  18  with  a  rush 
of  last-minute  business  and  flurry  of  night  meet- 
ings of  committees  and  the  full  Assembly  in  an 
effort  to  complete  the  agenda.  It  had  convened 
on  April  5  to  take  up  matters  not  completed  in 
the  Paris  session,  as  well  as  some  new  business. 

As  was  expected,  there  was  little  unanimity  in 
the  decisions  and  the  familiar  voting  pattern — a 
minority  vote  of  the  6  Slav  states — appeared  many 
times.  The  Assembly  took  action  on  such  matters 
as  the  admission  of  Israel  for  membership,  the 
question  of  relations  with  Franco  Spain,  the  crea- 
tion of  a  United  Nations  guard,  the  Mindszenty 
case,  the  convention  on  news-gathering  and  rights 
of  correction,  and  proposals  for  moderation  in  the 
use  of  the  veto. 

An  important  event  taking  place  concurrently 
among  United  Nations  representatives  of  the  Big 
Four  was  the  agi-eement  on  the  lifting  of  the 
Berlin  blockade. 

Just  before  adjournment  of  the  Assembly, 
Poland  tried  unsuccessfully  to  place  a  new  item 
on  the  agenda  relating  to  the  Gerhard  Eisler  case 
as  a  violation  of  human  rights.  The  Assembly 
upheld  President  Evatt's  ruling  that  the  request 
was  out  of  order  by  an  overwhehning  majority. 

The  fourth  regular  session  of  the  General 
Assembly  will  assemble  on  September  20. 

Spain 

A  four-nation  resolution  which  would  have  left 
members  freedom  of  action  to  restore  full  diplo- 
matic relations  with  Spain,  approved  by  a  small 
majority  in  the  Political  Committee,  failed  to  re- 
ceive the  required  two-thirds  majority  vote  in  the 
Assembly  on  May  16.  The  vote  on  the  resolution 
submitted  by  Bolivia,  Brazil,  Colombia,  and  Peru 
was  26  to  15,  with  16  abstentions.  The  United 
Kingdom,  the  United  States,  and  France  were 
among  the  countries  abstaining.  Although  the 
United  States  did  not  take  a  leading  part  in  the 
discussions,  the  United  States  Delegate  did  answer 
Soviet  charges  made  against  the  United  States  in 
both  committee  and  plenary  debate. 

Freedom  of  Information 

The  General  Assembly  approved  the  Conven- 
tion on  the  International  Transmission  of  News 
and  the  Right  of  Correction  on  May  14  by  a  vote 

May  22,   1949 


of  33  to  6,  with  13  abstentions.  The  document, 
however,  will  not  be  opened  for  signatures  of 
member  nations  before  a  companion  Convention 
on  Freedom  of  Information  is  completed  by  the 
Assembly,  probably  during  its  next  session.  The 
Social  Committee  earlier  approved  the  Convention 
on  news  transmission,  but  decided  it  would  not 
have  time  to  complete  work  on  the  second  conven- 
tion during  the  current  session. 

The  approved  convention  is  an  amalgamation  of 
two  news  conventions  drawn  up  last  year  at  Ge- 
neva by  the  United  Nations  Conference  on  P>ee- 
dom  of  Information.  It  is  intended  to  expedite  the 
work  of  foreign  correspondents  and  news  agencies 
by  providing  freedom  of  movement  abroad  and 
equal  access  to  news.  It  also  provides  guarantees 
against  discriminatory  restrictions  by  signatory 
states  and  arbitrary  censorship  or  delaying  tactics. 

Indians  in  South  Africa 

The  Assembly  on  May  14  adopted  a  French- 
Mexican  proposal  inviting  India,  Pakistan,  and 
the  Union  of  South  Africa  to  participate  in  a 
round-table  conference  dealing  with  the  treat- 
ment of  people  of  Indian  origin  in  South  Africa, 
taking  into  consideration  the  principles  of  the 
United  Nations  Charter  and  the  Declaration  of 
Human  Eights.  The  vote  was  47  to  1,  with  only 
South  Africa  opposing.  Ten  nations  abstained, 
including  members  of  the  Soviet  Bloc  who  ob- 
jected to  inclusion  of  reference  to  the  Declaration 
of  Human  Rights.  The  Indian  delegation  in 
plenary  debate  withdrew  a  proposal  previously 
approved  in  the  Political  Committee  by  a  small 
majority,  which  would  have  found  South  Africa 
guilty  of  violating  its  obligations  under  the  Char- 
ter and  international  agreements.  The  South 
African  delegate  insisted,  both  in  committee  and 
plenary  discussion,  that  the  Assembly  was  not 
competent  to  deal  with  the  question,  which  South 
Africa  maintained  was  purely  domestic. 

Indonesia 

The  General  Assembly  deferred  until  the  next 
session  discussion  of  tlie  Indonesian  question, 
pending  the  outcome  of  the  current  talks  between 
the  Dutch  and  Indonesians.  This  decision  was 
influenced  by  the  announcement  on  May  8  of  a 
preliminary  agreement  between  the  Dutch  and 
representatives  of  the  Indonesian  Republic,  look- 
ing forward  to  the  implementation  of  the  Security 
Council's  resolution  of  January  28,  1949,  on  the 
subject. 


INTERNATIONAL  ORGANIZATIONS  AND  CONFERENCES 


U.S.  Delegations  to  international  Conferences 


Telephone    and   Telegraph    Conference   and    Tele- 
communication Conference 

The  Uupartmcat  of  State  announced  on  May  4 
that  the  President  has  designated  Wayne  Coy, 
Chairman  of  tlie  Federal  Communications  Com- 
mission, Francis  Colt  de  Wolf,  Chief,  Telecom- 
munications Division,  Department  of  State;  and 
F'aul  A.  Walker,  Commissioner,  Federal  Com- 
munications Commission,  as  chairman,  vice  chair- 
man, and  delegate,  respectively,  of  the  United 
States  delegation  to  the  International  Adminis- 
trative Telephone  and  Telegraph  Conference  of 
the  International  Telecommunication  Union 
(Itu).  The  conference  is  scheduled  to  convene 
at  Paris  on  May  18,  1949.  Other  members  of  the 
United  States  delegation  are  as  follows : 

Admsers 

Edward  L.  Clinkseales,  Electrical  Engineer,  Common  Car- 
rier Division,  Bureau  of  Engineering,  Federal  Com- 
munications Commission 

Harold  J.  Cohen,  Assistant  General  Counsel,  Chief  of  the 
Common  Carrier  Division  of  the  Bureau  of  Law,  Fed- 
eral Communications  Commission   . 

Benedict  P.  Cottone,  General  Counsel,  Federal  Communi- 
cations Commission 

Martin  R.  Haven,  Communications  Accountant,  Bureau 
of  Accounting,  Federal  Communications  Commission 

Helen  G.  Kelly,  Special  Assistant  to  the  Chief,  Telecom- 
munications Division,  Department  of  State. 

John  R.  Lambert,  Chief  of  Tariffs-Telephone  Rates  Branch, 
Bureau  of  Accounting,  Federal  Communications  Com- 
mission 

William  Harry  J.  Mclntyre,  Attache,  American  Embassy, 
London 

Trevanion  Henry  Ernest  Nesbitt,  Assistant  Chief,  Tele- 
communications Division,  Department  of  State 

William  J.  Norflect,  Chief  Accountant,  Federal  Communica- 
tions Commission 

John  N.  Plakias,  First  Secretary,  American  Embassy, 
Paris 

John  A.  Russ,  Assistant  Chief,  Common  Carrier  Division, 
Bureau  of  Engineering,  Federal  Communications 
Commission 

Robert  B.  Stromberg,  Assistant  Chief  Accountant,  Federal 
Communications  Commission 

Jack  Werner,  Assistant  Chief,  Common  Carrier  Division, 
Bureau  of  Law,  Federal  Communii-ations  Commission 

Marion  H.  Woodward,  Assistant  Chief  Knsineer,  Chief  of 
the  Common  Carrier  Division  of  the  Bureau  of  Engi- 
neering, Federal  Communications  Commission 

Secretary  of  Delegation 

Ben  F.  Dixon,  Division  of  International  Conferences,  De- 
partment of  State 

Staff 

Hazel  O.  Briggs,  Telecommunications  Division,  Depart- 
ment of  State 

Lillian  M.  Conley,  Common  Carrier  Division,  Bureau  of 
Engineering,  Federal  Communications  Commission 

Johanna  W.  Oswald,  Office  of  the  Chairman,  Federal  Com- 
munications Commission 

658 


Virginia  G.  Siler,  Telecommunications  Division,  Depart- 
ment of  State 

Kathryn  J.  Wilson,  Division  of  Finance,  Department  of 
State 

Industry  Advisers 

Thomas  Joseph  Allen,  European  Director  of  Communica- 
tions, United  Press 

A.  L.  Bradford,  Vice  President  and  General  European 
Manager,  United  Press 

Arthur  J.  Costigan,  Vice  President  In  Charge  of  Com- 
munications, Radio  Marine  Corporation  of  America. 

Eugene  B.  English,  Manager,  European  Division,  Press 
Wireless,  Inc. 

Joseph  W.  Grigg,  Jr.,  Manager  for  France,  United  Press 

Morgan  Heiskell,  Vice  President  of  The  Commercial  Cable 
Company.  Vice  President  of  Mackay  Radio  and 
Telegraph  Company 

Maj.  Gen.  Harry  C.  Ingles,  U.S.A.,  Retired,  President, 
RCA  Communications  Incorporated 

Fred  E.  Meinholtz,  Director,  Press  Wireless,  Inc 

K.  Bruce  Mitchell,  Director,  The  Western  Union  Tele- 
graph Company 

John  H.  Muller,  Assistant  to  the  Executive  Vice  President 
in  Charge  of  Operations,  RCA  Communications  In- 
corporated 

William  Murray,  Chief,  European  Bureau,  Warner  Pathe 
News 

Harold  S.  Osborne,  Chief  Engineer,  American  Telephone 
and  Telegraph  Company 

Haraden  Pratt,  Vice  President  of  American  Cable  &  Radio 
Corporation  and  of  each  of  the  subsidiaries.  Vice 
President  of  All  America  Cables  and  Radio,  Inc. 
Vice  President  of  The  Commercial  Cable  Company. 
Vice  President  of  Mackay  Radio  and  Telegraph  Com- 
pany 

Kenneth  E  .Stockton,  President  of  American  Cable  &  Radio 
Corporation.  President  of  All  America  Cables  and 
Radio,  Inc. 

Laurens  E.  Whittemore,  Special  Representative,  American 
Telephone  and  Telegraph  Company 

The  purpose  of  the  conference  is  to  revise  the 
existing  International  Telephone  and  Telegraph 
Regulations  of  Cairo  1938,  which  apply  to  the  in- 
ternational operation  and  rate  structures  in  these 
two  fields.  Although  the  United  States  has  not 
heretofore  become  a  party  to  either  the  Telephone 
or  Telegraph  Regulations,  this  Government  may 
become  a  party  to  the  revised  telegraph  regulations 
should  they  take  a  form  which  will  be  acceptable 
to  this  government.  The  United  States  does  not 
expect  to  adhere  to  the  International  Telephone 
Regulations  but  will  participate  on  the  commit- 
tees of  the  conference  relating  to  these  regulations. 

This  government  was  represented  at  the  Tele- 
graph Regulations  Revision  Committee  of  the  Itu, 
which  met  at  Geneva  in  January  of  this  year.  At 
this  meeting  the  United  States  made  known  its 
objection  to  the  existing  Telegraph  Regulations 
and  indicated  the  form  that  the  new  regulations 
should  take  in  order  to  be  acceptable  to  it. 

Department  of  State   Bulletin 


Administrative  Radio  Conferences 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  10 
the  United  States  observer  delegation  to  the  ad- 
ministrative radio  conference  for  Region  I  of  the 
International  Telecommunication  Union  (Itd) 
and  the  Delegation  of  the  territories  of  the  United 
States  to  the  administrative  radio  conference  for 
Region  III  of  the  Ixtr.  The  conferences  will  run 
concurrently  and  are  scheduled  to  convene  at 
Geneva  on  May  18, 1949. 

Observer  Delegation  to  the  Conference  for  Region  I 
Chairman 

John  M.  Plakias,  First  Secretary,  American  Embassy,  Paris 
Advisers 

Lt.  Col.  Loren  E.  Gaither,  USAF,  Signal  Officer,  7890  Head- 
quarters Group,  Signal,  European  Command 

Lt.  James  L.  Lathrop,  USCG,  Chief  of  Electronics  Section, 
Aids  to  Navigation  Division,  United  States  Coast 
Guard 

Lt.  Comdr.  Edgar  L.  Margolf,  USN,  Frequency  Section, 
Office  of  the  Chief  of  Naval  Communications,  Depart- 
ment of  the  Navy 


Edgar  T.  Martin,  Chief,  Radio  and  Telecommunication 
Branch  of  the  Communications  Group,  OMGUS 

William  F.  Minners,  Chief  Assistant-Facilities  Branch, 
Marine  Radio  and  Safety  Division,  Bureau  of  En- 
gineering, Federal  Communications  Commission 

Col.  David  C.  Schlenker,  tJSAF,  Air  Communications  Of- 
ficer, United  States  Air  Force  in  Europe 

Capt.  Seymour  Stearns,  USAF,  Assistant  Communications 
Officer,  United  States  Air  Force  in  Europe 

Maj.  Walter  Wilson,  USAF,  Assistant  Communications 
Officer,  United  States  Air  Force  In  Europe 

Delegation  to  the  Confeeence  foe  Region  III 

Chairman 

John  M.  Plakias,  First  Secretary,  American  Embasy,  Paris 

Advisers 

Lt.  James  L.  Lathrop,  USCG,  Chief  of  Electronics  Sec- 
tion, Aids  to  Navigation  Division,  United  States  Coast 
Guard 

Lt.  Comdr.  Edgar  L.  Margolf,  USN,  Frequency  Section, 
Office  of  the  Chief  of  Naval  Communication,  Depart- 
ment of  the  Navy 

William  F.  Minners,  Chief  Assistant,  Facilities  Branch, 
Marine  Radio  and  Safety  Division,  Bureau  of  Engi- 
neering, Federal  Communications  Commission 


Liquidation  of  German  Assets  in  Switzerland 

STATEMENT  BY  SECRETARY  ACHESON 


[Released  to  the  press  May  11] 

A  quadripartite  conference  among  the  Govern- 
ments of  France,  Great  Britain,  Switzerland,  and 
the  United  States  began  at  the  Department  of 
State  on  May  10,  1949,  for  the  purpose  of  discuss- 
ing various  issues  which  have  thus  far  prevented 
implementation  of  the  Swiss- Allied  Accord.^ 

The  accord,  which  was  signed  on  May  25,  1946, 
consists  of  a  series  of  letters  exchanged  by  the 
three  Allies  acting  on  behalf  of  the  governments 
represented  on  the  Inter-Allied  Reparations 
Agency  at  Brussels  and  a  delegation  of  the  Swiss 
Government  at  Washington.  The  letters  con- 
cerned the  liquidation  of  German  assets  in 
Switzerland. 

As  a  result  of  informal  representations  by  the 
Swiss  Government  indicating  that  discussions  were 
desirable,  the  Allies  recently  invited  the  Swiss 
Government  to  meet  at  Washington  for  the  pur- 
pose of  discussing  various  issues  which  have  thus 
far  prevented  implementation  of  the  accord. 

I  cannot  now  list  the  issues  which  may  come  up 
for  discussion,  since  the  talks  have  not  yet  pro- 
gressed to  the  point  of  exploring  older  positions 
in  the  light  of  changing  conditions  and  of  pre- 
paring an  agenda.  It  is  known,  however,  that 
an  exchange  rate  between  the  German  currency 
and  the  Swiss  franc  will  be  high  on  the  agenda, 
as  the  Swiss  have  taken  the  position  that  the  pro- 
vision of  a  mechanism  whereby  local-currency 

May  22,   1949 


compensation  could  be  paid  to  the  German  former 
owners  of  assets  in  Switzerland  is  a  condition 
precedent  to  their  implementation  of  the  accord. 

The  delegations  will  be  headed  as  follows: 
Frangois  de  Panafieu,  Director  of  the  Technical 
Agreements  Division  of  the  French  Foreign  Of- 
fice; J.  Hubert  Penson,  Advisor  to  the  British 
Ambassador  at  Washington ;  Walter  Stucki,  of  the 
Swiss  Federal  Political  Department,  and  Willard 
L.  Thorp,  Assistant  Secretary  of  State.  The 
three  Allies  have  been  informed  of  the  illness  of 
Minister  Stucki,  which  prevents  his  arrival  in 
Washington  this  week.  It  is  therefore  believed 
that  any  final  resolution  of  the  difficulties  which 
have  been  met  in  the  implementation  of  the  accord 
will  be  delayed  until  Mr.  Stucki's  arrival.  Other 
members  of  the  Swiss  delegation  have  arrived  in 
Washington,  however,  and  it  is  understood  that 
they  have  suggested  that  certain  technical  issues 
be  examined  pending  the  arrival  of  the  principal 
Swiss  representative. 

The  Department  is  hopeful  that  as  a  result  of 
the  discussions  the  problems  which  have  prevented 
implementation  of  the  Swiss-Allied  Accord  will 
will  be  eliminated. 


'  Of  the  proceeds  of  the  liquidation  of  property  in  Switz- 
erland of  Germans  in  Germany,  50  percent  shall  accrue  to 
the  Swiss  Government  and  50  percent  shall  be  placed  at 
the  disposal  of  the  Allies  for  the  rehabilitation  of  countries 
devastated  or  depleted  by  the  war,  including  the  sending 
of  supplies  to  famine  stricken  people ;  see  also  Bulletin 
of  June  30, 1946,  p.  1121. 


THE  RECORD  OF  THE  WEEK 


U.S.  Spanish  Policy 


REMARKS  BY  SECRETARY  ACHESON 


[Released  to  the  press  May  11  ] 

In  response  to  questions  about  what  United  States 
policy  toward  Spain  is,  Secretary  Acheson  at 
his  press  conference  on  May  11  made  the  follow- 
ing extemporaneous  remarks: 

"WHiat  I  should  like  to  do  is  to  try  to  put  this 

S resent  matter,  which  involves  a  vote  in  the  United 
ations  as  to  whether  or  not  the  1946  resolution  is 
to  be  modified,  in  its  real  setting.  As  you  know, 
the  resolution  was  passed  in  1946  by  the  General 
Assembly  of  the  United  Nations,  and  it  recom- 
mended to  the  member  nations  that  they  withdraw 
their  ambassadors  from  Madrid.  At  that  time 
the  United  States  did  not  luvve  an  ambassador  in 
Madrid  because  Norman  Armour,  who  had  been 
the  Ambassador,  had  resigned,  and  no  one  had 
been  appointed  to  take  his  place.  Therefore,  in 
carrying  out  the  spirit  of  the  resolution,  no  one 
has  been  since  appointed  to  take  Mr.  Armour's 
place. 

The  argument  revolves  around  the  question  of 
whether  that  resolution  should  be  changed  and 
whether  the  ambassadors  should  be  restored.  Now 
in  the  first  place,  I  assume  it  is  everybody's  belief 
that  a  recommendation  by  the  General  Assembly 
of  the  United  Nations  should  be  followed  until 
it  is  changed.  I  do  not  think  there  would  be  any 
argument  about  that.  Argument  might  arise 
about  wliether  we  should  attempt  to  change  it. 

Another  preliminary  observation :  I  should  like 
to  say  that  in  and  of  itself  this  question  of  whether 
or  not  ambassadors,  as  distinct  from  charge 
d'affaires,  are  in  Madrid  is  a  matter  of  no  real  im- 
portance at  all.  This  resolution  was  adopted  by 
the  United  Nations  in  the  belief  that  it  would  lead 
to  certain  reforms,  on  the  part  of  Franco,  which 
would  make  the  relations  with  his  government  by 
other  free  governments  more  happy.  It  has  not 
had  that  effect. 

Now  why  was  the  resolution  passed,  and  what 
are  the  issues  which  grow  out  of  it,  and  what  is 
American  policy? 

In  the  first  place,  let  us  state  what  the  policy 
will  be  on  that  resolution.  Our  policy  will  be  to 
abstain  from  voting  upon  that  resolution  which  is 
to  the  effect  that  the  question  shall  be  left  to  the 
judgment  of  each  individual  member  of  the  United 


'  For  text  of  resolution  adopted  by  Committee  I,  see 
ante  p.  653. 


Nations.'  We  shall  not  vote  on  that.  "We  shall 
abstain. 

Now  this  question,  if  it  has  any  importance — 
and  it  obviously  has,  because  it  arouses  a  great 
deal  of  emotion,  both  in  this  country  and  in  other 
countries — is  because  it  is  a  symbol  of  something 
else.  The  reason  the  1946  resolution  was  passed 
is  rooted  in  history.  The  Franco  government  was 
one  which  was  established  with  the  active  support, 
and  only  with  the  active  support,  of  Hitler  and 
Mussolini.  The  Republican  Government  in 
Spain  received  the  support  of  the  Soviet  Union. 
There  were  charges  at  the  time  that  the  Republi- 
can Government  was  Communist.  Those  charges 
were  denied.  It  is  unimportant  at  this  point  to 
go  into  what  if  any  substance  they  had.  The  fact 
of  the  matter  was  that  a  government  was  estab- 
lished in  Spain  which  was  patterned  on  the 
regimes  in  Italy  and  in  Germany  and  was,  and  is, 
a  Fascist  government  and  a  dictatorship. 

The  importance  is  not  in  throwing  words  around 
in  talking  about  "Fascists,"  because  other  people 
call  us  Fascists,  too.  We  do  not  get  anywhere 
merely  by  using  that  word.  The  important  thing 
is  what  goes  on  in  Spain.  It  is  also  important 
what  the  western  European  governments  think 
of  what  goes  on  in  Spain  because,  as  I  have  said, 
the  important  matter  is  not  whether  we  send  an 
ambassador  instead  of  a  charge  d'affaires;  the  im- 
portant thing  is  what  can  be  done  to  bring  Spain 
into  the  conununity  of  free  nations  in  Europe  in 
both  the  economic  and  the  defense  fields.  When 
you  tliink  about  that  you  discover  at  once  that 
the  western  European  governments  are  opposed, 
and  have  publicly  stated  their  opposition,  to  this 
collaboration  with  Spain  in  the  economic  and  mili- 
tary fields. 

Now,  why  is  that  so  ?  I  say  we  get  nowhere  by 
using  such  words  as  "Fascism";  but,  if  we  look 
at  the  situation  in  Spain,  we  will  see  some  per- 
fectly simple  fundamental  facts  which  cannot  be 
obscured.  I  presume  that  the  foundation  of  lib- 
erty— individual  liberty — is  not  in  great  phrases 
at  all  but  in  certain  simple  procedures  and  simple 
beliefs,  and  I  should  put  first  on  the  list  of  essen- 
tials for  individual  liberty  the  writ  of  habeas  cor- 
pus and  an  independent  judiciary.  One  of  the 
things  that  all  dictators  do — from  the  time  of  the 
French  Revolution  and  before  the  French  Revolu- 
tion down  to  the  present  time — is  to  take  anyone 
that  they   do  not  like   and  throw   him   in   the 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


oubliette^  and  there  he  stays  until  he  dies,  or  until 
they  shoot  him,  or  until  they  take  him  out.  The 
fundamental  protection  against  that  in  free  coun- 
tries is  the  writ  of  habeas  corpus. 

Now  what  does  that  mean^  That  means  that 
anybody  who  is  detained  against  his  will  may  at 
any  time  get  an  order  from  the  court  that  he  shall 
be  produced  in  person  before  the  court  and  that 
those  who  hold  him  must  justify  the  fact  that  they 
are  holding  him  under  the  provisions  of  law. 
There  is  nothing  more  fundamental  in  the  preser- 
vation of  human  liberty  than  that  ancient  British 
tradition,  which  is  now  incorporated  in  most  of 
the  procedures  in  the  free  world.  That  right  does 
not  exist  in  Spain. 

I  suppose  a  second  fundamental  right,  which  is 
useful  only  if  you  have  the  first,  is  that  if  you  are 
tried — and,  of  course,  it  follows  from  the  writ  of 
habeas  corpus  that  you  cannot  be  sentenced  to 
prison  unless  you  are  convicted  of  some  crime — the 
second  right  is  that  in  being  convicted  of  a  crime 
you  are  convicted  not  by  employees  of  the  state  but 
by  your  own  fellow  citizens.  That  is  the  right  of 
trial  by  jury.  It  means  that  no  judge,  even  though 
he  be  independent,  cei'tainly  no  administrative  offi- 
cial, can  order  you  put  in  jail.  The  only  people 
who  can  do  that  are  10  in  some  parts  of  the  world, 
12  in  others — citizens  just  like  yourself — and  if 
they  listen  to  the  testimony  and  say  Joe  Doakes 
goes  to  jail,  then  he  goes  to  jail.  If  they  say  he 
does  not  go  to  jail,  then  he  does  not  go  to  jail.  That 
is  fundamental.  That  right  does  not  exist  in 
Spain. 

Then  there  is  the  question  of  religious  liberty, 
which  is  fundamental  to  a  free  exercise  of  the  hu- 
man personality.  That  right  does  not  exist  in 
Spain. 

Then  there  is  the  right  of  association — associa- 
tion in  political  activities,  association  in  trade 
imion  activities,  association  in  benevolent  activi- 
ties— that  right  does  not  exist  in  Spain. 

I  could  go  on,  but  what  I  want  to  draw  to  your 
attention  is  that  these  certain  fundamental  basic 
rights  of  the  individual  which  make  the  difference 
between  what  we  call  free  Europe  and  the  Iron 
Curtain  countries — these  rights  do  not  exist  in 
Spain,  and  the  Spanish  people  are  prevented  from 
enjoying  them  by  action  of  the  Spanish  Govern- 
ment. 

It  seems  perfectly  clear  to  the  western  Euro- 
pean countries  that  you  cannot  have  an  intimate 
working  partnership  with  such  a  regime  in  the 
economic  field  and  in  the  defense  field.  There 
must  be  some  move  to  liberalize  that.  None  of 
them  say,  nor  do  we  say,  that  Spain,  which  has 


never  been  a  full-flowered  democracy,  must  become 
so.  But  they  all  say  that  there  must  be  some  move 
toward  that  situation  because  if  there  isn't,  what  is 
the  use  of  having  ambassadors?  We  have  some- 
one with  a  different  title.  It  may  raise  the  pres- 
tige of  the  individual  a  little  bit,  but  what  is  the 
use  of  it  all? 

It  is  important  only  if  it  becomes  a  symbol,  and 
if  it  becomes  a  symbol  of  the  fact  that  after  all 
we  don't  care  much  about  these  rights,  then  it  is 
a  bad  symbol.  If  it  ceases  to  be  a  symbol,  it 
wouldn't  make  any  difference  to  anyone  whether 
you  had  an  ambassador  or  whether  you  didn't. 

But  the  fundamental  thing  is  that  American 
policy  is  to  try  to  bring  Spain  back  into  the  family 
of  western  Europe.  That  is  a  family  matter. 
You  have  to  convince  the  Spaniards  that  they  must 
take  some  steps  toward  that  end,  and  you  have  to 
convince  the  Europeans  that  they  have  to  take 
some  steps.  So  that  it  isn't  fundamentally  a  matter 
which  can  be  brought  about  by  American  action, 
and  therefore  the  policy  of  the  American  Govern- 
ment is  one  which  I  am  quite  sure  is  calculated  to 
please  neither  group  of  extremists  in  the  United 
States — either  those  who  say  that  we  must  im- 
mediately embrace  Franco,  or  those  who  say  that 
we  must  cast  him  into  the  outermost  darkness. 
But  it  is  a  policy  directed  toward  working  with  the 
Spaniards  and  with  the  western  Europeans, 
bringing  about  a  situation  where  these  funda- 
mental liberties  do  exist  in  Spain  and  where  the 
western  Europeans  can  bring  Spain  into  the 
community. 

I  have  spoken  at  some  length  on  this  subject 
because  it  is  so  easy  to  confuse  form  with  sub- 
stance. 


Bonn  Council  Approves  Draft  German 
Constitution 

Statement  iy  Secretary  Acheson 

[Released  to  the  press  May  11] 

I  should  like  to  say  a  few  words  on  the  ap- 
proval by  the  Bonn  Parliamentary  Council  of 
the  draft  German  Constitution. 

The  Parliamentary  Council  has  labored  dili- 

§ently  for  8  months,  and  to  good  effect.     The  mem- 
ers  of  the  Council  are  to  be  congratulated  upon 
the  successful  outcome  of  their  work. 

The  basic  law  is  being  studied  in  detail,  and 
the  terms  of  approval  will  be  communicated  by 
the  Military  Governors  after  the  necessary  review 
has  been  completed. 


May  22,    1949 


Lifting  of  the  Berlin  Blockade 

REMARKS  BY  SECRETARY  ACHESON' 


At  six  o'clock  tonight  [May  12  in  Berlin],  as  vou 
know,  the  blockade  will  be  lifted  in  Berlin,  the 
counter-measures  which  the  Western  governments 
have  taken  against  the  Eastern  zone  will  also  be 
lifted.  There  is  not  any  news  in  that,  you  have 
known  it  for  a  long  time.  I  thought  it  would  be 
appropriate  to  draw  your  attention  to  two  tilings, 
both  of  which  I  am  sure  you  know,  but  it  is  useful 
to  articulate  them. 

In  the  first  place,  we  are  where  we  are  in  regard 
to  the  lifting  of  the  blockade  because  of  the  superb 
performance  of  the  pilots  and  their  supporting 
crews,  ground  crews,  and  so  forth,  who  have  been 
for  10  months  conducting  this  airlift.  I  hope 
that  we  will  all  in  some  way  or  other  think  of  those 
men  when  this  occurs  toninjht.  The  American  Air 
Force  pilots,  the  Navy  pilots,  and  their  Britisli 
and  French  colleagues  have  for  10  months  around 
the  clock  been  carrying  on  a  task  which  required 
great  morale,  great  discipline,  and  superb  courage. 
They  have  done  it  in  every  way  worthily  of  the 
traditions  of  our  armed  services,  and  I  think  we 
could  properly  think  gratefully  of  them  tonight. 

The  second  thing  that  I  should  like  to  mention 


is  that  while  we  are  delighted  that  their  efforts 
have  brought  the  end  of  the  blockade,  we  must  not 
regard  that  fact  alone  as  having  solved  the  Gennan 
problem.  It  has  contributed  greatly  toward  our 
being  in  a  position  where  perhaps  over  a  long 
period  of  time  we  can  move  forward  to  a  solution. 
The  lifting  of  the  blockade  puts  us  again  in  the 
situation  in  which  we  were  before  the  blockade 
was  imposed.  It  was  an  arbitrary  and.  in  our 
view,  an  illegal  measure.  It  has  failed  because 
they  have  indicated  it  was  unsuccessful  and  be- 
cause the  countermeasures  produced  their  effect. 
In  addition,  as  and  of  itself,  the  lifting  of  the 
blockade  is  simply  removing  the  obstacle. 
Whether  a  solution  can  be  reached  in  Paris  de- 
pends, of  course,  upon  the  willingness  of  the 
Russians  to  make  or  consider  proposals  which  will 
not  retard  in  any  way  whatsoever  the  great 
progress  which  has  been  made  by  the  Western 
Powers  in  their  effort  to  bring  as  much  of  Germany 
as  possible  into  a  condition  where  it  can  be  a  peace- 
ful and  constructive  member  of  the  community  of 
free  nations  in  Europe. 


Clarification  of  Certain  Misapprehensions  Concerning  Attitude  of  ECE 
Economic  Survey  of  Europe  Toward  Recovery  Program 


STATEMENT  BY  SECRETARY  ACHESON 

[Released  to  the  press  May  11] 

A  report  on  the  economic  situation  in  Europe 
recently  prepared  by  the  Secretariat  staff  of  the 
Economic  Commission  for  Europe  has  attracted 
considerable  public  attention.  This  is  the  Secre- 
tariat's second  annual  survey,  and  it  has  just  been 
submitted  to  the  member  countries  of  the  Ece  for 
their  consideration  and  comment.  The  document 
is  lengthy  and  complex,  and  it  is  now  under  care- 
ful study  in  the  United  States  Government.  Pre- 
liminary comments  on  the  report  will  be  given  by 
Ambassador  Harriman  when  this  subject  is  dis- 
cussed at  the  annual  meeting  of  the  Economic 
Commission  for  Europe,  now  in  progress  at  Ge- 
neva.^   I  wish,  however,  at  this  time  to  correct  a 


Made  extemporaneously  at  his  press  conference  May  11, 
1949,  and  released  to  the  press  on  the  same  date. 
'  See  ante  p.  651. 

662 


misapprehension  which  may  exist  as  a  result  of 
certain  press  comments. 

The  report  is  not  critical  of  the  United  States 
or  of  the  European  Recovery  Program.  It  does 
analyze  critically  certain  tendencies  which  it  states 
are  characteristic  of  the  European  economy  today, 
such  as  a  failure  to  move  away  from  a  considerable 
degree  of  autarchy.  It  does  not  cite  ERP  as  a 
cause  of  this  development.  On  the  contrary,  a 
preliminary  review  of  the  report  indicates  that  it 
recognizes  the  importance  to  western  European 
recovery  of  assistance  given  by  the  United  States. 

It  has  been  made  clear  on  a  number  of  occasions 
by  Mr.  Hoffman,  Ambassador  Harriman,  and  my- 
self that  under  ERP  a  major  effort  is  being  made 
by  the  participating  European  countries  with 
United  States  assistance  to  move  away  from  au- 
tarchy toward  a  greater  cooperation  and  a  higher 
level  of  world  trade.  Outstanding  progress  to- 
ward that  end  has  already  been  made  through  the 
Oeec,  and  further  steps  are  now  under  way. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


SUMMARY  OF  THE  SURVEY 

[Released  to  the  press  by  the  U.N.  Economic  Council  May  4] 

The  second  postwar  Economic  Survey,  just  pub- 
lished by  the  Research  and  Planning  Division  of 
the  Economic  Commission  for  Europe,  which  cov- 
ers the  year  1948,  reveals  that  in  all  respects  that 
year  was  one  of  remarkable  and  accelerated  prog- 
ress for  Europe. 

Industrial  production,  for  the  first  time  since 
the  war,  surpassed  the  1938  level.  The  progress 
was  as  substantial  in  the  countries  of  eastern  Eu- 
rope as  in  those  of  western  Europe.  It  was  par- 
ticularly rapid  in  western  Germany,  where  the 
volume  rose  from  40  percent  of  prewar  at  the  end 
of  1947  to  64  percent  by  the  end  of  1948.  For  a 
group  of  14  countries,  excluding  Germany,  the 
volume  of  production  in  1948  was  13  percent  above 
prewar.  In  the  Soviet  Union  the  industrial  out- 
put was  18  percent  above  the  1940  level.  The  rise 
in  steel  production  by  IOI/2  million  tons,  or  28 
percent  over  1947,  was  outstanding. 

There  was  a  substantial  improvement  in  Eu- 
rope's agricultural  position  which  brought  over- 
all agricultural  production  for  Europe  (excluding 
the  IJ.S.S.R.)  up  to  85  percent  of  prewar,  and  in 
the  Soviet  Union,  grain  production  rose  to  within 
4  percent  of  the  1940  level. 

The  volume  of  goods  carried  on  European  rail- 
ways, which  in  1947  had  already  reached  the  pre- 
war level,  increased  by  about  13  percent.  In  the 
Soviet  Union  the  volume  of  goods  loaded  in  the 
railways  increased  by  19  percent,  inland-water 
transport  by  29  percent,  road  freight  by  23  per- 
cent, and  ocean  freight  by  11  percent. 

The  productivity  of  laljor  in  European  industry 
appears  to  have  risen  by  some  9  percent.  Exclud- 
ing Germany,  output  per  head  was  higher  than 
prewar. 

Nevertheless,  total  European  production  was 
still  only  about  three  quarters  of  that  of  the  United 
States,  whereas  it  was  one  third  larger  than  that 
of  the  United  States  before  the  war. 

The  survey  notes  that  substantial  progress  was 
made  in  1948  toward  more  stable  financial  condi- 
tions although  inflationary  pressure  is  still  a  prob- 
lem in  some  European  countries.  The  rate  of  in- 
crease in  prices  tended  to  slow  down  in  most  coun- 
tries fi'om  around  10  percent  between  1946  and 

1947  to  about  2  to  5  percent  between  1947  and  1948. 
Apart  from  a  few  countries,  the  increase  in  the 
wage  level  was  only  about  5  percent.  _ 

The  rate  of  capital  formation   in  Europe  in 

1948  was  about  one  quarter  higher  in  real  terms 
than  in  1938.  Nevertheless,  investment  in  fixed 
capital  in  Europe,  excluding  Germany,  which 
amounted  to  around  5,000  million  dollars  of  1938 
purchasing  power,  was  only  about  one  half  of  the 
corresponding  figure  for  the  United  States. 

There  was  a  further  remarkable  increase  in 
Europe's  trade,  characterized  by  a  relative  greater 
expansion  in  exports  in  relation  to  production  and 
a  relative  decline  in  imports.     Overseas  exports 

May  22,    J 949 


increased  by  770  million  dollars,  or  nearly  30  per- 
cent, and  exceeded  the  prewar  volume  by  5  percent. 
Overseas  impoi'ts  fell  by  360  million  dollars,  or 
6  percent,  and  were  in  1948  6  percent  above  1938. 
Within  total  imports  from  overseas  there  was  a 
sharp  fall  of  nearly  1,000  million  dollars,  or  some 
30  percent  in  imports  from  the  United  States  and 
Canada,  and  a  rise  of  over  600  million  dollars,  or 
20  percent,  in  imports  from  other  overseas  sources. 
The  volume  of  intra-European  trade  has  also  risen 
by  some  1,000  million  dollars,  or  25  percent,  though 
it  still  remains  some  30  percent  below  its  prewar 
volume.  The  cost  of  imports  from  overseas  was 
about  10  percent  higher  than  prewar  in  terms  of 
exports.  This  deterioration  in  the  terms  of  trade 
made  the  adverse  balance  of  trade  in  1948  about 
1,000  million  dollars  greater  than  it  would  have 
been  at  1947  prices. 

The  survey  notes  that  the  large  deficit  which 
characterized  Europe's  balance  of  payments  with 
the  outside  world  since  the  war  was  very  substan- 
tially reduced  in  1948.  The  over-all  deficit  fell 
from  7.6  billion  dollars  in  1947  to  5.6  million 
dollars  in  1948.  Furthermore,  the  reduction  was 
concentrated  at  the  point  where  the  deficit  had 
been  greatest — in  transactions  with  the  United 
States. 

As  a  result  of  the  changes  in  trade  within  west- 
ern Europe  one  of  the  most  notable  developments 
in  the  year  was  the  change  in  the  United  Kingdom's 
position  from  the  biggest  debtor  in  intra-European 
trade  to  one  of  the  major  creditors.  The  expan- 
sion of  trade  between  the  U.S.S.R.  and  other  east- 
ern European  countries  was  the  chief  element 
in  increasing  the  volume  of  eastern  Eurojiean 
trade  to  a  level  almost  double  that  of  1947  and 
about  treble  that  of  prewar.  The  increase  in  trade 
between  eastern  and  western  Europe  was  mainly 
due  to  an  increase  in  exports  from  eastern  Europe. 
With  regard  to  the  respective  occupation  zones  of 
Germany,  it  would  appear  that  the  volume  of 
trade  of  the  Soviet  zone  is  lower  in  relation  to  its 
economic  potential  than  other  zones.  The  Fi-ench 
zone  had  a  fair-sized  deficit.  The  Bizone  showed 
a  considerable  increase,  both  in  production  and 
exports. 

The  survey  states  that  an  examination  of  the 
degree  to  which  European  countries  fulfilled  their 
economic  plans  in  1948  shows  that  the  countries  of 
western  Europe  over-fulfilled  their  export  plans, 
fulfilled  their  investment  plans,  but  did  not  com- 
pletely fulfill  their  plans  for  the  production  of 
basic  commodities. 

The  countries  of  eastern  Europe,  apart  from 
the  U.S.S.R.,  show  a  satisfactory  record  in  their 
production  plans  and  a  higher  degree  of  fulfill- 
ment in  their  trade  plans  than  in  the  previous 
year.  Their  investment  plans,  however,  were  not 
completely  fulfilled. 

In  the  Soviet  Union  the  record  of  fulfillment  in 
1948,  both  overall  and  in  its  individual  branches, 
was  more  favorable  than  in  the  previous  two  years. 


Concluding,  the  survey  states  that  the  funda- 
mental economic  problem  with  wliicji  Europe  is 
faced  is  how  to  raise  the  low  standards  on  which 
the  majority  of  European  people  live.  Its  solu- 
tion IS  dependent  on  the  elimination  of  the  deficit 
in  Europe's  balance  of  payments  and  the  raising 
of  the  present  low  productivity  of  labor.  The 
particular  problem  of  the  balance-of-payments 
deficit,  says  the  survey  will  depend  partly  on 
changes  in  the  relative  scarcity  of  primary  prod- 
ucts and  partly  on  the  future  economic  policy  of 
the  United  States  which  will  influence  the  move- 
ment in  Europe's  balance  of  payments  as  much 
as  any  independent  action  which  the  countries  of 
Europe  can  take. 

The  Economic  Survey  of  Europe  in  1948.  which 
is  now  in  mimeographed  form,  will  be  available  in 
printed  form  in  about  2  weeks  from  ITnited  Na- 
tions sales  agents,  including  Columbia  University 
Press  of  New  York,  H.  M.  Stationery  Office  of 
London,  and  the  Ryerson  Press  of  Toronto. 


Need  for  Closer  Unity  Among  Free  Nations 
of  Europe 

Statement  hy  Secretary  Acheson 

[Released  to  the  press  May  11  ] 

Since  the  inception  of  the  European  Recovery 
Program  the  United  States  has  recognized  the 
need  for  a  closer  degree  of  unity  among  the  free 
nations  of  Europe.  During  the  past  few  years 
numerous  individual  proposals  have  been  ad- 
vanced with  this  as  their  aim.  The  United  States 
has  not  specifically  endorsed  any  of  these  indi- 
vidual proposals  but  has  given  its  support  in 
general  to  the  idea  of  European  unity.>  The 
United  States  has  maintained  the  position  that 
at  should  not  endorse  unofficial  proposals  which 
envisaged  a  specific  form  of  political  unity  and 
that  the  promotion  of  unity  is  primarily  a  matter 
for  the  Europeans  themselves. 

On  May  5,  1949,  representatives  of  Belgium, 
Denmark,  France,  Ireland,  Italy,  Luxembourg, 
the  Nctlierlands,  Norway,  Sweden,  and  the  United 
Kingdom  signed  the  Statute  for  the  Council  of 
Europe.  This  act  on  the  part  of  those  nations  is 
a  welcome  step  forward  toward  the  political  inte- 
gration of  the  free  nations  of  Europe.  The  people 
of  those  nations  are  to  be  praised  for  their  realiza- 
tion that  a  free  Europe,  to  remain  free  and  attain 
a  higher  degree  of  well-being,  must  be  a  united 
Europe. 

Before  World  War  II,  few  regarded  any  step 
in  the  direction  of  political  unity  as  being  within 
the  realm  of  practical  politics.  But  with  the  co- 
operation born  of  conflict  and  nurtured  by  collab- 
oration in  the  economic  field  since  the  war,  there 
came  the  realization  that  political  cooperation  was 
not  only  desirable  but  was  a  natural  path  leading 
toward  the  achievement  of  common  purposes. 

'  Bulletin  of  June  22,  1947,  p.  1213. 


The  basis  of  this  political  cooperation   i-  i    .i 

intangible.     The  people  of  these  nations  \ 

a  common  heritage  of  free  institutions,  a  lovt-  ul 
liberty,  a  belief  in  the  worth  of  the  individual, 
and  a  respect  for  the  rule  of  laws  formulated  by 
free  men  for  their  own  protection. 

The  progressively  closer  political  integration  of 
the  free  nations  of  Europe  will  insure  that  the 
economic  cooperation  which  has  resulted  from  the 
European  Recovery  Program  will  not  wane,  but, 
on  the  contrary,  will  become  even  closer  and  more 
enduring. 


American  Theatrical  Company  To  Present 
"Hamlet"  in  Denmark 

[Released  to  the  press  April  30] 

A  group  of  28  American  actors,  for  the  first 
time  in  history,  will  present  Shakespeare's  Hamlet 
in  the  play's  original  setting  at  Kronberg  Castle 
in  Elsinore,  Denmark,  June  17  to  28,  and  later  will 
appear  before  American  troops  in  Germany,  under 
plans  announced  on  April  30  by  the  Department 
of  State. 

The  theatrical  company,  sponsored  by  the  State 
Theater  of  Virginia,  which  itself  is  sponsored  by 
the  American  National  Theater  and  Academy,  will 
make  the  trip  by  plane  to  Denmark  at  the  invita- 
tion of  the  Danish  National  Theater.  The  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  United  States  Air  Force 
are  cooperating  to  facilitate  carrying  out  the  plan 
jointly  as  a  cultural-exchange  project  and  one  for 
the  benefit  of  American  troops  overseas. 

The  Danish  National  Open  Air  Stage,  which 
sponsors  the  international  Hamlet  Festival,  was 
constituted  in  1937,  and  the  institution  was  in- 
augurated the  same  summer  with  a  performance 
by  the  Old  Vic  players  from  England,  with  Lau- 
rence Oliver  and  Vivien  Leigh  in  the  principal 
parts.  Since  then  the  organization  has  carried 
through  five  seasons,  interrupted  by  six  years  of 
inactivity  during  the  War.  Distinguished  com- 
panies from  Norway,  Finland.  (Jermany.  and  a 
second  English  company,  headed  by  JohnGielgud, 
have  performed  the  plaj'  in  successive  years. 

This  year  the  invitation  came  to  the  United 
States,  to  the  American  National  Theater  and 
Academy,  which  sponsors  and  sustains  various 
theater  projects  and  cultural  organizations 
throughout  the  country.  The  American  National 
Theater  and  Academy,  chartered  by  Congress  in 
1935,  invited  the  State  Theater  of  Virginia,  the 
only  government-sponsored  organization  of  its 
kind  in  the  Ignited  States,  to  present  the  play. 
This  group  is  inviting  outstanding  American  ac- 
tors to  take  the  leading  roles. 

The  State  Theater  of  Virginia  was  chosen  be- 
cause of  its  official  State  sponsorship,  in  the  ab- 
sence of  an  official  Federal  Government-sponsored 
theater  group  such  as  exists  in  Denmark  and  many 
other  European  countries. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Anniversary  of  Liberation  of  Czechoslovai<ia 


CORRESPONDENCE  BETWEEN  SHAEF  AND  SOVIET  HIGH    COMMAND   CONCERNING    DECISIONS 
TO  HALT  ALLIED  FORCES  IN  CZECHOSLOVAKIA 


[Released  to  the  press  May  9] 

With  the  anniversary  of  the  liberation  of  Pilsen 
on  May  5, 1945,  and  the  liberation  of  Praha,  which 
was  completed  on  May  9, 1945,  the  respective  roles 
of  the  Allied  and  Soviet  forces  in  the  liberation  of 
Czechoslovakia,  including  that  of  Czech  forces, 
have  again  become  a  matter  of  public  interest  both 
in  the  United  States  and  Czechoslovakia. 

In  view  of  the  numerous  inquiries  that  have 
been  received  and  the  many  false  statements  and 
interpretations  that  have  been  published  in  re- 
gard to  the  matter,  the  Department  of  State  is 
making  available  the  paraphrase  texts  of  the  ex- 
change of  correspondence  between  SHAEF  and 
the  Soviet  High  Command,  giving  a  complete  pic- 
ture of  the  considerations  involved  in  the  decision 
to  halt  the  advance  of  the  Allied  forces  in  Czecho- 
slovakia at  the  line  of  Karlsbad,  Pilsen,  Budweis 
on  May  6, 1945,  instead  of  advancing  to  Praha. 

An  examination  of  the  documents  will  reveal 
that  SHAEF  was  particularly  interested  in  main- 
taining the  coordination  of  the  Allied  and  Soviet 
fronts  as  they  approached  each  other  in  the  last 
days  of  the  war,  in  order  to  mitigate  any  con- 
fusion or  misunderstandings.  The  decisions  and 
actions  of  the  Allied  Command  in  this  connection 
were  purely  operational  without  any  political  im- 
plications and  were  directed  solely  at  the  objective 
of  destroying  the  enemy  forces.  No  prior  political 
agreements  or  commitments  had  been  made  with 
respect  to  Czechoslovakia,  and  the  Allied  Com- 
mand made  perfectly  clear  its  willingness  to  com- 
plete the  destruction  of  the  enemy  in  Czecho- 
slovakia as  well  as  in  other  areas.  It  was  only  at 
the  specific  request  of  the  Soviet  High  Command, 
and  after  assurances  were  received,  that  the  Soviet 
Army  was  already  in  a  position  to  destroy  the 
enemy  in  the  Vltava  Valley,  in  which  Praha  is  situ- 
ated, that  the  advance  beyond  the  Pilsen  line  was 
halted. 

A  reading  of  these  documents  in  the  context  of 
the  events  of  the  time  will  reveal  the  important  role 
which  both  the  Allied  and  Soviet  forces  played  in 
the  liberation  of  Czechoslovakia  through  their  part 
in  the  destruction  of  the  enemy  forces  in  Ger- 
many and  through  their  coordinated  action  in 
Czechoslovakia. 

May  22,   J 949 


General  Eisenhower  to  the  United  States  Military 
Mission,  Moscow,  April  21, 194S 

Please  transmit  the  following  message  to  the 
Soviet  High  Command  in  view  of  the  fact  that 
the  operations  indicated  in  my  message  of  March 
28,  1945,  are  now  nearing  completion  and  a  fur- 
ther communication  is  considered  desirable : 

1.  We  wish  to  transmit  additional  information 
concerning  the  development  of  operations  in  this 
theater,  in  line  with  earlier  exchanges  of  informa- 
tion which  have  proved  of  value. 

2.  With  respect  to  our  message  of  March  28, 
1945,  the  operations  indicated  therein  have  been 
concluded  successfully  and  the  secondary  advance 
in  the  direction  of  Linz  will  begin  soon. 

3.  No  advance  will  be  made  in  any  strength  in 
the  center  for  at  least  several  weeks  because  the 
logistical  position  in  this  area  is  stretched  as  a  re- 
sult of  the  rapidity  and  extent  of  our  advance. 
Operations  to  begin  clearing  of  the  flanks  is 
planned. 

4.  We  will  cross  the  Elbe  in  the  north  and  drive 
the  Germans  beyond  the  Kiel  Canal  in  order  to 
open  the  German  ports,  important  for  the  supply 
of  our  forces. 

5.  Strong  forces  are  driving  in  the  direction  of 
the  Danube  Valley  and  Linz,  where  the  strongest 
opposition  on  our  front  is  located.  They  will  be 
protected  on  the  right  flank  by  an  additional  army. 
In  order  to  prevent  a  last  stand  by  the  Nazis  in 
western  Austria,  this  area  may  be  entered  by  the 
Army  at  a  later  date. 

6.  The  southern  offensive  will  commence  in  a 
few  days  and  shortly  thereafter  the  Elbe  will  be 
crossed  near  Hamburg. 

7.  We  would  be  glad  to  be  informed  concerning 
the  development  of  Soviet  operations  and  any 
change  in  timings  or  plans. 

8.  Although  arrangements  being  made  to  insure 
identification  and  liaison  between  our  troops  seem 
to  be  nearing  completion,  we  continue  to  believe 
that  an  exchange  of  officers  between  the  headquar- 
ters of  our  armies  to  handle  purely  local  problems, 
would  be  the  most  satisfactory  procedure  for  in- 
suring minimum  essential  coordination  of  our  joint 
efforts  as  the  armies  approach  each  other.  Pos- 
sible difficulties  arising  from  differences  of  lan- 
guage and  procedure  would  be  alleviated  by  the 
proposed  exchange. 


FollowinfT  is  for  your  back^ound  information 
which  may  be  divulged  as  occasion  demands : 

We  must  insure  the  cleaning  out  of  Norway  and 
Austria,  possible  Nazi  resistance  areas,  before 
winter — an  operation  which  may  be  of  lengthy  du- 
ration. But  since,  for  logistical  reasons,  we  cannot 
develop  strong  flank  attacks  against  the  balance 
of  the  Nazi  forces  while  continuing  the  rapid  ad- 
vance in  the  center,  I  have  decided  to  stop  this 
advance  temporarily  on  the  central  front  on  the 
main  line  of  the  Elbe  and  Mulde  Rivers  and  Erz 
Gebirge  foothills,  though  the  area  beyond  this  line 
will  be  probed.  The  cleaning  up  of  the  flanks 
will  involve  the  crossing  of  the  Elbe  and  destroy- 
ing the  Nazi  forces  in  Schleswig-Holstein  and 
Denmark,  thus  enabling  us  to  free  north  German 
ports,  obtain  enemy  shipping,  and  overcome  the 
present  submarine  menace.  The  attacks  in  the 
south  will  follow  the  route  Bayreuth  to  Salzburg 
by  one  United  States  army  and  the  route  Wiirz- 
burg-Munich-western  Austria  by  another.  Aus- 
tria may  also  be  entered  by  the  French  Army  after 
it  cleans  out  the  Black  Forest  areas. 

United  States  Military  Mission^  Moscow,  to  Gen- 
eral Eisenhower,  April  25,  19.^5 

A  letter  has  been  received  from  General  Antonov 
to  the  following  effect : 

The  Soviet  Command  thanks  General  Eisen- 
hower for  keeping  it  informed  of  his  plans  of 
operations  and  for  his  cooperation  in  these  mat- 
ters. .  .  . 

The  Soviet  forces  will  conduct  operations  for 
the  clearing  of  German  forces  from  the  east  bank 
of  the  Elbe  River  north  and  south  of  Berlin  and 
from  the  valley  of  the  Vltava  River. 

General  Eisenhower  to  the  United  States  Military 
Mission,  Moscow,  April  30,  IdJfi 

It  is  requested  that  you  thank  General  Antonov 
for  the  information  contained  in  your  telegram 
of  April  25,  194.5,  and  inform  the  Soviet  High 
Command  as  follows : 

Please  confirm  your  agreement  to  the  following 
proposals. 

Tne  plans  described  in  my  communication  of 
April  21,  1945  remain  effective  unless  develop- 
ments in  the  changing  situation  determine  other- 
wise. 

In  order  to  establish  a  firm  operational  cast 
flank  on  the  appropriate  line  Wismar-Schwerin- 
Doemitz,  which  will  be  adjusted  locally  by  coopera- 
tive action  when  our  forces  meet,  an  operation 
across  the  lower  Elbe  is  being  launched  at  the 
present  time. 

In  the  central  area  the  operational  positions  of 
the  Allied  forces  are  being  adjusted  along  the 
Elbe  and  Mulde  Rivers  in  accordance  with  pre- 
vious agreements.     Allied  forces  holding  for  the 


time  being  the  line  from  the  headwaters  of  the 
Mulde  River  approximately  along  the  1937  fron- 
tiers of  Czechoslovakia  in  the  Erz  Gebirge  and 
Boehmerwald  may  advance  to  Karlsbad,  Pilsen, 
and  Budweis,  if  circumstances  require  it.  This 
matter  will  be  the  subject  of  further  communica- 
tions as  the  operational  plans  are  developed.  It 
is  noted  that  the  east  banks  of  the  Elbe  and  the 
Vltava  Rivers  in  this  area  will  be  cleared  by  Soviet 
forces.  Local  adjustment  of  contacts  can  be  made 
by  local  commanders  in  the  light  of  mutual  knowl- 
edge of  our  operational  plans.  The  line  along 
north-south  railway  line  east  of  Linz  and  thence 
along  Enns  River  Valley  would  be  suitable  for 
tactical  adjustment,  since  a  forward  movement 
to  the  general  Linz  area  and  a  clearing  of  enemy 
forces  south  of  this  area  will  be  instituted  accord- 
ing to  plans  for  the  southern  flank. 

My  views  on  operations  further  south  will  ln' 
forthcoming  after  consultation  with  the  Supreme 
Allied  Commander,  Mediterranean.  The  opera- 
tions in  this  area  have  not  developed  sufficiently 
to  determine  probable  line  for  local  adjustment 
between  the  Soviet  and  Allied  forces. 

I  will  be  glad  to  order  further  advances  when- 
ever possible  if  your  operations  call  for  cooperative 
action  by  my  forces  in  attaining  our  common 
objective. 

United  States  Military  Mission,  Moscow,  to 
General  Eisenhower,  May  4, 191^5 

General  Antonov  expresses  thanks  for  the  in- 
formation contained  in  your  telegrams  of  April  30 
concerning  your  operational  plans  and  for  your 
willingness  to  aid  Soviet  forces  in  attaining  our 
common  purpose  and  wishes  to  inform  you  that 
the  Soviet  High  Command  has  expressed  full 
concurrence  with  your  proposals. 

General  Eisenhower  to  the  United  States  Military 
Mission,  Moscow,  May  Jf,  19^5 

It  is  requested  that  you  inform  the  Soviet  High 
Command  that  we  intend  to  advance  immediately 
to  the  line  Karlsbad-Pilsen-Budweis  and  to  cap- 
ture these  points.  Thereafter,  we  are  ready  to  con- 
tinue our  advance  into  Czechoslovakia  to  the  Elbe 
and  Vltava  for  the  purpose  of  clearing  the  west 
banks  of  these  rivers  in  coordination  with  Soviet 
plans  to  clear  the  east  banks,  if  the  situation  re- 
quires it. 

United  States  Militan/  Mission,  Moscow,  to       I 
SHAEF,  May  5, 19Ii5  \ 

A  letter  from  General  Antonov  follows : 

It  is  requested  that  General  Eisenhower  be  in- 
formed as  follows : 

Reference  is  made  to  my  letter  of  April  24, 1945 
concerning  Soviet  operational  plans  for  the  clear- 
ing of  the  enemy  forces  from  the  east  bank  of  the 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Elbe  river  north  and  south  of  Berlin  and  from  the 
Vltava  valley  by  which  veas  meant  from  both  the 
east  and  west  banks  of  the  Vltava  River,  and  Gen- 
eral Eisenhower's  reply  of  May  1,  1945  which  in- 
formed us  that  the  Allied  forces  will  advance  to 
Karlsbad,  Pilsen,  and  Budweis  in  Czechoslovakia. 
The  Soviet  command  has  grouped  its  forces  and 
is  nearing  the  completion  of  operations  in  accord- 
ance with  these  plans. 

Your  letter  indicating  General  Eisenhower's  in- 
tention to  advance  beyond  the  line  Karlsbad-Pil- 
sen-Budweis,  following  the  capture  of  these  three 
points,  for  the  purpose  of  clearing  the  west  banks 
of  the  Elbe  and  Vltava  rivers,  if  the  situation 
dictates,  was  received  yesterday.  The  Soviet  Com- 
mand requests  General  Eisenhower  to  refrain  from 
advancing  the  Allied  forces  in  Czechoslovakia  be- 
yond the  formerly  designated  line,  that  is,  Karls- 
bad, Pilsen  and  Budweis,  so  that  a  possible  con- 
fusion of  forces  can  be  avoided. 


In  accordance  with  General  Eisenhower's  re- 
quest, expressed  in  his  letter  of  May  1,  1945,  the 
Soviet  Command  has  halted  the  movement  of 
Soviet  forces  toward  the  lower  Elbe  at  the  line 
Wismar,  Schwerin,  Doemitz.  In  turn,  it  is  hoped 
that  with  respect  to  the  advance  of  the  Allied 
forces  in  Czechoslovakia,  General  Eisenhower  will 
accede  to  our  desires. 

General  Eisenhower  to   United  States  Military 
Mission,  Moscow,  May  6, 1945 

General  Antonov's  intentions  have  been  clarified 
by  your  telegram  of  May  5,  and  the  Allied  forces 
are  under  instructions  to  remain  at  the  line  Karls- 
bad-Pilsen-Budweis.  The  ability  of  the  Soviet 
forces  to  advance  rapidly  for  the  purpose  of  clear- 
ing up  the  situation  in  the  center  of  the  country 
is  presumed. 

You  are  requested  to  inform  General  Antonov 
of  my  instructions. 


Japanese  Reparations  and  Level  of  Industry 


STATEMENT  BY  MAJOR  GENERAL  FRANK  R.  McCOY< 
U.S.  Representative  on  the  Far  Eastern  Commission 


The  Japanese  reparations  problem  has  been  one 
of  the  most  important  and  pressing  questions  with 
which  the  Far  Eastern  Commission  and  its  mem- 
ber countries  have  had  to  deal.  The  United  States, 
on  its  part,  has  taken  a  long  and  continuing  in- 
terest in  this  problem  and  has  been  keenly  aware 
of  the  interest  of  the  other  FEC  countries  in  find- 
ing a  reasonable  solution  to  it.  It  is  to  be  re- 
gretted that  this  controversial  issue,  which  for 
such  a  long  time  has  proved  incapable  of  solution 
by  this  Commission,  continues  to  retard  the 
achievement  of  economic  self-support  by  Japan, 
which  is  so  greatly  in  the  interest  of  our  common 
objectives  with  respect  to  that  country. 

In  our  discussions  of  the  matter  here  in  the 
Commission,  we  have  proceeded  from  the  agree- 
ment contained  in  the  Potsdam  Declaration  that 
reparations  would  be  exacted  from  Japan  and  that 
they  should  be  in  a  form  which  would  not  impair 
the  ability  of  the  Japanese  people  to  support  them- 
selves. From  the  earliest  days  of  the  Far  East- 
ern Commission,  the  United  States  has  been  guided 
by  a  desire  that  the  victims  of  Japanese  aggression 
receive  as  reparations  such  of  Japan's  resources  as 
was  possible  without  jeopardizing  Japan's  ability 
to  meet  its  own  peaceful  needs.  The  United  States 
has  felt,  further,  that  in  order  that  the  nations 
devastated  by  Japan  might  receive  reparation 
while  their  need  was  greatest,  in  order  that  there 
might  be  removed  from  the  mind  of  the  Japanese 

May  22,   J 949 


Government  and  people  uncertainty  regarding  the 
reparations  question,  and  in  order  that  as  many  as 
possible  of  Japan's  postwar  obligations  might  be 
disposed  of  during  the  period  of  the  occupation,  a 
reparations  program  slaould  be  worked  out  and 
put  into  effect  at  the  earliest  practical  moment. 

These  factors  led  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment to  take  the  initiative  in  making  a  number  of 
policy  proposals  to  the  Far  Eastern  Commission. 
In  April  1946,  the  United  States  submitted  to  the 
Far  Eastern  Commission  a  pattern  of  proposals 
providing  that  there  should  be  made  immediately 
available  for  reparations  designated  quantities  of 
industrial  facilities  which  were  at  that  time  con- 
sidered to  be  clearly  surplus  to  Japan's  peaceful 
needs.  Between  May  and  December  of  that  year 
the  Commission  adopted  a  series  of  interim  repa- 
rations policy  decisions  based  upon  these  United 
States  proposals,  but  the  subsequent  inability  of 
the  Commission  to  agree  on  a  schedule  of  shares 
for  division  of  the  facilities  among  the  claimant 
countries  prevented  implementation  of  the  deci- 
sions. In  April  1947,  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment offered  further  proposals,  which  would  have 
had  the  effect  of  making  known  to  Japan  precisely, 
and  on  a  final  basis,  what  industrial  capacity 
should  be  considered  by  that  country  to  be  immune 
from  removal  as  reparations  and  what  should  be 

'  Made  before  the  Commission  on  May  12,  1949,  and  re- 
leased to  the  press  in  Washington  on  the  same  date. 


eligible  for  removal.  In  the  same  month,  the 
United  States  because  of  its  desire  to  work  toward 
a  settlement  of  this  matter  issued  an  Advance 
Transfers  interim  directive,  under  authority 
granted  in  paragraph  III,  3,  of  the  Terms  of  Ref- 
erence of  the  Far  P^astern  Commission,  instructing 
the  Supreme  Commander  to  effect  delivery  to  four 
of  the  FEC  countries  of  30  percent  of  the  facilities 
which  the  Far  Eastern  Commission  it-self  had 
previously  determined  in  the  Interim  Removals 
decisions  to  be  available  for  reparations  removal. 
Issuance  of  this  directive  was  motivated  in  part 
by  a  desire  to  assist  those  countries  which  had  in 
the  course  of  fighting  against  Japan's  aggression 
on  their  own  territories  suffered  most  grievously, 
but  it  was  also  motivated  by  a  desire  to  prompt 
FEC  countries  to  agi-ee  upon  a  reparations  pro- 
gram from  which  all  11  countries  might  benefit. 

In  November  TJl".  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment took  the  initiative  once  more  in  an  effort  to 
end  the  stalemate  within  the  Commission  on  the 
question  of  reparations  shares,  a  stalemate  which 
continued  to  make  it  impossible  for  any  of  the 
Commission's  decisions  on  the  rej^arations  prob- 
lem to  take  practical  effect.  This  United  States 
proposal  contained  the  provision  that  if  the  Far 
Eastern  Commission  countries  would  accept  the 
schedule  of  percentages  which  had  been  worked 
out  by  the  United  States  Government — on  the  basis 
of  prolonged  exchanges  of  views  among  Commis- 
sion members  as  to  the  equities  involved — the 
United  States  Government,  on  its  part,  would 
make  available  an  important  part  of  its  own  share 
for  distribution  among  the  countries  which  could 
accept  the  United  States  proposal  as  a  whole. 
Sixteen  months  have  passed,  and  this  proposal  has 
not  been  accepted  bj*  the  Commission. 

I  should  like  to  emphasize  at  this  point  that  the 
action  of  my  government,  and,  it  is  assumed,  of 
the  other  member  governments,  in  participating 
in  the  policy  decisions  which  have  been  taken  by 
the  Commission  on  the  question  of  reparations  was 
predicated  upon  two  basic  assumptions,  namely, 
that  the  resources  to  be  removed  from  Japan  as 
reparations  were  clearly  excess  to  the  peaceful 
needs  of  a  self-supporting  Japanese  economy,  and 
that  there  would  be  a  shares  schedule  acceptable 
to  and  agreed  upon  by  the  Far  Eastern  Commis- 
sion countries  which  would  determine  in  what 
proportions  available  reparations  should  be  di- 
vided. 

As  I  have  already  stated,  and  as  the  Commis- 
sion well  knows,  the  second  of  these  assumptions 
has  not  been  realized,  and  there  seems  little  pros- 
pect of  its  being  realized.  As  regards  the  first 
assumption,  that  reparations  removals  should  be 
limited  to  facilities  clearly  excess  to  the  needs 
of  a  self-supporting  Japanese  economy,  successive 
studies  during  the  past  18  months  of  Japan's  fu- 
ture industrial  requirements  have  necessitated 
progressive  upward  adjustments  of  earlier  esti- 


mates of  these  requirements.  The  first  of  these 
studies  was  that  of  Overseas  Consultants,  Incor- 
porated, whose  report  was  made  available  to  the 
Commission  on  March  2,  1948,  and  the  second 
was  that  of  the  so-called  Johnston  Committee, 
whose  report  was  made  available  to  the  Commis- 
sion on  May  19, 1948.  Both  of  these  reports  came 
to  the  sober  conclusion  that  the  quantity  of  capital 
equipment  in  Japan  which  could  be  properly  con- 
sidered in  excess  of  Japan's  peaceful  need's  had 
been  greatly  overestimated.  Both  reports  indi- 
cated that  for  a  variety  of  reasons  the  Japanese 
economy  was  continuing  to  operate  at  a  heavy  def- 
icit even  though  living  standards  remained  at  a 
minimum  level,  and  that  the  end  to  these  deficits 
is  not  in  sight.  The  evidence  contained  in  these 
reports,  and  the  common  knowledse  of  all  Far 
Eastern  Commission  countries,  leads  to  the  ines- 
capable conclusion  that  the  Japanese  economy  can 
be  made  to  bear  additional  economic  burdens,  be- 
yond those  directly  related  to  meeting  its  own  re- 
quirements, only  by  prolonging  or  increasing  the 
staggering  costs  borne  by  the  American  taxpayer. 

The  United  States  has,  since  the  time  of  the 
Japanese  surrender,  carried  the  burden  of  prevent- 
ing such  disease  and  unrest  in  Japan  as  might 
jeopardize  the  purposes  of  the  occupation.  The 
critical  economic  conditions  with  which,  it  is  now 
apparent,  Japan  is  faced,  and  the  prospect  of  con- 
tinuing deficits  in  Japan's  international  payments 
for  some  years  to  come,  render  measures  of 
Japanese  economic  recovery  of  utmost  importance. 
It  is  inescapable  that  if  the  basic  purposes  of  the 
occupation  are  to  be  achieved,  the  Japanese  people 
must  be  enabled  to  support  themselves  at  a  toler- 
able standard  of  living.  No  one  could  reasonably 
suggest  that  Japan  should  be  abandoned  to  eco- 
nomic despair.  So  to  abandon  Japan  would  be 
to  undo  the  costly  victory  in  the  Pacific. 

I  am  sure  that  other  Commission  countries  agree 
with  my  government  that  the  Japanese  people 
themselves  must  exert  maximum  efforts  for  the 
attainment  of  recovery.  For  some  months  the 
United  States  Government  has  explored  means 
whereby  this  objective  could  best  be  achieved.  In 
issuing  its  directive  of  December  10  regarding 
Japan's  economic  stabilization,  the  United  States 
Government  took  a  major  step  toward  requiring 
the  Japanese  people  to  exert  their  utmost  energies 
in  stabilizing  their  economy  and  reducing  their 
dependence  for  subsistence  on  foreign  subsidy. 
Under  present  circumstances  in  Japan  the  cost  of 
dismantling,  packing,  and  transporting  repara- 
tions facilities  would  conflict  with  the  program  of 
Japan's  economic  stablization  and  would  consti- 
tute an  additional  financial  burden  upon  the 
United  States  Government.  I  do  not  wish  to  em- 
phasize this  point  unduly,  but  the  United  States 
Government  would  be  lacking  in  candor  if  it  did 
not  point  out  that  the  resources  at  its  disposal  to 
meet  demands  from  all  parts  of  the  world  are 
limited. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


It  is  now  apparent  to  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment that  the  first  as  well  as  the  second  of  the 
two  basic  assumptions  mentioned  earlier,  assump- 
tions which  underlay  the  policy  decisions  of  the 
FEC  having  to  do  with  reparations  and  are  a  pre- 
condition for  an  FEC  reparations  program,  has 
not  been  realized.  This  fact  has  led  my  govern- 
ment to  several  conclusions.  Before  stating  them, 
however,  I  wish  to  emphasize  that  the  United 
States  Government  maintains  fully  and  categori- 
cally its  support  of  the  principle  adopted  by  the 
Far  Eastern  Commission  that  Japan's  warmaking 
capacity  should  be  eliminated.  As  you  know,  all 
of  Japan's  specialized  warmaking  facilities  have 
been  destroyed.  The  United  States  Government 
believes  that  all  other  equipment  used  for  war 
purposes  in  the  past  should,  if  retained  in  Japan, 
be  fully  converted  to  the  purposes  of  and  utilized 
in  Japan's  peaceful  economy.  Where  this  cannot 
be  done,  the  United  States  Government  believes 
that  such  equipment  should  be  scrapped.  The 
United  States  will  not  permit  difficulties  in  reach- 
ing a  solution  of  the  reparations  problem  to  be 
a  means  whereby  Japan's  war  capacity  might 
reemerge. 

It  may  not  be  amiss  at  this  point  to  recall  that 
Japan  has  already  been  deprived  not  only  of  all  of 
its  overseas  territorial  possessions,  but  also  of  sub- 
stantial quantities  of  real  property  of  Japanese 
ownership  and  origin  in  the  former  possessions  and 
elsewhere  abroad.  This  property  constitutes  a 
large  payment  which  the  Japanese  have  already 
made  toward  satisfaction  of  their  reparations  ob- 
ligations. Unfortunately,  from  the  standpoint  of 
equity,  some  countries  have  benefited  more  than 
others  in  the  reparations  that  they  have  obtained 
in  this  form.  However,  from  the  standpoint  of 
Japan,  the  loss  of  these  properties,  whatever  the 
proportions  in  which  they  happen  to  have  been 
distributed,  drastically  reduces  Japan's  ability  to 
support  even  at  a  minimum  level  the  needs  of 
its  people. 

In  view  of  the  above  considerations,  the  United 
States  is  forced  to  the  following  conclusions : 

(a)  The  deficit  Japanese  economy  shows  little 
prospect  of  being  balanced  in  the  near  future  and, 
to  achieve  eventual  balance,  will  require  all  re- 
sources at  its  disposal. 

(i)  The  burden  of  removing  further  repara- 
tions from  Japan  could  detract  seriously  from  the 
occupation  objective  of  stabilizing  the  Japanese 
economy  and  permitting  it  to  move  toward  self- 
support. 

(c)  There  is  little  or  no  prospect  of  Far  Eastern 
Commission  agreement  on  a  reparations-shares 
schedule  despite  the  repeated  initiatives  by  the 
United  States  over  the  past  3  years  to  assist  the 
Commission  in  reaching  such  an  agreement. 
Without  agreement  on  a  shares  schedule  the  exist- 
ing Far  Eastern  Commission  policy  decisions  re- 
May  22,   1949 


garding  reparations  are  incapable  of  implementa- 
tion. 

(d)  Japan  has  already  paid  substantial  repar- 
ations through  expropriation  of  its  former  over- 
seas assets  and,  in  smaller  degree,  under  the  Ad- 
vance Transfer  Program. 

In  light  of  these  conclusions  the  United  States 
Government  is  impelled  to  rescind  its  interim  di- 
rective of  April  4,  1947,  bringing  to  an  end  the 
Advance  Transfer  Program  called  for  by  that 
directive.  It  is  impelled  also  to  withdraw  its 
proposal  of  November  6, 1947,  on  Japanese  repara- 
tions shares,  and  I  am  so  informing  the  Secretary- 
General.  Finally,  the  United  States  Government 
takes  this  occasion  to  announce  that  it  has  no  in- 
tention of  taking  further  unilateral  action  under 
its  interim  directive  powers  to  make  possible  addi- 
tional reparations  removals  from  Japan. 

I  earlier  stated  my  government's  belief  that 
maximum  efforts  should  be  exerted  by  the  Jap- 
anese themselves  for  their  economic  recovery.  It 
is  the  view  of  the  United  States  that  all  facilities, 
including  so-called  "primary  war  facilities,"  pres- 
ently designated  as  available  for  reparations 
which  can  contribute  to  Japanese  recovery  should 
be  utilized  as  necessary  in  Japan's  peaceful  econ- 
omy for  recovery  purposes. 

With  regard  to  "primary  war  facilities,"  all  of 
which,  as  I  earlier  stated,  were  some  time  ago 
stripped  of  their  special  purpose  equipment  and 
thus  of  their  "war  facilities"  characteristics,  it  is 
the  view  of  the  United  States  that  SCAP,  under 
the  authority  granted  in  paragraph  10  of  the  FEC 
decision  on  Reduction  of  Japanese  Industrial  War 
Potential,  should  as  rapidly  as  practicable  I'equire 
the  dismantlement,  dispersion,  or  other  action  for 
the  utilization  in  Japan's  peaceful  economy  of  such 
of  these  facilities  as  are  required  to  meet  the  needs 
of  the  occupation,  which  needs  prominently  in- 
clude economic  recovery.  Remaining  "primary 
war  facilities"  should  continue  to  be  protected,  in 
the  sense  of  preventing  loss  or  scrapping  of  indi- 
vidual items,  pursuant  to  the  above-mentioned 
FEC  decision  requiring  their  "impounding."  Im- 
pounding does  not,  however,  include  the  require- 
ment that  the  facilities  be  kept  in  their  present 
locations  or  that  the  Japanese  devote  resources  to 
preserve  their  value  or  maintain  them  in  work- 
ing order. 

The  United  States,  it  will  be  recalled,  has  re- 
peatedly clarified  its  understanding  that  the  "level 
of  industry"  proposals  before  the  Commission,  ex- 
cepting those  levels  which  will  lapse  by  FEC  de- 
cision on  October  1,  1949,  had  application  only  to 
the  question  of  the  quantities  of  industrial  fa- 
cilities which  could  be  spared  for  reparations,  and 
had  no  bearing  on  the  matter  of  future  levels  of 
industrial  capacity  in  Japan.  Turning  now  to 
this  latter  question,  I  have  already  emphasized 
my  government's  support  of  the  principle  that 
Japan's  capacity  to  make  war  should  not  be  per- 
mitted to  reemerge.     It  is  the  considered  view  of 


the  United  States  Government  that  this  objective 
does  not  i-equire  that  Japan's  production  for  peace- 
ful purposes  be  limited  or  that  limitations  be  im- 
posed on  levels  of  Japanese  productive  capacity 
in  industries  devoted  to  peaceful  purposes.  This 
belief,  coupled  with  the  evidence  of  Japan's  pres- 
ent economic  plight  and  the  difficult  problems 
Japan  will  face  in  future  in  attaining  levels  of 
industrial  production  and  foreign  trade  sufficient 
to  support  its  people  even  at  minimum  levels, 
render  it  clearly  advisable  in  my  government's 
view  that  Japan  be  permitted  to  develop  its  peace- 
ful industries  without  limitation.  The  problem 
facing  us  is  not  one  of  limitation  of  Japan's  peace- 


ful industries  but  of  reviving  these  industries  to 
provide  the  people's  barest  wants. 

The  United  States  Government  plans  shortly  to 
submit  to  the  FEC  for  its  consideration  proposals 
for  the  rescission  or  amendment  of  existing  and 
pending  FEC  reparations  and  level-of-industry 
policy  papers  so  as  to  bring  FEC  policies  on  these 
matters,  should  the  proposals  be  approved  by  the 
Commission,  into  conformity  with  the  position 
which  I  have  set  forth.  My  government  earnestly 
hopes  that  the  other  member  governments  will  ap- 
preciate the  considerations  underlying  this  posi- 
tion and  will  be  able  to  concur  in  the  new  United 
States  proposals. 


Agrarian  Reform  in  Japan  ^ 


1.  In  the  view  of  the  Far  Eastern  Commission 
an  equitable  and  sound  agrarian  reform  program 
is  an  important  factor  favoring  the  democratiza- 
tion of  Japan. 

2.  The  Far  Eastern  Commission  approves  the 
basic  principles  underlying  the  following  steps 
which  have  been  taken  since  the  surrender  with  a 
view  to  securing  a  thoroughgoing  reform  of  the 
Japanese  agricultural  system : 

a.  the  directives  issued  to  the  Japanese  Govern- 
ment by  the  Supreme  Commander  for  the  Allied 
Powers,  in  particular  that  of  9th  December,  1945, 

6.  the  Agricultural  Land  Adjustment  Law  of 
1938,  as  amended  by  the  Japanese  Government  in 
1945, 1946  and  1947,  which,  together  with  the  Ordi- 
nance relative  thereto  dated  25th  January,  1946, 
contained  provisions  designed  to  bring  to  an  end 
the  system  of  rents  payable  in  kind  and  to  prevent 
the  exaction  of  exorbitant  rents, 

c.  tha  Land  Keform  Law  (known  also  as  the 
"Law  Concerning  the  Special  Measure  for  the 
Establishment  of  Owner  Farmers"),  enacted  on 
19th  October,  1946,  designed  to  bring  about  a  large 
scale  transfer  of  the  ownership  of  land  from  the 
landlord  class  to  the  tenantry  and  thereby  to  create 
a  numerous  class  of  independent  owner-farmers, 

d.  the  creation  of  a  network  of  Agricultural 
Land  Commissions  covering  the  whole  country  to 
administer  the  reforms  referred  to  above, 

e.  the  partial  execution  of  the  land  transfer  pro- 
gram as  witnessed  by  the  latest  returns  of  the  Jap- 
anese Ministry  of  Agriculture  and  Forestry, 

/.  the   Agricultural   Co-operative   Association 


'  Policy  decision  approved  by  the  Far  Eastern  Commis- 
sion Apr.  28,  1949,  and  released  to  the  press  on  May  6, 
1949;  a  directive  based  upon  this  decision  has  been  for- 
warded to  the  Supreme  Commander  for  the  Allied  Powers 
for  implementation. 

'Documents  and  State  Papers  for  January  1949,  p.  C21. 


Law  enacted  on  7th  November,  1947,  which  facili- 
tated the  provision  of  credits  to  operating  farm- 
ers and  the  extension  of  education  in  farming 
techniques. 

3.  The  Far  Eastern  Commission  now  decides  as 
a  matter  of  policy  as  follows : 

a.  the  proper  objectives  of  the  reform  should  be 
to  improve  the  economic  status  of  all  tenant  farm- 
ers and  as  far  as  practicable  to  create  a  more  nu- 
merous class  of  independent  owner-farmers  than 
has  previously  existed, 

b.  to  these  ends,  the  basic  principles  underlying 
the  measures  set  forth  in  paragraph  2  above, 
should  continue  to  be  applied. 

[Released  to  the  presa  by  FEC  May  6] 

The  Far  Eastern  Commission  at  its  151st  meet- 
ing on  28  April  1949  approved  a  policy  decision 
endorsing  the  basic  principles  underlying  the  land- 
reform  program  now  being  carried  out  in  Japan 
by  the  Japanese  Government  under  the  guidance 
of  General  MacArthur,  Supreme  Commander  for 
the  Allied  Powers  (SCAP). 

The  action  by  the  11-nation  body  which  is 
charged  with  formulating  the  policies,  principles, 
and  standards  for  the  occupation  of  Japan,  marked 
its  sixtieth  policy  decision  in  its  over  three  years 
of  continuous  session  in  Washington.  It  also 
supplemented  an  earlier  policy  decision  of  the 
Commission,  "Principles  for  Japanese  Farmers' 
Organization"  of  9  December  1948  -,  which  speci- 
fied that  farmers'  cooperatives  and  farmers'  unions 
were  to  be  encouraged. 

A  program  of  agrarian  reform  was  instituted  in 
Japan  by  SCAP  soon  after  the  beginning  of  the 
occupation.  Acting  by  virtue  of  his  authoritj' 
as  Supreme  Commander  and  under  the  terms  of 


670 


Department  of  State  Rulletin 


the  orifcinal  Presidential  Policy  Statement  of  22 
September  1945  (and  later  under  the  terms  of  the 
Far  Eastern  Commission's  Basic  Post-Siu'render 
Policy  of  19  June  1947)  General  Mac  Arthur  issued 
directives  to  the  Japanese  Government  ordering  it 
to  take  immediate  steps  "to  insure  that  those  who 
till  the  soil  of  Japan  shall  have  a  more  equal 
opportunity  to  enjoy  the  fruits  of  their  labor" 
(SCAP  directive  of  9  December  1945) . 

The  three  major  goals  of  the  Japanese  land  re- 
form program,  as  evidenced  by  the  measures  listed 
in  the  new  FEC  policy  decision,  have  been:  (1) 
the  elimination  of  the  system  of  rents  payable  in 
kind  and  the  exaction  of  exorbitant  rents;  (2)  the 
large-scale  transfer  of  the  ownership  of  land  from 
the  landlord  class  to  the  tenantry  and  the  creation 
thereby  of  a  numerous  class  of  independent  owner- 
farmers;  (3)  the  facilitation  of  credit  extension 
and  education  in  agricultural  techniques  to  oper- 
ating farmers. 

Legislation  and  administrative  action  to  carry 
out  each  of  these  goals  has  been  undertaken  by 
the  Japanese  Government  during  the  past  three 
years.  As  a  result,  over  5  million  acres  of  farm 
land  have  been  purchased  by  the  Japanese  Gov- 
ernment from  landlords  and  resold  to  tenants  at 
reasonable  prices.  For  the  remaining  approxi- 
mately 10  percent  of  the  land  still  tilled  by  tenants, 
rent  ceilings  have  been  established  and  written 
contracts  giving  the  tenant  greater  security  are 
required.  Close  to  30,000  agricultural  coopera- 
tive associations  and  10,000  agricultural  mutual 
relief  associations  have  also  been  formed. 


Prime  Minister  of  India  To  Visit  United  States 

[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  May  12] 

About  a  year  ago  the  President  sent  to  the  Prime 
Minister  of  India,  Pandit  Nehru,  an  invitation 
to  visit  the  United  States  at  some  time  which 
would  be  mutually  convenient.  The  Prime  Min- 
ister was  not  able,  however,  to  make  the  visit  last 
year  because  of  the  pressure  of  official  duties  in 
India.  Recently  the  President  renewed  his  invi- 
tation through  the  American  Embassy  in  New 
Delhi,  suggesting  October  as  an  agreeable  time. 

The  Prime  Minister  has  authorized  the  Ameri- 
can Ambassador  to  India  to  report  that  he  gladly 
accepted  the  invitation  and  looked  forward  to  visit- 
ing America  at  the  time  suggested.  He,  of  course, 
pointed  out  that  it  was  impossible  to  make  definite 
plans  so  far  in  advance,  but  said  that,  unless  un- 
foreseen developments  occurred,  he  had  every  hope 
of  fulfilling  the  engagement.  This  will  be  Mr. 
Nehru's  first  visit  to  the  United  States. 


PUBLICATIONS 
Department  of  State 

For  sale  6?/  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  Oovem- 
ment  Printing  Office,  Washington  25,  D.C.  Address  re- 
quests direct  to  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  except 
in  the  case  of  free  publications,  which  may  be  obtained 
from  the  Department  of  State. 

Fisheries    Mission.     Treaties   and   Other    International 

Acts  Series  1869.     Pub.  3423.     3  pp.     5^. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Mexico  fur- 
ther extending  the  agreement  effected  by  exchanges 
of  communications  dated  Apr.  17,  May  22,  July  22  and 
27,  and  Oct.  24,  1942 — Effected  by  exchange  of  notes 
signed  at  Washington  Sept.  15  and  Oct.  6,  1048;  en- 
tered into  force  Oct.  6,  1948. 

Ferrous  Scrap:  Allocations  for  Export.  Treaties  and 
Other  International  Acts  Series  1874.  Pub.  3431.  8  pp. 
100. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  the  United 
Kingdom  of  Great  Britain  and  Northern  Ireland — 
Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Washington 
Sept.  30,  1948 ;  entered  into  force  Sept.  30,  1948. 

Sixtlt  Report  to  Congress  on  Assistance  to  Greece  and 
Turliey,  For  the  Period  Ended  December  31,  1948.  Eco- 
nomic Cooperation  Series  17.     Pub.     3467.     41  pp.     200. 

The  President's  quarterly  report  on  military  aid  to 
Greece  and  Turkey.  Tables  showing  status  of  ap- 
propriation are  included. 

United  States  Advisory  Commission  on  Information, 
Semiannual  Report  to  the  Congress,  March  1949.  Inter- 
national Information  and  Cultural  Series  5.  Pub.  3485a. 
127  pp.     650. 

The  Commission's  first  semiannual  report  including 
status  of  the  information  program,  effectiveness  of 
the  program,  recommendations  to  the  Secretary  of 
State,  etc. 

The  World  Audience  for  America's  Story.  International 
Information  and  Cultural  Series  5.  Pub.  3485.  127  pp. 
Limited  distribution. 

This  publication  is  based  on  the  first  semiannual  re- 
port on  international  information  activities  of  the 
U.S.  Advisory  Commission  on  Information  to 
Congress. 

Progress  in  European  Recovery  and  the  Road  Ahead. 

Foreign  Affairs  Outlines,  Building  the  Peace,  No.  20. 
Economic  Cooperation  Series  16.     Pub.  3466.     6  pp.     Free. 

America's  Role  in  Economic  Development  Abroad.  Eco- 
nomic Cooperation  Series  18.     Pub.  3488.     6  pp.     50. 

Article  by  Wilfred  Malenbaum  based  on  an  address 
delivered  in  Los  Angeles  on  Mar.  7,  1949. 

The  Meaning  of  the  North  Atlantic  Pact.  General  For- 
eign Policy  Series  9.     Pub.  3489.     5  pp.     5(if. 

Radio  address  by  Secretary  Acheson  Mar.  18,  1949. 

Diplomatic  List,  April  1949.  Pub.  3491.  155  pp.  300  a 
copy ;  $3.25  a  year  domestic,  $4.50  a  year  foreign. 

Monthly  list  of  foreign  diplomatic  representatives  in 
Washington,  with  their  addresses. 


May  22,   1949 


The  United  Nations  and  Paga 

Specialized  Agencies 

Progress  in  the  Economic  Commission  for  F^u- 

rope.     Statement  by  W.  Averoll  Harriman.    651 
The  Spanish  Question.     Resolution  Adopted  by 

Committee  I 653 

The    Netherlands   and    Republic   of   Indonesia 
Reach  Agreement: 
Letter  From  Netherlands  Representative  to 

President  of  Security  Council 653 

Approval  of  U.S.  Government 654 

U.S.  Supports  Israeli's  Application  for  Member- 
ship   in    U.N.    Statement    by    Warren    R. 

Austin 655 

U.N.  Documents:  A  Selected  Bibliography     .    .    656 
The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations  .    .    .    657 
U.S.  Delegations  to  International  Conferences: 
Telephone    and    Telegraph    Conference    and 

Telecommunication  Conference 658 

Administrative  Radio  Conferences     ....    659 

General  Policy 

The  U.S.  Military  Assistance  Program.   Foreign 

Affairs  Outlines 643 

Probable  Impact  of  Military  Assistance  Pro- 
gram on  Steel,  Copper,  and  Aluminum  .    .    650 

U.S.   Spanish   Policy.     Remarks   by   Secretary 

Achoson 660 

Clarification  of  Certain  Misapprehensions  Con- 
cerning Attitude  of  ECE  Economic  Survey 
of  Europe  Toward  Recovery  Program: 


General  Policy — Continued  page 

Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson 662 

Summary  of  the  Survey 663 

Need  for  Closer  Unity  Among  Free  Nations  of 

Europe.    Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson  .    664 

Anniversary  of  Liberation  of  Czechoslovakia. 
Correspondence  Between  SHAEF  and 
Soviet  High  Command  of  1945  Made 
Public 665 

Prime  Minister  of  India  To  Visit  United  States.    671 

Occupation  Matters 

Bonn  Council  Approves  Draft  German  Con- 
stitution.   Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson  661 

Lifting  of  the  Berlin  Blockade.     Remarks  by 

Secretary  Acheson 662 

Japane.5e   Reparations  and  Level  of  Industry. 

Statement  by  Maj.  Gen.  Frank  R.  McCoy .    667 

Agrarian  Reform  in  Japan 670 

Economic  Affairs 

Liquidation  of  German  Assets  in  Switzerland. 

Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson     ....    659 

International  Information  and 
Cultural  Affairs 

American    Theatrical    Company    To    Present 

"Hamlet"  in  Denmark 664 

Publications 

Department  of  State 671 


iJne/  ^eha/y^Cmen^  ^ utate/ 


A  PERSPECTIVE  ON  PROBLEMS  FACING 
THE  COUNCIL  OF  FOREIGN  MIN- 
ISTERS •  Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson   .    .      675 

GENERAL  ASSEMBLY  ADOPTS  DRAFT 
CONVENTION  ON  INTERNATIONAL 
TRANSMISSION  OF  NEWS: 

Statement  by  Erwin  D.  Canham 678 

Resolutions  Adopted  by  General  Assembly  .     682 

Text  of  Draft  Convention 682 

VISIT  OF  PRESIDENT  DUTRA  OF  BRAZIL: 

Welcoming   Remarks   by    President 
Truman 694 

Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson 694 


For  compile  contents  see  back  cover 


Vol.  XX,  No.  517 
May  29,  1949 


tjAe  z/Jefia/y^me^  /o£ Cnale    Vj  W  1 1  Kj  L 1 11 


Vou  XX,  No.  517    •    PcBUCATioN  3519 
May  29,  1949 


For  sale  by  the  Bnperlntendent  of  Docnment* 

U.S.  QoTemment  PrlntiDK  Office 

Washington  26,  D.O. 

Prick: 

bi  Issues,  domestic  $£,  foreign  $7.26 

Single  copy,  16  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  ( J"ebruaryl8, 1949). 

Note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  items  contained  herein  may 
bo  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Dipabtuent 
or  State  Bullitim  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BULLETIN, 
a  weekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publico  tions. 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  tcith  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  work  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  include* 
press  releases  on  foreign  policy  issued 
by  the  White  House  and  the  Depart- 
ment, and  statements  and  addresses 
made  by  the  President  and  by  the 
Secretary  of  State  and  other  officer* 
of  the  Department,  as  well  as  special 
articles  on  various  phases  of  inter- 
national affairs  and  the  function*  of 
the  Department.  Information  is  in- 
cluded concerning  treaties  and  in- 
tertuitional  agreements  to  which  the 
United  States  is  or  may  become  a 
party  and  treaties  of  general  inter- 
national interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
well  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


A  Perspective  on  the  Problems  Facing  tiie  Council  of  Foreign  Ministers 

STATEMENT  BY  SECRETARY  ACHESON  > 


I  leave  the  United  States  tomorrow  [May  20J 
for  Paris  to  participate  in  another  meeting  of  the 
Council  of  Foreign  Ministers  on  the  problem  of 
Germany. 

I  refer  to  another  meeting  because,  as  you  know, 
my  predecessor,  General  Marshall,  journeyed  to 
Moscow  in  the  spring  of  1947  and  to  London  in 
the  autumn  of  the  same  year  to  deal  with  the 
same  problem  in  the  same  body.  You  all  know 
that  these  two  previous  attempts  to  reach  a  work- 
able agreement  with  the  Soviet  Union  on  the 
problem  of  Germany  ended  in  deadlock  and 
failure. 

On  the  eve  of  these  negotiations,  it  is,  I  think, 
of  the  utmost  importance  that  the  people  of  the 
United  States  understand  and  keep  in  perspective 
the  circumstances  under  which  this  meeting  is 
taking  place. 

The  agreement  reached  with  the  Soviet  Gov- 
ernment on  May  4th,  which  has  brought  about 
the  lifting  of  the  Berlin  blockade  and  restora- 
tion of  normal  communications  with  that  city  and 
between  the  zones  of  occupation  in  Germany,  has 
made  possible  this  meeting.  It  has  been  the  ob- 
stacle of  the  Berlin  blockade  which  for  the  past 
10  months  has  stood  in  the  way  of  any  four-power 
consideration  of  the  German  problem  as  a  whole. 

The  three  Western  Powers  have  repeatedly  made 
clear  their  willingness  to  sit  down  with  the  repre- 
sentatives of  the  Soviet  Union  for  a  discussion  of 
German  problems  just  as  soon  as  the  blockade  was 
removed.  We  had,  since  the  establishment  of  the 
blockade  in  June  of  last  year,  made  repeated  at- 
tempts, by  direct  negotiation  and  through  the 
United  Nations,  to  bring  this  dangerous  and,  in 
our  view,  illegal  situation  to  an  end. 

AVhile  we  were  not  willing  to  negotiate  under 
pressure  of  the  blockade,  we  were  nonetheless  con- 
stantly on  the  alert  for  any  indication  which 
might  bring  about  the  adjustment  of  this  situa- 
tion without  impairment  of  our  rights  and  obliga- 
tions as  an  occupying  power.  As  a  result  of  the 
informal  exchanges  which  occurred  in  New  York, 
it  has  been  possible  to  do  just  that. 

We  welcome  this  agreement.  It  is  important, 
however,  to  realize  that,  in  itself,  this  agreement 
merely  restores  a  situation  which  existed  a  year 
ago  and  thereby  removes  an  obstacle  which  for 

May  29,   J 949 


10  months  has  stood  in  the  path  of  further  nego- 
tiations on  Germany.  It  is  not,  in  itself,  a  solu- 
tion or  even  the  beginning  of  a  solution  of  the 
vital  and  difficult  problem  of  the  future  of  Ger- 
many. We  do  not  know  yet  whether  this  wel- 
come development  can  be  regarded  as  an  encour- 
aging omen  for  the  forthcoming  talks  until  we 
have  come  to  grips  with  the  realities  of  the  Ger- 
man situation. 

In  his  report  to  the  nation  following  the  break- 
down of  the  Council  of  Foreign  Ministers  on  Ger- 
many in  December  1947,  General  Marshall  stated 
that  (in  regard  to  a  peace  settlement)  : 

"The  issue  is  really  clear-cut,  and  I  fear  there 
can  be  no  settlement  until  the  coming  months 
demonstrate  whether  or  not  the  civilization  of 
western  Europe  will  prove  vigorous  enough  to  rise 
above  the  destructive  effects  of  the  war  and  restore 
a  healthy  society.  Officials  of  the  Soviet  Union 
and  leaders  of  the  Communist  Parties  openly  pre- 
dict that  this  restoration  will  not  take  place.  We, 
on  the  other  hand  are  confident  in  the  rehabilita- 
tion of  western  European  civilization  with  its 
freedoms." 

Much  has  happened  in  the  world  since  the  last 
meeting  of  the  Council  of  Foreign  Ministers  on 
this  subject.  The  United  States  Government  and 
the  democracies  of  western  Europe  have  under- 
taken a  series  of  steps,  the  most  important  of 
which  have  been  the  European  Recovery  Program 
and  the  North  Atlantic  pact,  which  have  already 
contributed  to  a  great  change  for  tlie  better  in 
the  situation  in  western  Europe.  Real  progress 
has  been  made  in  the  direction  of  recovery  and 
the  resumption  of  conditions  of  stability  and 
health  throughout  this  community.  Progress  has 
likewise  been  made,  both  economic  and  political, 
in  the  parts  of  Germany  which  have  been  the 
responsibility  of  the  three  Western  Powers.  The 
confidence  voiced  by  General  Marshall  in  regard  to 
the  vitality  of  the  free  countries  of  western  Europe 
has  been  fully  justified.  These  countries,  with  our 
assistance,  have  demonstrated  their  ability  to  re- 
habilitate western  European  civilization  with  its 
freedoms  intact.    It  is  not  our  intention,  no  matter 


'  Made  on  May  19,  1949,  following  the  Secretary's  meet- 
ing with  the  Senate  Foreign  Relations  Committee  and 
released  to  the  press  on  the  same  day. 


II.  «,  SUPERINTENDtNT  UI-'  lATbUMtKIt 


how  much  we  may  desire  agreement,  to  accept  any- 
tliing  which  would  tend  to  undo  what  has  been 
accomplished  or  impede  future  progress  along 
the  course  we  have  charted  toward  the  revival  of 
health  and  strength  for  the  free  nations  of  the 
world. 

The  people  of  the  United  States  have  already 
demonstrated  that  they  can  act  with  firmness  and 
determination  in  the  face  of  situations  which 
looked  disheartening  and  even  almost  hopeless.  If 
there  is  more  hope  in  the  air  today,  it  is  in  no 
small  measure  due,  I  believe,  to  the  vigorous  and 
courageous  manner  in  whicli  the  people  of  this 
country  have  reacted  in  these  circumstances. 

We  must  not  forget  the  lesson  that  recent  history 
has  taught  us.  It  would  be  tragic,  indeed,  if  the 
first  signs  of  success  of  the  vast  efforts  made  in 
the  past  should  be  so  misinterpreted  as  to  lead 
us  to  slackening  our  efforts  prematurely.  We  must, 
and  I  am  confident  that  we  will,  demonstrate  that 
we  have  the  same  calmness,  the  same  resolution 
of  purpose  in  successful  achievement  as  we  did  in 
more  adverse  circumstances. 

There  is  perhaps  nothing  more  important  in  the 
world  today  than  the  steadiness  and  consistency 
of  the  foreign  policy  of  this  Republic.  Too  much 
depends  on  the  United  States  for  us  to  indulge 
in  the  luxury  of  either  undue  pessimism  or  prema- 
ture optimism.  Our  foreign  policy  has  been  and 
must  continue  to  be  guided  by  the  fundamental  in- 
terests of  the  United  States  in  our  quest  for  a  world 
of  peace  and  security.  We  cannot  allow  it  to  be- 
come subject  to  the  fluctuations  produced  by  a 
raising  and  lowering  of  the  international  tempera- 
ture. To  accept  these  fluctuations  as  a  guide  for 
our  policy  would  be  to  put  in  foreign  hands  a  large 


measure  of  control  over  the  conduct  of  our  foreign 
relations. 

We  shall  neglect  no  real  opportunity  for  increas- 
ing the  area  of  solution  and  tranquillity  in  the 
world.  At  the  same  time,  we  shall  not  barter  away 
successes  achieved  for  the  sake  of  promises  which 
might  again  prove  to  be  illusory,  as  they  too  often 
have  in  the  past. 

It  remains  to  be  seen  whether  the  present  favor- 
able developments  have  brought  about  a  situation 
in  which  workable  and  effective  agreements  can  be 
reached  with  the  Soviet  Union  on  the  central  prob- 
lem of  Germany.  I  think  perhaps  we  have  a  bet- 
ter opportunity  to  do  so  than  we  have  had  before. 
We  most  certainly  are  now  in  a  better  position  to 
deal  with  the  consequences  of  a  failure. 

I  cannot,  therefore,  honestly  state  whether  or 
not  this  new  attempt  will  end  in  success.  No  one 
can  tell.  The  answer  will  have  to  await  the  meet- 
ing of  the  Council  of  Foreign  Ministers  itself.  I 
can  only  say  that,  as  in  the  past,  the  United  States 
representatives  will  approach  this  meeting  with 
an  open  mind  and  with  an  honest  intention  to  ex- 
plore all  possibilities  to  arrive  at  a  lasting  solution 
of  the  problem  of  Germany.  I  have  already  out- 
lined in  an  address  before  the  Society  of  News- 
paper Editors  the  main  considerations  which  have 
guided  us  and  will  continue  to  guide  our  policy  in 
regard  to  Germany.^ 

I  have  just  met  with  the  members  of  the  Foreign 
Relations  Committee  in  executive  session.  We  dis- 
cussed our  policies  and  plans  in  regard  to  the 
coming  meeting,  and  I  asked  their  advice  on  the 
many  problems  respecting  Germany  for  which  we 
hope  to  arrive  at  solutions  in  Paris. 


Current  United  Nations  Documents:  A  Selected  Bibliograpliy' 


Security  Council 

Official  Records,  Second  Tear 
198th  and  199th  Meetings.    28  August  1947.    No.  86. 

35  pp.  printed.     35#. 
202iid  Meeting.    15  September  1947.    No.  89.    38  pp. 

printed.     40^. 
206th  Meeting.     1  October  1947.     No.  92.     29  pp. 

printed.     30#. 
208th  Meeting.     7  October  1947.     No.  94.     18  pp. 

printed.     20f 

'  Bulletin  of  May  8,  1949,  p.  585. 

'  Printed  materials  may  be  secured  in  the  United  States 
from  the  International  Documents  Service,  Columbia 
University  Press,  2960  Broadway,  New  York  27,  N.  Y. 
Other  materials  (mimeograiihed  or  processed  documents) 
may  be  consulted  at  certain  designated  libraries  In  the 
United  States. 


215th  Meeting.     29  October  1947.     No.  101.     24  pp. 

printed.     25^.  ,       ,„,^     ^, 
218th  and  219th  Meetings.    1  November  1947.    No. 

103^    30  pp.     printed.     30«(. 
223rd  and  224th  Meetings.     IS  and  19  December 

1947.     No.  107.     29  pp.  printed.     30(f. 
225th  Meeting.     30  December  1947.     No.  108.     15 

pp.     printed.     15^ 
Official  Records,  Third  Year 
3&4th  and  395th  Meetings.    28  December  1948.    No.  136. 

83  pp.     printed.     H0<*. 
Official  Records,  Fourth  Year 

403d  Meeting.     25  January  1949.     No.  7.     29  pp.     30<!. 

Atomic  Energy  Commission 

Official  Records,  Fourth  Year 

17th  Meeting.    18  February  1949.     No.  1.    10  pp.  printed. 

10(f. 
18th  Meeting.    25  February  1949.    No.  2.    14  pp.  printed. 

15(f. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


J 


UNITED  NATIONS  AND  SPECIALIZED  AGENCIES 


Despite  Our  Differences,  We  Are  Still  the  United  Nations  " 


STATEMENT  BY  AMBASSADOR  AUSTIN  AT  CLOSE  OF  THIRD  SESSION  OF 
THE  GENERAL  ASSEMBLY 


[Released  to  the  press  by  the  U.  S.  Mission  to  the 
United  Nations  May  18] 

Mr.  President:  Before  your  gavel  sounds  to 
close  this  final  meeting  of  the  third  session  of  the 
General  Assembly,  I  should  like  to  take  a  moment 
to  express  a  few  thoughts,  which  I  believe  are 
widely  shared  by  our  fellow-delegates. 

Mr.  President,  the  record  of  this  session  is  illu- 
minated by  the  leadership  and  vigor  with  which 
you  have  guided  the  work  of  this  session  of  the 
Assembly.  You  have  done  honor  to  the  high  office 
of  the  presidency  of  the  General  Assembly  of  the 
United  Nations;  it  is  today  perhaps  the  foremost 
position  of  responsibility  in  the  field  of  world 
statesmanship.  You  have  discharged  that  i-espon- 
sibility  ably  and  well.  Your  faith  in  the  United 
Nations  has  been  a  strong  force  in  the  delibera- 
tions of  this  body,  inspiring  us  and  reminding  us 
of  our  awesome  obligations  to  the  people  of  the 
world.  For  these  qualities  and  contributions,  Mr. 
President,  I  want  to  express  our  sincere  thanks. 

It  is  also  appropriate  at  this  time  to  convey  our 
appreciation  to  Secretary-General  Trygve  Lie  and 
his  able  and  conscientous  staff  of  international 
civil  servants  for  their  contribution  to  our  work. 
We  are  all  familiar  with  the  able  support  which 
the  Secretary-General  and  the  Secretary  of  this 
Assembly,  Mr.  Cordier,  have  furnished  our  ple- 
nary meetings.  Our  committee  meetings  have 
been  assisted  by  an  outstanding  staff  of  committee 
secretaries  and  assistants  for  whose  constant  serv- 
ice we  are  grateful. 

For  the  faithful  service  of  our  interpreters, 
whose  skill  in  the  swift  translation  of  our  speeches 
is  a  never-ending  marvel  to  the  public  and  to  us 
delegates  as  well,  we  also  feel  a  keen  appreciation. 

And  we  are  aware,  Mr.  President,  that  in  addi- 
tion to  the  Secretariat  staff  whom  we  see  at  our 
tables  and  in  the  committee  rooms,  there  is  a  large 
staff  which  labors  faithfully  and  well  on  such  tasks 
as  translating,  editing,  typing,  and  reproducing 
the  thousands  of  pages  of  our  documentation ;  and 
all  the  other  essential,  behind-the-scenes  functions 


which  we  have  come  almost  to  take  for  granted,  so 
competently  are  they  performed.  To  all  these 
men  and  women  who  labor  with  such  energy  and 
faithfulness  as  fellow-servants  of  this  great  world 
organization  of  ours,  we  say :  "Thank  you." 

Finally,  Mr.  President,  to  you  and  to  my  fellow- 
delegates,  who  have  been  so  tolerant,  patient, 
longsuffering  and  amiable,  I  should  like  to  say  this : 
we  have  had  a  hard-fought  session ;  we  have  been 
through  some  very  difficult  issues,  and  there  have 
been  expressed  from  this  platform  some  sharp 
disagreements  among  us.  Now,  that's  all  right; 
that's  the  purpose  of  this  organization — to  bring 
us  together  so  we  can  work  out  our  differences. 
We've  seen  the  United  Nations  tackle  even  the 
tough  problems  of  the  peace  settlements  and  bring 
to  bear  the  conflicting  views  of  59  independent  na- 
tions in  working  for  but  failing  yet  to  arrive  at 
constructive  solutions.  We  can  be  proud,  I  believe, 
of  the  accomplishments  of  this  third  session.  I 
place  very  high  on  our  list  of  accomplishments  the 
resolution  on  the  subject  of  voting  in  the  Security 
Council.  This  recommendation  for  the  use  of  re- 
straint and  self -discipline  as  a  step  in  the  gradual 
liberalization  of  voting  procedures  in  the  Security 
Council  will,  I  feel  strongly,  contribute  impor- 
tantly to  the  more  effective  functioning  of  the 
United  Nations. 

In  the  field  of  human  rights,  we  have  made  im- 
portant progress.  The  Human  Rights  Commis- 
sion is  sitting  today.  The  Universal  Declaration 
of  Human  Rights,  the  conventions  of  genocide  and 
on  the  freedoms  of  newsgathering  and  transmis- 
sion, and  the  other  human  rights  questions  which 
we  have  discussed — these  are  steps. 

The  future,  Mr.  President,  can  and  will  see  the 
service  of  the  United  Nations  to  the  cause  of  peace 
grow  in  scope  and  effectiveness ;  so  long  as  we  can 
rise  from  such  deliberations  as  these,  and  say: 
"Despite  our  differences,  we  are  still  the  United 
Nations." 

Thank  j'ou  again,  Mr.  President. 


May  29,   7949 


General  Assembly  Adopts  Draft  Convention  on  international 
Transmission  of  News  and  Right  of  Correction 


STATEMENT  BY  ERWIN  D.  CANHAM  > 
Alternate  U.S.  Delegate  to  the  General  Assembly 

The  United  Nations  General  Assembly  is  about 
to  undertake  an  unprecedented  step.  It  is  about 
to  write  into  international  law,  for  the  first  time, 
a  charter  of  liberties  for  the  gathering  and  the 
international  transmission  of  news.  It  is  also 
about  to  establish,  for  the  first  time,  an  interna- 
tional right  of  correction.  What  is  the  real  sig- 
nificance of  these  steps? 

First  let  us  reaffirm  some  basic  facts.  One  fact 
is  that  the  people  of  the  world  cannot  possibly 
solve  the  many  problems  that  confront  them  and 
their  institutions  unless  they  are  adequately 
informed. 

Another  fact  is  that  there  are  today  many  bar- 
riers to  the  adequate  interchange  of  information. 
Tliere  are  many  dark  corners  into  which  news- 
gatherers  caniiot  penetrate.  There  are  areas  in 
which  news  cannot  freely  circulate.  And — as 
some  delegations  have  pointed  out,  and  any  can- 
did journalist  will  admit — the  press  itself  is  far 
from  perfect  and  has  many  problems  of  its  own 
to  solve. 

Two  fundamentally  divergent  concepts  of  the 
role  of  the  press  in  the  modern  world  were  urged 
upon  the  Third  Committee,  as  they  were  urged 
upon  the  Geneva  conference  last  year.  One  of 
these  concepts  points  toward  freedom.  It  was 
based  on  the  recognition  of  the  right  of  free  speech 
and  of  a  free  press  which  is  embodied  in  the  con- 
stitutions and  in  the  practical  experience  of  all 
free  peoples.  The  other  concept  was  that  of  com- 
plete, arbitrary,  repressive,  totalitarian  control  of 
the  press,  along  with  all  other  aspects  of  modern 
society. 

These  proposals  of  totalitarian  press  control 
were  disguised,  as  usual,  in  most  beguiling  robes. 
We  were  told  that  news  must  be  "truthful" — and 
indeed  it  should  be.  We  were  told  that  news  that 
is  false  or  distorted  must  be  suppressed,  and  it 
should  be.  But  how?  And  who  is  to  say  which 
news  is  false  and  which  is  truthful?  The  pur- 
pose of  these  innocent-sounding  proposals  was 
chiefly  to  make  propaganda.  The  totalitai'ian  na- 
tions that  proposed  them  knew  full  well  that  free 
people  and  free  governments  would  never  accept 
them. 


'  Made  In  plenary  session  of  General  Assembly  on  May 
13,  1949,  and  released  to  the  press  by  the  U.S.  Mission  to 
the  United  Nations  on  the  same  date. 


The  purpose  of  these  proposals  is  to  smear  the 
free  press  everywhere  and  thus  to  persuade  free 
people  to  distrust  their  own  institutions.  The 
j)urpose  is  to  persuade  free  people  to  take  the 
first,  dangerous  steps  down  a  long,  slippery  slope 
that  would  lead  to  despotism  and  slavery — the  des- 
potism of  a  dogma  and  the  destruction  of  all  civil 
liberties. 

From  time  to  time  there  came  up  in  our  deliber- 
ation certain  intermediate  concepts  which,  while 
intended  to  correct  evils,  in  the  opinion  of  my 
delegation  would  actually  have  contributed  to  the 
greatest  evil  of  all,  the  control  by  repressive  power 
of  the  rights  of  free  people  to  be  freely  informed. 
We  do  not  suggest  that  any  of  these  intermediate 
proposals  were  advanced  with  such  an  end  in  view. 
But  their  ultimate  result,  now  or  in  the  future,  in 
our  view  would  have  been  to  destroy  freedom — 
and  we  do  not  speak  of  that  impossibility,  absolute 
freedom,  but  of  the  freedoms  of  responsible  men 
in  an  orderly  society.  A  little  later  I  shall  refer 
again  to  the  happy  and  successful  clarification  of 
these  proposals,  which  was  worked  out  and  which 
brought  the  Third  Committee  to  broad  agreement. 

The  basic  significance  of  the  decisions  reached 
in  the  Third  Committee,  and,  I  hope,  about  to  be 
affirmed  here,  is  that  a  vast  majority  of  the  United 
Nations  has  refused  to  take  even  the  first  step 
down  the  long  road  that  leads  to  totalitarianism 
and  the  police  state.  The  Assembly  is  here  reaf- 
firming its  belief  in  freedom.  It  is  here  rejecting 
the  most  dangerous  of  all  state  controls :  the  effort 
to  control  ideas.  On  the  contrary,  this  convention 
widens  the  channels  down  which  factual  infor- 
mation may  flow:  it  strengthens  the  interchange 
of  ideas.  And  by  contributing  this  to  a  better  in- 
formed world,  it  contributes  to  a  more  peaceful 
and  stable  world. 

The  convention  which  is  before  the  General  As- 
sembly for  adoption  is  simple,  precise,  concrete, 
and  wisely  limited  in  its  applications.  It  does  not 
guarantee  the  millenium  overnight.  But  it  is 
based  on  sound  principles.  It  is  a  good  beginning. 
It  sets  standards  which  will  enable  higher  goals 
to  be  reached  through  practical  experience  in  the 
future. 

Wliat  does  the  convention  actually  provide? 
First,  it  defines  "news  materials,"  "news  despatch," 
"information  agency,"  and  "correspondent"  in 
such  a  way  as  to  include  adequately  all  interna- 
tional transmission  and  operation  of  these  ele- 
ments. One  of  the  most  difficult  differences  of 
opinion  arose  over  the  definition  of  "correspond- 
ent."  This  difficulty,  in  the  view  of  my  delegation. 

Department  of  Sfafe  Bulletin 


springs  really  from  a  misunderstanding.  We  are 
convinced  that  after  governments  have  given  the 
matter  more  careful  legal  study,  their  difficulties 
on  this  score  will  diminish  and  disappear.  But 
some  delegations  have  felt  that  no  national  of  a 
contracting  state  should  be  defined  as  a  corre- 
spondent in  his  own  state,  even  though  he  is  en- 
gaged in  the  gathering  and  international  trans- 
mission of  news  for  an  information  agency  of 
another  contracting  state. 

Delegations  which  have  sought  to  remove  na- 
tionals from  the  operation  of  this  convention  in 
their  own  state  have  feared  it  might  set  up  a  spe- 
cial kind  of  citizenship,  a  discrimination  in  favor 
of  such  nationals,  which  would  enable  them  to 
flout  the  laws  of  their  country.  That  such  a  fear 
can  have  absolutely  no  basis  in  fact  is  abundantly 
proved  in  article  III  of  the  convention  which 
states  categorically  that — 

correspondents  and  information  agencies  must  conform  to 
the  laws  in  force  in  the  countries  in  which  they  are 
operating. 

Further,  in  article  XII,  the  convention  especially 
affirms  that — 

Nothing  in  the  present  Convention  shall  be  construed 
as  depriving  a  Contracting  State  of  its  right  to  make  and 
enforce  laws  and  public  regulations  for  the  protection 
of  national  security  and  public  order. 

I  would  point  out  that  in  the  amendment  we 
have  presented,  paragraph  8  of  article  XII  would 
read: 

Nothing  in  the  present  Convention  shall  oblige  a  Con- 
tracting State  to  consider  one  of  its  own  nationals  em- 
ployed by  a  foreign  Infoi-mation  agency  operating  in  its 
territory  as  a  correspondent,  except  when  he  is  func- 
tioning in  behalf  of  that  information  agency  and  then  only 
to  the  extent  required  to  enable  that  information  agency 
fully  to  enjoy  the  benefits  of  this  Convention ; 

Then  we  add  the  following  words : 

provided,  however,  that  no  provision  of  this  Convention 
shall  be  construed  as  entitling  another  Contracting  State 
to  intercede  on  behalf  of  such  national  with  his  govern- 
ment, as  distinguished  from  interceding  on  behalf  of  the 
information  agency  by  which  he  is  employed. 

This  provision  gives  a  government  absolute  pro- 
tection against  any  kind  of  special  treatment  of 
its  own  nationals.  No  foreign  government  could 
make  any  protest  to  another  government  on  be- 
half of  that  government's  own  nationals.  Any 
protection  accorded  by  this  convention  is  in  be- 
half of  the  information  agency.  It  does  not  set  up 
a  special  kind  of  citizenship,  and  it  does  not  sanc- 
tion discriminatory  treatment  of  any  kind.  It 
leaves  no  room  for  any  national  to  seek  the  pro- 
tection of  a  foreign  government,  and  it  permits  no 
information  agency  to  defy  the  laws  and  regula- 
tions of  the  state  where  it  operates. 

This  convention  positively  defines  and  estab- 
lishes certain  basic  rights  of  the  information 
agency  and  correspondent.  These  rights  are  noth- 
ing new.    They  reflect  practices  regarding  corre- 

May  29,   J 949 


spondents  and  news  material  already  observed  in 
more  democratic  countries. 

The  convention  requires  contracting  states  to 
expedite,  in  a  manner  consistent  with  their  re- 
spective laws  and  regulations,  the  administrative 
procedures  necessary  for  the  entry  into,  residence 
in,  travel  through  and  egress  from  their  respective 
territories  of  correspondents  of  other  contracting 
states.  It  provides  against  discriminatory  restric- 
tions on  such  correspondents.  It  protects  them 
against  expulsion  on  account  of  any  lawful  exex'- 
cise  of  their  right  to  collect  and  report  news  mate- 
rial. It  guarantees  access  to  news  and  the  admis- 
sion of  news  dispatches  on  a  nondiscriminatory 
basis. 

In  respect  to  censorship,  this  convention  makes 
a  notable  and  imprecedented  advance.  It  pro- 
vides— for  the  first  time  in  international  law,  I 
think — that  news  material  shall  leave  the  terri- 
tory of  contracting  states  without  censorship, 
editing,  or  delay,  provided  that  each  contracting 
state  may  make  and  enforce  regulations  relating 
directly  to  national  defense.  That  means  that  the 
only  possible  grounds  of  censorshi^j — and  we  hope 
there  will  be  no  censorship  at  all — must  be  related 
directly  to  national  defense.  The  only  existing 
international  law  on  the  subject,  in  the  telecom- 
munication conventions,  permits  much  more  wide- 
spread and  dangerous  censorship.  The  limitations 
on  censorship  set  up  by  the  convention  we  are  dis- 
cussing today  would,  of  course,  prevail  among  the 
contracting  states  which  sign  and  ratify  this  later 
convention. 

An  amendment  relating  to  censorship  has  been 
submitted  by  the  delegations  of  Chile  and  India — 
document  A/861.  We  very  much  hope  these  dis- 
tinguished delegations  will  not  press  their  amend- 
ment. If  they  do,  we  are  bound  to  point  out  its 
effects,  which  we  are  confident  these  delegations 
did  not  intend.  To  remove  paragraph  3  from 
article  XII,  as  this  amendment  proposes  to  do, 
and  place  it  in  article  VII  would  introduce  a  re- 
dundant absurdity  into  article  VII  and  remove  an 
indispensable  safeguard  from  article  XII.  Ar- 
ticle VII  is  the  original  censorship  article.  To 
introduce  this  language  there  is  totally  unneces- 
sary and  entirely  inappropriate.  But  without 
this  language  in  article  XII,  every  single  one  of 
the  clauses  in  that  article  might  be  made  a  basis 
for  censorship.  Article  XII  is  intended  to  give 
governments  needful  protection  for  their  internal 
domestic  order.  To  extend  it  so  that  it  becomes 
the  basis  for  censorship  on  outgoing  copy  would 
certainly  make  a  travesty  of  our  entire  convention. 
This  censorship  provision  was  inserted  into  article 
XII  by  substantial  majorities:  in  fact,  the  vote 
was  31  to  8,  and  we  cannot  believe  the  General 
Assembly  would  seek  to  overthrow  so  wise  and 
emphatic  a  decision. 

We  also  have  before  us  today  an  amendment  in- 
troduced by  the  Soviet  Union — an  amendment  to 
article  V.    This  amendment  is  typical  of  the  pro- 


posals  which  we  have  had  at  the  Geneva  confer- 
ence and  throughout  the  deliberations  of  the  Third 
Committee.  Its  last  sentence  introduces  this  kind 
of  language : 

"The  Contracting  States  shall  evolve  measures 
to  ensure  increasingly  wide  dissemination  of  genu- 
inely honest  and  objective  information." 

I  said  a  moment  ago  that  such  proposals  are 
invariably  cloaked  in  innocent-seeming  and  beguil- 
ing words.  These  words  that  I  have  just  quoted 
are  innocent-seeming  and  beguiling:  "dissemina- 
tion of  genuinely  honest  and  objective  informa- 
tion." I3ut  to  give  governments  the  power  to  in- 
sure that  information  be  "genuinely  honest  and 
objective"  would  in  fact  be  a  cloak  for  repres- 
sion. In  reality,  the  language  of  this  amendment 
would  autliorize  governnieiils  to  apply  any  kind  of 
restriction  they  cared  to  apply  to  the  dissemination 
of  news.  It  would  render  the  words  of  this  con- 
vention not  only  ironic,  but  jwsitively  dangerous. 
This  proposal  is  a  booby  trap  which  contains  a 
land  mine.  But  the  Third  Committee,  like  the 
Geneva  conference,  has  had  a  great  deal  of  experi- 
ence in  avoiding  this  very  trap,  time  after  time, 
and  I  am  confident  that  the  General  Assembly  will 
follow  in  that  path  of  wise  experience  around  such 
perilous  language. 

The  United  States  delegation  is  most  gratified 
that  the  provisions  on  the  international  right  of 
correction,  originally  propounded  by  the  (lelega- 
tion  of  France,  have  been  included  in  this  con- 
vention. Those  provisions  set  up  a  channel  by 
means  of  which  a  contracting  state  may  make  sure 
that  the  correction  of  a  dispatch  it  considers  false 
or  injurious  reaches  the  information  agency  in 
another  contracting  state  which  was  responsible 
for  such  a  dispatch. 

The  machinery  is  clear,  simple,  swift.  It  does 
not  provide  for  the  compulsory  publication  of 
such  corrections  because,  in  the  deep-rooted  con- 
viction of  many  countries,  such  compulsion  is  con- 
trary to  basic  freedoms.  The  real  difliculty,  of 
course,  lies  in  the  possibly  subjective  character  of 
correction.  When  is  a  correction  a  genuine  correc- 
tion, and  when  is  it  merely  the  propaganda  of  some 
national  regime?  The  difference  would  be  impos- 
sible to  guarantee.  Therefore,  this  convention 
does  not  introduce  the  element  of  compulsion,  but 
it  follows  what  is  already  the  well-established  pro- 
fessional practice  of  responsible  newspapers  and 
information  agencies.  As  a  matter  of  course,  they 
publish  or  transmit  well-founded  corrections,  but 
they  have  to  remain  the  ultimate  judges — short 
of  laws  of  libel  and  slander — of  what  constitutes 
a  valid  correction.  We  have  high  hopes  that  the 
correction  provisions  of  this  convention  will  pro- 
vide a  useful  channel  which,  above  all,  will  utilize 
the  sense  of  professional  responsibility  of  news- 
papermen themselves. 

I  have  said  that  this  convention  does  not  go 
beyond  the  existing  practices  in  more  democratic 


countries.  Of  course,  we  should  like  to  see  it  ex- 
tend the  light  into  the  censorship-darkened  areas 
of  the  world.  But  it  is  chimerical  to  hope  that,  in 
the  present  world  climate,  the  convention  would  be 
signed  and  ratified  by  such  nations  as  the  Soviet 
states.  The  representatives  of  these  nations  have 
voted  against  practically  every  provision  of  the 
convention  at  the  Geneva  conference  and  at  this 
session  of  the  General  Assembh*.  They  have  given 
us  abundant  warning  that  they  will  not  extend  its 
provisions  in  their  territories. 

Moreover,  they  have  contended  repeatedly  that 
the  convention  is  drafted  solely  in  the  interests  of 
what  they  call  the  monopolies  of  the  press.  It  is 
indeed  a  paradox  that  the  thousands  of  individual 
newspapers  in  the  United  States  and  the  vigor- 
ously competing  news  agencies  here,  as  well  as  in 
other  democratic  countries,  should  be  called  a  mo- 
nopoly, while  the  ab.solute  monopoly  rigorously 
enforced  by  the  state  over  all  means  of  news  gath- 
ering and  dissemination  in  Communist  countries 
should  be  described  as  free.  The  true  situation 
will  be  apparent  to  all,  for  all  free  men  and  many 
who  are  now  enslaved  know  very  well  that  the 
monopolies  of  the  totalitarian  states  are  rigid  and 
absolute.  The  press  in  the  free  countries  is  far 
from  perfect,  but  the  people  are  free  to  criticize  it 
and  the  press  is  free  to  criticize  itself  and  to  raise 
its  standards  under  the  healthy  lash  of  public  criti- 
cism. All  the  many  quotations  from  American 
criticisms  of  the  United  States  press  which  we 
have  heard  from  Soviet  spokesmen  in  the  past — 
and  perhaps  we  may  have  the  pleasure  of  hearing 
them  again  today — prove  one  thing:  they  prove 
the  glory  of  the  free  way — the  freedom  never  to  be 
satisfied  with  one's  own  standards,  the  freedom  to 
criticize  oneself,  the  freedom  to  grow  and  rise 
higher  and  higher  on  the  basis  of  the  clash  of  ideas 
and  the  interplay  of  diversity. 

There  is  another  fact,  finally,  that  I  want  to 
make  clear.  The  American  press  has  never  asked 
its  government  for  special  privileges,  and  the 
American  Government  does  not  ask  special  privi- 
leges for  the  press  in  this  convention.  There  is 
only  one  thing  the  press  asks  for,  and  only  one 
thing  that  the  American  Government  requests  in- 
ternationally on  behalf  of  the  press.  That  is  the 
right  to  report.  The  so-called  privileges  of  the 
press,  the  so-called  freedom  of  the  press,  are  not 
privileges  or  freedom  that  are  the  possession  of  the 
press.  Least  of  all  are  they  the  possession  of  the 
publisher.  These  are  rights  of  the  people.  They 
are  the  duty  the  press  owes  the  people.  It  is  the 
duty  of  the  press  to  report  the  news  of  the  world 
and  to  seek  to  explain  its  meaning  as  accurately, 
as  fearlessly,  and  as  objectively  as  is  possible  in  a 
world  of  imperfect  humanity. 

This  duty  of  reporting  the  facts  will  not  always 
please  everybody.  Least  of  all  will  it  please  all 
governments.  Sometimes  the  press  must  uncover 
and  expose.  Article  IX  of  this  convention  states 
that,  as  a  result  of  the  fulfillment  by  the  press  of 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


its  professional  responsibility  to  report  facts,  peace 
and  understanding  will  be  promoted.  That  is 
broadly  and  fundamentally  true,  but  sometimes 
there  are  unavoidable  intermediate  stages.  In  1939 
and  earlier,  it  was  indeed  the  professional  respon- 
sibility of  newspapermen  in  Berlin  to  report  the 
facts.  Those  facts  were  not  pleasing  to  the  gov- 
ernment in  Berlin.  Those  facts  did  not  directly 
promote  peace  and  understanding  and  coopera- 
tion. Ultimately,  by  helping  to  awaken  the  peoples 
of  the  world  to  the  Nazi  and  Fascist  dangers,  this 
fearless  reporting  of  the  facts  did  contribute  to 
peace — but  only  after  an  intervening  period  when 
anything  but  peace  prevailed.  Had  this  conven- 
tion then  been  in  force,  and  had  the  Nazi  govern- 
ment been  a  signatory,  it  would  undoubtedly  have 
used  its  "right  of  correction"  to  flood  the  Foreign 
Offices  of  the  democracies  with  communiques  of 
alleged  correction.  Then  governments  would  have 
been  glad  that  they  had  not  accepted  the  obliga- 
tion of  forcing  their  newspapers  to  print  these  so- 
called  corrections. 

We  all  hope  that  there  will  never  be  another 
world  war,  but  we  cannot  realistically  expect  that 
disputes  and  grave  differences  of  viewpoint  will 
not  arise  between  governments  and  between  re- 
gimes. We  cannot  expect  that  the  press  will  or 
should  please  everyone  all  the  time.  Sometimes 
some  governments"  will  disagree  with  press  dis- 
patches when — I  make  so  bold  as  to  say — the  dis- 
patches will  be  right  and  the  governments  wrong. 
Sometimes,  I  freely  admit,  it  may  be  the  other 
way  round.  But  very  frequently  there  will  be  hon- 
est differences  of  opinion  when  there  will  be  some- 
thing valid  to  say  on  both  sides.  This  is  precisely 
why  it  would  have  been  a  grave  mistake  to  base 
this  convention  on  coercive  power. 

This  convention  sets  up  no  special  privileges  for 
the  press.  It  does  reaffirm  the  right  of  the  people 
to  know,  and  it  seeks  to  protect  the  press  in  the 
fulfillment  of  its  duty  to  report  the  facts.  Amei'i- 
can  newspapermen,  I  will  tell  the  Assembly 
frankly,  have  observed  with  some  misgivings  this 
intervention  not  of  one  government  but  of  many 
governments  into  the  international  areas  of  news 
gathering  and  transmission.  Newspapermen  have 
learned  that  most  governments  instinctively  crave 
power.  They  have  learned  that  many  governments 
seek  to  conceal  rather  than  to  reveal  many  of  the 
facts  that  the  people  need  to  know.  So  they  have 
naturally  asked  whether  this  intervention  of  gov- 
ernment into  a  new  field  will  turn  out  in  the  inter- 
est of  more  freedom  or  of  more  limitation. 

The  text  of  the  convention  which  is  before  the 
General  Assembly  should  help  to  resolve  these 
doubts.     By  the  adoption  of  this  convention  today 


the  General  Assembly— if  it  takes  that  course — 
will  give  added  strength  to  agreed  principles 
based  on  the  right  of  the  people  to  know.  No 
longer,  among  the  nations  prepared  to  accept 
and  apply  these  principles,  will  the  function  of 
correspondents  be  subject  to  the  shifting  tactics 
of  regimes.  They  will  rest  on  the  firm  founda- 
tion of  law.  This  convention  can  prevent  any  re- 
gression of  present  good  practices,  if  and  as  a 
tendency  towards  greater  governmental  controls 
sets  in.  Recognition  of  this  convention  as  inter- 
national law  cannot  help  but  influence  additional 
governments  to  observe  the  moi-e  liberal  practices 
included  therein  through  the  pressure  of  world 
opinion  and  the  psychological  compulsion  on  all 
individuals,  peoples,  and  nations  to  observe  law. 
It  is  through  these  beginning  steps  that  we  hope 
the  observance  of  the  principles  of  the  convention 
will  ultimately  be  extended  to  all  parts  of  the 
world. 

It  is  not  proposed  that  this  convention  should  be 
signed  now,  but  that  that  solemn  act  should  be 
deferred  until  the  fourth  session  of  the  General 
Assembly  completes  action  on  the  Convention  on 
Freedom  of  Information,  which  was  also  drafted 
by  the  Geneva  conference.  That  important  task 
lies  ahead,  and  we  believe  that  it  will  be  accom- 
plished with  the  utmost  speed  consistent  with  the 
large  problems  implicit  in  it. 

I  wish  to  pay  tribute  to  the  atmosphere  which 
prevailed  in  the  Third  Committee.  There  were 
sometimes  sharp  interchanges,  but  the  basic  de- 
sire of  the  overwhelming  majority  to  reach  an 
area  of  agreement  was  apparent.  I  am  particu- 
larly grateful  to  the  representatives  of  Mexico, 
Colombia,  Peru,  France,  and  the  United  Kingdom 
who  joined  with  my  delegation  to  work  out,  in 
more  than  20  informal  meetings,  an  agreement  on 
the  most  difficult  clauses  of  this  convention.  These 
delegations — and  particularly  the  delegation  of 
Mexico  which  had  introduced  most  of  the  amend- 
ments under  discussion— showed  their  recognition 
of  the  basic  elements  of  press  freedom.  There  was 
no  lack  of  common  ground  between  these  delega- 
tions when  once  our  basic  purposes  and  our  funda- 
mental convictions  were  clear  to  one  another.  This 
act  of  achieving  understanding  was  typical  of  the 
true  role  and  indispensable  value  of  the  United 
Nations.  Thus  the  convention  as  a  whole  stands 
before  the  General  Assembly,  a  practical,  con- 
crete illustration  of  sound  and  realistic  interna- 
tional agreement.  It  will  contribute  to  the  ability 
of  men  and  nations  to  understand  the  problems 
that  face  them  for,  by  recognizing  the  right  of  the 
people  to  know,  it  will  widen  and  deepen  the  flow 
of  fo-ct.  That  is  a  great  accomplishment,  because 
upon  knowledge  depends  peace. 


May  29,    7949 


RESOLUTIONS  ADOPTED  BY  THE 
GENERAL  ASSEMBLY 

U.  N.  doc.  A/876 
Adopted  Ma;  13.  1049 

A.  Consideration  and  Signature  of  the  Draft 
Conventions 

Tlie  General  Assembly 

1.  Refers  to  its  fourth  regular  session  the  draft 
Convention  on  Freedom  of  Information,  together 
with  the  records  of  the  debates  on  this  subject 
in  the  Third  Committee  and  other  organs  of  the 
United  Nations; 

2.  Inviten  the  General  Assembly,  at  its  fourth 
session,  to  give  high  priority  to  this  item; 

3.  Invites  the  General  Assembly,  at  its  fourth 
session,  to  take  into  full  consideration  all  the  sub- 
stantive amendments  to  the  draft  Convention  al- 
ready adopted  by  the  Third  Committee  in  order 
to  reconcile  divergent  views ; 

4.  Resolves  that  the  draft  Convention  on  the 
International  Transmission  of  News  and  the  Right 
of  Correction  shall  not  be  open  for  signature  until 
the  General  Assembly  has  taken  definite  action  on 
the  draft  Convention  of  Freedom  of  Information. 

B.  Final  Act  of  the  United  Nations  Conference 
on  Freedom  of  Information 

The  General  Assembly, 

Considering  that  it  lies  within  the  competence 
of  the  Economic  and  Social  Council  to  implement 
certain  resolutions  adopted  by  the  United  Nations 
Conference  on  Freedom  of  Information, 

Considering  further  that  the  provisions  of  some 
of  the  resolutions  adopted  by  the  Conference  have 
been  incorporated  in  the  draft  Convention  on  the 
International  Transmission  of  News  and  the  Right 
of  Correction,  while  others  require  no  further 
action, 

1.  Decides  that  resolutions  Nos.  2,  3,  6,  11,  14, 
23,  24, 26,  30-34,  36,  37  and  40,  as  well  as  resolution 
No.  9  together  with  the  account  of  the  debates 
thereon  in  the  Third  Committee,  be  referred  to 
the  Economic  and  Social  Council  for  appropriate 
action,  at  the  Council's  discretion ;  and 

2.  Takes  note  of  resolutions  Nos.  1,  4,  5,  7,  8, 
10, 12, 13, 15-22, 25, 27-29, 35  and  38. 

C.  Draft  Convention  on  the  International^Trans- 
mission  of  News  and  the  Right  of  Correction 

The  General  Assembly 

1.  Takes  note  of  the  recommendations  con- 
tained in  resolution  152  (VII)  of  the  Economic 
and  Social  Council; 

2.  Approves  the  draft  Convention  on  the  Inter- 
national Transmission  of  News  and  the  Right  of 
Correction  and  recommends  it  for  early  ado{Dtion 


to  all  Members  of  the  United  Nations  and  other 
States  invited  to  the  United  Nations  Conference 
on  Freedom  of  Information  held  at  Geneva  in 
1948; 

3.  Urges  these  States  to  sign  or  accede  to  this 
Convention  when  it  has  been  opened  for  signature, 
and  requests  any  Member  which  does  not  so  sign 
or  accede  to  communicate  its  reasons  therefor  to 
the  Secretary-General  of  the  United  Nations 
within  twelve  months  of  such  opening  date  as  well 
as  the  further  steps,  if  any,  it  intends  to  take ; 

4.  Urges  each  Contracting  State  to  take  as  soon 
as  possible  the  necessary  steps  in  order  to  extend 
its  application  to  territories  for  which  it  has  in- 
ternational responsibility,  subject,  where  neces- 
sary for  constitutional  reasons,  to  the  consent  of 
the  governments  of  such  territories; 

5.  Urges  each  Contracting  State  which  does  not 
make  a  declaration  under  article  XVIII  (1)  of  this 
Convention  in  respect  of  any  territories  for  which 
it  has  international  responsibility,  to  communicate 
to  the  Secretary-General  within  twelve  months  of 
the  opening  of  this  Convention  for  signature  the 
names  of  all  such  territories  together  with  the  rea- 
sons for  not  making  such  a  declaration  as  well  as 
the  further  steps,  if  any,  it  intends  to  take. 

TEXT  OF  DRAFT  CONVENTION 

U.  N.  doc.  A/876 
Adopted  May  13.  1949 

Preamile 

The  Contracting  States, 

Desiring  to  implement  the  right  of  their  peoples  to  be 
fully  and  reliably  informed, 

Desiring  to  improve  understandingr  between  their 
peoples  through  the  free  flow  of  information  and  opinion, 

Desiring  thereby  to  protect  mankind  from  the  scourge 
of  war,  to  prevent  the  recurrence  of  aggression  from  any 
source,  and  to  combat  all  propaganda  which  is  either  de- 
signed or  likely  to  provoke  or  encourage  any  threat  to  the 
peace,  breach  of  the  peace,  or  act  of  aggression. 

Considering  the  danger  to  the  maintenance  of  friendly 
relations  between  peoples  and  to  the  preservation  of  peace, 
arising  from  the  publication  of  inaccurate  reports. 

Considering  that  at  its  second  regular  se.ssion  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  of  the  United  Nations  recommended  the 
adoption  of  measures  designed  to  combat  the  dissemina- 
tion of  fal.se  or  distorted  reports  likely  to  injure  friendly 
relations  between  States, 

Considering,  however,  that  it  is  not  at  present  practica- 
ble to  institute,  on  the  international  level,  a  procedure  for 
verifying  the  accuracy  of  a  report  which  might  lead  to 
the  imposition  of  penalties  for  the  publication  of  false  or 
distorted  reports. 

Considering,  moreover,  that  to  prevent  the  publication 
of  reports  of  this  nature  or  to  reduce  their  pernicious 
effect.s,  it  is  above  all  necessary  to  promote  a  wide  circula- 
tion of  news  and  to  heighten  the  sense  of  responsibility  of 
those  regularly  engaged  in  the  dissemination  of  news, 

Considering  that  an  effective  means  to  these  ends  is  to 
give  States  directly  affected  by  a  report,  which  they  con- 
sider false  or  distorted  and  which  is  disseminated  by  an 
information  agency,  the  possibility  of  securing  commen- 
surate publicity  for  their  corrections, 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


CoNsiDEBiNG  that  the  legislation  of  certain  States  does 
not  provide  for  a  right  of  correction  of  which  foreign  Gov- 
ernments may  avail  themselves,  and  that  it  is  therefore 
desirable  to  institute  such  a  right  on  the  international 
level,  and 

Having  resolved  to  conclude  a  Convention  lor  these 
purposes, 

Have  agreed  as  follows  : 

Article  I 
For  the  purposes  of  the  present  Convention : 

1.  "News  material"  means  all  news  material,  whether  of 
information  or  opinion  and  whether  visual  or  auditory,  for 
dissemination  to  the  public. 

2.  "News  despatch"  means  news  material  transmitted  in 
writing  or  by  means  of  telecommunications,  in  the  form 
customarily  employed  by  information  agencies  in  trans- 
mitting such  news  material,  before  publication,  to  news- 
papers, news  periodicals  and  broadcasting  organizations. 

3.  "Information  agency"  means  a  press,  broadcasting, 
film,  television  or  facsimile  organization,  public  or  private, 
regularly  engaged  in  the  collection  and  dissemination  of 
news  material,  created  and  organized  under  the  laws  and 
regulations  of  the  Contracting  State  in  which  the  central 
organization  is  domiciled  and  which,  in  each  Contracting 
State  where  it  operates,  functions  under  the  laws  and 
regulations  of  that  State. 

4.  "Correspondent"  means  a  national  of  a  Contracting 
State  or  an  individual  employed  by  an  information  agency 
of  a  Contracting  State,  who  in  either  case  is  regularly 
engaged  in  the  collection  and  the  reporting  of  news  ma- 
terial, and  who  when  outside  his  State  is  identified  as  a 
correspondent  by  a  valid  passport  or  by  a  similar  docu- 
ment internationally  acceptable. 

GATHERING  AND  INTERNATIONAL  TRANSMISSION 

OP  NEWS 

Article  II 

In  order  to  facilitate  the  freest  possible  movement  of 
correspondents  in  the  performance  of  their  functions,  the 
Contracting  States  shall  expedite,  in  a  manner  consistent 
with  their  respective  laws  and  regulations,  the  admin- 
istrative procedures  necessary  for  the  entry  into,  residence 
in,  travel  through  and  egress  from  their  respective  terri- 
tories of  correspondents  of  other  Contracting  States  to- 
gether with  their  professional  equipment,  and  shall  not 
impose  restrictions  which  discriminate  against  such  cor- 
respondents with  respect  to  entry  into,  residence  in,  travel 
through  or  egress  from  such  territories. 

Article  III 
The  Contracting  States,  while  recognizing  that  corre- 
spondents and  information  agencies  must  conform  to  the 
laws  in  force  in  the  countries  in  which  they  are  operating, 
agree  that  correspondents  of  other  Contracting  States 
legally  admitted  into  their  territories  shall  not  be  expelled 
on  account  of  any  lawful  exercise  of  their  right  to  collect 
and  report  news  material. 

Article  rv 

The  present  Convention  shall  not  apply  to  any  corre- 
spondent of  a  Contracting  State  who,  while  not  otherwise 
admissible  under  the  laws  and  regulations  referred  to  in 
article  II  into  the  territory  of  another  Contracting  State, 
is  nevertheless  admitted  conditionally  in  accordance  with 
an  agreement  between  that  other  Contracting  State  and 
the  United  Nations  or  a  specialized  agency  thereof,  in  order 
to  cover  their  proceedings,  or  pursuant  to  a  special  ar- 
rangement made  by  that  other  Contracting  State  in  order 
to  facilitate  the  entry  of  such  correspondents. 

May  29,   1949 


Article  V 
Each  Contracting  State  shall,  to  the  extent  compatible 
with  its  national  security,  permit  and  facilitate  access  to 
news  for  all  correspondents  of  other  Contracting  States 
BO  far  as  possible  on  the  same  basis  as  for  the  corre- 
spondents employed  by  its  domestic  information  agencies, 
and  shall  not  discriminate  among  correspondents  of  other 
Contracting  States  as  regards  such  access. 

Article  VI 

Correspondents  and  information  agencies  of  a  Contract- 
ing State  operating  in  the  territories  of  other  Contracting 
States  shall  have  access  to  all  facilities  in  such  territories 
generally  and  publicly  used  for  the  international  trans- 
mission of  news  material  and  shall  be  accorded  the  right 
to  transmit  news  material  from  each  such  territory  on 
the  same  basis  and  at  the  same  rates  applicable  to  all 
users  of  such  facilities  for  similar  purposes. 

Article  VII 

1.  The  Contracting  States  shall  permit  egress  from  their 
territories  of  all  news  material  of  correspondents  and 
information  agencies  of  other  Contracting  States  without 
censorship,  editing  or  delay ;  provided  that  each  Contract- 
ing State  may  make  and  enforce  regulations  relating  di- 
rectly to  national  defence.  Such  of  these  regulations  as 
relate  to  the  transmission  of  news  material  shall  be  com- 
municated by  the  State  to  all  correspondents  and  informa- 
tion agencies  of  other  Contracting  States  operating  in  its 
territory  and  shall  apply  equally  to  them. 

2.  If  the  requirements  of  national  defence  should  compel 
a  Contracting  State  to  establish  censorship  in  peacetime 
it  shall : 

(a)  Establish  in  advance  which  categories  of  news 
material  are  subject  to  previous  inspection ;  and  commu- 
nicate to  correspondents  and  information  agencies  the 
directives  of  the  censor  setting  forth  forbidden  matters ; 

(6)  Carry  out  censorship  as  far  as  possible  in  the  pres- 
ence of  the  correspondent  or  of  a  rejiresentative  of  the 
information  agency  concerned ;  and  when  censorship  in 
the  presence  of  the  person  concerned  is  not  possible : 

(i)  Fix  the  time-limit  allowed  the  censors  for  the 
return  of  the  news  material  to  the  correspondent  or 
information  agency  concerned; 

(ii)  Require  the  immediate  return  of  news  material 
submitted  for  censorship  direct  to  the  correspondent 
or  information  agency  concerned,  together  with  the 
marks  indicating  the  portions  thereof  that  have  been 
deleted  and  any  notations; 

(c)  In  the  case  of  a  telegram  subjected  to  censorship: 

(i)  Base  the  charge  on  the  number  of  words  compos- 
ing the  telegram  after  censorship ; 
(ii)  Return  the  charge,  in  accordance  with  the  rele- 
vant provisions  of  the  international  telegraph  regu- 
lations currently  in  force,  provided  that  the  sender 
has  cancelled  the  telegram  before  its  transmission. 

Article  VIII 

1.  Each  Contracting  State  shall  permit  all  news 
despatches  of  correspondents  and  information  agencies  of 
other  Contracting  States  to  enter  its  territory  and  reach 
information  agencies  operating  therein  on  conditions  which 
are  not  less  favourable  than  those  accorded  to  any  cor- 
respondent or  information  agency  of  any  other  Contracting 
or  non-Contracting  State. 

2.  As  regards  the  projection  of  newsreels  or  parts 
thereof,  the  Contracting  State  shall  take  measures  to  pre- 
vent monopolistic  practices  in  any  form,  whether  open 
or  concealed,  in  order  to  avoid  restrictions,  exclusions  or 
privileges  of  any  kind. 

683 


INTERNATIONAL  RIGHT  OF  CORRECTION 
Article  IX 

1.  RecoKnizing  that  the  professional  responsihility  of 
corrospoiidfnts  and  information  agencies  requires  them  to 
report  facts  without  discrimination  and  in  their  i)roper 
context  and  thereby  to  promote  respect  for  human  rights 
and  fundamental  freedoms,  to  further  international  un- 
derstanding and  co-operation  and  to  contribute  to  the 
maintenance  of  international  peace  and  security, 

Considering  also  that,  as  a  matter  of  professional  ethics, 
all  correspondents  and  information  agencies  should,  in  the 
case  of  news  despatches  transmitted  or  published  by  them 
and  which  have  been  demonstrated  to  be  false  or  distorted, 
follow  the  customary  practice  of  transmitting  through 
the  same  channels,  or  of  publishing,  corrections  of  such 
despatches, 

The  Contracting  States  agree  that  in  cases  where  a 
Contracting  State  contends  that  a  news  despatch  capable 
of  injuring  its  relations  with  other  States  or  its  national 
prestige  or  dignity  transmitted  from  one  country  to  an- 
other tiy  correspondents  or  Information  agencies  of  a 
Contracting  or  non-Contracting  State  and  published  or 
disseminated  abroad  is  false  or  distorted,  it  may  submit 
its  version  of  the  facts  (hereinafter  called  "communique") 
to  the  Contracting  States  within  whose  territories  such 
despatch  has  been  published  or  disseminated.  A  copy  of 
the  communique  shall  be  forwarded  at  the  same  time  to 
the  correspondent  or  information  agency  concerned  to 
enable  that  correspondent  or  information  agency  to  cor- 
rect the  news  despatch  in  question. 

2.  A  communiqu<^  may  be  issued  only  with  respect  to 
news  despatches  and  must  be  without  comment  or  ex- 
pression of  opinion.  It  should  not  be  longer  than  is  neces- 
sary to  correct  the  alleged  inaccuracy  or  distortion  and 
must  be  accompanied  by  a  verbatim  text  of  the  despatch 
as  published  or  disseminated,  and  by  evidence  that  the 
despatch  has  been  transmitted  from  abroad  by  a  corre- 
spondent or  an  information  agency. 

Article  X 

1.  With  the  least  possible  delay  and  in  any  case  not 
later  than  five  clear  days  from  the  date  of  receiving  a 
communique  transmitted  in  accordance  with  the  provisions 
of  article  IX,  a  Contracting  State,  whatever  be  its  opinion 
concerning  the  facts  in  question,  shall : 

(a)  Release  the  communiqu(^  to  the  correspondents  and 
Information  agencies  operating  in  its  territory  through 
the  channels  customarily  used  for  the  release  of  news 
concerning  international  affairs  for  putilication  ;  and 

(6)  Transmit  the  communique^  to  the  headquarters  of 
the  information  agency  whose  correspondent  was  responsi- 
ble for  originating  the  despatch  in  question,  if  such  head- 
quarters are  within  its  territory. 

2.  In  the  event  that  a  Contractin<,'  State  does  not  dis- 
charge its  obligation  under  this  article  with  respect  to 
the  communiqut''  of  another  Contracting  State,  the  latter 
may  accord,  on  the  basis  of  reciprocity,  similar  treatment 
to  a  communique?  thereafter  submitted  to  it  by  the  de- 
faulting State. 

Article  XI 

1.  If  any  of  the  Contracting  States  to  which  a  commu- 
nique has  been  transmitted  in  accordance  with  article  IX 
fails  to  fulfil,  within  the  prescribed  time-limit,  tlie  obliga- 
tions laid  down  in  article  X,  the  Contracting  State  exer- 
cising the  right  of  correction  may  submit  the  said  com- 
munique, tngetlier  with  a  verbatim  text  of  the  despatch 
as  published  or  disseminated,  to  the  Secretary-General  of 
the  United  Nations  and  shall  at  the  same  time  notify  the 
State  complained  against  that  it  is  doing  so.  The  latter 
State  may,  within  five  clear  days  after  receiving  such  no- 
tice, submit  its  comments  to  the  Secretary-General,  which 
shall  relate  only  to  the  allegation  that  it  has  not  dis- 
charged its  obligations  under  article  X. 

2.  The  Secretary-General  shall  in  any  event,  within  ten 


clear  days  after  receiving  the  communique,  give  appro- 
priate publicity  through  the  information  channels  at  his 
disiKjsal  to  the  communique,  together  with  the  despatch 
and  the  comments,  if  any,  submitted  to  him  by  the  State 
complained  against. 

MISCELLANEOUS  PROVISIONS 

Article  XII 

1.  Nothing  in  the  present  Convention  shall  be  construed 
as  depriving  a  Contracting  State  of  its  right  to  make  and 
enforce  laws  and  public  regulations  for  the  protection  of 
national  security  and  public  order. 

2.  Nothing  in  the  present  Convention  shall  be  construed 
as  depriving  any  Contracting  State  of  its  right  to  make 
and  enforce  laws  and  public  regulations  prohibiting  news 
material  which  is  blasphemous  or  contrary  to  public 
morals  or  decency. 

3.  No  Contracting  State  .shall,  however,  impose  cen- 
sorship in  peacetime  on  news  material  leaving  its  terri- 
tory except  on  grounds  of  national  defence,  and  then  only 
in  accordance  with  article  VII. 

4.  Nothing  in  the  present  Convention  shall  be  construed 
as  prejudicing  the  adoption  by  a  Contracting  State  of  any 
legislation  requiring  that  a  portion  of  the  staff  employed 
by  foreign  enterpri.ses  operating  in  its  territory  shall  be 
compo.sed  of  nationals  of  that  State. 

5.  Nothing  in  the  present  Convention  shall  be  construed 
as  preventing  a  Contracting  State  from  taking  measures 
to  help  the  establishment  and  development  of  indeiwndent 
domestic  information  agencies  or  to  prohibit  practices 
tending  to  create  monopolies. 

6.  Nothing  in  the  present  Convention  shall  limit  the 
power  of  a  Contracting  State  to  reserve  to  its  nationals 
the  right  to  establish  and  direct  in  its  territory  news- 
papers, periodicals,  and  radio-broadcasting  and  television 
organizations. 

7.  Nothing  in  the  present  Convention  shall  be  construed 
as  limiting  the  discretion  of  a  Contracting  State  to  refuse 
entry  into  its  territory  to  any  particular  person  or  to 
restrict  the  period  of  his  residence  therein  ;  provided  that 
any  such  refusal  or  restriction  is  based  on  groun<ls  other 
than  that  such  person  is  a  correspondent,  and  that  any 
sucli  restriction  as  to  residence  does  not  conflict  with  the 
provisions  of  article  III. 

cS.  Nothing  in  the  present  Convention  shall  oblige  a  Con- 
tracting State  to  consider  one  of  its  own  nationals  em- 
ployed by  a  foreign  information  agency  operating  in  its 
territory  as  a  correspondent,  except  when  he  is  functioning 
on  behalf  of  tiiat  informatinn  agency  and  then  only  to 
the  extent  required  to  enable  that  information  agency  fully 
to  enjoy  the  benefits  of  this  Convention;  provided,  how- 
ever, that  no  provision  of  this  Convention  shall  be  con- 
strued as  entitling  another  Contracting  State  to  inter- 
cede on  behalf  of  such  national  with  his  government,  as 
distinguished  from  interceding  on  behalf  of  the  informa- 
tion agency  by  which  he  is  employed. 

Article  XIII 

1.  In  time  of  war  or  any  other  public  emergency,  a 
Contracting  State  may  talie  measures  derogating  from  its 
obligations  under  the  present  Convention  to  the  extent 
strictly  limited  by  the  exigencies  of  the  situation. 

2.  Any  Contracting  State  availing  itself  of  this  right 
of  derogation  shall  promptly  inform  the  Secretary-General 
of  the  United  Nations  of  the  measures  which  it  has  thus 
adopted  and  of  the  reasons  therefor,  and  shall  also  inform 
him  as  and  when  the  measures  cease  to  operate. 

Article  XIY 

Any  dispute  between  any  two  or  more  Contracting  States 
concerning  the  Interpretation  or  application  of  the  pres- 
ent Convention  which  is  not  settled  by  negotiations  shall 
be  referred  to  the  International  Court  of  Justice  for  de- 
cision unless  the  Contracting  States  agree  to  another  mode 
of  settlement. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Article  XV 

1.  The  present  Convention  shall  be  open  for  signature 
to  all  Member  States  of  the  United  Nations,  to  every  State 
Invited  to  the  United  Nations  Conference  on  Freedom  of 
Information  held  at  Geneva  in  1948,  and  to  every  other 
State  which  the  General  Assembly  may,  by  resolution, 
declare  to  be  eligible. 

2.  The  present  Convention  shall  be  ratified  by  the  States 
signatory  hereto  in  conformity  with  their  respective  con- 
stitutional processes.  The  instruments  of  ratification 
shall  be  deposited  with  the  Secretary-General  of  the  United 
Nations. 

Article  XVI 

1.  The  present  Convention  shall  be  open  for  accession 
to  the  States  referred  to  in  article  XV  (1). 

2.  Accession  sliall  he  effected  by  the  deposit  of  an  in- 
strument of  accession  with  the  Secretary-General  of  the 
United  Nations. 

Article  XVII 

When  any  six  of  the  States  referred  to  in  article  XV 
(1)  have  deposited  their  Instruments  of  ratification  or 
accession,  the  present  Convention  shall  come  into  force 
among  them  on  the  thirtieth  day  after  the  date  of  the  de- 
posit of  the  sixth  instrument  of  ratification  or  accession. 
It  shall  come  into  force  for  each  State  which  ratifiis  or 
accedes  after  that  date  on  the  thirtieth  day  after  the 
deposit  of  its  instrument  of  ratification  or  accession. 

Article  XVIII 

1.  Any  State  may,  at  the  time  of  signature  or  at  any 
time  thereafter,  declare  by  notification  addressed  to  the 
Secretary-General  of  the  United  Nations  that  the  present 
Convention  shall  extend  to  all  or  any  of  the  territories 
for  the  international  relations  of  which  it  is  responsible. 
This  Convention  shall  extend  to  the  territory  or  terri- 
tories named  in  the  notification  as  from  the  thirtieth  day 
after  the  day  of  receipt  by  the  Secretary-General  of  the 
United  Nations  of  this  notification. 

2.  Each  Contracting  State  undertakes  to  take  as  soon 
as  possible  the  necessary  steps  in  order  to  extend  the 
application  of  this  Convention  to  such  territories,  sub- 
ject, where  necessary  for  constitutional  reasons,  to  the 
consent  of  the  governments  of  such  territories. 

3.  The  Secretary-General  of  the  United  Nations  shall 
communicate  the  present  Convention  to  the  States  re- 
ferred to  in  article  XV  (1)  for  transmission  to  the  respon- 
sible authorities  of: 

(a)  Any  Non-Self-Governing  Territory  administered 
by  them  ; 

(6)   Any  Trust  Territory  administered  by  them; 

(c)  Any  other  non-metropolitan  territory  for  the  in- 
ternational relations  of  which  they  are  responsible. 

Article  XIX 

1.  Any  Contracting  State  may  denounce  the  present 
Convention  by  notification  to  the  Secretary-General  of  the 
United  Nations.  Denunciation  shall  take  effect  six 
months  after  the  date  of  receipt  of  the  notification  by  the 
Secretary-General. 

2.  Any  Contracting  State  which  has  made  a  declaration 
under  article  XVIII  (1)  may  at  any  time  thereafter,  by 
notification  to  the  Secretary-General  of  the  United  Na- 
tions, declare  that  the  Convention  shall  cease  to  extend 
to  such  territory  six  months  after  the  date  of  receipt 
of  the  notification  by  the  Secretary-General. 

Article  XX 

The  present  Convention  shall  cease  to  be  in  force  as 
from  the  date  when  the  denunciation  which  reduces  the 
number  of  Parties  to  less  than  six  becomes  effective. 

May  29,   1949 


Article  XXI 

1.  A  request  for  the  revision  of  the  present  Convention 
may  be  made  at  any  time  by  any  Contracting  State  by 
means  of  a  notification  to  the  Secretary-General  of  the 
United  Nations. 

2.  The  General  Assembly  shall  decide  upon  the  steps, 
if  any,  to  be  taken  in  respect  of  such  request. 

Article  XXII 

The  Secretary-General  of  the  United  Nations  shall 
notify  the  States  referred  to  in  article  XV  (1)  of  the 
following: 

(a)  Information  received  in  accordance  with  article 
XIII  (2)  ; 

(6)  Signatures,  ratifications  and  accessions  received  in 
accordance  with  articles  XV  and  XVI ; 

(c)  The  date  upon  which  the  present  Convention  comes 
into  force  in  accordance  with  article  XVII ; 

(d)  Notifications   received   in  accordance  with  article 

XVIII  and  article  XIX  (2)  ; 

(e)  Denunciations  received  in  accordance  with  article 

XIX  (1); 

(f)  Abrogation  in  accordance  with  article  XX; 

(9)  Notifications  received  in  accordance  with  article 
XXI. 

Article  XXIII 

1.  The  present  Convention,  of  which  the  Chinese,  Eng- 
lish, French,  Russian  and  Spanish  texts  shall  be  equally 
authentic,  shall  be  deposited  in  the  archives  of  the  United 
Nations. 

2.  The  Secretary-General  of  the  United  Nations  shall 
transmit  a  certified  copy  to  each  State  referred  to  in 
article  XV  (1). 

3.  The  present  Convention  shall  be  registered  with  the 
Secretariat  of  the  United  Nations  on  the  date  of  its  coming 
into  force. 


Assistance  to  Political  Refugees  From 
Eastern  Europe 

Statement  hy  Secretary  Acheson 

[Released  to  the  press  May  18] 

The  constitution  of  the  International  Eefugee 
Organization  (Iro)  does  not  preclude  assistance 
either  in  maintenance  or  resettlement  to  refugees 
from  eastern  European  countries.  Such  restric- 
tions as  have  been  imposed  on  assistance  to  these 
refugees  arise  from  the  lack  of  resources  avail- 
able to  the  organization  resulting  from  the  fact 
that  only  16  out  of  the  59  member  governments 
of  the  United  Nations  have  joined  the  organiza- 
tion to  date  and  contributed  to  its  support.  Italy 
and  Switzerland,  nonmembers  of  the  United  Na- 
tions, have  recently  become  members.  Conse- 
quently, Iro  has  been  obliged  to  apply  its  re- 
sources in  main  to  those  already  present  in  the 
displaced  persons  centers  in  Germany  and  Austria. 
Others  arriving  in  those  areas  in  more  recent 
months  have  been  assisted  on  a  showing  that  hard- 
ship would  result  if  Iro  assistance  were  not 
forthcoming. 


Special  efforts  have  been  made  in  recent  months, 
both  by  the  military  authorities  and  Iro,  to  pro- 
vide for  the  refugees  from  Czechoslovakia  who 
entered  Austria  and  Germany  after  February 
1948  and  to  extend  assistance  to  other  {groups  of 
refugees,  particularly  from  Poland,  Hungary,  and 
Rumania,  to  the  extent  possible  within  the  limits 
of  available  resources.  House  Resolution  No. 
4567,  now  under  consideration  by  the  House,  pro- 
poses to  amend  the  Displaced  Persons  Act  of  1948 
by  providing  for  the  admission  of  15,000  refugees 
within  the  total  numerical  limitations  of  the  Act 


who  fled  from  their  countries  of  origin  after  Janu- 
ary 1,  1946,  and  whose  admission  is  recommended 
by  or  on  behalf  of  the  Secretary  of  State  and  the 
Secretary  of  Defense.  The  dateline  of  January  1, 
1949,  appearing  in  section  1  of  the  bill  does  not 
apply  to  this  group,  nor  is  it  required  that  the 
persons  envisaged  under  this  section  shall  be  eligi- 
ble under  the  constitution  of  Iro.  This  provision 
of  House  Resolution  No.  4567,  which  the  Depart- 
ment of  State  supports,  will  if  adopted  by  the 
Congress  especially  benefit  refugees  from  the  east- 
ern European  countries. 


U.S.  Position  Regarding  Spain 


STATEMENT  BY  RAY  ATHERTON' 
Alternate  U.S.  Delegate  to  the  General  Assembly 


Mr.  President  :  Because  of  my  respect  for  the 
ability  of  the  member  delegates  to  differentiate 
between  fiction  and  fact,  I  shall  not  attempt  to 
evaluate  the  fog  of  fancy  that  contains  so  much 
fake  and  so  much  folderol  that  the  distinguished 
Polish  delegate  and  his  satellite  speakers  have 
attempted  to  surround  us  with.  Indeed,  I  could 
imagine  in  succeeding  speeches  we  shall  have  more 
of  it.  But  I  do  venture  for  the  sake  of  clarity  very 
briefly  to  repeat  the  position  of  my  government  in 
regard  to  Spain  very  much  as  I  did  in  Committee  I. 

The  United  States  has  no  military  alliance  with 
Spain.  We  have  given  no  military  assistance  to 
Spain.  The  United  States  maintains  no  military 
or  naval  missions  in  Spain.  The  United  States 
has  no  naval  bases  or  air  bases  anywhere  on  Span- 
ish territory.  We  have  made  no  overture  toward 
bringing  Spain  into  the  United  Nations,  or  into 
the  European  Economic  Recovery  Program,  or 
the  North  Atlantic  Treaty. 

As  to  the  two  resolutions  which  have  been  placed 
before  the  General  Assembly,  the  United  States 
will  abstain  on  the  resolution  sponsored  by  Bolivia, 
Brazil,  Colombia,  and  Peru  as  wo  did  in  Commit- 
tee I.  The  United  States  will  oppose  the  Polish 
resolution.  We  intend  to  vote  against  each  and 
every  paragraph  of  this  resolution.     As  I  have 

'  Made  before  the  plenary  session  of  the  General  As- 
sembly in  New  York  on  May  16,  1949,  and  released  to  the 
press  by  the  U.S.  Mission  to  the  United  Nations  on  the 
same  date ;  released  to  the  press  by  the  Department  of 
State  on  May  17. 


already  explained  in  Committee  I,  we  do  this  for 
two  reasons.  First,  although  there  is  much  in  the 
preamble  to  which  we  have  no  objection,  we  can- 
not, and  we  are  certain  the  Assembly  will  not,  agree 
to  the  operative  parts  of  the  resolution.  We  will 
vote  against  it,  therefore,  in  order  to  lessen  the 
possibility  of  a  resolution  resulting  which  would 
consist  of  only  a  few  statements  and  a  preamble. 
Second,  the  1946  resolution  remains  in  effect,  and 
we  would  not  vote  for  its  repeal. 

We  will  vote  against  the  Polish  resolution,  there- 
fore, because  we  feel  the  situation  does  not  permit 
the  passage  of  any  new  resolution  at  this  time  that 
would  in  effect  be  a  repetition  of  the  1946  resolu- 
tion. 

In  conclusion  may  I  reiterate  that  the  United 
States  policy  towards  Spain  remains  unchanged, 
and  we  continue  to  hope  for  the  development  of 
free  and  democratic  institutions  in  Spain.  We  do 
not  wish  to  take  any  action  which  could  be  repre- 
sented as  injurious  to  the  national  spirit  of  the 
Spanish  people.  We  believe  that  the  peaceful  solu- 
tion of  the  Spanish  problem  is  one  which  should 
be  brought  about  by  the  Spanish  people  themselves 
and  on  their  own  initiative.  It  is  our  opinion  that 
if  the  situation  in  Spain  is  allowed  to  develop  free 
from  external  threats,  the  people  of  Spain,  whose 
love  of  freedom  and  individualism  is  well  known 
through  the  centuries,  will  take  peaceful  steps  to 
make  possible  the  restoration  of  Spain  to  its  former 
position  in  the  community  of  democratic  nations. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


U.S.  Continues  Support  of  Security  Council's  Resolution  on  Indonesia 

STATEMENT  BY  AMBASSADOR  WARREN  R.  AUSTIN' 


Mr.  President  :  I  did  not  plan  to  speak  on  this 
question  in  view  of  the  recommendation  of  the 
A.d  Hoc  Committee  to  defer  discussion  of  the  ques- 
tion until  the  fourth  regular  session  of  the  General 
Assembly  and  in  view  of  my  desire  to  support  the 
efforts  of  the  President  in  bringing  the  Assembly 
to  a  close  this  week,  unless  the  wild  accusations 
of  bad  faith  which  have  been  leveled  at  my  govern- 
ment by  the  Soviet  group  of  states  in  connection 
with  the  Indonesian  question  forced  me  to  make 
a  few  remarks  in  order  to  make  the  record  straight. 
My  government  has  viewed  with  admiration  the 
efforts  of  the  Indonesian  people  to  gain  their  in- 
dependence and  has  steadfastly  sought  to  sup- 
port them  in  their  legitimate  aspirations.  We  have 
supported  and  continue  to  support  the  forces  work- 
ing for  independence,  both  in  the  Republic  and 
elsewhere  in  Indonesia,  and  have  sympathized  with 
the  efforts  of  the  very  able  leaders  of  this  move- 
ment to  improve  the  conditions  of  their  people 
and  bring  stability,  security,  and  independence 
to  their  land. 

The  United  States  believes  that  it  is  only  by 
granting  independence  to  the  Indonesian  people 
themselves  that  it  would  be  possible  to  restore  to 
this  important  area  of  the  world  a  stable  govern- 
ment capable  of  caring  for  the  interest  of  its  70 
million  inhabitants  and  contributing  to  interna- 
tional peace  and  security.  These  considerations 
have  guided  the  United  States  throughout  the 
consideration  of  the  Indonesian  question  in  the 
United  Nations.  My  government  cooperated  fully 
in  the  Security  Council  and  its  Commission  to 
bring  about  a  peaceful  adjustment  of  the  difficul- 
ties between  the  Indonesian  Republic  and  the  Neth- 
erlands Government  so  that  the  United  States  of 
Indonesia  might  be  established  at  an  early  date 
as  one  of  the  fully  sovereign  and  independent 
peoples  of  the  world. 

I  reject  emphatically  and  absolutely  the  charges 
we  have  heard  tonight  and  the  insinuations  which 
have  been  intemperately  made  here  as  to  the  mo- 
tives of  the  United  States  Government  in  this  case. 
I  should  like  to  point  out  that  these  charges  come 
from  states  whose  purposes  in  connection  with  In- 
donesia are  obvious  to  all  the  world.  The  Soviet 
group  of  states  has  never  paid  more  than  lip  serv- 
ice to  the  principles  of  the  United  Nations  in  con- 
nection with  the  Indonesian  question.  From  the 
very  beginning  they  have  acted  in  such  a  way  as 
to  bring  about  political  and  economic  disorder  in 

May  29,  1949 


Indonesia.  Has  their  conduct  shown  interest  in 
making  anything  but  propaganda  by  exciting  dis- 
agreement and  causing  distrust?  Their  acts  have 
not  promoted  the  efforts  of  the  United  Nations  and 
particularly  of  the  Security  Council  to  use  the 
peaceful  settlement  procedures  of  the  United  Na- 
tions Charter  so  that  early  independence  could  be 
brought  to  an  early  realization. 

Does  the  Soviet  Union  want  an  independent 
Indonesia  ?  Its  conduct  indicates  that  it  wants  an 
Indonesia  under  the  domination  and  control  of  a 
Communist  minority  taking  its  order  from  Mos- 
cow. The  record  clearly  reveals  that  the  Soviet 
Government  has  no  interest  in  supporting  the 
Government  of  the  Indonesian  Republic  or  of  re- 
storing peace  to  Indonesia.  In  fact,  the  Soviet 
Government  is  fundamentally  opposed  to  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  Republic  of  Indonesia.  Its  Com- 
munist Party  has  tried  to  undermine  and  over- 
throw that  Government.  Communist  revolt 
against  President  Sukarno  and  Premier  Hatta, 
in  September  of  last  year,  was  an  open  effort  on 
the  part  of  the  Soviet  Union  to  overthrow  the 
Indonesian  Republic.  When  the  resumption  of 
hostilities  by  the  Netherlands  Government  against 
the  Indonesian  Republic  took  place  last  Decem- 
ber, the  official  Communist  line  as  presented  in  the 
Communist  press,  instead  of  deploring  this  action, 
openly  gloated  that  it  was  a  punishment  for  the 
Government  of  Sukarno  and  Hatta,  who  had  suc- 
cessfully put  down  the  Communist  revolt.  The 
Communists  even  went  so  far  as  to  accuse  the 
Premier  of  the  Indonesian  Republic,  Dr.  Hatta, 
of  being  a  traitor  to  his  country  for  his  actions  in 
putting  down  that  revolt.  The  charges  by  the 
Soviet  representative  in  the  Security  Council  and 
this  Assembly  when  discussing  this  question  can- 
not hide  from  the  world  the  true  position  of  his 
government.  As  in  previous  cases,  we  expect  the 
Soviet  Union  to  continue  its  obstructive  tactics 
as  the  prospects  for  settlement  appear  brighter. 
We  however,  should  not  allow  such  tactics  to 
delay  us  long  from  our  objective. 

The  parties  to  the  dispute  seek  specific  settle- 
ment through  conciliation  and  mediation  with  the 
aid  of  the  Security  Council.    No  discussion  in  the 

'  Made  before  the  plenary  session  of  the  General  Assem- 
bly in  New  York  on  May  11, 1949,  and  released  to  the  press 
by  the  U.S.  Mission  to  the  United  Nations  on  the  same  date. 

687 


General  Assembly  should  take  place  which  could 
interfere  with  their  efforts. 

In  spite  of  the  obstruction  of  the  Soviet  Union, 
the  United  Nations  is  continuing  to  follow  the 
principles  and  procedures  of  the  Charter  in  its 
efforts  to  find  a  just  and  lasting  settlement  of  this 
problem.  My  govei-nment  continues  to  believe 
that  the  terms  of  the  Security  Council's  resolution 
of  January  28,  1949,  provide  for  such  a  solution.' 
After  receiving  guidance  from  the  Security  Coun- 
cil on  March  23 '  of  this  year  regarding  the  im- 
plementation of  the  first  phase  of  the  program 
laid  down  in  that  resolution,  the  parties  have 
now  taken  an  initial  ste[)  forward  in  this  program. 
Thej'  have  now  reached  a  preliminary  agreement. 
We  commend  both  parties  for  their  statemanship 
and  for  the  good  will  which  they  have  shown.  We 
believe  this  preliminary  agreement  augurs  well 
for  the  success  of  the  negotiations,  which  presum- 
ably will  be  undertaken  in  the  near  future  at  The 
Hague.  It  is  tlie  earnest  hope  of  my  government 
that  both  parties  will  promptly  and  wholeheart- 
edly carry  forward  the  program  which  they  have 
now  embarked  upon  and  that  the  United  Nations 
Commission  for  Indonesia  will  be  able  to  report  by 
next  fall  that  a  final  solution  of  the  problem  has 
been  reached.  Consequently,  of  course,  we  support 
the  pending  motion. 


Question  of  Indonesia 

Resolution  Adopted  hy  the  General  Assembly 

U.N.  doc.  A/86S 
Adopted  May  11,  1049 

The  General  Assembly, 

Noting  the  outcome  of  preliminarj'  negotiations 
between  the  Netherlands  and  the  Republic  of  Indo- 
nesia in  Batavia  as  announced  on  7  May  1949, 
which  negotiations  were  based  on  the  directives 
of  the  Security  Council  of  23  March  1949, 

Expressing  the  hope  that  this  agreement  will 
assist  the  attainment  of  a  lasting  settlement  in 
accordance  with  the  intentions  of  the  Security 
Council  resolution  of  28  January  1949, 


Decides  to  defer  further  consideration  of  the 
item  to  the  fourth  regular  session  of  the  General 
Assenibl}'. 

Admission  of  Israel  to  U.N.  Membership 

Resolution  Adopted  hy  General  Assembly 

D.N.  doc.  A/S67 
Adopted  May  11,  1949 

H.wiNG  RECEIVED  the  report  of  the  Security 
Council  on  the  application  of  Israel  for  member- 
ship in  the  United  Nations,^ 

Noting  that,  in  the  judgment  of  the  Security 
Council,  Israel  is  a  peace-loving  State  and  is  able 
and  willing  to  carry  out  the  obligations  contained 
in  the  Charter, 

Noting  that  the  Security  Council  has  recom- 
mended to  the  General  Assembly  that  it  admit 
Israel  to  membership  in  the  United  Nations, 

Noting  furthermore  the  declaration  by  the 
State  of  Israel  that  it  "unreservedly  accepts  the 
obligations  of  the  United  Nations  Charter  and 
undertakes  to  honour  them  from  the  day  when  it 
becomes  a  Member  of  tlie  United  Nations"',' 

Recalling  its  resolutions  of  29  November  1947 
and  11  December  1948  and  taking  note  of  the  dec- 
larations and  explanations  made  by  the  represen- 
tative of  the  Government  of  Israel  before  the  ad  hoc 
Political  Committee  in  respect  of  the  implementa- 
tion of  the  said  resolutions, 

The  general  assembly. 

Acting  in  discharge  of  its  functions  under  Ar- 
ticle 4  of  the  Charter  and  rule  125  of  its  rules  of 
procedure, 

1.  Decides  that  Israel  is  a  peace-loving  State 
which  accepts  the  obligations  contained  in  the 
Charter  and  is  able  and  willing  to  carry  out  those 
obligations; 

2.  Decides  to  admit  Israel  to  membership  in  the 
United  Nations. 


'  Bulletin  of  Feb.  27,  1949,  p.  2.50. 
'  Bulletin  of  Mar.  27,  1949,  p.  379. 
'  U.N.  doc.  A/S18,  dated  Mar.  9,  1949. 
*  U.N.  doc.  S/1093,  dated  Nov.  29,  1948. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations 


Human  Rights 

During;  its  present  session,  the  Commission  on 
Human  Rights  has  decided  to  complete  the  draft 
International  Covenant  on  Human  Rights  and 
Measures  of  Implementation.  The  18-member 
Commission  is  under  the  chairmanship  of  Mrs. 
Eleanor  Roosevelt. 

After  tentative  adoption  by  the  Commission,  the 
documents  will  be  transmitted  to  member  govern- 
ments for  comments  by  January  1,  1950.  The 
Commission  will  then  do  a  final  redrafting  and 
present  the  documents  to  the  Economic  and  Social 
Council  in  time  to  enable  the  Council  to  submit 
them  to  the  Assembly  at  the  latter's  fifth  session. 

The  Commission  rejected  a  U.S.S.R.  amend- 
ment to  delete  all  reference  to  Measures  of 
Implementation. 

During  the  current  session,  which  began  on  May 
9,  the  Commission  has  discussed  10  of  the  26 
articles  of  the  covenant,  which  when  completed 
and  adopted  by  individual  nations  will  furnish  a 
means  for  implementing  the  observance  of  human 
rights. 

One  of  the  main  tenets  of  the  United  States  po- 
sition has  been  that  the  covenant  should  be  drafted 
along  rather  limited  lines  which  would  be  aimed 
against  oppressive  action  by  the  state  only.  Dis- 
cussion within  the  Commission  has  made  it  appar- 
ent that  a  number  of  the  Commission  members 
oppose  the  United  States  viewpoint.  They  prefer 
a  covenant  much  broader  in  scope,  which  would 
protect  the  individuals  not  only  against  unwar- 
ranted action  by  the  state  but  also  against  other 
individuals  and  groups.  Mrs.  Roosevelt  has  made 
it  clear  to  the  Commission  that  the  United  States 
will  continue  to  oppose  this  concept.  However, 
the  United  States  delegate  will  not  press  these 
views  in  connection  with  each  article  as  it  is  taken 
up  in  the  Commission,  but  retains  the  right  to 
reopen  the  question  at  an  appropriate  time  in  the 
future.  Every  vote  and  action  taken  by  the  Com- 
mission on  the  covenant  in  the  next  few  weeks 
will  be  subject  to  this  understanding. 

International  Trade  Organization 

After  a  5-week  study  of  the  problems  of  inter- 
national trade,  the  twenty-three  contracting  par- 
ties to  the  General  Agreement  on  Tariffs  and 
Trade  (GATT)  have  reported  substantial  prog- 
ress in  their  third  session  being  held  at  Annecy, 
France.  To  date  the  meeting,  which  opened  on 
April  8,  has  given  attention  to  seven  major  ques- 
tions including  charges  of  trade  restrictions,  plans 
for  customs  unions,  and  problems  relating  to  new 

Moy  29,   1949 


tariff  negotiations  currently  under  way  at  Annecy. 

Still  to  be  considered  are  half  a  dozen  other 
questions  including  differences  between  Pakistan 
and  India  and  between  Czechoslovakia  and  the 
United  States. 

The  conference  has  discussed  problems  arising 
from  the  desire  of  11  additional  countries  to  accede 
to  the  Gatt,  who,  are  now  negotiating  tariff  con- 
cessions witli  the  original  23  contracting  paities  to 
the  Gatt  and  among  themselves. 

The  contracting  parties  are  examining  state- 
ments supporting  trade  restrictions  which  have 
been  reported  to  them. 

The  agreement  for  restoration  of  a  customs 
union  between  the  Union  of  South  Africa  and 
Southern  Rhodesia  is  being  reviewed.  Additional 
projected  customs  unions  have  been  reported  to 
the  contracting  parties  since  the  session  opened: 
the  Scandinavian  group,  the  Colombia  group 
(Colombia,  Venezuela,  Ecuador,  and  Panama), 
and  a  union  between  France  and  Italy. 

Among  the  items  yet  to  be  considered  are :  emer- 
gency measures  to  allow  Cuba  to  resolve  the  crisis 
in  that  country's  textile  industry,  a  request  of 
Unesco  for  assistance  and  advice  on  the  problem 
of  reducing  barriers  to  world  trade  in  educational, 
scientific,  and  cultural  materials,  a  complaint  by 
Pakistan  that  India  has  failed  to  carry  out  Gatt 
obligations,  and  a  request  by  Czechoslovakia  for 
a  decision  whether  the  United  States  has  failed  to 
carry  out  Gatt  obligations  through  its  adminis- 
tration of  the  issue  of  export  licenses. 

Economic  and  Employment  Commission 

The  Economic  and  Employment  Commission 
concluded  its  fourth  session,  approving  its  final 
report  on  May  26.  The  report  covered  extensive 
discussions  on  economic  development  for  under- 
developed areas  and  on  einployment  and  economic 
stability.  The  three  Slav  states  either  voted 
against  or  abstained  on  each  of  the  separate  para- 
graphs of  the  document.  The  Commission  recom- 
mended that  the  Economic  and  Social  Council 
abolish  the  Subcommission  on  Employment  and 
Economic  Stability  and  the  Subcommission  on 
Economic  Development  because  of  their  failure  to 
live  up  to  original  expectations  of  accomplish- 
ment. 


The  United  Nations  Commission  on  Korea  has 
sent  a  letter  to  Kum  Sung,  head  of  the  Soviet-spon- 
sored North  Korean  regime,  requesting  that  ar- 
rangements be  made  for  a  Commission  visit.    This 


request  is  the  second  attempt  on  the  part  of  the 
Commission  to  establish  contact  with  the  north,  an 
earlier  effort  of  last  February  having  proved 
fruitless. 

The  activities  of  the  Commission  have  neces- 
sarily been  confined  to  South  Korea  as  were 
those  of  its  predecessor,  the  Temporary  Commis- 
sion on  Korea.  The  latter,  though  established  by 
the  General  Assembly  to  observe  elections  through- 
out Korea,  was  consistently  denied  access  to  the 
Soviet-occupied  northern  zone.  As  a  result  of  the 
United  Nations-observed  elections  in  the  south,  the 
Republic  of  Korea  with  its  capital  at  Seoul  was 
established.  In  December,  the  General  Assembly 
recognized  it  as  the  only  legal  government  of  the 
country,  and  established  a  new  commission  to  aid 
in  the  unification  of  Korea  and  to  seek  the  removal 
of  conomic,  social,  and  other  barriers  caused  by 
the  country's  division. 

The  Commission  Chairman  emphasized  that  the 
letter  was  addressed  to  Kum  Sung  simply  because 
he  is  head  of  the  present  North  Korea  regime.  It 
did  not  in  any  way  constitute  recognition  of  the 
"People's  Republic." 

The  Commission  on  May  23  by  3  votes  in  favor 
(Philippines,  El  Salvador,  and  China),  1  against 
(India) ,  and  2  abstentions  ( France  and  Australia) 
decided  to  assume  no  responsibility  regarding 
either  the  timing  or  the  facilitating  of  the  with- 
drawal of  the  forces  of  the  occupying  powers  from 
Korea.  The  Commission  has  not  been  able  as  yet 
to  observe  the  actual  withdrawal  of  U.S.S.R.  occu- 
pation forces  as  announced  by  the  U.S.S.R.  delega- 
tion. 

International  Law  Commission 

The  International  Law  Commission  by  a  vote  of 
11  in  favor  and  2  opposed  (Manley  O.  Hudson  of 
the  United  States  and  Vladimir  M.  Koretsky  of 
the  U.S.S.R.)  adopted  as  a  whole  the  draft  Declar- 
ation on  Rights  and  Duties  of  States,  which  it  has 
been  considering  since  April  21,  and  it  decided  to 
send  this  draft  declaration  to  the  General  Assembly 
for  its  consideration.  The  Commission  has  now 
turned  to  consideration  of  the  formulation  of  the 
principles  recognized  in  the  charter  of  the  Niirn- 
berg  Tribunal  and  in  the  j udgment  of  the  Tribunal. 

Judge  Hudson,  the  Commission's  chairman,  said 
that  he  voted  against  the  draft  declaration  as  a 
whole  because  of  one  article — article  6  on  human 
rights.  He  said  this  went  beyond  the  text  of  the 
charter  and  beyond  existing  international  law. 
This  article  reads:  "Every  State  has  the  duty  to 
treat  all  persons  under  its  jurisdiction  with  re- 
spect for  human  rights  and  fundamental  freedoms, 
without  distinction  as  to  race,  sex,  language,  or 
religion." 

Profe.ssor  Koretsky  declared  that  he  voted 
against  the  draft  declaration  because  of  shortcom- 
ings in  the  text  which  he  had  mentioned  previ- 
ously which,  he  said,  was  that  it  attacked  the  sov- 
ereignty of  states.    He  cited  article  16  as  a  "max- 


imum attack"  against  the  principle  of  sovereignty 
which  reads  "Every  State  has  the  duty  to  conduct 
its  relations  with  other  States  in  accordance  with 
international  law,  and  with  the  principle  that  the 
sovereignty  of  each  State  is  subject  to  the  su- 
premacy of  international  law."  He  felt  that  the 
Commission  should  submit  the  draft  declaration  to 
all  member  states,  rather  than  directly  to  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly,  and  await  their  opinion. 

Atomic  Energy 

Meeting  for  the  first  time  since  March  25,  the 
Atomic  Energy  Commission  on  May  25  referred 
both  the  General  Assembly  resolution  of  November 
4,  1948,  endorsing  the  atomic  plan  developed  by 
the  Commission  majority  and  tlio  Soviet  proposal 
of  February  25,  1949,  on  prohibition  of  atomic 
weapons  and  control  of  atomic  energy,  to  its  work- 
ing committee  for  further  consideration.  State- 
ments by  Soviet  Delegate  Jacob  Malik  dimmed  any 
hoi)es  that  the  Soviet  position  on  atomic  controls 
would  be  modified. 

The  Assembly  resolution,  opposed  only  by  the 
Soviet  bloc,  states  that  the  plan  worked  out  by  the 
Commission  constitutes  "the  necessarj'  basis"  for 
an  effective  system  of  atomic  control.  It  calls 
upon  the  five  members  of  the  Security  Council  and 
Canada  to  consult  and  report  back  to  the  Assembl}^ 
next  September  on  whether  any  basis  for  agree- 
ment has  been  reached. 

The  Soviet  proposals  call  for  the  drafting  of  two 
conventions,  as  opposed  to  the  one  advocated  by  the 
majority,  covering  the  prohibition  of  atomic 
weapons  and  the  establishment  of  a  control 
authority — both  conventions  to  come  into  force 
"simultaneously." 

Tlie  U.S.S.R.  has  repeatedly  stated  its  opposi- 
tion to  the  inspection  and  control  powers  which 
the  majority  believe  the  projected  atomic  authority 
should  have  in  order  to  prevent  clandestine  activi- 
ties. 

The  United  States,  supported  by  the  majority, 
holds  that  under  the  Soviet  plan  the  United  States 
would  be  obliged  to  destroy  its  atomic  weapons 
without  any  assurance  that  such  weapons  would 
not  be  produced  elsewhere  in  secret. 

Admission  of  New  IVIembers 

The  Security  Council's  Committee  on  Admission 
of  New  Members,  after  discussion  of  the  applica- 
tion of  Nepal,  a  small  kingdom  on  the  southern 
slopes  of  the  Himalayas,  decided  on  May  24  to 
request  the  Government  of  Nepal  to  supply  addi- 
tional information,  particularly  concerning 
Nepal's  sovereignty  and  independence.  This  pro- 
posal, made  by  the  French  delegate  and  chairman, 
was  approved  by  9  votes,  with  the  U.S.S.R.  and 
the  Ukraine  abstaining.  The  Commission  rejected 
a  Soviet  resolution  which  asked  the  Committee  to 
defer  action  on  Nepal  since  proof  was  lacking  as 
t<i  Nepal's  governmental  status,  independence,  and 
sovereignty. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


INTERNATIONAL  ORGANIZATIONS  AND  CONFERENCES 


U.S.  Delegations  to  International  Conferences 


Sixth  Session:  Council  of  Foreign  Ministers 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  18 
the  United  States  delegation  to  the  sixth  session 
of  the  Council  of  Foreign  Ministers  scheduled  to 
convene  at  Paris  on  May  23, 1949.  The  delegation 
is  as  follows : 

United  States  Memier 

Dean  Acheson,  Secretary  of  State 

Advisers 

Jacob  D.  Beam 

Charles  E.  Bohlen 

Qerard  B.  Crook,  Lieutenant  Colonel,  U.S.A. 

Goldthwaite  H.  Dorr 

John  Foster  Dulles 

Sidney  F.  Glffin,  Colonel,  USAF 

Wesley  C.  Haraldson 

Edwin  S.  Hartshorn,  Lieutenant  Colonel,  U.S.A. 

Philip  C.  Jessup,  Alternate 

Carter  B.  Magruder,  Major  General,  U.S.A. 

Robert  D.  Murphy,  Deputy  for  Germany 

Paul  H.  Nitze 

Fritz  Oppenheimer 

G.  Frederick  Reinhardt 

Jacques  J.  Reinstein 

Howard  Trivers 

Charles  W.  Tost 

Press  Relations  Officer 
Michael  J.  McDermott 

Public  Affairs  Officer 
Lloyd  A.  Lehrbas 

Secretary  General 
Warren  Kelchner 

Special  Assistants  to  the  United  States  Member 
Lucius  D.  Battle 
Robert  G.  Barnes 


Secretariat 

Vernice  Anderson 
Mildred  J.  Asbjornson 
Kenneth  R.  Boyle 
Allison  M.  Crump 
Adele  Dix 
Donald  B.  Eddy 
Barbara  Evans 
William  McH.  Franklin 
Walter  B.  Gates 
Edmund  S.  Glenn 
Bruce  Grainger 
Fred  L.  Hadsel 
Margaret  J.  Halden 
Henry  J.  Kellermann 
Millard  L.  Kenestrick 
William  H.  Ketner 
Alexander  Logofet 
Beatrice  F.  Ober 
Bradley  H.  Patterson 
Charles  A.  Patterson 
Richmond  C.  Reeley 
Alexis  B.  Tatistcheff 

May  29,   1949 


Staff 

Amelia  Allen 
M.  Teresa  Beach 
Madalyne  Burke 
Helen  E.  Campbell 
Stella  Adeline  Critzer 
Jeannette  Dastous 
Doris  Doyle 
Elizabeth  G.  Dudley 
Eleanor  Glenn 
Linda  M. Jacobson 
Margaret  Keller 
Gloria  Kishpaugh 
Edna  C.  Moyer 
Gladys  C.  Nelson 
Anna  Mae  Rgker 
Helen  Skouland 
Virginia  Terry 
Vivia  R,  Thompson 
Edith  B.  Waddell 
M.  Louise  Williams 


At  the  forthcoming  session,  to  be  held  at  the 
Palais  des  Marbre  Rose,  the  Council  of  Foreign 
Ministers  will  hold  further  discussions  on  the  Ger- 
man question.  The  last  session  of  the  Council  was 
held  at  London,  November  25-December,  1947. 

ILO:  Inland  Transport  Committee  Third  Session 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  17 
that  upon  the  recommendation  of  the  Secretary 
of  Labor,  the  following  persons  have  been  ap- 
pointed to  represent  the  United  States  at  the  third 
session  of  the  Inland  Transport  Committee  of  the 
International  Labor  Organization  (Ilo),  sched- 
uled to  be  held  at  Brussels,  May  17-28,  1949 : 

GOVEENMENT  REPRESENTATIVES 

Delegates 

Clara   M.   Beyer,  Associate  Director,   Bureau  of  Labor 

Standards,  Department  of  Labor 
William  J.  Patterson,  Commissioner,  Interstate  Commerce 

Commission 

Adviser 

Eric  Kocher,  Second  Secretary  and  Consul,  American 
Embassy,  Brussels 

Employee  Repeesentative8 

Delegates 

L.  W.  Horning,  Vice  President,  New  York  Central  Rail- 
road System,  New  York 

Ted  V.  Rodgers,  Honorary  Chairman,  American  Trucking 
Association,  Inc.,  Scranton 

WOBKEE  REPEESENTATIVES 

Delegates 

Joseph  J.  Kehoe,  Representative,  Amalgamated  Associa- 
tion of  Street  and  Electric  Railway  Employees, 
Chicago 

A.  E.  Lyon,  Executive  Secretary-Treasurer,  Railway  La- 
bor Executives  Association,  Washington,  D.  C. 

The  agenda  of  the  meeting  includes  a  general 
report  dealing  particularly  with  the  action  taken 
by  the  various  countries  to  implement  the  con- 
clusions of  the  second  session  of  the  Committee,  the 
action  taken  by  the  International  Labor  Office  to 
follow  up  the  studies  and  inquiries  proposed  by 
the  Committee,  and  the  developments  and  recent 
events  in  the  inland-transport  industry.  Other 
items  on  the  agenda  will  be  concerned  with  the  de- 
casualization  of  dock  labor,  the  protection  of  young 
workers  on  inland  waterways,  and  the  technical 
methods  of  selection  of  workers  for  the  inland- 
transport  industry. 


The  Inland  Transport  Committee  is  one  of  the 
nine  committees  established  by  the  Jix>  to  meet  the 
need  for  dealing  with  the  special  problems  of  the 
si:)ecific  industries. 

Discussions  on  Scientific  Investigation 
of  Tuna  in  Tropical  America 

The  Secretary  of  State  on  May  20  appointed  a 
delegation  to  hold  discussions  with  representatives 
of  Costa  Rica  looking  toward  the  conclusion  of 
a  convention  for  the  scientific  investigation  of  tuna 
in  the  tropical  American  area,  similar  to  tliat  re- 
cently negotiated  with  Mexico.  The  meetings  will 
take  place  in  Washington  commencing  Monday, 
May  23. 

Delegates 

Dr.  Wilbert  M.  Chapman,  Chairman,  Special  Assistant  for 
Fisheries  to  the  Under  Secretary  of  State 

Milton  C.  James,  Assistant  Director  of  the  Fish  and 
Wildlife  Service,  Department  of  the  Interior 

Adviners 

Richard    S.   Crol<pr,   Chief  of  the   California  Bureau   of 

Marine  Fisheries 
Arnie  J.  Suomela,  Master  Fish  Warden  of  Oregon 
Fredericli  J.  Cunningham,  Second  Secretary  of  the  United 

States  Embassy  at  San  Jos6,  Costa  Rica 
Warren  F.  Looney,  Fred  G.  Heins,  and  Fred  E.  Taylor  of 

tlie  Department  of  State  in  Washington,  D.C. 
Donald  J.  Chaney,  Chief  Counsel  of  the  Fish  and  Wildlife 

Service,  Department  of  the  Interior 

This  conference  will  be  a  further  step  in  a  pro- 
gram of  cooperating  with  other  countries  in  the 
sound  management  and  utilization  of  the  high- 
seas  fisheries  in  which  citizens  of  this  country 
participate. 

Royal  Sanitary  Institute  Health  Congress 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  20 
the  United  States  delegation  to  the  Health  Con- 
gress of  the  Royal  Sanitary  Institute  which  is 
scheduled  to  be  held  at  Brighton,  England,  May 
23-27,  1949.     The  delegation  is  as  follows: 

Chairman 

Senior  Surgeon  Arthur  S.  Osborne,  Medical  Officer  in 
Charge,  United  States  Public  Health  Service,  Ameri- 
can Embassy,  London 

Delegates 

Assistant  Surgeon  General  Bruce  D.  Forsyth,  Chief,  Den- 
tal Division,  Public  Health  Service,  Federal  Security 
Agency 

Senior  Surgeon  G.  Halsey  Hunt,  Assistant  Chief,  Division 
of  Hospitals,  Public  Health  Service,  Federal  Security 
Agency 

Barton  I*.  .lenks,  Housing  Adviser,  United  States  Delega- 
tion to  the  Ecimomic  Commission  for  Europe,  Geneva. 

Col.  Don  Longfellow,  MC,  Chief,  Preventive  Medicine 
Division,  Office  of  The  Surgeon  General,  Department 
of  the  Army 

Nurso  Director  Pearl  Mclver,  Chief,  Office  of  Public  Health 
Nursing,  Public  Health  Service,  Federal  Security 
Agency 

692 


Felix  E.  Moore,  Jr.,  .\cting  Chief,  Office  of  Statistical  Re- 
search, National  Heart  Institute,  National  Institutes 
of  Health,  Bethesda,  Maryland 

Col.  Jay  F.  Game),  MC,  United  States  Air  Force 

The  Congress  will  be  divided  into  the  following 
sections:  (1)  preventive  medicine;  (2)  engineer- 
ing and  architecture;  (3)  maternal  and  child 
health;  (4)  veterinary  medicine;  (5)  food  and 
nutrition;  (6)  housing  and  town  planning;  (7) 
tropical  medicine;  and  (8)  hygiene  in  industry. 
Scientific  papers  on  these  subjects  will  be  pre- 
sented by  delegates  from  the  various  coimtries. 

This  Congress  will  be  the  fifty-fifth  meeting  of 
its  type  since  the  founding  of  the  Royal  Sanitary 
Institute  73  years  ago.  The  Institute  is  the  lead- 
ing public  health  society  of  the  British  Common- 
wealth and  could  be  considered  as  the  British 
counterpart  of  the  American  Public  Health  As.so- 
ciation.  At  these  animal  Congresses  the  Institute 
brings  together  workers  in  public  health  and  sani- 
tation from  all  parts  of  the  world.  The  last  Con- 
gress, held  at  Harrogate,  England.  May  24—28, 

1948,  had  an  attendance  of  over  2.400. 

Whaling  Commission  First  International  Meeting 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  20 
the  United  States  delegation  to  the  first  meeting 
of  the  International  Whaling  Commission  which 
is  scheduled  to  convene  at  London  on  May  30, 

1949.  The  delegation  is  as  follows : 


Dr.  A.  Remington  Kellogg,  Director,  National  Museum, 
Smithsonian    Institution,   Washington,   D.C. 

.Idn'frrs 

Charles  I.  Bevans,  Deputy  Assistant  to  the  Legal  Adviser, 
Officer  of  Treaty  Affairs,  Department  of  State 

Dr.  Hilary  J.  Deason,  Cliief,  Office  of  Foreign  .-Vctivities, 
Fish  and  Wildlife  Service,  Department  of  the  Interior 

The  forthcoming  meeting  is  being  convened  by 
the  Government  of  the  United  Kingdom  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  International  Convention  for 
the  Regulation  of  Whaling.  The  convention, 
which  entered  into  force  on  November  10,  1948, 
was  formulated  at  the  International  Whaling  Con- 
ference held  at  Washington,  D.C,  in  December 
1946.  It  is  expected  that  the  12  countries  which 
have  ratified  or  adhered  to  the  convention,  namely, 
Australia,  Canada,  France,  Iceland.  Netherlands, 
Norway,  Panama,  Sweden,  Union  of  South  Africa, 
Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics,  United  King- 
dom, and  the  United  States,  will  be  represented  at 
the  meeting.  In  addition,  it  is  expected  that  ob- 
servers will  be  present  from  other  governments 
which  have  signed  the  convention  but  have  not  as 
yet  ratified. 

The  meeting  will  be  concerned  primarily  with 
organizational  procedures  governing  the  work  of 
the  Commission  and  arrangements  for  the  collec- 
tion, coordination,  and  interpretation  of  whaling 
statistics. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


I 


Seventh  International  Congress  on  Rheumatic 

Diseases 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  17 
the  United  States  delegation  to  the  Seventh  Inter- 
national Congress  on  Rheumatic  Diseases,  which 
is  scheduled  to  be  held  at  New  York  City  May  30- 
June  3,  19i9.  The  United  States  delegation  is  as 
follows : 

Chairman 

Joseph  W.  Mountin,  M.  D.,  Assistant  Surgeon  General,  As- 
sociate Cliief,  Bureau  of  State  Services,  U.S.  Public 
Health  Service,  Federal  Security  Agency 


Walter  Bauer,  M.  D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Medicine, 
Harvard  Medical  School,  Boston 

John  K.  Cullen,  Colonel,  M.C.,  USAF,  Surgeon,  Fort  Fran- 
cis E.  Warren,  Cljeyenne 

Augustus  M.  Davison,"  Lt.  Colonel,  M.C.,  U.S.A.,  Chief  of 
Rheumatology,  Army  and  Navy  General  Hospital,  Hot 
Springs  National  Park,  Arkansas 

Richard  H.  Freyberg,  M.  D.,  President,  American  Rheuma- 
tism Association,  .321  East  42nd  Street,  New  York 

Charles  H.  Gingles,  Lt.  Colonel,  M.C.,  U.S.A.,  Acting  Chief, 
Medical  Consultants  Division,  Office  of  the  Surgeon 
General,  Department  of  the  Army 

John  R.  McDride,  Colonel,  M.C.,  USAF,  Chief  of  Medical 
Service,  Station  Hospital,  Scott  Air  Force  Ba.se,  Belle- 
ville, Illinois 

Currier  McEv^en,  M.  D.,  Dean,  New  York  University  Col- 
lege of  Medicine,  477  First  Avenue,  New  York 

Joseph  Ney,  M.  D.,  Secretary,  National  Research  Council 
Committee  for  Survey  of  Research  on  Rheumatic  Dis- 
eases. 2101  Constitution  Avenue,  Washington,  D.C. 

Leon  J.  Numainvllle,  Lt.  Colonel,  M.C..  U.S.A.,  Assistant 
Chief  of  Medical  Service,  William  Beaumont  General 
Hcspital,  El  Paso 

Thomas  E.  Fatten,  Jr.,  Colonel,  M.C.,  U.S.A.,  Assistant 
Chief,  Preventive  Medicine  Division,  Office  of  the 
Surgeon  General,  Department  of  the  Army 

Mark  P.  Schultz,  M.D.,  Medical  Director,  Chief,  Unit  of 
Rheumatic  Fever  and  Allied  Diseases,  National  In- 
stitutes of  Health,  U.S.  Public  Health  Service,  Federal 
Security  Agency 

John  Ridley  Seal,  Lt.  Commander,  M.C.,  USN,  Officer  in 
Charge  of  the  Naval  Medical  Research  Unit  No.  4, 
Naval  Training  Center,  Great  Lakes,  Illinois 

Kuth  Wichelhausen,  M.D.,  Department  of  Medicine  and 
Surgery,  Veterans  Administration  Hospital,  Wash- 
ington, D.C. 

Charles  T.  Young,  Colonel,  M.D.,  U.S.A.,  Chief  of  Medi- 
cal Service,  Army  and  Navy  General  Hospital,  Hot 
Springs  National  Park,  Arkansas 

The  American  Rheumatism  Association  will  act 
as  host  at  the  Congress,  which  is  sponsored  by  the 
International  League  Against  Rheumatism.  The 
Association  was  organized  in  1934  for  the  purpose 
of  increasing  and  disseminating  knowledge  of 
arthritis,  fibi'ositis,  rheumatic  fever,  gout,  and 
other  rheumatic  diseases. 

The  agenda  of  the  Congress  will  concern  itself 
with  all  phases  of  the  rheumatism  problem  includ- 
ing its  medical,  social,  and  economic  aspects.  The 
findings  of  recent  research  concerning  physiology 
of  tissues  affected  by  rheumatic  diseases  will  also 
be  jDresented. 

i  May  29,   7949 


ILO  Governing  Body,  109th  and  110th  Sessions 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  20 
that  the  President  has  approved  the  designation 
of  Philip  M.  Kaiser,  Director,  Office  of  Interna- 
tional Labor  Relations,  Department  of  Labor,  as 
representative  of  the  Government  of  the  United 
States  on  the  Governing  Body  of  the  International 
Labor  Office.  Mr.  Kaiser's  nomination  was  sub- 
mitted to  the  President  by  the  Secretary  of  State 
upon  the  recommendation  of  the  Secretary  of 
Labor.  Mr.  Kaiser  will  attend  the  109th  and  110th 
sessions  of  the  Governing  Body  at  Geneva,  May 
27-June  8,  and  June  29-July  3, 1949,  respectively. 
Walter  M.  Kotschnig,  Chief,  Division  of  United 
Nations  Economic  and  Social  Affairs,  Department 
of  State,  has  been  designated  by  the  President  as 
substitute  United  States  Government  representa- 
tive to  these  two  sessions.  In  addition,  Val  R. 
Lorwin,  Cliief,  European  Section,  Division  of 
International  Labor  and  Social  Affairs,  Depart- 
ment of  State,  and  an  officer  of  the  Department  of 
Labor  will  serve  as  advisers  to  the  goverrmient 
representative. 

The  Governing  Body  is  the  executive  organ  of 
the  International  Labor  Organization  (Ilo).  It 
meets  four  times  a  year  and  receives  reports  on  the 
activities  of  the  organization,  outlines  its  future 
work,  and  prepares  the  agenda  for  the  annual  ses- 
sions of  the  International  Labor  Conference.  Six- 
teen governments  are  represented  on  the  Govern- 
ing Body.  The  United  States  is  one  of  the  eight 
permanent  members. 


U.S.  Representative  to  Ruhr  Authority 
Meeting  Named 

[Released  to  the  press  May  17] 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  17 
that  the  President  has  appointed  Wayne  G.  Jack- 
son as  the  Acting  United  States  Representative  at 
the  organizational  meetings  of  the  Council  of  the 
International  Authority  for  the  Ruhr,  scheduled 
to  open  at  London  on  May  20, 1949. 

Mr.  Jackson  is  Special  Assistant  to  the  Director 
of  the  Office  of  European  Affairs,  specializing  in 
European  economic  matters. 

The  agreement  for  the  establishment  of  an  In- 
ternational Authority  for  the  Ruhr  was  signed 
at  London  on  April  28,  1949,  in  accordance  with 
the  decision  reached  by  the  Foreign  Ministers  at 
their  recent  meeting  in  Washington.^  Parties  to 
the  agreement  are  the  United  States,  United 
Kingdom,  France,  Belgium,  Netherlands,  and 
Luxembourg. 

■  Bulletin  of  May  8,  1949,  p.  592. 


Visit  of  President  Dutra  of  Brazil 


THE  RECORD  OF  THE  WEEK 


REMARKS  BY  PRESIDENT  TRUMAN 
WELCOMINGPRESIDENT  DUTRA  > 

Mr.  Pkksidknt.  I  aia  deliglited  to  welcome  you 
to  tlie  United  States  as  the  guest  of  the  people  of 
this  Nation.  I  personally  am  happy  to  be  able  to 
renew  our  acquaintanceship  and  to  reciprocate 
the  generous  hospitality  which  you  accorded  me 
on  my  visit  to  Brazil  in  1947.  I  sincerely  hope 
that  your  stay  in  the  United  States  will  prove  as 
enjoyable  to  you  as  my  trip  to  your  country  was 
to  me. 

This  is  the  first  time  a  Brazilian  chief  of  state 
has  visited  our  country  since  Dom  Pedro  II  at- 
tended the  Centennial  Exposition  at  Philadelphia 
in  1876.  He  captivated  the  people  of  the  United 
States  with  his  gracious  manner  and  lively  interest 
in  the  scientific  and  social  developments  that  char- 
acterized that  period  of  our  history.  I  trust  that 
you  will  find  the  contemporary  scene  equally  in- 
teresting and  significant. 

The  exchange  of  visits  between  the  heads  of 
state  of  Brazil  and  the  United  States  symbolizes 
the  cordial  relations  that  have  always  existed  be- 
tween our  two  countries.  Throughout  the  history 
of  the  two  nations,  our  relationship  has  been  one 
of  warm  friendship  and  mutual  helpfulness.  We 
have  fought  through  two  World  Wars  as  loyal 
allies.  In  peace  and  in  war,  Brazil  and  the  United 
States  have  been  secure  in  the  knowledge  that  we 
could  confidently  rely  upon  the  active  and  effective 
support  of  each  other. 


At  the  present  time,  when  the  world  is  still  dis- 
turbed by  fear  and  conflicting  ideologies,  it  is 
gratifying  to  know  that  Brazil  and  the  United 
States  are  exerting  their  constructive  efforts  in 
the  common  resolve  to  strengthen  democracy  and 
assure  world  peace  under  conditions  in  which  free- 
dom and  human  rights  will  flourish. 

Mr.  President,  all  of  us  in  this  country  are  hon- 
ored by  your  visit  as  the  Chief  Executive  of  a  great 
nation  and  a  great  people.  You  share  with  us  the 
principles  and  ideals  which  have  guided  our  coun- 
tries in  our  progress  toward  a  better  life  for  our 
people. 

I  know^  that  these  ideals  will  continue  to  inspire 
us  in  our  quest  for  peace  and  happiness  for  all 
mankind. 

STATEMENT  BY  SECRETARY  ACHESON 

[Released  to  the  press  May  18] 

This  afternoon  His  Excellency  President  Eurico 
Gaspar  Dutra  of  Brazil  will  arrive  in  Washington. 
It  is  a  great  pleasure  for  me  to  join  in  welcoming 
him  to  our  country.  Brazil  and  the  United  States 
have  for  many  decades  been  joined  through  com- 
mon ideals  and  principles.  During  this  long  pe- 
riod relations  between  the  two  countries  have 
reflected  a  sameness  of  purpose  and  desire,  charac- 
terized by  a  cordial,  never  varying  spirit  of  co- 
operation and  mutual  help.  I  am  confident  that 
the  visit  of  the  very  distinguished  President  of 
our  great  sister  nation  will  serve  to  refresh  and 
strengthen  these  traditional  bonds. 


The  Presidents  of  the  U.S.  and  Brazil  Discuss  Fostering 
of  Economic  Development  and  Social  Progress 


[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  May  21] 

The  President  of  Brazil  and  the  President  of  the 
United  States  are  associated  in  their  approval  of 
the  following  statements: 

The  President  of  the  United  States  of  Brazil 
and  the  President  of  the  United  States  of  America 
have  met  in  Washington  and  have  discussed  at 
length  the  desirability  of  fostering  economic  de- 

'  Slade  at  the  National  Airport  in  Washington  on  May  18, 
1!M!),  and  released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  on  the 
same  date. 


velopment  and  social  progress  through  the  mu- 
tually beneficial  interchange  of  technological  data 
and  trained  specialists  of  all  types,  as  well  as 
through  financial  and  economic  cooperation. 
These  conversations  have  been  inspired  by  the  tra- 
ditional and  unfaltering  friendship  which  has 
prevailed  for  more  than  a  century  in  the  relations 
between  the  two  countries. 

The  recently  published  report  of  the  Joint 
Brazil-United  States  Technical  Mission,  which 
outlines  a  program  of  economic  development  for 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Brazil,  was  discussed.  In  reply  to  the  expression 
of  appreciation  by  President  Dutra  for  services 
given  by  North  American  experts  with  this  report, 
President  Truman  emphasized  the  past  record  of 
interdependence  of  the  two  countries,  in  times  of 
peace  and  war,  and  assui-ed  the  Brazilian  Presi- 
dent that  the  United  States  is  now,  and  will  con- 
tinue to  be,  most  interested  in  the  further  de- 
velopment of  his  country,  either  through  the 
implementation  of  the  recommendations  made  in 
the  joint  report  or  in  other  fields  of  related  en- 
deavor. It  was  suggested  that  technical  discus- 
sions regarding  this  report  might  take  place  later 
in  the  year  at  the  time  of  the  visit  of  the  Brazilian 
Minister  of  Finance  to  the  United  States. 

President  Dutra  mentioned  the  need  of  foreign 
private  investment  in  Brazil.  The  two  Presidents 
recognized  the  important  role  of  private  invest- 
ment in  economic  development  and  social  progress. 
Accordingly,  they  have  instructed  technical  ex- 
perts of  their  respective  governments  to  commence 
immediately  the  negotiation  of  an  appropriate 
treaty  that  would  stimulate  the  mutually  beneficial 
flow  of  private  investment. 

The  two  Presidents  were  also  fully  agreed  that 
a  comprehensive  joint  study  of  the  tax  relations 
between  the  two  countries  would  be  helpful.  It 
was  decided  that  conversations  on  this  subject 
should  be  held  with  a  view  toward  negotiating  a 
convention  between  the  two  countries,  similar  to 
those  already  in  force  between  the  United  States 
and  other  countries,  which  will,  it  is  hoped,  elimi- 
nate many  of  the  factors  that  result  in  double 
taxation. 

President  Dutra  also  pointed  to  the  great  need 
in  Brazil  for  trained  technicians  and  specialists  of 


all  types.  He  was  assured  that  every  effort  would 
be  made  to  meet  Brazil's  requirements  in  the  field 
of  technical  cooperation. 

The  two  Presidents  recognized  the  possibility  of 
financing  through  public  lending  agencies  appro- 
priate development  projects  not  suited  to  private 
financing,  such  as  those  projects  which  have  al- 
ready been  accepted  for  financing  by  the  Interna- 
tional Bank  for  Reconstruction  and  Development 
and  the  Export-Import  Bank.  President  Truman 
assured  President  Dutra  that  requests  from  Brazil 
would  in  the  future,  as  in  the  past,  receive  the 
most  attentive  consideration  of  the  United  States 
Government. 

Negotiation  of  U.S.-Brazil  Cultural 
Treaty  Approved 

Statement  hy  President  Trrnnan  and  President 
Dutra 

[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  May  21] 

The  historical  record  of  relations  between  Bra- 
zil and  the  United  States  reflects  cordial  and  un- 
broken friendship  and  cooperation.  During  the 
present  visit  of  Brazilian  President  Dutra,  he  and 
the  President  of  the  United  States  have  reviewed 
this  admirable  record  and  have  discussed  means 
through  which  relations  between  the  two  states 
might  be  improved  and  broadened.  In  this  con- 
nection both  Presidents  have  agreed  that  a  cul- 
tural convention,  a  treaty  which  would  encourage 
and  further  stimulate  the  present  cultural  ex- 
change between  the  two  countries,  would  be  de- 
sirable and  have  given  their  approval  to  the  nego- 
tiation of  such  an  instrument. 


Developments  in  the  "Point  4"  Program 

STATEMENT  BY  SECRETARY  ACHESON 


[Released  to  the  press  May  18] 

The  program  of  technical  cooperation  is  still 
under  discussion  in  the  Executive  Branch.  As 
revisions  are  still  taking  place,  I  cannot  give  spe- 
cific figures.  The  range  of  cost  estimates  given  in 
stories  published  during  the  last  three  months  in- 
dicate correctly,  however,  that  the  cost  of  this  pro- 
gram is  expected  to  be  modest.  The  Bureau  of  the 
Budget  has  participated  and  has  been  consulted  in 
much  of  the  planning  on  the  program. 

The  technical  cooperation  program  being  pre- 
pared is  an  illustrative  one,  indicating  the  kinds 
of  technical  assistance  that  are  known  to  be  needed 
in  other  countries,  and  the  kinds  and  amounts  of 
activities  considered  to  be  feasible  in  the  first  year 
of  operations.    The  exact  details  of  the  program 

tAay  29,   1949 


will  not  be  fixed  until  after  negotiations  have  been 
carried  out  with  the  countries  wishing  to  partici- 
pate. 

For  another  reason  any  program  must  be  tenta- 
tive. The  United  Nations  and  specialized  agen- 
cies have  not  yet  formally  approved  the  programs 
which  they  would  be  prepared  to  undertake  in  the 
technical  cooperation  field.  Until  it  is  known  what 
they  can  undertake  and  what  magnitude  of  contri- 
butions other  governments  may  make  to  the  United 
Nations  and  specialized  agency  programs,  the 
exact  nature  of  the  program  and  the  cost  to  the 
United  States  Goverimient  cannot  be  precisely 
determined. 

The  amount  programmed  for  a  particular  region 
does  not  bear  any  simple  relationship  to  the  po- 


litical  importance  of  that  area  or  to  the  value  to 
the  area  of  the  assistance  received  hy  it.  The  needs 
for  particular  types  of  technical  assistance  are 
different  in  different  areas.  One  area's  most  ur- 
gent need  may  be  for  engineering  assistance  in 
planning  flood  control  and  irrigation  projects, 
while  another  area's  first  need  rnay  be  basic  edu- 
cation. The  cost  of  these  two  programs  may  be 
quite  different,  although  each  is  equally  important 
to  the  country  receiving  it.  In  considering  techni- 
cal cooperation  activities  in  Europe  and  its  de- 
pendencies, account  must  be  taken  of  the  fact  that 
the  ECA  already  has  a  substantial  program 
planned  for  Europe  and  its  dependencies,  and 
Point-4  programs  in  these  areas  would  simply 
sui)plcment  ECA  programs  and  would  therefore 
appear  smaller  than  in  other  regions. 

The  Executive  Brancli  is  actively  considering 
possible  measures  to  promote  the  flow  of  interna- 
tional investment,  but  it  is  too  early  to  discuss  the 
nature  of  tlie  measures  to  be  recommended  to  the 
Congress,  if  any. 

The  I-oint-4  program  will  be  ready  for  presen- 
tation to  Congress  during  this  session.  Depart- 
ment officers  are  discussing  with  Congressional 
leaders  when  it  might  best  be  fitted  into  the  al- 
ready heavy  ]egislali\e  schedule. 

Pacific  Pact  Corresponding  to  North  Atlantic 
Treaty  Untimely 

Statement  hy  Secretary  Acheson 

[Released  to  the  press  Ma.v  18] 

While  the  conclusion  of  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty  does  not  mean  any  lessening  of  our  inter- 
est in  the  security  of  other  areas,  as  I  have  taken 
pains  to  make  clear  on  several  occasions,  the 
United  States  is  not  currently  considering  partici- 
pation in  any  further  special  collective  defense 
arrangements  other  than  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty. 

Recently  there  have  been  a  number  of  public 
suggestions  about  a  Pacific  pact  modeled  after 
the  North  Atlantic  Treaty.  It  seems  to  me  that 
some  of  those  who  make  such  suggestions  may 
not  have  given  study  to  the  evolution  of  the  North 
Atlantic  Treaty,  which  was  largely  the  product 
of  a  specific  set  of  circumstances  peculiar  to  Eu- 
rope and  the  Atlantic  comnninity — the  logical  cul- 
mination of  a  long  series  of  developments.  Prac- 
tical plans  for  effective  collaboration  for  defense 
were  in  progress  among  the  principal  countries 
of  Western  Europe  long  before  steps  were  taken 
to  extend  such  collaboration  to  provide  for  the 
security  of  the  North  Atlantic  as  an  integrated 
whole.  There  thus  existed  a  solid  foundation  on 
which  to  build. 

Wliile  it  is  true  that  there  are  serious  dangers 
to  world  peace  existing  in  the  situation  in  Asia, 
it  is  also  true,  as  Prime  Minister  Nehru  of  India 


stated  to  the  press  the  other  day,  that  a  Pacific 
defense  pact  could  not  take  shape  until  present 
internal  conflicts  in  Asia  were  resolved.  He  was 
quoted  as  going  on  to  say  that  the  time  was  not 
ripe  for  a  pact  corresponding  to  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty,  owing  to  these  conflicts.  Nehru's  view 
appears  to  be  an  objective  appraisal  of  the  actual, 
practical  possibilities  at  the  present  time. 


Frontier  Violations  Basic  Issue  in 
Greek  Situation 

[Released  to  the  press  May  20] 
A  Tass  despatch  has  referred  to  conversations 
on  Greece  among  representatives  of  the  Soviet 
Union,  the  United  Kingdom,  and  the  United  States 
during  the  recent  General  Assembly.  The  follow- 
ing is  a  brief  summary  of  the  facts : 

On  April  2G,  during  the  course  of  informal  din- 
ner table  conversations  at  the  home  of  Trygve  Lie, 
various  matters  on  the  agenda  of  the  United  Na- 
tions were  discussed  by  Ajidrei  Gromyko,  Hector 
ilcNeil,  and  Dean  Rusk.  At  one  point  in  this  con- 
versation, Mr.  Rusk  expressed  the  hope  that  the 
three  governments  would  use  their  influence  to 
bring  about  a  settlement  of  the  Greek  question,  in 
order  that  the  Greek  people  might  concentrate  on 
the  reconstruction  of  their  country.  Mr.  Gromyko 
commented  that  if  foreign  troops  were  withdrawn 
the  matter  would  solve  itself.  Mr.  Rusk  replied 
that  our  military  assistance  to  Greece  had  become 
necessary  because  of  conditions  created  in  Greece 
by  armed  rebellion  against  the  Greek  Government 
by  the  guerrillas,  directly  assisted  by  Greece's  three 
northern  neighbors.  Mr.  Rusk  also  called  Mr. 
Gromyko's  attention  to  the  efforts  being  made  by 
the  United  Nations  Special  Committee  on  the 
Balkans  (Unscob)  and  to  Mr.  Evatt's  conciliation 
efforts  at  Lake  Success.  Mr.  Gromyko's  reaction 
to  these  United  Nations  efforts  in  the  matter  fol- 
lowed the  same  negative  lines  employed  by  the 
Soviet  delegation  in  the  course  of  the  Greek  debate 
in  the  United  Nations. 

Shortly  thereafter  Mr.  Gromyko  asked  to  see 
Mr.  McNeil  and  Mr.  Rusk  who  called  upon  him  on 
May  4.  Mr.  Gromyko  referred  to  the  previous 
"vague"  conversation  and  said  he  wished  to  dis- 
cuss the  matter  further  in  more  concrete  terms. 
Mr.  Rusk  and  Mr.  McNeil  made  it  clear  that  such 
an  informal  conversation  should  imply  no  change 
in  the  forum  for  discussing  the  (ireek  question 
from  existing  United  Nations  channels. 

Mr.  Gromyko  then  referred  to  certain  proposals 
which  had  been  made  in  Prague  by  Mr.  Porphy- 
roghenis  of  the  Greek  guerrilla  junta.  Mr.  Gro- 
myko characterized  these  proposals  as  calling  for 
a  cease-fire,  a  general  amnesty,  and  new  elections, 
in  the  administration  of  which  the  guerrilla  forces 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


would  participate.  Mr.  Kusk  reiterated  that  the 
main  issue  was  the  illegal  furnishing  of  assistance 
across  Greece's  northern  frontier  to  rebels  in 
Greece  and  that  the  United  Nations  was  the  appro- 
priate forum  for  discussion  of  that  issue. 

It  is  of  interest  to  note  that  on  May  7,  three  days 
after  this  conversation,  the  Greek  guerrilla  radio 
broadcast  that  communications  in  the  foreign  press 
on  the  guerrilla  proposals  "do  not  correspond  with 
the  views  of  the  provisional  democratic  govern- 
ment .  .  .  which  has  not  yet  officially  expounded 
anywhere  its  concrete  views  on  this  question." 

McNeil  and  Rusk  again  saw  Gromyko  briefly  on 
May  14  at  the  plenary  session  of  the  General  As- 
sembly at  Flushing  Meadows.  In  this  conversa- 
tion Rusk  and  McNeil  made  it  clear  that  while  we 
would  welcome  the  restoration  of  peace  in  Greece, 
we  could  not  negotiate  on  the  matter  except  in  an 
appropriate  international  forum  which  provided 
for  full  participation  by  the  Greek  Government. 
Rusk  again  specifically  referred  to  Unscob  and  to 
Mr.  Evatt's  conciliation  efforts.  He  stated  further 
that  the  main  issue  was  the  illegal  activities  of 
Greece's  northern  neighbors,  particularly  Albania 
and  Bulgaria,  in  furnishing  assistance  to  rebels  in 
Greece. 

At  the  close  of  the  above  conversation,  Mr. 
Gromyko  said  that  he  had  three  other  points  which 
had  not  been  mentioned  earlier.  First,  the  Soviet 
Union  would  be  willing  to  participate  with  the 
great  powers  in  the  supervision  of  a  new  Greek 
election ;  second,  the  Soviet  Union  would  be  will- 
ing to  join  with  the  great  powers  in  a  commission 
to  "control"  the  northern  frontier  of  Greece ;  and 
third,  all  foreign  military  assistance,  both  materiel 
and  personnel,  would  have  to  be  withdrawn  from 
Greece.    There  have  been  no  further  conversations. 

In  the  Department's  view,  the  basic  issue  in  the 
Greek  situation  is  the  violation  of  Greece's  north- 
ern frontier  by  military  and  other  assistance  to 
the  rebel  forces  in  Greece.  This  illegal  foreign 
intervention  has  been  repeatedly  exposed  by  the 
competent  organs  of  the  United  Nations  and  de- 
nounced by  an  overwhelming  majority  of  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  as  endangering  the  peace  and  as 
inconsistent  with  the  purposes  and  principles  of 
the  Charter.  The  United  Nations  has  had  this 
problem  before  it  since  1946  and  has  established 
the  means  for  settling  it.  The  General  Assembly 
elected  both  the  Soviet  Union  and  Poland  to  mem- 
bership on  the  present  United  Nations  Special 
Committee  on  the  Balkans,  but  both  have  refused 
to  take  their  seats.  The  action  of  the  Soviet  Union 
in  blocking  effective  action  in  the  Security  Council, 
in  refusing  to  participate  in  the  effort  of  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  to  bring  about  a  settlement,  and  in 
lending  encouragement  to  the  illegal  operations 
which  have  disturbed  the  peace,  explain  why  peace 
has  not  yet  been  achieved. 

Internal  questions  such  as  an  amnesty  and  elec- 
tions are  matters  for  determination  by  the  Greek 
Government.    We  believe  that  that  Government 


has  made  a  sincere  and  genuine  effort  to  settle  the 
matter  with  the  help  of  the  United  Nations  and 
in  a  manner  consistent  with  the  security  of  Greece. 
United  States  military  assistance  became  necessary 
because  of  the  direct  threat  to  the  independence 
and  integrity  of  Greece.  It  was  in  direct  response 
to  the  situation  created  by  the  illegal  intervention 
of  Greece's  northern  neighbors.  So  long  as  that 
situation  continues,  the  United  States  will  not 
relax  its  determination  to  assist  the  Greeks  in  pro- 
tecting themselves  against  this  form  of  aggression. 
We  would,  however,  welcome  a  bona  fide  effort 
by  the  Soviet  Union  to  remove  the  threat  to  the 
peace  and  security  of  the  Greek  people  and  hope 
that  it  will  use  its  influence  in  full  support  of  the 
United  Nations  in  seeking  a  settlement. 

At  no  time  during  any  of  the  informal  conversa- 
tions referred  to  above  was  any  suggestion  made 
that  the  Greek  question  be  discussed  in  the  Council 
of  Foreign  Ministers.  The  United  States  has  con- 
sistently taken  the  view  that  we  are  prepared  to 
discuss"  any  matter  with  the  Soviet  Union  in  the 
proper  forum;  in  the  case  of  the  Greek  question, 
it  is  the  United  Nations  in  which  the  Greek  Gov- 
ernment would  have  full  participation. 

Hungary  Violates  Peace  Treaty  in  Denying 
Freedom  in  Elections 

This  government  has  observed  attentively  the 
conduct  of  the  election,  held  on  May  15,  for  the 
Hungarian  Parliament.  It  is  clear  that  freedom 
of  political  opinion,  one  of  the  fundamental  free- 
doms specified  in  the  peace  treaty,  has  been  pro- 
tected by  the  Hungarian  Government  neither  in 
the  electoral  campaign  nor  in  the  election  itself. 
The  latter  was,  in  reality,  a  controlled  plebiscite 
reminiscent  of  those  staged  in  Nazi  Germany.  It 
has  produced  the  predicted  and  desired  mechanical 
result :  election  of  a  completely  Communist-domi- 
nated Parliament  and  endorsement,  however, 
meaningless,  of  the  political,  economic,  and  social 
program  of  the  Communist  Party. 

The  election  of  May  15  occurred  without  the 
participation  of  any  parties  outside  the  Commu- 
nist-controlled "Hungarian  People's  Independent 
Front,"  which  put  up  the  common  electoral  slate. 
The  attitude  of  the  Communist  leadership  in  this 
regard  was  frankly  admitted  by  Jozsef  Revai,  edi- 
tor of  Szahad  Nep,  the  official  Communist  news- 
paper in  Budapest,  when  he  stated  on  April  17  that 
"we  have  not  crushed  the  enemies  of  democracy  in 
order  to  resuscitate  them  at  the  elections."  These 
"enemies  of  democracy"  were  all  the  political  par- 
ties which  would  not  agree  to  accept  Communist 
dictation.  They  have  been  ruthlessly  eliminated 
from  Hungarian  political  life. 

At  the  same  time,  the  Hungarian  Communist  au- 
thorities set  out  to  intimidate  individual  voters 
from  expressing  their  opposition  either  by  voting 
"no"  or  by  abstention  from  voting.     Before  the 


MaY  29,   J  949 


election,  house  wardens  and  electioneering  com- 
mittees under  Communist  control  subjected  pros- 
pective voters  to  interrogation  in  order  to  check 
their  political  views  and  material  circumstances 
and  to  make  sure  that  tliey  voted.  "Yes"  votes  for 
the  People's  Front  were  encouraged  by  Communist 
newspaper  threats  that  "those  failing  to  vote  are 
enemies  of  the  people"  and  by  the  absence  of  secret 
balloting.  Under  the  system  of  voting  which  was 
used,  an  affirmative  vote  required  only  that  the 
unmarked  ballot  be  folded,  placed  in  a  sealed 
envelope,  and  deposited  in  the  ballot  box.  To  cast 
a  negative  vote,  on  the  other  hand,  the  voter  had 
to  enter  the  votinf;  booth  in  order  to  mark  his  bal- 
lot. The  nature  of  the  vote  cast  was  therebv  imme- 
diately apparent  to  watchers  stationed  in  the  poll- 
ing room. 

The  Hungarian  people,  tlius  denied  the  exercise 
of  freedom  of  political  opinion  in  the  election  just 
concluded,  have  been  openly  deprived  of  the  right 
to  parliamentary  representation  of  their  own 
choosing.  The  Hungarian  Communist  authori- 
ties have  not  succeeded  in  creating  their  intended 
illusion  of  popular  support.  On  the  contrary,  by 
their  conduct  of  the  election  they  have  again 
drawn  the  world's  attention  to  the  totalitarian 
character  of  their  regime  and  to  their  flagrant 
violations  of  Hungary's  obligation  under  the  peace 
treaty  to  secure  to  the  Hungarian  people  the  en- 
joyment of  human  rights  and  of  the  fundamental 
freedoms. 

Educational  Exchange  Agreement  Signed 
With  Netherlands  Government 

[Released  to  the  press  May  17] 

The  Netherlands  Government  on  May  17  signed 
an  agreement  under  the  Fulbright  Act  with  the 
United  States,  putting  into  operation  the  program 
of  educational  exchanges  authorized  by  Public 
Law  .^SJ-  (70th  Congress) .  The  signing  took  place 
at  The  Hague,  with  Dr.  D.  U.  Stikker.  Nether- 
lands Minister  of  Foreign  Affairs,  representing 
the  Government  of  the  Kingdom  of  the  Nether- 
lands and  United  States  Ambassador  Herman  B. 
Baruch  representing  the  United  States.  This 
agreement  was  the  tenth  signed  under  the  Act. 

The  agreement  provides  for  a  United  States 
Educational  Foundation  in  the  Netherlands  to 
assi.st  in  the  administration  of  the  educational  pro- 
gram financed  from  certain  funds  resulting  from 
the  sale  of  surplus  property  to  that  country.  The 
present  agreement  provides  for  an  annual  pro- 
gram of  the  equivalent  of  250  thousand  dollars  in 
Netherlands  guilders  for  certain  educational  pur- 
poses. These  purposes  include  the  financing  of 
"studies,  research,  instruction,  and  other  educa- 
tional activities  of  or  for  citizens  of  the  United 
States  of  America  in  schools  and  institutions  of 
higher  learning  located  in  the  Netherlands,  Suri- 
nam, and  the  Netherlands  West  Indies,  or  of  the 
nationals  of  the  Netherlands,  Surinam,  and  the 


Netherlands  West  Indies  in  United  States  schools 
and  institutions  of  higher  learning  located  out- 
side the  continental  United  States  .  .  .  including 
payment  for  transportation,  tuition,  maintenance, 
and  other  expenses  incident  to  scholastic  activities; 
or  furnishing  transportation  for  nationals  of  the 
Netherlands,  Surinam,  and  the  Netherlands  West 
Indies  who  desire  to  attend  United  States  schools 
and  institutions  of  higher  learning  in  the  conti- 
nental United  States  .  .  .  whose  attendance  will 
not  deprive  citizens  of  the  United  States  of  Amer- 
ica of  an  opportunity  to  attend  such  schools  and 
institutions. 

The  Foundation  in  the  Netherlands  will  con- 
sist of  10  members,  the  honorary  chairman  of 
which  will  be  the  United  States  Ambassador  to  the 
Netherlands.  The  members  of  the  Foundation  will 
include  5  citizens  of  the  United  States  and  5  mem- 
bers who  are  nationals  of  the  Kingdom  of  the 
Netherlands. 

After  the  members  of  the  Foundation  in  the 
Netherlands  have  been  appointed,  information 
about  specific  opportunities  for  American  citizens 
to  pursue  study,  teaching,  or  research  in  that  coun- 
try will  be  made  public.  Further  inquiries  about 
those  opportunities  and  requests  for  application 
forms  should  be  addressed  to  the  following  three 
agencies :  Institute  of  International  Education,  2 
West  4.5th  Street,  New  York  19,  New  York  (for 
graduate  study) ;  United  States  Office  of  Educa- 
tion, Washington  25,  D.  C.  (for  teaching  in  na- 
tional elementary  and  secondary  schools) ;  and  the 
Conference  Board  of  Associated  Research  Coun- 
cils, 2101  Constitution  Avenue,  Washington  25, 
D.  C.  (for  teaching  at  the  college  level,  for  post- 
doctoral research,  and  for  teaching  in  American 
elementary  and  secondary  schools  in  the  Nether- 
lands, Surinam,  and  the  Netherlands  West  Indies) . 

Letters  of  Credence 

India 

The  newl]^  appointed  Ambassador  of  India, 
Shrimati  Vijaya  Lakshmi  Pandit,  presented  her 
credentials  to  the  President  on  May  12.  For 
texts  of  the  Ambassador's  remarks  and  the  Presi- 
dent's reply,  see  Department  of  State  press  release 
.•552  of  May  12,  1949. 

Lihena 

The  newly  appointed  Ambassador  of  Liberia, 
Charles  D.  B.  King,  presented  his  credentials  to 
the  President  on  May  12.  For  texts  of  the  Am- 
bassador's remarks  and  the  President's  reply,  see 
Department  of  State  press  release  351  of  May  12, 
1949. 

Venezuela 

The  newlj'  appointed  Ambassador  of  Venezuela, 
Sefior  Don  Jose  Rafael  Pocaterra,  presented  his 
letters  of  credence  to  the  President  on  April  26, 
1949.  For  texts  of  the  Ambassador's  remarks  and 
the  President's  reply,  see  Department  of  State 
press  release  290  of  April  26. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Significance  off  the  International  Wheat  Agreement 


STATEMENT  BY  WILLARD  L.  THORP' 
Assistant  Secretary  for  Economic  Affairs 


Representatives  of  the  Department  of  State  co- 
operated closely  with  officials  of  the  Department 
of  Agriculture  in  negotiating  the  International 
Wheat  Agi-eement.  I  am  therefore  especially 
glad  to  have  this  opportunity  of  appearing  in 
support  of  the  agreement. 

becretary  Brannan  has  described  the  principal 
provisions  of  the  agreement  and  has  emphasized 
its  importance  to  American  agriculture.  I  wish 
to  emphasize  the  contribution  it  would  make  to 
the  realization  of  the  objectives  of  United  States 
foreign  policy.  My  remarks  will  be  directed  spe- 
cifically to  the  way  in  which  the  Wheat  Agreement 
would  further  each  of  the  following  objectives  of 
our  foreign  policy : 

1.  The  maintenance  of  stable  conditions. 

2.  The  encouragement  of  nondiscrimination. 

3.  The  development  of  a  general  policy  for  deal- 
ing with  international  commodity  surpluses. 

Stability  in  the  International  Wheat  Market 

The  preamble  of  the  International  Wheat 
Agreement  indicates  that  it  was  negotiated  with 
the  intention  of  overcoming  the  serious  hardships 
caused  to  producers  and  consumers  by  burden- 
some surpluses  and  critical  shortages  of  wheat. 
The  objectives  of  the  agreement,  as  its  first  article 
states,  are  to  assure  supplies  of  wheat  to  importing 
countries  and  markets  for  wheat  to  exporting 
countries  at  equitable  and  stable  prices.  By  as- 
suring the  flow  of  wheat  from  exporting  countries 
to  importing  countries,  the  agreement  should  dis- 
courage the  tendency  of  the  latter  to  build  up 
uneconomic  production  and  should  enable  the  ex- 
porting countries  to  find  markets  for  a  larger  part 
of  their  production.  It  should  accordingly  help 
to  bring  the  supply  and  demand  for  wheat  into 
closer  balance  and  should  both  discourage  the  ac- 
cumulation of  burdensome  wheat  surpluses  and 
provide  an  equitable  means  for  sharing  the  bur- 
dens of  such  surpluses,  if  they  do  develop. 

The  United  States  is  a  very  large  producer  of 
wheat,  and  burdensome  surpluses  would  be  a  seri- 
ous matter  to  us.  They  would  be  even  more  seri- 
ous to  certain  other  countries  whose  wealth  is  not 
so  gi-eat  as  ours  and  whose  exports  of  wheat  ac- 
count for  a  larger  proportion  of  their  national 
income. 

As  you  remember,  the  world  went  through  a  try- 
May  29,  1949 


ing  period  of  readjustment  following  the  disloca- 
tions of  the  First  World  War.  Attempts  made 
during  that  period  to  bring  wheat  supply  and  de- 
mand together  were  never  entirely  successful, 
however,  largely  because  the  efforts  of  producers, 
traders,  consumers,  and  governments  were  unco- 
ordinated, and  the  problem  was  generally  not 
attacked  through  international  means  on  a  suffi- 
ciently broad  front. 

The  International  Wlieat  Agreement  is  an  at- 
tempt to  meet,  through  an  international  program, 
the  surplus-wheat  problem  which  is  expected  to 
arise  as  an  aftermath  of  the  Second  World  War. 
Faced  with  the  prospect  of  a  burdensome  surplus 
in  wheat,  we  have,  through  the  Wheat  Agreement, 
set  limits  for  the  next  4  years  within  which  pro- 
ducers, consumers,  and  traders  can  plan  their 
individual  actions  with  confidence. 

The  agreement  recognizes  that  importing  coun- 
tries as  well  as  exporting  countries  have  a  stake 
in  a  predictable  wheat  market.  The  price  pro- 
visions of  the  agreement  are  drawn  in  such  a  way 
as  to  assure  not  only  that  the  prices  of  wheat 
covered  by  the  agreement  will  not  collapse  but  also 
that  they  will  not  soar  to  high  speculative  levels. 
Unfortunately,  two  important  wheat-producing 
countries  that  were  represented  at  the  conference, 
Argentina  and  the  U.S.S.R.,  were  unwilling  to 
participate  in  the  agreement  on  terms  considered 
fair  and  equitable  by  the  other  countries.  As  re- 
grettable as  their  absence  of  participation  is,  it 
does  not  constitute  a  valid  argument  against  the 
agreement.  The  choice  was  between  the  agree- 
ment without  these  countries  and  no  agreement. 
Fortunately,  its  structure  is  such  as  to  assure  its 
operation  without  their  participation.  The  agree- 
ment is  in  the  nature  of  a  multilateral  contract. 
It  does  not  purport  to  cover  all  international  trade 
in  wheat.  In  fact,  it  generally  does  not  cover  all 
the  wheat  trade  of  the  participating  countries. 
The  United  States,  Canada,  and  Australia  are  each 
expected  to  have  wheat  to  sell  in  addition  to  the 
quantity  which  they  are  committed  to  supply  under 
the  agreement,  and  the  importing  countries  par- 
ticipating in  the  agreement  are  expected  to  make 

'  Made  before  the  Subcommittee  of  the  Senate  Foreign 
Relations  Committee  on  May  19,  1940,  and  released  to  the 
press  on  the  same  date.  For  an  article  on  the  agreement 
by  Edward  G.  Cole,  see  Bulletin  of  Apr.  24,  1949,  p.  507, 
and  for  the  text  of  the  agreement,  see  Documents  and  State 
Papers  for  May  1949. 


purchases  outside  the  a^eenient.  The  quantity  of 
wheat  which  the  agreement  does  obligate  each 
country  to  purchase  or  to  sell  is  quite  definite,  how- 
ever, and  each  country  is  expected  to  keep  itself  in 
a  position  to  fulfill  this  commitment  before  enter- 
ing into  other  transactions  in  wheat. 

The  participants  in  the  agreement  have  thus 
undertaken  obligations  that  make  export  outlets 
certain  for  substantial  quantities  of  wheat  and  as- 
sure that  these  quantities  will  be  available  at  rea- 
sonable prices.  The  countries  which  are  not 
participating  in  the  agreement  have  no  such  assur- 
ance. With  this  hard  core  of  international  trade 
in  wheat  among  participating  countries  estab- 
lished, a  significant  contribution  will  have  been 
made  toward  greater  stability  in  the  world  wheat 
trade  generally. 

The  measure  of  stability  which  the  agreement 
would  assure  to  the  world  wheat  market  is  in  har- 
mony with  the  efforts  which  this  government  has 
made  and  which  it  is  continuing  to  make  toward 
economic  recovery  and  economic  stability  through- 
out the  world.  The  floor  that  the  agreement  would 
place  under  the  prices  of  a  very  substantial  part 
of  the  world's  trade  in  wheat  should  contribute 
significantly  to  the  maintenance  of  stable  condi- 
tions in  the  market  for  this  most  important  com- 
modity. At  the  same  time,  the  assurance  that  it 
provides  to  the  wheat-importing  countries  that  a 
substantial  portion  of  their  wheat  imports  can  be 
procured  at  prices  no  higher  than  the  maximum 
prices  which  it  establishes  should  mean  that  the 
financial  resources  which  wo  and  they  are  contrib- 
uting toward  their  economic  recovery  will  not  be 
dissipated  in  the  payment  of  excessive  wheat 
prices. 

Nondiscriminatory  Trade  in  Wheat 

Most  governments,  including  our  own,  are  com- 
mitted to  support  agricultural  prices  against 
substantial  declines.  Carrying  out  these  com- 
mitments may  create  difficulties  for  international 
trade.  In  the  absence  of  intergovernmental  agree- 
ment as  to  the  way  in  which  the  operation  of  the 
price-support  programs  of  one  country  will  affect 
those  of  another,  conflicts  which  lead  to  the  de- 
velopment of  discriminations  in  international 
trade  are  likely  to  arise.  Experience  has  taught 
us  that  attempts  by  individual  countries  to  solve 
their  surplus  agricultural  problems  by  programs 
which,  in  essence,  would  transfer  the  problems  to 
other  countries  are  not  likely  to  be  successful  but 
to  be  restrictive  of  international  trade  and  harmful 
to  international  relations  generally.  The  results 
of  such  attempts  in  the  past  have  normally  been 
the  encouragement  of  uneconomic  attempts  by 
some  countries  to  become  self-sufficient,  the  ac- 
cumulation of  burdensome  surpluses  in  others,  and 
the  disorganization  of  world  production  and  trade. 


Experience  has  also  shown  that  even  when  pro- 
ducers or  governments  have  sought  to  work  out  an 
agreed  solution  to  such  an  international  problem 
as  that  anticipated  in  wheat,  the  method  used  has 
often  tended  to  set  one  segment  of  the  economy, 
or  one  group  of  countries,  against  the  rest  of  the 
world.  For  example,  the  prewar  schemes  in  tin 
and  rubber  were  formulated  and  operated  pri- 
marily for  the  benefit  of  producers,  were  accord- 
ingly open  to  attack  by  consumers,  whose  interests 
they  largely  ignored,  and  were  restrictive  of  the 
volume  of  these  commodities  moving  in  interna- 
tional trade. 

The  Wheat  Agreement  was  negotiated  in  full 
recognition  of  past  experience.  It  was  formulated 
by  delegations  which  included  ample  representa- 
tion by  officials  responsible  for  the  wheat  programs 
of  the  countries  concerned.  The  agreement  should 
therefore  help  to  obviate  conflicts  that  might  other- 
wise develop  between  these  programs. 

P'urthermore,  the  agreement  was  negotiated  in 
a  conference  to  which  all  countries  which  were 
members  of  either  the  Food  and  Agriculture  Or- 
ganization of  the  United  Nations  or  of  the  United 
Nations  itself  were  invited,  and  most  of  the  coun- 
tries of  the  world  that  are  important  either  as 
producers  or  consumers  of  wheat  have  signed  it. 
Full  publicity  was  given  to  the  conference  and" 
that  part  of  the  documentation  of  the  conference 
which  could  not  be  made  available  for  public  dis- 
tribution while  the  conference  was  in  progress  has 
since  been  made  available. 

The  voting  provisions  of  the  agreement  are  such 
that  countries  participating  in  it  as  importers  and 
those  participating  as  exporters  will  have  an  equal 
voice,  thus  assuring  each  group  that  it  will  have 
an  ample  opportunity  to  safeguard  its  interests 
while  the  agreement  is  in  operation.  The  voting 
strength  of  individual  countries,  including  the 
United  States,  will  be  proportionate  to  the  quan- 
tity of  wheat  M-hich  they  guarantee  to  buy  or  sell 
under  the  agreement.  These  and  the  other  terms 
of  the  agreement  were  worked  out  through  a  bar- 
gaining process  under  which  each  nation  was  given 
an  opportunity  to  bring  its  views  to  bear  in  the 
determination  of  such  matters  as  the  shares  of  in- 
dividual countries  in  the  total  quantity  of  wheat 
covered  by  the  agreement  and  the  priceprovisions 
of  the  agreement.  The  agreement  thus  negotiated 
is  a  fair  bargain,  democratically  made,  and  should 
further  this  government's  policy  of  nondiscrimina- 
tion in  international  trade. 

Development  of  Commodity  Agreements  Policy 

The  general  trade  policy  which  this  govern- 
ment has  now  followed  for  many  years  is  directed 
toward  the  reduction  of  the  barriers  to  inter- 
national trade.  In  addition,  during  recent  years 
there  has  been  a  very  considerable  development 
of  thought  and  action,  especially  on  the  part  of 
the  executive  branch  of  the  Government,  looking 


Department  of  Slate  Bulletin 


toward  the  formulation  of  a  policy  for  dealing 
with  some  of  the  problems  of  surplus  agricultural 
production  through  intergovernmental  agree- 
ments. Such  agreements  have  come  to  be  looked 
upon  as  one  of  the  instruments  that  can  be  used 
to  prevent  or  relieve  burdensome  surpluses  of 
some  agricultural  commodities  while  at  the  same 
time  avoiding  the  harmful  effects  to  international 
trade,  including  special  restrictions,  which  have 
resulted  from  uncoordinated  national  actions  in 
the  past.  Such  agreements  are  not  considered  as 
a  complete  program  in  themselves  but  as  an  im- 
portant supplement  to  a  policy  aimed  at  the  de- 
velopment of  multilateral,  nondiscriminatory 
trade. 

Under  such  a  program,  intergovernmental  com- 
modity agreements  would  be  negotiated  only  in 
instances  where  international  conditions  of  bur- 
densome surplus  or  widespread  unemployment 
connected  with  the  commodity  were  in  existence 
or  clearly  anticipated  and  where  the  condition 
would  not  be  readily  corrected  by  normal  market 
forces  in  time  to  prevent  serious  hardship. 
Furthermore,  the  agreements  would  be  negotiated 
in  accordance  with  principles  which  would  assure 
that  they  would  not  have  the  restrictive  effects 
which  characterized  the  operation  of  many  of  the 
prewar  schemes.  In  other  words,  intergovern- 
mental commodity  agreements  would  not  be  ne- 
gotiated unless  conditions  of  burdensome  surplus 
and  the  threat  of  widespread  distress  among  small 
producers,  such  as  are  now  anticipated  in  wheat, 
were  actually  in  existence  or  expected  to  arise  in 
the  near  future.  Also,  the  agreements  when  nego- 
tiated would  provide,  as  the  Wheat  Agreernent 
now  provides,  for  such  safeguards  as  a  limited 
duration  for  the  agreement,  open  membership  to 
all  countries,  appropriate  representation  of  both 
exporters  and  importers,  and  adequate  publicity. 
The  executive  branch  of  the  Government,  has 
sponsored  the  development  of  such  a  commodity 
agreements  policy  through  a  series  of  meetings 
called  by  the  United  Nations.  It  has  also  sup- 
ported such  a  policy  in  meetings  of  the  Food  and 
Agriculture  Organization  of  the  United  Nations 
when  discussions  have  turned  to  the  special  diffi- 
culties sometimes  encountered  by  farmers  in  the 
international  marketing  of  their  crops. 

The  executive  branch  has,  of  course,  received 
encouragement  from  your  committee  in  this  con- 
nection when,  in  reporting  on  the  "Wheat  Agree- 
ment submitted  to  the  80th  Congress,  you  recorded : 
"...  the  Committee's  earnest  belief  that  the 
principle  of  surplus  marketing  by  international 
agreement  is  sound  .  .  ."  and  expressed  the  Com- 
mittee's wish  to  encourage  this  objective. 

The  "Wheat  Agreement  is  the  first  agreement 
to  be  considered  by  the  governments  of  the  world 
in  the  light  of  the  wartime  and  postwar  thinking 
with  respect  to  the  conditions  which  should  exist 
before  an  intergovernmental  commodity  agree- 
ment is  negotiated  and  with  respect  to  the  safe- 


Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson 

[Released  to  the  press  May  18] 

Representatives  of  the  Department  of 
State  have  cooperated  closely  with  represent- 
atives of  the  Department  of  Agriculture  over 
a  number  of  years  in  negotiating  the  Inter- 
national Wheat  Agreement.  It  is  our  hope 
that  the  agreement,  which  was  sent  to  the 
Senate  on  April  19,  1949,  by  the  President  as 
a  treaty,  will  be  approved. 

The  Department  believes  that  the  agree- 
ment would  help  assure  stable  conditions  in 
the  international  wlieat  market,  that  it  would 
help  further  the  Government's  general  policy 
of  encouraging  nondiscrimination  in  inter- 
national trade,  and  that  it  is  also  of  signifi- 
cance in  that  the  treatment  accorded  it  by  this 
Government  will  have  a  bearing  on  the  ques- 
tion whether  agreements  of  a  similar  char- 
acter will  be  negotiated  for  other  commodi- 
ties that  may  be  soon  faced  with  burdensome 
surplus  problems  of  substantially  the  same 
kind  as  those  anticipated  in  wheat. 


guards  which  should  be  incorporated  in  the  agree- 
ment in  order  that  it  not  be  restrictive  in  opera- 
tion. It  should  therefore  be  considered,  not  only 
on  what  are  believed  to  be  its  solid  merits  in  assist- 
ing the  orderly  marketing  of  wheat,  but  because 
it  IS  widely  regarded  both  in  this  and  other  coun- 
tries as  a  test  case  of  whether  such  a  policy  can 
be  followed  in  negotiating  and  placing  a  com- 
modity agreement  into  effect. 

You  have  before  you  not  only  the  matter  of  the 
approval  of  an  agreement  which  will  deal  with 
the  wheat  situation,  but  the  approval  of  a  multi- 
lateral approach  to  the  solution  of  international 
trade  problems  of  primary  commodities.  I  hasten 
to  say  that  it  is  clear  to  me  that  the  program  will 
remain  a  limited  one  in  practice,  not  only  because 
of  the  limitations  and  safeguards  placed  upon  its 
use  but  because  of  the  difficulty  of  negotiating  and 
gaining  approval  for  such  intergovernmental 
agreements.  Certainly  our  experience  through 
the  many  years  of  development  of  the  present 
Wheat  Agreement  furnishes  the  most  vivid  illus- 
tration of  these  difficulties. 

The  report  of  the  Secretary  of  State  on  the 
Wheat  Agreement  and  Secretary  Brannan's  testi- 
mony have  pointed  out  that  in  respect  of  objectives 
and  the  substantive  application  of  the  agreement 
its  provisions  are  similar  to  the  1948  draft.  Both 
the  report  and  Secretary  Brannan  have  also  called 
attention  to  the  fact  that  in  certain  important  re- 
spects the  terms  of  the  present  agreement  differ 
from  those  of  the  1948  draft.  In  calling  together 
the  countries  of  the  world  to  attempt  to  negotiate 
another  wheat  agreement,  we  took  fully  into  ac- 


May  29,   J  949 


count  both  the  general  approval  given  to  this  ap- 
proach in  your  Committee's  report  on  the  1948 
draft  as  well  as  the  many  useful  comments  made 
in  the  hearings  last  year.  The  response  to  our  in- 
vitation and  the  cooperative  attitude  in  the  nego- 
tiations by  those  countries  which  are  signatory  to 
the  present  agreement  make  it  clear  that  most  of 
the  countries  of  the  world  hope  for  the  adoption 
and  implementation  of  this  agreement.  Their 
earnest  hopes  are  not  an  offset  to  the  safeguarding 
of  our  own  interests  in  this  matter.  But,  in  the 
view  of  the  Department  of  State,  they  furnish  an 
additional  and  forceful  argument  in  support  of 
this  agreement. 


THE  DEPARTMENT 

Reorganization  of  Administrative  Area 

[Released  to  the  press  May  IB] 

The  Department  of  State  made  the  following 
Departmental  Announcement  on  May  16: 

1.  Effective  May  16,  1949  the  Administrative 
Area,  consisting  oJ  the  central  administrative  of- 
fices of  the  De])artment  under  the  supervision  of 
the  Assistant  Secretary  for  Administration,  will 
be  reorganized.  After  reorganization,  the  Ad- 
ministrative Area  will  consist  of  the  Office  of  the 
Assistant  Secretary  for  Administration,  the  Of- 
fice of  Personnel,  the  Office  of  Consular  Affairs, 
the  Office  of  Operating  Facilities,  and  the  Office  of 
Management  and  Budget,  together  with  their  con- 
stituent divisions. 

_  2.  Effective  May  16, 1949,  the  Offices  of  the  For- 
eign Service  (OFS),  Departmental  Administra- 
tion (ODA),  Controls  (CON),  and  Budget  and 
Planning  (OBP),  are  hereby  abolished,  and  their 
functions,  personnel,  and  records  are  transferred 
in  accordance  with  the  following : 

a.  The  Director  General  of  the  Foreign  Service 
is  located  in  the  Office  of  the  Assistant  Secretary 
for  Administration  and  will  assist  him  in  a  staff 
capacity  on  matters  affecting  the  Foreign  Service. 

b.  The  Division  of  Foreign  Buildings  Opera- 
tions, the  Division  of  Foreign  Reporting  Services, 
the  Foreign  Service  Inspection  Corps,  and  the  Sec- 
retariat of  the  Board  of  the  Foreign  Service  are 
transferred  to  the  Office  of  the  Assistant  Secretary 
for  Administration. 

c.  The  Division  of  Foreign  Service  Planning 
(FSP)  in  the  existing  Office  of  the  Foreign  Serv- 
ice and  the  Division  of  Organization  and  Budget 
(OB)  in  the  existing  Office  of  Budget  and  Plan- 
ning are  abolished,  and  their  functions,  personnel, 
and  records  are  transferred  to  the  new  Office  of 
Management  and  Budget  and  the  new  Office  of 
Operating  Facilities. 

d.  A  new  Division  of  Organization  (OD)  and 
a  new  Division  of  Budget  (DB)  are  established 


within  the  new  Office  of  Management  and  Budget 
(0MB). 

e.  The  Division  of  Finance  (DF)  in  the  existing 
Office  of  Budget  and  Planning  is  transferred  to  the 
new  Office  of  Management  and  Budget. 

f.  The  Division  of  Departmental  Personnel 
(DP)  in  the  existing  Office  of  Departmental  Ad- 
ministration, the  Division  of  Foreign  Service  Per- 
sonnel, (FP),  the  Secretariat  of  the  Board  of 
Examiners  for  the  Foreign  Service,  and  the  For- 
eign Service  Institute  in  the  existing  Office  of  the  j 
Foreign  Service  are  transferred  to  the  new  Office 
of  Personnel  (PER). 

g.  The  Division  of  Communications  and  Records 
(DC),  Language  Services  (TC).  Central  Services 
(CS),  and  Cryptography  (CY),  in  the  existing 
Office  of  Departmental  Administration  are  trans- 
ferred to  the  new  Office  of  Operating  Facilities. 
In  addition,  the  New  York  Regional  Administra- 
tive Office  is  transferred  to  the  Office  of  Operating 
Facilities. 

h.  The  Division  of  Foreign  Service  Administra- 
tion (FA)  in  the  existing  Office  of  the  Foreign 
Service  is  abolished,  and  its  functions,  staff,  and 
records,  except  for  allowances  and  commissarv  and 
welfare  activities,  are  transferred  to  the  new  Office 
of  Operating  Facilities. 

i.  Responsibility  for  allowances  and  commissary 
and  welfare  activities  together  with  necessary  staff 
and  records  of  the  Division  of  Foreign  Service 
Administration  (FA)  in  the  existing  Office  of  the 
Foreign  Service  is  transferred  to  the  Di\nsion  of 
Foreign  Service  Personnel  in  the  new  Office  of 
Personnel. 

j.  The  Passport  Division  (PD),  Visa  Division 
(VD),  the  Division  of  Protective  Services  (DS), 
Division  of  Security  (SY)  and  the  Munitions 
Division  (MD)  in  the  existing  Office  of  Controls 
are  transferred  to  the  new  Office  of  Consular 
Affairs. 

3.  After  reorganization  the  structure  of  the  "A" 
area.  the  routing  symbols,  and  the  designation  of 
key  staff  is  as  follows : 

a.  The  Office  of  the  Assistant  Secretary  of  State 
for  Administration  (A),  John  E.  Peurifoy,  As- 
sistant Secretary,  shall  include  the  Director  Gen- 
eral of  the  Foreign  Service  (FS),  Christian 
Ravndal,  and  the  following : 

(1)  Division  of  Foreign  Buildings  Operations 
(FBO),  Frederick  Larkin,  Chief; 

(2)  Division  of  Foreiirn  Reporting  Services 
(FR ) ,  A.  Cyril  Crilley,  Chief ; 

(3)  Foreign  Service  Inspection  Corps  (FI), 
Howard  K.  Travers,  Chief; 

(4)  The  Executive  Secretarv.  Board  of  the 
Foreign  Service.  F.  Patrick  Kellv. 

b.  The  Office  of  Personnel  (PER),  under  the 
direction  of  Haywood  P.  Martin,  shall  include: 

(1)  Division  of  Departmental  Personnel  (DP). 
Arch  K.  Jean,  Chief; 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


(2)  Division  of  Foreign  Service  Personnel 
(FP  ,  Donald  W.  Smith,  Chief; 

(3)  Foreign  Service  Institute  (FSI),  William 
P.  Maddox,  Director;  „  ^        .  . 

(4)  Secretariat  of  the  Board  of  Examiners  ot 
the  Foreign  Service  (BEX),  Joseph  C.  Green, 
Executive  Director. 

c.  The  Office  of  Consular  Affairs  (CON) ,  under 
I  the  direction  of  Samuel  D.  Boykin,  shall  include : 

j      (1)  Passport  Division  (PD),  Kuth  B.  Shipley, 

(2)'  Visa  Division  (VD),  Herve  J.  L'Heureux, 
Chief* 

(3) 'Division  of  Protective  Services  (DS),  Ed- 
ward E.  Hunt,  Chief ; 

(4)  Division  of  Security  (SY),  Donald  L.. 
Nicholson,  Chief ; 

(5)  Munitions  Division  (MD) ,  John  C.  Elliott, 
Acting  Chief ; 

d.  The  Office  of  Operating  Facilities,  under  the 
direction  of  Walter  K.  Scott,  shall  include :    . 

(1)  Division  of  Central  Services  (CS) ,  William 
Digges  Wright,  Chief; 

(2)  Division  of  Communications  and  Records 
(DC),  Robert  E.  Stufflebeam,  Chief; 

(3)  Division  of  Cryptography  (CY),  Lee  W. 
Parke,  Chief; 

(4)  Division  of  Language  Services  (TO), 
Guillermo  A.  Suro,  Chief;  _ 

(5)  New  York  Regional  Administrative  Omce 
(RAO),  Alva  M.  Meyers,  Regional  Administra- 
tive Officer. 

e.  The  Office  of  Management  and  Budget 
(0MB),  under  the  direction  of  William  O.  Hall, 
shall  include : 

(1)  Division  of  Organization  (OD),  Charles  E. 
Johnson,  Acting  Chief ; 

(2)  Division  of  Budget  (DB),  Edward  B. 
Wilber,  Chief;  . 

(3)  Division  of  Finance  (DF),  Louis  F. 
Thompson,  Chief. 

4.  Effective  May  16,  1949  the  Chief  of  the 
Budget  Division  is  designated  Budget  Officer  of 
the  Department  of  State,  and  the  Associate  Chief 
of  the  Budget  Division  is  designated  Deputy 
Budget  Officer  of  the  Department  of  State. 

5.  The  responsibilities  of  the  new  Office  of  Con- 
sular Affairs  will  include  the  development  of  staff 
facilities  to  support  and  improve  the  consular 
activities  of  the  Foreign  Service. 

6.  Pending  issuance  of  further  instructions  and 
delegations,  all  authorities  previously  conferred  or 
delegated  shall  continue  in  effect  to  the  same  extent 

I    as  heretofore.     Revised  functional  statements  for 
;    inclusion  in  the  Organization  Manual  will  be  re- 
leased shortly. 

7.  The  Office  of  Management  and  Budget  will 
j    coordinate  the  various  phases  of  the  reorganiza- 
tion. 


PUBLICATIONS 


Department  of  State 

For  sale  hy  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  Government 
Printing  Office,  Washington  25,  D.  C.  Address  requests 
direct  to  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  except  in  the 
case  of  free  pnMications,  which  may  be  obtained  from  the 
Department  of  State. 

Double  Taxation:  Taxes  on  Income.  Treaties  and  Other 
International  Acts  Series  1855.     Pub.  3397.     41  pp.     15^. 

Convention  between  tlie  United  States  and  the  Neth- 
erlands—Signed at  Washington  Apr.  29,  1948;  pro- 
claimed by  the  President  of  the  United  States  Dec. 
8,  1948. 

Narcotic  Drugs:  Entry  Into  Force  of  Amendments  Set 
Forth  in  the  Annex  to  the  Protocol  of  December  11,  1946. 

Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  1859.     Pub. 

3402.  2  pp.     50. 

Proclamation  by  the  President  of  the  United  States  at 
Washington  Mar.  30,  1948. 

United    States    Educational    Foundation    in    Belgium. 

Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  1860.     Pub. 

3403.  13  pp.     5«(. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Belgium 
and  Luxembourg — Signed  at  Brussels  Oct.  8,  1948; 
entered  into  force  Oct.  8,  1948. 

Passport  Visas.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts 
Series  1867.     Pub.  3422.     4  pp.     5«f. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Italy — 
Eif  ected  by  exchange  of  notes  verbales  dated  at  Rome 
Sept.  28  and  29,  1948;  entered  into  force  Sept.  29, 
1948. 

World  Economic  Progress  Through  Cooperative  Techni- 
cal Assistance:  The  "Point  4"  Program.  Economic  Co- 
operation Series  15.     Pub.  3454.     12  pp.    10<S. 

Remarks  by  Dean  Acheson,  Secretary  of  State,  con- 
cerning the  President's  inaugural  address. 

Cultural  Relations  Between  the  United  States  and  the 
Soviet  Union.  International  Information  and  Cultural 
Series  4.     Pub.  3480.     25  pp.     10<ii. 

U.S.  efforts  to  establish  cultural-scientific  exchange 

blocked  by  the  U.S.S.R. 


THE  FOREIGN  SERVICE 
Confirmations 

The  following  nominations  were  confirmed  by  the  Sen- 
ate on  May  20,  1949 : 

Admiral  Alan  G.  Kirk  to  be  American  Ambassador  Ex- 
traordinary and  Plenipotentiary  to  the  Union  of  Soviet 
Socialist  Republics. 

Capus  M.  Waynick  to  be  American  Ambassador  Ex- 
traordinary and  Plenipotentiary  to  Nicaragua. 

George  R.  Merrell  to  be  American  Ambassador  Ex- 
traordinary and  Plenipotentiary  to  Ethiopia. 

William  C.  Foster  to  be  Deputy  United  States  Special 
Representative  in  Europe,  with  the  rank  of  Ambassador 
Extraordinary  and  Plenipotentiary. 

On  May  9,  1949,  the  Senate  confirmed  the  nomination 
of  David  K.  E.  Bruce  to  be  American  Ambassador  Ex- 
traordinary and  Plenipotentiary  to  France. 


May  29,    1949 


^^{ynCerU^/ 


The  United  Nations  and  Page 

Specialized  Agencies 

U.N.  Documents:  A  Selected  Bibli- 
ography            67G 

"Despite  Our  Differences,  We  Are  Still  the 
United  Nations".  Statement  by  Am- 
bas.sador  Austin 677 

General    Assembly    Adopts    Draft    Conven- 
tion   on    International    Transmission    of 
News  and  Right  of  Correction: 
Statement  by  Erwin  D.  Canham     ....        678 
Resolutions  Adopted  by  the  General  As- 
sembly          682 

Text  of  "Draft  Convention 682 

U.S.   Position   Regarding  Spain.     Statement 

by  Ray  Atherton 686 

U.S.  Continues  Support  of  Security  Coun- 
cil's Resolution  on  Indonesia.  State- 
ment by  Warren  R.  Austin 687 

Question  of  Indonesia.    Resolution  Adopted 

by  the  General  Assembly 688 

Admission  of  Israel  to  U.N.  Membership. 
Resolution  Adopted  by  General  Assem- 
bly             688 

The  ITnitcd  States  in  the  United  Nations  .    .        689 

Ilo:  Inland    Transport     Committee     Third 

Session 691 

Ilo     Governing     Body,     109th    and     110th 

Sessions 693 

Frontier    Violations    Basic    Issue    m    Greek 

Situation 696 

Treaty  Information 

The  Presidents  of  the  U.S.  and  Brazil 
Discuss  Fostering  of  Economic  Develop- 
ment and  Social  Progress 694 

Negotiation  of  U.S.-Brazil  Cultural  Treaty 
.\pproved.  Statement  by  President 
Truman  and  President  Dutra 695 

Pacific  Pact  Corresponding  to  North  At- 
lantic Treaty  Untimely.  Statement  by 
Secretary  Acheson 696 

Hungary  Violates  Peace  Treaty  in  Denying 

Freedom  in  Elections 697 

Educational     Exchange     Agreement     Signed 

With  Netherlands  Government   ....        698 

Significance  of  the  International  Wheat 
Agreement: 

Statement  by  Willard  L.  Thorp 699 

Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson     ....        701 

Council  of  Foreign  Ministers 

A  Perspective  on  the  Problems  Facing  the 
Council  of  Foreign  Ministers.  Statement 
by  Secretary  .\cheson 675 

Sixth  Se.ssion:  Council  of  Foreign  Minis- 
ters           691 


General  Policy  Page 

.Assistance  to  Political  Refugees  From 
Eastern  Europe.  Statement  by  Secre- 
tary Acheson 685 

Sixth  Session:  Council  of  Foreign  Minis- 
ters            691 

Visit  of  President  Dutra  of  Brazil : 

Remarks   by   President  Truman   Welcom- 
ing President  Dutra 694 

Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson     ....        694 
The  Presidents  of  the   U.S.  and  Brazil  Dis- 
cuss   Fostering    of    Economic    Develop- 
ment and  Social  Progress 694 

Hungary  Violates  Peace  Treaty  in  Denying 

Freedom  in  Elections 697 

Letters  of  Credence: 

India 698 

Liberia 698 

Venezuela 698 

Economic  Affairs 

Discussions    on    Scientific    Investigation    of 

Tuna  in  Tropical  America 692 

Royal  Sanitary  Institute  Health  Congress  .    .        692 

VAlialing     Commission     First     International 

Meeting 692 

Seventh  International  Congress  on  Rheu- 
matic Diseases 693 

Developments    in    the    "Point   4"    Program. 

Statement  by  Secretary  Acheson  .    .    .        695 


Occupation  Matters 

U.S.     Representative    to 
Meeting  Named  .    .    . 


Ruhr     Authority 


The  Foreign  Service 

Confirmations      .    .    . 


693 


International  Information  and 
Cultural  Affairs 

Educational     Exchange    Agreement    Signed 

With  Netherlands  Government   ....        698 


The  Department 

Reorganization  of  Administrative  Area  .    .    .        702 


Publications 

Department  of  State 


703 


703 


^ne/  ^ehct/^imen{/  ,m  trtaie^ 


PEACEFUL    UTILIZATION    OF    ATOMIC 

ENERGY    •    Statement   by  Senator  Brien 
McMahon 726 

FOREIGN    DISTRIBUTION    OF    RADIO- 
ISOTOPES   727 

THE  COSTA  RICA-NICARAGUA  INCIDENT: 
EFFECTIVE    INTERNATIONAL  ACTION 

IN   KEEPING    THE   PEACE    •    Article   by 

TT  .  Tapley  Bennett,  Jr 707 


FoT  complete  contents  see  back  cover 


Vol.  XX,  No.  518 
June  5,  1949 


^Ae  zl^e^uvylme^  A)j^ C/Ca^    As_/  LI  1 1  Kj  L  i  11 


Vol  XX,  No.  518    •    Publication  3524 
June  5,  1949 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

U.S.  Government  Printing  Otlice 

Washington  25,  D.C. 

Peice: 

62  Issues,  domestic  $5,  foreign  $7.2j 

Single  copy,  16  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Budget  (February  18, 
1949). 

Note:  Contents  of  thl3"publlcation  are  not 
copyrighted  and  Items  contained  herein  iiuiy 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Department 
or  State  Bulletin  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BULLETIN, 
a  weekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications, 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  with  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  work  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includes 
press  releases  on  foreign  policy  issued 
by  the  White  House  and  the  Depart- 
ment, and  statements  and  addresses 
made  by  the  President  and  by  the 
Secretary  of  State  and  other  officers 
of  the  Department,  as  well  as  special 
articles  on  various  phases  of  inter- 
national affairs  and  the  functions  of 
the  Department.  Information  is  in- 
cluded concerning  treaties  and  in- 
ternatiorutl  agreements  to  which  the 
United  States  is  or  may  become  a 
party  and  treaties  of  general  inter- 
national interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
well  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


The  Costa  Rica-Nicaragua  Incident:  Effective  International 
Action  in  Keeping  the  Peace 


BY  W.  TAPLEY  BENNETT,  JR. 


On  December  3,  1948,  the  Inter-American 
Treaty  for  Eeciprocal  Assistance,  more  familiarly 
known  as  the  Rio  treaty,  entered  into  force.  A 
scant  week  after  the  elaborate  ceremony  at  the  Pan 
American  Union,  Costa  Rica,  on  December  11,  re- 
quested that  the  treaty  be  invoked.  This  first 
test  of  the  Rio  machinery  resulted  in  the  estab- 
lishment of  numerous  precedents  in  inter-Ameri- 
can organization  and  in  the  interpretation  of 
this  mutual  defense  agreement.  In  view  of  the 
importance  of  these  precedents  and  the  general 
similarity  between  the  Rio  document  and  the 
North  Atlantic  pact,  it  may  be  of  interest  to  re- 
view in  some  detail  the  steps  taken  in  the  initial 
implementation  of  the  Rio  accord. 

The  Costa  Rican  action  was  taken  in  a  letter 
of  December  11, 1948,  to  the  chairman  of  the  Coun- 
cil of  the  Organization  of  American  States  Coas 
from  Mario  A.  Esquivel,  Ambassador  of  Costa 
Rica  to  Washington  and  representative  of  his  gov- 
ermnent  on  the  Council.^  As  is  generally  known, 
among  the  principal  features  of  the  treaty  are 
stipulations  concerning  specific  obligations  on 
the  part  of  the  American  Republics  in  the  event 
either  of  an  armed  attack  or  other  threats  to  the 
integrity  of  any  one  of  their  number.  The  Costa 
Rican  Ambassador's  communication  charged  that 
on  the  night  of  December  10  Costa  Rican  terri- 
tory had  been  invaded  by  armed  forces  proceeding 
from  Nicaragua.  The  Ambassador  stated  that 
in  the  opinion  of  his  government  this  violation  of 
the  territory  of  a  sister  republic  with  the  aim  of 
overthrowing  its  established  goverimient  had  pre- 
cipitated a  situation  within  the  scope  of  article 
6  of  the  Rio  treaty.  The  Ambassador  went  on  to 
request  an  immediate  convocation  of  the  Council 
of  the  Organization  of  American  States  to  con- 
sider the  situation.  In  his  communication  Am- 
bassador Esquivel  refrained  from  alleging  official 
participation  on  the  part  of  Nicaraguan  Govern- 


ment, confining  himself  to  statements  that  the 
invasion  had  resulted  from  preparations  carried 
on  openly  in  Nicaragua  by  a  group  of  Costa  Ricans 
and  that  the  movement  had  proceeded  from  Nic- 
aragua to  Costa  Rican  territory.  In  response  to 
this  request  and  in  view  of  the  urgency  of  the  situa- 
tion, the  chairman  of  the  Coas,  Ambassador  En- 
rique V.  Corominas  of  Argentina,  called  an 
extraordinary  session  of  the  Council  for  3  p.  m.  on 
Sunday,  December  12. 

As  the  representatives  of  the  American  Repub- 
lics assembled  that  afternoon,  there  was  general 
awareness  of  the  significant  implications  of  the 
situation.  The  machinery  provided  in  the  Rio 
treaty  was  to  be  put  into  operation  for  the  first 
time.  The  decisions  taken,  the  procedures  fol- 
lowed would  serve  as  precedents  for  the  future 
and  would  establish  a  pattern  for  the  considera- 
tion of  future  controversies.  Concurrent,  there- 
fore, with  the  rapid  response  to  the  Costa  Rican 
call  and  the  urgent  consideration  of  practical 
steps  to  serve  the  immediate  situation,  careful  as- 
sessment of  the  juridical  aspects  of  the  problem 
and  of  their  import  for  future  situations  was  re- 
quired. Some  felt  that  the  application  of  the  Rio 
treaty  should  be  confined  to  conflicts  between 
states  and,  since  not  even  the  aggrieved  party  here 
had  charged  direct  action  by  the  other  state,  there 
were  perhaps  no  grounds  for  calling  the  treaty  into 
action. 

Pertinent  Treaty  Articles 

A  citation  of  pertinent  articles  of  the  treaty  is 
here  given.  The  first  paragraph  of  article  3  pro- 
vides as  follows: 

The  High  Contracting  Parties  agree  that  an  armed 
attaclj  by  any  State  against  an  American  State  shall  be 


June  5,   J  949 


'  Pan  American  Union  (PAU)  doc.  1736.    The  Security 
Council  was  informed  of  the  situation  on  Dec.  12,  1948. 
See  U.N.  doc.  S/1116,  Dec.  12,  1948. 
«.  ».  bUPERINTENDENT  OF  DOCUMEKTJ  707 


JtIN  2'y  1949 


considered  ns  an  attack  against  all  the  American  States 
and,  conswiuently,  each  one  of  the  said  Contractint;  Par- 
ties undertakes  to  assist  In  meetin),'  the  attack  in  the  exer- 
cise of  the  Inherent  right  of  Individual  or  collective  self- 
defense  recognized  by  Article  51  of  the  Charter  of  the 
United  Nations. 

Article  6  reads  as  follows : 

If  the  inviolability  or  the  integrity  of  the  territory  or 
the  sovereignty  or  political  independence  of  any  American 
State  should  be  affected  by  an  aggression  which  is  not  an 
armed  attack  or  by  an  extra-continental  or  intra-continen- 
tal  conflict,  or  by  any  other  fact  or  situation  that  might 
endanger  the  peace  of  America,  the  Organ  of  Consultation 
shall  meet  immediately  in  order  to  agree  on  the  measures 
which  must  be  taken  in  case  of  aggression  to  assist  the 
victim  of  the  aggression  or,  in  any  case,  the  measures 
which  should  be  taken  for  the  common  defense  and  for 
the  maintenance  of  the  peace  and  security  of  the  Con- 
tinent. 

The  consensus  was  that,  if  the  Kio  treaty  were 
to  be  invoked,  article  6  was  the  provision  applica- 
ble to  the  situation.  It  was  then  necessary  to  con- 
sider whether  the  application  of  article  6  would 
require  a  meeting  of  the  Foreign  Ministers  to  ex- 
amine the  problem  and  to  decide  on  appropriate 
action.  Article  11  of  the  treaty  states  that  con- 
sultations 

shall  be  carried  out  immediately  by  means  of  the  Meet- 
ings of  Ministers  of  Foreign  Affairs  of  the  American 
Republics  which  have  ratified  the  Treaty  .  .  . 

The  calling  together  of  the  Foreign  Ministers 
would  have  been,  indeed,  a  serious  step  and  would 
have  brought  with  it  many  attendant  complica- 
tions and  inevitable  delays.  Following  the  dis- 
cussion on  December  12,  the  Council  came  to  the 
conclusion  that  there  was  insufficient  information 
at  hand  to  justify  the  immediate  convocation  of 
the  Foreign  Ministers  as  the  Organ  of  Consulta- 
tion provided.  In  conclusion,  therefore,  the 
Council  adopted  a  resolution  -  providing  for  ur- 
gent study  of  the  Costa  Rican  complaint  and 
authorizing  the  chairman  to  seek  full  information 
from  all  appropriate  sources.  It  was  agreed  that 
the  Council  would  meet  again  on  December  14, 
48  hours  later. 

In  pursuance  of  the  authority  given  him,  the 
chairman  of  the  Council  dispatched  on  the  eve- 
ning of  the  twelfth  telegraphic  messages  to  the 
Presidents  of  the  21  American  Republics  to  ap- 

"  PAU  doc.  1742. 

'  PAU  doc.  1789.  See  also,  U.N.  doc.  S/1171,  Dec.  31, 
1948. 


prise  them  of  the  situation  and  to  bespeak  the  full 
cooperation  of  their  respective  governments  in 
the  maintenance  of  inter- American  order,  as  well 
as  their  collaboration  in  such  curative  measures 
as  might  be  decided  on  by  the  Council  with  re- 
spect to  the  instant  case.  On  December  13  a 
circular  telegram  was  addressed  bj'  the  chairman 
to  the  21  Foreign  Ministers,  in  which  they  were 
requested  to  furnish  any  pertinent  information 
on  the  problem. 

On  December  14,  the  Council  assembled  again 
in  extraordinary  session.  On  the  basis  of  infor- 
mation supplied  to  the  chairman,  including  a 
memorandum  transmitted  by  the  United  States, 
and  after  lengthy  discussion  the  meeting  adopted 
the  following  resolutions : ' 

1.  To  convoke  the  meeting  of  Consultation  of  Ministers 
of  Foreign  Affairs  to  study  the  situation  existing  between 
Costa  Rica  and  Nicaragua,  the  place  and  date  of  the 
meeting  to  be  fixed  later. 

2.  The  Council  of  American  States  to  constitute  itself 
Provisional  Organ  of  Consultation  as  prorided  in  Article 
12  of  the  Treaty. 

3.  To  authorize  the  Chairman  of  the  Council  to  appoint 
a  committee  to  Investigate  on  the  scene  the  alleged  events 
and  their  antecedents. 

4.  To  request  all  the  American  governments  and  the 
Secretary  General  of  the  OAS  to  extend  full  cooperation 
to  the  work  of  the  committee  which  should  undertake  its 
task  immediately. 

Investigating  Committee  Named 

The  Provisional  Organ  of  Consultation  met  the 
following  afternoon,  December  15.  The  chair- 
man of  the  Council  announced  that  he  had  that 
morning  designated  a  Committee  of  Information 
from  among  the  members  of  the  Council  to  proceed 
at  once  to  Costa  Rica  and  Nicaragua.  Its  mem- 
bership was  as  follows : 

Ambassador  Jos6  Maria  Bello  of  Brazil 
Ambassador  Silvio  Viliegas  of  Colombia 
Ambassador  Luis  Quintanilla  of  Mexico 
Ambassador  Juan  Bautista  de  Lavalle  of  Peru 
Ambassador  I'aul  C.  Daniels  of  the  United  States 

The  Peruvian  member  was  unable  to  serve,  so  the 
Committee  was  composed  of  the  four  Ambassa- 
dors, together  with  their  political  and  military 
advisers  and  a  secretariat  made  available  by  the 
Pan  American  Union.  The  entire  group  consisted 
of  14  persons. 

The  ForeigQ  Ministers  of  the  American  Re- 
publics were  informed  of  this  action  by  the  chair- 
man, and,  in  accord  with  article  15  of  the  treaty, 


708 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


a  communication  was  immediately  addressed  to 
the  chairman  of  the  Security  Council  of  the  United 
Nations*  to  inform  that  body  of  the  situation 
under  consideration  by  the  Provisional  Organ  of 
Consultation.  The  chairman  also  placed  in  the 
minutes  of  the  meeting  a  copy  of  the  letter  of  ap- 
pointment of  the  five  members  of  the  Committee 
of  Information.^  This  communication  did  not 
give  detailed  instructions  to  the  Committee  but 
called  on  it  to  organize  immediately  and  to  adopt 
such  measures  as  it  might  consider  necessary  for 
the  fulfillment  of  its  duties.  The  Committee  was 
thus  given  wide  discretion  as  to  the  exercise  of 
its  functions. 

The  Committee  departed  from  Washington  on 
the  evening  of  December  16  in  a  special  plane  made 
available  by  the  United  States  Government  and 
flew  directly  to  Costa  Rica,  arriving  at  San  Jose  in 
the  afternoon  of  December  17.  After  2i/2  days 
in  Costa  Rica  the  Committee  flew  to  Managua, 
Nicaragua,  for  a  2-day  visit,  whence  the  return 
to  the  United  States  by  way  of  Mexico  was  made. 
The  group  arrived  back  in  Washington  in  the 
early  morning  of  December  23,  less  than  a  week 
after  its  departure  for  Central  America. 

Committee  Activities  in  Costa  Rica 
and  Nicaragua 

Tlie  reception  given  the  international  Commit- 
tee by  the  two  affected  parties  to  the  dispute  af- 
forded a  heai'tening  indication  of  the  respect 
accorded  the  institutions  of  the  inter-American 
system  by  the  governments  and  peoples  of  the 
member  states.  At  San  Jose,  for  instance,  a  quite 
unexpected  welcome  awaited  the  Committee.  In 
addition  to  the  President  and  members  of  the 
Costa  Rican  Cabinet,  who  were  assembled  at  the 
airport,  a  crowd  estimated  at  40  thousand  over- 
flowed the  plaza  at  the  air  terminal  and  lined  the 
highway  from  the  airport  to  the  city.  The  road- 
way had  been  strewn  with  flowers,  and  small  white 
flags  were  waved  by  the  thousands  along  the  route. 
This  unusual  reception,  which  had  nothing  of 
regimentation  or  forced  participation  in  its  spon- 
taneous enthusiasm,  was  eloquent  testimony  to  the 
prestige  enjoyed  by  the  Organization  of  American 
States  among  the  general  public,  quite  aside  from 
any  official  attitude  of  the  Government. 

The  Committee  took  testimony  for  one  full  day 
in  Costa  Rica  for  which  the  Government  made 
available  the  principal  salon  of  the  Casa  Amarilla, 


the  Costa  Rican  Foreign  Office.  In  addition, 
headquarters  of  the  Committee  secretariat  had 
been  set  up  in  the  Grand  Hotel.  At  the  Foreign 
Office  the  Committee  met  with  President  Figueres 
and  the  members  of  his  Cabinet  for  an  exposition 
of  the  Costa  Rican  viewpoint  in  the  controversy. 
The  Committee  was  invited  to  go  anywhere  in 
Costa  Rica  that  it  wished  and  to  talk  with  anyone 
whom  it  desired.  Private  persons  were  invited 
to  come  forward  with  testimony  and  did  so.  The 
Costa  Rican  Government  conducted  to  the  Foreign 
Office  prisoners  who  had  been  captured  in  the 
fighting  near  the  frontier,  and  some  of  these  in- 
dividuals were  interrogated  in  executive  session 
with  no  members  of  the  Government  present.  At 
the  request  of  the  Committee  there  appeared  for 
questioning  certain  officials  of  the  so-called  Carib- 
bean Legion,  an  organization  of  exiles  of  various 
Caribbean  countries  alleged  to  be  plotting  the 
overthrow  of  their  home  governments.  Since 
Costa  Rica  and  Nicaragua  continued  to  exercise 
full  diplomatic  relations,  an  interview  was  had 
by  the  Committee  with  the  Charge  d'Afi'aires  of 
Nicaragua  in  San  Jose.  On  the  last  day  of  the 
Committee's  stay  in  Costa  Rica  a  flight  was  made 
to  Liberia,  the  field  headquarters  of  the  Costa 
Rican  armed  forces.  Testimony  was  taken  from 
officers  of  the  Costa  Rican  forces.  Red  Cross  per- 
sonnel, and  private  individuals,  and  there  was 
opportunity  to  gain  impressions  of  the  general 
atmosphere. 

In  sum,  the  Committee  enjoyed  complete  free- 
dom of  action  in  Costa  Rica  and  pursued  its  in- 
vestigations with  full  acceptance  on  the  part  of 
the  local  government  of  the  unlimited  scope  of 
its  authority  as  an  international  investigating 
body. 

Similar  cooperation  was  shown  the  Committee 
and  its  mission  in  Nicaragua.  In  Managua  head- 
quarters were  established  at  the  Grand  Hotel,  and 
persons  from  whom  testimony  was  desired  were 
requested  to  meet  with  the  Committee.  The  Costa 
Rican  Minister  at  Managua  was  interviewed,  and 
discussions  were  held  with  other  members  of  the 
Diplomatic  Corps  on  an  informal  basis.  Mem- 
bers of  the  Foreign  Office  presented  the  Nicara- 
guan  Government's  version  of  the  case  and  sup- 
plied pertinent  data.    Another  witness  was  the 

'  PAU  doc.  1801. 
•  PAU  doc.  1803. 


June  5,   1949 


former  President  of  Costa  Rica,  Teodoro  Picado, 
now  residing  in  Nicaragua.  In  further  coopera- 
tion the  Xicaraguan  Government  arranged  to  have 
escorted  to  the  Committee  headquarters  a  Nicara- 
guan  political  prisoner  and  a  leading  officer  of 
the  invasion  forces,  who  had  subsequently  been 
interned  by  the  Nicaraguan  Government.  In  the 
cases  of  both  these  individuals  their  military  es- 
cort withdrew  before  the  Committee's  questioning 
began. 

The  Committee  obtained  additional  informa- 
tion in  calls  on  President  Roman  y  Reyes  of  Nic- 
aragua, on  the  Acting  Foreign  Minister,  and  on 
the  Minister  of  "War.  Conversations  also  were 
had  informally  with  officers  of  the  Nicaraguan 
Army  relative  to  events  along  the  border.  One 
of  the  military  advisers  to  the  Committee  made  a 
visit  to  the  scene  of  the  actual  fightiiig  in  the  bor- 
der area  and  took  testimony  from  active  partic- 
ipants. In  short,  every  effort  was  made  to  get 
at  the  basis  of  the  situation  and  to  obtain  con- 
firmed facts  regarding  events  which  had  occurred 
in  a  remote  frontier  region  and  which  already  in 
less  than  2  weeks'  time  had  come  to  be  shrouded 
in  confusion  and  obscurity. 

The  work  of  the  Committee  and  the  preparation 
of  its  report  provided  an  excellent  example  of  the 
physical  exigencies  of  modern-day  diplomacy. 
The  Committee  left  Managua  early  in  the  morning 
of  December  22  and,  with  the  exception  of  a  3- 
hour  stopover  in  Mexico  City,  flew  steadily  for  23 
hours  arriving  in  Washington  early  on  the  morn- 
ing of  December  23.  This  day-long  flight  was  the 
final  lap  in  a  journey  of  6,500  miles,  which  in- 
volved almost  continuous  travel  and  lengthy  ses- 
sions without  interruptions  for  meals,  nor  should 
the  late  hours  necessitated  by  official  demands  in 
the  two  capitals  be  discounted.  Notwithstanding 
the  physical  demands  of  the  week,  the  members  of 
the  Committee  wished  to  have  their  report  in  at 
least  preliminary  form  upon  arrival  in  Washing- 
ton; accordingly,  the  long  night  hours  of  Decem- 
ber 22  were  spent  in  discussion  and  drafting 
aboard  the  plane.  A  statement  for  release  to  the 
press  on  the  return  to  Washington  was  prepared 
at  4: 15  a.  m.  during  a  brief  operational  stop  at 
Nashville  on  the  morning  of  the  twenty-third. 
All  decisions  of  the  Committee  were  taken 
unanimously. 


•  PAU  doc.  1918. 
710 


Conclusions  of  the  Committee  of  Information 

The  Committee  assembled  on  the  afternoon  of 
December  23  with  the  chairman  of  the  Council  of 
American  States  and  officials  of  the  Pan  Ameri- 
can Union  to  give  an  informal  report  and  to  make 
arrangements  for  presentation  of  their  impres- 
sions to  the  Provisional  Organ  of  Consultation, 
which  was  called  to  meet  on  December  24.  It 
was  agreed  that  actual  minutes  of  testimony  and 
other  documents  involving  individuals,  as  well  as 
the  data  furnished  the  Committee  by  the  two  Gov- 
ernments should  not  be  published  at  that  time. 
There  was  general  agreement  that  certain  of  the 
material  was  of  such  a  nature  as  to  prove  incrimi- 
nating or  embarrassing  to  individuals  involved. 
It  was,  accordingly,  decided  that  the  documents 
should  be  held  in  confidential  files  of  the  Pan 
American  Union  until  sufficient  time  will  have 
elapsed  to  bring  about  the  elimination  of  these 
considerations. 

The  Council  of  the  Organization  of  American 
States,  acting  as  the  Provisional  Organ  of  Consul- 
tation under  the  Rio  treaty,  assembled  once  again 
in  extraordinary  session  on  Christmas  Eve,  at 
10 :  30  a.  m.  This  meeting  lasted  until  5  p.  m., 
with  only  one  10-minute  recess  in  the  late  after- 
noon. It  was  voted  to  make  the  session  open  to 
the  press  and  the  public.  The  Committee  of  In- 
formation presented  its  report  which  follows  be- 
low in  substance :  ° 

[Translation] 

Conclusions  Unanimously  Adopted  by  the  Committee  of 
Information  of  the  Provisional  Organ  of  Consultation 
(.Council  of  the  Organization  of  American  States') 

1.  The  members  of  the  Committee  do  not  doubt 
that  the  revolutionary  movement  which  broke  out 
in  Costa  Rica  was  organized  jJi'incipally  in  the 
territory  of  Nicaragua.     It  was  in  Nicaragua  that    , 
a  large  group  of  Costa  Rican  political  exiles,    j 
headed  bj'  Calderon  Guardia,  prepared  the  expe-    ' 
dition  which  later  crossed  the  frontier  between 
Nicaragua  and  Costa  Rica.     There  is  not  the  least 
doubt  that  the  Government  of  Nicaragua  did  not 
take  adequate  measures  to  prevent  the  develop- 
ment of  revolutionary  activities  directed  against 

a  neighboring  and  friendly  coimtry. 

2.  From  December  10,  it  appears  that  the  Gov- 
ernment of  Nicaragua  actually  began  to  take  the 
necessary  measures  to  the  end  that  the  rebels,  who 
had  already  crossed  the  frontier,  might  not  con- 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


tinue  to  receive  assistance  from  Nicaragua;  but 
the  principal  nucleus  of  the  revolutionaries,  com- 
posed of  Costa  Ricans  and  Nicaraguans,  had  al- 
ready entered  the  territory  of  Costa  Rica  when  the 
measures  to  which  we  refer  were  taken. 

3.  The  Committee  did  not  find  any  proof  that 
the  armed  forces  of  the  Government  of  Nicaragua 
had  participated,  on  Costa  Rican  territory,  in 
this  revolutionary  movement  against  the  Govern- 
ment of  Costa  Rica,  although,  as  a  result  of  its  in- 
vestigations, it  has  the  impression  that  certain 
military  elements  in  Nicaragua,  perhaps  on  their 
own  account,  might  have  furnished  technical  as- 
sistance to  the  grouj)s  which  later  were  to  cross 
the  frontier. 

4.  The  Committee  had  no  knowledge  of  any 
contact  between  armed  forces  of  Nicaragua  and 
armed  forces  of  Costa  Rica. 

5.  As  certain  Costa  Rican  elements  have  de- 
clared, the  failure  to  fulfill  the  pact  of  amnesty 
which  was  solenmly  signed  explains  to  a  gi-eat 
extent  why  the  large  majority  of  the  exiles  were 
obligated  to  resort  to  desperate  and  violent  meas- 
ures,   with    serious    international    repercussions. 

6.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is  undeniable  that  for 
many  months  before  the  invasion,  the  so-called 
Legion  of  the  Caribbean  or  Caribbean  Legion, 
with  the  material  and  moral  support  of  the  Gov- 
ernment of  Costa  Rica,  received  official  favor 
and  facilities  to  develop  its  programs  and  activi- 
ties, both  of  which  were  directed,  according  to  the 
prevailing  opinion  in  the  Caribbean  region,  to- 
ward the  overthrow  of  certain  Governments,  in- 
cluding the  present  Nicaraguan  regime. 

7.  The  existence  of  active  military  centers  of 
international  agitation  constitutes,  as  it  is  nat- 
ural to  suppose,  a  justifiable  ground  for  preoccu- 
pation on  the  part  of  the  Governments  affected. 

8.  This  situation,  which  is  anormal  and  dan- 
gerous for  American  international  peace,  explains 
why  the  majority  of  the  Central  American  and 
Caribbean  Republics  have  been  living  in  an  at- 
mosphere of  mutual  distrust,  constant  anxiety, 
and  open  hostility  for  some  time. 

9.  The  situation  is  all  the  more  regrettable 
since,  because  of  the  characteristics  which  we  have 
pointed  out,  the  international  relations  of  the  re- 
publics involved  must,  of  necessity,  become  more 
strained  each  day,  as  the  fear  of  the  intentions  of 
one  neighboring  country  obliges  the  other  to  take 
the  precautions  which  it  considers  necessary,  with 


serious  detriment  to  its  own  economy  and  with 
grave  danger  to  institutional  life. 

Luis  Quintanilla 
Representative  of  Mexico,  Chairman 
Jose  JVLvria  Bello 
Representative  of  Brazil 
Silvio  Villegas 
Representative  of  Colombia 
Paul  C.  Danxels 
Representative  of  the  United  States 

Action  by  the  Provisional  Organ 
of  Consultation 

After  discussing  the  Committee's  conclusions, 
the  Provisional  Organ  of  Consultation  adopted  the 
following  resolution :  ^ 

[Translation] 

Resolution  of  the  Provisional  Organ  of  Consultation 

The  Council  of  the  Organization  of  American 
States,  acting  as  the  Provisional  Organ  of  Consul- 
tation, after  carefully  examining  the  detailed  re- 
port of  the  Commission  which  was  in  Costa  Rica 
and  Nicaragua  for  the  purpose  of  investigating 
the  facts  and  antecedents  of  the  situation  created 
between  these  sister  Republics. 

Resolves : 

I.  To  request  that  the  Governments  of  Costa 
Rica  and  Nicaragua,  in  fulfilhnent  of  the  Inter- 
American  Treaty  of  Reciprocal  Assistance,  give 
the  Provisional  Organ  of  Consultation  full  guar- 
anties that  they  will  abstain  immediately  from 
any  kind  of  hostile  acts  toward  each  other. 

II.  To  inform  the  Government  of  Nicaragua 
respectfully  that,  in  the  light  of  the  data  gathered 
by  the  Conimittee  of  Investigation  especially  ap- 
pointed for  the  purpose,  that  Government  could 
and  should  have  taken  adequate  measures  in  due 
time  for  the  purpose  of  preventing:  (a)  the  devel- 
opment, on  Nicaraguan  territory,  of  activities 
aimed  at  overthrowing  the  present  government  of 
Costa  Rica,  and  (i)  the  departure  from  Nicara- 
guan tei'ritory  of  revolutionary  forces  which 
crossed  the  frontier  and  are  now  prisoners  or  fight- 
ing against  the  Government  of  Costa  Rica. 

III.  To  inform  the  Government  of  Costa  Rica 
respectfully  that  it  can  and  should  take  adequate 
measures  to  prevent  the  existence  on  its  territory 


'  PAU  doc.  1863,  see  also  U.N.  doc.  S/11724  of  Dec.  31, 
1948. 


June  5,   7949 


of  domestic  or  foreign  groups  militarily  organized 
with  the  deliberate  purpose  of  conspiring  against 
the  security  of  Nicaragua  and  other  sister  Repub- 
lics and  of  preparing  to  fight  against  their  Gov- 
ernments. 

IV.  To  request  both  Governments  very  earnestly 
to  observe  loyally  by  all  the  means  in  their  power 
the  principles  and  rules  of  non-intervention  and 
solidaritj'  contained  in  the  various  Inter-American 
instruments  signed  by  them. 

v.  To  continue  in  consultation  until  they  receive 
from  the  Governments  of  Costa  Kica  and  Nicara- 
gua clear  assurances  that,  they  undoubtedly  are 
resolved  to  do,  they  will  be  bound  strictly  liy  those 
lofty  principles  and  rules  that  constitute  the  jurid- 
ical basis  of  American  relationships. 

VI.  To  recommend  to  all  American  Govern- 
ments that  they  actively  collaborate  for  the  better 
fulfillment  of  the  principles  by  which  this  Kesolu- 
tion  is  inspired. 

VII.  To  inform  all  States  Members  of  the  Or- 
ganization of  the  steps  taken  in  this  case,  for  their 
better  information. 

(Approved  on  December  24,  1948.) 

Appointment  of  a  Committee  of  Military  Experts 

In  addition  to  the  principal  resolution  the  Pro- 
visional Organ  also  voted  to  designate  an  inter- 
American  conmiittee  of  military  experts  to  be  com- 
posed of  not  more  than  three  representatives  from 
each  of  five  member  states.'  This  committee  was 
directed  to  proceed  to  Costa  Eica  and  Nicaragua 
at  the  earliest  possible  date  for  the  purpose  of 
"contributing  to  the  effective  fulfillment  of  the 
resolution  adopted  on  this  date,"  that  being  the 
resolution  of  December  24.  Brazil,  Colombia, 
Mexico,  Paraguay,  and  the  United  States  were 
subsequently  requested  by  Chairman  Corominas 
to  appoint  representatives  of  their  armed  forces 
to  this  committee.  These  actions  were  duly  re- 
ported to  the  governments  of  the  American  Re- 
publics and  to  the  President  of  the  Security 
Council. 

In  his  letter  of  instruction  ®  to  the  members  of 
the    military    committee,    Chairman    Corominas 


•  PAU  doc.  1864. 
"  PAU  doc.  192.5. 
"  PAU  doc.  2294. 

"PAU  doc.  2494,  see  also  U.N.  doc.  S/1288,  Feb.  25, 
1949. 


712 


called  attention  to  the  confusing  situation  existing' 
along  the  frontier  betwen  Costa  Rica  and  Nic- 
aragua and  outlined  the  duties  and  obligations  of 
both  governments  under  the  1928  Habana  conven- 
tion on  the  duties  and  rights  of  states  in  the  event 
of  civil  strife.  The  committee  of  military  experts 
was  directed  to  inform  the  Provisional  Organ  of 
Consultation  immediately  of  any  violation  of  the 
December  24  resolution,  and  it  was  authorized,  on 
prior  agreement  of  the  Governments  of  Costa  Rica 
and  Nicaragua,  to  give  assistance  to  those  Govern- 
ments in  the  application  of  the  measures  called  for 
in  that  resolution.  The  committee  was  informed 
that  the  duration  of  its  mission  would  be  deter- 
mined by  the  Provisional  Organ  of  Consultation. 
The  Mexican  and  United  States  members  de- 
parted for  Costa  Rica  on  December  28  and  were 
joined  there  by  the  other  representatives.  Mem- 
bers of  the  Committee  spent  more  than  2  months 
in  Costa  Rica  and  Nicaragua.  They  traveled  be- 
tween the  two  countries,  visited  the  border  areas 
involved  in  the  military  action,  and  were  in  con- 
tinuing communication  with  the  two  governments 
concerning  compliance  with  the  terms  of  the  De- 
cember 24  resolution.  The  Committee  sent  peri- 
odic reports  to  and  received  instructions  from  the 
Provisional  Organ  of  Consultation.  In  a  report 
transmitted  from  Managua  on  January  31 "  the 
Committee  expressed  the  view  that  the  official 
measures  taken  by  the  Costa  Rican  and  Nicara- 
guan  Governments  in  pursuance  of  the  December 
24  resolution  were  sufficient  to  comply  with  the 
terms  of  the  resolution. 

Pact  of  Amity — Termination  of  the  Incident 

This  report  gave  impetus  to  the  efforts  under 
way  in  Washington  through  the  Provisional  Or- 
gan of  Consultation  to  bring  about  a  final  solution 
of  the  controversy.  A  committee  was  appointed 
to  draw  up  a  brief  document  which  might  be 
signed  by  the  Governments  of  Costa  Rica  and 
Nicaragua  to  indicate  their  compliance  with  the 
directives  of  the  Council  and  their  desire  to  bring 
an  end  to  the  existing  situation.  The  represen- 
tatives of  Costa  Rica  and  Nicaragua  on  the  Coun- 
cil participated  in  the  work  of  the  committee. 
Tliere  resulted  a  Pact  of  Amity,"  which  was 
signed  at  the  Pan  American  Union  on  February 
21,  1949,  by  the  Costa  Rican  and  Nicaraguan  Am- 
bassadors on  behalf  of  their  governments.    In 

(Continued  on  page  725) 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


UNITED  NATIONS  AND  SPECIALIZED  AGENCIES 


Disposition  of  the  Former  Italian  Colonies 


STATEMENT  BY  AMBASSADOR  WARREN  R.  AUSTIN' 


During  the  last  six  weeks  we  have  listened  at- 
tentively to  the  views  of  other  delegations,  of  the 
representative  of  the  Italian  Government,  and  of 
various  representatives  of  the  inhabitants  of  the 
former  Italian  colonies.  The  effort  of  the  First 
Committee  and  of  its  subcommittee  has  been  de- 
voted to  the  task  of  finding  its  solution  to  the  prob- 
lem of  the  disposal  of  the  former  Italian  colonies. 

The  First  Committee's  draft  resolution  before 
the  Assembly  seeks  to  take  into  account  the  vari- 
ous views  expressed.  It  is  not  possible  to  find  a 
solution  which  would  completely  reconcile  all  the 
various  suggestions  which  have  been  put  forward, 
and  that  is  a  postulate.  It  is  possible,  however,  to 
apply  the  trusteeship  system  of  the  United  Na- 
tions to  certain  territories,  to  incorporate  another 
territory  into  an  adjoining  state  with  homogene- 
ous population  and  interests,  and  under  appropri- 
ate guaranties  for  the  protection  of  minorities,  to 
provide  for  the  agreements  and  instruments  de- 
signed to  settle  and  stabilize  the  rights  of  states 
and  peoples  concerned,  in  accordance  with  the 
purposes  and  principles  of  the  Charter  and  of  the 
treaty  of  peace  with  Italy. 

I  submit  that  this  is  not  colonization  or  colonial- 
ism under  either  its  own  name  or  some  other  name. 
This  is  not  supporting  imperialism.  I  speak  of 
that  only  because  of  the  charges  made  rather 
recklessly  today. 

During  the  last  few  years  most  of  the  members 
of  the  United  Nations  have  bent  their  efforts  to 
restoring  suitable  peacetime  political  and  eco- 
nomic conditions  throughout  the  world.  These 
efforts  have  met  with  considerable  success.  We 
have,  nevertheless,  an  obligation  to  assure  to  the 
peoples  of  these  territories  a  prompt  transition 
fi-om  wartime  to  peacetime  administration.  The 
uncei'tainties  regarding  their  future  must  be  re- 
moved. New  political  institutions  are  required 
to  prepare  them  to  govern  themselves.  Their 
progressive  development  towards  self-government 
should  begin — the  earlier  the  better,  now  rather 
than  after  another  assembly.  Economic  progress 
is  needed  to  bring  them  greater  benefits  and  to 
enable  them  to  lay  the  necessary  foundations  for 
early  nationhood,  as  in  Libya,  or  to  play  their  part, 
where  appropriate,  in  the  development  of  neigh- 
boring nations  to  whose  destinies  they  may  be 
tied,  as  in  Eritrea. 

June  5,   J  949 


These  important  considerations  indicate  the 
need  for  prompt  action.  Our  trust  will  not  per- 
mit us  to  indulge  in  the  luxury  of  prolonging 
indecision  in  the  hope  of  agreement  on  a  perfect 
solution.  Our  efforts  must  instead  be  directed 
toward  the  achievement  of  a  formula  which,  in  at- 
taining United  Nations  major  objectives,  recon- 
ciles to  the  greatest  extent  possible  the  various 
conflicting  views  which  have  been  expressed  in  this 
General  Assembly. 


Progress  Problems  of  Italian  Colonies 

U.N.  doc.  A/808 
Adopted  May  17,  1949 

The  General  Assembly 

Recommends  that  the  Economic  and  Social  Coun- 
cil should,  in  studying  and  planning  its  activities 
in  connexion  with  economically  under-developed 
regions  and  countries,  take  into  consideration  the 
problems  of  economic  development  and  social 
progress  of  the  former  Italian  colonies. 


During  the  consideration  of  this  problem  in  the 
First  Committee,  the  representative  of  the  United 
States  on  several  occasions  set  forth  the  views  of 
our  delegation  on  the  various  aspects  of  this  prob- 
lem. I  do  not  pretend  that  the  resolution  ap- 
proved by  the  Committee  corresponds  fully  with 
those  views.  Nor  does  it  present  a  perfect  solu- 
tion. However,  it  does  apply  the  principles  of  the 
Charter,  and  it  is  animated  by  the  spirit  of  the 
Charter. 

In  the  case  of  Libya,  the  resolution  paves  the 
way  for  independence  and  unity.  Independence 
will  be  attained  in  10  years  unless  there  are  very 
strong  reasons  to  the  contrary  at  that  time.  Unity 
is  arranged  for  in  the  recommendation  that  the 
powers  charged  with  the  administration  of  the 
three  territories  should  take  adequate  measures  to 
promote  coordination  of  their  activities  in  order 
that  nothing  should  be  done  to  prejudice  the  at- 
tainment of  an  independent  and  unified  Libyan 
state.  There  again  the  principles  of  the  Charter 
govern  the  action  because  the  Trusteeship  Council 

'  JIade  before  the  plenary  session  of  the  General  As- 
sembly in  New  York  on  May  17,  1949,  and  released  to  the 
press  by  the  U.  S.  Mission  to  the  United  Nations  on  the 
same  date. 

713 


will  be  responsible  for  supervising  the  execution  of 
this  provision.  The  representative  of  Poland 
whimsically  calls  this  a  fig  leaf.  However,  the 
truth  is  that  the  formula  of  the  resolution  contains 
ample  provision  for  working  out  the  necessary 
machinery  to  achieve  a  unified  state  at  the  time 
of  independence. 

The  Norwegian  delegation's  amendment  to  the 
subcommittee's  draft  regarding  the  independence 
of  Libya  is  a  virtual  guarantee  now  that  Libya 
will  be  independent.  This  guaranty  would  take 
effect  in  10  years  unless  at  that  time  the  General 
Assembly,  by  a  two-thirds  vote,  should  decide 
otherwise.  The  consequent  decision,  if  this  pro- 
vision were  adopted,  would  place  the  burden  of 
proof  heavily  upon  those — should  there  be  any — 
who  believed  10  years  from  now  that  independence 
should  not  be  granted. 

To  state  it  another  way,  the  risk  of  nonpersua- 
sion — that  is,  the  risk  of  nonindependence — is  not 
on  the  Libyans.  Under  this  resolution,  it  is  on 
the  challenger  of  their  independence. 

Let  me  say  in  passing  that  the  United  States 
delegation  will  support  the  amendment  proposed 
by  Egypt  which  would,  if  adopted,  grant  Libya 
independence  in  10  years  from  the  adoption  of  this 
resolution.     I  shall  refer  to  this  again  shortly. 

The  references  to  unity  are  not  taken  lightly  by 
my  delegation.  We  should  expect  the  trusteeship 
agreements  which  would  be  worked  out  in  order 
to  implement  these  recommendations  further  to 
strengthen  the  object  of  unity.  I  would  remind 
the  members  of  this  Assembly,  moreover,  that  these 
agreements  will  be  submitted  to  the  General  As- 
sembly for  their  approval,  and  that  they  will  then 
have  a  further  opportunity  to  assure  themselves 
that  the  administrations  of  the  territories  do 
undertake  the  obligations  and  do  serve  the  basic 
objectives  of  the  trusteeship  system,  with  special 
regard  for  the  interests  of  the  inhabitants.  An 
important  principle  of  the  Charter  is  that  the  in- 
terests of  the  inhabitants  of  these  territories  are 
paramount.  The  destiny  of  human  beings — in  the 
language  of  my  distinguished  friend  General 
Romulo — will  be  the  highest  objective  among  the 
provisions  of  these  agreements,  to  be  passed  upon 
under  the  trusteeship  system  and  by  the  Trustee- 
ship Council.  Let  me  observe  again  that  the 
freely  expressed  wishes  of  the  people  will  be  con- 
sidered, in  connection  with  other  elements  of  Char- 
ter requirements,  in  formulating  those  agreements. 

I  should  also  like  to  say  something  about  the 
importance  which  my  delegation  attaches  to  the 
advisory  council  for  Tripolitania  provided  in  par- 
agraph 1  (c)  of  the  resolution.  We  consider  the 
establishment  of  the  advisory  council  to  be  one  of 
tlie  most  important  features  of  the  resolution. 
The  resolution  provides  that  l^etween  now  and  the 
end  of  1951,  when  the  Italian  trusteeship  over 
Tripolitania  will  become  effective,  there  shall  be 


an  advisory  council  consisting  of  several  states 
and  a  representative  of  the  people  of  the  coun- 
try— a  representative  of  the  inhabitants.  This 
advisory  council  would  be  given  the  power  to  deter- 
mine its  own  scope  and  duties  in  consultation  with 
the  administering  authority.  It  would  have  the 
broad  responsibility  under  the  resolution  of  assist- 
ing the  temporary  British  administration  during 
the  interim  period.  It  is  our  considered  view  that 
the  advisory  council,  in  so  assisting  the  temporary 
British  administration,  will  be  able  to  aid  substan- 
tially the  beginning  of  the  process  of  political, 
economic,  social,  and  educational  development  con- 
templated by  the  Charter,  which  must  lead  and 
precede  independence  of  the  unified  Libya  in  10 
years.  We  hope  that  the  advisory  council  will 
meet  as  soon  as  possible  to  organize  itself  and  to 
begin  discharging  its  important  responsibilities. 


Disposal  of  Italian  Colonies 

D.N.  doc.  A/899 
Adopted  May  18,  1949 

The  General  As.sembly 

Dccitles  to  postpone  further  consideration  of  the 
item  "Question  of  the  disposal  of  the  former  Italian 
colonies"  until  the  fourth  regular  session  of  the 
General  Assembly. 


In  the  case  of  Eritrea,  the  draft  resolution  re- 
flects the  desire  of  the  majority  of  the  inhabitants 
of  the  area  to  be  incorporated  within  Ethiopia  to 
merge  their  destiny  with  that  of  the  Ethiopian 
people,  with  whom  they  are  united  by  race,  lan- 
guage, and  religion.  I^  this  a  Charter  principle 
or  not?  Is  this  imperialism?  It  also  satishes 
Ethiopia's  urgent  need  for  adequate  access  to  the 
sea  by  incorporating  within  Ethiopia  the  port  of 
Massawa,  the  only  satisfactory  port  in  the  area. 
The  proposal,  moreover,  calls  for  the  protection 
of  minorities  and  municipal  charters  for  the  cities 
of  Asmara  and  Massawa.  This  is  a  reconciliation 
which  in  our  view  protects  the  interests  of  Ethi- 
opia as  well  as  those  of  the  minority  peoples  in 
that  area.  The  resolution  contemplates  the  im- 
plementation of  this  provision  by  international 
instrument  or  agreement.  The  contents  of  these 
intei-national  instruments  or  agreements  will  fur- 
ther be  agreed  on  in  the  Interim  Committee  before 
the  next  session  of  the  General  Assembly.  That 
Interim  Committee  will  be  acting  as  the  subsidiary 
organ  of  the  General  Assembly  in  working  out 
these  agreements  for  submission  to  the  fourth 
session  of  tlie  General  Assembly. 

Italian  Somaliland  would  be  placed  under  the 
inlernational  trusteeship  system  with  Italy  as  the 
administering  authority  and  with  independence  as 
the  objective.  Here  again,  transfer  of  adminis- 
tration would  not  take  place  until  a  trusteeship 
agreement  satisfactory  to  the  General  Assembly 
is  approved.  In  entrusting  the  administration  of 
these  territories  of  Tripolitania  and  Somaliland 
to  Itiily,  we  shall  be  welcoming  the  Italy  of  today 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


as  a  partner  in  the  great  task  of  assisting  the 
people  of  Africa  on  the  road  of  political  and 
economic  progress. 

While  this  resolution  does  not  contain  the  per- 
fect answer  to  the  general  problem  before  us,  it 
does  contain  constructive  elements  of  an  answer 
to  the  problem,  and  we  urge  it  upon  the  General 
Assembly  as  the  most  practicable  solution  in  the 
circumstances.  The  United  States  delegation 
therefore,  supports  the  resolution  as  a  whole  and 
every  part  of  it. 

As  I  am  about  to  point  out,  there  are  certain 
amendments  now  on  the  table  to  which  we  would 
agree.  I  wish  to  speak  about  all  of  the  amend- 
ments briefly.  My  delegation  will  vote  against 
the  proposal  of  the  Soviet  Union  contained  in  the 
document  A/881  for  reasons  which  were  stated  by 
us  fully,  and  I  shall  not  restate  them. 

With  respect  to  the  draft  resolution  submitted 
by  the  delegation  of  Iraq  contained  in  document 
A/875,  we  shall  be  unable  to  support  it  because 
of  our  conviction  that  Libya  requires  a  period  of 
preparation  under  the  trusteeship  system.  In  ex- 
pressing this  conviction,  I  should  like  to  reiterate 
our  belief  that  Libya  will  be  able  to  attain  inde- 
pendence after  the  preparatory  period  of  10  years. 
As  I  have  already  stated,  we  will  welcome  and 
support  the  Egyptian  amendment  in  this  regard 
contained  in  document  A/885.  We  share  with  the 
delegation  of  Liberia  the  spirit  which  animated  it 
to  introduce  an  amendment  setting  a  period  after 
which  the  General  Assembly  would  determine 
whether  the  inhabitants  have  made  sufficient  prog- 
ress to  warrant  independence.  We  believe,  how- 
ever, that  15  years  is  too  short  a  period  in  which 
to  accomplish  the  difficult  task  it  will  involve,  and 
that  a  period  corresponding  to  about  one  genera- 
tion would  be  more  realistic.  We  are  prepared, 
therefore,  to  support  the  amendment  offered  by 
the  delegations  of  Argentina,  Brazil,  and  Peru 
to  the  Liberian  amendment  prolonging  the  time 
from  15  to  25  years.  Of  course,  you  understand 
that  the  United  States  delegation  supports  the 
Liberian  amendment  whether  it  is  amended  by 
this  last  amendment  or  not.  We  also  welcome 
and  support  the  Egyptian  amendment  on  the 
western  province  of  Eritrea.  That  amendment 
corresponds  to  the  position  we  took  in  the  First 
Committee  on  the  subcommittee's  draft  resolution. 


Appointment  of  a  Special  Committee  on 
Metliods  and  Procedures  of  the 
General  Assembly 

UN.  doc.  A/849 
Adopted  Apr.  29,  1949 

The  General  Assembly, 

Mindful,  of  the  increasing  length  of  General 
Assembly  sessions,  and  of  the  growing  tendency 
towards  protracted  debates  in  its  plenary  meet- 
ings and  committees, 

June  5,   1949 


1.  Decides  to  create  a  Special  Committee  con- 
sisting of  Belgium,  Brazil,  Canada,  China,  Czech- 
oslovakia, Egypt,  France,  India,  Iran,  Mexico, 
Sweden,  Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics, 
United  Kingdom,  United  States  of  America  and 
Uruguay  in  order  to : 

(a)  Consider  methods  and  procedures  which 
would  enable  the  General  Assembly  and  its  com- 
mittees to  discharge  their  functions  more  effec- 
tively and  expeditiously ; 

(b)  Submit,  if  possible,  a  preliminary  report 
to  the  General  Assembly  during  the  second  part 
of  its  third  session ; 

(c)  Transmit  a  report  to  the  Secretary-Gen- 
eral, not  later  than  15  August  1949,  for  circulation 
to  Members  and  for  consideration  at  the  fourth 
regular  session  of  the  General  Assembly; 

2.  Invites  the  Secretary-General  to  collaborate 
closely  with  the  Special  Committee  in  its  work. 


Current  United  Nations  Documents: 
A  Selected  Bibliography  ^ 

Trusteeship  Council 

Provision  of  Information  to  the  Peoples  of  Trust  Terri- 
tories.    T/272,  March  14,  1949.     14  pp.     mimeo. 

Beport  of  the  Visiting  Mission  to  East  Africa.  T/273, 
March  14,  1949.     16  pp.     mimeo. 

Economic  and  Social  Council 

Official  Records,  Eighth  Session.  Resolutions.  7  Febru- 
ary-18  March  1949.  Supplement  No.  1.  vl,  47  pp. 
printed.     50^. 

Report  of  the  Third  Session  of  the  Commission  on  the 
Status  of  Women.  Beirut,  Lebanon,  21  March  to  4 
AprU  1949.  E/1316.  E/CN.  6/124.  19  Apr.  1949. 
36  pp.  mimeo. 

Economic  Commission  For  Asia  and  the  Far  East.  Com- 
mittee of  the  Whole.  Establishment  of  Subsidiary 
Bodies.  Report  by  the  Executive-Secretary.  E/CN. 
11/183.     4  March  1949.     41  pp.  mimeo. 

Composition  of  the  Economic  and  Social  Council  and 
Subsidiary  Organs.  E/INF/21/Rev.  2.  14  AprU 
1949.    21  pp.  mimeo. 

Proposed  United  Nations  Charter  of  the  Rights  of  the 
Child.  Report  by  the  Secretary-General.  E/CN. 
5/111.     8  March  1949.    79  pp.  mimeo. 

The  Work  of  the  United  Nations  with  Respect  to  the  Pre- 
vention of  Crime  and  the  Treatment  of  Offenders. 
E/CN.5/113.     13  April  1949.     44  pp.  mimeo. 

Atomic  Energy  Commission 

Resolution  Adopted  by  the  General  Assembly  at  Its  One 
Hundred  and  Fifty-seventh  Plenary  Meeting  on  4 
November  1948  concerning  "Reports  of  the  Atomic 
Energy  Commission."  AEO/33.  Feb.  14,  1949.  1  p. 
mimeo. 


'  Printed  materials  may  be  secured  in  the  United  States 
from  the  International  Documents  Service,  Columbia 
University  Press,  2960  Broadway,  New  York  27,  N.  Y. 
Other  materials  (mimeographed  or  processed  documents) 
may  be  consulted  at  certain  designated  libraries  in  the 
United  States. 

715 


The  United  States  and  the  United  Nations:  Report  by  the  President 
to  the  Congress  for  the  Year  1948' 


In  his  letter  transmitting  the  report  to  the  Con- 
gress on  United  States  participation  in  the  United 
Nations  in  1948,  the  President  says  that  the  United 
States  supports  the  United  Nations  in  all  respects 
and  emphasizes  our  determination  to  continue  to 
work  for  the  Charter  objectives  of  the  prevention 
of  wars,  pacific  settlement  of  disputes,  tne  promo- 
tion of  world-wide  progress  and  better  living 
standards,  universal  respect  of  fundamental  hu- 
man rights  and  freedoms,  and  the  removal  of  the 
economic  and  social  causes  of  international  con- 
flict and  unrest.  He  points  out  that  if  the  United 
Nations  has  been  disappointing  as  a  security  or- 
ganization, and  "if  we  have  had  to  take  supple- 
mental measures  to  meet  actual  or  potential 
threats  to  our  security,  it  is  not  because  the  United 
States  has  not  put  forth  real  efforts  to  develop  the 
United  Nations  to  its  full  stature." 

Secretary  Acheson  in  his  letter  accompanying 
the  report  frankly  states  that  "both  hope  and  dis- 
appointment marked  the  participation  of  the 
United  States  in  the  United  Nations  during  1948." 
This  disappointment  is  attributed  to  "the  failure 
of  certain  states  to  observe  their  obligations  under 
the  Charter  on  matters  which  seriously  atfect  the 
maintenance  of  peace."  The  Secretary  notes  the 
leading  part  played  by  the  United  States  "in 
keepin<T  the  attention  of  the  United  Nations 
focused  upon  the  political  questions  of  the  future 
government  of  Palestine,  the  independence  of 
Korea,  and  the  maintenance  of  the  territorial  in- 
tegrity and  political  independence  of  Greece,"  as 
well  as  its  initiative  in  Indonesia  and  in  the  con- 
sideration by  the  Security  Council  of  the  Soviet 
blockade  of  the  Western  sectors  of  Berlin.  In  ad- 
dition to  these  achievements  in  the  political  field, 
the  Secretary  stresses  the  leadership  of  the  United 
States  in  the  fields  of  human  rights,  trusteeship, 
and  economic  and  social  matters.  Although  he 
does  not  fail  to  point  out  the  incomplete  growth 
of  the  United  Nations  as  a  security  organization, 
he  makes  clear  that  "there  is  no  sound  reason  for 
Americans  to  lose  confidence  in  the  United  Na- 
tions." The  United  Nations,  he  says,  is  the  proper 
agency  for  promoting  the  extension  of  democratic 
principles  and  purposes  in  other  areas  by  peaceful 
and  proper  means. 

The  first  section  of  the  report  discusses  the  de- 
velopment of  the  organization  and  work  of  each 
of  the  major  organs  of  the  United  Nations:  the 
General  Assembly,  the  Security  Council,  the  Eco- 

'  Informal  rdsnm^  released  to  the  press  on  May  12, 1949. 


nomic  and  Social  Council,  the  Trusteeship  Coun- 
cil, the  International  Court  of  Justice,  and  the 
Secretariat. 

The  work  of  the  Assembly,  it  is  reported,  re- 
flects an  impressive  measure  of  agreement  on  a 
variety  of  extremely  difficult  problems.  It  is 
noted  that  the  business  of  the  Assembly,  particu- 
larly in  the  political  field,  has  expanded  during 
the  three  years  of  the  Assembly's  existence. 

The  major  problems  which  engaged  the  Security 
Council  in  1948  and  its  organizational  develop- 
ment are  discussed.  The  outstanding  fact,  the  re- 
port states,  is  the  extensive  use  which  states  made 
of  the  Council  in  their  serious  disputes  so  that  it 
continues  to  exercise  its  responsibilities  as  the  or- 
gan of  the  United  Nations  primarily  responsible 
for  the  maintenance  of  international  peace  and  se- 
curity. Reference  is  also  made  to  the  work  of  the 
Military  Staff  Committee,  the  Atomic  Energy 
Commission,  and  the  Commission  for  Conven- 
tional Armaments. 

The  broad  range  of  the  work  of  the  United  Na- 
tions in  the  economic  and  social  field  is  explained 
in  an  analysis  of  the  Economic  and  Social  Council 
and  its  "specialized  organizational  tools,"  includ- 
ing the  10  established  specialized  agencies  and  the 
3  specialized  agencies  now  in  process  of  final  or- 
ganization ;  the  International  Children's  Emer- 
gency Fund,  the  9  functional  commissions,  and  the 
3  regional  commissions.  The  tendency  to  censure 
the  Council  for  having  produced  "little  in  the  way 
of  concrete  achievement  or  for  having  proceeded 
too  slowly  in  taking  up  its  important  tasks"  is  ex- 
plained as  the  result  of  a  misunderstanding  of  the 
nature  of  the  Council's  role  in  the  United  Nations 
which  is  clearly  defined  as  that  of  an  advisory,  rec- 
ommendatory body  meant  "to  provide  a  sense  of 
direction  and  coherence  to  world  economic  and  so- 
cial policies." 

A  brief  section  on  the  Trusteeship  Council  out- 
lines the  progress  in  this  important  field  and  points 
out  the  continuing  active  support  wliich  this  gov- 
ernment has  given  to  the  principles  upon  which 
the  trusteeship  system  is  based. 

The  work  of  tne  International  Court  of  Justice 
is  outlined  briefly  and  the  cases  with  which  the 
Court  has  been  concerned  are  briefly  discussed. 

Finally,  the  role  of  the  Secretariat  is  explained 
in  the  general  context  of  its  staff  work  for  the  or- 
ganization and  as  part  of  a  developing  interna- 
tional civil  service. 

The  second  part  of  the  report  which  is  entitled 
"The  United  Nations  in  World  Politics,  1948" 
comprises  a  systematic  discussion  of  the  major 

DepartmenI  of  Sfate  Bulletin 


problems  which  the  organization  has  considered  in 
each  of  its  fields  of  activity. 

Beginning  with  the  security  problems  before  the 
United  Nations,  the  report  discusses  in  detail  the 
action  taken  during  the  past  year  on  the  interna- 
tional control  of  atomic  energy  and  the  regulation 
and  reduction  of  conventional  armaments. 

Two  significant  developments  in  the  atomic  en- 
ergy field  are  noted,  the  approval  by  the  General 
Assembly  of  the  plan  of  international  control  de- 
veloped by  the  Atomic  Energy  Commission  during 
its  two  years  of  work,  and  the  clear  recognition  of 
the  impasse  in  the  negotiations  created  by  the  re- 
fusal of  the  Soviet  Union  to  accept  this  plan. 
"The  slight  progress"  of  the  Commission  for  Con- 
ventional Armaments  is  also  attributed  to  the  di- 
vision between  a  large  majority  of  the  members 
and  the  Soviet  group,  but  hope  is  expressed  that 
the  action  of  the  General  Assembly  at  Paris,  in 
providing  for  the  formulation  of  proposals  for 
the  receipt,  checking,  and  verification  by  an  inter- 
national agency  of  information  with  regard  to 
conventional  armaments  and  armed  forces  will  be 
helpful  in  this  situation. 

The  various  cases  and  situations  involving  peace- 
ful settlement  by  the  organization  are  considered 
in  some  detail.  The  evolution  of  the  Palestine 
settlement  is  set  forth  in  a  point-by-point  history 
of  this  diiRcult  problem.  The  related  problem  of 
assistance  to  Palestinian  refugees  is  also  consid- 
ered. The  report  next  proceeds  to  a  discussion 
of  the  threats  to  the  political  independence  and 
territorial  integrity  of  Greece,  and  particularly 
the  work  of  the  United  Nations  Committee  on  the 
Balkans.  Succeeding  sections  of  this  portion  of 
the  report  deal  in  turn  with  the  problems  of  Korean 
independence,  the  Berlin  blockade,  Kashmir,  Tri- 
este, Hyderabad,  Indonesia,  and  Czechoslovakia. 

This  section  of  the  report  also  covers  certain 
organizational  developments,  including  the  pro- 
gram of  work  and  the  continuation  of  the  Interim 
Committee,  voting  procedure  in  the  Security  Coun- 
cil, the  admission  of  new  members,  and  the  United 
Nations  Guard. 

The  second  major  section  of  this  part  of  the  re- 
port deals  with  the  economic,  social,  and  human- 
rights  problems  considered  by  the  United  Nations. 
On  the  economic  side,  an  important  contribution 
to  the  economic  work  of  the  organization  is  to  be 
found,  the  report  states,  in  the  first  factual  world 
economic  survey  since  before  the  war,  which  will 
provide  data  helpful  to  the  analysis  of  problems 
in  this  field.  The  program  of  the  United  Nations 
looking  toward  the  advancement  of  the  economic 
development  of  its  members  is  discussed  in  detail. 
The  implementing  programs  of  the  specialized 
agencies  and  the  work  of  the  Economic  Commis- 
sion for  Europe  are  given  particular  attention  in 
this  connection.  Another  section  considers  the 
concerted  measures  taken  under  the  auspices  of  the 
organization  to  meet  the  world  food  crisis. 

The  widely  acclaimed  action  of  the  organization 

June  5,   1949 


in  the  field  of  human  rights  is  considered  in  sec- 
tions of  the  report  dealing  in  turn  with  the  Uni- 
versal Declaration  of  Human  Rights,  Freedom  of 
Information,  and  the  Convention  on  Genocide.  It 
is  pointed  out  that  the  Human  Rights  Declaration 
is  the  culmination  of  two  and  one-half  years  of 
painstaking  work  by  the  organization  and  par- 
ticularly its  Human  Rights  Commission. 

The  report  then  takes  up  the  problems  of  de- 
pendent territories.  An  extensive  section  on  trus- 
teeship activities  describes  the  work  of  the  Trus- 
teeship Council  in  examining  annual  reports  sub- 
mitted by  administering  states  on  their  territories, 
and  petitions  from  the  inhabitants  of  trust  terri- 
tories or  other  interested  parties.  The  work  of  the 
first  regular  visiting  Trusteeship  Council  mission 
to  East  Africa  is  considered.  The  part  the  Trus- 
teeship discussions  in  the  General  Assembly  have 
played  in  the  formulation  of  over-all  policies  is 
pointed  out.  An  accompanying  section  takes  up 
the  work  and  development  of  the  policies  of  the 
organization  toward  non-self-governing  territo- 
ries, and  in  particular  the  work  of  the  Assembly's 
Special  Committee  on  Information  transmitted 
under  article  73  (e)  of  the  Charter.  The  work  of 
the  regional  commissions  on  non-self-governing 
territories  in  the  Caribbean  and  in  the  South  Pa- 
cific, which  have  been  developed  to  implement 
the  work  of  the  United  Nations  in  these  important 
fields,  is  noted. 

The  two  closing  parts  of  the  report  deal  respec- 
tively with  the  administrative  and  budgetary  ques- 
tions decided  by  the  General  Assembly  and  the 
international  legal  questions  which  have  con- 
fi'onted  the  organization  during  1948.  The  elec- 
tion of  the  International  Law  Commission,  which 
is  to  have  the  task  of  working  toward  the  codifi- 
cation and  progressive  development  of  interna- 
tional law,  is  cited  as  an  important  step  forward 
in  the  international  legal  program  of  the  organi- 
zation. 

A  wealth  of  reference  material  is  contained  in 
the  extensive  appendices  of  the  report.  The  most 
important  resolutions  adopted  by  the  General  As- 
sembly and  by  the  Security  Council  during  1948 
and  an  interesting  factual  account  of  the  organiza- 
tion of  the  United  States  to  participate  in  the 
United  Nations  are  included.  There  are  tables 
which  give  a  complete  listing  of  United  States 
representatives  to  the  United  Nations,  its  organs, 
subsidiary  bodies,  and  specialized  agencies  during 
1948 ;  the  membership  of  the  principal  organs  and 
the  specialized  agencies  of  the  United  Nations; 
charts  showing  the  general  structure  of  the  organ- 
ization; a  chronology  of  significant  United  Na- 
tions developments ;  and  an  extensive  bibliography 
of  materials  about  the  United  Nations. 

Copies  of  the  report  may  be  obtained  from  the 
Superintendent  of  Documents,  Government 
Printing  Office,  Washington  25,  D.  C,  at  550  per 
copy.  The  report  is  not  copyrighted,  and  it  may 
be  reprinted  in  whole  or  in  part. 


The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations 


[May  28-Juiie  3] 

Technical  Assistance  Program 

The  fii-st  comprehensive  international  program 
of  technical  assistance  for  the  economic  develop- 
ment of  underdeveloped  countries,  prepared  by  the 
Secretariat  and  eifjht  specialized  agencies,  was 
released  on  June  2  by  the  Secretary-General.  The 
estimated  cost  of  the  technical  assistance  described 
in  the  program  is  35.9  million  dollars  for  the  first 
year  and  50.2  million  dollars  for  the  second  year, 
plus  the  amounts  tliat  governments  of  recipient 
countries  will  be  expected  to  pay  as  their  part  of 
the  cost. 

The  material  presented  in  the  program  is,  in 
most  instances,  in  the  form  of  projects,  but  the 
character,  size,  location,  and  costs  of  the  specific 
projects  will  depend  on  the  nature  of  requests 
received  from  governments  desiring  assistance. 
The  purpose  of  the  program,  the  report  notes,  is 
to  help  underdeveloped  countries  achieve  the  ma- 
terial and  social  benefits  of  sound,  balanced  eco- 
nomic development. 

The  program  will  be  submitted  for  approval 
to  the  Economic  and  Social  Council  this  summer 
and  to  the  General  Assembly  in  the  fall. 

Commission  for  Conventional  Armaments 

A  working  pai)er  outlining  principles  and  pro- 
cedures for  implementation  of  the  General  Assem- 
bly November  19  resolution  relating  to  the  future 
work  of  the  Commission  for  Conventional  Arma- 
ments was  submitted  to  the  working  committee  by 
the  French  representative.  The  United  States 
representative  supported  the  paper,  stating  that  it 
would  clear  the  ground  and  build  a  foundation 
for  future  successful  work.  The  United  King- 
dom and  Canadian  representatives  also  received 
the  plan  favorably,  but  asked  time  to  study  it 
and  to  receive  instructions  from  their  govern- 
ments. Questions  of  the  U.  S.  S.  R.  representa- 
tive indicated  that  the  U.  S.  S.  R.  considers  that 
implementation  of  the  resolution  should  include 
a  concurrent  plan  of  arms  reduction  and  that  col- 
lection of  atomic  as  well  as  conventional  arma- 
ments data  should  be  included  in  the  census  project. 

Commission  on  Human  Rights 

The  Commission  on  Human  Rights  approved 
several  additional  articles  of  the  Draft  Interna- 
tional Covenant  of  Human  Rights  and  turned  to 
discussion  of  measures  of  implementation,  using 
an  outline  prepared  by  the  Secretariat  as  a  basis 
for  the  discussion.  The  approved  articles  deal 
in  general  with  the  prohibition  of  slavery,  servi- 


tude and  compulsory  labor,  the  right  to  freedom 
of  movement,  the  prohibition  of  the  expulsion  of 
an  alien  who  has  been  legally  admitted  to  a  state 
other  than  in  accordance  with  such  procedures  as 
are  provided  by  law,  and  the  right  to  a  fair  trial. 

As  U.  S.  Representative,  Chairman  Mrs.  Roose- 
velt felt  that  the  covenant  and  implementation 
measures  should  go  hand  in  hand.  She  considered 
that  because  the  United  Nations  lacked  experience 
in  the  human  rights  implementation  field,  it  would 
be  wise  to  make  a  modest  beginning. 

The  Commission  decided  to  recommend  to  the 
Economic  and  Social  Council  that  its  next  session, 
tentatively  scheduled  for  March  1950,  be  held  in 
Geneva. 

Social  Commission  Round-Up 

The  main  achievement  of  the  fourth  session  of 
the  Social  Commission  held  May  2-20  at  Lake 
Success  was  the  adoption  of  a  draft  Convention 
for  the  Suppression  of  Traffic  in  Persons  and  of 
the  Exploitation  of  the  Prostitution  of  Others. 
Former  treaties  on  this  traffic  were  limited  to 
police  measures  for  the  suppression  and  punish- 
ment of  traffic  in  women;  the  new  draft,  however, 
recognizes  the  importance  of  the  educational  aspect 
of  the  problem  and  recommends  measures  for  the 
prevention  of  prostitution  and  rehabilitation  of 
prostitutes. 

The  Commission  approved  a  program  of  work 
which  includes  studies  on  levels  of  living  and  im- 
provement of  living  conditions  in  less  developed 
areas  and  decided  to  ask  the  Secretarj'-General 
to  invite  member  governments  to  notify  him  of 
measures  they  have  a{)plied  which  would  be  of 
assistance  in  suggesting  practical  measures  for 
raising  living  standards  of  low  income  groups. 

The  Commission  agreed  to  urge  tlie  General 
Assembly  to  authorize  that  United  Nations  ad- 
visory social  welfare  activities  be  put  on  a  con- 
tinuing basis  in  place  of  the  present  j'ear-to-year 
basis.  A  report  to  the  Commission  showed  the 
progressive  increase  in  the  numbers  of  experts, 
fellowships,  and  other  assistance  provided  for 
member  countries. 

Other  matters  which  the  Social  Commission 
considered  were  the  report  of  the  activities  and 
development  of  the  International  Children's 
Emergency  Fund,  the  principles  of  a  Declaration 
of  the  Rights  of  the  Child.  A  proposal  asking 
the  Secretary-General  to  arrange  for  a  meeting 
in  1950  of  experts  to  consider  technical  questions 
relating  to  housing  and  town  planning  for  lower 
income  groups  in  the  humid  tropics  was  accepted 
by  the  Social  Commission. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Subcom mission  on  Freedom  of  Information 

The  12-member  Subcommission  on  Freedom  of 
Information  and  of  the  Press,  established  by  the 
Commission  on  Human  Rights  of  the  Economic 
and  Social  Council  to  "consider  issues  and  pi'ob- 
lems  involved  in  the  dissemination  of  informa- 
tion by  newspapers  and  news  periodicals,  radio 
broadcasts  and  newsreels,"  opened  its  third  session 
at  Lake  Success  on  May  31. 

At  its  first  two  meetings,  the  Subcommission 
elected  officers  and  began  consideration  of  the 
method  of  approach  to  the  23-item  agenda  drawn 
up  by  the  Secretariat.  The  agenda  includes  such 
items  as  study  of  information  barriers  and  of 
news  adequacy;  analysis  of  information  agree- 
ments; implementation  of  the  United  Nations 
information  conventions;  and  jDromotion  of  true 
information  to  counteract  Nazi,  Fascist,  and  dis- 
criminatory propaganda.  United  States  Member 
Carroll  Binder  expressed  opposition  to  having  the 
group  take  on  the  responsibility  of  implementing 
freedom  information  conventions. 

The  World  Health  Organization 

An  agreement  by  which  the  Pan  American  Sani- 
tary Bureau,  located  in  Washington,  D.C.,  becomes 
the  Regional  Office  for  the  Western  Hemisphere 
of  the  World  Health  Organization  was  sigiied 
May  24  in  Washington  by  Dr.  Brock  Chisholm, 
Director  General  of  the  World  Health  Organiza- 
tion and  Dr.  Fred  L.  Soper,  Director  of  the  Pan 
American  Sanitary  Office.  Under  the  agreement 
the  F'an  American  Sanitary  Conference  may  adopt 
and  promote  health  and  sanitary  conventions  and 
programs  in  the  Western  Hemisphere  provided 
they  are  "compatible  with  the  policy  and  programs 
of  the  World  Health  Organization  and  ai'e  sepa- 
rately financed." 

UNESCO 

A  book-exchange  center,  which  will  enable  libra- 
rians in  the  four  occupation  zones  of  Germany 
to  interchange  publications  with  countries  all  over 
the  world,  has  been  established  at  Bad  Godesberg, 
Germany,  on  the  initiative  of  the  United  Nations 
Educational,  Scientific  and  Cultural  Organization 
(Unesco)  .  The  center,  similar  to  the  one  already 
established  in  Tokyo,  will  be  financed  by  the  Emer- 
gency Council  for  the  Promotion  of  German  Sci- 
ence and  by  a  possible  grant-in-aid  from  the 
Rockefeller  Foundation. 

The  Bad  Godesberg  center  will  work  directly 
with  Unesco  in  arranging  the  exchange  of  publi- 
cations between  Germany  and  Unesco  member 
states.  In  particular,  it  will  supply  information 
on  German  institutions  seeking  publication  ex- 
changes in  any  given  field  and  will  have  complete 
lists  of  German  publications  for  exchange. 

International  Refugee  Organization 

The  International  Refugee  Organization  an- 
nounced in  an  annual  report  just  submitted  that 

June  5,   1949 


it  expects  to  resettle  342,500  displaced  persons 
during  the  next  12  months,  nearly  half  of  them  in 
the  United  States. 

Atomic  Energy  Commission 

Inconclusive  discussion  of  the  U.  S.  S.  R.  resolu- 
tion for  simultaneous  atomic  energy  conventions 
on  prohibition  and  control  was  begun  in  the  work- 
ing committee  of  the  Atomic  Energy  Commission 
on  June  1.  The  United  States,  French,  and  other 
representatives  queried  the  U.  S.  S.  R.  representa- 
tive about  possible  new  Soviet  proposals.  The 
latter  insisted  that  he  was  awaiting  "possible  new 
U.  S.  proposals"  with  as  great  an  interest  as  that 
which  the  United  States  was  awaiting  new 
U.  S.  S.  R.  proposals. 

International  Law  Commission 

Continuing  consideration  of  the  formulation  of 
principles  recognized  in  the  charter  of  the  Niirn- 
berg  Tribunal  and  in  the  judgment  of  that  Tribu- 
nal, the  International  Law  Commission  tentatively 
enumerated  the  acts  constituting  crimes  against 
IDeace  and  war  crimes  and  tentatively  approved  a 
definition  of  crimes  against  humanity.  The  docu- 
ments will  be  referred  to  the  second  session  of  the 
Commission.  After  preliminary  discussion  of 
other  agenda  items,  the  Commission  agreed  to  ap- 
point rapporteurs  to  prepare  working  papers  for 
consideration  at  the  next  session  on  (1)  prepara- 
tion of  a  draft  code  of  oifenses  against  the  peace 
and  security  of  mankind,  (2)  the  question  of  estab- 
lishment of  an  international  judicial  organ  for 
trial  of  persons  charged  with  genocide  or  other 
crimes  and  (3)  ways  and  means  for  making  the 
evidence  of  customary  international  law  more 
readily  available. 

The  Commission  will  meet  in  closed  session  to 
elect  rapporteurs  to  prei^are  papers  for  the  next 
session  on  the  three  priority  topics  for  codification 
selected  earlier  in  this  session — treaties,  arbitral 
procedure,  and  regime  of  the  high  seas. 

Economic  Commission  for  Latin  America 

The  Economic  Commission  for  Latin  America 
opened  its  second  session  in  Habana  on  May  29 
with  discussion  of  an  Economic  Survey  of  Latin 
America  as  one  of  the  main  agenda  items.  The 
survey,  recommended  by  the  Commission's  first 
session  at  Santiago  on  June  23,  1948,  presents  the 
main  elements  of  the  current  economic  situation 
in  the  Latin  American  countries  and  the  changes 
which  have  taken  place  as  a  result  of  the  war. 

A  report  on  trade  expansion  will  also  be  con- 
sidered. In  this  report  an  analysis  is  made  of  the 
possibilities  of  increasing  production  and  exports 
of  certain  commodities,  especially  to  Europe,  and 
of  increasing  imports  of  farm  machinery,  trans- 
port and  electric-power  equipment,  Diesel  motors, 
and  durable  consumer  goods  which  Europe  might 
be  able  to  supply  to  Latin  America  during  coming 
years. 


INTERNATIONAL  ORGANIZATIONS  AND  MEETINGS 


Calendar  of  Meetings  * 


Adjourned  during  May 

United  Nations: 

General  Assembly:  Second  Part  of  Third  Session 

Ecosoc  (Economic  and  Social  Council): 

Subcommission    on    Employment   and    Economic    Stability: 
Third  Session. 

Statistical  Commission:  Fourth  Session 

Social  Commission:  Fourth  Session 

IcAO  (International  Civil  Aviation  Organization): 

Special  Meeting  on  Notices  to  Airmen      

Meeting  on  Joint  Support  for  Ocean  Weather  Ship  Stations  and 
Joint  Support  for  Air  Navigation  Facilities  in  Danish  and  in 
Greek  Territory. 
Fag  (Food  and  Agriculture  Organization): 

Preparatory  Conference  on  World  Wood  Pulp  Problems  .    .    .    . 
Latin    American    Commission   for   Forestry   and   Forest   Prod- 
ucts. 
Ilo  (International  Labor  Organization) : 

Fourth  Regional  Conference  of  American  States  Members  .    .    . 
Inland  Transport  Industrial  Committee:  Third  Session    .    .    .    . 

First  International  Congress  on  Civil  Engineering 

South  Pacific  Commission:  Third  Meeting 

Health  Congress  of  the  Royal  Sanitary  Institute 

Pan     American     Sanitary    Organization:  Executive    Committee, 

Seventh  Meeting. 
Conference  on  Central  African  Transportation  Problems      .    .    .    . 

In  Session  as  of  June  1, 1949 

United  Nations: 

Commission  on  Korea 


Commission  on  India  and  Pakistan 

Conciliation  Commission  for  Palestine 

Ecosoc  (Economic  and  Social  Council): 

Economic  and  Employment  Commission:  Fourth  Session    . 

Commission  on  Human  Rights:  Fourth  Session 

Commission  on  Narcotic  Drugs:  Fourth  Session 

Economic  Commission  for  Latin  .\merica:  Second  Session  . 

Subcommission  on  Freedom  of  Information  and  the  Press: 
Third  Session. 
International  Law  Commission 


Itu  (International  Telecommunication  Union) : 
Provisional  Frequency  Board 


Region  II — Fourth  Inter-American  Radio  Conference 

Administrative   Conference  to   Revise  the  International  Tele- 
graph and  Telephone  Regulations. 

Region  I  Frequency  Conference 

Region  III  Frequency  Conference 

Council  of  Foreign  Ministers:  Deputies  for  Austria 

Gatt  (General  Assembly  on  Tariffs  and  Trade) : 

Third  Session  of  the  Contracting  Parties 

War  Victims,  Diplomatic  Conference  for  the  Drawing  Up  of  a  New 

Convention  Intended  to  Protect. 
IcAO  (International  Civil  Aviation  Organization): 

European  Frequency  Meeting:  Second  Session 

Council:  Seventh  Session 

Swiss  Allied  Accord,  Four-Power  Discussions  Regarding 

International   Authority  for  the  Ruhr,   Organizational   Meetings 
of  the  Council  of. 


Lake  Success 
Lake  Success 


Geneva   .    . 
Lake  Success 


Montreal 
London    . 


Montreal     .    . 
Rio  de  Janeiro 


Montevideo    .    .    . 

Brussels 

Mexico  City  .    .    . 

Noumea 

Brighton,  England 
Washington    .    .    . 


Lisbon 


Seoul 


Lake  Success 

Haifa,  Jerusalem,  and  Rhodes . 


Lake  Success . 
Lake  Success . 
Lake  Success . 
Habana  .  .  . 
Lake  Success . 


Lake  Success . 


Geneva 


Washington 
Paris    .    .    . 


Geneva 
Geneva 
London 


Annecy,  France 
Geneva   .    .    .    . 


Paris  .  .  . 
Montreal  . 
Washington 
London   .    . 


'  Prepared  in  the  Division  of  International  Conferences,  Department  of  State. 
'  In  recess  Apr.  6-25;  adjourned  May  10,  to  reconvene  June  25,  1949. 


1949 

Apr.  5-May  18 

Apr.  11-22 

Apr.  25- May  6 
May  2-20 

Apr.  19-May  12 
Apr.  20-May  12 


Apr.  25- May  4 
May  23-27 


Apr.  25-May  7 
Mav  17-28 
Apr.  30- May  7 
Mav  7-17 
Mav  23-27 
Mav  23-30 


May  24-27 
1948 


Dec.  12- 


1949 


Jan.  3- 
Jan.  28- 

May  9- 
Mav  9- 
May  16- 
Mav  29- 
May  31- 

Apr.  12- 


1948 


Jan.  15- 


1949 


Apr.  25- 
May  18- 

May  18- 
May  18- 
Feb.  9-^ 

Apr.  11- 
Apr.  21- 


Apr.  26- 
n&y  17- 
May  10- 
May  20- 


Departmeni  of  State  Bulletin 


Calendar  oj  Meetings — Continued 


In  Session  as  of  June  1,  1949 — Continued 

Inter-American  Bar  Association,  Sixth  Meeting  of  the 

Ilo  (International  Labor  Organization) : 

Governing  Body:   109th  Session 

International  Whaling  Commission:  First  Meeting 

Scheduled  for  June 

The  President's  Highway  Safety  Conference 

UNESCO    (United    Nations    Educational,    Scientific   and    Cultural 
Organization: 

Interim  Committee  for  the  Permanent  Bureau  to  Coordinate 
International  Congresses  of  Medical  Sciences. 

Executive  Board:  Fifteenth  Session 

International  Conference  on  Science  Abstracting 

Permanent  Committee  of  the  International  Council  on  Philos- 
ophy and  Humanistic  Studies. 
IcAO  (International  Civil  Aviation  Organization): 

Third  Assembly 

Legal  Committee 

Ilo  (International  Labor  Organization) : 

Thirty-second  International  Labor  Conference 

Governing  Body:   110th  Session 

Journees  Medicales  de  Bruxelles  (Medical  Days  of  Brussels) : 

23d  Session. 

International  Tin  Study  Group:  Fourth  Meeting 

Who  (World  Health  Organization) : 

Second  General  Assembly 

Caribbean  Commission:  Eighth  Meeting 

Fag  (Food  and  Agriculture  Organization) : 

Council:  Sixth  Session 

Southeast  Asia  Conference  on  Rinderpest  Control  Problems    .    . 
United  Nations: 

Permanent  Central  Opium  Board:  Fifty-third  Session 

Ecosoc  (Economic  and  Social  Council): 

Subcommission  on  Prevention  of  Discrimination  and  Protection 
of  Minorities:  Second  Session. 

Economic  Commission  for  Europe:  Inland  Transport  Commit- 
tee. 

Narcotic  Drugs  Supervisory  Body:  Thirty-second  Session   .    .    . 

Trusteeship  Council:  Fifth  Session 

Twelfth  International  Conference  on  Adult  Education 

Second  International  Film  and  Fine  Arts  Festival 

Fifth  International  Grassland  Congress 

Iro  (International  Refugee  Organization) : 

General  Council:  Extraordinary  Session 

Executive  Committee:  Fifth  Meeting 

International  Sugar  Council 

Second  Inter-American  Conference  on  Indian  Life 

Twelfth  International  Conference  on  Public  Education 

Imo  (International  Meteorological  Organization) : 

Regional  Commission  No.  6  (Europe) :  Fourth  Session 

Third  Conference  on  African  Tourism 

International  Wheat  Council:  Preparatory  Committee 


1949 

Detroit 

May  22-June  1 

Geneva   

Detroit 

May  27- 
May  30- 

Washington 

June  1-3 

Paris 

June  1-4 

Paris 

Paris 

June  20- 

Montreal 

Montreal 

June  7- 
June  7- 

Geneva   

June  8- 
June  29- 

Brussels 

June  11- 

June  13- 

Rome 

Port-au-Spain,  Trinidad  .    .    . 

June  13- 
June  13-18 

Paris 

June  13-25 
June  20-24 

June  13- 

Lake  Success 

June  13- 

June  13- 

June  20- 

Lake  Success 

Elsinore,  Denmark 

Jtme 

June  16-25 
June  18- 

Noordwijk,  Netherlands  .    .    . 

June  22-26 

June  22- 

Geneva    

London    

Cuzco,  Peru 

June 
June  23- 
June  24- 
June  27- 

June  27— 

Washington 

June  27- 

June  5,   1949 


International  Cooperation  Against  the  Tsetse 

BY  FREDERICK  J.  BRADY,  IM.D. 


It  seems  incredible  to  most  of  us  that  in  this 
age  of  miracles  of  medical  science  an  area  of 
Africa  one  and  a  half  times  as  large  as  the  United 
States  remains  virtually  undeveloped  primarily 
because  of  disease.  The  major  problem  in  this 
vast  area  is  the  presence  of  diseases  caused  by 
microscopic  parasites,  the  trypanosomes,  which 
are  spread  by  tsetse  flies. 

In  man,  trypanosomiasis  is  a  vicious  disease 
known  as  African  sleeping  sickness.  Almost  in- 
variably, it  is  fatal  unless  treated  early.  Al- 
though liuman  trypanosomiasis  is  a  hazard  to 
colonization  and  development,  the  disease  in 
domestic  animals,  known  as  nagana,  has  been  the 
greater  barrier  to  the  development  of  these  vast 
lands.  Reclamation  of  these  areas  for  agricul- 
tural pursuits  and  for  recovery  of  natural  wealth 
is  costly  when  performed  by  the  techniques  of  con- 
trol of  trypanosomiasis  now  available. 

D.  Rees-Williams,  Parliamentary  Under-Secre- 
tary of  State  for  the  Colonies,  addressed  the 
British  Parliament  on  December  2,  1948,  as 
follows : 

"I  believe  this  tsetse  fly  problem  is  the  African 
problem  No.  1.  If  we  can  solve  it,  we  shall  have 
gone  a  long  way  towards  solving  the  economic, 
social,  and  eventually,  the  political  problems  of 
Africa.  It  affects  a  vast  area  .  .  .  and  its 
solution  will  change  the  whole  face  of  Africa  and 
the  economy  of  the  world." 

In  1948,  representatives  of  interested  nations 
met  in  Brazzaville  for  the  purpose  of  pooling 
their  knowledge  in  the  fight  against  trypano- 
somiasis. One  recommendation  of  this  conference 
was  that  a  small  committee  be  organized  to  meet 
at  12-  to  18-month  intervals  to  discuss  and  en- 
courage research  on  trypanosomiasis. 

The  first  meeting  of  the  Committee  on  Trypan- 
osomiasis Research  was  held  at  London,  February 
8-11,  1949.  There  were  11  members  present  rep- 
resenting Belgium,  France,  Portugal,  Southern 
Rhodesia,  Sudan,  Union  of  South  Africa,  and  the 
United  Kingdom.  In  addition,  there  were  eight 
advisers  present  who  came  from  Belgium,  France, 
Southern  Rhodesia,  and  the  United  Kingdom. 
Observers  included  the  members  of  the  London 
Tsetse  Fly  and  Trypanosomiasis  Committee,  rep- 
resentatives of  the  Imperial  Chemical  Industries, 
an  observer  from  the  World  Health  Organization, 
and  an  observer  from  the  United  States. 

The  meetings  were  opened  by  A,  Creech  Jones, 


the  British  Secretary  of  State  for  the  Colonies. 
Mr.  Creech  Jones  emphasized  that  the  meetings 
were  scientific  sessions  and  there  would  be  as  little 
"official"  obtrusion  as  possible.  Jerome  Rodham, 
Honorary  Director  of  the  Institute  of  Tropical 
Medicine  at  Antwerp,  was  elected  chairman  and 
was  to  serve  in  that  capacity  until  the  next  meet- 
ing of  the  committee.  Le  Mcdicin  General  Inspec- 
teur  Vaucel  of  France  was  elected  deputy  chairman 
until  the  next  meeting,  at  which  time  he  would 
assume  the  chairmanship.  Meetings  are  to  be  held 
in  various  countries  but  the  permanent  Secretariat 
will  remain  in  London. 

Two  days  were  devoted  to  scientific  reports  on 
trypanosomiasis  in  man  and  animals  and  on  tsetse 
flies.  The  reports  included  instances  of  successful 
reclamation  of  tracts  of  land  from  trypanosomia- 
sis. There  were  also  reports  on  the  eilicacy  of 
drugs  in  treating  the  disease  in  man  and  animals 
including  experimental  trials  with  new  dru^s  re- 
cently developed  in  England  and  the  United 
States. 

The  American  people,  as  well  as  the  peoples  of 
the  rest  of  the  world,  are  gradually  coming  to 
realize  that  they  may  no  longer  safely  ignore  the 
occurrence  of  disease  because  it  is  remote  from 
their  own  shores.  The  increasing  amount  and 
speed  of  international  travel  have  already  made 
us  revise  our  own  opinions  of  the  importance  of 
exotic  diseases  and  have  prompted  the  World 
Health  Organization  to  proceed,  on  an  interna- 
tional scale,  with  studies  and  recommendations  for 
a  new  approach  to  the  problem  of  controlling  the 
spread  of  disease. 

It  is  interesting  to  note  that  considerable  re- 
search has  been  performed  in  the  United  States 
using  the  African  trypanosomes.  Oddly  enough, 
most  of  this  work  has  dealt  with  studies  on  the 
life  processes  of  lower  organisms  and  considerable 
information  applicable  to  the  treatment  of  syphilis 
has  been  obtained  with  the  use  of  trypanosomes. 
Drugs  have  been  developed  in  the  United  States 
that  have  considerable  promise  in  the  prophylaxis 
and  treatment  of  African  sleeping  sickness.  How- 
ever, in  the  United  States  there  is  a  barrier  to  the 
type  of  research  that  would  be  of  greatest  use  in 
the  control  of  African  trypanosomiasis.  Al- 
though European  laboratories  have  imported  live 
tsetse  flies  for  experimental  work,  we  have  not  per- 
mitted the  importation  of  this  fly  into  the  United 
States.  There  is  good  evidence  that  trypanosomes 
carried  in  animals  or  in  cultures  change  their 

Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


characteristics  from  those  that  are  passed  through 
the  tsetse  flies  at  intervals.  Therefore  our  work- 
ers are  limited  in  their  laboratory  research 
material. 

There  can  also  be  little  doubt  that  the  existence 
of  debilitating  or  fatal  diseases  is  retarding  or 
completely  arresting  the  economic  development  of 
large  areas  of  the  world.  Development  of  these 
areas  is  contingent  upon  disease  eradication  and 
control.  Effective  work  in  this  field  would  not 
only  relieve  the  suffering  of  many  millions  of 
people  but  would  also  provide  them  with  oppor- 
tunities for  gainful  employment  and  improvement 


of  their  standards  of  living.  At  the  same  time, 
the  world  would  benefit  from  increased  production, 
particularly  of  agricultural  areas  now  virtually 
uncultivable.  President  Truman  recognized  the 
importance  of  the  development  of  new  areas  when, 
in  point  4  of  his  inaugural  address,  he  indicated 
that  the  United  States  is  about  to  embark  upon  a 
program  whereby  this  country  will  share  its  tech- 
nical skills  and  attaimnents  with  other  countries 
of  the  world  which  are  desirous  of  this  type  of 
assistance  to  improve  their  national  economies. 
Disease  control  should,  of  necessity,  be  an  integral 
part  of  such  assistance. 


Eighth  Meeting  of  the  International  Cotton  Advisory  Committee 


BY  J.  G.  EVANS 


The  International  Cotton  Advisory  Committee 
held  its  eighth  plenary  meeting  in  Brussels,  April 
25-30,  1949.  Member  governments  represented 
were  Australia,  Austria,  Belgium,  Canada,  Czech- 
oslovakia, Egypt,  France,  Greece,  the  Indian  Un- 
ion, Italy,  Lebanon,  Mexico,  Netherlands,  Pakis- 
tan, Peru,  Turkey,  United  Kingdom,  and  the 
United  States.  Governments  sending  observers 
were  Bolivia,  Chile,  Dominican  Eepublic,  Finland, 
Nicaragua,  Poland,  Portugal,  Siam,  Sweden, 
Switzerland,  Syria,  and  Yugoslavia.  The  Inter- 
national Federation  of  Master  Cotton  Spinners 
and  the  International  Federation  of  Agi-icultural 
Producers  were  also  represented  by  observers.  M. 
Albert  Moulaert,  Minister  Plenipotentiary,  Bel- 
gium, served  as  chairman  of  the  eighth  plenary 
meeting.  The  opening  address  was  made  by  M. 
Moens  de  Fernig,  Minister  of  Foreign  Trade, 
Belgium. 

The  International  Cotton  Advisory  Committee 
was  established  in  1939.  Its  function  is  to  keep 
the  world  cotton  situation  under  review,  and  when 
advisable,  to  recommend  steps  toward  further 
intergovernmental  collaboration  in  the  solution 
of  world  cotton  problems.  The  Committee  main- 
tains a  Secretariat  in  Washington  whose  staff  pub- 
lishes a  monthly  review  of  the  world  cotton  situa- 
tion and  a  quarterly  statistical  bulletin.  Between 
annual  plenary  meetings  the  Advisory  Committee 
functions  tlirough  a  Standing  Committee  which 
meets  periodically  in  Washington. 

The  agenda  for  the  eighth  plenary  meeting  in- 
cluded the  report  of  the  chairman  of  the  Stand- 
ing Committee,  a  review  of  the  world  cotton  situa- 
tion by  the  Secretariat,  cotton  situation  statements 
by  delegates  of  the  member  countries,  and  con- 
sideration of  recommendations  and  resolutions 
proposed  by  the  Standing  Committee  and  by  mem- 
ber governments.  Reports  of  the  three  subcom- 
mittees— Finance,    Statistical    and    Information, 

June  5,   7949 


and  Policies  and  Programs — were  embodied  in  12 
resolutions  unanimously  approved  at  the  final  ses- 
sion. The  Secretariat  will  publish  the  proceed- 
ings of  the  meeting  in  English  and  French. 

Recommendations  to  Member  Governments 

At  the  seventh  plenary  meeting,  held  at  Cairo, 
attention  was  concentrated  on  the  purpose  of  the 
Advisory  Committee  to  provide  timely  and  au- 
thentic cotton  statistics  on  a  world  basis,  and 
particular  emphasis  was  placed  on  the  importance 
of  cooperation  of  member  governments  with  the 
Secretariat.  In  order  to  further  facilitate  such 
cooperation,  the  Advisory  Committee,  at  its  eighth 
plenary  meeting,  recommended  that  each  member 
government  consider  favorably  the  establishment 
of  a  permanent  national  coordinating  agency  for 
the  purpose  of  supplying  fully  the  needs  of  the 
Secretariat  for  statistical  data  and  other  informa- 
tion. Such  a  national  coordinating  agency  would 
be  expected  to  serve  as  a  direct  contact  between 
the  Secretariat  and  member  governments. 

Work  Program 

The  Advisory  Committee  approved  the  publi- 
cation of  monthly  reviews  of  the  world  cotton  sit- 
uation and  quarterly  statistical  bulletins  on  cotton 
and  competing  fibers  as  the  principal  work  of  the 
Secretariat.  In  addition  to  the  preparation  of 
these  reports,  the  Secretariat  was  instructed  to 
make  certain  special  studies  under  its  work  pro- 
gram for  next  year,  the  most  important  of  which 
is  an  analysis  of  the  factors  affecting  consumption 
of  cotton.  Other  studies  proposed  include  a  sur- 
vey by  countries  of  spindle  and  loom  capacity, 
the  availability  of  textile  machinery  for  expan- 
sion and  modernization,  a  comparison  of  statis- 
tical reporting  procedures  in  individual  countries, 
the  competitive  position  of  cotton,  the  effect  of  in- 


ternational  trade  in  cotton  textiles  on  the  con- 
sumption of  cotton,  and  a  survey  of  methods  in 
calcuhiting  relative  costs  of  producing  cotton  and 
competing  crops. 

Standing  Committee 

Noting  the  rajiid  recovery  of  cotton  production 
in  the  world  and  the  possibility  of  surplus  stocks 
accumulation,  the  eignth  plenary  meeting  invited 
the  Standing  Committee  to  make  a  special  study  of 
ways  and  means  of  bringing  about  an  increase 
in  the  consumption  of  cotton  and  cotton  products 
and  an  adequate  balance  between  production  and 
consumption  of  cotton.  E.  D.  White,  United 
States,  was  reelected  chairman  of  the  Standing 
Committee. 

Expenditures  and  Assessments 

No  change  was  made  in  the  formula  for  assess- 
ing member  governments  or  in  the  amount  of  the 
annual  budget  for  financing  the  work  of  the  Ad- 
visory Committee.  The  Standing  Committee  is 
authorized  to  approve  expenditures  for  the  fiscal 
year  beginning  July  1,  1949,  totaling  $60,000  and, 
if  necessary,  to  carry  out  the  proposed  program 
of  work  to  increase  expenditures  above  that 
amount  by  not  more  than  15  percent  without  im- 
pairment of  the  reserve  fund.  The  amount  of 
the  reserve  fund  was  declared  to  be  $50,000,  a 
sum  which  accumulated  above  expenditures  prior 
to  June  30,  1948. 

IVIembersiiip 

Invitations  to  accede  to  the  International  Cotton 
Advisory  Committee  will  continue  to  be  held  open 
to  all  members  of  the  United  Nations  or  of  the 
Food  and  Agriculture  Organization  of  the  United 
Nations  having  a  substantial  interest  in  cotton. 
The  Standing  Committee  is  authorized  to  con- 
sider an  application  for  membership  from  any 
other  country  having  a  substantial  interest  in 
cotton. 

Nintli  Pienary  Meeting 

The  ninth  plenary  meeting  of  the  International 
Cotton  Advisory  Committee  will  be  held  in  the 
United  States  in  the  spring  of  1950. 


World  Cotton  Situation 

The  Secretariat  summarized  the  world  cotton 
situation  in  its  annual  review  as  follows : 

The  1948-49  cotton  season,  like  its  1947-48  pred- 
ecessor, is  one  of  adequate  global  supply.  Open- 
ing stocks  on  August  1,  1948,  were  smaller  than  a 
year  earlier,  but  production  in  the  current  season 
is  correspondingly  larger  than  in  last  season  and 
total  supply  is  therefore  about  the  same. 

The  cultivation  of  cotton  has  been  stimulated 
by  favorable  prices  in  most  producing  countries 
and  has  benefited  from  exceptionally  good  grow- 
ing conditions  in  the  United  States.  Unfavorable 
weather  has  adversely  affected  this  season's  crop 
in  the  Indian  Union,  and  in  the  Soviet  Union. 
Global  production  in  1948^9  is,  however,  esti- 
mated at  15  percent  larger  than  in  the  immediately 
preceding  season  and  for  the  fii-st  time  in  postwar 
years  is  expected  to  exceed  consumption,  with  a 
consequent  small  addition  to  the  world  carry-over 
at  the  end  of  the  current  season. 

Although  the  total  carry-over  is  likely  to  be 
somewhat  larger,  mill  stocks  will  be  smaller  as 
will  also  other  nongovernment  stocks,  a  substan- 
tial accumulation  having  taken  place  in  the  United 
States  Government  loan  stock.  Except  in  the 
United  States,  individual  countries'  stocks  are 
likely  to  be  smaller  than  a  year  earlier,  or  at  about 
the  same  level. 

On  the  whole,  prices  for  cotton  in  the  current 
season  have  varied  little  from  the  average  level 
of  the  immediately  preceding  season,  the  underly- 
ing stability  being  attributable  to  the  effectiveness 
of  official  price  supports  in  the  United  States  and 
the  enactment  of  maximum  prices  in  the  Indian 
Union. 

At  present  levels,  prices  are  favorable  to  the 
planting  of  cotton;  but,  being  above  rayon  prices 
in  many  countries,  they  are  at  the  same  time  con- 
ducive to  the  substitution  of  rayon  for  cotton. 
Rayon  production  has  increased,  and  a  further 
enlargement  in  output  is  expected  in  Europe  and 
Japan  as  plans  for  the  expansion  and  rehabilita- 
tion of  rayon  production  capacity  are  realized. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


U.S.  Delegations  to  International  Conferences 


U.S.-Canadian  Civil  Aviation  Meeting 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  23 
that  Russell  B.  Adams,  Member,  Civil  Aeronautics 
Board,  and  Livingston  L.  Satterthwaite,  Chief, 
Division  of  British  Commonwealth  Affairs,  De- 
partment of  State,  will  be  chairman  and  vice  chair- 
man respectively  of  the  United  States  delegation 
to  the  Conference  on  Civil  Aviation  between  the 
United  States  and  Canada.  The  Conference  is 
scheduled  to  convene  at  New  York  City  on  May  23, 
1949.  Other  members  of  the  delegation  are  as 
follows : 

Louis  W.  GoodkincJ,  Assistant  Director,  Bureau  of  Eco- 
nomic Regulations,  Civil  Aeronautics  Board 

George  S.  Roper,  Civil  Air  Attacli6,  American  Embassy, 
Ottawa 

Sydney  B.  Smith,  Chief,  Foreign  Air  Transport  Division, 
Bureau  of  Economic  Regulation,  Civil  Aeronautics 
Board 

Stuart  G.  Tipton,  General  Counsel,  Air  Transport  Asso- 
ciation 

Joseph  J.  Wolf,  Acting  Assistant  Chief,  Aviation  Divi- 
sion, Department  of  State 

The  purpose  of  the  Conference  will  be  to  discuss 
general  civil  aviation  problems  with  Canada. 
Prior  discussions  on  these  problems  were  held  in 
the  winter  of  1946-47. 

Joint  U.S.-Canadian  Industrial  Mobilization 
Committee 

The  first  meeting  of  the  Joint  United  States- 
Canadian  Industrial  Mobilization  Committee  will 
be  held  in  Washington  on  June  1.  The  members 
of  this  Committee,  as  previously  announced  after 
the  exchange  of  notes  between  representatives  of 
the  two  governments  on  April  12,  are: 

Harry  J.  CarmicUael,  C.M.G.,  Chairman,  Industrial  De- 
fense Board  of  Canada 

Sidney  Pierce,  O.B.E.,  Associate  Deputy  Minister  of 
Trade  and  Commerce,  Canada 

John  R.  Steelman,  Acting  Chairman,  National  Security 
Resources  Board 

Donald  S.  Carpenter,  Chairman,  Munitions  Board 

The  agreement  of  April  12,  which  set  up  the 
Committee,  recognizes  the  mutual  interests  and 
complementary  characteristics  of  the  resources  of 
Canada  and  the  United  States.^  It  will  be  the 
function  of  the  new  Committee  to  exchange  in- 
formation and  coordinate  the  views  of  the  two 
governments  in  connection  with  planning  for  in- 
dustrial mobilization  in  the  event  of  an  emergency. 
The  Committee  is  further  charged  with  coopera- 
tion with  the  existing  United  States-Canadian 

June  5,   1949 


Permanent  Joint  Board  on  Defense,  established  in 
1940  by  the  late  President  Roosevelt  and  Macken- 
zie King,  then  Prime  Minister  of  Canada. 


The  Costa  Rica-Nicaragua  incident — Continued  from 
page  71S 

the  pact  the  two  governments  bound  themselves 
to  avoid  such  controversies  in  the  future  and  to 
submit  any  disputes  to  pacific  settlement  in  accord 
with  existing  inter-American  agreements.  The 
two  governments  agreed  to  negotiate  an  accord 
providing  for  appropriate  internal  measures  and 
border  controls  with  the  purpose  of  preventing  a 
repetition  of  incidents  tending  to  disturb  the  tran- 
quil relations  of  the  two  countries.  It  was  pro- 
vided that  the  pact  would  be  ratified  by  the  two 
governments.  Copies  of  the  document  were  sent 
at  once  by  the  Pan  American  Union  to  the  21 
American  Republics  and  to  the  Secretary-General 
of  the  United  Nations. 

Following  this  peaceful  solution  of  a  contro- 
versy which  had  at  one  time  threatened  open 
armed  conflict  between  two  members  of  the  Ameri- 
can community,  the  Council  took  a  final  resolu- 
tion =  in  termination  of  the  incident.  Summar- 
izing the  steps  which  had  been  taken  since  the 
establisliment  of  the  Provisional  Organ  of  Con- 
sultation on  December  14,  including  the  naming 
of  the  Committee  of  Information  and  the  later 
committee  of  military  experts,  the  resolution  con- 
cluded that  the  circumstances  which  had  brought 
the  convocation  in  the  December  14  resolution  of 
a  consultation  of  Foreign  Ministers  no  longer 
existed.  Accordingly,  the  call  for  consultation 
was  revoked,  and  with  it  the  labors  of  the  military 
committee  and  of  the  Provisional  Organ  of  Con- 
sultation were  terminated.  A  paragraph  of  this 
final  action  in  the  Costa  Rica-Nicaragua  incident 
resolved  "to  present  this  noble  conduct  of  Ameri- 
can solidarity  and  of  respect  for  pacific  solution 
as  a  new  and  high  example  for  all  the  peoples  of 
the  continent." 


'  Bulletin  of  Apr.  24,  1949,  p.  537. 
'  PAU  doc.  2358. 


THE  RECORD  OF  THE  WEEK 
Peaceful  Utilization  of  Atomic  Energy 

STATEMENT  BY  SENATOR  BRIEN  McMAHON  FOR  THE  VOICE  OF  AMERICA' 


Ever  since  the  destruction  of  Hiroshima  and 
Nagasaki  by  atomic  bombs  was  dramatically  an- 
nounced to  the  world  in  1945,  the  greatest  em- 
phasis has  been  placed  on  atomic  energy  as  a  pow- 
erful and  deadly  instrument  of  warfare.  It  is 
true  that  atomic  energ}'  is  a  tool  in  the  hands  of 
men  which,  if  used  for  purposes  of  war,  can  cause 
great  suffering  and  the  loss  of  millions  of  lives  and 
can  retard  the  advance  of  civilization  by  centuries. 
It  should  be  understood,  however,  that  atomic 
energy  can  also  be  useful  to  achieve  peace  and  to 
add  immeasurably  to  human  welfare.  It  is  im- 
portant that  the  people  of  the  world  have  a  clear 
understanding  of  atomic  energy  and  all  its  im- 
plications, for  it  is  only  with  such  knowledge  that 
human  reasoning  will  insist  that  this  great  force 
be  used  solely  for  peaceful  purposes. 

I  want  you  to  know  that  atomic  science  is  not 
confined  solely  to  the  manufacture  of  bombs.  This 
science  has  a  constructive  side  which  will  surely 
contribute  to  great  advances  in  the  relief  of  want 
and  disease. 

There  are  certain  peaceful  and  practical  appli- 
cations of  atomic  science  which  already  give  evi- 
dence of  proving  a  boon  to  man.  One  of  the  most 
important  of  these  is  the  use  of  atomic  energy  for 
the  production  of  artificially  made  radioactive 
forms  of  atoms,  called  radioisotopes,  which  are 
now  being  widely  used  in  many  fields  of  research, 
in  medical  treatment,  and  in  industrial  technology. 

Radioisotopes  are  simply  radioactive  forms  of 
common  elements  such  as  phosphorus,  calcium,  and 
iodine  which  may  be  used  in  exactly  the  same  way 
natural  or  nonradioactive  elements  are  used.  The 
great  advantage  radioisotopes  have  over  common 
elements  is  that  they  give  off  easily  detected  rays 
which  betray  their  presence  and  permit  them  to 
be  traced  wherever  they  may  go.  Hence,  radio- 
isotopes may  bo  called  tagged  atoms,  which  can 
be  used  to  study  the  action  of  atoms  in  all  kinds  of 
complicated  processes.  They  divulge  information 
that  can  be  learned  in  no  other  manner.  They 
may  eventually  bring  light  into  all  the  dark  corners 
traversed  by  atoms  in  going  about  their  business  in 
the  healthy  or  unhealthy  body. 

In  the  field  of  medicine,  the  use  of  atomic 
energy  materials  for  research  purposes  has  become 
a  great  challenge  to  scientists  of  imagination  and 

'  Broadcast  over  the  Voice  of  America  on  May  14,  1949. 
Senator  McMahnn  Is  cliairman  of  the  Joint  Atomic  Energy 
Committee  of  Congress. 

726 


confidence.  In  1948,  the  United  States  Atomic 
Energy  Commission,  in  answer  to  this  challenge, 
announced  a  program  in  support  of  cancer  research 
which  will  cost  approximately  3  million  dollars. 
The  basic  objective  of  the  program  is  the  develop- 
ment of  the  use  of  radioactive  materials  in  studies 
of  the  nature  of  cancer,  its  diagnosis,  and  its  treat- 
ment. To  encourage  and  foster  such  research,  the 
United  States  is  distributing  radioisotopes  of 
iodine,  phosphorus,  and  sodium  without  cost  to 
research  institutions  taking  part  in  the  program. 

Medical  science  has  already  learned  that  two 
noncancerous  conditions — hyperthyroidism  and 
polycythemia — can  be  treated  with  radioiodine 
and  radiophosphorus.  One  research  institution 
has  announced  that  radioactive  iodine  has  cured  or 
definitely  improved  12  of  18  toxic  goiter  patients. 

Radioactive  elements  have  also  been  used  suc- 
cessfully to  learn  new  and  extremely  important 
facts  about  anemia,  the  circulation  of  normal 
hearts  afflicted  with  coronary  occlusion,  brain  tu- 
mors, and  man}'  other  ailments  of  the  human  body. 

The  use  of  radioactive  materials  is  not  limited  to 
medical  research.  In  biological  and  agricultural 
studies  these  elements  have  proved  as  important 
as  in  medical  research.  Agricultural  experiment 
stations  in  the  United  States  are  using  them  to 
study  the  growth  and  development  of  plants. 
They  are  being  used  to  learn  the  action  or  ferti- 
lizers and  various  agents  on  the  growth  of  many 
crops.  They  are  also  being  employed  in  studies  to 
learn  how  cows  utilize  foods  in  producing  milk. 
Tests  with  animals  to  learn  more  about  disease 
which  afflict  them  are  also  in  progress. 

Kesearch  with  radioactive  carbon  atoms  pro- 
duced at  Oak  Ridge,  Tennessee,  and  sent  to  the 
Hawaiian  Islands  has  demonstrated  a  hitherto  un- 
suspected fact  of  plant  life.  It  was  discovered 
that  sugar  formed  in  one  leaf  of  a  large  sugarcane 
plant  during  one  hour  in  the  sun  is  distril)uted  to 
all  ])arts  of  an  11-foot  stalk  in  3  days.  In  Ohio, 
radioactive  i)hosi:ihorus  and  chlorine  are  being 
utilized  to  determine  just  how  growing  corn  plants 
take  up  those  materials,  how  they  dispose  of  them, 
and  what  effects  varying  amounts  have  on  their 
growth. 

Other  research  institutions  are  conducting  ex- 
periments with  radioactive  materials  to  learn  the 
food  habits  of  insects,  with  the  idea  of  producing 
cheaper  and  better  poisons  for  use  against  de- 
structive pests. 

Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


Radioisotopes  have  also  become  important  as 
research  tools  in  industry.  In  petroleum  engi- 
neering, in  chemical  engineering,  in  metallurgy,  in 
synthetic  rubber  studies,  in  pharmaceutical  investi- 
gations, and  in  industrial  hygiene,  research  with 
radioactive  materials  occupies  a  very  important 
position. 

In  order  to  determine  what  happens  to  metal 
during  friction  and  wear,  steel  has  been  made 
radioactive  for  experiments  on  dry  and  lubricated 
friction  phenomena.  Radioactive  sulphur  has 
been  used  to  study  the  mechanization  of  vulcaniza- 
tion of  rubber.  The  same  element  has  been  used  to 
study  the  role  of  sulphur  in  the  coking  process  for 
the  steel  industry. 

These  are  but  a  few  of  the  projects  now  in 
progress  which  use  atomic  energy  materials  as  the 
basis  for  hitherto  impossible  research.  Such  re- 
search is  encouraged  by  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment. To  provide  trained  scientific  personnel 
in  this  field,  2.5  million  dollars  has  been  allocated 
by  our  government  for  the  establishment  of  fel- 
lowship study  programs  for  training  in  the  physi- 
cal sciences  basic  to  atomic  energy  development 
and  for  training  in  biology  and  medicine. 

Prior  to  the  development  of  the  atomic  bomb, 
it  took  a  year  and  cost  approximately  a  million 
dollars  to  make  a  minute  quantity  of  radioactive 
materials  in  a  cyclotron.  Now,  through  the  me- 
dium of  the  chain-reacting  pile,  or  atomic  furnace, 
at  Oak  Ridge,  Tennessee,  a  like  quantity  of  such 
materials  is  being  manufactured  in  a  very  short 
time  for  as  little  as  $50.  Today,  the  United  States, 
through  its  Atomic  Energy  Commission,  is  pro- 
ducing radioisotopes  in  such  quantity  as  to  make 
them  available  at  reasonable  cost  to  many  research 
institutions  and  hospitals  throughout  the  world. 

The  United  States  Government,  realizing  that 
radioisotopes  constitutes  the  first  great  contribu- 
tion of  the  development  of  atomic  energy  to  peace- 
time welfare,  has  formulated  a  program  for 
distribution  of  such  materials  for  research  pur- 
poses at  a  charge  which  covers  only  direct  pro- 
duction costs.  Distribution  of  these  great  scientific 
tools  is  not  limited  to  American  institutions,  but 


more  than  29  radioisotopes  of  20  elements  impor- 
tant for  general  research  are  available  to  all  the 
laboratories  of  the  world.  The  United  States,  in 
its  espousal  of  the  free  exchange  of  scientific  in- 
formation which  will  benefit  mankind,  offers  ra- 
dioactive materials  for  research  purposes  to  any 
nation  in  the  world  which  is  willing  to  meet  three 
reasonable  conditions.  These  conditions  are: 
First,  results  of  research  must  be  reported  semi- 
annually to  the  United  States  Atomic  Energy 
Commission  and  they  must  be  published.  Second, 
the  radioisotopes  are  to  be  used  only  for  purposes 
stated  in  the  original  requests.  Lastly,  qualified 
scientists  of  all  nations  must  be  permitted  to  visit 
the  institutions  of  the  user  nations  and  freely  ob- 
tain information  about  the  research  work. 

By  the  end  of  June  1948, 15  nations  had  received 
159  shipments  of  radioactive  materials  from  the 
United  States.  At  the  end  of  1948,  355  shipments 
had  been  made  to  22  nations.  Those  countries 
which  have  applied  for  and  received  radioactive 
materials  from  the  United  States  are :  Argentina, 
Australia,  Belgium,  Brazil,  Canada,  Denmark, 
France,  Iceland,  Italy,  Nethei-lands,  New  Zealand, 
Norway,  Peru,  Spain,  Sweden,  Switzerland,  Tur- 
key, Union  of  South  Africa,  England,  Bermuda, 
and  British  West  Indies. 

After  looking  over  the  list  of  research  projects 
in  progress  which  use  materials  produced  by 
atomic  scientists,  it  is  not  difficult  to  understand 
that  atomic  energy  should  not  be  thought  of  only 
in  terms  of  weapons  and  warfare. 

Atomic  energy  is  an  instrument,  which,  if  used 
in  the  wrong  hands,  can  cause  increased  greed  for 
materialistic  benefits  and  power.  So  used,  it  can 
cause  fear  throughout  the  world.  In  the  right 
hands,  atomic  energy  can  be  a  major  factor  in 
bringing  the  nations  of  the  world  together  in  long 
lasting  peace. 

It  should  be  considered  a  challenge  to  humanity 
to  encourage  peace  and  to  promote  the  use  of  this 
new  force  for  human  welfare.  Atomic  energy  can 
contribute  to  a  better  basis  for  moral  and  social 
integration  of  the  world  by  helping  to  alleviate 
want,  suffering,  and  disease  for  all  peoples. 


Foreign  Distribution  of  Radioisotopes 


[Released  to  the  press  by  Atomic  Energy  Commission  May  24] 

The  Manhattan  Engineer  District  announced 
in  June  1946  that  pile-produced  radioisotopes 
would  be  available  for  so-called  off-project  uses. 
The  first  shipment  under  this  program  of  domes- 
tic distribution  of  radioisotopes  was  made  on 
August  2,  1946.    As  a  result  of  this  program,  the 

June  5,    1949 


Manhattan  Engineer  District  received  a  number 
of  inquiries  from  abroad  as  to  whether  radioiso- 
topes could  be  made  available  for  foreign  distribu- 
tion. Inquiries  and  requests  from  abroad  thus 
were  pending  at  the  time  the  Commission  suc- 
ceeded to  the  responsibilities  of  the  Manhattan 
Engineer  District  on  January  1, 1947. 


Consideration  of  the  desirability  of  inaugu- 
ratinfj  a  program  for  the  foreign  distribution  of 
radioisotopes  was  undertaken  by  the  Commission's 
staff  during  January  1947.  During  the  first  half 
of  1947,  the  many  aspects  of  the  subjects  received 
careful  attention  within  the  Commission,  and  there 
were  also  informal  discussions  with  the  Depart- 
ment of  State. 

Wlien  the  principal  aspects  of  the  proposal  had 
been  worked  out  by  the  staff,  the  advice  of  the 
General  Advisory  Committee  was  requested.  The 
General  Advisory  Committee  considered  the  mat- 
ter at  its  meeting  of  May  31,  1947,  on  the  basis  of 
draft  proposals  which  had  been  submitted  to  it. 
By  letter  dated  June  1,  1947,  Dr.  Oppenheimer, 
the  chairman  of  the  General  Advisory  Committee, 
informed  the  Commission : 

"We  heartily  concur  in  the  proposal  of  the  Com- 
mission to  distribute  certain  radioisotopes  abroad. 
To  the  many  reasons  well-known  to  the  Commis- 
sion for  taking  this  step,  we  would  add  that  it 
appears  to  have  a  great  effect  in  restoring  the 
confidence  of  scientists,  and  educated  men  gener- 
ally, in  foreign  countries,  in  their  colleagues  in 
the  United  States.  We  attach  great  importance 
to  this  objective." 

The  General  Advisory  Committee  made  certain 
suggestions  as  to  the  details  of  the  proposal,  and 
stated  also  that  at  a  later  date  they  should  like  to 
return  to  the  question  of  extending  the  list  of  avail- 
able isotopes  to  include  stable  isotopes  and  fission 
products.  "At  the  moment,"  the  letter  added,  "we 
are  concerned  that  there  be  a  prompt  start." 

The  entire  subject  was  considered  by  the  Com- 
mission at  its  meeting  on  June  5,  in  the  light  of 
the  views  which  had  been  expressed  by  the  Gen- 
eral Advisory  Committee.  Final  action  was  de- 
ferred so  that  there  could  be  further  discussion 
of  the  matter. 

During  the  middle  of  June  the  subject  was  also 
considered  by  the  Medical  Board  of  Review,  of 
■which  Dr.  Robert  F.  Loeb  was  chairman.  In  its 
report  to  the  Commission,  dated  June  20,  1947, 
this  Board  suggested  that  steps  be  taken  to  make 
isotopes  available  to  foreign  investigators. 

At  its  meeting  on  July  29,  1947,  the  General 
Advisory  Committee  inquired  of  the  Commission 
as  to  the  progress  of  the  proposal  for  the  distribu- 
tion of  radioisotopes  abroad,  and  members  of  the 
Committee  again  expressed  views  in  favor  of  the 
program. 

There  followed  a  period  of  about  a  month,  dur- 
ing which  final  details  relating  to  the  proposed 
program  were  worked  out,  partly  in  consultation 
with  the  Department  of  State.  When  the  staff 
work  on  these  details  had  been  substantially  com- 
pleted, the  Commission  had  a  full  discussion  of 
the  subject  at  its  meeting  of  August  19,  1947.  At 
this  meeting  the  many  considerations  relating  to 
the  proposed  program  were  carefully  canvassed. 


At  the  conclusion  of  the  meeting  the  Commission 
decided  by  a  vote  of  4  to  1,  with  Commissioner 
Strauss  voting  in  the  negative,  to  recommend  to 
the  Department  of  State  that  the  program  be  un- 
dertaken, and  to  authorize  the  program  if  the  De- 
partment of  State  should  approve  the  program  on 
the  basis  of  this  recommendation. 

Accordingly,  on  August  27,  1947,  the  Commis- 
sion addressed  to  the  Secretary  of  State  a  letter 
relating  to  the  proposed  program.  This  letter 
included  the  following: 

"The  most  careful  consideration  has  been  given 
to  the  question  as  to  whether  or  not  the  distribu- 
tion of  selected  radioisotopes  to  scientists  in  other 
countries  will  adversely  affect  the  national  secu- 
rity. The  Commission  is  of  the  opinion  that  the 
type  of  radioisotopes  involved,  in  the  quantities 
and  under  the  conditions  prescribed,  will  not  con- 
tribute to  atomic  energy  research  in  other  countries 
except  to  the  extent  that  radioisotopes  are  tools 
which  can  contribute  to  any  nation's  general  scien- 
tific research  program.  The  view  may  be  taken, 
therefore,  that  to  this  extent  their  distribution  is 
detrimental  to  this  country's  welfare.  It  is  the 
Commission's  judgment,  however,  that  the  advan- 
tages the  United  States  will  gain  from  taking 
steps  at  this  time  to  make  available  the  use  of  radio- 
isotopes for  humanitarian  purposes  outweigh  this 
consideration." 

Enclosed  with  the  letter  was  a  memorandum 
entitled  "Foreign  Distribution  of  Radioisotopes," 
whicli  reviewed  and  assessed  in  some  detail  the 
nature  of  the  foreign  distribution  program  which 
was  proposed.  Also  enclosed  with  the  Commis- 
sion's letter  was  an  outline  of  the  procedure  under 
which  the  foreign  distribution  program  would  be 
carried  on.  The  letter  requested  the  concurrence 
of  the  Department  of  State  in  the  program,  and  in- 
vited any  comments  and  suggestions  which  the 
Department  of  State  might  wish  to  make. 

By  letter  dated  August  28, 1947,  the  Acting  Sec- 
retary of  State  expressed  to  the  Commission  the 
following  view : 

"I  note  that  these  valuable  products  of  United 
States  atomic  energy  plants  will  now  be  available 
in  the  service  of  mankind  and  that,  to  this  extent 
a  least,  we  are  able  to  advance  toward  the  benef- 
icent use  of  this  new  force.  This  initiative 
should  promote  harmony  and  good  feeling  among 
nations. 

"Based  on  5"our  assurances  that  this  offer  on 
our  part  does  not  prejudice  our  national  safety,  and 
in  view  of  the  checks  and  safeguards  set  up  in  the 
distribution  scheme  as  you  outline  it  in  the  en- 
closure to  your  letter,  the  Department  of  State 
sees  no  objection  from  the  point  of  view  of  foreign 
policy." 

The  inauguration  of  the  foreign  distribution 
program  was  announced  by  the  President  in  a 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


message  delivered  to  the  Fourth  Annual  Interna- 
tional Research  Congress  on  September  3,  1947. 
The  President's  announcement  read  as  follows : 

"I  want  to  advise  you  that  it  is  now  possible  for 
the  United  States  to  take  an  important  forward 
step  toward  greater  international  cooperation  in 
the  field  of  medical  and  biological  research.  On 
behalf  of  the  people  of  the  United  States  I  am 
pleased  to  announce  to  the  Fourth  International 
Cancer  Research  Congress  that  progress  in  the 
production  of  radioisotopes  by  the  United  States 
Atomic  Energy  Commission  now  permits  limited 
distribution  to  qualified  research  workers  in  other 
countries  of  radioisotopes  principally  for  medical 
and  biological  research.  I  know  that  the  repre- 
sentatives of  the  United  States  attending  the 
Cancer  Research  Congress  share  my  hope  that  the 
open,  impartial,  and  truly  international  character 
of  medical  research  will  carry  over  into  the  realm 
of  other  problems  of  world  concern.  The  shar- 
ing by  and  among  all  nations  of  both  the  means 
and  the  results  of  cancer  research  will  reduce  the 
loss  of  life  and  human  sufi'ering  from  disease 
throughout  the  world." 

On  September  15, 1917,  the  Department  of  State 
distributed  to  the  representatives  of  the  foreign 
governments  in  Wasliington  information  concern- 
mg  the  procedure  which  would  be  followed  in  the 
pi'ogram  of  foreign  distribution  of  radioisotopes. 
This  procedure  contained  a  number  of  safeguards, 
which  are  an  integral  part  of  the  program.  The 
procedure  requires  each  foreign  goverimient  in- 
terested in  having  radioisotopes  made  available  to 
eligible  users  in  its  country  to  address  a  note  to 
the  Secretary  of  State,  specifying  the  name  of  the 
representative  in  the  United  States  who  will 
handle  matters  connected  with  radioisotope  ship- 
ments, and  also  that  the  representative  is  author- 
ized to  certify  on  behalf  of  the  foreign  government 
the  accuracy  of  the  information  set  forth  in  each 
request  for  radioisotopes.  The  procedure  fur- 
ther provides  that  the  designated  representative 
of  the  foreign  government  present  each  radioiso- 
tope request  to  the  Isotope  Branch  of  the  Atomic 
Energy  Commission.  The  request  would  include 
information  on  the  radioisotope  desired,  the  quan- 
tity desired,  the  desired  time  and  rate  of  delivery, 
the  name  and  experience  of  persons  who  would 
use  the  material  furnished,  and  the  institution  at 
which  they  would  be  used,  the  purposes  for  which 
the  materials  would  be  used,  and  the  health  and 
safety  measures  to  be  employed.  It  was  also 
stipulated  that  the  request  should  contain  the  fol- 
lowing undertakings : 

a.  That,  (1)  at  intervals  of  six  months  after 
delivery  of  each  shipment  of  radioisotopes  to  the 
representative  of  a  foreign  government  for  for- 
warding to  an  investigator  in  the  country  he  rep- 
resents, three  copies  of  a  progress  report  on  the 
results  of  the  investigation  will  be  furnished  to  the 

June  5,   1949 


United  States  Atomic  Energy  Commission  and 
(2)  the  results  of  such  investigation  if  publish- 
abie  by  nature  either  will  be  published  by  the 
author  in  an  appropriate  technical  or  scientific 
publication  or  permission  to  arrange  for  publish- 
ing such  results  will  be  granted  to  the  Commission. 

b.  That  the  materials  will  not  be  used  in  a 
manner  other  than  as  disclosed  in  the  request. 

c.  That  qualified  scientists  irrespective  of  na- 
tionality will  be  permitted  to  visit  the  institutions 
where  the  materials  will  be  used  and  to  obtain  in- 
formation freely  with  respect  to  the  purposes, 
methods  and  results  of  such  use,  in  accordance 
with  well-established  scientific  tradition. 

From  this  beginning  the  program  has  developed 
and  grown  at  a  healthy  rate.  In  the  first  15 
months,  through  December  31,  1948,  356  sMp- 
ments  of  14  different  isotopes  to  19  countries  had 
been  made.  Nearly  45  percent  of  the  shipments 
in  this  period  were  for  medical  therapy.  Ap- 
proximately 47  percent  were  for  research  related 
to  medicine  and  biology.  Less  than  8  percent  had 
been  for  research  in  other  fields  such  as  physics 
and  chemistry. 

The  scope  of  the  foreign  distribution  program 
has  been  regularly  reported  by  the  Commission 
in  its  semiannual  reports  to  the  Congress. 


ERP  Key  Factor  in  U.S.  Foreign  Policy 

Statement  iy  Acting  Secretary  Weil) 

[Released  to  the  press  May  25] 

The  Department  of  State  is  greatly  concerned 
by  the  recommendation  of  the  House  Appropria- 
tions Committee  to  cut  the  proposed  EGA  appro- 
priation for  the  fiscal  year  1950  by  15  percent. 
According  to  the  best  available  evidence,  such  a 
cut  would  constitute  a  serious  blow  to  the  Euro- 
pean Recovery  Program.  The  requested  amount 
was  carefully  screened  by  the  Economic  Coopera- 
tion Administration,  both  in  Washington  and 
abroad.  The  other  Departments  of  the  Govern- 
ment which  reviewed  the  ECA  proposals  consid- 
ered that  the  amount  requested  was  an  appropriate 
one  if  the  objectives  of  the  European  Recovery 
Program  were  to  be  achieved.  The  Department 
of  State,  of  course,  does  not  take  the  position  that 
any  single  figure  is  the  exact  one  required  under 
all  the  circumstances.  For  example,  because  of 
falling  prices,  the  President  actually  asked  for 
less  than  had  been  thought  necessary  at  the  time 
of  the  original  Economic  Cooperation  Adminis- 
tration presentation  to  Congress.  However,  the 
Department  of  State  feels  strongly  that  a  reduc- 
tion of  such  a  magnitude  as  that  recommended  by 
the  Appropriations  Committee  will  adversely  and 
seriously  affect  the  prospects  that  the  program 
can  be  successfully  completed  in  1952. 


We  are  hopeful  that  the  House  of  Representa- 
tives will  see  tit  to  restore  the  cut,  so  tliat  the  prcat 
progress  which  has  already  been  made  in  Euro- 
pean recovery  can  be  carried  forward  during  the 
second  year  of  this  program. 

We  must  never  lose  sight  of  the  fact  that  the 
European  Recovery  Program  is  a  key  factor  in 
our  foreign  policy.  It  has  already  paid  a  large 
dividend  in  the  improved  conditions  in  Europe. 


Nomination  of  John  J.  McCloy  To  Be  U.  S.  High 
Commissioner  for  Germany  and  Chief  of 
Mission  Sent  to  Senate 

(Kcleasfd  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  May  18] 

The  President  announced  on  May  IS  that  he  is 
sending  to  the  Senate  the  nomination  of  John  J. 
McCloy  to  be  United  States  High  Commissioner 
for  Germany  and  Chief  of  Mission.  Tentative 
plans  are  that  Mr.  McCloy,  upon  confirmation,  will 
take  up  his  duties  in  Germany  within  the  near 
future. 

In  sending  the  nomination  of  Mr.  McCloy  to  the 
Senate,  the  President  indicated  his  great  reluc- 
tance to  ask  Mr.  McCloy  to  relinquish  his  posi- 
tion with  the  World  Bank  because  of  the  impor- 
tance he  attaches  to  the  role  the  Bank  can  play 
in  the  economic  reconstruction  and  development 
of  the  world.  He  did  so  only  after  being  satis- 
fied that  a  successor  tlioroughly  equipped  to  carry 
on  the  work  of  the  Bank  was  available  for  the 
presidency  of  the  Bank. 

Mr.  McCloy's  resignation  as  president  of  the 
World  Bank  for  Reconstruction  and  Development 
will  become  effective  not  later  than  July  1,  1949. 

One  of  the  matters  which  Mr.  McCloy  will  take 
under  early  advisement  will  be  the  development  of 
plans  for  the  transfer  of  responsibility  for  non- 
military  aspects  of  the  United  States  occupation 
of  Germany  from  the  Department  of  the  Army 
to  the  Department  of  State  and  the  Economic  Co- 
operation Administration.  This  transfer  will 
take  place  on  or  about  the  time  of  the  establish- 
ment of  the  German  Provisional  Government. 

The  appointment  of  Mr.  McCloy  as  United 
States  High  Commissioner  for  Germany  grows 
out  of  the  Washington  meeting  of  the  Foreign 
Ministers  of  the  United  Kingdom,  France,  and  the 
Secretary  of  State,  at  which  agreement  was 
reached  on  the  establishment  of  tripartite  control 
machinery  for  West  Germany. 

As  United  States  High  Commissioner,  Mr.  Mc- 
Cloy will  be  the  supreme  United  States  authority 
in  Germany.  Subject  to  consultation  with  and 
ultimate  direction  by  the  President,  he  will  be 
under  tlie  immediate  supervision  and  direction 
of  the  Secretary  of  State.  He  will  have  the  au- 
thority to  exercise  all  the  governmental  functions 
of  the  United  States  in  Germany,  other  than  the 


Command  of  the  United  States  Occupation  Forces. 
He  will  represent  the  United  States  on  the  Allied 
High  Commission  for  Germany  (United  States- 
United  Kingdom-France)  when  established  and 
will  exercise  the  appropriate  functions  of  a  Chief 
of  Mission,  Class  One.  within  the  meaning  of  the 
Foreign  Service  Act  of  August  13,  194G. 

Subject  to  consultation  with  and  ultimate  direc- 
tion by  the  President.  Mr.  McCloy  will  be  the 
representative  of  the  Economic  Cooperation  Ad- 
ministration in  all  its  relations  and  actions  with 
respect  to  Germany.  As  regards  these  functions 
he  will  be  under  the  immediate  supervision  and 
direction  of  the  Administrator  for  Economic  Co- 
operation. Mr.  Hoffman,  and  the  coordination 
of  the  United  States  Special  Representative  in 
Europe,  Mr.  Harriman.  Mr.  McClo}'  will  be  as- 
sisted by  a  Chief  of  Special  Mission  to  be  ap- 
pointed by  Mr.  Hoffman,  who  will  have  the  rank 
of  minister  and  act  under  the  immediate  super- 
vision and  direction  of  the  United  States  High 
Commissioner. 

On  military  matters,  the  Military  Commander 
will  continue  to  receive  instructions  directly  from 
the  Joint  Chiefs  of  Staff.  However,  the  High 
Commissioner  will  be  authorized  to  direct  the 
United  States  Commanding  General  to  intervene 
for  the  maintenance  of  law  and  order  and  to  take 
such  other  action  as  is  required  to  support  United 
States  policy  in  Germany.  During  the  period 
prior  to  the  transfer  of  military  government  re- 
sponsibility from  the  Secretary  of  Defense  to  the 
Secretary  of  State,  the  High  Commissioner  will 
also  be  the  Military  Governor  of  the  United  States 
zone  in  Germany.  In  this  capacity  he  will  be 
under  the  immediate  supervision  of  the  Secretary 
of  Defense,  subject  of  course  to  consultation  with 
and  ultimate  direction  hj  the  President. 

It  is  contemplated  that  to  the  maximum  extent 
practicable,  existing  personnel  of  OMGUS  in  Ger- 
many and  of  the  Army  Department  in  Washing- 
ton will  be  utilized  in  staffing  the  organization  of 
the  High  Commissioner,  including  the  ECA  Mis- 
sion in  Germany,  and  the  appropriate  additional 
Washington  facilities  of  the  Department  of  State 
and  ECA. 

Czech  Language  Edition  of  "Amerika"  Begun 

[Released  to  the  press  May  23] 

Starting  this  month,  a  Czech  language  edition 
of  the  magazine  Amerika  will  be  distributed  in 
Czechoslovakia,  it  was  announced  on  ilay  23  by 
the  Department  of  State.  It  will  be  similar  to 
the  Amerika^  an  illustrated  monthly,  which  has 
been  published  to  date  only  in  the  Russian  lan- 
guage for  distribution  in  the  Soviet  Union. 

The  Department  has  for  some  time  been  giving 
consideration  to  editions  of  Amerika  in  other  sec- 
tions of  the  world,  primarily  those  where  pri- 
vately published  United  States  magazines  do  not 
circulate    freely.     Last    summer    the    editor    of 

Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


Amerika,  Mrs.  Marian  K.  Sanders,  was  sent  over- 
seas to  explore  the  feasibility  and  desirability  of 
such  editions  in  conjunction  with  U.S.I.S.  officers 
abroad.  Subsequently  discussions  were  held  be- 
tween Ambassador  Joseph  E.  Jacobs,  in  Praha, 
and  the  Czechoslovak  Foreign  Office,  and  the 
latter  has  now  o;iven  formal  approval  to  the  plan 
for  a  Czech  edition  of  the  magazine. 

Like  the  Russian  edition,  the  Czech  Amerika 
is  designed  to  give  a  picture  of  American  life, 
thinking,  and  achievement  in  government,  sci- 
ence, education,  industry,  labor,  and  the  arts. 
It  will  be  sold  in  Czechoslovakia  through  Orbis 
Distributing  Company,  by  subscription  and  on 
newsstands. 

Educational  Exchange  Agreement  With  Norway 

[Released  to  the  press  May  25] 

Norway  and  the  United  States  on  May  25  signed 
an  agreement  under  the  Fulbright  Act,  putting 
into  operation  the  progi'am  of  educational  ex- 
changes authorized  by  Public  Law  584  (79th 
Congi'ess). 

The  signing  took  place  in  Oslo,  with  Foreign 
Minister  Halvard  M.  Lange  representing  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  Kingdom  of  Norway  and  United 
States  Charge  d'Affaires  Henry  S.  Villard  rep- 
resenting the  United  States. 

This  agreement  was  the  eleventh  signed  under 
the  act,  previous  agreements  having  been  signed 
with  the  Governments  of  China,  Burma,  the 
Philippines.  Greece,  New  Zealand,  the  United 
Kingdom,  Belgium  and  Luxembourg,  France, 
Italy,  and  the  Netherlands. 

The  agreement  provides  for  a  United  States 
Educational  Foundation  in  Norway  to  assist  in 
the  administration  of  the  educational  program 
financed  from  certain  funds  resulting  from  the 
sale  of  U.S.  surplus  property  to  that  country.  It 
provides  for  an  annual  program  of  the  equivalent 
of  $250,000  in  kroner  for  certain  educational  pur- 
poses. These  purposes  include  the  financing  of 
"studies,  research,  instruction,  and  other  educa- 
tional activities  of  or  for  citizens  of  the  United 
States  of  America  in  schools  and  institutions  of 
higher  learning  located  in  Norway  or  of  nationals 
of  Norway  in  United  States  schools  and  institu- 
tions of  higher  learning  located  outside  the  conti- 
nental United  States  .  .  .  including  payment 
for  transportation,  tuition,  maintenance,  and 
other  expenses  incident  to  scholastic  activities ;  or 
furnishing  transportation  for  nationals  of  Nor- 
way who  desire  to  attend  United  States  schools 
and  institutions  of  higher  learning  in  the  conti- 
nental United  States  .  .  .  whose  attendance 
will  not  deprive  citizens  of  the  United  States  of 
America  of  an  opportunity  to  attend  such  schools 
and  institutions." 

The  Foundation  in  Norway  will  consist  of 
eight  members,  the  honorary  chairman  of  which 
will  be  the  United  States  Ambassador  to  Norway. 
The  members  of  the  Foundation  will  include  four 

Jone  5,  1949 


citizens  of  the  United  States  and  four  nationals  of 
the  Kingdom  of  Norway. 

After  the  members  of  the  Foundation  in  Norway 
have  been  appointed,  information  about  specific 
opportunities  for  American  citizens  to  pursue 
study,  teaching,  or  research  in  that  country  will 
be  made  public.  Further  inquiries  about  those  op- 
portunities and  requests  for  application  forms 
should  be  addressed  to  the  following  three  agen- 
cies: Institute  of  International  Education,  2  West 
Forty-fifth  Street,  New  York  19,  New  York  (for 
graduate  study) ;  United  States  Office  of  Educa- 
tion, Washington  25,  D.C.  (for  teaching  in  na- 
tional elementary  and  secondary  schools)  ;  and 
the  Conference  Board  of  Associated  Research 
Councils,  2101  Constitution  Avenue,  Washington 
25,  D.C.  (for  teaching  at  the  college  level,  for 
postdoctoral  research,  and  for  teaching  in  Ameri- 
can elementary  and  secondary  schools  in  Norway) . 

Hamlet  Company  Leaves  for  Denmark 

[Released  to  the  press  May  29] 

A  group  of  28  American  actors  left  by 
plane  from  Westover  Field,  Massachusetts,  on 
June  1,  for  Copenhagen  at  the  request  of 
the  Danish  Government,  to  present  Shakespeare's 
Hamlet  at  historic  Kronberg  Castle  in  Elsinore, 
the  play's  original  setting.  Produced  and  backed 
financially  by  Blevins  Davis  of  Independence,  Mis- 
souri, and  New  York,  the  play  is  directed  by  Rob- 
ert Breen,  of  the  Virginia  State  Theater,  who  will 
appear  in  the  leading  role. 

The  Department  of  State  and  the  United  States 
Air  Force  are  cooperating  to  facilitate  the  carry- 
ing out  of  the  plan  jointly  as  a  cultural  exchange 
project  and  one  for  the  benefit  of  the  American 
troops  in  Germany,  where  the  play  will  be  pre- 
sented at  military  installations  after  performances 
in  Denmark. 

Commemorating  this  cultural  exchange  between 
Denmark  and  the  United  States,  a  souvenir  pro- 
gram has  been  published,  thousands  of  copies 
of  which  will  be  distributed  to  the  audiences  in 
Elsinore  as  well  as  to  cultural  groups  throughout 
the  world.  Included  in  the  distinctive  brochure 
are  statements  of  high  officials  of  both  governments 
expressing  their  best  wishes  for  the  success  of  the 
project. 

President  Truman  said:  "It  is  gratifying  to 
learn  that  an  American  group  will  perform  Ham- 
let witliin  the  ancient  precincts  of  Kronberg 
Castle  .  .  .  It  is  indeed  an  appropriate  offer- 
ing from  the  American  stage  to  lovers  of  the 
drama  in  Denmark.  A  better  selection  for  presen- 
tation before  our  armed  forces  in  Germany  could 
hardly  have  been  made." 

In  welcoming  the  players  to  Denmark,  Prime 
Minister  Hans  Hedtoft  remarked  on  the  fine  tra- 
dition which  has  been  established  by  having  the 
play  presented  each  summer  at  Elsinore  by  inter- 
preters  from   different   lands,   "This   year,"   he 


writes,  "American  artists  are  to  conquer  Kron- 
berg.  We  know  and  udinire  the  American  dra- 
matic arts  of  stage  and  screen  .  .  .  We  know 
.  .  .  tiiat  the  Pilgrim  Fathers  brought  .  .  . 
tlie  culture  of  the  Old  World  when  they  sailed 
West,  but  on  that  foundation  the  Americans  have 
created  an  independent  culture  of  their  own.  We 
bid  her  representatives  welcome  to  the  stage  to 
which  attaches  the  name  of  Hamlet.'''' 

Speaking  of  the  special  significance  which  this 
play  has  today,  Assistant  Secretary  George  V. 
Allen  said:  "It  is  this  deeply  human  quality  tran- 
scending nationality  which  makes  especially  ap- 
propriate the  presentation  in  this  decisive  year  in 
the  history  of  western  civilization  ...  It 
may  be  that  no  generation  before  our  own  has  seen 
itself  so  niirr(ji'e(l  in  tliJs  play  ...  is  also  an 
aflirmation  that  in  tlie  liighest  reaches  of  the  mind, 
men  of  all  ages,  all  races,  and  all  creeds  meet  as 
brothers  on  an  equal  height." 

Aline  MacMahon,  noted  American  actress  of 
stage  and  screen,  whose  role  in  the  recent  motion 
picture  The  Search  brought  her  acclaim  both 
here  and  abroad,  will  play  the  role  of  the  Queen. 
Walter  Abel,  also  of  the  stage  and  screen,  will  play 
Claudius,  with  Clarence  Derwent,  distinguished 
President  of  the  American  Actor's  Association  as 
Polonius,  and  Ruth  Ford,  recently  seen  in  Ten- 
nessee Williams'  A  Streetcar  Named  Desire  as 
Ophelia. 

The  players  will  rehearse  at  Elsinore  for  two 
weeks  following  their  arrival  and  will  present  the 
play  from  June  17  to  28.  The  company  is  spon- 
sored by  the  State  Theater  of  Virginia  as  part  of 
the  American  National  Theater  and  Academy. 

Visitors  to  U.S.  Under  Travel-Grant  Program 

The  following  persons  were  awarded  travel 
grants  for  visiting  in  the  United  States: 

Argentine  Economist 

Carlos  Coll  Benegas,  economic  consultant  of 
Buenos  Aires,  has  arrived  in  Washington  for  a 
three-month  visit  to  study  trends  in  economic 
thought  in  the  United  States.  Conferences  are 
being  arranged  for  him  by  the  Division  of  Ex- 
change of  Persons  of  the  Department  of  State 
with  authorities  in  the  field  of  economics  in  vari- 
ous universities  and  other  institutions  in  this 
country. 

Argentine  Physician 

Dr.  Maria  Luisa  Herraiz,  head  of  the  biological 
section  of  the  National  Institute  of  Nutrition  of 
Argentina,  has  arrived  for  a  three-month  visit  in 
the  United  States  to  study  the  organization  of 
nutritional  institutes  in  this  country  and  the 
methods  of  chemical  and  biological  research  in 
vitamins  used  by  specialists  in  this  field.  Her  visit 
has  been  arranged  in  cooperation  with  the  Depart- 
ment of  Agriculture. 


Dr.  Herraiz  has  been  active  in  international  con- 
ferences in  the  field  of  nutrition  in  Buenos  Aires 
and  Montevideo,  and  her  findings,  in  collaboration 
with  others,  in  numerous  vitamin  research  projects 
and  other  studies  pertaining  to  nutrition  have  ap- 
peared in  medical  journals  and  annals  in  various 
countries  of  South  America  and  Spain. 

Bolivian  Journalist 

Huiuberto  Palza  S.,  editor  of  Ultima  Ilora,  one 
of  the  leading  daily  newspapers  of  La  Paz,  has 
arrived  in  Washington  for  a  three-month  visit  in 
tlie  United  States  under  the  e.xchange-of -persons 
program  of  the  Department  of  State.  In  addi- 
tion to  a  study  of  journalism  in  the  United  States, 
he  will  confer  with  publishers  of  children's  text- 
books and  with  manufacturers  of  printing  ma- 
chinery in  connection  with  his  plans  to  establish 
in  La  Paz  an  editorial  and  publisiiing  house  for 
magazines  and  textbooks  for  children  and  for  the 
Indians  of  Bolivia. 

Bolivian  Lawyer 

Carlos  Gonzalo  de  Saavedra,  civil  lawyer  of  La 
Paz,  and  an  authoritj'  in  the  field  of  South  Ameri- 
can colonial  historj',  has  arrived  in  AVashington  for 
a  three-month  visit.  He  plans  to  visit  various 
universities  and  to  spend  some  time  at  the  Li- 
brary of  Congress  and  Harvard  University  on  re- 
search in  colonial  history  and  international  rela- 
tions between  the  United  States  and  South 
America.  He  is  to  be  a  special  guest  on  the 
campus  of  Kent  University,  Kent,  Ohio,  for  the 
period  of  an  inter-American  workshop  to  be  held 
there  during  the  week  beginning  June  20. 

Bolivian  Pediatrician 

Dr.  Julio  Pereira  Betancourt,  Director  of  the 
Children's  Hospital  of  La  Paz,  has  arrived  in 
Washington  to  begin  a  series  of  visits  to  hospitals, 
medical  schools,  and  medical  centers  in  the  United 
States  for  a  period  of  three  months. 

Dr.  Pereira,  who  is  also  professor  of  medicine 
at  the  University  of  La  Paz,  has  had  special  train- 
ing in  children's  diseases  at  the  Children's  Hospital 
in  Buenos  Aires.  He  was  formerly  director  or  the 
Prenentorio  de  Ninas,  La  Paz,  and  was  one  of 
the  founders  of  the  Bolivian  Pediatrics  Society. 
He  Mas  for  five  years  Director  of  Public  Health, 
Dcijartment  of  Beni,  and  since  1940  has  served  as 
Chief  of  External  Consultation  of  the  ilinistry  of 
Health,  La  Paz. 

Brazilian  Highway  Engineer 

Valdo  Silveira,  assistant  engineer  to  the 
Director  General  of  the  Highway  Department  of 
the  State  of  Sao  Paulo,  has  arrived  in  Washington 
for  a  three-month  visit  in  the  United  States  to 
consult  with  officials  of  the  Public  Roads  Admin- 
istration concerning  problems  of  highway  con- 
struction, with  special  emphasis  on  low-cost  pav- 

Deporfmenf  of  Sfafe   Bulletin 


ing,  and  to  observe  highway  construction  in  this 
country.  His  visit  has  been  arranged  in  coopera- 
tion with  the  Public  Koads  Administration  of  the 
Federal  Works  Agency. 

Brazilian  Surgeon 

Dr.  Antonio  Bruno  Silva  Maia,  Chief  Surgeon 
of  the  State  Emergency  Hospital  of  Recife,  Brazil, 
has  arrived  in  Washington  for  a  three-month 
visit  in  the  United  States  for  the  purpose  of  observ- 
ing hospital  organization  and  modern  methods  in 
surgery.  He  is  especially  interested  in  the  field 
of  orthopedics.  Dr.  Maia  has  made  tentative 
plans  to  visit  hospitals  and  medical  schools  in  New 
York,  Boston,  Chicago,  and  San  Francisco. 

Chilean  Physician 

Dr.  Jorge  Mardones,  secretary  of  the  faculty 
of  biology  and  medical  sciences,  and  professor  of 
pharmacology  of  the  Medical  School  of  the  Na- 
tional University  of  Chile,  has  arrived  in  Wash- 
ington for  a  three-month  visit  in  this  country. 
The  purpose  of  his  visit  is  to  discuss  with  inter- 
ested groups  plans  for  the  rehabilitation  of  the 
libraries  and  the  laboratory  of  the  Medical  School, 
which  were  destroyed  by  fire  last  December,  and 
to  study  the  development  of  the  basic  sciences  as  a 
part  of  medical  education  in  the  United  States. 

Ecuadoran  Educator 

Julio  Enrique  Paredes  C.,  rector  of  the  Central 
University  of  Quito,  has  arrived  in  Washington 
under  a  Department  of  State  grant  to  observe  and 
study  university  organization  and  administration. 
He  is  interested  in  obtaining  first-hand  informa- 
tion useful  in  connection  with  the  new  University 
City  now  under  construction  in  Quito. 

Significance  of  World  Trade  Week 

Statement  hy  Acting  Secretary  Wehh 

[Released  to  the  press  May  25] 

The  observance  this  week  of  World  Trade  Week 
has  a  special  meaning  for  the  American  people. 
To  the  extent  that  goods  are  able  to  pass  with 
ease  between  nations,  to  the  extent  that  we  are 
able  to  do  away  with  economic  warfare,  and  to 
the  extent  that  we  are  able  to  bring  the  spirit  of 
fair  play  to  the  field  of  world  economic  relation- 
ships, we  shall  have  progressed  that  much  further 
toward  a  peaceful  world. 

These  tasks  would  never  have  been  easy  ones, 
but  the  economic  dislocation  of  the  postwar  world 
intensified  by  Communist  attempts  to  bring 
further  economic  chaos  to  the  free  peoples  of  the 
earth  have  made  them  harder  and  at  the  same  time 
made  their  successful  completion  more  urgent. 

The  past  4  years  have  shown  conclusively  that 

June  5,  7949 


to  gain  political  and  social  stability  a  people  must 
have  the  means  to  sell  abroad  and  to  buy  from 
abroad.  Lacking  the  means,  they  cannot  hope  to 
better  themselves  and  thus  become  easy  targets  for 
the  promises  of  totalitarian  ideologies. 

There  is  no  such  thing  today  as  economic  self- 
sufficiency,  either  for  the  United  States  or  any 
major  nation  in  the  world.  Our  well-being  as  a 
people  is  inseparable  from  a  large  and  expanding 
world  trade.  The  European  Recovery  Program, 
our  reciprocal-trade-agreements  program,  the  pro- 
posed International  Trade  Organization,  and  the 
President's  program  for  technical  and  scientific 
cooperation  with  underdeveloped  countries,  all 
are  a  part  of  this  objective. 

Unless  it  is  achieved,  we  can  look  forward  to 
dwindling  foreign  markets  for  the  things  we  sell 
abroad,  to  a  denial  of  the  things  we  wish  and  need 
to  buy  from  others,  and  a  general  return  to  eco- 
nomic nationalism  by  all  countries. 

The  reason  for  World  Trade  Week  lies,  there- 
fore, in  a  far  wider  orbit  than  the  material  bene- 
fits to  us  of  international  commerce.  For  the  ma- 
terial prosperity  brought  by  orderly  and  growing 
trade  reflects  the  larger  picture  of  world  economic 
stability  without  which  a  lasting  peace  is  impos- 
sible. 

Lend-Lease  Settlement  With  Ethiopia 

[Released  to  the  press  May  25] 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  25 
that  the  Governments  of  the  United  States  and 
Ethiopia  have  reached  an  agreement  regarding 
final  settlement  of  lend-lease,  reciprocal  aid,  and 
other  financial  claims  arising  out  of  World  War  II. 
Formal  signing  of  the  agreement  took  place  in 
Addis  Ababa  on  May  20, 1949. 

Under  the  terms  of  the  settlement,  the  Imperial 
Government  of  Ethiopia  has  agreed  to  pay  to  the 
Government  of  the  United  States  the  sum  of  $200,- 
000,  which  is  considered  as  payment  for  lend-lease 
goods  of  civilian  utility  remaining  in  inventory  on 
V-J  Day.  These  funds  will  be  used,  in  Ethiopia, 
for  any  of  the  following  purposes,  or  any  combina- 
tion thereof,  designated  by  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment: (1)  transfer  of  property  to  the  United 
States  and  improvements  to  United  States  prop- 
erty, or  (2)  educational  and  cultural  programs  of 
benefit  to  both  countries,  or  (3)  defraying  ex- 
penses of  the  Government  of  the  United  States 
and  its  agencies.  All  of  the  foregoing  expendi- 
tures shall  be  by  mutual  agreement.  Within  5 
years  and  90  days  after  the  date  of  this  agreement, 
the  Imperial  Government  of  Ethiopia  will  pay  to 
the  Government  of  the  United  States,  in  United 
States  dollars,  any  remaining  balance  of  the 
$200,000. 

The  total  of  lend-lease  aid  to  Ethiopia,  in  round 
figures,  is  $5,152,000,  most  of  which  was  expended 
during  the  course  of  hostilities. 


Union  of  South  Africa  [Israel] — Suspension 
of  Tonnage  Duties 

A    PROCLAMATION' 

Whereas  section  4228  of  the  Revised  Statutes 
of  the  United  States,  as  amended  by  the  act  of 
July  24,  1897,  c.  13,  30  Stat.  214  (U.  S.  C,  title  4G, 
sec.  141),  provides,  in  part,  as  follows: 

Upon  satisfactory  proof  being  given  to  the  President, 
by  the  government  of  any  foreign  nation,  that  no  dis- 
criminating duties  of  tonnage  or  imposts  are  imposed  or 
levied  in  the  ports  of  such  nation  upon  vessels  wholiy  be- 
longing to  citizens  of  the  United  States,  or  upon  the  prod- 
uce, manufactures,  or  merchandise  imported  in  tlie  same 
from  the  United  States  or  from  any  foreign  country,  the 
President  may  issue  his  proclamation,  declaring  that  the 
foreign  discriminating  duties  of  tonnage  and  impost 
within  the  United  States  are  suspended  and  discontinued, 
so  far  as  respects  the  vessels  of  such  foreign  nation,  and 
the  produce,  manufactures,  or  merchandise  imported  into 
the  United  States  from  such  foreign  nation,  or  from  any 
other  foreign  country ;  the  suspension  to  take  effect  from 
the  time  of  such  notification  being  given  to  the  President, 
and  to  continue  so  long  as  the  reciprocal  exemption  of 
vessels,  belonging  to  citizens  of  the  United  States,  and 
their  cargoes,  shall  be  continued,  and  no  longer  .  .  . ; 

And  AviiEREAS  satisfactory  proof  was  received 
by  me  from  the  (lovernment  of  the  Union  of  South 
Africa  on  April  19.  1949  [April  18,  1949]  that  no 
discriminating  duties  of  tonnage  or  imposts  are 
imposed  or  levied  in  the  ports  of  the  Union  of 
South  Africa  [Israel]  upon  vessels  wholly  belong- 
ing to  citizens  of  the  United  States,  or  upon  the 
produce,  manufactures,  or  merchandise  imported 
in  such  vessels,  from  the  United  States,  or  from 
any  foreign  country : 

Now,  THEREFORE,  I,  Harry  S.  Truman,  President 
of  the  United  States  of  America,  by  virtue  of  the 
authority  vested  in  me  by  the  above-quoted  statu- 
tory provisions,  do  hereoy  declare  and  proclaim 
that  the  foreign  discriminating  duties  of  tonnage 
and  imposts  within  the  United  States  are  sus- 
pended and  discontinued  so  far  as  respects  the 
vessels  of  the  Union  of  South  Africa  and  the  prod- 
uce, manufactures,  or  merchandise  imported  in 
said  vessels  into  the  United  States  from  the  Union 
of  South  Africa  [Israel]  or  from  any  other  for- 
eign country;  the  suspension  to  take  effect  from 
April  19,  1949,  [April  18,  1949]  and  to  continue 
so  long  as  the  reciprocal  exemption  of  vessels  he- 
longing  to  citizens  of  the  United  States  and  their 
cargoes  shall  be  continued,  and  no  longer. 

In  testimony  whereof  I  have  hereunto  set  my 
hand  and  caused  the  seal  of  the  United  States  of 
America  to  be  affixed. 

Done  at  the  City  of  Washington  this  19th  day  of 

May,  in  the  year  of  our  Lord  nineteen  hundred 

and  forty-nine  and  of  the  Independence 

[seal]     of  the  United  States  of  America  the  one 

hundred  and  sevent,y-third. 

Harry  S.  Trtjman 
By  the  President: 

Dean  Aciieson, 
Secretary  of  State. 


Consultations  Initiated  With  Argentina  on 
Mutual  Commercial  Problems 

(Released  to  the  press  May  27] 

As  a  result  of  discussions  between  the  Argentine 
Ambassador,  Dr.  Jeronimo  Remorino,  and  officials 
of  the  Department  of  State,  consultations  have 
been  initiated  with  respect  to  business  and  com- 
mercial problems  of  mutual  concern  to  the  Gov- 
ernments of  Argentina  and  the  United  States. 
In  order  to  facilitate  study  and  agreement  on  these 
problems,  a  temporary  joint  committee  has  been 
formed.  The  United  States  section  of  the  com- 
mittee is  headed  bj*  Rollin  S.  Atwood,  Acting 
Chief,  Division  of  River  Plate  Affairs,  of  the  De- 
partment of  State;  and  Dr.  Juan  Scarpati,  Eco- 
nomic Counselor  of  the  Argentine  Embassy,  heads 
the  Argentine  section.  The  other  members  of  the 
United  States  section  who  have  so  far  been  named 
are  George  Wythe,  Chief,  American  Republics 
Branch,  Department  of  Commerce,  and  Harold 
Randall,  Adviser  on  Latin  America  in  the  Division 
of  Commercial  Policy  of  the  Department  of  State. 


THE  DEPARTMENT 

Announcement  of  Nominations  of  Assistant 
Secretaries,  Legal  Adviser,  and  Counselor 

[Released  to  tbe  press  May  26] 

The  President  on  May  26  announced  the  nomi- 
nations of  Edward  G.  Miller,  Jr.,  George  W.  Per- 
kins, George  C.  McGhee,  W.  Walton  Butterworth, 
and  John  D.  Hickerson  to  be  Assistant  Secretaries 
of  State.  The  President  also  announced  the  nom- 
inations of  Adrian  S.  Fisher  and  George  F.  Ken- 
nan  as  Legal  Adviser  and  Counselor,  respectively. 

These  nomination  are  in  implementation  of  Pub- 
lic Law  No.  73  signed  by  the  President  on  May 
26,  1949,  which  provides  for  the  reorganization  of 
the  Department  of  State. 

Under  this  law  which  provides  for  10  Assistant 
Secretaries  of  State,  a  Legal  Adviser,  and  a  Coun- 
selor, the  Secretary  of  State  is  authorized  to  des- 
ignate two  Assistant  Secretaries  as  Deputy  Under 
Secretaries  and  delegate  responsibilities  to  the 
Assistant  Secretaries. 

The  Secretary  has  designated  Assistant  Secre- 
tary Dean  Rusk  to  serve  as  Deputy  Under  Sec- 
retary for  substantive  matters  and  Assistant 
Secretary  John  E.  Peurifoy  to  serve  as  Deputy 
Under  Secretary  for  Administration.  Assistant 
Secretary  for  Economic  Affairs  Willard  L.  Thorp, 
Assistant  Secretary  for  Public  Affairs  George  V. 
Allen,  and  Assistant  Secretary  for  Congressional 
Relations  Ernest  A.  Gross  will  continue  in  their 
present  capacities. 

'Proclamations  2838,  2839,  respectively,  14  Fed.  Reg. 
2681. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Following  confirmation  by  the  Senate,  it  is  the 
intention  of  the  Secretary  of  State  to  designate 
Edward  G.  Millei-,  Jr.,  to  serve  as  Assistant  Sec- 
retary for  American  Republic  Affairs;  George  W. 
Perkins  to  serve  as  Assistant  Secretary  for  Euro- 
pean Affairs;  George  C.  McGhee  to  serve  as  As- 
sistant Secretary  for  Near  Eastern  and  African 
Affairs;  W.  Walton  Butterworth  to  serve  as  As- 
sistant Secretary  for  Far  Eastern  Affairs,  and 
John  D.  Hickerson  to  serve  as  Assistant  Secretary 
for  International  Organization  Affairs. 

George  C.  Kennan  will  replace  Charles  E.  Boh- 
len  who,  after  7  years  of  distinguished  service  in 
the  Department  of  State,  will  be  assigned  to  the 
United  States  Embassy  in  Paris  as  Minister  and 
Deputy  Chief  of  Mission. 

Ambassador  Paul  C.  Daniels,  Director  of  the 
Office  of  American  Republic  Affairs,  will  now  be 
enabled  to  devote  full  time  to  his  assignment  as 
United  States  Ambassador  to  the  Organization  of 
American  States,  in  keeping  with  the  growing 
practice  of  inter-American  states  to  maintain  full- 
time  representatives  to  that  organization. 

Foreign  Service  Officer  Joseph  C.  Satterthwaite, 
Director  of  the  Office  of  Near  Eastern  and  African 
Affairs,  completes  his  statutory  tour  of  duty  with 
the  Department  in  the  near  future  and  will  be 
assigned  to  a  high  diplomatic  post. 


Resignation  of  Charles  E.  Saltzman 

[Released  to  the  press  May  26] 

The  President  has  accepted  the  resignation  of  Charles 
E.  Saltzman  as  Assistant  Secretary  of  State  effective  May 
26. 

Appointment  of  Officers 

[Released  to  the  press  May  23] 
The  Department  of  State  announced  on  May  23, 1949,  the 
appointment  of  Theodore  C.  Achilles  as  a  Deputy  Director 
of  the  Office  of  European  Affairs,  with  Llewellyn  E.  Thomp- 
son continuing  as  Deputy  Director,  in  place  of  Samuel 
Eeber,  who  has  been  assigned  as  Counselor  at  Rome.  John 
D.  Hickerson  is  Director  of  the  Office. 

Mr.  Achilles  has  been  Chief  of  the  Western  European 
Division  of  the  Office  since  November  17,  19-17.  Mr. 
Thompson  has  been  Deputy  Director  since  November  14, 
1947. 

Mr.  Reber  is  serving  as  United  States  Foreign  Ministers' 
Deputy  on  the  Austrian  Treaty  discussions  in  London.  He 
has  served  as  Deputy  Director  of  the  Office  of  European 
Affairs  since  September  21,  1947. 


PUBLICATIONS 


Department  of  State 


For  sale  by  the  Siiperiyitendent  of  Documents,  Government 
Printing  Office,  Washington  23.  D.  0.  Address  requests 
direct  to  tlie  Superintendent  of  Documents,  excej)t  in  the 
case  of  free  publications,  which  may  lie  obtained  from,  the 
Department  of  State. 

Food  Production:  Cooperative  Program  in  Pern.  Trea- 
ties and  Other  International  Acts  Series  1S72.  Pub.  3426. 
3  pp.     5(*. 

June  5,  1949 


Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Peru.  Ex- 
tending Agreement  of  May  19  and  20,  1943,  as  Modi- 
fied and  Extended — Effected  by  exchange  of  notes 
signed  at  Lima  June  28  and  July  8,  1948 ;  entered  into 
force  July  9,  1948. 

Relief  Supplies  and  Packages  for  France;  Duty-Free 
Entry  Payment  of  Transportation  Charges.  Treaties 
and  Other  International  Acts  Series  1873.  Pub.  3420.  12 
pp.     10<*. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  France — 
Signed  at  Paris  Dec.  23,  1948 ;  entered  into  force  Dec. 
23,  1948. 

Air  Search  and  Rescue  Operations.  Treaties  and  Other 
International  Acts  Series  18S2.     Pub.  3455.     4  pp.     5^. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Canada — 
Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  WasMng- 
ton  Jan.  24  and  31,  1949;  entered  into  force  Jan.  31, 
1949. 


THE  FOREIGN  SERVICE 


American  and  Liberian  Legations  Raised 
to  Embassies 

The  American  Legation  in  Monrovia,  Liberia, 
was  elevated  to  Embassy  status  May  7,  when 
Edward  R.  Dudley  presented  his  letters  of  cre- 
dence as  Ambassador  to  President  Tubman. 

The  Liberian  Legation  in  Washington  will  be 
raised  to  Embassy  status  within  a  few  days  when 
C.  D.  B.  King,  Liberian  Minister  to  the  United 
States,  presents  his  letters  of  credence  as  Ambas- 
sador to  President  Truman. 

Relations  between  the  peoples  of  Liberia  and 
the  United  States  date  back  to  1822,  when  the  first 
efforts  were  made  to  establish  a  Republic  in  Africa 
by  American  freedmen.  Formal  diplomatic  re- 
lations between  the  two  countries  were  established 
on  March  11, 1863,  and  the  close  relations  between 
the  two  countries  have  continued  uninterruptedly. 
The  exchange  of  Ambassadors  is  a  fitting  tribute 
to  the  long-standing  friendship  between  Liberia 
and  the  United  States. 


Consular  Offices 

The  Consular  Office  at  Buenaventura,  Colombia  was 
raised  to  the  rank  of  Consulate,  effective  April  25,  1949. 

The  Consular  Office  at  Bremerhaven,  Germany  was 
raised  to  the  rank  of  Consulate,  effective  May  1,  1949. 


Resignations 

The  President  accepted  the  resignations  of  Seldon  Chapin 
as  American  Minister  to  Hungary,  and  Albert  F.  Nufer 
as  American  Ambassador  to  El  Salvador.  For  the  texts 
of  Mr.  Truman's  letters  accepting  their  resignations,  see 
White  House  press  release  of  May  25,  1949. 

735 


■x-W^^& 


^<yrvC€ot/^ 


Economic  Affairs  Pace 

International  Cooperation  Against  the  Tsetse. 

By  Frederick  J.  Brady,  M.  D 722 

Eighth  Meeting  of  tlie  International   Cotton 

Advisory  Committee.     By  J.  G.  Evans  .        723 

U.S.    Delegations    to    International    Confer- 
ences: 
U.S.-Canadian  Civil  Aviation  Meeting  .    .        725 
Joint  U.  S.-Canadian  Industrial  Mobiliza- 
tion Committee 725 

Foreign  Distribution  of  Radioisotopes  .    .    .        727 

ERP    Key    Factor  in   U.S.   Foreign  Policy  . 

Statement  by  Acting  Secretary  Webb  .        729 

Significance  of  World  Trade   Week.     State- 
ment by  Acting  Secretary   Webb  .    .    .        733 

Union  of  South   Africa   [Israel] — Suspension 

of  Tonnage  Duties.     A  Proclamation  .        734 

Consultations   Initiated    With   Argentina  on 

Mutual   Commercial   Problems  ....        734 

Treaty  Information 

The  Costa  Rica-Nicaragua  Incident:  Effec- 
tive International  Action  in  Keeping  the 
Peace.     By  W.  Taploy  Bennett,  Jr.  .    .        707 
Lend-Lease  Settlement  With  Ethiopia  .    .    .        733 
Consultations   Initiated    With   .\rgentina  on 

Mutual    Commercial    Problems  ....        734 

Internationai  Information  and 
Cultural  Affairs 

Peaceful     Utilization     of     Atomic     Energy. 

Statement  by  Senator  Brien  McMahon  .        726 
Czech  Language  Edition  of  Amerika  Begun  .        730 
Educational  Exchange  Agreement  With  Nor- 
way          731 

Hamlet  Company  Leaves  for  Denmark  .    .    .        731 
Visitors  to    U.S.    Under   Travel-Grant   Pro- 
gram             732 


The  United  Nations  and  Pag* 

Specialized  Agencies 

Disposition  of  the  Former  Italian  Colonies. 
Statement  by  Ambassador  Warren  R. 
Austin 713 

Appointment  of  a  Special  Committee  on 
Methods  and  Procedures  of  the  General 
Assembly 715 

U.N.  Documents:  A  Selected  Bibliography  .        715 

The  United  States  and  the  United  Nations: 
Report  by  the  President  to  the  Congress 
for  the  Year  1948 716 

The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations  .    .        718 

Occupation  Matters 

Nomination  of  John  J.  McCloy  To  Be  U.S. 
High  Commissioner  for  Germany  and 
Chief  of  Mission  Sent  to  Senate  ....        730 

Calendar  of  International  Meetings    .    .        720 

The  Department 

Announcement  of  Nominations  of  Assistant 
Secretaries,  Legal  Adviser,  and  Counse- 
lor         734 

Resignation  of  Charles  E.  Saltzman  ....        735 
Appointment  of  Officers 735 

The  Congress 

ERP    Key    Factor   in    U.S.    Foreign    Policy. 

Statement  by  Acting  Secretary  Webb  .        729 

The  Foreign  Service 

American  and  Liberian  Legations  Raised  to 

Emba.ssies 735 

Consular  Offices 735 

Resignations 735 

Publications 

Department  of  State 735 


^(m^ymtdo^ 


W.  Taplcy  liennvtt,  Jr.,  author  of  the  article  on  the  Costa 
Rica-Nicaragua  Incident,  is  Acting  Assistant  Chief,  Division 
of  Central  America  and  Panama  Affairs,  Office  of  American 
Republic  Affairs,  Department  of  State.  Mr.  Bennett  served  as 
Adviser  to  the  United  States  member  of  the  Committee  on 
Information  in  connection  with  the  situation  which  existed 
between  Costa  Rica  and  Nicaragua. 

Dr.  Frederick  J.  Brady,  author  of  the  article  on  International 
Cooperation  Against  the  Tsetse,  is  Bledical  Director  from  the 
National  Institutes  of  Health,  U.S.  Public  Health  Service. 
Dr.  15rady  represented  the  Department  of  State  as  Observer  at 
the  First  Meeting  of  the  International  Scientific  Committee  for 
Trypanosomiasis  Research. 

J.  a.  Evans,  author  of  the  article  on  the  Eighth  Meeting  of 
the  International  Cotton  Advisory  Committee,  is  Chief  of  the 
Cotton  and  Fiber  Section,  Division  of  International  Resources, 
Office  of  International  Trade  Policy,  Department  of  State. 
Mr.  Evans  served  as  Adviser-Secretary  on  the  U.S.  Delegation 
to  this  meeting. 


tJne/  ^ehao^7>tent^  ^ C/iate^ 


U.S.  NOTES  TO  BULGARIA,  HUNGARY,  AND 
RUMANIA  INVOKE  PEACE  TREATY 
CLAUSES  TO  SETTLE  DISPUTES  ON 
VIOLATING     HUMAN     FREEDOMS    • 

Statement  by  Acting  Secretary  Webb      ....      755 


GOALS  AND  PRACTICAL  PROBLEMS  OF 
THE  POINT  4  PROGRAM     •     By  John  R. 

Steelman         760 

CONSULTATION  BETWEEN  ECONOMIC 
AND  SOCIAL  COUTNCIL  ANT)  NONGOV- 
ERNMENTAL ORGANIZATIONS     ...     739 


For  complete  contents  see  bade  cover 


Vol.  XX,  No.  519 
June  12,  1949 


I 


^Ae  z/^e/ia/y^e^  x)^ CHaCe    yj  vJL  1 1 KJ  L  i  i  1 


Vol.  XX,  No.  519    •    Pubucation  3532 
June  12,  1949 


For  Bale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

U.S.  Qoverament  Printing  Office 

Washington  26,  D.O. 

Price: 

52  issues,  domestic  $5,  foreign  $7.25 

Single  copy,  16  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has  Ix'cn 
approved  by  the  Director  of  the  Bureau 
of  the  Budget  (February  18,  l'J49). 

Note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  Items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Depabtuent 
or  State  BcLLETm  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  Slate  BULLETIN, 
a  tpeekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications. 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  tcith  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  vcork  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includes 
press  releases  on  foreign  policy  issued 
by  tlie  White  House  and  the  Depart' 
ment,  and  statements  and  addresses 
made  by  the  President  and  by  the 
Secretary  of  State  and  other  officers 
of  the  Department,  as  well  as  special 
articles  on  various  phases  of  inter- 
national  affairs  and  the  functions  of 
the  Department.  Information  is  in- 
cluded concerning  treaties  and  in- 
ternational agreements  to  which  the 
United  States  is  or  may  become  a 
party  and  treaties  of  general  inter- 
national interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
tcell  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


Consultation  Between  the  Economic  and  Social  Council 
and  Nongovernmental  Organizations 


COMPILED  BY  KATHLEEN  BELL 


Article  71  of  the  Charter  states  that — 

The  Economic  and  Social  Council  may  make  suitable 
arrangements  for  consultation  with  non-governmental 
organizations  which  are  concerned  with  matters  within 
its  competence.  Such  arrangements  may  be  made  with 
international  organizations  and,  where  appropriate,  with 
national  organizations  after  consultation  with  the  Mem- 
ber of  the  United  Nations  concerned. 

The  Council  established  a  Committee  of  the 
Council  to  draw  up  detailed  proposals  to  imple- 
ment this  article.  At  the  second  session  of  the 
Council,  June  1946,  the  basic  arrangements  under 
which  the  Council  has  been  acting  were  adopted. 
In  the  3  years  that  have  followed,  these  arrange- 
ments have  been  modified  and  amplified.  The 
following  is  an  attempt  to  bring  together  under 
one  heading  all  the  resolutions  and  decisions  of 
the  Council  and  the  Council  Committee  on  Non- 
Governmental  Organizations  (Council  Ngo  Com- 
mittee) which  establish  the  criteria,  principles, 
rules,  and  privileges  applicable  to  nongovernmen- 
tal organizations  entering  into  consultative  rela- 
tionship with  the  Economic  and  Social  Council 
under  article  71. 

I.  Definition  of  nongovernmental  organizations 

Any  international  organization  which  is  not 
established  by  intergovernmental  agreement  shall 
be  considered  as  a  nongovernmental  international 
organization. 

II.  Criteria  of  eligibility  for  applications  ^ 

1.  The  organization  shall  be  concerned  with 
matters  falling  within  the  competence  of  the 
Economic  and  Social  Council  with  respect  to 
international  economic,  social,  cultural,  educa- 
tional, health,  and  related  matters. 

2.  The  aims  and  purposes  of  the  organization 
should  be  in  conformity  with  the  spirit,  purposes, 
and  principles  of  the  Charter  of  the  United 
Nations. 


3.  Organizations  proved  to  be  discredited  by 
past  collaboration  in  Fascist  activities  shall  not 
for  the  present  be  admitted. 

4.  The  organization  shall  be  of  recognized 
standing  and  shall  represent  a  substantial  pro- 
portion of  the  organized  persons  within  the  par- 
ticular interest  field  in  which  it  operates.  To 
meet  this  requirement,  a  group  of  organizations 
may  form  a  joint  committee  or  other  body  author- 
ized to  carry  on  consultation  for  the  group  as  a 
whole. 

5.  The  organization  shall  have  an  established 
headquarters,  with  an  executive  officer.  It  shall 
have  a  conference,  convention,  or  other  policy- 
making body. 

6.  The  organization  shall  have  authority  to 
speak  for  its  members  through  its  authorized  rep- 
resentatives. Evidence  of  this  authority  shall  be 
presented,  if  requested. 

7.  The  organization  should  be  international  in 
its  structure,  with  members  who  exercise  voting 
rights  in  relation  to  the  policies  or  action  of  the 
international  organization. 

8.  National  organizations  should  normally  pre- 
sent their  views  through  tlieir  respective  govern- 
ments or  through  international  nongovernmental 
organizations  to  which  they  belong.  It  would 
not,  save  in  exceptional  cases,  be  appropriate  to 
include  national  organizations  which  are  affiliated 
to  an  international  nongovernmental  organization 
covering  the  same  subjects  on  an  international 
basis.  National  organizations,  however,  may  be 
included  in  the  list  after  consultation  with  the 
member  state  concerned  if  they  cover  a  field  which 
is  not  covered  by  any  international  organization 
or  have  special  experience  upon  -which  the  Council 
wishes  to  draw. 


'  Resolutions  of  2d  Session,  Journal  29,  p.  482. 


June   12,   7949 


U.  S.  SUPERIWEMOENT  Of  D0CUMEW15 

juu  21  •ia49 


m.  Principles  governing  the  granting  of  status 

1.  It  is  important  to  note  that  a  clear  distinction 
is  drawn  in  the  Charter  between  participation 
without  vote  in  the  deliberations  of  the  Council, 
and  the  arrangements  for  consultation.  Under  ar- 
ticles 6i)  and  70,  participation  is  provided  for  only 
in  the  case  of  states  not  members  of  the  Council, 
and  of  specialized  intergovernmental  agencies. 
Article  71  applying  to  nongovernmental  organiza- 
tions provided  for  suitable  arrangements  for  con- 
sultation. It  is  considered  that  this  distinction, 
deliberately  made  in  the  Charter,  is  fundamental 
and  that  the  arrangements  for  consultation  should 
not  be  such  as  to  accord  to  nongovernmental  organ- 
izations the  same  rights  of  participation  accorded 
to  states  not  members  of  the  Council  and  to  the 
specialized  agencies  brought  into  relationship  with 
the  United  Nations. 

2.  It  should  also  be  recognized  as  a  basic  prin- 
ciple that  the  arrangements  should  not  be  such  as 
to  overburden  the  Council  or  transform  it  into  a 
general  forum  for  discussion  instead  of  a  body  for 
coordination  of  policy  and  action,  as  is  contem- 
plated in  the  Charter. 

3.  Decisions  on  arrangements  for  consultation 
should  be  guided  by  the  principle  that  consultative 
arrangements  are  to  be  made,  on  the  one  hand  for 
the  purpose  of  enabling  the  Council  or  one  of  its 
bodies  to  secure  expert  information  or  advice  from 
organizations  having  special  competence  on  the 
subjects  for  which  consultative  arrangements  are 
made,  and,  on  the  other  hand,  to  enable  organiza- 
tions which  represent  important  elements  of  public 
opinion,  to  express  their  views.  Therefore,  the  ar- 
rangements for  consultation  made  with  each  organ- 
ization should  involve  only  the  subjects  for  which 
that  organization  has  a  special  competence  or  in 
which  it  has  a  special  interest.  In  general  these 
arrangements  should  be  made  for  a  definite  period, 
reviewable  at  the  end  thereof. 

4.  Consultative  arrangements  should  not  be 
made  with  an  international  organization  which  is 
a  member  of  a  committee  or  group  composed  of  in- 
ternational organizations  with  which  consultative 
arrangements  have  been  made  except  for  different 
subjects  than  those  for  which  consultative  arrange- 
ments have  been  made  with  that  committee  or 
group. 


'  Resolutions  of  Gth  Session,  U.N.  doe.  E/777,  p.  42. 
'  Resolutions  of  7th  Session,  U.N.  doc.  E/1310,  p.  22. 
'  Resolutions  of  3d  Session,  U.N.  doc.  E/245/rev.  1,  p.  28. 


5.  In  several  of  the  fields  covered  by  the  Coun- 
cil there  will  exist  specialized  intergovernmental 
agencies  brought  into  relationship  with  the  Coun- 
cil, and  participating  in  its  deliberations  as  pro- 
vided in  article  70.  There  may  be  close  connection 
and  cooperation  between  these  agencies  and  tln' 
nongovernmental  organizations  whose  specific  fit' 
of  interest  is  the  same  as  or  similar  to  that  of  th 
specialized  agency. 

The  Council  should  take  this  consideration  into 
account. 

6.  Any  reapplication  for  consultative  status  or 
requests  for  reclassification  should  be  considered 
by  the  Council  Noo  Committee,  for  recommenda- 
tion to  the  Council,  at  earliest  18  months  after  the 
last  occasion  on  which  such  applications  or  re- 
quests were  considered  by  the  Council,  unless 
otherwise  decided  at  the  time  of  such  con- 
sideration.* 

7.  International  nongovernmental  organizations 
which  have  legally  constituted  branches  in  Spain, 
the  policies  of  which  are  determined  and  controlled 
by  the  Franco  government,  should  be  excluded 
from  relationship  imder  article  71  of  the  Charter  of 
the  United  Nations. 

8.  Nongovernmental  organizations  which  have 
legally  constituted  branches  in  Spain  shall,  how- 
ever, be  eligible  for  consultative  relationship  if 
their  branches  in  Spain  have  the  following 
characteristics: 

(a)  If  these  branches  are  not  actively  partici- 
pating in  the  international  nongovernmental  or- 
ganization in  which  they  maj'  hold  membership, 
that  is  to  say,  if  they  are  not  represented  on  any 
of  the  policy- forming  bodies  of  the  international 
nongovernmental  organizations  concerned,  do  not 
vote  therein,  and  make  no  financial  contribution ; 

(b)  If  these  branches  are  active  but  have  a 
purely  humanitarian  character  and  if  their  policies 
are  not  determined  and  controlled  by  the  Franco 
government. 

9.  Nongovernmental  organizations  should  also 
be  eligible  for  consultative  relationship  if  they 
have  only  individual  members  in  Spain  who  are 
not  organized  into  a  legally  constituted  branch.' 

10.  In  general  these  arrangements  should  be 
made  for  a  definite  joeriod,  reviewable  at  the  end 
thereof.* 

11.  Any  new  applications  for  consultative  status 
received  from  organizations,  reapplications,  re- 
quests for  reclassification  or  any  new  data  involv- 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


ing  substantial  changes  in  applications  already 
received  will  not  be  considered,  if  received  later 
than  6  weeks  before  the  opening  of  the  Economic 
and  Social  Council.^ 

IV.  Functions  of  the  Council  Ngo  Committee 

The  Council  shall  establish  a  Standing  Commit- 
tee on  Non-Governmental  Organizations  composed 
of  the  President  and  five  members  of  the  Council 
to  be  elected  each  year  at  the  first  regular  session 
of  the  Council,  (1)  to  recommend  to  the  Council 
what  action  should  be  taken  on  applications  for 
consultative  status  submitted  by  nongovernmental 
organizations,  and  (2)  to  consult  with  nongovern- 
mental organizations  in  categories  (a),  (b),  and 
(c).« 

V.  Consultation  with  the  Economic  and  Social 
Council 

i.  Organizations  in  categories  (a),  (b),and  (c) 

1.  Nongovernmental  organizations  in  categories 
(a),  (b),and  (c)  may  designate  authorized  repre- 
sentatives to  sit  as  observers  at  all  public  meetings 
of  the  Council  and  of  its  committees. 

2.  The  Council  may  consult,  through  the  Coun- 
cil Committee  on  Non-Goverimiental  Organiza- 
tions, with  nongovernmental  organizations  in  cate- 
gories (a),  (b),  or  (c)  upon  matters  in  which  such 
organizations  have  special  competence  or  knowl- 
edge, if  the  Council  so  decides  or  if  the  nongovern- 
mental organization  specifically  requests  such 
consultation.  The  representatives  of  the  organiza- 
tions shall  be  entitled  to  participate  fully  in  any 
discussion  of  substance  during  such  consultation. 

3.  The  Council  Committee  on  Non-Govern- 
mental Organizations  shall  report  on  its  consul- 
tations to  the  Council  in  sufficient  detail  to  permit 
the  members  of  the  Council  to  form  their  own  judg- 
ment regarding  the  importance  of  the  subject  un- 
der consideration  and  any  action  to  be  taken 
thereon.' 

4.  The  Secretariat  is  urged  to  be  so  organized 
as  to  render  all  appropriate  assistance  to  nongov- 
ernmental organizations  and  offer  to  them  all  ap- 
propriate facilities.  Such  assistance  might  in- 
clude the  arrangement  of  interviews  with  individ- 
ual members  of  the  Council  or  its  commissions,  and 
the  arrangement  of  informal  discussions  on  mat- 
ters of  special  interest  to  groups  of  organizations. 
The  Secretariat  would  also  aid  organizations  in 
obtaining  documentation  and  securing  special  fa- 


cilities, for  instance,  the  use  of  the  library,  meeting 
place,  etc.* 

5.  It  was  agi^eed  that  organizations  wishing  to 
be  heard  should  be  given  fixed  and  reasonable  dates 
early  in  the  session  and  that  noncompliance  would 
involve  forfeiture  of  their  right  to  be  heard  during 
that  session." 

6.  The  Secretary-General  has  been  requested  to 
prepare  for  distribution  to  the  members  of  the 
Council  a  list  by  categories  (a),  (b),  and  (c)  of 
communications  from  nongovernmental  organiza- 
tions received  since  the  end  of  a  session  of  the 
Council  and  up  to  the  adoption  of  the  agenda  of 
the  next  session,  indicating  their  titles  and  docu- 
ment numbers  and  which  of  them  are  specifically 
addressed  to  items  on  the  agenda  as  adopted  by  the 
Council.  It  is  understood  that  the  establisliment 
of  such  lists  will  not  derogate  from  the  right  of 
nongovernmental  organizations  in  category  (a) 
to  request  a  hearing  before  the  Council  on  any  sub- 
stantive item  on  the  agenda  of  the  Council.^" 

ii.  Organizations  in  category  (a) 

1.  The  provisional  agenda  of  each  regular  ses- 
sion of  the  Council  shall  include  all  items  proposed 
by: 

(3)  Members  of  the  United  Nations,  specialized 
agencies  and  non-governmental  organizations  in 
category  (a) ,  if  submitted  with  basic  documents  in 
sufficient  time  to  reach  the  Secretary-General  not 
less  than  seven  weeks  before  the  first  meeting  of 
each  session.  Any  item  submitted  to  the  Secre- 
tary-General for  inclusion  upon  the  provisional 
agenda  less  than  seven  weeks  before  the  date  of 
the  first  meeting  of  the  session  shall  be  accom- 
panied by  a  statement  of  the  urgency  of  the  item 
and  of  the  reasons  which  precluded  its  submission 
within  the  period  of  time  specified,  as  well  as  by 
the  basic  docmnents.  Such  items  shall,  together 
with  the  above-mentioned  statement  and  any  com- 
ments the  Secretary-General  sees  fit  to  offer,  be 
placed  before  the  Agenda  Committee." 


'  U.N.  doc.  E/940/Add.  4. 

"  Rule  78,  Rules  of  Procedure,  Resolutions  of  8th  Session, 
U.N.  doc.  E/1310,  p.  38. 

'  ma.    Rule  79. 

'  Resolutions  of  2d  Session,  .Journal  29,  p.  486. 

'  U.N.  doc.  E/940/Add.  1,  p.  11. 

'"Ibid., -p.  3. 

"  Rule  10,  Rules  of  Procedure,  Resolutions  of  8th  Ses- 
sion, U.N.  doc.  E/1310. 


June   72,   1949 


741 


2.  Tlie  provisional  agcndii  for  each  session  shall 
be  drawn  up  by  the  Secretary-General  in  consulta- 
tion with  the  President  and  shall  be  communicated 
by  the  Secretary-General  to  the  members  of  the 
United  Nations,  to  the  President  of  the  Security 
Council,  to  the  President  of  the  Trusteeship  Coun- 
cil, to  the  specialized  agencies  and  to  the  nongov- 
ernmental organizations  in  category  (a),  (1)  in 
the  case  of  regular  sessions  6  weeks  before  the 
opening  of  the  session,  and  (2)  in  the  case  of 
special  sessions,  at  the  same  time  as  the  notice 
convening  the  Council." 

3.  Nongovernmental  organizations  in  category 
(a)  may  circulate  to  the  Council  through  the  Sec- 
retary-General written  statements  and  suggestions 
on  matters  within  their  competence." 

4.  Whenever  the  Council  discusses  the  substance 
of  an  itf>m  proposexl  by  a  nongovernmental  organ- 
ization in  category  (a),  as  provided  for  in  rule  10, 
and  placed  on  the  agenda  of  the  Council,  such  an 
organization  shall  be  entitled  to  present  orally  to 
the  Council,  or,  if  the  item  is  referred  in  the  first 
instance  to  a  committee  of  the  whole  of  the  Coun- 
cil, to  the  committer,  an  introductory  statement  of 
an  expository  nature.  In  the  course  of  the  discus- 
sion, the  organization,  if  invited  by  the  President 
of  the  Council  or  the  chairman  of  the  committee, 
with  the  consent  of  the  relevant  body,  may  make 
one  further  statement  either  before  the  Council  or 
before  the  committee.^' 

5.  A  nongovernmental  organization  in  categoiy 
(a)  desiring  to  speak  either  before  the  Council  or 
a  committee  of  the  whole  on  an  item  which  it  has 
not  proposetl,  shall  make  such  a  request  in  writing 
to  the  chairman  of  the  Council  Committee  on  Non- 
Governmental  Organizations  not  later  than  48 
hours  after  the  adoption  of  the  agenda  by  the 
Council.  The  Council  Committee  on  Non-Govern- 
mental Organizations  shall  as  soon  as  possible 
thereafter  hear  the  views  of  the  nongovernmental 
organization  on  its  request,  and  upon  the  recom- 
mendation of  this  C'ommittee,  the  Council  as  a 
whole,  or  the  appropriate  committee,  may  arrange 
to  hear  one  statement  by  a  representative  of  the 
organization. '^ 


"  Rule  11.  Rules  of  Procedure,  Resolutions  ot  8th  Ses- 
sion, U.N.  doc.  B/1310. 

"Ibid.     Rule  80. 

"Ibid.     Rule  81. 

'•Social,  Human  Rights,  Status  of  Women,  Economic 
nnd  Employment,  Fiscal,  Statistical,  Population,  and 
Transport  and  Communications. 


742 


iii.  Organizations  in  categories  (b)  and  (c) 

1.  Organizations  in  categories  (b)  and  (c)  may 
submit  to  the  Secretariat  written  statements  and 
suggestions  on  matters  within  their  comi>etence. 
The  Secretariat  will  prepare  and  distribute  a  list 
of  all  such  communications,  briefly  indicating  the 
substance  of  each.  Upon  the  request  of  any  mem- 
ber of  the  Council,  a  communication  will  be  repro- 
duced in  full  and  distributed.  Any  lengthy  com- 
munication will  be  distributed  by  the  Secretariat 
only  if  sufficient  copies  are  furni.shed  by  the  or- 
ganization concerned." 

2.  Organizations  in  categories  (b)  and  (c)  shall 
not  be  heard  by  the  Council  or  a  committee  of  the 
whole,  but  upon  their  request  in  writing  to  the 
chairman  of  the  Council  Committee  on  Non- 
Governmental  Organizations  within  48  hours  of 
the  adoption  by  the  Council  of  the  final  agenda, 
they  shall  be  given  opportunity  to  express  their 
views  on  any  item  on  the  agenda  within  their  com- 
petence before  the  Coimcil  Committee  on  Non- 
Governmental  Organizations  which  will  report  to 
the  Council  on  such  hearings  in  accordance  with 
rule  79." 

VT.  Consultation   with   the   functional   commis- 
sions of  the  Economic  and  Social  Council." 

The  Rules  of  Procedure  of  the  Council  were 
revised  during  the  8th  session  of  the  Council.  The 
Rules  of  Procedure  of  the  Functional  Commission 
will  be  revised  during  the  10th  Session  to  bring 
them  into  line  with  the  new  rules  of  the  Council. 
Until  that  time  the  following  rules  are  in  force : 

i.  Organizations  in  category  (a),  (b),  and  (c) 

1.  The  provisional  agenda  for  each  session  shall 
be  drawn  up  by  the  Secretary-General  in  consulta- 
tion with  the  chainnan  whenever  possible  and 
shall  be  comnmnicated  to  the  members  of  the  Com- 
mission, and  in  the  case  of  the  Narcotics  Com- 
mission, to  the  President  of  the  Permanent  Cen- 
tral Opium  Board  and  to  the  chairman  of  the 
Supervisory  Body,  to  all  other  members  of  the 
United  Nations,  to  the  specialized  agencies,  to  the 
nongovernmental  organizations  in  category  (a), 
and  to  the  appropriate  nongovernmental  organ- 
izations in  categories  (b)  and  (c),  together  with 
the  notice  convening  the  Commission. 

2.  As  soon  as  possible  the  text  of  all  reports, 
resolutions,  recommendations,  and  other  formal 
decisions  adopted  by  the  Commission  and  its  sub- 

Deparlment  of  State  Bulletin 


sidiary  bodies,  shall  be  communicated  by  the 
Secretary-General  to  the  members  of  the  Com- 
mission, and  as  soon  as  possible  after  the  end  of 
the  session  to  all  members  of  the  United  Nations 
and  to  the  specialized  agencies,  to  the  nongovern- 
mental organizations  in  category  (a),  and  to  the 
appropriate  nongovernmental  organizations  in 
categories  (b)  and  (c)  " 

ii.  Organizations  in  category  (a) 

1.  To  insure  effective  consultation  with  commis- 
sions on  matters  in  which  organizations  have  spe- 
cial competence  or  knowledge,  it  is  recommended 
that  consultation  with  organizations  in  category 

(a)  should  normally  be  with  the  commission 
itself." 

2.  The  provisional  agenda  (of  functional  com- 
missions) shall  include  items : 

a.  proposed  by  the  commission  at  a  previous 
session ; 

b.  proposed  by  any  member  of  the  United 
Nations; 

c.  proposed  by  the  General  Assembly,  the 
Economic  and  Social  Council,  the  Security  Coun- 
cil, the  Trusteeship  Council,  a  specialized  agency, 
or  a  nongovernmental  organization  in  category 
(a).'' 

iii.  Organizations  in  categories  (b)  and  (c) 

1.  Those  organizations  included  in  categories 

(b)  and  (c)  would  normally  be  linked  for  con- 
sultation purposes  with  the  particular  commission 
or  commissions  concerned  with  these  fields  of  inter- 
est. The  commission  or  commissions  might  con- 
sult with  these  organizations  either  directly  or 
through  a  committee  or  committees  established  for 
the  purpose.  In  all  cases,  such  consultations  may 
be  arranged  on  the  invitation  of  the  Commission  or 
on  the  request  of  the  organization.^" 

VII.  Consultation  with  the  regional  commis- 
sions of  the  Economic  and  Social  Council 

i.  Economic  Commission  for  Europe  ^''  and  Eco- 
nomic Commission  for  Latin  America  ^' 

1.  Nongovernmental  organizations  in  categories 
(a),  (b),  and  (c)  may  designate  authorized  rep- 
resentatives to  sit  as  observers  at  public  meetings 
of  the  Commission.  Nongovernmental  organiza- 
tions in  category  (a)  may  circulate  to  the  members 
of  the  Commission  written  statements  and  sug- 
gestions on  matters  within  their  competence. 
Nongovernmental  organizations  in  categories  (b) 


and  (c)  may  submit  such  statements  and  sug- 
gestions to  the  Executive  Secretary.  The  Execu- 
tive Secretary  will  prepare  and  distribute  at  each 
session  of  the  Commission  a  list  of  such  com- 
munications received,  briefly  indicating  the  sub- 
stance of  each  of  them.  On  the  request  of  any 
member  of  the  Commission  the  Executive  Secre- 
tary will  reproduce  in  full  and  distribute  any  such 
communication. 

2.  The  Commission  at  its  discretion  may  con- 
sult with  nongovernmental  organizations  in  cate- 
gories (a),  (b),  and  (c)  on  matters  in  which  the 
Commission  regards  these  organizations  as  having 
special  competence  or  knowledge.  Such  consul- 
tations may  be  arranged  on  the  invitation  of  the 
Commission  or  on  the  request  of  the  organization. 
In  the  case  of  nongovernmental  organizations  in 
category  (a)  consultations  should  normally  be 
held  with  the  Commission  itself.  In  the  case  of 
nongovernmental  organizations  in  categories  (b) 
and  (c)  consultations  might  be  effected  either 
directly  or  through  ad  hoc  committees. 

ii.  Economic  Commission  for  Asia  and  the  Far 
East  (Ecafe) 

1.  Nongovernmental  organizations  in  categories 
(a),  (b),  and  (c)  may  designate  authorized  rep- 
resentatives to  sit  as  observers  at  public  meetings 
of  the  Commission.  The  Executive  Secretary  will 
circulate  to  the  members  and  associate  members 
of  the  Commission  written  statements  and  sug- 
gestions submitted  by  category  (a)  organizations 
on  matters  within  their  competence.  Nongovern- 
mental organizations  in  categories  (b)  and  (c) 
may  submit  such  statements  and  suggestions  to  the 
Executive  Secretary,  who  will  prepare  and  dis- 
tribute at  each  session  of  the  Commission  a  list 
of  such  communications  briefly  indicating  the 
substance  of  each.  Upon  the  request  of  any 
member  or  associate  member  of  the  Commission, 
the  Executive  Secretary  will  distribute  the  full 
text  of  any  such  communication. 


"  Rules  5  and  44,  Rules  of  Procedure  of  the  Functional 
Commissions,  Resolutions  of  6th  Session,  U.N.  doc.  E/777, 
p.  43. 

"  Resolutions  of  2d  Session,  Journal  29,  p.  485. 

"  Rule  6,  Rules  of  Procedure  of  Functional  Commis- 
sions, U.N.  doc.  E/565,  p.  16. 

"Resolutions  of  2d  Session,  Journal  29,  pp.  485-486. 

"  Rules  47  and  48,  Rules  of  Procedure  of  Ece,  U.N.  doc. 
E/CN.lO/2/ReT.  4,  p.  9. 

"  Rules  49  and  50.  U.N.  doc.  B/840,  pp.  26-27. 


June   72,   7949 


743 


2.  The  Commission  may  consult  with  nongov- 
ernmental organizations  in  categories  (a),  (b), 
and  (c)  on  matters  in  which  the  Commission  re- 
gards these  organizations  as  having  special  com- 
petence or  knowledge.  Such  consultations  may 
be  arranged  either  on  the  invitation  of  the  Com- 
mission or  upon  the  request  of  the  organization. 
In  the  case  of  nongovernmental  organizations  in 
category  (a),  consultations  should  normally  be 
held  with  the  Commisson  itself.  The  Commission 
may  consult  with  organizations  in  categories  (b) 
and  (c)  either  directly  or  through  a  committee  or 
committees  established  for  that  purpose." 

"VTII.  List  of  nongovernmental  organizations 
granted  consultative  status  by  the  Economic  and 
Social  Council 

i.  Organizations  in  category   (a) 

1.  World  Federation  of  Trade  Unions  (Wftu) 

2.  International  Cooperative  Alliance  (Ica) 

3.  American  Federation  of  Labor  (AFL) 

4.  International  Chamber  of  Commerce  (Ice) 

6.  International  Federation  of  Agricultural  Produc- 
ers (Ifap) 

6.  International     Federation     of     Cliristian     Trade 

Unions    (Ifctu) 

7.  Inter-Parliamentary  Union  (Ipu) 

8.  International  Organization  of  Employers   (Ioe) 

9.  World  Federation  of  United  Nations  Associations 

(  Wfuna  ) 

ii.  Organizations  in  category  (b) 

1.  Agudas  Israel  World  Organization 

2.  All-India  Women's  Conference 

3.  Associated  Country  Women  of  the  World  (Acww) 

4.  Boy  Scouts'  International  Bureau 

5.  Carnegie  Endowment  for  International  Peace 

6.  Catholic  International  Union  for  Social  Service 

7.  Commission  of  the  Churches  on  International  Af- 

fairs (Ccia) 

8.  Consultative    Council    of    Jewish    Organizations 

(CcJO) 

9.  Coordinating  Board  of  Jewish  Organizations  for 

Consultation   with    the   Economic   and    Social 
Council  of  the  United  Nations 

10.  Econometric  Society,  The 

11.  Friends  World  Committee  for  Consultation 

12.  Howard  League  for  Penal  Reform 

13.  Inter-American  Council  of  Commerce  and  Produc- 

tion 

14.  International  Abolitionist  Federation 

15.  International  African  Institute 

16.  International  Alliance  of  Women — Equal  Rights, 

Equal  Responsibilities 

17.  International  Association  of  Democratic  Lawyers 


"Rules  47  and  48,  Rules  of  Procedure  of  Ecafe,  U.N. 
doc.  E/839,  p.  68. 


IS.  International  Association  of  Penal  Law 

19.  International  Automobile  Federation  (Iaf) 

20.  International  Touring  Alliance   (Ita) 

21.  International    Bureau    for    the    Suppression    of 

Traffic  in  Women  and  Children 

22.  International  Bureau  for  the  Unification  of  Penal 

Law 
2.3.  International  Carriage  and  Van  Union — R.I.C. 

24.  International  Wagon  Union 

25.  International    Committee   of    Schools   of   Social 

Work 
2C.  International  Conference  of  Social  Work 

27.  International  Committee  of  the  Red  Cross 

28.  International  Cooperative  Women's  Guild 

29.  International  CouncU  of  Women 

30.  International  Criminal  Police  Commission 

31.  International  Federation  for  Housing  and  Town 

Planning 

32.  International  Federation  of  Business  and  Pro- 

fessional Women 

33.  International   Federation   of  Friends   of   Young 

Women 

34.  International  Federation  of  University  Women 

35.  International  Fiscal  Association  (Ifa) 

36.  International  Institute  of  Administrative  Sciences 

37.  International  Institute  of  Public  Finance 

38.  International  Institute  of  Public  Law 

39.  International  Law  Association,  The  (Ila) 

40.  International  League  for  the  Rights  of  51an,  The 

41.  International    Organization    for    Standardization 

(ISO) 

42.  International  Organization  of  Journalists 

43.  International  Road  Trausiwrt  Union  (luc) 

44.  International  Social  Service  (Iss) 

45.  International  Statistical  Institute  (Isi) 

46.  International  Student  Service  (Iss) 

47.  International     Transport     Workers'     Federation 

(Itwf) 

48.  International  Union  for  Child  Welfare 

49.  International  Union  of  Architects 

50.  International  Union  of  Catholic  AVomen's  Leagues 

51.  International  Union  of  Family  Organizations 

52.  International  Union  of  Local  Authorities 

53.  International  Union  of  Official  Travel  Organiza- 

tions 
5-t.  International  Union  of  Producers  and  Distributors 
of  Electric  Power 

55.  Liaison    Committee    of    Women's    International 

Organizations 

56.  National  Association  of  Manufacturers 

57.  Pax  Romana — International  Catholic  Movement 

for  Intellectual  and  Cultural  Affairs 

58.  Pax  Romana — International  Movement  of  Cath- 

olic Students 

59.  Salvation  Army,  The 

60.  Service  Civil  International 

61.  Women's  International  Democratic  Federation 
02.  Women's  International  League  for  Peace  and  Free- 
dom 

(Continued  on  page  70S) 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Summary  of  Important  Decisions  of  the  Second  Part  of  tlie  Third  Session 
of  the  General  Assembly 


The  second  part  of  the  Third  Session  of  the 
General  Assembly,  which  opened  on  April  5,  ended 
on  May  18. 

The  first  part  of  the  session,  held  in  Paris  from 
September  21  to  December  12,  1948,  had  been  im- 
able  to  complete  action  on  all  its  agenda  items 
and  referred  19  of  these  to  this  second  part  in 
New  York.  With  additional  items  the  number  of 
questions  before  this  New  York  session  totaled 
26,  and  they  included  such  matters  as  the  future 
of  the  former  Italian  colonies,  the  Spanish  ques- 
tion, observance  of  human  rights  in  Hungary  and 
Bulgaria,  the  admission  of  Israel,  freedom  of  in- 
formation, the  promotion  of  international  coopera- 
tion in  the  political  field,  refugees  and  displaced 
persons. 

In  the  course  of  the  150  plenary  and  committee 
meetings  of  this  session  came  news  of  success  in 
other  spheres  in  which  the  United  Nations  has 
played  an  important  role  of  mediation  and  con- 
ciliation :  the  Berlin  agreement  reached  by  United 
Nations  delegates  on  United  Nations  ground ;  and 
the  agreement  in  Indonesia  between  the  Nether- 
lands and  Republican  leadei's  meeting  under 
United  Nations  auspices. 

Among  its  important  decisions  of  the  second 
part  of  this  session  the  Assembly  has : 

admitted  Israel  as  its  59th  member  [Btjlletin 
of  May  29, 1949] ; 

rejected  proposals  which  would  have  modified 
the  Assembly's  previous  stand  with  regard  to 
Spain  [post,  p.  749]  ; 

recommended  measures  whereby  the  permanent 
members  of  the  Security  Council,  by  agreement, 
may  limit  the  use  of  the  "veto"  [Bulletin,  Jan. 
23,1949]; 

adopted  proposals  for  inquiry  and  conciliation 


in  the  settlement  of  disputes  [Bulletin  of  Jan. 
23, 1949  and  post,  p.  746] ; 

expressed  its  concern  at  the  accusations  made 
against  Bulgaria  and  Hungary  regarding  the  sup- 
pression of  human  rights  and  fundamental  free- 
doms and  urgently  drawn  the  attention  of  these 
governments  to  their  obligations  under  the  peace 
treaties  [Bulletin  of  May  15,  1949] ; 

declared  that  any  measures  which  prevent  or 
coerce  wives  of  citizens  of  other  nationalities  from 
leaving  their  country  of  origin  with  their  hus- 
bands or  in  order  to  join  them  abroad  are  not  in 
conformity  with  the  Charter  .  .  .  and  recom- 
mended the  U.S.S.R.  to  withdraw  any  such  meas- 
ures which  have  been  adopted  [Bulletin  of  May 
15, 1949] ; 

drafted  and  recommended  for  early  adoption  by 
member  states  and  others  invited  to  the  United 
Nations  Conference  on  Freedom  of  Information, 
a  draft  convention — the  first  of  its  kind — on  the 
International  Transmission  of  News  and  the 
Right  of  Correction  [Bulletin  of  May  29, 1949] ; 

urged  Governments  to  take  prompt  action  to 
ratify  the  Ilo  Convention  on  Freedom  of  Associ- 
ation and  the  Right  to  Organize  [Bulletin  of 
May  29,  1949] ; 

asked  the  Economic  and  Social  Council  to 
study  the  problem  of  slavery  [post,  p.  748] ; 

invited  India,  Pakistan,  and  the  Union  of  South 
Africa  to  discuss  at  a  round-table  conference  the 
question  of  the  treatment  of  persons  of  Indian 
origin  in  South  Africa  [post,  p.  748] ; 

The  question  of  the  disposal  of  the  former 
Italian  colonies,  lengthily  discussed,  was  deferred 
for  further  consideration  at  the  next,  fourth,  reg- 
ular session  [Bulletin  of  June  5, 1949]. 


TEXTS  OF  RESOLUTIONS  ADOPTED  BY  THE  GENERAL  ASSEMBLY 


Study  of  Methods  for  the  Promotion  of  Interna- 
tional Cooperation  in  the  Political  Field 

The  resolutions  adopted  by  the  General  Assem- 
bly on  April  28,  1949,  (A/846)  included  parts  C 
and  D,  which  were  in  addition  to  the  recommenda- 
tions of  the  ad  hoc  Political  Committee  printed  in 
the  Bulletin  of  January  23,  1949,  page  101. 
Minor  changes  made  by  the  General  Assembly 
are  the  following :  Under  A,  the  third,  fourth,  and 
fifth    paragraphs    read    "whereas"    rather    than 


"Noting" ;  Under  B  fourth  paragraph,  delete  the 
last  word,  "and" ;  sixth  paragraph  delete  the  sixth 
word,  "should". 

C 

Proposed  amendments  to  the  rules  of  procedure  of  the 
General  Assembly 

The  General  Assembly 

Resolves  that  the  proposed  amendments  to  rules 
31  and  58  of  the  rules  of  procedure  of  the  General 
Assembly  submitted  by  the  Interim  Committee  for 


June    72,   7949 


consideration  by  the  General  Assembly  (A/605, 
Annex  II :  Proposed  amendments  to  rules  of  pro- 
cedure of  the  General  Assembly  submitted  for 
consideration  by  the  Greneral  Assembly)  be  recom- 
mitted to  the  Interim  ('ominission  for  fuither  con- 
sideration in  the  broader  context  of  the  studies 
whicli  it  is  to  undertake  concernino;  the  pro- 
cedures of  the  General  Assembly  relating  to  the 
pacific  settlement  of  disputes. 

D 

Creation  of  a  panel  /or  inquiry  and  conciliation 

The  General  Assembly, 

MixPFUL  of  its  responsibilities,  under  Articles 
13  (paragraph  1  a)  and  11  (paragraph  1)  of  the 
Charter,  to  promote  international  co-operation  in 
the  political  field  and  to  make  recommendations 
with  regard  to  the  general  principles  of  the  main- 
tenance of  international  jwace  and  security, 

De>:ming  it  desirable  to  facilitate  in  every  prac- 
ticable way  the  compliance  by  Member  States  with 
the  obligation  in  Article  3.'5  of  the  Charter  first 
of  all  to  seek  a  solution  of  tlieir  disputes  by  peace- 
ful means  of  their  own  choice, 

NoTiXG  the  desirability,  as  shown  by  the  ex- 
perience of  organs  of  the  United  Nations,  of  hav- 
ing qualified  persons  readily  available  to  assist 
those  organs  in  the  settlement  of  disputes  and  sit- 
uations by  serving  on  commissions  of  inquiry  or 
of  conciliation. 

Concluding  that  to  make  provision  for  a  panel 
of  pei-sons  having  the  highest  qualifications  in  this 
field  available  to  any  States  involved  in  contro- 
versies and  to  the  General  Assembly,  the  Security 
Council  and  their  subsidiary  organs,  when  exercis- 
ing their  respective  functions  in  relation  to  dis- 
putes and  situations,  would  promote  the  use  and 
effectiveness  of  procedures  of  inquiry  and  con- 
ciliation, 

1.  Invites  each  Member  State  to  designate  from 
one  to  five  persons  who,  by  reason  of  their  train- 
ing, experience,  character  and  standing,  are 
deemed  to  be  well  fitted  to  serve  as  membei-s  of 
commissions  of  inquiry  or  of  conciliation  and  who 
would  be  disposed  to  serve  in  that  capacity; 

2.  Directs  the  Secretary-General  to  take  charge 
of  the  administrative  arrangements  connected 
with  the  composition  and  use  of  the  panel ; 

.3.  Adopts  the  annexed  articles '  relating  to  the 
composition  and  use  of  the  Panel  for  Inquiry  and 
Conciliation. 

Abticles  Rexatino  to  the  Composition  and  Use  op  the 
Panel  fob  Inquiry  and  Conciijation 


The  Panel  for  Inquiry  and  Conciliation  shall  consist 
of  persons  designated  by  Member  States  who,  by  reason  of 

'  The  text  of  the  articles  is  to  be  found  In  document 
A/S33  and  will  be  includeil  in  the  printed  volume  of  reso- 
lutions adopted  by  the  General  Assembly  during  its  third 
session  (part  II).  The  Bulijetin  here  prints  these  ar- 
ticles. 


their  training,  experience,  character  and  standing,  are 
deemed  to  be  well  fitted  to  serve  as  members  of  commis- 
sions of  inquiry  or  of  conciliation  and  who  would  be  dis- 
po.sed  to  serve  In  that  capacity.  Each  Member  State  may 
designate  from  one  to  five  persons,  who  may  be  private 
persons  or  government  officials.  In  designating  any  of 
its  officials,  a  State  shall  agree  to  make  every  effort  to 
make  such  person  available  if  his  services  on  a  commis- 
sion are  requested.  Two  or  more  States  may  designate 
the  same  person.  Members  of  the  panel  shall  be  desig- 
nated for  a  term  of  five  years  and  such  desi nations  shall 
be  renewable.  Members  of  commissions  appointed  tinder 
the.se  articles  shall  not,  in  the  performance  of  their  duties, 
seek  or  receive  instructions  from  any  Government.  Mem- 
bership in  the  panel  shall  not,  however,  render  a  person 
Ineligible  for  appointment,  as  representatives  of  his  Gov- 
ernment or  otherwise,  on  commissions  or  other  bodies  not 
formed  under  these  articles. 

Article  2 

The  Secretary-General  of  the  United  Nations  shall  have 
general  responsibility  for  the  administrative  arrange- 
ments connected  with  the  panel.  Kach  Government  shall 
notify  him  of  each  designation  of  a  person  for  inclusion  in 
the  panel,  including  with  each  notification  full  pertinent 
biographical  information.  Each  Government  shall  inform 
liim  when  any  member  of  the  panel  designated  by  it  is  no 
longer  available  due  to  death,  incapacity  or  inability  to 
serve. 

The  Secretary -General  shall  communicate  the  panel  and 
any  changes  which  may  occur  in  it  from  time  to  time 
to  the  Member  States,  to  the  Security  Council,  the  General 
As.sembly  and  the  Interim  Committee.  He  .shall,  where 
necessary,  invite  Member  States  promptly  to  desiimate 
replacements  to  fill  any  vacancies  on  the  panel  whicti  may 
occur. 

Article  S 

The  panel  shall  be  available  at  all  times  to  the  organs 
of  the  United  Nations  in  case  they  wish  to  select  from 
it  members  of  commissions  to  perform  tasks  of  inquiry 
or  conciliation  in  connexion  with  disputes  or  situations  in 
respect  of  which  the  organs  are  exercising  their  functions. 

Article  i 

The  panel  shall  be  available  at  all  times  to  all  States, 
whether  or  not  Members  of  the  United  Nations,  which 
are  parties  to  any  controversy,  for  the  purpose  of  sele<ting 
from  the  panel  members  of  conimis.sions  to  perform  tasks 
of  inquiry  or  conciliation  with  a  view  to  settlement  of 
the  controversy. 

Article  5 

The  method  of  selecting  members  of  a  commission  of 
inquiry  or  of  conciliation  from  the  panel  shall  be  deter- 
mined in  each  case  by  the  organ  appointing  the  commis- 
sion or,  in  the  case  of  commissions  appointed  by  or  at 
the  request  of  States  parties  to  a  controversy,  by  agree- 
ment between  the  parties. 

Whenever  the  parties  to  a  controversy  jointly  request 
the  Secretary-General,  the  I'resident  of  the  General  As- 
sembly or  the  Chairman  of  the  Interim  Committee  to  ap- 
point under  these  articles  a  member  or  members  of  a 
commission  to  jx^rform  tasks  of  inquiry  or  conciliation  in 
respect  of  the  controversy,  or  whenever  such  request  is 
otherwise  made  pursuant  to  Uie  provisions  of  a  treaty  or 
agreement  registered  with  the  Secretary-General  of  the 
United  Nations,  the  officer  so  requested  shall  appoint  from 
the  panel  the  number  of  commissioners  required. 

Article  6 

In  connexion  with  the  constituting  of  any  commission 
under  these  articles,  the  Secretary-General  shall  give  the 
United  Nations  organ  concerned   or  the  parties   to   the 


I 


746 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


controversy  every  assistance,  by  the  performance  of  such 
tasks  as  aseeitaining  the  availability  of  individuals  se- 
lected from  the  panel,  and  making  arrani;ements  for  the 
time  and  place  of  meeting  of  the  persons  so  selected. 

Article  7 

Members  of  commissions  constituted  pursuant  to  these 
articles  by  United  Nations  organs  shall  have  the  privileges 
and  imnmnities  specified  in  the  General  Convention  on 
the  Privileges  and  Immunities  of  the  United  Nations. 
Members  of  commissions  constituted  by  States  under  tliese 
articles  should,  so  far  as  possible,  receive  the  same 
privileges  and  immunities. 

Article  S 

Members  of  commissions  constituted  under  these  ar- 
ticles shall  receive  appropriate  comi)ensation  for  the 
period  of  their  service.  In  the  case  of  commissions  con- 
stituted under  article  4,  such  compensation  shall  be  pro- 
vided by  the  parties  to  the  controversy,  each  party 
providing  an  equal  share. 

Article  9 

Subject  to  any  determinations  that  may  be  made  by 
the  United  Nations  organ  concerned  or  by  the  parties  to  a 
controversy  in  constituting  commissions  under  articles  3 
and  4,  respectively,  commissions  constituted  under  these 
articles  may  meet  at  the  seat  of  the  XFnited  Nations  or  at 
such  other  places  as  they  may  determine  to  be  necessary 
for  the  effective  i)erformance  of  their  functions. 

Article  10 

The  Secretary-General  shall  assign  to  each  commission 
constituted  by  a  United  Nations  organ  under  these  articles, 
staff  adequate  to  enable  it  to  perform  its  duties  and  shall, 
as  necessary,  seek  expert  assistance  from  specialized 
agencies  brought  into  relationship  with  the  United  Nations. 
He  shall  enter  into  suitable  arrangements  with  the  proper 
authorities  of  States  in  order  to  assure  the  commission, 
so  far  as  it  may  find  it  necessary  to  exercise  its  functions 
within  their  territories,  full  freedom  of  movement  and 
all  facilities  necessary  for  the  performance  of  its  func- 
tions. The  Secretary-General  shall,  at  the  request  of  any 
commission  appointed  by  parties  to  a  controversy  pursuant 
to  article  4,  render  this  assistance  to  the  commission  to 
the  extent  possible. 

Upon  completion  of  its  proceedings  each  commission 
appointed  by  a  United  Nations  organ  shall  render  such 
reports  as  may  be  determined  by  the  appointing  organ. 
Each  commission  appointed  by  or  at  the  request  of  parties 
to  a  controversy  pursuant  to  article  4,  shall  file  a  report 
with  the  Secretary-General.  If  a  settlement  of  the  con- 
troversy is  reached,  such  report  will  normally  merely 
state  the  terms  of  settlement. 

United  Nations  Guard 

U.N.  doc.  A/848 
Adopted  Apr.  29,  1949 

The  General  Assembly, 

H.wiNG  CONSIDERED  the  proposal  made  by  the 
Secretary-General  for  the  creation  of  a  United 
Nations  Guard  for  the  purposes  set  forth  in  his 
report  of  28  September  1948,= 

Realizing  the  need  for  a  thorough  study  of  the 
matter  before  concrete  action  can  be  taken  thereon, 

Resolves  to  establish  a  Special  Committee  of 
specially  qualified  representatives  of  Australia, 
Brazil,  China,  Colombia,  Czechoslovakia,  France, 
Greece,  Haiti,  Pakistan,  Poland,  Sweden,  Union 
of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics,  United  Kingdom 
and  United  States  of  America. 


Tlie  Special  Committee  shall  study  the  proposal 
for  tlie  establishment  of  a  United  Nations  Guard 
in  all  its  relevant  aspects,  including  the  technical, 
budgetary  and  legal  problems  involved,  and  such 
other  proposals  as  may  be  made  by  Member  States 
and  by  the  Secretary-General  with  regard  to  other 
similar  means  of  increasing  the  effectiveness  of  the 
services  provided  to  the  United  Nations  missions 
by  the  Secretary-General  and  shall  prepare  a  re- 
port embodying  its  observations  and  recommenda- 
tions for  consideration  during  the  fourth  regular 
session  of  the  General  Assembly. 

Study  of  the  Social  Problems  of  the  Aboriginal 
Populations  and  Other  Underdeveloped  Social 
Groups  of  the  American  Continent 

U.N.  doc.  A/869 
Adopted  May  11,  1949 

Whereas  the  Charter  sets  forth  as  one  of  the 
objectives  of  the  United  Nations  the  promotion  of 
social  progress  and  higher  standards  of  living 
throughout  the  world, 

Whereas  tliere  exist  on  the  American  Continent 
a  large  aboriginal  population  and  other  under- 
developed social  groups  which  face  peculiar  social 
problems  that  it  is  necessary  to  study  in  the  field 
of  international  co-operation, 

Whereas  several  American  nations  are  directly 
and  vitally  interested  in  that  problem, 

Whereas  the  material  and  cultural  development 
of  those  populations  would  result  in  a  more  profit- 
able utilization  of  the  natural  resources  of  America 
to  the  advantage  of  the  world. 

The  Genei-ul  Assembly 

1.  Recormnends  that,  in  accordance  with  Articles 
13  and  62  of  the  Charter,  the  Economic  and  Social 
Council,  with  the  assistance  of  the  specialized 
agencies  concerned,  and  in  collaboration  with  the 
Instituto  Indigenista  Interamericano^  study  the 
situation  of  the  aboriginal  populations  and  of  the 
above-mentioned  under-developed  social  groups  of 
the  States  of  the  American  Continent  requesting 
such  help; 

2.  Invites  the  Secretary-General  to  co-operat«  in 
such  studies  as  are  deemed  necessary,  in  consulta- 
tion with  the  interested  Member  States  and  taking 
into  account  the  studies  and  conclusions  of  the 
Instituto  Indigenista  Interamericano,  in  compli- 
ance with  the  terms  of  this  resolution. 

Refugees  and  Displaced  Persons 

U.N.  doc.  A/871 
Adopted  May  16,  1949 

1.  The  General  Assembly,  at  its  142nd  plenary 
meeting  on  24  September  1948,  referred  tlie  fol- 
lowing item  on  its  agenda  to  the  Third  Committee 
for  consideration  and  report : 

Refugees  and  displaced  persons: 

(a)  Problem  of  refugees  and  displaced  per- 
soi.i:  item  proposed  by  Poland  (A/614) ; 

"  U.N.  doc.  A/656. 


June   72,   1949 


(b)  Repatriation,  resettlement  and  immifrra- 
tion  of  refuj^ees  and  disi)laced  persons:  Report  of 
the  Economic  and  Social  Council  {A/636). 

2.  The  Third  Committee  devoted  its  228th  and 
229th  meetings  on  12  May  1949  to  the  considera- 
tion of  this  item,  which  it  had  not  had  time  to  dis- 
cuss during  the  firet  part  of  the  third  session  of 
the  Assembly. 

3.  The  Committee  first  considered  a  draft  resolu- 
tion submitted  by  Poland  (A/C.3/513),  which 
was  rejected  by  19  votes  to  6,  with  11  abstentions. 

4.  It  tlien  considered  the  Report  of  the  Economic 
and  Social  Council  on  the  repatriation,  resettle- 
ment and  immigration  of  refugees  and  displaced 
persons.  A  draft  resolution  on  this  question  sub- 
mitted by  Brazil,  the  Netherlands,  the  United 
Kingdom  and  the  United  States  of  America 
(A/C. 3/403)  was  withdrawn  in  favour  of  a  shorter 
text  (A/C.3/518),  which  was  adopted  by  27  rotes 
to  5,  with  1  abstention. 

5.  Accordingly,  the  Third  Committee  recom- 
mends the  General  Assembly  to  adopt  the  follow- 
ing resolution: 

Refugees  and  Displaced  Persons 

The  General  Assembly 

Takes  note  of  the  report  of  the  Secretary-Gen- 
eral, drawn  up  in  consultation  with  the  Interna- 
tional Refugee  Organization  (E/816  and  A/C.3/ 
375),  on  the  repatriation,  resettlement  and  immi- 
gration of  refugees  and  displaced  persons. 


Discriminations  Practised  by  Certain  States  Against 
Immigrating  Labor,  and  in  Particular,  Against  Labor 
Recruited  From  the  Ranl<s  of  Refugees 


1.  The  delegation  of  Poland  proposed  that  the 
question  of  discriminations  practised  by  certain 
States  against  immigrating  labour  (A/614)  be 
placed  on  the  agenda  of  the  third  regular  session 
of  the  General  Assembly.  The  General  Assembly 
at  its  142nd  plenary  meeting  of  24  September  1948 
referred  the  item  to  the  Third  Committee  for  con- 
sideration and  report.  The  Committee  was  not, 
however,  able  to  take  up  consideration  of  the  item 
during  the  first  part  of  the  third  session. 

2.  The  representative  of  Poland  informed  the 
Tliird  Committee  at  its  229th  meeting  that  his 
delegation  wished  to  postpone  examination  of  the 
item  to  the  fourth  regular  session  of  the  General 
Assembly. 

3.  Accordingly,  the  Third  Committee  imani- 
mously  decided  at  that  meeting  to  recommend  the 
General  Assembly  to  adopt  the  following  reso- 
lution : 

Discriminations  Against  Immigrating  Labour 

The  General  Assembly, 

Considering  the  statement  made  by  the  Polish 


delegation  to  the  effect  that  it  wishes  to  postpone 
examination  of  the  item  to  the  fourth  regular  ses- 
.sion  of  the  General  Assembly. 

Withdraws  from  the  agenda  of  its  third  session 
the  item  entitled:  ''Discriminations  practised  by 
certain  States  against  immigrating  laoour,  and  in 
particular  against  labour  recruited  from  the  ranks 
of  refugees' . 


Treatment  of  People  of  Indian  Origin  in  the 
Union  of  South  Africa 

U.N.  doc.  A/880 
Adopted  May  14,  1949 

The  General  Assembly, 

Taivixg  note  of  the  application  made  by  the 
Government  of  India  regarding  the  treatment  of 
people  of  Indian  origin  in  the  Union  of  South 
Africa  as  well  as  of  considerations  put  forward  by 
the  Government  of  the  Union,  and  having  ex- 
amined till'  matter, 

Inr'dcx  the  Governments  of  India,  Pakistan  and 
the  Union  of  South  Africa  to  enter  into  discussion 
at  a  round-table  conference,  taking  into  considera- 
tion the  purposes  and  principles  of  the  Charter  of 
the  United  Nations  and  the  Declaration  of  Hu- 
man Rights. 


Slavery 

U.N.  doc.  A/87T 
Adopted  May  IG,  1949 

The  General  Assembly 

Requests  the  Economic  and  Social  Council  to 
study  tlie  problem  of  slavery  at  its  next  session. 


Trade  Union  Rights 

U.N.  doc.  A/878 
Adopted  May  13,  1949 

The  General  Assembly, 

Recalling  that  at  its  second  regular  session  it 
endorsed  the  principles  proclaimed  by  the  Inter- 
national Labour  Conference  at  its  thirtieth  ses- 
sion in  respect  of  trade  union  rights  and  approved 
the  request  made  by  the  Economic  and  Social 
Council  at  its  fifth  session  that  the  International 
Labour  Organisation  should  continue  its  efforts 
in  order  that  one  or  several  international  conven- 
tions on  the  subject  may  be  adopted,  and 

Noting  that  the  International  Labour  Confer- 
ence at  San  Francisco  in  the  course  of  its  thirty- 
first  session  adopted,  on  9  July  1948,  a  Convention 
on  Freedom  of  Association  and  Protection  of  the 
Right  to  Organize,  and  that  this  Convention  has 
now  been  communicated  to  Governments  for 
ratification. 

Expresses  the  earnest  hope  that  Governments 
will  take  prompt  action  for  the  early  ratification 
of  the  Convention  of  Freedom  of  Association  and 
Protection  of  tlie  Right  to  Organize  adopted  by 
the  International  Labour  Conference  at  San 
Francisco. 


Department  of  Sfofe   Bulletin 


World  Social  and  Cultural  Situation 

U.N.  doc.  A/879 
Adopted  May  13,  1949 

The  General  Assembly, 

Considering  that  the  Economic  and  Social 
Council  has  been  entrusted  by  the  Charter  with 
the  responsibility  of  helping  to  solve  international 
problems  in  the  economic,  social,  humanitarian 
and  cultural  fields. 

Considering  that  solutions  to  these  problems 
can  best  be  achieved  through  exhaustive  studies 
in  the  corresponding  fields. 

Considering  that  the  Council  has  already  ini- 
tiated, in  the  economic  field,  a  series  of  general 
studies  on  the  world  economic  situation  which  has 
been  of  the  greatest  practical  use  to  it  in  carrying 
out  its  work. 

Invites  the  Economic  and  Social  Council  to  con- 
sider, on  the  basis  of  a  report  by  its  Social  Com- 
mission and  after  consultation  with  the  specialized 


agencies  and  the  non-governmental  organizations 
concerned,  the  possibility  of  drafting  a  general 
report  on  the  world  social  and  cultural  situation. 

The  Spanish  Question 

Note:  No  resolution  was  adopted  by  the  As- 
sembly. 

Tlie  resolution  submitted  in  the  report  of  the 
First  Committee  which  had  originally  been  jointly 
submitted  in  Committee  by  Bolivia,  Brazil,  Co- 
lombia and  Peru,  failed  to  secure  the  requisite  two- 
thirds  majority.^  The  roll-call  vote  was  26  in 
favor,  15  against,  with  16  abstentions. 

A  Polish  proposal  (Document  A/860)  was  re- 
jected in  a  vote  by  show  of  hands,  6  in  favor,  40 
against,  with  7  abstentions.  The  individual  para- 
graphs of  the  Polish  proposal  had  previously  been 
rejected  in  a  series  of  nine  votes,  seven  of  which 
were  by  roll  call.     (See  Press  Release  GA/492.) 


Current  United  Nations  Documents:    A  Selected  Bibliograpliy^ 


Economic  and  Social  Council 

Official  Records,  Third  Year 

Sixth  Session.     Supplement  No.  5. 
Report  of  the  second  session  of  the  Commission  on  the 
Status  of  Women  (5-19  January  1948).     E/615,  Jan- 
uary 26,  1948.     23  pp.     Printed.     250. 

Preliminary  List  of  Questions  for  the  Provisional  Agenda 
of  the  Ninth  Session  of  the  Council.  E/1278,  Mar.  14, 
1949.     3  pp.      mimeo. 

Assistance  Rendered  by  the  United  Nations  and  the  Spe- 
cialized Agencies  for  the  Promotion  of  the  Economic 
Development  of  Under-Developed  Countries.  E/CN.l/ 
Sub.  3/24,  Mar.  4, 1949.     88  pp.     mimeo. 

Living  Conditions  in  Under-Developed  Countries  and  Ter- 
ritories. The  Study  of  Standards  of  Living  in  Less 
Developed  Areas  of  Africa,  Asia,  Middle  and  South 
America,  and  the  Pacific.  E/CN.5/106,  Mar.  11,  1949. 
14  pp.     mimeo. 

Technical  Assistance  for  Social  Development.  Report  on 
International  Exchange  of  Social  Welfare  Personnel. 
E/CN.5/105,  Mar.  11,  1949.     130  pp.     mimeo. 

International    Social   Welfare   Advisory    Services. 

E/CN.5/108,  Mar.  17,  1949.     94  pp.     mimeo. 

Report  Based  on  Replies  to  Part  I,  Section  G  (Nationality) 
of  the  Questionnaire  on  the  Legal  Status  and  Treat- 
ment of  Women.  E/CN.6/82,  Feb.  28,  1949.  123  pp. 
mimeo. 


General  Assembly 

Official  Records  of  the  Third  Session  of  the  General  As- 
sembly, Part  I. 

Resolutions,    21     September-12    December    1948. 

A/810,  December  1948.    viii,  181  pp.    Printed.    $2.00. 

General  Committee.  Summary  Records  of  Meet- 
ings 22  September-11  December  1948.  v,  81  pp. 
Printed.     800. 

Joint    Second    and    Third    Committee.     Summary 

Records  of  Meetings  5   October-16  November  1948. 
xii.  147  pp.     Printed.     $1.50. 

Economic  and  Financial  Questions.  Second  Com- 
mittee. Summary  Records  of  Meetings  21  September- 
26  November  1948.    xiv,  369  pp.    Printed.    $3.70. 

Trustee.ship.  Fourth  Committee.  Summary  Rec- 
ords of  Meetings  21  September-22  November  1948. 
xii,  378  pp.  Printed.  $4.00. 
OfEcial  Records,  second  session  Ad  Hoc  Committee  on 
Headquarters.  Summary  Records  of  Meetins.  24 
September  to  13  November  1947.  vii,  30  pp.  printed. 
AQ(!:. 

'  For  text  of  the  resolution,  see  Buixetin  of  May  22, 
1949,  p.  653. 

-  Printed  materials  may  be  secured  in  the  United  States 
from  the  International  Documents  Service,  Columbia 
University  Press,  2960  Broadway,  New  York  27,  N.  Y. 
Other  materials  (mimeographed  or  processed  documents) 
may  be  consulted  at  certain  designated  libraries  in  the 
United  States. 


June   72,    7949 


THE  UNITED  STATES  IN  THE  UNITED  NATIONS 


International  Law  Commission 

The  International  Law  Commission  concluded 
its  first  session  on  Jmie  9  with  the  formal  adoption 
of  iUs  report  to  the  (leiieral  .Vsseinbly,  wiiich  in- 
cluded the  draft  declaration  on  the  rights  of  states. 
The  Commission  completed  action  on  its  final 
agenda  item  "ways  and  means  of  making  the  evi- 
dence of  customary  international  law  more  readily 
available"  by  deciding  that  one  of  its  members 
would  draw  up  a  working  paper  on  the  subject 
for  consideration  at  the  next  session. 

The  Commission  appointed  six  members  as 
special  rapporteurs  to  prepare  working  papers  for 
the  next  session  on  topics  discussed  during  this  ses- 
sion. These  subjects  include  treaties,  arbitral  pro- 
cedure, and  regime  of  the  high  seas  (which  were 
topics  given  priority  for  codification),  formula- 
tion of  principles  recognized  in  the  charter  and 
judgment  of  the  Niirnberg  Tribunal,  preparation 
of  a  draft  code  of  offenses  against  the  peace  and 
security  of  mankind,  and  desirability  and  possi- 
bility of  establishing  an  international  judicial  or- 
gan for  trial  of  persons  charged  with  genocide  or 
other  crimes  over  which  jurisdiction  will  be  con- 
ferred by  international  conventions. 

Commission  for  India  and  Pakistan 

The  Commission  for  India  and  Pakistan  re- 

¥orted  June  6  that  the  Grovernments  of  India  and 
'akistan  have  not  acceded  to  the  Commission's 
request  for  unreserved  acceptance  of  truce  tenns 
presentexi  by  the  Commission  on  April  28.  The 
cease-fire  agreement  was  accepted  by  the  two  gov- 
ernments on  January  1, 1949,  but  up  to  the  present, 
and  aft*r  4  months  of  discussion,  an  agreement 
for  the  implementation  of  the  truce  has  not  been 
reached.  The  principal  difference  between  India's 
viewpoint  and  that  of  Pakistan  i-elates  to  the  dis- 
position and  withdrawal  of  troops  from  the  State 
of  Jammu  and  Kashmir  so  as  to  prepare  the 
ground  for  holding  a  plebiscite  to  which  both  gov- 
ernments are  committed. 

At  present  the  Commission  is  studying  the  re- 
plies of  the  two  governments  and  will  decide  its 
future  plans  after  considering  all  relevant  factors. 

Atomic  Energy  Commission 

Following  United  States,  United  Kingdom, 
French,  and  Chinese  arguments  that  continued  dis- 
cussion of  previously  rejected  Soviet  proposals  for 
simultaneous  conventions  on  prohibition  and  con- 
trol of  atomic  energy  would  be  futile,  U.  S.  S.  R. 
Delegate  Malik  told  the  working  committee  of 
the  Atomic  Energy  Commission  that  the  majority 

750 


sliould  present  new  proposals  which  might  form 
tile  ba.«is  for  common  agreement.  A  request  by 
the  Ukraine  delegate  for  additional  time  to  pre- 
pare a  statement  prevented  the  Committee  from 
completing  action  on  a  Chinese  resolution  to  con- 
clude further  discussion  on  previously  defeated 
Soviet  proposals,  and  debate  was  resumed  on  the 
1948  General  Assembly  resolution  instructing  the 
Atomic  Energy  Commission  to  resume  its  study  of 
"practicable  and  useful"  subjects. 

United  States  Delegate  Frederick  H.  Osborn 
contended  that  the  U.  S.  S.  R.  plan  would  have 
countries  of  good  faith  destroy  their  weapons  be- 
fore the  control  organ  could  determine  whether 
weapons  had  been  destroyed  in  states  which  had 
no  such  high  motives.  Mr.  Malik  repeated  previ- 
ous Soviet  attitudes  on  the  atomic  energj'  question 
and  charged  the  United  States  with  a  lack  of  de- 
sire for  any  convention  to  prohibit  the  manufac- 
ture and  use  of  atomic  arms. 

Mr.  Osborn  replied  to  three  questions  posed  by 
Mr.  Malik  in  the  discussion  of  the  1948  General 
Assembly  resolution.  The  United  States  was  not 
willing  to  have  prohibition  of  atomic  weapons  go 
into  effect  prior  to  the  establishment  of  an  effective 
control  system,  Mr.  Osborn  asserted.  He  reaf- 
firmed US  support  of  the  General  Assembly  ap- 
proved majority  plan.  To  a  second  query  Mr. 
Osborn  replied  that  the  United  States  a^eed  to 
control  by  an  international  agency  over  all  stages 
of  production.  He  felt  that  if  Mr.  Malik  mis- 
understood this  aspect  of  the  plan,  "The  Soviet 
Delegate  should  point  out  the  paragraphs  of  the 
approved  plan  from  which  he  draws  other  con- 
clusions." 

In  reply  to  Mr.  Malik's  third  question  Mr. 
Osborn  recalled  that  several  delegations  had  par- 
ticipated in  preparing  the  recommendations  even- 
tually approved  by  the  Assembly  and  it  would  be 
impossible  to  call  this  plan  "an  atomic  super-trust" 
controlled  by  the  United  States,  since  provision 
for  the  rights  of  nations  had  been  placed  in  the 
projected  treaty,  thus  reduciiig  the  control  organ's 
power.  Neither  the  United  States  nor  any  other 
nation  could  accept  the  inadequate  control  system 
proposed  by  the  USSR,  which  would  enable  na- 
tions to  control  the  production  of  nuclear  fuels. 
Mr.  Osborn  concluded  that  "such  a  system  would 
never  remove  the  fear  and  mistrust  which  consti- 
tute a  threat  to  peace." 

Trade  Negotiations 

The  Contracting  Parties  to  the  General  Agree- 
ment on  Tariffs  and  Trade  (Gatt),  meeting  at 
Annecy,  France,  since  April  11.  agreed  that  tariff 

Deparfment  of  State  Bulletin 


negotiations  would  have  to  be  prolonged  until  the 
end  of  July  and  perhaps  into  August.  Agree- 
ments are  under  consideration  by  34  nations,  the 
23  original  contracting  parties  to  the  Gatt  plus 
11  acceding  governments. 

The  contracting  parties,  resuming  their  debate 
on  a  Czechoslovak  complaint  against  the  United 
States  export-license  system,  rejected  the  charge 
made  by  Czechoslovakia.  Only  Czechoslovakia 
cast  a  ballot  supporting  the  charge  in  a  roll  call 
vote.  The  two  main  points  of  the  debate  were :  Is 
tlie  United  States  contravening  the  most-favored- 
nation  treatment  clause  of  the  Gatt?  and  What  is 
the  scope  of  the  Gatt  article,  which  allows  excep- 
tions to  most-favored-nation  treatment  for  reasons 
of  national  security  ?  The  chairman  ruled^  that 
the  only  question  was  "whether  the  United  States 
has  failed  to  carry  out  its  Gatt  obligations  in 
administering  the  export  license  system." 

Commission  on  Human  Rights 

Continuing  debate  on  the  draft  International 
Covenant  of  Human  Rights  and  measures  of  im- 
plementation at  nine  meeting  during  the  week, 
the  Commission  on  Human  Rights  adopted  five 
additional  articles  and  postponed  further  discus- 
sion of  implementation  measures  after  rejecting 
by  identical  tie  votes  both  the  proposition  that  pro- 
vision should  be  made  for  individual  and  group 
petitions  and  the  proposition  that  such  provision 
should  not  be  included. 

The  approved  articles  pertain  to  the  right  of 
everyone  to  recognition  everywhere  as  a  person 
before  the  law ;  the  right  to  freedom  of  religion ; 
the  right  to  freedom  of  peaceful  assembly;  and 
the  right  to  freedom  of  association  with  others. 
On  the  basis  of  a  proposal  by  Mrs.  Roosevelt,  U.  S. 
Representative  and  Chairman,  the  Commission 
postponed  action  on  the  article  relative  to  freedom 
of  information  pending  completion  of  the  con- 
vention now  being  considered  by  the  Subcommis- 
sion  on  Freedom  of  Information. 

The  Commission  by  a  vote  of  twelve  to  two 
(U.S.S.R.,  Ukraine),'  with  France  abstaining, 
tentatively  concluded  that  the  right  to  enter  com- 
plaints with  respect  to  human  rights  violations 
would  be  open  to  signatory  states.  Debate  then 
shifted  to  the  question  of  extending  this  right  to 
individual  groups  and  organizations,  and  opinions 
of  the  members  were  divided  into  three  groups: 
(1)  those  who  urged  that  the  United  Nations 
should  recognize  the  right  of  individuals  to  file 
complaints  on  violations  of  human  rights  (Aus- 
tralia, Denmark,  France,  Guatemala,  India,  and 
Lebanon)  ;  (2)  a  group  who  felt  that  in  the  initial 
stages  the  right  to  petition  the  United  Nations 
should  be  accorded  only  to  States  (China,  Egypt, 
Iran,  Philippines,  the  United  Kingdom,  and  the 
United  States)  ;  and  (3)  the  third  view  expressed 
by  U.S.S.R.  and  Ukrainian  representatives  that 
the  United  Nations  should  under  no  circumstances 
accord  the  right  of  petition  to  individuals. 


Mrs.  Roosevelt  said  that  the  Commission  was 
devising  an  entirely  new  machinery  for  imple- 
mentation of  human  rights  and  that  access  to  this 
machinery  should,  as  a  first  step,  be  confined  to 
governments.  If  this  machinery  was  to  be  over- 
whelmed at  the  very  beginning  by  an  unreason- 
ably large  number  of  petitions,  it  would  prove 
unworkable.  The  Commission,  Mrs.  Roosevelt 
said,  should  first  set  up  a  provisional  system,  ac- 
knowledge frankly  that  this  was  as  yet  incomplete, 
and  move  on  later  to  perfect  it. 

Subcommission  on  Freedom  of  Information 

The  subcommission  on  Freedom  of  Information 
and  of  the  Press  adopted  a  fifteen-item  "program 
of  work  and  priorities  for  the  three-year  period  of 
life  of  the  subcommission"  and  took  action  on 
several  items. 

In  consideration  of  means  by  which  the  Sub- 
commission  might  receive  information  concerning 
current  legislation  and  practices  in  the  field  of  its 
competence,  the  subcommission  called  on  govern- 
ments to  complete  the  questionnaires  sent  to  them 
by  the  Secretariat  and  recommended  that  the 
Secretary-General  be  authorized  to  request  govern- 
ments to  submit  lists  of  nongovernmental  organi- 
zations from  which  national  press-freedom 
information  might  be  obtained,  to  obtain  informa- 
tion from  them  and  from  other  nongovernmental 
organizations  as  the  Subcommission  may  decide. 

The  Subcommission  voted  to  receive  and  discuss 
complaints  or  criticism  against  states  regarding 
their  information  principles  or  practices.  Com- 
plaints may  be  made  by  "any  legally  constituted 
national  or  international  press,  infoniiation, 
broadcasting  or  newsreel  enterprise  or  association" 
or  from  "any  member  of  a  professional  organiza- 
tion ...  or  any  other  legally  constituted 
body"  with  competence  in  this  field.  Anonymous 
complaints  wiU  not  be  rece-ived,  but  individuals 
who  send  in  complaints  may  be  protected  from 
public  disclosure  of  their  identity  if  they  so 
request. 
International  Labor  Organization 

A  twelve-point  agenda  has  been  prepared  for 
the  Thirty-second  Session  of  the  General  Confer- 
ence of  the  International  Labor  Organization 
(Ilo),  which  opened  in  Geneva,  June  8.  Repre- 
sentatives of  the  governments,  workers,  and  em- 
ployers of  most  of  Ilo's  61  member  countries  are 
attending  this  meeting.  Ilo's  Governing  Body 
began  its  conference  also  in  Geneva  on  June  3. 

Among  the  subjects  which  the  General  Confer- 
ence will  consider  are  adoption  of  two  conventions 
to  aid  migrant  workers,  vocational  guidance  stand- 
ards, revision  of  working  standards  on  shipboard, 
revision  of  the  1933  convention,  which  sought  to 
abolish  fee-charging  employment  agencies  con- 
ducted with  a  view  to  profit  and  to  regulate  the 
operation  of  those  not  conducted  for  profit,  and 
application  of  the  principles  of  the  right  to  or- 
ganize and  to  bargain  collectively. 


June   12,  7949 


INTERNATIONAL  ORGANIZATIONS  AND  CONFERENCES 


The  Atmosphere  of  Neighborliness  Between  American  States 


BY  AMBASSADOR  ELLIS  O.  BRIGGS' 


The  International  Labor  Organization  occupies 
an  enviable  position  as  one  of  the  most  experienced 
and  effective  of  international  organizations.  Its 
wisdom  is  nowhere  more  evident  than  in  the  organ- 
ization of  these  regional  conferences,  held  in  rec- 
ognition of  the  fact  that  different  areas  of  the 
world  have  special  interests  in  common  and  have 
special  problems  to  solve.  We  accordingly 
warmly  welcome  the  opportunities  which  this  re- 
gional conference  provides  to  discuss  our  own  af- 
fairs among  our  own  neighbors. 

The  people  of  the  Americas  are  already  ex- 
perienced in  international  cooperation,  and  it  is 
no  disrespect  to  the  excellent  and  mature  Ilo  to 
point  out  that  the  Pan  American  Union  antedates 
it  by  a  full  generation.  Here  in  the  New  World — 
where  so  much  remains  to  be  done — we  have  never- 
theless come  as  near,  I  am  convinced,  as  any  region 
of  the  world  to  answering  that  ancient  exhorta- 
tion, "My  neighbor — let  him  enter  into  my  house 
as  my  friend." 

It  is  eminently  fitting  then  that  this  meeting 
should  take  place  in  the  free  air  of  Uruguay.  Here 
in  Uruguay  we  can,  as  His  Excellency  the  Presi- 
dent pointed  out  in  his  eloquent  opening  address 
last  Monday,  "breathe  the  same  freedom  which  sus- 
tains the  people"  of  this  country.  Later  he  said, 
"Social  justice  without  liberty  for  the  citizens  is  a 
lie,  and  what  is  more  serious,  a  dangerous  lie." 

The  President  spoke  truly.  In  no  part  of  the 
world  is  respect  for  the  dignity  of  the  individual 
more  zealously  cherished  or  more  steadfastly 
guarded,  by  people  and  government  alike,  than  it 
is  in  this  progressive  country,  whose  capital  has 
generously — with  true  "hospitalidad  oriental'" — 
been  placed  at  our  disposal  for  the  duration  of 
this  conference.  Gentlemen,  the  atmosphere  of 
freedom  cannot  be  falsified  or  counterfeited.  The 
presence  of  that  atmosphere  in  Montevideo  augurs 
well  for  the  success  of  our  deliberations. 

We  have  noted  the  growing  interest  of  the  Ilo 
in  the  affairs  of  this  hemisphere.  We  desire  to 
see  the  Ilo  and  the  Organization  of  American 
States,  successor  to  the  Pan  American  Union, 
work   closely    and    harmoniously    together.     We 


'Address  delivered  Apr.  29,  1949,  at  the  Fourth  Con- 
ference of  American  States  Members  of  the  Ilo,  in  reply 
to  the  report  of  the  Director  General.  Ambassador 
Briggs  served  as  U.S.  delegate  to  the  Conference. 

752 


would  suggest  therefore  that  the  Governing  Body 
maintain  contact  with  the  Director  General  of 
the  Organization  of  American  States,  with  the 
object  of  concluding  a  draft  agreement  defining 
our  relationship.  This  draft  should  be  submitted 
for  discussion  and  action  to  the  responsible  organs 
of  the  two  organizations.  Similarly,  we  look  for- 
ward to  an  increasingly  cooperative  relationship 
between  the  Ilo  and  the  various  commissions  and 
committees  affiliated  with  the  Organization  of 
American  States. 

Nations  everywhere  are  going  through  a  period 
of  economic  and  social  readjustment.  Although 
the  war  took  no  toll  in  this  hemisphere  comparable 
to  the  catastrophic  destruction  in  Europe  and 
elsewhere,  the  fabric  of  the  New  World  was 
strained  in  many  directions.  The  durability  of 
that  fabric,  the  work  of  Artigas,  of  Bolivar,  of 
Juarez,  Marti,  0"Higgins,  San  Martin,  Sucre, 
Washington,  and  a  host  of  other  proceres  and 
statesmen  whose  names  are  venerated  from  Tierra 
del  Fuego  to  the  Arctic  Circle,  is  challenged  today 
by  a  destructive  philosophy,  defense  against  which 
is  the  business— the  very  personal  and  vital  busi- 
ness—of every  member' of  this  assembly  and  of 
every  citizen  of  each  and  every  cotm'try  here 
represented. 

It  is  a  time  for  courage  and  for  resolute  action 
following  calm  and  careful  deliberation.  It  is 
only  when  we  can  detach  ourselves  and  contem- 
plate the  basic  issues  that  we  can  appreciate  the 
long  road  which  the  peoples  of  America  have 
traveled  already  as  friends  and  neighbors.  It  is 
only  true  that  we  can  map  the  terrain  that  lies 
ahead. 

The  rate  at  which  we  progress  across  this  new 
terrain  will  be  largely  determined  by  the  political 
and  economic  climate  in  which  we  live,  and  by  our 
success  in  completing  some  of  the  readjustments 
which  inevitably  follow  in  the  wake  of  devastat- 
ing war.  In  my  own  country  a  postwar  readjust- 
ment is  in  progress.  Although  nearly  60  million 
people  are  employed  in  industry  and  agriculture, 
some  of  our  workers  are  experiencing  periods  of 
unemployment  as  markets  become  adjusted  to 
postwar  levels  of  demand.  At  present  the  number 
of  unemploj'ed  in  the  United  States  is  relatively 
low — about  5  percent  of  the  labor  force.  Still, 
our  factories  and  mines  are  producing  at  a  rate 
only  slightly  below  the  latter  part  of  1948.  Last 
3'ear  we  had  an  extraordinarily  bountiful  harvest, 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


both  of  wheat  and  feed  grains.  With  this  con- 
tinued volume,  prices  are  declining  somewhat,  and 
already  agricultural  products  have  fallen  almost 
15  percent  from  the  extraordinarily  high  levels 
which  they  reached  in  late  1947  and  early  1948, 
after  the  failure  of  the  corn  crop  in  the  United 
States  and  the  small  grain  crops  in  Europe. 

The  Director  General  and  the  staff  have  given 
this  conference  a  most  comprehensive  and  enlight- 
ening report  upon  which  to  base  our  discussions. 
In  our  view,  the  keynotes  of  that  report  are  the 
progress  of  economic  development  and  the  social 
programs  with  which  it  should  be  accompanied  if 
we  are  to  avoid  many  of  the  hardships,  for  in- 
dustry and  labor  alike,  that  other  countries  have 
encountered.  The  report  emphasizes  the  funda- 
mental need  for  greater  production  in  agi-iculture 
as  well  as  in  industry.  It  suggests  policies  for 
the  recruitment  and  training  of  labor  and  for  the 
safeguards  essential  thereto:  regulation  of  hours 
of  work,  industrial  hygiene,  the  establishment  of 
minimum  wages,  avoidance  of  exploitation  of 
women  and  young  workers,  and  measures  for  social 
insurance. 

In  connection  with  this  report  I  invite  your 
attention  particularly  to  the  problems  incident  to 
future  economic  development.  This  is  a  subject 
in  which  the  Government  of  the  United  States  is 
profoundly  interested.  It  is  not  long — it  is  only 
a  moment  in  terms  of  history — since  my  country 
itself  was  one  vast  frontier.  From  our  own  experi- 
ence over  the  past  century  and  a  half,  we  have 
learned  something  of  the  development  of  natural 
resources,  of  maintaining  and  increasing  the  capac- 
ity of  the  land,  of  industrial  specialization,  and  of 
the  technique  of  bringing  these  about  under  a 
system  of  free  labor  and  free  enterprise.  We  have 
learned— and  God  grant  that  the  lesson  may  never 
be  forgotten— that  no  progress  is  valid  or  is  long 
sustained  except  in  an  atmosphere  of  individual 
freedom  under  law. 

It  is  moreover  our  belief  that  the  solution  of 
many  of  the  world's  material  problems  lies  in  the 
use  of  advanced  technology  in  industry,  in  agri- 
culture, and  in  transportation. 

With  this  in  mind  the  President  of  the  United 
States,  in  his  inaugural  address  of  January  20  of 
this  year,  proposed  that  the  American  people 
should  support  a  broad  progi-am  of  technical  col- 
laboration, to  be  carried  out  through  appropriate 
international  agencies. 

President  Truman  said : 

".  .  .  we  must  embark  on  a  bold  new  program 
for  making  the  benefits  of  our  scientific  advances 
and  industrial  progress  available  for  the  improve- 
ment and  growth  of  underdeveloped  areas. 

".  .  .  The  material  resources  which  we  can  af- 
ford to  use  for  the  assistance  of  other  peoples  are 
limited.  But  our  imponderable  resources  in  tech- 
nical knowledge  are  constantly  growing  and  are 
inexhaustible. 

June    12,   1949 

839962—49 3 


"Our  aim  should  be  to  help  the  free  peo- 
ples of  the  world,  through  their  own  efforts,  to 
produce  more  food,  more  clothing,  more  materials 
for  housing,  and  more  mechanical  power  to  lighten 
their  burdens. 

"We  invite  other  countries  to  pool  their  techno- 
logical resources  in  this  undertaking.  ,  .  .  This 
should  be  a  cooperative  enterprise.  ...  It  must 
be  a  world-wide  effort  for  the  achievement  of 
peace,  plenty,  and  freedom." 

This  problem  is  so  vast  that  its  solution  requires 
that  all  nations  contribute.  It  is  a  type  of  co- 
operation by  whicli  areas  not  hitherto  developed 
can  be  aided  through  the  efforts  of  their  friends 
and  their  neighboi-s.  It  is  long  range  in  charac- 
ter. It  is  a  program  reciprocal  in  nature.  It  is 
a  program  the  operational  details  of  which  will 
vary  from  country  to  country,  and  from  zone  to 
zone  within  countries,  depending  upon  resources, 
governments,  citizens,  and,  above  all,  the  will  re- 
ciprocally to  collaborate.  Some  countries  will  de- 
velop along  lines  different  from  others,  depending 
on  geography,  climate,  resources,  and  the  avail- 
ability of  raw  materials.  Not  all  will  industrial- 
ize or  industrialize  to  the  same  degree.  Not  all 
should  do  so. 

Since  many  international  organizations — in- 
cluding the  Ilo — have  long  had  programs  touch- 
ing this  matter,  it  would  appear  profitable  to 
expand  these  existing  programs.  Accordingly,  at 
the  suggestion  of  the  United  States  representative, 
the  Economic  and  Social  Council  has  requested 
that  the  Secretary-General  of  the  United  Nations 
prepare  a  concrete  program  for  enlarging  United 
Nations  activities  in  the  field  of  technical  assist- 
ance for  economic  development.  This  program  is 
now  in  preparation  for  consideration  of  the  ninth 
session  of  the  Council  to  be  held  in  Geneva  on 
July  5  next. 

Clearly,  among  the  international  agencies,  the 
Ilo  can  play  an  imjiortant  role  in  this  expanded 
program,  because  of  the  importance  of  manpower 
in  any  economic  development,  and  further,  the 
importance  of  so  directing  that  development  that 
social  standards  may  be  safeguarded  while  living 
standards  are  being  raised.  In  particular,  in 
problems  of  manpower,  recruitment,  training,  re- 
location, and  the  standards  under  which  men  work, 
the  Ilo  can  provide  stimulating  leadership  and 
wise  guidance. 

The  tripartite  character  of  the  Ilo  gives  it 
special  advantages.  Here  today  are  men  who  have 
themselves  had  experience  in  establishing  and  op- 
erating industries.  Here  today  are  men  who  as 
individuals  have  done  the  work  in  those  plants 
with  their  own  hands.  The  members  of  this  tri- 
partite body  perhaps  know  better  than  any  other 
international  body  what  it  means  in  human 
terms — to  start  a  new  industry,  to  train  new 
workers,  to  provide  the  social  safeguards  that  must 
accompany  these  new  developments  if  they  are  to 
prosper. 


It  is  our  hope  therefore  that  the  Ilo  may  ex- 
tend its  leadership  by  rapid  and  vigorous  action 
within  that  part  of  the  progi-am  for  economic  de- 
velopment which  relates  to  labor  and  its  func- 
tions within  agriculture  and  industry.  This  is, 
in  fact,  nothing  new  for  the  Ilo.  It  is  an  exten- 
sion, an  expansion,  of  an  existing  program. 

There  are  many  fields  in  which,  in  our  estima- 
tion, active  programs  can  be  undertaken  without 
delay.  In  fact,  the  Director  General,  in  the  pref- 
ace to  his  report  to  the  conference,  has  listed  an 
impressive  number.  But  since  the  funds  of  the 
Ilo  are  limited  and  the  staff  equipped  by  job  ex- 
perience to  engage  in  many  of  these  programs  not 
immediately  available,  it  may  be  prudent  for  us 
to  consider  the  selection  of  two  or  three  fields  of 
interest  that  should  have  primacy  in  the  initial 
stagas  of  the  progi'am.  Take  for  example,  pro- 
grams for  training.  We  surely  all  agree  that  man- 
power is  fundamental  to  economic  development; 
that  the  training  of  manpower  in  the  use  of  new 
techniques — whether  on  the  farm,  in  the  factory, 
or  in  the  mine — is  basic.  After  tlie  completion  of 
the  special  survey  of  training  needs  in  this  region, 
the  Governing  Board  may  wish  to  formulate  a 
series  of  specific  training  programs,  each  differ- 
ing from  country  to  country,  from  project  to  proj- 
ect, and  also  it  need  hardly  be  emphasized,  each 
drafted  in  cooperation  with  each  separate  country 
concerned.  I  am  confident  that  the  International 
Labor  Office,  with  its  rich  background  of  technical 
knowledge  and  with  leaders  in  industry  and  labor 
throughout  the  hemisphere  already  attending  this 
conference,  can  command  the  personnel  needed  to 
embark  on  such  a  program. 

There  are  doubtless  other  areas  within  the  com- 
petence of  the  Ilo  in  which  action  is  feasible  and 
is  urgently  needed.  Training  programs  are  cited 
merely  for  illustration. 

One  great  advantage  of  the  Ilo  in  such  a  pro- 
gram is  that  it  can  help  assure  the  maintenance  of 
high  standards  for  workei-s.  Take  one  example: 
industrialization  draws  women  into  paid  employ- 
ment. Countries  in  process  of  industrial  develop- 
ment can  see  to  it  that  women  newly  recruited  into 
industry  be  not  only  well-trained,  but  that  they 
have  satisfactory  working  conditions,  decent  min- 
imum wages,  and  fair  hours.  The  program  can 
thus  contribute  to  avoiding  the  exploitation  of 
women,  which  characterized  the  industrial  revolu- 
tion in  many  other  areas. 

As  the  program  goes  forward,  it  will  also  be 
evident  that  much  can  be  gained  from  exchange 
of  personnel,  even  by  countries  in  which  a  rela- 
tively high  degree  of  development  has  already 
taken  place.  For  instance,  part  of  the  European 
Recovery  Program  involves  furnishing  technical 
assistance  and  expert  service.  EflForts  are  also  be- 
ing made  to  stimulate  the  exchange  of  technical 
assistance  among  participating  countries,  and  be- 
tween them  and  international  agencies. 


Among  the  American  States,  there  has,  of 
course,  long  been  an  interchange  of  experts  in 
many  fields,  in  which  labor  has  been  prominent. 
My  country  has  participated  in  a  wide  range  of 
projects.  An  Interdepartmental  Conunittee  on 
Scientific  and  Cultural  Cooperation  was  estab- 
lished in  Washington  on  the  initiative  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  10  years  ago,  and  it  now  co- 
ordinates the  activities  of  25  departments  and 
agencies  of  my  government,  which  carry  on  co- 
o[)erative  international  technical  projects,  ex- 
change of  persons,  and  personnel  training.  Our 
Department  of  Labor  is  one  of  these  agencies. 
Only  .3  weeks  ago  the  Secretary  of  Labor  greeted 
21  government  officials  and  representatives  from 
1.']  other  American  countries  who  came  to  Wash- 
ington for  in-service  training  programs  in  labor 
law  administration  and  industrial  safety,  statis- 
tical methods  and  techniques,  and  methods  of  im- 
proving working  conditions  and  employment  op- 
portunities for  women.  Furthermore  in  the  past 
3'ear  a  number  of  represent^itives  from  that  De- 
l)artmcnt  have  gone  to  Latin  America  to  consult 
and  work  with  officials  of  other  governments  on 
similar  programs  in  the  labor  field. 

Through  the  Institute  of  Inter- American  Af- 
fairs, which  administers  programs  in  public  health, 
agriculture,  and  education,  formal  agreements 
have  for  several  years  been  negotiated  covering 
projects  to  be  undertaken  by  special  agencies  form- 
ing an  integral  part  of  the  governments  concerned, 
and  in  which  technicians  who  are  citizens  of  each 
country  collaborate  to  cany  out  the  program. 
Here  in  Uruguay  there  is  such  an  agreement  for 
cooperative  work  on  public  health.  The  recent 
joint  Brazil-United  States  Technical  Commission 
is  another  example. 

Since  the  days  of  Columbus,  Cortes,  and  Pizarro, 
it  has  always  been  characteristic  of  the  Americas 
that  they  presented  new  frontiers  to  the  world.  In 
Latin  America  today  your  frontiers  are  both  ge- 
ographic and  social.  They  include  the  undevel- 
oped lands,  the  vast  plains,  the  wind-driven  Cor- 
dillera, and  all  the  resources  still  locked  in  the 
breast  of  the  continent.  There  are  mountains  to 
conquer,  plains  to  cross,  treasures  to  discover.  But 
there  are  also  social  frontiers,  and  they  are  no  less 
cliallenging.  It  is  our  purpose,  working  together 
at  this  conference,  to  try  to  find  wa3's  to  advance 
our  economic  and  social  frontiers  simultaneously, 
both  through  helping  to  promote  the  evolution  of 
areas  not  fully  developed  and  through  enhancing 
the  welfare  and  efficiency  of  the  people  themselves. 
These  objectives  we  believe  we  can  best  accomplish 
through  the  help  and  joint  leadership  of  free  in- 
dustry, free  labor,  and  free  enterprise,  working 
with  governments  under  the  international  stand- 
aids  established  for  us  all  by  this  long-experienced 
tripartite  organization. 

The  Director  General  has  well  declared  that  this 
is  the  time  to  act.  The  delegation  of  the  United 
States  is  in  wholehearted  agreement. 


Deparfmenf  of  State   Bulletin 


THE  RECORD  OF  THE  WEEK 


U.S.  Notes  to  Bulgaria,  Hungary^  and  Rumania  Invoke  Peace  Treaty  Clauses 
To  Settle  Disputes  on  Violating  Human  Freedoms 


[Released  to  the  press  June  1] 

The  United  States  Government,  on  April  2, 
1949,  formally  charged  the  Governments  of  Bul- 
garia, Hungary,  and  Rumania  with  violation  of 
the  respective  clauses  of  the  peace  treaties  obli- 
gating them  to  protect  the  human  rights  and  fun- 
damental freedoms  of  their  peoples.^  Havin^^  re- 
ceived unsatisfactory  replies  from  the  three  Gov- 
ernments, the  United  States  Government  in- 
formed them  on  May  31,  1949,  that  disputes  have 
arisen  concerning  the  interpretation  and  execu- 
tion of  the  respective  peace  treaties.  In  notes  de- 
livered by  the  American  Legations  in  Sofia,  Buda- 
pest, and  Bucharest,  the  United  States  invoked 
the  relevant  treaty  articles  providing  for  the  set- 
tlement of  such  disputes.  The  American  Chiefs 
of  Mission  in  the  three  capitals  have  requested 
their  British  and  Soviet  colleagues  to  meet  with 
them  to  consider  the  disputes  in  accordance  with 
the  procedure  specified  in  those  articles  (article  36 
of  the  Bulgarian  treaty,  article  40  of  the  Hunga- 
rian treaty,  and  article  38  of  the  Eumanian 
treaty). 

Similar  action  has  been  taken  by  the  British 
Government.  The  Govermnents  of  Canada,  Aus- 
tralia, and  New  Zealand  have  associated  them- 
selves with  the  British  notes. 

The  texts  of  the  Bulgarian,  Hungarian,  and  Ru- 
manian replies  to  the  United  States  notes  of  April 
2,  1949,  together  with  the  texts  of  the  United 
States  notes  delivered  on  May  31,  are  given  below.' 
Copies  of  these  documents  have  been  made  avail- 
able to  all  signatories  of  the  peace  treaties. 


Bulgarian  Note  to  the  United  States 

April  m,  1949 

[Unofficial  translation] 

The  Ministi-y  of  Foreign  Affairs  of  the  People's 
Republic  of  Bulgaria  has  the  honor  to  inform  the 
Legation  of  the  United  States  that  it  has  taken 
cognizance  of  the  tenor  of  the  Legation's  Note 
No.  130. 

The  Government  of  the  People's  Republic  of 
Bulgaria  has  always  carried  out  and  will  carry 
out  in  a  most  conscientious  manner  the  clauses  of 
the  Peace  Treaty  and  this  not  only  because  this 


Government  is  signatory  to  the  said  Treaty,  but 
also  because  its  policy,  expression  of  the  will  of 
the  overwhelming  majority  of  the  Bulgarian  peo- 
ple, is,  by  its  inherent  nature,  profoundly  demo- 
cratic, and  corresjDonds  fully  to  the  letter  and 
spirit  of  Articles  2,  3,  4,  and  5  of  the  Peace  Treaty. 

1.  Even  before  the  entry  into  force  of  the  Peace 
Treaty,  the  Bulgarian  Government  had  under- 
taken all  measures  dependent  on  it  (its  will)  for 
the  guaranteeing  of  the  fundamental  civil  liber- 
ties as  well  as  the  political  rights  of  Bulgarian 
citizens,  without  distinction  of  race,  nationality, 
sex  or  creed: 

(a)  This  Government  convoked,  on  the  basis  of 
universal,  secret,  equal  and  direct  suffrage,  a 
Grand  National  Assembly  which  elaborated  the 
constitutional  law  of  the  country,  and  this  Con- 
stitution did  not  only  consecrate  in  a  solemn  man- 
ner the  fundamental  rights  and  freedoms  of  Bul- 
garian citizens — rights  and  freedoms  which  are 
subject  matter  of  Article  2  of  the  Peace  Treaty 
but  also  guaranteed  their  effective  exercise. 

(b)  At  the  same  time,  this  Government  took 
the  necessary  measures  for  the  definitive  liquida- 
tion of  the  fascist  regime  and  the  elimination  of 
every  attempt  to  frustrate  the  nation  of  its  demo- 
cratic rights  and  freedoms.  These  measures  of 
the  Goveriunent  were  in  conformance  with  the 
text  itself  of  Article  4  of  the  Treaty,  and  more- 
over, the  new  Bulgarian  Constitution  wliich  came 
into  force  on  December  5,  1947,  guaranteed  to  the 
Bulgarian  people  the  necessary  right  and  power  to 
condemn  to  failure  all  attempts  of  fascist  or  anti- 
democratic restoration  in  Bulgaria.  In  the  pres- 
ence of  such  well-known  facts,  it  is  strange  that 
the  Government  of  the  United  States  could  formu- 
late against  Bulgaria  accusations  of  non-observ- 
ance and  violation  of  the  political  clauses  of  the 
Peace  Treaty,  and  of  Article  2  of  the  said  Treaty 
in  particular. 

2.  Similarly,  it  is  surprising  that  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  United  States  has  deemed  it  necessary 
to  support  its  accusations  of  the  Peace  Treaty  in 
force  since  September  15,  1947  by  evoking  facts 
going  back  to  the  Armistice  period,  at  a  time  when 
the  three  great  Powei-s  disposed  of  measures  to  ex- 

'  BmLETm  of  Apr.  10,  1949,  p.  450. 
'  Printed  from  telegraphic  text. 


June   12,   7949 


ercise  a  wide  control  over  the  administration  of 
the  country. 

3.  On  the  other  hand,  the  note  of  the  United 
States  Government  rehites  to  certain  facts  and  acts 
of  the  Bulgarian  Government,  such  as  trials,  etc., 
which  have  taken  place  after  the  entry  into  force 
of  the  Peace  Treaty.  The  Bulgarian  Government 
having  taken  all  measures  to  ensure  the  compliance 
with  all  the  political  clauses  of  the  Peace  Treaty, 
and  notably  after  Bulgaria  had  been  granted  the 
most  democratic  Constitution  in  the  world,  and  the 
people  had  been  guaranteed  legal  power  to  exer- 
cise and  defend  its  rights  and  freedoms,  the  Bul- 
garian Government,  as  government  of  a  sovereign 
state,  cannot  agree  to  permit  other  states  the  ap- 
preciation of  its  acts,  for  which  it  is  solely  respon- 
sible to  the  National  Assembly.  This  Government 
can  even  less  agi'ee  to  suffer  the  criticism  of  foreign 
powers,  in  so  far  as  the  activities  of  Bulgarian 
courts  are  concerned,  being  (in  existence)  by  vir- 
tue of  the  Constitution  and  functioning  in  public 
in  accordance  with  the  most  modern  and  most 
democratic  of  laws. 

The  Bulgarian  Government  will  repel  every 
attempt  of  interference  in  the  domestic  affairs  of 
Bulgaria  and  will  consider  as  an  unfriendly  act  any 
attempt  to  force  it  to  accept  treatment  as  a  state 
whose  internal  acts  would  be  subject  to  judgment 
by  foreign  powers. 

4.  As  regards  the  essence  of  the  accusations  for- 
mulated in  the  note  of  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment, the  Bulgarian  Government,  without  wishing 
to  discuss  their  compass,  rejects  them  energetically. 
Under  the  regime  of  people's  democracy  in  Bul- 
garia, the  toiling  masses  of  towns  and  villages 
which  constitute  the  immense  majority  of  the  na- 
tion, enjoy  not  only  on  paper  but  also  in  fact  all 
fundamental  political  rights  and  freedoms  of  man. 
Restrictions  on  the  exercise  of  the  freedom  of 
meeting  or  of  association,  of  the  freedom  of  speech 
or  of  press,  do  not  exist  and  are  not  applied  in 
Bulgaria  excepting  in  the  cases  provided  by  the 
laws  against  infringers  and  in  the  interest  itself 
of  public  security,  maintenance  of  order,  and  pub- 
lic morals  of  the  people. 

In  conclusion,  the  Government  of  the  People's 
Republic  of  Bulgaria  considers  the  note  of  the 
Honorable  Legation  of  the  United  States  as  un- 
founded, and  its  tenor,  rendered  public  by  the 
United  States  Government  immediately  after  it 
had  been  delivered  and  long  before  the  ])resi'nt 
reply,  as  unfriendly  propaganda,  incompatible 
with  the  principles  of  international  law,  and  of  a 
nature  to  encourage  the  pro-fascist  and  hostile 
elements  in  the  country. 

The  Ministry  of  Foreign  Affairs  of  the  People's 
Republic  of  Bulgaria  avails  itself  of  this  oppor- 
tunity to  reiterate  to  the  Honorable  Legation  of 
the  United  States  the  assurance  of  its  high 
consideration. 


United  States  Note  to  Bulgaria 

May  31,  WJfi 

The  Legation  of  the  United  States  of  America 
presents  its  compliments  to  the  Ministry  of  For- 
eign Affairs  of  Bulgaria  and,  acting  under  the 
instructions  of  the  United  States  Government,  has 
the  honor  to  reply  to  the  Ministry's  note  of  April 
21, 1919  concerning  the  question  of  Bulgaria's  com- 
pliance with  the  obligations  of  Article  2  of  the 
Treaty  of  Peace. 

The  United  States  Government,  taking  note  of 
the  Bulgarian  Government's  rejection  of  the  state- 
ments made  in  the  Legation's  note  of  April  •_'. 
1949,  concerning  Bulgaria's  disregard  of  its  obli- 
gations under  Article  2,  finds  it  necessary  to  place 
on  record  its  view  that  the  Bulgarian  Government 
has  not  given  a  satisfactory  reply  to  the  specific 
charges  set  forth  in  the  Legation's  "note.  The  Bul- 
garian Government  has  also  failed  to  furnish  tlie 
United  States  Government  with  the  requested  in- 
formation as  to  measures  which  the  Bulgarian 
Government  is  prepared  to  adopt  in  order  to 
remedy  the  situation  caused  by  the  violation  of 
its  obligations  under  Article  2  "and  to  implement 
fully  the  terms  of  that  Article.  The  remainiiiL' 
portions  of  the  Bulgarian  Government's  note  of 
April  21  consist  of  allegations  against  the  United 
States  which  are  demonstrably  false  and  irrelevant 
to  the  matter  at  hand. 

The  United  States  Government  accordingly 
considers  that  a  dispute  has  arisen  concerning  the 
interpretation  and  execution  of  the  Treat"y  of 
Peace  which  the  Bulgarian  Government  has  shown 
no  disposition  to  join  in  settling  by  direct  diplo- 
matic negotiations. 

The  American  Minister  has  therefore  been  in- 
structed by  his  Government  to  refer  the  dispute  to 
his  British  and  Soviet  colleagues  for  consideration 
jointly  with  himself  in  accordance  with  the  pro- 
visions of  Article  36  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace. 
Copies  of  his  letters  to  the  Ambassador  of  the 
Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics  and  to  the 
British  Minister  inviting  them  to  meet  for  this 
purpose  are  enclosed. 

Hungarian  Note  to  the  United  States 

ApriI8,194d 

[Dnofflclal  translation] 

The  Hungarian  Ministry  of  Foreign  Affairs  has 
received  the  official  note  No.  360  of  the  Budapest 
Legation  of  the  United  States,  dated  April  2,  and 
has  the  honor  to  give  the  following  answer. 

The  Government  of  the  United  States  accuses 
the  Goverimient  of  Hungary  of  violation  of  the 
Treaty  of  Peace  referring,  first  of  all,  to  Article 
2,  paragraph  1,  which  obliges  Hungar}'  to  secure 
"to  all  persons  under  Hungarian  jurisdiction, 
without  distinction  as  to  race,  sex,  language  or  re- 
ligion, the  enjoyment  of  human  rights  and  of  the 
fundamental  freedoms."     It  is  well  known  that, 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


concerning  the  free  enjoyment  of  human  rights, 
the  Republic  of  Hungary,  well  before  the  con- 
clusion of  the  Ti'eaty  of  Peace,  abolished  all  dis- 
criminations as  to  race,  sex,  language  and  religion 
which  existed  under  Horthy  regime.  Thus,  the 
Government  of  Hungary  has  fully  comi^lied  with 
the  provisions  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace.  The  Gov- 
ernment of  Hungary  wishes  to  point  out  that  it  is 
the  Government  of  the  United  States  that  launches 
the  above  reproaches  against  the  Government  of 
Hungary,  whereas  it  is  notorious  that  in  the 
United  States  serious  discrimination  exists  be- 
tween citizens  of  different  race  and  color  and  that, 
by  far,  not  every  person  can  equally  enjoy  human 
rights. 

Further  on  the  Government  of  the  United  States 
refers  to  Article  2,  paragraph  2,  of  the  Treaty  of 
Peace,  which,  among  other,  obliges  Hungary  not 
to  discriminate  by  her  laws  between  Hungarian 
citizens  interfei-ence  to  "their  persons,  property, 
business,  professional  or  financial  interests",  et 
cetera.  The  Government  of  Hungary  categori- 
cally protests  such  an  interpretation  of  this  Ar- 
ticle of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  which  would  dispute 
the  legality  of  measures  taken  by  this  Government 
by  which  it  has  passed  the  large  estates  into  the 
hands  of  the  people  and  declared  common  prop- 
erty the  capitalist  monopolies.  This  kind  of  in- 
terpretation of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  equals  the 
defense  of  medieval  latif undia,  capitalist  monopo- 
lies and  their  owners  who  were  principal  sup- 
porters of  fascism  in  Hungary  and  at  same  time 
Hitler's  most  ardent  henchmen  in  the  war  against 
the  Allied  and  Associated  Powers  and  thus  against 
the  United  States.  Consequently,  the  above  in- 
terpretation of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  does  not  only 
mean  defense  of  large  estates  and  capitalist 
monopolies,  but  also  means  that  the  Government 
of  the  United  States  wishes  to  help  the  adherents 
of  the  reactionary  and  fascist  regime  who  were  in 
power  in  Hungary  and  to  hamper  the  successful 
democratic  transformation  of  country. 

-  The  Government  of  Hungary  calls  the  attention 
of  the  Government  of  the  United  States  to  Article 
4  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  which  explicitly  obliges 
Hungary  not  only  to  dissolve  the  fascist  organiza- 
tions but  also  not  to  allow  "the  existence  and 
activities  or  organizations  of  that  nature  which 
have  as  their  aim  denial  to  the  people  of  their 
democratic  rights."  The  Government  of  Hun- 
gary points  out  that  it  has  been  and  is  proceeding 
in  the  sense  of  these  provisions  of  the  Treaty  of 
Peace,  when  dissolving  the  organizations  and  par- 
ties aiming  at  the  restoration  of  the  old  Fascist 
regime  and  when  summoning  to  the  court  those 
who  pursue  an  activity  to  overthrow  the  demo- 
cratic republic.  The  protest  of  the  Government 
of  the  United  States  against  the  measures  taken 
against  fascist  and  anti-democratic  organizations 
by  the  Government  of  Hungary,  when  fulfilling 
the  provisions  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace,  makes  it 


obvious  that  it  does  not  intend  to  ensure  respect 
for  the  Treaty  of  Peace  but  wishes  to  extend  its 
support  to  those  reactionary  and  anti-democratic 
elements  who  would  like  to  restore  the  rule  of  large 
estates  and  the  monopolies  in  Hungary. 

The  Government  of  Hungary  states  that  while 
the  Republic  of  Hungary  has  rigorously  observed 
the  stipulations  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States  repeatedly  violated 
the  provisions  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  with  Hun- 
gary. One  of  the  miliary  officials  of  the  United 
States,  General  L.  D.  Clay,  abrogated  by  a  stroke 
of  the  pen  Article  30  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  which 
stipulates  that  Hungarian  property  taken  to  Ger- 
many should  be  restituted.  As  a  result  of  this 
violation  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace,  Hungarian  prop- 
erty in  the  value  of  several  hundred  million 
forints  got  lost  in  the  American  occupation  zone 
of  Germany.  Contrary  to  the  stipulations  of  the 
Treaty  of  Peace  and  other  international  agree- 
ments, the  Anierican  authorities  several  times  re- 
fused extradition  of  Hungarian  war  criminals 
applied  for  by  Hungary,  on  the  one  hand,  and,  on 
the  other,  they  are  giving  full  and  official  support  to 
the  most  responsible  Hungarian  criminals  of  the 
fascist  war,  such  as  former  Regent  Miklos  Horthy, 
Colonel  General  Ferenc  Kisbarnaky  Farkas,  Lt. 
General  Gusztav  Hennyey,  who  waged  war  with 
the  fascist  methods  also  against  the  United  States 
and  are  still  openly  professing  fascism.  The  sup- 
port systematically  given  by  official  quarters  of 
the  United  States  in  the  last  years  to  conspiratory 
organizations  of  reactionary  Hungarian  politi- 
cians is  also  incompatible  with  the  spirit  of  the 
Treaty  of  Peace.  The  Hungarian  courts  estab- 
lished as  a  fact  that  the  Minister  Plenipotentiary 
of  the  United  States  and  other  United  States  offi- 
cials have  actively  collaborated  with  reactionary 
conspiratory  organizations  aiming  at  the  ovei-- 
throw  of  the  democratic  Republic  of  Hungary, 
recognized  by  the  Treaty  of  Peace,  and  desirous 
of  restoring  the  old  regime  brand-marked  in  the 
Treaty  of  Peace. 

The  Government  of  Hungary  declares  once  more 
that  Hungary  has  fulfilled,  fulfills  and  will  fulfill 
all  obligations  embodied  in  the  Treaty  of  Peace. 
At  same  time,  the  Government  of  Hungary  em- 
phatically protests  the  tendency  of  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  United  States  to  use  the  stipulations 
of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  as  a  pretext  for  illegitimate 
interference  in  the  domestic  affairs  of  the  sover- 
eign Hungarian  state  and  for  supporting  reaction- 
ary and  fascist  forces  opposed  to  the  Government 
of  Hungary.  On  the  basis  of  the  above  exposed 
arguments  the  Hungarian  Government  considers 
the  note  of  the  United  States  an  attempt  at  illegiti- 
mate interference  in  the  domestic  affairs  of  this 
counti-y  and  a  new  phase  in  the  campaign  of  reac- 
tionary incitement  pursued  by  the  imperialist 
quarters  of  the  United  States  in  the  service  of  their 


June   12,   1949 


aims  threntoninp  peace  and  directed  against  the 
Hungarian  people  s  democracy. 

For  these  reasons  Hungary  emphatically  rejects 
the  note  of  the  Government  of  the  United  States. 

United  States  Note  to  Hungary 

May  31,  1949 

The  Legation  of  the  United  States  of  America 
presents  its  compliments  to  the  Ministry  of  For- 
eign Affairs  of  Hungary  and,  acting  under  instruc- 
tions of  the  United  States  Government,  has  the 
honor  to  reply  to  the  Ministry's  note  of  April  8, 
1949,  concerning  the  question  of  Hungary's  com- 
pliance with  the  obligations  of  Article  2  of  the 
Treaty  of  Peace. 

The  United  States  Government,  taking  note  of 
the  Hungarian  Government's  rejection  of  the  state- 
ments made  in  the  Legation's  note  of  April  2, 
1949,  concerning  Hungary's  disregtird  of  its  obli- 
gations under  Article  2,  finds  it  necessary  to  place 
on  record  its  view  that  the  Hungarian  Govern- 
ment has  not  given  a  satisfactory  reply  to  the 
specific  charges  set  forth  in  the  Legation's  note. 
The  Hungarian  Government  has  also  failed  to 
furnish  the  United  States  Government  with  the 
requested  information  as  to  measures  which  the 
Hungarian  Government  is  prepared  to  adopt  in 
order  to  remedy  the  situation  caused  by  the  viola- 
tion of  its  obligations  under  Article  2  and  to  imple- 
ment fully  the  terms  of  that  Article.  The  United 
States  Government  cannot  accept  the  Hungarian 
Goverimient's  contention  that  the  matters  dealt 
with  in  the  United  States  note  are  purely  domestic 
affairs  or  the  contention  that  Hungary  has  com- 
plied with  the  obligations  of  Article  2  of  the  Treaty 
of  Peace  merely  by  the  formal  repeal  of  the  dis- 
criminatory legislation  of  the  Horthy  regime. 
Nor  can  the  United  States  Government  agree  that 
violations  of  Article  2  can  be  excused  by  reference 
to  Hungary's  obligations  under  Article  4  of  the 
Treaty.  Persecution  of  all  political  leaders  and 
parties  not  amenable  to  the  dictates  of  the  minority 
ruling  group  and  denial  of  freedom  of  expression 
cannot  properly  be  justified  under  any  Article  of 
the  Treaty. 

The  remaining  portions  of  the  Hungarian  Gov- 
ernment's note  of  April  8,  including  references  to 
other  Articles  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace,  consist  of 
allegations  against  the  United  States  which  are 
demonstrably  false  and  irrelevant  to  the  matter 
at  hand.  The  United  States  Government  rejects 
categorically  the  unwarranted  accusations  that  it 
has  supported  reaction  and  conspiracies  in  Hun- 
gary, accusations  which  will  not  obscure  the  real 
issues  raised  by  the  United  States  note  of  April  2. 

The  United  States  Government  ac<^ordingly 
considers  that  a  dispute  has  arisen  concerning  the 
interpretation  and  execution  of  the  Treaty  of 
Peace    which    the    Hungarian    Government    has 


shown  no  disposition  to  join  in  settling  by  direct 
diplomatic  negotiations. 

The  American  Minister  has  therefore  been  in- 
structed by  his  Government  to  refer  the  dispute 
to  his  British  and  Soviet  colleagues  for  considera- 
tion jointly  with  himself  in  accordance  with  the 
provisions  of  Article  40  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace. 
Copies  of  his  letters  to  the  Ambassador  of  the 
Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics  and  to  the 
British  Minister  inviting  them  to  meet  for  this 
purpose  are  enclosed. 

Riimanian  Note  to  the  United  States 

April  18,  1949 

[Unofficial  translation] 

The  Ministry  for  Foreign  Affairs  presents  its 
compliments  to  the  Legation  of  the  United  States 
and  has  the  honor  to  transmit  the  following  on 
behalf  of  the  Government  of  the  Rumanian  Peo- 
ple's Republic. 

On  April  2  the  Legation  of  the  United  States 
in  Bucharest  presented  a  note  to  the  Ministry  of 
Foreign  Affairs  of  the  Rumanian  People's  Re- 
public on  behalf  of  the  American  Government  in 
which  as  in  former  notes  certain  affirmations  were 
made  by  the  Government  of  the  United  States  with 
reference  to  violation  by  the  Rumanian  Govern- 
ment of  the  provisions  of  Article  3  of  the  Peace 
Treaty. 

The  Government  of  the  Rumanian  People's  Re- 
public maintains  that  the  context  of  the  note  of 
tlie  United  States  Government  with  reference  to 
the  violation  by  the  Rumanian  Government  of 
human  rights  and  of  fundamental  freedoms  does 
not  correspond  to  reality  and  that  it  repeats  the 
inventions  of  the  slanderous  pi-ess  of  the  imperial- 
ist monopolists. 

In  the  Rumanian  People's  Republic  the  exercise 
of  the  fundamental  freedoms,  freedom  of  as- 
semblj',  of  demonstrations,  of  the  press  and  of 
speech  are  guaranteed  by  the  Constitution  and 
tliese  are  assured  by  making  available  to  those 
who  work  the  means  of  printing,  supply  of  paper 
and  meeting  places. 

Discrimination  because  of  nationality  or  race 
is  })unishable  by  law. 

Religious  organizations  enjoy  freedom  of  wor- 
ship and  are  given  the  places  and  means  necessary 
for  tlie  exercise  of  their  religion. 

Tims  the  laws  of  the  Rumanian  People's  Re- 
public in  fact  guarantee  the  application  of  the 
provisions  of  Article  3  of  the  Peace  Treaty. 

The  Rumanian  Government  declares  that  the 
United  States  Government  has  transgressed  and  is 
transgressing  the  Peace  Treaty  with  Rumania  by 
trying  to  prevent  the  application  of  Article  5  of 
the  Peace  Treaty  which  provides  that  the  Ru- 
manian Government  will  not  permit  the  existence 
or  activity  of  any  organizations  of  a  fascist  type 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


and  which  aim  at  depriving  the  people  of  their 
democratic  rights. 

The  Note  of  the  United  States  Government  in 
support  of  its  affirmation  cites  steps  taken  by  the 
Rumanian  Government  agamst  fascist  remnants 
as  well  as  the  sentences  pronounced  by  the  courts 
of  the  Rumanian  People's  Republic  against  the 
gi'oups  of  spies  and  saboteure  in  the  service  of  the 
American  Espionage  Service. 

The  public  trials  of  these  bands  composed  of  the 
leaders  of  the  former  National  Peasant  Party, 
legionnaires,  large  landownei's  and  great  indus- 
trialists who  tried  to  transform  Rumania  into  a 
new  breeding  ground  of  war,  have  shown  beyond 
any  doubt  that  these  persons  received  instructions 
from  and  were  led  by  members  of  the  United 
States  Mission  in  Bucharest.  Even  the  American 
press  has  admitted  that  their  discovery  and  their 
sentencing  constituted  a  blow  to  the  American 
Espionage  services. 

The  Rumanian  Government  declares  that  the 
United  States  Government  is  encouraging  the  ac- 
tivities and  the  organization  of  fascist  fugitives, 
of  squanderers  of  public  funds,  of  traitors  from 
Rumania  who  are  in  the  United  States  or  on  terri- 
tory under  American  control  by  granting  asylum, 
by  placing  at  their  disposal  official  radio  channels, 
etc. 

Under  these  circumstances,  the  Rumanian  Gov- 
ernment declares  that  the  note  of  the  United 
States  Government,  as  well  as  former  notes,  en- 
deavors to  lead  astray  world  public  opinion  which 
condemns  its  policy  of  racial  discrimination,  its 
barbarous  acts  of  lynching,  its  drowning  out  of 
democratic  political  opinion,  its  trials  of  men  of 
culture  and  representatives  of  the  working  peo- 
ple who  fight  for  democracy  and  peace,  its  incite- 
ment to  war  and  policy  of  aggressive  pacts,  its 
nurturing  of  breeding  grounds  of  war,  and  its  sup- 
port of  fascist  bands  which  kill  women  and  chil- 
dren en  masse.,  all  of  which  are  in  reality  a  brutal 
violation  of  the  fundamental  rights  and  liberties 
of  man. 

In  consequence,  the  Government  of  the  Ruma- 
nian People's  Republic  declares  that  it  cannot 
accept  the  attempt  of  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment to  interfere  in  the  internal  affairs  of  Ruma- 
nia and  it  rejects  the  note  of  the  Government  of 
the  United  States. 

United  States  Note  to  Rumcmia 

May  31, 19Jf9 
The  Legation  of  the  United  States  of  America 
presents  its  compliments  to  the  Ministi-y  of  For- 
eign Affairs  of  Rumania  and,  acting  under  the 
instructions  of  the  United  States  Government, 
has  the  honor  to  reply  to  the  Ministry's  note  of 
April  18,  1949  concerning  the  question  of  Ru- 
mania's compliance  with  the  obligations  of  Article 
3  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace. 


Statement  by  Acting  Secretary  Webb 

(Released  to  the  press  June  1] 

Oil  May  31  our  representatives  delivered  in  Sotia, 
Budapest,  and  Bucharest  notes  invoking  those 
clauses  of  the  peace  treaties  wliicli  provide  pro- 
cedures for  the  settlement  of  disputes.  Disputes 
have  arisen  between  the  United  States  and  these 
governments  over  their  failure  to  comply  with  their 
peace  treaty  obligations  to  secure  to  their  citizens 
the  enjoyment  of  human  rights  and  of  the  funda- 
mental freedoms.  You  may  recall  that  on  April  2 
the  United  States  and  Britisli  Governments  formally 
charged  Bulgaria,  Hungary,  and  Rumania  with 
violating  tliese  obligations.  Their  replies,  as  you 
will  see  by  the  tests  released  June  1,  fail  to  answer 
these  charges  satisfactorily  and  show  no  willingness 
to  remedy  the  situation.  A  large  part  of  each  reply 
consists  of  familiar  propaganda  statements  and  of 
false  accusations  against  the  United  States.  We 
shall  not  be  distracted  from  the  main  issue  by  such 
tactics.  We  intend  to  proceed,  according  to  the 
treaty  procedures,  flnst,  to  American-British-Soviet 
consultations  in  the  three  capitals  and  later,  if 
necessary  to  the  appointment  of  commissions  to  con- 
sider the  disputes  and  render  decisions. 

The  charges  which  we  have  made  are  serious  ones 
involving  not  only  the  violation  of  binding  treaty  ob- 
ligations but  also  the  denial  to  whole  peoples  of 
their  fundamental  liberties.  This  government,  act- 
ing in  the  interests  of  the  states  signatory  to  the 
treaties  and  of  world  opinion  as  expressed  in  the 
recent  General  Assembly  resolution  on  the  subject, 
will  press  for  a  full  hearing  and  for  the  assessment 
of  responsibilities. 


The  United  States  Government,  taking  note  of 
the  Rumanian  Government's  rejection  of  the  state- 
ments made  in  the  Legation's  note  of  April  2, 1949, 
concerning  Rumania's  disregard  of  its  obligations 
under  Article  3,  finds  it  necessary  to  place  on 
record  its  view  that  the  Rumanian  Government  has 
not  given  a  satisfactory  reply  to  the  specific  charges 
set  forth  in  the  Legation's  note.  The  Rumanian 
Government  has  also  failed  to  furnish  the  United 
States  Government  with  the  requested  informa- 
tion as  to  measures  which  the  Rumanian  Govern- 
ment is  prepared  to  adopt  in  order  to  remedy  the 
situation  caused  by  the  violation  of  its  obligations 
under  Article  3  and  to  implement  fully  the  terms 
of  that  Article.  The  United  States  Government 
cannot  accept  the  Rumanian  Government's  conten- 
tion that  the  matters  dealt  with  in  the  United 
States  note  are  purely  domestic  affairs  or  the  con- 
tention that  Rumania  has  complied  with  the  obli- 
gations of  Article  3  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace  merely 
by  the  formal  enactment  of  laws  purporting  to 
guarantee  the  application  of  the  provisions  of  that 
Article.  The  remaining  portions  of  the  Rumanian 
Government's  note  of  April  18,  including  refer- 
ences to  other  Articles  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace, 
consist  of  allegations  against  the  United  States 
which  are  demonstrably  false  and  irrelevant  to  the 
matter  at  hand.  The  United  States  Governnient 
rejects  categorically  the  unwarranted  accusations 
that  it  has  supported  reaction  and  conspiracies  in 


June   12,   )949 


liumania,  accusations  which  will  not  obscure  the 
real  issues  raised  by  the  United  States  note  of 
April  2. 

The  United  States  Government  accordingly  con- 
siders that  a  dispute  has  arisen  concerning  the 
interpretation  and  execution  of  the  Treaty  of 
Peace  which  the  Rumanian  Government  has  shown 
no  disposition  to  join  in  settling  by  direct  diplo- 
matic negotiations. 


The  American  Minister  has  therefore  been  in- 
structed by  his  Government  to  refer  the  di^^In^te 
to  his  British  and  Soviet  colleagues  for  considera- 
tion jointly  with  himself  in  accordance  with  the 
provisions  of  Article  38  of  the  Treaty  of  Peace. 
Copies  of  his  letters  to  the  Ambassador  of  the 
Union  of  Soviet  Socialist  Republics  and  to  the 
British  Minister  inviting  them  to  meet  for  this 
purpose  are  enclosed. 


Goals  and  Practical  Problems  of  the  Polnt-4  Program 


ADDRESS  BY  JOHN  R.  STEELMAN' 
Assistant  to  the  President 


I  am  happy  to  be  in  Chicago  again  and  to  have 
this  opportunity  to  talk  to  you  about  what  has 
come  to  be  known  as  the  Point-4  program.  Every 
day  it  is  becoming  more  apparent  that  the  concept 
underlying  this  program  holds  promise  of  untold 
benefit  for  the  entire  world. 

This  concept  was  first  outlined  by  President 
Truman  in  his  inaugural  address.  He  stated  that 
we  must  embark  on  a  bold  new  program  for  mak- 
ing the  benefits  of  our  scientific  advances  and  our 
industrial  programs  available  for  the  improve- 
ment and  growth  of  economicallj'  underdeveloped 
areas  of  the  world. 

The  President  called  upon  other  countries  to 
share  in  this  effort,  which  he  said  must  be  a  world- 
wide effort  for  the  achievement  of  peace,  plenty, 
and  freedom. 

The  President's  words  produced  an  electric  ef- 
fect around  the  globe.  They  were  at  the  same 
time  a  challenge  and  a  promise.  Not  a  promise 
of  what  the  United  States  can  do  for  the  world, 
but  a  promise  of  what  all  freedom-loving  people, 
working  together,  can  accomplish  for  themselves. 

In  talking  about  the  Point-4  program,  I  want 
not  only  to  discuss  its  goals  and  potentialities  but 
also  the  practical  problems  which  confront  us  when 
we  come  to  translate  this  concept  into  action. 

At  the  outset  it  should  be  stated  that  when  we 
refer  to  a  country  as  economicallj^  underdeveloped, 
we  do  not  mean  to  reflect  on  it  in  anj-  unfavorable 
way.  A  number  of  countries  with  rich  cultural 
heritages,  and  which  rank  high  in  the  community 
of  civilized  nations,  badlj'  need  to  bring  their  re- 
sources and  the  skills  of  their  people  to  higher 
levels  of  economic  productivity. 

Another  point  to  clarify  at  the  outset  is  that 
Point  4  is  not  a  recovery  program.  It  is  not  a 
reconstruction  program.    It  is  not  designed  to 

'  Mnrle  before  the  Joint  Luncliooii  of  the  Executives 
Club  of  Cliicago  and  the  Chicago  Association  of  Commerce 
and  IiKlustry,  .at  Chicago  on  May  27,  1949,  and  released  to 
the  press  by  tlie  White  House  on  the  same  date. 


build  up  again  something  torn  down  or  ravaged 
by  war. 

Point  4  is  a  development  program,  and  to  that 
extent  a  creative  enterprise.  Its  purpose  is  not  to 
restore  living  standards  but  to  raise  them  where 
they  are  below  the  traditional  levels  enjoyed  in 
many  other  parts  of  the  world. 

Point  4  is  a  logical  forward  step  in  our  program 
of  international  cooperation. 

In  the  first  postwar  years,  our  attention  was 
centered  on  the  devastated  areas  of  Europe.  It 
was  necessary  to  help  bring  order  out  of  the  chaos 
and  debris  of  the  war-shattered  cities  of  Western 
Europe  and  to  lend  a  helping  hand  to  many  other 
war-weary  peoples. 

Today  the  economy  of  Europe  is  on  the  road 
to  recovery.  But  to  secure  stability  for  the  world, 
it  is  necessary  to  give  attention  to  the  economic 
development  of  other  areas.  For  peace,  we  know, 
is  not  divisible,  and  the  economic  insecurity  of 
peoples  in  some  far  corner  of  the  earth  may  imperil 
our  own  safety. 

Since  the  end  of  the  war,  the  people  in  many  of 
the  less  developed  countries  nave  made  great 
strides  toward  social  and  political  democracy.  In 
many  cases  their  continued  progress  will  depend 
upon  their  material  welfare.  Safeguarding  their 
economic  rights — and  assuring  them  a  participa- 
tion in  the  business  affairs  of  the  world  that  will  be 
of  mutual  benefit — is  one  of  the  major  interna- 
tional problems  today. 

It  is  the  intention  of  the  United  States,  in  em- 
barking on  the  Point-4  program,  to  assist  those 
freedom-loving  countries  which  seek  and  desire 
iour  economic  cooperation.  It  will  be  our  policy 
to  aid  in  the  establislunent  of  programs  which  will 
meet  the  varying  needs  of  the  countries  seeking 
assistance.  For  different  countries  have  different 
needs. 

It  has  been  made  clear  by  the  President  that  our 
intention  is  not  that  of  duplicating  our  own  econ- 
om}'  or  imposing  our  own  patterns  of  business  and 


760 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


social  life  on  the  peoples  of  other  countries.  The 
work  to  be  undertaken  must  serve  the  national 
aspirations,  social  customs,  and  economic  needs 
of  the  peoples  involved. 

The  objective  of  Point  4  is  not  to  change  the 
economy  of  any  country  over  night.  Rather,  our 
contribution  should  vitalize  the  effort  of  the 
country  in  the  development  of  its  own  resources. 
I  keep  hearing  the  term  "show-how,"  and  that  is 
what  we  must  do  at  first. 

In  Washington  I  am  often  asked  if  Point  4  does 
not  carry  the  danger  of  creating  industries  which 
will  compete  with  our  own.  I  think  we  have  only 
to  look  back  upon  the  history  of  our  trade  with 
Europe  and  Latin  America  to  see  the  folly  of  such 
fears.  Certainly  for  the  foreseeable  future,  the 
economic  development  of  other  areas  will  require 
capital  goods  from  the  United  States.  Also,  the 
Point-4  program  will  aid  in  developing  the  world 
trading  system  which  is  necessary  for  the  growth 
of  our  own  economy  and  the  future  prosperity  of 
all  nations. 

Point  4  has  its  forerunners  in  many  activities  of 
both  government  and  of  private  organizations, 
which  are  now  being  carried  on  in  underdeveloped 
areas.  Private  business  has  carried  on  develop- 
ments which  have  added  to  the  wealth  and  well- 
being  of  distant  parts  of  the  world,  and  our 
government  has  provided  technical  assistance  in 
various  lines  to  governments  seeking  to  improve 
the  standards  of  living  of  their  people. 

The  significance  of  the  Point-4  program  is  that 
major  emphasis  is  to  be  placed  upon  this  type 
of  activity.  What  have  been  the  scattered  activi- 
ties of  business  and  government  are  to  be  brought 
together  and  made  a  major  part  of  our  foreign 
policies.  The  requirements  of  the  underdevel- 
oped areas  far  outstrip  anything  we  have  hereto- 
fore been  able  to  do.  It  is  important  to  attack  the 
problem  as  a  whole  and  to  understand  that  tech- 
nical assistance  and  overseas  development  will 
have  constantly  increasing  importance  for  years 
to  come. 

Many  fine  examples  of  what  can  be  done  through 
Point  4  are  before  us  already  in  the  work  which 
has  been  carried  out  by  American  businessmen  in 
South  America  and  elsewhere.  Projects  sup- 
ported by  American  capital  include  lumber  camps 
in  South  America,  palm  oil  in  the  Belgian  Congo, 
rubber  plantations  in  Liberia.  American  capital 
has  developed  railroads  in  Brazil  and  mines  in 
Bolivia. 

In  many  parts  of  the  world  today  where  Ameri- 
can capital  has  aided  in  developing  the  natural  re- 
sources, it  has  contributed  more  significantly  in 
developing  the  human  resources.  Stamping  out 
yellow  fever  and  malaria  has  been  good  business. 
It  has  been  good  business  also  to  build  schools  for 
training  able  workers. 

Royalties  on  oil  produced  by  American  capital 
have  made  possible  fine  hospitals  and  schools  in 
Venezuela.     The  first  railroad  ever  to  be  con- 


structed in  Saudi  Arabia  is  being  built  by  Ameri- 
can capital  and  paid  for  from  oil  royalties. 

American  capital  has  assisted  many  areas  in  the 
creation  of  a  broader  trading  system,  enabling  the 
people  to  exchange  their  goods  in  larger  volume 
and  on  better  terms  with  others. 

An  outstanding  development  of  this  kind  has 
been  made  possible  through  the  Venezuelan  Basic 
Economy  Corporation.  One  of  its  many  projects 
assisted  in  building  up  the  fishing  industry.  On 
the  one  hand  new  fishing  methods  with  modern 
equipment  and  refrigeration  were  introduced.  On 
the  other  hand,  retail  outlets  were  created  for  the 
increased  production,  modern  marketing  methods 
were  taught,  and  new  ways  of  using  the  fishery 
products  were  developed. 

In  addition,  much  international  assistance  has 
been  rendered  by  private  nonprofit  organizations. 
The  international  exchange  of  students  and  the 
extensive  medical  research  made  possible  by  uni- 
versities and  private  foundations  have  contributed 
greatly  to  the  development  of  technical  knowledge 
in  other  countries.  The  far-flung  medical  and 
agricultural  services  of  the  various  mission  soci- 
eties have  also  made  an  immense  contribution  to 
the  technical  skills  of  people  in  underdeveloped 
areas. 

The  Government  as  well  as  private  organiza- 
tions has  aided  in  foreign  economic  development. 
The  Department  of  Agriculture  has  provided 
technical  assistance  to  other  countries  for  more 
than  a  decade,  and  today  through  cost-sharing 
arrangements  with  the  countries  concerned,  is 
assisting  in  more  than  300  agricultural  research 
projects  in  Latin  America.  On  a  similar  basis, 
technical  missions  in  agriculture  have  been  sent 
to  nearly  a  score  of  countries. 

The  Public  Health  Service  has  provided  experts 
to  assist  many  countries  in  solving  problems  of  dis- 
ease and  pest  control,  maternal  and  child  health, 
and  nutrition ;  and  the  Federal  Works  Agency  has 
provided  assistance  on  transportation,  engineer- 
ing, and  sewage  projects.  Altogether  25  agencies 
of  the  Government  are  now  working  with  foreign 
governments  in  economic  projects  of  various 
kinds. 

Point  4  has  a  definite  precedent  also  in  such 
enterprises  as  the  Joint  Brazil-United  States 
Technical  Mission  which  conducted  a  survey  of 
Brazil's  development  needs  last  year.  Moreover, 
it  has  a  definite  relationship  to  our  other  programs 
of  international  cooperation,  such  as  the  Recipro- 
cal Trade  Agreement  Program. 

The  President  stated  that  the  Point-4  program 
must  be  a  cooperative  enterprise  in  which  all  na- 
tions work  together  through  the  United  Nations 
and  its  specialized  agencies  wherever  practicable. 
We  are  today  cooperating  with  other  countries  and 
assisting  them  through  our  work  in  the  United 
Nations  Economic  and  Social  Council,  the  Ukesco, 
the  Food  and  Agriculture  Organization,  the  In- 


June   12,   1949 


ternational  Labor  Office,  the  World  Healtli  Or- 
ganization, and  others. 

These  are  some  of  the  things  that  are  being  done 
now.  Our  forward  planning  for  the  carrying  out 
of  the  Point-4  program  envisages  several  phases 
of  effort.  It  is  not  merely  an  expansion  of  what 
we  are  doing  at  the  present  moment — we  must  for- 
mulate an  integrated  policy  which  will  be  the 
framework  of  our  effort  5,  10,  and  20  years  in  the 
future. 

The  first  step  in  many  areas  will  undoubtedly 
be  to  conduct  an  expert  survey  in  the  various 
fields  that  are  basic  to  economic  development — 
such  as  transportation,  health,  education,  com- 
munications, and  water  resources.  Only  by  sur- 
vej'ing  "from  the  ground  up"  can  future  projects 
be  integrated  into  a  practical  program.  Lack  of 
development  in  such  basic  fielcls  imposes  real  lim- 
its on  the  rate  at  which  capital  investment  can  be 
absorbed  in  most  underdeveloped  sections  of  the 
world. 

In  some  of  these  areas,  basic  improvements  in 
health  and  education  will  have  to  precede  any  real 
advances  in  other  fields  necessary  to  a  stable  econ- 
omy. The  ultimate  objective  of  an  education  pro- 
gram in  such  areas  would  be  to  fit  the  people  to 
understand  and  make  the  most  of  their  environ- 
ment and  to  enable  them  to  become  useful  workers 
and  citizens.  The  importance  of  introducing 
modern  health  techniques  is  obvious.  It  is  impos- 
sible for  malaria-ridden  areas,  for  instance,  to 
develop  their  full  potentialities. 

Introduction  of  modern  agricultural  techniques 
will  increase  food  production  and  make  possible  a 
better  diet.  Conservation  of  the  soil  will  increase 
arable  areas.  Development  of  a  system  of  trans- 
portation will  open  up  new  markets.  And  the 
development  of  mining,  industry,  and  agriculture 
would  provide  decent  jobs  for  millions  now  living 
at  bare  subsistence  levels. 

In  many  countries  the  scope  of  the  capital  invest- 
ment which  could  profitably  be  utilized  is  tre- 
mendous. In  India,  for  instance,  already  the  most 
highly  industrialized  area  of  the  Far  East,  there 
is  a  great  need  for  railroads  and  railroad  equip- 
ment, and  for  hydroelectric  projects.  In  Africa, 
transportation  and  port  facilities  might  open  up 
enormous  possibilities  for  the  development  of  the 
entire  continent. 

Much  of  the  capital  investment  required  at  the 
outset  will  undoubtedly  be  of  a  type  not  ordinarily 
handled  directly  by  private  enterprise.  The  need 
for  roads,  port  facilities,  drainage  and  irrigation 
projects — to  name  only  a  few — is  normally  satis- 
fied through  government  obligations,  sold  to  other 
governments,  international  agencies,  or  the  invest- 
ing public  in  highly  developed  countries.  More- 
over, especially  in  the  underdeveloped  areas  which 
can  most  fruitfully  benefit  from  the  Point-4  pro- 
gram, needs  of  this  type  must  be  met  before  pri- 
vate investment  can  be  made  effective. 

In  the  early  stages  of  the  program,  it  is  not 


expected  that  the  rate  of  private  investment 
abroad  will  be  substantially  greater  than  at  pres- 
ent. However,  ultimately  the  export  of  American 
capital  is  certain  to  increase  enormously. 

Last  year  U.S.  net  private  investment  abroad — 
including  Europe — was  approximately  850  million 
dollars.  One  business  group  has  estimated  that 
given  favorable  circumstances,  U.S.  private  in- 
dustry by  1952  should  be  able  annually  to  invest 
abroad  approximately  2  billion  dollars  net.  I  be- 
lieve that  private  investment  will  go  beyond  this 
estimate  when  the  proper  understanding  and  sta- 
bility have  been  achieved. 

(lovernment  direction  and  assistance  are  neces- 
sary, particularly  in  the  planning  and  develop- 
ment stages,  but  the  ultimate  success  of  Point  4 
necessarily  will  in  great  part  depend  upon  the 
ability  of  American  businessmen  to  supply  the 
wants  of  the  underdeveloped  areas  through  the 
wise  use  of  American  private  capital. 

There  are  certain  major  questions  relating  to 
the  role  of  private  business  in  the  program  which 
must  be  given  serious  and  immediate  consideration 
by  the  business  community.  How  much  lending 
will  be  required?  How  much  lending  can  private 
business  undertake?  Wliat  incentives  are  needed? 
What  controls  should  be  exercised,  and  through 
what  means,  to  protect  the  investments  abroad? 
What  will  be  the  impact  on  our  own  economy  of  a 
broad  program  of  economic  cooperation? 

The  problems  are  complex.  The  countries 
which  stand  most  in  need  of  assistance  are  poor 
countries.  Ways  must  be  found  to  bring  hidden 
capital  to  light,  to  modernize  systems  oi  finance 
and  fiscal  policy  in  order  to  make  it  possible  for 
the  countries  to  utilize  Point  4  on  a  self-help  basis. 
The  experiences  of  American  businessmen  in  in- 
ternational affairs  up  to  now  will  make  their  serv- 
ice and  advice  to  these  countries  invaluable. 

We  must  bring  together  and  utilize  the  best 
American  scientific,  technical,  and  business  ex- 
perts in  order  to  formulate  and  carry  out  a  pro- 
gram of  the  scope  required.  We  have  had  many 
helpful  suggestions  from  business  groups  and  in- 
dividuals.    We  hope  that  we  will  have  more. 

It  is  essential  that  two  difficulties  be  overcome 
before  private  investment  can  make  its  maximum 
contribution  to  the  Point-4  program.  Both  con- 
cern the  "climate"'  for  investments.  There  is  the 
question  of  discrimination  through  unfair  taxa- 
tion, expropriation,  or  other  abuse  of  American 
capital  in  foreign  countries.  Private  enterprise 
must  bo  assured  that  its  investments  anywhere 
will  receive  equal  treatment  with  any  other 
investments  in  the  country. 

Secondly,  it  is  equally  necessary  that  the  coun- 
tries be  assured  that  the  imported  capital  will 
improve  their  standard  of  living  and  will  not  ex- 
ploit their  people,  destroy  their  resources,  or  im- 
pair their  independence  or  political  integrity.  As 
the  Pre.sident  has  made  clear,  imperialism  has  no 
place  in  Point  4. 

Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


In  addition,  it  will  be  necessary  to  deal  with 
the  problem  of  convertibility  into  dollars  of  the 
returns  from  foreign  investment.  Today  many 
countries  are  unable  to  earn  even  the  dollars  they 
need  to  pay  for  the  most  necessary  imports.  As 
you  know,  there  has  been  considerable  discussion 
in  Congress  and  elsewhere  of  the  possibility  of 
United  States  Government  guaranties  against  the 
extraordinary  risks  peculiar  to  foreign  investment, 
particularly  in  connection  with  the  convertibility 
of  local  currency  derived  from  such  investment. 
This  is  a  subject  involving  difficult,  and  to  some 
extent  unpredictable,  elements,  and  it  may  be  that 
it  can  best  be  approached  through  an  experimental 
program,  involving  limited  liabilities,  through 
which  a  workable  technique  for  insuring  against 
such  risks  can  gradually  be  developed. 

The  Government  is  now  at  work  on  programs  of 
technical  assistance  which  in  many  areas  must 
precede  any  extensive  capital  investment — public 
and  private.  A  program  is  being  drawn  up  to 
provide  for  the  supplying  of  technical  assistance 
in  accordance  with  the  Point-4  program  through 
existing  governmental  and  United  Nations 
chamiels. 

I  want  to  make  it  very  clear,  however,  that  these 
proposals  for  technical  assistance  are  only  the  first 
step,  the  initial  breaking  of  the  ground,  in  what 
will  become  a  major  effort  of  goverrmient  and 
business  together  to  help  the  peoples  of  the  world 
to  help  themselves. 

However  great  the  effort  we  put  into  the  de- 
velopment of  Point  4,  the  effort  of  the  people  in 
the  underdeveloped  areas  must  be  immeasurably 
greater.  The  manpower,  the  money,  and  the  skills 
that  first  developed  our  country  came  in  large  part 
from  abroad.  But  what  was  started  by  others 
gained  momentum  through  our  own  efforts. 

As  in  our  own  country,  the  development  of  the 
resources  of  the  world  may  be  assisted  by  others, 
but  must  rest  primarily  on  local  initiative. 

One  of  the  forms  of  self-help  that  other  coun- 
tries can  provide  is  to  undertake  the  basic  eco- 
nomic surveys  and  studies  which  are  necessary 
before  programs  of  tecluiical  assistance  or  invest- 
ment can  be  begun.  The  assistance  which  the 
United  States  can  render  will  be  expedited  and 
greatly  facilitated,  if  the  countries  which  wish  to 
participate  in  the  Point-4  program  undertake  such 
studies  and  surveys  without  delay. 

In  laying  their  basic  plans  for  future  develop- 
ment, it  is  also  important  that  the  underdeveloped 


countries  avoid  the  dangers  of  trying  to  establish 
self-sufficient  economic  units.  We  must  not  foster 
plans  that  will  create  nationalistic  barriers  which 
impede  social  and  economic  progress  in  other 
countries.  Some  arrangement  whereby  a  review 
of  development  plans  may  be  undertaken  by  other 
countries,  perhaps  under  the  auspices  of  the  Eco- 
nomic and  Social  Council  of  the  United  Nations, 
would  be  helpful  in  avoiding  these  dangers  and 
increasing  production  and  international  trade. 

In  the  process  of  carrying  forward  this  pro- 
gram, so  wisely  proposed  by  the  President  of  the 
United  States,  we  will  gain  new  experience  in  the 
application  of  American  engineering  and  scien- 
tific skill.  We  shall  certainly  advance  our  own 
technology.  The  challenging  problems  in  many 
undeveloped  parts  of  the  world  may  test  our  vision 
and  teach  us  much  of  enduring  value  that  will  ad- 
vance our  principles  of  management  and  invest- 
ment. 

Our  aim  in  this  enterprise  is  to  help  the  freedom- 
loving  peoples  of  the  economically  depressed  parts 
of  the  world  to  raise  their  standard  of  living.  By 
so  doing  we  not  only  aid  them  in  realizing  their 
aspirations  for  a  better  life,  but  we  shall  be  laying 
foundations  for  our  own  continued  growth  and 
prosperity. 

Beyond  the  material  rewards  derived  from  this 
progi-am,  lies  the  broad  vista  which  it  opens — a 
better  civilization  whose  motive  force  is  no  longer 
fear,  but  hope. 


Economic  and  Social  Council — Continued  from  page  74/i- 

63.  World  Association  of  Girl  Guides  and  Girl  Scouts, 

The 

64.  World  Federation  of  Democratic  Youth 

65.  World  Jewish  Congress 

66.  World  Movement  of  Mothers 

67.  World  Power  Conference 

68.  World's  Woman's  Christian  Temperance  Union 

69.  World's  Alliance  of  Young  Men's  Christian  Asso- 

ciations 

70.  World's  Young  Women's  Christian  Association 

iii.  International  organizations  in  category  (c) 

1.  International  Federation  of  Secondary  Teachers 

2.  Lions  International — International  Association  of 

Lions  Clubs 

3.  Rotary  International 

4.  World  Organization  of  the  Teaching  Profession 


June   12,   1949 


Labor  Strikes  in  Bolivian  Tin-Mining  Areas 

STATEMENT  BY  ACTING  SECRETARY  WEBB 


[Released  to  the  press  June  1] 

For  several  months  labor  has  been  extremely 
restive  at  the  Bolivian  tin-mining  area  of  Catavi, 
the  property  of  the  Patino  Company.  Tlie  basis 
of  the  trouble  has  been  a  jurisdictional  dispute 
between  the  National  Mine  Worlcers  Federation, 
headed  by  Juan  Lechin,  and  an  independent  union. 
The  leaders  of  the  National  Mine  Workers  Federa- 
tion are  controversial  political  figures  allied  with 
the  extremist,  Movimiento  Nacioual  Revoluciona- 
rio  (MNR)  political  party,  which  was  overthrown 
by  a  popular  revolt  in  1946. 


American  Fatalities 

[Released  to  the  press  May  31] 
The  Department  of  State  was  distressed  to  learn 
of  the  grave  developments  which  took  place  at  the 
Catavi  tin  mines  in  Bolivia  on  May  28  and  29  re- 
sulting in  many  fatalities.  According  to  reports 
received  from  the  American  Embassy  in  La  Paz, 
two  Americans  were  killed,  John  H.  O'Conner  and 
Albert  Krefling,  and  two  others  seriously  injured, 
William  J.  Cook  aud  Pat  Green.  A  fifth  American, 
T.  H.  Peterson,  has  disappeared.  The  Department 
has  instructed  the  American  Embassy  in  La  Paz 
to  express  the  sympathy  of  this  government  to  the 
widows  of  the  two  men  killed,  and  also  to  the  two 
injured  Americans,  and  to  spare  no  effort  to  locate 
the  missing  American. 

The  Embassy  has  also  been  requested  to  express 
to  the  Bolivian  Government  sympathy  for  the  loss 
of  Bolivian  lives  and  appreciation  for  the  steps  taken 
to  remove  Americans  from  the  scene  of  the 
difficulties. 


A  congressional  election  was  held  on  May  1 
during  wliich  MNR  adlierents  fomented  disorders 
in  La  Paz  which  resulted  in  11  deaths.  MNR 
agitators  seized  a  district  police  station  and  were 
in  control  of  it  for  several  hours.  This  and  other 
developments  convinced  the  Bolivian  Government 
that  a  plot  existed  to  overthrow  it  by  forceful 
means. 

The  night  of  May  26,  the  Bolivian  Cabinet  de- 
cided that  in  order  to  forestall  imminent  revolu- 
tion it  would  deport  from  Bolivia  certain  labor 
leaders  affiliated  with  MNR  as  well  as  former  army 
officers  and  others  suspected  of  being  involved  in 
the  revolutionary  plot.  On  May  27  and  28,  a 
considerable  number  of  persons  were  arrested  and 
exiled  to  Chile.  Included  were  Juan  Lechin  and 
a  number  of  other  labor  leaders  alleged  to  be  in- 
volved in  the  MNR  plot. 


Immediately  the  workers  at  Siglo  XX,  a  mine 
in  the  Catavi  area,  cjuit  work.  They  seized  15  of 
the  supervisory  personnel  including  7  Ameri- 
cans and  held  them  in  the  union  headquarters  al- 
legedly as  hostages  for  the  release  of  Lechin  and 
other  union  leaders.  Many  of  these  hostages  were 
badly  beaten  and  several  of  them,  including  two 
Americans,  were  murdered.  Bolivian  army  units 
have  been  stationed  at  Catavi  for  about  2  months, 
or  since  tlte  situation  became  tense.  Reinforced  by 
other  troops  from  Oruro,  they  captured  the  union 
headquarters  about  noon,  May  29.  By  means  of 
Bolivian  Air  Force  planes  and  United  States 
Military  Attache  and  Air  Mission  planes  most  of 
the  Americans  in  the  Catavi  area  were  evacuated 
to  Oruro  on  May  29  and  30.  Two  Americans  who 
were  badly  mjured  while  being  held  as  hostages 
remained,  together  with  their  wives,  at  the  hos- 
pital in  Catavi.  It  is  planned  to  evacuate  them 
also  when  they  are  able  to  travel.  The  American 
manager  of  the  Patino  enterprises  at  Catavi.  D.  C. 
Deringer,  has  remained  there.  Apparently  the 
Bolivian  Army  has  been  in  control  of  the  area 
since  May  29. 

Strikes  or  threats  of  strikes  have  occurred  in 
practically  all  the  other  mining  centers  of  Bolivia. 
In  Colquiri,  a  Hochschild  mining  property,  and 
Huanuni,  another  Patino  mine,  management  per- 
sonnel were  seized  and  held  as  hostages.  Those 
at  Huanuni  were  rescued  by  Bolivian  Army  units 
about  noon,  May  31.  Every  effort  is  being  made 
to  obtain  the  release  of  the  management  hostages 
at  Colquiri.  A  number  of  the  hostages  in  each 
case  are  American  citizens. 

Immediately  upon  receiving  word  of  the  first 
developments  at  Catavi,  the  American  Charge 
d'Affaires  in  La  Paz,  James  Espy,  requested  the 
Bolivian  Government  to  provide  American  citi- 
zens throughout  Bolivia  with  the  fullest  protection 
possible.  On  Ma_v  30  he  sent  urgent  word  to  all 
the  mining  centers  advising  American  citizens  to 
evacuate  their  wives  and  children  to  the  centers  of 
population  and  to  leave  themselves  if  at  all  pos- 
sible. By  means  of  a  plane  chartered  by  the  Pa- 
tino Company,  a  plane  owned  by  the  Aramayo 
ComiJanj',  and  planes  of  our  Military  Air  Attache 
and  the  United  States  Air  Mission  in  Bolivia, 
American  management  personnel  and  their  fam- 
ilies are  being  evacuated  to  places  of  safety  as 
rapidly  as  possible.  The  number  of  persons  evac- 
uated from  Catavi  was  approximately  140. 

The  wave  of  strikes  does  not  appear  to  hav^e  sub-" 
sided.     Railway   workers   are   reported   to   have 

Department  of  State   Bulletin 


planned  to  strike  at  noon,  May  31.  The  Bolivian 
Government  the  morning  of  May  31  had  hopes  of 
maintaining  at  least  limited  service  on  the  La  Paz 
Arica  Railway  and  the  La  Paz  Guaqui  Railway, 
which  are  links  with  Chile  and  Peru.  The  Bo- 
livian air  line,  LAB,  struck  May  27  but  returned 
to  work  later. 

On  May  31  the  Bolivian  Government  issued  a 
decree  declaring  a  state  of  siege  covering  the  whole 
country.  The  decree  stated  that  violent  happen- 
ings in  different  parts  of  the  country  are  creating 
a  state  of  civil  war. 

The  American  Embassy  in  La  Paz  is  continuing 
to  exert  every  effort  to  secure  the  safety  of  Ameri- 
can citizens  in  the  mining  districts.  To  date  there 
have  been  no  reports  of  disturbances  in  the  prin- 
cipal centers  of  population  which  are  La  Paz, 
Oruro,  Cochabamba,  and  Sucre. 

Acting  under  instructions,  the  American  Charge 
d'Affaires  in  Bolivia  on  May  30  expressed  to  the 
Bolivian  Government  sympathy  for  the  loss  of 
Bolivian  lives  and  appreciation  for  the  steps  taken 
to  remove  Americans  from  the  scene  of  the  diffi- 
culties. On  May  31  the  Bolivian  Ambassador  in 
Washington  expressed  the  profound  regret  of  his 
government  at  the  death  of  the  two  murdered 
Americans. 


American  Community  Activities 
Continue  in  Shanghai 

Statement  by  John  M.  Cabot  ^ 

So  far  as  we  have  been  able  to  ascertain  no 
Americans  have  been  injured  in  the  course  of 
fighting  in  or  around  Shanghai.  All  reports  so 
far  indicate  that  the  Communist  soldiers  have  re- 
spected Americans  and  their  property  despite  cer- 
tain relatively  minor  difficulties  which  have  arisen 
in  a  few  instances. 

The  American  community,  both  business  and 
philanthropic,  is  carrying  on  and  intends  to  con- 
tinue to  do  so  insofar  as  this  is  permitted  by  the 
new  authorities.  They  feel  that  their  activities 
are  a  benefit  to  China  as  well  as  the  organizations 
they  represent.  They  will,  I  am  confident,  re- 
spect the  laws  and  regulations  instituted  as  re- 
quired by  the  new  authorities  in  their  public 
announcem  ents. 

It  will  be  necessary  to  wait  until  the  new  author- 
ities have  established  the  policies  which  they  pro- 
pose to  follow  before  it  is  possible  to  say  whether 
the  American  community  can  look  to  the  future 
with  optimism,  but  the  community's  first  reactions 
have  been  distinctly  favorable.  For  those  who 
have  suffered  tragic  losses  in  the  hostilities  which 
have  swept  over  Shanghai  the  American  commu- 
nity feels  deeply  sympathetic;  it  is  fervently 
thankful  for  the  greater  horrors  from  which 
Shanghai  has  happily  been  spared. 

iune  12,   7949 


«Siam"  Officially  Changed  to  "Thailand" 

Text  of  coynmunique  transmitted  hy  the  American 
Emiassy  at  Bangkok  which  was  officially  broad- 
cast on  May  11 

Following  the  announcement  made  by  the  Pre- 
mier's Office  on  September  7,  1945,  to  the  effect 
that  the  name  of  the  kingdom  be  called  in  English 
"Siam"  and  the  people  of  the  kingdom  called 
"Siamese",  the  present  government  has  again 
taken  this  matter  into  consideration. 

Because  of  the  fact  that  the  present  constitution 
calls  the  kingdom  "Prates  Thai"  by  name,  the 
present  Government  is  of  the  opinion  that  for  con- 
venience sake,  the  name  of  the  kingdom  is  to  be 
called  "Thailand"  in  English  and  other  languages 
and  the  name  of  the  people  living  in  the  kingdom 
"Thai". 

This  announcement  is  being  officially  made  May 
11,  1949,  and  signed  by  the  Premier,  Field  Mar- 
shal P.  Pliibun  Songgram. 

Letters  of  Credence 

Hashemite  Jordan  Kingdom 

The  newly  appointed  Minister  of  the  Hashemite 
Jordan  Kingdom,  Dr.  Yussef  Haikal,  presented 
his  credentials  to  the  President  on  June  1.  For 
texts  of  the  Minister's  remarks  and  the  President's 
reply,  see  Department  of  State  press  release  406 
of  June  1, 1949. 


Northwest  Atlantic  Fisheries  Convention 
Transmitted  to  Senate 

To  the  Senate  of  the  United  States: 

With  a  view  to  receiving  the  advice  and  consent 
of  the  Senate  to  ratification,  I  transmit  herewith 
a  certified  copy  of  the  International  Convention 
for  the  Northwest  Atlantic  Fisheries,  formulated 
at  the  International  Northwest  Atlantic  Fisheries 
Conference  and  signed  at  Washington  under  date 
of  February  8, 1949  by  the  plenipotentiaries  of  the 
United  States  of  America  and  by  the  plenipoten- 
tiaries of  certain  other  governments.^ 

I  transmit  also,  for  the  information  of  the  Sen- 
ate, the  report  of  the  Secretary  of  State  regard- 
ing this  convention,  and  a  certified  copy  of  the 
Final  Act  of  the  Conference.  The  Final  Act  does 
not  require  ratification. 

Haery  S.  Trtjman 
The  White  House, 

May  9, 1949. 


'  Released  to  the  press  by  the  American  Embassy  In 
Shanghai  on  May  27, 1949.  Printed  from  telegraphic  text. 
Mr.  Cabot  is  Consul  General  of  the  American  Embassy  at 
Shanghai. 

'  For  text  of  the  convention  see  Documents  and  State 
Papers  for  March  and  April  1949,  p.  711. 

765 


Cuba  Grants  Renegotiations  of  Certain 
Tariff  Concessions 

[Released  to  the  press  June  3] 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  October 
11,  1948,  that  Cuba  had  requested  the  renegotia- 
tion of  certain  tariff  concessions  granted  by  Cuba 
in  the  General  Agreement  on  Tariffs  and  Trade.' 
Cuba  has  now  requested  that  its  concession  on 
certain  colored-woven  textiles  be  similarly  rene- 
gotiated. 

At  the  second  session  of  the  Contracting  Parties 
to  the  General  Agreement  on  Tariffs  and  Trade, 
held  at  Geneva  in  the  summer  of  1948,  the  con- 
tracting parties  recommended,  and  the  United 
States  agreed,  that  renegotiation  of  preferential 
tariff  concessions  accorded  to  the  United  States 
by  Cuba  on  certain  colored-woven  textiles  should 
be  undertaken  if  Cuba  so  requested.  These  col- 
ored-woven textiles  are  listed  as  items  114  to  117 
and  132  to  135,  part  II,  schedule  IX  (the  Cuban 
schedule),  of  the  General  Agreement  on  Tariffs 
and  Trade.  Consideration  will  therefore  be  given 
by  the  United  States  to  possible  adjustments  of  the 
Cfuban  rates  of  duty  applicable  to  colored-woven 
textiles  provided  for  in  the  third  note  to  each 
of  these  items. 

As  recommended  by  the  contracting  parties,  the 
negotiations  will  include  consideration  of  any  new- 
concessions,  whether  or  not  in  respect  of  an  item 
now  in  the  Cuban  schedule  which  Cuba  might 
grant  to  the  United  States  in  return  for  any  modi- 
hcations  of  the  duties  on  colored-woven  textiles 
that  might  be  agreed  to  by  this  government.  Con- 
sideration will  also  be  given  to  the  possible  with- 
drawal or  partial  withdrawal  of  some  concessions 
which  the  United  States  granted  to  Cuba  in  sched- 
ule XX  of  the  General  Agreement  on  Tariffs  and 
Trade.  If  such  concessions  are  to  be  withdrawn, 
another  announcement  with  respect  thereto  will 
be  made. 

Views  of  any  interested  persons  with  regard  to 
these  renegotiations  should  be  submitted  to  the 
Committee  for  Reciprocity  Information,  which  is 
the  Committee  established  to  receive  views  on 
trade-agreement  matters,  no  later  than  June  24, 
1949.  All  communications  on  these  matters  should 
be  addressed  to:  The  Secretary,  Committee  for 
Reciprocity  Information,  Department  of  Com- 
merce, Washington  25,  D.C. 

Convention  Witli  Costa  Rica  Establisliing 
Inter- American  Tropical  Tuna  Commission 

A  convention  between  the  United  States  and 
Costa  Rica  for  the  establishment  of  an  Inter- 
American  Tropical  Tuna  Commission  was  signed 
on  May  31  in  Washington.^  This  action  came  as 
a  result  of  a  conference  between  representatives  of 
the  two  countries  held  in  Washington  last  week. 

766 


Signing  on  behalf  of  the  United  States  were  Act- 
ing Secretaiy  of  State  James  E.  Webb,  and  W.  M. 
Chapman,  Special  Assistant  for  Fisheries  to  the 
Under  Secretary  of  State.  Senor  Don  Mario  A. 
Esquivel,  Ambassador  of  Costa  Rica,  and  Senor 
Don  Jorge  Hazera,  Counselor  of  the  Costa  Rican 
Embassy,  signed  on  behalf  of  Costa  Rica. 

The  convention  provides  for  a  joint  Commission 
empowered  to  undertake  the  scientific  investiga- 
tion of  yellowfin  and  skipjack  tuna  and  of  ancho- 
vetta  and  other  bait  fishes  in  the  eastern  Pacific 
Ocean  in  the  fisheries  maintained  by  the  nationals 
of  the  two  countries.  Other  kinds  of  fish  taken  by 
tuna  fishing  vessels  may  also  be  studied  b}'  the 
Commission.  Much  remains  to  be  known  about 
yellowfin  and  skipjack  tuna  and  the  other  species 
concerned  before  the  need  for  conservation  mea- 
sures may  be  determined. 

The  convention  differs  in  a  number  of  respects 
from  the  United  States-Mexican  tuna  agreement 
signed  last  January  in  Mexico  City.  It  covers 
particularly  the  tuna  fisheries  in  the  tropical 
waters  of  the  eastern  Pacific  Ocean.  In  addition, 
unlike  all  of  the  fisheries  concerned  in  the  United 
States-Mexican  agreement,  the  fisheries  included 
in  the  present  convention  present  problems  of  in- 
teiest  to  a  number  of  countries  besides  the  sigiia- 
tories.  Accordingly',  the  convention  provides  a 
new  departiire  by  making  possible  the  adherence 
of  other  governments  whose  nationals  operate  in 
tlie  fisheries  involved.  It  is  hojied  that  these  other 
governments  will  join  the  United  States  and  Costa 
Rica  in  the  cooperative  program  for  maintaining 
the  populations  of  the  fishes  concerned  at  a  level 
which  will  permit  maximum  sustained  catches 
3'ear  after  year. 


Air  Transport  Agreement  With  Canada  Signed 

It  was  announced  June  5  that  the  delegations 
representing  the  United  States  and  Canadian  Gov- 
ernments, which  have  during  the  past  week  been 
discussing  bilateral  air  arrangements  between  the 
two  countries,  have  concluded  and  signed  a  new 
bilateral  air  agreement  on  scheduled  air  services 
to  replace  the  one  presently  in  effect  which  was 
signed  earl,y  in  1945.^ 

The  new  agreement  differs  from  its  predecessor 
in  form  in  (hat  it  adopts  tlie  pattern  for  bilateral 
agreements  that  has  been  evolving  in  recent  years. 
'I'his  pattern,  which  is  based  on  certain  standard 
articles  developed  at  the  Chicago  International 
Air  Conference  in  1944,  is  known  generally  as  the 
Bermuda-type  agreement  since  the  first  agreement 


'  BuiXETiN  of  Oct.  24,  1948,  p.  527. 

'  For  text  of  convention,  see  Department  of  State  press 
release  400  of  May  31,  1940. 

•  For  text  of  agreement,  see  Department  of  State  press 
release  414  of  June  5,  1!)49. 

Department  of  Slate  Bulletin 


of  this  type  was  concluded  in  Bermuda  between 
the  United  States  and  the  United  Kingdom. 

The  new  agreement  provides  for  the  exercise  of 
traffic  rights  in  each  coimtry  by  scheduled  air- 
lines of  the  other  on  certain  agi'eed  international 
through  routes.  Certain  changes  were  made  in 
the  existing  network  of  transborder  air  services 
between  the  two  countries. 

The  changes  in  transborder  services  are  that 
the  United  States  has  been  granted  a  direct  route 
between  New  York  and  Toronto,  replacing  its  ex- 
isting route  from  Buffalo  to  Toronto.  This  route 
will  directly  parallel  the  existing  Canadian  route 
from  Toronto  to  New  York.  The  United  States 
has  also  received  a  route  from  Great  Falls,  Mon- 
tana, to  Edmonton,  Alberta,  which  may  be  oper- 
ated in  conjunction  with  the  existing  United  States 
service  from  Great  Falls  to  Lethbridge. 

Canada  has  received  a  direct  route  from  Mont- 
real to  New  York  which  will  directly  parallel  the 
existing  United  States  route  between  New  York 
and  Montreal. 

Under  these  arrangements  carriers  of  both  coun- 
tries may  both  operate  between  the  largest  city 
in  the  United  States  and  the  two  largest  cities  in 
Canada.  In  other  respects  the  existing  pattern  of 
transborder  services  is  not  changed. 

In  addition  the  United  States  has  been  gi-anted 
two  international  through  routes,  the  first  from 
the  United  States  through  Gander,  Newfoundland, 
and  on  across  the  Atlantic  and  the  second  from 
the  United  States  through  Edmonton  to  Alaska 
and  the  Orient.  United  States  carriers  on  these 
routes  may  pick  up  and  set  down  traffic  at  Gander 
and  at  Edmonton. 

Canada  has  been  granted  a  through  route  to 
Hawaii  and  on  to  Australasia  and  a  through  route 
to  Florida  and  on  to  the  Caribbean.  On  these 
routes  Canadian  carriers  may  pick  up  and  set  down 
traffic  at  Honolulu  and  at  Tampa-St.  Petersburg, 
Florida. 

The  chairmen  of  the  two  delegations  expressed 
gi'eat  satisfaction  at  the  conclusion  of  the  negotia- 
tions and  stated  their  belief  that  the  new  agree- 
ment is  a  fair  and  reasonable  arrangement,  which 
will  add  to  the  already  excellent  record  of  close 
and  friendly  aviation  relations  between  the  two 
countries. 

The  agreement  was  signed  at  Ottawa  on  June  4 
on  behalf  of  the  United  States  by  Russell  B. 
Adams,  chairman  of  the  United  States  delegation 
and  member  of  the  Civil  Aeronautics  Board  and  on 
behalf  of  the  Government  of  Canada  by  John 
Baldwin,  chairman  of  the  Air  Transport  Board. 

An  exchange  of  notes  concerning  the  use  of  cer- 
tain leased  bases  was  also  entered  into,  the  notes 
being  signed  for  the  United  States  by  Ambassador 
Laurence  A.  Steinhardt  and  for  Canada  by  A.  D. 
P.  Heeney,  Under  Secretary  of  State  for  External 
Affairs. 

June  12,  1949 


THE  DEPARTMENT 
Appointment  of  Officers 

John  B.  Howard  as  Special  Assistant  to  the  Secretary 
of  State  to  assist  the  Assistant  Secretary  for  Congressional 
Relations,  Ernest  A.  Gross,  effective  May  23,  1949. 

Douglas  MacArthur  as  chief  of  the  Division  of  Western 
European  Affairs,  effective  May  16,  1949. 


PUBLICATIONS 
Department  of  State 

For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  Government 
Printing  Office,  Washington  25,  D.  C.  Address  requests 
direct  to  the  Superintendent  of  Documents,  except  in  the 
case  of  free  publications,  which  may  be  obtained  from  the 
Department  of  State. 

Mexican  Agricultural  Workers :  Legal  Employment  of  Cer- 
tain Workers  Who  Entered  the  State  of  Texas  Illegally. 

Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series  1858.  Pub. 
3433.    6  pp.    5<f. 

Supplementary  Agreement  between  the  United  States 
and  Mexico— Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at 
Mexico  City  March  10,  1947 ;  entered  into  force  March 
10,  1947. 

United  States  Participation  in  the  United  Nations :  Report 
by  the  President  to  the  Congress  for  the  Year  1948.  Inter- 
national Organization  and  Conference  Series  III,  29.  Pub. 
3437.    33  pp.    55(f. 

Report  by  the  President  to  the  Congress  for  the  year 
1948  on  the  activities  of  the  United  Nations  and  the 
participation  of  the  United  States  therein. 

Relief  Supplies  and  Packages  for  the  Netherlands :  Duty- 
Free  Entry  Payment  of  Transportation  Charges.  Treaties 
and  Other  International  Acts  Series  1881.  Pub.  3452.  7 
pp.    50. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  the  Nether- 
lands— Effected  by  the  exchange  of  notes  signed  at 
The  Hague  January  17,  1949 ;  entered  into  force  Jan- 
uary 17,  1949. 

Passport  Visas :  Waiver  for  American  Citizens  Proceeding 
to  Spitsbergen,  Jan  Mayen,  and  Certain  Norwegian  De- 
pendencies. Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts  Series 
1S84.    Pub.  3458.    1  p.    50. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Norway — 
Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  dated  at  Washington 
September  10  and  October  19,  1948 ;  entered  into  force 
October  19,  1949. 

Assistance  to  the  People  of  Italy  Under  Public  Law  389, 
80th  Congress.  Treaties  and  Other  International  Acts 
Series  1885.     Pub.  3459.    3  pp.     5!* 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Italy  Ex- 
tending Agreement  of  January  3,  1948 — Effected  by 
exchange  of  notes  verbales  dated  at  Rome  December 

30,  1948;  entered  into  force  December  30,  1948. 

Exchange  of  Official  Publications.  Treaties  and  Other 
International  Acts  Series  1894.     Pub.  3472.     3  pp.     50. 

Agreement  between  the  United  States  and  Ceylon — 
Effected  by  exchange  of  notes  signed  at  Colombo 
January  7  and  31,  1949;  entered  into  force  January 

31,  1949. 

767 


m^mMi.^^'y-m.-^-::' 


^4>n£€/n/6/ 


The  United  Nations  and  Page 

Specialized  Agencies 

Consultation  Between  Economic  and  Social 
Council  and  Nongovernmental  Organ- 
izations.    Compiled  by  Kathleen  Bell  .        739 

Summary  of  Important  Decisions  of  the 
Second  Part  of  the  Third  Session  of  the 
General  Assembly.  Texts  of  Resolu- 
tions Adopted  by  the  General  Assembly.        745 

U.N.  Documents:  A  Selected  Bibliography  .        749 

The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations  .    .        750 

General  Policy 

The  Atmosphere  of  Neighborliness  Between 
American  States.  By  Ambassador  Ellis 
O.  Briggs 752 

U.S.  Notes  to  Bulgaria,  Hungary,  and 
Rumania  Invoke  Peace  Treaty  Clauses 
To  Settle  Disputes  on  Violating  Human 

Freedoms 755 

Statement  by  Acting  Secretary  Webb.  .    .        759 

Labor  Strikes  in  Bolivian  Tin-Mining  Areas: 

Statement  by  Acting  Secretary  Webb  .    .        764 
American  Fatalities 764 

American  Community  Activities  Continue 
in  Shanghai.  Statement  by  John  M. 
Cabot 765 

Siam  Officially  Changed  to  Thailand  ....        765 

Letters  of  Credence:  Hashemite  Jordan  King- 
dom          765 


Treaty  Information  Page 

U.S.  Notes  to  Bulgaria,  Hungary,  and 
Rumania  Invoke  Peace  Treaty  Clauses 
To  Settle  Disputes  on  Violating  Human 

Freedoms 755 

Statement  by  Acting  Secretary  Webb  .    .        759 

Northwest     Atlantic     Fisheries     Convention 

Transmitted  to  the  Senate 765 

Convention  With  Costa  Rica  EstabUshing 
Inter-American  Tropical  Tuna  Com- 
mission         766 

Air     Transport     Agreement     With     Canada 

Signed 766 

Cuba  Grants  Renegotiations  of  Certain  Tariff 

Concessions 766 

Economic  Affairs 

Goals  and  Practical  Problems  of  the  Point-4 
Program.  Address  by  John  R.  Steel- 
man  760 

The  Department 

Appointment  of  Officers 767 

Publications 

Department  of  State 767 


r. 


mnlmmdcyyi 


The  compilation  on  Consultation  Between  Ecosoc  and  Nongov- 
ernmental Organizations  was  prepared  by  Kathleen  Bell,  Assist- 
ant for  International  Organizations  Affairs  in  the  Division  of 
United  Nations  Economic  and  Social  Affairs,  Office  of  United 
Nations  Affairs,  Department  of  State. 


RNMENT  PRINTII 


^ne^  ^eha^tmmii/  /(w  t/va^e^ 


ESSENTIAL    ELEMENTS    OF    LASTING 

PEACE  •  Address  by  President  Truman     ....  771 

U.  S.  POLICY  TOWARD  KOREA  •  President's 
Message  to  Congress  for  Continuing  Economic 
Assistance ,    .    .    .   781 

IRON  CURTAINS   •  By  Assistant  Secretary  Thorp   .  797 

PERPETUAL  PEACE  THROUGH  WORLD- 
WIDE FEDERATION  •  By  Assistant  Secretary 
Allen     801 


For  complete  contents  see  back  cover 


Vol.  XX,  No.  520 
June  19, 1949 


tt.  S.  SUV^RINTFI(t(tf«f  0^  UOtUMUtU 

JUL  15  1949 


*^^y^..  bulletin 


Vol.  XX,  No.  520    •    Publication  3543 
June  19,  1949 


For  sale  by  the  8up«rlnten(Jent  of  Documenti 

U.S.  Govemmfnt  PrlnllnR  Office 

Washington  26,  D.O. 

Price: 

62  Issun,  domestic  $6,  foreign  $7.2£ 

Single  copy,  16  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has 
been  approved  by  the  Director  of  the 
Bureau  otthe  Budget  (FebruarylS,  1949). 

Note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  DEPiRiMKNT 
or  State  Bulletin  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BULLETIN, 
a  meekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publication; 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  uiith  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  tcork  of  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETIN  includes 
press  releases  on  foreign  policy  issued 
by  the  trhite  House  and  the  Depart- 
ment, and  statements  and  addresses 
made  by  the  President  and  by  the 
Secretary  of  State  and  other  officers 
of  the  Department,  as  tcell  as  special 
articles  on  various  phases  of  inter- 
national affairs  and  the  function*  of 
the  Department.  Information  is  in- 
cluded concerning  treaties  and  in- 
ternational agreements  to  tchich  the 
United  States  is  or  may  become  a 
party  and  treaties  of  general  inter- 
national interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
tcell  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


Essential  Elements  of  Lasting  Peace 

ADDRESS  BY  PRESIDENT  TRUMAN' 


We  are  here  to  dedicate  this  beautiful  park  to 
the  memory  of  the  dead  of  two  World  Wars. 

The  brave  men  who  lost  their  lives  in  those  wars 
would  approve  of  the  way  you  have  chosen  to 
honor  them.  This  park  will  be  a  place  of  rest  and 
recreation.  It  is  fitting  that  a  war  memorial 
should  be  something  that  can  be  used  and  enjoyed 
by  the  people.  Nothing  could  be  more  appro- 
priate than  to  devote  a  war  memorial  to  those 
values  of  human  life  which  our  soldiers  died  to 
preserve — the  values  of  freedom  and  peace. 

We  are  not  a  militaristic  country.  We  do  not 
glorify  the  military  way  of  life.  Some  nations 
have  taken  greater  pride  in  their  military  victories 
than  in  any  other  national  achievements,  but  it 
has  never  been  so  with  us.  Wlien  we  think  of 
war,  it  is  with  a  prayer  that  the  sacrifices  our  dead 
have  made  will  never  have  to  be  repeated. 

After  every  war  we  have  solemnly  resolved  to 
prevent  future  wars.  We  have  learned,  however, 
that  it  is  not  enough  to  make  resolutions.  It  is  not 
enough  to  utter  them  in  speeches  or  to  engrave  them 
on  monuments.  We  have  learned  that  we  must 
devote  the  best  efforts  of  our  whole  nation  to  make 
those  resolutions  come  true. 

We  entered  the  first  World  War  to  restore  peace 
and  to  preserve  human  freedom;  but  when  that 
war  was  finished,  we  turned  aside  from  the  task 
we  had  begun.  We  turned  our  backs  upon  the 
League  of  Nations — the  international  organization 
which  was  established  to  maintain  peace.  We  ig- 
nored the  economic  problems  of  the  world,  and 
adopted  a  tariff  policy  which  only  made  them 
worse.  We  let  our  domestic  affairs  fall  into  the 
hands  of  selfish  interests. 

We  failed  to  join  with  others  to  take  the  steps 
which  might  have  prevented  a  second  world  war. 

This  time  we  are  fully  aware  of  the  mistakes  that 
were  made  in  the  past.  We  are  on  guard  against 
the  indifference  and  isolationism  which  can  only 
lead  to  the  tragedy  of  war.  This  time  we  will  not 
let  our  decisions  be  made  for  us  by  a  little  group 
of  men  wlio  are  concerned  only  with  their  own 
special  interests. 

This  time  we  have  taken  vigorous  and  far-seeing 
measures  to  preserve  peace  and  restore  prosperity 
throughout  the  world.  We  have  assumed  the  re- 
sponsibility that  I  believe  God  intended  this  great 
republic  to  assume  after  the  first  World  War.  We 
have  shouldered  the  enormous  responsibilities  that 
go  with  our  tremendous  strength. 

We  have  been  fortunate  in  having  many  public 

June    19,    1949 


servants  of  ability  and  vision  who  have  devoted 
themselves  to  the  problems  of  foreign  affairs  and 
national  defense.  We  have  able  leaders  in  the 
Congress,  who  have  mastered  the  complex  details 
of  our  relations  with  other  nations.  They  have 
made  themselves  familiar  with  the  effects  of  our 
policies  in  all  parts  of  the  globe.  They  have 
labored  painstakingly  to  enact  a  body  of  legisla- 
tion to  carry  out  the  responsibilities  we  have 
assumed. 

Most  significant  of  all,  the  people  of  this  country 
understand  tlie  supreme  importance  of  our  foreign 
policy  and  the  gi-eat  objectives  toward  which  we 
are  moving.  Public  debate  has  threshed  out  the 
basic  questions  of  our  foreign  policy.  The  people 
have  made  up  their  minds.  They  have  supported, 
and  will  continue  to  support,  the  measures  neces- 
sary to  maintain  peace. 

We  have  had  to  work  for  peace  in  the  face  of 
troubled  conditions  and  against  Communist  pres- 
sures. But  because  we  have  been  united  in  our 
determination  to  use  our  strength  and  our  sub- 
stance, we  have  already  turned  the  tide  in  favor 
of  freedom  and  peace.  The  disintegration  of  the 
democracies  of  Europe  has  been  halted.  Free 
peoples  in  many  parts  of  the  world  have  been  given 
new  hope  and  new  confidence.  The  restoration  of 
a  system  of  world  trade  has  begun.  And  all  this 
has  been  accomplished  without  closing  the  door 
to  peaceful  negotiation  of  the  differences  between 
the  free  nations  and  the  Soviet  Union. 

But  we  are  only  midway  in  carrying  out  our 
policy.  We  liave  a  long  way  to  go  before  we  can 
make  the  free  world  secure  against  the  social 
and  political  evils  on  which  Communism  thrives. 
The  cause  of  peace  and  freedom  is  still  threatened. 

Yet  there  are  some  who  have  grown  weary  of 
the  effort  we  are  making.  There  are  voices  which 
claim  that  because  our  policy  has  been  successful 
so  far,  we  can  now  afford  to  relax.  There  are  some 
who  want  to  slash  the  aid  we  are  giving  to  the 
economic  recovery  of  other  nations ;  tnere  are  some 
who  want  to  reject  the  measures  that  are  necessary 
for  defense  against  aggression ;  there  are  some  who 
wish  to  abandon  our  efforts  toward  the  revival 
of  world  trade.  These  are  the  same  voices  that 
misled  us  in  the  1920's.  They  are  misguided  by 
shoi-t-run  considerations.  Tliey  refuse  to  face  the 
plain  facts.  They  try  to  convince  us  that  we  can- 
not afford  to  pay  the  price  of  peace. 

'  Delivered  in  Little  Rock,  Ark.,  on  June  11,  1949,  and 
released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  on  the  same  date. 


But  the  people  of  the  United  States  will  not  be 
misled  a  second  time.  We  know  that  the  short- 
sighted course,  the  easy  way,  is  not  the  path  to 
peace.  The  path  is  difficult  and  requires  firm  de- 
termination and  steadfast  effort. 

We  know  that  if  we  are  to  build  a  lasting  peace 
in  the  world  we  must  achieve  three  essential 
conditions. 

First,  this  nation  must  be  strong  and  prosperous. 

Second,  other  nations  devoted  to  the  cause  of 
peace  and  freedom  must  also  be  strong  and 
prosperous. 

Third,  there  must  be  an  international  structure 
capable  of  adjusting  international  differences  and 
maintaining  peace. 

The  first  condition  is  our  own  strength  and 
prosperity. 

It  is  unusual  for  this  nation  to  maintain  sub- 
stantial armed  forces  in  time  of  peace.  Yet,  so 
long  as  there  is  a  threat  to  the  principles  of  peace — 
the  principles  on  which  the  United  Nations  is 
founded — we  must  maintain  strong  armed  forces. 
Any  uncertainty  as  to  the  ability  or  the  willing- 
ness of  the  free  nations  of  the  world  to  defend 
themselves  is  an  invitation  to  aggression.  We 
have  seen  the  truth  of  this  statement  in  the  out- 
break of  two  World  Wars. 

Our  national  strength  is  not,  however,  simply 
a  matter  of  weapons  and  trained  men.    Even  more 
important  are  our  economic  growth  and  continued 
prosperity, 
peace.     The  task  is  difiicult  and  requires  firm  de- 

Our  economy  is  the  center  of  a  world  economy. 
The  hope  of  economic  revival  throughout  the 
world  depends  in  large  measure  upon  the  pros- 
perity of  the  United  States.  If  our  production 
and  purchasing  power  are  badly  impaired,  if  the 
buying  and  selling  and  investing  that  we  do  in 
other  parts  of  the  world  are  cut  off,  other  nations 
will  be  plunged  into  chaos  and  despair. 

It  is  a  prime  belief  of  the  Communist  philos- 
ophy that  our  kind  of  economy  is  doomed  to 
failure.  The  Communists  predict  that  our  pros- 
perity will  collapse — bringing  the  rest  of  the  free 
world  down  with  it.  But  they  are  wrong — wrong 
as  they  can  be. 

We  know  more  today  about  keeping  our  econ- 
omy strong  than  we  have  ever  known  before.  We 
know  how  to  strengthen  our  economy  through  the 
expansion  of  production  and  purchasing  power 
and  the  improvement  of  standards  of  living.  We 
understand  that  constantly  rising  national  output, 
increasing  real  wages,  and  a  fair  income  for 
farmers  are  basic  elements  of  our  economic 
strength. 

To  maintain  these  elements  of  prosperity,  it  is 
not  sufficient  to  drift  with  the  tide.  We  must 
take  advantage  of  the  new  opportunities,  the  in- 
creased demands  which  result  from  the  natural 
growth  of  our  population.  We  must  develop  our 
natural  resources  and  restore  those  we  have  de- 
pleted or  wasted.  We  must  establish  a  fair  dis- 
tribution of  business  opportunity;  we  must  have 


a  free  labor  movement  able  to  hold  its  own  at  the 
bargaining  table;  we  must  protect  the  purchasing 
power  of  Americans  against  the  hazards  and  mis- 
fortunes of  life. 

These  steps  are  necessary  if  we  are  to  continue 
strong  and  prosperous.  That  is  why  our  domestic 
programs  for  the  development  of  resources,  for 
protection  against  economic  hazards,  for  the  im- 
provement of  social  conditions,  are  fundamental 
to  our  national  effort  for  peace. 

The  second  condition  essential  to  peace  is  that 
other  nations,  as  well  as  our  own,  must  be  strong 
and  prosperous. 

We  need  other  nations  as  our  allies  in  the  cause 
of  human  freedom.  We  have  seen  free  nations 
lost  to  the  democratic  way  of  life  because  of 
economic  disaster.  We  know  that  despair  over 
economic  conditions  will  turn  men  away  from  free- 
dom and  into  the  hands  of  dictators. 

It  is  to  our  interest,  therefore,  to  aid  other  na- 
tions to  restore  and  maintain  their  economic 
health.  Our  aim  is  not  only  to  help  other  nations 
to  help  themselves,  but  also  to  encourage  economic 
cooperation  among  them. 

We  have  taken  the  lead  in  cooperating  with 
other  nations  to  restore  a  mutually  beneficial  sys- 
tem of  world  trade.  No  nation  today  can  achieve 
prosperity  in  isolation.  Only  through  participa- 
tion in  the  trade  of  the  world  can  a  country  raise 
its  own  standards  of  living  and  contribute  to  the 
welfare  of  other  nations. 

For  years  before  the  war,  world  trade  was 
crippled  by  high  tariffs,  import  quotas,  exchange 
manipulation,  and  other  artificial  devices  for  se- 
curing commercial  advantage.  These  practices 
were  a  symptom  of  international  anarchy.  They 
resulted,  ultimately,  in  idle  ships,  idle  men,  and 
economic  chaos. 

We  have  come  a  long  way  toward  correcting 
these  evils.  Since  1934,  we  have  worked  out  a 
multitude  of  agreements  with  other  countries  to 
reduce  specific  tariff  barriers.  In  the  General 
Agreement  on  Tariffs  and  Trade  of  1948,  we  struck 
a  world-wide  blow  at  these  obstacles  to  trade. 

But  this  work  is  not  yet  finished.  If  we  are  to 
succeed  it  is  vital  that  the  authority  to  negotiate 
reciprocal-trade  agreements  be  extended.  We 
should  then  go  on  to  establish  a  permanent  inter- 
national trade  organization  to  apply  standards  of 
fair  dealing  in  the  commerce  among  nations. 

The  same  cooperative  principle  has  been  ap- 
plied in  our  great  undertaking  to  restore  the  econ- 
omies of  the  Western  European  nations  to  a  self- 
sustaining  basis.  The  food,  fuel,  and  equipment 
which  we  have  sent  to  Europe  have  been  matched 
by  the  efforts  which  these  nations  have  made  to 
restore  their  own  economies  and  to  cooperate  with 
one  another  in  increasing  their  production  and 
raising  their  standards  of  living. 

It  is  fair  to  say  that  the  European  Recovery 
Program  has  halted  the  social  and  economic  disin- 
tegration which  threatened  the  countries  of  West- 
ern Europe  with  Communism  and  civil  strife. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Nevertheless,  the  European  Recovery  Program 
is  still  in  its  early  stages.  At  the  outset  it  was  esti- 
mated that  it  would  take  four  years  before  these 
countries  could  again  become  independent  of  spe- 
cial economic  aid.  Only  a  little  more  than  one 
year  has  passed  since  we  began. 

If  we  were  to  falter  now  and  cut  down  our  aid, 
the  momentum  of  recoveiy  would  be  destroyed. 
The  people  of  these  countries  would  be  thrown 
into  confusion,  and  their  advance  toward  eco- 
nomic self-reliance  would  be  blocked.  A  slash  in 
the  funds  available  for  European  recovery  at  this 
time  would  be  the  worst  kind  of  false  economy. 
It  would  cancel  the  hopes  and  the  plans  of  the 
Western  European  nations.  It  would  be  a  great 
gain  for  Communism. 

I  am  confident  we  shall  not  make  this  mistake. 

Our  concern  with  the  economic  health  of  the 
world  also  extends  to  its  underdeveloped  regions. 
The  prospects  for  peace  will  be  immeasurably 
brighter  if  we  can  oner  a  future  of  hope  and  a  bet- 
ter life  to  the  people  of  these  regions.  In  these 
areas  there  are  millions  who  for  centuries  have 
known  nothing  but  exploitation  and  poverty,  and 
whose  economic  life  is  still  primitive. 

I  have  offered  a  program  for  bringing  these 
people  the  benefits  of  our  modern  civilization. 
It  is  not  a  program  of  relief.  While  it  is  intended 
ultimately  to  bring  about  a  great  movement  of  cap- 
ital through  the  channels  of  private  investment  for 
the  development  of  these  poverty-stricken  regions, 
it  is  not  a  program  of  imperialism.  The  develop- 
ment of  these  areas  offers  enormous  potential 
benefits  to  a  growing  world  economy. 

We  have  to  lay  the  foundations  for  this  pro- 
gram with  care.  I  expect  shortly  to  send  to  the 
Congress  recommendations  for  initial  legislation. 
This  will  be  but  the  first  step  of  many  that  we  shall 
take,  over  the  years  to  come,  in  this  cooperative 
effort  to  better  the  living  standards  and  to  unlock 
the  human  skills  and  the  natural  i-esources  of  the 
underdeveloped  parts  of  the  globe. 

The  third  condition  essential  for  peace  is  an 
international  structure  capable  of  suppressing 
international  violence.  However  well  conceived 
our  economic  programs  may  be,  they  cannot  suc- 
ceed unless  there  is  some  assurance  against  the 
outbreak  of  aggression.  Neither  our  own  pros- 
perity nor  the  prosperity  of  other  nations  can 
survive  unless  we  can  protect  the  operations  of 
economic  life  from  the  threat  of  war. 

Such  protection  depends  on  two  factors.  First, 
there  must  be  constant  efforts  by  all  nations  to 
adjust  their  differences  peacefully.  Second,  there 
must  be  an  agreement  among  nations  to  employ 
overwhelming  force  against  armed  aggression. 

The  United  Nations  is  a  valuable  instrument 
for  accomplishing  these  ends.  It  has  already 
achieved  the  peaceful  settlement  of  difficult  issues. 
It  has  stopped  hostilities  in  the  Near  East  and  in 
Indonesia.  It  has  done  a  great  deal  to  explore 
and  find  solutions  for  many  of  the  economic  and 
social  problems  which  afilict  the  world. 

June    79,   1949 


Much  remains  to  be  done,  however,  to  carry  out 
the  principles  of  the  United  Nations.  Within  the 
terms  of  the  United  Nations  Charter,  we  and  cer- 
tain other  countries  have  undertaken  to  provide 
greater  assurance  against  the  danger  of  armed 
conflict.  That  is  the  purpose  of  the  North  At- 
lantic Treaty.  The  idea  behind  this  treaty — the 
association  of  democratic  nations  for  mutual 
defense — is  well  understood  in  this  country.  Per- 
haps we  do  not  understand,  however,  the  impor- 
tance of  this  pact  in  the  eyes  of  the  other  demo- 
cratic nations  which  are  parties  to  it.  They  have 
been  greatly  weakened  by  the  war.  They  have 
been  haunted  by  the  fear  of  again  becoming  the 
scene  of  conflict.  By  assuring  them  of  our  sup- 
port the  pact  goes  a  long  way  to  dispel  their  fears. 

I  have  been  greatly  heartened  by  the  unanimous 
report  of  the  Foreign  Relations  Committee  of  the 
Senate  this  past  week  in  favor  of  the  North  At- 
lantic Treaty.  I  believe  that  it  will  soon  be  passed 
by  an  overwhelming  majority  in  the  Senate.  The 
effect  of  this  action  will  be  immediate  and  far- 
reaching  in  allaying  the  fears  which  have  retarded 
economic  recovery  in  Europe. 

It  is  of  vital  importance  that  the  Atlantic  pact 
be  followed  by  a  program  of  military  aid  to  in- 
crease the  effective  strength  of  the  free  nations 
against  aggression.  This  military  assistance  pro- 
gram— based  upon  mutual  help — will  give  addi- 
tional confidence  to  the  people  of  those  nations  as 
they  continue  to  rebuild  their  economies. 

These  measures  will  bring  a  stability  to  the 
democratic  nations  of  Europe,  which  has  not  ex- 
isted since  the  end  of  the  war.  They  will  at  the 
same  time  contribute  directly  to  the  security  of  the 
United  States. 

I  have  discussed  the  three  essential  elements  of 
lasting  peace — a  strong  and  prosperous  United 
States ;  a  strong  and  prosperous  community  of  free 
nations ;  an  international  organization  capable  of 
preventing  aggression. 

We  have  given  greatly  of  our  effort  and  our 
strength  to  build  a  firm  and  enduring  foreign  pol- 
icy upon  these  essentials.  The  burdens  we  have 
had  to  assume  in  this  enterprise  have  been  un- 
usual. The  size  of  the  national  budget  shows  that 
we  are  engaged  in  an  undertaking  without  parallel 
in  the  history  of  our  country  or  of  the  world. 

But  the  goal  we  seek  is  a  great  one,  and  worth 
the  price.  Never  has  a  nation  had  the  opportunity 
which  we  have  today  to  do  so  much  for  the  peace 
and  prosperity  of  mankind.  Never  has  a  nation 
had  a  better  chance  of  reaching  this  high  goal. 

We  must  not  falter  now. 

We  must  not  defeat  our  own  efforts  by  doing 
only  half  the  job  that  lies  before  us. 

The  brave  men,  whose  memory  we  honor  here, 
did  all  that  was  required  of  them.  They  did  not 
fail  us.  We  must  not  fail  them  in  our  efforts  to 
reach  the  goal  for  which  they  died. 

We  must  press  on  in  the  confidence  that  we  will 
succeed  in  the  mission  a  divine  Providence  has 
assigned  to  us. 


THE  UNITED  NATIONS  AND  SPECIALIZED  AGENCIES 


U.S.-U.N.  Cooperation  in  Point-4  Program 


STATEMENT    BY    ACTING    SECRETARY     WEBB 

(Released  to  the  press  June  S] 

The  plan  announced  by  Secretary-General  Lie 
for  an  expanded  program  of  technical  assistance 
for  economic  development  to  be  carried  out 
through  the  United  Nations  and  specialized  agen- 
cies was  prepared  in  response  to  a  resolution  in- 
troduced by  the  United  States  at  the  eighth 
meeting  of  the  United  Nations  Economic  and 
Social  Council  at  Lake  Success,  in  February  of 
this  year.'  It  will  be  discussed  at  the  Ninth 
Meeting  of  the  UN-Ecosoc,  which  will  convene  in 
July  at  Geneva,  and  its  various  parts  will  also  be 
considered  by  the  various  specialized  agencies  who 
participated  in  preparing  it. 

It  is  the  intention  of  this  government  to  co- 
operate wholeheartedly  with  the  United  Nations  in 
tnis  program.  As  President  Truman  pointed  out 
in  his  inaugural  address,  "This  should  be  a  co- 
operative enterprise  in  wliich  all  nations  work 
together  through  the  United  Nations  and  its 
specialized  agencies  wherever  practicable."  We 
hope  that  other  governments  will  also  participate 
extensively  in  this  program,  as  they  do  in  the 
other  activities  of  the  United  Nations  and  its 
specialized  agencies. 

The  appropriations  requested  from  Congress  to 
carrv  out  the  Point-4  Program  will  include  funds 
for  United  States  participation  in  the  technical 
assistance  activities  of  the  United  Nations  and  its 
specialized  agencies.  It  is  anticipated  that  there 
will  be  a  substantial  need  for  additional  technical 
cooperation  activities,  carried  out  on  a  bilateral 
basis,  to  supplement  the  many  activities  to  be 
carried  out  through  the  United  Nations  and  other 
international  organizations. 

WORLD   RESPONSE  TO  THE  POINT-4  PROGRAM 

Interview  with  Assiifant  Secretary  Thorp  over 
the  Voice  of  America  ^ 

Mr.  Qxjeen  [Economic  Commentator] :  Good 
evening.  In  the  next  few  days,  the  American 
Congress  will  be  asked  to  approve  legislation  pro- 
viding technical  assistance  and  fostering  capital 
investment  for  the  less  developed  areas  of  the 
world. 

Here  is  what  you  might  call  the  first  concrete, 
global  application  of  what  President  Truman 
meant  when  he  said  last  January  20th :  "Our  aim 
should  be  to  help  the  free  peoples  of  the  world, 
through  their  own  efforts,  to  produce  more  food. 


more  clothing,  more  materials  for  housing,  and 
more  technical  power  to  lighten  their  burdens." 

In  a  sense,  this  idea  of  a  first  program  is  mis- 
leading. In  one  area,  Latin  America,  this  country 
has  over  the  past  decade  exchanged  its  skills  and 
knowledge  with  20  other  nations — teaching 
farmers  how  to  grow  different  and  more  foods, 
wiping  out  century-old  diseases,  bringing  new 
tools  and  techniques  to  our  neighbors  to  the  south 
and  showing  their  peoples  how  to  use  them. 

The  idea  of  a  program  is  misleading  in  a  deeper 
sense.  For  this  is  not  a  single  plan  or  even  a 
series  of  plans.  What  we  are  seeing  here  is  the 
emergence  of  a  policy  that  will  extend  to  virtually 
every  aspect  of  American  foreign  relations — with 
people  as  much  as  countries.  It  is  a  recognition 
of  the  fact  that  where  the  threat  of  oppression, 
ignorance,  hunger,  and  despair  grip  any  segment 
of  the  free  world,  they  menace  the  welfare  and 
liberties  of  everyone,  everywhere — this  nation 
included. 

What  is  developing  in  Washington,  therefore, 
is  not  simply  one  program  with  a  beginning  and 
an  end  but  a  basic  and  major  element  of  American 
foreign  policy.  Although  some  parts  of  it  will 
produce  results  relatively  quickly,  its  operation 
will  extend  over  many  decades  and  in  many  ways. 

There  are  two  other  points  to  note  about  this 
policy  and  program.  First,  it  is  cooperative.  The 
United  States  is  joining  with  other  countries  and 
the  LTnited  Nations  to  bring  into  play  the  full  use 
of  all  skills  of  all  countries. 

The  second  point  is  that  the  program  will  be 
called  into  action  only  by  the  choice  and  willing- 
ness of  the  nations  desiring  such  help.  This 
assistance,  moreover,  whether  in  the  lorm  of 
technical  aid  or  measures  to  encourage  capital 
investment  cannot  be  effective  unless  it  is  based 
on  and  supported  by  the  resources,  funds  and 
determination  on  the  part  of  the  countries  and 
the  peoples  themselves. 

As  experts  in  Washington  see  it,  here  lie  the 
possibilities  for  the  greatest  advances  in  world 
health   and  security.     Any   attempt  to   measure 

'  Technical  Assistance  for  Economic  Development: 
Plan  for  an  expanded  co-operative  programme  through 
the  United  'Nations  and  the  speeialised  agencies.  [V.  N. 
doc.  1327/Adrl.  1,  May  1949]  viii,  329  pp.  Printod.  $2.50. 
For  text  of  resolutions  relating  to  economic  development, 
see  Bulletin  of  Mar.  20,  1949,  p.  300. 

'  Given  over  the  Voice  of  America  short-wave  s.vstem  on 
June  9,  1949,  and  released  to  the  press  on  the  same  date. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


these  in  terms  of  money  expenditures  is  short- 
sighted and  incorrect.  How  do  you  measure  the 
elimination  of  cholera,  typhus,  or  bubonic  plague 
for  hundreds  of  thousands  of  humans,  who,  on  the 
average,  have  never  lived  beyond  the  age  of  thirty  ? 
A  small  group  of  men  will  instruct  some  hundreds 
of  others  on  methods  of  improving  crop  pro- 
duction by  20  or  30  or  50  percent.  These  hundreds, 
in  turn,  pass  on  their  knowledge  to  thousands.  A 
pilot  plant,  small  in  cost  and  operation,  shows 
manufacturers  new  uses  for  local  resources.  How 
do  you  estimate,  in  money,  the  ultimate  value  of 
these  operations? 

We  are  fortunate  in  having  with  us  today  in  the 
Voice  of  America  studios  in  Washington,  the  man 
responsible  for  developing  this  new  concept  in 
American  foreign  policy — Willard  L.  Thorp, 
Assistant  Secretary  of  State  for  Economic  Affairs. 

Mr.  Thorp,  what  has  been  the  response  thus  far 
to  President  Truman's  program? 

Mk.  Thorp:  I  should  start  by  saying  that  not 
only  since  the  President's  speech  but  for  the  past  4 
years,  I  have  had  callers  from  countries  in  all 
parts  of  the  world  telling  me  about  their  hopes 
and  needs  in  the  field  of  economic  development. 
These  haven't  been  merely  the  point  of  view  of 
some  government  officials.  They  usually  repre- 
sent the  needs  and  aspirations  of  the  people  them- 
selves back  in  the  home  country  who  are  demand- 
ing that  their  governments  find  ways  and  means 
of  bringing  economic  betterment  to  their  lives. 
Of  course,  since  the  President's  speech,  these  re- 
quests to  the  American  Government  have  multi- 
plied considerably.  Almost  every  week  we  get 
new  messages  from  our  embassies  from  covmtries 
asking  for  information  and  proposing  specific 
projects  for  development.  Last  week  the  Secre- 
tary-General of  the  United  Nations  announced  a 
proposed  program  of  world-wide  technical  assist- 
ance to  be  carried  out  by  the  United  Nations  and 
the  specialized  agencies  and  to  cost  36  million 
dollars  in  1950  and  50  million  dollars  in  1951. 
There  has  never  been  any  question  of  the  interest 
of  other  countries  in  this  program.  The  greatest 
problem  probably  will  be  how  to  make  the  most 
effective  use  of  the  limited  number  of  people  avail- 
able for  the  job.  In  this  case,  however,  we  will 
have  the  assistance  of  the  many  private  organi- 
zations who  already  have  developed  large  pro- 
grams in  health,  education,  and  agriculture  for  all 
parts  of  the  world. 

Mr.  Queen  :  I  gather  that  you  are  speaking  pri- 
marily of  technical  assistance,  Mr.  Thorp.  What 
about  the  question  of  foreign  investments? 

Mr.  Thorp:  Most  responsible  officials  in  these 
countries  clearly  understand  that  the  effectiveness 
of  such  technical  assistance  is  limited  unless  you 
have  capital  investment  to  go  with  it.  I  think 
that  there  is  common  agreement  too,  to  use  Mr. 
Truman's  phrase,  that  the  old  imperialism  is  dead. 
Where  foreign  capital  does  invest  in  a  country, 
it  should  be  run  so  as  to  benefit  the  people  there. 

June   19,   1949 


At  the  same  time,  I  must  point  out  that  in  order 
to  attract  capital  for  the  development  of  a  country, 
conditions  must  exist  for  fair  and  equitable  treat- 
ment of  the  investor — no  unjust  taxation  or  ex- 
cessive interference  in  local  administration,  just 
to  mention  two  instances.  And  let  me  repeat  your 
earlier  point — that  foreign  investments  can  only 
help  start  a  country  on  the  road  to  economic  prog- 
ress. The  people  themselves  must  have  enough 
faith  in  their  future  to  put  their  own  savings  to 
work  in  factories  and  in  the  land.  The  United 
States  got  its  own  start  substantially  through  for- 
eign capital  but  over  the  long  run  it  has  been  the 
money  that  Americans  have  invested  that  really 
has  brought  this  comatry  to  its  present  state  of 
development. 

Mr.  Queen  :  We've  discussed  some  of  the 
broader  aspects  of  Point  Four,  Mr.  Thorp.  Now 
can  you  tell  us  how  the  program  stands  today? 

Mr.  Thorp  :  The  next  step  is  approval  by  Con- 
gress. I  think  it  is  safe  to  say  that  some  of  the 
first  projects  will  get  under  way  a  few  months 
after  passage  of  the  bill.  You  may  be  sure  how- 
ever that  when  the  program  is  approved  we  are 
going  to  make  every  effort  to  do  our  share  to  get 
knowledge  and  help  to  those  areas  of  the  world 
that  need  it  just  as  speedily  as  possible.  Economic 
development  is  a  long,  slow  process,  but  with  full 
cooperation  by  everyone,  I  believe  that  rapid 
progress  can  be  made. 

Current  United  Nations  Documents: 
A  Selected  Bibliography^ 

Security  Council 

Official  Records,  Second  Tear 

• ■  175th  and  176th  meetings :  5  August  1947.     No.  70. 

51  pp.     printed.     500. 

177th  meeting:  6  August  1947.      No.  71.      29  pp. 

printed.     300- 

ITSth  meeting:  7  August  1947.     No.  72.     printed. 

300. 

■ 179th  meeting :  11  August  1947.    No.  73.    printed. 

400. 

180th  and  181st  meetings :  12  August  1947.     No.  74. 

printed.     500. 

. •  lS2d  meeting:   13  August  1947.     No.   75.     22  pp. 

printed.     250. 
■ 183rd  and  lS4th  meetings :  14  August  1947.     No.  76. 

38  pp.     printed.     400. 

lS5th  meeting:  15  August  1947.     No.  77.     26  pp. 

printed.     250. 

• iseth  meeting:  18  August  1947.     No.  78.     29  pp. 

printed.     300. 

187th  and  188th  meetings :  19  August  1947.     No.  79. 

45  pp.     printed.     450. 

lS9th  meeting:  20  August  1947.     No.  80.     14  pp. 

printed.     150. 


'  Printed  materials  may  be  secured  in  the  United  States 
from  the  International  Documents  Service,  Columbia  Uni- 
versity Press,  2960  Broadway,  New  York  27,  N.Y.  Other 
materials  (mimeographed  or  processed  documents)  may 
be  consulted  at  certain  designated  libraries  in  the  United 
States. 

775 


Provisional  Agenda  Ninth  Session  ECOSOC 


D.N.  doc.  B/1326 
Dated  May  23,  1949 

I.  After  consultation  with  the  President,  the 
Secretary-General  has  the  honour  to  submit,  in 
accordance  with  Rules  7,  9  and  10,  the  provisional 
agenda  for  the  ninth  session  of  the  Economic  and 
Social  Council,  commencing  at  11  a.  m.  on  5  July 
1949  at  Geneva. 

1.  Adoption  of  the  agenda 

2.  Report  of  the  ad  hoc  Committee  on  the  factors 
bearing  upon  the  establishment  of  an  Eco- 
nomic Commission  for  the  Middle  East 

3.  Report  of  the  second  session  of  the  Transport 
and  Communications  Commission:  inland 
transport  in  the  Middle  East 

4.  International  facilities  for  the  promotion  of 
.     training  in  public  administration 

5.  Question  of  the  election  of  three  members  of 
the  Economic  Board  for  Palestine 

6.  Report  of  the  Secretary-General  on  housing 
and  town  and  country  planning 

7.  Study  of  statelessness 

8.  Report  of  the  fourth  session  of  the  Economic 
and  Employment  Commission 

9.  Economic  development  of  under-developed 
countries 

10.  Measures  to  increase  availability  of  food 

11.  Availability  of  DDT  insecticides  for  combat- 
ing malaria  in  agricultural  areas 

12.  Report  of  the  third  session  of  the  Transport 
and  Communications  Commission 

13.  Report  of  the  second  session  of  the  Fiscal  Com- 
mission 

14.  Report  of  the  fourth  session  of  the  Statistical 
Commission 

15.  Annual  report  of  the  Economic  Commission 
for  Europe  ^ 

16.  Annual  report  of  the  Economic  Commission 
for  Asia  and  the  Far  East  ^ 

17.  Annual  report  of  the  Economic  Commission 
for  Latin  America  ^ 

18.  Report  of  the  fourth  session  of  the  Population 
Commission 

19.  Report  of  the  fourth  session  of  the  Social 
Commission 

20.  World  social  and  cultural  situation  (General 
Assembly  resolution  of  13  May  1949) 

21.  Social  problems  of  the  aboriginal  populations 
and  other  under-developed  social  groups  of  the 
American  continent  (General  Assembly  reso- 
lution of  11  May  1949) 


'  Including  the  question  of  the  number  of  sessions  In 
1949. 


22.  Report  of  the  fifth  session  of  the  Commission 
on  Human  Rights 

23.  Survey  of  forced  labour  and  measures  for  its 
abolition 

24.  The  problem  of  slavery  (General  Assembly 
resolution  of  13  May  1949) 

25.  Trade  union  rights  (freedom  of  association) 

26.  Report  of  the  ad  hoc  Committee  on  declaration 
of  death  of  missing  persons 

27.  Report  of  the  third  session  of  the  Commission 
on  the  Status  of  Women 

28.  Report  of  the  third  session  of  the  Sub-Com- 
mission on  Freedom  of  Information  and  of  the 
Press 

29.  Freedom  of  information :  Resolutions  from 
the  Final  Act  of  the  United  Nations  Confer- 
ence on  Freedom  of  Information  (General  As- 
sembly resolution  of  13  May  1949) 

30.  (i)    Report  of  the  fourth  session  of  the  Com- 

mission on  Narcotic  Drugs 
(ii)  Question  of  exemption  of  "Valbine"  from 
the  provisions  of  the  Geneva  Convention 
of  1925  on  Narcotic  Drugs.     Item  pro- 
posed by  the  Secretary-General 

31.  Report  of  the  United  Nations  International 
Children's  Emergency  Fund 

32.  Report  of  the  Secretary-General  on  the  United 
Nations  Appeal  for  Children 

33.  Implementation  of  recommendations  on  eco- 
nomic and  social  matters 

34.  Relations  with  and  co-ordination  of  special- 
ized agencies 

35.  Report  of  the  International  Labour  Organisa- 
tion 

36.  Report  of  the  Food  and  Agriculture  Organiza- 
tion of  the  United  Nations 

37.  Report  of  the  United  Nations  Educational, 
Scientific  and  Cultural  Organization 

38.  Report  of  the  World  Health  Organization 

39.  Report  of  the  International  Civil  Aviation 
Organization 

40.  Report  of  the  International  Telecommunica- 
tion Union 

41.  Report  of  the  Universal  Postal  Union 

42.  Report  of  the  International  Refugee  Organi- 
zation 

43.  Relations  with  inter-governmental  organi- 
zations 

44.  Reports  of  the  Council  Committee  on  Non- 
Governmental  Organizations 

45.  Co-ordination  of  cartographic  services  of  spe- 
cialized agencies  and  international  organiza- 
tions 


Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


46.  Use  of  the  Central  Library  at  Geneva  by  the 
United  Nations  and  the  specialized  agencies 

47.  Calendar  of  conferences  for  1950 

48.  Election  of  one-third  of  the  members  of  the 
Economic  and  Employment,  Transport  and 
Communications,  Fiscal,  Statistical,  Popula- 
tion, Social,  Human  Rights,  and  Status  of 
Women  Commissions ;  and  of  fifteen  members 
of  the  Commission  on  Narcotic  Drugs 

49.  Unemployment  and  full  employment.  Item 
proposed  by  the  World  Federation  of  Trade 
Unions 

50.  Summary  of  financial  implications  of  actions 
of  the  Council 

51.  Confirmation  of  members  of  commissions 

52.  Election  of  members  of  the  Agenda  Commit- 
tee for  the  tenth  session 

II.  The  procedure  to  be  followed  by  the  Council 
in  the  consideration  of  the  above  items  will  form 
the  subject  of  recommendations  by  the  Agenda 
Committee  in  accordance  with  Eule  15  of  the  Rules 
of  Procedure  of  the  Council.  The  Agenda  Com- 
mittee (consisting  of  the  President,  the  two  Vice- 
Presidents  of  the  Council  and  the  representatives 
of  Denmark  and  India)  is  scheduled  to  meet  at 
Geneva  on  29  June  1949. 

III.  In  connection  with  the  composition  of  del- 
egations, the  Secretary-General  draws  the  atten- 
tion of  members  of  the  Council  to  his  letter  of  20 
April  1949,  in  which  reference  was  made  to  the 
statement  of  the  President  at  the  278th  meeting  of 
the  eighth  session  of  the  Council  (E/W.ll)  with 
respect  to  the  heavy  agenda  of  the  ninth  session 
and  to  the  necessity  of  holding  six  meetings  a  day, 
i.  e.,  three  meetings  at  a  time,  from  an  early  date 
in  the  session. 

IV.  The  Secretary-General  also  draws  the  at- 
tention of  the  members  of  the  Council  to  resolu- 
tion 218  (VIII)  by  which  the  Council,  in  order 
to  facilitate  the  work  of  the  Agenda  Committee, 
decided  to  invite  members  of  the  Council  to  com- 
municate to  the  Secretary-General  any  comments 
which  they  may  have  on  the  provisional  agenda. 

Notes 

Several  of  the  basic  documents  which  should 
have  been  distributed  on  the  same  date  as  the  pro- 
visional agenda  for  the  ninth  session,  in  applica- 
tion of  Rule  9  of  the  Rules  of  Procedure  of  the 
Council,  will  be  issued  with  some  delay  in  view  of 
the  fact  that  the  facilities  of  the  technical  services 
of  the  Secretariat  were  primarily  at  the  disposal 
of  the  General  Assembly  until  18  May. 

Items 

1.  See  rule  13  of  the  rules  of  procedure. 

2.  Item  postponed  from  the  eighth  session :  see 
E/SR.270. 

Council  resolution  107  (VI) 
General  Assembly  resolution  199  (III) 
E/AC.26/16 ;  Report  of  the  ad  hoc  Committee 
on  the  proposed  economic  commission  for  the 
Middle   East,  distributed  on   3   June   1948, 

June   19,   1949 


E/AC.26/16/Add.3,  E/AC.26/16/Corr.  1 
E/850,  distributed  on  10  July  1948 
E/919:  Letter  from  the  representative  of 
Egypt  concerning  headquarters  of  proposed 
commission,  distributed  on  4  August  1948 
E/814:  Letter  from  the  representative  of 
Pakistan  on  application  of  Pakistan  for  mem- 
bership in  proposed  commission,  distributed 
on  10  June  1948 

3.  Item  postponed  from  the  eighth  session:  see 
E/SR.270 

E/789,  Part  III,  paragraph  2  (a) ,  and  Resolu- 
tion 4,  distributed  on  19  May  1948,  E/789/- 
Add.l  and  E/789/Add.2 

4.  Item  postponed  from  the  eighth  session:  see 
E/SR.227 

General  Assembly  resolution  246  (III) 
Council  resolution  132  (VI) 
E/849 :  Report  of  the  Secretary-General,  dis- 
tributed on  7  July  1948 

E/1336 :  Report  of  the  Secretary-General  dis- 
tributed on  23  May  1949 

5.  Item  postponed  from  the  eighth  session:  see 
E/SR.227 

General  Assembly  resolution  181  (II) 
Special  Assembly  resolution  186  (S-2) 
Council  resolution  112  (VI) 

6.  Item  postponed  from  the  eighth  session:  see 
E/SR.227 

Council  resolution  155  (VII),  F 
E/1107:    Communication    from    the    World 
Health  Organization,  distributed  on  28  Janu- 
ary 1949 

E/1343:  Report  of  the  Secretary-General  to 
be  distributed  in  the  first  week  of  June  1949 

7.  Item  postponed  from  the  eighth  session:  see 
E/SR.227  Council  resolution  116  (VI),  D 
E/1112:  Report  of  the  Secretary-General, 
Part  I,  distributed  on  1  February  1949 
E/1112/Add.l :  Report  of  the  Secretary-Gen- 
eral, Part  II,  to  be  distributed  on  25  May 
1949 

8.  Report  of  the  fourth  session  of  the  Economic 
and  Employment  Commission  to  be  distrib- 
uted after  the  fourth  session  of  the  Commis- 
sion which  convened  on  9  May  1949 

In  connection  with  that  part  of  the  report 
which  deals  with  the  subject  of  economic  sta- 
bility and  full  employment,  the  Council 
received,  under  its  resolution  104  (VI),  doc- 
ument E/1111  and  addenda  1-6  containing 
replies  from  governments  and  specialized 
agencies  to  the  questionnaire  on  this  subject. 
The  analysis  of  these  replies  is  being  com- 
pleted by  the  Secretariat  and  will  be  made 
available  early  in  July 

In  connection  with  Council  resolution  139 
(VII)  on  the  question  of  the  future  organi- 
zation and  terms  of  reference  of  the  Commis- 
sion and  its  Sub-Commissions,  the  views  of 
the  governments  are  contained  in  E/CN.1/63 
and  addenda.    See  also  E/CN.1/62 


9.  (General  Assembly  resolution  200  (III) 

General  Assembly  resolution  of  17  May  1949, 
A/898  19. 

Council    resolutions    179     (VIII)     and    180 
(VIII) 
(i)   E/1345:  Keport  of  the  Secretary-Gen- 
eral,    under     Council     resolution     179 
(VIII),  on  measures  already  devised  by 
the  Council  and  the  specialized  agencies 
to  promote  economic  development  and 
raise  the  standards  of  living  of  under- 
developed countries;  to  be  distributed  on 
27  May  1949 
(ii)   E/1333:  Report  of  the  Secretary-Gen-        20. 
eral,     under     Council     resolution     179 
(VIII),  on  methods  of  financing  eco- 
nomic development  of  under-developed 
countries;  to  be  distributed  on  28  May        21. 
1949 
(iii)   E/1335:  Second  report  of  the  Secretary- 
General,  under  General  Assembly  reso- 
lution 200  (III),  on  technical  assistance        22. 
for  economic  development;  to  be  distrib- 
uted on  25  May  1949 
(iv)   E/1327 :  report   of   the   Secretary-Gen- 
eral,    under     Council     resolution     180 
(VIII),  on  a  comprehensive  plan  for 
an  expanded  co-operative  programme  of 
technical  assistance  for  economic  devel- 
opment; to  be  distributed  on  30  May 
1949 

10.  General  Assembly  resolution  202  (III) 
Council  resolution  183  (VIII) 

E/1339:  Report  of  the  Fag  distributed  on 
23  May  1949 

11.  Council  resolution  184  (VIII)  Report  of  the 
Secretary-General  to  be  distributed  on  25  May 
1949.  03 

12.  E/CN.2/65/Rev.l :  Report  of  the  third  ses- 
sion of  the  Transport  and  Communications 
Commission,  distributed  on  31  March  1949  q, 

13.  E/1104:  Report  of  the  second  session  of  the 
Fiscal  Commission,  distributed  on  3  February 
1949,  E/1104/Add.l  and  E/1104/Corr.l 

14.  E/1312:  Report  of  the  fourth  session  of  the  q. 
Statistical  Commission,  to  be  distributed  on  24  ''^' 
May  1949 

15.  E/1328:  Annual  report  of  the  Economic 
Commission  for  Europe,  to  be  distributed  after 
the  fourth  session  of  the  Commission,  which 
convened  on  9  May  1949 

General  Assembly  resolution  206  (III) 

16.  E/1329 :  Annual  report  of  the  Economic  Com- 
mission for  Asia  and  the  Far  East,  including 
the  report  of  the  Committee  of  the  Whole, 
to  be  distributed  on  30  May  1949 

General  Assembly  resolution  206  (III) 

17.  E/1330:  Annual  report  of  the  Economic  Com-        27. 
mission  for  Latin  America,  to  be  distributed 
after  the  second  session  of  the  Commission  to 
convene  on  29  May  1949 

General  Assembly  resolution  206  (III)  28. 

18.  E/1313 :  Report  of  the  fourth  session  of  the 


(ii) 


2G. 


Population  Commission,  distributed  on  23 
May  1949 

Rei)ort  of  the  fourth  session  of  the  Social  Com- 
mission, to  be  distributed  after  the  fourth  ses- 
sion of  the  Commission  which  convened  on 
2  May  1949 

Draft  Convention  for  the  suppression  of  the 
traffic  in  persons  and  of  the  exploitation  of 
the  prostitution  of  others,  to  be  submitted  to 
the  Council  by  the  Social  Commission,  in  pur- 
suance of  resolution  155  (VII),  E;  to  be  dis- 
tributed after  the  fourth  session  of  the 
Commission. 

General  Assembly  resolution  of  13  May  1949 
(A/879) 

Memorandum  by  the  Secretary-General  to  be 
distributed 

General  Assembly  resolution  of  11  May  1949. 
A/869 

Memorandum  by  the  Secretary-General  to  be 
distributed 

(i)   Report  of  the  fifth  session  of  the  Commis- 
sion on  Human  Rights,  to  be  distributed 
after  the  fifth  session  of  the  Commission, 
which  convened  on  9  May  1949 
E/CN.4/169 :  Memorandum  by  the  Secre- 
tary-General on  the  question  of  inclusion 
of  court  decisions  in   the  Yearbook  on 
Human  Rights,  prepared  for  the  fifth  ses- 
sion of  the  Commission  on  Human  Rights, 
to  be  revised,  if  necessary,  in  the  light  of 
action  by  the  Commission 
iii)   E/1315  :  Kepoi't  of  the  fourth  session  deal- 
ing with  the  election  of  members  of  the 
Sub-Commission  on  Freedom  of  Informa- 
tion and  of  the  Press,  distributed  on  15 
April  1949  (for  information) 
C/Ouncil  resolution  195  (VIII) 
E/1337 :  Report  of  the  Secretarv-General,  dis- 
tributed on  23  May  1949 

General  Assembly  resolution  of  13  May  1949, 
A/877 

Memorandum  by  the  Secretary-General  to  be 
distributed 

Council  resolution  193  (VIII) 
Consultations  between  the  Secretary-General 
and  the  Director-General  of  the  Ilo,  entered 
into  in  accordance  with  Council  resolution  193 
(VIII),  are  still  in  progress.     It  is  anticipated 
tliiit  the  Secretary-General's  roj^ort  on  the  re- 
sults of  these  consultations  will  be  circulated 
in  the  course  of  June 
Council  resolution  209  (VIII) 
Report  of  the  ad  hoc  Committee  to  be  distrib- 
uted after  the  session  of  the  Committee  to  con- 
vene at  Geneva  on  6  June  1949 
E/131():  Report  of  the  third  session  of  the 
Commission  on  the  Status  of  Women,  dis- 
tributed on  19  April  1949,  E/131G/Add.l  dis- 
tributed on  21  May  1949. 
Council  resolution  197  (VIII) 
Report  of  the  Sub-Commission  to  be  distrib- 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


uted  after  the  third  session  of  the  Sub-Com- 
mission to  convene  at  Lake  Success  on  31  May 
1949 

29.  General  Assembly  resolution  of  13  May  1949, 
A/876,  B 

Memorandum  by  the  Secretary-General  on  res- 
olutions 2,  3,  6,  "11,  14,  23,  24,  26,  30-34,  36,  37 
and  40  from  the  Final  Act  of  the  United  Na- 
tions Conference  on  Freedom  of  Information 
to  be  distributed  on  24  May  1949 
Memorandum  by  the  Secretary-General  on 
resolution  9  from  the  Final  Act  of  the  United 
Nations  Conference  on  Freedom  of  Informa- 
tion, to  be  distributed  in  the  first  week  of  June 
1949 

30.  (i)  Report  of  the  fourth  session  of  the  Com- 

mission on  Narcotic  Drugs  to  be  distrib- 
uted after  the  fourth  session  of  the  Com- 
mission which  convened  on  16  May  1949 
(ii)  E/1324 :  Memorandum  of  the  Secretary- 
General  on  transmission  by  the  Economic 
and  Social  Council  to  the  Government  of 
France  of  a  communication  from  the 
World  Health  Organization  under  Article 
8  of  the  Geneva  Convention  of  19  Febru- 
ary 1925  on  Narcotic  Drugs,  regarding  a 
request  for  "Valbine"  to  be  exempted  from 
the  provisions  of  the  Convention;  distrib- 
uted on  6  May  1949 

31.  The  report  of  the  United  Nations  Interna- 
tional Children's  Emergency  Fund  will  in- 
clude the  report  required  by  General  Assembly 
resolution  215  (III)  to  the  extension  of  the 
United  Nations  Appeal  for  Children  during 
1949 ;  to  be  distributed  in  July  1949 

32.  Council  resolution  207  (VIII) 

E/1346:  Eeport  of  the  Secretary-General  to 
be  distributed  on  25  May  1949 

33.  General  Assembly  resolution  119  (II) 
Council  resolution  210  (VIII) 

E/1325 :  Report  of  the  Secretary-General  dis- 
tributed on  23  May  1949 

34.  (i)  E/1340:  Fifth  report  of  the  Adminis- 

trative Committee  on  Co-ordination,  to 
be  distributed  on  25  May  1949 
(ii)  E/1342 :  Report  of  the  Secretary-General 
on    co-ordination    of    fellowship    pro- 
grammes, to  be  distributed  on  30  May 
1949 
(iii)  E/1341 :  Report  of  the  Secretary-General 
on  co-ordination  of  migration  activities, 
to  be  distributed  on  30  May  1949 
(iv)  E/1347:  Communication  from  the  Di- 
rector-General of  the  Ilo  on  manpower 
programmes  to  be  distributed  on  25  May 
1949 
(v)  E/1344  and  E/1344/Add.l.    Report  of 
the  Secretary-General,  under  Council 
resolution  128  (VI),  on  organization  of 
the  Economic  and  Social  Affairs  Depart- 
ments and  on  the  work  programmes  of 
the  Economic  and   Social  Affairs  De- 
June   19,   1949 


partments  and  of  the  Commissions  of  the 
Council;  to  be  distributed  after  reports 
of  all  Commissions  are  available   (for 
information) 
(vi)  Comparative  Review  of  the  work  pro- 
grammes of  the  United  Nations  and  spe- 
cialized agencies  prepared  in  pursuance 
of  Council  resolution  166  (VII) ;  to  be 
distributed  in  the  first  half  of  June;  a 
revision  to  be  distributed  after  reports 
of   all    Commissions   become   available 
(for  information) 
(vii)   Catalogue  of  Economic  and  Social  proj- 
ects, prepared  in  pursuance  of  Council 
resolution  128  (VI) ;  printed  document 
distributed  on  26  April  1949   (for  in- 
formation) 
(viii)  E/1317:  Report  of  the  Secretary-Gen- 
eral, under  General  Assembly  resolu- 
tions 50  (I)  and  124  (II),  on  the  action 
taken  in  pursuance  of  the  agreements 
between   the   United   Nations   and   the 
specialized  agencies;  to  be  distributed 
on  31  May  1949 
(ix)  E/1320:  Communication  from  the  Di- 
rector-General    of     the     International 
Labour  Organisation  on  the  agreement 
between   the   United   Nations   and   the 
International  Labour  Organisation,  to 
be  distributed  on  31  May  1949 
(x)  E/1348 :  Report  of  the  Secretary-Gen- 
eral   on    the    agreement   between    the 
United  Nations  and  the  United  Nations 
Educational,    Scientific    and    Cultural 
Organization,  in  accordance  with  Arti- 
cle XXI  of  the  agreement,  to  be  dis- 
tributed in  the  first  week  of  June  1949 
(xi)   E/1331:     Report    of    the    Secretary- 
General  on  general  co-ordination  mat- 
ters, to  be  distributed  on  9  June  1949 

35.  Report  of  the  International  Labour  Organ- 
ization, to  be  distributed  at  the  end  of  May 
1949 

36.  E/1321 :  Report  of  the  Food  and  Agriculture 
Organization  of  the  United  Nations,  distrib- 
uted on  27  April  1949 

37.  E/1349 :  Report  of  the  United  Nations  Edu- 
cational, Scientific  and  Cultural  Organization, 
to  be  distributed  at  the  end  of  May  1949 

38.  E/1350 :  Report  of  the  World  Health  Organi- 
zation to  be  distributed  at  the  end  of  May  1949 

39.  E/1338:  Report  of  the  International  Civil 
Aviation  Organization,  distributed  on  23  May 
1949.  A  supplementary  report  will  be  dis- 
tributed as  soon  as  it  becomes  available. 

40.  E/1319:  Report  of  the  International  Tele- 
communications Union,  distributed  on  27  April 
1949 

41.  E/1323:  Report  of  the  Universal  Postal 
Union,  to  be  distributed  in  the  beginning  of 
June  1949 

(Continued  on  page  794) 


The  United  States  fn  the  United  Nations 


Commlttion  on  Human  Rights 

[June  11-17] 

The  Commission  on  Human  Rights  on  June  16 
completed  action  on  the  articles  contained  in  the 
drafting  committee's  International  Covenant  of 
Human  Rights.  Five  additional  articles  were 
approved  during  the  week.  One  is  designed  to 
guarantee  equality  before  the  law  and  equal  pro- 
tection of  the  law,  equal  enjoyment  of  the  rights 
defined  in  the  covenant  without  any  discrimination, 
and  equal  protection  against  incitement  to  such 
discrimination.  Another  is  intended  to  provide 
that  nothing  in  the  covenant  may  be  interpreted  as 
implying  any  right  for  any  state,  group,  or  person 
to  engage  in  any  activity  or  to  perform  any  act 
aimed  at  the  destruction  of  any  of  the  freedoms 
defined.  Another  provides  that  each  state  which 
becomes  a  party  to  the  covenant  will  undertake  to 
insure  to  the  individuals  within  its  jurisdiction  the 
rights  defined  in  the  covenant. 

The  Commission  tentatively  approved  an  article 
whicli  was  to  be  a  general  limitation  clause  for  the 
provisions  of  the  covenant.  The  United  States 
delegate  recommended  elimination  of  this  article 
because  the  incorporation  of  limitations  into  each 
substantive  article  had  made  it  unnecessary.  The 
United  States  draft  of  the  ratification  article  was 
adopted,  under  which  the  covenant  would  be  open 
to  all  states. 

Further  action  on  the  preamble,  and  two  articles 
of  the  Committee's  draft  as  well  as  on  additional 
articles  submitted  by  various  governments  was 
postponed  until  the  next  session  of  the  Human 
Rights  Commission. 

Security  Council  Considers  Membership 

In  accordance  with  the  General  Assembly  reso- 
lution of  December  8,  1948,  the  Security  Council 
on  June  16  began  a  reconsideration  of  11  applica- 
tions for  membership  in  the  United  Nations  which 
had  previously  failed  to  receive  favorable  recom- 
mendations. 

The  countries  involved  are :  Albania,  Mongolian 
People's  Republic,  Transjordan,  Portugal,  Ireland, 
Hungary,  Italy,  Austria,  Rumania,  Bulgaria,  and 
Finland. 

The  meeting  was  called  by  Ambassador  Arne 
Sunde  of  Norway,  chairman  during  June,  in  order 
to  inquire  whether  any  of  the  members  of  the 
Council  had  changed  their  positions  on  the  ques- 
tion, or  whether  any  of  the  new  members  of  the 
Council  wished  to  express  their  opinions.  Ambas- 
sador Sunde,  as  the  representative  of  Norway, 
spoke  in  behalf  of  the  idea  of  universal  member- 
ship in  the  United  Nations. 


The  representative  of  Argentina,  Dr.  Jose  Arce, 
in  the  course  of  an  80-minute  address  to  the  Coun- 
cil, held  that  the  Charter  conferred  final  determina- 
tion on  membership  applications  upon  the  General 
Assembly  rather  than  the  Council,  and  that  the 
veto  power  could  not  be  used  to  block  the  passage 
of  a  membership  application  through  the  Security 
Council.  Dr.  Arce  introduced  resolutions  calling 
for  the  admission  to  membership  of  Portugal, 
Transjordan,  Italy,  Finland,  Ireland,  Austria,  and 
Ceylon. 

Further  discussion  was  postponed  to  the  next 
meeting  of  the  Council,  whicli  was  scheduled  for 
June  21. 

Korea 

The  Korean  Commission  has  appointed  a  sub- 
committee to  observe  and  verify  withdrawal  of 
remaining  United  States  occupation  forces  in 
Korea.  Withdrawal  of  United  States  troops  was 
begun  last  December  in  compliance  with  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  resolution  calling  for  withdrawal 
of  all  occupation  forces  from  Korea  "as  early  as 
practicable,"  and  the  Korean  Commission  was 
given  the  responsibility  of  observing  the  with- 
drawal. Although  the  Soviet  Union  has  reported 
that  its  forces  have  been  withdrawn  from  north 
Korea,  the  Commission  has  never  been  permitted 
to  visit  the  northern  zone  to  verify  this. 

Palestine 

Mark  F.  Ethridge  on  his  return  to  the  United 
States  to  resign  as  the  United  States  representative 
on  the  Palestine  Conciliation  Commission,  in- 
formed President  Truman  that  the  Arab-Israeli 
negotiations  at  Lausanne  under  the  auspices  of  the 
Conciliation  Commission  are  "deadlocked"  and 
that  both  Israeli  and  Arab  representatives  must 
adopt  "entirely  new  approaches"  if  a  formal  peace 
is  to  be  reached. 

Atomic  Energy 

The  Atomic  Energy  Commission's  working  com- 
mittee resolved  that  further  study  by  the  working 
committee  of  the  General  Assembly  resolution, 
which  endorsed  the  majority  plan  as  a  basis  for  an 
eflfective  system  of  atomic  control,  is  useless  until 
the  Big  Five  and  Canada  report  that  some  basis  for 
agreement  exists.  This  decision  was  embodied  in  a 
resolution  sponsored  by  Cuba  and  Argentina  and 
was  approved  on  June  15  by  a  vote  of  eight  to  two 
(Ukraine,  U.S.S.R.),  with  Egypt  abstaining. 

Department  of  Stale  Bulletin 


U.S.  Policy  Toward  Korea 


THE  RECORD  OF  THE  WEEK 


Summary  of  Actions  1947-49 

[Beleased  to  the  press  June  8] 

On  January  1  of  this  year  the  United  States 
Government  extended  full  recognition  to  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  Republic  of  Korea.^  In  so  doing, 
the  United  States  welcomed  into  the  community 
of  free  nations  a  new  republic,  born  of  the  efforts 
of  the  United  Nations,  and  of  the  United  States  as 
a  principally  interested  power,  to  give  effect  to  the 
urgent  and  rightful  claims  of  the  Korean  people 
to  freedom  and  national  independence. 

The  United  States  Government,  inspired  by  its 
historic  ties  of  friendship  with  the  Korean  people 
and  by  its  sincere  interest  in  the  spread  of  free 
institutions  and  representative  government  among 
the  peoples  of  the  world,  entertains  a  particularly 
deep  and  sympathetic  concern  for  the  welfare  of 
the  Republic  of  Korea,  As  evidence  of  this  con- 
cern, the  United  States  is  currently  carrying  out 
in  Korea  a  program  of  economic  and  technical 
assistance  designed  to  provide  the  economic 
stability  without  which  political  stability  would 
be  impossible.  A  request  for  authorization  to 
continue  and  to  strengthen  this  program  during 
the  coming  fiscal  year  has  already  been  submitted 
to  the  Congress.  The  United  States  has,  more- 
over, maintained  in  Korea  a  military  training  mis- 
sion whose  function  it  has  been  to  advise  and 
assist  the  Government  of  the  Republic  of  Korea 
in  the  development  of  its  own  security  forces,  in 
consonance  with  the  United  Nations  General  As- 
sembly's resolution  of  November  14, 1947,^  and  has 
transferred  to  that  government  for  those  forces 
substantial  amounts  of  military  equipment  and 
supplies  under  the  authority  of  the  Surplus 
Property  Act.  The  transfer  of  such  equipment 
and  supplies  is  continuing,  while  the  military 
training  mission  has  recently  been  placed  on  a 
more  formal  basis  with  the  establishment  of  a 
United  States  Military  Advisory  Group  to  the 
Republic  of  Korea.  Other  forms  of  assistance, 
such  as  that  in  the  fields  of  education  and  voca- 
tional training,  also  have  been  and  are  being  given 
to  the  Republic  of  Korea  by  the  United  States 
Government. 

In  pursuance  of  the  recommendation  contained 
in  the  General  Assembly's  resolution  of  December 
12,  1948,'  to  the  effect  that  the  occupying  Powers 
should  "withdraw  their  occupation  forces  from 
Korea  as  early  as  practicable,  the  United  States 
Government  will  soon  have  completed  the  with- 
drawal of  its  occupation  forces  from  that  country. 
As  is  clear  from  the  broad  program  of  assistance 
outlined  above,  this  withdrawal  in  no  way  indi- 

June   19,   1949 


cates  a  lessening  of  United  States  interest  in  the 
Republic  of  Korea,  but  constitutes  rather  another 
step  toward  the  normalization  of  relations  with 
that  republic  and  a  compliance  on  the  part  of  the 
United  States  with  the  cited  provision  of  the  De- 
cember 12  resolution  of  the  General  Assembly. 

While  the  United  States  has  given  unstintingly 
of  its  material  assistance  and  political  support 
in  order  that  the  Republic  of  Korea  might  grow 
and  prosper,  this  government  recognizes  that  the 
Korean  problem  remains  one  of  international  con- 


For  the  Department  of  State:  $1,955,000  to  con- 
tinue the  information  and  education  program  In 
Korea,  for  which  responsibility  was  transferred 
from  the  Army  to  the  Department  of  State  on 
January  1,  1949. — Request  by  the  President  for 
supplemental  estimates  for  fiscal  year  1950. 


cern  and  that  it  is  only  through  continued  support 
by  the  entire  community  of  nations  to  which  that 
republic  owes  its  existence  that  the  security  and 
stability  of  this  new  nation  can  be  assured  during 
the  critical  months  and  years  that  lie  ahead.  So 
long  as  the  authority  of  the  Republic  of  Korea] 
continues  to  be  challenged  within  its  own  terri- 
tory by  the  alien  tyranny  which  has  been  arbi- 
trarily imposed  upon  the  people  of  north  Korea, 
the  need  for  such  support  will  be  a  vital  one. 

The  United  States  Government  has  already 
pledged  its  support  to  the  United  Nations  Com- 
mission on  Korea  in  its  efforts  to  assist  the  Karean 
people  toward  the  goal  of  a  free  and  united  Korea. 
It  believes,  however,  that  this  goal  can  be  achieved 
only  through  the  continued  strengthening  of  the 
freely  elected  and  democratic  Government  of  the 
Republic  of  Korea  as  an  embodiment  of  the  hopes 
and  aspirations  of  all  Koreans  to  the  freedom 
and  independence  for  which  they  have  worked  and 
waited  so  long. 

Request  to  Congress  for  Continuing  Economic 
Assistance 

Message  of  the  President  to  the  Congress 

[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  Honse  June  8] 

To  the  Congress  of  the  United  States: 

I  recommend  that  the  Congress  authorize  the 
continuation  of  economic  assistance  to  the  Repub- 


'  Bulletin  of  Jan.  S,  1949,  p.  59. 
'  Bulletin  of  Nov.  30, 1947,  p.  1031. 
•  Bulletin  of  Dec.  19,  1948,  p.  760. 


lie  of  Korea  for  the  fiscal  year  ending  June  30, 
1950. 

The  United  States  is  now  providing  relief  and 
a  small  amount  of  assistance  in  rehabilitation  to 
the  Republic  of  Korea  under  Public  Law 
793 — 80th  Congress.  The  continuation  of  that 
assistance  is  of  great  importance  to  the  successful 
achievement  of  the  foreign  policy  aims  of  the 
United  States.  The  authority  of  the  present  Act 
extends  only  until  June  30,  1949.  For  this  reason 
legislation  is  urgently  needed  and  I  am  hopeful 
that  the  Congress  may  give  it  early  consideration. 

The  people  of  the  United  States  have  long  had 
sympatnetic  feelings  for  the  Korean  people. 
American  missionaries,  supported  by  American 
churches  of  many  denominations,  brought  spirit- 
ual guidance,  education  and  medical  aid  to  the 
Korean  people  during  their  forty  years  of  Japa- 
nese bondage.  All  Americans  who  have  come  to 
know  the  Korean  people  appreciate  their  fierce 
passion  for  freedom  and  their  keen  desire  to  be- 
come an  independent  nation. 

Early  in  the  war  with  Japan,  it  was  resolved 
that  Korea  should  be  liberated.  In  the  Cairo 
Declaration  of  December,  1943,  the  United  States 
joined  with  the  United  Kingdom  and  China  to 
express  their  determination  that  in  due  course 
Korea  should  become  free  and  independent.  This 
pledge  was  reaffirmed  in  the  Potsdam  Declaration 
of  July  26,  1945,  with  which  the  Soviet  Union 
associated  itself  upon  its  entrance  into  the  war 
against  Japan  in  the  following  month.  With  our 
victory  over  Japan,  it  was  hoped  that  the  Korean 
nation  would  be  reborn.  Unfortunately,  how- 
ever, only  the  people  of  Korea  south  of  the  38° 
parallel  have  thus  far  attained  their  freedom  and 
independence. 

The  present  division  of  Korea  along  the  38° 
parallel  was  never  intended  by  the  United  States. 
The  sole  purpose  of  the  line  along  the  38°  parallel 
was  to  facilitate  acceptance  by  the  Soviet  and 
United  States  forces  of  the  surrender  of  Japanese 
troops  north  and  south  of  that  line.  Immediately 
after  the  completion  of  the  Japanese  surrender, 
the  United  States  through  direct  negotiations 
with  the  Soviet  Union  sought  to  restore  the  unity 
of  Korea. 

For  two  years  these  efforts  were  rendered  un- 
availing by  the  attitude  of  the  Soviet  Union. 
When  it  became  apparent  that  further  delay  would 
be  injurious  to  the  interests  of  the  Korean  people, 
the  United  States  submitted  the  matter  to  the 
General  Assembly  of  the  United  Nations,  in  the 
hope  that  the  United  Nations  could  assist  the 
people  of  Korea  to  assume  their  rightful  place  as 
an  independent,  democratic  nation. 

By  vote  of  an  overwhelming  majority,  the  Gen- 
eral Assembly  adopted  a  resolution  on  November 
14, 1947,  calling  for  an  election,  under  the  observa- 
tion of  a  United  Nations  Temporary  Commission 
on  Korea,  to  choose  a  representative  National  As- 
sembly for  the  purpose  of  drafting  a  democratic 


constitution  and  establishing  a  national  govern- 
ment.    The  Soviet  Union  refused  to  permit  the 
United   Nations  Commission   to  enter   its  zoii' 
Consequently,  the  right  of  the  Korean  people  i 
participate  in  a  free  election  to  establish  a  free 
government  was  confined  to  south  Korea.     As  a    i 
result  of  this  election,  the  Government  of  the  Re- 
public of  Korea  was  inaugurated  August  15.  1948. 

The  General  Assembly  of  the  United  Nations 
at  its  next  session  considered  the  report  of  its 
Commission  and  in  December,  1948,  adopted  a 
resolution  holding  the  Government  of  the  Re- 
public of  Korea  to  be  the  validly  elected,  lawful 
government  of  the  area  in  which  elections  were 
held  under  the  Commission's  observation — and 
the  only  such  government  in  Korea.  The  General 
Assembly  established  a  re-constituted  Commission 
to  consult  with  the  occupying  powers  on  the  with- 
drawal of  their  forces  and  to  continue  to  work  for 
the  unification  of  Korea  under  representative 
government. 

The  United  States  terminated  its  military  gov- 
ernment in  Korea  upon  the  inauguration  of  the 
Government  of  the  Republic  of  Korea  and  recog- 
nized the  new  government  on  New  Year's  Daj', 
1949. 

The  December,  1948,  resolution  of  the  General 
Assembly  called  on  the  occupj'ing  powers  to  with- 
draw their  forces  as  soon  as  practicable.  The 
United  States  has  thus  far  retained  a  small  num- 
ber of  troops  in  Korea  at  the  request  of  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  Republic  to  give  the  Republic  an 
opportunity  to  establish  forces  adequate  to  pro- 
tect itself  against  internal  disturbances  and  ex- 
ternal attacks  short  of  an  aggressive  war  sup- 
ported by  a  major  power.  A  military  advisory 
group  requested  by  the  Korean  Government  for 
traininof  purposes  will  be  retained  in  Korea  after 
the  witndrawal  of  United  States  troops. 

The  debilitated  state  in  which  the  Korean  econ- 
omy was  left  by  the  Japanese  has  been  accentuated 
by  the  separation  of  the  hydroelectric  power,  coal 
and  metal  and  fertilizer  industries  of  the  north 
from  the  agricultural  and  textile  industries  of  the 
south  and  by  the  effects  of  continuing  communist 
agitation.  The  United  States  has  furnished  the 
people  of  south  Korea  with  basic  relief  during 
the  period  of  military  government.  Despite 
such  assistance,  however,  the  Republic  is  still  far 
short  of  being  able  to  support  itself,  even  at  the 
present  modest  standard  of  living  of  its  people. 
It  is  in  urgent  need  of  further  assistance  in  the 
difficult  period  ahead  until  it  can  stand  on  its  own 
feet  economically. 

The  aid  now  being  provided  to  Korea  is  essen- 
tially for  basic  relief.  Without  the  continuation 
of  such  relief,  its  economy  would  collapse — in- 
cvitablj^  and  rapidly.  Bare  relief  alone,  how- 
ever, would  not  make  it  possible  for  the  Republic 
to  become  self-supporting.  The  Republic  would 
remain  dependent  upon  the  continuation  of  relief 
from  the  United  States  at  a  costly  level  into  the  in- 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


definite  future — and  subject  to  the  same  inevitable 
collapse  at  any  time  the  relief  should  be  with- 
drawn. For  these  reasons  the  aid  granted  should 
be  not  for  mere  relief  but  for  recovery.  The  kind 
of  program  which  is  needed  is  the  kind  which  the 
Congress  has  authorized  for  the  countries  of 
Western  Europe  and  under  which  those  countries 
have  achieved  sucli  rapid  progress  toward  re- 
covery during  the  past  year.  Full  advantage 
should  be  taken  of  the  broad  and  successful  ex- 
perience in  Western  Europe  by  continuing  re- 
sponsibility for  the  administration  of  the  Korean 
aid  program  in  the  Economic  Cooperation  Ad- 
ministration, which  has  been  administering  aid 
to  Korea  since  January  1  of  this  year. 

Prior  to  January  1  of  this  year,  aid  to  Korea 
was  administered  by  the  Army  as  a  part  of  its 
program  for  government  and  relief  in  occupied 
areas.  The  Budget  which  I  submitted  to  the  Con- 
gress in  January  contemplated  that  economic  as- 
sistance to  Korea  would  be  continued  outside  of 
the  Army's  program  for  government  and  relief  in 
occupied  areas.  The  needs  of  the  Republic  of 
Korea  for  economic  assistance  have  been  carefully 
studied  in  the  light  of  the  latest  available  informa- 
tion. I  am  convinced  that  the  sum  of  $150,000,000 
is  the  minimum  aid  essential  during  the  coming 
year  for  progress  toward  economic  recovery. 

Such  a  recovery  program  will  cost  only  a  rela- 
tively small  amount  more  than  a  bare  relief  pro- 
gram. Yet  a  recovery  pi'ogram — and  only  a  re- 
covery program — will  enable  the  Republic  of 
Korea  to  commence  building  up  the  coal  produc- 
tion, electric  power  capacity  and  fertilizer  pro- 
duction which  are  fundamental  to  the  establish- 
ment of  a  self-supporting  economy  and  to  the 
termination  of  the  need  for  aid  from  the  United 
States.  Aid  in  the  restoration  of  the  Korean 
economy  should  be  less  costly  to  the  United  States 
in  the  end  than  a  continued  program  of  relief. 

The  recovery  program  which  is  recommended  is 
not  only  the  soundest  course  economically  but  also 
the  most  effective  from  the  standpoint  of  helping 
to  achieve  the  objectives  of  peaceful  and  demo- 
cratic conditions  in  the  Far  East. 

Korea  has  become  a  testing  ground  in  which  the 
validity  and  practical  value  of  the  ideals  and 
principles  of  democracy  which  the  Republic  is 
putting  into  practice  are  being  matched  against 
the  practices  of  communism  which  have  been  im- 
posed upon  the  people  of  north  Korea.  The  sur- 
vival and  progress  of  the  Republic  toward  a  self- 
supporting,  stable  economy  will  have  an  immense 
and  far-reaching  influence  on  the  people  of  Asia. 
Such  progress  by  the  young  Republic  will  en- 
courage the  people  of  southern  and  southeastern 
Asia  and  the  islands  of  the  Pacific  to  resist  and 
reject  the  Communist  propaganda  with  which  they 
are  besieged.  Moreover,  the  Korean  Republic,  by 
demonstrating  the  success  and  tenacity  of  democ- 
racy in  resisting  communism,  will  stand  as  a  bea- 
con to  the  people  of  northern  Asia  in  resisting  the 

June   19,   1949 


control  of  the  communist  forces  which  have  over- 
run them. 

The  Republic  of  Korea,  and  the  freedom-seeking 
people  of  north  Korea  held  under  Soviet  domina- 
tion, seek  for  themselves  a  united,  self-governing 
and  sovereign  country,  independent  of  foreign 
control  and  support  and  with  membership  in  the 
United  Nations.  In  their  desire  for  unity  and  in- 
dependence, they  are  supported  by  the  United 
Nations. 

The  United  States  has  a  deep  interest  in  the  con- 
tinuing progress  of  the  Korean  people  toward 
these  objectives.  The  most  effective,  practical  aid 
which  the  United  States  can  give  toward  reaching 
them  will  be  to  assist  the  Republic  to  move  toward 
self-support  at  a  decent  standard  of  living.  In 
the  absence  of  such  assistance,  there  can  be  no  real 
hope  of  achieving  a  unified,  free  and  democratic 
Korea. 

If  we  are  faithful  to  our  ideals  and  mindful  of 
our  interest  in  establishing  peaceful  and  prosper- 
ous conditions  in  the  world,  we  will  not  fail  to 
provide  the  aid  which  is  so  essential  to  Korea  at 
this  critical  time. 

Harry  S.  Truman 
The  White  House, 

June  7,  1949. 

Statement  J>y  Acting  Secretary  Webb  made  before 
the  House  Foreign  Ajfairs  Committee  on  June 
8,19Jt9 

[Released  to  the  press  June  8] 

The  legislation  before  you,  calling  for  a  contin- 
uation of  economic  assistance  to  the  young  Repub- 
lic of  Korea  is  among  the  most  important  which 
the  Department  of  State  is  supporting  at  this  ses- 
sion of  Congress. 

For  almost  four  years  the  United  States  has 
been  intimately  involved  in  Korea  and  in  the 
growing  pains  of  the  new  Republic.  Although 
our  troops  who  went  to  Korea  to  take  the  Japanese 
surrender  have  been  progressively  reduced  in 
strength  as  the  people  of  Korea  became  more  able 
to  take  charge  of  their  own  affairs,  the  continua- 
tion of  aid  to  Korea  remains  essential  to  the 
achievement  of  the  foreign-policy  objective  of  the 
United  States. 

As  most  of  you  will  recall,  on  December  1, 1943, 
this  government  in  association  with  the  Govern- 
ments of  Great  Britain  and  China  made  a  soleom 
declaration  at  Cairo  "that  in  due  course  Korea 
shall  become  free  and  independent."  This  pledge 
was  reaffirmed  in  the  Potsdam  Declaration  of  July 
26,  1945,  with  which  the  Soviet  Union  associated 
itself  upon  its  declaration  of  war  against  Japan  on 
August  8  of  that  year.  The  sudden  surrender  of 
Japan  followed  almost  immediately.  Decisions 
had  to  be  made  as  to  what  Allied  troops  would  be 
available  at  the  proper  time  to  take  the  surrender 
of  the  Japanese  in  the  various  territories  con- 


cemed.  In  certain  areas  the  British  were  chosen, 
in  others  the  Chinese,  in  still  others  the  Ameri- 
cans and  the  Russians. 

In  deciding  who  should  take  the  surrender  in 
Korea,  our  military  authorities  had  to  take  into 
account  the  location  and  availability  of  both  the 
United  States  and  Soviet  forces  and  the  time  re- 
quired to  move  the  necessary  forces  into  Korea. 
As  a  result  of  a  purely  ad  hoc  military  decision  the 
line  was  drawn  at  the  38°  parallel,  and  it  was 
a^eed  that  the  United  States  forces  would  accept 
the  Japanese  surrender  below  that  line  and  the 
forces  of  the  U.S.S.R.  would  accept  surrender 
above  that  line. 

General  Hodge  and  his  soldiers  landed  in  Korea 
in  September  1945,  for  what  everyone  believed  at 
that  time  would  bo  a  comparatively  short  occupa- 
tion. We  had  just  won  a  great  victory  in  asso- 
ciation with  our  Russian  and  other  Allies.  We 
together  with  the  Russians  pledged  ourselves  to 
assist  in  the  formation  of  an  independent  Korea. 
The  38°  lino  was  adopted  for  military  purposes 
only — it  was  not  meant  by  us  to  be  a  barrier  cutting 
Korea  into  two  sections. 

It  soon  became  apparent,  however,  that  the  view 
of  the  United  States  as  to  the  nature  of  the  38° 
parallel  line  was  not  shared  by  the  Soviet  occupa- 
tion authorities  in  north  Korea,  who,  from  the  vei-y 
beginning,  frustrated  every  attempt  on  the  part 
of  the  United  States  Commander  in  the  south  to 
remove  the  artificial  barrier  thus  created  and  to 
restore  the  economic,  administrative,  and  social 
imification  of  the  country.  After  numerous  such 
attempts  on  his  part  had  yielded  no  results,  the 
United  States  Commander  finally  recommended 
that  the  problem  be  dealt  with  at  a  higher  level. 

On  December  27,  1945,  the  Foreign  Ministers 
of  the  United  States,  Great  Britain,  and  the  Soviet 
Union,  then  meeting  in  Moscow,  concluded  an 
agreement,  which  it  was  hoped  would  provide  a 
basis  for  the  resolution  of  existing  problems  in 
Korea  and  for  the  reestablishment  of  Korea  as 
an  independent  state.  That  agreement,  wliich 
received  the  adherence  also  of  the  Chinese  Gov- 
ernment, called  for  direct  negotiations  between 
United  States  and  Soviet  representatives  in  Korea 
with  a  view  to  the  setting  up  of  a  provisional  gov- 
ernment in  consultation  with  Korean  democratic 
parties  and  social  organizations.  It  would  take 
too  much  of  your  time  to  discuss  the  details  of 
the  alternating  periods  of  hope  and  disappoint- 
ment which  lasted  throughout  the  next  two  years. 
The  record  is  clear  and  has  been  published.  The 
United  States  maintained  consistently  the  right 
of  all  Korean  parties  and  organizations  to  par- 
ticipate in  the  talks  without  restrictions  on  free- 
dom of  opinion  and  expression.  Our  only  con- 
dition was  an  indication  of  their  willingness  to 
cooperate  with  the  Joint  U.S.-U.S.S.R.  Commis- 
sion set  up  by  the  Moscow  agreement  to  conduct 
the  negotiations.    The  Soviets,  in  spite  of  assur- 


ances to  the  contrary,  would  only  permit  the  par- 
ticipation of  Koreans  on  terms  which  would  have 
assured  the  domination  of  a  pro-Communist  mi- 
nority of  the  Korean  people.  This,  we  would  not 
allow. 

When  it  became  apparent  that  bilateral  nego- 
tiations could  not  bring  the  Korean  people  any 
nearer  their  promised  independence,  this  gov- 
ernment took  the  initiative  in  proposing  that  the 
Four  Powers  adhering  to  the  Moscow  agreement 
on  Korea — the  United  Kingdom,  China,  U.S.S.R., 
and  United  States — meet  in  Washington  to  con- 
sider methods  by  which  Korean  independence 
could  be  secured,  to  which  end  the  United  States 
Government  presented  a  7-point  proposal  as  a 
basis  of  discussion.  The  United  Kingdom  and 
China  accepted  the  invitation — the  U.S.S.R.  did 
not.  Korea  remained  divided — the  Korean  peo- 
ple were  still  not  independent.  In  these  circum- 
stances the  United  States  took  the  only  course 
open.  It  presented  the  problem  of  Korea  for  the 
consideration  of  the  General  Assembly  of  the 
United  Nations.  As  General  Marshall  said  at 
that  time,  "We  do  not  wish  to  have  the  inability 
of  two  powers  to  reach  agreement  delay  any  fur- 
ther the  urgent  and  rightful  claims  of  the  Korean 
people  to  independence." 

The  General  Assembly  of  United  Nations  by  an 
overwhelming  majority  adopted  on  November  14, 
1947,  a  resolution  establishing  a  United  Nations 
Temporary  Commission  on  Korea  and  calling  for 
an  election  under  its  observation  to  choose  a  repre- 
sentative National  Assembly  which  should  be  re- 
sponsible for  drafting  a  democratic  constitution 
and  establishing  a  national  government.  This 
election  was  held  on  May  10,  1948,  but  was  con- 
fined to  south  Korea  alone  because  the  U.S.S.R., 
in  complete  disregard  of  the  expressed  will  of  the 
United  Nations,  refused  to  allow  the  United  Na- 
tions Temporary  Commission  access  to  north 
Korea.  Having  thus  denied  the  people  of  north 
Korea  an  opportunity  to  express  their  will  in  a 
national  election  by  secret  ballot,  the  Soviets  in 
their  zone  of  occupation  proceeded  with  the  estab- 
lishment of  a  Communist-dominated  puppet 
government. 

The  May  10,  1948  election  was  the  first  occasion 
in  the  long  history  of  Korea  on  which  the  Korean 
people  had  been  given  the  opportunity  freely  to 
choose  their  own  government,  and  the  people  of 
south  Korea  responded  enthusiastically  to  this 
opportunity.  Approximately  80  percent  of  the 
eligible  voters  registered,  and  an  estimated  92.5 
percent  of  these  went  to  the  polls  and  cast  their 
ballots  in  an  election  which,  despite  the  disruptive 
tactics  of  the  Communists,  was  characterized  by 
every  mark  of  public  order,  approval,  and 
enthusiasm. 

The  Government  of  the  Republic  of  Korea 
which  resulted  from  this  election  was  formally 
inaugurated   on   August   15,   1948.     The   United 

Deparlrnvnt  of  State  Bu//«fi'n 


States  terminated  its  military  government  on  the 
same  date  and  soon  thereafter  in  consonance  with 
the  United  Nations  resolution  of  November  14, 
began  a  substantial  reduction  in  its  occupation 
forces. 

The  third  session  of  the  United  Nations  General 
Assembly  at  Paris  in  the  fall  of  1948  considered 
the  report  of  its  Temporary  Commission  which 
had  observed  the  elections  held  in  south  Korea  and 
had  witnessed  the  emergence  of  the  Government 
of  the  Republic.  On  December  12,  1948,  tlie  Gen- 
eral Assembly  adopted  a  second  resolution  which 
declared  in  part — 

that  there  has  beeu  established  a  lawful  government  (the 
Government  of  the  Republic  of  Korea),  having  effective 
control  and  jurisdiction  over  that  part  of  Korea  where  the 
Temporary  Commission  was  able  to  observe  and  consult 
and  in  which  the  great  majority  of  the  people  of  all 
Korea  reside ;  tliat  this  Government  is  based  ou  elections 
which  were  a  valid  expression  of  the  free  will  of  the 
electorate  of  that  part  of  Korea  and  which  were  observed 
by  the  Temporary  Commission ;  and  that  this  is  the  only 
such  Government  in  Korea ; 

This  resolution  further  provided  for  the  establish- 
ment of  a  re-constituted  seven-nation  United 
Nations  Commission  on  Korea  to  work  for  the 
unification  of  Korea  and  the  further  development 
of  representative  government  in  tliat  country,  and 
otherwise  to  promote  "the  full  accomplishment  of 
the  objectives  set  forth  in  the  Resolution  of  No- 
vember 14,  1947."  This  Commission  has  been  in 
south  Korea  since  January,  but  has  not  as  yet  been 
successful  in  obtaining  permission  to  enter  north 
Korea. 

This  further  consideration  of  the  Korean  ques- 
tion by  the  General  Assembly  offered  the  U.S.S.R. 
yet  another  opportunity  to  abandon  its  unilateral 
course.  It  did  not  choose  to  do  so.  Instead  it 
insisted  that  the  Communist  regime  which  it  had 
fostered  unilaterally  in  north  Korea  should  be 
accepted  as  the  government  for  the  whole  of 
Korea.  Finding  the  General  Assembly  unim- 
pressed by  tliis  argument,  the  Soviet  bloc  opposed 
the  December  12  resolution  which  was  approved 
with  virtual  unanimity  by  the  other  member 
nations. 

The  resolution  of  December  12, 1948,  also  recom- 
mended that  member  states,  in  establishing  their 
relations  with  the  Government  of  the  Republic  of 
Korea,  take  into  consideration  the  facts  quoted 
above  relating  to  the  status  of  tliat  government. 
In  consonance  with  this  provision  the  United 
States,  on  January  1,  1949,  extended  full  recogni- 
tion to  the  Republic  of  Korea.  The  United  States 
has  been  joined  in  such  recognition  by 
China,  France,  Great  Britain,  and  the  Philippine 
Republic. 

But  political  recognition  is  not  enough.  A  gov- 
ernment if  it  is  to  survive  must  rest  on  a  solid 
economic  base.  The  call  of  Communism  can  not 
compete  with  the  sound  of  people  going  to  and 
from  productive  work,  which  brings  them  a  decent 
living  and  some  hope  for  the  future.    And  this 

June   19,   7949 

841036 — 49 3 


requires  raw  materials,  machinery,  and  trained 
leaders  to  direct  operations.  The  division  of  Korea 
as  the  result  of  Soviet  obstructionism  separated  the 
industrial  north  from  the  agricultural  south  and 
this,  added  to  the  other  dislocations  of  the  war, 
caused  serious  economic  distress  among  the  20 
million  Koreans  in  the  United  States  zone.  It  has 
therefore  been  necessary  for  the  United  States  to 
carry  on  a  program  of  basic  economic  assistance. 
Until  recently  this  program  was  carried  on  by  the 
Department  of  the  Army,  but  on  January  1,  1949, 
its  administration  and  necessary  funds  were  trans- 
ferred to  the  Economic  Cooperation  Administra- 
tion under  the  autliority  of  Public  Law  793.  The 
funds  so  transferred  however,  will  enable  the  pro- 
gram of  economic  assistance  so  vitally  needed  by 
the  Korean  people  to  continue  only  until  July  1, 
1949. 

Mr.  Hoffman  will  discuss  with  you  the  economic 
situation  in  Korea  and  the  urgent  need  of  the 
Republic  for  economic  assistance.  I  shall  not  go 
into  that  aspect  of  the  matter  except  to  indicate 
that  the  economy  of  south  Korea  now  falls  tragi- 
cally short  of  being  self-supporting  even  at  the 
present  modest  standard  of  living..  Without  a 
continuation  for  the  present  of  outside  assistance, 
not  onl}'  for  essential  relief,  but  also  to  help  the 
Korean  people  to  bring  themselves  closer  to  a  level 
of  economic  self-support,  the  Korean  economy 
will  suffer  a  rapid  and  inevitable  collapse.  Under 
such  circumstances  only  the  Commmiists  would 
win. 

The  people  of  Korea  understand  the  conditions 
which  confront  them  and  realize  that  they  must 
continue  to  ask  for  assistance  for  a  period  until 
they  can  stand  on  their  own  feet.  Through  their 
government  they  have  many  times  expressed  their 
gratitude  to  the  United  States  for  the  aid  which 
it  has  already  given  them — both  political  and 
economic.  They  have  now  asked  the  United 
States  for  a  continuation  of  assistance  in  the  vital 
period  ahead. 

If  the  United  States  is  to  continue  to  aid  Korea, 
it  should  do  so  through  the  kind  of  progi'am  which 
will  be  most  effective  in  reaching  the  policy  ob- 
jectives of  the  United  States  in  Korea  and  eco- 
nomically least  burdensome  to  the  United  States. 

In  order  to  become  substantially  self-support- 
ing Korea,  as  Mr.  Hoffman  and  his  associates 
will  show  you  in  detail,  must  make  basic  invest- 
ments in  capital  equipment  for  coal,  electric  power, 
and  commercial  fertilizer  production,  and  for 
transportation. 

Under  present  conditions  in  Korea,  these  in- 
vestments can  be  i^rovided  only  through  a  program 
of  capital  assistance  by  the  United  States.  With- 
out it,  no  matter  how  long  relief  is  continued,  it 
will  be  known  to  the  people  of  both  south  and 
north  Korea  that  the  economy  of  south  Korea 
is  not  becoming  self-supporting  and  must  depend 
upon  outside  assistance  for  its  survival.  Since 
there  is  no  immediate  hope  for  a  large  income  for 
south  Korea   from  exports,  the   withdrawal   of 


assistance  at  any  time  before  soutli  Korea  has 
become  able  to  meet  its  basic  rcriuirements  for 
coal,  power,  and  fertilizer  from  internal  sources 
would  result  in  an  increasing  balance  of  payments 
deficit  or  progressive  lowering  of  the  standard  of 
living.  Under  such  circumstances  there  would 
appear  to  be  little  prospect  that  the  Republic  of 
Korea  could  ever  provide  the  firm  nucleus  of  self- 
sustaining  political  and  economic  stability  so  es- 
sential to  any  ultimate  unification  of  the  country 
on  a  democratic  i)asis. 

A  modest  capital  equipment  program  will  be  the 
most  economical  form  of  assistance.  The  Eca's 
estimates  show  that  a  comparatively  small  amount 
of  capital  assistance  in  addition  to  basic  relief 
would  lay  tlie  foundation  for  a  progressive  reduc- 
tion of  the  present  high  annual  deficit.  With  the 
success  of  such  a  program  the  Koreans  would  be 
able  to  supply  most  of  their  basic  needs  for  coal, 
electric  power,  and  fertilizer  production  and,  with 
the  possibility  of  some  private  investment  as  the 
economy  becomes  more  stabilized,  the  need  for 
outside  assistance  could  either  be  ended  entirely 
or  reduced  considerably.  On  the  other  hand,  mere 
relief  without  the  investment  necessary  for  re- 
covery would  not  make  possible  any  progress 
toward  self-support  and,  unless  continued  indeli- 
nitely  at  a  high  rate,  would,  as  I  have  already 
pointed  out,  leave  the  Republic  in  a  condition  in 
which  it  might  collapse  at  any  time  should  aid  be 
withdrawn. 

Should  the  unification  of  Korea  on  a  non-Com- 
munist, democratic  basis  become  an  accomplished 
fact  at  an  early  date,  tlius  enabling  the  country  to 
reintegrate  its  economy,  it  is  likely  that  the  lui'ited 
country  could  become  self-sustaining  with  less 
assistance  and  in  a  shorter  time.  It  would  be  ill- 
advised,  however,  on  the  basis  of  the  record  I  have 
outlined,  to  plan  at  this  time  on  a  basis  other  than 
the  stern  realities  we  now  face.  In  any  event, 
virtually  all  assistance  proposed  for  the  Republic 
would  contribute  usefully  to  the  economy  of  the 
united  country. 

For  four  years  this  government  has  taken  the 
lead  among  the  great  powers  in  an  effort  to  bring 
to  the  Korean  people  the  independence  promised 
them  at  Cairo.  Our  success  has  been  limited.  An 
independent  imited  Korea  does  not  yet  exist.  A 
representative  government  has  been  elected  in 
southern  Korea,  where  we  see.the  beginnings  of  a 
modern  democratic  state  which,  if  allowed  to  sur- 
vive, will  be  another  example  of  a  free  nation  to 
which  millions  in  this  important  part  of  the  world 
may  look  for  inspiration.  Conscious  of  its  respon- 
sibilities as  a  former  occupying  power  and  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  resolutions  adopted  by  the 
United  Nations  General  Assembly  which  were 
initiated  by  the  United  States,  the  United  States 
has  been  doing  all  in  its  power  to  assist  the  young 
Republic.  In  addition  to  economic  assistance,  our 
military  authorities  have  participated  in  the  train- 
ing of  the  Korean  govornuient's  security  forces, 


and  as  our  own  troops  have  progressively  been 
withdrawn,  they  have  left  behind  substantial 
quantities  of  equipment  for  the  Korean  forces. 

This  is  in  consonance  with  the  recommendation 
in  the  General  Assembly  resolution  of  November 
14,  11)47,  providing  for  the  formation  of  Korean 
security  forces  and  the  withdrawal  of  the  occupy- 
ing powers.  While  our  remaining  occupation 
forces  will  shortly  be  withdrawn  there  will  be 
retained  in  Korea  a  substantial  military  advisory 
group  to  continue  training  the  Koreans  so  that 
they  will  be  in  a  position  to  handle  internal  secu- 
rity problems  and  resist  outside  pressure  of  less 
magnitude  than  military  aggression  by  a  major 
power.  But  a  sound  economy  is  the  basis  of  mili- 
tary as  well  as  political  strength.  The  Korean 
Ciovernment  cannot  maintain  a  force  able  to  insure 
internal  order  without  a  viable  economy. 

The  rest  of  Asia  is  watching  us  in  Korea.  Here 
in  vivid  contrast  to  the  conditions  found  by  many 
other  peoples  is  a  representative  government, 
opeidy  established  under  the  general  guidance  of 
the  free  nations  of  the  world  associated  in  the 
United  Nations,  face  to  face  with  a  regime  set  up 
in  secret  and  maintained  in  secret  in  defiance  of 
the  United  Nations.  If  we  do  not  do  all  in  our 
power,  consistent  with  our  world-wide  obligations, 
to  assist  this  outpost  of  freedom  so  that  it  will 
have  an  opportunity  to  survive,  countless  mil- 
lions of  the  peoples  of  Asia  will  begin  to  doubt 
the  practical  superioritj-  of  democratic  principles. 
By  heljnng  the  Korean  people  to  attain  a  stable 
economy  on  which  to  build  a  free  and  democratic 
government,  we  will  encourage  millions  of  peoples 
in  the  East  to  retain  their  present  faith  in  de- 
mocracy and  the  principles  for  which  America 
stands.  If  we  fail  we  will  provide  a  rallying  cry 
by  which  the  Communist  leaders  in  all  countries 
from  Japan  to  India  will  attract  more  and  more 
people  to  their  cause. 

Unfortunately,  I  cannot  assure  you  that  ap- 
proval of  the  present  legislation  will  guarantee 
the  survival  of  the  Korean  Republic  and  the 
achievement  of  our  objective  of  a  truly  free  and 
indei)endent  Korea.  I  can  only  say  that  disap- 
proval of  this  program  or  an  inadquate  approach 
to  the  j)robleni  involved  will  guarantee  failure. 
With  the  approval  of  this  program,  there  is  hope — 
without  it,  there  is  despair.  In  the  light  of  present 
woi'ld  conditions  we  cannot  afford  to  risk  return 
to  despair. 

Korean  Military  Advisory  Group  Established 

[Released  to  the  press  June  8] 

The  folJoiinng  is  the  text  of  a  letter  of  May  2,  J949 
to  the  President  of  the  Republic  of  Korea,  Dr. 
Syngman  Rhee,  from  Amhassador  John  J. 
Miiccio  concerning  the  estahlishment  of  a  United 
States  Military  Advisory  Group  in  Korea: 

I  have  the  honor  to  refer  to  your  request  for  a 
United  States  military  and  naval  mission  and  to 
recent  references  thereto  in  our  discussions  looking 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


towards  setting  a  date  for  the  early  withdrawal  of 
United  States  occupation  forces. 

As  you  know,  there  has  been  in  existence  on  a 
provisional  basis  for  more  than  eight  months  a 
United  States  military  mission  known  as  the  Pro- 
visional Military  Advisory  Group  whose  function 
it  has  been  to  advise  and  assist  the  Korean  Gov- 
ernment in  the  development  and  training  of  its 
own  security  forces.  It  is  the  judgment  of  my 
Government  that,  due  in  no  small  part  to  the 
spirit  of  eager  cooperation  which  has  been  shown 
by  the  Korean  Government  and  its  responsible 
officials,  the  work  of  the  Provisional  Military  Ad- 
visory Group  has  contributed  significantly  to 
raising  the  capabilities  of  the  security  forces  of 
the  Republic  of  Korea.  This  judgment  would 
seem  to  be  substantiated  by  your  own  recent  state- 
ment to  the  effect  that  Korean  defense  forces  are 
now  rapidly  approaching  the  point  at  which  our 
security  can  be  assured,  jjrovided  the  Republic  of 


Korea  is  not  called  upon  to  face  attack  from  for- 
eign sources. 

In  order  to  assure  the  continuance  of  this 
progress  without  further  dependence  upon  the 
presence  of  United  States  occupation  forces  in 
Korea,  my  Government  has  decided  to  establish  an 
augmented  Korean  Military  Advisory  (iroup  to 
function  as  a  part  of  the  American  Mission  in 
Korea,  with  responsibility  for  the  training  mission 
heretofore  undertaken  by  the  Provisional  Military 
Advisory  Group.  Under  my  overall  direction  as 
Ambassador,  the  Korean  Military  Advisory  Group 
will  be  headed  by  Brigadier  General  W.  L.  Rob- 
erts, presently  Commanding  General,  United 
States  Army  Forces  in  Korea,  and  Commanding 
Officer  of  the  Provisional  Military  Advisory 
Group.  Further  details  concerning  the  composi- 
tion of  the  new  Military  Advisory  Group  will  be 
discussed  at  an  appropriate  time  with  the  proper 
officials  of  your  Government. 


North  Atlantic  Treaty 

REPORT  OF  THE  COMMITTEE  ON  FOREIGN  RELATIONS' 


The  Committee  on  Foreign  Relations,  to  whom 
was  referred  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  (Execu- 
tive L,  81st  Cong.,  1st  sess.),  sigi\ed  at  Washing- 
ton on  April  4, 1949,  unanimously  report  the  treaty 
to  the  Senate  and  recommend  that  its  advice  and 
consent  to  ratification  be  given  at  an  early  date. 

Part  II.  General  Natdre  or  the  Treaty 
The  treaty  establishes  a  collective  defense  ar- 
rangement for  the  North  Atlantic  area  within 
the  framework  of  the  United  Nations  Charter  and 
based  upon  the  inherent  right  of  individual  or 
collective  self-defense  recognized  by  article  51  of 
the  Charter.  In  many  I'espects  it  is  similar  to  and 
Ijatterned  upon  the  Treaty  of  Rio  de  Janeii'o. 

The  12  signatories  of  the  treaty  are  Belgium, 
Canada,  Denmark,  France,  Iceland,  Italy,  Luxem- 
bourg, the  Netherlands,  Norway,  Portugal,  the 
United  Kingdom,  and  the  United  States. 

The  treaty  is  subject  to  review  at  any  time  after 
10  years  and  any  party  may  cease  to  be  a  party 
after  20  years;  otherwise  it  is  of  indefinite 
duration. 

General  ohjectives  of  the  treaty 

The  primary  objective  of  the  treaty  is  to  con- 
tribute to  the  maintenance  of  peace  by  making 
clear  the  determination  of  the  parties  collectively 
to  resist  armed  attack  upon  any  of  them. 

It  is  designed  to  strengthen  the  system  of  law 
based  upon  the  purposes  and  principles  of  the 

June    T9,    1949 


United  Nations.  It  should  go  far  to  remove  any 
uncertainty  which  might  mislead  potential  ag- 
gressors as  to  the  determination  of  the  parties  fully 
to  carry  out  their  obligations  under  the  Charter 
and  collectively  to  resist  an  armed  attack. 

The  security  of  the  North  Atlantic  area  is  vital 
to  the  national  security  of  the  United  States  and 
of  key  importance  to  world  peace  and  security. 
The  peoples  of  the  North  Atlantic  area  are  linked 
together  not  only  by  the  interdependence  of  their 
security  but  by  a  common  heritage  and  civilization 
and  devotion  to  their  free  institutions,  based  upon 
the  principles  of  democracy,  individual  liberty  and 
the  rule  of  law.  It  is  this  common  heritage  and 
civilization  and  these  free  institutions  which  the 
signatories  are  determined  to  defend. 

The  treaty  is  designed  to  contribute  toward  the 
further  development  of  peaceful  and  friendly  in- 
ternational relations,  to  strengthen  the  free  in- 
stitutions of  the  parties  and  promote  better  under- 
standing of  the  principles  upon  which  they  are 
founded,  to  promote  conditions  of  stability  and 
well-being,  and  to  encourage  economic  collabora- 
tion. It  should  facilitate  long-term  economic  re- 
covery through  replacing  the  sense  of  insecurity 
by  one  of  confidence  in  the  future. 

Although  it  is  intended  that  the  general  ma- 
chinery and  procedures  provided  in  the  Charter 

'  Excerpts  from  S.  Exec.  Kept.  No.  8,  81st  Cong.,  1st 
Sess.,  June  6, 1949. 


would  be  utilized  in  cases  of  disputes  between  the 
sifiiuitories,  the  treaty  can  of  course  be  used  as  a 
regional  arrangement  under  the  United  Nations 
for  dealing  with  such  matters  as  are  appropriate 
for  regional  action  within  the  meaning  of  chapter 
VIII  of  the  Charter. 

The  obligations  of  national  defense  and  ad- 
vancing the  welfare  of  its  people  are  inherent  in 
anv  government-  The  obligations  to  settle  in- 
ternational disputes  by  peaceful  means  and  to  re- 
frain from  the  threat  or  use  of  force,  expressly 
reaffirmed  in  the  treaty,  were  undertaken  by  this 
Government  when  it  ratified  the  United  Nations 
Charter. 
New  obligations 

The  new  obligations  undertaken  by  the  United 
States  in  the  treaty  are — 

1.  To  maintain  and  develop,  separately  and 
jointly  and  by  means  of  continuous  and  effective 
self-help  and  mutual  aid,  the  individual  and 
collective  capacity  of  the  parties  to  resist  armed 
attack  (art.  3)  : 

2.  To  consult  whenever,  in  the  opinion  of  any 
of  the  parties,  the  territorial  integrity,  political 
independence,  or  security  of  any  of  them  is 
threatened  (art.  4) ; 

3.  To  consider  an  armed  attack  upon  any  of 
the  parties  in  the  North  Atlantic  area  an  attack 
against  them  all  (art.  5)  ;  and 

4.  In  the  event  of  such  an  attack,  to  take 
fortlnvith,  individually  and  in  concert  with  the 
other  parties,  such  action  as  the  United  States 
deems  necessary,  including  the  use  of  armed 
force,  to  restoreand  maintain  the  security  of  the 
North  Atlantic  area  (art.  5). 

The  treaty  provides  for  a  council  and  such  sub- 
sidiary agencies  as  may  be  necessary,  including  a 
defense  committee,  to  assist  the  parties  in  giving 
effect  to  the  treaty. 
Safeguards 

The  treaty  in  letter  and  in  spirit  is  purely  de- 
fensive. It' is  directed  against  no  one;  it  is  di- 
rected solely  against  aggression. 

The  treaty  expressly  provides  that  all  of  its 
provisions  must  be  carried  out  in  accordance  with 
the  respective  constitutional  processes  of  the 
parties. 

The  provisions  of  the  treaty  are  expressly  sub- 
ordinated to  (he  purposes,  principles,  and  provi- 
sions of  the  United  Nations  Charter.  The  provi- 
sions of  the  Charter,  wherever  applicable,  control 
every  activity  undertaken  under  the  treaty. 
P.\RT  III.  Analysis  and  Inteupretation  ^ 
PREAJirtl.B 

The  purposes  and  npirit  of  the  treaty 

The  preamble  states  cloarly  and  simply  the  purpose, 
intent,  and  spirit  of  the  treaty.     The  committee  endorses 

788 


this  declaration,  which  is  formal  recognition  of  the  com- 
mon interests,  developing  unity,  and  increasing  interde- 
pendence of  the  North  Atlantic  community. 

It  .should  be  emphasized,  however,  that  the  preamble 
is  no  expression  of  narrow  regionalism  for  the  members" 
will  to  live  in  peace  is  "with  all  peoples  and  all  govern- 
ments"— the  primary  purpose  of  the  Charter  of  the  United 
Nations.  Moreover,  peace,  stability,  and  well-being  in 
the  North  Atlantic  area  are  of  universal  advantage  in  the 
cause  of  peace. 


ARTICLE  1.— PEACEFUL  SETTLEMENT  OF  DISPUTES 


In  this  article  the  members  of  the  pact  reaffirm  the 
solemn  oblisations  which  they  have  accepted  under  the 
United  Nations  Charter  to  settle  all  their  international  dis- 
putes by  peaceful  means.  The  committee  Is  convinced 
that  the  entire  text  of  the  treaty,  and  particularly  this 
article,  makes  abundantly  clear  the  will  of  the  signatories 
for  peace  and  their  desire  to  threaten  no  one. 


By  becoming  parties  to  the  treaty,  countries  which  are 
not  members  of  tlie  United  Nations,  such  as  Italy  and 
Portugal,  accept  the  obligations  set  forth  in  article  2  of 
the  Charter  to  settle  any  international  disputes  In  which 
they  may  be  involved  by  peaceful  means  in  such  a  manner 
that  International  peace  and  security  and  justice  are  not 
endangered. 


ARTICLE  2.— DEVELOPMENT  OF  PEACEFUL  AND 
FRIENDLY  RELATIONS 


Article  2  is  a  reaffirmation  of  faith.  It  demonstrates 
the  conviction  of  the  parties  that  peace  is  positive  and 
dynamic,  that  real  peace  is  far  more  than  the  mere 
ab.sence  of  war.  The  parties  undertalie  to  strengthen  their 
free  institutions,  promote  conditions  of  stability  and  well- 
being,  and  encourage  economic  collaboration. 

The  unilateral  undertalcing  of  the  parties  to  "strengthen 
their  free  institutions"  recognizes  that  free  institutions 
have  succumbed  in  many  places  of  the  world  and  that 
eternal  vigilance  is  still  the  price  of  liberty.  The  effort 
to  secure  "better  understanding"  of  the  principles  upon 
which  these  institutions  are  based  is  a  positive  apprecia- 
tion of  the  role  of  public  opinion,  both  among  the  signa- 
tories and  throughout  the  world.  Free  nations  must  take 
affirmative  measures  to  this  end,  rather  than  resort  to 
censorship  or  iron  curtains.  The  gospel  of  freedom  can 
best  be  spread  by  example. 

The  committee  supports  these  objectives  as  desirable 
goals  to  be  sought  by  the  signatory  parties.  It  believes 
that  their  progressive  attainment  will  contribute  to 
stability,  well-being  and  real  peace. 

No  legislative  action  required 

Considerable  attention  has  been  given  by  the  committee 
to  the  question  whether  article  2,  in  stating  these  objec- 
tives, imposes  on  the  United  States  any  obligation  to  take 
specific  legislative  action.  Would  the  references  to 
"strengthening  free  institutions"  and  "eliminate  conflict 
in  their  international  economic  policies,"  for  example, 
mean  that  we  would  be  obligated  to  enact  additional  legis- 
lation relating  to  civil  rights,  tlie  reduction  of  tariffs,  and 
similar  matters? 

The  committee  is  completely  satisfied  that  this  article 
involves  no  obligation  on  us  to  take  any  legislative  action 

'  For  text  of  the  treaty  see  Bulletin  of  Mar.  20,  1949, 
p.  330,  or  Department  of  State  publication  3464. 


Department  of  Stale   Bulletin 


whatsoever.  In  fact,  no  such  obligations  were  contem- 
plated by  the  negotiators  and  no  new  machinery  is  en- 
visaged for  these  purposes  under  the  treaty.  The  article 
does,  however,  provide  encouragement  for  individual  or 
bilateral  action  or  action  through  such  existing  agencies 
as  the  United  Nations,  the  Brussels  pact,  and  the  Organiza- 
tion of  European  Economic  Cooperation. 

The  committee  finds  no  implication  whatever  in  article  2 
that  the  United  States  could  be  called  upon  under  the 
treaty  to  contribute  toward  a  long-term  recovery  program 
for  Europe. 

ARTICLE  3— SELF-HELP  AND  MUTUAL  AID 


Article  3  embodies  in  the  treaty  the  principle  of  continu- 
ous and  effective  self-help  and  mutual  aid  established  by 
Senate  Resolution  239  as  a  prerequisite  to  United  States 
association  in  any  collective  defense  arrangement.  This 
principle  has  formed  the  basis  of  the  European  recovery 
program.  In  both  cases  the  committee  Is  convinced  that 
the  greater  the  degree  of  coordination  achieved  the  greater 
will  be  the  results  at  the  least  cost  to  each  participant. 
The  committee  also  wishes  to  emphasize  that  under  this 
principle  each  participant  must  do  Its  utmost  to  help  Itself 
and  its  share  to  help  the  others.  There  are  no  free  rides. 
A  definite  obligation  is  undertaken  by  each  party  to  con- 
tribute, individually  and  collectively,  to  the  defense  of 
the  North  Atlantic  area. 

It  has  been  suggested  in  some  quarters  that  article  3 
might  be  interpreted  In  such  a  way  as  to  provide  the  basis 
for  an  armaments  race.  The  committee  rejects  any  such 
interpretation.  Capacity  to  resist  armed  attack  includes 
all  elements.  Including  economic  strength,  and  is  relative 
to  the  degree  of  danger  and  the  strength  of  potential  ag- 
gressors. If  the  treaty  and  the  United  Nations  are  suc- 
cessful in  providing  substantially  increased  security,  it 
should  be  possible  to  have  greater  capacity  to  resist  armed 
attack  with  smaller  military  forces.  The  essential  ob- 
jective is  increased  security,  not  Increased  military 
strength. 

Questions  have  also  been  raised  as  to  whether  the 
United  States,  under  article  3,  would  be  obligated  to  assist 
the  other  parties  to  develop  the  capacity  of  their  overseas 
territories  to  resist  armed  attack.  The  objective  of  the 
treaty  is  to  maintain  the  peace  and  security  of  the  North 
Atlantic  area.  During  the  negotiations  there  were  no 
suggestions  that  this  article  should  be  interpreted  as 
applying  to  any  other  area.  The  United  States  Is  under 
no  obligation  to  assist  the  other  parties  in  building  up 
military  establishments  for  use  in  their  overseas  terri- 
tories, nor  to  engage  in  resisting  armed  attack  outside 
the  area  defined  in  article  6. 

The  committee  calls  attention  to  the  fact  that  the 
United  States  stands  to  gain  great  benefits  from  the 
principle  of  "continuous  and  effective  self-help  and  mutual 
aid."  Implementation  of  this  principle  will  not  only  help 
deter  aggression  but  will  go  far,  in  the  event  all  the 
efforts  of  the  parties  for  peace  should  fall,  to  assure  the 
successful  defense  of  the  United  States  and  the  collective 
strength  essential  for  victory. 

ARTICLE  4— CONSULTATION 


In  article  4  the  parties  undertake  to  consult  whenever 
any  party  so  requests  on  the  basis  that  the  territorial 
integrity,  political  Independence,  or  security  of  any  of 
them  is  threatened.  A  situation  arising  anywhere 
might  be  cause  for  consultation,  provided  that  it  con- 
stituted a  threat  to  one  or  more  of  the  parties  and  might 
involve  obligations  under  the  treaty.  The  committee 
underlines  the  fact  that  consultation  could  be  requested 
only  when  the  element  of  threat  is  present  and  expresses 
the  opinion  that  this  limitation  should  be  strictly 
Interpreted. 


Many  well-known  techniques  have  been  developed 
whereby  internal  disorders  or  coups  are  deliberately  en- 
gineered by  outside  powers  to  further  their  own  Interests. 
Accordingly,  consultation  might  also  be  sought  under 
article  4  in  the  case  of  an  internal  disorder  where  cir- 
cumstances indicated  that  such  disorder  was  being  aided 
and  abetted  by  assistance  from  outside  the  country 
affected. 

Article  4  carries  no  obligation  other  than  that  of  con- 
sultation. Whether  or  not  any  action  was  taken  follow- 
ing consultation,  or  what  form  such  action  might  take, 
would  be  matters  for  each  party  to  decide  for  itself.  It 
should  be  emphasized,  however,  that  in  no  event  is  col- 
lective enforcement  action,  such  as  that  defined  in  articles 
41  and  42  of  the  Charter,  contemplated. 

Use  of  United  Nations  machinery 

The  committee  is  confident  that  the  framers  of  the 
Atlantic  Pact  did  not  intend  that  article  4  should  infringe 
upon  the  efficacy  of  United  Nations  machinery  or  In  any 
way  impair  its  usefulness.  Clearly  there  should  be  no 
duplication  of  United  Nations  machinery.  It  is  the  opin- 
ion of  the  committee  that  consultation  under  article  4 
should  not  be  sought  unless  the  United  Nations  for  some 
reason  Is  prevented  from  dealing  with  the  situation  giv- 
ing rise  for  consultation.  The  committee  wishes  to  em- 
phasize this  view  since  it  has  consistently  supported  the 
United  Nations  as  the  cornerstone  of  American  foreign 
relations,  and  would  be  loath  to  see  any  action  taken  not 
entirely  in  harmony  with  this  policy. 

ARTICLE  5— ACTION  IN  THE  EVENT  OF  ARMED 
ATTACK 


Article  5  is  the  heart  of  the  treaty.  In  it  the  parties 
establish  the  principle  that  an  armed  attack  against  one  or 
more  of  them  is  to  be  considered  an  attack  against  them 
all.  In  accepting  this  principle,  the  committee  believes 
that  the  United  States  Is  acting  on  the  basis  of  a  realiza- 
tion brought  about  by  its  experience  In  two  world  wars 
that  an  armed  attack  in  the  North  Atlantic  area  is  in  effect 
an  attack  on  itself.  The  solemn  acceptance  of  this  prin- 
ciple by  all  the  parties  should  have  a  powerful  deterring 
effect  on  any  would-be  aggressor  by  making  clear  to  him 
in  advance  that  his  attack  would  be  met  by  the  combined 
resistance  of  aU  the  nations  in  the  North  Atlantic  Pact. 

Determination  whether  attack  hag  occurred. 

The  committee  notes  that  article  5  would  come  into 
operation  only  when  a  nation  had  committed  an  interna- 
tional crime  by  launching  an  armed  attack  against  a  party 
to  the  treaty.  The  first  question  which  would  arise  would 
be  whether  or  not  an  armed  attack  had  in  fact  occurred. 
If  the  circumstances  were  not  clear,  there  would  presum- 
ably be  consultation  but  each  party  would  have  the  re- 
sponsibility of  determining  for  itself  the  answer  to  this 
question  of  fact. 

"Such  action  as  it  deems  necessary" 

The  second  problem  is  the  nature  and  extent  of  the 
action  contemplated  as  a  result  of  armed  attack.  The 
action  specified  is  that  deemed  necessary  "to  restore  and 
maintain  the  security  of  the  North  Atlantic  area."  The 
committee  emphasizes  that  this  clearly  does  not  commit 
any  of  the  parties  to  declare  war.  Depending  upon  the 
gi-avity  of  the  attack,  there  are  numerous  measures  short 
of  the  use  of  armed  force  which  might  be  sufficient  to  deal 
with  the  situation.  Such  measures  could  involve  any- 
thing from  a  diplomatic  protest  to  the  most  severe  forms 
of  pressure. 

In  this  connection,  the  committee  calls  particular  atten- 
tion to  the  phrase  "such  action  as  It  deems  necessary." 
These  words  were  included  in  article  5  to  make  absolutely 
clear  that  each  party  remains  free  to  exercise  its  honest 
judgment  in  deciding  upon  the  measures  it  will  take  to 


June   19,   1949 


help  restore  nnd  maintain  the  security  of  the  North  At- 
lantic area.  The  fieedoiu  of  decision  as  to  what  action 
each  party  shall  take  in  no  way  reduces  the  importance  of 
the  commitment  undertaken.  Action  short  of  the  use  of 
armed  force  minht  suffice,  or  total  war  with  all  our  re- 
sources might  be  necessary.  Obviously  article  5  carries 
with  it  an  important  and  far-reaching  commitment  for  the 
United  States;  what  we  may  do  to  carry  out  that  com- 
mitment, however,  will  depend  upon  our  own  Independent 
decision  in  each  particular  instance  reached  in  accordance 
with  our  own  constitutional  processes. 

President  and  Congress 

The  answer  to  both  these  questions  is  "No."  An 
armed  attack  upon  any  State  of  the  United  States  by  its 
very  nature  would  require  the  immediate  application  of 
all  force  necessary  to  repel  the  attack.  The  Constitution 
itself  recognizes  the  special  significance  of  such  a  calam- 
ity by  providing  that  the  United  States  shall  protect  each 
State  against  invasion.  Similarly,  the  government  of 
any  nation  party  to  the  treaty  would  feel  itself  under  obli- 
gation and  under  imminent  pliysical  need  to  give  the 
highest  priority  to  essential  countermeasures  to  meet  an 
armed  attack  upon  its  own  homeland. 

In  the  event  any  party  to  the  treaty  were  attacked  the 
obligation  of  the  United  States  Government  would  be  to 
decide  upon  and  take  forthwith  the  mea.sures  it  deemed 
necessary  to  restore  and  maintain  the  security  of  the 
North  Atlantic  area.  The  measures  which  would  be  nec- 
essary to  accomplish  that  end  would  depend  upon  a  num- 
ber of  factors,  including  the  location,  nature,  scale,  and 
significance  of  the  attack.  The  decision  as  to  what 
action  was  necessary,  and  the  action  itself,  would  of 
course  have  to  be  taken  in  accordance  with  established 
constitutional  procedures  as  the  treaty  in  article  11  ex- 
pressly requires. 

Article  .'>  records  what  is  a  fact,  namely,  that  an  armed 
attack  within  the  meaning  of  the  treaty  would  in  the 
present-day  world  constitute  an  attack  upon  the  entire 
community  comprising  the  parties  to  the  treaty,  includ- 
ing the  United  States.  Accordingly,  the  President  and 
the  Congress,  within  their  sphere  of  assigned  constitu- 
tional responsibilities,  would  be  expected  to  take  all  action 
necessary  and  appropriate  to  protect  the  United  States 
against  the  consequences  and  dangers  of  an  armed  attack 
committed  against  any  party  to  the  Treaty.  The  com- 
mittee does  not  believe  it  appropriate  in  this  report  to 
undertake  to  define  the  authority  of  the  President  to  use 
the  armed  forces.  Nothing  in  the  treaty,  however,  includ- 
ing the  provision  that  an  attack  against  one  shall  be  con- 
sidered an  attack  against  all,  increases  or  decreases  the 
constitutional  powers  of  either  the  President  or  the  Con- 
gress or  changes  the  relationship  between  them. 

Duration  of  action 

Measures  may  be  taken  under  article  5  only  when  an 
armed  attack  has  occurred  and  must  be  terminated  when- 
ever the  Security  Council  has  taken  the  measures  neces- 
sary to  restore  and  maintain  international  peace  and 
security.  Thus  action  under  article  .5  will  never  be  neces- 
sary unless  the  Security  Council  has  been  unable  to  meet 
its  responsibilities  and  must  cease  whenever  the  Security 
Council  has  regained  control  of  the  situation.  The  treaty, 
like  article  r)i  nf  tlu>  Charter,  provides  insurance  against 
a  situation  which  the  Security  Council  is  unable  to  control. 
The  committee  is  convinced  that  the  treaty,  in  making 
clear  that  an  aggressor  could  not  profit  from  such  a  situa- 
tion, provides  a  valuable  supplement  to  the  Charter  in 
reducing  the  possibility  that  it  might  arise. 

ARTICLE  6— DESCRIPTION  OF   NORTH  ATLANTIC 
ARIiA 


Article  G  specifies  the  area  within  which  an  armed 
attack  would  bring  the  provisions  of  article  5  into  opera- 
tion. Thus,  the  obligations  under  article  5  are  strictly 
limited  to  the  area  described. 

790 


The  word  "area"  is  intended  to  cover  the  general  region, 
rather  than  merely  the  North  Atlantic  Ocean  in  a  narrow      I 
.sense,  and  Includes  the  western  part  of  the  Mediterranean      ' 
as  well  as  the  North  Sea  and  most  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico. 
Western   Europe  faces  on   the   Atlantic  even   if  all   the 
nations  of  the  western  Euroi)ean  community  do  not. 

in  view  of  the  purpose  of  the  treaty  to  deter  armed  at- 
tack, the  area  cxvered  by  the  treaty  was  deliberately 
described  in  general  terms  rather  than  defined  by  lines  on 
a  map.  The  committee  agrees  that  this  general  descrip- 
tion is  preferable,  for  it  would  seem  inconsistent  with 
the  si)irit  of  the  treaty  to  provide  that  article  ,5  would 
come  into  operation  in  the  event  of  an  attack,  for  example, 
upon  ships  or  aircraft  at  a  given  point  but  not  if  the 
attack  occurred  a  few  miles  away.  If  there  should  be 
any  doubt  as  to  whether  or  not  an  armed  attack  has  taken 
place  within  the  area  specified  in  the  treaty,  each  party 
would  decide  for  itself,  in  the  light  of  the  facts  surround- 
ing the  i)articular  situation  and  the  significance  of  the 
attack. 

Not  applicable  to  overseas  territories 

The  committee  wishes  to  emphasize  the  fact  that 
article  5  would  not  apply  to  any  of  the  overseas  territories 
outsi<le  the  North  Atlantic  area  as  described  in  article  6. 
The  three  Algerian  departments  of  France  (which  consti- 
tute only  a  small  part  of  the  total  territory  of  Algeria) 
are  an  integral  part  of  metropolitan  France  under  the 
French  Constitution  and  are  not  overseas  possessions. 
The  only  outlying  territories  covered  are  the  islands  in 
the  North  Atlantic  area,  Alaska,  the  Aleutian  Islands,  and 
the  islands  of  the  Canadian  Arctic. 

ARTICLE    7— PARAMOUNT    AUTHORITY     OF    THE 
UNITED  NATIONS 


Lest  there  be  any  misunderstanding  about  the  relative 
position  of  the  treaty  and  the  United  Nations  Charter, 
article  7  makes  clear  the  overriding  character  of  the 
Charter  with  respect  to  the  obligations  of  the  signatories 
who  are  also  members  of  the  United  Nations.  This  prin- 
ciple is  in  accordance  with  the  provisions  of  article  103 
of  the  Charter  which  stipulates  that — 

In  the  event  of  a  conflict  between  the  obligations  of  the 
Members  of  the  United  Nations  under  the  present  Charter 
and  their  obligations  under  any  other  international  agree- 
ment, their  obligations  under  the  present  Charter  shall 
prevail. 

The  provisions  of  the  Charter  thus  govern,  wherever  they 
may  be  applicable,  any  activities  undertaken  under  the 
treaty. 

The  Charter  also  bestows  upon  the  Security  Council 
the  primary  responsibility  for  the  maintenance  of  inter- 
national peace  and  security.  In  the  opinion  of  the  com- 
mittee the  treaty  rightly  recognizes  the  primary  respon- 
sibility of  the  Security  Council  in  this  field  and  makes 
clear  the  intent  of  the  signatories  not  to  compete  with  this 
responsibility  or  interfere  with  it  in  any  way. 

This  desire  not  to  compete  with  or  impair  the  authority 
of  the  United  Nations  is  applicable  not  <inly  to  the  Security 
Council  but  to  other  organs  of  the  United  Nations,  which, 
the  committee  understands,  the  parties  intend  to  use 
wherever  appropriate. 

ARTICLE    8— POSSIBLE    CONFLICT    WITH    OTHER 
TREATIES 


Article  8  is  designed  to  make  perfectly  clear  that  none 
of  the  existing  international  engagements  of  any  of  the 
signatories  is  in  conflict  with  the  provisions  of  the  treaty. 
Each  signatory  has  solemnly  declared  that  in  fact  there 
is  no  conflict  and  that,  in  effect,  they  have  no  commit- 


Department  of  State  6u//efin 


ments  which  would  prevent  them  from  carrying  out  their 
obligations  under  the  pact.  The  committee  sees  no  reason 
why  the  United  States  Governmeut  should  question  the 
validity  of  this  declaration  by  the  signatories. 

Italian  peace  treaty 

The  committee  also  examined  the  terms  of  the  Italian 
peace  treaty,  which  limit  the  size  of  the  Italian  armed 
forces  and  the  extent  to  which  rearmament  will  be  possible. 
Given  these  limitations  the  question  naturally  arises  as 
to  whether  Italy  could  live  up  to  her  obligations  under 
article  3  of  the  Atlantic  Pact  to  develop  her  capacity  to 
resist  armed  attack.  The  matter  is  adequately  disposed 
of  by  the  following  statement  supplied  for  the  record  by 
the  State  Department : 

It  is  understood  by  all  parties  to  the  treaty  that  the 
participation  of  Italy  in  the  North  Atlantic  Pact  has  no 
effect  on  the  military  provisions,  or  any  other  provisions, 
of  the  Italian  peace  treaty.  Any  contribution  which  Italy 
makes  to  the  collective  capacity  for  defense  of  the  North 
Atlantic  area  must  be  within  the  limits  fixed  by  the  mili- 
tary provisions  of  the  Italian  peace  treaty. 

ARTICLE  9— ORGANIZATION  UNDER  THE  TREATY 


While  some  machinery  is  clearly  necessary  for  the  effec- 
tive implementation  of  the  treaty,  it  would  be  inadvisable 
to  attempt  to  elaborate  this  machinery  in  detail  in  the 
treaty.  On  the  contrary,  it  is  preferable  that  the  machin- 
ery be  described  only  in  broad  outline  in  order  that  the 
specific  organization  may  be  evolved  in  the  light  of  need 
and  experience.  The  committee  urges  that  the  organiza- 
tion set  up  be  as  simple  as  possible  consistent  with  its 
function  of  assisting  implementation  of  the  treaty  and  that 
maximum  use  be  made  of  existing  organizations. 


It  should  be  emphasized,  however,  that  the  respon.sibil- 
ity  for  making  decisions  lies  in  the  respective  governments 
rather  than  in  the  council.  Since  the  council  will  have 
only  advisory  powers,  no  voting  procedure  is  needed  or 
contemplated.  No  party  will  have  a  veto,  nor  can  it  be 
coerced  into  taking  a  decision  against  its  own  judgment. 

ARTICLE  10— NEW  MEMBERS 


Senate  action  necessary  on  new  inenibers 

Inasmuch  as  the  admission  of  new  members  might 
radically  alter  our  obligations  under  the  pact,  the  com- 
mittee examined  article  10  very  carefully.  The  question 
arose  whether  any  United  States  decision  respecting  new 
members  would  be  based  solely  on  Presidential  action  or 
would  require  Senate  approval.  Consequently,  the  com- 
mittee was  fully  satisfied  by  the  commitment  of  the 
President,  delivered  by  the  Secretary  of  State,  that  he 
would  consider  the  admission  of  a  new  member  to  the  pact 
as  the  conclusion  of  a  new  treaty  with  that  member  and 
would  seek  the  advice  and  consent  of  the  Senate  to  each 
such  admission.  The  committee  considers  this  an  obli- 
gation binding  upon  the  Presidential  otBce. 

Spain  and  Oermany 

The  signatory  countries  did  not  invite  Spain  to  par- 
ticipate though  it  is  recognized  that  Spain  is  strategically 
important  to  the  defense  of  the  North  Atlantic  area. 
Whether  Spain  will  be  invited  to  participate  at  a  later 
date  will  depend  upon  the  unanimous  decision  of  the 
parties. 

So  many  imponderables  affect  the  current  position  of 
Germany,  which  is  still  under  military  occupation,  that 
in  the  negotiations  extensive  consideration  was  not  given 
to  the  inclusion  of  western  Germany.  Presumably,  Ger- 
many will  be  reunited  one  day,  but  time  is  required  so  that 
the  German  people  may  prove  their  attachment  to  the 
principles  of  the  treaty.    Meanwhile,  it  should  be  noted 


June   19,   J  949 


that  Germany  receives  some  protection  since  the  treaty 
covers  armed  attack  upon  the  occupation  forces. 

ARTICLE  11— CONSTITUTIONAL  PROCESSES 


The  committee  and  the  Senate,  in  Senate  Resolution 
239,  attached  great  importance  to  assuring  that  any  such 
agreement  as  the  pact  would  not  only  be  ratified  in  ac- 
cordance with  the  "respective  constitutional  processes" 
of  the  signatory  nations,  but  also  that  all  its  provisions 
would  be  carried  out  under  the  same  constitutional  safe- 
guards. Constitutional  processes  for  giving  effect  to  the 
will  of  the  people  are  the  very  essence  of  democracy  and 
it  is  only  through  wide  popular  support  that  the  treaty 
can  be  given  the  strength  and  vitality  necessary  to  assure 
its  success. 

The  committee  wishes  to  emphasize  the  fact  that  the 
protective  clause  "in  accordance  with  their  respective 
constitutional  processes"  was  placed  in  article  11  in  order 
to  leave  no  doubt  that  it  applies  not  only  to  article  5, 
for  example,  but  to  every  provision  in  the  treaty.  The 
safeguard  is  thus  all-inclusive. 

The  treaty  in  no  way  affects  the  basic  division  of 
authority  between  the  President  and  the  Congress  as 
defined  in  the  Constitution.  In  no  way  does  it  alter  the 
constitutional  relationship  between  them.  In  particular, 
it  does  not  increase,  decrease,  or  change  the  power  of  the 
President  as  Commander  in  Chief  of  the  armed  forces  or 
impair  the  full  authority  of  Congress  to  declare  war. 

Except  for  the  proposed  foreign  military  assistance 
program,  no  legislation  related  to  the  treaty  is  presently 
contemplated  or  considered  necessary. 

Effectiveness  of  the  democratic  process 

It  has  been  questioned  whether  a  treaty  subordinating 
action  to  the  constitutional  processes  of  12  democratic 
nations  offers  sufficient  certainty  and  immediacy  of  action 
effectively  to  deter  aggression.  The  committee  is  con- 
vinced that  it  does.  The  expression  of  the  will  of  a  whole 
people  offers  far  more  certainty  than  any  commitment  by 
a  dictator.  The  action  of  the  democracies  in  the  past 
great  war  is  concrete  evidence  of  their  ability  to  act  with 
the  necessary  speed  in  the  event  of  an  emergency. 

ARTICLE  12— REVIEW  AND  AMENDMENT  OF 
TREATY 


The  treaty  takes  into  account  the  processes  of  peaceful 
change  and  the  need  for  flexibility  in  a  rapidly  changing 
world  by  providing  that  its  terms  may  be  reviewed  at  any 
time  after  it  has  been  in  force  10  .years.  Of  course,  earlier 
review  is  possible  by  unanimous  consent.  For  purposes  of 
review,  the  signatories  will  take  into  account  the  factors 
affecting  peace  and  security  in  the  North  Atlantic  area. 
The  committee  draws  particular  attention  to  the  explicit 
reference  that  developments  in  the  United  Nations,  includ- 
ing universal  as  well  as  regional  arrangements,  will  figure 
significantly  among  such  factors. 

Apart  from  the  general  review  contemplated  in  article  12 
the  treaty  makes  no  provision  for  particular  amendments. 
If  such  amendments  were  advanced,  they  would  require 
the  unanimous  approval  of  the  signatory  states.  In  our 
own  case  the  advice  and  consent  of  the  Senate  would  be 
required.  The  committee  believes  that  the  interests  of 
the  United  States  would  be  amply  protected  by  these  safe- 
guards. 

ARTICLE  13— DURATION  OF  TREATY 


This  article  provides  that  after  the  treaty  has  been  in 
effect  for  20  years  any  party  may  cease  to  be  a  party  1 
.year  after  notice  of  denunciation  has  been  given.  There 
is  no  provision  for  individual  members  to  withdraw  prior 
to  that  time. 


791 


The  committee  gave  eerlous  thought  to  the  problems  In- 
volved In  the  duration  of  the  treaty.  In  view  of  the  diffi- 
culties of  forecasting  developments  in  the  International 
situation  in  the  distant  future,  rigidity  for  too  long  a  time 
clearly  would  be  undesirable.  On  the  other  hand,  the  com- 
mittee agrees  that  the  stability  and  confidence  which  are 
so  essential  for  the  security  of  the  North  Atlantic  area 
could  not  adequately  be  established  if  the  treaty  were  of 
short  duration.  It  accepts  as  a  desirable  solution,  there- 
fore, the  indefinite  duration  of  the  treaty,  with  provision 
for  review  after  10  years,  and  for  withdrawal  after  20 
years. 

ARTICLE   14— AUTIiENTICITY   OF   TEXTS 


Article  14  is  a  formal  article  concerning  the  equal  au- 
thenticity of  the  English  and  French  texts  which  have  been 
found  to  be  identical  in  meaning.  Each  text  being  equally 
authentic,  as  is  the  case  with  any  treaty  done  in  more 
than  one  language,  neither  prevails  over  the  other;  and 
any  differences  In  interpretation  which  might  arise  would 
have  to  be  settled  by  negotiation. 


3.  COMPARISON  OF  TREATY  WITH  OLD-FASHIONED 
MILITARY  ALLIANCES 

Some  confusion  may  have  arisen  in  the  public 
mind  due  to  the  allegations  of  certain  critics  that 
the  treaty  is  an  "old-fashioned  military  alliance" 
of  the  type  which  Washington  warned  against  in 
his  Farewell  Address.  In  the  past,  niilitary  alli- 
ances have  varied  widely  in  both  their  language 
and  their  intent.  On  the  surface,  at  least,  many  of 
them  were  purely  defensive  in  nature.  The  com- 
mittee believes,  however,  that  in  actuality  the  pres- 
ent treaty  is  fundamentally  different  from  the  old- 
fashioned  alliances  which  characterized  European 
diplomacy  during  past  centuries. 

Some  of  these  alliances  constituted  automatic 
commitments  to  go  to  war  in  the  event  the  other 
parties  became  involved.  The  Holy  Alliance,  for 
example,  provided  that  the  parties  "will  on  all 
occasions  and  in  all  places  lend  each  other  aid  and 
assistance."  Some  of  them  were  personal  agree- 
ments concluded  between  kings  or  emperors  who 
were  often  related  to  each  other.  Many  of  them 
were  kept  secret  and  often  those  which  were  made 
public  were  accompanied  by  secret  understand- 
ings, with  aggression  and  national  aggrandizement 
in  the  minds  of  the  signatories  if  not  in  the  actual 
texts  of  the  treaties.  Most  of  them  were  limited 
to  two  or  three  parties. 

The  present  treaty  avoids  all  these  undesirable 
aspects.  Its  entry  into  force  and  its  execution  de- 
pends upon  the  continuing  support  of  the  people 
of  the  signatory  states  given  through  their  demo- 
cratic constitutional  processes.  Moreover,  it  has 
been  conceived  within  the  framework  of  the  United 
Nations  Charter  with  all  the  solemn  obligations 
against  aggressive  action  which  that  document  im- 
poses upon  its  members.  Finally,  in  both  intent 
and  language,  it  is  purely  defensive  in  nature.  It 
comes  into  operation  only  against  a  nation  which, 
by  its  own  action,  has  proved  itself  an  inter- 
national criminal  by  violating  the  Charter  and 


attacking  a  party  to  the  treaty.  It  continues  in 
operation  only  until  the  Security  Council  has 
taken  the  measures  necessary  to  restore  and  main- 
tain peace  and  security.  If  it  can  be  called  an 
alliance,  it  is  an  alliance  only  against  war  itself. 


6.  THE  TREATY  AND  THE  MILITARY  ASSISTANCE 
PROGRAM 

The  committee  did  not  consider  in  detail  the 
military  assistance  program  since  legislation  deal- 
ing with  that  matter  has  not  yet  been  submitted 
to  the  Congress.  It  is  understood,  however,  that 
the  President  will  soon  recommend  legislation  au- 
thorizing the  transfer  of  military  equipment  and 
assistance  to  the  Atlantic  Pact  signatories.  The 
proposed  pro<?ram  will  request  $1,130,000,000  for 
members  of  tne  Atlantic  Pact  and  approximately 
$320,000,000  for  other  countries,  including  Greece 
and  Turkey,  making  a  total  of  $1,450,000,000  for 
the  fiscal  year  1950. 

Whether  approval  of  the  treaty  by  the  United 
States  woidd  constitute  any  kind  of  commitment 
to  support  the  military-assistance  program  was 
discussed  at  considerable  length  during  the  hear- 
ings. Clearly  the  ratification  of  the  treaty  would 
commit  the  United  States  to  the  principle  ex- 
pressed in  article  3,  namely,  to  maintain  and  de- 
velop the  individual  and  collective  capacity  of  the 
signatories  to  resist  armed  attack  "by  means  of 
continuous  and  effective  self-help  and  mutual  aid." 
It  is  equally  clear,  however,  that  article  3  does  not 
bind  the  United  States  to  accept  the  proposed 
military-assistance  program  or,  for  that  matter, 
any  particular  kind  of  implementation  program. 
It  does  bind  our  Government,  as  well  as  the  other 
signatory  governments,  to  the  general  principle 
of  self-help  and  mutual  aid.  Each  member  of  the 
pact  will  have  to  exercise  its  own  honest  judgment 
as  to  what  steps  it  should  take  to  give  effect  to  this 
principle. 

The  State  Department  has  assured  the  commit- 
tee that  during  the  negotiations  no  commitments 
of  any  kind  were  made  by  the  United  States  to 
furnish  military  assistance.  The  European  nego- 
tiators were  constantly  reminded  that  the  imple- 
mentation of  article  3  by  the  United  States  would 
depend  upon  congressional  action.  While  they 
were  told  that  the  administration  intended  to  in- 
troduce legislation  authorizing  the  transfer  of 
military  equipment,  at  the  same  time  they  were 
repeatedly  warned  that  no  assurances  whatsoever 
could  be  given  as  to  whether  or  not,  in  what  form 
or  in  what  amounts,  such  legislation  would  be 
approved. 

With  these  factors  in  mind  the  committee  agrees 
that  the  treaty  and  the  military-assistance  pro- 
gram should  be  considered  separately  by  the  Con- 
gress, each  on  its  own  merits.  The  committee 
further  agrees  that  a  member  of  the  Senate  might 
vote  for  the  treaty  and  still  find  valid  reasons  for 

D»parlm»nt  of  Staf»  Bulltfin 


opposing  the  program  of  implementation  recom- 
mended oy  the  administration.  During  the  hear- 
ings several  members  of  the  committee  publicly 
announced  that  their  support  for  the  pact  did  not 
necessarily  mean  they  were  going  to  approve  the 
military-assistance  program. 

On  this  point  the  following  statement  of  Secre- 
tary Acheson,  as  he  testified  before  the  committee, 
is  pertinent : 

The  judgment  of  the  executive  branch  of  this  Govern- 
ment is  that  the  United  States  can  and  should  provide 
military  assistance  to  assist  the  other  countries  In  the 
pact  to  maintain  their  collective  security.  The  pact  does 
not  bind  the  Congress  to  reach  that  same  conclusion, 
for  it  does  not  dictate  the  conclusion  of  honest  judgment. 
It  does  preclude  repudiation  of  the  principle  or  of  the 
obligation  of  making  that  honest  judgment.  Thus,  if  you 
ratify  the  pact,  it  cannot  be  said  that  there  Is  no  obliga- 
tion to  help.  There  is  an  obligation  to  help,  but  the 
extent,  the  manner,  and  the  timing  is  up  to  the  honest 
judgment  of  the  parties.  I,  therefore,  earnestly  trust 
that  the  Congress  will  see  fit  to  enable  this  Government 
to  carry  out  that  aspect  of  Its  foreign  policy  represented 
by  the  proposed  military-assistance  program. 

Paet  V.  Conclusions  and  Recommendations 
1.  NEED  FOR  RATIFICATION 

The  committee  believes  that  our  failure  to  ratify 
the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  would  have  disastrous 
consequences  abroad.  At  the  present  time  there 
is  an  encouraging  momentum  of  confidence  that 
has  been  building  up  in  Europe  during  the  past 
year  as  a  direct  result  of  our  interest  and  as- 
sistance. The  failure  of  the  political  strikes  in 
France,  the  Communist  losses  in  the  Italian  and 
French  elections  in  1948  and  1949,  the  recent  suc- 
cess of  the  French  internal  loan  and  the  increased 
strength  of  the  western  European  currencies  gen- 
erally, the  recent  agreements  on  Germany,  and  the 
success  of  the  recovery  program — all  these  things 
reflect  this  growing  momentum. 

The  great  retarding  factor  in  the  European  situ- 
ation has  been  the  pervading  sense  of  insecurity. 
This  sense  of  insecurity  has  been  lessened  during 
the  past  year  as  a  direct  result  of  American  inter- 
est in  common  security  problems  as  demonstrated 
by  the  passage  of  Senate  Resolution  239  and  our 
willingness  to  negotiate  and  sign  the  North  At- 
lantic Treaty.  The  decision  on  the  part  of  some 
of  the  European  nations,  such  as  Norway  and  Den- 
mark, to  participate  in  the  treaty  was  not  taken 
without  full  regard  for  the  risks  inherent  in  mak- 
ing clear  their  determination  to  resist  aggression. 

The  committee  strongly  believes  that  it  would 
be  in  the  best  interests  of  the  United  States  and  in- 
deed, the  entire  world,  to  sustain  and  encourage 
the  momentum  of  confidence  that  has  been  build- 
ing up  in  Europe,  by  ratifying  the  treaty  at  an 
early  date. 

2.  SUMMARY  OF  REASONS  COMMITTEE  URGES 
RATIFICATION 

On  June  6  the  committee  unanimously  agreed  to 
report  the  treaty  to  the  Senate  for  favorable  action. 

June   19,  1949 


Its  reasons  for  recommending  ratification  include 
the  following : 

(1)  The  treaty  should  greatly  increase  the  pros- 
pect that  another  war  can  be  averted  by  making 
clear  in  advance  the  determination  of  these  12 
nations  of  the  North  Atlantic  area  to  throw  their 
collective  power  and  influence  into  the  scales  on 
the  side  of  peace. 

(2)  It  expresses  in  concrete  terms  the  will  of 
the  American  people,  and  the  other  peoples  of  the 
North  Atlantic  area,  to  work  constantly  to  main- 
tain peace  and  freedom. 

(3)  Since  the  course  of  action  envisaged  in 
the  treaty  is  substantially  that  which  the  United 
States  would  follow  without  the  treaty,  there  is 
great  advantage  to  the  United  States  and  the 
entire  world  in  making  clear  our  intentions  in 
advance. 

(4)  The  treaty  is  expressly  subordinated  to  the 
purposes,  principles,  and  provisions  of  the  United 
Nations  Charter  and  is  designed  to  foster  those 
conditions  of  peace  and  stability  in  the  world 
which  are  essential  if  the  United  Nations  is  to 
function  successfully. 

(5)  It  is  wholly  consistent  with  our  Constitution 
and  stipulates  that  all  its  provisions  shall  be  car- 
ried out  in  accordance  with  the  constitutional 
processes  of  the  participating  countries. 

(6)  The  treaty  is  in  accordance  with  the  basic 
interests  of  the  United  States,  which  should  be 
steadfastly  served  regardless  of  fluctuations  in 
the  international  situation  or  our  relations  with 
any  country. 

(7)  In  strengthening  the  security  of  the  North 
Atlantic  area  the  treaty  greatly  increases  the  na- 
tional security  of  the  United  States. 

(8)  It  is  strictly  in  accordance  with  the  Senate's 
recommendation,  expressed  last  year  in  Senate 
Resolution  239,  that  the  United  States  should  asso- 
ciate itself  with  collective  defense  arrangements 
and  thus  contribute  to  the  maintenance  of  peace  by 
making  clear  its  determination  to  defend  itself 
against  any  armed  attack  affecting  its  national 
security. 

(9)  The  treaty  will  greatly  increase  the  deter- 
mination of  the  North  Atlantic  states  to  resist 
aggression  and  their  confidence  that  they  can  suc- 
cessfully do  so. 

(10)  It  will  free  the  minds  of  men  in  many 
nations  from  a  haunting  sense  of  insecurity  and 
enable  them  to  work  and  plan  with  that  confidence 
in  the  future  which  is  essential  to  economic  re- 
covery and  progress. 

(11)  By  encouraging  this  feeling  of  confidence 
and  security  it  should  eventually  make  possible 
substantial  savings  for  the  United  States  both  in 
connection  with  the  European  recovery  progi-am 
and  our  domestic  Military  Establishment. 

(12)  The  treaty  is  essential  to  the  development 
of  that  degree  of  unity  and  security  among  the 
North  Atlantic  states  which  will  make  possible 


the  reintppratinn  of  Germany  into  western  Europe 
and  the  ultimate  solution  of  the  German  problem. 

(13)  It  will  greatly  stimulate  the  efforts  of  the 
North  Atlantic  states  to  help  themselves  and  to 
help  each  other  and,  through  proper  coordina- 
tion of  these  efforts,  to  achieve  maximum  benefits 
with  mininmm  costs  and  bring  far  greater  strength 
than  could  be  achieved  by  each  acting  alone. 

(14)  In  the  event  our  efforts  for  peace  are  under- 
mined and  war  is  imposed  upon  us,  the  treaty  as- 
sures us  that  11  other  nations  will  stand  with  us 
to  defend  our  freedom  and  our  civilization. 

(15)  The  treaty  is  not  confined  to  tlie  prevention 
of  war  but  reflects  the  will  of  the  participating 
nations  to  strengthen  the  moral  and  material 
foundations  of  lasting  peace  and  freedom. 

In  tendering  this  unanimous  report  on  the  North 
Atlantic  Treaty,  we  do  so  in  furtherance  of  our 
Nation's  most  precious  heritage — shared  in  com- 
mon with  the  other  signatories — continuing  faith 
in  our  dependence  upon  Almighty  God  and  His 
guidance  in  the  affairs  of  men  and  nations. 


British  Ambassador  Deposits  Ratification  of 
North  Atlantic  Treaty 

Exchange  of  Remarks  Between  Ambassador 
Franks  and  Acting  Secretary  Webb 

(Released  to  the  press  June  7] 

The  following  is  the  text  of  remarks  made  by 
the  British  Ambassador,  Sir  Oliver  Franks,  upon 
the  occasion  of  the  deposit  of  tlie  United  Kingdom 
instrument  of  ratification  of  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty  and  the  reply  of  Acting  Secretary  of  State 
James  E.  Webb. 

Remarks  by  Sir  Oliver  Franks 

I  have  been  instructed  by  Mr.  Bevin  to  hand 
to  you  the  instrument  of  ratification  by  His  Maj- 
esty the  King  of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty  signed 
in  Washington  two  months  ago. 

The  United  Kingdom  Parliament  voted  in 
favor  of  ratifying  the  Treaty  by  an  overwhelming 
majority.  In  so  doing,  Parliament  expressed  the 
conviction  of  the  British  people  that  the  North 
Atlantic  Treaty  is  a  major  contribution  to  world 
peace  and  that  its  early  entry  into  force  will  add 
greatly  to  the  general  stability  and  security.  The 
British  people  are  determined  to  play  their  part 
as  loyal  members  of  the  North  Atlantic  community 
in  the  defense  of  democracy,  as  is  indeed  already 
shown  by  the  stei)s  which  they  are  taking  in  con- 
junction with  their  fellow  members  of  the  Brussels 
Treaty,  and  to  take  their  full  share  in  the  respon- 
sibilities which  the  Treaty  places  upon  its  Signa- 


tories. They  do  so  in  the  firm  belief  that  in 
present  circumstances  the  Treaty  provides  the  best 
guarantee  for  future  peace. 

Reply  by  Acting  Secretary  of  State  James  E.  Webb 

Mr.  Ambassador,  this  instrument  of  ratifica- 
tion will  be  deposited  in  the  Archives  of  the  United 
States  with  the  original  of  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty,  and  this  Government  will  inform  the  other 
Signatories  that  it  has  been  deposited. 

"I  should  like  to  pay  tribute  to  the  people  of  the 
United  Kingdom,  who  have  always  done  their  ut- 
most in  the  interests  of  preserving  freedom  and  a 
democratic  way  of  life.  Their  steadfastness  in 
serving  the  cause  of  peace  once  again  has  been 
demonstrated  by  the  ratification  of  this  Treaty. 


Ninth  Session  ECOSOC — Continued  from  page  779 

42.  E/1334 :  Report  of  the  International  Refugee 
Organization,  to  be  distributed  on  28  Rlay 
1949 

43.  Council  resolution  l7l  (VTI) 

E/1318 :  Report  of  the  Secretary-General  on 
relations  with  inter-governmental  organiza- 
tions, distributed  on  26  April  1949, 
E/1318/Corr.l  and  E/1318/Corr.2 

44.  Reports  to  be  distributed  after  the  meetings  of 
the  Committe  to  convene  on  4  Julj'  at  Geneva 
and,  if  required,  during  the  session 

45.  Council  resolution  131  (VI) 

E/1322 :  report  of  the  Secretary-General  dis- 
tributed on  23  May  1949;  E/1322/Add.l  and 
E/1.322/Add.2,  to  be  distributed  in  the  first 
half  of  June. 

46.  Council  resolution  205  (VIII) 

Report  of  the  Secretary-General  to  be  dis- 
tributed on  27  May  1949 

47.  At  its  meeting  of  13  April  1949,  the  Interim 
Committee  on  Programme  of  Meetings  agreed 
to  consider  in  the  latter  part  of  May  a  prelim- 
inary draft  calendar  of  conferences  for  1950 
(E/C.4/SR.13) 

48.  General  Assembly  resolution  207  (III) 
Council  resolution  199  (VIII) 

See  document  E/INF.21/Rev.2  for  terms  of 
oflice  of  members  of  Commissions 

49.  E/1332:  Communication  from  the  World  Fed- 
eration of  Trade  Unions,  distributed  on  19 
Ma  J'  1949;  additional  documentation  to  be 
received  from  the  World  Federation  of  Trade 
Unions. 

50.  Rule  33  of  the  Rules  of  Procedure  of  the  Coun- 
cil 

Note  by  the  Secretary-General  to  be  distrib- 
uted 

51.  Document  to  be  distributed  during  the  Coim- 
cil  session 

52.  Rule  14  of  the  Rules  of  Procedure 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Accomplishments  of  Institute  of  Inter-American  Affairs 


STATEMENT  BY  WILLARD  L.  THORP  > 
Assistant  Secretary  for  Economic  Affairs 


The  proposed  legislation  for  continuing  and 
expanding  the  activities  of  the  Institute  of  Inter- 
American  Affairs  is  directly  in  line  with  our  for- 
eign policy,  particularly  as  it  relates  to  coopera- 
tion with  the  other  American  Republics. 

The  activities  of  the  Institute  are  based  on  tech- 
nical and  scientific  cooperation  with  other  nations 
of  this  hemisphere  to  strengthen  the  foundations 
of  their  freedom  and  ours. 

What  our  country  has  to  contribute  to  this  com- 
mon objective,  more  significant  than  money  or  ma- 
terial resources,  is  the  technical  knowledge  and 
skill  we  have  gained  in  the  course  of  our  own  de- 
velopment. The  programs  of  the  Institute  of 
Inter-American  Affairs  are  developmental  pro- 
grams in  which  technicians  from  the  United  States 
work  abroad  with  the  technicians  of  the  cooperat- 
ing countries  to  increase  the  productivity  of  the 
farmers,  wipe  out  disease,  and  to  reduce  ignorance. 

The  Congress  has  recognized,  as  have  all  who 
have  been  familiar  with  these  cooperative  pro- 
grams, that  they  have  been  and  are  successful. 
I  quote  the  following  statement  from  the  report  of 
the  House  Committee  on  Foreign  Affairs,  which 
was  incorporated  in  the  report  of  the  Senate  Com- 
mittee on  Foreign  Relations,  on  the  Institute  of 
Inter- American  Affairs  Act  of  1947. 

Results  achieved.  The  hearings  brought  out  impressive 
evidence  of  the  practicality  of  the  accomplishments  of  the 
activities  here  under  review.  The  programs  aim  to 
strengthen  the  bonds  of  friendship  among  the  American 
Republics  and  to  add  to  the  foundation  of  democratic 
society  ...  by  concrete  examples  in  the  form  of  hospitals 
built,  infested  areas  made  healthful,  undernourished  seg- 
ments of  the  populations  brought  to  a  proper  diet  standard, 
illiterate  people  provided  with  schools,  and  the  like. 

It  was  brought  out  that  to  date  upward  of  25,000,000 
people  in  Latin  America  have  received  tangible,  prized 
benefits  through  these  cooperative  efforts,  which  they  re- 
gard as  telling  evidence  of  the  good  will  of  the  people  of 
the  United  States.  Latin  Americans  consider  them  a  con- 
spicuously successful,  desirable  Implementation  of  the  good 
neighbor  policy,  in  furtherance  of  the  inter-American 
political  system.  Each  of  the  other  participating  gov- 
ernments has  requested  continuance  of  the  programs  and 
progressively  increases  the  proportion  of  its  contribution. 

Through  the  benefits  realized  in  thousands  of  commu- 
nities by  millions  of  the  Latin  Americans  served  by  the 
programs,  an  appreciable  impetus  has  been  given  toward 
raising  consumer  standards  and  in  other  ways  as  well, 
bringing  home  to  the  masses  what  democracy  stands  for 
and  can  do.  The  programs  are  recognized  by  Latin  Ameri- 
can statesmen  and  American  diplomats  as  an  effective  in- 
strument for  strengthening  democratic  ideas  and  institu- 
tions and  counteracting  the  spread  of  communism  among 
the  masses.  They  do  this  liy  demonstrating  the  practical 
capacity  of  democratic  governments,  aided  by  this  form  of 

June    19,   J949 


cooperation,  to  improve  basic  conditions  of  human  life 
and  successfully  meet  the  challenge  of  totalitarian 
propaganda. 

The  success  we  have  had  with  these  programs 
may  in  part  be  attributed  to  the  device  of  the  co- 
operative servicio,  as  we  call  it.  This  is  an  ad- 
ministrative arrangement  whereby  a  bureau  or 
office,  called  servicio,  is  set  up  within  the  Ministry 
of  Agriculture  or  Health  or  Education  of  the 
other  government,  generally  under  the  direction 
of  a  United  States  technician  paid  by  the  Institute. 
This  servicio  is  responsible  to  the  minister  and  is 
staffed  by  United  States  and  local  technicians  to- 
gether. It  operates  with  funds  contributed  in 
large  part  by  the  local  government,  in  smaller  part 
by  the  Institute,  to  a  common  pool.  Our  experi- 
ence has  been  that  our  contribution  to  such  a  pool 
is  essential  to  maintaining  in  practice  the  concept 
of  partnership  between  governments.  This  part- 
nership, in  turn,  has  been  successful  in  insuring 
the  continuity  of  programs  in  spite  of  local  politi- 
cal vicissitudes  and  local  changes  of  administra- 
tion. 

These  programs  are,  by  their  nature,  long  range. 
In  the  past  2  years  the  Institute  has  operated  on 
a  year-to-year  basis,  not  knowing  whether  it  would 
have  funds  to  continue  or  whether  it  would  have 
to  liquidate  its  participation  in  these  programs 
all  over  the  hemisphere.  If  the  decision  of  the 
Congress  is  to  continue  this  activity,  I  am  sure  the 
Congress  will  want  it  continued  in  such  a  way  that 
the  relatively  small  amount  of  money  involved  can 
be  spent  with  maximum  effectiveness.  This  means 
that  programs  must  be  planned  and  agreements 
entered  into  for  several  years  ahead.  Let  me  quote 
a  dispatch  from  our  ambassador  in  Paraguay  on 
this  point.    He  writes  as  follows : 

"The  Embassy  would  like  to  emphasize  the  need 
for  signing  contracts  with  the  Latin  American 
Governments  for  as  long  periods  as  possible.  Its 
realization  of  the  need  goes  back  to  the  experience 
during  the  last  year  when  it  was  mandatory  to 
obtain  a  contract  for  just  twelve  months.  At  that 
time  neither  the  Department,  Iiaa,  nor  the  Em- 
bassy knew  whether  it  would  be  possible  to  operate 
these  three  organizations  (conducting  the  health, 
agricultural  and  educational  programs  respec- 
tively)  beyond  June  30,  1949.     This  experience 

'  Made  before  the  Senate  Foreign  Relations  Committee 
on  June  10,  1949,  and  released  to  the  press  on  the  same 
date. 


showed  the  Embassy  that  it  is  a  great  deterrent  if 
not  an  impossibility,  for  Paraguay  (and,  certainly, 
for  the  other  Latin  American  countries)  to  main- 
tain an  interest  in  the  work  of  these  three  agencies 
when  it  is  being  done  on  a  year-to-year  basis.  The 
Government  and  officials  of  Paraguay  need  a 
longer  period  in  order  to  budget  and  make  ar- 
rangements for  the  funds  for  her  contribution  to 
the  maintenance  of  the  three  agencies.  On  the 
other  hand,  if  the  political  and  governmental  lead- 
ers of  Paraguay  can  look  ahead  for  a  period  of 
five  or  ten  years  of  activity  (for  the  three  pro- 
grams) they  will  be  stimulated  to  plan  and  to 
obtain  funds  for  Paraguayan  cooperation  in  their 
work. 

"It  is  equally  as  important  to  recall  that  the 
American  personnel  of  these  civilian  missions  are 
unable  to  plan  and  carry  out  the  work  to  be  done 
on  a  year-to-year  basis.  They  must,  if  their  work 
is  to  be  effective,  make  plans  on  a  longer  range. 
Whether  we  consider  the  improvement  of  planting 
seed,  the  training  of  agricultural  supervisors,  in- 
struction in  public  health,  or  education  in  plumb- 
ing, radio  or  auto  mechanics,  our  Chiefs  of  Party 
must  be  able  to  plan  for  a  period  of  more  than 
twelve  months. 

"All  that  has  been  said  above  underlines  the 
need  of  our  agencies  for  long  term  contracts  which 
Embassy  experience  has  shown  necessary.  If  five 
year  contracts  can  be  signed  hereafter  the  people 
of  the  United  States  will  get  more  value  per  dollar 
for  money  spent  than  it  will  be  possible  to  obtain 
under  shorter  contracts,  regardless  of  the  effort 
spent  by  the  Department,  the  Iiaa,  and  the  Iiaa 
agencies." 

The  proposed  legislation  has  been  drawn  up  to 
meet  the  need  outlined  in  the  statement  I  have  just 
quoted  by  enabling  the  Institute  to  plan  and  work 
on  the  basis  of  3-to-5-year  commitments. 

To  the  extent  that  these  programs  realize  their 
long-range  objectives,  they  promote  the  economic 
and  political  stability  of  the  countries  that  consti- 
tute our  inter-American  community.  This  means 
an  expanding  international  trade.  It  means 
better  markets  for  our  products  and  more  effective 
supplies  for  our  needs.  Incidentally,  these  pro- 
grams have  a  direct  effect  in  increasing  the  de- 
mand for  particular  United  States  products  by 
introducing  and  demonstrating  on  a  large  scale  the 
use  of  our  agricultural  machinery,  our  pharma- 
ceuticals, hospital  equipment,  medical  supplies, 
and  so  forth.  Far  more  important,  however,  is 
the  fact  that  by  promoting  conditions  of  economic 
health  they  strengthen  the  hemisphere  of  which 
we  are  a  part  and  enable  it  better  to  withstand 
any  aggression,  direct  or  indirect,  that  might  be 
launched  against  it.  By  helping  our  neighbors  to 
help  themselves,  we  are  promoting  the  conditions 
that  make  inter- American  cooperation  in  all  fields 
more  constructive  and  effective. 

I  had  said  that  the  programs  are  generally  rec- 
ognized as  outstanding  successes.    Last  August  we 


queried  our  ambassadors  in  the  16  countries  where 
programs  are  now  operative,  and  queried  them  in 
confidence,  asking  them  to  report  whether  and 
how  the  programs  were  assisting  in  implementing 
the  foreign  policy  of  the  United  States,  whether 
the  programs  were  building  good  will  for  the 
United  States,  and  whether  they  ought  to  be  ex- 
tended. Now  it  is  the  business  of  our  ambassadors 
to  be  critical  where  the  national  interest  is  not  be- 
ing served  in  a  positive  fashion,  but  the  response 
in  this  case  was  uniformly  favorable,  and,  I  think 
I  may  say,  generally  enthusiastic. 

Our  ambassador  to  Bolivia  wrote :  "My  own  esti- 
mate of  the  value  of  the  Institute's  activities 
is  a  high  one  ...  I  consider  that  the  pro- 
grams .  .  .  are  necessary  in  developing  the 
mode  of  life  that  we  desire  to  have  in  the  Western 
Hemisphere    .     .    ." 

Our  ambassador  to  Paraguay  wrote:  "I  consider 
that  the  maintenance  and  continuance  of  all  three 
programs  (in  food  production,  health  and  basic 
education)  is  essential  to  the  development  of  our 
foreign  policy  in  this  country  and  that  the  work 
they  are  doing  helps  this  Embassy  immeasurably 
in  carrying  out  its  mission  here.  ...  To  dis- 
continue any  one  of  these  programs  now  would 
be  to  throw  away  many  of  the  benefits  already 
gained  and  to  lose  most  of  the  investments  which 
have  been  made     .     .     ." 

These  quotations,  of  course,  are  representative 
of  favorable  reports.  I  camiot  quote  examples  of 
unfavorable  reports  because  there  were  none. 

I  have  so  far  emphasized  the  positive  benefits 
that  result  from  the  continuance  of  these  programs. 
I  am  bound  to  call  attention,  as  well,  to  the  positive 
damage  that  would  result  if  our  country  should 
suddenly  withdraw  from  this  cooperation.  It 
would  certainly  be  taken  as  evidence  in  support  of 
the  false  charges  that  we  have  turned  our  backs  on 
our  sister  republics  in  the  hemisphere,  that  the 
good-neighbor  policy  has  been  a  temporary  ex- 
pedient, and  that  our  advocacy  of  inter-American 
cooperation  has  been  cynical.  We  cannot  possibly 
meet  all  the  requests  for  assistance  that  come  to  us 
from  our  neighbors  to  the  south,  but  we  can  con- 
tinue and  we  can  strengthen  this  kind  of  assistance, 
which  consists  in  the  application  of  our  technical 
knowledge  and  our  skills  to  their  basic  problems. 

The  work  of  the  Iiaa  is  in  conformity  with 
point  4  of  the  President's  inaugural  address,  in 
which  he  stressed  "making  the  benefits  of  our  st-icn- 
tific  advances  and  industrial  progress  available  for 
the  improvement  and  growth  of  underdeveloped 
areas." 

As  you  know,  the  Department  of  State  was 
designated  by  the  President  as  the  agency  re- 
sponsible for  developing  plans  to  implement  this 
objective.  I  expect  that  the  results  of  the  inter- 
departmental study  that  has  been  going  forward 
under  my  direction  will  be  submitted  to  the  Con- 
gress by  the  President  early  next  week.  The  work 
of  the  Iiaa  has  been  thoroughly  reviewed,  and 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


there  is  no  question  about  the  desirability  of  con- 
tinuing this  type  of  activity. 

The  IiAA  and  the  projects  it  is  carrying  out 
have  the  earnest  endorsement  of  the  President,  of 
the  Department  of  State,  and  of  our  ambassadors, 
■who  speak  at  first  hand  for  their  effectiveness  in 
the  field.  These  are  down-to-earth  programs  of 
constructive  action.    We  request  authorization  of 


the  Congress  to  continue  their  development  as  im- 
portant and  integral  aspects  of  our  relations  with 
our  sister  American  Republics,  and  in  accordance 
with  the  policy  proclaimed  by  President  Truman. 
Dr.  Dillon  Myer,  President  of  the  Institute,  is 
prepared  to  give  you  a  full  description  of  these 
projects  and  explanations  of  the  proposed  bill  and 
to  answer  your  questions  in  detail. 


Iron  Curtains 


BY  WILLARD  L.  THORP  < 
Assistant  Secretary  for  Economic  Affairs 


The  Soviet  Union  is  clearly  trying  to  reduce  its 
contact  with  the  outside  world  to  a  minimum.  At 
the  moment,  it  maintains  as  far  as  possible  a  closed 
system.  The  iron  curtain  may  not  be  as  tangible 
as  the  Great  Wall  of  China,  but  it  is  a  much  more 
effective  barrier  against  outside  influence. 

The  most  obvious  operation  of  the  curtain  is  evi- 
dent in  the  limited  number  of  individuals  who 
move  across  the  border.  Only  a  handful  of  for- 
eigners obtain  permission  to  enter  Russia  today, 
and  as  for  Russians  traveling  outside,  even  the 
ambassadors  do  not  keep  their  wives  and  children 
with  them  on  their  posts. 

Nor  have  unoffiical  ambassadors  been  any  more 
successful.  Shortly  after  the  end  of  the  war,  the 
Department  of  State  invited  the  Soviet  Union  to 
arrange  for  a  visit  to  this  country  of  the  Red  Army 
Chorus  and  other  similar  groups,  at  the  same  time 
suggesting  the  possibility  of  corresponding  visits 
to  the  Soviet  Union  by  American  groups.  It  was 
proposed  that  there  be  instituted  an  exchange  of 
ballet  groups,  theater  groups,  and  orchestras,  and 
that  reciprocal  exhibits  of  art,  architecture,  and 
handicraft  be  arranged  as  a  means  of  increasing 
the  mutual  understanding  of  the  Soviet  and  Amer- 
ican people. 

During  the  next  year  or  so,  there  were  a  num- 
ber of  offers  either  to  visit  Russia  or  to  welcome 
Russians  to  the  United  States  made  by  various  in- 
terested American  private  groups  and  individuals, 
who  hoped  to  establish  cultural  interchange  with 
the  Soviet  Union.  Texas,  Columbia,  and  Amherst, 
among  other  educational  institutions,  endeavored 
to  offer  tuition  fellowships  to  Soviet  students. 
Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technology,  Princeton, 
and  others,  expressed  their  desire  to  exchange 
scientific  personnel.  The  members  of  the  Boston 
Symphony  Orchestra  offered  to  travel  to  the 
Soviet  Union  for  2  weeks  at  their  own  expense  to 
give  a  series  of  performances,  the  proceeds  to  be 
used  for  whatever  benefits  the  Soviet  Government 
might  select.  Most  of  these  offers,  and  there  were 
many  more,  were  never  even  acknowledged,  and 
nothing  materialized  from  any  of  them. 

At  least,  the  Ballet  Theatre  got  an  answer 
within  the  last  few  days  to  an  earlier  offer  to 

June   19,    1949 


send  a  company  of  our  outstanding  dancers  to 
Russia  at  no  expense  to  the  Soviet  Union.  The 
offer  was  rejected  in  terms  which  might  have  been 
a  paraphrase  of  Mr.  Belvedere's  expressions  of 
self-esteem : 

"We  are  sure  that  it  would  be  highly  beneficial 
for  the  American  ballet  dancers  to  acquaint  them- 
selves with  the  achievement  of  the  ballet  in  our 
coiintry,  which  has  stepped  up  to  a  new  higher 
level  of  perfection  during  the  days  of  the  Soviet 
power." 

In  late  1946,  the  Surgeon  General  of  the  United 
States  Public  Health  Service  invited  four  prom- 
inent Soviet  doctors,  including  the  eminent  Dr. 
Parin,  then  Secretary  General  of  the  Soviet 
Academy  of  Medical  Sciences,  to  inspect  Ameri- 
can hospitals  and  our  main  cancer  research  cen- 
ters. All  the  latest  scientific  developments  were 
shown  the  group  during  its  visit.  But  this  was 
clearly  not  in  line  with  Soviet  policy.  Upon  his 
return  to  Moscow,  Dr.  Parin  apparently  disap- 
peared, and  shortly  thereafter,  the  Soviet  Minister 
of  Health  was  dismissed.  In  December  1947,  the 
iron  curtain  was  formally  recognized  by  a  decree 
legally  prohibiting  Soviet  cultural,  scientific,  and 
educational  institutions  from  dealing  directly  with 
foreigners,  thus  reducing  the  very  small  area  of 
infoi'mal  contacts  which  had  existed. 

It  does  not  appear  to  be  enough  to  restrict  con- 
tact merely  on  the  grounds  of  wasted  effort,  al- 
though this  point  of  view  has  been  frequently 
stated.  For  example,  a  statement  by  K.  Malkhov, 
a  Stalin  auto  plant  engineer,  was  recently  pub- 
lished in  Russia,  after  a  trip  to  the  United  States, 
"I  became  convinced  we  Soviet  specialists  have 
nothing  to  learn  from  Americans."  Western  or- 
ganizations are  regarded  as  threats.  Thus,  Pro- 
fessor Bernstein,  a  Soviet  professor,  denounced 
the  private  American  organization,  the  Institute 
of  International  Education,  which  had  endeavored 
to  arrange  for  an  interchange,  as  a  "monopoly 


'Address  made  at  the  commencement  exercises  of  Am- 
herst College,  Amherst,  Mass.,  on  June  12,  1949,  and  re- 
leased to  the  press  on  the  same  date. 


American  institution  for  training  legal  'peda- 
gogic' spies  and  informers,  and  for  establishing 
an  'American  column'  in  every  countrj'." 

Even  an  interest  in  Western  ideas  has  now  be- 
come unpatriotic  and  disgraceful.  Wliile  the  iron 
curtain  operates  as  a  bar  to  actual  contact  with  the 
outside  world,  it  is  supported  by  continual  efforts 
to  denounce  foreign  concepts  and  notions.  In 
Pravda  March  3,  194:8,  A.  A.  Zhdanov,  the  Soviet 
Minister  of  Higli  Education,  warned  Soviet  scien- 
tists against  tninking  about  the  possibility  of 
scientific  collaboration  with  foreign  colleagues  in- 
asmuch as  science  cannot  be  divorced  from  politics. 
Better  known  is  the  decree  of  February  10,  1948, 
laying  down  the  policy  that  Soviet  music  must  be 
nationalistic,  calling  upon  the  composers  to  end 
forever  all  ties  with  "bourgeois"  ideology  in  art. 
The  prescriptions  for  the  performance  of  archi- 
tects also  announce  the  superiority  of  Soviet 
architecture,  which  reflects  "the  Stalinist  principle 
of  solicitude  for  man"  rather  than  "the  ugly,  mis- 
anthropic essence  of  the  capitalist  system.""  Says 
one  of  the  leading  Soviet  architects,  G.  Seminov, 
"The  architecture  of  foreign  skj^scrapers  represses 
man,  does  not  take  account  of  him,  of  his  interests 
and  his  demands."  Perhaps  the  highest  propa- 
ganda point  in  this  field  has  been  reached  by  the 
announcement  that  Russian  architects,  wlio'have 
built  no  .skyscrapers  as  yet,  will  construct  build- 
ings which  will  be  completely  rigid  and  immov- 
able, typifying  the  might  and  planned  character 
of  the  socialist  national  economy,  and  not  struc- 
tures like  the  Empire  State  Building  which  sway 
dangerously  with  every  breeze,  typifying  the  in- 
stability of  the  capitalist  world.  '  Art  and  litera- 
ture likewise  must  protect  themselves  from  foreign 
influences,  feeding  entirely  upon  internal  sources 
and  nieeting  criteria  established  by  political 
authorities. 

Along  with  the  barriers  against  the  inflow  of 
ideas  and  information,  there  seems  to  be  a  reduc- 
tion in  intellectual  traffic  within  the  area.  The 
First  Five- Year  Plan  effective  in  1929  was  pub- 
lished in  four  volumes;  the  Second  in  two;  the 
Third  in  one  volume  of  239  pages ;  and  the  Fourth, 
for^l945-50,  in  si.x  pages  in  Pravda.  In  June 
1947,  the  Soviets  established  probably  the  most 
extensive  list  of  "state  secrets"  that  anv  country 
has  ever  established.  It  so  classified  military  and 
scientific  information,  and  information  concern- 
ing industry,  agriculture,  finance,  trade,  and  trans- 
port. The  decree  ended  with  an  omnibus  clause 
covering  "other  information  which  the  Council 
of  Ministers  of  the  U.S.S.R.  decides  should  not  be 
divulged."  The  clause  on  scientific  information 
classifies  as  secret : 

"The  discoveries,  inventions,  technical  improve- 
ments, research  and  experimental  work  in  all 
branches  of  science,  technology  and  national  econ- 
omy until  they  have  been  finally  completed  and 
permission  to  publish  them  has  been  given." 


Penalties  for  disclosing  such  secrets  are  now  from 
4  to  20  years  in  corrective  labor  camps.  Even 
the  United  Nations  has  great  difficulty  in  getting 
the  simplest  statistics  from  Russia,  with  the  result 
that  its  bulletins  contain  the  phrase  over  and  over 
again,  "world  total  excluding  U.S.S.R." 

In  the  past,  Russia  has  had  periods  when  the 
curtains  have  been  drawn,  for  example,  when 
Czar  Nicholas  I  feared  the  possible  spread  of  the 
Western  European  revolutionary  movement  of 
1848.  On  the  other  hand,  Peter  the  Great  trav- 
eled incognito  to  other  countries  for  the  very  pur- 
pose of  finding  new  ideas  and  new  methods. 
Between  the  wars,  there  were  numerous  Russian 
visitors  to  the  United  States  to  learn  modern 
technology,  although  the  purges  of  the  middle 
thirties  appear  to  have  been  directed  in  part  at 
Russians  who  had  been  too  friendly  with  foreign 
persons  or  ideas.  During  this  interwar  period, 
a  number  of  American  engineers  worked  on  proj- 
ects in  Russia,  including  such  major  efforts  as  the 
Dnieperstroy  Dam.  During  tlie  war  period 
and  immediately  thereafter,  American  industry 
opened  wide  its  doors  to  Soviet  engineers,  tech- 
nicians, and  scholars.  This  was  a  one-way  street, 
and  few  Americans  ever  visited  Russian  plants 
although  there  were  hundreds  of  Russian  visitors 
who,  at  the  time,  talked  and  behaved  as  though 
they  did  have  something  to  learn  from  Americans. 
However,  today,  the  curtain  is  all  pervasive.  It 
ranges  from  jamming  the  air  waves  and  censoring 
the  reporting  of  foreign  correspondents  to  bar- 
ring the  gates  to  foreign  visitors  and  denouncing 
as  degenerate  all  foreign  ideas. 

I  need  not  take  time  to  describe  our  own  coun- 
try. We  all  recognize  that  the  United  States  has 
been  built  with  foreign  material.  True,  there  are 
many  residues  still  surviving  from  the  Indians, 
among  them  a  collection  of  troublesome  poly- 
syllabic geographic  names,  some  unusual  designs 
and  patterns,  and  some  good  literary  and  football 
material.  However,  on  the  whole,  M-e  owe  far 
more  to  European  civilization.  We  have  at- 
tracted and  absorbed  immigrants,  skills  and  tech- 
nology, equipment  and  capital,  and  ideas  from 
many  other  countries,  and  we  continually  acknowl- 
edge that  indebtedness. 

Still  unformed  and  without  social  rigidities  at 
the  time  of  the  Social  and  Industrial  Revolution, 
it  was  easy  for  the  American  society  to  develop 
on  the  basis  of  freedom  and  ready  access.  We  did 
not  have  a  social  structure  which  had  acquired 
social  habits  and  institutions  over  the  previous 
centuries,  based  on  different  concepts  and  a  differ- 
ent state  of  knowledge,  largely  tied  to  the  main- 
tenance of  tlie  status  quo.  We  could  adopt  more 
easily  the  new  concept  of  individual  freedom. 
Ideas  were  free  to  compete  in  public,  and  free  dis- 
cussion has  long  been  one  of  our  great  national 
pastimes. 

We  have  of  course  contributed  our  own  share 
to  the  course  of  American  progress.  But  our  rail- 
roads were  built  in  large  part  by  foreign  capital 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


and  immigrant  labor.  Our  basic  concepts  of  law 
and  government  trace  back  to  foreign  sources. 
And  even  in  the  twentieth  century,  our  own  great 
research  laboratories  and  scientific  studies  nave 
utilized  and  added  to  many  major  discoveries 
made  in  other  lands.  Foreign  artists,  foreign 
musicians,  foreigii  authors,  and  foreign  motion 
pictures  are  all  familiar  elements  in  our  cultural 
life.  And  only  a  few  ignoramuses — using  the 
word  with  the  full  overtones  of  the  original 
Latin — ever  say  "This  is  bad  because  it  is  foreign." 

To  be  sure,  we  are  far  from  the  achievement  of 
the  ideal  of  free  circulation.  We  have  established 
limits  for  immigration  although  the  new  dis- 
placed-persons  legislation  helps;  we  have  our 
share  of  regional  prejudices  and  biases;  we  have 
shameful  evidences  of  class  and  racial  discrimina- 
tion; even  the  problem  of  setting  certain  bound- 
aries to  free  discussion  still  raises  issues  to  add  to 
the  record  of  divided  opinions  on  the  part  of  the 
already  harassed  Supreme  Court.  But  the  fact 
remains  that  our  progress,  such  as  it  is,  has  been 
possible  in  very  large  part  because  of  the  wide 
acceptance  of  the  notion  of  the  intellectual  and 
economic  open  door  and  resultant  cumulative 
interplay  of  many  contributing  sources,  domestic 
and  foreign. 

It  is  not  my  purpose  to  analyze  or  explain  these 
two  currently  contrasting  situations  and  their 
possible  significance  in  the  world  today.  I  have 
painted  these  two  quick  and  incomplete  sketches 
merely  to  point  out  to  each  of  you  in  the  most 
graphic  way  I  can  imagine,  the  challenge  of  your 
own  future.  Individuals  have  the  same  choices 
as  nations.  You  can  be  a  closed  system  within  an 
iron  curtain,  or  you  can  be  an  open  system  con- 
stantly absorbing  new  facts  and  ideas  from  out- 
side sources. 

The  primary  purpose  of  a  liberal  axis  college 
like  Amherst  is  to  get  rid  of  iron  curtains, — to  de- 
velop the  habit  and  practice  of  the  open  mind.  It 
is  said  that,  at  the  first  meeting  of  a  class  of  grad- 
uate students  in  economic  theory  in  Cornell,  be- 
fore the  professor  had  learned  to  distinguish  one 
student  from  another  by  name,  one  man  out  of  the 
mass  asked  a  particularly  penetrating  question, 
and  Professor  Davenport  replied,  "As  to  the  ques- 
tion asked  by  the  gentleman  from  Amherst  .  .  ." 
I  don't  know  whether  he  guessed  that  it  was  an 
Amherst  man  because  of  the  courage  required  to 
ask  the  first  question,  or  because  of  its  originality. 
But  I  submit  that  such  an  incident,  even  if  apocry- 
phal indicates  a  wonderful  reputation  for  a  college 
and  for  Amherst  men  to  have. 

The  possession  of  an  open  mind  does  not  mean 
merely  that  you  will  seek  out  exposure  to  new  facts 
and  ideas.  This  process  is  of  value  only  if  you 
proceed  to  apply  the  intellectual  process,  testing 
new  ideas  against  your  own  firm  convictions,  so 
that  you  actually  grow  in  understanding  rather 
than  bewilderment.  The  open  mind  must  be  ac- 
tive, not  passive.     It  must  challenge  and  be  eager 

June   79,   7949 


to  be  challenged.  It  must  be  skeptical  yet  con- 
tinually seeking  to  be  convinced. 

There  are  many  ways  of  describing  the  behavior 
of  an  open  and  trained  mind,  the  educated  mind, 
at  work.  First,  it  has  an  insatiable  thirst  for  evi- 
dence. It  wishes  facts,  more  facts,  and  more  facts. 
And  it  will  never  select  arbitrarily  the  particular 
facts  to  be  used  to  assure  its  arrival  at  some  de- 
sired conclusion.  The  trained  mind  recognizes 
that  the  conclusion  must  encompass  all  the  evi- 
dence, applying  a  coefficient  of  reliability,  of 
course. 

One  of  my  most  disappointing  experiences  in 
international  conferring  began  last  November  at 
the  United  Nations  General  Assembly  in  Paris 
when  the  Foreign  Minister  of  an  Eastern  Euro- 
pean country  charged  the  United  States  with  re- 
fusing to  grant  licenses  required  to  export  certain 
items  into  his  country.  He  specifically  listed  cot- 
ton 1  inters,  synthetic  resins,  ball  bearings,  radio 
tubes,  knitting  needles,  apparatus  for  measure- 
ment, and  phonograph  discs,  indicating  that  these 
were  all  completely  barred  from  trade.  I  imme- 
diately cabled  to  Washington  and  got  the  facts  in 
each  case,  and  made  a  speech  discussing  each  item 
in  detail.  I  shall  not  repeat  the  speech,  but  as  a 
quick  summary,  it  proved  to  be  the  fact  that  with 
respect  to  certain  items,  cotton  linters  and  phono- 
graph discs,  all  applications  for  licenses  had  been 
granted.  With  respect  to  other  items,  such  as 
synthetic  resins,  ball  bearings,  radio  tubes,  and 
apparatus  for  measurement,  licenses  had  been 
granted  for  substantial  amounts,  often  more  than 
the  prewar  quantities.  In  the  case  of  radio  tubes, 
for  example,  licenses  had  been  approved  in  a  ratio 
of  68  approved  to  1  rejected,  measured  in  value 
terms.  In  the  case  of  knitting  needles,  there  had 
been  a  tremendous  overshipment  in  March  1948, 
which  brought  the  total  far  in  excess  of  prewar 
shipments  and  of  license  authorizations  as  of  that 
time,  but  I  reported  that  the  matter  had  since 
been  cleared  up,  and  that  pending  applications 
were  being  validated.  In  February,  at  Lake  Suc- 
cess, at  the  meeting  of  the  Economic  and  Social 
Council,  the  delegate  from  the  same  country  made 
exactly  the  same  charges  and  cited  exactly  and 
completely  the  same  list  of  items.  My  statements 
as  to  the  facts  might  just  as  well  never  have  been 
made.  Here  was  a  complete  iron  curtain  as  to 
testimony  and  evidence.  The  open  mind,  on  the 
contrary,  is  not  merely  in  search  of  new  evidence, 
but  is  prepared  to  proceed  to  strengthen  or  re- 
construct earlier  conclusions  with  every  bit  of  new 
material  available. 

Second,  the  educated  mind  is  continually  aware 
of  and  reexamining  the  assumptions  with  which  it 
works.  It  always  seemed  to  me  that  one  of  the 
great  values  of  mathematics  is  the  conspicuous 
nature  of  its  assumptions  and  definitions.  Thus, 
we  can  say  that  three  plus  three  are  six  in  a  system 
of  numbers  based  on  ten,  but  if  we  had  had  only 
two  fingers  on  each  hand  and  had  built  up  a  system 


of  numbers  based  on  four,  three  plus  three  would 
truly  be  twelve.  In  the  economic,  political,  and 
social  fields,  we  have  our  assumptions  and  our 
definitions,  and  we  need  to  be  fully  aware  of  them. 
Here  is  where  we  are  likely  to  carry  over  prejudice 
and  bias  from  our  parents  or  our  social  group. 
For  example,  too  many  people  base  their  judgment 
concerning  acts  of  Congress  on  some  simple 
assumption  such  as  that  Congress  is  controlled  and 
directed  by  Wall  Street,  or  by  the  labor  unions,  or 
by  some  religious  group,  or  by  some  small  group 
of  descendants  of  the  1933  migration  to  Washing- 
ton. The  Communists,  of  course,  lay  all  its  actions 
to  the  "monopolists,"  whoever  they  may  be.  Any 
of  these  assumptions  is  not  only  untrue,  but  it 
is  likewise  dangerous  as  providing  a  basis  for 
interpreting  our  political  processes. 

Third,  the  educated  mind,  given  its  facts  and 
its  assumptions,  seeks  internal  consistency.  This 
is  the  area  of  logic.  One  persistent  enemy  of  the 
reasoning  process  is  the  person  who  draws  a  grand 
conclusion  because,  "I  knew  a  case  once  when  .  .  ." 
thus  demonstrating  a  generalization  by  a  partic- 
ular. Here  also  is  the  area  where  honesty  is  par- 
ticularly important.  Prejudice,  bias,  or  even 
ulterior  motive  all  try  to  twist  the  results.     I  once 

Erepared  a  detailed  study  for  a  State  Commission 
ased  on  extensive  field-work.  The  laboriously 
gathered  facts  led,  it  seemed  to  me,  to  an  obvious 
and  inevitable  conclusion.  The  report  was  pub- 
lished, but  the  State  Commission  drew  the  opposite 
conclusion  and  made  the  opposite  recommendation 
to  the  legislature.  It  is  not  an  unrelated  fact  that 
there  were  more  voters  with  a  financial  interest  on 
the  side  taken  by  the  Commission. 

The  educated  mind  therefore  is  actively  search- 
ing for  the  truth  by  demanding  evidence,  recog- 
nizing assumptions,  and  striving  to  derive  an 
honest  and  consistent  conclusion.  This  process 
inevitably  suggests  that  the  educated  mind,  be- 
cause of  its  awareness  of  the  limitations  on  cer- 
tainty, will  tend  to  be  hesitant  and  ineffective. 
This  is  the  dilemma  of  those  who  make  use  of  the 
intellectual  process.  From  the  viewpoint  of  soci- 
ety, it  is  a  very  real  danger,  because  the  iron  cur- 
tain operator  has  no  such  diflBculty.  He  is  sure 
and  certain,  even  to  the  point  of  fanaticism.  If 
you  do  desire  to  keep  the  iron  curtains  up,  you  must 
be  determined  and  ready  to  reach  conclusions  for 
action,  even  if  only  tentative,  at  any  given  moment 
of  time.  The  closed  mind  has  no  need  for  choice. 
The  open  mind  must  be  able  and  willing  .to  choose, 
to  select,  to  evaluate,  and  to  act  accordingly.  The 
intellectual  process  is  not  designed  to  stop  all 
action,  but  rather  to  assure  that  the  course  will 
be  followed  at  any  moment  of  time  whose  wisdom 
seems  clearest  in  terms  of  the  illumination  then 
available. 

It  is  of  course  much  simpler  to  live  with  the 
curtains  drawn,  or  riveted  about  one's  self.  By 
carefully  spending  your  time  with  people  of  the 
same  02:)inion  as  j'ours,  by  avoiding  all  controver- 


sial reading  or  lectures,  by  keeping  the  conversa- 
tion on  safe  subjects  such  as  goli,  beverages,  opera- 
tions, and  pei-sonal  misdemeanors,  or  otherwise 
excusing  yourself  from  the  group,  you  can  easily 
prevent  any  light  from  reaching  you.  You  will 
never  be  disturoed  or  your  conclusions  challenged 
by  new  facts  or  new  ideas.  You  will  never  have 
the  embarrassing  problem  of  admitting  that  you 
may  have  been  in  error  at  some  time  in  the  past. 
You  can  participate  on  all  subjects  with  easy  au- 
thority. If  this  is  your  goal,  then  probably  it  is 
easiest  to  achieve  if  you  arrange  to  be  put  in  soli- 
tary confinement,  although  many  individuals 
have  actually  succeeded  in  achieving  this  state  of 
being  an  intellectual  zombie,  while  walking  about 
apparently  alive. 

Being  static  and  closed  is  easy  and  simple,  but 
stupid  and  dull.  If  Amherst  has  been  at  all  suc- 
cessful in  facilitating  your  education,  then  the  cur- 
tains have  been  raised,  and  you  have  some  notion 
of  the  excitement  and  stimulation  of  life  in  these 
days,  if  one's  mind  is  open.  And  you  probably 
also  know  that  this  life  is  not  without  danger. 
My  wife  was  in  a  group  of  ladies  the  other  day 
when  one  of  them  expressed  curiosity  as  to  how 
Russia  got  along  without  money.  My  wife  ex- 
plained that  Russians  did  have  money  in  the  form 
of  rubles  as  well  as  considerable  freedom  of  ex- 
penditure. The  questioner  looked  most  horrified 
and  said,  "I  never  heard  of  such  a  thing. 
M-m-m — are  you  a  Communist?"  Open  minds  are 
always  in  danger  among  closed  nainds,  but  at  least 
they  are  alive. 

The  problem  of  the  iron  curtain  versus  the  open 
mind  will  always  exist.  You  will  have  to  take 
sides.  It  is  not  merely  a  problem  as  to  your  per- 
sonal life.  For  the  United  States,  we  must  con- 
tinually struggle  to  protect  the  channels  along 
which  facts  and  ideas  flow.  Freedom  of  informa- 
tion and  freedom  of  discussion  are  great  bases  un- 
derlying our  social  and  political  structure,  but 
they  must  be  guarded  carefully.  And  classes  and 
groups  are  continually  trying  to  impose  their  par- 
ticular interests  and  biases  on  the  whole.  The 
only  protection  is  for  a  strong  national  insistence 
on  the  right  to  maintain  open  opinions  openly  ar- 
rived at.  Nor  is  it  merely  our  national  problem. 
In  the  world  today,  there  are  great  areas  where 
no  clear  stand  has  yet  been  taken.  Narrow  na- 
tionalism threatens  to  draw  curtains  of  one  sort 
or  another.  Yet  it  is  obvious  that  understanding 
and  good-will  can  come  only  from  the  freest  inter- 
change of  persons  and  ideas. 

The  motto  of  Amherst,  Terras  irradient^  places 
our  alma  mater  clearly  in  the  van  of  those  who 
believe  in  the  importance  of  light,  ever  resistant 
to  curtains  about  the  mind.  Amherst  must  live 
through  her  sons,  as  she  has  lived  through  genera- 
tion after  generation  of  Amherst  men.  Rays  of 
light  are  pictured  on  the  Amherst  seal.  They 
must  shine  also  through  you,  her  3'oungest  sons. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Perpetual  Peace  Through  World-Wide  Federation 


BY  GEORGE  V.  ALLEN' 
Assistant  Secretary  for  Public  Affairs 


A  century  and  a  half  ago  the  world  was  stirred 
by  two  great  revolutions,  the  first  one  in  the  United 
States  and  the  second  in  France.  Inspired  by 
these  two  movements,  a  wise  philosopher  in  eastern 
Europe,  Immanuel  Kant  of  Konigsberg,  expressed 
the  belief  that  a  federation  of  free  peoples  would 
some  day  bring  about  lasting  peace. 

Kant  was  aware  that  people  who  lived  under 
absolute  monarchs  or  dictators  were  not  the  stuff 
out  of  which  a  successful  world  federation  could 
be  built. 

A  half  century  later,  Alfred  Lord  Tennyson 
dipped  even  farther  into  the  future  and  envisioned 
the  "Parliament  of  Man,  the  Federation  of  the 
World."  Tennyson  had  in  mind  a  representative 
parliament,  elected  by  free  people  living  under 
democratic  institutions. 

For  the  first  hundred  and  fifty  years  of  our  ex- 
istence, we  Americans  were  not  greatly  concerned 
with  the  question  of  democracy.  We  took  it  for 
granted  at  home  and  felt  comfortably  certain  that 
democracy  was  gradually  but  steadily  winning 
throughout  the  world.  AH  we  needed  to  do,  ap- 
parently, was  to  attend  to  our  own  affairs  and 
watch  democratic  institutions  cover  the  earth. 

Woodrow  Wilson  thought  at  Versailles  that  a 
sufficient  degree  of  democracy  had  been  achieved 
in  the  world  to  make  possible  the  establishment  of 
the  "federation  of  free  states,"  to  which  Immanuel 
Kant  had  referred.  He  thought  the  world  had 
been  made  safe  for  democracy. 

The  tragedy  of  Woodrow  Wilson  was  that  he 
lived  before  his  time,  before  democracy  had  spread 
sufficiently  to  make  his  great  ideal  workable. 

In  my  opinion,  the  League  of  Nations  was  not 
killed  by  the  failure  of  the  United  States  to  join 
it.  As  a  democracy,  we  abided  by  the  principles 
and  edicts  of  the  League  more  closely  than  some  of 
the  powers  which  assumed  formally  the  obliga- 
tions of  the  Covenant. 

The  League  of  Nations  expired  because  democ- 
racy was  crushed  in  Germany  and  because  a  totali- 
tarian regime  controlled  the  Soviet  Union.  The 
League  was  doomed  to  failure  because  it  was  not 
a  federation  of  free  peoples. 

The  question  everyone  asks  today  is  whether 
the  United  Nations  will  be  destroyed.  I  hope 
fervently  that  it  will  not.  I  hope  that  history  does 
not  repeat  itself.  But  we  who  believe  in  this  great 
world  organization  and  who  are  working  and 

June   19,  1949 


praying  for  its  success  are  apprehensive. 

As  General  Marshall  said  at  the  opening  of  the 
General  Assembly  in  Paris  last  September,  any 
government  which  disregards  the  rights  of  its  own 
people  is  not  likely  to  respect  the  rights  of  others. 
Aggression,  if  it  comes,  will  destroy  the  United 
Nations  as  surely  as  it  destroyed  the  League.  And 
in  totalitarianism,  of  either  the  right  or  the  left,  lie 
the  seeds  of  aggressive  action. 

No  true  democracy  can  be  either  imperialistic 
or  aggressive.  The  North  Atlantic  pact  will  re- 
main a  peace  pact  as  long  as  its  members  adhere  to 
democratic  principles — as  long  as  their  govern- 
ments are  responsive  to  the  will  of  their  people. 

We  should  begin  to  be  concerned  about  the  pact, 
just  as  we  are  now  concerned  about  the  United 
Nations,  if  any  of  the  North  Atlantic  states  should 
fall  under  the  sway  of  either  a  Fascist  or  a  Com- 
munist regime.  The  pact  itself  is  our  best  safe- 
guard against  such  an  eventuality  since  its  exist- 
ence does  much  to  free  its  members  from  the  fear 
of  aggression.  Without  it,  the  people  of  Western 
Europe  might  be  driven,  through  fear,  to  extrem- 
ist experiments.  The  pact  has  done  much  to 
achieve  for  its  signers  the  fourth  freedom — free- 
dom from  fear. 

The  Soviet  Government  uses  the  fear  technique 
as  a  calculated  instrument  both  in  its  internal  rela- 
tions with  the  Russian  people  and  in  the  conduct 
of  its  foreign  relations.  Threats  of  personal  vio- 
lence against  an  individual  or  his  family  is  a 
well-known  Soviet  method.  Two  years  ago,  when 
the  Soviet  Union  was  using  every  means  in  its 
power  to  force  an  oil  concession  from  Iran,  the 
Iranian  Prime  Minister  was  warned  by  high 
Soviet  authority  on  two  occasions  that  it  would  be 
very  dangerous  not  only  for  Iran  as  a  nation  but 
for  him  personally  if  he  did  not  grant  the  conces- 
sion. Iran  and  other  nations  today  remain  in 
constant  fear  of  an  attack  from  a  powerful 
neighbor. 

Let  us  face  the  facts  squarely  and  honestly. 
The  United  Nations,  with  all  its  virtues,  has  not 
yet  been  able  to  achieve  freedom  from  fear.  The 
reason  is  easy  to  understand.  Its  second  most 
powerful  member  is  not  a  democracy.  The  Rus- 
sian people  are  not  free. 

'  Made  before  the  Institute  of  International  Affairs  at 
Grinnell  College,  Grlnnell,  Iowa,  June  10,  1949,  and  re- 
leased to  the  press  on  the  same  date. 


I  should  make  it  clear  that  while  people  must 
be  free  bcfoie  they  can  cooperate  successful]}',  I 
do  not  think  they  must  necessarily  follow  the  same 
economic  pattern.  If  people  are  allowed  entire 
freedom  of  choice,  they  will  adopt  the  economic 
measures  which  serve  them  best  and  discard  those 
which  fail.  The  essential  requirement  for  mem- 
bership in  a  successsful  world  federation  is  not, 
for  e.xample,  whether  a  people  have  adopted  or 
rejected  a  "cradle  to  grave"'  social  security  system. 
The  requirement  is  that  their  economic  experi- 
ments, of  whatever  kind,  be  freely  adopted,  after 
open  public  debate,  without  censorship  or  control 
of  opinion,  and  can  be  as  freely  discarded  when- 
ever they  do  not  serve  the  public  interests. 

I  do  not  believe  we  shall  have  to  wait  another 
hundred  anrl  fifty  years  until  the  perpetual  peace 
to  wliich  Kant  referred  is  achieved  through  a 
world-wide  federation  of  free  peoples.  Democ- 
racy has  achieved  a  temporary  set-back  during 
the  past  generation,  but  it  will  resume  its  march  of 
progress.  Perhaps  the  very  social  upheavals  of  the 
past  30  years  have  done  much  to  prepare  the 
ground  for  a  further  significant  advance  in  East- 
ern Europe  and  Asia.  At  least,  the  unholy  alli- 
ance of  decadent  aristocracy  and  reactionary  cleri- 
calism have  been  wiped  away  in  areas  where  they 
formerly  flourished. 

I  view  the  future  with  optimism.  But  at  the 
same  time,  I  am  confident  that  a  successful  world 
federation  will  not  be  achieved  until  governments 
responsible  to  the  will  of  the  people  are  established 
in  all  of  the  major  countries  of  the  globe. 

Many  sincere  and  enthusiastic  international- 
ists in  the  United  States  have  shown  impatience 
with  the  Government  in  Washington  for  not.  mov- 
ing faster  along  the  road  to  world  federation  or 
world  government.  Some  of  these  enthusiasts 
believe  tliat  the  Western  democracies  are  too  tena- 
cious in  holding  on  to  their  national  sovereignty, 
too  reluctant  to  grant  sufiicient  power  to  an  inter- 
national body  to  make  it  strong  enough  to  survive. 
A  few  such  people,  particularly  among  the  young 
intellectual  group,  succumb  to  the  Soviet  propa- 
ganda line  that  the  Western  powers  are  reaction- 
ary' in  their  nationalism,  with  no  forward-looking 
program  aimed  at  eventual  world  federation.  In 
their  impatience  and  irritation,  some  of  these  peo- 
ple even  go  over  to  the  Soviet  side,  in  the  belief 
that  the  program  of  the  Kremlin  offers  the  best 
opportunity  for  reducing  nationalistic  barriers  to 
international  cooperation. 

Such  reasoning  is  utterly  fallacious.  The  de- 
mocracies are  working  to  achieve  an  international 
organization  based  on  the  only  principles  which 
offer  any  chance  of  success.  World  conquest  can 
never  be  the  basis  for  lasting  world  federation,  no 
matter  whether  the  conquest  is  by  a  cruel  or  by  an 
enlightened  despot,  by  a  military  genius  like 
Alexander  or  Napoleon,  or  even  by  an  army 
spurred   on  by  religious  or  ideological   fervor. 


Efforts  along  this  line  have  often  been  made  in  the 
past  and  have  always  failed,  as  they  always  will 
fail.  The  key  to  world  federation  is  freedom,  not 
slaveiy;  democracy  not  tyranny;  and  cooperation, 
not  conquest.  Immanuel  Kant  saw  this  fact  clearly 
a  hundred  and  fifty  years  ago,  but  some  of  our 
most  brilliant  professors  can't  see  it  yet. 

The  Kremlin  does  not  undei-stand  the  meaning 
of  the  word  cooperation.  Either  it  must  dominate 
or  it  refuses  to  plaj'  on  the  team. 

Your  significant  conference  on  the  Middle  East, 
held  here  in  the  Middle  West,  will  consider  an 
area  of  the  world  in  which  I  have  had  the  privilege 
of  serving  for  a  number  of  years.  I  would  like 
to  speak  for  a  few  minutes  concerning  one  impor- 
tant aspect  of  the  ideological  struggle  which  we 
Americans  must  keep  constantly  in  mind  in  study- 
ing that  area. 

The  most  effective  Soviet  propaganda  line  in  the 
Middle  East,  or  in  any  other  area  where  there  are 
large  numbers  of  poor  or  oppressed  people,  is  to 
repeat,  ad  nauseam,  that  the  United  States  has 
nothing  to  offer  but  a  program  of  reaction.  Radio 
Moscow  and  its  parrots  in  countries  like  Iran  and 
the  Arab  States  din  continually  into  the  receptive 
ears  of  landless  peasants  that  the  United  States 
is  on  the  side  of  the  absentee  landlords,  the  feudal 
barons,  and  the  medieval  clergj'. 

We  must  make  it  clear,  by  every  means  in  our 
power,  that  we  have  something  better  to  offer  than 
merely  opposition  to  change.  It  is  true  that  we 
oppose  a  change  to  Communism  in  the  Middle 
East,  with  its  oppression  more  heavy  than  any 
landlord  or  pasha,  its  bigotry  more  ferocious  than 
any  mullah. 

But  we  are  anxious  to  bring  about  a  change  for 
the  better  in  that  area.  We  want  to  see  the  stand- 
ard of  living  raised  ten  times  above  its  present 
level.  We  want  to  see  the  scourges  of  malaria, 
trachoma,  and  other  diseases  eliminated. 

W^e  want  every  individual  to  have  a  chance  to 
earn  a  decent  livelihood,  to  educate  his  children, 
and  to  develop  his  capacities.  Our  pi-ogram  looks 
forward,  not  backward.  Positive  proof  of  this 
is  contained  in  the  statement  of  President  Tru- 
man, in  his  inaugural  address,  announcing  a  bold 
new  program  of  technical  assistance  to  under- 
developed areas. 

This  program  is  based  on  the  policy  of  the  good 
neighbor.  We  want  to  help  the  countries  of  the 
Middle  East  to  be  strong  and  independent,  eco- 
nomically and  politically,  just  as  we  have  helped 
and  are  helping  the  countries  of  the  Western 
Hemisphere  in  this  direction. 

A  successful  implementation  of  this  program 
will  provide  the  answer  to  the  frequently  ex- 
pressed complaint  tliat  the  United  States  lias  had 
no  positive  policy  in  the  Middle  East.  This  im- 
plementation will  take  time,  but  the  possibilities 
are  unlimited. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Marshall  Islands  Scrap  Material  To  Be  Sold 

[Released  to  the  press  June  6] 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  June  6 
that  the  final  offering  of  any  significant  amount  of 
surplus  by  its  Office  of  Foreign  Liquidation  Com- 
missioner resulted  in  a  high  bid  of  $31,000  for 
an  estimated  94,000  tons  of  ferrous,  nonferrous, 
and  other  scrap  materials  located  throughout  the 
Marshall  Islands. 

This  material,  located  on  the  islands  of  Kwaja- 
lein,  Ebeye,  Roi,  Namur,  and  Majuro,  in  the  Mar- 
shall group,  had  originally  been  scheduled  for 
transfer  to  China  under  terms  of  the  China  Bulk 
Sale  Agreement  of  August  30,  1946,  but  by  subse- 
quent amendment  title  to  the  property  was  re- 
turned to  the  United  States  at  China's  request. 

The  initial  public  offering  of  this  property, 
which  was  made  on  January  10,  1949,  resulted  in 
all  bids  being  rejected  as  insufficient,  the  high  bid 
being  only  $6,400.  On  the  reoffering  made  on 
March  28,  1949,  the  following  bids  were  received: 
T.  Carr,  Sydney,  Australia,  $31,000.00;  Acorn 
Engineering  Company,  New  York  City,  $15,999.99 ; 
Double  Bend  Manufacturing  Company,  New 
York  City,  $10,338.12;  Elmer  Perry,  Los  Angeles, 
California,  $210.00.  The  high  bidder,  T.  Carr,  of 
Sydney,  Australia,  having  demonstrated  financial 
responsibility  and  having  posted  a  performance 
bond  of  $50,000,  received  the  award.  The  con- 
tract requires  that  all  salable  scrap,  as  a  critical 
item,  must  be  sold  to  buyers  who  agree  to  return 
it  to  the  United  States  for  use  in  the  United  States 
economy.  The  purchaser  is  also  required  by  the 
contract  to  remove  any  and  all  residual  scrap  items 
from  the  islands  to  insure  proper  "policing  up" 
of  the  areas  where  the  scrap  is  now  located. 

The  Foreign  Liquidation  Commissioner's  office 
is  scheduled  to  liquidate  itself  by  June  30,  1949. 
Since  its  creation  shortly  before  the  end  of  the  last 
war,  it  has  disposed  of  approximately  $10,300,- 
000,000  (at  procurement  cost),  realizing  approxi- 
mately $2,000,000,000  or  about  20  percent  from 
these  sales.^ 

The  Flaxseed  Scarcity  Terminated 

The  President  on  May  31  signed  a  proclama- 
tion ^  declaring  that  the  flaxseed-scarcity  situation 
prevailing  during  the  war  and  early  postwar 
periods  has  terminated.  The  effect  of  the  procla- 
mation will  be  to  restore  the  duty  on  flaxseed  to  the 
rate  of  50  cents  per  bushel,  negotiated  in  the  recip- 
rocal trade  agreements  signed  with  Argentina  and 
Uruguay  on  October  14,  1941,  and  July  21,  1942, 
respectively.  The  1930  Tariff  Act  rate  was  65 
cents  per  bushel.  The  agreements  referred  to  car- 
ried a  proviso  to  the  effect  that  the  normal  rate 
would  be  50  cents  per  bushel,  but  that  until  the 


thirtieth  day  following  a  proclamation  by  the  Pres- 
ident of  the  United  States,  after  consultation  with 
the  respective  foreign  governments,  declaring  that 
the  then  existing  abnormal  situation  had  termi- 
nated, a  special  rate  of  duty  of  321/2  cents  per 
bushel  would  be  collected  on  flaxseed  imported  into 
the  United  States. 

As  compared  to  the  scarcity  both  of  flaxseed  and 
linseed  oil  existing  at  the  time  the  agreements  were 
negotiated,  the  United  States  now  has  a  substantial 
surplus  on  hand  from  domestic  production. 

The  50  cent  duty  becomes  effective  on  June  30, 
1949. 


Cuba  Grants  Renegotiation  of  Certain 
Tariff  Concessions  on  Potatoes 

At  the  third  session  of  the  Contracting  Parties 
to  the  General  Agreement  on  Tariffs  and  Trade, 
now  being  held  at  Annecy,  France,  Cuba  has  re- 
quested and  the  United  States  and  Canada  have 
agreed  to  the  renegotiation  of  certain  tariff  con- 
cessions on  potatoes  granted  by  Cuba  in  Schedule 
IX  (the  Cuban  schedule)  of  the  General  Agree- 
ment. 

The  Cubans  have  requested  that  the  rate  of 
duty  on  potatoes  imported  into  Cuba  in  July  be 
increased  and  has  offered,  in  return,  to  decrease 
the  rates  of  duty  on  potatoes  imported  in  October 
and  November.  Cuba  has  requested  that  any  duty 
changes  which  may  be  agreed  upon  be  made  effec- 
tive July  1,  1949. 

Views  of  any  interested  persons  with  regard  to 
these  renegotiations  were  submitted  to  the  Com- 
mittee for  Eeciprocity  Information,  established 
to  receive  views  on  trade-agreement  matters,  be- 
fore June  25,  1949.  Such  communications  should 
be  addi'essed  to:  The  Secretary,  Committee  for 
Reciprocity  Information,  Department  of  Com- 
merce, Washington  25,  D.C. 

THE  FOREIGN  SERVICE 
Confirmation 

On  June  7, 1949,  the  Senate  confirmed  the  nomination  of 
Pete  Jarman  to  be  American  Ambassador  Extraordinary 
and  Plenipotentiary  to  Australia. 

Naval  Attache^  Appointed 

Commander  James  T.  Hodgson,  Jr.,  USN,  was  ap- 
pointed on  June  6  the  first  Naval  Attach^  and  Naval 
Attach^  for  Air  to  the  American  Embassy  at  Colombo, 

Ceylon. 


"  Bulletin  of  Apr.  17,  1949,  p.  503. 
'  Proc.  2843,  14  Fed.  Reg.  2913. 


June    19,    1949 


^cmyCen/6^ 


Hi 


m^ 


General  Policy  Paee 
Essential   Elements  of  Lasting   Peace.     Ad- 
dress by  President  Truman 771 

U.S.  Policy  Toward  Korea: 

Summary  of  Actions  1947-49 781 

Request  to  Congress  for  Continuing  Eco- 
nomic    Assistance.       Message     of     the 

President  to  the  Congress 781 

Statement  by  Acting  Secretary  Webb  Made 
Before  the  House  Foreign  Affairs  Com- 
mittee          783 

Korean  Military  Advisory  Group  Estab- 
lished.   Ambassador  Muccio's  Letter  to 

President  Rhee 786 

Iron  Curtains.    By  Willard  L.  Thorp     ...        797 
Perpetual  Peace  Through  World-Wide  Fed- 
eration.   By  George  V.  Allen 801 

The  United  Nations  and 
Specialized  Agencies 

U.S.-U.N.  Cooperation  in  Point-4  Program: 
Statement  by  Acting  Secretary  Webb  .  .  774 
World  Response  to  the  Point-4  Program  .  774 
U.N.  Documents :'A  Selected  Bibliography  .  775 
Provisional  Agenda  Ninth  Session  Ecosoc .  .  776 
The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations  .    .        780 

The  Congress 

U.S.  Policy  Toward  Korea: 

Summary  of  Actions  1947-49 781 


The  Congress — Continued  Pa«« 

Request  to  Congress  for  Continuing  Eco- 
nomic    Assistance.       Message    of    the 

President  to  the  Congress 781 

Statement     by     Acting    Secretary     Webb 
Made  Before  the  House  Foreign  Affairs 

Committee 783 

Korean   Military   Advisory   Group  Estab- 
lished.    Ambassador  Muccio's  Letter  to 

President  Rhee 786 

North  Atlantic  Treaty.  Report  of  the  Com- 
mittee on  Foreign  Relations 787 

Accomplishments  of  Institute  of  Inter-Amer- 
ican Affairs.  Statement  by  Willard  L. 
Thorp 795 

Economic  Affairs 

Marshall  Islands  Scrap  Material  To  Be  Sold  .        803 

Treaty  Information 

British  Ambassador  Deposits  Ratification  of 
North  Atlantic  Treaty.  E.xchange  of 
Remarks   Between   Ambassador   Franks 

and  Acting  Secretary  Webb 794 

The  Flaxseed  Scarcity  Terminated 803 

Cuba  Grants  Renegotiation  of  Certain  Tariff 

Concessions  on  Potatoes 803 

The  Foreign  Service 

Confirmation 803 

Naval  .\ttach6  Appointed 803 


Documents  and  State  Papers 

Contents  of  March-April  combined  issue: 

New  Links  In  the  Soviet  Alliance  System,  1948-49 


SuiTimary  Report  of  Brazll-U.S.  Technical  Commission 

International    Northwest    Atlantic   Fisheries  Conference 
Final  Act 
Text  of  Convention 

U.S.-U.K.  Consular  Convention 


Calendar  of  International  Meetings,  with  Annotations 

Coplea  of  the  publlcntion  nre  for  sale  by  the  Superin- 
tendent of  Documents,  Government  Printing  Office,  Wash- 
ington 25,  D.C.,  at  30(f  a  copy. 


RNHENT  PRrNTIf 


Pii^^ftl-'^"'' '^f  ?^- -K 


J/i€/  Zi)efia^tmen(/  ^  t/tate^ 


FORCE  AND   FREEDOM    •    By  Selden  Chapin, 

Former  Minister  to  Hungary 820 

FOREIGN  VISITORS  IN  GERMANY  TO  USE 

DEUTSCHE  MARKS      •     An  Article.   ...        807 

SCHOOL  REFORM  IN  HESSE      •      By  James 

R.  Neivman,  Director,  OMG  Hesse 808 


.  XX,  No.  521 
June  26,  1949 


For  complete  contents  see  back  cover 


».  S.  SUPtRIKTENOtNT  gF  l/OUUMtWI* 

^  '^'  '  '  -^^'^  bulletin 

Vol.  XX,  No.  521    •    Publicatio  3552 
June  26,  1949 


tJ/te  z!/^e^a/)tlm€^t  /)£^ ^CaCe 


For  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents 

U.S.  Government  Printing  Office 

Washington  25,  D.C. 

Price: 

52  issues,  domestic  $.5,  foreign  $7.25 

Single  copy,  15  cents 

The  printing  of  this  publication  has  been 
approved  by  the  Director  of  the  Bureau 
of  the  Budget  (February  18,  1949). 

note:  Contents  of  this  publication  are  not 
copyrighted  and  items  contained  herein  may 
be  reprinted.  Citation  of  the  Department 
or  State  Bulletin  as  the  source  will  be 
appreciated. 


The  Department  of  State  BULLETIN, 
a  u-eekly  publication  compiled  and 
edited  in  the  Division  of  Publications. 
Office  of  Public  Affairs,  provides  the 
public  and  interested  agencies  of 
the  Government  uith  information  on 
developments  in  the  field  of  foreign 
relations  and  on  the  urork  of  the  De- 
partment of  Slate  and  the  Foreign 
Service.  The  BULLETiy  includes 
press  releases  on  foreign  policy  issued 
by  the  White  House  and  the  Depart- 
ment, and  statements  and  addresses 
made  by  the  President  and  by  the 
Secretary  of  State  and  other  officers 
of  the  Department,  as  tcell  as  special 
articles  on  various  piloses  of  inter- 
national affairs  and  the  functions  of 
the  Department.  Information  is  in- 
cluded concerning  treaties  and  in- 
ternational agreements  to  u-hich  the 
United  States  is  or  may  become  a 
party  and  treaties  of  general  inter- 
national interest. 

Publications  of  the  Department,  as 
tcell  as  legislative  material  in  the  field 
of  international  relations,  are  listed 
currently. 


Foreign  Visitors  in  Germany  To  Use  Deutsche  Marks 


The  three  western  zones  of  Germany  will  be 
thrown  open  to  foreign  businessmen,  tourists  and 
other  visitors  June  21.  Thereafter,  travelers  will 
live  on  the  German  economy  and  pay  all  their  ex- 
penses in  Deutsche  marks  only. 

Up  to  the  present,  only  the  US  Zone  has  been 
open  generally  to  foreign  visitors  who  have  been 
required  to  stay  at  JEIA-licensed  German  hotels 
and  eat  in  JEIA-licensed  German  restaurants, 
paying  their  expenses  in  devisen  coupons  pur- 
chased with  dollar  instruments.  The  two  other 
zones  were  open  only  to  restricted  categories  of 
visitors  who  had  access  to  the  facilities  of  the 
occupation  forces  in  the  respective  zones. 

In  the  U.S.  Zone,  the  new  procedure  will  not 
apply  to  military  and  civilian  occupation  person- 
nel and  certain  specified  agencies  and  individuals 
whose  activities  are  deemed  for  the  benefit  of  or 
in  support  of  the  occupation,  as  provided  in 
EUCOM  Circular  No.  2,  of  May  13. 

Upon  entering  Germany,  after  June  20,  for- 
eigners will  receive  a  currency  control  book, 
printed  in  English,  French,  and  German,  explain- 
ing the  currency  regulations.  The  visitor  will 
be  required  to  declare  all  currencies,  currency  in- 
struments and  travelers  checks  in  his  possession 
and  notations  will  be  made  in  the  currency  con- 
trol book  accordingly. 

Nearly  500  German  foreign  trade  banks  are 
available  where  travelers  will  be  able  to  exchange 
authorized  instruments  for  D-marks.  For  the 
time  being,  instruments  payable  in  Swiss  francs, 
US  dollars,  Netherlands  guilder,  Belgian  francs 
and  sterling  letters  of  credit  endorsed  cashable 
in  Germany,  will  be  acceptable  in  exchange  for 
D-marks.  As  necessary  banking  arrangements 
are  made  with  other  countries,  instruments  in  their 
respective  currencies  will  become  acceptable. 

All  monetai-y  exchanges  will  be  recorded  by  the 
bank  in  the  currency  control  book  at  the  time  of 
exchange  and,  upon  the  visitor's  exit  from  Ger- 
many, customs  authorities  will  check  his  currency 
control  book  to  ensure  that  currency  control  reg- 
ulations have  been  observed. 


Foreign  visitors  will  also  receive,  upon  entering 
the  country  a  special  three-day  food  ration  card 
which  will  be  valid  in  any  German  hotel,  restau- 
rant or  food  shop.  Additional  seven-day  ration 
cards  will  be  available  from  any  German  food  of- 
fice, on  presentation  of  the  applicant's  passport 
and  currency  control  book.  The  ration  for  for- 
eigners will  provide  a  3,035  calorie  daily  diet. 

Travelers  already  in  the  zone  on  June  21  may 
obtain  currency  control  books  from  the  German 
customs  office  and  food  ration  cards  from  any 
food  office. 


Nr.  00000 


DEVESEN-KONTROLLBUCH 

CURRENCY  CONTROL  BOOK 
CARNET  DE  CONTROLE  DES  DEVISES 

fiir  die 

for 
pour  les 

amerikanische,    britische   und   franzosische   Besat- 

zungszone  Deutsehlands  US-UK-French  Zones  of 

Germany 

zones  am^ricaine,  anglaise  et  frangaise  d'occupatlon 

en  Allemagne 

{einschliesslich  amerikanischer,  britischer  und 

franzosincher  Sektor  von  Berlin) 

(including  US/UK/Fr.  Sectors  of  BerUn) 

(y  compris  les  secteurs  am^ricain,  anglais  et 

franeais  de  Berlin) 


JEIA  licenses  for  hotels  and  restaurants  will 
be  cancelled  as  of  June  20  and  all  payments  after 
that  time  will  be  in  D-marks.  Unused  devisen 
coupons  will  be  redeemed  at  German  banks  for 
D-marks,  but  not  foreign  currencies.  Occupation 
personnel  may  exchange  unused  devisen  coupons 
at  DER  (German  travel  agency)  offices. 

Gasoline  and  oil  (POL)  coupons  now  sold 
through  travel  agencies  will  be  sold  by  foreign 
trade  banks  against  acceptable  currency  instru- 

'  Reprinted  from  Information  Bulletin  of  U.S.  Mili- 
tary Government  in  Germany,  June  14,  1949. 


June  26,   1949 


ments  upon  presentation  of  passport  and  vehicle 
registration,  and  POL  transactions  will  be  re- 
corded in  the  currency  control  book.  The  visi- 
tor's POL  ration  will  be  a  maximum  of  200  liters 
(about  50  gallons)  per  week  per  automobile,  and 
POL  coupons  will  not  be  sold  for  German-owned 
vehicles.  Ten  liters  (two  and  half  gallons)  of 
gasoline  will  cost  $1.20. 

Internal  travel  in  Germany  will  be  by  normal 
rail  and  road  services.  Travel  on  military  trains 
for  foreigners  will  not  be  authorized  and  payment 
in  D-marks  for  travel  on  international  trains  has 
not  yet  been  approved.  International  telegram 
and  telephone  services  for  payment  in  D-marks 
will  be  available  at  German  post  offices  upon  pres- 
entation of  passport  and  currency  control  book. 

Foreigners  contemplating  visits  to  Germany 
should  book  reservations  through  travel  bureaus  or 
directly  with  hotels,  as  Military  Government  or 
Army  agencies  will  not  be  able  to  assist  in 
obtaining  accommodations  or  transportation. 
Though    the    new    regulations    take    effect    as 


of  June  21,  US  Army  logistic  support  to 
those  concerned,  such  as  the  right  to  handle  Mili- 
tary Payment  Certificates,  the  use  of  army  billets, 
messes,  theaters,  snack  bar,  PX's  etc.,  will  be  with- 
drawn on  July  1,  as  announced  by  EUCOM  Head- 
quarters. 

Military  entry  permits  will  be  issued  by  mili- 
tary permits  officei-s  in  foreign  countries  for  a 
maximum  of  80  days  subject  to  extensions  through 
the  entry  and  exits  branch  offices  in  German  state 
capitals.  Permits  normally  will  be  valid  for  one 
journey  except  for  business  visitors  who  may 
apply  for  repeated  journeys. 

Pointing  out  that  the  number  of  military  per- 
mits issued  for  Germany  in  the  first  four  months 
of  1949  was  double  the  number  issued  in  the  same 
period  last  year,  JEIA  officials  estimated  that  at 
the  present  rate,  about  500,000  foreigners  will  visit 
western  Germany  this  year.  Between  1929  and 
1938,  the  number  of  foreign  visitors  to  the  area 
now  comprising  the  three  western  zones  averaged 
1,500,000  yearly. 


School  Reform  in  Hesse 


BY  JAMES  R.  NEWMAN  1 
Director,  OMG  Hesse 


When  Americans  first  came  into  Germany, 
educators  and  IMG  officers  agreed  that  many  re- 
forms were  necessary.  Probably  the  gi-eatest  af- 
front to  freedom-loving  Americans  was  the  caste 
system  so  apparent  upon  first  contact  with  Ger- 
man officials  and  citizens. 

The  reform,  most  Americans  believed,  must  start 
with  the  youth,  and  to  the  youngsters  must  be 
given  the  essential  lessons  of  basic,  human  equal- 
ity. To  see  why  the  first  American  occupiers 
looked  so  strongly  to  the  children,  let  us  examine 
any  elementary  school  classroom  in  Germany  as 
it  existed  in  1945-4C. 

A  bright,  inquisitive  little  girl  is  sitting  at  her 
desk.  She  is  the  leader  of  her  fourth-year  class 
and  the  brightest  pupil  for  her  age  in  the  city. 
She  is  10  years  old  and  she  is  facing  the  greatest 
decision  in  her  life.    She,  however,  does  not  make 

'  Reprinted  from  Information  Bulletin  of  U.S.  Military 
Government  in  Germany,  June  14,  1049. 

808 


that  decision;  it  is  made  for  her  by  her  father, 
owner  of  a  small  linen  shop  and  a  man  of  very 
moderate  means.  At  the  age  of  10  her  entire 
future  life,  her  occupation,  her  friends,  her  social 
life,  her  future  husband,  probably,  all  hang  on  the 
decision  her  father  makes  as  to  whether  she  is 
allowed  to  take  the  examination  for  admittance  to 
an  academic  high  school. 

Her  father,  ignoring  the  youngster's  talent  and 
ability,  feels  that  an  academic  and  university  edu- 
cation is  unimportant  for  a  girl.  She  is  enrolled 
at  tlie  Volksschule  (elementary  school)  and  is  to 
finish  the  eight-year  course,  where  most  of  her 
time  is  to  be  spent  studying  German,  arithmetic 
and  religion.  Once  graduated  from  the  Volks- 
schule, she  is  to  serve  an  apprenticeship  in  her 
father's  store  and  then  take  an  examination  as  a 
salesgirl.  She  might  have  had  a  distinct  talent 
for  law,  medicine  or  the  arts,  but  at  the  age  of  10 
years  she  lost  all  chance  of  proving  it. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Next  to  the  little  girl,  in  the  fourth-year  class- 
room, is  a  10-year-old  boy.  He  faces  the  same 
decision.  His  father,  a  minor  civil  servant,  de- 
cides that  his  son  also  shall  be  a  civil  servant,  so 
the  young  man  is  enrolled  at  the  Mittelschule 
(middle  school)  where  he  sj^ends  a  total  of  10 
years,  and  where,  after  the  fourth  year,  his  courses 
are  entirely  diffei'ent  from  those  of  the  little  girl 
at  Volksschule.  At  the  end  of  his  schooling,  he 
decides  he  wants  to  go  to  the  university  to  study 
engineering.  In  order  to  enter  the  university,  he 
must  make  up  two  more  years  of  school  and  also 
many  of  the  subjects  taught  in  the  Gymnasium 
(higher  school),  which  he  did  not  have  from  the 
fourth  to  the  10th  year. 

In  the  same  schoolroom  there  is  another  little 
boy  also  10  years  of  age  and  also  a  very  bright 
student.  He  faces  no  decision.  The  decision  was 
made  for  him  by  his  father  the  day  the  child  was 
born.  The  father,  a  baron  and  civil  engineer,  had 
no  doubts  but  that  his  offspring  would  go  to  the 
academic  high  school,  the  Gymnasium,  and  then 
on  to  the  university  and  medical  school. 

But,  if  it  were  like  in  prewar  days,  before  the 
boy  could  enter  the  university  he  would  find  him- 
self in  the  army.  Upon  his  return  from  service 
the  young  man  would  seek  entrance  into  the  uni- 
versity but  all  places  in  the  universities  would 
have  already  been  filled. 

In  Hesse,  almost  12,000  students  are  taking  uni- 
versity training;  before  the  war  less  than  5,000 
students  were  enrolled  in  the  universities  of  the 
state.  Only  a  little  over  1,700  may  be  admitted 
each  year.  Over  2,000  are  graduated  from  high 
school  each  spring  and  more  and  more  former 
soldiers  are  seeking  to  continue  their  studies  inter- 
rupted by  the  war. 

Actually,  the  young  man  would  have  much  pre- 
ferred to  have  gone  to  a  trade  school  and  studied 
mechanics  for  which  he  had  a  natural  flair,  but 
his  academic  training  had  not  prepared  him  for 
a  change.  He  had  been  destined  for  the  univer- 
sity and  a  career  in  medicine  when  he  was  10 
years  old.  In  the  Gymnasium,  he  had  devoted  28 
percent  of  his  time  for  nine  years  of  the  12-year 
course  to  Latin  and  Greek,  another  seven  percent 
to  modern  languages  and  23  percent  to  German  and 
mathematics.  Less  than  10  percent  of  his  time 
was  devoted  to  social  studies. 

Returning  to  the  fourth-year  class  we  find  that 
only  10  percent  of  the  youngsters  will  be  permitted 
to  go  to  the  Gymnasium.     First,  their  parents 


must  be  willing  that  they  compete  for  the  entrance 
examinations;  and  second,  they  must  be  able  to 
pay  the  tuition  fees,  for  only  the  Volksschule  is 
free. 

The  children  who  stand  highest  on  the  competi- 
tive list  and  whose  parents  can  afford  the  tuition 
are  selected  for  matriculation.  Yet,  at  the  be- 
ginning of  the  occupation  when  these  conditions 
existed,  German  educators  stoutly  asserted  that  all 
intelligent  youngsters  were  being  admitted  to  the 
higher  schools. 

More  important,  the  die  was  cast  in  so  far  as 
social  separation  was  concerned.  The  caste  sys- 
tem was  starting  and  developing.  The  little  girl 
who  continued  in  the  Volksschule  no  longer  was 
invited  to  the  parties  of  the  middle-school  pupils, 
and  the  future  civil  servant  no  longer  associated 
with  the  future  medical  student.  The  barrier  had 
been  erected. 

To  quote  from  an  article  in  the  "American 
School  Board  Journal,"  by  Vaughan  R.  De  Long, 
chief  of  education  division,  OMG  Hesse,  students 
"were  trained  in  a  school  system  that  emphasized 
and  deepened  the  (class)  differences  instead  of 
lessening  them,  a  school  system  which  even  in  its 
academic  training  was  entirely  vocational  with 
little  or  no  training  in  the  basic  elements  of  social 
living  or  of  international  understanding  and  co- 
operation. From  the  time  .  .  .  children  entered 
these  different  types  of  schools  in  their  fifth  school 
year,  their  ways  became  ever  more  divergent. 
Each  course  of  study  was  different  from  the  other." 
The  real  purpose  of  the  German  school  system 
was  selection  and  elimination  rather  than  educa- 
tion. This  was  borne  out  by  the  fact  that  the 
average  Gymnasium  had  one  teacher  to  every  30 
pupils ;  the  Volksschule  had  one  teacher  to  every 
60  pupils.  This  was  justified  by  German  educa- 
tors on  the  ground  that  brighter  pupils  had  earned 
such  advantages.  Yet  recent  studies  under  the 
American  occupation  show  that  the  average  ability 
of  elementary  school  students  was  but  slightly 
below  that  of  gymnasium  pupils,  the  supposedly 
highly-selected  group. 

Even  the  teachers  in  the  various  schools  took 
different  training.  Elementary  school  teachers 
attended  a  special  seminary  for  training  elemen- 
tary school  teachers  after  completing  the  ele- 
mentary course  of  study.  The  academic  instruc- 
tors, however,  took  specific  training  in  the 
university  in  order  to  become  high  school  teachers. 
The  entire  educational  system  tended  to  create  an 


June  26,  1949 


elite  class  of  leaders  from  -whom  all  others  took 
their  leadership.  The  five  to  10  percent  of  the 
university-trained  people  became  the  "superior" 
class. 

These  were  the  school  problems,  then,  that  faced 
the  MG  educators.  Before  the  solution  could  be 
found  schools  had  to  be  located,  troops  moved  out 
of  them,  the  buildings  repaired,  teachers  denazi- 
fied and  demilitarized,  Nazi  textbooks  eliminated 
and  new  textbooks — often  denazified  by  the  use  of 
scissors  and  glue — distributed,  and  paper,  pencils 
and  teaching  aids  procured  and  given  out.  These 
mechanics  of  education  consumed  most  of  the 
time  in  1945  and  1946  and  little  active  thought 
could  be  given  to  a  school  reform,  as  such,  in 
Hesse. 

OMGUS.  in  January  1947,  had  established  the 
10  basic  doctrines  for  rebuilding  the  German 
school  system.  It  was  a  decision  to  teach  democ- 
racy by  example.  It  would  have  taken  far  less 
time  to  impose  democratic  education  by  decree, 
but  the  Germans  would  not  have  learned  the  actual 
practice  of  democracy  if  their  schools  had  been 
reformed  by  MG  order.  Thus  instead  of  order- 
ing, committees  of  Hessian  citizens  were  formed  to 
study  and  recommend  a  new  educational  system. 
Every  facet  of  life  and  every  section  of  the  state 
were  represented  on  one  or  more  of  the  working 
parties  studying  educational  reform. 

This  group  received  semi-official  status  when 
the  Ministry  of  Education,  in  January  1948,  ap- 
pointed it  the  State  School  Advisory  Board.  Cer- 
tain reforms  were  recommended  and  even  tested  in 
typical  schools  within  Hesse.  In  order  to  bring 
the  general  public— especially  the  parents — in 
contact  with  the  problem,  special  discussion  groups 
were  formed  and  meetings  held.  Student  govern- 
ment was  instituted  in  most  schools  and  visiting 
education  experts  gave  generously  of  time  and 
advice,  while  German  educators  were  sent  abroad 
to  see  liow  education  had  advanced  in  other  coun- 
tries during  the  war.  School  reform  was  on  the 
verge  of  becoming  a  reality. 

The  first  break  came  in  April  1947,  when,  by  a 
Ministry  of  Education  decree,  tuition  costs  in  high 
schools  and  universities  were  discontinued.  In 
February  1949,  the  Hessian  legislature  confirmed 
this  ministerial  decree  and  even  provided  free  tui- 
tion in  all  schools  of  the  state,  free  school  books 
and  free  school  materials.  The  first  real  breach  in 
the  age-old  caste  system  had  been  made.  Further 
progress  was  inevitable.     A  few  days  later,  the 


same  legislative  body  passed  a  law  providing  for 
standard  curriculum  in  all  schools.  Opportunity 
for  educational  equality  was  an  actuality.  With 
legislative  enactment  the  real  fundamentals  of 
school  reform  were  implemented  and  teeth  were 
put  into  Hessian  school  reform  by  the  educators 
themselves. 

Basically,  the  implementing  regulations  pro- 
vide for  three  separate  methods  of  insuring  educa- 
tional equality:  first  of  all,  a  uniform  objective 
test  is  given  to  all  pupils  in  the  fourth  grade  prior 
to  selection  of  new  pupils  to  the  middle  school 
and  the  high  school.  In  February  1949,  almost 
61,000  young  Hessians  took  this  competitive  ex- 
amination which  tests  intelligence,  knowledge, 
achievement  and  aptitude.  Selections  to  higher 
study  are  now  determined  by  ability  rather  than 
by  social  group,  family  tradition  or  ability  to  pay. 

The  second  basic  innovation  is  the  uniform 
course  of  study  for  all  fifth  grade  classes  regard- 
less of  school.  With  the  uniform  course,  the  over- 
specialization  and  practical  impossibility  of 
changing  courses  of  study  in  the  future  is  elimi- 
nated. Freedom  for  the  student  to  change  his 
mind  is  a  reality. 

The  third  action  by  the  Hessian  educators  is 
another  objective  test  to  be  given  at  the  end  of  the 
fifth  school  year  in  order  again  to  bring  objective 
influences  into  play  to  show  that  all  of  the  best 
students  are  not  in  the  Gymnasium,  and  to  provide 
students  desiring  to  change  from  Volksschule  to 
Gymnasium  the  opportunity  for  an  easy  switch 
of  program.  It  is  expected  that  these  achieve- 
ment tests  will  be  given  at  the  end  of  each  j-ear  for 
at  least  the  first  eight  years  of  study. 

Returning  to  the  second  directive,  equalization 
of  curriculum,  I  believe  it  well  to  point  out  that 
prior  to  this  change  a  different  history,  a  different 
geogi-aphy.  a  different  German  and  even  a  differ- 
ent course  in  mathematics  were  taught  at  the  dif- 
ferent schools.  The  plan  now  in  operation  in 
Hesse  has  all  pupils  of  like  grade  learning  same 
courses  from  the  same  books.  In  addition  to  the 
other  courses,  the  gymnasium  student  starts  his 
Latin  studies  in  the  fifth  school  year  but  a  student 
changing  from,  say  Volksschule  to  Gymnasium, 
can  make  up  this  course  without  undue  burden. 
Thus  the  course  of  study  will  no  longer  be  such  a 
deciding  influence  in  the  youngster's  life. 

Free  tuition  plus  common  testing  and  common 
curriculum  has  led  to  an  unexpected  trend: 
greater  interest  on  the  part  of  the  parent.     In  the 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


short  period  since  the  reform  was  instituted  OMG 
Hesse  education  officials  have  noted  an  ever- 
.  increasing  interest  on  the  part  of  fathei-s  and 
mothers.  This  in  itself  is  far  more  significant 
than  legislative  enactment.  For  the  first  time 
tradition-bound  parents  are  inquiring  as  to  why 
their  youngster  has  not  been  admitted  to  the 
Gymnasium  and  are  interesting  themselves  in  his 
studies  and  his  extra-curricular  activities. 

Further,  now  that  the  grocer's  son  and  the  bank- 
er's son  are  really  schoolmates  and  friends,  the 
grocer  and  the  banker  are  becoming  better 
acquainted.  The  caste  walls  are  beginning  to 
crumble  at  the  roots.  With  this  awakening  of 
parental  interest,  I  predict  that  parents  will  be- 
come increasingly  active  in  demanding  greater 
equalities  for  their  children — more  facilities,  bet- 
ter courses  of  study  and  eventually  a  chance  for 
every  youngster  to  go  on  to  a  free  university. 

The  reform  has  also  affected  the  school  laws 
themselves.  The  Ministry  of  Education  drafted 
a  law  for  a  school  organization  of  six  years  of 
elementary  school  studies.  In  the  draft  the  min- 
istry included  a  lengthy  justification  of  the  pro- 
posal. The  draft  was  then  circulated  among  the 
citizens  and  invited  their  comments  and  criticism. 
This  is  believed  to  be  the  first  time  in  the  history 
of  Germany  that  such  type  legislation  has  been 
given  to  the  people  in  an  unofficial  referendum  be- 
fore being  presented  to  the  legislature. 

Also  submitted  for  public  consideration  is  the 
draft  of  a  law  which  breaks  sharply  with  German 


educational  tradition.  This  draft,  which  has  been 
agreed  to  by  the  educators  of  the  state,  provides 
that  all  new  teacher  training  students  must  have 
completed  high  school  and  that  all  teacher  trainees 
will  have  at  least  one  full  year  of  common 
training.  Heretofore,  the  elementary  school 
teacher  did  not  need  a  high  school  education  and 
his  teacher  training  was  far  different  from  that 
of  his  colleague  in  the  high  school. 

With  school  reform  came  a  change  in  thinking 
and  textbooks  have  been  radically  changed.  A 
new  English  primer,  called  "It's  Quite  Easy,"  is 
a  lively,  illustrated  text.  It  is  now  used  in  all 
fifth  grade  classes.  New  history  texts  which 
teach  history  never  learned  by  members  of  the 
former  Wehrmacht  will  soon  be  making  an  ap- 
pearance in  all  schools.  A  new  geography  is  be- 
ing taught,  and  best  of  all,  it  is  being  taught  to 
all  pupils  in  the  same  grade  regardless  of  school. 

Since  the  start  of  the  occupation,  education  in 
Hesse  has  been  advanced  by  several  years.  It  was 
accomplished  not  as  a  miracle,  but  by  the  deter- 
mined effort  on  the  part  of  a  number  of  sincere 
educators  who  loved  and  believed  in  democracy. 
Educational  reform  was  not  realized  by  military 
order  or  occupational  decree  but  was  the  work  of 
the  Hessians  themselves  guided  by  democratic  ex- 
ample. School  reform  in  Hesse  is  the  result  of 
practicing  democracy,  and  it  can  be  used  as  the 
example  for  further  orientation  to  the  cause  of 
freedom  and  peace. 


Statements  and  Addresses  of  the  Month 


Acting  Secretary  Webb- 


Assistant  Secretary  Thorp. 


On  the  subject  of  enduring  peace.  Not 
printed.  Text  issued  as  press  release 
415  of  June  6. 

On  the  subject  of  economic  and  social  de- 
velopment. "Where  is  the  Horizon?" 
Not  printed.  Text  issued  as  press 
release  437  of  June  10. 


Address  made  at  alumni  luncheon,  Uni- 
versity of  North  Carolina,  Chapel  Hill, 
N.  C.  on  June  6. 

Address  made  at  the  Baccalaureate  exer- 
cises of  the  University  of  Connecticut, 
Storrs,  Conn,  on  June  12. 


June  26,   1949 


The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations 


Conventional  Armaments 

Meeting  for  the  first  time  since  May  26,  the 
working  committee  of  the  Commission  for  Con- 
ventional Armaments  on  June  21  began  consider- 
ation of  the  Frencli  proposal  for  a  census  and 
verification  of  armaments  and  armed  forces  of 
member  states  of  the  United  Xations.  The  United 
States,  Canada,  the  United  Kingdom,  Norway, 
Cuba,  and  Cliina  supported  the  French  proposal 
as  a  basis  for  discussion.  Opposition  was  ex- 
pressed by  Egypt,  the  U.S.S.R.,  and  the  Ukraine. 

The  U.S.  representative  welcomed  the  French 

groposal  as  a  good  basis  for  working  toward  ful- 
Iling  the  assignment  given  to  the  Commission 
by  the  General  Assembly  resolution  of  November 
19,  1948.  He  pointed  out  that  the  heart  and  core 
of  the  entire  proposal  is  the  necessity  of  providing 
for  adequate  verification  of  whatever  data  may 
be  covered  by  any  census  which  may  be  agreed 
upon.  It  represents,  he  said,  the  one  way  to  insure 
genuine  confidence  in  and  acceptance  of  the  pro- 
posal by  the  nations  of  the  world. 

The  discussion  will  be  resumed  on  June  28. 

Security  Council 

The  Security  Council  on  June  21  and  again 
on  June  24  returned  to  the  question  of  admission 
of  new  members  to  the  United  Nations. 

In  addition  to  resolutions  which  had  previously 
been  introduced  by  Argentina  calling  for  the  ad- 
mission of  Austria,  Ceylon,  Finland,  Ireland, 
Italy,  Portugal,  and  Transjordan,  the  Council  on 
June  21  received  a  resolution  from  the  Soviet 
Union  which  would  admit  12  applicants  simultane- 
ously— the  above  7  plus  Albania,  Bulgaria,  Hun- 
gary, Mongolia,  and  Rumania. 

Ambassador  Warren  R.  Austin  reiterating  U.S. 
opposition  to  the  consideration  of  applicants  "in 
IjIocs,"  indicated  that  the  latter  5  states  did  not, 
in  his  opinion,  meet  Charter  requirements  for 
membership.  However,  he  said,  the  United 
States  would  not  use  its  veto  privilege  to  prevent 
the  admission  of  a  state  which  would  otherwise 
have  sufficient  votes  for  admission. 

Ambassador  Austin  indicated  that  the  United 
States  would  be  willing  to  support  the  achnission 
of  these  5  states  if  they  would  take  steps  to  comply 
with  Charter  requirements,  and  he  urged  the 
U.S.S.R.  to  exercise  its  influence  with  them  toward 
this  end. 

Further  discussion  was  postponed  to  the  next 
meeting  of  the  Security  Council,  the  date  for  which 
was  not  set. 

Human  Rights 

The  Commission  on  Human  Rights  ended  a  six- 
week  session  at  Lake  Success  on  June  20  during 
which  most  of  the  discussion  was  devoted  to  a 


draft  Covenant  on  Human  Eights  and  measures 
for  its  implementation.  The  draft  covenant  and 
ail  draft  proposals  on  measures  of  implementation 
will  be  circulated  to  member  governments  lor  com- 
ment before  January  1, 19;J0.  The  Human  Rights 
Conunission  will  review  the  draft  covenant  and 
suggestions  from  the  governments  at  its  next  ses- 
sion in  March  1950  and  attempt  to  have  the  docu- 
ment in  final  form  for  action  by  the  General 
Assembly  later  that  year.  Action  on  8  of  the  pres- 
ent 26  articles  of  the  covenant  was  deferred  until 
the  next  session. 

During  its  final  meetings  the  Commission  de- 
cided to  ask  the  Secretary-General :  (1)  to  prepare 
a  survey  of  United  Nations  and  specialized  agen- 
cies activities  in  the  economic  and  social  rights 
fields  as  covered  by  the  Universal  Declaration  of 
Human  Rights ;  ( 2)  to  prepare  a  study  on  the  right 
of  individuals,  groups,  and  organizations  to  peti- 
tion; and  (2)  to  transmit  the  questionnaire  pre- 
pared by  the  Secretariat  on  implementation  to 
member  governments  for  reply  by  January  1. 1950. 

The  U.S.S.R.  and  Ukraine  criticized  the  cove- 
nant as  incomplete  and  unsatisfactory  and  ab- 
stained in  the  vote  on  the  final  report  of  the 
Commission. 

Protection  of  IVIinorities 

Two  proposals  submitted  by  the  United  States 
member,  Jonathan  Daniels,  were  among  those  ap- 
proved by  the  subcommission  on  Prevention  of 
Discrimination  and  Protection  of  Minorities,  dur- 
ing the  week  beginning  June  20.  Mr.  Daniels 
served  in  the  capacity  of  an  individual  expert. 

One  proposal  recommends  a  four-point  proce- 
dure for  the  handling  of  petitions  to  the  subcom- 
mission regarding  urgent  discrimination  problems. 
Stabject  to  approval  by  the  Human  Rights  Com- 
mission and  the  Economic  and  Social  Council,  the 
proposal  would  enable  the  subcommission  to  re- 
ceive and  examine  urgent  communications  from 
members,  organs  of  the  United  Nations,  specialized 
agencies  or  non-governmental  organizations.  It 
would  empower  the  Secretary-General  to  screen 
such  petitions  and  make  recommendations  regard- 
ing their  urgency;  it  would  permit  the  subcom- 
mission to  create  three-member  petitions  commit- 
tees to  investigate  and  render  informal  assistance. 
There  is  provision  in  tlie  petition  for  further  sub- 
commission  consideration  in  those  cases  where 
states  involved  invoke  the  domestic  jurisdiction 
clause  of  the  Charter. 

Tlie  other  proposal  successfully  submitted  by 
Mr.  Daniels  provided  that  the  General  Assembly 
recommend  to  all  states  that  they  enable  recognized 
minority  groups  to  maintain  their  cultural  heri- 
tage when  they  desire  to  do  so  by  providing  ade- 
quate facilities  for  the  use  of  minority  languages 
in  schools  and  courts.  Due  provision  is  made  for 
safeguarding  national  securitv. 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


INTERNATIONAL  ORGANIZATIONS  AND  CONFERENCES 


U.S.  Economic  Policy  in  the  Caribbean 


BY  W.  M.  CANADAY' 
U.S.  Co-Chairman 


YOTJR     EXCELUINCY,     FeLLOW      COMMISSIONERS, 

Ladies  and  Gentlemen:  I  want  to  thank  your 
Excellency  for  your  cordial  welcome  and  to  pay 
tribute  on  behalf  of  the  United  States  Section  to 
those  commissioners  whose  work  for  their  govern- 
ment has  taken  them  from  our  midst  and  to  extend 
warm  greetings  to  the  distinguished  new  members 
of  the  Commission  with  whom  we  shall  have  the 
pleasure  of  cooperating. 

Ever  since  my  appointment  by  President  Tru- 
man to  this  important  international  body,  I  have 
looked  forward  eagerly  to  visiting  again  your 
beautiful  island.  I  am  particularly  pleased  to  be 
able  for  the  first  time  to  visit  the  headquarters  of 
the  Caribbean  Commission,  and  also  to  comment 
publicly  upon  the  accomplishments  of  the  Com- 
mission since  its  seventh  meeting. 

Six  months  have  passed  since  the  third  session  of 
the  West  Indian  Conference  made  its  recommen- 
dations to  the  Caribbean  Commission.^  Those 
recommendations  have  been  studied  throughout 
the  various  departments  of  our  government. 

We  have  assurance  of  its  desire  to  take  action  on 
those  projects  which  the  member  governments 
mutually  consider  feasible. 

The  urgent  demand  is  for  action.  I  scarcely 
need  remind  you  that  today  with  the  world 
brought  closer  and  closer  together  we  are  racing 
against  time  to  raise  living  standards  of  unde- 
veloped peoples.  Two  years  ago  we  flew  to  our 
meetings  at  150  miles  an  hour,  today  at  250,  tomor- 
row possibly  at  500  miles  an  hour. 

So  swiftly  does  time  pass  that  already  the  re- 
cently born  Caribbean  Commission  has  become  a 
pilot  whose  action  may  guide  the  way  to  progress 
for  other  parts  of  the  world  who  yesterday  lived  in 
isolation. 

What  we  accomplish  in  the  Caribbean  now  is 
vital  news  around  the  globe. 

Only  a  few  weeks  ago  the  United  States  Com- 
missioners met  in  Washington  to  discuss  the  work 
of  the  Commission.  We  conferred  with  the 
President,  the  Secretary  of  State,  and  other  high 
officers  of  our  government. 

The  President  gave  renewed  emphasis  to  the 
declaration  made  in  his  January  inaugural  ad- 
dress. He  repeated  his  hope  to  make  available 
technical  aid  to  areas  such  as  those  coming  within 
the  sphere  of  this  Commission.    He  emphasized 

June  26,  1949 


his  program  to  help  the  free  peoples  of  the  world 
through  their  own  efforts  to  produce  more  food, 
more  clothing,  more  materials  for  housing,  and 
more  mechanical  power  to  lighten  their  burdens. 
There,  in  essence,  is  a  projection  on  the  world  scene 
of  the  purposes  and  principles  of  the  Caribbean 
Commission. 

He  was  enthusiastic  in  the  hope  that  the  Carib- 
bean might  become  a  shining  example  of  scientific 
progress. 

Every  official  with  whom  we  talked  showed  deep 
interest  in  the  economic  and  social  progress  of  this 
region.  We  found  everywhere  the  urge  to  press 
forward  with  practical  results. 

Our  Washington  discussions  confinned  to  us 
that  the  United  States  Government  has  a  vigorous 
interest  in  the  dynamic  success  of  this  inspiring 
enterprise. 

There  is  an  increasing  realization  that  the  eco- 
nomic and  social  development  of  this  area  is 
imperative  to  the  security  and  progress  of  this 
hemisphere. 

A  distinguished  former  British  commissioner 
aptly  said  that  the  influence  of  an  advisory  organi- 
zation such  as  the  Caribbean  Commission,  rests  not 
on  public  authority  but  on  public  confidence. 

Continued  public  confidence  in  the  work  of  this 
Commission  can  exist  only  through  results — 
through  realism — through  action  based  on  sound 
knowledge  of  the  problems  of  the  region  we  serve. 

By  its  very  nature  the  Commission  must  lead 
the  thinking  of  the  member  governments  through 
present  practice  to  a  practical  new  world  living 
at  a  new  pace. 

Notable  achievements  have  marked  the  7  years 
of  the  existence  of  this  Commission  and  of  its 
predecessor  the  Anglo- American  Caribbean  Com- 
mission. I  need  not  dwell  on  the  wartime 
accomplislmients. 

Today  the  need  is  that  all  of  us— member  gov- 
ernments, territorial  governments  and  commis- 


1  Address  made  at  the  Eighth  Meeting  of  the  Caribbean 
Commission  in  Port-au-Spain,  Trinidad,  on  June  14,  1949, 
and  released  to  the  press  by  the  Caribbean  Commission 
on  the  same  date. 

'  For  an  article  by  Elizabeth  Armstrong  on  the  West 
Indian  Conference,  see  Bulletin  of  Feb.  20,  1949,  p.  221 ; 
and  for  recommendations,  see.  Documents  and  State 
Papers  for  March-April,  1949,  p.  728. 

813 


sioners — concentrate  similarly  on  specific  pro- 
grams which  can  be  effected  with  little  delay. 

Political  stability  demands  some  economic  and 
social  progress.  For  this  reason,  the  United 
States  is  interested  chiefly  in  developing  the  com- 
mercial possibilities  of  the  Caribbean. 

We  are  convinced  of  the  necessity  of  stressing 
specific  plans  for  industrialization,  improvement 
of  communications  and  transportation,  and  devel- 
opment of  tourist  facilities,  comparable  to  its 
history  and  magnificent  climate. 

Let  me  mention  a  few  key  points  in  which  the 
United  States  Section  is  now  working  to  carry 
forward  the  Commission's  procramme.^ 

Industralhation. — The  United  States  Section 
is  gratified  that  the  Central  Secretariat  has  pro- 
duced for  the  consideration  of  the  Caribbean  Com- 
mission detailed  proposals  for  the  promotion 
of  primary  and  secondary  industries.  We  have 
submitted  these  draft  proposals  to  a  number  of 
authorities  both  within  and  outside  the  United 
States  Government  and  shall  incorporate  their 
views  in  comments  we  shall  make  later  in  this 
session. 

Comvmnications. — The  United  States  delegation 
to  the  Administrative  Telephone  and  Telegraph 
Conference,  which  is  now  being  held  in  Paris, 
has  been  requested  to  emphasize  the  importance 
attached  by  the  West  Indian  Conference  to  the 
need  for  obtaining  lower  telegraph  and  telephone 
tariffs  in  this  area. 

Tariffs. — In  conveying  the  recommendation  of 
the  West  Indian  Conference,  a  committee  of  ex- 
perts of  the  United  States  Government  has  already 
begun  assembling  basic  data  on  the  trade  and 
tariffs  of  the  Caribbean  territories  and  of  Cuba, 
the  Dominican  Republic,  and  Haiti. 

Tourist  Development. — I  am  happy  to  report 
that  the  United  States  territories  in  the  Caribbean 
area,  Puerto  Rico,  and  the  Virgin  Islands  have 
announced  their  adherence  to  the  Caribbean 
Tourist  Development  Association.  I  am  also 
pleased  to  inform  you  that  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment has  designated  Walter  C.  Reundle, 
Vice-President  of  the  American  Express  Com- 
pany, as  its  representative  on  the  Tourist  Ad- 
visory Council  of  the  Association. 

Hurricane  'Warning  System. — The  United 
States  Weather  Bureau  and  other  government 
agencies  have  been  working  together  all  winter 
to  give  effect  to  the  AVest  Indian  Conference  rec- 
ommendation concerning  improvements  in  the 
Caribbean  Hurricane  Warning  System.     During 

'  Bulletin  of  May  15, 1949,  p.  621. 


the  course  of  this  meeting  we  shall  propose  a  reso- 
lution on  this  subject,  recommending  that  a  con- 
ference of  meteorological  and  telecommunication 
experts  be  convened  in  the  area  before  the  next 
hurricane  season  for  the  purpose  of  coordinating 
a  uniform  hurricane  warning  system. 

Technical  Cooperation. — The  executive  depart- 
ments of  our  government  have  been  formulating 
proposals  for  the  implementation  of  a  programme 
for  technical  cooperation  envisaged  in  the  Presi- 
dent of  the  United  States  inaugural  address  to 
which  I  have  previously  referred.  The  United 
States  Section  proposes  that  an  item  on  technical 
cooperation  be  adtled  to  the  agenda  of  this  meet- 
ing and  will  submit  a  paper  summarizing  the 
latest  information  on  the  subject. 

Socio-Economic  Survey. — The  United  States 
Section  has  urged  consideration  by  the  Research 
Council  at  its  recent  meeting  of  this  vitally  im- 
portant subject  and  understands  that  the  Research 
Council  has  fully  endorsed  this  proposal.  We 
sliall  propose  therefore  that  these  studies  be  placed 
on  the  agenda  of  the  Commission  for  action  at 
this  session.  In  the  consideration  of  all  these 
matters  it  is  a  great  pleasure  to  pay  tribute  to 
the  excellent  work  done  by  the  Secretary  Gen- 
eral and  liis  staff.  The  Central  Secretariat  of 
the  Caribbean  Commission  is  composed  of  men 
and  women  representing  the  peoples  of  the  terri- 
tories in  the  area  who  in  their  daily  lives  are 
familiar  with  the  problems  of  the  Caribbean. 
They  are  making  a  very  real  and  comprehensive 
contribution  to  the  effective  work  of  the  Com- 
mission. 

There  is  much  work  for  us  to  do  in  the  too  few 
days  of  this  meeting. 

I  pledge  the  utmost  cooperation  of  the  United 
States  commissioners. 

It  is  our  earnest  hope  that  this  eighth  meeting 
will  stand  out  in  the  annals  of  the  Commission 
as  one  wjiich  achieved  notable  progress  in  prac- 
tical action. 

We  have  collected  much  data,  but  we  strive  in 
this  meeting  to  find  ways  to  put  this  data  to  work 
so  that  the  six  million  peoples  of  this  area  can  feel 
its  practical  benefit. 

In  closing,  I  should  like  to  leave  you  with  an  old 
verse : 

"Some  ships  sail  East, 
Some  ships  sail  West, 
All  sail  with  the  winds  that  blow — 
It's  the  set  of  the  sail 
Not  the  strength  of  the  gale 
That  determines  where  they  go." 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


U.S.  Delegations  to  International  Conferences 


ILO:  Thirty-second  Session 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  June 
7  that  the  President  has  approved  the  following 
delegation  recommended  by  the  Secretary  of 
Labor  to  represent  the  United  States  at  the  thirty- 
second  session  of  the  International  Labor  Confer- 
ence, scheduled  to  be  held  at  Geneva,  June  8- 
July  2,  1949 : 

Government  Retresentatives 

Delegates 

Philip  M.  Kaiser,  Director,  Office  of  International  Labor 

Affairs,  Department  of  Labor 
The  Honorable  Herbert  R.  O'Conor,  United  States  Senate 

Suhstitute  Delegate 

Walter  M.  Kotschnig,  Chief,  Division  of  United  Nations 
Economic  and  Social  Affairs,  Department  of  State 

Advisers 

B.  Harper  Barnes,  Special  Assistant  to  the  Solicitor, 
Office  of  the  Solicitor,  Department  of  Labor 

Clara  M.  Beyer.  Associate  Director,  Bureau  of  Labor 
Standards,  Department  of  Labor 

Robert  C.  Goodwin,  Director,  Bureau  of  Employment 
Security,  Federal  Security  Agency 

Harry  A.  Jager,  Chief,  Occupational  Information  and 
Guidance  Service,  Division  of  Occupational  Educa- 
tion, Office  of  Education,  Federal  Security  Agency 

Val  R.  Lorwin,  Chief,  European  Section,  Division  of 
International  Labor  and  Social  Affairs,  Department 
of  State 

William  R.  McComb,  Administrator,  Wage  and  Hour  and 
Public  Contracts  Divisions,  Department  of  Labor 

Jeter  S.  Ray,  Associate  Solicitor,  Office  of  the  Solicitor, 
Department  of  Labor 

Keene  A.  Roadman,  Office  of  International  Labor  Affairs, 
Department  of  Labor 

Charles  W.  Sanders,  Chief,  Division  of  Seamen  Services, 
U.   S.  Maritime  Commission 

Charles  W.  Sattler,  Labor  Commissioner  of  West  Virginia, 
Cliarleston,  West  Virginia 

Oscar  Weigert,  Chief,  Central  and  Eastern  European  Sec- 
tion, Office  of  Foreign  Labor  Conditions,  Bureau  of 
Labor  Statistics,  Department  of  Labor 

Faith  M.  Williams,  Chief,  Office  of  Foreign  Labor  Con- 
ditions, Bureau  of  Labor  Statistics,  Department  of 
Labor. 

EMPLOYEES  Representatives 

Delegate 

Charles  P.  McCormick,  President,  McCormick  and  Com- 
pany, Baltimore 

Advisers 

William  B.  Barton,  Director,  Employer-Employee  Rela- 
tions, Chamber  of  Commerce  of  the  United  States, 
Washington 

L.  E.  Ebeling,  Personnel  Director,  The  Sherwin-Williams 
Company,  Cleveland 

William  L.  McGrath,  President,  Williamson  Heater  Com- 
pany, Cincinnati 

June  26,   1949 


Robert  Nicol,  American  Export  Lines  Representative, 
American  Export  Lines  and  Company,  Via  Alia 
Nunziata  No.  1,  Genoa 

Herbert  M.  Ramel,  Vice  President,  The  Ramsey  Corpora- 
tion, St.  Louis 

Charles  E.  Shaw,  Manager,  Employee  Relations  Overseas, 
Standard  Oil  Company  of  New  Jersey,  New  York 

Leo  Teplow,  Staff  Member,  Industrial  Relations,  National 
Association  of  Manufacturers,  New  York 

Workers  Representatives 

Delegate 

George  Philip  Delaney,  International  Representative, 
American  Federation  of  Labor,  Washington 

Advisers 

Martin  P.  Durkin,  President,  United  Association  of 
Journeymen  and  Apprentices  of  the  Plumbing  and 
Pipe  Fitting  Industry,  Washington 

William  L.  McFetridge,  President,  Building  Service  Em- 
ployees' International  Union,  Chicago 

William  J.  McSorley,  President,  International  Union  of 
Wood,  Wire  and  Metal  Lathers,  Cleveland 

George  Meany,  Secretary-Treasurer,  American  Federation 
of  Labor,  Washington 

John  P.  Redmond,  President,  International  Association 
of  Fire  Fighters,  Washington 

Phil  E.  Ziegler,  Secretar.v-Treasurer,  Brotherhood  of  Rail- 
way Clerks,  Cincinnati 

Executive  Secretary 

Walter  W.  Sohl,  Jr.,  Division  of  International  Conferences, 
Department  of  State 

Administrative  Ofjj,cer 

Theodore  T.  Kibler,  Division  of  Research  for  Europe,  De- 
partment of  State 

The  agenda  for  the  thirty-second  session  in- 
cludes the  following  items:  (1)  the  Director- 
General's  report;  (2)  financial  and  budgetary 
questions;  (3)  reports  on  the  application  of  con- 
ventions ;  (4)  a  discussion  of  the  application  of  the 
principles  of  the  right  to  organize  and  to  bargain 
collectively;  (5)  a  discussion  of  industrial  rela- 
tions, comprising  collective  agreements,  concilia- 
tion and  arbitration,  and  cooperation  between 
public  authorities  and  employers'  and  workers' 
organizations;  (6)  labor  clauses  in  public  con- 
tracts; (7)  a  general  report  on  wages;  (8)  voca- 
tional guidance ;  (9)  revision  of  the  Fee-Charging 
Employment  Agencies  Convention,  1933;  (10) 
revision  of  the  Migration  for  Employment  Con- 
vention, 1939;  the  Migration  for  Employment 
Kecommendation,  1939;  and  the  Migration  for 
Employment  (cooperation  between  states)  Recom- 
mendation, 1939;  and  (11)  partial  revision  of  the 
Social  Security  (Seafarers)  Convention,  1946;  the 
Paid  Vacations  (Seafarers)  Convention,  1946; 
the  Accommodation  of  Crews  Convention,  1946; 


and  the  Wapes,  Hours  of  Work  and  Manning 
(Sea)  Convention,  1940. 

The  International  Labor  Conference,  which  gen- 
erally meets  once  a  year,  is  tlie  legislative  body  of 
the  International  Labor  Organization  (Ilo). 
The  thirty-first  session  of  the  Conference  was  held 
at  San  Francisco  in  the  summer  of  1948.  The 
functions  of  the  Conference  are  to  formulate  con- 
ventions and  recommendations,  which  are  then 
submitted  to  the  competent  authorities  of  each 
member  nation  for  ratification  or  implementation. 
It  is  expected  that  representatives  of  more  than 
50  of  61  member  nations  will  participate  in  the 
forthcoming  session. 

International  Tin  Study  Group:  Fourth  Meeting 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  June  7 
that  Donald  D.  Kennedy,  Chief  of  the  Inter- 
national Resources  Division,  Department  of  State, 
has  been  named  chairman  of  the  United  States 
delegation  to  the  fourth  meeting  of  the  Inter- 
national Tin  Study  Group,  scheduled  to  open  at 
London,  June  1.3,  1949.  Other  members  of  the 
delegation  are  as  follows : 

Advisers 

Glion  Curtis,  Jr.,  American  Embas.sy,  The  HagTie 
William  M.  B.  Freom-an,  European  Representative,  Bureau 

of  Federal  Supply 
Anthony   SiraRusa,  Assistant  to  Vice  President,   United 

States  Steel  Corporation 
Evan    Just,    Director,    Division    of    Strategic   Materials, 

Economic  Cooperation  Administration 
W.   F.   McKinnon,   Associate   Director,   Office   of   Metals 

Reserve,  Reconstruction  Finance  Corporation 
Charles  Merrill,  Cliicf,  Metal  Economics  Branch,  Bureau 

of  Mines,  department  of  the  Interior 
Erwin  VoLXflsaiig,  Chief,  Tin  and  Antimony  Section,  Metals 

Division,  Department  of  Commerce 

Adviser  and  Secretary 

Clarence    W.    Nichols,    Assistant    Chief,    International 
Resources  Division,  Department  of  State 

The  meeting  has  been  called  to  consider  the 
world  tin  position,  to  review  the  work  of  the  Sec- 
retariat of  the  (jroup,  and  to  discuss  the  replies 
which  member  governments  have  made  to  the  Sec- 
i^etary  setting  forth  their  views  as  to  the  desira- 
bility of  entering  into  an  intergovernmental  agree- 
ment on  the  broad  lines  proposed  at  the  Group's 
third  meeting,  held  at  The  Hague  last  October. 

The  International  Tin  Study  Group  was  es- 
tablished u))on  a  recommendation  of  the  Interna- 
tional Tin  Conference,  held  at  London  in  October 
194G,  to  which  the  principal  tin  producing  and 
consuming  countries  of  the  world  sent  repre- 
sentatives. 

Caribbean  Commission 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  June  10 
that  the  United  States  delegation  to  the  eighth 
meeting  of  the  Caribbean  Commission,  to  be  hold 
at  Port-of-Spain,  Trinidad,  li.  W.  I.,  on  June 
13-18,  1949,  will  consist  of  the  following : 


Commissioners 

Ward    M.    Canaday,    United    States    Co-Chairman,    and 

Chairman  of  the  Board,  Willys-Overland  Inc.,  Toledo, 

Ohio 
William  H.  Hastle,  Governor  of  the  Virgin  Islands  of  the 

United  States 
Jesus  T.  Pinero,  former  Governor  of  Puerto  Rico 
Dr.  Rafael  Pico,  Chairman  of  the  Planning,  Urbanizing 

and  Zoning  Board,  Puerto  Rico 

Advisers 

James  Frederick  Green,  Associate  Chief,  Division  of  De- 
pendent Area  Affairs,  Department  of  State 

Duncan  A.  D.  Mackay,  Division  of  Caribbean  Affairs, 
Department  of  State 

Frances  McReynolds,  Division  of  Dependent  Area  Affairs, 
Department  of  State 

Rollo  S.  Smith,  Assistant  Chief,  American  Republics 
Branch,  Department  of  Commerce 

The  Caribbean  Commission  was  established  in 
1948  as  an  advisorj'  and  consultative  body  to  the 
four  Governments  of  France,  the  Netherlands,  the 
United  Kingdom,  and  the  United  States.  It,  like 
its  predecessor  the  Anglo-American  Caribbean 
Commission,  has  made  a  real  contribution  to  the 
economic  and  social  well-being  of  the  Caribbean 
area. 

The  Commission  at  this  meeting  will  discuss 
methods  of  developing  primary  and  secondary  in- 
dustries in  the  area,  providing  technical  experts 
to  local  governments;  transportation  and  commu- 
nications; population  movements  in  the  area;  ex- 
pansion of  research  publications  and  information 
services  in  the  fields  of  human  and  plant  disease 
reporting,  and  the  implementation  of  recommenda- 
tions of  the  West  Indian  Conference  (third 
session). 

The  four  United  States  commissioners  met  in 
Wasliington  on  May  4—6  to  confer  with  officers  of 
the  United  States  Government  on  matters  relating 
to  the  work  of  the  Caribbean  Commission.  They 
asked  the  assistance  of  this  government  with  re- 
gard to  the  improvement  of  transportation  and 
commmiications  in  the  Caribbean,  the  promotion 
of  industrial  development,  and  the  use  of  the 
Caribbean  Commission  in  carrying  out  the  tech- 
nical cooperation  program  envisaged  in  point  4  of 
the  President's  inaugural  address. 

On  departing  for  Trinidad,  Mr.  Canaday  said : 
"I  am  leaving  for  the  eighth  meeting  of  the  Carib- 
bean Commission  with  a  gratifying  realization  of 
the  substantial  progress  which  the  Commission  has 
made  along  ])ractical  lines  since  tlie  seventh  meet- 
ing last  December.  I  am  particularly  pleased  by 
the  interest  which  our  government  and  our  public 
are  showing  in  the  need  for  moving  ahead  in  im- 
jiroving  economic  and  social  standards  in  the 
Caribbean." 

Second  World  Health  Assembly 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  June  10 
that  the  President  has  named  Dr.  Leonard  A. 
Scheele,  Surgeon  General,  United  States  Public 
Health  Service,  to  serve  as  chairman  and  chief 
delegate  of  the  United  States  delegation  to  the 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Second  World  Health  Assembly,  scheduled  to  con- 
vene at  Rome  on  June  13, 1949- 

Delegates 

Edward  S.  Rogers,  M.  D.,  Dean,  School  of  Public  Health, 
University  of  California,  Berkeley,  California 

Mrs.  Louise  Wright,  Chairman,  Chicago  Council  on 
Foreign  Relations,  Chicago,  Illinois 

Alternate  Delegates 

Howard  B.  Calderwood,  Division  of  United  Nations 
Economic  and  Social  Affairs,  Department  of  State 

H.  van  Zile  Hyde,  M.  D.,  United  States  Representative  on 
the  Executive  Board  of  the  World  Health  Organiza- 
tion ;  Medical  Director,  U.  S.  Public  Health  Service, 
Federal  Security  Agency 

James  R.  Miller,  M.  D.,  Member,  Board  of  Trustees, 
American  Medical  Association 

Senator  Allen  J.  Ellender  of  Louisiana  and 
Representative  Joseph  L.  Pfeifer  of  New  York 
have  been  appointed  Congressional  Advisers  to  the 
Delegation. 

Other  members  of  the  delegation  announced  on 
June  10  by  the  Department  of  State  are  as  follows : 

Advisers 

R.  W.  Babione,  Captain  (MC),  USN,  Bureau  of  Medicine 
and  Surgery,  Department  of  the  Navy 

Katharine  E.  Faville,  Dean  and  Professor  of  Nursing, 
College  of  Nursing,  Wayne  University,  Detroit, 
Michigan 

Robert  Felix,  M.  D.,  Director,  National  Institute  of  Mental 
Health,  U.S.  Public  Health  Service,  Federal  Security 
Agency 

George  M.  Ingram,  Acting  Chief,  International  Adminis- 
tration Staff,  Office  of  United  Nations  Affairs,  De- 
partment of  State 

David  B.  Lee,  State  Sanitary  Engineer  of  Florida,  Presi- 
dent, Conference  of  State  Sanitary  Engineers 

Knud  Stowman,  Cliief,  Information  and  Research,  Office 
of  International  Health  Relations,  U.S.  Public  Health 
Service,  Federal  Security  Agency 

Mary  Switzer,  Assistant  to  the  Administrator,  Federal 
Security  Agency 

Executive  Secretary 

William  H.  Dodderidge,  Division  of  International  Confer- 
ences, Department  of  State 

Assistant  Executive  Secretary 

Antliony  M.  Tapogna 

Administrative  Assistant 

Elizabeth  G.  Pritchard,  Special  Assistant  to  the  Surgeon 
General  of  the  U.S.  Public  Health  Service,  Federal 
Security  Agency 

Documetits  Officer 

Ellen  M.  Duggan,  Division  of  International  Conferences, 
Department  of  State 

The  World  Health  Assembly  serves  as  the  gov- 
erning body  of  the  organization  and,  among  other 
things,  it  determines  the  policies  of  the  organiza- 
tion and  adopts  conventions  and  regulations  per- 
taining to  world  health.  The  First  Assembly,  held 
at  Geneva,  June  24-July  24,  1948,  marked  the  be- 
ginning of  full-scale  activity  of  the  Who  and  the 
termination  of  the  interim  phase  of  the  interna- 

June  26,  1949 


tional  health  agency  planned  by  plenipotentiaries 
of  62  governments  at  the  International  Health 
Conference  at  New  York  City  during  the  summer 
of  1946. 

The  Second  Assembly  will  not  only  review  and 
approve  actions  taken  by  the  Who  Executive 
Board  during  the  past  year  but  will  also  discuss 
matters  of  policy  and  operation  during  the  forth- 
coming year.  Imi^ortant  agenda  items  include: 
(1)  approval  of  the  organization's  budget  for 
1950;  (2)  approval  of  the  scale  of  contributions  of 
member  governments;  (3)  the  election  of  mem- 
bers to  the  Executive  Board;  (4)  the  study  of 
relationships  of  the  Who  with  other  specialized 
agencies  of  the  United  Nations;  and  (5)  the  es- 
tablishment of  regional  Who  groups. 

Who,  which  now  has  a  membership  of  62  na- 
tions, was  formally  established  as  a  specialized 
agency  of  the  United  Nations  on  April  7,  1948. 
Deposit  of  the  instrument  of  acceptance  by  the 
United  States  was  made  on  June  21,  1948. 

Adult  Education  Conference 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  June 
14  the  United  States  delegation  to  the  Interna- 
tional Conference  on  Adult  Education,  scheduled 
to  be  held  at  Elsinore,  Denmark,  June  16-25, 
1949.     The  delegation  is  as  follows : 


Mark  Starr,  Educational  Director,  International  Ladies' 
Garment  Workers  Union,  New  York 

Delegates 

William  Cooper,  Director,  Adult  Education,  Hampton  In- 
stitute, Hampton,  Virginia 

Gladys  Gallup,  Assistant  Chief,  Division  of  Field  Studies 
and  Training,  Extension  Service,  Department  of 
Agriculture 

Herbert  Cason  Hunsaker,  Dean  of  Cleveland  College, 
Western  Reserve  University,  Cleveland 

Paul  Sheats,  Associate  Professor  of  Education,  Univer- 
sity of  California,  Los  Angeles 

The  Adult  Education  Conference  has  been 
called  by  the  United  Nations  Educational,  Scien- 
tific and  Cultural  Organization  (Unesco).  It  is 
considered  by  Unesco  to  be  one  of  the  most  im- 
portant projects  of  its  1949  program.  The  pur- 
poses of  the  meeting  are : 

(1)  to  emphasize  the  importance  of  adult  edu- 
cation, particularly  as  a  means  for  achieving  in- 
ternational understanding ; 

(2)  to  study  the  trends  and  experiments  in  adult 
education  in  various  countries; 

(3)  to  devise  means  for  continued  collaboration 
among  adult  education  leaders  and  workers  of 
different  coimtries;  and 

(4)  to  promote  the  international  exchange  of 
persons  interested  in  adult  education. 

International  Conference  on  Science  Abstracting 

The  Department  of  State  announced  on  June 
10  the  United  States  delegation  to  the  Interna- 
tional Conference  on  Science  Abstracting,  sched- 


uled  to  be  held  at  Paris,  June  20-25,  1949.    The 
delegation  is  as  follows : 

Chairman 

Verner  W.  Clapp,  Chief  Assistant  Librarian,  Library  of 
Congress,  Washington,  D.  C. 

Delegates 

Evan  J.  Crane,  Editor,  Chemical  Abstracts,  Ohio  State 

University,  Columbus,  Ohio 
J.     Murray     Luck,     Stanford     University,     Palo     Alto, 

California 

Advisers 

Mrs.  Kilecn  R.  Cunningham,  Editor,  Medical  Abstracts, 
Librarian,  Vanderbilt  University,  Nashville,  Ten- 
nessee 

John  E.  Flynn,  Editor,  Biological  Abstracts,  University 
of   Pennsylvania,    Philadelphia,    Pennsylvania 

Eugene  W.  Scott,  Assistant  Executive  Secretary,  Research 
and  Development  Board,  Washington,  D.C. 

The  Conference  is  being  held  in  pursuance  of  a 
resolution  adopted  at  the  second  session  of  the 
General  Conference  of  the  United  Nations  Educa- 
tional, Scientific  and  Cultural  Organization 
(Unesco).  The  purpose  of  the  Conference  will 
be  to  consider  and  take  action  to  improve  and  de- 
velop abstracting  services  for  the  natural  sciences, 
both  pure  and  applied,  and  to  consider  methods  of 
increasing  their  usefulness  to  scientists,  with  re- 
gard at  the  same  time  to  the  related  problems  of 
indexing  and  accessibility  of  the  recorded  publi- 
cations. 


U.S.  Commission  Appointed  for  Pan  American 
Railway  Congress 

'I'he  Department  of  State  announced  on  June 
14  tlie  appointment  of  members  of  a  United  States 
National  Commission  in  the  Pan  American  Rail- 
way Congress  Association,  as  authorized  by  Pub- 
lic Law  794  of  the  80th  Congress  (approved  June 
28,  1948). 

Members  of  the  Connnission  are  as  follows: 

William  T.  Farley,  Chairman,  President,  Association  of 
American  Railroads 

Willard  L.  Tlioi-p,  Assistant  Secretary  of  State 

Charles  Sawyer,  Swretary  of  Commerce 

Charles  D  ftlahaffle,  Chairman,  Interstate  Commerce 
Commission 

George  P.  Balcer,  Professor  of  Transportation,  Graduate 
School  of  Business  Administration,  Harvard  Uni- 
versity 

J.  M.  Hood,  President,  American  Short  Line  Railroad 
Association 

James  G.  Lyne,  President,  Simnions-Boardraan  Publish- 
ing Corporation,  and  Editor,  Railway  Age 

Arlon  E.  Lyon,  Ex{K?utive  Secretary,  Railway  Labor  Ex- 
ecutives Association 

The  Commission  will  meet  for  the  first  time  in 
Washington  on  June  21,  1949,  to  consider  its  pro- 
gram of  work.  Its  resj^onsibilities  are  outlined 
in  general  terms  in  the  charter  of  the  Pan  Ameri- 
can Railway  Congress  Association  as  including  as- 
sistance in  the  organization  of  periodic  congresses 
and  preparation  of  special  studies. 


The  aims  of  the  Association  are  "to  promote  the 
development  and  progress  of  railways  in  the 
American  continent''  by  holding  congresses,  pub- 
lishing a  bulletin  and  other  documents,  and  main- 
taining information  services.  The  Association 
has  held  six  congresses  since  1910,  the  sixth  being 
in  Habana  in  April  1948.  The  seventh  congress 
will  be  held  in  ilexico  City  in  October  1950. 

The  following  17  countries  are  now  members  of 
the  Association :  Argentina,  Bolivia,  Brazil.  Chile, 
Colombia,  Cuba,  Dominican  Republic.  Ecuador, 
El  Salvador.  Haiti,  Mexico,  Panama,  Paraguay. 
Peru,  United  States,  Uruguay,  and  Venezuela. 

Inter-American  Conference  on  Indian  Life 

On  June  17  tlie  Department  of  State  announced 
that  William  E.  Warne,  Assistant  Secretary  of 
the  Department  of  the  Interior,  has  been  named 
chairman  of  the  United  States  delegation  to  the 
Second  Inter-American  Conference  on  Indian 
Life.  The  Conference  is  scheduled  to  be  held  at 
Cuzco,  Peru,  June  24-July  4,  1949.  Other  mem- 
bers of  the  delegation  are  the  following: 

Delegates 

Albert  A.  Giesecke.  Foreign  Service  Staff  Officer,  Ameri- 
can Embassy,  Lima,  Peru 

John  R.  Nichols,  Commissioner  of  Indian  Affairs,  Depart- 
ment of  the  Interior 

John  H.  Provinse,  Assistant  Commissioner  of  Indian  Af- 
fairs, Department  of  the  Interior 

Clarence  Senior,  Bureau  of  Applied  Social  Research, 
Colunil)ia  University,  New  York 

T.  Dale  Stewart,  Curator  of  Physical  .\nthropology, 
Smithsonian  Institution 

Advisers 

Miss  Doloris  Coulter,  Executive  Secretary,  National  Indian 
Institute 

Albert  P.  Gorman,  Institute  of  Inter-American  Affairs, 
American  Embassy,  La  Paz,  Bolivia 

Mrs.  Ruth  Kirk,  Chairman,  Indian  Committee,  General 
Federation  of  Women's  Clubs,  Gallup,  N.  Mex. 

George  Kubler,  Dire<tor  of  the  Lima  Otfice  of  the  Institute 
of  Social  Anthropology,  Smithsonian  Institution, 
American  Embassy,  Lima,  Peru 

Mrs.  Rachel  Warren  Lothrop,  Cambridge.  Mass. 

Ernest  E.  Maes,  Education  Division,  Institute  of  Inter- 
American  Affairs,  American  Embassy,  Guatemala  City 

D'Arcy  McN'ickle,  Acting  Director,  Tril)al  Relations.  Bu- 
reau of  Indian  Affairs,  Department  of  the  Interior 

Lyle  B.  Pember.  Education  Division.  Institute  of  Inter- 
American  Affairs.  American  Embassy,  Lima,  Peru 

Mrs.  Helen  Peterson,  Director  of  the  Slayer's  Commit- 
tee on  Human  Relations,  Denver 

Benjamin  Reiflo,  Superintendent,  Fort  Berthold  Indian 
Agency,  Elliowoods,  N.  D. 

Marion  Trice,  Health  and  Sanitation  Division,  Institute 
of  Inter-American  Affairs,  American  Embassy,  Lima, 
Peru 

Frederick  Wampler,  Health  and  Sanitation  Division,  In- 
stitute of  Inter-American  Affairs,  American  Embassy, 
Lima,  Peru 

.\lbert  Yava,  Placement  Officer,  Hopi  Indian  Service, 
Keams  Canyon,  Ariz. 

Adv^iscr-Secretary 

Simon  N.  Wilson,  Division  of  Special  Inter-American 
Affairs,  Department  of  State 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


The  Conference  on  Indian  Life  has  been  called 
at  the  invitation  of  the  Government  of  Peru  which 
has  appointed  an  Organizing  Committee  for  its 
preparation.  The  purpose  of  the  Conference, 
which  will  be  attended  by  official  delegations  from 
the  American  Republics  and  Canada,  is  to  ex- 
change information  ,and  opinions  on  the  adminis- 
tration of  the  affairs  of  the  Indians  and  on  the 
protection  of  their  interests.  The  agenda  for  the 
Conference  comprises  about  seventy  items  per- 
taining to  education,  medical  care,  liousing,  and 
economic,  social,  and  juridical  problems  of  indi- 
genous peoples.  Papers  are  being  submitted  by 
various  delegations  on  these  questions  as  the  basis 
for  study. 

The  First  Inter-American  Conference  on  In- 
dian Life  was  held  at  Patzcuaro,  Mexico  in  April 
1940.  This  meeting  drafted  a  plan  which  was  the 
basis  for  the  convention  creating  the  Inter- 
American  Indian  Institute.  The  convention  was 
proclaimed  by  the  President  of  the  United  States 
on  February  12,  1942.  It  has  now  been  ratified 
by  14  countries. 

The  Institute,  with  headquarters  at  Mexico 
City,  acts  as  a  standing  committee  on  the  Inter- 
American  Indian  Conferences  and,  among  other 
things,  cooperates  in  the  fulfillment  of  the  resolu- 
tions adopted  by  the  conferences.  The  National 
Indian  Institute,  established  in  the  Department  of 
the  Interior  in  1945,  maintains  relations  with  the 
Inter-American  Indian  Institute. 


Swiss-Allied  Accord  Conference  Recesses 
Until  September 

Joint  C onimunique  of  V .  S.,  U.  K.,  France,  and 
Switzerland 

[Released  to  the  press  June  9] 

During  the  past  5  weeks,  conversations  have 
taken  place  in  Washington  between  representa- 
tives of  the  United  States,  the  United  Kingdom, 
France,  and  Switzerland.  The  purpose  of  these 
talks  was  to  resolve  by  mutual  agreement  the  diffi- 
culties and  differences  in  interpretation  which  had 
arisen  with  regard  to  the  execution  of  the  Swiss- 
Allied  Accord  of  May  25, 1946. 

The  conversations  were  conducted  in  a  friendly 
spirit,  and  agreement  was  reached  on  a  number 
of  points.  On  the  questions  on  which  agreement 
was  not  reached,  it  was  possible  to  bring  the 
Swiss  and  Allied  positions  considerably  closer 
together.  Efforts  will  be  continued,  during  a  re- 
cess of  the  conference,  to  find  solutions  for  the 
remaining  problems,  in  certain  cases  by  bilateral 
negotations. 

It  was  agreed  to  discontinue  the  Four  Power 
discussions  for  the  time  being.  These  will  be  re- 
sumed early  in  September,  probably  in  Switzer- 
land. 

June  26,  J  949 


Major  Issues  Announced 

[Released  to  the  press  June  15] 

As  announced  by  a  joint  communique  on  June 
10,  the  four-power  conference  on  the  Swiss- Allied 
Accord  recessed  on  June  9,  1949,  with  a  contem- 
plated reconvention  date  eai-ly  in  September,  prob- 
ably in  Switzerland.  The  conference  discussed 
all  the  major  and  most  of  the  minor  issues  which 
have  been  considered  as  presenting  implementa- 
tion of  the  Swiss-Allied  Accord.  The  major  is- 
sues were  considered  to  be : 

(a)  the  question  of  establishing  a  rate  of  ex- 
change between  the  German  mark  and  the  Swiss 
franc  for  the  purposes  of  computing  compensa- 
tion for  the  benefit  of  the  German  owners  whose 
property  is  liquidated  in  Switzerland ; 

(b)  the  question  of  the  liquidation  of  German 
assets  in  Switzerland  owned  from  the  Eastern  zone 
of  Germany ;  and 

(c)  the  question  of  intercustodial  conflicts. 

It  became  apparent  at  the  conference  that  issues 
(a)  and  (b)  above  will  probably  be  capable  of 
settlement  after  continued  discussion  of  the  inter- 
custodial conflicts  problem.  Therefore,  it  was 
agreed  to  recess  the  conference  until  September, 
during  which  time  the  Government  of  Switzerland 
will  engage  in  bilateral  negotiations  with  the 
other  governments  concerned.  Such  discussions 
have  already  begun  between  representatives  of 
the  Swiss  and  United  States  Governments. 

Agreement  was  reached  on  a  majority  of  the 
secondary  issues  (16  in  all) ,  such  agreement  being 
provisional  upon  final  agreement  regarding  the 
major  issues. 

Progress  in  Negotiations  at  Third  Session 
of  Contracting  Parties  to  GATT 

[Released  to  the  press  June  15] 

Tariff  negotiations  now  under  way  at  the  third 
session  of  the  Contracting  Parties  to  the  General 
Agreement  on  Tariffs  and  Trade  meeting  at  An- 
necy,  France,  are  exfiected  to  continue  through  the 
month  of  July,  it  has  been  announced  by  Dana  Wil- 
gress  of  Canada,  chairman  of  the  Working  Party 
of  the  Tariff  Negotiations  Committee  of  the  ses- 
sion. The  Tariff  Negotiations  Committee  has  ex- 
tended through  July  its  commitments  for  hotel 
and  office  space  in  Annecy. 

Mr.  Wilgress  stated  that  15  sets  of  bilateral 
tariff  negotiations  have  been  completed,  74  are  in 
progress,  87  are  under  consideration,  and  a  the- 
oretically possible  99  others  are  not  expected  to 
take  place  because  there  is  no  trade  basis  for  them. 
The  negotiations  involving  the  largest  volumes  of 
trade  will  naturally  require  the  most  time. 

By  July  7  to  10,  Mr.  Wilgi'ess  stated,  the  con- 
tracting parties  should  finish  their  agenda  except 
for  the  remaining  tariff  negotiations  and  such 
items  as  can  not  be  dealt  with  until  the  end  of  the 
meeting,  such  as  arrangements  for  a  third  series 
of  negotiations. 


THE  RECORD  OF  THE  WEEK 


Force  and  Freedom 


BY  SELDEN  CHAPIN' 
Former  Minister  to  Hungary 


When  I  first  arrived  in  Hungary  in  July,  1947, 1 
made  it  my  publicly  declared  business  to  call  on 
all  leaders  of  Hun^rian  thought  and  opinion,  be- 
ginning with  the  President  and  the  Prime  Min- 
ister. Among  those  leaders  upon  whom  I  called 
was  Jozsef  Cardinal  Mindszenty.  He  returned 
my  call.  Following  custom,  I  again  made  calls 
on  the  principal  men  of  Hungary  after  New  Year's 
Day  in  1948.  Cardinal  Mindszenty  again  re- 
turned my  call.  The  fifth  and  last  time  I  met  the 
Cardinal  was  at  his  request  in  November  of  that 
year. 

Now  in  the  standard  assortment  of  scurrilous 
charges  raised  against  the  Cardinal  at  his  trial, 
the  Communists  had  to  find  something  really  im- 
pressive with  which  to  nail  him.  They  knew  that 
the  Cardinal  had  talked  on  several  occasions  with 
the  American  Minister.  Now,  it  is  said  that  when 
two  Communists  get  together  you  have  a  con- 
spiracy. What  would  be  more  reasonable,  then, 
to  a  Communist  than  to  assiune  that  the  Cardinal 
and  the  Minister  were  fomenting  a  plot?  So  they 
worked  out  this  plan  in  which  we  were  trying  to 
restore  the  monarcliy  in  Hungary. 

I  hope  it  will  not  be  a  disappointment  when  I  say 
that  there  was  no  conspiracy.  I  talked  with  the 
Cardinal  on  five  occasions,  a  total  of  five  hours, 
and  that  was  through  an  interpreter,  so  you  can 
cut  it  in  half.  We  were  two  people  talking  to- 
gether, but  we  weren't  Communist — we  were  a 
Catholic  prelate  and  a  Protestant  layman,  in  other 
words,  two  Christians. 

I  am  very  pleased  to  have  this  opportunity  to 
speak  lief  ore  the  Catholic  war  veterans.  From 
what  I  know  of  your  organization,  I  believe  I  can 
work  on  the  assumption  that  we  are  all  pretty 
much  in  agreement  as  to  the  objectives  the  United 
States  is  seeking  and  should  seek  in  world  affairs. 

In  the  first  place,  we  all  want  peace  and  se- 
curity in  the  world.  We  all  want  to  promote  dem- 
ocratic principles  and  institutions  throughout  the 
world,  because  we  believe  these  are  conducive  to 
peace.  We  want  to  create  throughout  the  world 
an  atmosphere  of  economic  well-being  for  all,  as 
a  basic  condition  for  peace  and  democracy.  We 
know  that  the  greatest  obstacle  to  peace  and  se- 

•  An  ixldress  delivered  before  the  Catholic  War  Vet- 
erans in  Houston,  Tox.,  on  June  17,  1949,  and  relea.sed 
to  the  press  on  the  same  date. 


curity  lies  in  the  relentless  drive  of  Communist 
totalitarianism  for  world  domination,  and  we  are 
determined  to  stop  that  drive. 

I  suggest  again  that  most  of  us  are  in  basic 
agreement  with  the  policies  and  actions  of  the 
Government  designed  to  achieve  the  general 
foreign  political  and  economic  objectives  and  to 
stem  the  advance  of  Communist  aggression. 
These  policies  represent  a  realistic  and  hard- 
headed  approach  to  world  conditions  as  they  exist 
today.  They  reflect  the  will  and  temper  "of  the 
vast  majority  of  Americans. 

The  success  of  our  policies  is  not,  of  course, 
assured.  There  are  certain  dangers,  but  the 
greatest  lies  primarily  with  ourselves.  The  task 
we  have  cut  out  for  ourselves  is  a  long,  difficult, 
and  expensive  one.  There  is,  and  will  continue  to 
be,  a  corresponding  temptation  to  slacken  in  our 
various  programs  whenever  there  is  a  real  or  seem- 
ing improvement  in  world  tensions  or,  partic- 
ularly, if  we  run  into  economic  problems  at  home. 
This  temptation  is  the  main  thing  we  shall  have  to 
guard  against  for  many  years  to  come.  That  is 
one  place  where  alert  people  such  as  you  can  be  a 
valuable  source  of  strength  and  vigilance. 

We  are  not  likely  to  yield  to  this  temptation  so 
long  as  we  keep  the  basic  situation  clearly  in  mind. 
We  must  constantly  remind  ourselves  that  we  are 
dealing  with  a  ruthless  and  patient  force  that  will 
take  advantage  of  our  slightest  lapse  of  purpose. 
If  we  remember  this,  we  shall  not  be  caught 
napping. 

As  a  sort  of  refresher  course  in  international 
Communism  and  its  techniques,  I  would  like  to 
talk  for  a  moment  about  the  Communist  domina- 
tion of  Hungar}'.  I  had  some  personal  ex])erience 
with  that  matter  and  besides,  the  case  of  Hungary 
gives  a  test-tube  example  of  how  domination  and 
control  over  a  freedom-loving  people  has  been 
progressively  achieved.  It  happened  to  all  of 
tlic  satellite  countries,  one  by  one,  and  by  now  it 
probably  would  have  spread  much  farther  had 
we  not  taken  effective  countermeasures. 

We  might  begin  the  story  at  Yalta  in  February 
194."),  when  Stalin,  Roosevelt,  and  Churchill 
pledged  that  the  liberated  peoples  of  Europe 
should  be  allowed  to  create  their  own  democratic 
institutions.  While  the  ink  was  drying  at  Yalta, 
the  Communist  Party  of  Hungary  was  hard  at 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


work  vmdermining  the  foundations  of  freedom 
and  democracy  in  their  country.  In  its  work  the 
party  had  the  whole-hearted  intervention  and  sup- 
port of  the  red  army — numbering  several  hundred 
thousand  at  the  time — and  with  Soviet  Marshal 
Voroshilov  as  Chairman  of  the  Allied  Control 
Commission,  they  were  assured  that  any  efforts  by 
the  British  or  by  ourselves  to  back  genuine  demo- 
cratic elements  in  Hungary  would  be  nullified. 

The  first  postwar  elections  in  Hungary,  which 
were  held  in  November  1945,  made  it  clear  that 
the  people  had  little  use  for  the  Communists.  The 
party  polled  only  17  percent  of  the  vote.  A  clear 
majority — 57  percent  of  all  votes  cast,  went  to 
the  Smallholders  Party,  a  progressive  and  demo- 
cratic farmers  party. 

In  the  face  of  this  rebuff,  the  Communists  re- 
solved to  force  their  will  upon  the  people  of  Hun- 
gary. In  order  to  do  this,  they  had  to  break  the 
power  of  the  political  opposition  and  weaken  the 
hold  of  the  churches  upon  the  people.  The  way 
they  went  about  it  follows  the  typical  Communist 
pattern  of  step-by-step  internal  conquest  by  force 
and  subversion.  I  will  summarize  it  here,  be- 
cause I  think  that  the  ease  with  which  a  small  but 
ruthless  totalitarian  minority  can  impose  its  will 
on  the  majority  is  one  of  the  things  we  all  should 
keep  in  mind  as  we  face  up  to  the  problems  result- 
ing from  the  clash  of  force  and  freedom. 

First  the  Communists  went  after  control  of  the 
police  and  communications.  That  is  the  stand- 
ard opening  move.  Having  extracted  a  pre-elec- 
tion agreement  from  all  major  parties  to  form  a 
coalition  government,  regardless  of  how  the  elec- 
tion turned  out,  they  demanded  the  most  impor- 
tant cabinet  posts  for  themselves  and  their  pup- 
pets, and  in  this  demand  they  were  backed  up  by 
curt  orders  from  the  Soviet  Chairman  of  the  Al- 
lied Control  Commission.  They  then  began  to 
purge  key  ofBcials  in  the  Government  and  the 
army. 

Second,  they  increased  their  strength  in  the 
Government  by  forming  an  extreme  leftist  bloc 
within  the  coalition,  to  work  in  opposition  to  the 
Smallholders. 

Third,  they  undertook  an  all-out  effort  to  pro- 
mote civil,  economic,  and  political  disorder  and  so 
shake  the  confidence  of  the  people  in  the  ability 
of  the  Smallholders  Party  to  govern. 

Fourth,  they  resorted  to  open  terror  against 
their  opponents,  including  star-chamber  trials  on 
trumped-up  charges,  kidnapping,  and  all  the 
usual  paraphernalia  of  totalitarian  discipline  and 
justice. 

In  May-June  1947  the  Communist  leaders, 
aided  by  the  intervention  of  the  Soviet  occupa- 
tion forces,  forced  the  resignation  of  the  Small- 
holder Prime  Minister  and  seized  effective  con- 
trol of  the  Government.  This  coup  was  followed 
by  a  rigged  election  designed  to  cast  a  cloak  of 
respectability  over  the  seizure  of  power.  It  is 
interesting  that  this  election,  held  in  August  1947, 

June  26,  7949 


with  the  Communists  very  much  in  command,  re- 
turned them  only  22  percent  of  the  vote. 

With  the  political  opposition  well  in  hand,  they 
went  after  the  religious  groups.  Now  I  should 
like  to  make  it  very  clear  that  attack  on  religion 
is  not  so  much  a  matter  of  conflict  between  church 
and  state  as  between  the  secular  religion  of  Marx- 
ist materialism  and  the  traditional  religion  of  the 
churches  based  on  moral  and  spiritual  values.  It 
is  an  attack  on  Protestant,  Catholic,  Jew,  and 
Moslem  alike,  and  it  isn't  just  an  attack  on  the 
churches,  but  on  all  free  institutions  and  human 
freedoms.  It  is  materialism  versus  morality.  It 
is  violence  and  treachery  versus  order  and  hu- 
manity. Communist  morality  has  been  expressed 
in  these  words  of  Lenin,  "everytliing  is  moral 
which  is  necessary  for  the  annihilation  of  the  old 
exploiting  social  order,  and  for  uniting  the 
proletariat." 

When  the  Communists  went  after  the  churches 
in  Hungary  here  is  what  confronted  them.  Cath- 
olics numbered  two  thirds  and  Protestants  most 
of  the  remainder  of  the  population.  Both 
churches  traditionally  played  a  very  active  part 
in  public  life.  In  1940,  for  example,  about  17 
percent  of  the  Hungarian  parliament  consisted 
of  members  of  the  Catholic  clergy.  All  of  the 
churches  were  wealthy  in  land,  the  income  of 
which  before  the  war  substantially  supported 
about  three  fifths  of  all  educational  institutions — 
Catholic,  Lutheran,  Calvinist,  Jewish,  and  so  on. 

In  these  denomination  schools,  religious  in- 
struction was  obligatory,  but  Protestant  and  Jew- 
ish children  in  Catholic  schools  freely  received 
such  instruction  from  their  own  teachers  and  vice 
versa.  These  schools  unavoidably  came  into  po- 
litical as  well  as  ideological  conflict  with  the  Com- 
munists who  have  long  since  recognizecl  that  to 
consolidate  control  over  the  people  one  must  bring 
up  the  youth  in  complete  Leninist-Marxist  philos- 
ophy. Today  to  be  admitted  to  a  high  school, 
technical  school  or  university,  one  has  to  pass  a 
satisfactory  examination  in  Communist  philos- 
9Phyj  both  theoretical  in  knowledge  and  practical 
in  action. 

"Wliile  the  land  reform  had  severely  hurt  the 
churches  economically,  the  real  attack  opened  in 
March  1947  with  the  introduction  of  measures 
designed  to  nationalize  and  communize  the 
schools.  Here  the  Communists  ran  into  sharp 
opposition  from  leaders  of  the  churches.  The 
Catholic  Primate,  Cardinal  Mindszenty,  went  so 
far  as  to  excommunicate  all  Catholics  assisting 
the  state  in  its  effort  to  nationalize  the  schools. 
The  Communists  then  proceeded  to  purge  all  of 
the  resistant  church  leaders  in  a  very  methodical 
manner. 

Taking  things  progressively,  they  went  first 
after  the  Protestant  minority.  The  Calvinists, 
largest  of  the  Protestant  Churches,  were  brought 
into  line  by  the  disgrace  of  the  President  of  the 
Republic,  Tildy,  himself  a  pastor,  and  by  securing 


the  resignation  of  Bishop  Ravasz — this  by  threat- 
eniiifi  the  livelihood  of  ;3,OuO  ministerial  families 
if  he  did  not  resign — and  replacing  him  with  a 
collaborationist  pastor.  They  then  asked  for  the 
resignation  of  Lutheran  Bishop  Ordass.  He  re- 
plied that  he  would  "rather  burn  in  hell"  than 
desert  his  flock,  and  proved  verj'  hardheaded.  so 
they  tried  and  convicted  him  on  the  usual  charges 
of  black  marketing  and  eml)ezzling. 

By  mid-ir)48  Cardinal  Mindszenty  was  left  as 
the  sole  fighting  sjmibol  of  resistance  to  Com- 
munism. 

Mindszenty  then  had  to  be  eliminated.  As  a 
symbol,  he  had,  if  possible,  to  be  totally  discredited 
in  the  minds  of  the  people.  Now,  as  you  know, 
the  Communists  always  tried  to  avoid  religious 
issues  in  these  purges  of  religious  leaders.  Both 
in  the  press  and  in  the  courts,  they  tried  to  brand 
the  leaders  of  the  opposition  as  black  marketeers, 
petty  crooks,  or  traitors. 

Now  in  my  few  talks  with  Cardinal  INIindszenty 
I  did  learn  a  number  of  things  about  him.  He  was 
a  bold  and  uncompromising  man  of  Spartan  tem- 
perament. On  one  occasion  he  is  said  to  have 
told  emissaries  of  Soviet  Marshal  Voroshilov,  who 
had  asked  him  to  pay  a  call  and  then  had  kept 
him  waiting  for  an  hour,  that  if  the  Marshal 
wished  to  see  him,  the  distance  from  the  Mar- 
shal's headquarters  to  the  Primate's  palace  was 
the  same  as  the  distance  from  the  Primate's  jialace 
to  the  Marshal's  headquarters.  He  was,  I  am 
convinced,  quite  prepared  to  become  a  martyr. 
But  it  is  one  thing  to  be  a  martyr  yourself  and 
another  to  bring  thousands  into  martyrdom  with 
you.  He  was  deeply  concerned,  in  our  last  talk, 
last  November,  with  the  fate  of  the  lower  clergy. 
Tliat  concern  must  be  kept  in  mind  in  any  evalua- 
tion of  the  Cardinal  and  his  later  actions. 

On  the  26th  of  December,  1948,  the  Cardinal 
was  arrested,  and  charged  with  being  a  criminal, 
a  traitor,  and  a  conspirator  against  the  "demo- 
cratic" form  of  life.  Anticipating  his  arrest,  the 
Cardinal  earlier  that  day  had  sent  to  all  members 
of  the  Bench  of  Bishops  the  following  message: 

"I  have  participated  in  no  conspiracy  what- 
ever; I  will  not  resign  my  Episcopal  See;  I  will 
make  no  confession.  If,  after  this,  you  should 
hear  that  I  have  confessed  or  resigned  and  that 
this  i.'i  authenticated  with  my  own  signatui'e,  con- 
sider chat  to  be  only  the  consequence  of  human 
frailty  and,  in  advance,  I  declare  it  null  and  void." 

Some  40  days  later,  during  the  trial,  the  Cardinal 
is  said  to  have  retracted  this  statement,  on  the 
grounds  that  his  viewpoint  had  altered  mean- 
while. However,  the  prosecution  did  not  question 
the  existence  of  that  statement,  made  while  the 
Cardinal  was  still  not  under  duress.  After  only 
3  days  on  the  stand,  he  was  found  guilty  on  all 
charges  and  sentenced  to  life  imprisonment.  The 
prosecutor  had  demanded  the  death  penalty.  Com- 
pare this  speed  with  the  patience  being  displayed 


at  a  certain  trial  now  taking  place  in  New  York 

City. 

There  has  been  a  great  deal  of  conjecture  as  to 
the  precise  methods  used  to  extract  the  confession 
from  the  Cardinal.  AVe  do  not  know  exactly 
what  they  did.  There  are,  of  course,  a  great  many 
ways  of  getting  at  a  man,  through  his  family  and 
friends  as  well  as  through  the  various  forms  of 
pliysical  and  mental  torture,  and  tlie  Communists 
have  a  legendary  skill  at  picking  the  right  ap- 
jiroach.  What  is  important  is  that  no  one,  to  mj 
knowledge,  who  was  at  all  familiar  with  the  Cardi- 
nal and  his  life,  has  the  slightest  doubt  that  ex- 
tremely severe  pressure  was  brought  to  bear  on 
him.  Although  I  have  had  recent  reports  that 
the  Cardinal's  mother  has  visited  him,  so  far  as 
I  know,  no  unbiased  person  has  been  permitted  to 
see  him  since  his  sentence. 

Now  I  should  like  to  say  just  a  word  about  the 
life  of  the  average  Hungarian  under  Communist 
rule.  I  had  personal  experience  with  various 
forms  of  restraint  and  got  a  pretty  good  picture 
of  what  things  are  like. 

As  I  have  said,  the  Communists  are  highly 
skilled  at  the  techniques  of  keeping  themselves 
in  power,  and  they  are  willing  in  many  cases — 
and  perhaps  prefer — to  use  measures  other  than 
naked  force  to  gain  acquiescence  from  the  people. 
Terror  enters  in,  of  couree.  Everybody  knows  of 
someone  who  has  mysteriously  disappeared  from 
the  scene,  but  the  terror  lies  in  the  background, 
so  to  speak,  and  you  don't  see  it  happening  all 
around  you.  The  real  restraining  force  is  eco- 
nomic pressure. 

In  the  first  place,  the  Hungarians  are  kept  under 
close  surveillance.  There  are  the  usual  block- 
leaders  ;  all  apartment  houses  and  even  most  pri- 
vate houses  are  required  by  law  to  have  a  house- 
man, or  sort  of  super-janitor,  who  reports  on  the 
comings  and  goings  of  his  people.  If  a  Hunga- 
rian's behavior  is  reported  to  be  out  of  line, 
economic  pressure  is  applied.  He  fiiuls  himself 
out  of  a  job,  and  after  a  time  he  finds  that  no 
one  else  will  hire  him.  Incidentally,  despite  all 
tlie  ballyhoo  about  Communist  labor  unions,  labor 
in  Hungary  has  lost  the  right  to  strike  and  the 
few  instances  of  workers  protesting  against  the 
S]ieed-up  piece  rate  were  never  even  mentioned  in 
the  Communist  press,  even  though  blood  was  shed. 
A  citizen  in  political  disfavor  may  also  lose  the 
privilege  of  buying  at  state  stores  and  restaurants, 
where  prices  are  low.  He  may  not  renew  his  driv- 
ing license.  He  has  to  go  into  the  black  market, 
and  eventually  a  time  comes  when  there  is  nothing 
left  to  sell  and  no  source  of  income.  Then  he 
and  his  family  starve.  He  may  not  buy  penicillin 
or  other  essential  drugs  in  case  he  or  his  family 
fall  ill.  His  children  may  even  be  denied  entry 
to  the  now  nationalized  schools.  All  this  is  a  very 
elTective  way  of  assuring  compliance  with  the  au- 
thorities.    I  have  seen  it,  and  it  works. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


Now  I  have  discussed  the  Hungarian  picture 
in  some  detail  because  to  me  it  portrays  clearly 
the  nature  of  the  force  we  are  up  against.  We 
helieve  in  fair  play.  We  tend  to  credit  the  next 
man  with  the  basic  ideals  and  beliefs  that  we  our- 
selves hold  sacred,  even  though  they  may  out- 
wardly take  different  forms.  But  we  must  not 
forget  that  the  sworn  Communist  is  the  sworn 
enemy  of  all  that  we  hold  to  be  good  and  decent. 
Believe  me,  if  I  thought  that  anything  the  Com- 
munists did  in  Hungary  was  really  done  with  the 
^ood  of  the  people  in  mind,  I  should  be  the  first 
to  give  them  credit.  They  are  out  for  power  and 
mastery,  and  that  is  that. 

What  then,  can  we  do?  The  President  in  his 
inaugural  address,  summarized  four  lines  of  policy 
designed  to  achieve  the  kind  of  world  we  want  to 
live  in. 

First,  is  support  of  the  United  Nations  system. 
The  United  Nations  represents  the  democratic, 
friendly,  cooperative  approach  to  world  peace.  It 
sets  the  pattern  for  the  kind  of  world  in  which  na- 
tions behave  toward  each  other  the  way  that  we  like 
to  think  Christian  individuals  do.  In  practical 
terms,  the  United  Nations  provides  a  vast  mecha- 
nism for  negotiation,  without  which  international 
action  today  would  be  greatly  hampered.  It  also 
provides  a  forum  in  which  the  moral  force  of  world 
opinion  acts  as  a  sharp  restraint  against  overt  acts 
of  dictatorial  governments. 

Second,  we  must  continue  our  programs  for 
improving  the  economic  conditions  of  peoples 
throughout  the  world.  As  long  as  vast  masses  of 
people  are  ill-fed,  ill-clothed  and  ill-housed,  the 
siren-song  of  Communism  will  have  great  effect. 

We  must  therefore  continue  vigorously  the  Eu- 
ropean Recovery  Progi-am,  which  has  already 
proved  its  worth  in  resurrecting  hope  and  con- 
fidence among  the  peoples  of  Western  Europe. 
Although  recent  news  from  Europe  is  encourag- 
ing, we  must  not  underestimate  the  extensive  job 
that  still  has  to  be  done. 

Third,  we  must  help  friendly  nations  protect 
themselves  against  domination  by  direct  or  in- 
direct aggression.  That  means  joining  with  like- 
minded  nations  in  collective  security  arrange- 
ments like  the  Rio  treaty  and  the  North  Atlantic 
pact,  which  have  been  designed  in  complete  ac- 
cord with  the  principles  and  purposes  of  the 
United  Nations.  It  means  providing  military 
equipment  and  advice,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Greek- 
Turkish  Aid  Program  and  the  proposed  Military 
Assistance  Program. 

Finally,  we  must  support  the  Point-4  Pro- 
gram to  bring  to  other  areas  the  benefits  of  the 
technological  knowledge  of  the  modern  world  and 
encourage  the  investment  of  capital  in  those  areas. 
The  possibilities  of  this  program  are  unlimited  in 
terms  of  the  economic  benefits  it  can  eventually 
bring  to  all  nations.  At  the  least,  it  can  bring 
to  the  underdeveloped  areas  increasing  material 
benefits  favorable  to  the  growth  of  democracy. 


We  must  pursue  this  same  goal  through  partici- 
pation in  the  International  Trade  Organization 
in  order  to  promote  a  broad  exchange  of  the  bene- 
fits of  world  industry  and  agriculture  for  the 
betterment  of  all.  That  means  also  that  we  must 
continue  the  Reciprocal  Trade  Agreements  Pro- 
gram, so  that  we  can  function  in  the  Ito. 

Now,  I  should  like  to  add  a  point  on  the  Mili- 
tary Assistance  Program.  This  program  is  a  par- 
ticularly vital  counterpart  of  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty.  It  provides  concrete  evidence  of  our  se- 
rious intent  and  provides  the  best  way  to  fulfill 
our  commitment  to  contribute  to  the  common  de- 
fense through  self-help  and  mutual  aid.  This 
aid,  supplementing  the  productive  effort  of  the 
treaty  countries  and  applied  within  the  frame- 
work of  a  cohesive  joint  military  defense  plan  un- 
der the  pact,  can  buy  more  security  for  all  the 
countries  concerned,  than  a  like  amount  spent 
any  other  way. 

These  policies  all  depend  on  each  other.  Under- 
cut one  and  you  jeopardize  the  others.  They  are 
the  vital  parts  of  the  mechanism  of  our  foreign 
policy.  Take  out  a  vital  part,  and  you  know  what 
happens  to  the  mechanism. 

Now,  looking  back  over  what  I  have  said  this 
morning,  I  imagine  one  question  may  be  bothering 
all  of  you,  and  that  is  what  the  future  holds  for 
our  oppressed  friends  in  the  satellite  countries. 
That  calls  for  the  kind  of  conjecture  that  people 
in  the  State  Department  are  notoriously  reluctant 
to  attempt. 

Actually,  in  my  personal  opinion,  the  situation 
does  not  appear  promising.  It's  hard  to  see  at 
the  present  time  what  might  happen  to  alter  the 
Communist  control.  Of  course,  there  is  always  the 
unpredictable.  I  don't  think  many  of  us  would 
have  foreseen  Tito's  successful  defiance  of  Moscow. 

But  you  can  look  at  the  situation  that  would 
logically  exist  if  the  policies  we  are  now  following 
are  successful.  If  you  have  a  confident  Western 
Europe,  economically  and  defensively  strong,  and 
you  get  a  peace  settlement  in  Germany  and 
Austria — which  means  that  the  red  army  goes 
back  home — then  you  obviously  have  altered  the 
situation  affecting  Eastern  Europe.  You  have  for 
one  thing,  a  strong  economic  magnetism  working 
on  the  satellites. 

Incidentally,  the  Voice  of  America  also  exer- 
cises a  strong  pull  on  freedom-loving  peoples  be- 
hind the  curtain.  It  is  particularly  effective  in 
Hungary. 

The  main  hope  for  these  countries,  in  other 
words,  lies  in  the  success  of  our  present  policies. 
That  is  one  reason  why  I  personally  hope  that 
each  of  us  will  become  as  familiar  as  possible 
with  the  nature  of  the  problems  that  we  face  and 
with  what  we  are  trying  to  do  about  those  prob- 
lems ;  and  that  each  of  us  will  give  his  best  effort 
to  support  the  policies  which  he  thinks  are  wise, 
in  the  difficult  and  challenging  years  ahead. 

To  conclude,  the  so-called  "peace  offensive"  is  a 


June  26,   7949 


deadly  weapon  of  propaganda,  employed  to 
weaken  the  resolve  of  the  free  nations.  We  must 
not  be  taken  in  by  any  such  measures.  We  can 
relax  our  vigilance  only  when  we  have  undeniable 
proof  that  the  Communists  have  undergone  a  basic 
change  of  heart  and  of  policy,  and  that  they  are 
making  an  honest  effort  by  continuous  concrete 
actions  to  live  in  peace  and  friendship  with  the 
rest  of  us. 

I  suggest  that  until  then  we  have  a  set  of  policies 
and  programs  which  are  proving  their  worth  at 
the  present  time.  When  you  are  a  little  ahead  of 
the  race,  that  is  the  time  to  make  the  greatest 
effort.  Now  that  we  are  gaining  a  certain  advan- 
tage, we  must  push  with  renewed  vigor  the  actions 
which  are  gaining  that  advantage. 

Coming  back  to  the  United  States  from  a  coun- 
try behind  the  Iron  Curtain,  I  can  assure  you  that 
the  most  welcome  sight  I  have  ever  seen  was  the 
torch  ujjlifted  in  the  hand  of  Bartholdi's  Statue 
of  Liberty — with  all  the  promise  and  assurance 
that  it  extends. 

But — and  it  is  a  very  big  "but" — that  promise 
and  assurance  can  only  be  maintained  if  we  re- 
member and  act  according  to  the  warning  of 
Daniel  Webster  to  the  Senate  some  hundred  years 
ago,  which  is  just  as  valid  today:  "God  grants 
liberty  only  to  those  who  love  it,  and  are  always 
ready  to  guard  and  defend  it." 

U.S.S.R.  Refuses  To  Fulfill  Commitments  on 
German  Prisoners  of  War 

[Released  to  the  press  June  17] 

The  Soviet  Government  on  June  4, 1949,  replied 
to  the  United  States  note  of  March  15,  regarding 
the  repatriation  of  German  prisoners  of  war  from 
the  Soviet  Union.^ 

It  will  be  recalled  that  the  Governments  of  the 
United  States,  United  Kingdom,  France,  and  the 
Soviet  Union  agreed  at  the  Council  of  Foreign 
Ministers  Meeting  in  Moscow  in  April  1947  to 
complete  the  repatriation  of  German  prisoners  of 
war  by  December  31,  1948.  The  United  States, 
Great  Britain,  and  France  complied  with  this 
agreement  and  returned  all  German  prisoners  of 
war  in  their  custody  prior  to  the  agreed  date.  Tlie 
Soviet  Government  not  only  has  failed  to  fulfill 
its  commitments  but  in  the  note  of  June  4  attempts 
by  misrepresentation  to  place  the  blame  for  Soviet 
failure  to  complete  repatriation  upon  the  Govern- 
ments of  the  United  States,  Great  Britain,  and 
France.  Four  years  after  the  termination  of  hos- 
tilities with  Germany,  there  still  remain  in  Soviet 
custody  several  hundred  thousand  German  pris- 
oners of  war.  The  Soviet  Government  makes  no 
mention  in  this  note  of  any  plans  to  return  to 

'BtnxEmN  of  Jan.  IG,  1949,  p.  77  and  Mar.  27,  1949, 
p.  389. 

'  Bulletin  of  June  12,  1949,  p.  755. 


their  homes  this  large  number  of  unrepatriated 
German  prisoners  of  war. 

The  Soviet  note  of  June  4  reads  as  follows: 

"Soviet  Government  cannot  agree  with  argu- 
ments brought  forward  in  Embassy's  note  in  justi- 
fication of  disruption  by  Governments  of  U.S.A., 
Great  Britain,  and  France  of  preparation  of  plan 
for  repatriation  German  war  prisoners.  Consid- 
erations brought  forward  in  this  note  do  not  dis- 
prove indisputable  fact  that  plan  in  connection 
with  which  repatriation  of  German  war  prisoners 
should  have  been  carried  out  was  not  worked  out 
by  control  council  through  fault  of  representatives 
U.S.A.,  Great  Britain  and  France. 

"Soviet  Government  again  affirms  that  in  virtue 
of  facts  brought  forward  in  memorandum  Soviet 
Government  January  24,  1949,  it  does  not  see  any 
necessity  to  enter  into  further  examination  ques- 
tions raised  in  note  Embassy  U.S.A.  March  15, 
1949."  ' 


The  U.S.S.R.  Refuses  To  Cooperate  in  Settling 
Disputes  Under  Bulgarian,  Hungarian,  and 
Rumanian  Peace  Treaties 

Statement  hy  Acting  Secretary  Webh 

[Released  to  the  press  June  15] 

On  Saturday,  June  11,  a  reply  to  our  note  of  May 
31  ^  was  delivered  to  the  Department  by  messenger 
from  the  Soviet  Embassy  here.  This  reply  re- 
fused the  cooperation  of  the  Soviet  Ambassadors 
with  the  American  and  British  Ministers  in  Bul- 
garia, Hungary,  and  Rumania  in  an  effort  to  settle 
the  disputes  which  have  arisen  under  the  peace 
treaties. 

The  Soviet  note  supports  the  contention  that  the 
three  ex-enemy  countries  have  fulfilled  all  their 
obligations  under  the  treaties  and  that  our  charges 
of  violations  of  the  human  rights  clauses  and  in- 
vocation of  the  treaty  procedures  are  an  attempt 
to  interfere  in  the  internal  affairs  of  those 
countries. 

We  cannot  accept  either  of  these  arguments  as 
valid.  The  obvious  way  in  which  the  validity  of 
our  charges  can  be  determined  is  through  the  pro- 
cedure for  the  settlement  of  disputes  laid  down  in 
the  treaties  themselves.  By  refusing  to  cooperate 
in  these  procedures,  the  Soviet  Government  and  its 
Balkan  satellites  have  created  a  presumption  of 
guilt  against  themselves.  The  argument  that  our 
attempts  to  invoke  the  peace  treaties  in  connection 
with  violations  of  human  rights  represents  inter- 
ference in  the  internal  affairs  of  these  nations  is  a 
false  one  since  these  are  obligations  clearly  stipu- 
lated in  the  peace  treaties  themselves. 

The  next  step  in  the  treaty  procedures  for  the 
settlement  of  these  disputes  is  the  creation  of  com- 
missions composed  of  one  member  named  by  each 
party  to  a  dispute  and  a  third  member  named  by 


Department  of  State  Bulletin 


agreement  between  the  parties.  If  they  cannot 
agree,  either  party  may  request  the  Secretary- 
General  of  the  United  Nations  to  make  the  ap- 
pointment. Since  the  treaties  provide  a  two- 
month  period  during  which  the  disputes  remain, 
theoretically  at  least,  before  the  three  Heads  of 
Mission  prior  to  being  submitted  to  the  three- 
member  commissions,  the  question  of  naming 
these  commissions  will  not  arise  until  the  end  of 
next  month. 


Belgium  Ratifies  North  Atlantic  Treaty 

[Keleased  to  the  press  June  16] 

The  following  is  the  text  of  remarks  made  on 
June  16  by  the  Belgian  Ambassador,  Baron  Sil- 
vercruys,  upon  the  occasion  of  the  deposit  of  the 
Belgian  instrument  of  ratification  of  the  North 
Atlantic  Treaty  and  the  reply  of  Acting  Secretary 
of  State  Webb. 

Reviarhs  hy  Baron  Silvercniys 

I  have  been  instructed  to  place  in  your  hands, 
for  deposit  with  the  United  States  of  America,  the 
instrument  of  ratification  by  the  Kingdom  of 
Belgium  of  the  North  Atlantic  Treaty. 

History  has  shown  that  the  danger  of  war  in- 
creases in  relation  to  the  weakness  and  disunity 
of  the  threatened  nations.  The  forces  of  freedom 
who  reject  all  idea  of  aggressive  warfare  have  now 
decided,  through  unity  and  strength,  within  the 
framework  of  the  Charter,  to  place  in  the  service 
of  mankind  the  most  powerful  means  of  defense 
the  world  has  ever  known. 

The  constitutional  approval  of  this  Treaty 
beai"s  witness  to  the  determination  of  the  people 
of  Belgium  to  join  with  these  forces  in  the  preser- 
vation of  peace. 

Reply  by  Acting  Secretary  of  State  Wehh 

Mr.  Ambassador,  this  instrument  of  ratification 
will  be  deposited  in  the  Archives  of  the  United 
States  with  the  original  of  the  North  Atlantic 
Treaty,  and  this  Government  will  notify  the  other 
Signatories  that  it  has  been  deposited. 

This  act  by  the  Government  of  Belgium  is 
further  evidence  of  the  desire  of  the  Belgian  peo- 
ple to  work  for  peace  and  freedom.  It  is  in  keep- 
ing with  the  character  of  Belgium  and  with  its 
traditional  conduct  that  expression  should  be 
given  to  the  will  to  resist  any  encroachment  upon 
the  free  and  democratic  nations  of  the  North 
Atlantic  community.  I  should  like  to  associate 
myself  with  you  in  saying  that  this  Treaty  is  a 
great  service  to  mankind. 


British  Attitude  Toward  Film  Quotas 

Letter    from    Acting    Secretary    Webb    to^   the 

President  of  the  Motion  Picture  Association 

May  26,  1949 
Dear  Mk.  Johnston  : 

With  your  letter  of  March  31, 1949  you  attached 
a  memorandum  relating  to  the  British  film  quota 
and  requesting  that  the  State  Department  attempt 
to  negotiate  a  reduction  in  this  quota.  As  you 
know  the  Department  took  this  matter  up  with 
British  officials  in  early  April.  The  Department 
has  now  received  a  response  from  the  British  Gov- 
ernment to  the  protest  made  at  that  time.  This 
response  was  substantially  as  follows. 

The  British  Government  states  that  the  quota, 
which  was  fixed  by  Parliament,  cannot  be  modi- 
fied at  the  present  time.  It  hopes,  however,  that 
as  a  result  of  the  recent  meetings  in  Washington 
between  certain  members  of  the  American  and 
British  film  industries  and  those  scheduled  to 
take  place  early  in  June  an  improvement  in  the 
relations  between  the  two  groups  may  be  effected. 

The  British  Government  states  that  it  feels 
that  the  quota  in  no  way  contravenes  the  General 
Trade  Agreement  or  any  other  legal  commitment, 
that  the  British  Government  had  the  same  right 
to  raise  this  quota  as  the  United  States  or  any 
other  government  would  have  to  raise  an  import 
duty  with  respect  to  which  it  had  made  no  com- 
mitments. It  believes  that  the  quota  is  consistent 
with  and  a  necessary  part  of  the  British  effort  to 
build  up  pi-oduction  and  trade  looking  toward  an 
improvement  in  the  British  balance  of  trade  situa- 
tion. The  British  Government  contends  also  that 
the  quota  is  reasonable  from  the  standpoint  of 
British  film  production  possibilities  although  the 
quota  was  not  entirely  filled  with  British  features 
during  the  first  year.  This  fact  presumably  ac- 
counted for  the  reduction  in  the  quota  from  45 
percent  to  40  percent  for  the  second  year.  Fi- 
nally the  British  Government  expresses  surprise 
that  the  setting  up  of  the  film  quota  should  have 
been  necessarily  unexpected  by  the  American  film 
industry  or  interpreted  as  an  act  of  bad  faith  as 
a  consequence  of  any  understanding  between  the 
industry  and  the  British  Government  in  connec- 
tion with  the  Film  Agreement  of  1948. 

I  am  sorry  to  have  to  transmit  an  unfavorable 
reply  to  you  particularly  in  view  of  the  efforts 
which  have  been  made  toward  getting  a  modifica- 
tion of  the  quota.  The  Department  is  studying 
the  response  which  the  British  Government  has 
made  in  this  case. 

Sincerely  yours, 

James  E.  Webb 
Acting  Secretary 


June  26,  1949 


U.S.  Completes  Reconstruction  of  Greek  Transportation  System 


(Kolensed  to  the  press  Jointly  by  ECA  and  National  Military  Establlahmpnt] 


Reconstruction  of  essential  transportation  facil- 
ities throujrhout  Greece,  under  the  Interim  Aid 
Program  established  by  Congress,  May  22,  1947, 
was  announced  jointly  on  May  27  by  the  Economic 
Cooperation  Administration  and  Secretary  of  De- 
fense Louis  Johnson. 

Under  the  program,  1,000  miles  of  first-rate 
highways  have  been  constructed  to  link  the  impor- 
tant cities  and  mountainous  regions  of  Greece, 
while  rebuilding  of  the  ports  of  Piraeus  (Athens) , 
Salonika  in  Macedonia,  and  Volos  in  Thessaly  re- 
quired construction  of  more  than  2  miles  of  con- 
crete quays,  two  large  drydocks,  and  breakwaters 
and  installation  of  permanent  port  equipment. 
More  than  2  miles  of  bridges  and  railroad  tunnels 
have  been  built,  and  the  4-mile  Corinth  Canal, 
closed  by  German  demolition  in  1944,  has  been  re- 
opened. The  latter  operation  alone  required  the 
moving  of  1  million  cubic  yards  of  earth  and 
debris.  Seven  airfields,  all  with  modern  facilities, 
also  have  been  constructed. 

To  carry  out  the  complex  project,  which,  officials 
pointed  out,  has  given  the  Greek  people  tangible 
evidence  of  the  scope  and  effectiveness  of  the 
American  aid  program,  the  Chief  of  Army  Engi- 
neers established  a  Grecian  Engineer  JDistrict 
under  the  North  Atlantic  Division  Engineer  at 
New  York  City.  The  Grecian  District  Engineer 
and  a  skeleton  staff  established  themselves  in 
Greece  in  August  1947,  together  with  contractoi-s' 
representatives,  to  initiate  operations. 

A  rear  echelon  of  the  Grecian  District  was  estab- 
lished in  the  United  States  to  expedite  procure- 
ment and  handle  necessary  operational  details. 

Actual  performance  time  for  completion  of  the 
record  construction  project  was  little  more  than 
a  year.  The  over-all  time  required  was  20  months, 
but  at  least  6  months  were  required  to  procure 
materials  and  personnel.  In  this  connection. 
Corps  of  Engineers  search  parties  located  in  ware- 
houses and  other  areas  5  million  dollars  worth 
of  usable  materials  from  Unrra  and  lend-lease 
sources,  accumulated  since  the  end  of  World  War 
II. 

The  cost  of  the  over-all  program  was  29  million 
dollars  in  United  States  currency,  plus  330  million 
drachmas  in  Greek  currency.  Of  this  amount,  the 
Department  of  State  furnished  201/2  million  dol- 
lars in  cash  and  400  thousand  dollars  in  services. 
The  Economic  Cooperation  Administration  sup- 
plemented the  fund  with  8.1  million  dollars  in 
July  1948.  When  the  program  was  begun  in  1947, 
the  Greek  drachmas  had  the  official  exchange  rate 
of  5,000  drachmas  to  a  dollar.     Later,  however, 


the  official  rate  of  exchange  was  10,000  drachmas  to 
a  dollar. 

According  to  Col.  D.  W.  Griffiths,  head  of  the 
Grecian  Engineer  District,  the  toughest  difficulties 
encountered  were  an  unusually  severe  winter  and 
continued  guerrilla  attacks.  There  were  214  in- 
cidents with  guerrillas,  causing  the  death  of  28 
Greek  employees,  and  the  wounding  of  102  more. 
Some  equipment  was  destroyed  or  damaged. 

The  construction  program  was  initiated  after 
preliminary  investigations  made  it  apparent  that 
American  equipment  and  technical  assistance 
would  be  required  to  restore  the  transportation 
system  as  the  first  and  most  urgent  step  in  re- 
habilitating the  economy  of  Greece.  All  work  was 
done  by  American  contracting  firms  working  under 
supervision  of  the  Army  Corps  of  Engineers. 

The  American  contracting  firms  of  Guy  F. 
Atkinson  Company  of  San  Francisco.  Johnson- 
Drake  and  Piper  of  Minneapolis,  and  Starr-Park 
and  Freeman  of  New  York,  associated  in  a  joint 
venture  as  Atkinson-Drake-Park,  were  selected 
to  undertake  the  reconstruction  of  highways  and 
railroads. 

The  J.  Rich  Steers  Company  and  Grove-Wil- 
son-Shepherd and  Kruge  of  New  York,  who 
formed  the  joint  venture  known  as  Steers-Grove, 
were  chosen  to  undertake  the  reconstruction  of 
port  facilities  and  the  reopening  of  the  Corinth 
Canal. 

An  agreement  was  concluded  between  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  the  Department  of  the 
Army  under  which  the  Corps  of  Engineers  was 
given  the  responsibility  for  administering  these 
contracts. 

The  Grecian  District,  after  establishing  head- 
quarters at  Athens,  set  up  six  subordinate  areas 
with  headquarters  in  Salonika,  Larissa,  Lamia, 
Patras,  Corinth,  and  Piraeus. 

Preliminary  surveys  were  immediately  made,  a 
plan  of  operations  was  developed,  equipment  was 
procured,  and  organization  tables  were  set  up  for 
pei-sonnel.  The  work  to  be  done  was  divided 
among  the  American  contractors  and  the  Greek 
agencies  which  were  in  a  position  to  participate. 

It  became  ajiparent  that  the  procurement  of  all 
needed  equipment  in  the  United  States  during  a 
boom  period  of  construction  would  be  impossiole 
within  the  time  limitations  specified.  Fortunately 
there  were  in  Greece  substantial  quantities  of 
equipment  brought  in  by  Uxrra,  or  bought  with 
an  Export-Import  loan  to  Greece.  Records  of 
stocks  in  all  warehouses  and  storage  yards  in  all 
parts  of  Greece  were  utilized  to  determine  the 

Department  of  State  Bullelin 


amount  of  usable  equipment  available.  From 
these  sources  and  by  loan  from  Greek  Government 
agencies  and  ministries,  it  was  possible  to  obtain 
about  5  million  dollars  of  the  approximately  13 
million  dollars'  worth  of  equipment  used  on  the 
job.  At  the  peak  of  construction,  more  than  5,200 
pieces  of  equipment  were  in  operation. 

The  facilities  of  the  port  of  Piraeus,  which 
serves  Athens,  had  suffered  the  greatest  damage. 
Repairs  to  6,970  feet  of  quay  walls  and  two  dry- 
docks  were  required  plus  the  replacement  of  grain 
silo  and  port  operating  equipment.  Original  con- 
struction of  quay  walls  i)rovided  berthing  space 
for  sixteen  10,000-  to  15,000-ton  vessels.  Wlien  the 
forward  echelon  of  Engineers  arrived,  there  was 
berthing  space  for  only  two  fair-sized  vessels  at 
this  port,  and  this  space  was  necessarily  restricted 
to  military  use. 

Quay  walls  at  Salonika  and  Volos  were  recon- 
structed in  a  similar  manner  and  accounted  for  an 
additional  1,052  lineal  yards  of  quay  wall.  At 
Salonika,  198  lineal  yards  of  old  breakwater  were 
removed,  and  705  lineal  yards  of  new  breakwater 
were  constructed  in  addition  to  the  quay  wall  con- 
struction. To  permit  the  utilization  of  the  quay 
walls,  sunken  vessels  were  removed  and  dredging 
was  necessary.  At  Volos,  in  addition  to  the  quay 
wall  repair,  65  lineal  yards  of  breakwater  were 
repaired. 

The  Corinth  Canal  across  the  Isthmus  of 
Corinth  permits  substantial  savings  in  time  and 
distance  for  shipping  from  the  east  to  the  west 
coast  of  Greece.  The  Germans  blocked  the  Canal 
by  placing  demolition  charges  in  the  steep  side 
slopes  at  two  points,  bringing  down  a  total  of 
approximately  845,000  cubic  yards  of  earth  and 
rock,  together  with  tons  of  bridge  steel  from  a 
demolished  duplex  railway  and  highway  bridge 
which  crossed  the  Canal. 

Clearing  of  the  Canal  began  on  November  6, 
1947,  on  the  Poseidon  Slide.  At  the  Isthmia  Slide, 
at  the  east  end  of  the  Canal,  an  access  road  ramp 
was  built,  i^ermitting  trucks  to  haul  material  to 
the  spoil  area  near  the  top  of  the  bank.  Dump 
scows  were  used  to  remove  dredge  material  from 
both  slides.  Progress  was  slow  initially  due  to 
the  poor  condition  of  rented  trucks  and  the  worn- 
out  condition  of  the  dredges  borrowed  from  the 
Canal  Companj\  But  after  9  months'  work,  the 
Canal  was  opened  to  shallow  draft  navigation  and 
fully  completed  on  September  18,  1948. 

The  highways  of  Greece,  not  built  for  modern- 
motorized  traffic,  were  in  a  deplorable  condition 
from  lack  of  maintenance.  Of  the  6,524.7  miles  of 
national  highways  system  shown  upon  charts  of 
the  Ministry  of  Public  Works,  4,971.2  miles  had 
deteriorated  so  badlj'  that  vehicles  could  use  them 
only  at  lowest  speeds. 

As  reconstruction  of  the  entire  highway  system 
was  a  monumental  task  far  beyond  the  scope  of 
the  Aid  Program,  the  road  program  was  set  up  to 
include  only  those  highways  essential  to  the  eco- 

June  26,   7949 


nomic  and  military  requirements  of  Greece.  On 
this  basis  1,118.5  miles  of  roads  were  selected  for 
reconstruction.  This  included  576.6  miles  of  sta- 
tionary plant,  hot-mix  asphalt  surfacing,  408.8 
miles  of  travel  plant  cold-mix  asphalt  surfacing, 
and  132.9  miles  of  penetration  asphalt  surfacing. 
The  program  was  later  reduced  to  approximately 
900  miles,  as  increased  guerrilla  activities  made 
it  impossible,  without  great  risk  to  personnel  and 
equipment,  to  carry  on  operations  in  certain  areas. 

Airfield  construction  was  not  originally  con- 
templated. However,  the  Greek  Air  Ministry  re- 
quested that  American  contractors  undertake  this 
aclditional  work.  Accordingly,  the  following 
seven  airfields  were  included  in  the  program :  King 
Paul  Airfield,  near  Tripolis ;  Bisdouni  Airfield,  a 
new  airfield  approximately  2  miles  north  of  loan- 
nina ;  Kavalla  Airfield,  a  flight  strip  6  miles  north 
of  Kavalla;  Kozani  Airfield,  near  the  city  of 
Kozani;  Sedes  Airfield,  8  miles  east  of  Salonika; 
Larissa  Airfield,  in  the  city  of  Larissa;  in  the 
Thessaly  area  200  miles  north  of  Athens;  and 
Hassan!  Airfield,  8  miles  southeast  of  Athens  and 
serving  as  the  main  air  terminal  of  the  capital 
city. 

in  addition  to  these  projects,  a  flight  control 
tower  was  built  at  Agrinion  in  western  mainland 
Greece,  Romney  huts  and  a  fuel  system  were  in- 
stalled at  Elefsis,  west  of  Athens  and  eight 
pierced-steel  plank  hardstands  were  constructed 
at  Katsika  Airfield  near  loannina  in  Epirus. 

The  rehabilitation  of  Greek  railroads  included 
the  main  lines  of  the  Piraeus- Athens-Peloponnese 
Railway  Company,  the  Thessaly  Railway  Com- 
pany, Ltd.,  Franco-Hellenic  Railroad  Company, 
and  the  Greek  State  Railways.  The  work  of  track 
repair  was  left  to  the  railroad  companies,  while 
the  major  railroad  bridges  were  assigned  to  Ameri- 
can contractors.  Steel  for  all  of  these  except  the 
Gorgopotamos  Bridge  was  imported  from  the 
United  States. 

The  program  involved  the  construction  of  12 
steel  railroad  bridges  and  1  highway  bridge,  but 
4  railroad  bridges  were  near  Edessa  in  Western 
Macedonia,  too  near  the  northern  frontier  for 
safety  and  were  therefore  dropped  from  the  pro- 
gram. The  steel  for  these  has  been  stored  at 
Salonika  until  peace  is  restored. 


OEEC  Officials  Visit  in  U.S. 

[Released  to  the  press  by  EC.\  and  the 
Department  of  Commerce  May  29] 

Four  officials  of  the  Organization  for  European 
Economic  Cooperation  in  Paris  will  arrive  by  air 
in  New  York  June  2  or  3  to  discuss  proposals  of 
several  communities  for  United  States  interna- 
tional trade  fairs  to  be  held  in  1950,  the  United 
States  Department  of  Commerce  and  the  Economic 


Cooperation  Administration  announced  on  May 
29. 

The  group  will  explore  the  possibility  of  ex- 
hibiting Oeec  country  products  at  proposed  inter- 
national trade  fairs  in  tliis  country  next  j-ear. 
Members  will  present  their  recommendations  to 
the  Oeec  after  their  return  to  Paris  June  15. 

The  group  will  go  irom  New  York  to  "Washing- 
ton for  conferences  with  Department  of  Commerce 
and  ECA  officials  and  later  will  visit  with  the 
officials  of  an  international  fair  at  Toronto. 
Visits  will  be  made  to  several  American  cities 
where  international  fairs  in  19.50  are  under  con- 
sideration. Expenses  of  the  group  will  be  paid 
with  Oeec  funds. 

Members  of  the  group  are:  Albert  de  Smaele, 
former  Belgian  Minister  of  Economics;  Dr. 
Michele  Guido  Franci.  Secretary  General  of  the 
Milan  International  Trade  Fair;  Michel  Jaoul, 
Oeec  Trade  Committee  Secretary,  and  Jacobus 
Milius,  General  Manager  of  the  Utrecht  Interna- 
tional Trade  Fair. 


ltalian]'<ERP"  Stamps  Issued 

[Released  to  the  press  by  ECA  May  31] 

The  first  postage  stamps  to  honor  the  Marshall 
Plan  went  on  sale  in  Italy  on  May  30,  it  was  an- 
nounced by  the  Economic  Cooperation  Adminis- 
tration. 

The  stamps,  issued  by  the  Italian  Government 
as  a  symbol  of  appreciation  for  Marshall  Plan 
aid,  were  printed  in  a  series  of  three :  gi-een,  five 
lire,  for  printed  matter;  blue,  15  lire,  for  post- 
cards; and  brown,  20  lire,  for  letters. 

The  design  illustrates  a  ship  carrying  Marshall 
Plan  goods  being  greeted  by  an  Italian  workman 
with  an  anvil,  hammer,  and  tongs.  The  letters 
"ERP"  (European  Eecovery  Program)  appear  in 
the  lower  left  corner. 


Certain  Functions  of  the  United  States  High 
Commissioner  for  Germany  Defined' 

By  virtue  of  the  authority  vested  in  me  by  Sec- 
tion 109  (d)  of  the  Economic  Cooperation  Act 
of  1948  (Public  Law  472,  80th  Congi-ess),  it  is 
hereby  ordered  as  follows: 

1.  During  his  tenure  of  office  as  United  States 
High  Commissioner  for  Germany,  Mr.  John  J. 
McCloy,  under  the  immediate  supervision  of  the 
Administrator  for  Economic  Cooperation  and  the 
coordination  of  the  United  States  Special  Repre- 
sentative for  Europe  (subject,  however,  to  consul- 
tation with  and  ultimate  direction  by  the  Presi- 
dent), shall  be  the  representative  of  the  said  Ad- 


ministrator and  the  said  Special  Representative  in 
all  their  relations  and  actions  with  respect  to 
Germany. 

2.  Mr.  McCloy,  in  performing  the  duties  set 
forth  in  paragraph  one  hereof,  shall  be  assisted  by 
a  Chief  of  Special  Mission  who  shall  be  appointed 
by  the  Administrator  for  Economic  Cooperation 
and  who  shall  be  acceptable  to  Mr.  McCloy.  The 
Chief  of  Special  Mission  shall  have  the  rank  of 
Minister  and  shall  act  under  the  immediate  super- 
vision and  direction  of  Mr.  McCloy. 


The  White  House, 
June  13,  19 J^. 


Harkt  S.  Trumah 


'  Ex.  Or.  100(53,  14  Fed.  Reg.  3221. 
'  Ex.  Or.  10062, 14  Fed.  Reg.  2965. 


Establishing  the  Position  of  United  States 
High  Commissioner  for  Germany- 

By  virtue  of  the  authority  vested  in  me  bv  the 
Constitution  and  the  Statutes,  including'  the 
Foreign  Service  Act  of  1946  (60  Stat.  999),  and 
as  President  of  the  United  States  and  Commander 
in  Chief  of  the  Armed  Forces  of  the  United  States, 
it  is  ordered  as  follows : 

1.  There  is  hereby  established  the  position  of 
United  States  High  Commissioner  for  Germany, 
which  position  shall  be  that  of  Chief  of  Mission, 
Class  1,  in  accordance  with  the  provisions  of  the 
said  Foreign  Service  Act  of  1946. 

2.  The  United  States  High  Commissioner  for 
Germany,  hereinafter  referred  to  as  the  High 
Commissioner,  shall  be  the  supreme  United  States 
authority  in  Germany.  The  High  Commissioner 
shall  have  the  authority,  under  the  immediate 
supervision  of  the  Secretary  of  State  (subject, 
however,  to  consultation  with  and  ultimate  direc- 
tion by  the  President),  to  exercise  all  of  the  gov- 
ernmental functions  of  the  United  States  in 
German}'  (other  than  the  conmiand  of  troops) ,  in- 
cluding rei)resentation  of  the  United  States  on 
the  Allied  High  Commission  for  German}-  when 
established,  and  the  exercise  of  appropriate  func- 
tions of  a  Chief  of  Mission  within  the  meaning 
of  the  Foreign  Service  Act  of  1946. 

3.  With  resjaect  to  military  matters  the  Com- 
mander of  the  United  States  Armed  Forces  in 
Germany  shall  continue  to  receive  instructions 
directly  from  the  Joint  Chiefs  of  Staff.  On  re- 
quest of  tlie  High  Commissioner,  such  Commander 
shall  take  necessary  measures  for  the  maintenance 
of  law  and  order  and  such  other  action  as  is  re- 
quired to  support  the  policy  of  the  United  States 
in  Germany.  If  major  differences  arise  over 
policy  affecting  military  mattei-s,  necessary  reports 
and  recommendations  shall  be  referred  to  the  De- 
partment of  State  and  to  tlie  National  Military 
Establishment  for  resolution.  In  the  event  of  an 
emergency  involving  the  security  of  the  United 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


States  forces  in  Europe,  such  Commander  may 
take  whatever  action  he  considers  essential  to  safe- 
guard the  security  of  his  troops. 

4.  In  the  event  that  the  High  Commissioner 
shall  assume  his  duties  in  accordance  with  this 
Executive  Order  prior  to  the  date  that  the  Military 
Government  of  the  United  States  Zone  of  Ger- 
many is  terminated,  he  shall  during  such  interval 
report  to  the  Secretary  of  Defense,  through  the 
Secretary  of  the  Army,  and  shall  be  the  United 
States  Military  Governor  with  all  the  powers 
thereof  including  those  vested  in  the  United  States 
Military  Governor  under  all  international  agi'ee- 
ments. 

Haket  S.  Truman 

The  White  House, 
June  6, 19Ji9. 


John  J.  McCloy  To  Be  Chief  ECA  Representa- 
tive in  Germany 

[Released  to  the  press  by  the  White  House  June  6] 

The  President  announced  June  6  that  in  sign- 
ing the  Executive  order  establishing  the  position 
of  United  States  High  Commissioner  for  Ger- 
many, it  was  his  intention — as  stated  on  May  18, 
1949,  in  announcing  Mr.  McCloy's  selection  as 
High  Commissioner — to  designate  Mr.  McCloy 
also  as  the  chief  representative  of  ECA  in  Ger- 
many. This  will  be  done  by  issuance  of  an  Execu- 
tive order  following  Senate  confirmation  of  Mr. 
McCloy's  designation  as  High  Commissioner. 


Foreign  Distribution  of  Isotopes 

Statement  from  the  General  Advisory  Committee 
to  the  AEC 

[Released  to  the  press  by  AEC  June  8] 

We  have  had  from  the  Atomic  Energy  Commis- 
sion itself  and  from  the  Director  of  Research  a 
request  to  reconsider  the  question  of  the  distribu- 
tion of  isotopes  abroad. 

With  regard  to  the  isotopes  distribution  we  have 
reexamined  in  detail  the  statement  made  by  us  at 
our  fourth  meeting.  Despite  the  criticisms  that 
have  been  voiced  to  Commission  policy,  we  wish  to 
reaffirm  our  conviction  that  these  recommenda- 
tions constituted  sound  policy.  We  believe  that  it 
would  be  useful  to  have  available  a  documentary 
account  of  how  the  results  from  the  foreign  distri- 
bution of  isotopes  have  in  fact  served  to  further 
progress  in  therapy  and  in  research. 


Following  is  the  text  of  the  public  statement  iy 
the  foreign  distribution  of  radioisotopes  by  the 
United  States  Atomic  Energy  Co?n,?tiission  pre- 
pared by  Drs.  DuBridge,  Rabi,  and  Gonant  aaid 

June  26,  7949 


approved  by  the  General  Advisory  Comm,ittee  of 
the  AEC  at  the  fourth  meeting  of  the  Committee 
May  30-June  1, 19^7 : 

The  Atomic  Energy  Commission  has  authorized 
the  distribution  of  specified  radioactive  materials 
to  scientists  in  foreign  countries,  through  their  re- 
spective govermnents,  in  order  that  these  valuable 
by-products  of  atomic  energy  work  may  be  em- 
ployed in  scientific  and  medical  research  and  in 
therapy. 

This  represents  an  important  step  in  implement- 
ing the  declared  purpose  of  Congress,  as  stated  in 
the  Atomic  Energy  Act,  to  utilize  the  develop- 
ments in  atomic  energy  for  "improving  the  public 
welfare  .  .  .  and  promoting  world  peace." 

These  radioactive  isotopes,  such  as  radio  phos- 
phorus are  made  by  exposing  materials  to  the  in- 
tense neutron  radiation  from  the  chain  reacting 
pile  at  the  Clinton  Laboratories,  Oak  Ridge.  They 
are  very  valuable  tools  for  research  in  chemistry 
and  biology  and  in  treatment  of  certain  diseases. 
A  plan  for  making  them  available  at  cost  to 
United  States  scientists  for  research  purposes  was 
announced  a  year  ago.  They  will  be  equally  valu- 
able to  scientists  and  medical  men  abroad  and  the 
research  done  with  them  will  benefit  all  mankind. 

In  these  days  when  the  restoration  of  free  science 
and  the  building  up  of  good  will  among  people  is 
so  vital,  it  is  essential  that  the  United  States  should 
take  this  step  to  share  its  new  tools  for  research 
and  therapy  with  other  countries,  and  thus  prove 
that  this  democratic  country  will  do  all  it  can,  con- 
sistent with  its  own  defense  and  security,  to  im- 
prove the  public  welfare  and  raise  the  standard  of 
living  throughout  the  world. 

It  is  emphasized  that  the  quantity  of  radioactive 
materials  required  and  to  be  made  available  for 
research  are  extremely  small,  so  that  they  can  be 
used  with  safety  with  only  ordinary  precautions, 
that  they  are  not  useful  for  military  or  industrial 
employment  of  atomic  energy  and  cannot  consti- 
tute a  danger  to  world  peace  or  to  the  security  of 
the  United  States.  Also  the  materials  are  now 
produced  in  sufficient  quantities  so  that  foreign 
distribution  will  not  interfere  with  an  ample 
supply  for  United  States  scientists. 

The  conditions  under  which  these  materials  will 
be  sold  at  cost  to  an  individual  scientific  laboratory 
are  such  as  to  insure  that  the  sole  purpose  for  which 
they  will  be  used  is  for  research  or  medical  treat- 
ment. The  research  results  obtained  are  to  be 
published  and  reported  to  this  country  and  the 
laboratories  are  to  be  open  to  qualified  scientists 
in  accordance  with  established  traditions  of  free 
science.  Thus  diversion  of  the  material  to  secret 
or  military  research  will  be  difficult  and  any  con- 
tinued diversion  of  this  sort  will  be  impossible. 

The  radioisotopes  available  were  well  known  to 
scientists  before  the  war  and  can  be  produced  by 
standard  instrmnents  such  as  cyclotrons.    How- 


ever,  the  scientists  in  countries  abroad  do  not  have 
access  to  such  facilities  on  any  scale,  and  the  quan- 
tities and  concentrations  producible  in  a  pile  are 
such  as  to  be  more  useful  to  science.  It  is  there- 
fore a  very  great  service  to  have  the  materials 
available  immediately. 

The  C'oiiuuission  also  points  out  that  a  continu- 
ous supply  of  radioactive  isotopes  is  necessary  for 
such  research,  but  that  such  supplies  cannot  accu- 
mulate since  they  are  mostly  of  relatively  short  life 
and  because  they  are  expended  in  the  experiments 
themselves  beyond  practical  recovery. 

Finally  the  Commission  will  maintain  continu- 
ous contact  with  the  laboratories  supplied  with 
the  nuiterial,  will  expect  the  foreign  governments 
to  certify  the  qualifications  of  the  scientists  apply- 
ing and  to  assure  the  United  States  that  the  mate- 
rials will  be  used  only  for  the  i)urposes  stated. 
Under  all  these  conditions  the  beneficial  results  of 
the  program  will  be  great  in  terms  of  good  will 
and  it  may  assist  distinguished  foreign  scientists 
abroad  who  work  in  ojien  laboratories  to  make 
important  discoveries  of  benefit  to  all. 


U.S.,  U.K.,  and  South  Africa  To  Discuss 
Uranium  Production 

[Koleased  to  the  press  by  the  AEC  June  11  ] 

The  informal  discussions  which  the  United 
States  and  the  United  Kingdom  have  had  with 
the  Union  of  South  Africa  over  a  period  of  years 
have  been  confined  to  the  problems  involved  in 
producing  uranium  occurring  in  the  South  Afri- 
can gold  ores. 

Further  discussions  are  envisaged,  and  while 
no  date  has  been  set,  it  is  expected  that  represent- 
atives of  the  United  States  and  the  United  King- 
dom will  visit  South  Africa,  on  the  invitation  of 
that  government,  to  continue  discussions  concern- 
ing the  eventual  production  of  uranium  from  the 
gold-bearing  ores  of  South  Africa. 


Tax  Conventions  With  Norway  Signed 

[Kcleasoii  t(i  Uie  press  .Tune  13] 

On  June  1:5,  I'.Mt),  .lames  K.  Webb,  Acting  Sec- 
retary of  State,  and  Wilhelm  Munthe  IMorgen- 
stierne,  Norwegian  Ambassador  in  Washington, 
signed  two  conventions  between  the  United  States 
and  Norway  for  the  avoidance  of  double  taxation 
and  the  prevention  of  fiscal  evasion,  one  with 
respect  to  taxes  on  income  and  the  other  with  re- 
spect to  taxes  on  estates  and  inheritances. 

The  provisions  of  the  income-tax  convention 
are  similar  in  general  to  those  contained  in  in- 
come-tax conventions  now  in  force  between  the 
United  States  and  Canada,  Denmark,  France,  the 
Netherlands,  Sweden,  and  the  United  Kingdom. 
The  provisions  of  the  estate-tax  convention  are 
similar  in  general  to  those  contained  in  estate- 


tax  conventions  now  in  force  between  the  United 
States  and  Canada  and  the  United  Kingdom. 

The  conventions  provide  that  instruments  of 
ratification  shall  be  exchanged.  The  income-tax 
convention  provides  that  it  shall  become  effective 
on  the  finst  day  of  January  of  the  year  in  which 
the  exchange  of  instruments  of  ratification  takes 
place.  The  estate-tax  convention  provides  that  it 
sliall  come  into  force  on  the  day  of  the  exchange 
of  instruments  of  ratification  and  shall  be  effective 
only  as  to  estates  and  inheritances  in  the  case  of 
persons  who  die  on  or  after  that  date. 


U.S.-Brazii  To  Study  Tax  Relations 

[Released  to  the  press  June  9] 

As  a  preparatoi-y  measure  for  the  joint  study  of 
tax  relations  with  Brazil  announced  .May  21,  1949, 
by  the  President  of  the  United  States  and  the 
President  of  Brazil,  interested  persons  are  invited 
to  submit  views  and  recommendations  on  the  mat- 
ters involved.  Communications  may  be  addressed 
to  Eldon  P.  King,  Special  Deputy  Commissioner 
of  Internal  Revenue,  Bureau  of  Internal  Revenue, 
Washington,  D.C. 

The  pertinent  part  of  the  joint  statement  of 
May  21  said : 

"The  two  Presidents  were  also  fully  agreed  that 
a  comprehensive  joint  study  of  the  tax  relations 
between  the  two  countries  would  be  helpful.  It 
was  decided  that  conversations  on  this  subject 
should  be  held  with  a  view  toward  negotiating  a 
convention  between  the  two  countries,  similar  to 
tiiose  already  in  force  between  the  United  States 
and  other  countries,  which  will,  it  is  ho])ed,  elimi- 
nate many  of  the  factors  that  result  in  double 
taxation." 


Colombia-U.S.  To  Discuss  Tax  Treaty 

[Released  to  the  press  June  9] 

Discussions  between  American  and  Colombian 
technical  experts  looking  to  the  conclusion  of 
treaties  for  the  avoidance  of  double  taxation  and 
for  administrative  cooperation  in  prevention  of 
tax  evasion  with  respect  to  income  taxes  and  to 
taxes  on  estates  of  deceased  persons  are  expected 
to  be  o{)ened  at  an  early  date. 

If  the  discussions  are  successful  and  a  basis  for 
agreement  is  found,  they  will  result  in  the  prepa- 
ration of  draft  treaties  whicli  will  be  submitted  by 
the  negotiators  to  their  respective  governments 
for  consideration  with  a  view  to  signing. 

In  preparation  for  the  discussions,  the  Ameri- 
can delegation  Mill  welcome  conferences  with  in- 
terested i)arties,  or  statements  and  suggestions 
from  them,  concerning  jiroblems  in  tax  relations 
with  Colombia.  Communications  in  this  connec- 
tion should  be  addressed  to  Eldon  P.  King,  Special 
Deputy  Commissioner  of  Internal  Revenue,  Bu- 
reau of  Internal  Revenue,  Washington  25,  D.C. 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


U.S.  Repudiates  Philippine  and  Chinese  Complaint  on 
Japanese  Reparation  Removals 


[Released  to  the  press  June  10] 

The  United  States  Government  announced  on 
May  12  in  a  statement  read  by  General  McCoy  to 
the  Far  Eastern  Commission  ^  that  it  had  decided 
to  terminate  removal  of  reparations  from  Japan 
under  the  Advance  Transfers  Program  instituted 
by  United  States  interim  directive  on  April  4, 
1947;  to  withdraw  its  proposal  of  November  6, 
1947,  on  the  division  of  Japanese  reparations 
shares ;  to  take  no  further  action  under  its  interim 
directive  powers  to  make  possible  additional  repa- 
rations removals  from  Japan ;  and  to  submit  new 
policy  proposals  to  the  Far  Eastern  Commission 
which  would  have  the  effect,  if  adopted,  of  pre- 
cluding further  industrial  reparations  removals 
from  Japan  during  the  occupation. 

On  May  19  and  26,  the  Philippine  and  Chinese 
representatives  on  the  Far  Eastern  Commission 
read  to  the  Commission  and  released  to  the  press 
statements  expressing  disagreement  with  the 
United  States  position.  These  statements  appear 
to  this  government  to  be  based  on  a  number  of 
serious  misconceptions  both  as  to  United  States 
policies  toward  Japan  and  the  fundamental  na- 
ture of  the  Japanese  problem.  Before  examining 
the  specific  points  advanced  by  the  Philippine  and 
Chinese  representatives,  it  is  desired  to  clarify 
beyond  any  question  of  doubt  the  considerations 
underlying  the  United  States  jDosition  announced 
on  May  12. 

Because  of  its  leading  role  in  the  war  against 
Japan  and  relatively  stronger  military  and  eco- 
nomic position  at  the  close  of  the  conflict,  the 
United  States  has  from  the  outset  assumed  a 
primary  role  in  the  occupation  of  Japan.  Its 
policies  and  actions  in  this  capacity  have  been 
determined  not  by  considerations  of  special  ad- 
vantage but  on  behalf  of  and  for  the  benefit  of  all 
Far  Eastern  and  other  concerned  nations.  It 
early  recognized  that  the  programs  of  democra- 
tization and  reform  prescribed  by  the  Far  Eastern 
Commission  for  Japan  could  succeed  only  in  a 
tolerable  economic  environment,  and  for  nearly 
4  years  has  assumed  unaided  the  responsibility 
of  providing  assistance  to  Japan  to  make  such  an 
environment  possible,  at  a  cost  to  this  government 
of  over  a  billion  dollars.  The  United  States  has 
naturally  been  reluctant  to  assume  this  burden, 
not  merely  because  the  American  taxpaj-er  is 
already  carrying  a  heavy  load,  but  also  because 
there  is  a  limit  to  United  States  resources.  Funds 
spent  in  Japan  are  unavailable  for  other  vital 

June  26,  1949 


Eurposes  at  home  and  abroad.  It  has  nevertheless 
een  willing  to  provide  this  aid  so  as  to  make 
possible  the  success  of  the  Far  Eastern  Commis- 
sion programs  and  basic  policy  objectives,  on 
which  the  emergence  of  a  peacefully  inclined  and 
responsible  Japan  depends.  The  aid  has  been 
given  as  a  matter  of  hard  necessity  in  the  interest 
of  all  peace-loving  nations. 

Clearly,  however,  the  United  States  cannot  in- 
definitely bear  the  burden  of  Japan's  support.  It 
must  therefore  assist  the  reattainment  by  Japan 
of  a  self-sustaining  economy  at  the  earliest  pos- 
sible time.  Further  i-eparations  from  the  deficit 
Japanese  economy  would  obviously  be  inconsistent 
with  this  objective.  Nor  are  further  reparations 
required  for  purposes  of  demilitarization  and  dis- 
armament. Japan  has  been  completely  disarmed, 
and  the  United  States  is  determined  that  its  war- 
making  capacity  shall  not  be  permitted  to  re- 
emerge.  In  those  rare  instances  where  Japan,  in 
its  efforts  to  support  a  population  1.5  million 
larger  than  prewar,  cannot  put  to  productive  use 
for  jDeacef ul  purposes  facilities  previously  used  in 
the  war  effort  not  already  destroyed  as  specialized 
war  equipment,  it  is  the  United  States  view  that 
the  facilities  should  at  the  appropriate  time  be 
scrapped. 

The  United  States  position  announced  by  Gen- 
eral McCoy  on  May  12  derived  from  these  funda- 
mental considerations  and  stands  on  its  merits  as 
a  necessary  step  for  the  achievement  of  basic  Allied 
policy  objectives  in  Japan. 

Turning  to  the  Philippine  and  Chinese  repre- 
sentatives' specific  points,  there  is  no  conflict  be- 
tween the  United  States  position  and  the  Potsdam 
Declaration.  Paragraph  11  of  the  Declaration 
provides  that  "Japan  shall  be  permitted  to  main- 
tain such  industries  as  will  sustain  her  economy 
and  permit  the  exaction  of  just  reparations  in  kind, 
but  not  those  which  would  enable  her  to  rearm  for 
war.''  Reference  is  first  to  the  needs  of  a  self- 
supporting  Japanese  economy,  and  second  to  rep- 
arations. This  order  of  priority  is  repeated  and 
emphasized  in  the  Fec  reparations  decisions. 
Since  the  Japanese  economy  today  is  a  heavily 
deficit  economy,  and  since  the  exaction  of  further 
reparations  would  increase  that  deficit  and  defer 
the  achievement  of  self-support,  the  United  States 
position  is  fully  consonant  with  the  above-quoted 
Potsdam  provision  and  with  the  pertinent  provi- 
sions of  the  Fec  Basic  Post-Surrender  Policy  for 

'  Bulletin  of  May  22,  1949,  p.  667. 


Japan,  the  clear  intent  of  which  is  that  reparations 
shall  be  restricted  to  resources  surplus  to  Japan's 
peaceful  needs. 

The  claim  that  the  United  States  position  is  in- 
compatible with  the  Fec  Interim  Removals  and 
other  Fec  reparations  decisions  in  the  sense  that 
the  position  in  any  way  contravenes  these  deci- 
sions, is  equally  unfounded.  The  Fec  decisions 
have  been  nullified  not  by  any  action  of  the  United 
States  but  by  the  failure'of  the  Fec,  notwithstand- 
ing every  assistance  and  encouragement  by 
the  United  States,  to  adopt  a  schedule  of  repara- 
tions shares  which  would  give  the  decisions  prac- 
tical effect.  The  Philippine  representative 
charges  the  United  States  with  impatience  in  pro- 
posing that  the  reparations  account  now  be  closed. 
One  may  wonder,  as  we  approach  the  end  of  the 
fourth  year  of  the  occupation,  how  long  the 
United  States,  bearing  the  burden  of  the  inade- 
quacies of  Japanese  economic  revival,  was  ex- 
pected to  wait  before  acting  to  remove  the  impedi- 
ment which  the  reparations  issue  has  interposed 
to  the  attainment  of  Japanese  self-support. 

No  conflict  is  perceived  between  the  United 
States  reparations  position  and  effective  and  con- 
tinuing Japanese  disarmament  and  demilitariza- 
tion. On  the  contrary,  this  position  accords  with 
the  only  course  offering  real  hope  of  elimination 
of  the  Japanese  military  threat.  Japan,  it  was 
earlier  pointed  out,  has  been  completely  disarmed. 
It  should  be  apparent  to  all  Far  Eastern  nations 
that  Japan  faces  most  difficult  problems  in  devel- 
oping Its  agriculture,  industry,  and  trade  to  a  point 
where  they  can  support  its  population,  and  that 
if  Japan  again  threatens  the  peace  of  the  Far  East, 
it  will  in  all  probability  be  because  it  failed  in 
that  objective  rather  than  because  it  was  permitted 
to  retain  existing  industrial  plants  for  peaceful, 
productive  purposes. 

The  assertion  by  the  Philippine  and  Chinese 
representatives  that  the  United  States  reparations 
position  indicates  that  the  United  States  feels 
greater  concern  for  the  welfare  of  its  late  enemy 
than  for  the  just  reparations  claims  of  its  Allies 
could  arise  only  from  a  profound  misunderstand- 
ing of  United  States  desires  and  intentions.  As 
earlier  stated.  United  States  policies  and  actions  in 
Japan  have  been  dictated  by  hard  necessity  to  per- 
mit achievement  of  the  basic  Fec  policy  objectives 
for  Japan.  These  objectives  cannot  be  accom- 
plished by  permitting  the  Japanese  to  starve  or 
by  depriving  them  of  indvistrial  equipment  needed 
for  their  peaceful  economy.  The  United  States 
must  point  out  that  the  Allies  have  assumed  a  joint 
responsibility  in  their  connnon  interest  in  Japan 
and  must  bear  their  proportionate  measure  of  sac- 
rifice, if  the  agreed  and  vital  end  of  a  peaceful, 
democratic,  and  self-supporting  Japan  is  to  be 
attained. 

The  charge  that  the  Japanese  under  the  direc- 
tion of  the  former  Zaibatsu  class  are  deliberatelv 


sabotaging  economic  recovery  is  not  borne  out  by 
reports  from  the  Supreme  Commander  or  from 
other  competent  observers  in  Japan.  There  are 
of  course  elements  in  Japan  which  seek  to  take 
advantage  of  their  country's  plight  for  their  own 
benefit.  All  reliable  evidence  indicates,  however, 
that  the  Japanese  Government  and  the  Japanese 
people  as  a  whole  desire  to  regain  a  self-supporting 
status  at  the  earliest  possible  time.  The  Philip- 
pine representative's  statement  that  "the  Japanese 
must  first  help  themselves"  before  a  solution  is 
sought  through  Allied  abstention  from  further 
reparations  ignores  the  fact  the  United  States 
in  December,  1948,  directed  the  institution  of  an 
economic  stabilization  program  to  this  very  end, 
which  is  now  being  vigorously  pursued  in  japan. 
If  there  are  any  measures  to  enable  the  Japanese 
better  to  help  themselves  which  are  not  being 
pressed  in  Japan  under  this  program  the  United 
States  Government  is  unaware  of  them. 

The  United  States  repudiates  the  contention 
of  the  Philippine  representative  that  the  United 
States  Government  implicitly  undertook  in  the 
Philippine  Rehabilitation  Act  of  1946  to  act  as 
agent  for  the  Philippines  to  collect  reparations 
from  Japan  at  least  to  the  extent  of  the  balance 
of  Philippine  war-damage  claims  not  met  by  the 
520  million  dollar  appropriation  for  the  Philip- 
pines under  the  act.  The  Philippine  Rehabilita- 
tion Act  was,  as  its  name  implies,  designed  to  pro- 
mote the  early  rehabilitation  of  the  Philippine 
Islands'  economy  and  not  to  provide  for  general 
compensation  of  Philippine  war  damage.  It  did 
not  in  any  sense  purport  to  settle,  or  to  prescribe 
machinery  for  settlement,  of  Philippine  repara- 
tions claims  against  Japan.  It  does  not  provide, 
nor  do  its  terms  and  provisions  imply,  that  the 
United  States  should  claim  reparations  from 
Japan  on  account  of  war  damage  to  Philippine 
property.  To  avoid  any  possibiTity  of  misunder- 
standing on  this  point,  the  United  States  Govern- 
ment instructed  its  ambassador  at  Manila  on  No- 
vember 1,  1946.  to  inform  the  Philippine  Govern- 
ment that  the  United  States  would  not  claim  repa- 
rations for  Philippine  war  damages  or  losses.  At 
the  same  time,  the  act  does  not  in  any  way  limit  the 
authority  of  the  Philippine  Government  to  claim 
reparations.  The  fact  that  the  Philippine  Gov- 
ernment has  from  the  outset  advanced  its  own 
reparations  claims  in  the  Fec  and  has  requested 
and  received  its  own  percentage  share  of  repara- 
tions in  all  shares,  proposals  considered  by  the 
Commission  would  indicate  that  the  Philippine 
Government  has  never  previously  had  any  doubts 
as  to  its  right  and  responsibility  to  submit  its  own 
reparations  claims. 

Jt  is  noteworth}'  that  section  106  (h)  (1)  of  the 
Rehabilitation  Act  provides  that  the  United  States 
sliall  reimburse  itself  for  outlays  under  Titles  I 
and  III  of  the  act  solely  out  of  money  or  bullion 
received  by  the  United  States  from  Japan  for 
Philippine  reparations.    Since  it  was  fully  rocog- 

Departmenl  of  State  Bulletin 


nized  at  the  time  of  passage  of  the  act  that  Japa- 
nese reparations  would  consist  in  major  part  of 
capital  equipment  and  only  in  very  small  degree 
of  money  or  bullion,  this  fact  is  a  further  indica- 
tion that  the  United  States  never  expected  reim- 
bursement from  reparations  of  the  520  million 
dollar  expenditure  authorized  under  the  act,  and 
has  never  considered  itself  in  the  role  of  agent  for 
the  collection  of  reparations  for  the  Philippines. 

The  Philippine  representative  in  his  statement 
of  May  26  quoted  a  press  report  of  May  24  alleg- 
ing the  formation  of  a  "Japanese  national  defense 
force"  to  be  under  "vigorous  study"  in  Washing- 
ton. On  the  same  day,  May  24,  a  spokesman  of 
the  Department  of  State  announced  at  a  news  con- 
ference that  "there  is  absolutely  no  intention  of 
forming  or  allowing  the  formation  of  any  national 
defense  f oi-ce  for  JajDan.  The  press  report  is  quite 
obviously  a  speculative  story  based  on  the  well 
known  fact  that  the  present  police  force  in  Japan 
is  inadequate  for  the  ordinary  internal  police  tasks 
of  the  country." 

The  Government  of  the  United  States  trusts 
that  this  statement  will  receive  the  careful  con- 
sideration of  the  Philippine  and  Chinese  Govern- 
ments and  peoples  and  will  contribute  to  a  more 
accurate  understanding  by  these  nations  of  the 
position  of  this  government  as  announced  on  May 
12  on  the  Japanese  reparations  issue. 


The  conservation  of  open-ocean  and  near-shore 
resources  has  been  a  concern  of  the  SCAP  organi- 
zation from  almost  the  day  the  occupation  began. 
Progress  has  already  been  made  in  the  reorgani- 
zation and  redirection  of  research  for  this  purpose 
as  well  as  in  making  the  Japanese  conscious  of 
proper  fishery  conservation  methods.  The  United 
States  considers  it  important,  however,  that  Japan 
continue  and  intensify  this  program  in  order  to 
supply  in  these  fields  of  activity  specific  assurance 
of  Japanese  wish  and  intention  to  participate  in 
world  affairs  in  a  responsible  manner. 


Extension  of  FEC  Policies  on  Access  to 
Japanese  Teclinicai  and  Scientific 
Information 

The  Far  Eastern  Commission  announced  on 
April  18  that  it  decided  as  a  matter  of  policy  on 
April  7, 1949  that  the  provisions  of  the  Fec  policy 
decisions  entitled  "Access  to  Jfu^anese  Technical 
and  Scientific  Information  in  Japan,"  approved 
June  24,  1948,  and  "Access  to  Japanese  Technical 
and  Scientific  Information  by  Non-FEC  Coun- 
tries at  War  with  Japan,"  approved  December  23, 
1948,  are  extended  until  December  31,  1949.  For 
texts  of  these  documents  see  Documents  and  State 
Papers  for  January  1949,  page  622. 


Progress  of  Japanese  Fisiiing  Industry 
Conservation  Program 

[Released  to  the  press  June  10] 

The  Departments  of  State,  Interior,  and  the 
Army  jointly  announced  on  June  10  that  a  con- 
servation program  for  the  Japanese  fishing  indus- 
try, developed  by  General  MacArthur's  headquar- 
ters, is  progressing  toward  eliminating  the  basis 
of  objections  on  the  part  of  some  nations  to  the 
return  of  Japanese  fishing  fleets  to  some  portions 
of  their  prewar  fishing  areas. 

The  program  being  carried  on  under  General 
MacArthur  as  the  Supreme  Commander  for  the 
Allied  Powers,  calls  for  the  Japanese  to  maintain 
surveillance  over  fishing  and  other  aquatic  opera- 
tions to  eliminate  excessive  exploitation,  to  collect 
and  analyze  statistical  information  relating  to 
aquatic  life,  and  to  disseminate  such  information 
to  other  interested  nations.  It  also  calls  for  the 
Japanese  to  cooperate  with  other  nations  in  the 
use  of  common  fishing  grounds  and  to  observe  the 
customary  fishing  habits  of  other  nations  using 
the  same  areas. 

Japanese  fishing  since  the  end  of  the  war  has  not 
been  authorized  outside  certain  areas,  generally  in 
the  vicinity  of  Japan  and  eastward  to  the  165th 
meridian.  Japanese  fishing  operations  prior  to 
World  War  II  did  not  always  observe  interna- 
tionally accepted  practices,  particularly  regarding 
conservation  of  resources. 


Dominican-Haitian  Declaration  on  Peaceful 
Settlement  of  Differences 

The  following  is  the  text  of  the  joint  declara- 
tion agreed  upon  by  the  Governments  of  the  Do- 
minican Republic  and  Haiti,  during  considera- 
tion by  the  Inter-American  Committee  for  the 
peaceful  solution  of  conflicts  of  the  situation  exist- 
ing between  these  two  countries.  The  joint  dec- 
laration was  published  in  Ciudad  Trujillo  and 
Port-au-Prince  on  June  10,  1949. 

The  Governments  of  the  Dominican  Republic  and  the 
Republic  of  Haiti, 

DECLARE : 

1.  That  they  reiterate  their  adherence  to  the  principles 
and  provisions  contained  in  tlie  Treaties  in  force  be- 
tween the  two  Countries  and  in  the  American  diplomatic 
Instruments  that  they  have  accepted  ;  and  that  they  re- 
affirm their  purpose  to  maintain  Good  Neighbor  relations 
between  the  two  Countries. 

2.  That  they  do  not  and  will  not  tolerate  in  their  re- 
spective territories  the  activities  of  any  individuals, 
groups,  or  parties,  national  or  foreign,  that  have  as  tlieir 
object  the  disturbance  of  the  domestic  peace  of  either  of 
the  two  neighboring  Republics  or  of  any  other  friendly 
Kation. 

3.  That  they  are  convinced  that  the  faithful  and  mutual 
observance  of  these  purposes  will  eliminate,  between  the 
two  Countries,  the  causes  and  occasions  of  conflicts ;  and 
they  also  declare  that  they  will  resort  to  direct  negotia- 
tion ;  and  whenever  necessary,  to  the  procedures  of  peace- 
ful settlement  for  the  solution  of  any  difference  in  the 
future  between  the  Dominican  Republic  and  the  Republic 
of  Haiti. 


June  26,  1949 


833 


Visitors  to  U.  S.  Under  Travel-Grant  Program 
Chilean  Agriculturist 

Osvaldo  Barruza  Quiroga,  Director  General  of 
Agriculture  of  Chile,  has  arrived  in  Washington 
for  consultation  with  officials  of  the  Department 
of  Agriculture  concerning  various  phases  of  its 
work,  and  for  visits  to  other  points  of  interest 
in  his  field.  He  is  especially  interested  in  the 
extension  service  and  soil  conservation  programs, 
and  in  seeing  first-hand  various  types  of  activity 
in  different  parts  of  the  country,  including  dairy 
farms,  irrigation  projects,  and  tlie  Tennessee  Val- 
ley project.  His  visit  lias  been  arranged  in  co- 
operation with  the  Department  of  Agriculture. 

Chilean  Playwright 

Santiago  Del  Campo  Silva,  Chilean  author, 
playwright,  and  director  of  the  national  radio 
station  bNA,  has  been  awarded  a  grant-in-aid  for 
a  visit  of  three  montlis  in  this  country  to  study 
modern  trends  in  the  field  of  tlie  tlieater  and  radio. 
Mr.  Del  Campo  will  visit  New  Orleans,  Albuquer- 
que, San  Francisco,  Los  Angeles,  Chicago,  Boston, 
New  York,  and  Philadelphia,  and  other  cities 
during  his  stay  here. 

Costa  RIcan  Civil  Aviation  Director 

Mario  Waldemar  Facio  Segreda,  Director  of 
Civil  Aviation  and  Captain  of  the  National  Air 
Force  of  Costa  Rica,  has  arrived  in  Washington 
for  a  series  of  conferences  with  officials  of  the 
Civil  Aei-onautics  Administration  and  for  study 
and  observation  of  the  latest  developments  in 
various  phases  of  civil  aviation  organization  and 
procedures  in  this  country.  He  is  especially  in- 
terested in  airway  traffic  rules.  Mr.  Facio's  three- 
month  visit  has  been  arranged  in  cooperation  with 
the  Civil  Aeronautics  Administration. 

Ecuadoran  Social-Service  Leader 

Graciela  Escudero  Moscoso,  head  of  the  Social 
Service  Division  of  the  Ministry  of  Social  Wel- 
fare, and  Director  of  the  National  School  of  Social 
Service  of  Ecuador,  arrived  in  Washington 
for  a  three-month  stay  in  this  country  for  the 
purpose  of  conferring  witli  colleagues  and  observ- 
ing social-service  work  in  the  United  States. 

Miss  Escudero 's  visit  has  been  arranged  in  co- 
operation with  the  Children's  Bureau  of  the  Fed- 
eral Security  Agency. 

El  Salvador  Physician 

Dr.  Jose  Benjamin  Mancia  of  the  Policlinica 
Salvadorena,  San  Salvador,  recently  arrived  in 
Washington  to  begin  a  series  of  visits  to  hospitals 
and  medical  schools  in  this  country. 

A  specialist  in  internal  diseases,  Dr.  Mancia 
received  his  medical  degree  from  the  University 
of  El  Salvador  in  19-11.     In  addition  to  main- 


tainintjf  his  own  clinic,  the  Policlinica  Salvado- 
rena, he  has  been  a  member  of  the  staff  of  the 
Hospital  Kosales  since  1945. 

Honduran  Engineer 

Jorge  Colindres,  highway  engineer  of  Hon- 
duras, has  arrived  in  Washington  for  a  three- 
month  visit  in  the  United  States  to  study  high- 
way construction.  He  is  particularly  interesteil 
in  the  construction  of  bridges  and  in  various  type- 
of  paving.  His  visit  has  been  arranged  in  coopera 
tion  with  the  Public  Roads  Administration  of  tlie 
Federal  Works  Agency. 

Latin  American  Women  Leaders 

The  Department  of  State  has  awarded  grants  to 
a  group  of  five  women  leaders  from  three  of  the 
other  American  republics  in  cooperation  with  the 
Women's  Bureau  of  the  Department  of  Labor  and 
nine  national  women's  organizations  to  enable 
them  to  spend  three  months  observing  the  social 
and  civic  work  of  women's  organizations  in  this 
country.  They  will  study  the  place  of  women  in 
the  United  States  as  citizens,  workers,  and  home- 
makers,  as  well  as  the  basic  programs,  methods  of 
operation,  and  membership  activities  of  organiza- 
tions whose  objectives  are  designed  to  advance  the 
status  of  women  and  promote  the  general  welfare. 
Special  emphasis  has  been  placed  on  opportuni- 
ties to  observe  democratic  techniques  used  by  rep- 
resentative women's  organizations  through  visits 
to  national  headquarters  and  local  branches  of 
such  organizations. 

The  following  women,  who  arrived  in  the  United 
States  in  April,  have  been  awarded  grants  for 
participation  in  this  program: 
Brazil 

Miss  Marfa  Luiza  Moniz  de  Aragao,  Head  of  the  Division 
of  Adininistratidn  of  tlic  National  Industrial  Appren- 
ticesliip  Service  and  Director  of  the  Department  of 
Social  Service  of  the  Leo  XIII  Foundation,  Uio  de 
.Taneiro 
Mc.riro 

Mrs.  Carmen  Gordea  Ricossa,  member  of  the  Executive 
Committee  of  the  Alliance  of  Women's  Organizations, 
and  of  the  Board  of  Directors  of  the  YWCA,  Mexico 
City 
Mrs.  Aurelia  Rocha  Lozano,  founder  and  president  of  the 
Federation  of  Women's  Clubs  of  the  State  of  Nuevo 
Le6n  and  founder  of  the  Club  Femenino  of  Monterre.v, 
a  group  devoted  especially  to  -social  work  for  the  blind 
Mrs.   Ana   Bprta    IJnmero   de  Campos  of  Mexico  City,  a 
teacher  by  profe.ssioti ;  educational  chairman  of  the 
Mexican  Technical  Feminine  Commission  and  secre- 
tary general  of  the  National  Feminine  Alliance 
Uritfiiiay 

Mrs.  Lucia  Armand  Ugon  de  Gardiol,  pharmacist,  public 
school  teacher,  City  Council  member,  and  civic  leader 
of  Colonia 

Museum  Director  To  Lecture  in  Cuba 

Stcplicn  W.  Tlioinas,  Director  of  tlie  Rochester 
Museum  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  has  been  awarded  a 
grant-in-aid  to  enable  him  to  accept  an  invitation 

Department  of  State  Bulletin 


extended  by  the  Sociedad  Economica  de  Amigos 
del  Pais,  a  learned  society  of  Habana,  to  lecture  on 
museum  management.  This  series  of  lectures, 
which  is  to  be  published  by  the  Sociedad,  has  been 
arranged  in  connection  with  preparations  for  the 
opening  of  the  new  National  Museum  building 
now  under  construction  in  Habana. 


Mathematicians  To  Lecture  in  Mexico 

Dr.  Garrett  Birkhoff,  associate  professor  of 
mathematics,  Harvard  University,  and  Dr.  Solo- 
mon Lefschetz,  head  of  the  department  of  mathe- 
matics, Princeton  University,  have  been  awarded 
grants-in-aid  to  enable  them  to  accept  invitations 
extended  by  the  National  University  of  Mexico  to 
lecture  there  during  the  month  of  June. 


Puerto  Rican  Botanist  To  Lecture  in  Costa  Rica 

Professor  Rafael  A.  Toro  of  the  University  of 
Puerto  Rico,  now  serving  as  visiting  professor  of 
botany  at  Howard  University,  has  been  awarded 
a  grant-in-aid  to  enable  him  to  spend  4  months  in 
Turrialba,  Costa  Rica,  where  he  has  been  assigned 
to  organize  the  botanical  services  and  the  herbar- 
ium at  the  Inter- American  Institute  of  Agricul- 
tural Sciences.  He  will  also  give  lectures  at  the 
Institute  in  the  field  of  systematic  botany. 


Historian  and  Englisli  Professor  Visit 
Latin  America 

Dr.  Dixon  Wecter,  authority  on  United  States 
literature  and  professor  of  American  History  at 
the  University  of  California,  has  been  awarded 
a  grant-in-aid  for  a  three-month  series  of  lectures 
on  American  history  and  literature,  at  the  United 
States-assisted  cultural  institutes  in  Costa  Rica, 
Ecuador,  Peru,  and  Chile. 

Dr.  Edd  Winfield  Parks,  professor  of  English 
at  the  University  of  Geoi-gia,  has  been  appointed 
for  a  year  as  visiting  professor  of  English  at  the 
University  of  Brazil  under  the  exchange-of-per- 
sons  program  of  the  Department  of  State. 

THE  DEPARTMENT 

Organization  of  tlie  Department  of  State 

[Public  Law  73 — 81st  Congress,  1st  Session] 
AN  ACT 

To  strengthen  and  improve  the  organization  and  adminis- 
tration of  the  Department  of  State,  and  for  other 
purposes. 


Be  it  enacted  hy  the  Senate  and  House  of  Repre- 
sentatives of  the  United  States  of  America  in  Con- 
gress assembled,  That  there  shall  be  in  the  De- 
partment of  State  in  addition  to  the  Secretary  of 
State  an  Under  Secretary  of  State  and  ten  As- 
sistant Secretaries  of  State. 

Sec.  2.  The  Secretary  of  State  and  the  officers 
referred  to  in  section  1  of  this  Act  shall  be  ap- 
pointed by  the  President,  by  and  with  the  advice 
and  consent  of  the  Senate.  The  Counselor  of  the 
Department  of  State  and  the  Legal  Adviser,  who 
are  required  to  be  appointed  by  the  President,  by 
and  with  the  advice  and  consent  of  the  Senate, 
shall  rank  equally  with  the  Assistant  Secretaries 
of  State.  Any  such  officer  holding  office  at  the 
time  the  provisions  of  this  Act  become  effective 
shall  not  be  required  to  be  reappointed  by  reason 
of  the  enactment  of  this  Act.  The  Secretary  may 
designate  two  of  the  Assistant  Secretaries  as 
Deputy  Under  Secretaries. 

Sec.  3.  The  Secretary-  of  State,  or  such  person 
or  persons  designated  by  him,  notwithstanding 
the  provisions  of  the  Foreign  Service  Act  of  1946 
(60  Stat.  999)  or  any  other  law,  except  where  au- 
thority is  inherent  in  or  vested  in  the  President  of 
the  United  States,  shall  administer,  coordinate, 
and  direct  the  Foreign  Service  of  the  United 
States  and  the  personnel  of  the  State  Department. 
Any  provisions  in  the  Foreign  Service  Act  of  1946, 
or  in  anj'  other  law,  vesting  authority  in  the  "As- 
sistant Secretary  of  State  for  Administration", 
the  "Assistant  Secretary  of  State  in  Charge  of  the 
Administration  of  the  Department",  the  "Director 
General",  or  any  other  reference  with  respect 
thereto,  are  hereby  amended  to  vest  such  authority 
in  the  Secretary  of  State. 

Sec.  4.  The  Secretary  of  State  may  promulgate 
such  rules  and  regulations  as  may  be  necessary  to 
carry  out  the  functions  now  or  hereafter  vested  in 
the  Secretary  of  State  or  the  Department  of  State, 
and  he  may  delegate  authority  to  perform  any  of 
such  functions  to  officers  and  employees  under  his 
direction  and  supervision. 

Sec.  5.  The  following  statutes  or  parts  of  stat- 
utes are  hereby  repealed : 

Section  200  of  the  Revised  Statutes,  as  amended 
and  amplified  by  the  Acts  authorizing  the  estab- 
lishment of  additional  Assistant  Secretaries  of 
State,  including  section  22  of  the  Act  of  May  24, 
1924  (ch.  182,  and  the  Act  of  December  8,  1944, 
R.  S.  200 ;  43  Stat.  146 ;  58  Stat.  798 ;  5  U.  S.  C.  152, 
as  amended  by  Public  Law  767,  Eightieth  Con- 
gress). 

Section  202  of  the  Foreign  Service  Act  of  1946 
(60  Stat.  1000)  and  any  other  reference  in  such 
Act  to  the  "Deputy  Director  General". 

Section  1041  of  the  Foreign  Service  Act  of  1946 
(60  Stat.  1032). 

Approved  May  26,  1949. 


June  26,   1949 


P  U  L  L  I  C 


Occupation  Matters  Page 

Foreign     Visitors     in     Germany     To     Use 

Deutsche  Marks 807 

School    Reform    in    Hesse.      By    James    R. 

Newman 808 

Statements  and  Addresses  of  the  Month   .    .        811 

U.S.S.R.    Refuses    To   Fulfill   Commitments 

on  German  Prisoners  of  War 824 

Certain  Functions  of  the  United  States  High 

Commissioner  for  Germany  Defined   .    .        828 

EstablisbiiiK    the   Position   of   United   States 

High  Commissioner  for  Germany    .    .    .        828 

John  J.  McCloy  To  Be  Chief  ECA  Repre- 
sentative in  Germany 829 

U.S.  Repudiates  Pliilippine  and  Chinese 
Complaint  on  Japanese  Reparation  Re- 
movals          831 

Extension  of  Fec  Policies  on  .\ccess  to  Japanese 

Technical  and  Scientific  Information  .    .        833 

Progress     of     Japanese     Fishing      Industry 

Conservation  Program 833 

Economic  Affairs 

U.S.  Economic  Policy  in  the  Caribbean.    By 

W.  M.  Canaday 813 

International    Tin  "Study    Group:      Fourth 

Meeting 816 

Caribbean  Commission 816 

International  Conference  on  Science  Ab- 
stracting          817 

U.S.  Commi.ssion  Appointed  for  Pan  .\merican 

Railway  Congress 818 

Inter-.\merican  Conference  on  Indian  Life     .        818 

British  Attitude  Toward  Film  (Juotas.  Letter 
from  Acting  Secretary  Webb  to  the  Presi- 
dent of  the  Motion  Picture  Association  .        825 

U.S.     Completes    Reconstruction    of    Greek 

Transportation  System 826 

Oeec  Officials  Visit  in  U.S 827 

Italian  "ERP"  Stamps  Issued 828 

Foreign  Distribution  of  Isotopes.  Statement 
from  the  General  Advisory  Committee 
totheAEC 829 

U.S.,    U.K.,    and    South   Africa  To  Discuss 

Uranium  Production 830 

U.S.-Brazil  To  Study  Tax  Relations  ....        830 


Treaty  Information  Page 

Swiss-Allied  .Vccord  Conference  Recesses  Until 

September: 
Joint  Communique  of  U.  S.,  U.  K.,  France,  and 

Switzerland 819 

Major  Issues  Announced 819 

Progress  in   Negotiations  at  Third  Session  of 

Contracting  Parties  to  Gatt 819 

The  U.S.S.R.  Refuses  to  Cooperate  in  Settling 

Disputes  Under  Bulgarian,  Hungarian,  and 

Rumanian  Peace  Treaties.     Statement  by 

Acting  Secretary  Webb 824 

Belgium  Ratifies  North  Atlantic  Treaty  ...  825 
Tax  Conventions  With  Norway  Signed  .  .  .  830 
Colombia-L^  S.  To  Discuss  Tax  Treaty  .  .  .  830 
Dominican-Haitian     Declaration    on    Peaceful 

Settlement  of  Differences 833 

The  United  Nations  and 
Specialized  Agencies 

The  United  States  in  the  United  Nations .    .    .    812 

Ilo:  Thirty^second  Session 815 

Second  World  Health  Assembly 816 


General  Policy 

Force  and  Freedom. 


By  Selden  Chapin  . 


The  Department 

Organization  of  the  Department  of  State 


820 


835 


International  Information  and 
Cultural  Affairs 

Adult  Education  Conference 817 

Visitors  to  U.S.  Under  Travel-Grant  Program.  834 
Museum  Director  To  Lecture  in  Cuba  ....  834 
Mathematicians  To  Lecture  in  Mexico  ....  835 
Puerto   Rican   Botanist   To   Lecture   in    Costa 

Rica 835 

Historian    and    English    Professor    Visit    Latin 

America 835 


u. 


Documents  and  State  Papers  for  May  1949 

CONTENTS: 

Report  of  Technical  Committee  on  Berlin  Currency  and  Trade 

Three  Power  Statement  on  Currency  Reform 

international  Wheat  Agreement 

Policy  Toward  Patents,  Utility  Models  and  Designs  in  Japan 

Israeli  Armistice  Agreements  With  Egypt,  Lebanon,  and  Hashe- 

mite  Jordan  Kingdom 
Calendar  of  International  Meetings,  with  Annotations 

Copies  of  this  publication  are  for  sale  by  the  Superintendent  of  Documents, 
Government  Printing  OflBce,  Washington  25,  D.  C.  at  30fi  a  copy. 


BOSTON  PUBLIC  LIBRARY 


3  9999  06352  744  2